This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles

for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: C581 − 20

Standard Practice for

Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins
Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for
Liquid Service1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C581; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This practice is designed to evaluate, in an unstressed
state, the chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in
the fabrication of reinforced thermosetting plastic (RTP) lami-
nates. This practice provides for the determination of changes
in the properties, described as follows, of the test specimens
and test reagent after exposure of the specimens to the reagent:
hardness of specimens, weight change thickness, appearance of
specimens, appearance of immersion media, and flexural
strength and modulus.
1.1.1 This practice is also useful to evaluate other factors,
such as surfacing veils and the effect of resin additives, on the
chemical resistance of the resin.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic Piping
Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Feb. 15, 2020. Published March 2020. Originally
approved in 1965. Last previous edition approved in 2015 as C581 – 15. DOI:
10.1520/C0581-20.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2563 Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-
Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms:
3.1.1 For definitions of terms associated with plastic
materials, see Terminology D883.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The results obtained by this practice shall serve as a
guide in, but not as the sole basis for, selection of a thermo-
setting resin used in an RTP structure. No attempt has been
made to incorporate into the practice all the various factors that
will potentially affect the serviceability of an RTP structure
when subjected to chemical environments. These factors will
potentially include stress, different resin-to-glass ratios, and
multiple veils.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Hardness Testing Instrument—This shall be as described
in Test Method D2583.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:27 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C581 − 20
5.2 Flexural Properties Testing Apparatus, in accordance
with Test Methods D790.
5.3 Thickness Measurement—A micrometer suitable for
measurement to 0.001 in. (0.025 mm).
5.4 Containers, of sufficient size, capacity, and inertness to
allow total immersion of reinforced thermosetting plastic
specimens in the specific corrosives chosen for testing. These
containers shall, when necessary, be capable of maintaining
liquid levels of volatile solutions, that is, solvents. This can be
accomplished by the use of reflux condensers.
5.5 Heating Apparatus—A constant temperature oven, heat-
ing mantle, or liquid bath capable of maintaining temperature
within range of 64.0°F (62.2°C). Take proper precautions if
the corrosives selected are flammable liquids.
5.6 Analytical Balance, suitable for accurate weighing to
0.001 g.
6. Reagents
6.1 The test media shall consist of the reagents or solutions
to which the RTP laminates are to be exposed.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 Standard Laminates—Prepare standard fiber-reinforced
laminates using identical reinforcement in all of the laminates.
The laminates shall be constructed of the following materials:
7.1.1 Surfacing Mat (Veil)—A thin mat of fine fibers used
primarily to produce a smooth, resin-rich surface on a rein-
forced plastic. The surfacing veil helps determine the thickness
of the resin-rich layer, reduces microcracking and provides a
non-wicking chemically–resistant layer. The surfacing veil
shall be compatible with the resin and manufactured with
uniform fiber distribution and non-bundled fibers. The dry veil
layer(s) shall be a minimum 10 mils in thickness and produce
a 10 to 15 mil resin-saturated veil layer per 10 mils of dry veil.
To eliminate the surfacing veil as a variable in corrosion tests,
prepare each laminate within a test group with the same
surfacing veil.
7.1.2 Chopped Strand Mat—Type E glass fiber with sizing
and binder compatible with the resin. It is acceptable to use
other glass fiber compositions, but using such alternate com-
positions shall be considered as variables for comparison to the
standard.
7.1.2.1 Note that this practice applies to E-CR glass fiber,
which is a type of E glass fiber. If the E glass fiber material is
of the E-CR type that information shall be identified in the test
report.
7.1.3 Resin—Catalyzed and promoted in accordance with
the resin manufacturer’s recommendation.
NOTE 2—It is acceptable to add fillers, such as antimony trioxide for
improved fire performance or thixotropes for viscosity control, but it is
possible that this will detract from the corrosion resistance of the test
laminate.
7.2 Dimensions and General Properties—The laminates
shall conform to the required dimensions and general proper-
ties of 7.2 and be fabricated in accordance with 7.3.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:27 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7.2.1 Laminate Size—A suitable laminate size has been
found to be 26 by 33 in. (660 by 838 mm) after trimming. This
laminate size is not restrictive and other dimensions are
acceptable.
7.2.2 Thickness—The thickness of the cured standard lami-
nate shall be between 0.120 and 0.140 in. (3.05 and 3.56 mm).
7.2.3 Reinforcement Content—The glass fiber and binder
shall be 4.73 6 0.47 oz/ft2 (three layers of 1.5 oz/ft2 chopped
strand mat 4.5 oz/ft2 having a nominal binder content of 3.5 %
and two layers of 10 mil surfacing mat 0.23 oz/ft2 having a
nominal binder content of 7 %)—determined by pre-weighing
the materials prior to construction of the laminate. This is
equivalent to 23.6 weight % (12.5 volume %) glass fiber when
using a resin having a cured specific gravity of 1.15. Such a
laminate will have a thickness of 0.125 in. (3.18 mm). The use
of resins having different specific gravities will result in
different weight percentages of glass fiber, but the volume
percentage of glass fiber will remain the same. When using
synthetic organic fiber surfacing veil, the glass content shall be
4.50 6 0.45 oz/ft2 (three layers of 1.5 oz/ft2 chopped strand
mat having a nominal binder content of 3.5 %).
7.2.4 Hardness—The hardness shall be at least 90 % of that
of a fully-cured clear casting of the resin, or of a similarly
constructed laminate as defined by the resin manufacturer.
Hardness shall be determined in accordance with s5.1. Note
that the use of synthetic veil will result in significantly lower
hardness values. The hardness value will vary with the type of
resin and number of plies of synthetic veil. The resin manu-
facturer needs to be contacted for the allowable Barcol
hardness value of a laminate containing synthetic veils with the
specific resin.
7.2.5 Laminate Condition—The laminate shall meet Accep-
tance Level I of Table I of Practice D2563.
7.3 Fabrication of Standard Laminate—The sequence of
lay-up shall be as follows:
7.3.1 Apply catalyzed resin and a 10-mil (0.25-mm) surfac-
ing mat on a flat surface covered with plastic release film or
treated with a suitable release agent and roll to distribute resin.
NOTE 3—Use the following formula as a guide to determine the total
weight of resin to be used. This is equivalent to 12.5 volume % glass fiber
in the laminate. Grams resin equals grams glass fiber material per 7.2.3
times 2.82 G. Where G equals specific gravity of cured resin. It is
acceptable to use excess resin due to loss by adhering to mixing
containers, rollers, and other factors. A suggested amount of excess resin
is 10 to 15 % by weight.
7.3.2 Follow with three plies of 1.5 oz/ft2 chopped strand
mat and resin. Roll after each ply to distribute and wet-out the
chopped strand mat. Rolling with a serrated roller is acceptable
after each ply to remove entrapped air but it shall be done in
accordance with 7.3.4. The mat weight shall be within 65 % of
1.5 oz/ft2 upon weighing the full 26 by 33-in. cut (660 by
838-mm) piece, (or other full dimension used, 7.2.1.).
NOTE 4—Cut chopped strand mat so that the 26-in. dimension is across
the width of the roll and the 33-in. dimension is along the machine
direction of the mat. Mat weight variation will most commonly occur
across the width of the mat. If a wide roll of mat, 52 in. (1320 mm) or
greater, is used, place the two plies of mat in the laminate such that the
center cut of one ply is placed over the outside edge of the second ply. If
narrower width mat is used, reverse the second ply 180° in the machine
 C581 − 20
direction and lay it on top of the first ply to minimize weight variations.
7.3.3 Follow with a 10-mil (0.25-mm) surfacing mat as in
7.3.1.
7.3.4 Remove the air by rolling over the surface with a
serrated metal or plastic roller. Take care not to expel enough
resin to raise the glass content above the permissible maxi-
mum. The laminate is considered within the range of allowable
levels of resin and glass if the thickness of the laminate is
within 0.120 and 0.140 in. (3.05 and 3.56 mm), as described in
7.2.2.
7.3.5 After the lay-up is completed, cover the laminate with
a plastic release film to prevent air inhibition or to provide a
uniform smooth glossy surface, or both. Carefully smooth
down to remove entrapped air.
NOTE 5—It is acceptable to use any convenient method for the
application of the release film. Regardless of how it is applied, it is critical
that any entrapped air between the film and the laminate be entirely
removed. One method of application is done by previously wrapping the
film around a metal rod. Starting at one edge of the laminate, slowly unroll
the film from the rod, keeping a bead of resin ahead of the rod as you cross
the laminate. Any entrapped air remaining can be removed by rubbing a
tongue depressor across the release film surface. Carefully pull the film
taut and fasten at the edges to prevent wrinkling of the film. Placing stops
(neoprene has been found to be suitable) around the edges of the laminate
and passing a heavy metal roller over the laminate helps to insure uniform
controlled thickness.
7.3.6 Cure as recommended by the resin manufacturer. The
cure schedule shall be reported.
7.3.7 Trim edges as required.
7.4 Record of Standard Laminate Construction—Record the
properties of the standard laminate as follows:
7.4.1 Hardness—Determine Barcol hardness on the strip as
described in 7.2.4 in accordance with Test Method D2583.
7.4.2 Laminate Conditions—Visually examine the laminate.
The laminate shall meet Acceptance Level I of Table 1 of
Practice D2563.
7.4.3 If the laminate meets the requirements of this
specification, retain the laminate sections for preparation of test
specimens.
NOTE 6—The major criteria for accepting a laminate is thickness and
not glass content. If glass content is desired, cut eight 1 by 1 in. specimens
from the center of the laminate and test in accordance with Test Method
D2584.
7.5 Individual Test Specimens:
7.5.1 Specimens for immersion in test solutions shall be
approximately 4 by 5 in. (101.6 by 127 mm), cut from the
standard laminate.
7.5.2 Identity of specimens shall be maintained by suitable
means.
7.5.3 Cut edges and drilled holes, if used for suspension,
shall be sanded smooth and coated with paraffinated resin.
7.5.4 The number of specimens required is dependent on the
number of test solutions to be employed, the number of
different temperatures at which testing is performed, and the
number of test intervals. In addition, at least two 4 by 5 in.
(101.6 by 127 mm) specimens shall be available for test (see
8.4) following the curing period, prior to immersion.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:27 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8. Procedure
8.1 Measurement of Specimens—Immediately following the
curing period, measure the thickness of the specimens to the
nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) at the geometric center of each of
the intended 1 by 3 in. (25.4 by 76.2 mm) specimens that will
be cut for flexural tests after the completed exposures. Measure
the weight of the specimens to the nearest 0.01 g. These
thickness and weight measurements shall also be used for
comparison against thickness and weight measurements after
the completed exposures.
8.2 Exposure—Following the curing period, as specified in
7.3.6, prior to immersion, record a brief description of the color
and surface appearance of the coupons and the color and the
clarity of the test solution. The total number of coupons per
container is not limited except by the ability of the container to
hold the coupons without touching each other or the container.
The coupons must always be completely immersed. Coupons
shall be vertical, parallel, and spaced a minimum of 0.25 in.
(6.35 mm) apart. There shall be a minimum of 0.50 in. (12.7
mm) between coupon edges and the container or the liquid
surface. Place the closed container in a constant temperature
oven adjusted to the required temperature or in a suitably
adjusted liquid bath. Examine the coupons after 30, 90, 180
days, and one year of immersion or other time intervals as
required to determine the rate of attack.
8.2.1 Discard the test solution and replace it with fresh
solution as often as necessary to maintain original composition
and concentration. As a minimum, solutions known to be stable
need to be replaced at the end of each test period.
8.3 Cleaning and Examination After Exposure—Clean the
coupon and dry by blotting with a paper towel. Cold tap water
is normally used for specimen cleaning. If other cleaning
agents are used, verify that they do not attack the resin being
tested.
8.3.1 Note any indication of surface attack on a coupon, any
discoloration of the test solution, and the formation of any
sediment.
8.3.2 After final blotting, immediately measure the coupon
thickness to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) in the geometric
center of each intended 1 by 3 in. (25 by 76.2 mm) specimen.
Measure the coupon to the nearest 0.01g. The Barcol hardness
can then be checked, taking an average of ten readings on each
coupon, a minimum of 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) from the edge.
8.3.3 After washing and measuring thickness, weight, and
Barcol hardness, place the coupons in an air-tight polyethylene
bag for conditioning or shipping as described in 8.4.1.
8.4 Flexural Testing—Determine the flexural strength and
modulus for: (1) two sets of three specimens immediately
following the curing period, and (2) one set of three specimens
after each inspection, for each solution, and each test tempera-
ture. Calculation of flexural strength and modulus after expo-
sure shall use the coupon thickness determined at the time of
flexural testing as measured in 8.3.2. The two pretested sets
shall be taken from the center of the laminate as described in
7.2.1. The flexural strengths for these two sets shall be
averaged together for use in calculating the retained flexural

strength in 9.2. The flexural modulus values shall also be
averaged for use in 9.2.
8.4.1 Flexural tests shall be conducted in accordance with
Procedure A of Test Methods D790, except for the conditioning
parameters specified in this document. Coupons being tested at
the exposure location shall be placed in the conditioning
environment for a minimum of 2 h immediately following the
“cleaning and examination” described in 8.3. The coupon shall
be tested during the same day after removing the coupon from
the test environment. For testing at a different location, the
clean, dry coupons shall be placed in a vapor tight bag for
shipment.
NOTE 7—In cases of volatile chemical exposure, special methods of
specimen handling will probably be required.
8.4.2 Three 1 by 3 in. (25 by 76.2 mm) (see Fig. 1) are cut
from each 4 by 5 in. coupon. After cutting, the specimen edges
shall be routed or sanded to provide a nick-free edge. Test
specimens shall be the full thickness of the exposure coupon.
9. Calculation
9.1 Barcol Hardness Change—Tabulate or construct a graph
showing the actual hardness readings of the specimens exposed
at a given temperature, and the test period, in days.
9.2 Retained Flexural Strength and Modulus—Calculate to
the nearest 1.0 %, the percentage retention of flexural strength
and flexural modulus of the specimen during immersion for
each examination period, taking the flexural strength and
flexural modulus after curing as 100 %:
Retained flexural strength, % 5 @ S 2 /S 1 # 3 100
where:
S1 = flexural strength of specimen after curing period, and
S2 = flexural strength of specimen after test period.
Retained flexural modulus, % 5 @ E 2 /E 1 # 3 100
where:
FIG. 1 Specimen Cutting Guide
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:27 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
C581 − 20
E1 = flexural modulus of specimen after curing period, and
E2 = flexural modulus of specimen after test period.
9.2.1 Calculate flexural strength and modulus properties in
accordance with Section 12 of Test Methods D790.
9.2.2 Construct graphs showing the average percentage of
retained flexural strength and the average flexural modulus of
the specimens broken at a given examination period after
immersion in a particular test solution at a given temperature,
plotting the percentage of retained flexural strength and flex-
ural modulus as the vertical axis, and the test period, in days,
as the horizontal axis.
9.3 Percent Weight and Thickness Change—Calculate to the
nearest 0.01 % the percent weight and thickness change of the
specimen during immersion for each examination period.
9.4 Calculate the percent weight and thickness change, and
tabulate or graph these values as a function of the test period,
in days.
10. Interpretation of Results
10.1 Mechanical Properties of the Specimen—Because of
the chemical nature of certain types of plastic materials, the
rate of change with time is of more significance than the actual
value at any one time. A plot of the test results will indicate
whether a particular specimen will approach constant flexural
strength, flexural modulus, or hardness with time or will
continue to change as the test progresses.
10.2 Appearance of Specimen—Visual inspection of the
exposed specimen for surface cracks, loss of gloss, etching,
(1) blistering, pitting, softening, changes in thickness, or other
irregularities, is very important, for these conditions indicate
some degradation of the laminate by a chemical environment.
10.3 Appearance of Immersion Medium—It is possible that
(2)
discoloration of the test solution and the formation of sediment
will be significant factors. It is possible that an initial discol-
oration will indicate extraction of soluble components.
10.4 Weight and Thickness of Specimen—Weight and thick-
ness changes can indicate the extent of chemical degradation or
absorption of the test solution.
NOTE 8—Carry out all test exposures for the longest practical time to
assure valid results. It is particularly important to obtain 6 and 12-month
results in order to determine whether the properties are stable over a
period of time. Short-term results (less than six months) can be unreliable
when evaluating resins.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Company and individual preparing standard lami-
nates.
11.1.2 Complete identification of material tested including
resin, nonvolatile content, accelerator, catalyst, reinforcement,
surfacing mat, and filler, such as fire-retardant additive or
thixotropes.
11.1.2.1 As this practice applies to E-CR glass fiber, a type
of E glass fiber, if the E glass fiber material is of the E-CR type
that information shall be identified in the test report.
11.1.3 Cure cycle including room temperature gel time, time
at room temperature before testing or before post-cure if
4
 C581 − 20
required, post-cure time, and temperature. Any special post-
curing techniques such as boiling water or steam for FDA-type
applications shall also be reported.
11.1.4 Glass content of standard laminate, if run in accor-
dance with Note 6.
11.1.5 Hardness, flexural strength of control coupons.
11.1.6 Color and surface appearance of specimens before
testing.
11.1.7 Test conditions; immersion medium, temperature,
and the like.
11.1.8 Total duration of test in days, and examination
periods, in days. For each examination period, the data listed in
11.1.8.11 through 11.1.8.6 are required.
11.1.8.1 Pretesting samples conditioning (if different than
standard).
11.1.8.2 Appearance of specimens after immersion (surface
cracks, loss of gloss, etching, pitting, softening, and the like).
11.1.8.3 Appearance of immersion medium (discoloration,
sediment, and the like).
11.1.8.4 Barcol hardness of the specimens before and after
exposure.
11.1.8.5 Weight and thickness before and after exposure.
11.1.8.6 Flexural strength and flexural modulus of coupons
and percent retention of flexural strength and flexural modulus.
11.1.9 Graph showing percent retention of flexural strength
and flexural modulus plotted against test periods.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 No precision statement can be made for this practice,
since controlled round-robin test programs have not been run.
The test results of this practice are obtained to assign bias
statements to the subjective results since there are no standards.
The bias of the quantitative results are covered by Test
Methods D790.
13. Keywords
13.1 chemical resistance; glass-fiber-reinforced; glass-
reinforced plastic (GRP); laminate; liquid service; reinforced
thermosetting plastic (RTP); reinforced thermosetting resins;
thermosetting resins

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (C581 – 15)
that may impact the use of this standard. (February 15, 2020)

(1) Subsection 1.1: Addition of indentation for formatting. (3) Subsection 7.2.3: Removal of extra spacing around paren-
(2) Subsection 7.2.3: Updated preweighing to pre-weighing for theses.
grammatical correctness.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:27 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: C582 − 09 (Reapproved 2016)

Standard Specification for

Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP)
Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant Equipment1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation C582; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers composition, thickness, fabri-
cating procedures, and physical property requirements for glass
fiber reinforced thermoset polyester, vinyl ester, or other
qualified thermosetting resin laminates comprising the materi-
als of construction for RTP corrosion-resistant tanks, piping,
and equipment. This specification is limited to fabrication by
contact molding.
NOTE 1—The laminates covered by this specification are manufactured
during fabrication of contact-molded RTP tanks, piping, and other
equipment.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2016. Published November 2016. Originally
approved in 1965. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as C582 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/C0582-09R16.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D3681 Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”
(Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a
Deflected Condition
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
3. Definitions
3.1 Definitions used in this specification are in accordance
with Terminology D883 unless otherwise indicated. The ab-
breviation for reinforced thermoset plastic is RTP.
3.2 polyester—resins produced by the polycondensation of
dihydroxyderivatives and dibasic organic acids or anhydrides,
wherein at least one component contributes ethylenic unsatu-
ration yielding resins that can be compounded with styryl
monomers and reacted to give highly crosslinked thermoset
copolymers.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C582 − 09 (2016)
3.3 vinyl ester—resins characterized by reactive unsatura-
tion located predominately in terminal positions that can be
compounded with styryl monomers and reacted to give highly
crosslinked thermoset copolymers.
NOTE 3—These resins are handled in the same way as polyesters in
fabrication of RTP components.
3.4 contact molding—a method of fabrication wherein the
glass-fiber reinforcement is applied to the mold, in the form of
chopped strand mat or woven roving, by hand or from a reel,
or in the form of chopped strands of continuous-filament glass
from a chopper-spray gun. The resin matrix is applied by
various methods, including brush, roller, or spray gun. Con-
solidation of the composite laminate is by rolling.
4. Classification
4.1 Laminates shall be classified according to type, class,
and grade.
4.1.1 Type—In Roman numerals, shall designate the rein-
forcement structure comprised of specific plies of glass fiber in
specific sequences.
4.1.1.1 Type I—A standard all-mat or chopped-roving
construction, or both, as shown in Table 1.
4.1.1.2 Type II—A standard mat or chopped-roving and
woven-roving construction, or combination thereof, as shown
in Table 2.
4.1.1.3 Other types, such as standard mat or chopped roving
with alternating layers of nonwoven biaxial or unidirectional
reinforcement in the structured plies. may be qualified in
accordance with Appendix X2.
4.1.2 Class—In capital letters, shall designate the generic
resin: “P” for polyester and “V” for vinyl ester. The letters
“FS” followed by parenthesis, “FS( ),” shall designate fire
retardancy, if specified, with maximum flame spread in the
parentheses in accordance with Test Method E84.
NOTE 4—Fire retardancy by Test Method E84 is determined for
0.125-in. (3.175-mm) thick, flat laminates with all-mat glass content of 25
to 30 %.
NOTE 5—Maximum flame spread designation by Test Method E84
relates to measurement and description of the properties of materials,
products, or systems in response to heat and flame under controlled
laboratory conditions and should not be considered or used for the
description or appraisal of the fire hazard of materials, products, or
systems under actual fire conditions. However, results of this test may be
used as elements of a fire risk assessment that takes into account all the
factors that are pertinent to an assessment of the fire hazard or a particular
end use.
4.1.3 Grade—In Arabic numerals, shall designate the mini-
mum physical property levels of a laminate at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23
6 2°C).
NOTE 6—The five Arabic grade numbers designate minimum physical
property levels of a laminate obtained from tests of representative
production process samples. They are not arbitrarily selected values.
4.1.4 Thickness—Nominal, shall be designated by Arabic
number in decimal hundredths of an inch. (See Table 1 and
Table 2 for standard thicknesses.)
NOTE 7—Table 1 and Table 2 are for reference purposes and do not
preclude other laminate-type constructions, such as nonwoven biaxial or
unidirectional fabric, which may be agreed upon between the buyer and
the seller, or may be added to this specification if they have been fully
identified and characterized, as shown in Appendix X2.
4.1.5 Classification Requirements for Different Laminates—
Laminate designation from Table 3 shall consist of the abbre-
viation RTP followed by (1) type in Roman numerals; (2) class
in capital letters followed by FS( ) if required; (3) grade
consisting of five Arabic numbers to designate minimum levels
of physical properties and (4) thickness designated by Arabic
number in decimal inches (or ALL, if properties apply to all
thicknesses).
4.1.5.1 Examples:
(1) RTP I 1 ALL, designates Type I polyester laminate,
non-fire-retardant Grade 13211, having the following mini-
mum physical property levels (see Table 3):

TABLE 1 Standard Laminate Composition Type IA

Calculated Corrosion Structural PliesE Drafting
ThicknessBC BarrierD Number and Sequence of Plies Symbols
in. (mm) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

0.18 (4.6) V M M M M V, 4M
0.23 (5.8) V M M M M M V, 5M
0.27 (6.9) V M M M M M M V, 6M
0.31 (7.9) V M M M M M M M V, 7M
0.35 (8.9) V M M M M M M M M V, 8M
0.40 (10.2) V M M M M M M M M M V, 9M
0.44 (11.2) V M M M M M M M M M M V, 10M
0.48 (12.2) V M M M M M M M M M M M V, 11M
0.53 (13.5) V M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 12M
0.57 (14.5) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 13M
0.61 (15.5) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 14M
0.66 (16.8) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 15M
0.70 (17.8) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 16M
0.74 (18.8) V M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M V, 17M
A
Glass content, weight, % = 25 to 30, all thickness.
B
Calculated thickness for design purposes is determined as follows:
V = Surfacing mat − 0.010 in./ply (0.25 mm/ply) when saturated with resin.
M = 1 1⁄2 oz/ft2 (459 g/m2) mat − 0.043 in./ply (1.1 mm/ply) when saturated with resin.
C
The thickness shall be not less than 90 % of the calculated thickness shown.
D
Corrosion barrier (Plies 1, 2, and 3) shall gel before structural plies are added.
E
Structural lay-up may be interrupted at intervals long enough to exotherm if required by the laminate manufacturing procedure and 6.3.1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C582 − 09 (2016)
TABLE 2 Standard Laminate Composition Type II
Calculated Glass Corrosion Structural PliesD
ThicknessAB Content BarrierC Number and Sequence of Plies Drafting
(weight, Symbols
in. (mm) %) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

0.22 (5.6) 28 to 33 V M M M R M V, 2M, MRM

0.29 (7.4) 30 to 35 V M M M R M R M V, 2M, 2(MR)M
0.37 (9.4) 30 to 35 V M M M R M R M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M
0.41 (10.4) 30 to 35 V M M M R M R M R M M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
M
0.49 (12.5) 34 to 38 V M M M R M R M R M M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
MRM
0.57 (14.5) 34 to 38 V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
2(MR)M
0.64 (16.3) 37 to 41 V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
3(MR)M
0.69 (17.5) 37 to 41 V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
3(MR)M,M
0.76 (19.3) 37 to 41 V M M M R M R M R M M R M R M R M M R M V, 2M, 3(MR)M,
3(MR)M,
MRM
A
Calculated thickness for design purposes is determined as follows:
V = Surfacing mat − 0.010 in./ply (0.25 mm/ply) when saturated with resin.
M = 1 1⁄2 oz ⁄ft2 (459 g/m2) mat = 0.043 in./ply (1.1 mm/ply) when saturated with resin.
R = 241⁄2 oz/yd2 (832 g/m2) 5 × 4 woven roving = 0.033 in./ply (0.84 mm/ply) when saturated with resin.
B
The thickness shall be not less than 90 % of the calculated thickness shown.
C
Corrosion barrier (Plies 1, 2, and 3) shall gel before structural plies are added.
D
Structural lay-up may be interrupted long enough to exotherm following an “M” ply, if required by the laminate manufacturing procedure. Location of exotherm plies may
be shifted within the laminate body. No plies may be omitted. Refer to 6.3.1.

TABLE 3 Classification System for Hand Lay-up Laminates Using Minimum Property ValuesA
Classification Order
RTP followed by:

(1) Type I II III IV V

(2) Class P V ... ... ... followed by FS ( ), if
Polyester Vinylester specified with flame
spread in parentheses in
accordance with Test
Method E84
Physical and Mechanical Properties
(3) Grade 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
1st Digit: Tensile strength, 9 11 13 15 17.5 20 ... ... ... ...
ultimate psi × 103
(MPa) (62) (76) (90) (104) (121) (138) ... ... ... ...
2nd Digit: Tensile modulus, 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.3 1.5 1.75 2.0 ... ...
tangent psi × 103
(MPa) (5 863) (6 552) (7 242) (7 932) (8 966) (10 346) (12 070) (13 794) ... ...
3rd Digit: Flexural strength, 16 18 20 22 24 ... ... ... ... ...
ultimate psi × 103
(MPa) (110) (124) (138) (152) (166) ... ... ... ... ...
4th Digit: Flexural modulus, 0.7 0.85 1.0 1.15 1.3 1.5 ... ... ... ...
psi × 106
(MPa) (4 828) (5 863) (6 897) (7 932) (8 966) (10 346) ... ... ... ...
5th Digit: Glass content, by 25 28 30 34 37 40 44 ... ... ...
weight, %
A
Table will be completed as new resins and higher strength laminates become available.

Tensile strength, ultimate—9000 psi (62 MPa). (2) RTP II P FS(25) 55433.30, designates Type II, poly-
Tensile modulus—1 050 000 psi (7242 MPa). ester fire-retardant resin laminate with a maximum flame
Flexural strength, ultimate—18 000 psi (124 MPa). spread of 25, Grade 55433 having the following minimum
Flexural modulus—700 000 psi (4828 MPa). physical property levels (see Table 3):
Glass content—25 %. Tensile strength, ultimate—17 500 psi (121 MPa).
Thickness—“ALL” thicknesses. Tensile modulus—1 300 000 psi (8966 MPa).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C582 − 09 (2016)
Flexural strength, ultimate—22 000 psi (152 MPa).
Flexural modulus—1 000 000 psi (6897 MPa).
Glass content—30 %.
Thickness—0.30 in. (7.62 mm).
5. Materials
5.1 Resin Matrix System:
5.1.1 The resin shall be determined to be acceptable for the
service either by test, see 8.6, or by verified case history.
5.1.2 Catalyst/Promoter System, shall be as recommended
or approved by the resin producer.
5.1.3 Diluents, such as added styrene, fillers, dyes,
pigments, or flame retardants shall be used only when agreed
upon between the fabricator and the buyer. When such items
are required, limits for each shall be agreed upon between the
fabricator and the buyer. A thixotropic agent may be added to
the resin for viscosity control.
NOTE 8—The addition of fillers, dyes, pigments, flame retardants, and
thixotropic agents may interfere with visual inspection of laminate quality.
NOTE 9—Chemical resistance can be significantly affected by the
catalyst/promoter system, diluents, dyes, fillers, flame retardants, or
thixotropic agent used in the resin.
5.1.4 Resin Pastes, used where necessary to fill crevices
formed by joining subassemblies before overlay shall not be
subject to the limitations of 5.1.3. Pastes shall be made with
thixotropic agents.
5.1.5 Ultraviolet Absorbers, may be added to the exterior
surface for improved weather resistance when agreed upon
between the fabricator and the buyer.
5.2 Fiber Reinforcement:
5.2.1 Surfacing Mat (veil) is a thin mat of fine fibers used
primarily to produce a smooth surface on a reinforced plastic.
5.2.1.1 Veil shall be determined to be acceptable for the
service either by Test Methods C581 or D3681, or by a verified
case history.
5.2.1.2 Requirements of acceptable surface veils are:
(a) Resin compatibility,
(b) Uniform fiber distribution,
(c) Single filaments (not bundled),
(d) The thickness shall be a minimum of 10 mils per ply
when saturated with resin, and
(e) Minimum fiber length shall be 0.5 in.
NOTE 10—The chemical resistance of the RTP laminate is provided by
the resin. In combination with the cured resin, the surfacing veil helps
determine the thickness of the resin-rich layer, reduces microcracking, and
provides a nonwicking chemically resistant layer.
Additional desirable considerations in choosing a veil for a specific
application include:
(a) Drapability (surfacing veil should conform to mold shape),
(b) Dry and wet tensile strength,
(c) Binder solubility (if used),
(d) Wetability,
(e) Surfacing veil shall wet-out completely without trapping air during
laminating, and
(f) Surfacing veil should not inhibit resin cure.
5.2.2 Chopped-Strand Mat, shall be “E” or “ECR” type
glass fiber, 11⁄2 oz/ft2 (459 g/m2), with sizing and binder
compatible with the resin.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
5.2.3 Woven Roving, shall be “E” or “ECR” type glass, 241⁄2
oz/yd2 (832 g/m2), 5 by 4 square weave fabric having a sizing
compatible with the resin.
5.2.4 Roving, used in chopper guns for spray-up application,
shall be “E” or “ECR” type glass with sizing compatible with
the resin.
5.2.5 Other Reinforcements, such as nonwoven biaxial or
unidirectional fabric. These products shall be a commercial
grade of “E” or “ECR” type glass fiber with a sizing that is
compatible with the resin.
5.3 Laminates:
5.3.1 Laminate construction shall be in accordance with the
tabulated lay-up sequence for the specified type.
5.3.2 Type I, laminate structure is detailed in Table 1.
5.3.3 Type II, laminate structure is detailed in Table 2.
6. Laminate Fabrication
6.1 Apply the catalyzed resin to a mold or mandrel properly
prepared with a parting agent or film suitable for the lay-up
resin. Next apply the specified surface mat, rolling so as to
draw the resin through the mat for thorough wet-out and
deaeration.
6.2 Apply resin and two plies of 11⁄2-oz (42.6-g) mat. As an
alternative, a minimum of two passes of chopped roving
(minimum fiber length 1 in. (25.4 mm) and resin may be
applied by the spray-up process equivalent in weight and
thickness to 3 oz/ft2 (918 g/m2) of chopped mat. Each pass of
chopped roving or ply of chopped-strand mat shall be thor-
oughly rolled out. This section of the laminate shall be allowed
to exotherm prior to application of subsequent plies of rein-
forcement.
6.3 Continue lay-up in the sequence of plies, tabulated for
the specified laminate type. Roll each ply for thorough wet-out
and deaeration.
6.3.1 Interruption of laminate construction for exotherm
shall follow instructions noted on Table 1 and Table 2 for the
particular laminate type. The final ply of reinforcement before
interruption for exotherm shall be 11⁄2-oz/ft2 (459-g ⁄m2) mat
or chopped roving equivalent. The initial ply of the following
lamination shall be 11⁄2-oz/ft2 mat or chopped roving equiva-
lent.
6.4 The outer surface of the fabricated laminate shall be
smooth and free of exposed glass fibers. The final ply shall be
mat or chopped roving equivalent. A surfacing mat is not
required unless specified. Surface resin may require the addi-
tion of paraffin or may be sealed with overlaid film, as required
or approved by the resin producer, to ensure proper surface
cure.
6.4.1 When pigmentation is specified, the pigment shall be
incorporated only in the resin used to lay-up the final laminate
ply.
6.5 All edges of reinforcement material except surfacing
mat shall be lapped 1-in. (25.4-mm) minimum. Lapped edges
of adjacent layers shall be staggered. Surfacing mat shall be
butted together or have overlaps no more than 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
Gaps are not permitted.
 C582 − 09 (2016)
7. Physical and Mechanical Properties
7.1 The composition and sequence requirements for Type I
and II laminates are shown in Table 1 and Table 2.
7.2 The mechanical property requirements for Type I and II
laminates are shown in Table 4.
7.3 Physical properties of each type and grade of laminate
shall be established on flat laminates prepared under shop
conditions. In Type II laminates the woven roving is to be laid
square, and test specimens are to be cut parallel to the warp
rovings.
7.3.1 Test specimens cut from fabricated equipment usually
are not parallel to warp rovings. Interpretation of mechanical
property data obtained from such specimens is discussed in
Appendix X1.
8.5 Hardness—Test Method D2583.
8.6 Chemical Resistance—Test Method C581.
8.6.1 Exposure tests under plant operating conditions shall
employ Test Method C581 standard test laminate samples.
NOTE 11—Thicker laminates shall not be used for such tests, as results
will vary significantly compared to exposure of standard samples in Test
Method C581.
8.7 Surface Flame-Spread Classification—Test Method
E84.
9. Workmanship and Finish
9.1 The finished laminate shall conform to visual accep-
tance criteria of Table 5.

8. Test Methods
8.1 Tensile Strength and Tangent Modulus of Elasticity—
Test Method D638.
8.1.1 Specimens shall be in accordance with Type III, Fig. 1
of Test Method D638 for all laminate thicknesses.
8.2 Flexural Strength and Tangent Modulus of Elasticity—
Test Methods D790, Method I, Procedure A, and Table 1, 1/d
= 16 to 1.
8.2.1 Specimens shall be the full thickness of the laminate
as fabricated.
8.2.2 The loading nose shall be applied to the inner face of
the laminate specimen.
8.3 Glass Content—Test Method D2584.
8.3.1 The residual, undisturbed glass-fiber plies from the
ignition shall be separated carefully and counted to confirm
standard lay-up sequence.
8.4 Thickness shall be measured with a ball-foot microm-
eter.
9.2 The surface exposed to the chemical environment (pro-
cess side) shall be smooth, resin-rich, and fully cured. The
exterior surface shall also be fully cured.
9.2.1 The degree of cure shall be measured by a Barcol
hardness test in accordance with Test Method D2583. At least
80 % of the random readings shall exceed at least 90 % of the
resin manufacturer’s recommended hardness for the cured
resin.
9.2.2 Potential air-inhibited, undercured surfaces (both in-
terior secondary lamination and exterior non-mold surfaces)
shall be tested using an acetone sensitivity test. Four to five
drops of acetone rubbed with a finger on the laminate surface,
free of mold release, wax, dust, or dirt, until it evaporates, will
not result in surface softness or tackiness.
10. Keywords
10.1 contact molded; corrosion-resistant equipment; glass-
fiber-reinforced; laminate; reinforced thermosetting plastic
(RTP); thermoset polyester resin; thermoset vinyl ester resin

TABLE 4 Standard Laminate Properties

Calculated Thickness,A TensileB Mechanical Properties, min, psi (MPa)C
in. (mm) −6
Ultimate Stress × Modulus × 10 FlexuralD Edge CompressionE
Type
10−3 (MPa) (MPa) Ultimate Stress × Modulus × 10 −6
Ultimate Stress × 10−
10−3 (MPa) (MPa) 3
(MPa)

ALL I 9.0 0.85 16.0 0.7 16

(62) (5862) (110) (4828) (110)
0.22 (5.6) II 12.0 0.9 19.0 0.8 16
(83) (6207) (131) (5518) (110)
0.30 (7.6) II 13.5 1.1 20.0 0.9 18
(93) (7587) (138) (6207) (124)
0.37 (9.4) and up II 15.0 1.2 22.0 1.0 20
(104) (8276) (152) (6897) (138)
A
The thickness shall be not less than 90 % of the calculated thickness shown.
B
Test Method D638.
C
Barcol hardness should be 90 % (minimum) of cast resin hardness.
D
Test Method D790.
E
Test Method D695.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C582 − 09 (2016)
TABLE 5 Visual Acceptance Criteria
Visual Observation Surface Inspected
Process Side Nonprocess Side

Cracks None None

Crazing (fine resin-rich surface cracks)
Blisters (rounded elevations of the
laminate surface over bubbles)
Wrinkles and solid blisters
Pits (craters in the laminate surface)
Surface porosity, pin holes, or pores in
the laminate
Chips (small piece broken from edge or
surface)
Dry spot (non-wetted reinforcing)
Entrapped air (bubbles or voids or
delaminations in the laminate)
None Maximum dimension 1 in. (25.4 mm). Maximum density
5/ft2 (0.1 m2).A
None Maximum 1⁄4 -in. (6.4-mm) diameter by 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm)
high. Maximum 2/ft2 (2/0.1 m2).A
Maximum deviation, 20 % of wall thickness, but not exceeding Maximum deviation, 20 % of wall thickness, but not
1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm).A exceeding 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm).A
Maximum dimensions, 1⁄8 -in. (3.2-mm) diameter by 1⁄32 in. (0.8 Maximum dimension 1⁄8 -in. (3.2-mm) diameter by 1⁄16 in.
mm) deep. Maximum number 10/ft2 (10/0.1 mm2).A (1.6 mm) deep. Maximum density 10/ft2 (10/0.1 m2).A
Maximum dimensions, 1⁄16 -in. (1.6-mm) diameter by 1⁄32 in. (0.8 Maximum dimension 1⁄16 -in. (1.6-mm) diameter by 1⁄16 in.
mm) deep. Maximum number 20/ft2 (20 ⁄0.1 m2) by 1⁄16 in. (1.6 deep. Maximum number 20/ft2 (20/0.1 m2). Must be
mm). Must be resin-rich.A resin-rich.A
Maximum dimensions, 1⁄8 -in. (3.2-mm) diameter by 1⁄32 in. (0.8 Maximum dimension 1⁄4 -in. (6.4-mm) diameter by 1⁄16 in.
mm) deep. Maximum number 1/ft2 (1/0.1 m2).A (1.6 mm) deep. Maximum number 5/ft2 (5/0.1 m2).A
None Maximum dimensions 2 in.2 (13 cm2) per ft2 (0.1 m2).A
Maximum diameter 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm), 10/in.2 (10 ⁄6.5 cm2) Maximum diameter 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm). 10/in.2 (10 ⁄6.5 cm2)
maximum density. Maximum diameter 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm), 2/in.2 maximum density. Maximum diameter 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm),
(2/6.5 cm2) maximum density. Maximum depth of 1⁄32 in. (0.8 2/in.2 (2/6.5 cm2) maximum density. Maximum diameter
mm).AB 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm), 2/ft2 (2/0.1 m2). Maximum density.AB

Exposed glass None None

Burned areas None None
Exposure of cut edges NoneC NoneC
Scratches None over 0.005 in. deep and 4 in. long Maximum length 12 in. (3.5 mm). Maximum depth 0.010
in. (0.25 mm) 2/ft2 (2/0.1 m2), maximum density.A
Foreign matter None 1⁄8-in. (3.2-mm) diameter, maximum density 1/ft2 (1 ⁄0.1

m2). 3⁄16 -in. (4.8-mm) diameter, maximum density 1/ft2

(1/0.1 m2).AD
A
Maximum 5 % of total surface area affected.
B
Entrapped air or bubbles described are allowed, provided the surface cannot easily be broken with a pointed object, such as a knife blade.
C
Cut edges must be covered with resin.
D
Foreign matter must not penetrate the surface and must not contribute to entrapped air or other defects not allowed.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. INTERPRETATION OF DATA FROM ANISOTROPIC LAMINATES

X1.1 General—Mechanical properties of laminates contain- applied load and the direction of the roving strands. For 5 by 4
ing alternative plies of woven roving and chopped strand mat square weave roving, the approximate relationship is shown in
are dependent upon relationship between the direction of the Fig. X1.1.

X2. QUALIFICATION OF LAMINATE STRUCTURE FOR TYPE, CLASS, AND GRADE DESIGNATION

X2.1 General—The RTP laminate structures other than
those covered by this specification may be characterized for
designation as standard type, class, and grade by means of the
following procedure.
X2.2 Laminate Preparation:
X2.2.1 Under shop fabrication conditions, lay up 12 by
25-in. (305 by 635-mm) flat laminates of the proposed laminate
structure in nominal thicknesses of 3⁄16, 5⁄16, 1⁄2, and 3⁄4 in. (4.8,
8, 12.8, and 19.2 mm).
X2.2.1.1 Orientation of reinforcing fibers of fabrics shall be
such as to produce maximum properties in the 25-in. (635-mm)
direction of the laminate.
X2.2.1.2 Laminates having essentially unidirectional fiber
reinforcement shall be 25 by 25-in. (635 by 635-mm) size to
provide sufficient laminate for testing in two directions.
X2.2.1.3 The degree of cure of the surface exposed to the
chemical environment (process side) shall be measured by a
Barcol hardness test in accordance with Test Method D2583.
At least 80 % of the random readings shall exceed at least 90 %
of the resin manufacturer’s recommended hardness for the
cured resin.
X2.2.1.4 Cured laminates shall be flat within the limits of
1⁄8-in./ft (3.2-mm/0.1 m2) deviation from a plane surface.
X2.3 Testing:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 C582 − 09 (2016)

Standard
Deviation
Note: At 45°, Tensile strength is 69 % of 0°. 11 %
Tensile modulus is 86 % of 0°. 2%
At 45°, Flexural strength is 62 % of 0°. 14 %
Flexural modulus is 72 % of 0°. 14 %
At 45°, Composition strength is 100 % of 0°. 11 %
Composition modulus is 73 % of 0°. 20 %

FIG. X1.1 Directional Properties of RTP Alternating Mat/Woven

Roving

X2.3.1 Tests shall be performed, and results certified, by a
recognized independent testing laboratory experienced in the
testing of RTP laminates.
X2.3.2 Determine mechanical and physical properties as
required by Sections 7 and 8 of this specification.
X2.3.2.1 Unidirectional laminates, as described in X2.2.1.2,
shall have properties determined both parallel to, and at 90° to,
the direction of reinforcement.
X2.4 Report:
X2.4.1 The report shall describe laminate manufacture, date
of manufacture, resin used with batch number noted, identifi-
cation of reinforcements used, cure components, additives, and
all pertinent cure information.
X2.4.2 The report shall contain the data obtained on all
specimens, the laboratory that performed the tests, and the date
performed.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:35 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D953 − 19

Standard Test Method for

Pin-Bearing Strength of Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D953; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the pin- Plastics Specimens
bearing strength of rigid plastics in either sheet form, molded D7290 Practice for Evaluating Material Property Character-
form, or in reinforced thermoset form. Procedures A and B are istic Values for Polymeric Composites for Civil Engineer-
applicable for thermoplastic materials in tension loading and ing Structural Applications
compression loading respectively. Procedure C is applicable E4 Practices for Force Verification of Testing Machines
for thermoset reinforced plastics. See the significance and use E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
section (Section 5) for cautions in using this test standard. ASTM Test Methods
E6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing
1.2 Test data obtained by this test method is relevant and E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
appropriate for use in quality control and engineering design. Determine the Precision of a Test Method
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the 2.2 ISO Standards:
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information ISO 12815 Fibre-reinforced plastic composites—
only. Determination of plain-pin bearing strength3
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the 3. Terminology
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 3.1 Definitions—For definitions of technical terms used in
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter- this test method and associated with plastics issues refer to
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. terminology contained in ASTM D883.

NOTE 1—This standard and ISO 12815 address the same subject matter,
but differ in technical content.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.18 on Reinforced Thermoset-
ting Plastics.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2019. Published December 2019. Originally
approved in 1948. Last previous edition approved in 2018 as D953 - 18. DOI:
10.1520/D0953-19.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:4
3.2.1 pin-bearing area—the diameter of the hole multiplied
by the thickness of the specimen.
3.2.2 pin-bearing strength—the pin-bearing stress at which
the pin-bearing hole is deformed 4 % of its diameter for
thermoplastics. For thermosets, the pin-bearing strength is the
maximum pin-bearing stress at which the sample fails.
3.2.3 pin-bearing stress—the applied load in newtons (or
pounds-force) divided by the pin-bearing area in mm2 (or in2).
3.2.4 edge distance ratio—the distance from the center of
the pin-bearing hole to the edge of the specimen in the
direction of loading, divided by the diameter of the hole.
3.2.5 maximum pin-bearing stress—the maximum load in
newtons (or pounds-force) sustained by the specimen, divided
by the bearing area.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test standard is intended to test the pin-bearing
strength of thermoplastic material using procedures A, B and
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
4
Attention is also directed to Terminology E6.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D953 − 19
reinforced thermoset plastics using procedure C. In procedures no more than 61 % of the applied load as determined in
A and B, the sample with a pin-bearing hole will be tested in accordance with Practices E4.
tension and compression respectively. While using procedure A 6.2 Tension Loading Fixture for Procedure A—A three-plate
and B, the load at which the hole deformation reaches 4 % of fixture of hardened steel similar to that shown in Fig. 1.
hole diameter, that load shall be considered as maximum
pin-bearing load to calculate the pin-bearing strength. In 6.3 Extension Indicator—A suitable instrument reading in
procedure C, the sample shall be tested in compression and the 0.0025 mm (0.0001 in.) for indicating the movement of the free
maximum failure load of the sample shall be used as maximum end of the specimen with relation to the bearing pin in the
pin-bearing load to calculate the pin-bearing strength. As tension loading fixture. A dial gauge fitted with accessories for
reinforced thermoset plastics are much stiffer than this purpose is shown in Fig. 2.
thermoplastics, the pin-bearing failure happens much before 6.4 Compression Loading Fixture for Procedure B—A type
the hole deformation reaches 4 % of the hole diameter. Using of support with a suitable bearing pin similar to Fig. 3.
procedure C, it is allowed to test reinforced thermoset samples 6.5 Compression Indicator—A suitable instrument reading
with over-sized holes for any engineering design purposes. to 0.0025 mm (0.0001 in.) for indicating the movement of the
Using the maximum pin-bearing load obtained by using an free end of the specimen with relation to the bearing pin in the
appropriate procedure, the pin-bearing strength of the material compression loading fixture. A schematic of the dial gauge
will be determined. assembly for this purpose is shown in Fig. 4.
5. Significance and Use 6.6 Compression Loading Fixture for Procedure C—The
fixture as shown in Fig. 5 (A) is made up of two properly
5.1 This pin-bearing strength test for plastics is intended to aligned steel angle uprights welded to a steel base plate. The
apply in the specification of various thermoplastic or thermo- welding of the angle uprights has to be on the outside only and
setting products in sheet form where rivets, bolts, or similar not for the surfaces against which the specimen makes contact
fastenings are to be used in joining members or sections. It also
is intended to apply wherever sheet materials of the classes
indicated are required to sustain edgewise loads that are
applied by means of pins or rods of circular cross section which
pierce the sheet perpendicular to the surface.
5.2 The purpose of the test using procedures A and B is to
determine the pin-bearing strength of thermoplastic material
and to plot the pin-bearing stress versus the deformation of the
hole. The allowable deformation of the hole in the material
shall be such as to produce no looseness of joints.
5.3 The purpose of procedure C is to determine the ultimate
pin-bearing strength of reinforced thermoset material. This test
procedure enables the user to test the part in any direction that
is intended to carry the pin-bearing loads. The sample size used
in this procedure will cover thermoset reinforced plastics that
are commonly used in infrastructure applications.
5.4 While it is a known fact that higher strength materials 1—Hardened spacer plate.
2—6.3-mm (-in.) steel bolts in reamed holes.
will generally give higher bearing strengths, there is no 3—Hardened side plate.
satisfactory method to estimate pin-bearing strength from 4—Extensometer span.
tensile or compressive properties of the material. 5—Hardened steel pin in reamed hole.
6—Test specimen.
5.5 Before proceeding with this test method, reference shall
be made to the specification of the material being tested. Any
test specimen preparation, conditioning, dimensions or testing NOTE 1—Critical dimensions are as follows:
Thickness of
parameters or combination thereof covered in the relevant Type
Bearing Hole Bearing Pin Diameter, mm
Spacer Plate,
Diameter, mm (in.) (in.)
ASTM materials specification shall take precedence over those mmA (in.)
in this test method. If there are no relevant ASTM material I 3.175 + 0.025 3.150 + 0.000 3.2
− 0.000 − 0.025
specifications then the default conditions apply. (0.125 + 0.0010 (0.124 + 0.0000 (1⁄8 )
− 0.0000) − 0.0010)
6. Apparatus II 6.350 + 0.025 6.325 + 0.000 6.3
− 0.000 − 0.025
6.1 Testing Machine—A properly calibrated universal test- (0.250 + 0.0010 (0.249 + 0.0000 (1⁄4 )
− 0.0000) − 0.0010)
ing machine that is capable to be operated at a speed of 1.3 6 A
The spacer plate shall be shimmed to a thickness of 0.025 to 0.125 mm (0.001
0.3 mm (0.05 6 0.01 in.)/min, except that in cases of certain to 0.005 in.) greater than the specimen under test.
types of materials where it is necessary to operate at a slower
speed. The percentage of error of the testing machine shall be FIG. 1 Steel Tension Loading Fixture

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D953 − 19

1—Test specimen.
2—Hardened steel pin.
3—Hardened thrust bushing.

NOTE 1—Critical dimensions are as follows:

Minimum
Clear-
Bearing Hole
Bearing Pin Diameter, ance Be-
Type Diameter,
mm (in.) tween
mm (in.)
Bushings,
mm (in.)
I 3.175 + 0.025 3.150 + 0.000 2.8
− 0.000 − 0.025
(0.125 + 0.0010 (0.124 + 0.0000 (7/64)
− 0.0000) − 0.0010)
II 6.350 + 0.025 6.325 + 0.000 6.0
− 0.000 − 0.025
(0.250 + 0.0010 (0.249 + 0.0000 (15/64)
− 0.0000) − 0.0010)

FIG. 3 Steel Compression Loading Fixture

1—Spacer plate.
2—Dial gauge.
3—Double foot ring mounted on spindle of dial gauge.
4—Bearing pin.
5—Yoke mounted on specimen.
6—Test specimen.
7—Plan view of yoke.
FIG. 2 Tension Loading Assembly
with so the sample can be supported flush to the surface of the
angle and align without any angularity. This fixture will
support and align the sample normal to the loading ram. It is
allowed to use C-clamps to provide lateral support to the
sample against the fixture as shown in Fig. 5 (B). For quality
assurance purposes, the nominal bearing pin diameter shall be
the same as the thickness of the sample.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The test specimens for Procedures A and B shall
conform to the dimensions shown in Fig. 6. A size of test
specimen shall be chosen that most nearly conforms to
production requirements of the material and the type of loading
under consideration. It is permitted to machine the specimen
from sheet or molded to finished size. The bearing hole shall be
located as shown in Fig. 6. It shall be drilled undersized and
reamed to size as indicated. The hole shall be clean and smooth
with sharp edges but not polished. The reaming operation shall
be done in the drill press by hand without the use of a jig.
NOTE 2—The thicker specimens with the larger pin-bearing hole are
likely to give the more precise results, although it is advantageous to use
the thinner specimens with the smaller pin-bearing hole in testing certain
relatively brittle plastics because they are less likely to fail prematurely.
7.2 The test specimens for procedure C shall conform to the
dimensions shown in Fig. 7. The test specimen shall be a 76.2
mm by 76.2 mm (3 in. by 3 in.) sample machined from a part
that mostly nearly conforms to the production requirements of
the material under consideration. The specimen shall be clearly
marked to identify the orientation of the material. The pin-
bearing hole shall be located at a distance of 15.88 mm (0.625
in.) from the one edge of the sample in the direction of the
loading. The hole shall be drilled undersized and reamed to size
as indicated in Fig. 7. The hole shall be clean and smooth with
sharp edges but not polished. The reaming operation shall be
done in the drill press by hand without the use of a jig. The
sample with pin-bearing hole shall be carefully machined at the
mid-section of the hole to present half of the hole as shown in
Fig. 7.
7.3 The dimensions given in Fig. 7 applies to holes up to
25.4 mm (1 in.). For pin-bearing holes bigger than 25.4 mm (1
in.) an edge distance (B) of 3 times the diameter of the
pin-bearing pin shall be considered.
7.4 Oversized Holes for Engineering Designs—To deter-
mine the pin-bearing strength of oversized holes for engineer-
ing design purpose, it is allowed to use the compression fixture
and the compression sample, prepared as described in 7.2
except that it is not required to clean or ream the hole. While
determining the pin-bearing stress of an oversized hole, note
that the values obtained for a particular combination of hole
size, pin size, thickness, and material is acceptable only for that
combination.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D953 − 19

1—Test specimen. 6—Dial gauge.

2—Bearing pin. 7—Pedestal support.
3—Thrust bushings. 8—Clamp for cheek blocks.
4—Hanger for dial gauge. 9—Hard maple cheek blocks to stabilize test specimen.
5—Spring-supported thrust member of transfer deforma-
tion of specimen to dial gauge foot.

FIG. 4 Compression Loading Assembly

FIG. 5 Compression Loading Fixture for Procedure C (With Picture of Sample Under Pin-Bearing Load)

8. Number of Test Specimens 8.2 Ten specimens, five perpendicular to and five parallel
8.1 At least five specimens shall be tested for each sample in with the principal axis of anisotropy, shall be tested for each
the case of isotropic materials. sample in case of anisotropic materials.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D953 − 19

Type Dimensions, mmA (in.) Ream Hole

A B C D to

I 11.913 ± 0 .127 19.050± 0 .127 120.6 3.2 3.200 ± 0 .025

(0.469 ± 0 .005) (0.750 ± 0 .005) (43⁄4 ) (1⁄8 ) (0.126 ± 0 .001)
II 11.913 ± 0 .127 19.050 ± 0 .127 120.6 6.4 6.375 ± 0 .025
(0.469 ± 0 .005) (0.750 ± 0 .005) (43⁄4 ) (1⁄4 ) (0.251 ± 0 .001)

A
All fractional dimensions shall be held to ±0.40 mm (1⁄64 in.) tolerance.

Edge distance ratio = B/hole diameter

FIG. 6 Dimensions of Pin-Bearing Strength Test Specimens

Dimensions, mm (in.)
A B Ream Hole to
76.2 ± 1.588 14.732 ± 0.0635 D ± 0.0635
(3 ± 0.0625) (0.625 ± 0.0025) (D ± 0.0025)

FIG. 7 Dimensions of Compression Pin-Bearing Samples for Procedure C

NOTE 3—If the intent of the testing is to obtain the characteristic value
in accordance with Practice D7290, the sample numbers have to be a
minimum of ten samples per direction of principal axis.
8.3 Specimens that break at some obvious flaw that is not
naturally formed by the material processing method shall be
discarded and retests made, unless such flaws constitute a
variable the effect of which is being studied.
9. Conditioning
9.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens in accor-
dance with Procedure A of Practice D618, unless otherwise
specified by contract or the relevant ASTM material specifica-
tion. Conditioning time is specified as a minimum. Tempera-
ture and humidity tolerances shall be in accordance with
Section 7 of Practice D618 unless specified differently by
contract or material specification.
9.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests at the same temperature
and humidity used for conditioning with tolerances in accor-
dance with Section 7 of Practice D618 unless otherwise
specified by contract or the relevant ASTM material specifica-
tion.
10. Measurement of Dimensions
10.1 Measure the width and thickness of the conditioned
test specimen to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) at the bearing

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D953 − 19
hole. Also, measure the pin diameter, diameter of the pin-
bearing hole and the distance from the center of the pin-bearing
hole to the edge of the specimen in the direction of the
principal stress to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). All
measurements to be made using the applicable test methods in
accordance with Test Method D5947.
11. Speed of Testing
11.1 The mean rate of crosshead travel in the testing of
specimens shall not exceed 1.3 6 0.3 mm (0.05 6 0.01
in.)/min. In any case the crosshead movement shall be slow
enough so that deflection gauge readings can be made accu-
rately.
12. Procedure
12.1 The choice of either Procedure A for tension loading
(12.2) or Procedure B for compression loading (12.3) is
optional, but note that Procedure B gives higher pin-bearing
strength values than Procedure A on the same material. Test
specimens according to both Procedures A and B if a complete
specification of pin-bearing strength is required.
12.2 Procedure A for Tension Loading—Mount the speci-
men to be tested in the tension loading fixture and attach a
deformation indicator. If a dial gauge (Fig. 2) is used, adjust the
yoke so that contact is made with the specimen at the level
indicated in Fig. 1. Exception is taken in the case of those
thermoplastic materials which exhibit extended plastic flow.
Such specimens tend to “neck down” in the region of the
pin-bearing hole, and it is necessary to mount the yoke 12.7
mm (1⁄2 in.) below the normal position indicated in A, Fig. 1, so
that it will not slip during test.
12.3 Procedure B for Compression Loading—Mount the
specimen to be tested in the compression loading fixture and
load through a flat, hardened compression plate. Adjust the
clearance between the thrust bushings of the loading fixture
such that their contact with the specimen is sufficient to support
it in a vertical position without binding. Clamp the hardwood
cheek blocks in place and attach the deformation indicator (see
Fig. 4).
12.4 Details Common to Procedures A and B—Take care in
aligning the long axis of the specimen with the center line of
the testing fixture. Load the specimen at the prescribed rate of
crosshead travel and take deformation readings. In case auto-
graphic recording is not available, record the load sustained by
the specimen for every 0.0127-mm (0.0005-in.) deformation
up to a total deformation of 4 % of the pin-bearing hole
diameter. Continue the test until maximum load is sustained
and the corresponding deformation of the pin-bearing hole is
recorded.
12.5 Procedure C for Compression Loading—Mount the
specimen to be tested in the steel compression fixture against
the steel angle uprights as shown in Fig. 5. Clamp the sample
to the fixture to keep it in place during the testing. Place the
bearing pin in the half-circle of the specimen and center this
assembly under the flat platen attachment of the test machine.
Load the specimen at the prescribed rate of crosshead travel
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
until the maximum load is recorded. Record load vs. position
readings throughout the test.
13. Calculation
13.1 Plot the load - deflection curve for each specimen.
13.2 For Procedures A and B, use a template as described in
the Appendix to determine the load at 4 % hole deformation.
For Procedure C, use the ultimate (maximum) load for pin-
bearing strength calculations.
13.3 Calculate the pin-bearing strength as follows:
S b 5 P/ ~ td! (1)
where:
Sb = pin-bearing strength, MPa (or psi),
P = pin-bearing load at 4 % hole deformation for thermo-
plastics using Procedure A and B, N (or lbf). Use
maximum load for reinforced thermoset plastics, N (or
lbf).
d = pin-bearing hole diameter, mm (or in.), and
t = specimen thickness, mm (or in.).
13.4 Calculate the arithmetic mean of the observations and
report the result to three significant figures.
13.5 Calculate the standard deviation of each batch of test
results and record to two significant figures.
14. Report
14.1 Report the following information:
14.1.1 Complete identification of the material tested, includ-
ing type, source, manufacturer’s code number, form, principal
dimensions, and previous history,
14.1.2 Direction of cutting and loading specimens,
14.1.3 Conditioning procedure and environmental condi-
tions under which the tests were conducted,
14.1.4 Length, width, and thickness of specimen, in milli-
metres (or inches),
14.1.5 Diameter of pin and diameter of pin-bearing hole, in
millimetres (or inches),
14.1.6 Edge distance ratio,
14.1.7 Mean rate of crosshead motion in millimetres (or
inches) per minute,
14.1.8 Pin-bearing strength in Megapascals (or pounds-
force per square inch), stating whether Procedure A for tension
loading or Procedure B for compression loading for thermo-
plastic materials or Procedure C for reinforced thermoset
plastics was used,
14.1.9 Average pin-bearing stress in Megapascals (or
pounds-force per square inch), stating whether Procedure A or
Procedure B or Procedure C was used,
14.1.10 The test method number and published/revision
date.
15. Precision and Bias
15.1 The precision of this test method is based on an
intralaboratory study of ASTM D953—Test Method for Bear-
ing Strength of Plastics using Procedure C, conducted in 2018.
A single laboratory participated in this study, testing a single 3⁄8
in. pultruded material. Every “test result” represents the

average of ten individual determinations. The laboratory re-
ported three replicate test results for the study material in both
the crosswise and lengthwise direction. Except for the use of
only one laboratory and one material, Practice E691 was
followed for the design and analysis of the data; the details are
given in ASTM Research Report No. D20-1273.5
15.1.1 Repeatability Limit (r)—The difference between re-
petitive results obtained by the same operator in a given
laboratory applying the same test method with the same
apparatus under constant operating conditions on identical test
material within short intervals of time would in the long run, in
the normal and correct operation of the test method, exceed the
following values only in one case in 20.
15.1.1.1 Repeatability can be interpreted as maximum dif-
ference between two results, obtained under repeatability
conditions, that is accepted as plausible due to random causes
under normal and correct operation of the test method.
15.1.1.2 Repeatability limits are listed in Tables 1 and 2.
15.1.2 Reproducibility Limit (R)—The difference between
two single and independent results obtained by different
operators applying the same test method in different laborato-
ries using different apparatus on identical test material would,
in the long run, in the normal and correct operation of the test
method, exceed the following values only in one case in 20.
TABLE 1 Average Bearing Stress (MPa)
Material Average Repeatability
Standard
Deviation
x̄ Sr
⁄ in. Pultruded
38 287.74 4.59
Material
(Lengthwise)
3⁄8 in. Pultruded 236.26 3.26
Material
(Crosswise)
5
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1273. Contact ASTM Customer
Service at service@astm.org.
X1. DETERMINATION OF PIN-BEARING LOAD USING PROCEDURES A AND B
X1.1 Pin-bearing strength has been defined as the pin-
bearing stress at which the pin-bearing hole is deformed a
given percentage (4 %) of the hole diameter, and is by
definition, sensitive to zero load errors. The following proce-
dure for determining pin-bearing strength has been found to
eliminate this ambiguity. It is insensitive to zero load errors,
and as a result improves the precision of the pin-bearing
strength measurements.
X1.2 The method is best illustrated by Fig. X1.1. Given the
pin-bearing load − deflection curve, ABC, the tangent is deter-
mined at a point, B, such that when the tangent is projected
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D953 − 19
TABLE 2 Average Bearing Stress (psi)
Material Average Repeatability Repeatability
Standard Limit
Deviation
x̄ Sr r
⁄ in. Pultruded
38 41 733 666 1864
Material
(Lengthwise)
3⁄8 in. Pultruded 34 267 473 1323
Material
(Crosswise)
15.1.2.1 Reproducibility can be interpreted as maximum
difference between two results, obtained under reproducibility
conditions, that is accepted as plausible due to random causes
under normal and correct operation of the test method.
15.1.2.2 Reproducibility limits cannot be calculated from a
single laboratory’s results.
15.1.3 The above terms (repeatability limit and reproduc-
ibility limit) are used as specified in Practice E177.
15.1.4 Any judgment in accordance with statement 15.1.1
would normally have an approximate 95 % probability of
being correct, however the precision statistics obtained in this
ILS must not be treated as exact mathematical quantities which
are applicable to all circumstances and uses. The limited
number of laboratories reporting replicate results essentially
guarantees that there will be times when differences greater
than predicted by the ILS results will arise, sometimes with
Repeatability
considerably greater or smaller frequency than the 95 %
Limit probability limit would imply. Consider the repeatability limit
as a general guide, and the associated probability of 95 % as
r
12.85
only a rough indicator of what can be expected.
15.2 Bias—At the time of the study, there was no accepted
9.13
reference material suitable for determining the bias for this test
method, therefore no statement on bias is being made.
15.3 The precision statement was determined through sta-
tistical examination of 12 test results, from a single laboratory,
one 3⁄8 in. pultruded material.
16. Keywords
16.1 compression strength; pin-bearing strength; plastics
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
through the point, O, on the zero load axis, the distance
betweenOandDshall be equal to 4 % of the bearing hole
diameter.
X1.3 A template to facilitate the determination of point Bon
the curve is shown in Fig. X1.2. It is designed to fit the
coordinate paper upon which the load-deformation curve is
drawn in such a way that a “4 % line” on the template is
established at a distance from the origin, O, equal to 4 % of the
pin-bearing hole diameter. It consists of a thin rigid sheet of
transparent plastic upon which the rectangular coordinates are
ruled. A strip of transparent plastic is mounted on the sheet so
7
 D953 − 19

FIG. X1.2 Template for Determining Point Bon Pin-Bearing Load-

FIG. X1.1 Illustration of Method of Determining Pin-Bearing
Deformation Curve
Strength from Pin-Bearing Load-Deformation Curve

as to rotate about point O. The strip is provided with a
reference center line passing through the point of rotation.
X1.4 In practice, the deformation axis of the template is
superimposed on the zero load axis of the load-deformation
curve. This can best be done with the aid of a drawing board
and a parallel straightedge. The template is then slid to right or
left while in superposition until the rotating arm can be made
tangent to the load-deformation curve at its intersection with
the 4 % line. The intersection is the point Bon the curve in Fig.
X1.1; Bis projected horizontally to the load axis and the
pin-bearing load is read.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D953 - 18)
that may impact the use of this standard. (November 1, 2019)

(1) Changed the sentence in 6.6: The nominal bearing pin

diameter shall be the same as the thickness of the sample to
“For quality assurance purposes, the nominal bearing pin
diameter shall be the same as the thickness of the sample”.

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D953 - 10)
that may impact the use of this standard. (November 1, 2018)

(1) Changed the title of the standard to “Standard Test Method (3) Changed language at several locations in accordance with
for Pin-Bearing Strength of Plastics.” ASTM D4968-17.
(2) Added Procedure C to the scope of the test standard to
include a test procedure for reinforced thermoset plastics

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:37 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D1494 − 17 An American National Standard

Standard Test Method for

Diffuse Light Transmission Factor of Reinforced Plastics
Panels1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D1494; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the diffuse
light transmission factor of translucent reinforced plastics
building panels.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in the parentheses are for informa-
tion only.
1.3 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding those in Tables and Figures) shall not be considered
as requirements of this standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2017. Published January 2018. Originally
approved in 1957. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D1494 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D1494-17.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Laboratory Applications
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
2.2 ASTM Adjuncts:
Test Cabinet for Diffuse Light Transmission Factor of
Reinforced Panels3
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminol-
ogy D883 and abbreviations with Terminology D1600, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The purpose of this test method is to obtain the diffuse
light transmittance factor of both flat and corrugated translu-
cent building panels by the use of simple apparatus and by
employing as a light source a combination of fluorescent tubes
whose energy distribution closely approximates CIE Source C.
5. Apparatus
5.1 The apparatus for this test method shall consist of a
transmissometer, Fig. 1, comprising essentially the following:
5.1.1 Light Source—The illumination shall consist of twelve
20-W fluorescent tubes which are assembled in three banks of
four tubes each, according to the following schedule: daylight,
deluxe cool white, blue, and daylight.
5.1.2 Photometer—The photometer shall consist of a pho-
tocell and of a galvanometer. The photocell shall be of the
barrier-layer type and shall contain a visual correction filter.
The assembly preferably should be hermetically sealed into
plastic as a protection against moisture. The indicating galva-
nometer should contain one scale graduated from 0 to 100, and
a circuit with sufficient variable resistance so that the sensitiv-
ity of the photometer can be adjusted over the range of 50 to
100 footcandles.
3
Detailed working drawings and a bill of materials for this equipment can be
obtained at a nominal charge from ASTM Headquarters, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO
Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. Order Adjunct: ADJD1494.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:41 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D1494 − 17

Metric Equivalents
in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
⁄
1 32 0.8 ⁄
34 19.1 83⁄4 222 243⁄4 634
3⁄16 4.8 11⁄4 31.8 93⁄4 248 251⁄2 648
7⁄37 5.6 11⁄2 38.1 12 305 28 711
1⁄ 4 6.4 2 50.8 14 356 291⁄2 749
9⁄32 7.1 63⁄4 172 24 610 381⁄2 978
3⁄ 8 9.5

FIG. 1 Assembly Drawing of Transmissometer

5.1.3 Test Cabinet, constructed in accordance with the bottom of the test specimen to the bottom of the masking plate
following dimensions.3 shall be 233.0 6 0.8 mm (93⁄4 6 1⁄32 in.).
5.1.3.1 The transmitted area of the test specimen shall be
610.0 6 1.6 mm by 610.0 6 1.6 mm (24 6 1⁄16 in. by 24 6 6. Standardization of Transmissometer
1⁄16 in.).
6.1 Center the photocell beneath the 31.8-mm (11⁄4-in.)
5.1.3.2 The distance from the bottom of the fluorescent
diameter hole in the bottom masking plate. Place the galva-
tubes to the bottom of the test specimen shall be 203.0 6 0.8
nometer in a flat level position. Ensure that no current flows in
mm (8 6 1⁄32 in.).
the electrical circuit by opening the circuit. Adjust the position
5.1.3.3 A 4.8-mm (3⁄16-in.) thick, white, standard outdoor,
of the indicating needle on the galvanometer to read “0’’ by
translucent diffusing plate shall be placed between the light
means of the zero adjustment knob. Close the galvanometer
source and the test specimen so that the distance from the
circuit. Turn on the illumination in the transmissometer. Wait a
bottom of the diffusing plate to the bottom of the test specimen
minimum of 20 min to permit the transmissometer to reach
is 31.8 6 0.8 mm (11⁄4 6 1⁄32 in.).
equilibrium conditions. Adjust the galvanometer to read “100.”
5.1.3.4 The photocell shall be positioned below the center
The instrument is now ready to be used for measurements of
axis of the test specimen so that the distance from the bottom
diffuse light transmission factor.
of the specimen to the top of the cell is 283.0 6 0.8 mm
(111⁄8 6 1⁄32 in.).
7. Test Specimens
5.1.3.5 A masking plate containing a 31.8-mm (11⁄4-in.)
diameter hole in its center shall be placed between the test 7.1 The test specimens shall consist of translucent rein-
specimen and the photocell so that the distance from the forced plastic panels having a minimum length of 610 mm (24

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:41 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D1494 − 17
TABLE 1 Precision Values in the Units of Percent
Material Average SrA SRB IrC IRD
Sample #4 6.1 0.36 1.08 1.02 3.06
Sample #5 24.1 0.59 2.48 1.67 7.02
Sample #1 59.7 0.45 5.01 1.27 14.18
Sample #3 73.0 0.76 3.19 2.16 9.03
Sample #2 95.6 0.64 1.61 1.81 4.56
A
Sr is the within-laboratory standard deviation of the average.
B
SR is the between-laboratory standard deviation of the average.
C
Ir = 2.83 Sr; and
D
IR = 2.83 SR.

in.) and a width greater than 610 mm (24 in.), but not
exceeding 711 mm (28 in.).
8. Conditioning
8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 23 6
2°C (73 6 4°F) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less
than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of
Practice D618, for those test methods where conditioning is
required. In cases of disagreement, the tolerances shall be
61°C (62°F) and 65 % relative humidity.
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct tests in the Standard Labora-
tory Atmosphere of 23 6 2°C (73 6 4°F) and 50 6 10 %
relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test meth-
ods or in this specification. In cases of disagreement, the
tolerances shall be 61°C (62°F) and 65 % relative humidity.
9. Procedure
9.1 In making a measurement, place the test specimen in the
test cabinet so that it completely covers the 610 by 610-mm (24
by 24-in.) space. The transmittance is read on the galvanometer
in percent.
10. Report
10.1 The report shall include the following:
10.1.1 The source and identity of test specimens.
10.1.2 The percent transmission of the test specimen.
10.1.3 The average thickness of the test specimen in inches
expressed to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) and comprising
at least ten individual measurements.
11. Precision and Bias4
11.1 Table 1 is based on a round robin conducted in 1987 in
accordance with Practice E691, involving five materials tested
by seven laboratories. Because of the nonuniform nature of
large corrugated sheets, the five samples were sequentially sent
4
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
1145.
to the seven participating laboratories. Each test result is an
individual determination. Each laboratory obtained three test
results for each material.
NOTE 2—The explanation of Ir and IR (11.2 through 11.2.3) are only
intended to present a meaningful way of considering the approximate
precision of this test method. The data in Table 1 should not be vigorously
applied to acceptance or rejection of materials as these data specific to the
round robin and may not be representative of other lots, conditions,
materials, or laboratories.
11.1.1 Users of this test method should apply the principles
outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
laboratory and materials or between specific laboratories. The
principles of 11.2 through 11.2.3 then would be valid for such
data.
11.2 Concept of Ir and IR—If Sr and SR have been
calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test
results that are the individual result from testing one specimen:
11.2.1 Ir: Repeatability The value below which the absolute
difference between two individual test results obtained under
repeatability conditions is likely to be expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
11.2.2 IR: Reproducibility The value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under reproducibility conditions is likely to be expected to
occur with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
11.2.3 Equivalence testing on numerical data from two
sources shall be conducted in accordance with Practice E2935
or any known method for judging the equivalence of two
means.
NOTE 3—Example, a t-test.
11.3 Bias is systematic error which contributes to the
difference between a test result and a true (or reference) value.
There are no recognized standards on which to base an estimate
of bias for this test method.
12. Keywords
12.1 building panels; diffuse light transmission factor; rein-
forced plastics

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:41 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D1494 − 17
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of the following changes to this standard since the last issue
(D1494-12) that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2017)

(1) Revised 2.1, added reference to E2935. (4) Revised 11.2.1, 11.2.2, 11.2.3, new rewording.
(2) Revised 8.1 and 8.2, changed 6 2% to 5% per D618-13. (5) Added Note 3.
(3) Revised 8.2, corrected °C to °F.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:41 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2143 − 15

Standard Test Method for

Cyclic Pressure Strength of Reinforced, Thermosetting
Plastic Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2143; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the failure
characteristics of reinforced plastic pipe when subjected to
cyclic internal hydraulic pressure. It is limited to pipe in which
the ratio of outside diameter to wall thickness is 10:1 or more.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values in parentheses are for information
only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic
Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved May 1, 2015. Published June 2015. Originally
approved in 1963. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D2143 – 00(2010).
DOI: 10.1520/D2143-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 failure—the transmission of the test fluid through the
pipe wall in any manner, whether it be wall fracture, localized
leaking, or weeping at a distance greater than one diameter
from the end closure (specimens failing within one diameter of
the end closure shall be discarded).
3.1.2 failure detector—a devise that measures the electrical
resistance between the test fluid and a conductive material,
wrapped around the circumference of the test specimen, and
which will indicate failure when 1) the resistance is lowered to
a range from 10 to 20 meg-ohm or 2) for the case of municipal
water, when the first drop of fluid has passed through the wall
of the specimen.
3.1.3 localized leaking—failure that occurs as small frac-
tures (one or more in a test specimen) that permit the test fluid
to be transferred at a rate that is measured by the failure
detector.
3.1.4 weeping—a general transmission of the test fluid
through the pipe, without visible fracture, at a sufficient rate to
be measured by the failure dectector, or in the case of larger
magnitudes of fluid transmission appear to be moisture con-
densation on the specimen.
3.1.5 wall fracture—failure by a break in the pipe wall
causing immediate loss of test fluid and continued loss at
essentially no pressure.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of exposing pipe specimens to
cyclic internal pressures at several different pressure levels and
measuring the cycles to failure at these different levels. Test
temperatures are obtained by circulating salt water or munici-
pal water through the specimens.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The values obtained by this test method are applicable
only to conditions that specifically duplicate the procedures
used.
5.2 After the regression characteristics of a pipe material
and manufacturing process have been determined by this test
method, one pressure may be used for quality-control purposes.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:46 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2143 − 15
This pressure shall be one of the points used in the original
determination and be agreed upon between the individuals
concerned.
5.3 This test method deals with cyclic internal pressure
performance of a pipe and omits creep and nonrecoverable
deformation measurements.
5.4 For determination of the cyclic hydrostatic design basis
using data from this test method see Practice D2992.
5.5 In the application of the following test requirements and
recommendations it is assumed that test specimens of a given
sample of pipe are truly representative of that material and
manufacturing process. In tests conducted to show the effect of
temperature and pressures on the life span of the pipe, great
care must be taken to ensure that the specimens being tested are
representative of the group being studied. Departure from this
assumption could introduce discrepancies that are greater than
those introduced by departure from the details of the procedure
outlined in this test method.
6. Apparatus
6.1 A schematic diagram of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 1
and shall consist of the following:
6.1.1 Pressurizing System—A device capable of exerting
cyclic internal pressure of the salt water or municipal water to
the test specimens. Fig. 1 shows an oil pump leading to a
four-way solenoid-operated valve which directs the fluid alter-
nately to the two pressure legs, each of which contains a
spring-operated, manually adjustable, pressure relief valve and
FIG. 1 Schematic Drawing of Cyclic Pressure Apparatus
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:46 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
an accumulator which acts as a fluid separator transferring the
pressurizing medium to the salt solution or municipal water.
The solenoid is operated with equal on and off times by an
electric pulsator.
6.1.2 Test Fluid—The test fluid shall be a 2 % aqueous
sodium chloride solution when salt water or municipal water is
used.
6.1.3 Temperature Bath—A thermostatically controlled bath
coupled into the test fluid, which maintains specimen tempera-
ture to within 65°F (62°C). The circulation of this fluid is
pumped on the off portion of the pressure cycle.
6.1.4 Pressure Gages—Pressure gages having a precision of
not less than 1 % of full-scale deflection with a maximum
indicating hand. The pressure gage shall be selected such that
the final readings are in the mid-60 % range of the scale. The
gage should be equipped with a surge protection device.
6.1.5 Specimen Fittings—Any suitable closure that allows
free end mounting, and does not contribute to end failures may
be used.
6.1.6 Specimen Support—Any support is acceptable as long
as it does not contribute to the restraint of the specimen in
either the circumferential or axial direction.
6.1.7 Cycle Counter and Failure Detector—Each group of
specimens shall be outfitted with a cyclic counter and a failure
detector which automatically stops the cyclic count when the
specimen has failed.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 Sample Size—See Practice D2992.
 D2143 − 15
7.2 Specimen Size—For pipe sizes of 6 in. (150 mm) or less, 9.7 After each specimen fails, record the failure count as
the specimen length between the end closures shall be not less indicated by the failure detector.
than five times the outside diameter of the pipe, but in no case
10. Calculation
less than 12 in. (300 mm). For larger sizes, the minimum length
shall be not less than three times the outside diameter, but in no 10.1 Calculate the hoop stress in the pipe specimen as
case less than 30 in. (760 mm). follows:
7.3 Measurement of Dimensions—The physical dimensions S 5 P ~ D 2 t ! /2t
of the pipe shall be measured in accordance with Practice where:
D3567.
S = hoop stress, psi (MPa),
P = internal pressure, psi (MPa),
8. Conditioning D = average outside diameter, in. (mm), and
8.1 Precondition all specimens in the standard laboratory t = minimum wall thickness, in. (mm).
atmosphere as specified in Practice D618. 10.2 For the statistical calculation method, see Practice
8.2 The specimen shall be suitable for test when the D2992.
temperature of the test fluid, at both inlet and outlet, is
11. Report
maintained within 5°F (2.8°C) of the test temperature for a
period of 1 h. 11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Complete identification of specimens, including ma-
8.3 Ambient temperature need not be controlled.
terial type, source, manufacturer’s name and code number, and
previous history,
9. Procedure 11.1.2 Pipe dimensions,
9.1 Attach the specimen with end closures into the system, 11.1.3 Test temperature and test fluid,
being careful to eliminate all air from the entire system. 11.1.4 Cyclic rate and cycles to failure of each specimen
9.2 With the valves to the specimens closed and the power tested and nature of the failure,
pump operating, adjust the pressure regulator to the desired 11.1.5 Correlation coefficient,
pressure. 11.1.6 Any unusual effects or observations during or prior to
the test,
9.3 Open the bypass needle valves, and with the circulating 11.1.7 Dates of test.
pump running, circulate the salt solution through the specimen
to obtain the desired test temperature for conditioning. 12. Precision and Bias
9.4 Close the bypass needle valve to permit only enough test 12.1 No precision and bias statement can be made for this
fluid to pass through to maintain the test temperature. Connect test method since a controlled round-robin test program has not
the failure detector units, reset these units to zero, and start the been run. A controlled round-robin program is not considered
main power pump. feasible due to the number of samples, the duration of time, and
the cyclic pressure apparatus specified by this test method.
9.5 Adjust the cycling rate to at least 25 6 2 cycles/min.
9.6 As additional specimens are added or removed from the 13. Keywords
system, maintain the maximum pressure condition desired by 13.1 cyclic pressure strength; fiberglass pipe; hydrostatic
readjusting the cyclic rate to at least 25 6 2 cycles/min. design basis; pressure design basis

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D2143-00(2010)) that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2015)

(1) Revised specimen length requirements in 7.2 to be consis-

tent with Test Methods D1598 and D1599.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:46 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2143 − 15
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:46 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2517 − 18

Standard Specification for

Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2517; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers requirements and methods of
test for materials, dimensions and tolerances, hydrostatic-burst
strength, chemical resistance, and longitudinal tensile
properties, for reinforced epoxy resin pipe and fittings for use
in gas mains and services for direct burial and insertion
applications. The pipe and fittings covered by this specification
are intended for use in the distribution of natural gas, petro-
leum fuels (propane–air and propane–butane vapor mixtures),
manufactured and mixed gases where resistance to gas
permeation, toughness, resistance to corrosion, aging, and
deterioration from water, gas, and gas additives are required.
Methods of marking are also given. Design considerations are
discussed in Appendix X1.
1.2 The values in SI units are to be regarded as the standard.
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 A recommended inplant quality control program is
given in Appendix X2.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D396 Specification for Fuel Oils
D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Chemical Reagents
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Under Constant Internal Pressure
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)3
D2105 Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of
“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe and Tube
D2143 Test Method for Cyclic Pressure Strength of
Reinforced, Thermosetting Plastic Pipe
D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2924 Test Method for External Pressure Resistance of
“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D2996 Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
D3839 Guide for Underground Installation of “Fiberglass”

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Jan. 1, 2018. Published February 2018. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1966. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D2517 – 06(2011). The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
DOI: 10.1520/D2517-18. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

(Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D5685 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 or F412. Abbreviations are in accordance with
Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated. The abbrevia-
tion for fiberglass pipe is RTRP and the abbreviation for
fiberglass fittings is RTRF.
3.1.2 The gas industry technology used in this specification
is in accordance with definitions given in The Department of
Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline Minimum
Safety Standards.
3.1.3 Standards Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe Ma-
terials Designation Code—The pipe material designation code
shall consist of the abbreviation RTRP followed by type and
grade in arabic numerals, class by a capital letter and the long
term steady pressure strength by a second capital letter. The
fittings material designation shall consist of the abbreviation
RTRF followed by type (method of manufacture), grade
(general type of resin), class (configuration of joining system),
and pressure rating.
4. Classification
4.1 Pipe—The pipe covered in this specification is made by
the filament winding process and is described in Specification
D2996. Requirements of this pipe are based on short-term tests
defined in this specification.
4.2 Fittings—This specification covers a) reinforced epoxy
resin fittings described in specification D5685 and made of the
type of materials covered in Section 5, and b) metal fittings
which have been designed and tested in accordance with the
provisions of The Department of Transportation Title 49 of The
Code of Federal Regulations Part 192 – Transportation of
Natural Gas and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal
Safety Standards, which are capable of being joined to the pipe
and will provide a suitable gas distribution system.
5. Materials
5.1 The resins and reinforcements used to make pipe shall
be as specified in 5.1.1.
5.1.1 This specification covers glass fiber reinforced epoxy
resin pipe and fittings as defined in Specification D2996 as
RTRP Type 1; Grade 1; Classes A, C, F, and H; and Hydrostatic
TABLE 1 Pipe Dimensions, mm (in.)
Nominal Outside Diameter
2 60.325 (2.375)
3 88.900 (3.500)
4 114.300 (4.500)
6 168.275 (6.625)
8 219.075 (8.625)
10 273.050 (10.750)
12 323.850 (12.750)
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D2517 − 18
Design Basis U, W, X, Y, and Z —Example: RTRP 11 HZ and
fittings as defined in specification D5685-RTRF Types 1, 2, 3,
4, and 5; Grade 1; Class A, C, F, and H; Category 1, 2, 3, 4, and
5; and Pressure Rating Category D, E, F, G, H, I, and
J—Example: RTRF 21A2D.
NOTE 2—The particular reinforced thermosetting resin included ini-
tially in this specification for gas pressure piping was selected on the basis
of engineering test studies made by Battelle Memorial Institute, experi-
mental use in field installations, and technical data supplied by the
manufacturers of the plastics materials used to make the pipe and fittings.
It is the intent of ASTM Committee D-20 on Plastics to consider for
inclusion other resins and reinforcements in this specification when
evidence is presented to show that they are suitable for gas service.
Minimum requirements are an ASTM pipe specification and long-term
strength determined in accordance with Test Method D2992, Procedure B,
in addition to the requirements of this specification.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship—The pipe and fittings shall be free of
visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, blisters, and other
injurious defects. The pipe and fittings shall be as uniform as
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties.
6.2 Pipe Dimensions and Tolerances:
6.2.1 Diameters—The outside diameter of the pipe shall be
in accordance with Table 1 when measured in accordance with
8.4.1.
6.2.2 Wall Thickness—The wall thickness of the pipe shall
meet the requirements given in Table 1 when measured in
accordance with 8.4.1.
6.2.3 Lengths—The pipe shall be in lengths as specified on
the purchase order when measured in accordance with 8.4.1.
NOTE 3—Either threaded adaptors or bonded joints are acceptable.
Jointers of up to 5 % of the shipment are acceptable to meet the length
requirements. No section less than 1.5 m (5 ft) long can be used to make
a joint and only one jointer can be used in a length.
6.3 Fittings Dimensions and Tolerances— The fittings di-
mensions shall enable the pipe and fittings to be joined and
shall be measured in accordance with 8.4.2.
NOTE 4—Subcommittee D20.23 is working towards development of
dimensional requirements for fittings; however, it will be some time
before the requirements are available. Therefore, the method of measuring
is provided only to have a standard method of measuring fittings
dimensions for inspection purposes.
6.4 Short-Term Rupture Strength (Burst Pressure)—The
minimum hoop stress at burst for pipe covered by this
specification shall be as listed in Table 2 when tested in
accordance with 8.5. The minimum burst requirements for
fittings covered by this specification shall be 4.82 MPa (700
Tolerance Minimum Wall Thickness
+1.524, −0.457 (+0.060, −0.018) 1.524 (0.060)
+1.524, −0.457 (+0.060, −0.018) 1.524 (0.060)
+1.524, −0.457 (+0.060, −0.018) 1.780 (0.070)
+1.678, −0.711 (+0.066, −0.028) 2.540 (0.100)
+2.184, −1.016 (+0.086, −0.040) 3.227 (0.125)
+2.743, −1.219 (+0.108, −0.048) 3.830 (0.150)
+3.251, −1.422 (+0.128, −0.056) 4.215 (0.175)
2

TABLE 2 Minimum Physical Property Requirements for Pipe
Test 23°C
Physical Property Method (73.4°F)
Short-term rupture strength (burst) D1599 40 000
min, hoop stress, psi
Static hydrostatic hoop stress 105 h D2992 15 000
(estimated), min, psi
Hydrostatic collapse min, psig D2924 14.7
Longitudinal tensile strength, min, psi D2105 8 900
Parallel plate crush strength, min D2412 45
pipe stiffness at 5% deflection, psi
psi) internal pressure or 27.5 MPa (4000 psi) hoop tensile
stress, whichever is greater, when tested in accordance with 8.5
at temperatures of 23°C (73.4°F) and 65.6°C (150°F), and
calculated using the equation listed in Test Method D1599 for
hoop stress. The calculations shall use the fittings wall thick-
ness and diameter at a point where the wall thickness is at a
minimum and which is also in the section of the fittings which
is not reinforced by the pipe.
6.5 Crush Strength—The minimum stiffness at 5 % deflec-
tion of the pipe shall be as shown in Table 2 when tested in
accordance with Test Method D2412.
6.6 Chemical Resistance—The pipe shall not change more
than 612 % in apparent tensile strength when measured in
accordance with 8.7.
NOTE 5—A suitable chemical resistance test for fittings is not available
at the present time and will be added when available.
6.7 Longitudinal (Tensile Strength)—The minimum longi-
tudinal tensile strength for pipe covered by this specification
shall be as listed in Table 2 when tested in accordance with Test
Method D2105.
6.8 Hydrostatic Collapse—The minimum factor for pipe
covered by this specification shall be as listed in Table 2 when
tested in accordance with Test Method D2924.
7. Adhesive Requirements
7.1 Adhesives used to join reinforced epoxy resin pipe shall
be suitable for use with the pipe and fittings and meet the
requirements listed in 7.2 and 7.3.
NOTE 6—It is recommended that the working (pot) life of the adhesive
be agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
7.2 Adhesive Test—All adhesives covered by this specifica-
tion shall have a minimum ultimate shear strength of 10.3 MPa
(1500 psi) when tested in accordance with 8.8.
7.3 Packaging—Each adhesive kit shall contain the neces-
sary components and instruction sheets, which shall include
cure times and pot life.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Sampling—Take a sample of the pipe and fittings
sufficient to determine conformance with this specification.
About 15 m (50 ft) of pipe or tubing are required to make the
tests prescribed. The number of fittings required varies, de-
pending upon the size and type of fitting. It is suggested that a
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D2517 − 18
sampling plan be agreed upon by the purchaser and the
65.6°C manufacturer (see Practice D1898).
(150°F)
8.2 Conditioning—Unless otherwise specified, condition the
specimens prior to test at 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6
35 000 5 % relative humidity for not less than 48 h, in accordance with
14 000
Procedure A of Practice D618 for those tests where condition-
ing is required and in all cases of disagreement.
11.0
8 300
8.3 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the Standard
41 Laboratory Atmosphere of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F), unless
otherwise specified.
8.4 Dimensions and Tolerances:
8.4.1 Wall Thickness and Diameter—Determine in accor-
dance with Practice D3567.
8.4.2 Liner Thickness—When the test specimens contain a
liner, determine the average liner thickness in accordance with
Practice D3567.
8.5 Short-Term Hydrostatic Failure Strength (Minimum
Hoop Stress)—Determine in accordance with Test Method
D1599. Fittings shall be tested with pipe nipples bonded in the
sockets.
8.6 Apparent Tensile Properties—The apparent tensile
strength shall be determined in accordance with Procedure B of
Test Method D2290.
8.7 Chemical Resistance—Determine the resistance to the
following chemicals in accordance with Procedure II of Test
Method D543, except use ring specimens cut from pipe for this
purpose:
Chemical Concentration, %
Fuel Oil No. 1 (Specification D396) 100
t-butyl mercaptan 5 in fuel oil
Antifreeze agents (at least one shall be used):
Methanol 100
Isopropanol 100
Ethylene glycol 100
Cut specimens from the pipe in accordance with 8.6; test five
specimens with each reagent. Coat specimen edges with
adhesive prior to immersion. Completely immerse the speci-
mens in the chemicals for 72 h. Upon removal from the
chemicals, wipe the specimens with a clean dry cloth, condi-
tion in the testing room for a period not to exceed 2 h, and then
test in tension in accordance with 8.6.
8.8 Adhesive Test—The ultimate shear strength for adhe-
sives used to bond pipe and fittings together shall be deter-
mined in accordance with the following procedure; it is
applicable to all adhesives covered by this specification.
8.8.1 Principle—Laboratory shear specimens are made by
bonding together two 3 by 13 by 75-mm (1⁄8 by 1⁄2 by 3-in.),
reinforced thermosetting plastic laminates using the supplied
adhesive kits. This specimen is then cured in accordance with
instructions supplied with the adhesive. After curing, the
specimen is pulled apart in a universal testing machine.
8.8.2 Test Specimen—The test specimen shall be made using
longitudinally reinforced epoxy resin laminates that are made
of the same materials as the pipe with dimensions of 5 by 13
by 75 mm (1⁄8 by 1⁄2 by 3 in.). Each specimen shall have a
bonding surface on one end made by milling off 5 mils of the
surface for a length of 2 mm (3⁄4 in.). Test a minimum of five
test specimens.
3

8.8.3 Procedure:
8.8.3.1 Clean the milled surfaces of two 75-mm (3-in.) long
laminates using solvent supplied with adhesive.
8.8.3.2 Mix the adhesive components in accordance with
instructions supplied with the adhesives.
8.8.3.3 Wet the cleaned surface of the laminates with the
mixed adhesive.
8.8.3.4 Press the adhesive-coated areas of the laminates
together, maintaining alignment of edges and clamp so that the
specimen is held together using uniform pressure. Pressure
used shall be sufficient to yield specimens with adhesive line
thicknesses that do not exceed 0.9 mm (1⁄32 in.).
8.8.3.5 Note the time when assembly is completed.
8.8.3.6 Check the temperature in the room and determine
the cure time from instructions supplied with the adhesive.
8.8.3.7 When the required amount of time has elapsed,
remove the specimen from the clamping fixture, and place it in
grips of the universal testing machine. Good alignment in the
grips is essential. Set speed control at 5.1 to 6.4 mm (0.20 to
0.25 in.)/min and start the testing machine. Record the break-
ing load.
8.8.4 Calculation—Calculate the ultimate shear strength of
the adhesive using the following equation and report to three
significant figures:
σ 5 P/A
where:
σ = ultimate shear stress, MPa (or psi),
P = ultimate load, N (or lbf), and
A = bond area, mm2 (or in.2).
For each series of tests, calculate the arithmetic mean of all
values obtained to three significant figures and report as the
“average value.” Calculate the standard deviation as follows
and report to two significant figures:
1
s 5 @~ ( X 2 2 nX̄ ! / ~ n 5 1 ! #
2 2
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. DESIGN
X1.1 General
X1.1.1 The design of a plastic piping system for gas must
include consideration of the effect of the environment while
under stress, as well as internal and external loads. The
combined effects of time, stress, and environment must be
investigated as an overall basis for selecting a specific kind and
size of plastic pipe. The selection of design stresses for RTRP
is the prerogative of the Department of Transportation (DOT)
Office of Pipeline Safety. The AGA Plastic Pipe Committee and
members of Committee D-20 are cooperating with DOT to
provide assistance in selecting safe design stress levels for the
various kinds of plastic pipe.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D2517 − 18
where:
s = estimated standard deviation,
X = value of a single observation,
n = number of observations, and
X̄ = arithmetical average of the set of observations.
9. Packaging and Marking
9.1 Pipe—All required marking shall be legible and so
applied without indentation as to remain legible under normal
handling and installation practices. These markings shall con-
sist of the manufacturer’s name or trademark, the nominal pipe
size, and the standard reinforced plastic pipe identification at
each end of the pipe. In addition to the above, the pipe shall
bear an appropriate code number which will ensure identifica-
tion of the pipe as to the month and year of production and raw
materials used in the production of said pipe. The manufacturer
shall maintain such additional records as are necessary to
confirm identification of all coded pipe. Marking shall include
the designation ASTM D2517.
9.2 Fittings—All fittings shall be marked on the body or
hub. The marking shall consist at least of the manufacturer’s
name or trademark, or both, and the symbol for the type of
material and size. Marking shall include the designation ASTM
D2517.
(1) 9.3 Adhesives—All adhesive containers shall be marked on
the container. The marking shall consist of the manufacturer’s
name or trademark, or both, manufacturing date, shelf life, and
storage requirements.
9.4 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
10. Keywords
10.1 filament wound; compression molded; configuration of
joining system; rupture srength; crush strength; chemical
(2) resistance; apparent tensile properties; adhesive
X1.2 Internal Pressure
X1.2.1 The design stresses for natural gas are based on the
100 000-h hydrostatic strength of the pipe of 75°F obtained in
accordance with Procedure B of Practice D2992. The
100 000-h strengths of the plastics included in the applicable
ASTM specifications are as follows:
Long-Term (100 000-h)
Plastic Pipe Material Designation Strength at 23°C (73°F)
RTRP (glass fiber reinforced epoxy resin pipe) 15 000 psi
Strengths for other RTRP materials will be added when these
materials are included in the applicable ASTM specifications.
The design stresses are obtained by multiplying the 100 000-h
4
 D2517 − 18
strength by design factors or service factors in accordance with
the class of location as described in Chapter IV of the ASME
Code for Pressure Piping B31, ASME B 31.8, Gas Transmis-
sion and Distribution Piping System and The Department of
Transportation Minimum Federal Safety Standards for Gas
Lines (Part 192 Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations).
X1.3 External Loads
X1.3.1 It is recognized that certain minimum requirements
exist for the support of earth loads from backfill and other
external forces. Proper installation techniques can be used with
flexible conduit (as defined by Marston and Spangler)4 to
support relatively large earth loads without excessive deflec-
tion by mobilizing lateral passive soil forces. Proper installa-
tion technique ensures that the necessary passive soil pressure
at the sides of the pipe will be developed and maintained. It is
also recognized that the internal pressures may be valuable in
minimizing the deflection caused by earth loads. However, the
magnitude of this latter effect is somewhat subjective, and
therefore installation procedures defined in Test Method D3839
are recommended instead of more specific information.
4
Spangler, M. G., “Secondary Stresses in Buried High Pressure Lines,” The
Iowa State College Bulletin, Engineering Report 23 of the Iowa Engineering
Experiment Station, 1954–1955.

X2. RECOMMENDED IN-PLANT QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM FOR REINFORCED EPOXY RESIN PIPE INTENDED
FOR USE IN NATURAL GAS SERVICE

X2.1 Introduction TABLE X2.1 Pipe Tests

X2.1.1 The following in-plant quality control program cov- Property Test Method Test Frequency

ering material, performance requirements, and marking shall

Visual ... all
be used in manufacture to provide reasonable assurance that Dimensions:
the RTRP pipe and fittings for use with the type of RTRP Diameter D3567 900 m (3000 ft) or once/3h
Wall thickness D3567 1500 m (5000 ft) or once/lotA
supplied under this code meets the requirements of the appli-
Mechanical properties:
cable standard. The pipe and fittings producers shall maintain Burst pressure D1599 5000 ft
records on all aspects of this program and supply these to the Short-term static (20 D1598 (D2143) 24 h
h) or cyclicB
purchaser, if requested.
A
Whichever is most frequent.
X2.2 Material B
A cyclic pressure test made in accordance with the procedure in Test Method
D2143 may be substituted for the static test requirements if it has been demon-
X2.2.1 The pipe and fittings manufacturer shall use only strated that the results of the two methods are equivalent.
those raw materials that are allowed by the applicable standard
and shall so certify.
X2.3 Pipe Tests
X2.3.1 Product Quality Control (See Note X2.1)—The tests X2.5 Records
in Table X2.1 shall be made per size per processing unit at the
denoted frequencies and the test results recorded and filed for X2.5.1 A code number shall be included in the marking on
inspection, upon request. the pipe. If required, on the directional fittings, the code
number may be used to identify in the records the following:
NOTE X2.1—When the pipe fails to meet the specification (or standard)
requirement in any test, additional tests shall be made on the pipe X2.5.2 The compound,
produced back to the previous acceptable results to select the pipe
produced in the interim that does pass the requirement. Pipe that does not X2.5.3 The date of manufacture,
meet the requirement shall be rejected.
X2.5.4 The shift,
X2.4 Test Methods
X2.5.5 The test results required in this in-plant quality
X2.4.1 The test methods may be those generally used by the
control program, and
manufacturer, but in case of question, those given in the
applicable ASTM standard shall be used. X2.5.6 The manufacturer.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2517 − 18
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue,
D2517–06(2011), that may impact the use of this standard.(January 1, 2018)

(1) Revised 5.1.1. (2) Revised Table 2.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:40:55 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2924 − 12 (Reapproved 2017)

Standard Test Method for

External Pressure Resistance of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2924; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This test method covers determination of the resistance
of fiberglass pipe to external pressure. It classifies failures as
buckling, compressive, and leaking. Both glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-
reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for informa-
tion only.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic
Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2017. Published September 2017. Originally
approved in 1970. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D2924 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D2924-12R17.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology D883
or F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology
D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 aggregate, n—a siliceous sand conforming to the
requirements of Specification C33, except that the require-
ments for gradation shall not apply.
3.2.2 buckling failure pressure— the external gage pressure
at which buckling occurs. Buckling is characterized by a sharp
discontinuity in the pressure-volume change graph and subse-
quent fracture in the test specimen appearing as an axially
oriented crack. Buckling is an elastic instability type of failure
and is normally associated with thin-wall pipe.
3.2.3 compressive failure pressure—the maximum external
gage pressure that the specimen will resist without transmis-
sion of the testing fluid through the wall. Compressive failure
pressure will not be associated with a sharp discontinuity in the
pressure-volume change graph nor lead to a fracture appearing
as a sharp axially oriented crack. It will appear as a fracture
which is the result of reaching the compressive strength limits
of the material and is normally associated with thick-wall pipe.
Failure is usually identified by a sudden drop in pressure.
3.2.4 fiberglass pipe, n—a tubular product containing glass
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin; the composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular, or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.2.5 leaking pressure—the external gage pressure at which
the test fluid is transmitted through the pipe wall. It is
characterized in this test by continuous volume change indica-
tions with no pressure increase.
3.2.6 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP), n—a fiber-
glass pipe with aggregate.
3.2.7 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP), n—a fi-
berglass pipe without aggregate.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:44:03 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2924 − 12 (2017)
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of loading a specimen to
failure in a short time interval by means of incrementally
increasing external fluid pressure at a controlled constant
temperature. Fluid is also maintained inside the pipe, and
changes in the inside volume are monitored with a bleed hole
and fluid level tube. On Cartesian coordinates, pressure versus
change in volume is plotted and the failure pressure selected as
indicated by the graph. Scaling constants are presented for
extending the results to other diameters.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The values obtained by this test method are applicable
only to conditions that specifically duplicate the procedures
used.
5.2 After a scaling constant is determined for one diameter,
this may be used for calculating the external failure pressures
of other diameters as long as the resin and reinforcement (if
used), the wall thickness-to-diameter ratio, and the reinforce-
ment pattern (if reinforcement is used) are the same.
NOTE 3—Based upon tests conducted on one size of pipe, a scaling
constant is calculated according to 10.1 or 10.2. The appropriate constant
is used to calculate failure pressure for other pipe diameters, but it can
only be applied if the same resin and reinforcement are used, the wall
thickness to diameter ratios are similar, and the reinforcement pattern is
constant.
5.3 In the application of the following test requirements and
recommendations, care must be exercised to ensure that the FIG. 1 Apparatus Showing Specimen Loading with Both Hoop
specimens tested are truly representative of the group being and Axial Loads
studied.
6. Apparatus (see Figs. 1 and 2)
6.6 Temperature Regulator—When temperatures other than
6.1 Test Chamber—An external chamber capable of with-
ambient are being studied, a temperature-regulating system
standing pressures to be encountered. It may be either the type
will be employed that will maintain the temperature of the
that applies both hoop and axial loads as shown in Fig. 1 or the
testing fluid and specimen at a specified amount 62°C.
type that applies hoop load only as shown in Fig. 2. In either
event, the report shall state which type loading was used for
7. Test Specimens
test.
7.1 Number of Specimens—A minimum of five specimens
6.2 Weight Change Indicator—The specimen shall be in-
shall be used for determining the external pressure resistance.
strumented to measure changes in weight by use of a balance
Any specimens that are tested and fall outside the specified
accurate to within 60.1 g.
time limits shall be discounted and replaced with equivalent
6.2.1 Transparent Tube—Connected to the test specimen so
specimens, so that a minimum of five valid specimens are
that the volume changes of the specimen result in changes in
tested.
the level of fluid in the tube. A scale shall be affixed to the tube
so variations in fluid level can be recorded. Absolute measure- 7.2 Specimen Size—The inside and outside diameters of the
ment of volume change is not required. pipe specimens shall be as fabricated, with the permissible
exception of that portion of the pipe within 2 in. (50 mm) of the
6.3 Pressurizing System—A device capable of exerting ex-
end closures. The minimum specimen length exposed to
ternal fluid pressure to the specimen at a specified constant
external pressure shall be the greater of:
rate. A Bourdon-tube pressure gage or recording gage with an
accuracy of6 1 % of full scale should be used, and the L 5 10~ D !
anticipated failure pressure should be in the middle two thirds or Roark’s formula for long tube length:3
of the gage range. Care should be exercised so the gage is
placed where it will give a true reading of the external pressure
on the test specimen.
L 5 4.90r Πr
t
6.4 Test Fluid—Water or hydraulic oil.
6.5 Timer—Any time-measuring device that can measure 3
Roark, Raymond J., Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain, McGraw-Hill
the duration of test with accuracy of 1 s. Book Company, New York, NY, Sixth Edition, 1989, p. 690.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:44:03 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2924 − 12 (2017)
FIG. 2 Apparatus Showing Specimen Loading with Hoop Load
Only
where:
L = length of test specimen exposed to external pressure, in.
(or mm),
D = average outside diameter of pipe, in. (or mm),
r = mean wall radius (do not include unreinforced liner), in.
(or mm), and
t = minimum wall thickness (do not include unreinforced
liner), in. (or mm).
8. Conditioning
8.1 All samples shall be conditioned for a minimum of 2 h
in the fluid in which they will be tested. The temperature of the
fluid shall be uniform and stabilized to within 62°C of the test
temperature during conditioning.
9. Procedure
9.1 Mount the specimen in the test chamber and fill both
internal and external volumes with the test fluid. Take care to
expel all air from the inside of the specimen as any gaseous
fluid escaping through the measuring tube during the test will
disqualify the test. Fit the specimen with a tube to direct the
fluid into a suitable basin for collecting and weighing. Condi-
tion the system at a temperature in accordance with Section 8.
9.2 Increase the pressure at an incremental rate. The incre-
ment shall be chosen to allow at least 10 readings before
failure. After the fluid has stopped flowing from the tube,
record the pressure and weight of the fluid displaced. Rapidly
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:44:03 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
increasing weight of displaced fluid with a small increase in
pressure indicates failure. Record the time to failure.
9.3 After the specimen has failed, remove it from the
external pressure chamber and observe and record appearance.
9.4 Make a graph showing external pressure versus weight
of fluid displaced. A sharp change in slope indicates either a
buckling pressure or a pressure at which the pipe wall
transmitted fluid. Either condition is classified as failure.
10. Calculation
10.1 For specimens that failed by buckling, calculate a
buckling scaling constant as follows:
K 5 P⁄E□ ~ r ⁄ t ! 3
where:
K = buckling scaling constant,
P = external collapse pressure, psi (or MPa),
E = circumferential modulus of elasticity,
r = mean wall radius (do not include unreinforced liner in
reinforced wall), in. (or mm), and
t = minimum wall thickness (do not include unreinforced
liner in reinforced wall), in. (or mm).
10.2 For specimens that failed by collapse, calculate a
compressive failure scaling constant as follows:
C 5 P c ~ D 2 t ! /2t
where:
C = compressive failure scaling constant,
Pc = pressure at failure, psi (or MPa),
D = the average outside diameter of the specimen, in. (or
mm), and
t = minimum pipe wall thickness (do not include liner in
filament reinforced wall), in. (or mm).
10.3 Calculate the average failure pressure for all five
specimens tested.
10.4 Calculate the average scaling constant for all five
specimens tested.
11. Report
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Complete identification of the specimens, including
material type, source, manufacturer’s name, pipe trade name,
and previous history,
11.1.2 Pipe Dimensions—Record dimensions of each speci-
men including nominal size, length exposed to external
pressure, minimum wall thickness, and average outside diam-
eter. The wall thickness and outside diameter shall be rein-
forced dimensions only. Unreinforced thickness shall also be
recorded.
11.1.3 Test temperature and test fluid, (water or oil),
11.1.4 Type of loading used (hoop only or both hoop and
axial),
11.1.5 Failure pressures for each specimen tested and the
average,
11.1.6 Type of failure (buckling, compressive, or leaking),
11.1.7 Time to failure of each specimen tested,
 D2924 − 12 (2017)
11.1.8 Scaling constant (see 10.1 for buckling failures, 10.2
for compressive failures, no scaling permitted for leaking
failures), and
11.1.9 Date of test.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 The precision of this test method was determined from
the results of one laboratory performing one set of tests by each
loading method on each of six pipe sizes and conditions.
12.2 The following values of precision have been calculated
from the above test program.
NOTE 4—These values were developed using Procedure A. The samples
were conditioned at 23 6 2° (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6 5 % relative
humidity for not less than 40 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure
A of Practice D618.
The critical differences indicate the maximum deviation of
results beyond which measured values should be considered
suspect at a probability level of 0.95. They are expressed as
percentages of the mean value.
12.2.1 Hoop Load Method—For individual values within a
set of five, the precision is 68.4 %. Between averages of five
determinations, the precision is 64.9 %.
12.2.2 Axial and Hoop Load Method—For individual values
within a set of five, the precision is 613.1 %. Between
averages of five determinations, the precision is 67.6 %.
12.3 There are presently no definite means of establishing a
true value, so no bias statement can be made.
13. Keywords
13.1 external pressure resistance; fiberglass pipe; pipe; re-
inforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP); reinforced
thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP)

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:44:03 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2925 − 14 (Reapproved 2019)

Standard Test Method for

Beam Deflection of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Pipe Under Full Bore Flow1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2925; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This test method covers measurement of the deflection
as a function of time of a specimen of fiberglass pipe supported
on a flat non-arced support as a simple beam under full bore
flow of water at elevated temperatures. Both glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-
reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 This test method can be used to determine deflection at
varying conditions by substituting other test media.
1.3 Deflections observed using this test method are repre-
sentative only of piping supported as a simple beam under full
bore flow which has one diameter of pipe overhanging at each
support.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are provided for
information purposes only.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic
Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally
approved in 1970. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D2925 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D2925-14R19.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33/C33M Specification for Concrete Aggregates
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 and F412 and abbreviations are in accordance with
Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 aggregate—a siliceous sand conforming to the re-
quirements of Specification C33/C33M, except that the re-
quirements for gradation shall not apply.
3.2.2 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass
fiber reinforcement embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin; the composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners may
be included.
3.2.3 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—a fiber-
glass pipe without aggregate.
3.2.4 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—a fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 In the absence of deflection measurements from actual
installed-above-ground piping, this test method may be used to
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:02 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

evaluate the influence of span length on mid-span deflections at
differing temperatures under full bore flow.
NOTE 3—A flat bearing area, small contact area, and narrow bearing
width may induce high localized support interaction stresses, and con-
straints imposed by the supports may also adversely influence deflections
and performance of the pipe.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Rigid Support with edges rounded to a 6-mm ( ⁄ -in.)
radius, consisting of two uprights of a convenient height. The
uprights are to be spaced at a predetermined distance over
which deflection is to be determined as shown on Fig. 1. The
uprights shall have lateral guides, a saddle, groove, or inden-
tation on the top to keep the pipe specimen from rolling off
when placed in position.
5.1.1 The support space distance shall be estimated for a
maximum allowable sag of 12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.) at test conditions.
This estimate may be made by solving Eq 1 for L, using y =
12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.) and assuming an elastic modulus, E =
1 000 000 psi, unless a more accurate value is available.
5.2 Source of Hot Water and a Feed System maintained at
conditions such that when this source is coupled to the pipe
specimen and the water is fed into the specimen, the water
emerging from the specimen shall be maintained continuously
at the controlled temperature within 62°C (3.6°F). The water
shall be fed into the specimen at a head not exceeding 1.5 m
(5 ft) and allowed to flow through it under such conditions that
the pipe specimen is filled with the controlled temperature
D2925 − 14 (2019)
water at all times. Any recirculation shall be vented to
atmosphere. A schematic drawing of the test setup is shown on
Fig. 2.
5.3 Flexible Connections for the ends of the pipe test
specimens, installed so as to produce negligible moment on the
ends of the pipe.
5.4 A Device for Measuring the Deflection of the pipe
14 specimen to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) with negligible
constraint on the specimen. A recommended device is a
cathetometer as shown on Fig. 1.
5.5 Time-Interval Measuring Device graduated in minutes
or seconds.
5.6 Temperature and Pressure Gages and suitable control
devices to maintain standard test conditions.
6. Test Specimens
6.1 The test specimens shall be sections of fiberglass pipe
cut to a precalculated span length plus two pipe diameters 6 13
mm (60.5 in.), essentially straight and of a diameter and wall
thickness to be specified.
6.2 At least three specimens shall be tested for any given
pipe size.
7. Test Temperature
7.1 The test temperature selected should be the maximum
recommended service temperature for the piping unless it is
desired to test the effects of temperature variation.

FIG. 1 Schematic of Test Specimen Support

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:02 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2925 − 14 (2019)

FIG. 2 Schematic of Test Set-up for Beam Deflection Test on Pipe

8. Procedure 9. Calculation
8.1 Measure the total wall thickness, liner thickness, and 9.1 Calculate EI values from the data obtained, as follows:3
diameter of the pipe specimen in accordance with Practice EI 5 22.5wL4 /y (1)
D3567.
where:
8.2 Place the test specimen on the upright supports so that
there is an overhang of one pipe diameter 613 mm (60.5 in.) w = combined weight of pipe and fluid at test temperature,
on each end. lb/ft,
L = span length, ft,
8.3 Connect the test specimen to the water supply and outlet y = maximum measured deflection, in.,
system by means of supported flexible connectors. E = apparent elastic modulus of pipe, psi,
8.4 Fill the pipe test specimen with water at ambient I = 0.0491 (D4 − d4), cross-section moment of inertia of
temperature and determine initial deflection. pipe, in.4,
D = average outer diameter of pipe, in., and
8.5 Circulate the test media (water) through the test speci- d = average inner diameter of pipe, in.
men until a steady-state temperature (see 5.2) is attained at the
designated test temperature. Then take the initial elevated 10. Report
temperature deflection reading. 10.1 The report shall include the following:
8.6 Measure the position of the base point and the point of 10.1.1 Test laboratory and supervisor of tests,
maximum deflection at 15-min intervals for 1 h and then at 1-h 10.1.2 Dates of test,
intervals for 4 h. 10.1.3 Complete identification of the sample, including
8.7 Continue to measure the position of the base point and material, manufacturer, type, source, and previous history,
the point of maximum deflection at suitable time intervals until 10.1.4 Pipe dimensions, including nominal pipe size, mini-
1000 h have elapsed or until the total maximum deflection mum and average wall thickness, liner thickness, and the
exceeds the allowable design limit of 12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.). If a minimum and average outside diameter of each specimen,
change of deflection less than 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) occurs in 10.1.5 Number of specimens tested,
two consecutive 24-h periods after 1000 h elapsed time, the test 10.1.6 Calculated weight of pipe filled with water at test
may be terminated. If the change in deflection is greater than temperature, pounds per foot,
0.025 mm (0.001 in.) in two consecutive 24-h periods after 10.1.7 Type of support used and dimensions of support
1000 hour elapsed time, the test should be continued until the (width and saddle radius),
design limit of 12.7 mm (1⁄2 in.) is reached or until a change of 10.1.8 Span length between supports used in test,
deflection less than 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) occurs in two
consecutive 24-h periods. Record this equilibrium time and 3
Crocker, Sabin, Piping Handbook, McGraw-Hill Book Co., NY, Fourth Edition,
maximum deflection. 1945, p. 745.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:02 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2925 − 14 (2019)
10.1.9 Temperature of inlet and outlet water at equilibrium, 12. Keywords
10.1.10 Table of deflection in inches versus time in hours, 12.1 beam deflection; fiberglass pipe; fullbore flow; elastic
and modulus
10.1.11 Calculated EI values.
10.1.12 Temperature of environment outside the pipe.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
this method have not been successful. For this reason, data on
precision and bias cannot be given.4

4
Anyone wishing to participate in the development of precision and bias data
should contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D 20.23, ASTM International, 100 Barr
Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959 .

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue, D2925 – 14,
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) Reapproved without changes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:02 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2992 − 18

Standard Practice for

Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure Design Basis for
“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pipe and Fittings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2992; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* practice may not be applicable for evaluating stresses induced

1.1 This practice establishes two procedures, Procedure A
(cyclic) and Procedure B (static), for obtaining a hydrostatic
design basis (HDB) or a pressure design basis (PDB) for
fiberglass piping products, by evaluating strength-regression
data derived from testing pipe or fittings, or both, of the same
materials and construction, either separately or in assemblies.
Both glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP)
and glass-fiber-reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are
fiberglass pipe.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 This practice can be used for the HDB determination for
fiberglass pipe where the ratio of outside diameter to wall
thickness is 10:1 or more.
NOTE 2—This limitation, based on thin-wall pipe design theory, serves
further to limit the application of this practice to internal pressures which,
by the hoop-stress equation, are approximately 20 % of the derived
hydrostatic design stress (HDS). For example, if HDS is 5000 psi (34 500
kPa), the pipe is limited to about 1000-psig (6900-kPa) internal pressure,
regardless of diameter.
1.3 This practice provides a PDB for complex-shaped prod-
ucts or systems where complex stress fields seriously inhibit
the use of hoop stress.
1.4 Specimen end closures in the underlying test methods
may be either restrained or free, leading to certain limitations.
1.4.1 Restrained Ends—Specimens are stressed by internal
pressure only in the hoop direction, and the HDB is applicable
for stresses developed only in the hoop direction.
1.4.2 Free Ends—Specimens are stressed by internal pres-
sure in both hoop and longitudinal directions, such that the
hoop stress is twice as large as the longitudinal stress. This
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plasticsand
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic Piping
Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved May 15, 2018. Published May 2018. Originally
approved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D2992 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D2992-18.
by loadings where the longitudinal stress exceeds 50 % of the
HDS.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values in parentheses are given for
information purposes only.
NOTE 3—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Under Constant Internal Pressure
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2143 Test Method for Cyclic Pressure Strength of
Reinforced, Thermosetting Plastic Pipe
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

F948 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Piping
Systems and Components Under Constant Internal Pres-
sure With Flow (Withdrawn 2018)3
2.2 ISO Standard:
3 Preferred Numbers—Series of Preferred Numbers4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 and F412, and abbreviations are in accordance
with Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.2 closure, free-end—a sealing device or mechanism
fastened to the end of the test specimen so that internal pressure
produces longitudinal tensile stresses in addition to hoop and
radial stresses in the test specimen.
3.1.3 closure, restrained-end—a sealing device or mecha-
nism which relies on a rod through the test specimen or an
external structure to resist the end thrust produced by internal
pressure, thereby limiting the stresses in (straight) specimens to
the hoop and radial directions only.
3.1.4 failure—the transmission of the test fluid through the
body of the specimen in any manner, whether it be a wall
fracture, localized leaking, or weeping at a distance greater
than one diameter from the end closure.
NOTE 4—For this practice, specimens which have not failed may be
included as failures under the specific conditions given in 6.3, 9.3, and
12.2.
3.1.5 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass
fiber reinforcement embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting-resin; the composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.1.6 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—a fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
3.1.7 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—a fiber-
glass pipe without aggregate.
3.1.8 hoop stress—the tensile stress in the wall of the piping
product in the circumferential direction due to internal pres-
sure; hoop stress will be calculated by the ISO equation, as
follows:
S 5 P ~ D 2 t r ! /2t r
where:
S = hoop stress, psi (kPa),
D = average reinforced outside diameter, in. (mm),
P = internal pressure, psig (kPa), and
tr = minimum reinforced wall thickness, in. (mm).
NOTE 5—Hoop stress should only be determined on straight hollow
cylindrical specimens. Product evaluation of more complex shapes may be
based on pressure.
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D2992 − 18
3.1.9 hydrostatic design basis (HDB)—a hoop stress devel-
oped for fiberglass pipe by this practice and multiplied by a
service design factor to obtain an HDS.
3.1.10 hydrostatic design pressure (HDP)—the estimated
maximum internal hydrostatic pressure that can be applied
cyclically (Procedure A) or continuously (Procedure B) to a
piping component with a high degree of certainty that failure of
the component will not occur.
3.1.11 hydrostatic design stress (HDS)—the estimated
maximum tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the hoop
direction due to internal hydrostatic pressure that can be
applied cyclically (Procedure A) or continuously (Procedure B)
with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not
occur.
3.1.12 long-term hydrostatic strength (LTHS)—the esti-
mated tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the hoop direction
due to internal hydrostatic pressure that, when applied
cyclically, will cause failure of the pipe after a specified
number of cycles by Procedure A or a specified number of
hours by Procedure B.
NOTE 6—The time for determination of LTHS or LTHP is specified by
the product standard. Typically, the time is 150 × 106 or 657 × 106 cycles
for Procedure A and 100 000 or 438 000 h for Procedure B.
3.1.13 long-term hydrostatic pressure (LTHP)—the esti-
mated internal pressure of the piping product that, when
applied cyclically, will cause failure of the product after a
specified number of cycles by Procedure A or a specified
number of hours by Procedure B.
3.1.14 pressure design basis (PDB)—an internal pressure
developed for fiberglass piping product by this practice and
multiplied by a service design factor to obtain an HDP.
3.1.15 pressure rating (PR)—the estimated maximum pres-
sure in the pipe or fitting that can be exerted continuously with
a high degree of certainty that failure of the piping component
will not occur.
3.1.16 service design factor—a number equal to 1.00 or less
that takes into consideration all the variables and degree of
safety involved in a fiberglass piping installation so that when
it is multiplied by the HDB, an HDS and corresponding
pressure rating is obtained, or when it is multiplied by the PDB,
a pressure rating is obtained directly, such that in either case a
satisfactory and safe piping installation results when good
quality components are used and the installation is made
(1)
properly.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 average outside diameter—a measurement obtained in
accordance with Practice D3567 less any veil-reinforced and
nonreinforced exterior coating thicknesses.
3.2.2 minimum reinforced wall thickness—a measurement
obtained in accordance with Practice D3567, excluding veil-
reinforced and nonreinforced coating and lining thicknesses;
wall thickness of fittings is determined at the thinnest section of
the fitting body.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 Procedure A consists of exposing a minimum of 18
specimens of pipe or fittings, or both to cyclic internal
2
 D2992 − 18
pressures at a cycle rate of 25 cycles/min and at several
different pressures. Elevated test temperatures are obtained by
circulating a hot liquid through the specimens or by testing in
an air environment where the temperature is controlled.
4.1.1 The cyclic LTHS or cyclic LTHP of a pipe or fitting is
obtained by an extrapolation of a log-log plot of the linear
regression line for hoop stress or internal pressure versus
cycles to failure.
4.1.2 The experimental basis for Procedure A shall be in
accordance with Test Method D2143, which forms a part of
this practice. When any part of the procedure is not in
agreement with Test Method D2143, the provisions of this
practice shall be used.
4.1.3 Joints between pipe and fitting specimens shall be
typical of those normally used for the kind of piping being
tested.
4.2 Procedure B consists of exposing a minimum of 18
specimens of pipe or fittings, or both, to constant internal
hydrostatic pressures at differing pressure levels in a controlled
environment and measuring the time to failure for each
pressure level. Test temperatures are obtained by immersing
the specimens in a controlled-temperature water bath, by
testing in an air environment where the temperature is
controlled, or by circulating a temperature-controlled fluid
through the specimen.
NOTE 7—Testing in a water bath precludes the detection of weeping
failure, (see 3.1.4) by either visual or electronic means.
4.2.1 The static LTHS or static LTHP of a pipe or fitting is
obtained by an extrapolation of a log-log linear regression line
for hoop stress or internal pressure versus time to failure.
4.2.2 The experimental basis for Procedure B shall be in
accordance with either Test Method D1598 or Test Method
F948, or both, which form a part of this practice. When any
part of this practice is not in agreement with the selected
method, the provisions of this practice shall be used.
4.2.3 Joints between pipe and fitting specimens shall be
typical of those normally used for the kind of piping being
tested.
4.3 The HDB category is obtained by categorizing the
LTHS in accordance with Section 7 or Section 10.
4.4 The PDB category is obtained by categorizing the LTHP
in accordance with Section 8 or Section 11.
4.5 Hydrostatic design stresses for pipe are obtained by
multiplying the HDB values by a service design factor.
4.6 Reconfirmation of HDB or PDB for Altered
Constructions—When a product already has an HDB or PDB
determined in accordance with this practice and a change of
process or material is made, a reconfirmation of the original
HDB or PDB shall be attempted in accordance with Section 12.
At least six specimens must be tested and meet the specified
criteria.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This practice is useful for establishing the hoop stress or
internal pressure versus time-to-failure relationships, under
selected internal and external environments which simulate
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
actual anticipated product end-use conditions, from which a
design basis for specific piping products and materials can be
obtained. This practice defines an HDB for material in straight,
hollow cylindrical shapes where hoop stress can be easily
calculated, and a PDB for fittings and joints where stresses are
more complex.
5.1.1 An alternative design practice based on initial strain
versus time-to-failure relationships employs a strain basis HDB
instead of the stress basis HDB defined by this practice. The
strain basis HDB is most often used for buried pipe designs
with internal pressures ranging from 0 to 250 psig (1.72 MPa).
5.2 To characterize fiberglass piping products, it is neces-
sary to establish the stress versus cycles or time to failure, or
pressure versus cycles or time to failure relationships over
three or more logarithmic decades of time (cycles or hours)
within controlled environmental parameters. Because of the
nature of the test and specimens employed, no single line can
adequately represent the data. Therefore, the confidence limits
shall be established.
5.3 Pressure ratings for piping of various dimensions at each
temperature may be calculated using the HDS determined by
testing one size of piping provided that the same specific
process and material are used both for test specimens and the
piping in question.
5.4 Pressure ratings at each temperature for components
other than straight hollow shapes may be calculated using the
HDP determined by testing one size of piping provided that (1)
the specific materials and manufacturing process used for the
test specimens are used for the components, (2) for joints, the
joining materials and procedures used to prepare the test
specimens are used for field joining, and (3) scaling of critical
dimensions is related to diameter and pressure rating of the
component.
NOTE 8—Scaling of fittings and joints should be further verified by
short-time testing in accordance with Test Method D1599.
5.5 Results obtained at one set of environmental conditions
shall not be used for other conditions, except that higher
temperature data can be used for design basis assignment for
lower application temperatures. The design basis shall be
determined for each specific piping product. Design and
processing can significantly affect the long-term performance
of piping products, and therefore shall be taken into consider-
ation during any evaluation.
5.6 This practice is valid for a given pipe or fitting only so
long as the specimens are truly representative of that material
and manufacturing process.
5.6.1 Changes in materials or manufacturing processes will
necessitate a reevaluation as described in Section 12.
PROCEDURE A
6. Long-Term Cyclic Hydrostatic Strength or Long-Term
Cyclic Hydrostatic Pressure
6.1 Select either free-end or restrained-end closures based
on the tensile stresses induced by internal pressure and the type
of joint in the intended piping system (see 1.4).
 D2992 − 18
6.2 Obtain a minimum of 18 failure stress-cycle points for
each selected temperature in accordance with Test Method
D2143 except as follows:
6.2.1 Determine the average outside diameter and the mini-
mum reinforced wall thickness in accordance with Practice
D3567.
NOTE 9—Because of the need to cut the specimen, this determination
may be made on the failed test specimen. A corrected hoop stress is then
calculated for use in the analysis.
6.2.2 Elevated test temperatures are obtained by circulating
a heated test liquid through the specimens or by testing in a hot
air environment. In either case the test liquid shall be main-
tained within 65°F (3°C) of the selected temperature.
NOTE 10—Where elevated test temperatures are maintained by applying
heat to the circulating test liquid, work to date indicates that the ambient
air temperature need not be controlled.
6.2.3 The stress or pressure values for test shall be selected
to obtain a distribution of failure points as follows:
Cycles to Failure Failure Points
1000 to 10 000 at least 3
10 000 to 100 000 at least 3
100 000 to 1 000 000 at least 3
1 000 000 to 10 000 000 at least 3
After 15 000 000 at least 1
Total at least 18
6.3 Analyze the test results by using, for each specimen, the
logarithm of the stress or pressure in Section 6 and the
logarithm of the cycles to failure, as described in Annex A1.
NOTE 11—It is the custom of those testing fiberglass pipe to plot stress
or pressure on the vertical (y) axis and time or cycles on the horizontal (x)
axis.
6.3.1 A specimen which leaks within one diameter of an end
closure may be: (1) included as a failure point if it lies above
the 95 % lower confidence limit curve; (2) repaired and testing
resumed provided the new leak is more than one diameter from
a test joint, or (3) discarded and no data point recorded.
6.3.2 Those specimens that have not failed after more than
15 000 000 cycles may be included as failures in establishing
the regression line. Use of such data points may result in a
lower or higher cyclic LTHS or cyclic LTHP. In either case, the
lower confidence value requirements of Section 6 must be
satisfied.
NOTE 12—Non-failed specimens may be left under test and the
regression line recalculated as failures are obtained.
as one specimen, using the normal joining procedures to join them
together, with the fitting being at one end of the specimen. If the fitting
fails first, it can be cut off, and the test can be continued using the unfailed
pipe with a mechanical end closure replacing the fitting. Should the pipe
fail first, it can be recorded and repaired and the test continued until the
fitting fails. If this recommendation is followed, it may enable the tester to
obtain failure points for both the pipe and the fitting while testing only one
specimen.
7. Cyclic Hydrostatic Design Basis
7.1 Calculate the cyclic LTHS at the specified time (150×
106 or 657 × 106 cycles) as described in Annex A1.
7.2 If Sxy > 0 (see A1.4) consider the data unsuitable.
7.3 Calculate r in accordance with A1.4.3. If r is less than
the applicable minimum value given in Table A1.1, consider
the data unsuitable.
7.4 If required, determine the cyclic HDB category in
accordance with Table 1.
8. Cyclic Pressure Design Basis
8.1 Use the procedures in 7.1, 7.2, and 7.3, using pressure in
place of stress.
8.2 If required, determine the cyclic PDB category in
accordance with Table 2.
PROCEDURE B
9. Long-Term Static Hydrostatic Strength
9.1 Select either free-end or restrained-end closures based
on the tensile stresses induced by internal pressure and the type
of joint in the intended piping system (see 1.4).
9.2 Obtain a minimum of 18 failure points for each selected
temperature in accordance with Test Method D1598 or Test
Method F948 except as follows:
9.2.1 Determine the average outside diameter and the mini-
mum reinforced wall thickness in accordance with Practice
D3567 (Note 9).
9.2.2 The inside environment for the pipe or fitting, test
specimens, or both, shall be water. The outside environment
shall be air or a controlled temperature water bath (See 7).
TABLE 1 Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories by Procedure A or
Procedure B
Hydrostatic Design Basis
Category Range of Calculated Values

6.3.3 Determine the final line for extrapolation by the psiA (kPa) psi (kPa)

method of least squares using the failure points along with

2500 (17 200) 2400 to 3010 (16 500 to 20 700)
those nonfailure points selected by the method described in 3150 (21 700) 3020 to 3820 (20 800 to 26 300)
6.3.1 and 6.3.2. Do not use failure points for stresses or 4000 (27 600) 3830 to 4790 (26 400 to 33 000)
pressures that cause failure in less than 500 cycles on the 5000 (34 500) 4800 to 5990 (33 100 to 40 900)
6300 (43 400) 6000 to 7590 (41 000 to 52 900)
average; determine these points by averaging the number of 8000 (55 200) 7600 to 9590 (53 000 to 65 900)
cycles-to-failure of tests made at the same stress or pressure 10 000 (68 900) 9600 to 11 990 (66 000 to 82 900)
level, that is, a stress within 6200 psi (1380 kPa) or a pressure 12 500 (86 200) 12 000 to 15 290 (83 000 to 105 900)
16 000 (110 000) 15 300 to 18 990 (106 000 to 130 900)
within 620 psig (138 kPa). Include in the report all failure 20 000 (138 000) 19 000 to 23 990 (131 000 to 169 900)
points excluded from the calculation by this operation and 25 000 (172 000) 24 000 to 29 990 (170 000 to 209 900)
identify them as being in this category. 31 500 (217 000) 30 000 to 37 990 (210 000 to 259 900)
40 000 (276 000) 38 000 to 47 000 (260 000 to 320 000)
NOTE 13—Since this procedure is for pipe or fittings, or both, it is A
Standard stress levels chosen in accordance with ISO 3, Series R10.
recommended that the pipe specimen and fitting be tested at the same time

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2992 − 18
TABLE 2 Pressure Design Basis Categories by Procedure A or within 6200 psi (1380 kPa) or a pressure within 620 psi (138
Procedure B kPa). Include in the report all failure points excluded from the
Pressure Design Basis Category Range of Calculated Values calculation by this operation and identify them as being in this
psi (bar)A (kPa) psi (kPa) category (Note 12).
91 (6.3) (630) 87 to 110 (605 to 760)
116 (8) (800) 111 to 143 (765 to 990)
10. Static Hydrostatic Design Basis
150 (10) (1000) 144 to 172 (995 to 1180) 10.1 Calculate the static LTHS at the specified time
180 (12.5) (1250) 173 to 220 (1190 to 1510)
230 (16) (1600) 221 to 287 (1520 to 1980) (100 000 or 438 000 h) as described in Annex A1.
300 (20) (2000) 288 to 345 (1990 to 2380)
360 (25) (2500) 346 to 438 (2390 to 3020)
10.2 If Sxy > 0 (see A1.4), consider the data unsuitable.
460 (31.5) (3150) 439 to 556 (3030 to 3830) 10.3 Calculate r in accordance with A1.4.3. If r is less than
580 (40) (4000) 557 to 695 (3840 to 4790)
725 (50) (5000) 696 to 876 (4800 to 6040) the applicable minimum value given in Table A1.1, consider
910 (63) (6300) 877 to 1110 (6050 to 7680) the data unsuitable.
1160 (80) (8000) 1115 to 1380 (7690 to 9580)
1450 (100) (10 000) 1390 to 1720 (9590 to 11 800) 10.4 If required, determine the static HDB category in
1800 (125) (12 500) 1730 to 2220 (11 900 to 15 300) accordance with Table 1.
A
Standard pressures chosen in accordance with ISO 3, Series R10.
11. Static Pressure Design Basis
11.1 Use the procedures in 10.1, 10.2, and 10.3, using
Other media may be used, but the environment shall be given
pressure in place of stress.
in the test report. The test liquid shall be maintained within
65°F (3°C) of the test temperature (Note 10). 11.2 If required, determine the static PDB category in
9.2.3 The stress or pressure values for test shall be selected accordance with Table 2.
to obtain a distribution of failure points as follows:
Hours to Failure Failure Points
12. Reconfirmation of HDB or PDB
10 to 1000 at least 4 12.1 When a piping product has an existing HDB or PDB
1000 to 6000 at least 3
After 6000 at least 3 determined in accordance with Procedure A or Procedure B,
After 10 000 at least 1 any change in material, manufacturing process, construction,
or liner thickness shall necessitate a screening evaluation
Total at least 18
(reconfirmation) as described in 12.2, 12.3, 12.4, and 12.5.
9.2.4 Maintain the internal test pressure in each specimen
within 61 % of this pressure. Measure the time to failure to 12.2 Calculate and plot the 95 % confidence limits and the
within 62 % or 40 h, whichever is smaller. 95 % prediction limits of the original regression line in
accordance with A1.4 using only data obtained prior to the
9.3 Analyze the test results by using, for each failure point, change.
the logarithm of the stress or pressure in pound-force per
square inch or pound-force per square inch gage (kilopascals) NOTE 15—Prediction limits define the bounds for single observations,
whereas confidence limits define the bounds for the regression line.
and the logarithm of the time-to-failure in hours as described in NOTE 16—For 95 % confidence limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
Annex A1 (Note 9). the mean value for the regression line may fall above the UCL and a 2.5 %
9.3.1 A specimen which leaks within one diameter of an end probability that the mean value for the regression line may fall below the
closure may be: (1) included as a failure point if it lies above LCL. For 95 % prediction limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
the 95 % lower confidence limit curve; (2) repaired and testing individual data points may fall above the UPL and a 2.5 % probability that
individual data points may fall below the LPL.
resumed provided the new leak is more than one diameter from
a test joint, or (3) discarded and no failure point recorded. 12.3 From the original regression line, select stress or
9.3.2 Those specimens that have not failed after more than pressure levels for at least two sets of specimens, each set
10 000 h may be included as failures in establishing the consisting of 3 or more specimens tested at the same stress or
regression line. Use of such data points may result in a lower pressure level, that is, a stress within 6200 psi (1380 kPa) or
or higher static LTHS or static LTHP. In either case, the lower a pressure within 620 psi (138 kPa), as follows:
confidence value requirements of 9.3.1 must be satisfied. 12.3.1 For Procedure A:
Cycles to Failure Failure Points
NOTE 14—Non-failed specimens may be left under test and the (Average of Set)
regression line recalculated as failures are obtained.
15 000 to 3000 at least 3
9.3.3 Determine the final line for extrapolation by the More than 1 500 000 at least 3
method of least squares using the failure points along with
those nonfailure points selected by the method described in Total at least 6
9.3.1 and 9.3.2. Do not use failure points for stresses or For the purposes of reconfirmation, it is permitted to include
pressures that cause failure in less than 0.3 h on the average; as failures those specimens which have not failed after
determine these points by averaging the times-to-failure of 1 800 000 cycles provided they exceed the existing HDB or
tests made at the same stress or pressure level, that is, a stress PDB regression line.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2992 − 18
12.3.2 For Procedure B:
Hours to Failure Failure Points
(Average of Set)
10 to 200 at least 3
More than 1000 at least 3
Total at least 6
For the purposes of reconfirmation, it is permitted to include
as failures those specimens which have not failed after 1200 h
provided they exceed the existing HDB or PDB regression line.
12.4 Consider any changes in the material or manufacturing
process minor and permissible if the results of 12.2 meet the
following criteria.
12.4.1 The average failure point for each stress or pressure
level falls on or above the 95 % lower confidence limit of the
original regression line.
12.4.2 The earliest individual failure point at each stress or
pressure level falls on or above the 95 % lower prediction limit
of the original regression line.
12.4.3 The failure points are distributed about the originally
determined regression line. No more than two thirds of the
individual failure points may fall below the original regression
line.
12.5 Data meeting the criteria of 12.4 may be assumed to be
part of the original data set and it is permitted to determine a
new regression line and HDB or PDB using all failure points.
Specimens which have not failed after 1200 hours or 1 800 000
cycles are not suitable for establishing a new regression line;
however, it is permitted to use these points for the purpose of
reconfirmation.
12.6 If the data fails to satisfy the criteria of 12.4, the
changes are considered major and a new regression line must
be established. While the new test program is being conducted,
an interim HDB or PDB for the material or process change may
be taken as the lower of the following:
12.6.1 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the value ob-
tained by extrapolating the failure points of 12.3.1 to
657 000 000 cycles (50 years), or the failure points of 12.3.2 to
438 000 h (50 years) by the procedure in Annex A1.
12.6.2 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the original
regression line at 50 years.
13. Hydrostatic Design Stress or Hydrostatic Design
Pressure
13.1 Obtain the HDS or HDP by multiplying the HDB or
PDB as determined by Procedure A or Procedure B by a service
design factor selected for the application on the basis of two
general groups of conditions. The first group considers the
manufacturing and testing variables, specifically normal varia-
tions in the material, manufacture, dimensions, good handling
techniques, and in the evaluation procedures in this method.
The second group considers the application or use, specifically
installation, environment, temperature, hazard involved, life
expectancy desired, and the degree of reliability selected.
NOTE 17—It is not the intent of this practice to give service design
factors. The service design factor should be selected by the design
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
engineer after evaluating fully the service conditions and the engineering
properties of the specific plastic pipe material under consideration.
Recommended service design factors will not be developed or issued by
ASTM.
14. Pressure Rating
14.1 For data based on hoop stress calculate the pressure
rating from the HDS by means of the ISO equation in 3.1.8 for
each diameter and wall thickness of pipe made from the
specific materials and constructions tested.
14.2 For data based on internal pressure, establish the
pressure rating directly from the HDP for products made from
the specific materials and constructions tested.
15. Report
15.1 Report the following information:
15.1.1 Complete identification of the specimen including
material type, source, manufacturer’s name and code number,
and previous significant history, if any.
15.1.2 Specimen dimensions including nominal size, aver-
age and minimum reinforced wall thickness, and average
outside diameter, and liner material and liner thickness if
product is lined.
15.1.3 Fitting dimensions, including all items listed in
15.1.2 and the type of fitting.
15.1.4 Procedure used, (Procedure A or Procedure B), and
the ASTM designation of the underlying test method.
15.1.5 End closure type, free-end, or restrained-end.
15.1.6 Test temperature.
15.1.7 Test environment inside and outside of the pipe.
15.1.8 A table of stresses or pressures in pound-force per
square inch or pound-force per square inch gage (kilopascals)
and the number of cycles to failure (Procedure A) or time-to-
failure in hours (Procedure B) of all the specimens tested; the
nature of the failures, and the part that failed, that is, fitting or
pipe. Specimens that are included as failures after they have
been under stress or pressure for more than 15 000 000 cycles
or more than 10 000 h shall be indicated.
15.1.9 The estimated LTHS or LTHP.
15.1.10 The value for r.
15.1.11 The HDB or HDP.
15.1.12 The source of the HDB or PDB (7.1 or 7.2 for
Procedure A or 10.1 or 10.2 for Procedure B), and the
categorized value in accordance with Table 1 or Table 2.
15.1.13 Any unusual behavior observed in the tests.
15.1.14 Dates of tests.
15.1.15 Name of laboratory and supervisor of tests.
16. Precision and Bias
16.1 The precision and bias of this practice for obtaining the
HDB or PDB are as specified in Test Methods D1598, D2143,
and F948. This practice includes a statistical basis for evalu-
ating the suitability of the data in Sections 6 and 9.
17. Keywords
17.1 closure; cyclic pressure; design basis; fiberglass pipe;
reconfirmation; static pressure
 D2992 − 18

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. LEAST SQUARES CALCULATIONS FOR LONG-TERM HYDROSTATIC STRENGTH OR LONG-TERM HYDROSTATIC
PRESSURE

A1.1 General 1
5
n (y i (A1.2)
A1.1.1 The analysis is based on the following relationship:
y 5 a1bx (A1.1) x̄ = arithmetic mean of all xivalues:
1
where: 5
n (x i (A1.3)
y = one variable,
x = other variable, A1.4.2 Relevant Sums-of-Squares:
b = slope of the line, and A1.4.2.1 Calculate the following sums-of-squares and
a = intercept on the y axis. cross-products:
1
A1.1.2 A linear functional relationship analysis (sometimes S xy 5 ( ~ x 2 x̄ !~ y 2 ȳ !
i i (A1.4)
n
called “covariance analysis”) is used, subject to tests for the
sign (that is, “+” or “−”) of the slope and the coefficient of A1.4.2.2 If Sxy > 0, consider the data unsuitable for evalu-
correlation for the quantity of data available. The relevant ating the material; otherwise calculate also:
equations are given together with example data and results, on 1
the basis of which any other statistical computing package may S xx 5
n ( ~ x 2 x̄ !
i
2
(A1.5)
be used subject to validation by agreement with the example
results to within the indicated limits. 1
S yy 5
n ( ~y i 2 ȳ ! 2
(A1.6)
A1.1.3 For the purposes of this annex, a design service life
A1.4.3 Correlation of Data:
of 50 years has been assumed.
A1.4.3.1 Calculate the coefficient of correlation, r, from the
A1.2 Procedure for Analysis of Data following relationship:
A1.2.1 Use a linear functional relationship analysis to 2
~ S xy! 2
r 5 (A1.7)
analyze n pairs of data values (as y and x) to obtain the ~ S xx 3 S yy!
following information: r 5 =r 2

A1.2.1.1 The slope of line, b,

A1.4.3.2 If the value of r is less than the applicable
A1.2.1.2 The intercept on the y axis, a, minimum value given in Table A1.1as a function of n, reject
A1.2.1.3 The correlation coefficient, r, and the data; otherwise, proceed to A1.4.4.
A1.2.1.4 The predicted mean and the lower 95 % confi-
NOTE A1.1—The r minimum value assumes a two-sided 0.01 level of
dence and prediction intervals on the mean value. significance.
A1.3 Assignment of Variables A1.4.4 Functional Relationships:
A1.4.4.1 To find a and b for the functional relationship line,
A1.3.1 Let x be log10 t, where t is the time, in hours (or y = a + bx (Eq A1.1), first set:
cycles), and let y be log10 V, where V is the stress (or pressure)
value. λ5 S D S yy
S xx
(A1.8)
A1.4 Functional Relationship Equations and Method of
and then let:
Calculation
b 5 2 =λ (A1.9)
A1.4.1 Basic Statistics and Symbols:
A1.4.1.1 The following basic statistics and symbols are and then:
used: a 5 ȳ 2 bx̄ (A1.10)
NOTE A1.2—Since y = log10 V and x = log10 t, hence V = 10y, t = 10x
n = number of pairs of observed data values (Vi, ti), and the implied relationship for V in terms of t is therefore:
yi = log10 of Vi, where Vi is the stress (or pressure) at failure
of Observation i; i = 1, . . . n, V 5 10~ a1b3log 10 t !
xi = log10 of ti, where ti is the time to failure in hours of A1.4.5 Calculation of Variances:
Observation i; i = 1, . . .n, A1.4.5.1 If tL is the applicable time to failure, then set:
ȳ = arithmetic mean of all yi values:
x L 5 log10t L (A1.11)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2992 − 18
TABLE A1.1 Minimum Values for the Coefficient of Correlation, r, TABLE A1.2 Student’s “t” Value (Two-Sided 0.05 Level of
for Acceptable Data fromnPairs of Data Significance)
n n–2 Minimum, r n n–2 Student’st(0.05)
Number of variables Degrees of freedom Number of variables Degrees of freedom
3 1 0.9999 3 1 12.706
4 2 0.9900 4 2 4.303
5 3 0.9587 5 3 3.182
6 4 0.9172 6 4 2.776
7 5 0.8745 7 5 2.571
8 6 0.8343 8 6 2.447
9 7 0.7977 9 7 2.365
10 8 0.7646 10 8 2.306
11 9 0.7348 11 9 2.262
12 10 0.7079 12 10 2.228
13 11 0.6835 13 11 2.201
14 12 0.6614 14 12 2.179
15 13 0.6411 15 13 2.160
16 14 0.6226 16 14 2.145
17 15 0.6055 17 15 2.131
18 16 0.5897 18 16 2.120
19 17 0.5751 19 17 2.110
20 18 0.5614 20 18 2.101
21 19 0.5487 21 19 2.093
22 20 0.5368 22 20 2.086
23 21 0.5256 23 21 2.080
24 22 0.5151 24 22 2.074
25 23 0.5052 25 23 2.069
26 24 0.4958 26 24 2.064
27 25 0.4869 27 25 2.060
32 30 0.4487 32 30 2.042
37 35 0.4182 37 35 2.030
42 40 0.3932 42 40 2.021
47 45 0.3721 47 45 2.014
52 50 0.3542 52 50 2.009
62 60 0.3248 62 60 2.000
72 70 0.3017 72 70 1.994
82 80 0.2830 82 80 1.990
92 90 0.2673 92 90 1.987
102 100 0.2540 102 100 1.984

A1.4.5.2 Calculate, in turn, the following sequence of sta-

tistics. For i = 1 to i = n, the best fit, ξi, for true x, the best fit, the total variance, σy, for future values, yL, for y at xL using
Yi, for true y and the error variance, σδ, for x using Eq A1.12, the formula:
Eq A1.13, and Eq A1.14, respectively: σ y 2 5 σ n 2 1σ ε 2 (A1.22)
ξ i 5 $ λx i 1 ~ y i 2 a ! b % /2λ (A1.12) A1.4.5.5 Calculate the estimated standard deviation, σy, for
Y i 5 a1bξ i (A1.13) yL using the equation:
2
σy 5 ~σ 1σ ε 2 ! 0.5 (A1.23)
σδ 2 5 $ ( ~ y 2 Y ! 1λ ( ~ x
i i
2
i 2 ξ i! 2
%/$λ~n 2 2!% (A1.14) n

A1.4.5.3 Calculate the following quantities: and the predicted value, yL, for y at xL using the relationship:
y L 5 a1bxL (A1.24)
τ 5 bσ δ 2 /2S xy (A1.15)
D 5 2λbσ δ
2
/nSxy (A1.16) where a and b have the values obtained in accordance with
Eq A1.9 and Eq A1.10.
B 5 2Dx̄ ~ 11τ ! (A1.17)
A1.4.6 Calculation and Confidence Intervals:
A1.4.5.4 Calculate the following variances: the variance, C, A1.4.6.1 Calculate the lower 95 % prediction interval,
of b using the formula: yL 0.95, predicted for yL using the equation:
C 5 D ~ 11τ ! (A1.18) y L 0.95 5 y L 2 t v σ y (A1.25)
the variance, A, of a using the formula: where:
H
A 5 D x̄ 2 ~ 11τ ! 1
S xy
b J (A1.19) yL = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.24 when xL is,
as applicable, the value in accordance with Eq A1.11
the variance, σn, of the fitted line at xL using the formula: appropriate to a design life of, for example, 50 years
(that is, xL = 5.6415 (h)) or to a time at which it is
σ n 2 5 A12BxL 1CxL 2 (A1.20)
desired to predict with 95 % confidence the minimum
the error variance, σε, for y using the formula: value for the next observation of V,
σy = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.23, and
σ ε2 5 2λσ δ2 (A1.21)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2992 − 18

tv = applicable value for Student’s t for v = n − 2 df, as V L 5 10Y L (A1.27)

given in Table A1.2 for a two-sided 0.05 level of
significance (that is, mean 62.5 %).
A1.4.6.2 Calculate the corresponding lower 95 % prediction
limit for V using the relationship:
V L 0.95 5 10Y L 0.95
A1.4.6.3 The predicted mean value of V at time tL, that is,
VL, is given by the relationship:
where:
YL = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.24.
A1.4.6.4 Setting σy 2 = σn2 in Eq A1.22 will produce a
confidence interval for the line rather than a prediction interval
(A1.26)
for a future observation.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. DATA ANALYSIS

X1.1 Hoop Stress versus Cycles-to-Failure or Time-to-
Failure:
X1.1.1 Hoop stress is a more convenient parameter to use
when attempting to predict long-term hydrostatic strength of a
material. Its use reduces scatter in the data by compensating for
varying dimensions in the test specimens. It effectively nor-
malizes pressure for variations in specimen geometry, and
reduces the variable to a material parameter. For this particular
reason it has been widely used for evaluating the long-term
hydrostatic properties of plastic materials. Essentially, once a
value for HDS has been determined for a particular material
and construction, that value can be used to effectively predict
the long-term working pressure of tubular products by com-
pensating for the various product geometries.
X1.1.2 The main limitation of the use of hoop stress is that
it can only be applied to simple tubular-shaped specimens.
Therefore, its application has been mainly limited to materials
and a few products such as pipe and simple fittings like
couplings.
X1.2 Internal Pressure versus Cycles-to-Failure or Time-to-
Failure—The use of internal pressure rather than stress extends
the application of this practice to the prediction of service life
for many products of complex geometries which do not permit
the calculation of hoop stress. The logarithm of internal
pressure is used in place of the logarithm of hoop stress in the
calculations.

X2. EXAMPLE CALCULATION

X2.1 Basic Data—The example data given in Table X2.1, b = –3.31731 × 10–2
together with the example analysis given in this appendix, can a = 3.782188
be used to validate statistical packages procedures. Because of
rounding errors, it is unlikely that there will be exact X2.5 Calculated Variances:
agreement, but acceptable procedures should agree within D = 4.84225 x 10–6
60.1 % of the results given in X2.5. B = –1.46896 x 10–5
C(variance of b)= 5.01271 × 10–6
X2.2 Sums of Squares:
Sxx = 0.798109 A(variance of a)= 4.66730 × 10–5
Syy = 8.78285 x 10–4 σn2(error variance for) x = 4.046696 x 10–5
Sxy = –0.024836 σ ε2(error variance for) y = 1.1601 × 10–4

X2.3 Coeffıcient of Correlation: X2.6 Confidence Limits—For N= 32 and Student’s t of

r = 0.938083 2.0423, the estimated mean and confidence and prediction
X2.4 Functional Relationships: intervals are given in Table X2.2.
λ = 1.100457 × 10–3

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2992 − 18
TABLE X2.1 Example Data for Example Calculation
Data Time, Stress, Log Time, Log Stress, Data Stress, Log Time, Log Stress,
Point h psi h f Point Time, h psi h f

1 9. 5500. 0.95424 3.74036 17 1301. 4700. 3.11428 3.67210

2 13. 5500. 1.11394 3.74036 18 1430. 4800. 3.15534 3.68124
3 17. 5500. 1.23045 3.74036 19 1710. 4800. 3.23300 3.68124
4 17. 5500. 3.74036 20 2103. 4800. 3.32284 3.68124

5 104. 5200. 2.01703 3.71600 21 2220. 4500. 3.34635 3.65321

6 142. 5200. 2.15229 3.71600 22 2230. 4400. 3.34830 3.64345
7 204. 5200. 2.30963 3.71600 23 3816. 4700. 3.58161 3.67210
8 209. 5200. 2.32015 3.71600 24 4110. 4700. 3.61384 3.67210

9 272. 5000. 2.43457 3.69897 25 4173. 4600. 3.62043 3.66276

10 446. 5000. 2.64933 3.69897 26 5184. 4400. 3.71466 3.64345
11 466. 5000. 2.66839 3.69897 27 8900. 4600. 3.94939 3.66276
12 589. 4800. 2.77012 3.68124 28 8900. 4600. 3.94939 3.66276

13 669. 4700. 2.82543 3.67210 29 10900. 4500. 4.03743 3.65321

14 684. 5000. 2.83506 3.69897 30 10920. 4500. 4.03822 3.65321
15 878. 4600. 2.94349 3.66276 31 12340. 4500. 4.09132 3.65321
16 1299. 4800. 3.11361 3.68124 32 12340. 4500. 4.09132 3.65321

TABLE X2.2 Confidence Limits

Lower Lower
Confidence Prediction
Time, h Mean Interval Interval

1 6056 5864 5704

10 5611 5487 5309
100 5198 5129 4933
1000 4816 4772 4575
10 000 4462 4398 4233
100 000 4133 4037 3909
438 000 3936 3820 3711

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D2992 - 12)
that may impact the use of this standard. (May 15, 2018)

(1) Eliminated instances of non-mandator language. (3) Revised Tables A1.1 and A1.2 to unify range of variables
(2) Revised Section 12 on Reconfirmation of HDB or PDB. considered.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:06 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D2997 − 15

Standard Specification for

Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D2997; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing

1.1 This specification covers machine-made glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pressure pipe manufactured by
the centrifugal casting process. Included are a classification
system and requirements for materials, mechanical properties,
dimensions, performance, test methods, and marking.
NOTE 1—The term “fiberglass pipe” as described in Section 3 applies to
both reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP) and reinforced polymer
mortar pipe (RPMP).
NOTE 2—Pipe covered by this specification has been found suitable for
conveying gases, petroleum products, or corrosive fluids.
NOTE 3—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
NOTE 4—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 7, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved May 1, 2015. Published June 2015. Originally
papproved in 1971. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as D2997 – 01(2007)ε1.
DOI: 10.1520/D2997-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1598 Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe
Under Constant Internal Pressure
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2105 Test Method for Longitudinal Tensile Properties of
“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe and Tube
D2143 Test Method for Cyclic Pressure Strength of
Reinforced, Thermosetting Plastic Pipe
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 and F412 and abbreviations with Terminology
D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 aggregate, n—a siliceous sand conforming to the
requirements of Specification C33, except that the require-
ments for gradation shall not apply.
3.2.2 centrifugal casting, n—a manufacturing process used
to produce tubular goods by applying resin and reinforcement
to the inside of a mold that is rotated and heated, subsequently
polymerizing the resin system. The outside diameter (OD) of
the finished pipe is fixed by the inside diameter (ID) of the
mold tube. The inside diameter of the pipe is determined by the
amount of material introduced into the mold.
3.2.3 fiberglass pipe, n—a tubular product containing glass-
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin; the composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:12 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2997 − 15
pigments, or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.2.4 liner, n—the inner portion of the wall at least 0.005 in.
(0.13 mm) in thickness, as determined in 7.4 which does not
contribute to the strength in the determination of the hydro-
static design basis.
3.2.5 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP), n—a fiber-
glass pipe with aggregate.
3.2.6 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP), n—a fi-
berglass pipe without aggregate.
3.2.7 reinforced wall thickness, n—the total wall thickness
minus the liner or exterior surface resin layer thickness, or
both.
4. Classification
4.1 General—Pipe meeting this specification is classified by
type, grade, class, and hydrostatic design basis, and by a
secondary cell classification system that defines the basic
mechanical properties of the pipe. These types, grades, classes,
hydrostatic design basis categories, and cell classification
designations are as follows:
4.1.1 Types:—Type II
Centrifugally cast pipe.
4.1.2 Grades:—Grade 1
Glass-fiber-reinforced epoxy-resin pipe.
Grade 2—Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester-resin pipe.
Grade 3—Glass-fiber reinforced polydicyclopentadiene-
resin pipe.
Grade 8—Glass-fiber-reinforced polyester-resin mortar
pipe.
Grade 9—Glass fiber reinforced epoxy resin mortar pipe.
4.1.3 Classes:—Class A
No liner.
Class B—Polyester-resin liner, nonreinforced.
Class C—Epoxy-resin liner, nonreinforced.
Class D—Polydicyclopentadiene-resin liner, nonreinforced.
NOTE 5—For the purposes of this classification, polyester resin includes
vinylester resins, but the purchaser should consult with the manufacturer
to determine which resin is applicable for the specific conditions in which
the pipe will be used.
4.1.4 Hydrostatic Design Basis—Two methods of classify-
ing the hydrostatic design basis of the pipe are provided. Pipe
meeting this specification shall be classified using either the
cyclic test method or the static test method, or both, and the
designations are shown in Table 1. Appendix X1 explains how
to use the design basis categories shown in Table 1.
4.1.5 Mechanical Properties—Table 2 presents a cell clas-
sification system for identifying the mechanical properties of
pipe covered by this specification.
NOTE 6—All possible combinations covered by the preceding classifi-
cation system may not be commercially available.
4.1.6 Designation Code—The pipe designation code shall
consist of the abbreviation RTRP or RPMP, followed by the
type and grade in Arabic numerals, the class and static or cyclic
hydrostatic design basis level in capital letters, and four Arabic
numbers identifying, respectively, the cell classification desig-
nations of the short-term rupture strength, longitudinal tensile
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:12 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
TABLE 1 Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories
Cyclic Test Method Static Test Method
Hoop Stress, Hoop Stress,
Designation Designation
psi (MPa) psi (MPa)
A 2500 (17.2) Q 5000 (34.5)
B 3150 (21.7) R 6300 (43.4)
C 4000 (27.6) S 8000 (55.2)
D 5000 (34.5) T 10 000 (68.9)
E 6300 (43.4) U 12 500 (86.2)
F 8000 (55.2) W 16 000 (110)
G 10 000 (68.9) X 20 000 (138)
H 12 500 (86.2) Y 25 000 (172)
X 31 500 (217)
strength, tensile modulus, and pipe stiffness. Thus, a complete
pipe designation code shall consist of four letters, two
numerals, two letters, and four numerals.
4.1.6.1 Example—RTRP-21CA-1334. Such a designation
would describe a centrifugally cast, glass-fiber-reinforced,
epoxy pipe having a nonreinforced epoxy liner; a long-term
cyclic pressure strength level exceeding 2500 psi (17.2 MPa);
a short-term rupture strength exceeding 4000 psi (27.6 MPa); a
longitudinal tensile strength exceeding 16 000 psi (110 MPa);
a longitudinal tensile modulus exceeding 1.5 × 106 psi (10 300
MPa); and a pipe stiffness of 72 psi (496 kPa).
NOTE 7—Although the Form and Style for ASTM Standards manual
requires that the type classification be roman numerals, it is recognized
that few companies have stencil-cutting equipment for this style of type,
and it is therefore acceptable to mark the product type in arabic numbers.
5. Materials
5.1 General—The resins, reinforcements, colorants, fillers,
and other materials, when combined as a composite structure,
shall produce a pipe that shall be classified in accordance to
this specification based on performance.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship—The pipe shall be free from all defects,
including indentations, delaminations, bubbles, pinholes, for-
eign inclusions, and resin-starved areas which, as a result of
their nature, degree, or extent, detrimentally affect the strength
and serviceability of the pipe. The pipe shall be as uniform as
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties. The pipe shall be round and straight, and
the bore of the pipe shall be smooth and uniform. All pipe ends
shall be cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe, and any sharp
edges removed.
6.2 Dimensions and Tolerances:
6.2.1 Outside Diameter—The outside diameter and toler-
ances of pipe meeting this specification shall conform to the
requirements in Table 3, when determined in accordance with
7.4.
6.2.2 Wall Thickness—The minimum wall thickness of pipe
furnished under this specification shall not at any point be less
than 87.5 % of the nominal wall thickness published in the
manufacturer’s literature, current at the time of purchase, when
measured in accordance with 7.4.
 D2997 − 15
TABLE 2 Physical Property Requirements
Designation Cell Limits
Order Mechanical Property
Number 0A 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Short time rupture strength hoop tensile stress, min, psi — 4000 12 000 22 000 30 000 40 000 50 000
(MPa) (27.6) (82.7) (152) (207) (276) (345)
2 Longitudinal tensile strength, min, psi — 2000 8000 16 000 22 000 30 000 40 000
(MPa) (13.8) (55.2) (110) (152) (207) (276)
3 Longitudinal tensile modulus, min, psi × 106 — 0.6 1.3 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.0
(MPa) (4100) (9000) (10 300) (13 100) (17 200) (20 700)
4 Pipe stiffness at 5 % deflection, psi — 9 18 36 72 144 288
(kPa) (62) (124) (248) (496) (993) (1986)
A
0 = Unspecified.

TABLE 3 Outside Dimensions and Tolerances NOTE 8—For individual orders, only those additional tests and number
Nominal Pipe of tests specifically agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller need
in. (mm) be conducted.
Size, in.
7.4 Dimensions and Tolerances—Determine in accordance
1 1.315 ± 0.009 (33.401 ± 0.229)
1 1 ⁄2 1.900 ± 0.009 (48.260 ± 0.229)
with Practice D3567.
2 2.375 ± 0.012 (60.325 ± 0.305) 7.5 Long-Term Cyclic Pressure Strength—Determine in ac-
2 1 ⁄2 2.875 ± 0.012 (73.025 ± 0.305)
3 3.500 ± 0.012 (88.900 ± 0.305) cordance with Procedure A of Practice D2992.
4 4.500 ± 0.015 (114.300 ± 0.381) 7.6 Long-Term Static Pressure Strength—Determine in ac-
6 6.625 ± 0.025 (168.275 ± 0.635)
8 8.625 ± 0.025 (219.075 ± 0.635) cordance with Procedure B of Practice D2992.
10 10.750 ± 0.025 (273.050 ± 0.635)
12 12.750 ± 0.025 (323.850 ± 0.635)
7.7 Short-Term Rupture Strength—Determine in accordance
14 14.000 ± 0.035 (355.600 ± 0.889) with Test Method D1599.
7.8 Longitudinal Tensile Properties—Determine in accor-
dance with Test Method D2105.
6.2.3 Liner Thickness—Except for Class A unlined products,
all other classes shall have a minimum liner thickness of 0.005 7.9 Pipe Stiffness—Determine in accordance with Test
in. (5 mil), when measured in accordance with 7.4. Method D2412. The reported stiffness shall be based on 5 %
deflection.
6.3 Performance—Pipe meeting this specification shall be
categorized by a long-term static or cyclic hydrostatic design 8. Certification
basis shown in Table 1, when tested in accordance with 7.5 and 8.1 When agreed upon in writing by the purchaser and the
7.6. Additionally, the pipe shall meet the applicable cell limit seller, a certification shall be made the basis of acceptance of
requirements for short-term rupture strength, longitudinal ten- the material. This shall consist of a copy of the manufacturer’s
sile strength, tensile modulus, and pipe stiffness described in test report or a statement by the seller accompanied by a copy
Table 2, when tested in accordance with 7.7, 7.8, and 7.9. of the test results, that the material has been sampled, tested,
7. Test Methods and inspected in accordance with the provisions of the speci-
fication. Each certification so furnished shall be signed by an
7.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 23 6 authorized agent of the seller or the manufacturer.
2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not
less than 48 h prior to test, in accordance with Procedure A of 8.2 When original identity cannot be established, certifica-
Practice D618, for those tests where conditioning is required, tion can only be based on the sampling procedure provided by
and in all cases of disagreement. the applicable specification.
7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the Standard 9. Marking
Laboratory Atmosphere of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6 9.1 Each piece shall be marked at least once and at lengths
10 % relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test of at least every 15 ft. Each piece of pipe shall be marked with
specification. the following information in such a manner that it remains
7.3 Sampling—Samples of pipe to determine conformance legible under normal handling and installation practices:
of the material to be short-term rupture requirements shown in 9.1.1 Nominal pipe size (for example, 2 in.),
Table 2 shall be taken at random on a weekly basis or on each 9.1.2 Identification of fiberglass pipes in accordance with
production run, whichever is the most frequent. The rate of the designation code given in Section 5,
sampling for the other tests listed shall be in accordance with 9.1.3 This designation, D2997, with which the pipe
the accepted statistical practice and as agreed upon between the complies, and
purchaser and the seller. 9.1.4 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:12 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2997 − 15
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. HYDROSTATIC DESIGN BASIS, CATEGORIES, SERVICE FACTORS, AND PRESSURE RATINGS

X1.1 Hydrostatic Design Basis TABLE X1.2 Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories by
Procedure B
X1.1.1 The hydrostatic design basis is the estimated long-
Hydrostatic Design
term hydrostatic strength on which service factors (1.0 or less) Basis Category,
Range of Calculated Values,
psi (MPa)
are applied to obtain a hydrostatic design stress. The long-term psi (MPa)
hydrostatic strength is obtained by Practice D2992. In Practice
D2992, either Procedure A using data obtained in accordance 5000 (34.5) 4800 to 5900 (33.1 to 40.7)
6300 (43.4) 6000 to 7500 (41.4 to 51.7)
with Test Method D2143 or Procedure B using data obtained in 8000 (55.2) 7600 to 9500 (52.4 to 65.5)
accordance with Test Method D1598 is used to determine the 10 000 (68.9) 9600 to 11 900 (66.2 to 82.0)
12 500 (86.2) 12 000 to 15 200 (82.7 to 105)
long-term hydrostatic strength extrapolated at 50 years.
16 000 (110) 15 300 to 18 900 (106 to 130)
X1.1.2 The long-term hydrostatic strength is the estimated 20 000 (138) 19 000 to 23 000 (131 to 159)
25 000 (172) 24 000 to 29 000 (166 to 200)
tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the hoop orientation due 31 500 (217) 30 000 to 38 000 (207 to 262)
to internal hydrostatic pressure that will cause failure after 50
years (657 × 106 pressure cycles by Procedure A or 438 000 h
of static pressure by Procedure B). environment, temperature, hazard involved, life expectance
desired, and the degree of reliability selected.
X1.2 Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories
NOTE X1.1—It is not the intent of this specification to give service
X1.2.1 The hydrostatic design basis is obtained by catego- (design) factors. The service (design) factor should be selected by the
rizing the long-term strength in accordance with Table X1.1 or design engineer after evaluating fully the service conditions and the
Table X1.2. engineering properties of the specific pipe material under consideration.
Recommended service (design) factors will not be developed or issued by
X1.3 Service (Design) Factor ASTM.

X1.3.1 The service (design) factor is a number equal to 1.00 X1.4 Hydrostatic Design Stress
or less that takes into consideration all the variables and degree X1.4.1 The hydrostatic design stress is the estimated
of safety involved in a fiberglass pressure piping installation, maximum tensile stress in the wall of the pipe in the circum-
and is selected for the application on the basis of two general ferential orientation as a result of internal hydrostatic pressure
groups of conditions. that can be applied continuously with a high degree of certainty
X1.3.2 The first group considers the manufacturing and that failure will not occur. It is obtained by multiplying the
testing variables, specifically normal variations in the material, hydrostatic design basis as determined by Procedure A or
manufacture, dimensions, good handling techniques, and in the Procedure B by the service (design) factor.
evaluation procedures of this method. The second group X1.5 Pressure Rating
considers the application or use, specifically installation,
X1.5.1 The pressure rating is the estimated maximum pres-
TABLE X1.1 Hydrostatic Design Basis Categories by
sure that the medium in the pipe can exert continuously with a
Procedure A high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe will not occur.
Hydrostatic Design
Range of Calculated Values,
X1.5.2 The pressure rating for each diameter and wall
Basis Category, thickness of pipe and fitting is calculated from the hydrostatic
psi (MPa)
psi (MPa)
design stress for the specific pipe by means of the ISO formula:
2500 (17.2) 2400 to 3010 (16.5 to 20.8) S 5 P ~ D 2 t ! /2t
3150 (21.7) 3020 to 3820 (20.8 to 26.3)
4000 (27.6) 3830 to 4790 (26.4 to 33.0) where:
5000 (34.5) 4800 to 5900 (33.1 to 40.7)
6300 (43.4) 6000 to 7500 (41.4 to 51.7) S = hoop stress,
8000 (55.2) 7600 to 9500 (52.4 to 65.5) P = internal pressure,
10 000 (68.9) 9600 to 11 900 (66.2 to 82.0) D = average outside diameter, and
12 500 (86.2) 12 000 to 15 200 (82.7 to 105)
t = minimum reinforced wall thickness.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:12 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D2997 − 15
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue,
D2997–99(2007)ε1, that may impact this standard. (May 1, 2015)

(1) Removed reference to ASTM D2310. (3) Corrected instance of non-mandatory language in 4.1.4.
(2) Added Note 5, defining vinylester resins as a subset of (4) Humidity tolerances in Section 7 changed to comply with
polyester resins. most recent version of ASTM D618.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:12 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3262 − 20

Standard Specification for

“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Sewer Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3262; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers machine-made fiberglass pipe,
8 in. (200 mm) through 156 in. (4000 mm), intended for use in
gravity-flow systems for conveying sanitary sewage, storm
water, and some industrial wastes. Both glass-fiber-reinforced
thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-reinforced
polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 Although this specification is suited primarily for pipes
to be installed in buried applications, it is acceptable to apply
it to the extent applicable for other installations such as, but not
limited to, jacking, tunnel lining and sliplining rehabilitation of
existing pipelines.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.4 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification. This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
D3681 Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”
(Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a
Deflected Condition
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4161 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flex-
ible Elastomeric Seals
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
ing Plastic Pipe
2.2 AWWA Standard:
Standard C-950, Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting
Resin Pipe3

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved March 1, 2020. Published March 2020. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1973. Last previous edition approved in 2016 as D3262 – 16. DOI: Available from American Water Works Association (AWWA), 6666 W. Quincy
10.1520/D3262-20. Ave., Denver, CO 80235, http://www.awwa.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Unless otherwise indicated, definitions are
in accordance with Terminology D883 or Terminology F412,
and abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 fiberglass pipe—tubular product containing glass fiber
reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured thermo-
setting resin.
3.2.1.1 Discussion—The composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular, or platlet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes, and thermoplastic or thermosetting liners.
3.2.2 flexible joint —a joint that is capable of axial displace-
ment or angular rotation, or both.
3.2.3 liner—a resin layer, with or without filler or
reinforcement, or both, forming the interior surface of the pipe.
3.2.4 qualification test—one or more tests used to prove the
design of a product. Not a routine quality control test.
3.2.5 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
3.2.6 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—
fiberglass pipe without aggregate.
3.2.7 rigid joint— a joint that is not capable of axial
displacement or angular rotation.
3.2.8 surface layer—a resin layer, with or without filler or
reinforcement, or both, applied to the exterior surface of the
pipe structural wall.
4. Classification
4.1 General—This specification covers fiberglass sewer
pipe defined by raw materials in the structural wall (type) and
liner, surface layer material (grade), and pipe stiffness. Table 1
lists the types, liners, grades, and stiffnesses covered.
NOTE 3—All possible combinations of types, liners, grades, and
stiffnesses may not be commercially available. It is acceptable to add
additional types, liners, grades, and stiffnesses as they become commer-
cially available. The purchaser should determine for himself or consult
with the manufacturer for the proper type, liner, grade, and stiffness of
pipe to be used under the installation and operating conditions that will
exist for the project in which pipe is to be used.
4.2 Designation Requirements—The pipe materials designa-
tion code shall consist of the standard designation, ASTM
D3262, followed by type, liner, and grade indicated in Arabic
numerals, and pipe stiffness by a capital letter. Table 1 presents
a summary of the designation requirements. Thus a complete
material code shall consist of ASTM D3262, three numerals,
and a capital letter.
NOTE 4—Examples of the designation codes are as follows: (1) ASTM
D3262-1-1-3-A for glass–fiber–reinforced aggregate and polyester resin
mortar pipe with a reinforced thermoset liner and an unreinforced
polyester resin and sand surface layer having a minimum pipe stiffness of
9 psi (62 kPa). (2) ASTM D3262-4-2-6-C for glass–fiber–reinforced
epoxy resin pipe with an unreinforced thermoset liner, no surface layer,
having a minimum pipe stiffness of 36 psi (248 kPa).
NOTE 5—Although the Form and Style for ASTM Standards manual
requires that the type classification be roman numerals, it is recognized
that few companies have stencil-cutting equipment for this style of type,
and it is therefore acceptable to mark the product type in Arabic numbers.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 General—The thermosetting resins, glass fiber
reinforcements, fillers, and other materials, when combined as
a composite structure, shall produce piping products that meet
the performance requirements of this specification.
5.2 Wall Composition—The basic structural wall composi-
tion shall consist of a thermosetting resin, glass-fiber
reinforcement, and if used, an aggregate filler.
5.2.1 Resin—A thermosetting polyester or epoxy resin, with
or without filler.
5.2.2 Reinforcement—A commercial grade of glass fibers
compatible with the resin used.
5.2.3 Aggregate—A siliceous sand conforming to the re-
quirements of Specification C33, except that the requirements
for gradation shall not apply.

TABLE 1 General Designation Requirements for Fiberglass Sewer Pipe

Desig-
nation Property Cell LimitsA
Order

1 Type 1 2 3 4
glass-fiber-reinforced glass-fiber-resin-reinforced glass-fiber-reinforced glass-fiber-reinforced
thermosetting polyesterB resin thermosetting polyesterB resin thermosetting epoxy resin thermosetting epoxy resin
mortar (RPMP polyesterB ) (RTRP polyesterB ) mortar (RPMP epoxy) (RTRP epoxy)
2 Liner 1 2 3 4
reinforced thermoset liner non-reinforced thermoset liner thermoplastic liner no liner

3 Grade 1 2 3 4 5 6
polyesterB resin polyesterB resin polyesterB resin and epoxy resin surface epoxy resin surface no surface layer
surface layer— surface layer— sand surface layer layer—reinforced layer—non-reinforced
reinforced nonreinforced non-reinforced

4 Pipe stiffness A B C DA,B

psi (kPa) 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496)
A
This cell-type format provides the means of identification and specification of piping materials. This cell-type format, however, is subject to misapplication since
unobtainable property combinations can be selected if the user is not familiar with non-commercially available products. The manufacturer needs to be consulted.
B
For the purposes of this specification, polyester includes vinyl ester resins.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
5.3 Liner and Surface Layer—A liner or surface layer, or
both, when incorporated into or onto the pipe, shall meet the
structural requirements of this specification.
5.4 Joints—The pipe shall have a joining system that shall
provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition.
Restrained or unrestrained and flexible or rigid joints are
acceptable depending on the specific configuration and design
conditions.
5.4.1 Unrestrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding
internal pressure but not longitudinal tensile loads.
5.4.1.1 Coupling or Bell-and-Spigot Gasket Joints, with a
groove either on the spigot or in the bell to retain an
elastomeric gasket that shall be the sole element of the joint to
provide watertightness. For typical joint detail see Fig. 1.
5.4.1.2 Mechanical Coupling Joint, with elastomeric seals.
5.4.1.3 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay.
5.4.1.4 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring.
5.4.2 Restrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding inter-
nal pressure and longitudinal tensile loads.
5.4.2.1 Joints similar to those in 5.4.1.1 with supplemental
restraining elements.
5.4.2.2 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.3 Bell-and-Spigot, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.4 Bell-and-Spigot, adhesive-bonded joint: Three types
of adhesive-bonded joints are permitted by this standard as
follows:
(1) Tapered bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with a tapered socket for use in conjunction with a
tapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(2) Straight bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with an untapered socket for use in conjunction with
an untapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(3) Tapered bell and straight spigot, an adhesive joint that
is manufactured with a tapered socket for use with an unta-
pered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
5.4.2.5 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring.
5.4.2.6 Mechanical Coupling, an elastomeric sealed cou-
pling with supplemental restraining elements.
5.4.2.7 Threaded joints.
NOTE 6—It is acceptable to add other types of joints as they become
commercially available.
NOTE 7—Restrained joints typically increase service loads on the pipe
to greater than those experienced with unrestrained joints. The purchaser
is cautioned to take into consideration all conditions in the anticipated
service and to consult the manufacturer regarding the suitability of a
particular type and class of pipe for service with restrained joint systems.
5.5 Gaskets—Elastomeric gaskets used with this pipe shall
conform to the requirements of Specification F477, except that
composition of the elastomer shall be as agreed upon between
the purchaser and the supplier for the particular exposure to
oily or aggressive chemical environments.
FIG. 1 Typical Joints
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship—Each pipe shall be free from all defects
including indentations, delaminations, bubbles, pinholes,
cracks, pits, blisters, foreign inclusions, and resin-starved areas
that, due to their nature, degree, or extent, detrimentally affect
the strength and serviceability of the pipe. The pipe shall be as
uniform as commercially practicable in color, opacity, density,
and other physical properties.
6.1.1 The inside surface of each pipe shall be free of bulges,
dents, ridges, and other defects that result in a variation of
inside diameter of more than 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) from that obtained
on adjacent unaffected portions of the surface. No glass fiber
reinforcement shall penetrate the interior surface of the pipe
wall.
6.1.2 Joint sealing surfaces shall be free of dents, gouges,
and other surface irregularities that will affect the integrity of
the joints.
6.2 Dimensions:
6.2.1 Pipe Diameters—The pipe shall be supplied in the
nominal diameters shown in Table 2 or Table 3. The tolerances
shall be as shown in Table 2 or Table 3, when measured in
accordance with 8.1.1.
6.2.2 Lengths—Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of
10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 ft (3.05, 6.10, 9.15, 12.19, and 18.29 m).
The actual laying length shall be the nominal length 62 in.
(651 mm), when measured in accordance with 8.1.2. At least
90 % of the total footage of any one size and stiffness,
excluding special-order lengths, shall be furnished in the
nominal lengths specified by the purchaser. Random lengths, if
furnished, shall not vary from the nominal lengths by more
than 5 ft (1.53 m), or 25 %, whichever is less.
6.2.3 Wall Thickness—The average wall thickness of the
pipe shall not be less than the nominal wall thickness published
in the manufacturer’s literature current at the time of purchase,
and the minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be less
than 87.5 % of the nominal wall thickness when measured in
accordance with 8.1.3.
6.2.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—All points around each end
of a pipe unit shall fall within 61⁄4 in. (66.4 mm) or 60.5 %
of the nominal diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater, to a
plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe, when
measured in accordance with 8.1.4.
6.3 Chemical Requirements:
6.3.1 Long-Term—Pipe specimens, when tested in accor-
dance with 8.2.1, shall be capable of being deflected, without
failure, at the 50 year strain level given in Table 4 when
exposed to 1.0 N sulfuric acid.
NOTE 8—See Appendix X1 for derivation of the minimum sewer pipe
chemical requirements given in Table 4.
 D3262 − 20
TABLE 2 Nominal Inside Diameters (ID) and Tolerances Inside Diameter Control Pipe
Inch-Pound Series SI Series
Nominal Tolerance, in. Nominal Metric ID Range,B mm ToleranceB on
Diameter,A in. Diameter,B mm Minimum Maximum Declared ID, mm
8 ±0.25 200 196 204 ±1.5
10 ±0.25 250 246 255 ±1.5
12 ±0.25 300 296 306 ±1.8
14 ±0.25 400 396 408 ±2.4
15 ±0.25 500 496 510 ±3.0
16 ±0.25 600 595 612 ±3.6
18 ±0.25 700 695 714
20
21
±0.25
±0.25
800
900
795
895
816
918
J ±4.2

24 ±0.25 1000 995 1020

6
27 ±0.27 1200 1195 1220
30 ±0.30 1400 1395 1420
33 ±0.33 1600 1595 1620 ±5.0
36 ±0.36 1800 1795 1820
39 ±0.39 2000 1995 2020
42 ±0.42 (2200) 2195 2220
45
48
51
54
60
±0.45
±0.48
±0.51
±0.54
±0.60
2400
(2600)
2800
(3000)
3200
2395
2595
2795
2995
3195
2420
2620
2820
3020
3220
6 ±6.0

66
72
78
84
±0.66
±0.72
±0.78
±0.84
(3400)
3600
(3800)
4000
3395
3595
3795
3995
3420
3620
3820
4020
6 ±7.0

90 ±0.90 ... ... ... ...

96 ±0.96 ... ... ... ...
102 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
108 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
114 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
120 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
132 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
144 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
156 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
A
Inside diameters other than those shown shall be permitted by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.
B
Values are taken from International Standards Organization documents. Parentheses indicate non-preferred diameters.

NOTE 9—The calculations in Table 4 and Appendix X1 assume that the
neutral axis is at the pipe wall midpoint. For pipe wall constructions that
produce an altered neutral axis position, 2y shall be substituted for t to
evaluate results and establish requirements. (y is the maximum distance
from the neutral axis to the pipe surface.)
6.3.2 Control Requirements—Test pipe specimens periodi-
cally in accordance with 8.2.2, following the procedure of
8.2.2.1, or alternatively, the procedure of 8.2.2.2.
6.3.2.1 When the procedure of 8.2.2.1 is used, the following
three criteria must be met: (a) the average failure time at each
strain level must fall at or above the lower 95 % confidence
limit of the originally determined regression line, (b) all
specimen-failure times shall be greater than the lower 95 %
prediction limit of the originally determined regression line,
and (c) one third or more of the specimen-failure times must be
on or above the originally determined regression line.
NOTE 10—Determine the lower 95 % confidence limit and the lower 95
% prediction limit in accordance with Annex A1.
6.3.2.2 When the alternative procedure of 8.2.2.2 is used,
deflection Level B in accordance with Table 6, there shall be no
indication of structural damage as evidenced by interlaminar
separation, separation of the liner or surface layer (if incorpo-
rated) from the structural wall, tensile failure of the glass fiber
reinforcement, and fracture or buckling of the pipe wall.
NOTE 11—This is a visual observation (made with the unaided eye) for
quality control purposes only and should not be considered a simulated
service test. Table 6 values are based on an in-use long-term deflection
limit of 5 % and provide an appropriate uniform safety margin for all pipe
stiffnesses. Since the pipe stiffness values (F/∆y) shown in Table 5 vary,
the percent deflection of the pipe under a given set of installation
conditions will not be constant for all pipes. To avoid possible
misapplication, take care to analyze all conditions that might affect
performance of the installed pipe.
6.4.1 For other pipe stiffness levels, it is acceptable to
compute appropriate values for level A and level B deflections
(Table 6) as follows:
Level A at new PS 5 S 72
new PS D 0.33

~9! (1)

failure shall not occur in any specimen.
6.4 Stiffness—Each length of pipe shall have sufficient
strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (F/∆y) specified
in Table 5, when tested in accordance with 8.3. At deflection
Level A in accordance with Table 6, there shall be no visible
damage in the test specimen evidenced by surface cracks. At
Level B at new PS 5 new Level A÷0.6
6.4.2 For products that have use limits of other than 5 %
long-term deflection, it is acceptable to proportionally adjust
Level A and Level B deflections (Table 6) to maintain
equivalent in-use safety margins. For example, a 4 % long-
term limiting deflection would result in a 20 % reduction of

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
TABLE 3 Nominal Outside Diameters (OD) and Tolerances
NOTE 1—The external diameter of the pipe at the spigots shall be within the tolerances given in the table, and the manufacturer shall declare his
allowable maximum and minimum spigot diameters. Some pipes are manufactured such that the entire pipe meets the OD tolerances while other pipes
meet the tolerances at the spigots, in which case, if such pipes are cut (shortened) it is possible that the ends will need to be calibrated to the tolerances.

Metric Ductile Iron Pipe Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower, International O.D., Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower,
Pipe Size, mm Equivalent, mm mm mm mm mm mm
200 220.0 +1.0 0.0 ... ... ...
250 271.8 +1.0 -0.2 ... ... ...
300 323.8 +1.0 -0.3 310 +1.0 -1.0
350 375.7 +1.0 -0.3 361 +1.0 -1.2
400 426.6 +1.0 -0.3 412 +1.0 -1.4
450 477.6 +1.0 -0.4 463 +1.0 -1.6
500 529.5 +1.0 -0.4 514 +1.0 -1.8
600 632.5 +1.0 -0.5 616 +1.0 -2.0
700 ... ... ... 718 +1.0 -2.2
800 ... ... ... 820 +1.0 -2.4
900 ... ... ... 924 +1.0 -2.6
1000 ... ... ... 1026 +2.0 -2.6
1200 ... ... ... ... +2.0 ...
1400 ... ... ... 1229 +2.0 -2.6
1600 ... ... ... 1434 +2.0 -2.8
1800 ... ... ... 1638 +2.0 -2.8
2000 ... ... ... 1842 +2.0 -3.0
2200 ... ... ... 2046 +2.0 -3.0
2400 ... ... ... 2250 +2.0 -3.2
2600 ... ... ... 2453 +2.0 -3.4
2800 ... ... ... 2658 +2.0 -3.6
3000 ... ... ... 2861 +2.0 -3.8
3200 ... ... ... 3066 +2.0 -4.0
3400 ... ... ... 3270 +2.0 -4.2
3600 ... ... ... 3474 +2.0 -4.4
3800 ... ... ... 3678 +2.0 -4.6
4000 ... ... ... 3882 +2.0 -4.8
... ... ... ... 4086 +2.0 -5.0

Level A and Level B deflections, while a 6 % limiting
deflection would result in a 20 % increase in Level A and Level
B deflection values. However, minimum values for Level A
and Level B deflections shall be equivalent to strains of 0.6 and
1.0 % respectively (as computed by Eq X1.4 in Appendix X1).
6.4.3 For high stiffness pipes, 5 % deflection will likely be
above the use limit and the adjusted level A test deflection. For
very high stiffness pipes, 5% deflection may also be greater
than the adjusted level B test deflection. In such cases, the
pipes may be damaged or fail prior to determining the pipe
stiffness at 5 % deflection. Therefore, it is permitted to set the
pipe stiffness test deflection equal to the adjusted level A
deflection, but not greater than 5 %. See Note 12 for additional
information and further clarification.
NOTE 12—Depending upon the product modulus and allowable ring

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
TABLE 4 Minimum Sanitary Sewer Pipe Chemical Requirements εSCV
Pipe Stiffness, Minimum Strain
psi (kPa) 6 min 10 h 100 h 1000 h 10 000 h 50 years

9 (62) 0.97 (t/d) 0.84 (t/d) 0.78 (t/d) 0.73 (t/d) 0.68 (t/d) 0.60 (t/d)
18 (124) 0.85 (t/d) 0.72 (t/d) 0.66 (t/d) 0.61 (t/d) 0.56 (t/d) 0.49 (t/d)
36 (248) 0.71 (t/d) 0.60 (t/d) 0.55 (t/d) 0.51 (t/d) 0.47 (t/d) 0.41 (t/d)
72 (496) 0.56 (t/d) 0.48 (t/d) 0.44 (t/d) 0.41 (t/d) 0.38 (t/d) 0.34 (t/d)

Where: t and d are the nominal total wall thickness and the mean diameter (inside diameter plus t) as determined in accordance with 8.1, and
εSCV = strain corrosion value.

TABLE 5 Minimum Stiffness at 5 % Deflection 7.2 Production Tests—Select one pipe at random from each
Nominal Pipe Stiffness, psi (kPa) lot and take one specimen from the pipe barrel to determine
Diameter, Designation conformance of the material to the workmanship, dimensional,
in. A B C D and stiffness requirements of 6.1, 6.2, and 6.4, respectively.

8 36 (248)
10 18 (124) 36 (248)
12 and 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248)
greater
TABLE 6 Ring Deflection Without Damage or Structural Failure
Nominal Pipe Stiffness, psi
9 18 36
Level A 18 % 15 % 12 %
Level B 30 % 25 % 20 %
bending strain, this will likely begin affecting pipes with stiffness between
200 and 400 psi. For example, a pipe with pipe stiffness of PS360 may
have a use limit of 4.3 %, an adjusted level A deflection of 4.5 % and an
adjusted level B deflection of 7.5 %. Therefore, the new pipe stiffness test
deflection would be 4.5 %. Another possible product with pipe stiffness of
PS900 may have a use limit of 2.8 %, an adjusted level A deflection of
2.7 % and an adjusted level B deflection of 4.5 %. Therefore, the new pipe
stiffness test deflection would be 2.7 %.
6.5 Joint Tightness:
6.5.1 All joints shall meet the laboratory performance re-
quirements of Specification D4161. Unrestrained joints shall
be tested with a fixed end closure condition and restrained
joints shall be tested with a free end closure condition. Rigid
joints shall be exempt from angular deflection requirements of
D4161. Rigid joints typically include butt joints with laminated
overlay, bell-and-spigot joints with laminated overlay, flanged,
bell-and-spigot adhesive bonded and threaded.
6.6 Beam Strength—The pipe shall have a minimum axial
tensile elongation at failure of 0.25% and meet the following
requirements. For pipe sizes up to 27 in., the pipe shall
withstand, without failure, the beam loads specified in Table 7,
when tested in accordance with 8.4. For pipe sizes larger than
27 in., and alternatively acceptable for smaller sizes, adequate
beam strength is demonstrated by tension and compression
tests conducted in accordance with 8.4.1 for pipe wall speci-
mens oriented in the longitudinal direction, using the minimum
tensile and compressive strengths specified in Table 7.
7. Sampling
7.1 Lot—Unless otherwise agreed upon between the pur-
chaser and the supplier, one lot shall consist of 100 lengths of
each type, grade, and size of pipe produced.
72 (496)
7.3 Qualification Tests—Sampling for qualification tests
72 (496) (see 7.5) is not required unless otherwise agreed upon between
72 (496) the purchaser and the supplier. Qualification tests, for which a
certification and test report shall be furnished when requested
by the purchaser, include the following:
7.3.1 Long-term chemical test.
7.3.2 Joint-tightness test (see 6.5).
7.3.3 Beam strength test.
72
7.4 Control for Chemical Test—Perform sampling and test-
9% ing for the control requirements of the chemical test at least
15 % once annually, unless otherwise agreed upon between the
purchaser and the supplier.
7.5 For individual orders, conduct only those additional
tests and numbers of tests specifically agreed upon between the
purchaser and the supplier.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Dimensions:
8.1.1 Diameters:
8.1.1.1 Inside Diameter—Take inside diameter measure-
ments at a point approximately 6 in. (152 mm) from the end of
the pipe section using a steel tape or an inside micrometer with
graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Make two 90° opposing
measurements at each point of measurement and average the
readings.
8.1.1.2 Outside Diameter—Determine in accordance with
Test Method D3567.
8.1.2 Length—Measure with a steel tape or gage having
graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Lay the tape or gage on
or inside the pipe and measure the overall laying length of the
pipe.
8.1.3 Wall Thickness—Determine in accordance with Test
Method D3567.
8.1.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—Rotate the pipe on a man-
drel or trunnions and measure the runout of the ends with a dial
indicator. The total indicated reading is equal to twice the
distance from a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the pipe. When the squareness of the pipe ends is rigidly fixed
by tooling, it is acceptable to verify and reinspect the tooling at
intervals frequent enough to assure that the squareness of the
pipe ends is maintained within tolerance.
8.2 Chemical Tests—Test the pipe in accordance with Test
Method D3681.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
TABLE 7 Beam Strength Test Loads
Nominal Beam Load (P) Minimum Longitudinal Tensile Strength, per Unit Minimum Longitudinal Compressive Strength,
Diameter, of Circumference per Unit of Circumference
in. lbf (kN) lbf/in. (kN/m) lbf/in. (kN/m)

8 800 (3.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)

10 1200 (5.3) 580 (102) 580 (102)
12 1600 (7.1) 580 (102) 580 (102)
14 2200 (9.8) 580 (102) 580 (102)
15 2600 (11.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
16 3000 (13.3) 580 (102) 580 (102)
18 4000 (17.8) 580 (102) 580 (102)
20 4400 (19.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
21 5000 (22.2) 580 (102) 580 (102)
24 6400 (28.5) 580 (102) 580 (102)
27 8000 (35.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
30 ... ... 580 (102) 580 (102)
33 ... ... 640 (111) 640 (111)
36 ... ... 700 (122) 700 (122)
39 ... ... 780 (137) 780 (137)
42 ... ... 800 (140) 800 (140)
45 ... ... 860 (150) 860 (150)
48 ... ... 920 (161) 920 (161)
51 ... ... 980 (171) 980 (171)
54 ... ... 1040 (182) 1040 (182)
60 ... ... 1140 (200) 1140 (200)
66 ... ... 1260 (220) 1260 (220)
72 ... ... 1360 (238) 1360 (238)
78 ... ... 1480 (260) 1480 (260)
84 ... ... 1600 (280) 1600 (280)
90 ... ... 1720 (301) 1720 (301)
96 ... ... 1840 (322) 1840 (322)
102 ... ... 1940 (340) 1940 (340)
108 ... ... 2060 (360) 2060 (360)
114 ... ... 2180 (382) 2180 (382)
120 ... ... 2280 (400) 2280 (400)
132 ... ... 2520 (440) 2520 (440)
144 ... ... 2740 (480) 2740 (480)
156 ... ... 2964 (519) 2964 (519)

FIG. 2 Beam Strength—Test Setup

8.2.1 Long-Term—To find if the pipe meets the require-
ments of 6.3.1, determine at least 18 failure points in accor-
dance with Test Method D3681.
8.2.1.1 Alternative Qualification Procedure—Test four
specimens each at the 10 and 10 000-h minimum strains given
in Table 4 and test five specimens each at the 100 and 1000-h
minimum strains given in Table 4. Consider the product
qualified if all 18 specimens are tested without failure for at
least the prescribed times given in Table 4 (that is, 10, 100,
1000, or 10 000 h respectively).
8.2.2 Control Requirements—Test at least six specimens in
accordance with one of the following procedures and record
the results:
8.2.2.1 Test at least three specimens at each of the strain
levels corresponding to the 100- and 1000-h failure times from
the product’s regression line established in 8.2.1.
8.2.2.2 When the alternate method of 8.2.1.1 is used to
qualify the product, test at least three specimens each at the 100
and 1000-h minimum strains given in Table 4 for at least 100
and 1000-h respectively.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20
8.2.2.3 It is acceptable to use the control test procedures of
8.2.2.2 as an alternative to the reconfirmation procedure
described in Test Method D3681 for those products evaluated
by the alternative qualification procedure of 8.2.1.1.
8.3 Stiffness—Determine the pipe stiffness (F/∆y) at 5 %
deflection or the adjusted level determined in accordance with
6.4.3 for the specimen, using the apparatus and procedure of
Test Method D2412, with the following exceptions permitted:
8.3.1 Measure the wall thickness to the nearest 0.01 in.
(0.25 mm).
8.3.2 Load the specimen to 5 % deflection or the adjusted
level determined in accordance with 6.4.3 and record the load.
Then load the specimen to deflection Level A in accordance
with Table 6 or to the adjusted level A determined in accor-
dance with 6.4.1 and 6.4.2 and examine the specimen for
visible damage evidence by surface cracks. Then load the
specimen to deflection Level B in accordance with Table 6 or
to the adjusted level B determined in accordance with 6.4.1 and
6.4.2 and examine for evidence of structural damage as
evidenced by interlaminar separation, separation of the liner or
surface layer (if incorporated) from the structural wall, tensile
failure of the glass-fiber reinforcement, fracture, or buckling of
the pipe wall. Calculate the pipe stiffness at 5 % deflection or
at the adjusted test deflection level determined in accordance
with 6.4.3.
8.3.3 For production testing, only one specimen shall be
tested to determine the pipe stiffness.
8.3.4 The maximum specimen length needs to be 12 in. (305
mm) or the length necessary to include stiffening ribs if they
are used, whichever is greater.
8.4 Beam Strength—Place a 20-ft (6.1-m) nominal length of
pipe on saddles at each end. Hold the ends of the pipe round
ANNEX
(Mandatory Information)
A1. CALCULATIONS OF LOWER CONFIDENCE (LCL) AND LOWER PREDICTION (LPL) LIMITS
A1.1 The following equations are used:
h LCL 5 ~ a1bf0 ! 2 ts Π~f0 2 F!2 1
U
1
N
h LPL 5 ~ a1bf0 ! 2 ts Π~f0 2 F!2 1
U
1 11
N
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
during the test. Apply the beam load for the diameter of pipe
shown in Table 7 simultaneously to the pipe (see Fig. 2).
Maintain the loads for not less than 10 min with no evidence of
failure. The testing apparatus shall be designed to minimize
stress concentrations at the loading points.
8.4.1 As an alternative to 8.4, adequate beam strength shall
be shown by determining longitudinal tensile strength in
accordance with Test Method D638, except the provisions for
maximum thickness shall not apply, and longitudinal compres-
sive strength in accordance with Test Method D695, on pipe
wall specimens oriented in the longitudinal direction.
9. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
9.1 Mark each length of pipe that meets or is part of a lot
that meets the requirements of this specification at least once in
letters not less than 1⁄2 in. (12 mm) in height and of bold-type
style in a color and type that remains legible under normal
handling and installation procedures. The marking shall in-
clude the nominal pipe size, manufacturer’s name or
trademark, this ASTM specification number D3262, type, liner,
grade, and stiffness in accordance with the designation code in
4.2.
9.2 Prepare pipe for commercial shipment in such a way as
to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers.
9.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
10. Keywords
10.1 fiberglass pipe; pressure pipe; RTRP; RPMP; strain
corrosion
where all symbols are as defined in Annex A1 and Annex A3
of Practice D2992 except:
f 0 5 logof stress ~ strain! level of interest
NOTE A1.1—Of the expected failures at stress (strain) f0, 97.5 % will
occur after hLPL. The average failure time at stress (strain) f0 will occur
later than hLCL 97.5 % of the time.
 D3262 − 20
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. STRAIN CORROSION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

X1.1 From Molin and Leonhardt, the expression for bend- NOTE X1.1—Products may have use limits of other than 5 % long-term
ing strain is given as: deflection. In such cases, it is acceptable to adjust the requirements
proportionally. For example, a 4 % long-term limiting deflection would
ε b 5 D f ~ t/d !~ δv/d ! (X1.1) result in a 50 year requirement of 80 % of Table 4, while a 6 % limiting
deflection would yield a requirement of 120 % of Table 4.
With the common acceptance that these pipes must be
capable of withstanding 5 % deflection long-term, the maxi- X1.3 Alternative Strain Corrosion Test Requirements:
mum installed bending strain may be expressed as:
X1.3.1 At 0.1 h (6 min), the required strain corrosion
ε b max 5 ~ 0.05!~ D f !~ t/d ! (X1.2)
performance is based on the Level B deflections from Table 6
Using the AWWA C950 long-term bending factor of safety
of 1.50, the minimum strain corrosion performance extrapo- as follows:
lated to 50 years must be:
ε scv $ ~ 0.075!~ D f !~ t/d ! (X1.3)
ε test $ Df F t
d1δV/2 GF δV
d1δV/2 G (X1.4)

X1.2 The shape factor, Df, is dependent on both the pipe or

stiffness and the installation (backfill material, backfill density,
compaction method, haunching, trench configuration, native- ε test $ Df ~ t/d ! ~ δV/d ! S 1
11δV/2d D 2
(X1.5)
soil characteristics, and vertical loading, for example). Assum-
ing conservatively, installations achieved by tamped compac- Df for parallel plate loading is 4.28. Making the other
tion with inconsistent haunching that will limit long-term substitutions yield:
deflections to 5 %, the following values of Df have been Pipe Stiffness Minimum Test Strain
selected to be realistic, representative, and limiting. Substitut- (psi) Level B δv/d (%) at 6 Minutes

ing these values in the above equation for εscvyields the

9 30 0.97 (t/d)
minimum required strain corrosion performance at 50 years 18 25 0.85 (t/d)
given in Table 4 and below: 36 20 0.71 (t/d)
72 15 0.56 (t/d)
Pipe Stiffness, Minimum εscv
(psi) Df Performance X1.3.2 The minimum strain values at 10, 100, 1000, and
10 000 h given in Table 4 are defined by a straight line
9 8.0 0.60 (t/d)
18 6.5 0.49 (t/d) connecting the points at 6 min and 50 years on a log-log plot.
36 5.5 0.41 (t/d)
72 4.5 0.34 (t/d)

X2. INSTALLATION

X2.1 This specification is a material performance and pur-
chase specification only and does not include requirements for
engineering design, pressure surges, bedding, backfill, or the
relationship between earth cover load and the strength of the
pipe. Experience has shown, however, that successful perfor-
mance of this product depends upon the proper type of bedding
and backfill, pipe characteristics, and care in the field construc-
tion work. The purchaser of the fiberglass pipe specified herein
is cautioned that he must properly correlate the field require-
ments with the pipe requirements and provide adequate inspec-
tion at the job site.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3262 − 20

X3. RECOMMENDED METHODS OF DETERMINING GLASS CONTENT

X3.1 Determine glass content as follows: X3.1.2 As a process control, by weight of the glass fiber
X3.1.1 By ignition loss analysis in accordance with Test reinforcement applied by machine into the pipe structure.
Method D2584 or ISO 1172.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:17 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3299 − 18

Standard Specification for

Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin
Corrosion-Resistant Tanks1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3299; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope ization established in the Decision on Principles for the

1.1 This specification covers cylindrical tanks fabricated by
filament winding for above-ground vertical installation, to
contain aggressive chemicals at atmospheric pressure as clas-
sified herein, and made of a commercial-grade polyester or
vinylester resin. Included are requirements for materials,
properties, design, construction, dimensions, tolerances,
workmanship, and appearance.
1.2 This specification does not cover the design of vessels
intended for pressure above atmospheric or under vacuum
conditions, except as classified herein, or vessels intended for
use with liquids heated above their flash points.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.4 Special design consideration shall be given to tanks
subject to environmental and/or mechanical forces such as
seismic, wind, ice, agitation, or fluid dynamic forces, to
operational service temperatures greater than 180°F (82°C) and
to tanks with unsupported bottoms.
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 11, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D2150 Specification for Woven Roving Glass Fabric for
Polyester-Glass Laminates (Withdrawn 1987)3
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2996 Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D2997 Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4024 Specification for Machine Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-
Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
D5421 Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1974. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D3299 – 10. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D3299-18. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class
25, 125, 250, and 8004
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 and F412, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 filament-wound—as applied to tanks, a process in which
the principal circumferential load-bearing reinforcement is
applied by continuous filament winding.
3.3 contact molding—a molding process that includes “hand
lay-up,” “spray-up,” or a combination of these manufacturing
processes.
4. Classification
4.1 Tanks meeting this specification are classified according
to type as follows, and it is the responsibility of the purchaser
to specify the requirement for Type II tanks, the operating
pressure or vacuum levels, and the safety factor required for
external pressure. Absence of a designation of type required
shall imply that Type I is adequate.
4.1.1 Type I—Atmospheric pressure tanks vented directly to
the atmosphere, designed for pressure no greater or lower than
atmospheric.
4.1.2 Type II—Atmospheric pressure tanks vented directly
into a fume conservation system, and designed to withstand the
specified positive and negative pressure not to exceed 14 in.
(355.6 mm) of water when all tie-down lugs are properly
secured, in accordance with the fabricator’s recommendations
for flat-bottom tanks.
4.2 Tanks meeting this specification are classified according
to grade as follows:
4.2.1 Grade 1—Tanks manufactured with a single generic
type of thermoset resin throughout.
4.2.2 Grade 2—Tanks manufactured with different generic
types of thermoset resin in the barrier and the structural
portion.
NOTE 2—The external corrosive environment due to spillage or
corrosive vapors should be considered when specifying Grade 2 tanks (see
7.1.3.3).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Resin—The resin used shall be a commercial-grade,
corrosion-resistant thermoset that has either been evaluated in
a laminate by test in accordance with 11.3 or that has been
determined by previous documented service to be acceptable
for the service conditions. Where service conditions have not
been evaluated, a suitable resin also may be selected by
agreement between fabricator and purchaser.
5.1.1 The resin shall contain no pigment, dyes, colorants, or
filler, except as follows:
5.1.1.1 A thixotropic agent that does not interfere with
visual inspection of laminate quality, or with the required
corrosion resistance of the laminate, may be added for viscos-
ity control.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
NOTE 3—The addition of a thixotropic agent may reduce the resistance
of many resin systems to certain corrosive chemical environments. It is the
responsibility of the fabricator, using a thixotropic agent in the resin
required for 7.1.1 and 7.1.2, to ascertain its compatibility with the
corrosive environment when this has been reported to him by the
purchaser.
5.1.1.2 Resin pastes used to fill crevices before overlay shall
not be subject to the limitations of 5.1.1.
5.1.1.3 Resin may contain pigment, dyes, or colorants when
agreed upon between fabricator and purchaser.
NOTE 4—The addition of pigment, dyes, or colorants may interfere with
visual inspection of laminate quality.
5.1.1.4 Ultraviolet absorbers may be added to the exterior
surface for improved weather resistance, if agreed upon be-
tween fabricator and purchaser.
5.1.1.5 Antimony compounds or other fire-retardant agents
may be added to halogenated resins for improved fire
resistance, if agreed upon between fabricator and purchaser.
NOTE 5—Because the addition of fire-retardant agents may interfere
with visual inspection of laminate quality, they should not be used in the
inner surface (7.1.1) or interior layer (7.1.2) unless their functional
advantages would outweigh the loss of visual inspection.
5.2 Reinforcement:
5.2.1 Chopped-Strand Mat—Chopped-strand mat shall be
constructed from chopped commercial-grade E-type glass
strands bonded together using a binder. The strands should be
treated with a sizing that is chemically compatible with the
resin system used.
NOTE 6—The selection of the particular chopped-strand mat is depen-
dent upon the performance characteristics required of the finished product
and upon the processing techniques to be used.
5.2.2 Continuous Roving—Continuous roving shall be a
commercial-grade of E-type glass fiber with a sizing that is
chemically compatible with the resin system used.
5.2.3 Nonwoven Biaxial or Unidirectional Fabric—These
products shall be a commercial Grade of E-type glass fiber with
a sizing that is chemically compatible with the resin system
used.
5.2.4 Woven Roving—Woven roving shall be in accordance
with Specification D2150.
5.2.5 Surface Mat—The reinforcement used for the inner
surface (7.1.1) shall be either a commercial-grade chemical
resistant glass surface mat or an organic-fiber surface mat. In
environments that attack glass, the use of an organic-fiber
surface mat is required.
6. Design Requirements
6.1 Filament-Wound Laminates—Design for Internal
Pressure—The maximum allowable stress of the total laminate
(that is, filament winding plus the corrosion barrier, which is
made up of the inner surface (7.1.1) and interior layer (7.1.2))
shall be limited by the allowable movement (strain) of the tank
wall when filled with fluid.
6.1.1 The allowable strain of the tank wall shall not exceed
0.0010 in./in. (mm/mm) at 70°F (21°C).
6.1.2 Tanks shall have a longitudinal strength at least equal
to that of a helically wound tank having a maximum angle of
wind of 80° (measured from the tank axis, that is, 90° is hoop
 D3299 − 18
winding). For reference, the longitudinal tensile strength of a 2.6~ E/F !~ D o /L !~ t/D o ! 2.5
Pa 5 (4)
typical 80° helical winding is approximately 2200 psi (15,168 ~ L/D o ! 2 0.45 ~ t/D o ! 0.5
kPa).
where:
6.1.3 Hoop Design:
Do = outside diameter, in. (mm),
6.1.3.1 Normal Service (Structural Corrosion Barrier)— E = lower of hoop tensile modulus or axial tensile modulus,
When the product to be stored in the tank causes little or no psi (kPa),
degradation to the selected resin, the minimum required wall F = design factor = 5,
thickness shall be in accordance with Eq 1. L = design length, in., of a vessel section, taken as the
6.1.3.2 Severe Service (Non-Structural Corrosion largest of the following: (a) the distance between
Barrier)—When the product to be stored in the tank may cause head-tangent lines plus one-third the depth of each
degradation of the resin over time and with the agreement of formed head if there are no stiffening rings (excluding
the purchaser, the minimum required wall thickness of the tank conical heads and sections); (b) the distance between
shall be determined in accordance with Eq 2. cone-to-cylinder junctions for vessels with a cone or
0.036*γ*H*D conical heads if there are no stiffening rings; (c) the
tT 5 (1) greatest center-to-center distance between any two
2*E T *Z
adjacent stiffening rings; (d) the distance from the
or center of the first stiffening ring to the formed head
tangent line plus one-third the depth of the formed head
S tT 5
0.2489*γ*H*D
2*E T *Z D (excluding conical heads and sections), all measured
parallel to the axis of the vessel; (e) the distance from
0.036*γ*H*D the first stiffening ring in the cylinder to the cone-to-
t T 5 t CB1 (2)
2*E FW*Z cylinder junction,
Pa = allowable external pressure, psi (kPa), and
or t = wall thickness, in. (mm) (nominal).

S t T 5 t CB1
0.2489*γ*H*D
2*E FW*Z D 6.2.2 Torispherical Heads—For torispherical heads, com-
pute the allowable external pressure Pa as follows:
where: P a 5 0.36~ E/F !~ t/R o ! 2 (5)
tT = total thickness, in. (mm), where:
tCB = thickness of the corrosion barrier, in. (mm), Ro = outside crown radius of head, in. (mm).
H = fluid head, in. (mm),
γ = specific gravity of fluid, 6.2.2.1 For torispherical heads subject to internal loading,
D = inside diameter of tank, in. (mm). the knucle radius shall be externally reinforced in accordance
ET = hoop tensile modulus of the total laminate (see with Fig. 1. The reinforcement thickness shall be equal to the
Appendix X3), psi (kPa), thickness of the head as calculated above. The thickness of a
EFW = hoop tensile modulus of the filament winding only psi joint overlay near the knucle radius tangent line of a dished
(kPa), and head contributes to the knucle reinforcement.
Z = allowable strain in accordance with 6.1.2.
6.1.3.3 The minimum total thickness of the tank shall be
0.1875 in. (4.76 mm).
NOTE 7—The use of an accepted analytical technique, such as laminated
plate theory (LPT), for design and analysis of composite vessels may
predict stresses, strains, and strength on a ply-by-ply basis, given some
basic lamina properties.
NOTE 8—Tanks for installation outdoors shall be designed for the effect
of wind loading and other environmental factors in accordance with sound
design practice, including tank buckling analysis.
NOTE 9—Tanks with significant physical loadings other than fluid head
(such as side-mounted equipment, violent agitation, unusually high flow
rates, and unsupported bottoms) shall be given special design consider-
ation.
6.2 Design for External Pressure:
6.2.1 Cylindrical Shells—For cylindrical shell, compute the
value 1.73 (Do/t)0.5. If the result is less than L/Do of the
cylinder, compute Pa as follows:
P a 5 2.6~ E/F !~ D o /L !~ t/D o ! 2.5 (3)

If the result is greater than L/Do of the cylinder, compute Pa FIG. 1 Jointed Head Detail
as follows: Sketch A

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

6.2.3 Stiffening Rings—The required moment of inertia, Is,
of a circumferential stiffening ring for cylindrical shells under
external pressure or internal vacuum shall not be less than that
determined by the following formula:
I s 5 PLs D o 3 F/24E h
where:
Do = shell outside diameter, in. (mm),
Eh = hoop tensile modulus, psi (kPa),
F = design factor = 5,
Is = moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4), of stiffener and effective
length of shell,
Ls = one-half of the distance from the centerline of the
stiffening ring to the next line of support on one side,
plus one-half of the centerline distance to the next line
of support on the other side of the stiffening ring, both
measured parallel to the axis of the cylinder, in. A line
of support is the following: (a) a stiffening ring that
meets the requirements of this paragraph; (b) a circum-
ferential line on a head at one-third the depth of the
head from the head tangent line; (c) a cone-to-cylinder
junction, and
P = actual external pressure, psi (kPa).
Typical half-round stiffener sizes and dimensions for differ-
ent values of Is are shown in Fig. 2. Other stiffener profiles
meeting the required moment of inertia may be used.
6.3 Contact Molded Laminates—Portions of the tank, such
as joints, heads, nozzles, and supports, may be fabricated by
contact molding. Contact-molded laminates shall satisfy the
minimum property requirements listed in Specification C582,
as shown in Table 1.
6.3.1 Top Head—The top head, regardless of shape, shall be
able to support a single 250-lbf (113.4 kg) load on a 4 by 4-in.
(100 by 100-mm) area without damage and with a maximum
deflection of 1⁄2 % of the tank diameter at the area the load is
applied.
6.3.1.1 The minimum thickness shall be 0.1876 in. (4.76
mm).
NOTE 10—Support of auxiliary equipment, snow load, or operation
personnel may require additional reinforcement or the use of stiffener ribs,
sandwich construction, or other stiffening systems. Type II tanks may also
require additional reinforcement.
6.3.2 Bottom Head—The minimum thickness for a fully
supported flat-bottom head for Type I tanks shall be as follows:
3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) for 2 to 6 ft (0.6 to 1.8 m) diameter, 1⁄4 in. (6.4
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D3299 − 18
mm) for over 6 to 12 ft (1.8 to 3.7 m) diameter, and 3⁄8 in. (9.5
mm) for over 12 ft (3.7 m) diameter.
6.3.2.1 Deflection of the flat bottom when the tank is empty,
commonly known as “oil canning,” is permissible as long as
(6) the requirements of 6.3.2.4 are met.
6.3.2.2 Bottom heads may be molded integrally with the
straight shell or may be molded separately with a straight
flange length for subsequent joining to shell.
6.3.2.3 The radius of the bottom knuckle of a flat-bottom
tank shall be not less than 1 in. (25 mm) on tanks 4 ft (1.22 m)
or smaller in diameter and 1.5 in. (38 mm) on tanks larger than
4 ft (1.22 m) diameter. The minimum thickness of the radiused
section shall be equal to the combined thickness of the shell
wall and the bottom. The reinforcement of the knuckle-radius
area shall taper so that it is tangent to the flat bottom, and shall
not extend beyond the tangent line onto the tank bottom, unless
methods of manufacture are used that maintain flat-bottom
configuration, and shall extend up the vertical tank wall a
minimum of 8 in. (200 mm) on tanks up to 4 ft (1.22 m) in
diameter, and 12 in. (304 mm) on tanks over 4 ft (1.22 m) in
diameter. The reinforcement shall then taper into the side wall
over an additional length of 4 in. (102 mm) (see Fig. 3).
Methods of manufacture that incorporate stiffening bands as a
means of knuckle stabilization, are permissible alternatives by
agreement between purchaser and fabricator, provided the
fabricator can document the validity of the design.
6.3.2.4 The tank bottom shall not have variations from a
nominally flat plane that would prevent uniform contact of the
entire bottom surface with a properly prepared flat support
surface when the tank is filled with liquid. The bottom laminate
surface shall be a hand-work finish, and shall have no exces-
sive laminate projections that would prevent uniform contact
with a properly prepared flat support surface when the tank is
filled with liquid.
NOTE 11—This requirement is not intended to exclude the use of drain
nozzles which are commonly used at the bottom of the side shell. They do,
however, require foundation cut-outs of the appropriate dimensions for the
nozzle type and size.
6.3.2.5 The thickness of an elevated torispherical dished
bottom, suitable for supporting the weight of the fluid head,
shall be determined by the following equation, but shall not be
less than 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm):
t5
0.885 PR 0.885 ~ 0.036γHR!
S
5
S
or S
0.885 ~ 0.2489γHR!
S D (7)
4
 D3299 − 18

FIG. 2 Penetrating Nozzle Installation

TABLE 1 Minimum Contact-Molded Laminate Physical PropertiesA

NOTE 1— Based on use of woven roving in thickness 1⁄4 in. (6mm) and above.
Property Thickness, in. (mm)
⁄ to 3⁄16 (3.2 to 4.8)
18 ⁄ (6.4)
14 ⁄
5 16 (7.9) ⁄ & up (9.5 and up)
38

Ultimate tensile strength, min, psi (MPa) 9 000 (62.05) 12 000 (82.74) 13 000 (89.63) 15 000 (103.4)
Tensile modulus, psi (MPa) 1 000 000 (6895) 1 300 000 (8963) 1 400 000 (9653) 1 500 000 (10342)
Flexural strength, min, psi (MPa) 16 000 (110.3) 19 000 (131.0) 20 000 (137.9) 22 000 (151.7)
Flexural modulus of elasticity (tangent), min, psi 700 000 (4826) 800 000 (5516) 900 000 (6205) 1 000 000 (6894)
(MPa)
A
Laminates that do not meet the minimum values of Table 1 are considered acceptable, provided they are made to afford the same overall strength that would be obtained
with a laminate meeting the specified thickness.

where: PD
t5 (8)
t = thickness, in. (mm), 2S
S = allowable tensile strength (not to exceed 1⁄10 of ultimate
For Cone Bottom:
strength), psi (kPa) (see 11.6.1),
γ = specific gravity of fluid, PD
t5 (9)
P = pressure, psi (kPa), 2S· cos ~ α !
R = inside radius of dished head, in. (mm), and
H = distance from the top of the fluid to the deepest portion where:
of the bottom, in. (mm). α = 1⁄2 the included (apex) angle of the cone at the centerline
of the head. ( Not greater than 30°)
For Elliptical Bottom Head:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18

FIG. 3 Flat-Bottom Tank Corner Detail

NOTE 12—An alternative method for design of an elevated torispherical
dished bottom is shown in Appendix X2.
6.3.2.6 The torispherical dished-bottom head shall have a
radius of curvature that is equal to or less than the inside
diameter of the tank straight shell, and a minimum knuckle
radius of at least 6 % of the diameter of the head.
6.3.3 Open-Top Tanks—The top edge of open-top tanks
shall have a horizontal reinforcing flange or other means of
reinforcement sufficiently rigid to maintain the shape of the
tank after installation, such as stiffener ribs. The flange shall be
in accordance with Table 2.
6.3.4 Joints:

TABLE 2 Reinforcing Flange for Open-Top TanksA,B

Tank Diameter, ft (m) Flange Dimensions
Flange
L,C ft (m) 2 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 Width ThicknessD
Type
(0.610) (1.219) (1.629) (2.438) (2.743) (3.048) (3.353) (3.658) in. (mm) in. (mm)
2 (0.610) A A A C D E F G A 2 (51) 14⁄ (5)
4 (1.212) A A A C D E F G B 2 (51) 3 ⁄8 (10)
6 (1.829) A A A C D E F G C 2 (51) 1 ⁄2 (13)
8 (2.438) A A A C D E F G D 21⁄2 (64) 3 ⁄8 (10)
10 (3.048) A A B C D E F G E 21⁄2 (64) 1 ⁄2 (13)
12 (3.658) A A B D D E F G F 3 (76) 3 ⁄8 (10)
14 (4.267) A A B D E F F G G 3 (76) 1 ⁄2 (13)
16 (4.877) A A C E E G G H H 3 (76) 5 ⁄8 (16)
18 (5.486) A A C E F G G H J 3 (76) 3 ⁄4 (19)
20 (6.096) A A D E F G H J K 3 (76) 1 (25)
24 (7.315) A B D F G H J K
30 (9.144) A B E G H H K K
36 (10.973) A B E H J K K
40 (12.192) A B E H J K
A
This table is based on handling considerations only. Significant superimposed loads, such as from wind or seismic conditions, should be considered independently.
B
Reinforcement configurations other than a flange may be used if equal or greater stiffness is provided.
C
L = maximum distance from flange to the tank bottom or to the uppermost shell stiffener when used.
D
Flange thickness shall be at least equal to local vessel thickness.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

6.3.4.1 The cured resin surfaces to be overlaid shall be
roughened using 36 or coarser grit abrasive media and shall
extend beyond the lay-up area so that no reinforcement is
applied to an unroughened surface. Surfaces shall be clean and
dry before lay-up. The entire roughened area shall be coated
with paraffinated resin after the joint lay-up is made.
6.3.4.2 Joints between tank-wall sections shall be over-
wound to a thickness as calculated in 6.1.3.2, or they may be
overlaid by a contact-molded laminate. When contact-molded
laminate joints are used to join hoop segments of the straight
shell, or to join the bottom or top head to the shell, the
thickness of the structural joint overlay shall be determined by
the following equation, but shall not be less than 3⁄16 in. (4.8
mm):
t5
PD
2S h
5
0.036γHD
2S h
or S
0.2489γHD
2S h
where:
t = wall thickness, in. (mm),
Sh = allowable hoop tensile strength (not to exceed 1⁄10 of the
ultimate hoop strength), psi (kPa),
P = pressure, psi (kPa),
H = fluid head, in. (mm),
γ = specific gravity of fluid, and
D = inside diameter of tank, in. (mm).
6.3.4.3 The minimum width of the structural joint overlay
for bottom-supported tanks is shown in Table 3.
6.3.4.4 The corrosion-resistant barrier component of the
joint shall be formed in the same manner as the inner surface
and the interior layer (7.1.1 and 7.1.2) and the minimum
D3299 − 18
overlay width shall be 4 in. (100 mm). This internal overlay
shall not be considered a structural element in determining
joint thickness.
6.3.4.5 The thickness of a joint near the bottom tangent line
shall not be considered to contribute to the knuckle reinforce-
ment of 6.3.2.3, but shall be additive thereto.
6.3.5 Fittings:
6.3.5.1 The more common method of fabricating nozzles is
by contact molding both the nozzle neck and flange to the
dimensions shown in Specification D5421 and Table 4. The
corrosion-resistant barrier of the nozzle shall be at least
equivalent to the inner surface and interior layer (7.1.1 and
7.1.2) and shall be fabricated from the same resin as the tank
head or shell to which it is attached.
D (10) 6.3.5.2 Acceptable alternative methods to be agreed upon
between fabricator and purchaser are the use of contact-molded
pipe, filament-wound pipe, in accordance with Specification
D2996, or centrifugally cast pipe, in accordance with Specifi-
cation D2997, joined to a suitable contact-molded (Specifica-
tion D5421), or filament-wound flange (Specification D4024).
The corrosion-resistant barrier of the contact-molded portions
of such nozzles shall be equivalent to the inner surface and
interior layer (7.1.1 and 7.1.2) and shall be fabricated from the
same resin as the tank head or shell to which they are attached.
6.3.5.3 Nozzles 4 in. (100 mm) and smaller shall be
supported by a suitable gusseting technique, using plate gussets
or conical gussets, as shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5. Plate gussets,
where needed, shall be evenly spaced around the nozzle and
are to be added after complete assembly by the nozzle on the

TABLE 3 Minimum Widths of Joint Overlay for Circumferential Joints

H × DA = 60 100 140 180 220 260 300 340 380 420 460 500
minimum
width of
outsideB
in. 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
(mm) (102) (102) (127) (152) (178) (203) (229) (254) (279) (305) (330) (356)
A
where: H = distance from the top of the liquid level to the joint, ft (m) and
D = inside diameter of the tank, ft (m).
B
Axial joint overlay widths shall be twice the width shown in table.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18
TABLE 4 Dimensions for Contact-Molded Flanged Nozzles (25 psi Rating)

Nozzle Inside Minimum Wall Minimum Flange Minimum Hub Minimum Hub Length
Diameter (D), in. (mm) Thickness (tn), Thickness (tf), in. Thickness (th), (h), in. (mm)
in. (mm) (mm) in. (mm)
1 (25) ⁄ (5)
3 16 ⁄ (13)
12 14⁄ (6) 2 (51)
11⁄2 (38) ⁄ (5)
3 16 ⁄ (13)
12 14⁄ (6) 2 (51)
2 (51) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄4 (6) 2 (51)
3 (76) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄4 (6) 2 (51)
4 (102) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄4 (6) 2 (51)
6 (152) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄4 (6) 2 (51)
8 (203) 3⁄16 (5) 9⁄16 (14) 5⁄16 (8) 21⁄2 (57)
10 (254) 3⁄16 (5) 11⁄16 (17) 3⁄8 (10) 23⁄4 (70)
12 (305) 3⁄16 (5) 3⁄4 (19) 3⁄8 (10) 3 (76)
14 (356) 1⁄4 (6) 13⁄16 (21) 7⁄16 (11) 31⁄4 (83)
16 (406) 1⁄4 (6) 7⁄8 (22) 7⁄16 (11) 31⁄2 (89)
18 (457) 1⁄4 (6) 15⁄16 (24) 1⁄2 (13) 33⁄4 (95)
20 (508) 1⁄4 (6) 1 (25) 1⁄2 (13) 4 (102)
24 (610) 1⁄4 (6) 11⁄8 (29) 9⁄16 (14) 41⁄2 (114)

FIG. 4 Plate-Type Gussets

shell. Larger nozzles, subject to superimposed mechanical

forces, require special consideration.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18

NOTE 1—This design does not require lay-up of nozzle neck to exterior of tank wall. Nozzle may be penetrating type or flush type as illustrated.
FIG. 5 Conical Type Gussets

6.3.5.4 Manways installed in top heads may be of the
flanged or nonflanged design, as agreed upon between the
fabricator and purchaser.
6.3.5.5 Side-shell manways shall be installed in accordance
with 7.3.2, 7.3.3, and Fig. 6.
6.3.5.6 Typical manway dimensions are shown in Table 5.
NOTE 13—Tanks over 6 ft (1.8 m) straight-shell height may need both
top- and side-shell opening manways for safety and maintenance consid-
erations.
6.4 Vents:
6.4.1 Vents that discharge freely into the atmosphere must
be provided in all Type I closed-top tanks. Minimum vent size

NOTE 1—This installation method is used only when the nozzle is being installed with an integral conical gusset which would prevent application of
an exterior laminate.
FIG. 6 Nozzle Installation and Cutout Reinforcement Location Alternative

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18
TABLE 5 Typical Dimensions of Manways
NOTE 1—Bolt size equals bolt hole diameter minus 1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
NOTE 2—Gaskets shall be 1⁄8 in. thick full-face elastomeric material having a hardness of Shore A80 ± 5.
Minimum Minimum Diameter of Minimum Thickness of Minimum Manway Diameter of Bolt Number of Bolt Hole Diameter, in.
Size, in. Flange and Cover, in. Flange and Cover, in. Wall Thickness, in. Circle, in. (mm)ABC Bolts (mm)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Pressurized Manway—up to 15 psig
20 (508) 271⁄2 (699) 1 (25.4) 3⁄8 (9.5) 25 (635) 20 ⁄ (19)
34

22 (559) 30 (762) 1 (25.4) 3⁄8 (9.5) 27 (686) 20 ⁄ (19)

34

24 (610) 32 (813) 1 ⁄4 (31.8)

1 3⁄8 (9.5) 291⁄2 (749) 20 ⁄ (19)
34

Manway—Atmospheric Pressure up to 0.5 psig

20 (508) 271⁄2 (699) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 25 (635) 20 ⁄ (12.7)
12

22 (559) 30 (762) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 27 (686) 20 ⁄ (12.7)

12

24 (610) 32 (813) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 291⁄2 (748) 20 1⁄2 (12.7)

A
±0.06 in. (1.5 mm) (ASME/ANSI B 16.5).
B
±0.03 in. (0.76 mm) center to center of adjacent bolt holes (ASME/ANSI B 16.5).
C
±0.06 in. (1.5 mm) eccentricity between bolt circle and center of nozzle.

shall be sufficient to handle the flow displacement of all
combined inlet or outlet nozzles without creating any pressure
above atmospheric, or any vacuum condition.
NOTE 14—Special vent sizing consideration should be given to the
numerous operating situations that could otherwise cause a positive or a
negative pressure in a closed tank. Since overfilling a closed tank with the
vent on the top can cause the tank to be over-pressured, a suitably sized
overflow, properly located, or other appropriate protection, may be
required to prevent over-pressuring the tank.
6.4.2 Type II tanks shall be designed to withstand the
specified positive or negative pressures not to exceed 14 in.
(355.6 mm) of water. Special design consideration must be
given to buckling of tank wall and heads, the hold-down lug
system, and top and bottom knuckle requirements. Fluid level
in the tank is an important consideration in the analysis.
6.4.2.1 Flat-bottom Type II tanks must have all hold-down
lugs properly secured to the foundation, in accordance with the
tank fabricator’s recommendation for the design of the lugs
used and for the tank installation and operation.
6.5 Hold-Down Lugs—Hold-down lugs shall be a require-
ment on all tanks for outdoor service, on all Type II tanks, and
on tanks subject to seismic loads or vibrations. The design
number and attachment of such lugs is the responsibility of the
fabricator, based on the wind, seismic, and other loads speci-
fied by the purchaser.
6.5.1 Hold-down lugs shall be placed on the tank in such a
way that they do not protrude below the bottom surface of the
tank.
6.6 Lifting Lugs—Lifting lugs or other provisions for lifting
tanks (see Appendix X1) shall be provided for tanks over 500
lb (227 kg) in weight.
7. Laminate Construction Requirements
7.1 Structural Tank—The laminate comprising the structural
tank (bottom, cylindrical shell, top head) shall consist of a
corrosion-resistant barrier (also known as “liner”) comprised of
an inner surface and interior layer, and a structural layer.
7.1.1 Inner Surface—The inner surface exposed to the
chemical environment shall be a resin-rich layer 0.010 to 0.020
in. (0.25 to 0.5 mm) thick, reinforced with a suitable chemical-
resistant glass fiber surface mat or with an organic fiber surface
mat, in accordance with 5.2.5.
NOTE 15—This resin-rich inner surface will usually contain less than
20 % by weight of reinforcing material.
7.1.2 Interior Layer—The inner surface layer exposed to the
corrosive environment shall be followed with a layer composed
of resin, reinforced only with noncontinuous glass-fiber strands
applied in a minimum of two plies of chopped-strand mat
equivalent to a total of 3 oz/ft2 (0.92 kg/m2 ). As an alternative,
a minimum of two passes of chopped roving of minimum
length 0.5 in. (13 mm) to a maximum length of 2.0 in. (50.8
mm), shall be applied uniformly to an equivalent weight of 3
oz/ft2 (0.92 kg/m2). Each ply of mat or pass of chopped roving
shall be well-rolled prior to the application of additional
reinforcement. The combined thickness of the inner surface
and interior layer shall not be less than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm).
7.1.2.1 Glass content of the inner liner and the interior layer
combined shall be 27 6 5 % by weight when tested in
accordance with 11.4.
7.1.2.2 The degree of cure of the laminate shall be such as
to exhibit a Barcol hardness on the inner surface of at least
90 % of the resin manufacturer’s minimum specified hardness
for the cured resin, when tested in accordance with 11.5 and
Note 18, Note 19, and Note 20.
7.1.3 Structural Layer:
7.1.3.1 Filament-Wound Structural Layer—Subsequent re-
inforcement shall be continuous-strand roving in accordance
with 5.2.2, that is needed to satisfy the requirements of 6.1.3.2.
The thickness of the filament-wound portion of the tank shell
may be varied with tank height (tapered-wall construction),
provided these requirements are met at any height level. If
additional longitudinal strength is required, the use of other
reinforcements, such as woven fabric, nonwoven unidirectional
or bidirectional fabric, chopped-strand mat, or chopped
strands, may be interspersed in the winding to provide addi-
tional strength. Glass content of this filament-wound structural
layer shall be 50 to 80 % by weight. Only those constructions
evaluated for design properties in 11.6 shall be used.
7.1.3.2 Contact-Molded Structural Layer in Top and Bottom
Heads—Subsequent reinforcement shall be comprised of 1.5

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18
oz/ft2 (0.46 kg/m2) chopped-strand mat or equivalent weight
of chopped roving, or shall be comprised of chopped-strand
mat or chopped roving and such additional number of alter-
nating plies of 24 oz/yd2 (0.81 kg/m2) woven roving 18
oz/yd2 (0.61 kg/m2) nonwoven biaxial fabric to a thickness as
required to meet the physical properties that are used for the
design. The use of woven roving is optional. The designations
of these specific weights of glass reinforcement are for
reference only and may be comprised of other weight combi-
nations of reinforcement materials, when agreed to between the
fabricator and purchaser. Each successive ply or pass of
reinforcement shall be well-rolled prior to the application of
additional reinforcement. Where woven roving is used,
chopped-strand glass reinforcement shall be used as alternating
and final layers. All woven roving, nonwoven fabric, and
surfacing mat shall be overlapped. Laps in subsequent layers
shall be staggered at least 2.25 in. (60 mm) from laps in the
preceding layer.
7.1.3.3 When the outer surface of this structural layer is to
be subject to spillage or a corrosive environment, a resin-rich
layer, in accordance with 7.1.1, shall be applied over the final
layer of reinforcement.
7.1.3.4 Tanks used for outdoor service or subject to ultra-
violet exposure shall incorporate provisions to minimize ultra-
violet degradation. Suitable methods include use of ultraviolet
absorbers, incorporation of pigment of sufficient opacity in the
outer surface resin-rich layer, or use of resins inherently
resistant to ultraviolet degradation. Since pigmentation makes
inspection difficult, it shall be added after inspection or
otherwise by agreement between the purchaser and fabricator.
7.1.3.5 Where air-inhibited resin is exposed to air, full
surface cure of the inner surface shall be obtained by coating
such surface with a coat of resin containing 0.2 to 0.6 %
paraffin wax, having a melting point between 122 and 126°F
(50 and 52°C). Other techniques such as sprayed, wrapped, or
overlaid films are also acceptable methods to attain surface
cure.
7.2 Joints:
7.2.1 The width of the first layer of joint overlay shall be 3
in. (76 mm) minimum. Successive layers shall uniformly
increase in width in that specified in Table 3 to form a smooth
contour laminate that is centered on the joint.
7.2.2 A highly filled resin paste shall be placed in the
crevices between joined pieces, leaving a smooth surface for
lay-up.
7.2.3 The cured resin surfaces of parts to be joined shall be
roughened using 36 or coarser abrasive grit media to expose
glass fibers. This roughened area shall extend beyond the
lay-up areas so that no reinforcement is applied to an unpre-
pared surface. The entire roughened area shall be coated with
paraffinated resin after joint overlay is made.
7.2.4 The interior overlay of a joint shall consist of a
minimum of two plies of 1.5 oz/ft2 (0.46 kg/m2) chopped-
strand mat reinforcement, followed by a resin-rich layer
reinforced with surfacing mat. This overlay shall be the
equivalent of 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 combined, and shall be centered
on the joint. It shall be finished in accordance with 7.1.3.5.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7.2.5 The outer structural overlay of a joint shall be centered
on the joint, fabricated in accordance with 6.3.4.2, and shall be
finished in accordance with 7.1.3.5.
7.3 Fittings and Accessories:
7.3.1 The surfaces of fittings, tank accessories, and the
laminates required for their installation that are exposed to the
corrosive media, shall be constructed in accordance with 7.1.1
and 7.1.2, except for those fitting surfaces which are made by
manufacturing processes other than contact molding (see
6.3.5.2).
7.3.1.1 The cut edges of all laminates exposed to the
chemical environment shall be sealed with a laminate conform-
ing to 7.1.1 and 7.1.2. Where shape, thickness, or other
restrictions preclude covering the edges with the preceding
laminate, such cut edges and any machined flange faces shall
be at least coated with resin. In either case, the resin used shall
be that used in the equipment laminate and finished in
accordance with 7.1.3.5.
7.3.2 Nozzle and Manway Installation—Flanged nozzles
may be installed with the pipe stub flush with the inside of the
tank shell (flush type, Fig. 4) or projecting inside the tank
(penetrating type, Fig. 5).
7.3.2.1 Nozzle Projection—The installed nozzle shall main-
tain a minimum clearance of 3 in. (76 mm) between the back
face of the flange and the exterior of the cutout opening
reinforcement. In addition, this clearance shall not be less than
the shear distance required for proper installation of the nozzle
(see 7.3.3).
7.3.2.2 Cutout Reinforcement Laminate—When a vessel
shell or head is cut in an area bearing hydrostatic pressure, P,
the cutout shall be reinforced on a circular area concentric with
the cutout, as shown in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5. Acceptable patterns
of reinforcement placement are shown in Fig. 2.
7.3.2.3 Cutout Reinforcement Diameter—The outer diam-
eter of the cutout reinforcing laminate, dr, shall not be less than
two times the nominal nozzle diameter. For nozzles less than 6
in. (152 mm) in diameter, the minimum cutout reinforcement
diameter, dr, shall be the nominal nozzle size plus 6 in. (152
mm).
7.3.2.4 Cutout Reinforcement Thickness—The thickness, tr,
of the cutout reinforcement laminate for nozzles installed in
cylindrical shells or dished heads shall be determined as
follows:
t r 5 PDK/2S r (11)
where:
K = 1.0 for nozzles 6 in. (152 mm) diameter and larger,
K = d/(dr − d) for nozzles less than 6 in. (152 mm) diameter,
P = hydrostatic pressure at the point of nozzle installation,
psi (kPa),
D = inside diameter of tank, in. (mm),
Sr = allowable tensile stress (not to exceed 1⁄10 of the
ultimate strength of the cutout reinforcing laminate);
see Table 1,
d = nominal nozzle diameter, in. (mm), and
d r = cutout reinforcement diameter, in. (mm).
This thickness, tr, may be applied to the outer or inner
surfaces, or be divided between them as shown in Fig. 6.
 D3299 − 18
NOTE 16—When tr is calculated to be 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) or less, it can be
disregarded, as the strength requirements will be met by t0 (see Figs. 2 and
7).
7.3.2.5 When reinforcing materials are cut to facilitate
placement around an installed nozzle, joints in successive
reinforcing layers should be staggered to avoid overlapping
and (on cylindrical shell installations) shall not be placed so
they parallel the axis of the tank. The intent of these require-
ments is to avoid orienting joints in reinforcing layers perpen-
dicular to the maximum load-bearing direction (circumferen-
tial).
7.3.3 Nozzle Installation Laminates—Nozzle installation
laminate dimensions are shown in Fig. 2 and Fig. 7. Installation
laminate placements are shown in Fig. 6. The all-interior
installation laminate placement is used only when the nozzle
being installed has an integral conical gusset preventing
application of an exterior laminate.
7.3.3.1 Installation Laminate Thickness—The inside and
outside installation thicknesses (ti and to) combined shall be at
least as thick as the nozzle neck.
7.3.3.2 Inside Installation Laminate Construction—The in-
side installation laminate shall be constructed using only
noncontinuous glass reinforcements, except that when woven
roving is included to strengthen the laminate, it shall be
FIG. 7 Flush Nozzle Installation
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
preceded and followed by a layer of 11⁄2 –oz (0.458 kg/m2) mat
and then covered with a laminate equivalent to 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.
When the inside laminate consists only of a corrosion barrier,
the length of the laminate, hr shall be a minimum of 3 in. and
hi shall be the lesser of 3 in. (76mm) or the nominal radius of
the nozzle.
7.3.3.3 Installation Laminate Lengths—The length of the
outside laminate, ho, and the inside laminate, hi, shall each be
equal to the shear length, hs, given in Table 6 based on the
thickness of the individual laminates.
7.3.3.4 In nozzle installations where the installation overlay
is installed before the cutout reinforcement has fully cured, that
portion of the overlay which extends onto the tank shell may be
considered to become a part of the cutout reinforcement
laminate if the installation laminate length is extended to the
required cutout reinforcement diameter, dr.
7.3.3.5 Monolithic Installation—The total bond thickness,
tm, shall be the greater of either the cutout reinforcement
thickness, tr, or the outside bond thickness, to.
7.3.4 Gussets—If gussets (either plate or conical) are used to
stiffen the installed nozzle, gusset installation laminates are in
addition to the requirements of 7.3.3. Typical plate type and
conical type gussets are shown in Fig. 6 and Fig. 7. Other
 D3299 − 18
TABLE 6 Shear Bond Length (see Figs. 2 and 7)
NOTE 1—When internal overlay serves only as a corrosion barrier, the total shear length must be placed on the exterior overlay.
Inch-Pound Units
Overlay thickness, in. ⁄
14 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
38 ⁄
7 16 1 ⁄2 9⁄16 ⁄
58 ⁄
11 16 ⁄
34 ⁄
78 1
hA (shear length), in. 3 3 3 31⁄2 4 41⁄2 5 5 1 ⁄2 6 7 8
SI Units
Overall thickness, mm 6.4 8 9.5 11 13 14 16 17.5 19 22 25.4
h (shear length), mm 76 76 76 90 100 114 127 140 152 178 203
A
h = total shear length (ho+ hi) (Fig. 4).

gusseted nozzle installations may be used as agreed upon
between fabricator and purchaser.
7.3.5 Location of Cutouts on the Shell—For cutouts made
within 6 in. (152 mm) of the knuckle radius area of a head or
within 6 in. (152 mm) of a shell-to-shell or shell-to-head joint,
additional hole-cutout reinforcement is required, unless the
area of installation is at a point within the vessel that is not
exposed to hydrostatic pressure.
7.3.6 All nozzles and manways shall be installed in accor-
dance with Fig. 2 and Fig. 7. The interior overlay shall present
the same corrosion resistance to the fluid as specified in 7.1.1
and 7.1.2.
8.5 The standard orientation of flanges shall provide bolt
holes straddling the normal centerlines of the tank. Bolt holes
of flanges located on the tank top or bottom, shall straddle the
principal centerline of the vessel or lines parallel to it as shown
in Fig. 8.
8.6 An alternative method of orientation of flanges on the
tank top or bottom, with the bolt holes straddling the radial
centerlines, shall be by agreement between the purchaser and
fabricator.
8.7 The location of nozzles shall be held to the tolerance
shown in Fig. 8.

9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance

8. Dimensions and Tolerances
8.1 Standard tank diameters, based on internal measure-
ments with the tank in the vertical position, are listed in Table
7. Tolerance on the inside diameter, including out-of-
roundness, shall be 61 %.
8.2 Where employed, shell taper shall be additive to the
figure used for the tank diameter, unless otherwise specified by
the manufacturer and accepted by the purchaser. The shell taper
shall not exceed 1⁄2 ° per side.
8.3 Tolerance on overall tank height shall be 1⁄2 %, but shall
not exceed 61⁄2 in. (12.7 mm).
8.4 Nozzle flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of
the pipe within tolerances shown in Fig. 8, and shall be flat
within 61⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) through 18 in. (457 mm) nozzle size
and 61⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) for large nozzle sizes. Tolerances on
installation are shown in Fig. 8.
9.1 The minimum acceptable level for workmanship and
finish of the finished laminate shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Section 9 of Specification C582.
NOTE 17—A representative laminate sample may be used for determi-
nation of an acceptable surface finish and acceptable level of visual
imperfections.
10. Requirements
10.1 Degree of Cure—Degree of cure of the laminate shall
be found by determining the Barcol hardness as indicated in
11.5.
NOTE 18—A useful technique to check the cure of a non-molded surface
of a polyester resin is as follows: Rub a few drops of acetone on the
laminate surface until it evaporates. If the surface becomes softened or
tacky, it is and indication of under cure.
NOTE 19—The use of organic reinforcing materials may reduce the
Barcol hardness readings without necessarily indicating undercure.
NOTE 20—Barcol hardness values may vary when tests are conducted at
temperatures that differ from those shown in 11.2.

TABLE 7 Standard Tank Inside Diameter 11. Test Methods

in. mm 11.1 Conditioning—Condition the specimens prior to test at
24 (610) 70 to 77°F (23 6 2°C) for not less than 40 h in accordance with
30 (762)
36 (914)
Procedure A of Methods D618, for those tests when condition-
42 (1067) ing is required, and in all cases of disagreement.
48 (1219)
54 (1372) 11.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in a laboratory
60 (1524) temperature of 70 to 77°F (23 6 2°C), unless otherwise
66 (1676) specified.
72 (1829)
84 (2134) 11.3 Chemical Resistance of Resin—Determine the chemi-
96 (2438)
108 (2743)
cal resistance of the resin in accordance with Practice C581.
120 (3048) 11.4 Glass Content—Determine the glass content of the
132 (3353)
144 (3658) inner liner and interior layer combined. Obtain a test sample by
carefully splitting these combined areas from the structural

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18

Nozzle Inside Diameter Permissible Angular Deviation, −0

Up to 10 in. (254mm) 1°
10 in. (254mm) and larger 1⁄ 2 °

NOTE 1—Larger tolerances may be agreed upon between purchaser and fabricator for tanks over 12 ft in diameter.
FIG. 8 Nozzle Location and Orientation Tolerances

layer. The glass content of the separated sample shall be
determined in accordance with Test Method D2584.
11.5 Degree of Cure—Degree of cure of the laminate shall
be found by determining the Barcol hardness using Barcol
Model No. GYZJ934.1. Instrument calibration and method
shall be as described in Test Method D2583.
11.6 Physical Properties:
11.6.1 Contact Molded Laminates—Where required, physi-
cal properties of contact-molded laminates shall be determined
in accordance with the test methods listed in Specification
C582.
11.6.2 Filament-Wound Laminates—Verify design stresses
and moduli of elasticity of filament-wound tanks by manufac-
turer’s test data based upon:
11.6.2.1 Strain (that is, modulus) measurements of small-
diameter filament-wound cylinders made to the same laminate
construction, helix angle, glass content, liner construction, and
resin as the full-size tank, in accordance with Test Method
D1599 with restrained end closures that prevent the application
of axial tensile stress, or:
11.6.2.2 Strain-gage (hoop-elongation) tests on tanks filled
with water.
NOTE 21—Practical test methods on samples cut from filament-wound
specimens are not available to cover all cases of testing filament-wound
laminates. Other test methods for determination of hoop properties may be
used when the fabricator can verify the validity of the selected method.
12. Product Marking
12.1 The tank shall be marked to identify the producer, date
of manufacture, capacity, all resins used, inner surface
reinforcements, specific gravity, design temperature, and the
words “Pressure-Atmospheric,” or the operating pressure and
vacuum, shall be imprinted on the tank.
12.2 Additional marking requirements may be needed for
compliance with local codes. It is the responsibility of the
purchaser/user to specify additional labeling requirements for

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18
the vessel, such as liquid content, operating and safety
instructions, and any other warnings necessitated by local
codes.
13. Packaging and Package Marking
13.1 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
14. Shipping
14.1 Since there are variations in the design of support
cradles, lifting- and hold-down lugs, and methods of shipping,
the manufacturer’s special instructions shall be followed in all
cases.
14.2 Tanks shall be mounted on cradles if shipping
horizontally, or on a suitable skid or pallet if shipping in the
vertical position. The cradles or skid shall be padded and
secured to the bed of the vehicle in such a manner that will
prevent damage to the tank with normal handling. The tank
shall be secured to the cradles or skid so that there can be no
movement of the tank in relation to the skid or cradle under
normal handling.
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
X1.1 Handling
X1.1.1 The following normal precautions should be taken in
handling the tank at the destination:
X1.1.1.1 Proper rigging practices should be observed at all
times. Hoisting equipment operators should attach a guide line
to prevent tank from swinging out of control.
X1.1.1.2 The tank should not be dropped or allowed to
strike any other object. Damage caused by such action may
result in cracking the inner corrosion-resistant liner, as well as
the structural portion of the tank.
X1.1.1.3 The tank should not be rolled or slid on rough
ground. Never set a tank upon a fitting or other protrusion that
may be attached to the shell.
X1.1.1.4 In working around the tank, care should be exer-
cised to prevent tools, scaffolding, or other objects from
striking the tank or being dropped on, or inside the tank.
Soft-soled shoes should be worn by workmen entering the
tank. Where ladders are used (inside and outside), all points of
contact with the tank should be cushioned to protect the surface
from scratching or point loading.
X1.1.1.5 The use of a crane is recommended, both in lifting
and positioning the tank. The clearance between the head
shackle of the crane and the tank should be at least equal to the
span between the lugs used for lifting. If this is not possible, a
spreader bar must be used to approximate the same angle in
lifting.
X1.1.1.6 Where tanks are not equipped with lifting lugs, it
is recommended that such tanks be lifted with canvas or rope
slings (over 1 in. (25 mm) in diameter) positioned near each
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
15
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
14.3 A suitable means shall be provided at the open end of
open-top tanks to keep the loaded tank rigid.
14.4 Tanks shall be loaded to provide at least 2 in. (51 mm)
clearance between the tank (including fittings) and the bulk-
heads or bed of the vehicle.
14.5 When two or more tanks are shipped on the same
vehicle, sufficient clearance or padding shall be provided
between tanks to prevent contact in transit.
14.6 Upon arrival at the destination, the purchaser shall be
responsible for inspection for damage in transit. If damage has
occurred, a claim should be filed with the carrier by the
purchaser, and the supplier should be notified. If the damage is
not first repaired by the fabricator prior to the tank being put
into service, the purchaser accepts all future responsibility for
the effects of tank failure resulting from such damage.
15. Keywords
15.1 above ground; atmospheric; filament wound; polyester;
tank; vinylester
end of the tank. Tanks can be moved by positioning fork-lift
trucks on either side of the tank with forks padded.
X1.1.1.7 Under no conditions should chains or cables be
allowed to contact a tank. Full protection must be provided
when using chains or cables. Do not attach lifting devices to
any fitting other than lifting lugs.
X1.1.1.8 When storing the tank on the ground prior to
installation, it should be placed on the shipping cradles and tied
down so that it cannot roll, due to wind or sloping ground.
X1.2 Installation
X1.2.1 Vertical flat bottom tanks should be installed on a
base provided continuous support and having sufficient
strength to support the weight of the tank full of liquid with
negligible deflection. Full support of the bottom should be
obtained by one of the following:
X1.2.1.1 If the surface of the pad and the bottom of the tank
are flat and have no projections from the plane surface, the tank
may be set on such a surface.
X1.2.1.2 If the conditions of X1.2.1.1 cannot be met,
methods of support recommended by the manufacturer should
be used.
X1.2.2 If the tank has a bottom drain, a hole should be
provided in the pad with sufficient clearance so that the drain
and its flange will not contact the base at any point.
X1.2.3 Erection of Vertical Tank:
X1.2.3.1 Tanks should be handled with a crane, using the
lifting lugs provided. Do not attempt to lift tank by attaching to
 D3299 − 18
other fittings. Prior to hoisting the top end, a suitable protection X1.2.3.3 Valves, controllers, or other heavy items connected
pad of material should be placed under the bottom pivot point to tank nozzle should be independently supported.
of tank so that as the tank rises, the strain is taken on the pad. X1.2.3.4 When agitators, mixers, or cooling/heating coils
The hoist wire should be connected to the top lifting lugs, and are to be installed, special design considerations must be used.
the tank should be raised carefully, using guide ropes to
prevent sudden swinging.
X1.2.3.2 All hold-down lugs supplied should be utilized to
secure the tank to its pad. Hold-down lugs should be grouted or
shimmied to prevent excessive loads being transferred to the
tank shell.

X2. DISHED BOTTOM

X2.1 An alternative method for calculating the thickness of

an elevated dished torispherical bottom head is as follows
(refer to 6.3.4 and see Fig. X2.1):

tc 5
PRc 0.036γ HRc
2S
5
2S S or
0.2489γHRc ,
2S D (X2.1)

ti 5
PRc W 0.036γHRc W
2S
5
2S S or
0.2489γ HRc W
2S D (X2.2)

where:
tc = head thickness in area of the crown radius, in. (mm),
ti = head thickness in area of the knuckle radius, in. (mm),
S = allowable stress, psi (kPa),
γ = specific gravity of fluid,
P = pressure, psi (kPa),
Rc = crown radius of dished head, in. (m),
H = fluid head, in. (mm),
W = stress intensification factor =

S D~
1
4
31 =R c /r i , !
and
ri = knuckle radius of the dished head, in. (mm).

FIG. X2.1 Thickness of Dished-Bottom Head

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
16
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3299 − 18

X3. EXPRESSION OF HOOP TENSILE MODULUS OF A LAMINATE

X3.1 The hoop tensile modulus of a laminate, composed E FW = hoop modulus of filament winding,
partially of filament winding and partially of a contact molded ECB = modulus of corrosion barrier,
corrosion barrier, is expressed by: tL = corrosion barrier thickness,
tFW = filament winding thickness,
E FW*t FW E CB*t CB
ET 5 1 (X3.1) tT = total thickness, = tCB + tFW
tT tT

where: This expression will give a good approximation of total

laminate modulus for values of EFW of 3.0–6.0 × 106 psi
ET = hoop modulus of total laminate, (20.7–41.4 GPa).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:21 EDT 2020
17
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3517 − 19

Standard Specification for

“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pressure Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3517; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers machine-made fiberglass pipe,
8 in. (200 mm) through 156 in. (4000 mm), intended for use in
water conveyance systems which operate at internal gage
pressures of 450 psi (3103 kPa) or less. Both glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-
reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
The standard is suited primarily for pipes to be installed in
buried applications, although it may be used to the extent
applicable for other installations such as, but not limited to,
jacking, tunnel lining and slip-lining rehabilitation of existing
pipelines.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information purposes only.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally
approved in 1976. Last previous edition approved 2014 as D3517 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D3517-19.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33/C33M Specification for Concrete Aggregates
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4161 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flex-
ible Elastomeric Seals
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
ing Plastic Pipe
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
2.2 ISO Standard:
ISO 1172 Textile Glass Reinforced Plastics—Determination
of Loss on Ignition3
2.3 NSF Standard:
Standard No. 61 Drinking Water System Components4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 and Terminology F412 and abbreviations are in
accordance with Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indi-
cated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass-
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin. The composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular, or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes. Thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.2.2 flexible joint —a joint that is capable of axial displace-
ment or angular rotation, or both.
3.2.3 liner—a resin layer, with or without filler, or
reinforcement, or both, forming the interior surface of the pipe.
3.2.4 qualification test—one or more tests used to prove the
design of a product. Not a routine quality control test.
3.2.5 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—a fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
3.2.6 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—a fiber-
glass pipe without aggregate.
3.2.7 rigid joint —a joint that is not capable of axial
displacement or angular rotation.
3.2.8 surface layer—a resin layer, with or without filler, or
reinforcements, or both, applied to the exterior surface of the
pipe structural wall.
4. Classification
4.1 General—This specification covers fiberglass pressure
pipe defined by raw materials in the structural wall (type) and
liner, surface layer material (grade), operating pressure (class),
and pipe stiffness. Table 1 lists the types, liners, grades, classes,
and stiffnesses that are covered.
NOTE 3—All possible combinations of types, liners, grades, classes, and
stiffnesses may not be commercially available. Additional types, liners,
grades, and stiffnesses may be added as they become commercially
available. The purchaser should determine for himself or consult with the
manufacturer for the proper class, type, liner, grade and stiffness of pipe
to be used under the installation and operating conditions that will exist for
the project in which the pipe is to be used.
4.2 Designation Requirements—The pipe materials designa-
tion code shall consist of the standard designation, ASTM
D3517, followed by type, liner, and grade in Arabic numerals,
class by the letter C and two or three Arabic numerals, and pipe
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
4
Available from NSF International, P.O. Box 130140, 789 N. Dixboro Rd., Ann
Arbor, MI 48113-0140, http://www.nsf.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
stiffness by a capital letter. Table 1 presents a summary of the
designation requirements. Thus, a complete material code shall
consist of ASTM D3517. . . three numerals, C . . . and two or
three numerals, and a capital letter.
NOTE 4—Examples of the designation are as follows: (1) ASTM
D3517-1-1-3-C50-A for glass-fiber reinforced aggregate and polyester
resin mortar pipe with a reinforced thermoset liner and an unreinforced
polyester resin and sand surface layer, for operation at 50 psi (345 kPa),
and having a minimum pipe stiffness of 9 psi (62 kPa), (2) ASTM
D3517-4-2-6-C200-C for glass-fiber reinforced epoxy resin pipe with a
non-reinforced thermoset liner, no surface layer, for operation at 200 psi
(1380 kPa), and having a minimum pipe stiffness of 36 psi (248 kPa).
NOTE 5—Although the “Form and Style for ASTM Standards” manual
requires that the type classification be roman numerals, it is recognized
that companies have stencil cutting equipment for this style of type, and
it is therefore acceptable to mark the product type in arabic numbers.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 General—The thermosetting resins, glass fiber
reinforcements, fillers, and other materials, when combined as
a composite structure, shall produce piping products that meet
the performance requirements of this specification.
5.2 Wall Composition—The basic structural wall composi-
tion shall consist of thermosetting resin, glass fiber
reinforcement, and, if used, an aggregate filler.
5.2.1 Resin—A thermosetting polyester or epoxy resin, with
or without filler.
5.2.2 Reinforcement—A commercial grade of glass fibers
compatible with the resin used.
5.2.3 Aggregate—A siliceous sand conforming to the re-
quirements of Specification C33/C33M, except that the re-
quirements for gradation shall not apply.
NOTE 6—Fiberglass pipe intended for use in the transport of potable
water should be evaluated and certified as safe for this purpose by a testing
agency acceptable to the local health authority. The evaluation should be
in accordance with requirements for chemical extraction, taste, and odor
that are no less restrictive than those included in National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) Standard No. 61. The seal or mark of the laboratory
making the evaluation should be included on the fiberglass pipe.
5.3 Liner and Surface Layers—Liner or surface layer, or
both, when incorporated into or onto the pipe, shall meet the
structural requirements of this specification.
5.4 Joints—The pipe shall have a joining system that shall
provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition. A
particular type of joint may be restrained or unrestrained and
flexible or rigid depending on the specific configuration and
design conditions.
5.4.1 Unrestrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding
internal pressure but not longitudinal tensile loads.
5.4.1.1 Coupling or Bell-and-Spigot Gasket Joints, with a
groove either on the spigot or in the bell to retain an
elastomeric gasket that shall be the sole element of the joint to
provide watertightness. For typical joint details see Fig. 1.
5.4.1.2 Mechanical Coupling Joint, with elastomeric seals.
5.4.1.3 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay.
5.4.1.4 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring.
5.4.2 Restrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding inter-
nal pressure and longitudinal tensile loads..
5.4.2.1 Joints similar to those in 5.4.1.1 with supplemental
restraining elements.
Downloaded/printed by
TABLE 1 General Designation Requirements for Fiberglass Pressure Pipe
Desig-
nation Property Cell Limits (Note 1)
Order

1 Type 1 2 3 4
glass-fiber-reinforced ther- glass-fiber-reinforced ther- glass-fiber-reinforced ther- glass-fiber-reinforced ther-
mosetting polyester (Note 2) resin mosetting polyester (Note 2) resin mosetting epoxy resin mor- mosetting epoxy resin
mortar (RPMP polyester (Note 2)) (RTRP polyester (Note 2)) tar (RPMP epoxy) (RTRP epoxy)
2 Liner 1 2 3 4
reinforced thermoset liner non-reinforced thermoset liner thermoplastic liner no liner

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
3 Grade 1 2 3 4 5 6

3
polyester (Note 2) polyester (Note 2) polyester (Note 2) epoxy resin sur- epoxy resin sur- no surface
resin surface layer—reinforced resin surface resin and sand surface face layer— face layer—non- layer
layer—non- layer nonreinforced reinforced reinforced
reinforced
D3517 − 19

4 Class (Note 3) C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450

5 Pipe Stiffness A B C D
psi (kPa) 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496)

NOTE 1—The cell-type format provides the means of identification and specification of piping materials. This cell-type format, however, is subject to misapplication since unobtainable property
combinations can be selected if the user is not familiar with non-commercially available products. The manufacturer should be consulted.
NOTE 2—For the purposes of this standard, polyester includes vinyl ester resins.
NOTE 3— Based on operating pressure in psig (numerals).

Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
FIG. 1 Typical Joints
FIG. 2 Beam Strength—Test Setup
5.4.2.2 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.3 Bell-and-Spigot, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.4 Bell-and-Spigot, adhesive-bonded joint: Three types
of adhesive-bonded joints are permitted by this standard as
follows:
(1) Tapered bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with a tapered socket for use in conjunction with a
tapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(2) Straight bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with an untapered socket for use in conjunction with
an untapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(3) Tapered bell and straight spigot, an adhesive joint that
is manufactured with a tapered socket for use with an unta-
pered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
5.4.2.5 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring
5.4.2.6 Mechanical Coupling, an elastomeric sealed cou-
pling with a supplemental restraining elements.
5.4.2.7 Threaded Joints.
NOTE 7—Other types of joints may be added as they become commer-
cially available.
NOTE 8—Restrained joints typically increase service loads on the pipe
to greater than those experienced with unrestrained joints. The purchaser
is cautioned to take into consideration all conditions that may be
encountered in the anticipated service and to consult the manufacturer
regarding the suitability of a particular type and class of pipe for service
with restrained joint systems.
5.5 Gaskets—Elastomeric gaskets when used with this pipe
shall conform to the requirements of Specification F477.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship:
6.1.1 Each pipe shall be free from all defects including
indentations, delaminations, bubbles, pinholes, cracks, pits,
blisters, foreign inclusions, and resin-starved areas that due to
their nature, degree, or extent, detrimentally affect the strength
and serviceability of the pipe. The pipe shall be as uniform as
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.1.2 The inside surface of each pipe shall be free of bulges,
dents, ridges, and other defects that result in a variation of
inside diameter of more than 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) from that obtained
on adjacent unaffected portions of the surface. No glass fiber
reinforcement shall penetrate the interior surface of the pipe
wall.
6.1.3 Joint sealing surfaces shall be free of dents, gouges,
and other surface irregularities that will affect the integrity of
the joints.
6.2 Dimensions:
6.2.1 Pipe Diameters—Pipe shall be supplied in the nominal
diameters shown in Table 2 or Table 3. The pipe diameter
tolerances shall be as shown in Table 2 or Table 3, when
measured in accordance with 8.1.1.
6.2.2 Lengths—Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of
10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 ft. (3.05, 6.10, 9.15, 12.19, and 18.29 m).
The actual laying length shall be the nominal length 62 in.
(651 mm), when measured in accordance with 8.1.2. At least
90 % of the total footage of any one size and class, excluding
special order lengths, shall be furnished in the nominal lengths
specified by the purchaser. Random lengths, if furnished, shall
not vary from the nominal lengths by more than 5 ft (1.53 m)
or 25 %, whichever is less.
6.2.3 Wall Thickness—The average wall thickness of the
pipe shall not be less than the nominal wall thickness published
in the manufacturer’s literature current at the time of purchase,
and the minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be less
than 87.5 % of the nominal wall thickness when measured in
accordance with 8.1.3.
6.2.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—All points around each end
of a pipe unit shall fall within 61⁄4 in. (66.4 mm) or 60.5 %
of the nominal diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater, to a
plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe, when
measured in accordance with 8.1.4.
6.3 Soundness—Unless otherwise agreed upon between pur-
chaser and supplier, test each length of pipe up to 96 in. (2400
mm) diameter hydrostatically without leakage or cracking, at
 D3517 − 19
TABLE 2 Nominal Inside Diameters (ID) and Tolerances Inside Diameter Control Pipe
Inch-Pound Units SI Units

Nominal Nominal Metric ID RangeB , mm ToleranceB on

Tolerance, in. Declared ID,
DiameterA , in. DiameterB , mm Minimum Maximum mm

8 ±0.25 200 196 204 ±1.5

10 ±0.25 250 246 255 ±1.5
12 ±0.25 300 296 306 ±1.8
14 ±0.25 400 396 408 ±2.4
15 ±0.25 500 496 510 ±3.0
16 ±0.25 600 595 612 ±3.6
18 ±0.25 700 695 714 ±4.2
20 ±0.25 800 795 816 ±4.2
21 ±0.25 900 895 918 ±4.2
24 ±0.25 1000 995 1020 ±5.0
27 ±0.27 1200 1195 1220 ±5.0
30 ±0.30 1400 1395 1420 ±5.0
33 ±0.33 1600 1595 1620 ±5.0
36 ±0.36 1800 1795 1820 ±5.0
39 ±0.39 2000 1995 2020 ±5.0
42 ±0.42 (2200) 2195 2220 ±6.0
45 ±0.45 2400 2395 2420 ±6.0
48 ±0.48 (2600) 2595 2620 ±6.0
51 ±0.51 2800 2795 2820 ±6.0
54 ±0.54 (3000) 2995 3020 ±6.0
60 ±0.60 3200 3195 3220 ±7.0
66 ±0.66 (3400) 3395 3420 ±7.0
72 ±0.72 3600 3595 3620 ±7.0
78 ±0.78 (3800) 3795 3820 ±7.0
84 ±0.84 4000 3995 4020 ±7.0
90 ±0.90 ... ... ... ...
96 ±0.96 ... ... ... ...
102 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
108 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
114 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
120 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
132 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
144 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
156 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
A
Inside diameters other than those shown shall be permitted by agreement between purchaser and supplier.
B
Values are taken from International Standards Organization documents. Parentheses indicate non-preferred diameters.

the internal hydrostatic proof pressures specified for the
applicable class in Table 4, when tested in accordance with 8.2.
For sizes over 96 in. (2400 mm), the frequency of hydrostatic
leak tests shall be as agreed upon by purchaser and supplier.
6.4 Hydrostatic Design Basis:
6.4.1 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure—The pressure
classes shall be based on long-term hydrostatic pressure data
obtained in accordance with 8.3 and categorized in accordance
with Table 5. Pressure classes are based on extrapolated
strengths at 50 years. For pipe subjected to longitudinal loads
or circumferential bending, the effect of these conditions on the
hydrostatic design pressure, classification of the pipe must be
considered.
6.4.2 Control Requirements—Test pipe specimens periodi-
cally in accordance with Practice D2992.
NOTE 9—Hydrostatic design basis (HDB-extrapolated value at 50
years) determined in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D2992, may
be substituted for the Procedure B evaluation required by 8.3. It is
generally accepted that the Procedure A HDB value times 3 is equivalent
to the Procedure B HDB value.
specimen evidenced by surface cracks. At deflection level B
per Table 7, there shall be no indication of structural damage as
evidenced by interlaminar separation, separation of the liner or
surface layer (if incorporated) from the structural wall, tensile
failure of the glass fiber reinforcement, and fracture or buck-
ling of the pipe wall.
NOTE 10—This is a visual observation (made with the unaided eye) for
quality control purposes only and should not be considered a simulated
service test. Table 7 values are based on an in-use long-term deflection
limit of 5 % and provide an appropriate uniform safety margin for all pipe
stiffnesses. Since the pipe stiffness values (F/∆y) shown in Table 6 vary,
the percent deflection of the pipe under a given set of installation
conditions will not be constant for all pipes. To avoid possible
misapplication, take care to analyze all conditions which might affect
performance of the installed pipe.
6.5.1 For other pipe stiffness levels, appropriate values for
Level A and Level B deflections (Table 7) may be computed as
follows:
Level A at new PS 5 S 72
new PS D 0.33

~9! (1)

Level B at new PS 5 new Level A÷0.6

6.5 Stiffness—Each length of pipe shall have sufficient
strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (F/∆y) specified 6.5.2 Since products may have use limits of other than 5 %
in Table 6, when tested in accordance with 8.4. At deflection long-term deflection, Level A and Level B deflections (Table 7)
level A per Table 7, there shall be no visible damage in the test may be proportionally adjusted to maintain equivalent in-use

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
TABLE 3 Nominal Outside Diameters (OD) and Tolerances
NOTE 1—The external diameter of the pipe at the spigots shall be within the tolerances given in the table, and the manufacturer shall declare his
allowable maximum and minimum spigot diameters. Some pipes are manufactured such that the entire pipe meets the OD tolerances while other pipes
meet the tolerances at the spigots, in which case, if such pipes are cut (shortened) the ends may need to be calibrated to meet the tolerances.

Metric Ductile Iron Pipe Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower, International O.D., Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower,
Pipe Size, mm Equivalent, mm mm mm mm mm mm
200 220.0 +1.0 0.0 ... ... ...
250 271.8 +1.0 -0.2 ... ... ...
300 323.8 +1.0 -0.3 310 +1.0 -1.0
350 375.7 +1.0 -0.3 361 +1.0 -1.2
400 426.6 +1.0 -0.3 412 +1.0 -1.4
450 477.6 +1.0 -0.4 463 +1.0 -1.6
500 529.5 +1.0 -0.4 514 +1.0 -1.8
600 632.5 +1.0 -0.5 616 +1.0 -2.0
700 718 +1.0 -2.2
800 820 +1.0 -2.4
900 924 +1.0 -2.6
1000 1026 +2.0 -2.6
1200 1229 +2.0 -2.6
1400 1434 +2.0 -2.8
1600 1638 +2.0 -2.8
1800 1842 +2.0 -3.0
2000 2046 +2.0 -3.0
2200 2250 +2.0 -3.2
2400 2453 +2.0 -3.4
2600 2658 +2.0 -3.6
2800 2861 +2.0 -3.8
3000 3066 +2.0 -4.0
3200 3270 +2.0 -4.2
3400 3474 +2.0 -4.4
3600 3678 +2.0 -4.6
3800 3882 +2.0 -4.8
4000 4086 +2.0 -5.0

safety margins. For example, a 4 % long-term limiting deflec-
tion would result in a 20 % reduction of Level A and Level B
deflections, while a 6 % limiting deflection would result in a
20 % increase in Level A and Level B deflection values.
However, minimum values for Level A and Level B deflections
shall be equivalent to strains of 0.6 and 1.0 % respectively (as
computed by Eq X1.4 in Appendix X1 of Specification
D3262).
6.5.3 For high stiffness pipes, 5 % deflection will likely be
above the use limit and the adjusted level A test deflection. For
very high stiffness pipes, 5 % deflection may also be greater
than the adjusted level B test deflection. In such cases, the
pipes may be damaged or fail prior to determining the pipe
stiffness at 5 % deflection. Therefore, it is permitted to set the
pipe stiffness test deflection equal to the adjusted level A

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
TABLE 4 Hydrostatic-Pressure Test 6.6.1 Alternative Requirements—When agreed upon be-
Hydrostatic Proof Pressure tween the purchaser and the supplier, the minimum hoop-
Pressure Pipe Diameters Pipe Diameters tensile strength shall be as determined in accordance with
Class up to and >54 in. up to and
Including 54 in. Including 96 in. 8.5.1.
(psi) psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
C50 100 (689) 75 (517)
6.7 Joint Tightness—All joints shall meet the laboratory
C100 200 (1379) 150 (1034) performance requirements, of Specification D4161. Unre-
C150 300 (2068) 225 (1551) strained joints shall be tested with a fixed end closure condition
C200 400 (2757) 300 (2068)
C250 500 (3447) 375 (2585)
and restrained joints shall be tested with a free end closure
C300 600 (4136) 450 (3102) condition. Rigid joints shall be exempt from angular deflection
C350 700 (4826) 525 (3619) requirements of D4161. Rigid joints typically include butt
C400 800 (5515) 600 (4136)
C450 900 (6205) 675 (4654)
joints with laminated overlay, bell-and-spigot joints with lami-
nated overlay, flanged, bell-and-spigot adhesive bonded and
threaded.
TABLE 5 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure Categories 6.8 Longitudinal Strength:
Minimum Calculated Values of 6.8.1 Beam Strength—For pipe sizes up to 27 in. the pipe
Class Long-Term Hydrostatic
Pressure gage, psi (kPa)
shall withstand, without failure, the beam loads specified in
C50 90 (621)
Table 9, when tested in accordance with 8.6.1. For pipe sizes
C100 180 (1241) larger than 27 in., and alternatively for smaller sizes, adequate
C150 270 (1862) beam strength is demonstrated by tension and compression
C200 360 (2482)
C250 450 (3103)
tests conducted in accordance with 8.6.2 and 8.6.3,
C300 540 (3722) respectively, for pipe wall specimens oriented in the longitu-
C350 630 (4343) dinal direction, using the minimum tensile and compressive
C400 720 (4963)
C450 810 (5584)
strength specified in Table 9.
6.8.2 Longitudinal Tensile Strength—All pipe manufactured
under this specification shall have a minimum axial tensile
TABLE 6 Minimum Stiffness at 5 % Deflection elongation at failure of 0.25% and meet or exceed the longi-
Pipe Stiffness, psi (kPa) tudinal tensile strength shown for each size and class in Table
Nominal
Diameter, Designation 10, when tested in accordance with 8.6.2.
in. A B C D NOTE 12—The values listed in Table 10 are the minimum criteria for
8 ... ... 36 (248) 72 (496) products made to this standard. The values may not be indicative of the
10 ... 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496) axial strength of some products, or of the axial strength required by some
12 and greater 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496) installation conditions and joint configurations.
6.8.3 Conformance to the requirements of 6.8.1 shall satisfy
TABLE 7 Ring Deflection Without Damage or Structural Failure
the requirements of 6.8.2 for those pipe sizes and classes where
the minimum longitudinal tensile strength values of Table 9 are
Nominal Pipe
Stiffness, psi equal to the values of Table 10. Conformance to the require-
9 18 36 72 ments of 6.8.2 shall satisfy the longitudinal tensile strength
Level A 18 % 15 % 12 % 9% requirements of 6.8.1.
Level B 30 % 25 % 20 % 15 %
7. Sampling
7.1 Lot—Unless otherwise agreed upon between the pur-
chaser and the supplier, one lot shall consist of 100 lengths of
each type, grade, and size of pipe produced.
deflection, but not greater than 5 %. See Note 11 for additional
information and further clarification. 7.2 Production Tests—Select one pipe at random from each
lot and take one specimen from the pipe barrel to determine
NOTE 11—Depending upon the product modulus and allowable ring conformance of the material to the workmanship, dimensional,
bending strain, this will likely begin affecting pipes with stiffness between and stiffness, and strength requirements of 6.1, 6.2, 6.5, and
200 and 400 psi. For example, a pipe with pipe stiffness of PS360 may 6.6, respectively. Unless otherwise agreed upon between pur-
have a use limit of 4.3 %, an adjusted level A deflection of 4.5 % and an
chaser and supplier, all pipes (up to 96-in. (2400-mm) diam-
adjusted level B deflection of 7.5 %. Therefore, the new pipe stiffness test
deflection would be 4.5 %. Another possible product with a pipe stiffness eter) shall meet the soundness requirements of 6.3.
of PS900 may have a use limit of 2.8 %, an adjusted level A deflection of 7.3 Qualification Tests—Sampling for qualification tests
2.7 % and an adjusted level B deflection of 4.5%. Therefore, the new pipe (see section 3.2.4) is not required unless otherwise agreed upon
stiffness test deflection would be 2.7 %.
between the purchaser and the supplier. Qualification tests, for
6.6 Hoop-Tensile Strength—All pipe manufactured under which a certification and test report shall be furnished when
this specification shall meet or exceed the hoop-tensile strength requested by the purchaser include the following:
shown for each size and class in Table 8, when tested in 7.3.1 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
accordance with 8.5. 7.3.2 Joint-Tightness Test (See 6.7).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
TABLE 8 Minimum Hoop Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall
NOTE 1—The values in this table are equal to 2PD, where P is the pressure class in psi and D is the nominal diameter in inches.
Inch-Pound Units
Hoop Tensile Strength, lbf/in. Width
Nominal
Pressure Class
Diameter
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
(in.)
(psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
8 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200
10 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
12 1200 2400 3600 4800 6000 7200 8400 9600 10 800
14 1400 2800 4200 5600 7000 8400 9800 11 200 12 600
15 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10 500 12 000 13 500
16 1600 3200 4800 6400 8000 9600 11 200 12 800 14 400
18 1800 3600 5400 7200 9000 10 800 12 600 14 400 16 200
20 2000 4000 6000 8000 10 000 12 000 14 000 16 000 18 000
21 2100 4200 6300 8400 10 500 12 600 14 700 16 800 18 900
24 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 000 14 400 16 800 19 200 21 600
27 2700 5400 8100 10 800 13 500 16 200 18 900 21 600 24 300
30 3000 6000 9000 12 000 15 000 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000
33 3300 6600 9900 13 200 16 500 19 800 23 100 26 400 29 700
36 3600 7200 10 800 14 400 18 000 21 600 25 200 28 800 32 400
39 3900 7800 11 700 15 600 19 500 23 400 27 300 31 200 35 100
42 4200 8400 12 600 16 800 21 000 25 200 29 400 33 600 37 800
45 4500 9000 13 500 18 000 22 500 27 000 31 500 36 000 40 500
48 4800 9600 14 400 19 200 24 000 28 800 33 600 38 400 43 200
51 5100 10 200 15 300 20 400 25 500 30 600 35 700 40 800 45 900
54 5400 10 800 16 200 21 600 27 000 32 400 37 800 43 200 48 600
60 6000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000
66 6600 13 200 19 800 26 400 33 000 39 600 46 200 52 800 59 400
72 7200 14 400 21 600 28 800 36 000 43 200 50 400 57 600 64 800
78 7800 15 600 23 400 31 200 39 000 46 800 54 600 62 400 70 200
84 8400 16 800 25 200 33 600 42 000 50 400 58 800 67 200 75 600
90 9000 18 000 27 000 36 000 45 000 54 000 63 000 72 000 81 000
96 9600 19 200 28 800 38 400 48 000 57 600 67 200 76 800 86 400
102 10 200 20 400 30 600 40 800 51 000 61 200 71 400 81 600 91 800
108 10 800 21 600 32 400 43 200 54 000 64 800 75 600 86 400 97 200
114 11 400 22 800 34 200 45 600 57 000 68 400 79 800 91 200 10 2600
120 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 72 000 84 000 96 000 108 000
132 13 200 26 400 39 600 52 800 66 000 79 200 92 400 105 600 118 800
144 14 400 28 800 43 200 57 600 72 000 86 400 100 800 115 200 129 600
156 15 600 31 200 46 800 62 400 78 000 93 600 109 200 124 800 140 400
SI Units
Hoop Tensile Strength N/mm Width
Pressure
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
Class
Nominal
345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
Diameter
(kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
(mm)
200 138 276 414 552 690 828 966 1104 1241
250 173 345 517 690 862 1035 1207 1380 1552
300 207 413 620 827 1034 1241 1448 1655 1862
350 242 482 724 965 1207 1448 1690 1931 2172
375 259 517 776 1034 1293 1552 1811 2069 2327
400 276 551 827 1103 1379 1655 1931 2207 2482
450 311 620 931 1241 1552 1862 2173 2483 2793
500 345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
550 380 758 1137 1517 1896 2276 2655 3035 3413
600 414 827 1241 1655 2069 2483 2897 3311 3724
700 483 965 1448 1931 2414 2897 3380 3863 4344
750 518 1034 1551 2069 2586 3104 3621 4139 4655
850 587 1171 1758 2344 2931 3517 4104 4690 5275
900 621 1240 1861 2482 3103 3724 4345 4966 5585
1000 690 1378 2068 2758 3448 4138 4828 5518 6206
1100 759 1516 2275 3034 3793 4552 5311 6070 6827
1150 794 1585 2378 3172 3965 4759 5552 6346 7137
1200 828 1654 2482 3310 4138 4966 5794 6622 7447
1300 897 1791 2688 3585 4482 5379 6276 7173 8068
1400 966 1929 2895 3861 4827 5793 6759 7725 8688
1500 1035 2067 3102 4137 5172 6207 7242 8277 9309
1700 1173 2343 3516 4689 5862 7035 8208 9381 10 550
1800 1242 2480 3722 4964 6206 7448 8690 9932 11 171
2000 1380 2756 4136 5516 6896 8276 9656 11 036 12 412
2200 1518 3032 4550 6068 7586 9104 10 622 12 140 13 653
2300 1587 3169 4756 6343 7930 9517 11 104 12 691 14 274
2400 1656 3307 4963 6619 8275 9931 11 587 13 243 14 894
2600 1794 3583 5377 7171 8965 10 759 12 553 14 347 16 136

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19

2800 1932 3858 5790 7722 9654 11 586 13 518 15 450 17 377
2900 2001 3996 5997 7998 9999 12 000 14 001 16 002 17 997
3000 2070 4134 6204 8274 10 344 12 414 14 484 16 554 18 618
3400 2346 4685 7031 9377 11 723 14 069 16 415 18 761 21 100
3600 2484 4961 7445 9929 12 413 14 897 17 381 19 865 22 342
4000 2760 5512 8272 11 032 13 792 16 552 19 312 22 072 24 824

TABLE 9 Beam-Strength Test Loads 8. Test Methods

Minimum
Minimum
Longitudinal 8.1 Dimensions:
Longitudinal
Nominal Beam Load
Tensile Strength,
Compressive 8.1.1 Diameters:
Diameter, (P) Strength,
in.
per Unit of
per Unit of 8.1.1.1 Inside Diameter—Take inside diameter measure-
Circumference
Circumference ments at a point approximately 6 in. (152 mm) from the end of
lbf (kN) lbf/in. (kN/m) lbf/in. (kN/m) the pipe section using a steel tape or an inside micrometer with
8 800 (3.6) 580 (102) 580 (102) graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Make two 90° opposing
10 1200 (5.3) 580 (102) 580 (102) measurements at each point of measurement and average the
12 1600 (7.1) 580 (102) 580 (102)
14 2200 (9.8) 580 (102) 580 (102) readings.
15 2600 (11.6) 580 (102) 580 (102) 8.1.1.2 Outside Diameter—Determine in accordance with
16 3000 (13.3) 580 (102) 580 (102)
18 4000 (17.8) 580 (102) 580 (102)
Test Method D3567.
20 4400 (19.6) 580 (102) 580 (102) 8.1.2 Length—Measure with a steel tape or gage having
21 5000 (22.2) 580 (102) 580 (102) graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Lay the tape or gage on
24 6400 (28.5) 580 (102) 580 (102)
27 8000 (35.6) 580 (102) 580 (102) or inside the pipe and measure the overall laying length of the
30 ... ... 580 (102) 580 (102) pipe.
33 ... ... 640 (111) 640 (111)
36 ... ... 700 (122) 700 (122)
8.1.3 Wall Thickness—Determine in accordance with Test
39 ... ... 780 (137) 780 (137) Method D3567.
42 ... ... 800 (140) 800 (140) 8.1.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—Rotate the pipe on a man-
45 ... ... 860 (150) 860 (150)
48 ... ... 920 (161) 920 (161) drel or trunnions and measure the runout of the ends with a dial
51 ... ... 980 (171) 980 (171) indicator. The total indicated reading is equal to twice the
54 ... ... 1040 (182) 1040 (182) distance from a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
60 ... ... 1140 (200) 1140 (200)
66 ... ... 1260 (220) 1260 (220) the pipe. Alternatively, when squareness of pipe ends is rigidly
72 ... ... 1360 (238) 1360 (238) fixed by tooling, the tooling may be verified and reinspected at
78 ... ... 1480 (260) 1480 (260) frequent enough intervals to ensure that the squareness of the
84 ... ... 1600 (280) 1600 (280)
90 ... ... 1720 (301) 1720 (301) pipe ends is maintained within tolerance.
96 ... ... 1840 (322) 1840 (322)
102 ... ... 1940 (340) 1940 (340) 8.2 Soundness—Determine soundness by a hydrostatic
108 ... ... 2060 (360) 2060 (360) proof test procedure. Place the pipe in a hydrostatic pressure
114 ... ... 2180 (382) 2180 (382) testing machine that seals the ends and exerts no end loads. Fill
120 ... ... 2280 (400) 2280 (400)
132 ... ... 2520 (440) 2520 (440) the pipe with water, expelling all air, and apply internal water
144 ... ... 2740 (480) 2740 (480) pressure at a uniform rate not to exceed 50 psi (345 kPa)/s until
156 ... ... 2964 (519) 2964 (519) the Table 4 test pressure specified in accordance with 6.3 is
reached. Maintain this pressure for a minimum of 30 s. The
pipe shall show no visual signs of weeping, leakage, or fracture
of the structural wall.
7.3.3 Longitudinal-Strength Test, including: 8.3 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure—Determine the long-
term hydrostatic pressure at 50 years in accordance with
7.3.3.1 Beam strength and
Procedure B of Practice D2992, with the following exceptions
7.3.3.2 Longitudinal tensile strength. permitted:
7.4 Control Tests—The following test is considered a con- 8.3.1 Test at ambient temperatures between 50 and 110°F
trol requirement and shall be performed as agreed upon (10 and 43.5°C) and report the temperature range experienced
between the purchaser and the supplier: during the tests.
7.4.1 Soundness Test—102-in. (2600-mm) diameter pipe NOTE 13—Tests indicate no significant effects on long-term hydrostatic
and larger. pressure within the ambient temperature range specified.
7.4.2 Perform the sampling and testing for the control 8.3.2 Determine the hydrostatic design basis for the glass
requirements for hydrostatic design basis at least once every fiber reinforcement in accordance with the method in Annex
two years. A1.
7.5 For individual orders conduct only those additional tests 8.3.3 Calculate the long-term hydrostatic pressure and cat-
and numbers of tests specifically agreed upon between the egorize by class in accordance with Table 5. A1.6 explains how
purchaser and the supplier. to calculate the long-term hydrostatic pressure.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
TABLE 10 Longitudinal Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall
Inch-Pound Units
Longitudinal Tensile Strength lbf/in. of Circumference
Nominal
Pressure Class
Diameter
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
(in.)
(psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
8 580 580 580 580 580 624 700 800 900
10 580 580 580 580 650 780 875 1000 1125
12 580 580 580 624 780 936 1050 1200 1350
14 580 580 609 728 910 1092 1225 1400 1575
15 580 580 653 780 975 1170 1313 1500 1688
16 580 580 696 832 1040 1248 1400 1600 1800
18 580 580 783 936 1170 1404 1575 1800 2025
20 580 580 870 1040 1300 1560 1750 2000 2250
21 580 609 914 1092 1365 1638 1838 2100 2363
24 580 696 1044 1248 1560 1800 2100 2400 2700
27 580 783 1175 1404 1688 2025 2363 2700 3038
30 580 870 1305 1560 1875 2250 2625 3000 3375
33 627 957 1436 1716 2063 2475 2888 3300 3713
36 684 1044 1566 1800 2250 2700 3150 3600 4050
39 741 1131 1697 1872 2340 2808 3276 3744 4212
42 798 1218 1827 2016 2520 3024 3528 4032 4536
45 855 1305 1958 2160 2700 3240 3780 4320 4860
48 912 1392 2088 2304 2880 3456 4032 4608 5184
51 969 1479 2219 2448 3060 3672 4284 4896 5508
54 1026 1566 2349 2592 3240 3726 4347 4968 5589
60 1140 1740 2520 2880 3600 4140 4830 5520 6210
66 1254 1914 2673 3036 3795 4554 5313 5808 6534
72 1368 2088 2916 3312 4140 4968 5796 6336 7128
78 1482 2106 3159 3432 4290 5148 6006 6864 7722
84 1596 2268 3402 3696 4620 5292 6174 7056 7938
90 1710 2430 3645 3960 4950 5670 6615 7380 8303
96 1824 2592 3888 4224 5280 6048 7056 7680 8640
102 1938 2754 4131 4488 5610 6426 7497 8160 9180
108 2052 2916 4374 4752 5940 6804 7938 8640 9720
114 2166 3078 4617 5016 6270 7182 8379 9120 10 260
120 2280 3240 4860 5280 6600 7560 8820 9600 10 800
132 2508 3564 5346 5808 7260 8316 9702 10 560 11 880
144 2736 3888 5832 6336 7920 9072 10 584 11 520 12 960
156 2964 4212 6318 6864 8580 9828 11 466 12 480 14 040
SI Units
Longitudinal Tensile Strength N/mm of Circumference
Pressure
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
Class
Nominal
345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
Diameter
(kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
(mm)
200 102 102 102 102 102 109 123 140 158
250 102 102 102 102 114 137 153 175 197
300 102 102 102 109 137 164 184 210 236
350 102 102 107 127 159 191 215 245 276
375 102 102 114 137 171 205 230 263 296
400 102 102 122 146 182 219 245 280 315
450 102 102 137 164 205 246 276 315 355
500 102 102 152 182 228 273 306 350 394
550 102 107 160 191 239 287 322 368 414
600 102 122 183 219 273 315 368 420 473
700 102 137 206 246 296 355 414 473 532
750 102 152 229 273 328 394 460 525 591
850 110 168 251 301 361 433 506 578 650
900 120 183 274 315 394 473 552 630 709
1000 130 198 297 328 410 492 574 656 738
1100 140 213 320 353 441 530 618 706 794
1150 150 229 343 378 473 567 662 757 851
1200 160 244 366 403 504 605 706 807 908
1300 170 259 388 429 536 643 750 857 965
1400 180 274 411 454 567 652 761 870 979
1500 200 305 441 504 630 725 846 967 1087
1700 220 335 468 532 665 797 930 1017 1144
1800 240 366 511 580 725 870 1015 1110 1248
2000 260 369 553 601 751 902 1052 1202 1352
2200 279 397 596 647 809 927 1081 1236 1390
2300 299 426 638 693 867 993 1158 1292 1454
2400 319 454 681 740 925 1059 1236 1345 1513
2600 339 482 723 786 982 1125 1313 1429 1608
2800 359 511 766 832 1040 1192 1390 1513 1702
2900 379 539 809 878 1098 1258 1467 1597 1797

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19

3000 399 567 851 925 1156 1324 1545 1681 1891
3400 439 624 936 1017 1271 1456 1699 1849 2080
3600 479 681 1021 1110 1387 1589 1853 2017 2270
4000 519 738 1106 1202 1503 1721 2008 2185 2459

8.4 Stiffness—Determine the pipe stiffness (F/∆y) at 5 %
deflection or the adjusted level determined in accordance with
6.5.3 for the specimen, using the apparatus and procedure of
Test Method D2412, with the following exceptions permitted:
8.4.1 Measure the wall thickness to the nearest 0.01 in.
(0.25 mm).
8.4.2 Load the specimen to 5 % deflection or the adjusted
level determined in accordance with 6.5.3 and record the load.
Then load the specimen to deflection level A per Table 7 or to
the adjusted level A deflection determined in accordance with
6.5.1 and 6.5.2 and examine the specimen for visible damage
evidenced by surface cracks. Then load the specimen to
deflection level B per Table 7 or to the adjusted level B
deflection determined in accordance with 6.5.1 and 6.5.2 and
examine for evidence of structural damage, as evidenced by
interlaminar separation, separation of the liner or surface layer
(if incorporated) from the structural wall, tensile failure of the
glass fiber reinforcement, and fracture or buckling of the pipe
wall. Calculate the pipe stiffness at 5 % deflection.
8.4.3 For production testing, test only one specimen to
determine the pipe stiffness.
8.4.4 The maximum specimen length shall be 12 in. (305
mm), or the length necessary to include stiffening ribs, if they
are used, whichever is greater.
NOTE 14—As an alternative to determining the pipe stiffness using the
apparatus and procedure of Test Method D2412 the supplier may submit
to the purchaser for approval a test method and test evaluation on Test
Method D790, accounting for the substitution of curved test specimens
and measurement of stiffness at 5 % deflection.
8.5 Hoop-Tensile Strength—Determine the hoop-tensile
strength by Test Method D2290, except that the sections on
Apparatus and Test Specimens may be modified to suit the size
of specimens to be tested, and the maximum load rate may not
exceed 0.10 in/min. Alternatively, Test Method D638 may be
employed. Specimen width may be increased for pipe wall
thicknesses greater than 0.55 in. (14 mm). Means may be
provided to minimize the bending moment imposed during the
test. Cut three specimens from the test sample. Record the load
to fail each specimen and determine the specimen width as
close to the break as possible. Use the measured width and
failure load to calculate the hoop-tensile strength.
8.5.1 Alternative Minimum Hoop-Tensile Strength
Requirement—As an alternative, the minimum hoop-tensile
strength values may be determined as follows:
F 5 ~ S i /S r !~ Pr!
where:
F = required minimum hoop tensile strength, lbf/in.,
Si = initial design hoop tensile stress, psi,
Sr = hoop tensile stress at rated operating pressure, psi,
P = rated operating pressure class, psi, and
r = inside radius of pipe, in.
NOTE 15—A value of F less than 4 Pr results in a lower factor of safety
on short term loading than required by the values in Table 8.
The value for Si should be established by considering the
variations in glass reinforcement strength and manufacturing
methods, but in any case should not be less than the 95 % lower
confidence value on stress at 0.1 h, as determined by the
manufacturer’s testing carried out in accordance with 6.4. The
value for Sr should be established from the manufacturer’s
hydrostatic design basis.
8.6 Longitudinal Strength:
8.6.1 Beam Strength—Place a 20-ft (6.1-m) nominal length
of pipe on saddles at each end. Hold the ends of the pipe round
during the test. Apply beam load for the diameter of pipe
shown in Table 9 simultaneously to the pipe through two
saddles located at the third points of the pipe (see Fig. 2). The
loads shall be maintained for not less than 10 min with no
evidence of failure. The testing apparatus shall be designed to
minimize stress concentrations at the loading points.
8.6.2 Longitudinal Tensile Strength—Determine in accor-
dance with Test Method D638, except the provision for
maximum thickness shall not apply.
8.6.3 Longitudinal Compressive Strength—Determine in ac-
cordance with Test Method D695.
9. Packaging and Package Marking
9.1 Mark each length of pipe that meets or is part of a lot
that meets the requirements of this specification at least once in
letters not less than 1⁄2 in. (12 mm) in height and of bold-type
style in a color and type that remains legible under normal
handling and installation procedures. The marking shall in-
clude the nominal pipe size, manufacturer’s name or
trademark, this ASTM specification number: D3517, type,
liner, grade, class, and stiffness in accordance with the desig-
nation code in 4.2.
9.2 Prepare pipe for commercial shipment in such a way as
to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers.
9.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
(2)
10. Keywords
10.1 fiberglass pipe; hydrostatic design basis; pressure pipe;
RPMP; RTRP

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. ALTERNATIVE HYDROSTATIC DESIGN METHOD

A1.1 The following symbols are used: P 1 5 2 ~ t h sinθ !~ HDB! /D

The pipe is categorized in accordance with Table A1.1.
NOTE A1.2—The calculated result P1 may be multiplied by the factor
S = tensile stress in the glass fiber reinforcement in the 6.895 to convert from psig to kPa.
hoop orientation corrected for the helix angle,
psi, A1.6 Pressure Class Rating—The classes shown in Table
P = internal pressure, psig, A1.1 are based on the intended working pressure in psig for
P1 = long-term hydrostatic pressure, psig, commonly encountered conditions of water service. The pur-
D = nominal inside pipe diameter, in., chaser should determine the class of pipe most suitable to the
th = actual cross-sectional area of glass-fiber reinforce- installation and operating conditions that will exist on the
ment applied around the circumference of the pipe, project on which the pipe is to be used by multiplying the
in.2/in., values of P1 from Table A1.1 by a service (design) factor
θ = plane angle between hoop-oriented reinforcement selected for the application on the basis of two general groups
and longitudinal axis of the pipe (helix angle), of conditions. The first group considers the manufacturing and
and testing variables, specifically normal variations in the material,
HDB = hydrostatic-design basis, psi. manufacture, dimensions, good handling techniques, and in the
evaluation procedures in this method. The second group
A1.2 The hydrostatic design is based on the estimated
considers the application or use, specifically installation,
tensile stress of the reinforcement in the wall of the pipe in the
environment, temperature, hazard involved, life expectancy
circumferential (hoop) orientation that will cause failure after
desired, and the degree of reliability selected.
50 years of continuously applied pressure as described in
NOTE A1.3—It is not the intent of this standard to give service (design)
Procedure B of Practice D2992. Strength requirements are
factors. The service (design) factor should be selected by the design
calculated using the strength of hoop-oriented glass reinforce- engineer after evaluating fully the service conditions and the engineering
ment only, corrected for the helix angle of the fibers. properties of the specific plastic pipe material under consideration.
Recommended service (design) factors will not be developed or issued by
A1.3 Hoop-Stress Calculation is derived from the ISO ASTM.
equation for hoop stress, as follows:
S 5 PD/2 ~ t h sinθ !
This stress is used as the ordinate (long-term strength) in
calculating the regression line and lower confidence limit in TABLE A1.1 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure Categories
accordance with Annexes A1 and A3 of Practice D2992. Minimum Calculated Values of
Class Long-Term Hydrostatic
NOTE A1.1—The calculated result for S may be multiplied by the factor
Pressure gage, psi (kPa)
6.895 to convert from psi to kPa.
C50 90 (621)
A1.4 Hydrostatic-Design Basis—The value of S is deter- C100 180 (1241)
C150 270 (1862)
mined by extrapolation of the regression line to or 50 years in C200 360 (2482)
accordance with Practice D2992. C250 450 (3103)
C300 540 (3722)
A1.5 Hydrostatic-Design Basis Categories—Convert the C350 630 (4343)
C400 720 (4963)
value of the HDB to internal hydrostatic pressure in psig as C450 810 (5584)
follows:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3517 − 19
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. INSTALLATION

X1.1 These specifications are material performance and
purchase specifications only and do not include requirements
for engineering design, pressure surges, bedding, backfill or the
relationship between earth cover load, and the strength of the
pipe. However, experience has shown that successful perfor-
mance of this product depends upon the proper type of bedding
and backfill, pipe characteristics, and care in the field construc-
tion work. The purchaser of the fiberglass pressure pipe
specified herein is cautioned that he must properly correlate the
field requirements with the pipe requirements and provide
adequate inspection at the job site.

X2. RECOMMENDED METHODS FOR DETERMINING GLASS CONTENT

X2.1 Determine glass content as follows: X2.1.2 As a process control, by weight of the glass fiber
X2.1.1 By ignition loss analysis in accordance with Test reinforcement applied by machine into the pipe structure.
Method D2584 or ISO 1172.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3517 – 14) that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) Added 6.5.3 and Note 11. (2) Revised 7.2.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:25 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3567 − 17

Standard Practice for

Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and Fittings1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3567; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Intensity Instrument (Withdrawn 2008)3

1.1 This practice covers the determination of outside
diameter, inside diameter, total wall thickness, reinforced wall
thickness, liner thickness (where applicable), and length di-
mensions of “fiberglass” (glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting
resin) pipe. Included are procedures for measuring tapered
dimensions and taper angles for pipe intended to be joined by
tapered socket fittings, and procedures for gaging internal and
external threads.
1.2 This practice also includes procedures for determining
dimensions for fiberglass pipe fittings.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for
information only.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D4166 Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Non-
magnetic Materials by Means of a Digital Magnetic
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic Piping
Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2017. Published September 2017. Originally
approved in 1977. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D3567 – 97(2011).
DOI: 10.1520/D3567-17.
2 4
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
2.2 ANSI Standard:
B 2.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dryseal)4
2.3 API Standard:
API 5B Threading, Gaging, and Thread Inspection of
Casing, Tubing, and Line Pipe Threads5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.1.1 deviation from straightness—the maximum deviation
from a straight line exhibited by a pipe specimen divided by the
length of the specimen.
3.1.2 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass-
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin; the composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular, or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.1.3 laying length of fittings—the actual increase in the
length of a line afforded by the fitting when installed.
3.1.4 liner and exterior surface layer thicknesses—the inner
and outer portions of the wall used to enhance chemical and
water resistance; they may have a different composition than
the reinforced wall and the thicknesses of these internal and
external surfaces may be measured when their boundary limits
are visually indentifiable and if they are each at least 0.005 in.
(0.10 mm) in thickness.
3.1.5 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—a fiber-
glass pipe without aggregate.
3.1.6 reinforced wall thickness—the total wall thickness
minus the liner or exterior surface layer thickness, or both.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This practice provides for determining the physical
dimensions of fiberglass pipe and fittings. This practice is
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
5
Available from American Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L. St., NW,
Washington, DC 20005-4070, http://api-ec.api.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:30 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3567 − 17
suitable for determination of dimensional compliance with
product specifications.
5. Conditioning
5.1 Test conditions for measurements shall be in accordance
with appropriate product specification(s).
6. Total Wall Thickness—Pipe and Fittings
6.1 Apparatus—Calipers, optical comparators described in
Section 7, ultrasonic thickness meters, or other gages such as
the digital magnetic intensity instrument described by Test
Method D4166, with graduations of 0.01 in. (0.025 mm) or less
that produces a thickness measuring accuracy of within 5 %,
may be used for measuring thicknesses of 0.20 in. (5.1 mm) or
greater. For thicknesses less than the above, use a micrometer
or other gage with graduations of 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) and an
accuracy of within 5 %. Use a cylindrical tubing micrometer or
spherical anvil micrometer with a radius end where the
diameter of the pipe is small and a measuring error of 5 % or
less would be exceeded without its use.
6.2 Procedure—Make a series of at least four readings at
random selected locations, approximately equally spaced
around the circumference. The location of the measurements
should be taken some distance in from the pipe ends if the end
thickness would be expected to be greater than other regions of
the pipe.
NOTE 2—Take care to ensure that the measurements are not made at
either a tapered or belled pipe end.
NOTE 3—Take care to avoid misalignment of the anvil with the
longitudinal axis of the specimen when using cylindrical anvil microm-
eters that may bridge specimen surface curvature or indentations and give
falsely high readings.
6.3 Calculation—Calculate the average total wall thickness
of the four or more thicknesses taken.
6.4 Report—The report shall include the following:
6.4.1 Observed minimum and maximum wall thickness, and
6.4.2 Calculated average total wall thickness.
7. Reinforced Wall Thickness and Liner Thicknesses—
Pipe and Fittings
7.1 Sampling—When performed on finished pipe or fittings,
this procedure will usually destroy or damage the part. When
this procedure is to be used for quality control or sampling, it
is intended for use on samples taken from the excess of the
fabrication, such as the ends of pipe or fittings, or both. If the
procedure requires destructively testing the pipe or fittings, the
requirements shall be agreed upon between the buyer and the
seller.
7.2 Apparatus—An optical scale comparator with a 7 to
10X magnification and having a reticle graduated as follows:
7.2.1 For products with liner measurements less than 0.050
in. (1.27 mm): 0.001-in. (0.025-mm) divisions or not more than
10 % of liner thickness, whichever is smaller.
7.2.2 For products with liner measurements 0.050 in. (1.27
mm) or larger: 0.005-in. (0.13-mm) divisions or smaller.
7.3 Procedure:
7.3.1 Surface Preparation—At the desired cross section of
the pipe or fitting, make a sawcut at right angles to the inside
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:30 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
surface. Remove burrs and sand the cut surface smooth, using
200-grit (or finer) sandpaper. Thoroughly wash the sanded
surface with clean water to remove resin and glass dust, then
blot dry.
7.3.2 Reinforced Wall and Liner Thickness—Measure the
cut surface of the pipe or fitting by setting a major scale
division of the reticle at the apparent interface between the
liner and reinforced wall. Make 6 measurements 60° apart as
follows:
7.3.2.1 Read toward the outer surface of the pipe or fitting
wall and observe the reinforced wall thickness.
7.3.2.2 Read toward the inner surface of the pipe or fitting
wall and observe the liner thickness.
7.3.3 Surface Layer Thickness—If the product specification
requires surface layer measurement, set a major scale division
at the apparent interface between the coating and the reinforced
wall. Make 6 measurements 60° apart by reading toward the
outer surface of the pipe or fitting and observing the surface
layer thickness.
7.3.4 Nonreinforced Layers, within the reinforced wall or
combination reinforcement layers. If the product involves
unreinforced layers or multiple reinforcement layers of differ-
ent types, the amount and type of measurements shall be
agreed upon between the buyer and the seller.
7.3.4.1 The thickness of these layers shall be determined by
setting a major scale division of the reticle at the apparent
interface and reading toward the next apparent interface. Make
6 measurements 60° apart.
7.4 Calculations—Calculate the average reinforced wall
thickness and liner thickness by averaging the values obtained.
7.5 Report—The report shall include the following:
7.5.1 Observed minimum and maximum reinforced wall
thickness,
7.5.2 Calculated average reinforced wall thickness,
7.5.3 Observed minimum and maximum liner thickness,
7.5.4 Calculated average liner thickness, and
7.5.5 Observations of exterior surface layer, nonreinforced
layers, or other reinforced layer measurements within the
reinforced wall when measured.
8. Average Outside Diameter Measurements
NOTE 4—The need for measurements and the location of the measure-
ments should be evaluated since the outside surface of the pipe may not
be smooth. Uneven surfaces or burrs will influence the accuracy of the
outside diameter measurements.
8.1 Apparatus—A circumferential vernier wrap tape shall be
used to determine the average outside diameter. The tape
should be accurate to within 6 0.02 in. (6 0.4 mm) on the
circumference measured.
8.2 Procedure—Individually measure and record the outside
diameter end-sealing surfaces or special OD control surfaces.
Make the OD measurements near each end and at three
intermediate locations. Take the OD measurement by placing
the circumferential wrap tape around the pipe, making sure it is
at right angles to the pipe axis. Average all five readings.
8.2.1 Calculate the diameter as follows:
D 5 C OD/π (1)

where:
COD = average of the readings.
NOTE 5—For larger diameter piping, the weight of the piping may cause
significant distortion. Take care in measurement and evaluation of the
significance of this measurement. If significant product distortion due to
weight occurs, the pipe may be measured when in the vertical position.
Alternatively, the diameter may be measured as a reference from the
mandril from which the pipe was made as follows:
d 5 ~ C M /π12 3 wall thickness!
where:
CM = outside circumference of the mandril, in. (mm) and the wall
thickness is as described in 6.3. The measurement intervals are as
described in 8.2.
8.3 Report—When outside diameter measurements are
appropriate, the report shall include the minimum, maximum,
and average outside diameter.
9. Out-of-Round Measurements
9.1 Apparatus—A caliper, micrometer, or similar instrument
capable of measuring the OD within 6 0.25 % of nominal shall
be used.
9.2 Procedure—Using a micrometer or vernier calipers, take
a series of outside diameter measurements at intervals spaced
as in 8.2. Determine the maximum and minimum diameter by
three measurements 120° apart at each interval.
NOTE 6—For large diameter piping, the weight of the piping may cause
significant distortion. Take care in measurement and evaluation of the
significance of this measurement. If significant product distortion due to
weight occurs, the pipe may be measured when in the vertical position.
Alternatively, with the pipe in a horizontal position, measure the pipe
diameter both vertically and horizontally and then remeasured after
rotating the pipe 45°. Calculate the difference between the horizontal and
vertical measurements in each case. The difference will be the average
out-of-roundness. The measurement intervals are as described in 9.2.
9.3 Calculations—Calculate out-of-roundness as follows:
9.3.1 Subtract the minimum outside diameter from the
average outside diameter and subtract the average outside
diameter from the maximum.
9.4 Report—The report shall include the following:
9.4.1 The average plus tolerance (maximum outside diam-
eter − average outside diameter), and
9.4.2 The average negative tolerance (average outside di-
ameter − minimum outside diameter).
10. Inside Diameter
10.1 Calculate the average inside diameter as follows:
d 5 D 2 2t a
where:
d = average inside diameter, in.,
D = average outside diameter, in., as determined in Section
8, and
ta = average total wall thickness, in., as determined in
Section 6.
11. Pipe Taper Angle Measurement
11.1 Apparatus—Vernier Calipers, accurate to withing
0.001 in. (0.025 mm). These may also be used by comparing
actual differences in diameter at specific distances on the taper.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:30 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D3567 − 17
11.1.1 Procedure—Scribe two circumferential marks on the
taper as far apart as possible, but at least 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) from the
small end of the taper. Measure the exact distance between
these marks within 0.01 in. (0.25 mm). Using calipers, measure
the actual outside diameter at each of the scribe marks. Make
four measurements 45° apart.
11.2 Calculations—Using the actual diameters at the points
(2) measured and the distances between the points, calculate the
taper angle, a, as follows:
Sin a 5 @ ~ D 2 2 D 1 ! /2 # /L (4)
where:
D2 = large diameter observed,
D1 = smaller diameter observed, and
L = distance between the two diameters measured along the
tapers.
11.3 Report—The report shall include the following:
11.3.1 Apparatus used,
11.3.2 Average D1,
11.3.3 Average D2,
11.3.4 The value of L, and
11.3.5 Taper angle as calculated in 11.2, in terms of degrees
to the nearest 0.1°.
12. Length of Pipe
12.1 Apparatus—A steel tape, with 1⁄16-in. (1-mm) or finer
graduations.
12.2 Procedure—Lay the pipe specimen on a flat surface
and in a straight line. Observe the length within the nearest
1⁄16 in. (1 mm).
12.3 Report—The report shall include the length of each
specimen measured.
13. Laying Lengths of Fittings
13.1 Apparatus—Two good quality commercial steel scales
calibrated in 1⁄16-in. (1-mm) increments.
13.2 Procedure:
NOTE 7—Because of the wide variety of fittings and joining types,
specific procedures to cover every possible case cannot be written. As a
result, the following general techniques may have to be modified to
include a specific configuration or adapter.
13.2.1 Elbows and Branch Fittings:
13.2.1.1 Insert a steel scale into one opening of the fitting so
(3) that the inner edge of the scale is along the centerline of the
pipe when it is joined to the fittings. Repeat this procedure in
the other leg of the fitting until the end of the second scale
touches the inner edge of the first scale. Record the reading on
the second scale at the mouth of the fitting as overall length, A.
Now subtract from this overall length the socket or makeup
length, X, as measured, or as specified by the manufacturer.
The difference, L, is the laying length of the fitting. See Fig. 1.
13.2.2 Straight-Line Fittings:
13.2.2.1 Measure the overall length of the fitting. Subtract
from this the makeup lengths on both sides, as specified by the
manufacturer. The difference is the laying length of the fitting.
3
 D3567 − 17
14.3 Estimate the difference between the gaging face of the
ring gage and the face of the fitting (external threads) or the
difference between the notch of the plug gage and the end of
the thread (internal threads) to the nearest 1⁄8 turn, after
correction has been made for any variation in the gage from
basic dimensions.

FIG. 1 Measurement for Calculation of Laying Length
13.3 Report—The report shall include laying lengths of each
specimen measured.
14. Gaging Threads
14.1 Measure threads using American National Standard
tapered pipe thread gages conforming to ANSI B2.1 or API
EUE 8 round (API 5B) dimensions. In gaging external taper
threads, screw up the ring gage tight by hand on the external
thread. In gaging internal taper threads, screw up the plug gage
tight by hand into the fitting.
14.2 Gaging Chamfered, Countersunk, or Recessed
Threads—When the internal thread is chamfered, countersunk,
or recessed the notch should be flush with the bottom of the
chamfer, which shall be considered the intersection of the
chamfer cone and the pitch cone of the thread. Usually this
depth is equal to one-half thread from the face of the fitting.
15. Straightness
15.1 Apparatus—A plane horizontal surface, a drawn line or
string, and a metal rule with 1⁄16-in. (1.6-mm) or finer calibra-
tion.
15.2 Procedure—Place the pipe section on the plane surface
and allow it to come to rest. At a distance of half the outside
diameter above the plane surface, stretch the drawn line or
string from one pipe end to the other and draw it taut while in
contact with both ends. Holding the ruler horizontally, deter-
mine the maximum distance between the pipe and the line.
Pipe with a nonuniform curvature will not necessarily show the
maximum reading at the center.
15.3 Report—The report shall include the specimen length
and the maximum deviation from straightness.
16. Keywords
16.1 diameter; dimensions; fiberglass; fittings; gaging
threads; liner thickness; out-of-round; pipe; straightness; taper
angle; wall thickness

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3567–97(2011)) that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2017)

(1) Removed reference to measuring equipment no longer

commercially available (Section 11).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:30 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3678 − 19 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Interior-Profile Extrusions1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3678; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for the ma-
terial properties, including dimensional stability and extrusion
quality, of rigid, poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) interior-profile
extrusions. Methods for identifying interior-profile extrusions
that comply with the requirements of this specification are
provided.
1.2 Use of rigid PVC recycled plastic is permitted in
accordance with the requirements of Sections 6 and 7.
1.3 Rigid PVC compounds for interior building product
applications are covered in Specification D1784.
1.4 Rigid PVC exterior profile extrusions for assembled
windows and doors are covered in Specification D4726.
1.5 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding those in Tables and Figures) shall not be considered
as requirements of this standard.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are given for
information only.
NOTE 1—Information with regard to application should be obtained
from the manufacturers of the profiles.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2019. Published January 2020. Originally
approved in 1978. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D3678 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D3678-19.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D696 Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expan-
sion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous
Silica Dilatometer
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1042 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Plastics Caused by Exposure to Heat and Moisture
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4726 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Exterior-Profile Extrusions Used for Assembled Windows
and Doors
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Defintions are in accordance with Terminol-
ogy D883 or Terminology E631 and abbreviations with Ter-
minology D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The purpose of this specification is to establish on a
national basis, a recognized standard of quality for rigid
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) interior-profile extrusions for inte-
rior use other than cellular products, piping, tubing, and
window and door profiles used in finished building products.
The information contained in this standard is intended to be
helpful to producers, distributors, and users. It is also intended
to serve as the basis for requirements on finished interior
building products which are either made from or employ rigid
PVC profile extrusions in their construction.
5. Classification
5.1 This standard covers three classes of rigid PVC interior-
profile extrusions as follows:
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:34 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3678 − 19
Class 1—Normal impact
Class 2—Intermediate impact
Class 3—High impact
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 This specification covers profile extrusions made from
plastics conforming to the requirements of Specification
D1784, Table 1. Class 1 extrusions shall meet the requirements
for Class 12454 compound. Class 2 extrusions shall meet the
requirements for Class 14323 compound. Class 3 extrusions
shall meet the requirements for Class 15223 compound.
6.2 Use of rigid PVC recycled plastic is permitted in this
product if all the requirements in the sections on Materials and
Manufacture (Section 6), and on Physical Requirements (Sec-
tion 7) are met by the extrusions containing PVC recycled
plastic.
6.3 All Class compounds shall have a minimum coefficient
of linear expansion of 10 × 10-5 cm ⁄cm ⁄°C (5.5 × 10-
5 in. ⁄in. ⁄°F).
NOTE 3—Non-PVC materials may be used as a capstock.
6.4 Rework Material—Clean, homogeneous PVC rework
material or rework material containing PVC capstock gener-
ated from the manufacturer’s own production of the same class
compound is permitted for use by the same manufacturer
provided that the extruded profiles meet all the requirements of
this specification. Clean principally PVC rework material
containing non-PVC capstock is permitted for use only in the
substrate of a capstocked product by the same manufacturer,
providing that the extruded profiles meet all of the require-
ments of this specification.
6.5 The PVC compound in extruded section shall maintain
visually uniform color and be free of any visual surface or
structural changes, such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking,
or pitting.
7. Physical Requirements
7.1 Dimensions—The size, thickness, and dimensional tol-
erances of the interior-profile extrusions shall be as agreed
upon between the supplier and purchaser.
7.2 Dimensional Stability—The dimensional stability of the
interior-profile extrusions shall be determined in the extrusion
direction in accordance with 8.5. Extrusions over 1.02 mm
(0.040 in.) in thickness shall have a maximum shrinkage of
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:34 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
2.2 %; those of 1.02-mm (0.040-in.) thickness or less shall
have a 3.0 % maximum shrinkage.
8. Test Methods
8.1 General—Use the inspection and test procedures con-
tained in this section to determine the conformance of products
to the requirements of this specification. A producer or dis-
tributor representing products as conforming to this specifica-
tion shall utilize statistically based sampling plans that are
appropriate for each particular manufacturing process.
8.2 Visual Inspection—Visually examine the interior-profile
extrusions to determine their compliance with the requirements
of 6.5.
8.3 Conditioning of Specimens—Condition the test speci-
mens in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618, except
that the minimum conditioning time shall be 24 h.
8.4 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests at 23 6 1°C (73.4 6
1.8°F) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity, unless otherwise
specified in the applicable test method.
8.5 Dimensional Stability—Determine the dimensional sta-
bility in accordance with Test Method D1042, except that the
test cycle shall consist of heating the specimens for 30 min in
a uniformly heated oven at a temperature of 82.0 6 0.6°C (180
6 1°F).
8.6 Coeffıcient of Linear Expansion—Conduct this test in
accordance with Test Method D696.
9. Product Marking
9.1 To aid identification of products conforming to all
requirements of this specification, producers and distributors
shall include a statement of compliance in conjunction with
their name and address on product labels, invoices, sales
literature, and the like. The following statement is suggested:
“Conforms to ASTM D3678 (name and address of producer
or distributors).”
10. Packaging
10.1 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
11. Keywords
11.1 building products; extrusion; interior profile extru-
sions; recycled plastic; rigid poly(vinyl chloride)
 D3678 − 19
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3678 – 14) that may impact the use of this standard. (November 1, 2019)

(1) Section 2, remove reference to ASTM standards D2152, (8) Reword 8.4.
D4968 and D7209. (9) Delete 8.6.
(2) Reword 4.1. (10) Renumber 8.7 to 8.6.
(3) Reword 6.1, correct cell classification for Class 3 com- (11) Reword 9.1.
pounds. (12) Delete 9.2.
(4) Reword 6.2. (13) Delete 9.3.
(5) Reword 6.5, add ‘visual’ uniform color. (14) Reword 10.1 per ASTM D5740, 13.1.
(6) Delete 7.3, remove Acetone extrusion quality testing. (15) Summary of Change at end.
(7) Reword 8.1 to agree with wording in D4726.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:34 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3679 − 17 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3679; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification establishes requirements and test
methods for the materials, dimensions, warp, shrinkage, impact
strength, expansion, appearance, and wind load resistance of
extruded single-wall siding manufactured from rigid (unplas-
ticized) PVC compound. Methods of indicating compliance
with this specification are also provided.
1.2 The use PVC recycled plastic in this product shall be in
accordance with the requirements in Section 4.
1.3 Rigid (unplasticized) PVC soffit is covered in Specifi-
cation D4477.
1.4 Siding produced to this specification shall be installed in
accordance with Practice D4756. Reference shall also be made
to the manufacturer’s installation instructions for the specific
product to be installed.
NOTE 1—Information with regard to siding maintenance shall be
obtained from the manufacturer.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains to the test
method portion only, Section 6, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
D696 Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expan-
sion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous
Silica Dilatometer
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1042 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Plastics Caused by Exposure to Heat and Moisture
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and
Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates
D2457 Test Method for Specular Gloss of Plastic Films and
Solid Plastics
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4226 Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly-
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Building Products
D4477 Specification for Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Soffit
D4756 Practice for Installation of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chlo-
ride) (PVC) Siding and Soffit
D5033 Guide for Development of ASTM Standards Relating
to Recycling and Use of Recycled Plastics (Withdrawn
2007)3
D5206 Test Method for Windload Resistance of Rigid Plas-
tic Siding
D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid
Plastics Specimens
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
E1753 Practice for Use of Qualitative Chemical Spot Test
Kits for Detection of Lead in Dry Paint Films
G147 Practice for Conditioning and Handling of Nonmetal-
lic Materials for Natural and Artificial Weathering Tests

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Products. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved June 1, 2017. Published July 2017. Originally approved the ASTM website.
3
in 1979. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D3679 – 13. DOI: 10.1520/ The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
D3679-17. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3679 − 17
2.2 ASCE Standard:
ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures4
2.3 International Code Council:5
International Building Code
International Residential Code
2.4 Vinyl Siding Institute, Inc.:6
VSI Vinyl Siding Installation Manual (2015)
2.5 Structural Building Components Association:7
ANSI/SBCA FS 100-2012 Standard Requirements for Wind
Pressure Resistance of Foam Plastic Insulating Sheathing
Used in Exterior Wall Covering Assemblies
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminologies D883,
E631, and D1600, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 center-pinning—an installation technique in which the
siding panel is fastened tightly through the nail slot at the
center length of the panel, in order to cause thermal expansion
and contraction to occur equally in both directions from the
center.
3.2.2 heavily textured siding—in this standard, any vinyl
siding using separate postextrusion processing to produce a
textured surface.
3.2.2.1 Discussion—Post-extrusion-forming does not in-
clude embossing of the surface or forming of the faces of the
profile, but does include such processes as heat forming,
vacuum forming and compression molding applied to the
surface after the profile is extruded.
3.2.3 nominal—the value that a manufacturer consistently
uses to represent a specific property or dimension of a vinyl
siding product in public claims including, but not limited to,
product literature, advertisements, quotations, and certificates
of conformance.
3.2.4 process average thickness—the rolling, arithmetic
mean of average specimen thicknesses measured according to
6.5 for a specific product during all productions runs for the
most recent six month period.
3.2.5 temperate northern climate—in weather testing, a
North American metropolitan area testing site located within
73 to 100°W longitude and 37 to 45°N latitude.
3.2.6 wind load design pressure rating—the maximum wind
pressure that a vinyl siding product is rated to withstand, based
on testing under Test Method D5206; there are two types of
wind load design pressure rating used in this standard:
3.2.6.1 standard wind load design pressure rating—the
wind load design pressure rating for a siding product when
installed 1) over a sheathing material designed and attached
4
Available from American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander
Bell Dr., Reston, VA 20191, http://www.asce.org.
5
Available from International Code Council (ICC), 500 New Jersey Ave., NW,
6th Floor, Washington, DC 20001, http://www.iccsafe.org.
6
National Housing Center, 1201 15th Street NW, Suite 220, Washington, DC
20005, http://www.vinylsiding.org
7
6300 Enterprise Lane, Madison, WI 53719, http://www.sbcindustry.com
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
such that it is capable of resisting 100 % of positive and
negative wind pressures occurring under design conditions at
the building location; and 2) with the standard fastening
method specified in building codes, general installation
instructions, and the siding manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2.6.2 alternative wind load design pressure rating—the
wind load design pressure rating for a siding product when
installed over a sheathing not designed and attached such that
it is capable of resisting 100 % of positive and negative wind
pressures occurring under design conditions at the building
location, or when the siding is not fastened in the standard way;
as specified by the manufacturer.
3.2.6.3 Discussion—The standard test conditions,
configuration, and fastening method used in this Specification
are specified in 6.14, while alternative sheathing and installa-
tion conditions are specified by the manufacturer and must be
reflected in the product’s installation instructions. Alternative
ratings apply only when the specified sheathing and fastening
conditions are used. See Annex A1 for information on differ-
ences between the standard wind load design pressure rating
and alternative wind load design pressure ratings, and how to
determine standard and alternative design pressure ratings.
3.2.7 vinyl siding—a shaped material, made principally
from rigid poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC), that is used to clad
exterior walls of buildings.
3.2.7.1 Discussion—Any exception to a homogeneous rigid
PVC compound is present in a coextruded or laminated
capstock.
4. Materials and Manufacture
4.1 The siding shall be made of one or more layers of
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) compound. Any layers of materials
other than poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) compound shall be kept
to less than 20 % by volume.
4.2 Where rigid PVC recycled plastic as defined in Guide
D5033 is used, the siding containing the PVC recycled plastic
shall meet all of the requirements of Section 3, Terminology;
Section 4, Materials and Manufacture; and Section 5, Physical
Requirements.
4.3 The poly(vinyl chloride) siding material, when tested in
accordance with Test Method D635, shall not exceed an
average extent of burn of 4 in. (100 mm), with an average time
of burn not to exceed 10 s. A minimum sample thickness of
0.035 in. (0.9 mm) is required. (Warning—The flammability
testing data, conclusions, and recommendations of Test
Method D635 related solely to the measurement and descrip-
tion of properties for classification of the poly(vinyl chloride)
siding material in response to flame under controlled laboratory
conditions and shall not be used for the description or appraisal
of the fire hazard of vinyl siding under actual fire conditions.)
4.4 The PVC compound when extruded into siding shall
maintain uniform color and be free of any visual surface or
structural changes, such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking,
or pitting.
4.5 The PVC compound shall be compounded so as to
provide the heat stability and weather exposure stability
required for the siding market application.
 D3679 − 17
4.6 PVC siding shall not contain elemental lead (Pb) or
compounds of that material other than traces incidental to raw
materials or the manufacturing process. This limitation applies
to both PVC substrate and to any cap or film material.
Compliance with this requirement shall be demonstrated by
one of the methods in 6.16
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Length and Width—The nominal length and width of the
siding shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
seller. The actual length shall not be less than 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm)
of the nominal length and the actual width shall be within 61⁄16
in. (1.6 mm) of the nominal width when measured in accor-
dance with 6.3 and 6.4.
5.2 Thickness—Except for heavily textured siding, these
requirements pertain only to measurements of the portions of
the siding that are exposed after installation of the panel,
measured in accordance with the procedure in 6.5. For heavily
textured siding, these requirements apply to the portion of the
siding selected for measurement in accordance with 6.5. The
average thickness of each specimen shall be no less than 0.035
in. No individual measurement shall be thinner than 0.003 in.
below the nominal thickness. The process average thickness as
defined in 3.2.4 shall be no thinner than 0.001 in. below the
nominal thickness.
5.3 Camber—A full length of siding (typically 10 or 12 ft
(3.05 or 3.61 m)) shall not have a camber greater than 1⁄8 in.
(3.2 mm) when measured in accordance with 6.6.
5.4 Heat Shrinkage—The average heat shrinkage shall not
exceed 3.0 % when determined by the method described in 6.7.
5.5 Impact Resistance—Siding shall have a minimum im-
pact strength of 60 in.·lbf (6.78 J) when tested in accordance
with 6.8.
5.6 Coeffıcient of Linear Expansion—The siding shall have
a coefficient of linear expansion not greater than 4.5 by 10-5
in./in./°F (8.1 by 10−5 mm/mm/°C) when tested in accordance
with 6.9.
5.7 Gloss—The gloss of smooth and embossed siding shall
be uniform across the exposed surface. The average of all
readings for a panel determined in 6.11.2.5 shall not differ from
the manufacturer’s specified gloss value more than the permit-
ted variation in Table 1, and each individual reading shall not
vary more than 10 points from the average. Gloss of smooth
and embossed siding shall be tested in accordance with 6.11.
TABLE 1
Manufacturer’s Specified Permitted difference
Gloss Value from
Mfg. Spec. Gloss
Value
Less than or equal to 35 ±8
Greater than 35 ±10
5.8 Surface Distortion—The siding shall be free of bulges,
waves, and ripples when tested to a minimum temperature of
120°F (49°C) in accordance with the procedure in 6.12. This
distortion is called “oil-canning.”
5.9 Color—The color of the siding shall be within the
defined color space parameters for the specific color agreed
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The color
specified shall be uniform on the surface of the siding panels,
except in the case of multicolored woodgrain panels.
5.9.1 Uniformity of Color—When tested in accordance with
6.13, the total color change, ∆E, between a production speci-
men and the appropriate reference specimen or agreed-upon
color coordinates shall not vary by more than 1.5, and the
chromatic coordinates thereof shall not change by more than
6∆aH = 1.0 and 6∆bH = 1.0.
5.10 Weathering:
5.10.1 The siding shall maintain a uniform color and be free
of any visual surface or structural changes such as peeling,
chipping, cracking, flaking, and pitting when tested in accor-
dance with 6.10.
NOTE 3—Weathering-conformance-testing requirements are to reflect
performance of a “typical” extrusion siding profile representing a specific
color of PVC compound and a specific extrusion technology. In no case is
there an implied requirement for testing all the various shaped and sized
siding profiles produced in this color. The lengthy outdoor weatherability
testing for new products may be performed concurrently with market
development and sales of siding to existing markets. Completion of
weatherability testing prior to marketing of the product is not required.
5.11 Wind Load Resistance—The siding shall withstand a
minimum static test pressure and a standard wind load design
pressure rating shall be determined.
5.11.1 Minimum Test Pressure—The siding panel(s) shall be
able to withstand a minimum static test pressure of 22.5
lbf/ft2 (1077 Pa) when tested in accordance with 6.14. The
average maximum sustained static test pressure determined in
6.14 shall be equal to or greater than this value.
NOTE 4—The static test pressure of 22.5 lbf/ft2 (1077 Pa) was estab-
lished to withstand structural loading conditions that occur in wind
exposures of approximately 110 mph (177 km/h) (VASD) for mean roof
heights of 30 ft (9.1 m) and less in exposure category B, and corresponds
to 30.0 lbf/ft2 (1436 Pa) negative design pressure, to match the default
wind design conditions of Table 703.3(1) in the 2015 International
Residential Code.
NOTE 5—Refer to Annex A1 for an explanation as to how the negative
design pressure was established, and for applications where effective
negative design pressure as specified in ASCE 7-10 is different from 30.00
lbf/ft2 (1436 Pa) (for example, wind-zone areas greater than 110 mph (177
km/h) (VASD) (225 km/h (VULT)) or mean roof height above 30 ft (9.1 m),
or exposures other than exposure category B).
5.11.1.1 The design-pressure values can be negative (suc-
tion loads) or positive. The negative values are the largest in
magnitude and are the values used in this specification.
NOTE 6—In that the siding is being tested as a weather-resistant exterior
product applied to an existing exterior structural wall, forces (negative)
working to pull the siding off the wall, fasteners, or disengage locks will
be the most important criteria for testing. Positive wind forces test the
integrity of the total wall sections, and do not provide a measure of the
performance of the siding.
5.11.2 Standard Wind Load Design Pressure Rating—The
standard wind load design pressure rating shall be determined
from the results of testing in accordance with 6.14, using the
procedures described in A1.3.
NOTE 7—The standard design pressure rating is valid for applications
where the siding is installed over sheathing and its fastening that are
capable of independently resisting both positive and negative wind
pressures occurring under design conditions at the building location. For

applications over other sheathing, a different design pressure rating is
applicable, and is determined in accordance with A1.3. Determination of
a rating other than the standard design pressure rating is not required by
this section.
5.11.3 Alternative Design Pressure Ratings—Design pres-
sure ratings other than the standard wind load design pressure
rating, for use with different sheathing materials or using
different installation or fastening, are permitted to be deter-
mined in accordance with testing under 6.14, using the
procedures in Annex A1.
5.12 Nail Slot Allowance for Thermal Expansion—For sid-
ing panels utilizing nail slots to allow for thermal expansion
and contraction, the nail slot shall be sized to allow for the
expected range of expansion and contraction over a range of
100°F. Compliance with this requirement shall be demon-
strated either by the test method in 6.15 or by sizing of the nail
slots according to the specifications in the following sections.
The instrument used shall be capable of measuring to the
nearest 0.01 in. The manufacturing tolerance shall not exceed
-0.030 inch.
5.12.1 For panels shorter than 6 ft (1829 mm) in length, the
minimum nail slot width shall be 3⁄8 in. (11.4 mm).
5.12.2 For panels 6 ft (1829 mm) in length or longer the
minimum nail slot width shall be determined according to the
following formula. The minimum width shall be the width
resulting from application of the formula, rounded to the next
lower quarter-inch. Regardless of the results of the calculation,
the minimum nail slot width for panels 6 feet or longer shall be
1 in. (25.4 mm).
WS 5 P c 3 ~ α 3 100 °F 3 L ! 1T c
where:
WS = Minimum width of nail slot, in.
Pc = Center-pinning coefficient: 1 if manufacturer’s in-
structions require panel to be center-pinned; 1.5 if
center-pinning is not required
α = Coefficient of linear thermal expansion, 4.5 × 10-5
in./in./°F or actual known coefficient for material
used, as determined by 6.9
L = Length of panel, inches
Tc = Centering tolerance: 0.25 in.
6. Test Methods
6.1 General—The inspection and test procedures contained
in this section are used to determine the conformance of
products to the requirements of this specification. Each pro-
ducer who represents its products as conforming to this
specification shall be permitted to use statistically based
sampling plans that are appropriate for each manufacturing
process, but shall keep the essential records necessary to
document, with a high degree of assurance, his claim that all of
the requirements of this specification have been met. Addi-
tional sampling and testing of the product, as agreed upon
between the purchaser and the manufacturer, are not precluded
by this section.
6.2 Conditioning and Test Conditions—Condition the test
specimen in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618 and
test under those conditions, unless otherwise specified herein.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D3679 − 17
6.3 Length—Lay the specimen on a flat surface and measure
with a steel tape. Measure the length of a siding panel to the
nearest 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) at the center, the butt edge, and the
bottom of the top lock. The average of the three measurements
is the actual length.
6.4 Width—Interlock two specimens, each at least 26 in.
(660 mm) long, in the normal mode for installation. Lay the
two specimens on a flat surface. Measure to the nearest 1⁄16 in.
(1.6 mm), the distance between the lowest butt edge of the top
specimen and the lowest butt edge of the bottom specimen.
Commencing approximately one in. (25 mm) from one end of
the specimens, make 5 measurements at 6-in. (152-mm)
intervals, making sure that the measurement is made perpen-
dicular to the butt edge. Average the measurements. The
average constitutes the exposed width of siding.
6.5 Thickness—Thickness shall be measured in accordance
with Test Method A of Test Method D5947. The micrometer
shall be calibrated in accordance with Section 8 of Test Method
D5947. All measurements shall be taken to the nearest 0.001
inch. Calculate and report the average of these measurements.
Also report the thinnest individual measurement.
6.5.1 Non-Heavily Textured Siding—The thickness of the
siding shall be measured at a minimum of five locations
equally spaced across the entire portion of the siding that will
be exposed after installation.
6.5.2 Heavily Textured Siding—The thickness of the siding
shall be measured at a minimum of five locations on a flat
surface such as an end tab or other surface that is representative
of the extruded thickness. More than one panel shall be used as
(1) necessary to provide a random selection of measurement
locations.
6.6 Camber—Place a full length of siding (typically 10 or
12 ft (3.05 or 3.61 m)) on a flat surface alongside a straightedge
at least as long as the siding specimen. Measure the maximum
space between edge of the siding specimen and the straight-
edge for each edge to the nearest 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm).
6.7 Heat Shrinkage:
6.7.1 Apparatus:
6.7.1.1 Scriber, similar to that described in Test Method
D1042, with the exception that the needle points shall be
separated by 10 6 0.01 in. (254 6 0.254 mm).
6.7.1.2 Test Media, a controlled-temperature water bath of 5
gal (10 L) or more, equipped with an efficient stirrer that will
maintain uniform temperature throughout. Heater and
temperature-control devices must maintain the water at 160 6
1°F (71 6 0.5°C). Use a wire rack to raise and lower
specimens into the water bath. As an alternative to the use of a
water bath, the specimens may be heated for 30 min in a
uniformly heated forced-air oven maintained at a temperature
of 160 6 1°F (71 6 0.5°C).
6.7.1.3 Make measurements with any device capable of
measuring the distance between two scribe marks to the nearest
0.01 in. (0.254 mm).
6.7.2 Procedure:
6.7.2.1 Scribing shall be done on either the front or back
surface of the siding as necessary to provide a clean, recog-
nizable line.
4
 D3679 − 17
6.7.2.2 Cut three specimens from the siding panel, each 1 in.
(25.4 mm) wide by 12 in. (305 mm) long. Cut one specimen
from the center and one from each of the extreme edges of the
flat surface. The long axis shall be parallel to the machine
direction.
6.7.2.3 Condition specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C)
and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for at least 24 hours.
6.7.2.4 Make a slight mark with the scribe on each specimen
so that a reference point will be clearly visible.
6.7.2.5 Place specimens in the test medium.
6.7.2.6 Remove specimens after 30 min and place on a flat
surface until cool.
6.7.2.7 Repeat conditioning in accordance with 6.7.2.3.
6.7.2.8 Make a second mark with the scribe on each
specimen, using the same center.
6.7.2.9 Measure the distance, D, between the scribe marks
to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.254 mm).
6.7.2.10 Calculate the percent shrinkage as (D/10) × 100.
6.7.2.11 Report the average shrinkage of the three speci-
mens tested.
6.8 Impact Resistance—Test impact resistance of siding in
accordance with Test Method D4226, Procedure A, impactor
head configuration H.25. 4 in.-lb increments (0.5 in. height
increments with 8 lb falling weight) shall be used. Minimum
sample dimensions shall be 1.5 by 1.5 in. Samples shall be
tested with the normally exposed surface facing up. Condition-
ing time for quality-control tests shall be at least 1 hour.
6.8.1 For purposes of evaluating failure of the specimen
under 3.2.1 of Test Method D4226, a ductile tear of less than
0.2 in. (5 mm) in length shall not be considered a failure. Any
brittle break of any dimensions is considered a failure.
6.9 Coeffıcient of Linear Expansion—Conduct this test in
accordance with Test Method D696.
6.9.1 Alternative Specimen Preparation—Specimens pre-
pared from strips cut from extruded siding are permitted to be
used in testing under Test Method D696. Where such speci-
mens are used, they shall be cut with the long dimension
parallel to the long axis of the siding panel. Guides shall be
used in accordance with Test Method D696 to prevent bending
or twisting of the specimen in the dilatometer.
6.10 Weatherability:
6.10.1 A minimum of three samples shall be exposed at each
of at least three test sites. Test sites shall be located in a
northern temperate climate, represented by Cleveland, Ohio or
Louisville, Kentucky; a hot, humid climate represented by
Miami, Florida; and a hot, dry climate represented by Phoenix,
Arizona. The samples shall be exposed for a minimum of 24
months.
6.10.2 Samples shall consist of a flat section of siding with
minimum dimensions of 2 in. by 3 3⁄4 in. (25 mm by 95 mm).
6.10.3 Samples shall be representative of the product to be
evaluated.
NOTE 8—Samples prepared in the laboratory in the same manner as
commercial samples are permitted to be used as an alternative to a
commercial part. If the commercial product is extruded, the laboratory
specimen must be extruded; if the commercial product is injection
molded, the laboratory specimen must be injection molded, and so forth.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.10.4 Select a minimum of four specimens per sample per
test site to allow for three test specimens and one file specimen
for each sample evaluated.
6.10.5 Mark each specimen permanently to ensure retention
of identity during and after exposure testing.
NOTE 9—Use of a vibratool leaves a permanent mark that satisfies this
criterion.
6.10.6 All exposures shall be conducted at an angle of 45°
South, plywood backed, in accordance with Practices D1435
and G147.
6.10.7 After a minimum of 24 months of exposure, remove
the samples and inspect each exposed test specimen for
appearance and surface condition. Record observations and
inspection date in a permanent record.
6.11 Gloss:
6.11.1 Apparatus—Measure gloss using a 75° geometry
glossmeter that meets the requirements of the Apparatus
section of D2457.
6.11.2 Procedure:
6.11.2.1 Gloss measurements shall be made in accordance
with the procedure in Section 9 of D2457, unless otherwise
specified herein.
6.11.2.2 Measure gloss on one piece of siding on at least
three widely separated sections across the width of the exposed
surface of the panel. At least one reading shall be taken on each
face of the panel. Care needs to be taken to ensure that a new
surface area is used for each reading since instrument contact
may leave scratches on the specimen surface. The area tested
must be flat. If a flat area on the exposed surface cannot be
found due to the style or depth of embossing of the panel being
tested, then a non-exposed area of the panel shall be chosen in
its place. Such locations shall be representative of the gloss of
the area that will be exposed after installation.
6.11.2.3 Measure gloss parallel to the direction of emboss-
ing. When the embossing pattern is not apparent, measure the
gloss in the direction of extrusion.
6.11.2.4 Each reading shall be within the appropriate limit
specified in 5.7.
6.11.2.5 The average of all readings shall be used to
represent the gloss of the sample.
6.12 Surface Distortion:
6.12.1 Test Specimen/Apparatus:
6.12.1.1 The test specimen shall consist of three courses of
siding, a minimum of 6 ft (1.83 m) in length, mounted on a flat
rigid frame in accordance with the manufacturer’s recom-
mended installation instructions.
6.12.1.2 Heat-sensing elements shall be located at the mid-
point of the backside of the second course of siding.
6.12.1.3 Radiant-Heat Rod, 600 W for each linear foot (0.31
m), mounted parallel to the middle course and approximately
32 in. (810 mm) away from the surface of the siding.
6.12.1.4 Temperature-Control Device, used to regulate the
temperature of the radiant-heat rod, shall be able to maintain
the conditions specified in 6.12.2.1.
6.12.2 Procedure:
6.12.2.1 Heat the test panel (second course of siding) at a
rate of 3.0 to 6.0°F/min (1.7 to 3.3°C/min) until a minimum
 D3679 − 17
temperature of 120°F (49°C) is achieved as measured by the
heat-sensing element on the midpoint of the backside of the
second course. During this heating period, observe the test
panel for surface distortion.
6.12.2.2 Failure is defined as the appearance of bulges,
waves, or ripples before a temperature of 120°F (49°C) is
reached.
6.13 Color Uniformity—Calculate the difference between
the LH, aH, and bH color coordinates for a production specimen
to those of either the appropriate reference specimen or the
agreed upon color coordinates for that specific color product in
accordance with Test Method D2244. Calculate the total
difference ∆E between the production specimen and the
reference specimen in accordance with Test Method D2244.
6.14 Wind Load Resistance—Conduct the test on wind load
resistance of finished siding in accordance with Test Method
D5206. The average maximum sustained static test pressure
determined from this testing is used in 5.11. For purposes of
determining compliance with the minimum test pressure and
standard design pressure requirements in 5.11, the test structure
shall be constructed with vertical studs 16 inches on center, the
siding in the test installation shall be installed over wood
sheathing with a nominal thickness of 7⁄16 to 1⁄2 inch, and
fastened as follows:
6.14.1 Fastener Type—Roofing nail, smooth shank, 0.120
in. (1⁄8 in. nominal; 3.2 mm) shank diameter, 5⁄16 in. (7.9 mm)
head diameter, length as necessary to penetrate into sheathing
and stud a total of 1 1⁄4 in. (32 mm). For vertical siding, length
as necessary to penetrate the thickness of the sheathing plus 1⁄4
in. (6.4 mm).
6.14.2 Fastener Spacing—Every 16 in. (406 mm) into
center of stud for horizontal siding. For vertical siding, every
12 inches into sheathing only.
6.14.3 Fasteners shall not be driven tightly against the
siding. Allow approximately 1⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) clearance be-
tween the fastener head and siding surface.
NOTE 10—The installation details described in 6.14 conform to the
minimum requirements of the 2015 International Residential Code and the
VSI Vinyl Siding Installation Manual.
6.15 Nail Slot Allowance for Thermal Expansion—As an
alternative to conformance with the nail slot width specifica-
tion in 5.12.1 or 5.12.2, provision for thermal expansion and
contraction shall be demonstrated through the following test
procedure.
6.15.1 Samples—At least three samples of each profile in
which the siding is produced shall be provided. The length of
each sample shall be at least 50 % of the longest length in
which the profile is produced, and not shorter than 12 ft (3658
mm).
6.15.2 Test Chamber—The test chamber shall consist of an
environmentally controlled room or compartment capable of
providing an air temperature range of at least 0°F to 100°F
(-18°C to 38°C) without exposure of the panel to radiant
energy from heating or cooling elements. Air temperature shall
be controlled such that a rate of temperature change of 2°F
(1.11°C) per minute can be achieved over the full temperature
range, and the minimum and maximum temperatures can be
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
maintained for at least 15 minutes. Means for circulating air to
provide a uniform air temperature throughout the chamber
shall be provided. A vertical wall shall be provided for
mounting of samples. The wall shall be insulated such that,
with no panels mounted, the inner surface of the wall does not
deviate more than 10°F (5.5°C) from the air temperature at the
high and low temperature extremes after a holding period of 5
minutes. The test chamber shall be of sufficient size to
accommodate the longest panel to be tested, including ex-
pected thermal expansion of the panel. Means shall be pro-
vided to measure the actual temperature of the surface of each
panel at a minimum of three evenly-spaced locations along the
length of the panel.
6.15.3 Length Measurement—A means for measuring the
length of each sample throughout the temperature range shall
be provided. The method utilized for length measurement shall
not be influenced by the temperature of the chamber and shall
have a minimum resolution of no greater than 0.0625 in. (1.59
mm).
6.15.4 Procedure—Install the sample panels on the wall
inside the test chamber, following the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for fastener type, spacing, location and tightness. At
ambient temperature measure and record the length of each
panel and the temperature of the panel, averaged from a
minimum of three locations along the length of the panel.
6.15.4.1 Test Cycle—Test cycles shall be performed by
raising the air temperature to 100°F 6 5°F (38°C 6 2.75°C) at
an average rate of 2°F (1.11°C) per minute, holding the air
temperature at 100°F (38°C 6 2.75°C) for 15 minutes,
lowering the air temperature to 0°F 6 5°F (-18°C 6 2.75°C) at
an average rate of 2°F (1.11°C) per minute, holding at 0°F
(-18°C 6 2.75°C) for 15 minutes, and returning to ambient
temperature at an average rate of 2°F per minute.
6.15.4.2 Conditioning—Close the test chamber and perform
at least two conditioning cycles using the procedure in
6.15.4.1. No interruption is required between conditioning
cycles.
6.15.4.3 Test—Following completion of the conditioning
cycles, conduct three test cycles using the procedure in
6.15.4.1. It is acceptable for the test cycles to follow immedi-
ately upon completion of the final conditioning cycle, and no
interruption is required between test cycles. After a minimum
holding period of 15 minutes at the high and low extremes of
each test cycle, measure and record the length of each panel
and the temperature of the panel, averaged from a minimum of
three locations along the length of the panel.
6.15.5 Normalization—From among the length measure-
ments recorded for all three cycles, identify the shortest and
longest length of each panel, and the average panel temperature
at the time that length was recorded. Determine the maximum
difference in length, ∆L, and the maximum difference in
temperature, ∆T, by subtracting the smaller from the larger.
Normalize the change in length to the full length of the panel
over a 100°F (38°C) temperature range using the following
formula:
E t 5 ∆L x ~ 100/∆T ! x ~ L f /L t ! (2)
where:
 D3679 − 17
Et = Total thermal expansion and contraction of a full
length panel over a range of 100 °F (38 °C)
∆ L = Maximum change in length of the tested panel
∆T = Maximum change in temperature of the tested panel
Lf = Longest length in which the panel is produced
Lt = Actual length of the panel as tested
6.15.6 Acceptable Performance—When tested in accor-
dance with this procedure, the result of (Et × 2) + 0.25 in. for
each of the three samples for each profile shall not be greater
than the width of the nail slot. If the manufacturer’s installation
instructions require the panel to be center-pinned, the result of
Et + 0.25 in. for each of the three samples for each profile shall
not be greater than the width of the nail slot.
6.16 Lead Content:
6.16.1 Testing for lead content shall be conducted on
extruded siding using a rhodizinate-type lead swab test kit
conforming to Practice E1753. Testing shall be performed in
accordance with the test kit manufacturer’s instructions. The
siding shall be deemed to comply with 4.6 if the test shows a
negative or not-detected result; that is, the test does not indicate
the presence of lead. The test shall be conducted separately on
the substrate and on any cap or film material.
6.16.2 As an alternative to the method in 6.16.1, and as a
means of resolving any ambiguous results from that method, an
analytical method capable of detecting lead at least as low as
0.02 percent by sample weight shall be employed. Under this
alternative, neither the substrate nor any cap or film shall
contain a concentration of lead in excess of 0.02 percent by
weight.
7. Packaging and Package Marking
7.1 The siding shall be packed in such a manner as to
provide reasonable protection against damage in ordinary
handling, transportation, and storage.
7.2 Provisions of Practice D3892 shall apply to this speci-
fication.
7.3 To aid identification of siding conforming to all require-
ments of this specification, producers and distributors shall
include a statement of compliance in conjunction with their
name and address on product labels, invoices, sales literature,
ANNEX
(Mandatory Information)
A1. WIND LOAD RESISTANCE TEST DESIGN FACTORS
A1.1 Wind Load Criteria:
A1.1.1 ASCE 7-10 is the basis for determining the design
pressures used in this specification. Design wind loads are
determined on an ASD basis in this specification.
NOTE A1.1—In previous editions of ASCE 7, wind loads were deter-
mined using wind speed maps based on a 50-year return period. In ASCE
7-10, maps based on a 700-year return period are used which, for any
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
and the like. The following statement is suggested when
sufficient space is available:
This PVC siding conforms to all the requirements estab-
lished in ASTM Specification D3679, developed cooperatively
with the industry and published by ASTM.
Full responsibility for the conformance of this product to the
specification is assumed by (name and address of producer or
distributor).
7.4 The following abbreviated statement is suggested when
available space on labels is insufficient for the full statement:
Conforms to ASTM Specification D3679 (name and address
of producer or distributor).
7.5 The standard wind load design pressure rating deter-
mined in accordance with 5.11.2 shall be stated on the product
or on the product package by one of the means in 7.5.1 or 7.5.2.
7.5.1 The package shall be marked or labeled with the
standard wind load design pressure rating. The marking shall
be in the format “Standard Wind Load Design Pressure Rating:
##.# psf (ASD)”.
7.5.2 The standard design pressure rating shall be included
on a line imprint or other marking on the front (outward-
facing) surface of all siding panels. It is not required that the
marking be visible after installation, provided that the marking
can be revealed and read by detaching the lower edge lock of
an adjacent course, without removal of any fasteners. The
standard design pressure marking shall be stated at least once
per panel. The marking shall be in the format “Std Design
Pressure Rating: ##.# psf (ASD)”.
7.5.3 At the option of the manufacturer, additional marking
or labeling of the package or product with alternative wind load
design pressure ratings determined in accordance with 5.11.3
for use with alternative sheathings, wall configurations or
fastening methods is permitted. The marking shall use the
format specified in 7.5, shall indicate the type of sheathing or
wall configuration for which it is applicable, and shall refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions for more information and any
installation requirements.
8. Keywords
8.1 plastic building products; plastic weatherability; re-
cycled plastic; rigid PVC siding; specification
given location, produce a wind speed approximately 30 % greater than
that of the previous maps. This larger magnitude (higher return period)
wind speed, referred to as the ultimate wind speed, (VULT), is used directly
(with a load factor of 1.0) to determine nominal wind loads on a Strength
Design (LRFD) or “ultimate” wind load basis. When Allowable Stress
Design (ASD) is used, ASCE 7-10 provides for these ultimate wind loads,
determined from the ultimate wind speed map velocities, to be multiplied
by a load factor of 0.6. Alternatively, the adjustment can be made directly

to the wind velocity, which is the approach taken in this method (see
A1.1.2). This procedure produces results consistent with past ASD wind
loads.
A1.1.2 It is necessary to determine whether the wind
velocity to be used is based on the maps in ASCE 7-10 or on
older maps designed for direct application of ASD. Wind
velocity, V, based on ASD is used in this method. Wind speeds
determined using the maps in ASCE 7-10, referred to as VULT,
are converted to ASD wind speeds, VASD, by multiplying by the
square root of 0.6. Wind speeds based on maps using an ASD
basis do not require conversion (see A1.3) Thus:
V 5 V ASD 5 V ULT 3 =0.6
The V determined in this section is used in the following
calculations:
A1.1.3 The velocity pressures, q, used in this specification
have been computed using the following equation:
q 5 0.00256 K z K d V 2 I ~ lb/sq ft!
50.613 K z K d V 2 I ~ N/m 2 !
where:
V = wind velocity, mph (km/h). The basic wind speed
corresponds to a 3-s gust speed at 33 ft (10.1 m) above
ground in exposure category C, as described in ASCE
7-10. A velocity of V = VASD= 110 mph (177 km/h) was
used in this specification. (See Note A1.2 and Note
A1.3.)
I = “importance factor” as described in editions of ASCE 7
prior to ASCE 7-10. A value of 1.0 is used. This factor
is not used where the wind speed has been determined
from a map in ASCE 7-10. (See Note A1.4.)
Kz = “velocity pressure coefficient” as described in ASCE
7-10. A “Kz” of 0.70 is used in the wind pressure
calculations, which is the value from ASCE 7-10 for a
mean roof height of 30 ft (9.1 m) above ground level
and Exposure Category B.
Kd = “wind directionality factor” as described in ASCE
7-10. A “Kd” of 0.85 is used.
A1.1.4 The velocity pressure = -18.43 lbf/ft2 (882 Pa).
NOTE A1.2—As explained in Note A1.1, the wind velocity used in this
method is converted from the VULT given by wind speed maps in ASCE
7-10 to VASD using the equation in A1.1.2. A VULT wind speed of
approximately 140 mph from the maps is equivalent to a VASD of 110 mph,
which is the velocity V used in this specification.
NOTE A1.3—In ASCE 7-10 the default wind speeds are given for
exposure category C, and a table is provided to adjust this wind speed for
other exposure categories. Since most vinyl siding is installed on buildings
located in exposure category B, the velocity pressure coefficient, Kz is
included in the equation to make this adjustment.
NOTE A1.4—Editions of ASCE 7 prior to ASCE 7-10 included an
importance factor to represent the relative significance of the building and
the consequences of its loss. Because most vinyl siding is installed on
residential and light commercial buildings, the importance factor was set
at 1.0 by default. ASCE 7-10 has removed the importance factor from the
velocity pressure equation, and instead provides a different wind speed
map for each of the building importance categories (referred to as risk
categories in ASCE 7-10). Thus, the importance factor will already have
been incorporated into the wind speed determined from the appropriate
map, and the importance factor is not used for determining velocity
pressure using wind speeds from ASCE 7-10 maps.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D3679 − 17
A1.1.5 ASCE 7-10 recommends various internal and exter-
nal pressure coefficients, which include gust response factors.
These coefficients vary with the effective area of the cladding
component, the location of the cladding component relative to
building corners, and the configuration of the building (open
versus enclosed). The internal and external pressure coeffi-
cients are taken from Table 26.11-1 and Figure 30.4-1 of ASCE
7–10. The effective area is taken as 10 square ft (the area of one
piece of siding), an enclosed building is assumed, and factors
for the building corners are used. The pressure coefficients are
as follows:
Internal Pressure Coefficient 5 60.18
(A1.1)
External Pressure Coefficient 5 11.00 and 2 1.40
The design pressure is calculated by multiplying the velocity
pressures by the algebraic sum of the internal and external
pressure coefficients.
A1.2 Design Pressure:
Positive Design Pressure 5 ~ 18.43!~ 1.0010.18! 5 21.74 psf
Negative Design Pressure 5 ~ 18.43!~ 21.40 2 0.18! 5 229.12 psf
NOTE A1.5—Because the wind velocity has already been adjusted from
an ultimate basis to an ASD basis at the beginning of these calculations,
the design pressure determined in this step is an ASD load. This correlates
to the design pressure requirements stated in tables in the 2015 Interna-
tional Residential Code and other codes which have also been adjusted to
an ASD basis. However, the required design pressures in some other codes
and design standards have not been adjusted to an ASD basis. Where
required design pressures are based on ultimate wind loads determined
from ASCE 7-10 wind speeds, those loads must be multiplied by 0.60 to
match the design pressure determined from this equation.
A1.2.1 The negative values (suction loads) are the largest in
magnitude and are the design values used in this specification.
Research conducted by various organizations8,9 has shown that
a certain amount of pressure equalization occurs through
residential siding products installed with sheathing under high
dynamic pressures. In light of this pressure equalization, the
design pressure in the ASCE 7-10 wind load standards is
reduced by a factor of 0.5.
A1.2.2 Therefore, the required test pressures are calculated
as follows:
P t 5 D P 3 PEF 3 1.5
where:
Pt = test pressure, lbf/ft2 (Pa),
DP = design pressure, lbf/ft2 (Pa),
PEF = pressure equalization factor, 0.5, and
1.5 = safety factor.
A1.2.2.1 If documentation in support of the use of compen-
sation for pressure equalization other than 0.5 is provided, use
the calculation in A1.2.2, substituting the appropriate pressure
equalization factor.
8
Vinyl Siding Pressure Equalization Factor, Architectural Testing, Inc., Report
No. 01-40776.01, September, 2002.
9
Morrison, M.J., Cope, A.D., Wind Performance and Evaluation Methods of
Multi-Layered Wall Assemblies, Structures Congress, 2735-2748, Portland, OR,
2015.
8
 D3679 − 17
A1.2.3 Using the above equations, in a 110 mph (177 km/h)
(VASD) wind zone area specifying a design pressure of -29.12
lbf/ft2 (1394 Pa) for a building 30 ft (9.1 m) in height or less,
the required minimum siding uniform load test pressure is
21.84 lb/ft2 (1047 Pa).
A1.2.3.1 For compliance with 5.11, the referenced design
pressure has been rounded to -30.0 lbf/ft2 (1436 Pa) to match
the standard design conditions specified by the 2015 Interna-
tional Residential Code. When tested under Test Method
D5206, the siding must attain an average maximum sustained
static test pressure equal to or greater than the corresponding
minimum test pressure of 22.5 lb/ft2 (1077 Pa).
A1.2.4 For applications where the effective design pressure
is greater than -30.0 lbf/ft2 (1436 Pa) (for example, wind zone
areas greater than 110 mph (177 km/h) (VASD), mean roof
height over 30 ft (9.1 m), or exposure conditions other than
Exposure B), refer to ASCE 7-10 for the effective design
pressure. To be shown to be suitable for the application, when
tested under Test Method D5206 the siding must attain an
average maximum sustained static test pressure equal to or
greater than the minimum test pressure determined by the
formula in A1.2.2, using the design pressure, DP, determined
for the application using the procedure in A1.1.2 through A1.2.
A1.2.5 These loading conditions apply only to siding in-
stalled without an air space, directly over sheathing of a type
and fastening method that is capable of independently resisting
both positive and negative wind design pressures at the
building location. Examples of such sheathing include oriented
strand board (OSB) and plywood fastened to resist the design
wind pressures. For applications where the siding is installed
over open studding, without sheathing, rapid pressure equal-
ization does not occur. In these applications, the load the siding
will see is equal to the total design pressure, and the pressure
equalization factor (PEF) is set to 1.0. The static test pressure
required for products used under these conditions is as follows:
P t 5 D P 3 PEF 3 1.5
where:
Pt = static test pressure, lbf/ft2 (Pa),
DP = design pressure, lbf/ft2 (Pa),
PEF = pressure equalization factor, 1.0, and
1.5 = safety factor.
NOTE A1.6—Building codes and vinyl siding installation instructions
require vinyl siding to be installed over sheathing, so calculation of
minimum test pressure for siding installed without sheathing is essentially
moot. However, the calculation has been retained for completeness and
comparison with other installation conditions.
A1.2.6 When siding is installed over sheathing that is not
capable of independently resisting both positive and negative
wind pressures occurring under design conditions at the
building location, a greater percentage of the total wind
pressure is transferred to the siding and its fasteners. This has
the effect of partially or completely countering the effect of the
pressure equalization factor. In these cases a value between 0.5
and 1.0 is used for the pressure equalization factor (PEF).
A1.2.6.1 In addition, in cases where failure of the siding
would result in failure of the exterior wall covering assembly
(that is, siding and sheathing) a safety factor of greater than 1.5
is indicated.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
A1.2.6.2 If the adjusted PEF for a given combination of
siding and sheathing is known, and an appropriate safety factor
is used, a minimum test pressure can be determined using the
equation in A1.2.1. However, it is normally more appropriate
to make an adjustment for alternative sheathings when deter-
mining the design pressure rating, as discussed in A1.3.
NOTE A1.7—Where the sheathing is not capable of independently
resisting both positive and negative wind pressures occurring under design
conditions at the building location, the layer of siding over the sheathing,
and its fastening through the sheathing, act to reinforce the sheathing such
that the whole wall covering (siding-sheathing) assembly is capable of
resisting such wind pressures. Because vinyl siding is tested by itself (not
as part of a siding-sheathing assembly) in Test Method D5206, the
adjustment of test pressure (before the test) or of the design pressure (after
the test) ensures that the wind load resistance of the assembly as a whole
is reflected in the rating of the siding.
NOTE A1.8—In some high wind hazard regions, such as south Florida,
the exterior wall covering assembly may also be required to meet
wind-borne debris impact resistance criteria which would affect the choice
of sheathing material to be used together with vinyl siding. Such
considerations are beyond the scope of this standard.
A1.3 Wind Design Pressure Rating (Maximum Allowable
Pressure):
A1.3.1 A design pressure rating is the maximum wind
pressure that a particular vinyl siding product is rated to be able
to withstand. It is used in building design and building codes to
determine the acceptability of a siding product for use under
the design wind conditions for a specific application. To be
acceptable, a siding’s design pressure rating must be equal to or
greater than the design pressure for the specific building at the
specific location. The design pressure rating is determined
from the average maximum sustained static test pressure for a
siding product produced by testing under Test Method D5206,
the pressure equalization factor, and a safety factor.
A1.3.2 Standard Design Pressure Rating—The standard
design pressure rating is used for applications where the siding
is installed over a sheathing type and fastening method that is
capable of independently resisting both positive and negative
wind pressures occurring under design conditions at the
building location.
A1.3.2.1 The standard design pressure rating assumes that
the siding is fastened to the building in the standard manner,
with the minimum fastener type, size, spacing, and penetration
depth prescribed in Chapter 7 of the International Residential
Code and the VSI Vinyl Siding Installation Manual. The
installation of the siding for testing under Test Method D5206
must be consistent with these minimum fastening require-
ments. However, this does not prevent additional testing, using
different fastening, to support design pressure ratings for other
applications, such as special high wind installations.
A1.3.2.2 The pressure equalization factor and safety factor
are the same as those used to determine the test pressure in
A1.2.1, using the following equation:
Pm
D Rstd 5 (A1.2)
~ PEF 3 SF!
where:
DRstd = standard design pressure rating, lbf/ft2 (Pa),
 D3679 − 17
Pm = average maximum sustained static test pressure,
lbf/ft2 (Pa),
PEF = pressure equalization factor, 0.5, and
SF = safety factor, 1.5.
A1.3.3 Alternative Design Pressure Ratings—Design pres-
sure ratings for applications other than the standard conditions
described above can be developed. Common circumstances
where this is done include the use of alternative fastening
methods in order to achieve a higher design pressure rating,
and cases where the sheathing is not capable of independently
resisting wind pressures under design conditions, which neces-
sitates a reduction in the siding’s design pressure rating.
A1.3.3.1 Alternative Fastening—Where an alternative fas-
tening method is specified by the manufacturer, the siding is
permitted to be tested under Test Method D5206 using the
specified fastening. The resulting average maximum sustained
static test pressure is used in the above equation to determine
the alternative design pressure rating. In order for this alterna-
tive rating to be realized, the siding must be installed using the
alternative method, and the rating must be clearly tied to
installation requirements in manufacturer’s literature and in-
structions.
A1.3.3.2 Alternative Sheathing—An adjusted design pres-
sure rating for use of the siding over sheathings not capable of
independently resisting both positive and negative wind pres-
sures occurring under design conditions at the building
location, as discussed in A1.2.6, can be calculated using the
above equation if the appropriate PEF and safety factor are
specified.
A1.3.3.3 Alternative PEF and safety factor values have been
documented (see 2009 and 2012 International Residential
Code, section R703.11.2) for one type of sheathing, foam
plastic insulating sheathing complying with ANSI/SBCA FS
100. Two wall assembly cases are considered: 1) where the
interior surface of the wall is covered with gypsum wall board
or equivalent; and 2) where the interior surface of the wall is
not covered with gypsum wall board or equivalent. In both
cases vinyl siding is installed directly over foam sheathing,
BIBLIOGRPHY
(1) ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. Chap-
ter 26, 1977.
(2) “ Wind Forces on Structures,” Transactions of the American Soci-
ety of Civil Engineers, Vol 126, Part II, 1961, pp. 1124–1198.
(3) AAMA, TIR-A2, American Architectural Manufacturers Assn.,
Design Wind Loads for Aluminum Curtain Walls, American Archi-
tectural Manufacturers Assn., 2700 River Rd., Palatine, IL.
(4) Thom, H. C. S., New Distribution of Extreme Winds in the United
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
which is then attached directly to framing, without intervening
sheathing. The PEF and safety factor for each case are as
follows:
Case PEF Safety Factor
Case 1 0.7 2.0
Case 2 1.0 2.0
A1.3.3.4 Adjustment of the standard design pressure rating
is not necessary when foam plastic insulating sheathing is
installed directly over sheathing that is capable of indepen-
dently resisting both positive and negative wind pressures
occurring under design conditions at the building location, or
where the sheathing is fastened in a way that allows it to
independently resist the design wind pressure. For such cases
the standard design pressure rating is applied.
A1.4 Design Wind Speeds:
A1.4.1 The wind velocity maps in ASCE 7-10 provide one
source of design wind speeds for particular geographic regions.
The velocities on these maps are stated in terms of “ultimate,”
700-year return interval speeds. To be used in the procedure in
this Annex, those velocities need to be converted to the ASD
equivalent in accordance with A1.1.2, and the resulting veloc-
ity V used in the equation in A1.1.3. The 2012 and 2015
International Building Code and 2015 International Residential
Code also contain maps based on ultimate wind speeds.
A1.4.2 Other maps are available that do not require conver-
sion of wind velocities. Examples include the wind map in the
2012 International Residential Code, on which the velocities
have already been converted from those on the ASCE 7-10
maps. Maps from previous editions of ASCE 7 used ASD
velocities and do not require conversion. However, only
editions since 1995 used the 3-second gust basis that is used in
this Annex. The 1998, 2002, and 2005 editions of ASCE 7
continued the use of 3-second gust wind basis, but with
improved hazard modeling of hurricane wind speeds first made
in the 1998 edition. These previous editions also do not have
the benefit of further improved hurricane hazard modeling that
was incorporated into the maps used in ASCE 7-10.
States, American Society of Civil Engineers, Environmental Engi-
neering Conference Preprint 431, Dallas, TX, Feb. 6, 1967.
(5) Sachs, Peter, Wind Forces in Engineering, Pergamon Press,
Elmsford, NY 1972.
(6) MacDonald, A. J., Wind Loading on Buildings, Applied Sciences
Publishers, Ltd., Essex, England, 1975.
(7) Houghton, E., and Carruthers, N., Wind Forces on Buildings and
Structures, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1976.
 D3679 − 17
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D3679 - 13)
that may impact the use of this standard. (June 1, 2017)

(1) Section 2 was revised to add references to building codes
and to the VSI Vinyl Siding Installation Manual.
(2) Section 3 was revised to add definitions of design wind load
pressure rating, standard wind load design pressure rating, and
alternative wind load design pressure rating.
(3) Subsection 5.11 was revised to clarify current requirements
and put non-mandatory information in Notes, and to provide
for the determination of standard and alternative wind load
design pressure ratings.
(4) In 5.11, the minimum static test pressure was changed to
reflect the change in pressure equalization factor in A1.2.1.
(5) Subsection 6.14 was revised to provide the standard test
conditions for determining compliance with the minimum test
pressure and standard wind load design pressure rating.
(6) Section 7 was deleted and its content merged into a new
Section 7 dealing with packaging and package marking.
Provisions specifying marking of the standard design pressure
and alternative design pressures were added.
(7) Subsection A1.2 was revised to add provisions for adjusting
the minimum required test pressure for applications of siding
over certain alternative sheathing types.
(8) In A1.2.1, the pressure equalization factor was changed and
a reference added to research supporting this change.
(9) Added A1.2.1.1 to provide for the use of alternative
pressure equalization factors.
(10) In A1.2.3 and A1.2.3.1, the minimum test pressures were
changed to reflect the change in pressure equalization factor in
A1.2.1.
(11) Subsection A1.3 was added to describe the procedures for
determining design pressure ratings.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:38 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3681 − 18

Standard Test Method for

Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”
(Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a
Deflected Condition1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3681; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”

1.1 This test method covers the procedure for determining
the chemical-resistant properties of fiberglass pipe in a de-
flected condition for diameters 4 in. (102 mm) and larger. Both
glass–fiber–reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP) and
glass–fiber–reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiber-
glass pipes.
NOTE 1—For the purposes for this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 Inch-pound units are to be regarded as the standard. The
values given in parentheses are for information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific precautionary statements are given in 9.5.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 end point—the passage of the fluid through the pipe
wall unless otherwise stated. The failure mode may be
catastrophic, characterized by a sudden fracture through the
pipe wall in the area of greatest strain, parallel to the axis of the
pipe, with the fiber reinforcement cleanly broken at the edge of
the fracture. Visual evidence of surface etching or pitting may
or may not be present.
3.2.2 fiberglass pipe—tubular product containing glass fiber
reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured thermo-
setting resin. The composite structure may contain aggregate,
granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents, pigments, or
dyes. Thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or coatings may be
included.
3.2.3 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
3.2.4 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—
fiberglass pipe without aggregate.
3.2.5 strain-corrosion—the failure of the pipe wall caused
by the exposure of the inside surface, while in a strained
condition, to a corrosive environment for a period of time.

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
4. Summary of Test Method
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic 4.1 This test method consists of exposing the interior of a
Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally minimum of 18 specimens of pipe to a corrosive test solution
approved in 1978. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D3681 – 12ɛ1. DOI: while the pipe is constantly maintained in a deflected condition
10.1520/D3681-18.
2
at differing induced initial ring flexural strain levels, and
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
measuring the time to failure for each strain level. Test
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on temperatures are obtained by testing in an air environment
the ASTM website. where the temperature is controlled.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3681 − 18
4.2 The long-term resistance of the pipe to the test solution
is obtained by an extrapolation to 50 years of a log-log linear
regression line for initial strain level versus time.
NOTE 3—It is the consensus of Subcommittee D20.23 that the log–log
linear regression analysis of test data is a conservative approach and is
representative of standard industry practice.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method evaluates the effect of a chemical
environment on pipe when in a deflected condition. It has been
found that effects of chemical environments can be accelerated
by strain induced by deflection. This information is useful and
necessary for the design and application of buried fiberglass
pipe.
NOTE 4—Pipe of the same diameter but of different wall thicknesses
will develop different strains with the same deflection. Also, pipes having
the same wall thickness but different constructions making up the wall
may develop different strains with the same deflection.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Use parallel plate apparatus suitable to maintain a
constant deflection on the pipe. In order to achieve uniform
strain along the pipe, use 0.25-in. (6-mm) thick elastomeric
pads between the parallel plate (channel) surfaces and the pipe
ring (see Note 5). Foil type, single element strain gages suitable
for strain levels to 1.50 % strain and a length appropriate to the
diameter of the pipe are required when initial strain is to be
determined by Procedure B (see Note 6). An example of the
apparatus required is shown in Fig. 1.
NOTE 5—Elastomeric pads with a hardness of Shore A15 to 70 have
been used successfully.
NOTE 6—Strain gages of 1⁄4 and 1⁄2-in. (6 and 13-mm) length have been
found to be effective for pipe diameters 12 through 24 in. (305 through
610 mm). Consult the strain gage manufacturer for gage length recom-
mendations for other pipe diameters.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The test specimens shall be ring sections taken from a
sample of pipe selected at random from a normal production
FIG. 1 Strain-Corrosion Test Apparatus
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
run. The test specimens shall have a minimum length of one
nominal pipe diameter or 12 in. (300 mm) 6 5 %, whichever
is less.
8. Test Conditions
8.1 The standard temperature shall be 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6
2°C).
9. Procedure
9.1 General—Determine the initial strain level induced in
the pipe by calculation, or strain gage measurement, or both.
Procedure A describes the determination of initial strain by
calculation; Procedure B describes the determination of initial
strain as obtained by use of foil-type resistance strain gages.
9.2 Determination of Test Level:
9.2.1 Test Procedure A:
9.2.1.1 In accordance with Practice D3567 measure the wall
thickness to the nearest 0.001 in. (0.025 mm) in at least five
equally spaced places along the bottom of the pipe specimen on
a line parallel with the pipe axis, and average the measure-
ments.
9.2.1.2 In accordance with Practice D3567 measure the
vertical inside diameter to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm) at
both ends prior to deflection and average the measurements.
NOTE 7—It is recommended that the vertical inside diameter be
measured with the axis vertical.
9.2.1.3 Place the pipe specimen in the test apparatus (Fig. 1)
with the measured wall thicknesses at the bottom and apply
force to the apparatus to deflect the specimen while keeping the
top and bottom plates (channels) of the apparatus as near
parallel as possible. When the desired deflection is obtained,
lock the apparatus to maintain the specimen in the deflected
condition.
NOTE 8—Alignment of the specimen within the channels is critical. The
channels shall not only be parallel with the load points 180° opposite, but
the pipe shall be centered between the rods.
 D3681 − 18
9.2.1.4 Measure the vertical inside diameter of the deflected
pipe specimen at both ends to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm).
Average the measurements and determine the deflection by
subtracting the average vertical inside diameter after deflection
from the measurement determined in 9.2.1.2.
9.2.1.5 Calculate the initial strain level using the following
equation which includes compensation for increased horizontal
diameter with increasing deflection.
ε T 5 428~ t !~ ∆ !
SD m1
∆ 2
2 D
where:
εT = initial strain, %,
t = average wall thickness at bottom, in. (mm),
∆ = average deflection, in. (mm),
Dm = mean diameter, in. (mm) D̄ + t, and
D̄ = average inside pipe diameter, free state, in. (mm).
NOTE 9—The calculation assumes that the neutral axis is at the pipe
wall midpoint. For pipe wall constructions that produce an altered neutral
axis position, it may be necessary to evaluate results substituting 2 ȳ for
t. (ȳ is the distance from the inside pipe surface to the neutral axis.)
Neutral axis position must be determined with strain gage couples. See
also Note 11.
9.2.2 Procedure B:
9.2.2.1 Carefully align and attach three strain gages on the
inside bottom surface of the pipe specimen in the circumfer-
ential direction to measure initial circumferential strains. Place
the gages perpendicular to the pipe axis as follows: one in the
middle and the other two at the quarter points along the invert
of the specimen. The adhesive used to attach the gages shall not
cover more than 37 % of the pipe specimen length along the
invert. Zero-in the gages while the pipe is circular in shape.
NOTE 10—It is recommended that the pipe specimen be placed with its
axis vertical to maintain roundness when the bridge is balanced to “zero”
the instrument.
9.2.2.2 After installing the strain gages, place the specimen
in the test apparatus (see Fig. 1) with the strain gages at the
bottom. Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that the gages are
located at the point of maximum strain (6 o’clock position).
NOTE 11—Alignment of the specimen within the channels is critical.
The channels shall not only be parallel with the load points 180° opposite,
but the pipe shall be centered between the rods.
9.2.2.3 Apply force to the apparatus to deflect the specimen
while keeping the top and bottom plates (channels) of the
apparatus as parallel as possible. When the desired strain level
is reached, lock the apparatus to maintain the specimen in the
deflected condition. Read the gages as soon as the apparatus is
locked. Initial strain shall be recorded within 2 min after
locking the apparatus. At least two gages shall read within 5 %
of each other for a valid experiment. If any gage reads more
than 5 % from the average of the other two gages, disregard the
indication unless thickness verification implies the strain gage
reading was accurate. Average the valid gage indications, and
record as initial (indicated) strain. In addition, measure and
record the deflection.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.3 When using Procedure A, verify the strain level by using
strain gages as described in Procedure B for at least one
specimen in every nine. Conversely, when using Procedure B,
verify the strain level by measurement and calculation as
described in Procedure A for at least one specimen in every
nine. If the calculated strain and the indicated strain do not vary
more than 10 %, consider the strain levels accurate within
normal experimental error.
NOTE 12—Deflections in excess of 28 % of diameter may cause local
flattening of the pipe and lead to erratic strain distribution. For deflections
approaching 28 % improved accuracy is obtained by use of strain gages or
by establishing, for a typical pipe, a calibration of deflection versus
measured strain. This calibration technique is also useful at all deflection
levels as a check of the calculations by 9.2.1.5, which assumes neutral axis
at pipe wall midpoint.
9.4 After the initial strain is obtained using Procedure A or
B, install chemically inert dams using a flexible sealant so that
only the interior surface of the pipe will be exposed to the test
environment. The dams shall not add support to the pipe
specimen.
9.5 Place the apparatus containing the specimen in a chemi-
cally resistant trough or pan and introduce the test solution. The
solution should be added within 30 minutes of locking the
apparatus and the time shall be recorded from the addition of
the solution. (Warning—Since the failure mode could be
catastrophic, precautions should be taken to contain any
sudden leakage that may occur. The use of spacers (such as,
wooden blocks) under the apparatus is suggested to reduce
attack of the apparatus after failure of the sample.)
9.6 Periodically check and maintain the test solution within
65 % of the specified strength or concentration for the
duration of the test. Maintain the level at a depth of not less
than 1 in. (25.4 mm) during the period of the test.
NOTE 13—As some solutions become more concentrated with the
evaporation of water, care must be exercised in replenishment to prevent
a build-up in strength. It may be necessary, with some reagents, to
periodically clean the deflected specimen and replace the test solution with
a fresh mixture. The use of plastic film, cut carefully to fit between the
dams and floated on the top of the test solution, has been found helpful in
reducing evaporation.
9.7 Record the following data:
9.7.1 Average pipe wall thickness,
9.7.2 Average inside pipe diameter before deflection,
9.7.3 Average inside pipe diameter after deflection,
9.7.4 Percent deflection,
9.7.5 Initial strain and method of determination,
9.7.6 Type, location, and time of any distress of the pipe
wall, and
9.7.7 Time to end point. Times are measured from the
addition of solution.
9.8 To determine the regression line and the lower confi-
dence level for the report, a minimum of 18 samples is
required. Distribution of data points shall be as follows:
Hours Failure Points
10 to 1000 at least 4
1000 to 6000 at least 3
After 6000 at least 3
After 10 000 at least 1
9.9 Perform inspection of the test samples as follows:
 D3681 − 18
Hours Inspect at Least
10 to 20 every 1 h
20 to 40 every 2 h
40 to 60 every 4 h
60 to 100 every 8 h
100 to 600 every 24 h
600 to 6000 every 48 h
After 6000 every week
Record the time to end point for each specimen.
NOTE 14—The use of electronic timers is considered highly desirable in
monitoring failure time particularly on short term tests.
9.10 Analyze the test results by using for each specimen, the
logarithm of the strain in percent and the logarithm of the
time-to-failure in hours as described in Annex A1. Calculate
the strain at 50 years (YL).
9.11 Those specimens that have not failed after more than
10 000 h are permitted to be included as failures to establish
the regression line. Use of these data points may result in a
lower or higher extrapolated strain. In either case the require-
ments of 9.14 must be satisfied.
NOTE 15—Non-failed specimens may be left under test and the
regression line recalculated as failures are obtained.
9.12 Determine the final line for extrapolation to 50 years
by the method of least squares given in Annex A1, using all
end points along with those non-failure points selected by the
method described in 9.11. Calculate Sxy in accordance with
A1.4.2 and the coefficient of correlation, r, in accordance with
A1.4.3.
9.13 If Sxy is greater than 0 (see A1.4.2), consider the data
unsuitable.
9.14 If the coefficient of correlation value (see A1.4.3), r, is
less than the applicable minimum value given in Table A1.1 as
a function of n, reject the data.
9.15 Prepare a graph on a log-log diagram in accordance
with 9.12 showing time to failure versus strain, with time
plotted on the horizontal (x) axis and strain plotted on the
vertical (y) axis.
10. Reconfirmation of Strain Corrosion Regression Line
10.1 When a piping product has an existing strain corrosion
regression line, any change in material, manufacturing process,
construction, or liner shall necessitate a screening evaluation
(reconfirmation) as described in 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, and 10.5.
10.2 Calculate and plot the 95 % confidence limits and the
95 % prediction limits of the original regression line in
accordance with A1.4 using only data obtained prior to the
change.
NOTE 16—Prediction limits define the bounds for single observations,
whereas confidence limits define the bounds for the regression line.
NOTE 17—For 95 % confidence limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
the mean value for the regression line may fall above the UCL and a 2.5 %
probability that the mean value for the regression line may fall below the
LCL. For 95 % prediction limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
individual data points may fall above the UPL and a 2.5 % probability that
individual data points may fall below the LPL.
10.3 From the original regression line, select strain levels
for at least two sets of specimens, each set consisting of three
or more specimens each to be tested at the same strain level as
follows:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Hours to Failure (Average of Set) Failure Points
10 to 200 at least 3
More than 1000 at least 3
Total: at least 6
For the purpose of reconfirmation, it is permitted to include
as failures those specimens which have not failed after 1200
hours provided they exceed the regression line.
10.4 Consider any changes in material or manufacturing
process minor and permissible if the results of 10.3 meet the
following criteria.
10.4.1 The average time to failure for each strain level falls
on or above the 95 % lower confidence limit of the original
regression line.
10.4.2 The earliest individual failure time at each strain
level falls on or above the 95 % lower prediction limit of the
original regression line.
10.4.3 The failure points are distributed about the originally
determined regression line. No more than two-thirds of the
individual failure points may fall below the original regression
line.
10.5 It is permitted to assume that data meeting the criteria
of 10.4 are part of the original data set and a new regression
line determined using all failure points. Specimens that have
not failed after 1200 hours are not suitable for establishing a
new regression line; however, it is permitted to use these data
points for the purpose of reconfirmation.
10.6 If the data fails to satisfy the criteria of 10.4.1, the
changes are considered major and a new regression line must
be established. While the new test program is being conducted,
an interim strain corrosion value for the material or process
change may be taken as the lower of:
10.6.1 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the value ob-
tained by extrapolating the failure points of 10.3 to 438 000 h
(50 years) by the procedure in Annex A1.
10.6.2 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the original
regression line at 50 years.
11. Report
11.1 The report shall include the following:
11.1.1 Complete identification of the pipe composition,
manufacturer’s code, size, and minimum wall thickness.
11.1.2 Test procedure used.
11.1.3 Data in 9.7.
11.1.4 Notations of any type of distress observed in the
specimens, whether it be discoloration, leakage, small fracture,
surface crazing, or complete cracking, together with the time
and date of occurrence, and the location of distress. Indicate the
location of distress using the bottom center as the reference
point.
11.1.5 Complete description of the test solution (reagent).
11.1.6 Type of strain gage employed and method of mount-
ing.
11.1.7 Temperature at which the test was run.
11.1.8 Graph of 9.15.
11.1.9 Strains at 50 years.
11.1.10 Coefficient of correlation, r (see 9.12).
 D3681 − 18
12. Precision and Bias 13. Keywords
12.1 No precision and bias statement can be made for this 13.1 chemical resistance; constant deflection; extrapolation;
test method since controlled round-robin test programs have fiberglass pipe; regression line; strain-corrosion
not been run. This test method is generally used to evaluate
large-diameter fiberglass pipe.

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. LEAST SQUARES CALCULATION FOR LONG TERM STRAIN CORROSION VALUE

A1.1 General yi = the log10 of Vi, where Vi is the strain at failure of

A1.1.1 The analysis is based on the following relationship: observation i; i = 1, . . . n,
xi = the log10 of ti, where ti is the time to failure (in hours) of
y 5 a1bx (A1.1) observation i; i = 1, . . . n,
where: ȳ = the arithmetic mean of all yi values:
y = one variable, 1
x = the other variable 5
n (y i (A1.2)
b = the slope of the line, and
a = the intercept on the y axis. x̄ = the arithmetic mean of all xi values:
A1.1.2 A linear functional relationship analysis (sometimes 1
called “covariance analysis”) is used, subject to tests for the
5
n (x i (A1.3)

sign (that is, “+” or “−”) of the slope and the coefficient of A1.4.2 Relevant Sums-of-Squares:
correlation for the quantity of data available. The relevant A1.4.2.1 Calculate the following sums-of-squares and
equations are given together with example data and results, on cross-products:
the basis of which any other statistical computing package may
1
be used subject to validation by agreement with the example S xy 5 ( ~ x 2 x̄ !~ y 2 ȳ !
i i (A1.4)
n
results to within the indicated limits.
A1.1.3 For the purposes of this annex, a design service life A1.4.2.2 If Sxy > 0, consider the data unsuitable for
of 50 years has been assumed. evaluating the material; otherwise, calculate also:
1
A1.2 Procedure for Analysis of Data S xx 5
n ( ~ x 2 x̄ !
i
2
(A1.5)

A1.2.1 Use a linear functional relationship analysis to 1

analyze n pairs of data values (as y and x) to obtain the S yy 5
n ( ~ y 2 ȳ !
i
2
(A1.6)
following information:
A1.4.3 Correlation of Data:
A1.2.1.1 The slope of line, b,
A1.4.3.1 Calculate the coefficient of correlation, r, from the
A1.2.1.2 The intercept on the y axis, a, following relationship:
A1.2.1.3 The correlation coefficient, r, and
A1.2.1.4 The predicted mean and the lower 95 % confi- 2
~ S xy! 2
r 5 (A1.7)
dence and prediction intervals on the mean value. ~ S xx 3 S yy!
r 5 =r 2
A1.3 Assignment of Variables
A1.4.3.2 If the value of r is less than the applicable
A1.3.1 Let x be log10t, where t is the time, in hours, and let
minimum value given in Table A1.1 as a function of n, reject
y be log10V, where V is the strain value.
the data; otherwise, proceed to A1.4.4.
A1.4 Functional Relationship Equations and Method of A1.4.4 Functional Relationships:
Calculation A1.4.4.1 To find a and b for the functional relationship line,
A1.4.1 Basic Statistics and Symbols: y = a + bx (Eq A1.1), first set:
A1.4.1.1 The following basic statistics and symbols are
used: λ5 S D S yy
S xx
(A1.8)

and then let:

n = the number of pairs of observed data values (Vi, ti),
b 5 2 =λ (A1.9)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3681 − 18
TABLE A1.1 Minimum Values for the Coefficient of Correlation, r, the variance, A, of a using the formula:
for Acceptable Data From n Pairs of Data
n
Number of variables
n-2
Degrees of freedom
Minimum r H
A 5 D x̄ 2 ~ 11τ ! 1
S xy
b J (A1.19)
3 1 0.9999
4 2 0.9900 the variance, σn2, of the fitted line at xL using the formula:
5 3 0.9587
6 4 0.9172
σ n 2 5 A12BxL 1CxL2 (A1.20)
7 5 0.8745 2
8 6 0.8343
the error variance, σε , for y using the formula:
9 7 0.7977 σ ε2 5 2λσ δ2 (A1.21)
10 8 0.7646
11 9 0.7348 2
the total variance, σy , for future values, yL, for y at xL using
12 10 0.7079
13 11 0.6835 the formula:
14 12 0.6614
15 13 0.6411
σ 2y 5 σ 2n 1σ ε2 (A1.22)
16 14 0.6226
17 15 0.6055
A1.4.5.5 Calculate the estimated standard deviation, σy, for
18 16 0.5897 yL using the equation:
19 17 0.5751
20 18 0.5614 σ y 5 ~ σ 2n 1σ ε2 ! 0.5 (A1.23)
21 19 0.5487
22 20 0.5368 and the predicted value, yL, for y at xLusing the relationship:
23 21 0.5256
24 22 0.5151
y L 5 a1bxL (A1.24)
25 23 0.5052
26 24 0.4958
where a and b have the values obtained in accordance with
27 25 0.4869 (Eq A1.9) and (Eq A1.10).
32 30 0.4487
37 35 0.4182 A1.4.6 Calculation and Confidence Intervals:
42 40 0.3932 A1.4.6.1 Calculate the lower 95 % prediction interval,
47 45 0.3721
52 50 0.3542
yL 0.95, predicted for yL using the equation:
62 60 0.3248 y L 0.95 5 y L 2 t v σ y (A1.25)
72 70 0.3017
82 80 0.2830
92 90 0.2673
where:
102 100 0.2540 yL = the value obtained in accordance with (Eq A1.24) when
xL is, as applicable, the value in accordance with (Eq
A1.11) appropriate to a design life of, for example, 50
and then: years (that is, xL = 5.6415 (in h)) or to a time at which
it is desired to predict with 95 % confidence the
a 5 ȳ 2 bx̄ (A1.10) minimum value for the next observation of V,
NOTE A1.1—Since y = log10V and x = log10t, hence V = 10y, t = 10x and σy = the value obtained in accordance with (Eq A1.23), and
the implified relationship for V in terms of t is therefore:
tv = the applicable value for Student’s t for v = n − 2 degrees
V 5 10~ a1b3log10 t ! of freedom, as given in Table A1.2 for a two sided 0.05
A1.4.5 Calculation of Variances: level of significance (that is, mean 6 2.5 %).
A1.4.5.1 If tL is the applicable time to failure, then set: A1.4.6.2 Calculate the corresponding lower 95 % prediction
x L 5 log10t L (A1.11) limit for V using the relationship:
V L 0.95 5 10Y L 0.95 (A1.26)
A1.4.5.2 Calculate, in turn, the following sequence of sta-
tistics. For i= 1 to i = n, the best fit, ξi, for true x, the best fit, A1.4.6.3 The predicted mean value of V at time tL, that is,
Yi, for true y and the error variance, σδ2, for x using (Eq A1.12), VL, is given by the relationship:
(Eq A1.13), and (Eq A1.14) respectively:
V L 5 10Y L (A1.27)
ξ i 5 $ λx i 1 ~ y i 2 a ! b % /2λ (A1.12)
where:
Y i 5 a1bξ i (A1.13)
YL = the value obtained in accordance with (Eq A1.24).
σ δ2 5 $ ( ~ y 2 Y ! 1λ ( ~ x 2 ξ ! % / $ λ ~ n 2 2 ! %
i i
2
i i
2
(A1.14) A1.4.6.4 Setting σy2 = σn2 in (Eq A1.22) will produce a
A1.4.5.3 Calculate the following quantities: confidence interval for the line rather than a prediction interval
for a future observation.
τ 5 bσ δ /2S xy (A1.15)
2
D 5 2λbσ /nSxy δ (A1.16)
A1.5 Example Calculation
B 5 2Dx̄ ~ 11τ ! (A1.17)
A1.5.1 Basic Data—The example data given in Table A1.3,
A1.4.5.4 Calculate the following variances: the variance, C, together with the example analysis given in this subsection, can
of b using the formula: be used to validate statistical packages or procedures. Because
C 5 D ~ 11τ ! (A1.18) of rounding errors, it is unlikely that there will be exact

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3681 − 18
TABLE A1.2 Student’s “t” Value TABLE A1.3 Example Data for Example Calculation
(Two-Sided 0.05 Level of Significance) Data Time, Strain, Log Time, Log Strain,
n n-2 Student’s Point t %v x y
Number of variables Degrees of freedom t(0.05)
3 1 12.706 1 25.9 1.151 1.41330 0.06108
4 2 4.303 2 34.7 1.125 1.54033 0.05115
5 3 3.182 3 260.4 1.077 2.41564 0.03222
6 4 2.776 4 424.3 1.041 2.62767 0.01745
7 5 2.571 5 95.3 1.028 1.97909 0.01199
8 6 2.447 6 157.1 1.027 2.19618 0.01157
9 7 2.365 7 46.7 0.911 1.66932 −0.04048
10 8 2.306 8 124.7 0.902 2.09587 −0.04479
11 9 2.262 9 766.8 0.885 2.88468 −0.05306
12 10 2.228 10 1064 0.880 3.02694 −0.05552
13 11 2.201 11 1013 0.879 3.00561 −0.05601
14 12 2.179 12 2770 0.794 3.44248 −0.10018
15 13 2.160 13 12408 0.768 4.09370 −0.11464
16 14 2.145 14 4981 0.747 3.69732 −0.12668
17 15 2.131 15 3780 0.706 3.57749 −0.15120
18 16 2.120 16 4427 0.699 3.64611 −0.15552
19 17 2.110 17 28272 0.678 4.45136 −0.16877
20 18 2.101 18 16943 0.657 4.22899 −0.18244
21 19 2.093
22 20 2.086
23 21 2.080
24 22 2.074
25 23 2.069
26 24 2.064
27 25 2.060
r = 0.9023764
32 30 2.042 A1.5.4 Functional Relationships:
37 35 2.030
42 40 2.021
47 45 2.014
52 50 2.009 λ = 6.852660 × 10−3
62 60 2.000 b = −8.278079 × 10−2
72 70 1.994
82 80 1.990
a = 0.1800067
92 90 1.987 A1.5.5 Calculated Variances:
102 100 1.984

D = 9.266935× 10−5
agreement, but acceptable procedures should agree within B = −2.839595 × 10−4
60.1 % of the results given in A1.5.6. C (variance of b) = 9.830865 × 10−5
A1.5.2 Sums of Squares: A (variance of a) = 8.919367 × 10−4
σn2 (error variance for x) = 8.168303× 10−4
Sxx = 0.8578342 σε2 (error variance for y) = 1.29122 × 10−3
Syy = 5.878446 × 10−3 A1.5.6 Confidence Limits—For N = 18 and Student’s t of
Sxy = −0.064080 2.1199, the estimated mean and confidence and prediction
A1.5.3 Coeffıcient of Correlation: intervals are given in Table A1.4.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3681 − 18
TABLE A1.4 Confidence Limits
Time, h Mean Lower Confidence Lower Prediction
Interval Interval

1 1.51 1.31 1.20

10 1.25 1.13 1.04
100 1.03 0.97 0.86
1000 0.85 0.82 0.71
10 000 0.71 0.66 0.59
100 000 0.58 0.52 0.47
438 000 0.52 0.45 0.41

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3681 – 12ɛ1) that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2018)

(1) Clarified the intent and use of data for reconfirmation (3) Revised Tables A1.1 and A1.2 to unify range of variables
testing –Section 10. considered.
(2) Eliminated instances of non-mandatory language.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:44 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3753 − 19

Standard Specification for

Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Manholes and Wetwells1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3753; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Electrical Insulating Materials

1.1 This specification covers “fiberglass” (glass fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin) manholes and wetwells fabri-
cated with polyester, vinyl ester, or epoxy resin for use
primarily in sanitary, storm, and industrial sewer applications.
1.2 The values given in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values in parentheses are provided for
information purposes only.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D785 Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2019. Published September 2019. Originally
approved in 1979. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D3753 – 12ε1. DOI:
10.1520/D3753-19.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminol-
ogy D883 and the abbreviations are in accordance with
Terminology D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 bench and invert, n—internal flow channel with a sloped
bench extending from the edge of the flow channel to the
manhole wall designed to facilitate the flow of liquid through
the manhole between the pipe connectors.
3.3 bottom, n—a flat, domed, dished, or other shaped bottom
designed to make the manhole or wetwell watertight at its base.
3.4 expanded base manhole, n—a manhole with a larger
diameter base section and reduced diameter riser section. (See
Fig. 1 for a typical manhole and an expanded base manhole.)
3.5 expanded base reducer, n—a portion of the manhole,
between the manway reducer and bottom, that changes from
one diameter to another in the cylindrical portion of the
structure.
3.6 manway reducer, n—the top portion of the manhole
through which entrance to the manhole is made and where the
diameter increases from the entrance way to the larger manhole
cylinder.
3.7 manhole, n—a constant diameter cylinder attached to a
manway reducer designed to handle a manhole cover and ring.
3.8 manhole cover and frame, n—those accessories used
with the manhole to close the manway entrance (includes grade
adjustment rings).

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3753 − 19
FIG. 1 Typical Manhole and Expanded Base Manhole
3.9 manhole cylinder, n—the portion below the manway
reducer that extends in a constant diameter to the manhole
base.
3.10 pipe connectors, n—connectors that provide access for
the sewer pipe into the manhole.
3.11 resin rich, adj—describes that portion of the glass
fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin material where the resin-
to-glass ratio is significantly greater than in other portions of
the manhole.
3.12 wetwell, n—a cylindrical structure which is permitted
to be open at the top or include a top.
3.13 wetwell top, n—a flat, domed, dished or other shaped
top attached at the top of a wetwell structure. The top may
include ribs or other structures to add stiffness. Stiffening
features are permitted to be added to the interior or exterior
surface, and may be integral or added as a secondary feature.
It is permitted to use a similar top on manholes.
4. Materials
4.1 Resin—The resins used shall be a commercial grade
thermosetting unsaturated polyester, vinyl ester or epoxy resin.
4.2 Reinforcing Materials—The reinforcing materials shall
be commercial grade of E-type glass fibers in the form of mat,
continuous roving, chopped roving, or roving fabric, having a
coupling agent that will provide a suitable bond between the
glass reinforcement and the resin.
4.3 Surfacing Material—If reinforcing material is used on
the surface exposed to the contained substance, it shall be a
commercial grade chemical-resistant glass or organic surfacing
mat having a coupling agent that will provide a suitable bond
with the resin.
4.4 Fillers and Additives—Fillers, such as sand, calcium
carbonate, etc., when used, shall be inert to the environment
and manhole or wetwell construction. Additives, such as
thixotropic agents, catalysts, promoters, pigments, etc., are
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
permitted to be added as required by the specific manufacturing
process to be used to meet the requirements of this standard.
The resulting reinforced-plastic material shall meet the require-
ment of this specification. Use of fillers is permitted when
agreed upon between fabricator and purchaser. See Note 2.
NOTE 2—The use of paints, coatings, pigments, dyes, colorants and
fillers may interfere with visual inspection of the laminate.
4.5 Other Materials—The use of polyester filaments, poly-
ester scrim, glass fiber scrim, or similar material as processing
aids is permitted. The resulting reinforced-plastic material shall
meet the requirement of this specification.
4.6 Ribs—When used, ribs are permitted to be manufactured
as a solid construction or with materials applied over a
structural or non-structural form. The resulting reinforced-
plastic material shall meet the requirement of this specification.
5. Manufacture
5.1 Manholes, wetwells, manway reducers, eccentric or
concentric reducers, connectors, tops and bottoms shall be
produced from glass fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin with
construction determined by the particular process of manufac-
ture and configuration. The process is permitted to include
contact molding, compression molding, pultrusion, filament
winding, resin transfer molding, spray up, hand lay-up, cen-
trifugal casting, vacuum bagging, or other methods. Ribs are
permitted to be attached to the interior or the exterior surface.
5.2 Interior Access—All manholes and wetwells shall be
designed so that a ladder or step system can be supported by
the installed manhole or wetwell.
5.3 Manway Reducer—Manway reducers are permitted to
be eccentric or concentric with respect to the larger portion of
the manhole.
5.4 Cover and Ring Support—Manholes shall provide an
area from which a typical ring and cover plate can be supported
without damage to the manhole.
 D3753 − 19
5.5 Assembly Joints—Product segments are permitted to be
joined together to form a complete manhole or wetwell.
5.6 Manhole or Wetwell Bottom—Bottom shall be designed
to be water tight and withstand the external hydraulic pressure
of water to grade. The bottom design is permitted to include
methods to anchor the bottom to a concrete base or other
external structure to provide the required resistance to external
pressure.
5.7 Bench and Invert—Bench and invert are permitted to be
produced from glass fiber-reinforced thermosetting resin or
other material suitable for the contents of the manhole. The
bench and invert are permitted to include one or more 1⁄2-in.
diameter ports to allow the equalization of pressure between
the manhole interior and the cavity under the bench and invert.
Use of larger ports is permitted to allow the field installation of
concrete or grout in the cavity under the bench and invert.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship:
6.1.1 Exterior Surface—The exterior surface shall be rela-
tively smooth with no sharp projections. Hand-work finish is
acceptable if enough resin is present to saturate all fibers. The
exterior surface shall be free of blisters larger than 0.5 in. (12.7
mm) in diameter and delamination. Fibers loosely attached
(can be removed with wire brush) are allowed if not excessive.
6.1.2 Exterior Paint or Pigmentation—Use of exterior
paints, coatings, pigments and colorants is permitted when
agreed upon between fabricator and purchaser. See Note 2.
6.1.3 Interior Surface—The interior surface shall be resin
rich with no exposed fibers. The surface shall be free of
crazing, delamination, blisters larger than 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) in
diameter, and wrinkles of 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) or greater in
depth. Surface pits shall be permitted up to 6/ft2 (60/m2 ) if they
are less than 0.75 in. (19 mm) in diameter and less than 0.0625
in. (1.6 mm) deep. Voids that cannot be broken with finger
pressure and that are entirely below the resin surface shall be
permitted up to 4/ft2 (40/m2) if they are less than 0.5 in. (12.7
mm) in diameter.
6.1.4 Interior Paint or Pigmentation—Use of interior paints,
coatings, pigments, and colorants are permitted when agreed
upon between fabricator and purchaser. See Note 2.
6.1.5 Indentations—Indentations or other shape imperfec-
tions that will not affect performance are allowed.
6.2 Repairs—Any manhole or wetwell is permitted to be
repaired to meet all requirements of this specification.
6.3 Dimensions—The dimensions shall be as shown below
when measured in accordance with 8.3.1.
6.3.1 Minimum cylinder internal diameter of the manhole or
wetwell shall be 42 in. (1057 mm). The minimum manway
reducer inside diameter shall be 21 in. (533 mm).
6.3.2 Manhole or wetwell lengths shall be in 6-in. (152-mm)
increments 62 in. (51 mm).
6.3.3 Nominal inside diameters shall be 42 in. (1067 mm),
48 in. (1219 mm), 54 in. (1372 mm), 60 in. (1524 mm), 66 in.
(1676 mm), and 72 in. (1829 mm). Tolerance on the inside
diameter shall be 61 %. Other diameters are allowed and are
covered by this specification.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.4 Manhole Performance Test—One complete manhole
manufactured in a manner consistent in every way with this
specification shall meet the performance criteria in 6.4.1 –
6.4.3. If a change in materials or methods of manufacturing is
made and that change may affect the results of these tests, then
the testing shall be repeated. These tests are to be conducted on
a representative manhole to qualify the finished product
characteristics. They are not considered to be a quality control
procedure and are not required for production parts.
6.4.1 Load Rating—The complete manhole shall have a
minimum dynamic-load rating of 16 000 lbf (71 172 N) when
tested in accordance with 8.4. To establish this rating, the
complete manhole shall not leak, crack, or suffer other damage
when load tested to 40 000 lbf (177 929 N) and shall not
deflect vertically downward more than 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) at
the point of load application when loaded to 24 000 lb (106 757
N).
6.4.2 Stiffness—The manhole cylinder shall have the mini-
mum pipe-stiffness values shown in Table 1 when tested in
accordance with 8.5. It is permitted to interpolate stiffness
requirements for other manhole lengths between the values in
Table 1.
6.4.3 Soundness—The manholes shall not leak when tested
in accordance with 8.6.
6.5 Wetwell Stiffness—The wetwell cylinder shall have the
minimum pipe-stiffness value shown in Table 1 when tested in
accordance with 8.5. It is permitted to interpolate stiffness
requirements for other wetwell lengths between the values in
Table 1. These tests are to be conducted on a representative
wetwell to qualify the finished product characteristics. They
are not considered to be a quality control procedure and are not
required for production parts.
NOTE 3—Table 1 values are based upon a surrounding soil modulus of
750 psi or greater. This value is representative of moderately compacted
fine grain sand.
6.6 Chemical Resistance—Manhole or wetwell samples
manufactured in a manner consistent in every way with this
specification shall be tested in accordance with 8.7. The log of
percent retention of each property after immersion testing
when plotted against the log of immersion time, and extrapo-
lated to 100 000 h shall assure retention of at least 50 % of
initial properties. If a change is made in the manhole construc-
tion and that change may affect the results of the chemical
resistance testing, then the testing shall be repeated. Chemical
testing is conducted to determine the applicability of the
materials used in the manufacture of the manhole to the
specified use conditions. It is not considered to be a quality
control procedure.
TABLE 1 Stiffness Requirements
Manhole or Wetwell Length, ft F/∆Y, psi (kPa)
(mm)
6 (1829) 0.72 (4.96)
12 (3658) 1.26 (8.69)
20 (6096) 2.01 (13.86)
25 (7620) 3.02 (20.82)
35 (10668) 5.24 (36.13)
50 (15240) 8.42 (58.81)
 D3753 − 19
6.7 Material Properties—The following properties shall be
established for each type of construction used in the manhole
or wetwell. If a change in materials or methods of manufac-
turing is made and that change may affect the results of the
following tests, then the testing shall be repeated. Material
properties tests are conducted to qualify the finished product
characteristics. They are not considered to be a quality control
procedure and are not required for production parts.
6.7.1 Material Composition—The material composition of
the manhole or wetwell in percent by weight shall be deter-
mined in accordance with 8.8.1.
6.7.2 Compressive Strength—The compressive strength in
the hoop and axial directions of the manhole or wetwell shall
be determined in accordance with 8.8.2.
6.7.3 Flexural Strength and Modulus—The flexural strength
and flexural modulus of elasticity, in the hoop and axial
directions of the manhole or wetwell, shall be determined in
accordance with 8.8.3. Where component geometry will ad-
versely affect the test results (an example would be flexural
testing on curved samples taken in the hoop direction), hand
fabricated samples made consistent with the materials and
construction of the manhole or wetwell are permitted for
testing.
6.8 Hardness—The surface hardness of the manhole or
wetwell shall be determined in accordance with 8.8.4.
6.9 Thickness—The thickness of each manhole or wetwell
component part shall be determined in accordance with 8.3.2.
6.10 Field Vacuum Test Capability—Each manhole or
wetwell shall be designed to be structurally capable of with-
standing a field applied test vacuum of -5 psi (-34 kPa) gauge
after installation and backfilling. This design requirement is not
to imply that a field vacuum test must be performed.
7. Quality Control
7.1 Examination—Each manhole or wetwell component
part shall be examined for workmanship dimensions, hardness,
and thickness in accordance with Section 6.
7.2 Composition Control—Controls on glass and resin con-
tent shall be maintained for all manhole or wetwell manufac-
turing processes. Records shall be maintained as needed to
ensure products meet the requirements of the specification.
Proper glass content by glass usage checks, by periodic glass
and resin application rate checks, or by periodic material
composition testing in accordance with 8.8.1 is permitted.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Conditioning—Specimens tested shall be representative
of the actual manufacturing process. Conditioning of the
specimens is not allowed unless specified by this specification.
8.2 Test Conditions—Conduct at ambient temperature with-
out any special controls on temperature unless otherwise
specified.
8.3 Dimensions:
8.3.1 Measure dimensions other than thickness with a steel
tape with graduations of 0.125 in. (3 mm) or less.
8.3.2 Thickness—Measure to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm)
with a micrometer, caliper, gauge, or other suitable instrument.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Make a minimum of one thickness reading per 34 ft2 (3 m2) of
surface in areas of constant thickness. Through regions of wall
taper, make sufficient checks to establish the actual thickness.
8.4 Load Rating:
8.4.1 Load Test—The manhole tested shall be long enough
to include at least one of all unique or repetitive features of the
cylinder wall such as: bonded joints, adhesive seams, gasketed
joints, etc., except for reducers and cylinder sections of a
different diameter than the manhole. In any case, the minimum
length of the manhole cylinder shall not be less than 36 in. (914
mm) for each cylinder diameter.
8.4.1.1 Concentric Manholes—The manhole to be tested
shall be complete with cover and supporting ring installed.
Apply the specified load eccentrically (see Fig. 2 for typical
test model) on a 6 in. by 6 in. by 1⁄2 in. (152 mm by 152 mm
by 12.7 mm) steel plate resting on the manhole cover. Locate
the steel loading plate so that the center of the plate is within
4 in. (102 mm) from the edge of the cover. Load in 2000-lbf
(8896-N) increments with close inspection between increases.
Maintain the specified load for not less than 15 min.
8.4.1.2 Eccentric Manholes—The manhole to be tested shall
be complete with cover and supporting ring installed. Apply
the specified load eccentrically (see Fig. 3 for typical test
model) 6 in. by 6 in. by 1⁄2 in. (152 mm by 152 mm by 12.7
mm) steel plate resting on the manhole cover. Locate the steel
loading plate so that the center of the plate is within 4 in. (102
mm) from the edge of the cover at a point where the edge of the
cover is nearest to the axis of the manhole cylinder. Load in
2000-lbf (8896-N) increments with close inspection between
increases. Maintain the specified load for not less than 15 min.
8.4.2 Deflection Test—When load tested according to the
procedure as outlined in 8.4.1.1 and 8.4.1.2 the top of the
manhole(s) shall not deflect vertically downward more than
Table of Dimensions
in. (mm)
A 21 min (533 min)
B 42 min (1067 min)
C 6 by 6 by 1⁄2 (152 by 152 by 12.7)
FIG. 2 Concentric Manhole Load Test Model
 D3753 − 19
Table of Dimensions
in. (mm)
A 21 min (533 min)
B 42 min (1067 min)
C 6 by 6 by 1⁄2 (152 by 152 by 12.7)
FIG. 3 Eccentric Manhole Load Test Model
0.25 in. (6.35 mm) when measured at the point of load
application when the specified load is 24 000 lbf (106 757 N).
8.4.3 Where expanded base manholes have had their man-
hole portion tested in accordance with 8.4.1 and 8.4.2, it is
permitted to include reducers and attached cylinder sections
designed by the manufacturer to carry the loads in 8.4.1
without load testing. Use of generally accepted design methods
including closed form solutions, or finite element analysis
(FEA), or both is permitted. The calculations shall show that
the entire expanded base manhole will meet the requirements
of 8.4.2.
8.5 Stiffness—Test a section of the cylinder portion of the
manhole or wetwell in accordance with Test Method D2412.
The section tested shall be free of any joints, repetitive
features, or repairs. For manholes or wetwells larger than 72 in.
(1829 mm) diameter, the use of generally accepted design
methods including closed-form solutions, finite element analy-
sis (FEA), or both is permitted.
8.6 Manhole Soundness—In order to determine soundness,
apply an air or water pressure test, or both to the manhole test
sample described in 8.4.1. The test pressure shall not be less
than 3 psig (20.68 kPa) or greater than 5 psig (34.47 kPa).
While holding at the established pressure, inspect the entire
manhole for leaks. Any leakage through the laminate, joints, or
repairs is cause for failure of the test. (Warning—Care shall be
taken in the air test ensuring that the test is run in an isolated
or confined area. The preferred method is to fill the manhole
with water and add air pressure.)
8.7 Chemical Resistance—The testing procedure for mea-
suring chemical resistance shall conform with Practice C581
with the exceptions noted below.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.7.1 Test Specimen Construction—Make the basic test
specimen in a manner consistent in every way with the
manhole or wetwell construction. This includes, among other
considerations, percent glass, type of glass, resin type, catalyst
system, post-cure (if any), fillers and additives (if any), and the
exclusion or not of air from the laminate surfaces. Test
specimens shall be tested in their as-manufactured state with no
conditioning. Each specimen shall be large enough to allow a
minimum of three individual flexural test samples.
8.7.1.1 If the specimen is to be tested in an environment
simulating a contained substance, use of a resin-rich layer is
permitted to be added to the exterior portion of the specimen.
This second resin-rich surface, not present in the manhole
itself, shall be of the same construction and thickness; and
made with the same considerations (that is, exclusion of air) as
the primary layer on the opposite side of the specimen. Where
a dual-resin construction is used, this second resin-rich layer
shall employ the same resin as the primary layer. Seal cut edges
with the resin used in the resin-rich surfaces.
8.7.1.2 If the specimen is to be tested in an environment
simulating soil conditions, it shall be that described in 8.7.1.
Seal cut edges of the specimen with that resin used in the outer
surface of the manhole.
8.7.2 Test Intervals—Test specimens after one, three, six,
and twelve months immersions in each test medium. It is
permitted to include an extra specimen at the time of initial
immersion in the event it is necessary to extend the test interval
beyond one year because of inconclusive results at that time.
Cut each specimen into at least three samples for flexural tests.
8.7.3 Test Media—Test media shall represent as completely
as possible the actual environment of the manhole or wetwell
in service. Throughout the test period, change the test media as
required to maintain the properties of the test media.
8.7.3.1 Interior Surface—The required test medium for the
interior surface shall be the material to be contained in the
manhole or wetwell. When the manhole or wetwell is intended
to be placed in a raw sanitary sewage environment, a 5 %
sulfuric acid solution shall be used to simulate this environ-
ment.
8.7.3.2 Exterior Surface—Test the following media repre-
senting the exterior surface environment:
(a) Sodium chloride, saturated solution.
(b) Standard buffer aqueous solution at 73°F (22.8°C)
simulating alkaline soil (pH of 10).
(c) Standard buffer aqueous solution at 73°F (22.8°C)
simulating acidic soil (pH of 4).
8.7.4 Test Temperatures—The temperature of each test me-
dium used in corrosion-resistance verification of the manhole
or wetwell interior shall be the maximum suggested service
temperature for that medium. All media representing soil
conditions and sanitary sewage shall be 73°F (22.8°C).
8.7.5 Interpretation of Results:
8.7.5.1 Properties to be determined initially and after each
test period are flexural strength and flexural modulus (both in
accordance with Test Methods D790, Method I, Procedure A),
and Barcol hardness (in accordance with Test Method D2583)
of the interior of the laminate. The specimen shall not be cured
and shall represent the as-manufactured state of cure.
 D3753 − 19
8.7.5.2 Note any effect upon the immersion medium or
specimen observed during visual inspection and use to aug-
ment physical data in determining the suitability of the
manhole or wetwell in any given medium.
8.7.5.3 Plot the average log of percent retention of each
property (see 8.7.5.1) for all samples (at least three samples per
specimen, see 8.7.3.2) after immersion testing (versus initial)
against the log of immersion time in hours (see Fig. 4).
8.8 Material Properties—Specimens taken from a manhole
or wetwell shall be used, if possible, to establish material
properties. If it is not possible to take the specimens from a
manhole or wetwell because of dimensional requirements for
testing, make the specimens independently but, in any case,
they shall be consistent in all respects with the construction of
the manhole or wetwell. Test specimens shall be tested in their
as-manufactured state with no conditioning.
8.8.1 Material Composition—Determine composition in ac-
cordance with Test Method D2584. For specimens with fillers
or additives, or both, separate the residue into its components
(glass, sand, etc.) to determine the glass content.
8.8.2 Compressive Strength—Determine compressive
strength in accordance with Test Method D695.
8.8.3 Flexural Strength and Modulus—Determine flexural
strength and flexural modulus of elasticity in accordance with
Test Methods D790. Where strength property test methods
require flat specimens, specimens shall be constructed consis-
tently with the method of fabrication selected for the manhole
or wetwell.
8.8.4 Hardness—Determine Rockwell hardness in accor-
dance with Test Method D785 or Barcol hardness in accor-
dance with Test Method D2583. The frequency of checks shall
not be less than three random points per component part. The
minimum acceptable value of cure shall not be less than 90 %
of the resin manufacturer’s minimum value for the cured resin.
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
FIG. 4 Chemical Test Property Retention
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9. Inspection
9.1 Inspection of finished manholes and wetwells shall be
made as agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier as
part of the purchase contract.
10. Rejection and Rehearing
10.1 Manholes or wetwells that fail to conform to the
requirements of this specification may be rejected. Rejection
shall be reported to the manufacturer or supplier promptly and
in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with the results of any test,
the manufacturer or supplier is permitted to make a claim for
a rehearing.
11. Certification
11.1 When requested by the purchaser on his order, a
certification shall be made the basis of acceptance. This shall
consist of a copy of the manufacturer’s test report or a
statement by the supplier, accompanied by a copy of the test
results, that the manhole or wetwell has been tested, and
inspected in accordance with the provisions of this specifica-
tion and meets all requirements. Each certification so furnished
shall be signed by an authorized agent of the supplier or
manufacturer.
12. Packaging and Package Marking
12.1 The manholes or wetwells shall be marked with the
following information:
12.1.1 This ASTM designation,
12.1.2 Manufacturer’s name or trademark,
12.1.3 If available, manufacturing serial number, and
12.1.4 Manhole or wetwell total length.
12.2 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
 D3753 − 19
Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3753 - 12ε1) that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2019)

(1) The title and several sections have been revised to allow for
the use of vinyl ester and epoxy resins.
(2) Figure 1 – Graphic presentation of an expanded base
manhole has been added.
(3) Subsection 3.4 – Definition of “expanded base manhole”
was revised.
(4) Subsection 3.5 – Definition of “expanded base reducer”
was added.
(5) Subsection 3.13 – Definition of “wetwell top” was added.
(6) Subsection 4.4 – Language was added to allow for use of
fillers upon agreement between fabricator and user.
(7) Note 1 – Supplemental language was added to support
subsections 4.4, 6.1.2, and 6.1.4.
(8) Subsection 5.7 – Terminology was changed from “area” to
“cavity” under bench and invert. Option to allow for grout
ports has been added.
(9) Subsection 6.1.2 – Language was revised to allow for use
of external coatings, pigments and other additives upon agree-
ment between fabricator and user.
(10) Subsection 6.1.4 – Specification of maximum void thick-
ness within laminate was removed.
(11) Subsection 6.1.5 – Language was revised to allow for use
of internal coatings, pigments and other additives upon agree-
ment between fabricator and user.
(12) Subsection 6.3.3 – Language was revised to clarify that
additional diameters are allowed and covered under this
standard.
(13) Table 1 – Maximum length is increased to 50-feet (15240-
mm) and the associated minimum stiffness requirement is
provided.
(14) Note 2 – Assumed minimum soil modulus has been added
as explanation for stiffness values provided in Table 1.
(15) Subsection 6.10 – Clarifies language and specifies condi-
tions upon which a vacuum test must be performed.
(16) Subsection 7.2 – The word “periodic” has been added to
clarify that this practice is not a continuous requirement.
(17) Subsection 8.4.1 – Specifies that the “cylinder” sidewall
of the structure is to be tested and that fittings are not intended
to be inclusive in this test requirement.
(18) Subsection 8.5 – Allows for calculating stiffness at diam-
eters greater than 72-in. (1829 mm).
(19) Subsection 8.7.3.1 – Requires a 5 % sulfuric acid solution
to simulate a raw sanitary sewage environment.
(20) Editorial changes are provided in multiple locations to
correct the usage of the word “may.”
(21) Figures and tables have been re-numbered to accommo-
date additions.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:48 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3754 − 19

Standard Specification for

“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3754; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers machine-made fiberglass pipe,
8 in. (200 mm) through 156 in. (4000 mm), for use in pressure
systems for conveying sanitary sewage, storm water, and many
industrial wastes, and corrosive fluids. Both glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-
reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
This standard is suited primarily for pipes to be installed in
buried applications, although it may be used to the extent
applicable for other installations such as, but not limited to,
jacking, tunnel lining and slip-lining and rehabilitation of
existing pipelines. Pipe covered by this specification is in-
tended to operate at internal gage pressures of 450 psi (3103
kPa) or less.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 The values given in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information purposes only.
1.3 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 8, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2019. Published December 2019. Originally
approved in 1979. Last previous edition approved 2014 as D3754 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D3754-19.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
D2412 Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2992 Practice for Obtaining Hydrostatic or Pressure De-
sign Basis for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe and Fittings
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
D3681 Test Method for Chemical Resistance of “Fiberglass”
(Glass–Fiber–Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a
Deflected Condition
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4161 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flex-
ible Elastomeric Seals
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
ing Plastic Pipe
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 1 General Designation Requirements for Fiberglass Pressure Pipe
Desig-
Property Cell LimitsA
nation
1 Type 1 2 3 4
glass-fiber-reinforced glass-fiber-reinforced glass-fiber-reinforced glass-fiber-reinforced
thermosetting polyesterB resin thermosetting polyesterB resin thermosetting epoxy resin thermosetting epoxy resin
mortar (RPMP polyester)B (RTRP polyester)B mortar (RPMP epoxy) (RTRP epoxy)
2 Liner 1 2 3 4
reinforced thermoset liner non-reinforced thermoset liner thermoplastic liner no liner
3 Grade 1 2 3 4 5 6
Polyester resin polyesterB resin polyesterB resin and epoxy resin epoxy resin No surface
surface layer— surface layer— sand surface layer surface layer— surface layer— layer
reinforcedB nonreinforcedB nonreinforced reinforced nonreinforced
4 ClassC C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
5 Pipe Stiffness A B C D
psi (kPa) 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496)ABC
A
The cell-type format provides the means of identification and specification of piping materials. This cell-type format, however, is subject to misapplication since
unobtainable property combinations can be selected if the user is not familiar with commercially available products. The manufacturer should be consulted.
B
For the purposes of this standard, polyester includes vinyl ester resin.
C
Based on operating pressure in psig (numerals).

2.2 ISO Standard: 3.2.8 rigid joint—a joint that is not capable of axial dis-
ISO 1172 Textile Glass Reinforced Plastics—Determination placement or angular rotation.
of Loss on Ignition3
3.2.9 surface layer—a resin layer, with or without filler or
2.3 AWWA Standard: reinforcement, or both, applied to the exterior surface of the
AWWA C-950 Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin pipe structural wall.
Pressure Pipe4

3. Terminology 4. Classification

3.1 Definitions: 4.1 General—This specification covers fiberglass sewer and

3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 or Terminology F412 and abbreviations with
Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin. The composite structure may contain
aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes. Thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or
coatings may be included.
3.2.2 flexible joint—a joint that is capable of axial displace-
ment or angular rotation, or both.
3.2.3 industrial pipe—pipe designed for internal, or external
environments, or both, commonly encountered in industrial
piping systems used for many process solutions or effluents.
3.2.4 liner—a resin layer, with or without filler or
reinforcement, or both, forming the interior surface of the pipe.
3.2.5 qualification test—one or more tests used to prove the
design of a product. Not a routine quality control test.
3.2.6 reinforced polymer mortar pipe—a fiberglass pipe
with aggregate.
3.2.7 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe—a fiberglass pipe
without aggregate.
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
4
Available from American Water Works Association (AWWA), 6666 W. Quincy
Ave., Denver, CO 80235, http://www.awwa.org.
industrial pressure pipe defined by raw materials in the
structural wall (type) and liner, surface layer material (grade),
operating pressure (class), and pipe stiffness. Table 1 lists the
types, liners, grades, classes, and stiffnesses that are covered.
NOTE 3—All possible combinations of types, liners, grades, classes, and
stiffness may not be commercially available. Additional types, liners,
grades, and stiffnesses may be added as they become commercially
available. The purchaser should determine for himself or consult with the
manufacturer for the proper class, type, liner, grade, and stiffness of pipe
to be used under the installation and operating conditions that will exist for
the project in which the pipe is to be used.
4.2 Designation Requirements—The pipe materials designa-
tion code shall consist of the standard designation, ASTM
D3754, followed by type, liner, and grade in arabic numerals,
class by the letter C with two or three arabic numerals, and pipe
stiffness by a capital letter. Table 1 presents a summary of the
designation requirements. Thus a complete material code shall
consist of ASTM D3754, three numerals, C...and two or three
numerals, and a capital letter.
NOTE 4—Examples of the designation codes are as follows: (1) ASTM
D3754-1-1-3-C50-A for glass-fiber-reinforced aggregate and polyester
resin mortar pipe with a reinforced thermoset liner and an unreinforced
polyester resin and sand surface layer, for operation at 50 psi (345 kPa),
and having a minimum pipe stiffness of 9 psi (62 kPa). (2) ASTM
D3754-4-2-6-C200-C for glass-fiber-reinforced epoxy resin pipe with an
unreinforced thermoset liner, no surface layer, for operation at 200 psi
(1380 kPa) and having a minimum pipe stiffness of 36 psi (248 kPa).
NOTE 5—Although the “Form and Style for ASTM Standards” manual
requires that the type classification be roman numerals, it is recognized
that few companies have stencil-cutting equipment for this style of type,
and it is therefore acceptable to mark the product type in arabic numbers.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 General—The thermosetting resins, glass fiber
reinforcements, fillers, and other materials, when combined as
a composite structure, shall produce piping products that meet
the performance requirements of this specification.
5.2 Wall Composition—The basic structural wall composi-
tion shall consist of a thermosetting resin, glass-fiber
reinforcement, and, if used, an aggregate filler.
5.2.1 Resin—A thermosetting polyester or epoxy resin, with
or without filler.
5.2.2 Aggregate—A siliceous sand conforming to the re-
quirements of Specification C33, except that the requirements
for gradation shall not apply.
5.2.3 Reinforcement—A commercial grade of glass fibers
compatible with the resin used.
5.3 Liner and Surface Layers—A liner or surface layer, or
both, when incorporated into or onto the pipe shall meet the
chemical and structural requirements of this specification.
5.4 Joints—The pipe shall have a joining system that shall
provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition. A
particular type of joint may be restrained or unrestrained and
flexible or rigid depending on the specific configuration and
design conditions.
5.4.1 Unrestrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding
internal pressure but not longitudinal forces.
5.4.1.1 Coupling or Bell-and-Spigot Gasket Joints, with a
groove either on the spigot or in the bell to retain an
elastomeric gasket that shall be the sole element of the joint to
provide watertightness. For typical joint details see Fig. 1.
5.4.1.2 Mechanical Coupling Joint, with elsastomeric seals.
5.4.1.3 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay
5.4.1.4 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring.
5.4.2 Restrained—Pipe joints capable of withstanding inter-
nal pressure and longitudinal tensile loads.
5.4.2.1 Joints similar to those in 5.4.1.1 with supplemental
restraining elements.
5.4.2.2 Butt Joint, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.3 Bell-and-Spigot, with laminated overlay.
5.4.2.4 Bell-and-Spigot, adhesive-bonded-joint: Three types
of adhesive-bonded joints are premitted by this standard as
follows:
(1) Tapered bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with a tapered socket for use in conjunction with a
tapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(2) Straight bell-and-spigot, an adhesive joint that is manu-
factured with an untapered socket for use in conjunction with
an untapered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
(3) Tapered bell and straight spigot, an adhesive joint that
is manufactured with a tapered socket for use with an unta-
pered spigot and a suitable adhesive.
5.4.2.5 Flanged Joint, both integral and loose ring.
5.4.2.6 Threaded Joints.
FIG. 1 Typical Joints
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
5.4.2.7 Mechanical Coupling, an elastomeric sealed cou-
pling with supplemental restraining elements.
NOTE 6—Other types of joints may be added as they become commer-
cially available.
NOTE 7—Restrained joints typically increase service loads on the pipe
to greater than those experienced with unrestrained joints. The purchaser
is cautioned to take into consideration all conditions that may be
encountered in the anticipated service and to consult the manufacturer
regarding the suitability of a particular type and class of pipe for service
with restrained joint systems.
5.5 Gaskets—Elastomeric gaskets, when used with this
pipe, shall conform to the requirements of Specification F477,
except that composition of the elastomer shall be as agreed
upon between the purchaser and the supplier for the particular
exposure to oily or aggressive-chemical environments.
6. Requirements
6.1 Workmanship:
6.1.1 Each pipe shall be free from all defects including
indentations, delaminations, bubbles, pinholes, cracks, pits,
blisters, foreign inclusions, and resin-starved areas that due to
their nature, degree, or extent, detrimentally affect the strength
and serviceability of the pipe. The pipe shall be as uniform as
commercially practicable in color, opacity, density, and other
physical properties.
6.1.2 The inside surface of each pipe shall be free of bulges,
dents, ridges, or other defects that result in a variation of inside
diameter of more than 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) from that obtained on
adjacent unaffected portions of the surface. No glass-fiber
reinforcement shall penetrate the interior surface of the pipe
wall.
6.1.3 Joint sealing surfaces shall be free of dents, gouges, or
other surface irregularities that will affect the integrity of the
joints.
6.2 Dimensions:
6.2.1 Pipe Diameters—The pipe shall be supplied in the
nominal diameters shown in Table 2 or Table 3. The pipe
diameter tolerances shall be as shown in Table 2 or Table 3,
when measured in accordance with 8.1.1.
6.2.2 Lengths—The pipe shall be supplied in nominal
lengths of 10, 20, 30, 40, and 60 ft (3.05, 6.10, 9.15, 12.19, and
18.29 m). The actual laying length shall be the nominal length
62 in. (651 mm), when measured in accordance with 8.1.2. At
least 90 % of the total footage of any one size and class,
excluding special-order lengths, shall be furnished in the
nominal lengths specified by the purchaser. Random lengths, if
furnished, shall not vary from the nominal lengths by more
than 5 ft (1.53 m), or 25 %, whichever is less.
6.2.3 Wall Thickness—The average wall thickness of the
pipe shall not be less than the nominal wall thickness published
in the manufacturer’s literature current at the time of purchase,
and the minimum wall thickness at any point shall not be less
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 2 Nominal Inside Diameters (ID) and Tolerances Inside Diameter Control Pipe
Nominal Nominal Metric ID Range,B mm ToleranceB on
Tolerances, in. Declared ID,
Diameter,A in. Diameter,B mm Minimum Maximum mm

8 ±0.25 200 196 204 ±1.5

10 ±0.25 250 246 255 ±1.5
12 ±0.25 300 296 306 ±1.8
14 ±0.25 400 396 408 ±2.4
15 ±0.25 500 496 510 ±3.0
16 ±0.25 600 595 612 ±3.6
18 ±0.25 700 695 714 ±4.2
20 ±0.25 800 795 816 ±4.2
21 ±0.25 900 895 918 ±4.2
24 ±0.25 1000 995 1020 ±5.0
27 ±0.27 1200 1195 1220 ±5.0
30 ±0.30 1400 1395 1420 ±5.0
33 ±0.33 1600 1595 1620 ±5.0
36 ±0.36 1800 1795 1820 ±5.0
39 ±0.39 2000 1995 2020 ±5.0
42 ±0.42 (2200) 2195 2220 ±6.0
45 ±0.45 2400 2395 2420 ±6.0
48 ±0.48 (2600) 2595 2620 ±6.0
51 ±0.51 2800 2795 2820 ±6.0
54 ±0.54 (3000) 2995 3020 ±6.0
60 ±0.60 3200 3195 3220 ±7.0
66 ±0.66 (3400) 3395 3420 ±7.0
72 ±0.72 3600 3595 3620 ±7.0
78 ±0.78 (3800) 3795 3820 ±7.0
84 ±0.84 4000 3995 4020 ±7.0
90 ±0.90 ... ... ... ...
96 ±0.96 ... ... ... ...
102 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
108 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
114 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
120 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
132 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
144 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
156 ±1.00 ... ... ... ...
A
Inside diameters other than those shown shall be permitted by agreement between purchaser and supplier.
B
Values are taken from International Standards Organization documents. Parentheses indicate non-preferred diameters.

than 87.5 % of the nominal wall thickness when measured in
accordance with 8.1.3.
6.2.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—All points around each end
of a pipe unit shall fall within 61⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) or 60.5 % of
the nominal diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater, to a
plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe, when
measured in accordance with 8.1.4.
6.3 Chemical Requirements:
6.3.1 Sanitary Sewer Service:
6.3.1.1 Long-Term—Pipe specimens, when tested in accor-
dance with 8.2.1 shall be capable of being deflected, without
failure, at the 50 year strain level given in Table 4 when
exposed to 1.0 N sulfuric acid.
NOTE 8—See Appendix X1 for derivation of the minimum sanitary
sewer pipe chemical requirements given in Table 4.
NOTE 9—The calculations in Table 4 and Appendix X1 assume that the
neutral axis is at the pipe wall midpoint. For pipe wall constructions that
produce an altered neutral axis position, it is necessary to evaluate results
and establish requirements substituting 2y for t. (y is the maximum
distance from the neutral axis to the pipe surface.)
6.3.1.2 Control Requirements—Test pipe specimens peri-
odically in accordance with 8.2.1.3, following the procedure of
8.2.1.4, or alternatively, the procedure of 8.2.1.5.
6.3.1.3 When the procedure of 8.2.1.4 is used, the following
three criteria must be met: a) the average failure time at each
strain level must fall at or above the lower 95 % confidence
limit of the originally determined regression line, b) no
specimen-failure times may be sooner than the lower 95 %
prediction limit of the originally determined regression line,
and c) one-third or more of the specimen failure times must be
on or above the originally determined regression line.
NOTE 10—Determine the lower 95 % confidence limit and the lower
95 % prediction limit in accordance with to Annex A2.
6.3.1.4 When the alternative method of 8.2.1.5 is used,
failure shall not occur in any specimen.
6.3.2 Industrial Service—The resin component of the liner
or of the surface layer, or both, shall be a commercial-grade
corrosion-resistant thermoset that has either been evaluated in
a laminate by test, in accordance with 8.2.2, or that has been
determined by previous documented service to be acceptable
for the service conditions. Where service conditions have not
been evaluated, a suitable resin may also be selected by
agreement between the manufacturer and purchaser.
NOTE 11—The results obtained by this test shall serve as a guide only
in the selection of a pipe material for a specific service application. The
purchaser is cautioned to evaluate all of the various factors that may enter
into the serviceability of a pipe material when subjected to chemical
environment, including chemical resistance in the strained condition.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 3 Nominal Outside Diameters (OD) and Tolerances
NOTE 1—The external diameter of the pipe at the spigots shall be within the tolerances given in the table, and the manufacturer shall declare his
allowable maximum and minimum spigot diameters. Some pipes are manufactured such that the entire pipe meets the OD tolerances while other pipes
meet the tolerances at the spigots, in which case, if such pipes are cut (shortened) the ends may need to be calibrated to meet the tolerances.

Metric Ductile Iron Pipe Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower, International O.D., Tolerance Upper, Tolerance Lower,
Pipe Size, mm Equivalent, mm mm mm mm mm mm
200 220.0 +1.0 0.0 ... ... ...
250 271.8 +1.0 -0.2 ... ... ...
300 323.8 +1.0 -0.3 310 +1.0 -1.0
350 375.7 +1.0 -0.3 361 +1.0 -1.2
400 426.6 +1.0 -0.3 412 +1.0 -1.4
450 477.6 +1.0 -0.4 463 +1.0 -1.6
500 529.5 +1.0 -0.4 514 +1.0 -1.8
600 632.5 +1.0 -0.5 616 +1.0 -2.0
700 718 +1.0 -2.2
800 820 +1.0 -2.4
900 924 +1.0 -2.6
1000 1026 +2.0 -2.6
1200 1229 +2.0 -2.6
1400 1434 +2.0 -2.8
1600 1638 +2.0 -2.8
1800 1842 +2.0 -3.0
2000 2046 +2.0 -3.0
2200 2250 +2.0 -3.2
2400 2453 +2.0 -3.4
2600 2658 +2.0 -3.6
2800 2861 +2.0 -3.8
3000 3066 +2.0 -4.0
3200 3270 +2.0 -4.2
3400 3474 +2.0 -4.4
3600 3678 +2.0 -4.6
3800 3882 +2.0 -4.8
4000 4086 +2.0 -5.0

TABLE 4 Minimum Sanitary Sewer Pipe Chemical Requirements

εscv
Pipe Stiffness, Minimum Strain
psi (kPa) 6 min 10 h 100 h 1 000 10 000 50 years
9 (62) 0.97 (t/de) 0.84 (t/d) 0.78 (t/d) 0.73 (t/d) 0.68 (t/d) 0.60 (t/d)
18 (124) 0.85 (t/d) 0.72 (t/d) 0.66 (t/d) 0.61 (t/d) 0.56 (t/d) 0.49 (t/d)
36 (248) 0.71 (t/d) 0.60 (t/d) 0.55 (t/d) 0.51 (t/d) 0.47 (t/d) 0.41 (t/d)
72 (496) 0.56 (t/d) 0.48 (t/d) 0.44 (t/d) 0.41 (t/d) 0.38 (t/d) 0.34 (t/d)

Where: t and d are the nominal total wall thickness and the mean diameter (inside diameter plus t) as determined in accordance with 8.1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
6.4 Soundness—Unless otherwise agreed upon between pur- TABLE 6 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure Categories
chaser and supplier, test each length of pipe up to 96 in. (2400 Minimum Calculated Values of
mm) diameter hydrostatically without leakage or cracking, at Class Long-Term Hydrostatic
Pressure gage, psi (kPa)
the internal hydrostatic proof pressures specified for the
C50 90 (621)
applicable class in Table 5 when tested in accordance with 8.3. C100 180 (1241)
For sizes over 96 in. (2400 mm), the frequency of hydrostatic C150 270 (1862)
leak tests shall be as agreed upon by purchaser and supplier. C200 360 (2482)
C250 450 (3103)
6.5 Hydrostatic Design Basis: C300 540 (3722)
C350 630 (4343)
6.5.1 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure—The pressure C400 720 (4963)
classes shall be based on long-term hydrostatic pressure data C450 810 (5584)
obtained in accordance with 8.4 and categorized in accordance
with Table 6. Pressure classes are based on extrapolated
TABLE 7 Minimum Stiffness at 5 % Deflection
strengths at 50 years. For pipe subjected to longitudinal loads
or circumferential bending, the effect of these conditions on the Nominal Pipe Stiffness, psi (kPa)
Diameter, Designation
hydrostatic design pressure classification of the pipe must be in. A B C D
considered.
6.5.2 Control Requirements—Test pipe specimens periodi- 8 ... ... 36 (248) 72 (496)
cally in accordance with the reconfirmation procedures de- 10 ... 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496)
12 and greater 9 (62) 18 (124) 36 (248) 72 (496)
scribed in Practice D2992.
NOTE 12—Hydrostatic design basis (HDB—extrapolated value at 50
years) determined in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D2992, may TABLE 8 Ring Deflection Without Damage or Structural Failure
be substituted for the Procedure B evaluation required by 8.4. It is Nominal Pipe Stiffness, psi
generally accepted that the Procedure A value multiplied by 3 is equivalent
9 18 36 72
to the Procedure B value.
6.6 Stiffness—Each length of pipe shall have sufficient Level A 18 % 15 % 12 % 9%
strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (F/∆y) specified Level B 30 % 25 % 20 % 15 %
in Table 7 when tested in accordance with 8.5. At deflection
level A per Table 8, there shall be no visible damage in the test
specimen evidenced by surface cracks. At deflection level B 6.6.1 For other pipe stiffness levels, appropriate values for
per Table 8, there shall be no indication of structural damage as Level A and Level B deflections (Table 8) may be computed as
evidenced by interlaminar separation, separation of the liner or follows:
surface layer (if incorporated) from the structural wall, tensile
failure of the glass-fiber reinforcement, fracture, or buckling of Level A at new PS 5 S 72
new PS D 0.33

~9! (1)
the pipe wall.
Level B at new PS 5 new Level A÷0.6
NOTE 13—This is a visual observation (made with the unaided eye) for
6.6.2 Since products may have use limits of other than 5 %
quality control purposes only, and should not be considered a simulated
service test. Table 8 values are based on an in-use long-term deflection long-term deflection, Level A and Level B deflections (Table 8)
limit of 5 % and provide an appropriate uniform safety margin for all pipe may be proportionally adjusted to maintain equivalent in-use
stiffnesses. Since the pipe-stiffness values (F/∆y) shown in Table 7 vary, safety margins. For example, a 4 % long-term limiting deflec-
the percent deflection of the pipe under a given set of installation tion would result in a 20 % reduction of Level A and Level B
conditions will not be constant for all pipes. To avoid possible
misapplication, take care to analyze all conditions that might affect
deflections, while a 6 % limiting deflection would result in a
performance of the installed pipe. 20 % increase in Level A and Level B deflection values.
However, minimum values for Level A and Level B deflections
shall be equivalent to strains of 0.6 and 1.0 % respectively (as
computed by Eq X1.1 in Appendix X1).
TABLE 5 Hydrostatic Pressure Test 6.6.3 For high stiffness pipes, 5% deflection will likely be
above the use limit and the adjusted level A test deflection. For
Pressure Hydrostatic Proof Pressure
Class Pipe Diameters Pipe Diameters very high stiffness pipes, 5% deflection may also be greater
up to and >54 in. up to and than the adjusted level B test deflection. In such cases, the
including 54 in. including 96 in.
pipes may be damaged or fail prior to determining the pipe
(psi) psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
C50 100 (689) 75 (517) stiffness at 5% deflection. Therefore, it is permitted to set the
C100 200 (1379) 150 (1034) pipe stiffness test deflection equal to the adjusted level A
C150 300 (2068) 225 (1551)
C200 400 (2757) 300 (2068)
deflection, but not greater than 5%. See Note 14 for additional
C250 500 (3447) 375 (2585) information and further clarification.
C300 600 (4136) 450 (3102)
C350 700 (4826) 525 (3619) NOTE 14—Depending upon the product modulus and allowable ring
C400 800 (5515) 600 (4136) bending strain, this will likely begin affecting pipes with stiffness between
C450 900 (6205) 675 (4654) 200 and 400 psi. For example, a pipe with pipe stiffness of PS360 may
have a use limit of 4.3 %, an adjusted level A deflection of 4.5 % and an

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
adjusted level B deflection of 7.5 %. Therefore, the new pipe stiffness test
deflection would be 4.5 %. Another possible product with pipe stiffness of
PS900 may have a use limit of 2.8 %, an adjusted level A deflection of
2.7% and an adjusted level B deflection of 4.5 %. Therefore, the new pipe
stiffness test deflection would be 2.7 %.
6.7 Hoop-Tensile Strength—All pipe manufactured under
this specification shall meet or exceed the hoop-tensile strength
shown for each size and class in Table 9 and Table 10, when
tested in accordance with 8.6.
6.7.1 Alternative Requirements—When agreed upon by the
purchaser and the supplier, the minimum hoop tensile strength
shall be as determined in accordance with 8.6.1.
6.8 Joint Tightness—All joints shall meet the laboratory
performance requirements of Specification D4161. Unre-
strained joints shall be tested with a fixed end closure condition
and restrained joints shall be tested with a free end closure
condition. Rigid joints shall be exempt from angular deflection
requirements of D4161. Rigid joints typically include butt
joints with laminated overlay, bell-and-spigot joints with lami-
nated overlay, flanged, bell-and-spigot adhesive bonded and
threaded.
6.9 Longitudinal Strength:
6.9.1 Beam Strength—For pipe sizes up to 27 in. (686 mm),
the pipe shall withstand, without failure, the beam loads
specified in Table 11, when tested in accordance with 8.7.1. For
pipe sizes larger than 27 in., and alternatively for smaller sizes,
adequate beam strength is demonstrated by tensile and com-
pression tests conducted in accordance with 8.7.2 and 8.7.3
respectively, for pipe wall specimens oriented in the longitu-
dinal direction, using the minimum tensile and compression
strengths specified in Table 11.
6.9.2 Longitudinal Tensile Strength—All pipe manufactured
under this specification shall have a minimum axial tensile
elongation at failure of 0.25% and meet or exceed the longi-
tudinal tensile strength shown for each size and class in Table
12 and Table 13, when tested in accordance with 8.7.2.
NOTE 15—The values listed in Table 12 are the minimum criteria for
products made to this standard. The values may not be indicative of the
axial strength of some products, or of the axial strength required by some
installation conditions and joint configurations.
6.9.3 Conformance to the requirements of 6.9.1 shall satisfy
the requirements of 6.9.2 for those pipe sizes and classes where
the minimum longitudinal tensile strength values of Table 11
are equal to the values of Table 12. Conformance to the

TABLE 9 Minimum Hoop Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall

NOTE 1—The values in this table are equal to 2PD, where P is the pressure class in psi and D is the nominal diameter in inches.
Inch-Pound Units
Hoop Tensile Strength, lbf/in. Width
Nominal
Pressure Class
Diameter
(in.) C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
(psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
8 800 1600 2400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200
10 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000
12 1200 2400 3600 4800 6000 7200 8400 9600 10 800
14 1400 2800 4200 5600 7000 8400 9800 11 200 12 600
15 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 9000 10 500 12 000 13 500
16 1600 3200 4800 6400 8000 9600 11 200 12 800 14 400
18 1800 3600 5400 7200 9000 10 800 12 600 14 400 16 200
20 2000 4000 6000 8000 10 000 12 000 14 000 16 000 18 000
21 2100 4200 6300 8400 10 500 12 600 14 700 16 800 18 900
24 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 000 14 400 16 800 19 200 21 600
27 2700 5400 8100 10 800 13 500 16 200 18 900 21 600 24 300
30 3000 6000 9000 12 000 15 000 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000
33 3300 6600 9900 13 200 16 500 19 800 23 100 26 400 29 700
36 3600 7200 10 800 14 400 18 000 21 600 25 200 28 800 32 400
39 3900 7800 11 700 15 600 19 500 23 400 27 300 31 200 35 100
42 4200 8400 12 600 16 800 21 000 25 200 29 400 33 600 37 800
45 4500 9000 13 500 18 000 22 500 27 000 31 500 36 000 40 500
48 4800 9600 14 400 19 200 24 000 28 800 33 600 38 400 43 200
51 5100 10 200 15 300 20 400 25 500 30 600 35 700 40 800 45 900
54 5400 10 800 16 200 21 600 27 000 32 400 37 800 43 200 48 600
60 6000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000
66 6600 13 200 19 800 26 400 33 000 39 600 46 200 52 800 59 400
72 7200 14 400 21 600 28 800 36 000 43 200 50 400 57 600 64 800
78 7800 15 600 23 400 31 200 39 000 46 800 54 600 62 400 70 200
84 8400 16 800 25 200 33 600 42 000 50 400 58 800 67 200 75 600
90 9000 18 000 27 000 36 000 45 000 54 000 63 000 72 000 81 000
96 9600 19 200 28 800 38 400 48 000 57 600 67 200 76 800 86 400
102 10 200 20 400 30 600 40 800 51 000 61 200 71 400 81 600 91 800
108 10 800 21 600 32 400 43 200 54 000 64 800 75 600 86 400 97 200
114 11 400 22 800 34 200 45 600 57 000 68 400 79 800 91 200 10 2600
120 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 72 000 84 000 96 000 108 000
132 13 200 26 400 39 600 52 800 66 000 79 200 92 400 105 600 118 800
144 14 400 28 800 43 200 57 600 72 000 86 400 100 800 115 200 129 600
156 15 600 31 200 46 800 62 400 78 000 93 600 109 200 124 800 140 400

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 10 Minimum Hoop Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall
SI Units
Hoop Tensile Strength N/mm Width
Pressure
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
Class
Nominal
345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
Diameter
(kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
(mm)
200 138 276 414 552 690 828 966 1104 1241
250 173 345 517 690 862 1035 1207 1380 1552
300 207 413 620 827 1034 1241 1448 1655 1862
350 242 482 724 965 1207 1448 1690 1931 2172
375 259 517 776 1034 1293 1552 1811 2069 2327
400 276 551 827 1103 1379 1655 1931 2207 2482
450 311 620 931 1241 1552 1862 2173 2483 2793
500 345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
550 380 758 1137 1517 1896 2276 2655 3035 3413
600 414 827 1241 1655 2069 2483 2897 3311 3724
700 483 965 1448 1931 2414 2897 3380 3863 4344
750 518 1034 1551 2069 2586 3104 3621 4139 4655
850 587 1171 1758 2344 2931 3517 4104 4690 5275
900 621 1240 1861 2482 3103 3724 4345 4966 5585
1000 690 1378 2068 2758 3448 4138 4828 5518 6206
1100 759 1516 2275 3034 3793 4552 5311 6070 6827
1150 794 1585 2378 3172 3965 4759 5552 6346 7137
1200 828 1654 2482 3310 4138 4966 5794 6622 7447
1300 897 1791 2688 3585 4482 5379 6276 7173 8068
1400 966 1929 2895 3861 4827 5793 6759 7725 8688
1500 1035 2067 3102 4137 5172 6207 7242 8277 9309
1700 1173 2343 3516 4689 5862 7035 8208 9381 10 550
1800 1242 2480 3722 4964 6206 7448 8690 9932 11 171
2000 1380 2756 4136 5516 6896 8276 9656 11 036 12 412
2200 1518 3032 4550 6068 7586 9104 10 622 12 140 13 653
2300 1587 3169 4756 6343 7930 9517 11 104 12 691 14 274
2400 1656 3307 4963 6619 8275 9931 11 587 13 243 14 894
2600 1794 3583 5377 7171 8965 10 759 12 553 14 347 16 136
2800 1932 3858 5790 7722 9654 11 586 13 518 15 450 17 377
2900 2001 3996 5997 7998 9999 12 000 14 001 16 002 17 997
3000 2070 4134 6204 8274 10 344 12 414 14 484 16 554 18 618
3400 2346 4685 7031 9377 11 723 14 069 16 415 18 761 21 100
3600 2484 4961 7445 9929 12 413 14 897 17 381 19 865 22 342
4000 2760 5512 8272 11 032 13 792 16 552 19 312 22 072 24 824

requirements of 6.9.2 shall satisfy the longitudinal tensile
strength requirements of 6.9.1.
7. Sampling
7.1 Lot—Unless otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser
and the supplier, one lot shall consist of 100 lengths of each
type, grade, and size of pipe produced.
7.2 Production Tests—Select one pipe at random from each
lot and take one specimen from the pipe barrel to determine
conformance of the material to the workmanship, dimensional,
and strength requirements of 6.1, 6.2, 6.6, and 6.7 respectively.
Unless otherwise agreed upon between purchaser and supplier,
all pipes (up to 54 in. diameter) shall meet the soundness
requirements of 6.4.
7.3 Qualification Tests—Sampling for qualification tests is
not required unless otherwise agreed upon by the purchaser and
the supplier. Qualification tests, for which a certification and
test report shall be furnished when requested by the purchaser,
include the following:
7.3.1 Sanitary sewer service, long-term chemical test.
7.3.2 Industrial service resin component chemical test. A
copy of the resin manufacturer’s test report may be used as the
basis of acceptance for this test as agreed upon by the
purchaser and the supplier.
7.3.3 Long-term hydrostatic pressure test.
7.3.4 Joint-tightness test, see 6.8.
7.3.5 Longitudinal strength test, including:
7.3.5.1 Beam strength, and
7.3.5.2 Longitudinal tensile strength.
7.4 Control Tests—The following tests are considered con-
trol requirements and shall be performed as agreed upon
between the purchaser and the supplier.
7.4.1 Soundness Test—102 in. (2600 mm) diameter pipe and
larger.
7.4.2 Perform sampling and testing for the control require-
ments for sanitary sewer service at least once annually.
7.4.3 Perform sampling and testing for the control require-
ments for hydrostatic design basis at least once every two
years.
7.5 For individual orders, conduct only those additional
tests and number of tests specifically agreed upon between
purchaser and supplier.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 11 Beam Strength Test Loads
Nominal Minimum Longitudinal Tensile Strength, Minimum Longitudinal Compressive Strength,
Beam Load, P,
Diameter, per Unit of Circumference per Unit of Circumference
in. lbf (kN) lbf/in. (kN/m) lbf/in. (kN/m)
8 800 (3.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
10 1200 (5.3) 580 (102) 580 (102)
12 1600 (7.1) 580 (102) 580 (102)
14 2200 (9.8) 580 (102) 580 (102)
15 2600 (11.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
16 3000 (13.3) 580 (102) 580 (102)
18 4000 (17.8) 580 (102) 580 (102)
20 4400 (19.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
21 5000 (22.2) 580 (102) 580 (102)
24 6400 (28.5) 580 (102) 580 (102)
27 8000 (35.6) 580 (102) 580 (102)
30 ... ... 580 (102) 580 (102)
33 ... ... 640 (111) 640 (111)
36 ... ... 700 (122) 700 (122)
39 ... ... 780 (137) 780 (137)
42 ... ... 800 (140) 800 (140)
45 ... ... 860 (150) 860 (150)
48 ... ... 920 (161) 920 (161)
51 ... ... 980 (171) 980 (171)
54 ... ... 1040 (182) 1040 (182)
60 ... ... 1140 (200) 1140 (200)
66 ... ... 1260 (220) 1260 (220)
72 ... ... 1360 (238) 1360 (238)
78 ... ... 1480 (260) 1480 (260)
84 ... ... 1600 (280) 1600 (280)
90 ... ... 1720 (301) 1720 (301)
96 ... ... 1840 (322) 1840 (322)
102 ... ... 1940 (340) 1940 (340)
108 ... ... 2060 (360) 2060 (360)
114 ... ... 2180 (382) 2180 (382)
120 ... ... 2280 (400) 2280 (400)
132 ... ... 2520 (440) 2520 (440)
144 ... ... 2740 (480) 2740 (480)
156 ... ... 2964 (519) 2964 (519)

8. Test Methods 8.2.1 Sanitary-Sewer Service—Test the pipe in accordance

8.1 Dimensions:
8.1.1 Diameters:
8.1.1.1 Inside Diameter—Take inside diameter measure-
ments at a point approximately 6 in. (152 mm) from the end of
the pipe section using a steel tape or an inside micrometer with
graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Take two 90° opposing
measurements at each point of measurement and average the
readings.
8.1.1.2 Outside Diameter—Determine in accordance with
Test Method D3567.
8.1.2 Length—Measure with a steel tape or gage having
graduations of 1⁄16 in. (1 mm) or less. Lay the tape or gage on
or inside the pipe and measure the overall laying length of the
pipe.
8.1.3 Wall Thickness—Determine in accordance with Test
Method D3567.
8.1.4 Squareness of Pipe Ends—Rotate the pipe on a man-
drel or trunions and measure the runout of the ends with a dial
indicator. The total indicated reading is equal to twice the
distance from a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the pipe. Alternatively, when the squareness of the pipe ends is
rigidly fixed by tooling, the tooling may be verified and
reinspected at intervals frequent enough to assure that the
squareness of the pipe ends is maintained within tolerance.
8.2 Chemical Tests:
with Test Method D3681.
8.2.1.1 Long-Term—To find if the pipe meets the require-
ments of 6.3.1, determine at least 18 failure points in accor-
dance with Test Method D3681.
8.2.1.2 Alternative Qualification Procedure—Test four
specimens each at the 10 and 10 000 h minimum strains given
in Table 4 and test five specimens each at the 100 and 1000 h
minimum strains given in Table 4. Consider the product
qualified if all 18 specimens are tested without failure for at
least the prescribed times given in Table 4 (that is, 10, 100,
1000 or 10 000 h respectively).
8.2.1.3 Control Requirements—Test at least six specimens
in accordance with one of the following procedures and record
the results.
8.2.1.4 Test at least 3 specimens at each of the strain levels
corresponding to the 100- and 1000-h failure times from the
product’s regression line established in 8.2.1.
8.2.1.5 When the alternative method described in 8.2.1.2 is
used to qualify the product, test at least three specimens each
at the 100 and 1000 h minimum strains given in Table 4 for at
least 100 and 1000 h respectively.
8.2.1.6 The control test procedures of 8.2.1.5 may be used
as an alternative procedure to the reconfirmation procedure
described in Test Method D3681 for those products evaluated
by the alternative qualification procedure described in 8.2.1.2.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 12 Longitudinal Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall
Inch-Pound Units
Longitudinal Tensile Strength lbf/in. of Circumference
Nominal
Pressure Class
Diameter
(in.) C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
(psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
8 580 580 580 580 580 624 700 800 900
10 580 580 580 580 650 780 875 1000 1125
12 580 580 580 624 780 936 1050 1200 1350
14 580 580 609 728 910 1092 1225 1400 1575
15 580 580 653 780 975 1170 1313 1500 1688
16 580 580 696 832 1040 1248 1400 1600 1800
18 580 580 783 936 1170 1404 1575 1800 2025
20 580 580 870 1040 1300 1560 1750 2000 2250
21 580 609 914 1092 1365 1638 1838 2100 2363
24 580 696 1044 1248 1560 1800 2100 2400 2700
27 580 783 1175 1404 1688 2025 2363 2700 3038
30 580 870 1305 1560 1875 2250 2625 3000 3375
33 627 957 1436 1716 2063 2475 2888 3300 3713
36 684 1044 1566 1800 2250 2700 3150 3600 4050
39 741 1131 1697 1872 2340 2808 3276 3744 4212
42 798 1218 1827 2016 2520 3024 3528 4032 4536
45 855 1305 1958 2160 2700 3240 3780 4320 4860
48 912 1392 2088 2304 2880 3456 4032 4608 5184
51 969 1479 2219 2448 3060 3672 4284 4896 5508
54 1026 1566 2349 2592 3240 3726 4347 4968 5589
60 1140 1740 2520 2880 3600 4140 4830 5520 6210
66 1254 1914 2673 3036 3795 4554 5313 5808 6534
72 1368 2088 2916 3312 4140 4968 5796 6336 7128
78 1482 2106 3159 3432 4290 5148 6006 6864 7722
84 1596 2268 3402 3696 4620 5292 6174 7056 7938
90 1710 2430 3645 3960 4950 5670 6615 7380 8303
96 1824 2592 3888 4224 5280 6048 7056 7680 8640
102 1938 2754 4131 4488 5610 6426 7497 8160 9180
108 2052 2916 4374 4752 5940 6804 7938 8640 9720
114 2166 3078 4617 5016 6270 7182 8379 9120 10 260
120 2280 3240 4860 5280 6600 7560 8820 9600 10 800
132 2508 3564 5346 5808 7260 8316 9702 10 560 11 880
144 2736 3888 5832 6336 7920 9072 10 584 11 520 12 960
156 2964 4212 6318 6864 8580 9828 11 466 12 480 14 040

8.2.2 Industrial Service—The resin component of the liner
or of the surface layer, or both, to be subjected to an aggressive
service environment, shall be tested in accordance with Test
Method C581, except that the specimens tested shall be
representative of the laminate construction used in the liner or
surface layer, or both.
8.3 Soundness—Determine soundness by a hydrostatic
proof test procedure. Place the pipe in a hydrostatic pressure
testing machine that seals the ends and exerts no end loads. Fill
the pipe with water, expelling all air, and apply internal water
pressure at a uniform rate not to exceed 50 psi (345 kPa)/s until
the test pressure shown in Table 5 for the applicable class is
reached. Maintain this pressure for a minimum of 30 s. The
pipe shall show no visual signs of weeping, leakage, or fracture
of the structural wall.
8.4 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure—Determine the long-
term hydrostatic pressure at 50 years in accordance with
Procedure B of Practice D2992, with the following exceptions
permitted:
8.4.1 Test at ambient temperatures within the limits of 50°F
(10°C) and 110°F (43.5°C) and report the temperature range
experienced during the tests.
NOTE 16—Tests indicate no significant effects on long-term hydrostatic
pressure within the ambient temperature range specified.
8.4.2 Determine the hydrostatic design basis for the glass-
fiber reinforcement in accordance with the method in Annex
A1.
8.4.3 Calculate the long-term hydrostatic pressure and cat-
egorize by class in accordance with Table 6. Annex A1.6
explains how to calculate the long-term hydrostatic pressure.
8.5 Stiffness—Determine the pipe stiffness (F/∆y) at 5 %
deflection or the adjusted level determined in accordance with
6.6.3 for the specimen, using the apparatus and procedure of
Test Method D2412, with the following exceptions permitted:
8.5.1 Measure the wall thickness to the nearest 0.01 in.
(0.25 mm).
8.5.2 Load the specimen to 5 % deflection or the adjusted
level determined in accordance with 6.6.3 and record the load.
Then load the specimen to deflection level A per Table 8 or to
the adjusted level A determined in accordance with 6.6.1 and
6.6.2 and examine the specimen for visible damage evidenced
by surface cracks. Then load the specimen to deflection level B
per Table 8 or to the adjusted level B determined in accordance
with 6.6.1 and 6.6.2 and examine for evidence of structural
damage, as evidenced by interlaminar separation, separation of
the liner or surface layer (if incorporated) from the structural
wall, tensile failure of the glass-fiber reinforcement, fracture,
or buckling of the pipe wall. Calculate the pipe stiffness at 5 %

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE 13 Longitudinal Tensile Strength of Pipe Wall
SI Units
Longitudinal Tensile Strength N/mm of Circumference
Pressure
C50 C100 C150 C200 C250 C300 C350 C400 C450
Class
Nominal
345 689 1034 1379 1724 2069 2414 2759 3103
Diameter
(kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa)
(mm)
200 102 102 102 102 102 109 123 140 158
250 102 102 102 102 114 137 153 175 197
300 102 102 102 109 137 164 184 210 236
350 102 102 107 127 159 191 215 245 276
375 102 102 114 137 171 205 230 263 296
400 102 102 122 146 182 219 245 280 315
450 102 102 137 164 205 246 276 315 355
500 102 102 152 182 228 273 306 350 394
550 102 107 160 191 239 287 322 368 414
600 102 122 183 219 273 315 368 420 473
700 102 137 206 246 296 355 414 473 532
750 102 152 229 273 328 394 460 525 591
850 110 168 251 301 361 433 506 578 650
900 120 183 274 315 394 473 552 630 709
1000 130 198 297 328 410 492 574 656 738
1100 140 213 320 353 441 530 618 706 794
1150 150 229 343 378 473 567 662 757 851
1200 160 244 366 403 504 605 706 807 908
1300 170 259 388 429 536 643 750 857 965
1400 180 274 411 454 567 652 761 870 979
1500 200 305 441 504 630 725 846 967 1087
1700 220 335 468 532 665 797 930 1017 1144
1800 240 366 511 580 725 870 1015 1110 1248
2000 260 369 553 601 751 902 1052 1202 1352
2200 279 397 596 647 809 927 1081 1236 1390
2300 299 426 638 693 867 993 1158 1292 1454
2400 319 454 681 740 925 1059 1236 1345 1513
2600 339 482 723 786 982 1125 1313 1429 1608
2800 359 511 766 832 1040 1192 1390 1513 1702
2900 379 539 809 878 1098 1258 1467 1597 1797
3000 399 567 851 925 1156 1324 1545 1681 1891
3400 439 624 936 1017 1271 1456 1699 1849 2080
3600 479 681 1021 1110 1387 1589 1853 2017 2270
4000 519 738 1106 1202 1503 1721 2008 2185 2459

deflection or at the adjusted test deflection level determined in
accordance with 6.6.3.
8.5.3 For production testing, only one specimen need be
tested to determine the pipe stiffness.
8.5.4 The maximum specimen length may be 12 in. (305
mm), or the length necessary to include stiffening ribs if they
are used, whichever is greater.
NOTE 17—As an alternative to determining pipe stiffness using the
apparatus and procedure of Test Method D2412, the supplier may submit
to the purchaser for approval a test method and test evaluation based on
Test Method D790 accounting for the substitution of curved test speci-
mens and measurement of stiffness at 5 % deflection or at the adjusted test
deflection level determined in accordance with 6.6.3.
8.6 Hoop-Tensile Strength—Determine hoop tensile
strength by Test Method D2290, except that the sections on
apparatus and test specimens may be modified to suit the size
of the specimens to be tested, and the maximum load rate may
not exceed 0.10 in./min (2.54 mm/min). Alternatively, Test
Method D638 may be employed. Specimen width may be
increased for pipe wall thickness greater than 0.55 in (13.97
mm). Means may be provided to minimize the bending
moment imposed during the test. Three specimens shall be cut
from the test sample. Record the load to fail each specimen and
determine the specimen width as close to the break as possible.
Use the measured width and failure load to calculate the
hoop-tensile strength.
8.6.1 Alternative Minimum Hoop-Tensile Strength
Requirement—As an alternative, the minimum hoop-tensile
strength values may be determined through the use of the
following formula:
F 5 ~ S i /S r ! ~ P r ! (2)
where:
F = required minimum hoop-tensile strength, lbf/in.,
Si = initial design hoop tensile stress, psi,
Sr = hoop tensile stress at rated operating pressure, psi,
P = rated operating pressure class, psi, and
r = inside radius of pipe, in.
The value for Si should be established by considering the
variations in glass reinforcement strength and manufacturing
methods, but in any case, should not be less than the 95 %
lower confidence value on stress at 0.1 h, as determined by the
manufacturer’s testing carried out in accordance with 6.5. The
value for Sr should be established from the manufacturer’s
hydrostatic design basis.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
NOTE 18—A value of F less than 4 Pr results in a lower factor of safety
on short term loading than required by the values in Table 9.
8.7 Longitudinal Strength:
8.7.1 Beam Strength—Place a 20-ft (6.1-m) nominal length
of pipe on saddles at each end. Hold the ends of the pipe round
during the test. Apply the beam load for the diameter of pipe
shown in Table 11 simultaneously to the pipe through two
saddles located at the third points of the pipe (see Fig. 2).
Maintain the loads for not less than 10 min with no evidence of
failure. The testing apparatus shall be designed to minimize
stress concentrations at the loading points.
8.7.2 Longitudinal Tensile Strength—Determine in accor-
dance with Test Method D638, except the provisions for
maximum thickness shall not apply.
8.7.3 Longitudinal Compressive Strength—Determine in ac-
cordance with Test Method D695.
in letters not less than 1⁄2 in. (12 mm) in height and of bold-type
style in a color and type that remains legible under normal
handling and installation procedures. Include in the marking
the nominal pipe size, manufacturer’s name or trademark,
ASTM Specification number D3754, type, liner, grade, class,
and stiffness in accordance with the designation code in 4.2.
9.2 Prepare pipe for commercial shipment in such a way as
to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers.
9.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
10. Keywords
10.1 fiberglass pipe; sewer pipe; industrial pipe; pressure
pipe; strain corrosion; hydrostatic design basis

9. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping

9.1 Mark each length of pipe that meets or is part of a lot
that meets the requirements of this specification at least once,

ANNEXES

(Mandatory Information)

A1. ALTERNATIVE HYDROSTATIC DESIGN METHOD

A1.1 The following symbols are used:
S = tensile stress in the glass-fiber reinforcement in
the hoop orientation corrected for the helix angle, psi,
P = internal pressure, psig,
Pl = long-term hydrostatic pressure, psig,
D = nominal inside pipe diameter, in.,
th = actual cross-sectional area of glass-fiber rein-
forcement applied around the circumference of the pipe,
in.2/in.,
θ = plane angle between hoop-oriented reinforcement
and longitudinal axis of the pipe (helix angle), and
HDB = hydrostatic design basis, psi.
A1.2 The hydrostatic design is based on the estimated
tensile stress of reinforcement in the wall of the pipe in the
circumferential (hoop) orientation that will cause failure after
50 years of continuously applied pressure, as described in 8.4
and Practice D2992, Procedure B. Strength requirements are
calculated using the strength of hoop-oriented glass reinforce-
ments only, corrected for the helix angle of the fibers.
A1.3 Hoop-Stress Calculation, derived from the ISO for-
mula for hoop stress, is as follows:
S 5 PD/2 ~ t h sinθ !
This stress is used as the ordinate (long-term strength) in
calculating the regression line and lower confidence limit in
accordance with Practice D2992, Annexes A1 and A3.
NOTE A1.1—The calculated result for S may be multiplied by the factor
6.985 to convert from psi to kPa.

FIG. 2 Beam Strength-Test Setup

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19
TABLE A1.1 Long-Term Hydrostatic Pressure Categories NOTE A1.2—The calculated result P1 may be multiplied by the factor
Minimum Calculated Values of 6.895 to convert from psig to kPa.
Class Long-Term Hydrostatic
Pressure gage, psi (kPa) A1.6 Pressure Class Rating—The classes shown in Table
C50 90 (621) A1.1 are based on the intended working pressure in psig for
C100 180 (1241) commonly encountered conditions of water service. The pur-
C150 270 (1862)
C200 360 (2482)
chaser should determine the class of pipe most suitable to the
C250 450 (3103) installation and operating conditions that will exist on the
C300 540 (3722) project on which the pipe is to be used by multiplying the
C350 630 (4343)
C400 720 (4963)
values of P1 from Table A1.1 by a service (design) factor
C450 810 (5584) selected for the application on the basis of two general groups
of conditions. The first group considers the manufacturing and
testing variables, specifically normal variations in the material,
A1.4 Hydrostatic Design Basis—The value of S is deter- manufacture, dimensions, good handling techniques, and in the
mined by extrapolation of the regression line to 50 years in evaluation procedures in this method. The second group
accordance with Practice D2992. considers the application or use, specifically installation,
environment, temperature, hazard involved, life expectancy
A1.5 Hydrostatic Design Basic Categories—Convert the desired, and the degree of reliability selected.
value of the HDB to internal hydrostatic pressure in psig as NOTE A1.3—It is not the intent of this standard to give service (design)
follows: factors. The service (design) factor should be selected by the design
engineer after evaluating fully the service conditions and the engineering
P 1 5 2 ~ t h sinθ ! ~ HDB! /D properties of the specific pipe material under consideration. Recom-
The pipe is categorized in accordance with Table A1.1. mended service (design) factors will not be developed or issued by ASTM.

A2. CALCULATIONS OF LOWER CONFIDENCE (LCL) AND LOWER PREDICTION (LPL) LIMITS

h LCL 5 ~ a1bfo ! 2 ts Πf o 2 F) 2 1
U
1
N

h LPL 5 ~ a1bfo ! 2 ts Π~fo 2 F!2 1

U
1 11
N

where all symbols are as defined in Annexes A1 and A3 of NOTE A2.1—Of the expected failures at stress (strain) fo 97.5 % will
Practice D2992 except: occur after hLPL. The average failure time at stress (strain) f o will occur
later than hLCL 97.5 % of the time.
f o 5 logof stress ~ strain! level of interest

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. STRAIN CORROSION PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

X1.1 From Molin and Leonhardt, the expression for bend-
ing strain is given as: ε b 5D f ~ t/d ! ~ δv/d ! . With the common
acceptance that these pipes must be capable of withstanding
5 % deflection long-term, the maximum installed bending
strain may be expressed as:
ε b max 5 ~ 0.05! ~ D f ! ~ t/d !
Using the AWWA C-950 long-term bending factor of safety
of 1.50, the minimum strain corrosion performance extrapo-
lated to 50 years must be:
E scv $ ~ 0.075! ~ D f ! ~ t/d !
X1.2 The shape factor, Df, is dependent on both the pipe
stiffness and the installation (for example, backfill material,
backfill density, compaction method, haunching, trench
configuration, native-soil characteristics and vertical loading).
Assuming conservatively, installations achieved by tamped
compaction with inconsistent haunching that will limit long-
term deflections to 5 %, the following values of Df have been
selected to be realistic, representative and limiting. Substituting
these values in the above equation for ESCV yields the
minimum required strain corrosion performances given below
and in Table 4.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3754 − 19

Pipe Stiffness (psi) Df

Minimum ESCV
Performance ε test $ Df F t
d1δV/2 GF δV
d1δV/2 G (X1.1)

9 8.0 0.60 (t/d) or

18 6.5 0.49 (t/d)
36
72
5.5
4.5
0.41
0.34
(t/d)
(t/d) ε test $ Df ~ t/d ! ~ δV/d ! S 1
11δV/2d D 2
(X1.2)

Df for parallel plate loading is 4.28. Making the other

NOTE X1.1—Products may have used limits of other than 5 % long-
term deflection. In such cases, the requirements should be proportionally substitutions yield:
adjusted. For example, a 4 % long-term limiting deflection would result in Pipe Stiffness (psi) Level B δv ⁄ d (%) Minimum Test
a 50 year requirement of 80 % of Table 4, while a 6 % limiting deflection
would yield a requirement of 120 % of Table 4. 9 30 0.97 (t/d)
18 25 0.85 (t/d)
36 20 0.71 (t/d)
X1.3 Alternative Strain Corrosion Test Requirements: 72 15 0.56 (t/d)
X1.3.1 At 0.1 h (6 min), the required strain corrosion X1.3.2 The minimum strain values at 10, 100, 1000, and
performance is based on the level B deflections from Table 6 as 10 000 h given in Table 4 are defined by a straight line
follows: connecting the points at 6 min and 50 years on a log-log plot.

X2. INSTALLATION

X2.1 This specification is a material performance and pur-
chase specification only and does not include requirements for
engineering design, pressure surges, bedding, backfill, or the
relationship between earth cover load, and the strength of the
pipe. However, experience has shown that successful perfor-
mance of this product depends upon the proper type of bedding
and backfill, pipe characteristics, and care in the field construc-
tion work. The purchaser of the fiberglass pressure pipe
specified herein is cautioned that he must properly correlate the
field requirements with the pipe requirements and provide
adequate inspection at the job site.

X3. RECOMMENDED METHODS OF DETERMINING GLASS CONTENT

X3.1 Determine glass content as follows: X3.1.2 As a process control, by weight of the glass fiber
X3.1.1 By ignition loss analysis in accordance with Test reinforcement applied by machine into the pipe structure.
Method D2584 or ISO 1172.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:41:53 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3840 − 19

Standard Specification for

“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pipe Fittings for Nonpressure Applications1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3840; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-

1.1 This specification covers fiberglass pipe fittings in-
tended for use in gravity flow systems for conveying sanitary
sewage, storm water, and those industrial wastes for which the
fittings are determined to be suitable. Elbows, tees, laterals,
crosses, reducers, and adapters are included. Both glass-fiber-
reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and glass-fiber-
reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are fiberglass pipes.
NOTE 1—For the purposes of this standard, polymer does not include
natural polymers.
1.2 This specification is intended to cover only dimensions,
material properties, and workmanship rather than the structural
design of the fittings. The structural design of the fittings shall
be as agreed upon between purchaser and supplier, and needs
to take into consideration the anticipated conditions of instal-
lation and service.
1.3 This specification covers only fittings fabricated from
cut sections of pipe, or from a combination of pipe sections and
contact molded (hand layup), or machine fabricated compo-
nents.
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information purposes only.
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 11, of this specification. This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally
approved in 1979. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D3840 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D3840-19.
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D1763 Specification for Epoxy Resins
D2290 Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of
Plastic or Reinforced Plastic Pipe
D3262 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
ing Plastic Pipe
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 and F412. Abbreviations are in accordance with
Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured
thermosetting resin. It is acceptable for the composite structure
to contain aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic
agents, pigments or dyes. It is acceptable to include thermo-
plastic or thermosetting liners or coatings.
3.2.2 reinforced polymer mortar pipe—a fiberglass pipe
with aggregate.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19
3.2.3 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe—a fiberglass pipe
without aggregate.
3.2.4 qualification—One or more tests used to prove the
design of a product. Not a routine quality control test.
NOTE 3—Qualification requirements appear in 6.1, 7.2, and 12.3.
4. Materials
4.1 Laminating Resin:
4.1.1 Type 1—Polyester thermosetting resin, with or without
fillers or thixotropic agents or both.
NOTE 4—For the purpose of this standard, polyester includes vinyl ester
resins.
4.1.2 Type 2—Epoxy resin, conforming to the requirements
of Specification D1763, with or without fillers or thixotropic
agents, or both.
4.2 Reinforcement:
4.2.1 Grade 1—A commercial grade of glass fibers with a
polyester-compatible finish.
4.2.2 Grade 2—A commercial grade of glass fibers with an
epoxy-compatible finish.
4.3 Gaskets—The elastomeric gaskets used with the fittings
joined to pipe shall conform to the requirements of Specifica-
tion F477.
5. Fabrication
5.1 Permissible Components:
5.1.1 Fittings covered under this specification shall be
fabricated from cut section of pipe that conform to the
requirements of Specification D3262, or from a combination of
such pipe sections and contact molded (hand layup) or machine
fabricated components.
5.1.2 It is acceptable to incorporate saddles, wrappers,
necked flanges, and other components of metal or other
dissimilar materials, as agreed upon between purchaser and
supplier, provided the materials of such components are
resistant to the corrosive effects of the internal and external
environments anticipated in service, or are lined or coated or
both with materials that provide equivalent protection.
5.2 Bonding and Laminate Overlay Reinforcements:
5.2.1 Sections of the fitting shall be aligned and bonded
together using polyester (Type 1) or epoxy (Type 2) resin
materials with or without fiberglass reinforcement. Fiberglass
reinforcement materials shall be compatible with the laminat-
ing resin; Grade 1 reinforcements shall be used with Type 1
laminating resin, and Grade 2 reinforcements shall be used
with Type 2 laminating resin.
5.2.2 It is acceptable to apply laminated reinforcing over-
lays of bonded seams to either the outside or inside surface of
the fitting, or to both inside and outside surfaces. The laminate
shall be of chemically resistant construction suitable for the
purpose and shall provide the additional strength necessary to
meet the physical requirements shown in Table 1. Finished
seam overlays shall be built up in two or more successive
layers of reinforcement and shall be as crevice free as
described in this paragraph and 5.2.3. The width of the first
layer shall be 2 in. (50 mm) minimum. Successive layers shall
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
increase uniformly in width to provide the specified minimum
total width of overlay that shall be centered on the seam. Table
1 shows minimum widths of overlays required. The ends of
each layer of reinforcement shall be overlapped a minimum of
1 in. (25 mm). Crevices between joined sections shall be filled
with a filled resin paste, leaving a smooth inner surface. The
interior of the seams shall also be sealed by covering with not
less than a 0.03 in. (0.76 mm) thickness of reinforced resin-rich
surface that provides corrosion resistance suitable for the
intended service. Alternatively, when it is necessary to fabri-
cate a fitting where the size and configuration do not allow
adequate access to interior seams, the cut edges of sections
shall be sealed prior to assembly and any reinforcing overlay
protected by a resin-rich surface that provides corrosion
resistance suitable for the intended service.
5.2.3 Components of dissimilar materials, such as steel to
polyester or epoxy laminates, or polyester to epoxy laminates,
shall be bonded with a resin compound capable of adhering to
both materials. The resin compound shall contact the joining
surfaces of both components with the spaces between the
components filled. The excess resin compound that extrudes
from the seam shall be removed, leaving a smooth fillet.
Sealing laminates and reinforcing overlays shall be applied
where required (see 5.1.1, 5.2.1, and 5.2.2).
6. Joints
6.1 The fitting joints shall be coupling or bell-and-spigot in
accordance with the joint requirements of Specification D3262,
unless otherwise specified. It is acceptable to qualify joint
designs on straight sections of pipe.
7. Physical Requirements
7.1 Properties of structural laminates, used either as seam
reinforcing overlays or as contact molded or machine fabri-
cated components, other than cut sections of pipe, shall be as
shown in Table 1, when tested in accordance with 11.1.
7.2 Shear Strength—The minimum shear strength of seam
reinforcing overlays shall be 500 psi (3.45 MPa) when tested in
accordance with 11.2.
8. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
8.1 Wall Thickness—The wall thickness of any area of the
fitting furnished under this specification shall not at any point
be less than 87.5 % of the nominal wall thickness published in
the manufacturers’ literature current at the time of purchase
when measured in accordance with 11.3.1.
8.2 Fitting Diameters—Fittings shall be supplied in nominal
diameters as given in Specification D3262. The fitting diameter
tolerances shall be as given in Specification D3262, when
measured in accordance with 11.3.2 or 11.3.3 as applicable.
8.3 Lengths—The tolerance for the laying length and other
significant dimensions shall be 62 in. (651 mm) or 61 % of
the dimension, whichever is greater, when measured in accor-
dance with 11.3.4. See Tables 2-6 and Figs. 1 and 2 for typical
minimum laying lengths.
8.4 Angular Dimensions—Angular dimensions shall have a
tolerance of 61° when measured in accordance with 11.3.5.
 D3840 − 19
TABLE 1 Minimum Properties of Structural Laminates
Nominal Diameter, in. (mm) Minimum Hoop Tensile Minimum Axial Tensile Minimum Total Width of
Strength, lbf/in. (kN/m) of Strength, lbf/in. (kN/m) Overlay, in. (mm)B
widthA of circumferenceA

8 (203) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)

10 (254) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
12 (305) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
14 (356) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
15 (381) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
16 (406) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
18 (457) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
20 (508) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
21 (533) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
24 (610) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
27 (686) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
30 (762) 1600 (280) 1600 (280) 4 (100)
33 (838) 1700 (300) 1700 (300) 6 (150)
36 (914) 1800 (315) 1800 (315) 6 (150)
39 (991) 2000 (350) 2000 (350) 6 (150)
42 (1067) 2100 (368) 2100 (368) 6 (150)
45 (1143) 2300 (403) 2300 (403) 6 (150)
48 (1219) 2400 (420) 2400 (420) 8 (200)
51 (1295) 2600 (455) 2600 (455) 8 (200)
54 (1372) 2700 (473) 2700 (473) 8 (200)
60 (1524) 3000 (525) 3000 (525) 8 (200)
66 (1676) 3300 (578) 3300 (578) 10 (250)
72 (1829) 3600 (630) 3600 (630) 10 (250)
78 (1981) 3900 (683) 3900 (683) 10 (250)
84 (2134) 4200 (736) 4200 (736) 12 (300)
90 (2286) 4500 (788) 4500 (788) 12 (300)
96 (2438) 4800 (841) 4800 (841) 14 (350)
102 (2591) 5100 (893) 5100 (893) 16 (400)
108 (2743) 5400 (946) 5400 (946) 16 (400)
114 (2896) 5700 (998) 5700 (998) 16 (400)
120 (3048) 6000 (1051) 6000 (1051) 16 (400)
132 (3353) 6600 (1156) 6600 (1156) 18 (450)
144 (3658) 7200 (1261) 7200 (1261) 20 (500)
156 (3962) 7800 (1366) 7800 (1366) 22 (550)
A
The values given are minimums only. Sound engineering practice dictates that all fittings be designed to withstand the loads and conditions anticipated in the service for
which they are intended.
B
The dimensions given are minimums for“ butt-and-strap’’ type joints.

9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 The inside surfaces of each fitting shall blend smoothly
and shall be free of bulges, dents, ridges, or other irregularities
that result in a variation of more than 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) from that
obtained on adjacent portions of the surface.
NOTE 5—This requirement is concerned with roughness and waviness
and does not apply to diameter tolerances or thickness of internal seam
reinforcement if present. See 8.2 for inside diameter tolerances, including
internal reinforcement.
9.2 Joint sealing surfaces shall be free of dents, gouges,
cracks, and other surface imperfections that will affect the
integrity of the joints.
9.3 The inner surface of each reinforced plastic fitting
component and connecting seam shall be composed of resin
with or without reinforcement, aggregate, or filler. No glass
fiber-reinforcement shall penetrate the interior surface of the
fitting wall.
9.4 Internal and external reinforcements shall be free of
voids, dry spots, cracks, and crazing. Some waviness in the
internal reinforcement is permissible so long as the surface is
smooth. Unless otherwise agreed upon between purchaser and
supplier, all fittings shall meet the visual and repair criteria of
Tables 7 and 8.
9.5 Fittings shall show good workmanship, including uni-
formity from item to item.
10. Sampling
10.1 Lot—Unless otherwise agreed upon between purchaser
and supplier, one lot shall consist of 100 fittings of each type,
grade, and construction of laminate overlay reinforcement, or
contact molded or machine fabricated component, or both.
10.2 Unit Sample—Select one fitting from each lot. Prepare
a sample or representative laminate and test specimens to
determine conformance with the requirements of 7.1 for
ultimate tensile strength.
11. Test Methods
11.1 Ultimate Tensile Strength—Determine the ultimate ten-
sile strength of sample laminate specimens cut from seam
reinforcing overlays or contact molded or machine fabricated
components, or from specimens of a laminate fabricated to be
consistent in every way with the construction used in the
reinforcing overlay or component of the fitting. One or both of
the following test methods shall be employed at the manufac-
turer’s option:
11.1.1 Test Method D2290, using Type B specimens, except
that the size of the specimens shall be permitted to be modified

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19
TABLE 2 0° to 30° ElbowA TABLE 3 31° to 60° ElbowA

Pipe Size, in. (mm) Dimension AB , in. (mm)

Pipe Size, in. Dimension CB , R1 (45°), in.

(mm) in. (mm) (mm)
8 (203) 12 (305)
10 (254) 13 (330)
12 (305) 13 (330)
14 (356) 14 (356) 8 (203) 18.5 (470) 12.0 (305)
15 (381) 14 (356) 10 (254) 19.5 (495) 15.0 (381)
16 (406) 15 (381) 12 (305) 20.5 (521) 18.0 (457)
18 (457) 15 (381) 14 (356) 22.0 (559) 21.0 (533)
20 (508) 16 (406) 15 (381) 22.5 (572) 22.5 (572)
21 (533) 16 (406) 16 (406) 23.0 (584) 24.0 (610)
24 (610) 17 (432) 18 (457) 25.0 (635) 27.0 (686)
27 (686) 17 (432) 20 (508) 25.5 (648) 30.0 (762)
30 (762) 18 (457) 21 (533) 26.0 (660) 31.5 (800)
33 (838) 18 (457) 24 (610) 27.5 (699) 36.0 (914)
36 (914) 20 (508) 27 (686) 28.5 (724) 40.5 (1029)
39 (991) 21 (533) 30 (762) 31.0 (787) 45.0 (1143)
42 (1067) 22 (559) 33 (838) 33.0 (838) 49.5 (1257)
45 (1143) 23 (584) 36 (914) 34.5 (876) 54.0 (1372)
48 (1219) 24 (610) 39 (991) 36.5 (927) 58.5 (1486)
54 (1372) 25 (635) 42 (1067) 38.0 (965) 63.0 (1600)
60 (1524) 26 (660) 45 (1143) 40.5 (1029) 67.5 (1715)
66 (1676) 29 (737) 48 (1219) 41.5 (1054) 72.0 (1829)
72 (1829) 29 (737) 54 (1372) 45.0 (1143) 81.0 (2057)
78 (1981) 30 (762) 60 (1524) 48.5 (1232) 90.0 (2286)
84 (2134) 34 (864) 66 (1676) 52.0 (1321) 99.0 (2515)
90 (2286) 36 (914) 72 (1829) 55.5 (1410) 108.0 (2743)
96 (2438) 38 (965) 78 (1981) 59.0 (1499) 117.0 (2972)
102 (2591) 39 (991) 84 (2134) 62.5 (1588) 126.0 (3200)
108 (2743) 41 (1041) 90 (2286) 66.5 (1689) 135.0 (3429)
A 96 (2438) 70.0 (1778) 144.0 (3658)
Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the
102 (2591) 73.5 (1867) 153.0 (3886)
figure are acceptable as agreed upon between manufacturer and purchaser. Refer
108 (2743) 77.0 (1956) 162.0 (4115)
to Section 6.
B A
Dimensions given are typical minimum laying lengths. Laying lengths for fittings Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the figure
larger than 108 in. diameter shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. Refer to
supplier. Section 6.
B
Dimensions given are typical minimum laying lengths. Laying lengths for fittings
larger than 108 in. diameter shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and
supplier.

and speed of testing and rate of crosshead motion shall not

apply. Record the load to fail of each specimen and determine
the specimen width as close to the break as possible. Use the
measured width and failure load to calculate the tensile
strength.
11.1.2 Test Method D638, using flat Type I specimens,
except that the specimens shall be the actual thickness of the
reinforcing overlay or fabricated component and the other
dimensions shall be suitable for the specimen thickness and the
testing apparatus. Specimens shall be permitted to be machined
on the edges, but shall not be machined on the surface. Tensile
strength shall be the average of five specimens tested at a speed
of 0.20 to 0.25 in. (5 to 6.4 mm)/min.
11.1.3 Conduct tests of anisotropic laminates to determine
the ultimate tensile strength in both the hoop and axial
directions. The ultimate tensile strength of isotropic laminates
shall be permitted to be determined in either the hoop or axial
direction.
11.2 Minimum Shear Strength—Determine the shear
strength of axially oriented laminate specimens in accordance
with 11.1.2, except that the specimens shall be representative
of an overlay reinforced seam joining two cut sections of pipe
in straight alignment (See Fig. 3). Calculate the shear strength
by dividing the maximum load by the area of both sides of the
pipe section covered by the reinforcing overlay on one side of
the seam. If the specimen does not fail or if the failure occurs
outside of the reinforced area, consider the results satisfactory
provided the shear strength calculated from the maximum load
exceeds 500 psi (3.45 MPa).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19
TABLE 4 61° to 90° ElbowA TABLE 5 TeeA

Pipe Size, in. Dimension EB , R2 (90°), in.

(mm) in. (mm) (mm)
Pipe Size, in. Dimension DB , Dimension EB , in.
(mm) in. (mm) (mm)
8 (203) 26.0 (660) 12.0 (305)
10 (254) 28.5 (724) 15.0 (381) 8 (203) 15.0 (381) 30.0 (762)
12 (305) 31.0 (787) 18.0 (457) 10 (254) 16.0 (406) 32.0 (813)
14 (356) 34.5 (876) 21.0 (533) 12 (305) 17.0 (432) 34.0 (864)
15 (381) 35.5 (902) 22.5 (572) 14 (356) 18.0 (457) 36.0 (914)
16 (406) 37.0 (940) 24.0 (610) 15 (381) 18.5 (470) 37.0 (940)
18 (457) 40.5 (1029) 27.0 (686) 16 (406) 19.0 (483) 38.0 (965)
20 (508) 43.0 (1092) 30.0 (762) 18 (457) 20.0 (508) 40.0 (1016)
21 (533) 44.0 (1118) 31.5 (800) 20 (508) 21.0 (533) 42.0 (1067)
24 (610) 46.0 (1219) 36.0 (914) 21 (533) 21.5 (546) 43.0 (1092)
27 (686) 49.0 (1308) 40.5 (1029) 24 (610) 24.0 (610) 48.0 (1219)
30 (762) 53.0 (1422) 45.0 (1143) 27 (686) 25.5 (648) 51.0 (1295)
33 (838) 58.0 (1549) 49.5 (1257) 30 (762) 27.0 (686) 54.0 (1372)
36 (914) 63.0 (1638) 54.0 (1372) 33 (838) 28.5 (724) 57.0 (1448)
39 (991) 68.0 (1778) 58.5 (1486) 36 (914) 30.0 (762) 60.0 (1524)
42 (1067) 71.0 (1854) 63.0 (1600) 39 (991) 31.5 (800) 63.0 (1600)
45 (1143) 77.5 (1969) 67.5 (1715) 42 (1067) 33.0 (838) 66.0 (1676)
48 (1219) 80.0 (2070) 72.0 (1829) 45 (1143) 35.5 (902) 71.0 (1803)
54 (1372) 88.0 (2286) 81.0 (2057) 48 (1219) 37.0 (940) 74.0 (1880)
60 (1524) 95.0 (2489) 90.0 (2286) 54 (1372) 40.0 (1016) 80.0 (2032)
66 (1676) 103.0 (2705) 99.0 (2515) 60 (1524) 43.0 (1092) 86.0 (2184)
72 (1829) 115.0 (2921) 108.0 (2743) 66 (1676) 47.0 (1194) 94.0 (2388)
78 (1981) 123.0 (3137) 117.0 (2972) 72 (1829) 50.0 (1270) 100.0 (2540)
84 (2134) 131.5 (3340) 126.0 (3200) 78 (1981) 53.0 (1346) 106.0 (2692)
90 (2286) 140.0 (3556) 135.0 (3429) 84 (2134) 56.0 (1422) 112.0 (2845)
96 (2438) 148.5 (3772) 144.0 (3658) 90 (2286) 60.0 (1524) 120.0 (3048)
102 (2591) 157.0 (3988) 153.0 (3886) 96 (2438) 63.0 (1600) 126.0 (3201)
108 (2743) 165.5 (4204) 162.0 (4115) 102 (2591) 66.0 (1676) 132.0 (3353)
A
Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the figure 108 (2743) 69.0 (1753) 138.0 (3505)
are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser. Refer to A
Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the
Section 6. figure are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
B
Dimensions given are typical minimum laying lengths. Laying lengths for fittings Refer to Section 6.
larger than 108 in. diameter shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and B
Dimensions given are minimum laying lengths. Laying lengths for fittings larger
supplier. than 108 in. diameter shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and supplier.

11.3 Dimensions: 11.3.5 Angular Dimensions—Measure with a protractor or

11.3.1 Wall Thickness—Determine in accordance with Prac-
tice D3567.
11.3.2 Inside Diameter—Determine in accordance with
Practice D3567.
11.3.3 Outside Diameter—Determine in accordance with
Practice D3567.
11.3.4 Lengths—Determine in accordance with Practice
D3567. Straightedges, levels, squares, and other devices shall
be permitted to be employed as required by the configuration of
the fitting or component.
other suitable device having graduations of 1 deg or less.
Straightedges, levels, squares, and other devices shall be
permitted to be employed as required by the configuration of
the fitting or component. Alternatively, angular dimensions
shall be permitted to be calculated from linear measurements.
12. Inspection
12.1 Visually and dimensionally inspect each fitting. Dis-
crepancies shall be corrected or the defective fitting shall be
rejected, as agreed upon between purchaser and supplier.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19
TABLE 6 45° WyeA 12.2 If the results of the test for ultimate tensile strength
requirements of 7.1 fall below the required minimums, then, at
the option of the supplier, that test shall be repeated on two
additional sample laminates representative of that same lot,
each of which shall conform to the requirements specified. If
either of these two additional samples fail, the purchaser shall
have the option to reject the lot.
12.3 The initial design of reinforcing overlays and fabri-
cated components shall be qualified by dimensional and visual
inspection and by testing in accordance with the requirements
of 7.1 and 7.2. The overlay or component shall be requalified
when any change occurs in either the resin formulation, the
total amount of the reinforcement, the grade or composition of
the finish (sizing or coating) of the reinforcement, the applica-
tion method, or the technique of fabrication.
Pipe Size, Dimension AB , Dimension BB , Dimension CB , 12.4 Additional inspections and tests shall be as agreed
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
upon by the purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchase
contract.
8 (203) 24.0 (610) 13.0 (330) 37.0 (940)
10 (254) 26.5 (673) 13.5 (343) 40.0 (1016)
12 (305) 29.0 (737) 13.5 (343) 42.5 (1080) 13. Packaging, Marking, and Shipping
14 (356) 31.0 (787) 14.0 (356) 45.0 (1143)
15 (381) 32.5 (826) 14.5 (368) 47.0 (1194) 13.1 Fittings shall be marked on the outside surface in
16 (406) 33.5 (851) 14.5 (368) 48.0 (1219) letters not less than 1⁄2 in. in height and of bold type style in a
18 (457) 36.0 (914) 15.0 (381) 51.0 (1295)
20 (508) 38.5 (978) 15.5 (394) 54.0 (1372)
color and type that will remain legible under normal handling
21 (533) 39.5 (1003) 15.5 (394) 55.0 (1397) and installation procedures. The marking shall include this
24 (610) 43.5 (1105) 16.0 (406) 59.5 (1511) ASTM specification number: D3840, manufacturer’s name or
27 (686) 47.0 (1194) 17.0 (432) 64.0 (1626)
30 (762) 50.5 (1283) 17.5 (445) 68.0 (1727) trademark, nominal size, and the words “GRAVITY SEWER.”
33 (838) 54.0 (1372) 18.0 (457) 72.0 (1829)
36 (914) 58.0 (1473) 18.5 (470) 76.5 (1943) 13.2 Fittings shall be prepared for shipment so as to ensure
39 (991) 61.5 (1562) 19.0 (483) 80.5 (2045) acceptance by common or other carriers.
42 (1067) 66.0 (1676) 21.0 (533) 87.0 (2210)
45 (1143) 69.5 (1765) 21.5 (546) 91.0 (2311) 13.3 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
48 (1219) 73.5 (1867) 22.0 (559) 95.5 (2426)
54 (1372) 80.5 (2045) 23.5 (597) 104.0 (2642) Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
60 (1524) 88.0 (2235) 24.5 (622) 112.5 (2858)
66 (1676) 97.0 (2464) 28.0 (711) 125.0 (3175)
72 (1829) 104.5 (2654) 29.0 (737) 133.5 (3391)
14. Keywords
78 (1981) 111.5 (2832) 30.0 (762) 141.5 (3594) 14.1 dimensions; fabrication; fiberglass; fittings; overlays;
84 (2134) 120.0 (3048) 32.5 (826) 152.5 (3874)
90 (2286) 127.0 (3226) 33.5 (851) 160.5 (4077) pipe
96 (2438) 134.5 (3416) 35.0 (889) 169.5 (4305)
102 (2591) 141.5 (3594) 36.0 (914) 176.5 (4483)
108 (2743) 150.0 (3810) 38.5 (978) 188.5 (4788)
A
Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the
figure are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer and purchaser.
Refer to Section 6.
B
Dimensions given are typical minimum laying lengths. Laying lengths for fittings
larger than 108 in. diameter shall be as agreed upon between purchaser and
supplier.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19

NOTE 1—Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the figure are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and purchaser. Refer to Section 6.
FIG. 1 Concentric Reducer

NOTE 1—Fitting end configurations other than the typical bell and spigot shown in the figure are acceptable as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and purchaser. Refer to Section 6.
FIG. 2 Eccentric Reducer

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19
TABLE 7 Visual Inspection and Repair Criteria for Inside Surfaces of Fiberglass Pipe Fittings
Indication Description Acceptable Without Repair Permitted Maximum
Maximum Size No./ft2 Repair Repairs/ft2

Air bubble air entrapment within the liner ⁄

1 16 in. in diameter 2/in.2 A
10
(void) rein-
forcement
A
Chip small piece broken from edge or 1⁄4 in. long and 1⁄2 the liner 10 10
sur- thickness
face
A
Crack separation of the laminate none permitted 0 5
extending
through the thickness of the
liner
A
Crazing fine cracks at or under the none permitted 0 10
surface
A
Dry-spot area where reinforcement was not none permitted 0 0.35 ft2 in
thoroughly wetted with resin area
A
Lack of fill-out area where resin has drained 1 in. long and 1⁄2 the liner 5 0.35 ft2 in
from thickness area
reinforcement
A
Pits (pinholes) small craters in surface 1⁄8 in. long and 1⁄2 the liner 15 15
thickness
B
Scratch shallow mark, groove, furrow, or maximum 1⁄4 of the liner no limit no limitB
channel thickness; if exceeds 1⁄2 of the 0.35 ft2 areaA
liner thickness use repairA
Wrinkle an imperfection that has the no limit, provided wrinkle has not no limit none required 0
appear- cracked the structural wall
ance of a wave molded into the
reinforcement material
A
Permitted repairs—Replace liner material in the discrepant area.
B
Permitted repairs—Coat with liner resin.

TABLE 8 Visual Inspection and Repair Criteria for Exterior Surfaces of Fiberglass Pipe Fittings
Indication Description Acceptable Without Repair Permitted Maximum
Maximum Size No./ft.2 Repair Repairs/ft2

A
Burn thermal decomposition evidenced by 5 % of the wall thickness; repair not 5 1
distortion or destruction of the permitted if decomposition
surface, or both extends beyond 35 % of wall
thickness
A
Chip small piece broken from edge or maximum 1⁄4 in. long by 10 % of 2 5
surface wall thickness (NTE 1⁄8 in. deep);
if over 1⁄16 in. deep use repairB
A
Crack separation of the laminate extending none permitted 0 5
through the wall and visible on
opposite surfaces
A
Cut roving broken or cut outer rovings due to none permitted; repair not permitted 0 1
scraping or scuffing during if damage extends beyond 35 %
handling of wall thickness.
A
Crazing fine cracks at or under the surface, none permitted 0 5
exposing reinforcement
C
Drip, resin resin protrusion ⁄ in. high
12 no limit no limit
B
Dry spot area where reinforcement was not none permitted 0 5
thoroughly wetted with resin
C
Fish-eye small globular mass that has not ⁄ in. high
14 no limit no limit
blended completely into the
surrounding material
A
Fracture rupture of laminate surface without none permitted; repair not permitted 0 2
complete penetration if fracture penetrates beyond
outer 1⁄2 of
wall thickness
B
Lack of fill-out area where resin has drained from 2 in. long 5 0.5 ft2 in area
the reinforcement
B
Pits (pinholes) small craters in surface ⁄ in. long with no exposed
18 15 0.5 ft2 in area
reinforcement
B
Scratch shallow mark, groove, furrow, or no exposed reinforcement no limit 20
channel caused by improper
handling
A
Apply a structural overlay extending at least 2 in. beyond the damaged area and resulting in a minimum total wall thickness in the repaired area of the wall thickness of
the fitting or component in the affected area.
B
Coat with resin.
C
Grind excess to within tolerance.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3840 − 19

NOTE 1—It is acceptable to adjust the number of layers (symmetrically applied) and shear area, if desired, to ensure that shear is the failure mode.
FIG. 3 Shear Test Specimen

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D3840 – 14) that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) Revised 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:01 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3892 − 15

Standard Practice for

Packaging/Packing of Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3892; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 2.3 Other Standards:

1.1 This practice covers the packaging and packing of all
thermoset and thermoplastic resins and fabricated shapes.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.3 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
2.2 Federal Standards:
Department of Transportation 19A, Title 49, Code of Federal
Regulations, Section 178.190, Wooden Boxes—Glued,
Plywood Cleated3
Department of Transportation 17H, Title 49, Code of Federal
Regulations, Section 178.118, Steel Drums3
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic Materials.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2015. Published September 2015. Originally
approved in 1980. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D3892 - 93 (2009).
DOI: 10.1520/D3892-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from U.S. Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents,
732 N. Capitol St., NW, Mail Stop: SDE, Washington, DC 20401, http://
www.access.gpo.gov.
National Motor Freight Classification4
Uniform Freight Classification Rules5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of technical terms used in
this practice pertaining to plastics, see Terminology D883.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Packing and packaging provisions are outlined as
needed for adequate transport of resins and finished products
with a minimum of mishaps in shipment.
4.2 Commercial levels are included for all commercial and
most federal and military shipments. Level A requirements are
added for special military purchases only.
5. Procedure
5.1 Examination of Preparation for Delivery—Examine in
accordance with Table 1 to determine that packaging, packing,
and marking comply with requirements specified in the con-
tract or order. The sample unit for this examination shall be one
shipping container fully prepared for delivery.
5.2 Packaging—Packaging shall be commercial or Level A,
as specified.
5.2.1 Commercial—The material shall be packaged in ac-
cordance with normal commercial practice. The complete
package shall be designed to ensure the item against damage
during shipment, handling, and storage.
5.2.2 Level A—For Military Procurement Only:
5.2.2.1 Sheets, Rods, Tubes, Pipes, Fittings, and Other
Shapes—Unless otherwise specified in the contract or order,
individual fabricated shapes shall be packaged in such a
4
Available from American Trucking Assn., 1616 P Street, N.W., Washington, DC
20036.
5
Available from Railroad Freight Classification, Room 1106, 222 South River-
side Plaza, Chicago, IL 60606.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:09 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3892 − 15
TABLE 1 Examination for Defects in Preparation for Delivery
Examine Defect
Packaging Not level specified. Packaging material not as
specified.
Packing Not level specified. Containers not as specified.
Count Less than specified or indicated quantity.
Weight and cube Gross weight is greater than, or less than, specified
require-
ments.
Markings Markings not in accordance with specified
requirements.
manner as to protect the material against physical and mechani-
cal damage and contamination during transit. Only items
comprised of a single National Stock number (NSN) or
identifying number shall be placed in one package. Individual
sheets shall be masked or interleaved.
5.2.2.2 Rolls of Film or Sheeting—These shall be supplied
in rolls. Each roll shall be wrapped with at least one layer of
polyethylene film or kraft paper, and tightly sealed with tape to
prevent contamination.
5.3 Packing—Packing shall be commercial or Level A, as
specified.
5.3.1 Commercial—The material shall be packed in accor-
dance with normal commercial practice. The packaged mate-
rial shall be packed to assure acceptance by common carrier
and to provide product protection against loss and damage
during multiple shipments, handling, and storage. The shipping
container shall be in compliance with National Motor Freight
Classification and Uniform Freight Classification Rules.
5.3.2 Level A (For Military Procurement Only):
5.3.2.1 Sheets, Rods, Tubes, Film, and Other Shapes—The
materials packaged as specified in 5.2.2.1 and 5.2.2.2 shall be
packed in plywood cleated boxes conforming to Department of
Transportation (DOT) 19A. All items packed together must be
of the same technical description.
5.3.2.2 Resin, Powder, Granules—Unless otherwise
specified, the material in the quantity specified shall be packed
in metal drums conforming to DOT 17H. Insofar as practical,
containers shall be of uniform shape and size, with minimum
cube and tare consistent with the protection required. All items
packed together must be of the same technical description.
5.4 Marking—Marking for interior packages and shipping
containers shall be as specified in the contract or order.
6. Ordering Information
6.1 All orders shall include the following information:
6.1.1 Title, number, and date of this practice: ASTM D3892,
6.1.2 Type of material required,
6.1.3 Color required, with tolerance and method of
determination, including whether determination shall be made
on unprocessed material or molded specimens,
6.1.4 Form and uniformity required, when so specified,
6.1.5 Level of packaging/packing required, and
6.1.6 Marking requirements.
7. Keywords
7.1 containers; film; marking; packaging; packing; plastics;
shapes; sheeting

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D3892 - 93
(2009)) that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2015)

(1) Note 1 was updated to use currently approved statement.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:09 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D3982 − 08 (Reapproved 2014)

Standard Specification for

Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass Fiber Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Ducts 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D3982; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers ducts fabricated by contact
molding intended for use in handling corrosive fumes and
process gases. Special attention is given to equipment that
operates at temperatures over 180°F (82.2°C) with regard to
strength and corrosion resistance.
1.2 The material of construction shall be “fiberglass” con-
sisting of a polyester, vinyl ester, or other qualified resin-matrix
systems with fiber reinforcement in accordance with Specifi-
cation C582.
1.3 This specification is not intended to cover selection of
resins and reinforcements for specific chemical environments.
1.4 This specification covers ducts up to a design pressure
of 65 psig (34.5 Pa).
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard..
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
F0436_F0436M
2.2 NFPA Standard:
NFPA 91 Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for
Duct, Stack and Vapor Removal or Conveying3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 The definitions used in this specification are in accor-
dance with definitions in Terminologies D883 and F412, unless
otherwise specified.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 calculated thickness—this description is in accordance
with the standard laminate composition tables for Types I and
II in Specification C582.
3.2.2 contact molding—includes the “hand layup” and the
“spray up” methods of manufacture.

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved March 1, 2014. Published March 2014. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1981. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D3982 – 08. DOI: Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch
10.1520/D3982-08R14. Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471, http://www.nfpa.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)
3.2.3 flange cant—the angle that an entire branch is off from
being perpendicular to the main run centerline (see Fig. 1).
3.2.4 flange flatness—maximum deviation, (see Fig. 2) from
the actual flange face not including warpage or perpendicular-
ity.
3.2.5 flange offset—the amount that an entire branch is off
the main run centerline (see Fig. 3).
3.2.6 flange perpendicularity—maximum angle that the
plane (see Fig. 2) of the flange inside diameter makes with the
perpendicular plane to the duct’s centerline.
3.2.7 flange warpage—the amount that a flange outside
diameter pulls back from the plane of the inside diameter FIG. 2 Flange Tolerance Description
during the cure of the material (see Fig. 2).
3.2.8 hand layup—application of glass plies in sheet form
by hand. Resin can be applied by either brushing, rolling, or
spraying.
3.2.9 minimum thickness—take six thickness readings. The
average of the six readings shall be a minimum of 85 % of the
calculated thickness. This must contain the required layers of
glass.
3.2.10 spray up—fiberglass roving is chopped and blown
onto the mold in conjunction with resin and catalyst.
3.3 Symbols:
3.3.1 M = 11⁄2 oz ⁄ft2 chopped-strand mat.
3.3.2 R = 24 oz/yd2 woven-roving with a 5 by 4 weave.
3.3.3 V = glass or synthetic veil, 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
calculated thickness.
3.3.4 For additional symbols and abbreviations specific to
design requirements, see 6.2.1.

4. Materials and Manufacture

4.1 Resin—The resin used shall be a commercial-grade
thermoset that has either been evaluated in a laminate by test in FIG. 3 Flange Offset
accordance with Practice C581 or that has been determined by

previous documented service to be acceptable for service

conditions. Where service conditions have not been evaluated
a suitable resin may be selected by agreement between the
manufacturer and the end user.
4.1.1 The resin may contain fillers or pigments in accor-
dance with Specification C582.
4.1.2 A thixotropic agent may be added up to 5 % by weight
of resin.
NOTE 2—The addition of a thixotropic agent may reduce the resistance
of many resin systems to certain corrosive chemical environments. It is the
responsibility of the fabricator, using a thixotropic agent in the resin to
ascertain its compatibility with the corrosive environment when this has
been reported to him by the purchaser.
4.1.3 Fire-retardant additives may be added to resins if
required to reduce flame spread.
NOTE 3—The addition of fire-retardant agents may interfere with the
visual inspection of laminate quality. Use in the inner surface and interior
layer should consider this, and the need for fire retardance should out
weigh any potential visual inspection difficulties. In some cases fire-
retardant agents can also affect the the chemical resistance of the resin. If
this is suspected, then chemical resistance testing of the resin should be
FIG. 1 Flange Cant conducted with fire-retardant additives included. Again the need for fire

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)
resistance should be balanced with chemical resistance. 6.1.5 Increase all calculated wall thicknesses to the nearest
4.2 Reinforcement—Glass reinforcing material with a binder standard wall thickness. Treat these standard wall thicknesses
and sizing compatible with the resin to be used. Fiber rein- as minimum dimensions.
forcements shall be in accordance with, and meet the require- 6.2 Cylinder Wall Design:
ments of, Specification C582 including composition require- 6.2.1 Symbols and Abbreviations:
ments for Type I and Type II laminates. 6.2.1.1 P—Actual design pressure, psi (MPa).
4.2.1 Corrosion Barrier—Consists of the inner surface fol- 6.2.1.2 PA—Allowable pressure, psi (MPa).
lowed by the interior layer. The corrosion barrier has a
6.2.1.3 Do—Outside diameter of cylinder, in. (mm).
minimum total calculated thickness of 0.096 in. (2.4 mm).
6.2.1.4 D—Inside diameter of cylinder, in. (mm).
4.2.1.1 Inner Surface—Surfacing veil with approximately
90 % resin and 0.010 to 0.020-in. (0.25 to 0.50-mm) calculated 6.2.1.5 S—Ultimate tensile strength, psi (MPa).
thickness. 6.2.1.6 F—Safety factor (see 6.1.1).
4.2.1.2 Interior Layer—A minimum of two plies of 6.2.1.7 T—Cylinder wall thickness, in. (mm).
11⁄2 oz ⁄ft2 chopped-strand mat or chopped roving equivalent 6.2.1.8 E—Tensile modulus of elasticity, psi (MPa).
with a compatible sizing system with approximately 75 % resin 6.2.1.9 L—Cylinder length between joints or elements that
and 0.086-in. (2.2-mm) calculated thickness minimum. Fiber qualify as a stiffener, in. (mm).
length shall be 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) minimum to 2 in. (50.8 mm) 6.2.1.10 I—Required moment of inertia for an element to
maximum. qualify as a stiffener, in.3 (mm3).
4.2.2 Structural Layer—Shall consist of chopped-strand mat 6.2.2 Internal Pressure:
plies of nominally 11⁄2 oz ⁄ft2 and have a 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) PDF
minimum to 2 in. (50.8 mm) maximum fiber length, or shall T5
2S
consist of a chopped roving equivalent in the spray-up method.
When necessary, woven-roving plies shall be used and shall 6.2.3 External Pressure (Internal Vacuum):
consist of 24 oz/yd2 with a five by four weave or a suitable Calculate:
equivalent agreed on by the end user and the fabricator.
Woven-roving shall be applied alternately with a minimum of 1.73 S D
Do
T
0.5

a 11⁄2 oz ⁄yd2 mat or chopped roving equivalent, finishing with

a mat layer. If result:
4.2.3 Outer Surface—Shall be coated with a resin-rich layer L
,
and containing 0.2 to 0.6 % paraffin wax with a melting point Do
of 122 to 126°F (50.0 to 52.2°C), except when other means are
Then use:
used to prevent air inhibition.

5. Physical Properties
P5
2.2E
F S DT
Do
3

5.1 Minimum wall of (V, M, M, M) shall be maintained If result:

under any circumstances. L
$
5.2 Laminates or portions of laminates comprised only of Do
chopped-strand mat shall have a 25 to 30 % glass content by
Then use:
weight when tested by Test Method D2584.
5.3 Minimum mechanical properties of standard laminates
shall be in accordance with Specification C582. P5
2.6E T
F DoS D 2.5

6. Design Requirements
L
Do
2 0.45
T
Do S D 0.5

6.1 Design Limitations: 6.2.4 Stiffeners to Withstand External Pressure:

6.1.1 Safety Factor—Use five for external pressure, use ten
for internal pressure and all other design calculations.
6.1.2 Maximum Permissible Deflection Under Design
Load—Use 1 % of the span for laminates not exposed to a
chemical environment and use 1⁄2 % of the span for allowable
deflection when a chemical environment will be in contact with
the laminate.
6.1.3 Secondary Bond Strength—When the load is along the
surface, use 2000 psi (13.79 MPa) ultimate shear stress for the
bonding surface area. Use a safety factor of ten when calcu-
lating allowable secondary bonding stresses.
6.1.4 When an extra corrosion barrier is specified, do not
include this thickness in the design calculations.
6.2.4.1 Required Moment of Inertia:
PL ~ D o ! 3 F
I5
24E
6.2.4.2 Material used to attach ring stiffener to cylinder wall
may be included when calculating the actual moment of inertia
of the stiffener as well as the portion of the cylinder wall
beneath the stiffener and attachment material up to a width of
2x (stiffener width).
6.3 Rectangular Duct:
6.3.1 The largest flat panel shall be designed to withstand
the loading conditions and not exceed the design limitations
(see 6.1.2). This can be accomplished with a sufficient wall

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)
thickness alone or by the incorporation of stiffening ribs to
reduce the required wall thickness.
6.3.2 Appropriate calculations shall be performed for wall
thickness and stiffening ribs as determined by the manufacturer
and the purchaser. Minimum wall thickness in all cases for
rectangular duct shall be as in Table 1, substituting the longer
side for the diameter.
6.3.3 The radial sides of a rectangular elbow shall be
designed as a round cylinder with the same radius.
6.4 Follow the requirements of NFPA 91Bulletin, Section
510 when it is required by law or the engineer.
6.5 Shop Drawings and Design Calculations—The fabri-
cated structure shall be in accordance with the design and
construction details shown on shop drawings and design
calculations prepared by the manufacturer and approved by the
purchaser. Details to be covered include, but are not limited to,
the following:
6.5.1 Materials, including a definition of the fiber-resin
system, in accordance with types of resins and reinforcing
materials of Specification C582,
6.5.2 Dimensions,
6.5.3 Size and location of stiffening ribs,
6.5.4 Location of field joints and flanges, and
6.5.5 Type and location of supports, if supplied by the
manufacturer.
6.6 All stiffeners, access openings, lifting devices or other
appurtenances shall be included as part of the duct design.
6.7 Where static electricity has been determined to be a
problem by the engineer, the inner surface of the ductwork
shall be grounded with a maximum resistance to ground of
106 Ω. The grounding method shall be determined by the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
7. Dimensions
7.1 Standard duct and fitting dimensions are shown on Fig.
4 and are based on inside dimensions.
7.2 Standard elbows shall have a centerline radius of
11⁄2 times the duct diameter for over 3-in. (76.2-mm) diameter
and two times the duct diameter for 3-in. diameter and under.
7.3 Mitered joints on all elbows 24-in. (609.6-mm) diameter
and under are not permitted except when more room is required
for bolting or when a diameter is chosen that is not shown on
Table 1.
7.4 Standard duct flange thickness, drilling patterns, and
minimum wall thickness are shown in Table 1.
7.4.1 Vent connections from tanks and fans are normally
different from this pattern. Appropriate adjustments to flange
dimensions need to be taken to effect transition.

TABLE 1 Typical Flange Dimensions and Hanger Spacing

NOTE 1—1 in. = 25.4 mm

1 lb/ft = 1.488164 kg/m.
CalculatedA CylinderA FlangeB Flange Recom- Maximum MaximumCD
Inside Wall Wall Thickness, Outside Flange Bolt Bolt Hole Number Bolt mended Bolt Hanger
Thickness, Construction min, in. Bolt Torque, Spacing, ft
Diameter, in. Diameter, in. Circle, in. Diameter, in. Holes Torque, ft/lb
in. ft/lb
1 0.14 Type I ⁄
38 5 3 ⁄8 4 ⁄
7 16 4 20 30 8.0
1 1⁄ 4 0.14 Type I ⁄
38 5 5 ⁄8 4 1 ⁄4 ⁄
7 16 4 20 30 8.0
1 1⁄ 2 0.14 Type I 3⁄8 5 7 ⁄8 4 1 ⁄2 7⁄16 4 20 30 8.5
2 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 6 3 ⁄8 5 7⁄16 4 25 40 8.5
2 1⁄ 2 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 6 7 ⁄8 5 1 ⁄2 7⁄16 4 25 40 9.0
3 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 7 3 ⁄8 6 7⁄16 4 25 40 9.5
4 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 8 3 ⁄8 7 7⁄16 4 25 40 10.0
6 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 103⁄8 9 7⁄16 8 25 40 10.5
8 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 123⁄8 11 7⁄16 8 25 40 11.0
10 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 143⁄8 13 7⁄16 12 25 40 11.5
12 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 163⁄8 15 7⁄16 12 25 40 11.5
14 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 183⁄8 17 7⁄16 12 25 40 12.0
16 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 203⁄8 19 7⁄16 16 25 40 12.5
18 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 223⁄8 21 7⁄16 16 25 40 12.5
20 0.14 Type I 1⁄2 243⁄8 23 7⁄16 20 25 40 13.0
24 0.18 Type I 1⁄2 283⁄8 27 7⁄16 20 25 40 15.0
30 0.18 Type I 5⁄8 343⁄8 33 7⁄16 28 35 50 15.5
36 0.18 Type I 5⁄8 403⁄8 39 7⁄16 32 35 50 16.0
42 0.22 Type II 5⁄8 463⁄8 45 7⁄16 36 35 50 19.0
48 0.22 Type II 5⁄8 543⁄8 52 9⁄16 44 35 50 19.5
54 0.22 Type II 5⁄8 603⁄8 58 9⁄16 44 35 50 20.0
60 0.30 Type II 5⁄8 663⁄8 64 9⁄16 52 35 50 24.0
72 0.30 Type II 3⁄4 783⁄8 76 9⁄16 60 40 60 25.0
84 0.30 Type II 3⁄4 903⁄8 88 9⁄16 72 40 60 25.5
96 0.30 Type II 3⁄4 1023⁄8 100 9⁄16 80 40 60 26.0
A
Based on 10 ft (3.0 m) between stiffeners for 5-in. (127.0 mm) H2O vacuum service. See Specification C582 for wall construction.
B
The flange thicknesses are based on practical experience to resist maximum bolt torquing since these thicknesses are sufficient to resist process conditions. Minimum
flange thickness shall be measured in the spot-faced area.
C
Special design consideration must be given to hanger spacing for rectangular duct.
D
Based on experience involving duct systems not subjected to severe service conditions such as significant additional weight caused by liquid or solids buildup, effects
of wind loading, or possible failure of intermediate hangers. These are maximum spacings that must not be exceeded even when design may indicate a longer spacing.
Shorter spacings may be required due to other loads.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)

NOTE 1—FLGs are optional.

NOTE 2—FLG bolt holes straddle major centerlines.
NOTE 3—FLG backs flat for SAE washers unless otherwise specified by purchaser.
NOTE 4—All units are in inches, unless otherwise specified.
Dimensions for Installation
Size IDA A B C F E G H
1 6 10 6 16 – – 6
1 1⁄ 4 6 10 6 16 – – 6
1 1⁄ 2 6 10 6 16 – – 6
2 6 10 6 16 4 15⁄8 6
2 1⁄ 2 7 12 6 18 6 21⁄2 6
3 7 12 6 18 6 2 1⁄ 2 6
4 8 14 6 20 6 2 1⁄ 2 6
6 10 16 8 24 9 33⁄4 8
8 12 20 10 30 12 5 8
10 14 24 10 34 15 61⁄4 10
12 16 26 12 38 18 71⁄2 10
14 18 30 12 42 21 83⁄4 12
16 20 32 14 46 24 10 12
18 21 36 14 50 27 111⁄4 12
20 22 38 16 54 30 121⁄2 12
24 24 42 18 60 36 15 12
30 30 52 20 72 45 185⁄8 15
36 33 62 22 84 54 221⁄2 15
42 36 72 24 96 63 261⁄8 15
48 39 81 26 107 72 297⁄8 15
54 42 91 26 117 81 331⁄2 15
60 45 99 28 127 90 371⁄4 15
72 54 117 34 151 72 297⁄8 18
84 60 136 36 172 84 343⁄4 18
96 66 154 38 192 96 393⁄4 18
A
All units measured in inches.

FIG. 4 Standard Duct Dimensions

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)
7.5 To determine minimum information for rectangular TABLE 2 Minimum Weld Widths
duct, use the longest side and increase to the nearest standard Minimum Cylinder Wall Thickness Minimum Total Weld Width
round-duct inside diameter. This diameter can be used to in. (mm) in. (mm)
determine the flange thickness, minimum wall thickness and 0.14 (3.6) 4 (101.6)
bolt-hole diameter, or tolerances. 0.18 (4.6) 5 (127.0)
0.22 (5.6) 6 (152.4)
7.6 There is no standard drilling pattern for rectangular duct. 0.30 (7.6) 6 (152.4)
Bolt-hole spacing shall be designed for a proper seal with a
maximum spacing of 41⁄2 in. (114.3 mm).
7.7 All bolt holes straddle major centerlines unless other- 9.2.2 The weld construction and thickness shall be that of
wise specified. the thickest section being joined (see Fig. 5).
9.2.3 All welds shall have a 6:1 taper minimum (see Fig. 5).
8. Tolerances 9.2.4 All gaps between mating ends of duct or fittings to be
less than 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm).
8.1 Terminology for tolerances is given in 3.2. 9.2.5 All exposed cut edges to be coated in accordance with
8.2 Out of Roundness: 4.2.3.
#6-in. (152.4-mm) inside diameter, tolerance = ±1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) 9.3 Flanges:
>6-in. inside diameter, tolerance = ±1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) or ±1 % (whichever
is greater) 9.3.1 See Fig. 6 for flange attachment.
9.3.2 In a “flange on pipe” type flange, the same inner
not to exceed maximum = 3⁄4 in. (19.1 mm) surface and interior layer of the duct shall also be on the flange
8.3 Overall lengths shall be 61⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) maximum. face.
8.4 Cut ends of round duct shall be square within 61⁄8 in. 9.3.3 In an “integral” type flange the same inner surface and
(3.2 mm) for <24-in. (609.6-mm) inside diameter, 63⁄16 in. (4.8 interior layer must continue onto the flange face.
mm) for between 24 and 48-in. (609.6 to 1219.2-mm) inside 9.3.4 Flanges shall be vapor-tight at the design pressure
diameter, and 61⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for ≥48-in. (1219.2-mm) inside when using a 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) thick 60 durometer gasket and
diameter. torqued to the recommended tightness in accordance with
Table 1.
8.5 Flanged or plain ends of duct and fittings must be within 9.3.5 Flanges shall be drilled with the pattern specified in
the following angles from their theoretical location: ≤24 in. Table 1 with bold holes straddling major centerlines unless
(609.6 mm) within 61°, >24 to ≤48 in. (1219.2 mm) within otherwise specified.
63⁄4 °, and >48 in. (1219.2 mm) within 61⁄2 °. 9.3.6 Back of flanges to be flat and parallel to provide a
8.6 Flange warpage = 63°; offset = 61⁄8 in. (3.2 mm); good seat for washers (see 8.8).
flange perpendicularity = 61⁄2 °; cant = 61⁄2 °, and flange 9.3.7 Flange construction shall be Type I or Type II in
flatness = 61⁄32 in. (0.8 mm) for ≤18-in. (457.2-mm) inside accordance with Specification C582.
diameter and 61⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) for >18-in. (457.2-mm) inside
diameter. 10. Inspection
8.7 For rectangular ducting for each side, increase the side 10.1 The finished laminate shall conform to visual accep-
to the nearest standard-round-duct inside diameter and use that tance criteria of Table 5 in Specification C582.
diameter to determine the tolerance for that particular side. 10.2 All dimensions shall be within the acceptable toler-
8.8 Back of flange shall be parallel with the flange face ances in Section 8.
within 61°, otherwise spotface for acceptable washer seating. 10.3 Barcol hardness shall be determined in accordance
(See Specification F436 for washer dimensions.) with Test Method D2583. Finished laminate shall have a
8.9 All corners of rectangular duct shall be radiused with minimum of 90 % of the resin manufacturer’s published Barcol
⁄ -in. (12.7-mm) radius for corners adjoining a wall ≤24 in.
12 hardness for a cured resin.
(609.6 mm) in length, 1-in. (25-mm) radius for corners 10.4 The finished laminate shall not be tacky in accordance
adjoining a wall between 24 and 48 in. (609.6 to 1219.2 mm) with the acetone sensitivity test. This involves application of a
in length, and 11⁄2-in. (38.1-mm) radius for corners adjoining a small amount of acetone to the surface, rubbing with finger
wall ≥48 in. (1219.2 mm) in length. until acetone evaporates and checking for tackiness. It is
recommended that gloves be worn while performing this test.
9. Fabrication
9.1 All reinforcing materials shall be overlapped in accor-
dance with Specification C582. Overlaps in subsequent plies
shall be staggered 2.25 in. (57.2 mm) minimum from overlaps
in the preceding ply.
9.2 Joints:
9.2.1 See Table 2 for minimum total weld widths. The weld
shall be centered on the joint within 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm). FIG. 5 Weld Width and Thickness

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D3982 − 08 (2014)
FIG. 6 Flange Attachment
10.5 Inspection at the manufacturer’s shop by the end user
is recommended.
11. Shipping, Handling and Installation4,5
11.1 See Table 1 for recommended hanger spacing.
11.2 Use properly designed hangers. Saddle supports should
have a minimum of 150° circumferential contact and one third
of the diameter (2 in. (51 mm) minimum) longitudinal contact.
Hanger supports should have 360° circumferential contact and
a longitudinal contact equal to diameter/12 with a minimum of
2 in. (51 mm).
11.3 All other equipment or service loads shall be supported
independently. Use flexible connections to isolate ductwork
from vibration caused by air-moving equipment.
11.4 Because of the light weight of fiberglass ducts the
primary determinants of the overall dimensions of the sub-
assemblies will be the dimensional shipping limitations. The
dimensions of the sub-assemblies shall be determined by the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
11.5 Unload the equipment with care and store in a location
where it will be free of damage. Impact of a tool or other heavy
object may result in a fracture of the inner lining and may affect
the service life.
11.6 Support large sub-assemblies during shipment and
unloading, to prevent excessive deflection and over stressing.
11.7 Protect all flange surfaces with wooden blinds or other
approved material during shipment. Protect all ductwork, and
especially appurtenances that could be easily damaged, to
prevent shipping or handling damage.
11.8 Use full-face gaskets to eliminate any cantilever effect
caused from bolting.
11.9 Tighten bolting on flanged connections following
torque values given in Table 1. Tighten bolts following the
sequential concept shown in Fig. 7. Use washers under bolt
heads and nuts.
11.10 The vendor shall specify the quantity of field-joining
kits subject to the concurrence of the customer. The vendor
shall supply material safety data sheets and field-joining
instructions along with the joining materials.
11.11 Clean bonding surfaces to remove grease, oil, dirt,
moisture, or any other contaminants. In addition, sand or grind
surface to remove the surface gloss. Do not use solvents on any
freshly sanded or ground surfaces.
11.12 Anchor all joints to eliminate any movement during
the welding and curing process.
12. Keywords
12.1 chemical resistance; contact molding; ducts; flanges;
polyester resin; reinforced plastic

4
Store resin, glass reinforcing and curing agents in a cool, dry area to maximize
shelf life.
5
Upon arrival at the installation site the customer shall examine the equipment
for damage in transit. If damage has occurred the customer shall file a claim with the
carrier. FIG. 7 Bolt Tightening Sequence

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:12 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4000 − 16

Standard Classification System for

Specifying Plastic Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4000; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-

1.1 This standard provides a classification system for tabu-
lating the properties of unfilled, filled, and reinforced plastic
materials suitable for processing into parts.
NOTE 1—The classification system serves many of the needs of
industries using plastic materials. The standard is subject to revision as the
need requires; therefore, the latest revision should always be used.
1.2 The classification system and subsequent line call-out
(specification) is intended to be a means of identifying plastic
materials used in the fabrication of end items or parts. It is not
intended for the selection of materials. Material selection
should be made by those having expertise in the plastics field
after careful consideration of the design and the performance
required of the part, the environment to which it will be
exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the inherent
properties of the material not covered in this document, and the
economic factors.
1.3 This classification system is based on the premise that
plastic materials can be arranged into broad generic families
using basic properties to arrange the materials into groups,
classes, and grades. A system is thus established which,
together with values describing additional requirements, per-
mits as complete a description as desired of the selected
material.
1.4 In all cases where the provisions of this classification
system would conflict with the referenced ASTM specification
for a particular material, the latter shall take precedence.
NOTE 2—When using this classification system the two-letter, three-
digit suffix system applies.
NOTE 3—When a material is used to fabricate a part where the
requirements are too specific for a broad material call-out, it is advisable
for the user to consult the supplier to secure a call-out of the properties to
suit the actual conditions to which the part is to be subjected.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
at Commercial Power Frequencies
D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
Insulating Materials
D395 Test Methods for Rubber Property—Compression Set
D412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas-
tic Elastomers—Tension
D471 Test Method for Rubber Property—Effect of Liquids
D495 Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc
Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation
D569 Method for Measuring the Flow Properties of Ther-
moplastic Molding Materials (Withdrawn 1995)3
D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
D573 Test Method for Rubber—Deterioration in an Air
Oven
D575 Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Compression
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D624 Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vul-
canized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers

1 2
This classification system is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Materials. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved April 1, 2016. Published April 2016. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D4000 - 13. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D4000-16. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D706 Classification System and Basis for Specifications for
Cellulose Acetate Molding and Extrusion Compounds
(CA)
D707 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Cellulose Acetate Butyrate Molding and Extrusion Com-
pounds (CAB)
D747 Test Method for Apparent Bending Modulus of Plas-
tics by Means of a Cantilever Beam (Withdrawn 2019)3
D785 Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
D787 Specification for Ethyl Cellulose Molding and Extru-
sion Compounds
D788 Classification System for Poly(Methyl Methacrylate)
(PMMA) Molding and Extrusion Compounds
D789 Test Method for Determination of Relative Viscosity
of Concentrated Polyamide (PA) Solutions
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D955 Test Method of Measuring Shrinkage from Mold
Dimensions of Thermoplastics
D1003 Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Transparent Plastics
D1149 Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration—Cracking in
an Ozone Controlled Environment
D1203 Test Methods for Volatile Loss From Plastics Using
Activated Carbon Methods
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable
D1430 Classification System for Polychlorotrifluoroethylene
(PCTFE) Plastics
D1434 Test Method for Determining Gas Permeability Char-
acteristics of Plastic Film and Sheeting
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
D1499 Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Expo-
sures of Plastics
D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-
Gradient Technique
D1525 Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of
Plastics
D1562 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Cellulose Acetate Propionate Molding and Extrusion
Compounds (CAP)
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D1693 Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of
Ethylene Plastics
D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds
D1822 Test Method for Tensile-Impact Energy to Break
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
D1929 Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature
of Plastics
D2116 Specification for FEP Resin Molding and Extrusion
Materials
D2137 Test Methods for Rubber Property—Brittleness Point
of Flexible Polymers and Coated Fabrics
D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hard-
ness
D2287 Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer
and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds
D2288 Test Method for Weight Loss of Plasticizers on
Heating (Withdrawn 2010)3
D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In-
tended for Outdoor Applications
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2632 Test Method for Rubber Property—Resilience by
Vertical Rebound
D2843 Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning
or Decomposition of Plastics
D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Plastics (Oxygen Index)
D2951 Test Method for Resistance of Types III and IV
Polyethylene Plastics to Thermal Stress-Cracking (With-
drawn 2006)3
D3012 Test Method for Thermal-Oxidative Stability of
Polypropylene Using a Specimen Rotator Within an Oven
D3159 Specification for Modified ETFE Fluoropolymer
Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluo-
ride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials
D3275 Classification System for E-CTFE-Fluoroplastic
Molding, Extrusion, and Coating Materials
D3307 Specification for Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) Resin Mold-
ing and Extrusion Materials
D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fit-
tings Materials
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3638 Test Method for Comparative Tracking Index of
Electrical Insulating Materials
D3713 Test Method for Measuring Response of Solid Plas-
tics to Ignition by a Small Flame (Withdrawn 2000)3
D3763 Test Method for High Speed Puncture Properties of
Plastics Using Load and Displacement Sensors
D3801 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning
Characteristics of Solid Plastics in a Vertical Position
 D4000 − 16
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D3895 Test Method for Oxidative-Induction Time of Poly-
olefins by Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3915 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Com-
pounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Pressure
Applications (Withdrawn 2015)3
D3935 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polycarbonate (PC) Unfilled and Reinforced Material
D3965 Classification System and Basis for Specifications for
Rigid Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Materials
for Pipe and Fittings
D3985 Test Method for Oxygen Gas Transmission Rate
Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Coulometric
Sensor
D4020 Specification for Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Poly-
ethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials
D4066 Classification System for Nylon Injection and Extru-
sion Materials (PA)
D4067 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Reinforced and Filled Poly(Phenylene Sulfide) (PPS)
Injection Molding and Extrusion Materials Using ASTM
Methods
D4101 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials
D4181 Classification for Acetal (POM) Molding and Extru-
sion Materials (Withdrawn 2005)3
D4203 Specification for and Basis for Specifications for
Styrene-Acrylonitrile (SAN) Injection and Extrusion Ma-
terials
D4216 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Building Products Compounds
D4329 Practice for Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp Ap-
paratus Exposure of Plastics
D4349 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polyphenylene Ether (PPE) Materials
D4364 Practice for Performing Outdoor Accelerated Weath-
ering Tests of Plastics Using Concentrated Sunlight
D4396 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Com-
pounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Nonpressure
Applications
D4474 Classification System for Styrenic Thermoplastic
Elastomer Injection Molding and Extrusion Materials
(TES) (Withdrawn 2008)3
D4507 Specification for Thermoplastic Polyester (TPES)
Materials (Withdrawn 1999)3
D4549 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polystyrene and Rubber-Modified Polystyrene Molding
and Extrusion Materials (PS)
D4617 Classification System for Phenolic Compounds (PF)
(Withdrawn 2012)3
D4634 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Styrene-Maleic Anhydride Molding and Extrusion Mate-
rials (S/MA)
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4673 Classification System for and Basis for Specification
for Acrylonitrile–Butadiene–Styrene (ABS) Plastics and
Alloys Molding and Extrusion Materials
D4745 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Filled Polytetrafluoroethlyene (PTFE) Molding and Extru-
sion Materials Using ASTM Methods
D4804 Test Method for Determining the Flammability Char-
acteristics of Nonrigid Solid Plastics
D4812 Test Method for Unnotched Cantilever Beam Impact
Resistance of Plastics
D4894 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Granular Molding and Ram Extrusion Materials
D4895 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Resin Produced From Dispersion
D4976 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
Extrusion Materials
D4986 Test Method for Horizontal Burning Characteristics
of Cellular Polymeric Materials
D5021 Specification for Thermoplastic Elastomer–Chlori-
nated Ethylene Alloy (TECEA) (Withdrawn 2007)3
D5046 Classification for Fully Crosslinked Elastomeric Al-
loys (FCEAs) (Withdrawn 2000)3
D5048 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning
Characteristics and Resistance to Burn-Through of Solid
Plastics Using a 125-mm Flame
D5132 Test Method for Horizontal Burning Rate of Poly-
meric Materials Used in Occupant Compartments of
Motor Vehicles
D5138 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Liquid Crystal Polymers Molding and Extrusion Materials
(LCP)
D5203 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and
Extrusion Materials from Recycled Post-Consumer
(HDPE) Sources (Withdrawn 2016)3
D5204 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polyamide-Imide (PAI) Molding and Extrusion Materials
D5205 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polyetherimide (PEI) Materials
D5279 Test Method for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Prop-
erties: In Torsion
D5336 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polyphthalamide (PPA) Injection Molding Materials
D5420 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a
Falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
D5476 Classification System for Thermoplastic Polyure-
thane Materials (TPU) (Withdrawn 2005)3
D5575 Classification System for Copolymers of Vinylidene
Fluoride (VDF) with Other Fluorinated Monomers
D5593 Classification for Thermoplastic Elastomers—
Olefinic (TEO) (Withdrawn 2005)3
D5628 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
Plastic Specimens by Means of a Falling Dart (Tup or
Falling Mass)
D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D5676 Specification for Recycled Polystyrene Molding and
Extrusion Materials (Withdrawn 2004)3
 D4000 − 16
D5857 Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extru-
sion Materials Using ISO Protocol and Methodology
D5927 Classification System for andBasis for Specifications
for Thermoplastic Polyester (TPES) Injection and Extru-
sion Materials Based on ISO Test Methods
D5990 Classification System for Polyketone Injection Mold-
ing and Extrusion Materials (PK) (Withdrawn 2007)3
D6314 Specification for Fluorocarbon Perfluoromethoxy
(MFA) Resin Molding and Extrusion Materials (With-
drawn 2002)3
D6338 Classification System for Highly Crosslinked Ther-
moplastic Vulcanizates (HCTPV) Based on ASTM Stan-
dard Test Methods
D6339 Classification System for and Basis for Specifications
for Syndiotactic Polystyrene Molding and Extrusion
(SPS)
D6358 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Poly (Phenylene Sulfide) (PPS) Injection Molding, Extru-
sion and Blow Molding Materials Using ISO Methods
D6360 Practice for Enclosed Carbon-Arc Exposures of Plas-
tics
D6394 Specification for Sulfone Plastics (SP)
D6778 Classification System and Basis for Specification for
Polyoxymethylene Molding and Extrusion Materials
(POM)
D6779 Classification System for and Basis of Specification
for Polyamide Molding and Extrusion Materials (PA)
D6835 Classification System for Thermoplastic Elastomer-
Ether-Ester Molding and Extrusion Materials (TEEE)
D6869 Test Method for Coulometric and Volumetric Deter-
mination of Moisture in Plastics Using the Karl Fischer
Reaction (the Reaction of Iodine with Water)
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With-
drawn 2015)3
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E96/E96M Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
E104 Practice for Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity
by Means of Aqueous Solutions
E119 Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction
and Materials
E162 Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials
Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source
E662 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke
Generated by Solid Materials
E1354 Test Method for Heat and Visible Smoke Release
Rates for Materials and Products Using an Oxygen Con-
sumption Calorimeter
F372 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate of
Flexible Barrier Materials Using an Infrared Detection
Technique (Withdrawn 2009)3
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
2.2 Federal Standard:4
Department of Transportation Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 302
2.3 Underwriters Laboratories:5
UL94 Standards for Tests for Flammability for Parts in
Devices and Appliances
2.4 IEC and ISO Standards:6
IEC 600093 Recommended Methods of Tests for Volume
and Surface Resistivities of Electrical Insulation Materials
IEC 600112 Recommended Method for Determining the
Comparative Tracking Index of Solid Insulation Materials
Under Moist Conditions
IEC 600243 Recommended Methods of Test for Electrical
Strength of Solid Insulating Materials at Power Frequen-
cies
IEC 600250 Recommended Methods for the Determination
of the Permittivity and Dielectric Dissipation Factor of
Electrical Insulation Materials at Power, Audio, and Radio
Frequencies Including Metre Wavelengths
IEC 60695-2-12 Fire Hazard Testing—Part 2–12: Glowing/
Hot-Wire Based Test Methods—Glow-Wire Flammability
Test Method for Materials
IEC 60695-11-10 Fire Hazard Testing—Part 11-10: Test
Flames—50 W Horizontal and Vertical Flame Tests
IEC 60695-11-20 Fire Hazard Testing—Part 11-20: Test
Flames—500 W Flame Test Methods
ISO 62 Plastics—Determination of Water Absorption
ISO 75-1 Plastics—Determination of Temperature of De-
flection Under Load—Part 1: General Principles
ISO 75-2 Plastics—Determination of Temperature of De-
flection Under Load—Part 2: Plastics and Ebonite
ISO 178 Plastics—Determination of Flexural Properties of
Rigid Plastics
ISO 179 Plastics—Determination of Charpy Impact Strength
of Rigid Materials
ISO 180 Plastics—Determination of Izod Impact Strength of
Rigid Materials
ISO 294-4 Plastics—Injection Moulding of Test Specimens
of Thermoplastic Materials—Part 4: Determination of
Moulding Shrinkage
ISO 527–1 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Part 1: General Principles
ISO 527-2 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Part 2: Test Conditions for Moulding and Extrusion
Plastics
ISO 604 Plastics—Determination of Compressive Properties
ISO 868 Plastics—Determination of Indention Hardness by
Means of a Durometer (Shore Hardness)
4
Available from U.S. Government Printing Office Superintendent of Documents,
732 N. Capitol St., NW, Mail Stop: SDE, Washington, DC 20401, http://
www.access.gpo.gov.
5
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd.,
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
6
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
 D4000 − 16
ISO 877 Plastics—Determination of Resistance to Change
Upon Exposure Under Glass to Daylight
ISO 974 Plastics—Determination of the Brittleness Tem-
perature by Impact
ISO 1133 Plastics—Determination of the Melt Mass-Flow
Rate (MFR) and the Melt Volume-Flow Rate (MVR) of
Thermoplastics
ISO 1183 Plastics—Methods for Determining the Density
and Relative Density of Non-Cellular Plastics
ISO 2039-2 Plastics—Determination of Hardness—Part 2:
Rockwell Hardness
ISO 3795 Road Vehicles, Tractors, and Machinery for Agri-
culture and Forestry—Determination of Burning Behavior
of Interior Materials
ISO 4577 Plastics—Polypropylene and Propylene—
Copolymers—Determination of Thermal Oxidative Sta-
bility in Air-Oven Method
ISO 4589 Plastics—Determination of Flammability by Oxy-
gen Index
ISO 4607 Plastics—Method of Exposure to Natural Weath-
ering
ISO 4892 Plastics—Methods of Exposure to Laboratory
Light Sources
ISO 4892–4 Plastics—Methods of Exposure to Laboratory
Light Sources—Part 4: Open-flame Carbon-arc
ISO 5659 Plastics—Smoke Regeneration—Part 2: Determi-
nation of Optical Density by a Single-Chamber Test
ISO 6603-1 Plastics—Determination of Multiaxial Impact
Behavior of Rigid Plastics—Part 1: Falling Dart Method
ISO 6721-1 Plastics—Determination of Dynamic Mechani-
cal Properties—Part 1: General Principles
ISO 6721-2 Plastics—Determination of Dynamic Mechani-
cal Properties—Part 2: Torsion-Pendulum Method
ISO 9772 Cellular Plastics—Determination of Horizontal
Burning Characteristics of Small Specimens Subjected to
a Small Flame
ISO 9773 Plastics—Determination of Burning Behaviour of
Thin Flexible Vertical Specimens in Contact with a
Small-Flame Ignition Source
ISO 11357-1 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry—
Part 1: General principles
ISO 11357-3 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry—
Part 3: Determination of Temperature and Enthalpy of
Melting and Crystallization
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The definitions used in this classification
system are in accordance with Terminology D883.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 The purpose of this classification system is to provide a
method of adequately identifying plastic materials in order to
give industry a system that can be used universally for plastic
materials. It further provides a means for specifying these
materials by the use of a simple line call-out designation.
4.2 This classification system was developed to permit the
addition of property values for future plastics.
5. Classification

TABLE 1 Standard Symbols for Generic Families With Referenced Standards and Cell Tables
Standard Symbol Plastic Family Name ASTMA Standard Suggested Reference Cell Tables for
Materials Without an ASTM StandardB
Unfilled Filled
ABA acrylonitrile-butadiene-acrylate E
ABS acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene D3965, D4673
AMMA acrylonitrile-methyl methacrylate E
ARP aromatic polyester (see LCP)
ASA acrylonitrile-styrene-acrylate E
CA cellulose acetate D706
CAB cellulose acetate butyrate D707
CAP cellulose acetate proprionate E D
CE cellulose plastics, general E D
CF cresol formaldehyde H H
CMC carboxymethyl cellulose E
CN cellulose nitrate E D
CP cellulose propionate D1562
CPE chlorinated polyethylene F
CPVC chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride) D4396, D1784, D3915, D4216
CS casein H H
CTA cellulose triacetate E D
EC ethyl cellulose D787 E D
E-CTFE ethylene-chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymer D3275
EEA ethylene-ethyl acrylate F
EMA ethylene-methacrylic acid F
EP epoxy, epoxide H H
EPD ethylene-propylene-diene
EPM ethylene-propylene polymer F D
ETFE ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene copolymer D3159
EVA ethylene-vinyl acetate F
FCEA fully crosslinked elastomeric alloy D5046
FEP perfluoro (ethylene-propylene) copolymer D2116
FF furan formaldehyde H H
HCTPV highly crosslinked thermoplastic vulanizates D6338
IPS impact polystyrene (see PS)
LCP liquid crystal polymer D5138

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE 1 Continued
Standard Symbol Plastic Family Name ASTMA Standard Suggested Reference Cell Tables for
Materials Without an ASTM StandardB
Unfilled Filled
MF melamine-formaldehyde H H
PA polyamide (nylon) D4066-94, D4066-01, D6779
PAEK polyaryletherketone
PAI polyamide-imide D5204 G G
PARA polyacryl amide
PB polybutene-1 F
PBT poly(butylene terephthalate) (see TPES)
PC polycarbonate D3935
PCTFE polymonochlorotrifluoroethylene D1430
PDAP poly(diallyl phthalate) H H
PE polyethylene D1248, D4976, D3350, D4020, D5203
PEBA polyether block amide
PEEK polyetheretherketone
PEI polyether-imide D5205
PEO poly(ethylene oxide)
PESU polyether sulfone D6394
PET poly(ethylene terephthalate), general (see TPES)
PETG glycol modified polyethylene terephthalate comonomer (see TPES)
PF phenol-formaldehyde D4617
PFA perfluoro alkoxy alkane D3307
PI polyimide G G
PIB polyisobutylene F
PK polyketone D5990
PMMA Poly(methyl methacrylate) D788 D
PMP poly(4-methylpentene-1) F
POM polyoxymethylene (acetal) D4181, D6778
POP polyphenylene oxide (see PPE)
PP polypropylene D4101, D5857
PPA polyphthalamide D5336, D6779
PPE polyphenylene ether D4349
PPH polyphenylene G H
PPOX poly(propylene oxide)
PPS poly(phenylene sulfide) D4067, D6358
PPSU poly(phenyl sulfone) D6394 G G
PS polystyrene D4549, D5676
PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene D1430, D3159, D3222, D3307, D4745,
D4894, D4895, D6314
PUR polyurethane F D
PVAC poly(vinyl acetate) F D
PVAL poly(vinyl alcohol) F D
PVB poly(vinyl butyral) F D
PVC poly(vinyl chloride) D2287 F D
PVDC poly(vinyl idene chloride) F D
PVDF poly(vinyl idene fluoride) D3222
PVF poly(vinyl fluoride) F D
PVFM poly(vinyl formal) F D
PVK poly(vinylcarbazole) F D
PVP poly(vinyl pyrrolidone) F D
SAN styrene-acrylonitrile D4203
SB styrene-butadiene E D
SI silicone plastics G G
S/MA styrene-maleic anhydride D4634
SMS styrene-methylstyrene E D
SP polysulfone D6394
SPS syndiotactic polystyrene D6339
TECEA thermoplastic elastomer-chlorinated ethylene alloy D5021
TEEE thermoplastic elastomer, ether-ester D6835
TEO thermoplastic elastomer-olefinic D5593
TES thermoplastic elastomer-stryenic D4474
TPE thermoplastic elastomer (see individual material)
TPES thermoplastic polyester (general) D4507, D5927
TPU thermoplastic polyurethane D5476
UF urea-formaldehyde H H
UP unsaturated polyester
VDF vinylidene fluoride D5575
A
The standards listed are those in accordance with this classification.
B
Cell Tables A and B have been reserved for the referenced standards and will apply to unfilled and filled materials covered in those standards.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
5.1 Plastic materials shall be classified on the basis of their
broad generic family. The generic family is identified by letter
designations as found in Table 1. These letters represent the
standard abbreviations for plastics in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600.
NOTE 4—For example: PA = polyamide (nylon), EMA = ethylene-
methacrylic acid, and EVA = ethylene-vinyl acetate.
5.1.1 The generic family is classified into groups in
accordance, in general, with the chemical composition. These
groups are further subdivided into classes and grades as shown
in the basic property table that applies. The letter designation
applicable is followed by a four-digit number indicating group,
class, and grade. The first two digits indicate the group, the
third digit the class, and the fourth digit the grade.
ASTM D4000 Line Call-Out
1 2
SPECIFIC
Broad Group Class Grade
generic x x x x
type
1 = Two or more letters identify the generic family based on Terminology D1600.
2 = Four digits identify the specific chemical group, the modification or use
class, and the grade by viscosity or level of modification. A basic property table
will provide property values.
The D4000 line call-out can be used only if the plastic is
listed in Table 1 and has no more than one material standard
referenced. If two or more standards are referenced for a
material, a direct D4000 line call-out is ambiguous.
NOTE 5—An example using the group, class, and grade is as follows:
PC0122 would indicate: PC = polycarbonate, 01 (group) = polycarbonate,
ASTM D4000 Line Call-Out
1 2 3 4
SPECIFIC
2 (class) = flame retarded, and 2 (grade) with requirements given in the
(PC) basic property table of Classification D3935.
NOTE 6—A previous edition of this standard used three digits for group,
class, and grade; 0122 is equivalent to what was 122.
5.1.2 Basic property tables have been developed to sort the
commercially available unreinforced plastics into groups,
classes, and grades. These tables are found in the standards
listed in Table 1.
5.1.2.1 Where a standard does not exist for this classifica-
tion system the letter designation for the generic family will be
followed by four 0’s and the use of cell table that applies (see
5.3).
NOTE 7—Example—PI0000 would indicate a polyimide plastic (PI)
from Table 1, and 0000 indicating no basic property table requirements.
5.2 Reinforced or filled versions, or both of the basic
materials are identified by a single letter from Table 2 that
indicates the reinforcement or filler, or both, used and two
digits that indicate the nominal quantity in percent by weight.
A second letter from Table 2A may be used to indicate the form
or structure of the reinforcement or filler, or both, but is neither
necessary nor functional for mixtures. Thus, a letter designa-
tion G for glass and 33 for percent by weight, G33, specifies a
reinforced or filled material with 33 percent by weight of glass,
and another letter designation E following the G (that is, GE33)
specifies a filled material with 33 percent by weight of glass in
the form of beads (or spheres or balls).
5.2.1 The generic family is based on the broad chemical
makeup of the base polymer. By its designation, certain
inherent properties are specified.
5 6 7
CELL
REQUIREMENTS

Broad Group Class Grade Reinforcement % Table x x x x x Suffix

generic x x x x Reinforcement Physical
type Properties
1 = Two or more letters identify the generic family based on Terminology D1600.
2 = Four digits identify the specific chemical group, the modification or use class, and the grade by viscosity or level of modification. A basic property table will provide
property values.
3 = One letter indicates reinforcement type; an optional second letter indicates form of the reinforcement.
4 = Two digits indicate percent of reinforcement.
5 = One letter refers to a cell table listing of physical specifications and test methods.
6 = Five digits refer to the specific physical parameters listed in the cell table.
7 = Suffix codes indicate special requirements based on the application, and identify special tests (see Section 7).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16

TABLE 2 Reinforcement-FillerA SymbolsB and Tolerance

Symbol Material Tolerance
C Carbon and graphite ±2 percentage points
D Alumina trihydrate ±2 percentage points
E Clay ±2 percentage points
F Cellulose ±2 percentage points
G Glass ±2 percentage points
H Aramid ±2 percentage points
J Boron ±2 percentage points
K Calcium carbonate ±2 percentage points
L Lubricants (for example, PTFE, graphite, and so forth) Depends upon material and process—to be specified
M Mineral ±2 percentage points
N Natural organic (cotton, sisal, hemp, flax, and so forth) ±2 percentage points
P Mica ±2 percentage points
Q Silica ±2 percentage points
R Combinations of reinforcements or fillers, or both ±3 percentage points
S Synthetic organic ±2 percentage points
T Talcum ±2 percentage points
V Metal ±2 percentage points
W Wood ±2 percentage points
X Not specified To be specified
A
Ash content of filled or reinforced materials, or both may be determined using either Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451–1 where applicable.
B
Additional symbols may be added to this table as required.

TABLE 2A Symbols for the Form or Structure of Fillers and Reinforcing Materials
Symbol Form or Structure
C Chips, cuttings
D Fines, powder
E Beads, spheres, balls
F Fiber
G Ground
H Whisker
K Knitted fabric
L Layer
M Mat (fabric, thick)
N Non-woven (fabric, thin)
P Paper
R Roving
S Flake
T Cord
V Veneer
W Woven fabric
X Not specified
Y Yarn

5.2.2 The requirements for special or reinforced materials
will use the classification system as described by the addition
of a single letter that indicates the proper cell table in which the
properties are listed. A specific value is designated by the cell
number for each property in the order in which they are listed
in the table. When a property is not to be specified, a zero is
entered as the cell number. Likewise, when an acceptable value
is not available in the cell table, the number 9 should be used
and a suffix used indicating the specific value (see 7.3). Thus,
the letter designation “A” for cell table and 53380 for property
values shall always be written A53380. The cell tables that may
be used for each generic family are listed in Table 1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16

The following three examples illustrate correct usage of the system. Note that the second example specifies one of two referenced standards shown in Table 1 of
D4000-09b.

The first example is for a cellulose triacetate containing 33 percent glass reinforcement and with the property requirements shown in Table D of ASTM D4000.

ASTM D4000-09b CTA0000 G33 D53380

Basic Requirements
ASTM D4000-09b CTA 00 0 0 G 33
_____ __ ____ __ __ _ _ _ __
| | | | | | |
Plastic Generic Group Class Grade Glass Percent
(cellulos (Other) (Other) (Other) Reinforced Glass
triacetate)

Cell Requirements
D 5 3 3 8 0
_ _ _ _ _ _
| | | | | |
Cell Table Tensile Flexural Izod Deflection Unspeci-
fied
Strength Modulus Impact Tempera-
ture

Requirements from Table D of Classification D4000 - 09b

The second example is for a PET copolymer with 30 percent glass reinforcement with the properties requirements shown in Table A of ASTM D5927-09.

ASTM D5927-09 TPES0310 G30 A22450

Basic Requirements
ASTM D5927-09 TPES 03 1 0 G 30
_____ __ ____ __ __ _ _ _ __
| | | | | | |
Plastic Generic Group Class Grade Glass Percent
(thermo- (polyethyl- (PET G) (Other) Reinforced Glass
plastic ene te-
polyester) rephthalate
copolymer)

Cell Requirements
A 2 2 4 5 0
_ _ _ _ _ _
| | | | | |
Cell Table Tensile Tensile Charpy Deflection Unspeci-
fied
Strength Modulus Impact Tempera-
ture

Requirements from Table A of Classification D5927 - 09

The third example is for a reinforced plastic where the shape or form of the reinforcement is included. The designation D4066 - 94b PA0120G33A53380 indicates
the following with the material requirements from Classification D4066 - 94b:
PA0120 = Nylon 66 heat stabilized from Table PA of Classifica-
tion D4066 - 94b,
G33 = Glass reinforced with 33 % glass, nominal, no require-
ment for shape or form,
A = Table A (D4066) for property requirements,
5 = Tensile strength, 175 MPa, min,
3 = Flexural modulus, 7500 MPa, min,
3 = Izod impact, 75 J/m, min,
8 = Deflection temperature, 235°C, min, and
0 = Unspecified.

NOTE 8—The type and amount of reinforcement are sometimes shown porated in this standard (preceding Section 17). These tables
on the supplier’s technical data sheet. If necessary, additional control of should be used in the same manner as the cell tables that appear
these reinforcements shall be accomplished by the use of the suffix part of
the system (Section 7). in the material specifications.
5.3 To facilitate the identification of new, special, and
reinforced materials where basic property tables are not pro-
vided in a material specification, cell tables have been incor-

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
5.3.1 Although the values listed in cell tables include the
range of properties available in existing materials, that does not
imply that every possible combination of properties exists or
can be obtained.
6. Basic Requirements
6.1 The main table or cell tables in the referenced ASTM
classification standard found in Table 1, are to be used to
develop a line call-out for each Plastic Family Name. A direct
D4000 line call-out can be used only if the plastic is listed in
Table 1 and has no more than one material standard referenced.
6.2 The cell tables included in this standard shall be used to
develop a line call-out only for the materials not covered by a
classification standard in Table 1. When the existing main or
cell tables do not adequately describe the material, then
suffixes are used in place of, or in addition to, a cell table
designation.
6.3 A line call-out assembled using this classification sys-
tem becomes a specification. The line call-out shall refer to the
standard used and contain the broad and specific type of
plastic, together with the appropriate identifiers followed by
special suffix requirements, as they apply. The following
summarizes the line call-out and the entire system as detailed
in this standard.
7. Suffix Requirements
7.1 When requirements are needed that supersede or supple-
ment the property table or cell table requirements, they shall be
specified through the use of suffixes. In general, the first suffix
letter indicates the special requirement needed and the second
letter indicates the condition or test method, or both, with a
three-digit number indicating the specific requirement. The
suffixes that may be used are listed in Table 3 (following 16.1).
7.2 Basic requirements from property or cell tables, as they
apply, are always in effect unless these requirements are
superseded by special suffix requirements in the line call-out.
NOTE 9—When using the suffixes for additional requirements of the
material, the user must keep in mind that not all tests are routinely
conducted by the supplier. When these requirements are necessary to
identify particular characteristics important to specific applications they
shall be specified.
7.3 The following is an example of a line call-out specifi-
cation with suffix for a reinforced nylon:
Suffix Requirements
G A 140
| | |
Specific Test Requirement
Gravity Method
| 14. Test Methods
Requirements from Suffix Table
Acceptable Line call-out format for above
D6779 PA0120 G33 A53380 GA140
ASTM D6779 Referenced Standard, latest issue
PA0120G33 Plastic Material Basic Cell
A53380 A Table Property Requirements
GA140 Suffix Requirements
7.4 When a standard for a material is listed in Table 1, the
requirements of the referenced standard apply and the refer-
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
enced standard is to be used. When the requirements for a
material are included in this standard, the following sections
are applicable.
8. General Requirements
8.1 The composition of the specified material shall be
uniform and shall conform to the requirements specified
herein.
9. Detail Requirements
9.1 The material shall conform to the requirements pre-
scribed in the table (basic property, reinforced, cell, and suffix)
as they apply.
9.2 For the purpose of determining conformance with this
classification system, all specified limits, in this standard are
absolute limits as defined in Practice E29.
9.3 With the absolute method, an observed value or a
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly
with the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconfor-
mance with the specification is based on this comparison.
10. Sampling
10.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
requirements of 15.4. A lot of material shall be considered as a
unit of manufacture as prepared for shipment, and may consist
of a blend of two or more “production runs” or batches.
11. Numbers of Tests
11.1 The number of tests conducted shall be consistent with
the requirements of Sections 10.1 and 15.4.
12. Specimen Preparation
12.1 The test specimens shall be molded as specified for the
specific materials under test in the ASTM standard specifica-
tions for the materials.
13. Conditioning
13.1 Condition the test specimens at 23 6 2°C and 50 6
10 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h prior to testing for
those tests where conditioning is specified unless otherwise
directed in the ASTM standard specification for the material.
13.2 Conduct tests in the standard laboratory atmosphere of
23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 % relative humidity unless otherwise
directed in the ASTM standard specification for the material.
13.3 For materials sensitive to atmospheric exposure, spe-
cial preparations for conditioning and test conditions should be
adhered to as provided in the referenced standard for the
material.
14.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica-
tion system by means of the test methods referenced.
15. Inspection and Certification
15.1 Inspection and certification of the material supplied
under this classification system shall be for conformance to the
requirements specified herein.
 D4000 − 16
15.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
inspection shall consist of those tests which ensure process
control during manufacture as well as those necessary to ensure
certifiability in accordance with 15.4.
15.3 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the material under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure the material is certifiable in accordance with 15.4.
15.4 Certification shall be that the material was manufac-
tured by a process in statistical control, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this classification system, and
that average values for the lot meet the requirements of the
specification (line call-out).
15.5 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
requested. The report shall consist of results of the lot-
acceptance inspection for the shipment and the results of the
most recent periodic-check inspection.
NOTE 10—If recycled plastics are allowed in the standard, insert the
following phrase after the word “shipment” in the last sentence of 15.5:
“and the percent by weight of recycled plastic, as defined in 3.1 of Guide
D7209, if requested.”
16. Packaging, Packing, and Marking
16.1 Provisions of Practice D3892 apply for packaging,
packing, and marking of plastic materials.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE 3 Suffix Symbols and RequirementsA
Symbol Characteristic
A Color (unless otherwise shown by suffix, color is understood to be natural)
Second letter A = does not have to match a standard
B = must match standard
Three-digit number 001 = color and standard number on drawing
002 = color on drawing
B Fluid resistance
Second letter A = reference fuel A, ASTM D471, aged 70 h at 23 ± 2°C
B = reference fuel C, ASTM D471, aged 70 h at 23 ± 2°C
C = ASTM #1 oil, ASTM D471, aged 70 h at 100 ± 2 °C
D = IRM 902 oil, ASTM D471, aged 96 h at 100 ± 2°C
E = IRM 903 oil, ASTM D471, aged 70 h at 100 ± 2°C
F = Distilled water, ASTM D471, aged 70 h at 100 ± 2°C
Three digit number is obtained from Suffix Table 1. It indicates change in hardness, tensile strength, elongation, and volume.
Example: BC 132 specifies that material, after aging in ASTM #1 oil for 70 h at 100°C, can have changed no more than 2 Shore D points,
5 % tensile strength, 15 % elongation, and 5 % in volume.
C Melting point—softening point
Second letter B = ASTM D1525, load 10 N, Rate A (Vicat)
C = ASTM D1525, load 10 N, Rate B (Vicat)
D = ASTM D3418 (Transition temperature DSC/DTA) (ISO 11357-1 and ISO 11357-3)
G = ISO 306, load 10 N, heating rate 50°C/h (Vicat)
H = ISO 306, load 10 N, heating rate 120°C/h (Vicat)
I = ISO 306, load 50 N, heating rate 50°C/h (Vicat)
J = ISO 306, load 50 N, heating rate 120°C/h (Vicat)
K = ASTM D1525, load 50 N, Rate A (Vicat)
L = ASTM D1525, load 50 N, Rate B (Vicat)
Three-digit number = minimum value °C
E Electrical
Second letter A = dielectric strength (short-time), ASTM D149 (IEC 600243)
Three-digit number × factor of 0.1 = kV ⁄mm, min
B = dielectric strength (step by step), ASTM D149 (IEC 600243)
Three-digit number × factor of 0.1 = kV ⁄mm, min
C = insulation resistance, ASTM D257 (IEC 600093)
Three-digit number × factor of 1014 = Ω, min
D = dielectric constant at 1 MHz, ASTM D150, max (IEC 600250)
Three-digit number × factor of 0.1 = value
E = dissipation factor at 1 MHz, ASTM D150, max (IEC 600250)
Three-digit number × factor of 0.0001 = value
F = arc resistance, ASTM D495, min
Three-digit number = value
G = volume resistivity, ASTM D257 (IEC 600093)
Three-digit number × factor of 1014 = Ω-cm, min
H = comparative tracking index, ASTM D3638, ac frequency, 50 Hz, 0.1 % ammonium chloride (IEC 600112)
Three-digit number = V, min
J = volume resistivity, ASTM D257 (IEC 600093), Ω-cm
K = surface resistivity, ASTM D257 (IEC 600093), Ω (per square)
First digit indicates:
1 = minimum requirement
2 = maximum requirement
Final two digits indicate the exponential value of the base 10
Example: EJ206 specifies a maximum volume resistivity of 106 Ω-cm
F Flammability
Second Letter A = Horizontal Burning Rate ASTM D635, UL94 HB, IEC 60695-11-10, Method A
Report as: (First three digits equal maximum burn rate in mm/min), next three significant digits × factor of
0.1 = thickness of tested sample in mm. If sample burns beyond the 100 mm mark, the samples
are considered to have no rating.
B = Oxygen Index ASTM D2863, ISO 4589
Report as: Value % O2 to three significant figures
C = Flash Ignition ASTM D1929, Procedure A
Report as: Value, °C min to three significant digits rounded to nearest whole number.
D = Self Ignition ASTM D1929, Procedure B
Report as: Value, °C min to three significant digits rounded to nearest whole number.
E = Ignition by a Small Flame ASTM D3713
Letter retired, standard withdrawn without replacement in 2000.
F = Vertical Burn Rating ASTM D3801, UL94 V, IEC 60695-11-10, Method B
Report as: (First digit = rating), next three significant digits × factor of 0.1 = thickness of tested sample in
mm.
Rating designations: 0 = V-0
1 = V-1
2 = V-2
if no rating, do not use “F”
000 = to be specified by user
G = Radiant Panel Test ASTM E162
Report as: Flame Spread
First two digits indicate minimum specimen thickness
00 to be specified 05 3.00 mm

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
01 0.25 mm 06 6.00 mm
02 0.40 mm 07 9.00 mm
03 0.80 mm 08 12.70 mm
04 1.60 mm 09 >12.70 mm
Third digit indicates the flame spread
1 15 max 5 100 max
2 25 max 6 150 max
3 50 max 7 200 max
4 75 max 8 >200
H = Flame Spread Index ASTM E84
Report as: Flame Spread Index
NOTE 1: Smoke Developed Index may also be reported.
NOTE 2: Classifications may be used as per the International Building Code
Class I: Flame Spread 0–25
Class II: Flame Spread 26–77
Class III: Flame Spread 76–200
J = Automotive Horizontal ASTM D5132, FMVSS 302, ISO 3795
Burn Rate
Report as: (First three digits = maximum burn rate in mm/min), next three significant digits × factor of 0.1 =
thickness of tested sample in mm.
K= ASTM D2843
Letter retired, method no longer in broad commercial use, replaced by ASTM E662.
L= UL (IEC 60695-11-10)
Letter retired, see Appendix X1 for replacement procedures and references to the old requirements.
M = Vertical Burn Rating; FilmASTM D4804, UL94 VTM, ISO 9773
Report as: (First digit = rating), next three significant digits × factor of 0.1 = thickness of tested sample
tested in mm.
Rating designations: 0 = VTM0
1 = VTM1
2 = VTM2
if no rating, do not use “M”
N = Horizontal Burn Rate; ASTM D4986, UL94, ISO 9772
Foam
Report as: (First digit = rating), next three significant digits × factor of 0.1 = thickness of tested sample
tested in mm.
Rating designations: 0 = HBF
1 = HF-1
2 = HF-2
if no rating, do not use “N”
P = Glow Wire Flammability IEC 60695-2-12
Index
Report as: (First three digits are glow wire flammability index reported in °C). Following three significant dig-
its are thickness of sample tested in mm × factor of 0.1.
R = Heat Release Rate ASTM E1354
Report as: Peak Heat Release Rate
Rating Designations: (First three digits are peak heat release rate in kW/m2), next three digits are incident heat flux in
kW times ten (×10).
S = NBS Smoke (Flame or ASTM E662, ISO 5659–2
Smolder Mode)
Report as: (First digit = 1 for Flame mode or 2 for Smolder mode), final three digits = Specific Optical Den-
sity.
T = Fire Rating ASTM E119
Report as: (Fire resistance rating in hours, first two digits). Third digit = “1” for hose stream applied, “0” for
no hose stream applied. Fourth digit is application from table below:
Rating designations: 0: No application designated
1: Bearing Walls and Partitions
2: Nonbearing Walls and Partitions
3: Columns
4: Floors and Roofs
6: Loaded Restrained Beams
7: Protective Membranes in Wall, Partition, Floor, or Roof Assemblies
U = Large Flame Vertical ASTM D5048, UL94 5VA, IEC 60695-11-20
Burn Rating; Plaque
Report as: (First three digits = maximum burn time plus afterglow time in seconds after fifth flame
application), the fourth digit “1” or “0” for flaming drips (1 = yes, 0 = no), next three significant
digits × factor of 0.1 = thickness of tested sample tested in mm. Last digit: “1” or “0” for holes
burned through plaques (1 = yes, 0 = no).
V = Large Flame Vertical ASTM D5048, UL94 5VA, IEC 60695-11-20
Burn Rating; Bar
Report as: (First three digits = maximum burn time plus afterglow time in seconds after fifth flame
application), fourth digit “1” or “0” for flaming drips, last three significant digits × factor of 0.1 =
thickness of tested sample tested in mm.
G Specific gravity
Second letter A = ASTM D792 (tolerance ± 0.02) (ISO 1183 Method A)
B = ASTM D792 (tolerance ± 0.05) (ISO 1183 Method A)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
C = ASTM D792 (tolerance ± 0.005) (ISO 1183 Method A)
D = ASTM D1505 (tolerance ± 0.02)
E = ASTM D1505 (tolerance ± 0.05)
F = ASTM D1505 (tolerance ± 0.005)
H = ASTM D792/D 1505D1505 (max)
L = ASTM D792/D 1505D1505 (min)
Three-digit number × factor of 0.010 = requirement value
H Heat resistance, properties at temperature
Second letter A = heat aged for 70 h at 100 ± 2°C, ASTM D573
B = heat aged for 70 h at 150 ± 2°C, ASTM D573
C = heat aged for 70 h at 200 ± 2°C, ASTM D573
Three-digit number is obtained from Suffix Table 1. It indicates change in hardness, tensile strength, elongation and volume.
Second letter D = tested at 100 ± 2°C
E = tested at 125 ± 2°C
F = tested at 150 ± 2°C
Three-digit numbers obtained from Suffix Table 2. It indicates tensile strength, elongation, and tear strength.
Example: HE565 specifies that the material has a minimum of 15 MPA tensile strength, 400 % elongation, and a tear strength of 40 kN/m
when tested at 125°C.
Second letter L = low-temperature brittleness, ASTM D2137
Three-digit number indicates the temperature (°C) above which the material is non-brittle. Example: HL055 material is non-brittle according to
ASTM D2137a, above − 55°C.
I Not to be used at this time
J Hardness
Second letter A = ASTM D2240 (Type A) tolerance ±5 (ISO 868)
B = ASTM D2583 (Barcol), min
D = ASTM D2240 (Type D) tolerance ±3 (ISO 868)
E = ASTM D785 (Rockwell E), min
K = ASTM D785 (Rockwell K), min
L = ASTM D785 (Rockwell L), min (ISO 2039-2)
M = ASTM D785 (Rockwell M), min (ISO 2039-2)
R = ASTM D785 (Rockwell R), min (ISO 2039-2)
Three-digit number = value
K Tensile strength
Second letter B = at break, ASTM D638
C = at rupture, ASTM D412
D = tensile stress at break, ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2
E = tensile stress at 50 % strain, ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2
Three-digit number = value, MPa, min
Example: KC040 specifies a tensile strength at rupture of 40 MPa
M = tensile stress, ASTM D412
First digit indicates the elongation at which the tensile stress is measured.
1 = 25 %
2 = 100 %
3 = 300 %
Final two digits = value, MPa, min
N = tensile modulus, ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2
P = modulus of elasticity, ASTM D638
Three-digit number × factor of 100 = value, MPa, min
S = tensile set, ASTM D412
First digit indicates the elongation at which the set is measured.
1 = 50 %
2 = 100 %
3 = at break
4 = 200 %
Final two digits indicate the maximum percent set.
Example: KS208 specifies a maximum tensile set of 8 % when tested at 100 % extension.
Y = yield, ASTM D638
X = tensile stress at yield, ISO 527-1 and ISO 527-2
Three-digit number = value, MPa, min
L Elongation
Second letter B = break, ASTM D638
C = break, ASTM D412
D = break, ISO 527
Three-digit number = value, %, min
R = resilience, ASTM D2632
First digit:
1 = minimum
2 = maximum
Final two digits indicate percent rebound
Example: LR 150 specifies a minimum rebound of 50 %
T = tear strength, ASTM D624 Die C
Three-digit number = value, kN ⁄m, min
Y = yield, ASTM D638
X = yield, ISO 527
Three-digit number = value, %, min

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
M Moisture resistance or content
Second letter A = ASTM D570 (24-h immersion) (ISO 62)
B = ASTM D570 (2-h immersion)
C = ASTM D570 (long-term immersion)
D = ASTM D570 (1⁄2-h boiling water immersion)
E = ASTM D570 (48 h at 50°C immersion)
F = ASTM D6869 (ISO 15512, Method B), moisture content
Three-digit number × factor of 0.01 = value, percent max
N Flexural strength
Second letter A = ASTM D790, specimen = 3.2 × 13 × 76 mm, speed = 1.3 mm/min
B = ASTM D790, specimen = 6.4 × 13 × 127 mm, speed = 2.7 mm/min
C = ISO 178, specimen = 80 × 10 × 4 mm, speed = 2 mm/min, 64-mm span
Three-digit number = value, MPa, min
O Not to be used at this time
P Impact resistance
Second letter A = ASTM D256 (Test Method A, Izod)
000 = no break
Three-digit number = value, J ⁄m, min
B = ASTM D256 (Test Method B, Charpy)
Three-digit number = value, J ⁄m, min
C = ASTM D256 (Test Method C)
Three-digit number = value, J ⁄m, min
D = ASTM D256 (Test Method D)
Three-digit number = value, J ⁄m, min
E = ASTM D256 (Test Method E)
Three-digit number = value, J ⁄m, min
F = ASTM D5628
1 = Configuration FA
2 = Configuration FB
3 = Configuration FC
4 = Configuration FD
5 = Configuration FE
Two-digit number × 10 = value, J, min
G = ASTM D5420
1 = ASTM D5420 Configuration GA
2 = ASTM D5420 Configuration GB
3 = ASTM D5420 Configuration GC
4 = ASTM D5420 Configuration GD
5 = ASTM D5420 Configuration GE
Two-digit number × 10 = value, J min
H = ISO 6603-1, specimen = 2-mm thickness
Three-digit number = value, J
J = low-temperature brittleness, ISO 974
Three-digit number = –°C, max
K = ASTM D4812
Three-digit number × factor 10 = value, J/m, min
000 = no break
L = Low temperature brittleness, ASTM D746 (Procedure A)
Three-digit number = –°C, max
M = ISO 180/1A (Izod), specimen = 80 × 10 × 4 mm
N = ISO 179/1A (Charpy), specimen = 80 × 10 × 4 mm
Three-digit number × factor 0.1 = value kJ/m2, min
S = ASTM D1822, Type S, 3 mm thick
T = ASTM D1822, Type L, 3 mm thick
Three-digit number = value, kJ ⁄m2, min
U = ASTM D3763, specimen =3.2 mm thickness
First digit = test velocity
0 = 2.2 m/s
1 = 3.4 m/s
2 = 6.6 m/s
9 = other
Second Digit = Positive or Negative Value of ASTM D3763 Brittleness Temperature
0 = + and greater than
1 = + and less than
2 = - and less than
Third Digit = Brittleness Temperature, °C
0=0
1 = 10
2 = 20
3 = 30
4 = 40
5 = 50
6 = 70
7 = 100
8 = 150

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
15
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
9 = unspecified
V = ASTM D3763, specimen = 3.2 mm thickness
First digit = test temperature, °C
0 = +23°C
1 = +10°C
2 = +0°C
3 = -10°C
4 = -15° C
5 = -20°C
6 = -30°C
7 = -40°C
8 = at ASTM D3763 Brittleness Temperature
9 = unspecified
Second digit = type of energy absorbed
0 = average total energy absorbed
1 = average energy absorbed at maximum load
Third digit = average energy absorbed, in J
0 = <5
1 = $5 and <10
2 = $10 and <20
3 = $20 and <30
4 = $30 and <40
5 = $40 and <50
6 = $50 and <70
7 = $70 and <100
8 = $100 and <150
9 = $150
When Suffix PV is to be reported, Suffix PU must also be reported in order that all test conditions are reported for the ASTM D3763 test.
Q Compressive strength
Second letter A = ASTM D695
B = ISO 604
Three-digit number = value, MPa, min
D = compression deflection, ASTM D575, Test Method A
First digit = % deflection
1=5%
2 = 10 %
3 = 15 %
4 = 20 %
5 = 25 %
6 = 30 %
7 = 40 %
8 = 50 %
Final two digits indicate minimum load in MPa
Example: QD445 specifies a minimum load of 45 MPa when deflected 20 %
S = compression set, ASTM D395, (Test Method B), run for 22 h.
First digit = test temperature
1 = 23± 2°C
2 = 70± 2°C
3 = 100± 2°C
4 = 125± 2°C
5 = 150± 2°C
Final two digits indicate maximum percent set.
R Volatile loss, gas and vapor permeability
Second letter A = ASTM D1203, Test Method A
B = ASTM D1203, Test Method B
C = ASTM D2288
D = ASTM D2584
Three-digit number × factor of 0.01 = value, percent, max
E = ASTM D3985
F = ASTM D1434 (Test Method M)
G = ASTM E96/E96M (Test Method E)
H = ASTM F372
First digit 1 = oxygen
2 = nitrogen
3 = carbon dioxide
4 = water vapor
5 = hydrogen
6 = methane
7 = Fuel C
8 = helium
9 = hydrogen sulfide

Second and third digit = value

00 = between user and producer
01 = 1.0 cm3·mil/m2·24 h·atm, max

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
16
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
02 = 10.0 cm3·mil/m2·24 h·atm, max
03 = 100.0 cm3·mil/m2·24 h·atm, max
04 = 1.0 g·mil ⁄m2·24 h, max
05 = 10.0 g·mil ⁄m2·24 h, max
06 = 100.0 g·mil ⁄m2·24 h, max
(04 to 06 are water vapor units)
These units are currently the industry standard. Conversions to other units may be made using appendixes in ASTM D1434.
S Oxidative stability, mold shrinkage, and shear modulus
Oxidative stability tests
Second letter A = ASTM D3012 at 150°C (ISO 4577)
Three-digit number = value days to failure, min
C = ASTM D3895
Three-digit number = value minutes to failure, min
E = environmental stress crack resistance, ASTM D1693
Three-digit number = f20 h, min
T = thermal stress crack resistance, ASTM D2951
Three-digit number = h (without cracking), min
Mold shrinkage tests
H = ASTM D955 Mold shrinkage
First digit 1 = Compression molded bar
2 = Compression molded disk
3 = Transfer molded bar
4 = Transfer molded disk
5 = Injection molded bar
6 = Injection molded disk
7 = Injection molded plaque, 60 × 60 × 2 mm (ISO 294-4)
Two-digit number × factor 0.001 = value, mm/mm ± 0.001
Shear modulus tests
M = ASTM D5279, +23°C, 1 Hz (ISO 6721-1 and ISO 6721-2)
Three-digit number × factor 100 = value, MPa, min
T Transmission-haze
Second letter A = ASTM D1003, specimen 6.4 mm thick
B = ASTM D1003, specimen 3.2 mm thick
C = ASTM D1003, specimen 1.6 mm thick
First digit 1 = total luminous transmittance, min
2 = diffuse luminous transmittance, min
3 = haze, %, max
Second and third digit = value
U Flexural modulus, stiffness
Second letter A = ASTM D790, specimen = 3.2 by 13 by 76 mm, speed = 1.3 mm ⁄min
B = ASTM D790, specimen = 6.4 by 13 by 127 mm, speed = 2.7 mm ⁄min
C = ASTM D790 (secant modulus), Test Method I, Procedure A, specimen = 3.2 by 13 mm (1 % strain) speed = 1.3 mm/min
Three-digit number × factor 100 = value, MPa, min
D = stiffness, ASTM D747
First digit 1 = −30°C
Second and third digits × 1000 = value, MPa, max
First digit 2 = 23°C
3 = 70°C
Second and third digits × 1000 = value, MPa, min
Second letter E = ASTM D790, specimen-3.2 by 13 by 76 mm, speed − 1.3 mm ⁄min
F = ASTM D790, specimen = 6.4 by 13 by 127 mm, speed = 2.7 mm ⁄min
G = ASTM D790 (secant modulus), Method I, Procedure A, specimen = 3.2 by 13 by 76 (1 % strain) speed = 1.3 mm/min
M = ISO 178, chord modulus, specimen 80 × 10 × 4 mm, speed 2 mm/min, 64 mm span
Three digit number × factor 100 = value, MPa, max
N = ISO 178, chord modulus, specimen 80 × 10 × 4 mm, speed = 2 mm/min, 64-mm span
Three digit number × factor 100 = value, MPa, min
V Viscosity—flow rate
Second Letter A = relative viscosity, ASTM D789
Three-digit number = value, min
Second letter B = ASTM D1238 (ISO 1133)
First digit 1 = Condition 125 ⁄0.325
2 = Condition 125 ⁄2.16
3 = Condition 150 ⁄2.16
4 = Condition 190 ⁄0.325
5 = Condition 190 ⁄2.16
6 = Condition 190 ⁄21.60
7 = Condition 200 ⁄5.0
8 = Condition 230 ⁄1.20
9 = Condition 230 ⁄3.80
0 = Condition 265 ⁄12.5
Second letter C = ASTM D1238 (ISO 1133)
First digit 1 = Condition 275 ⁄0.325
2 = Condition 230 ⁄2.16
3 = Condition 190 ⁄1.05
4 = Condition 190 ⁄10.00

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
17
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
5 = Condition 300 ⁄1.20
6 = Condition 190 ⁄5.0
7 = Condition 235 ⁄1.05
8 = Condition 235 ⁄2.16
9 = Condition 235 ⁄5.0
0 = Condition 250 ⁄2.16
Second letter D = ASTM D1238 (ISO 1133)
First digit 1 = Condition 310 ⁄12.5
2 = Condition 210 ⁄2.16
3 = Condition 285 ⁄2.16
4 = Condition 315 ⁄5.0
For second letters B, C, and D
Second and third digit = value
01 = 0.1 max
02 = >0.1 to 0.3
03 = >1 to 4
04 = >0.3 to 0.5
05 = >4 to 6
06 = >0.5 to 0.7
07 = >6 to 8
08 = >0.7 to 0.9
09 = >8 to 10
10 = >0.9 to 1.1
15 = >10 to 20
25 = >20 to 30
35 = >30 to 40
45 = >40 to 50
55 = >50 to 60
65 = >60 to 70
75 = >70 to 80
85 = >80 to 90
95 = >90 to 100
99 = >100
Second Letter E = flow temperature, ASTM D569
Three-digit number = minimum value °C
W Weather resistance
Second letter A = ASTM D1435 (ISO 4607)
First digit 1 = tensile strength change
2 = flexural strength change
3 = flexural modulus change
4 = weight change
5 = elongation change
6 = dimensional change
Second and third digit = value, percent, max
B = (enclosed carbon-arc type), ASTM D6360
000 = to be specified by user
C = Ozone resistance, ASTM D1149 (100-ppm ozone)
Three-digit number × factor of 10 = h for first crack, min
D = (fluorescent-UV-condensation type) ASTM D4329 (ISO 4892-3)
E = (xenon-arc type) ASTM D2565 (ISO 4892-2)
F = (fresnel concentrator type) ASTM D4364 (ISO 877)
G = (open-flame carbon-arc) ASTM D1499 (ISO 4892-4)
000 = to be specified by user
X Humidity aging and accelerated service
Second letter A = ASTM E104, Test Method A
B = ASTM E104, Test Method B
C = ASTM E104, Test Method C
First digit 1 = tensile strength change
2 = flexural strength change
3 = flexural modulus change
4 = weight change
5 = elongation change
6 = dimensional change
Second and third digit = value, %, max
Y Deflection temperature
Second letter A = ASTM D648, stress 1.82 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 3.2 mm
B = ASTM D648, stress 1.82 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 6.4 mm
C = ASTM D648, stress 1.82 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 13 mm
D = ASTM D648, stress 0.455 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 3.2 mm
E = ASTM D648, stress 0.455 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 6.4 mm
F = ASTM D648, stress 0.455 MPa, unannealed specimen, width, 13 mm
G = ISO 75-1 and ISO 75-2, stress 1.80 MPa, unannealed specimen, positioned edgewise
H = ISO 75-1 and ISO 75-2, stress 0.450 MPa, unannealed specimen, positioned edgewise
I = ISO 75-1 and ISO 75-2, stress 1.80 MPa, unannealed specimen, positioned flatwise
J = ISO 75-1 and ISO 75-2, stress 0.450 MPa, unannealed specimen, positioned flatwise

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
18
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
TABLE Continued
Symbol Characteristic
Three-digit number = value, °C, min
Z Other special requirement
Second letter from existing list of symbols where test or requirement is not available.
These characteristics will be spelled out in detail and identified in sequence that is, 01, 02, 03, etc.
Example ZW01
Type I, tensile bars (ASTM D638) when exposed 500 h to Type DH light source per ASTM G151 and G153 shall retain 50 % min of their
original tensile
strength.
Additional suffixes and requirements will be added to this classification system as test methods or requirements are developed or requested,
or both.
A
ISO documents listed in parentheses are similar to the ASTM documents and the same suffix may be applied.

SUFFIX TABLE 1 Property Change Table

Designation
Order Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number
1 Hardness change, Shore D points unspecified ±2 ±2 ±5 ±5 ±10 ±10 ±20 ±20 specify value
Tensile change, ASTM D412, % change, max unspecified ±5 ±10 ±10 ±20 ±20 ±40 ±40 ±60 specify value
2 Elongation change, ASTM D412, % change, max unspecified ±5 ±10 ±15 ±20 ±30 ±40 ±50 ±70 specify value
3 Volume change, ASTM D471, % change, max unspecified ±2 ±5 ±10 ±15 ±25 ±30 ±40 ±60 specify value
SUFFIX TABLE 2 Tensile, Elongation and Tear Properties
Designation
Order Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D412, MPa, min unspecified 2 4 6 10 15 20 25 35 specify value
2 Ultimate elongation, ASTM D412, %, min unspecified 100 150 200 250 300 400 500 600 specify value
3 Tear strength, ASTM D624, KN/m, min unspecified 5 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 specify value
Cell Table C Detail Requirements
Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 35 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 1 500 2 000 2 200 2 300 2 400 2 600 2 900 3 000 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 30 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.
Cell Table D Detail Requirements
Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 55 70 80 90 105 115 125 140 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 700 3 000 5 000 7 000 9 000 12 000 14 500 16 000 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 33 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 75 85 95 110 120 130 140 155 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
19
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16

Cell Table E Detail Requirements

Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 50 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 30 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 40 50 60 70 85 95 105 115 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.

Cell Table F Detail Requirements

Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 3 10 15 25 35 40 50 60 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 10 700 1 000 1 400 1 900 2 400 2 900 3 400 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 30 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 25 40 55 70 80 90 100 110 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.
Cell Table G Detail Requirements
Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 15 40 65 85 110 135 160 185 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 600 3 500 6 500 10 000 13 000 16 000 19 000 22 000 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 30 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 130 160 200 230 260 300 330 360 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.
Cell Table H Detail Requirements
Designation
Order Property Cell Limits
Number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile strength, ASTM D638, MPa, minA unspecified 15 55 95 135 175 215 255 290 specify value
2 Flexural modulus, ASTM D790, MPa, minA unspecified 200 4 500 9 000 13 000 17 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 specify value
3 Izod impact, ASTM D256, J/m, minB unspecified 15 30 50 135 270 425 670 950 specify value
4 Deflection temperature, ASTM D648, unspecified 35 100 160 230 290 350 420 480 specify value
(1820 kPa), °C, min
5 To be determined unspecified ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
J/m × 18.73 × 10−3 = ft·lbf ⁄in.

17. Keywords
17.1 classification; classification system; line call-out;
plastic; plastic materials

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
20
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CODING OF FORMER SECTION “FL” IN TABLE 3

X1.1 In previous editions of this standard, section FL used

a three-digit code to designate performance. This code is as
follows:

L= UL (IEC 60695-11-10)
First digit indicates minimum specimen thickness.
Molding Materials Thin Films
mm µm
0 to be specified to be specified
1 0.25 25.0
2 0.40 50.0
3 0.80 75.0
4 1.60 100.0
5 2.50 125.0
6 3.00 150.0
7 6.00 175.0
8 12.70 200.0
9 >12.70 >200.0
Second digit indicates type of flame test
1 = Vertical (V) [Now Section FF]
2 = Horizontal (H) [Now Section FA]
3 = 125 mm flame (5V) [Now Section FU, FV]
4 = Vertical thin materials (VTM) [Now Section FM]
Third digit indicates the flame rating
0 = (94V ⁄94VTM) 0 - refer to UL94
1 = (94V ⁄94VTM) 1 - refer to UL94
2 = (94V ⁄94VTM) 2 - refer to UL94
3 = (94HB) 1 - burn rate < 40 mm/min
4 = (94HB) 2 - burn rate < 75 mm/min
5 = (94-5V) A no holes on plaques
6 = (94-5V) B with holes on plaques
7 = (94 foam) 1 refer to UL94
8 = (94 foam) 2 refer to UL94
9 = (94 foam) H refer to UL94

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4000 - 13)
that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2016)

(1) Table 3, Suffix KP was added.

This section identifies the location of selected changes to this classification system. For the convenience of the
user, Committee D20 has highlighted those changes that may impact the use of this classification system. This
section may also include descriptions of the changes or reasons for the changes, or both.

D4000 – 13:
(1) Table 3, Suffixes FA, FJ, FU, FV: Burn rate was changed to
“maximum” burn rate.
(2) Table 3, Suffixes FA, FJ, FU, FV, FF, FM, FN: Wording of
next three significant digits were clarified to prevent confusion.
D4000 – 12:
(1) Rearranged table layout so that Tables 1, 2, and 2a all
appear in Section 5, which was extensively revised.
(2) Placed Table 3 (suffixes) and cell tables between Sections
16 and 17.
(3) Removed a number of references in 2.1 because they refer
to shapes or chemical resistance rather than thermoplastic
materials. The same references were also removed from Table
1. The standards referenced in Table 1 refer to material
standards only.
(4) Retained “withdrawn” material standards in Table 1 be-
cause decades pass before they are forgotten.
(5) Listed two revision years of D4066 because they are not
identical in call-out identifications.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
21
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4000 − 16
(6) Revised Section 5 to simplify the flow of material, arrang-
ing things in order from the simpler to the more complex line
call-outs.
(7) Added a diagram showing the structure of the line call-out
for an unfilled material in 5.1.1. An example of such a call-out
is found in Note 5.
(8) Subsection 5.2 introduces the call-out systems in use for
filled or reinforced plastics. Subsection 5.2.1 illustrates the
structure of the call-outs used, and subsection 5.2.2 shows
examples of line call-outs for three different, reinforced mate-
rials.
(9) Introduced the use of suffixes in Section 7, and the example
shown in 7.3 has been rewritten to clarify the intent.
(10) A number of minor editorial changes have been made.
D4000 – 11:
(1) Added examples to Note 4.
(2) In 5.1.1, added statements concerning usage of D4000 and
altered examples to illustrate correct usage.
(3) In Sections 6.1, 6.3, and 7.4, added statements concerning
correct usage of D4000.
(4) In Note 6, Note 9, Note 10, and in 7.3, corrected examples
to conform to statements in 5.1.1.
(5) Revised relative humidity tolerance requirements to con-
form with Condition A of the latest issue of Practice D618.
D4000 – 09b:
(1) Replaced reference to Guide D5033 with Guide D7209.
(2) Revised Note 10 to reflect the replacement of Guide D5033.
D4000 – 09a:
(1) Added D3763 under Section 2.
(2) In Table 3, Suffix Symbols under Symbol P added second
letter U = ASTM D3763 and definition of numbers.
(3) In Table 3, Suffix Symbols under Symbol P added second
letter V = ASTM D3763 and definition of numbers.
D4000 – 09:
(1) Revised suffix MF in Table 3.
D4000 – 08:
(1) Added polyphenylene (PPH) to Table 1.
D4000 – 07:
(1) Revised parts A, F, J, N, P, U, and V of Table 3’s Section F.
Thickness was rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm, and will be
reported to three significant digits in mm ×10.
(2) Revised parts C and D of Table 3’s Section F. The
temperature was reported in whole numbers to three significant
digits.
(3) Revised parts U and V of Table 3’s Section F. The time of
flaming and afterglow were reported in seconds.
(4) An appendix was added for historical reference to deleted
codes in Table 3.
D4000 – 04:
(1) Changed symbol FB from value % max to value % min in
Table 3.
D4000 – 03a:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
22
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
(1) Revised paragraph 15.4.
(2) Added Note 10.
D4000 – 03:
(1) Added ISO 1133 as an alternative test method to Test
Method D1238.
(2) Editorially added to Table 1: ASTM Test Method D6779 to
PA, and Test Method D6778 to POM.
D4000 – 01a:
(1) Table 2 replaced with new data.
(2) Table 2A added.
(3) Revised 5.3 to address option of using Table 2A for shape
or form.
(4) Added new Note 10 and renumbered subsequent notes.
(5) Deleted “GA140” from the example in 5.1.1.
(6) Changed reference from “Specification” to Classification”
in Note 9.
(7) Editorially changed 2.1 and Table 1 to include new stan-
dards.
(8) Editorially corrected Note 7.
D4000 – 01:
(1) Second letters J and K added for Symbol E in Table 3.
(2) Second letter G added for Symbol W in Table 3.
(3) Referenced Documents were updated to reflect the revi-
sions to Table 3.
D4000 – 00a:
(1) Referenced Documents were updated to reflect the revi-
sions to Table 3.
(2) Table 3, Symbol B: ES 27 was removed; incorporated in
Test Method D471.
(3) Table 3, Symbol C: Removed second letters A and E and
added second letters K and L for Test Method D1525, 50-N
load.
(4) Table 3, Symbol D: Removed.
(5) Table 3, Symbol E: Added expression of results for second
letter H.
(6) Table 3, Symbol F: Substituted IEC reference for Second
Letter A to replace withdrawn ISO standard. Deleted repetition
of the second letter L which referenced a deleted ASTM
standard, Test Method F814.
(7) Table 3, Symbol K: Changed second letter M from tensile
modulus to tensile stress.
(8) Table 3, Symbol M: Added ISO reference for second letter
F.
(9) Table 3, Symbol S: Deleted references to withdrawn
standards, ASTM Test Method D2445 and ISO 537. Added
ISO 6721-1 and -2 as references for second letter M. Deleted
second letter P as it was a repeat of second letter M.
(10) Table 3, Symbol U: Added second letter N to permit
expression of flexural modulus by ISO 178 as a minimum
value.
(11) Table 3, Symbol W: Added new ASTM standards for
evaluating weather resistance.
 D4000 − 16
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:16 EDT 2020
23
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4020 − 18

Standard Specification for

Ultra-High-Molecular-Weight Polyethylene Molding and
Extrusion Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4020; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* tion system based on various characteristics and a range of viscosity

1.1 This specification provides for the identification of
virgin, natural color, unmodified homopolymer ultra-high-
molecular-weight polyethylene (UHMWPE) plastics molding
and extrusion materials. This identification is made in such a
manner that the seller and purchaser can agree on the accept-
ability of different commercial lots or shipments.
1.2 This specification also provides guidance for the char-
acterization of UHMWPE materials based on various
mechanical, thermal, electrical, and other analyses.
1.3 It is not intended to differentiate between various
molecular weight grades of ultra-high-molecular-weight poly-
ethylene commercially available.
1.4 It is not the function of this specification to provide
specific engineering data for design purposes.
1.5 Ultra-high-molecular-weight polyethylenes, as defined
in this specification, are those linear polymers of ethylene
which have a relative viscosity of 1.44 or greater, in accor-
dance with the test procedures described herein.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.7 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portions in Section 7 and the Annex and
Appendixes, of this specification: This standard does not
purport to address all of the safety concerns, if any, associated
with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this standard
to establish appropriate safety, health, and environmental
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
NOTE 1—This standard and ISO 11542-1 address the same subject
matter, but differ in technical content. ISO 11542-1 provides a classifica-
numbers determined in accordance with ISO 1628-3.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1601 Test Method for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Ethyl-
ene Polymers
2.2 ISO Standards:3
ISO 11542-1 Plastics—Ultra High Molecular-Weight Poly-
ethylene (PE-UHMW) Moulding and Extrusion
Materials—Part 1: Designation System and Basis for
Specification
ISO 1628-3 Plastics—Determination of Viscosity Number
and Limiting Viscosity Number—Part 3: Polyethylenes
and Polypropylenes
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of terms used in this specifica-
tion are in accordance with Terminology D883.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 ultra-high-molecular-weight polyethylene molding
and extrusion materials—as defined by this specification, those
substantially linear polyethylenes which have a relative viscos-
ity of 1.44 or greater, at a concentration of 0.02 %, at 135°C, in
decahydronaphthalene.
3.2.1.1 Discussion—It has been common practice to refer to
the “molecular weight” of UHMWPE resins. The following
calculations shall be used to approximate the specific viscosity

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Materials. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1981. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D4020 - 11. DOI: Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
10.1520/D4020-18. 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
(ηsp), reduced viscosity (ηred or R.S.V.), intrinsic viscosity (η 5. Materials and Manufacture
or I.V.), and the approximate nominal viscosity average mo- 5.1 The molding and extrusion material shall be UHMWPE
lecular weight of virgin resin. The calculations are shown as polyethylene in the form of powder or granules.
follows:
5.2 The molding and extrusion materials shall be as uniform
S
Relative viscosity 5 η r 5 t s 2
k
tsDS
/ to 2
k
to D (1)
in composition and size and as free of contamination as can be
achieved by good manufacturing practice. If necessary, the
level of contamination shall be agreed upon between the seller
Specific viscosity 5 η sp 5 η r 2 1
and the purchaser.
η sp 5.3 Unless controlled by requirements specified elsewhere
Reduced viscosity 5 η red 5 in this specification, the color and translucence of molded or
C
extruded pieces, formed under conditions recommended by the
The intrinsic viscosity is calculated by determining the manufacturer of the material, will be comparable within
reduced viscosity and extrapolating to infinite dilution, that commercial match tolerances to the color and translucence of
is, 0 % concentration. standard molded or extruded samples of the same thickness
Intrinsic Viscosity5 f η g 5 s 2η sp 22hlnhη rel 1⁄2 d ÷C supplied in advance by the manufacturer of the material.
Nominal Viscosity Molecular Weight55.373104 f η g 1.37
5.4 Additional test methods and conditions that are com-
where: monly used to characterize UHMWPE are listed in Table X4.1.
k = kinetic energy correction constant for the particular 5.4.1 Refer to Annex A2 for requirements regarding speci-
viscometer used, men preparation, dimensions, and conditioning requirements
ts = flow time of solution at 135°C, s, for these tests.
to = flow time of pure solvent at 135°C, s, and
C = concentration, %. 6. Sampling
NOTE 2—There are other equations being used in industry to calculate 6.1 A batch or lot shall be considered as a unit of manufac-
the nominal viscosity average molecular weights. Refer to Appendix X2 ture and can consist of a blend of two or more production runs
for the other equations and their relationship to the nominal viscosity of the same material.
average molecular weight equation in 3.2.1.1. The equation in 3.2.1.1 is
the only equation that shall be used for reporting of nominal viscosity
6.2 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the seller and the
average molecular weight. purchaser, prior to packaging, the material shall be sampled
NOTE 3—Use of the solution viscosity test on thermally processed based on adequate statistical sampling.
material is invalid due to inadequate solubility and possible crosslinking
7. Test Method
4. Classification 7.1 Dilute Solution Viscosity—Use Test Method D1601, as
modified in Annex A1.
4.1 It is recognized that dilute solution viscosity measure-
ments can only be made on virgin resin. Therefore, the 8. Keywords
following test and limits shall be used to determine the 8.1 extrusion materials; molding materials; plastics; poly-
properties of virgin polymer only. ethylene; ultra-high-molecular-weight; UHMWPE; viscosity

ANNEXES

(Mandatory Information)

A1. DILUTE SOLUTION VISCOSITY

A1.1 General Description

A1.1.1 The test sequence consists of dissolving UHMWPE A1.2.4 Erlenmeyer Flask, 250-mL, with glass stopper.
in decahydronaphthalene (0.02 g/100 mL) at 150°C and then A1.2.5 Vacuum Drying Oven.
measuring the relative viscosity at 135°C in an Ubbelohde No.
1 viscometer. It is possible to calculate the relative solution A1.2.6 Vacuum Aspirator.
viscosity from these experimental data. A1.2.7 Viscometer, Ubbelohde No. 1.
A1.2.8 Constant-Temperature Bath, 135 6 0.1°C, with a
A1.2. Apparatus 305-mm diameter by 460 mm (12 by 18-in.) tall glass jar as a
A1.2.1 Analytical Balance. container, and having a suitable support for the viscometer.
A1.2.2 Microscope Slide Cover Slip. A1.2.9 Buret, 100-mL capacity, 0.1-mL subdivisions.
A1.2.3 Hot Plate, with magnetic stirrer. A1.2.10 Stopwatch, 0.2-s reading.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
A1.2.11 Still, for decahydronaphthalene.
A1.2.12 Glass Funnel, with heating mantle.
A1.3. Reagents
A1.3.1 Decahydronaphthalene (Decalin), freshly distilled.
A1.3.2 Tetrakis [methylene 3-(3',5'-di-tert-butyl-4'-
hydroxyphenyl) propionate] methane (CAS No. 668-19-8).
NOTE A1.1—This may also be referred to as Tetrakis-(methylene-(3,5-
di-(tert)-butyl-4-hydrocinnamate))methane
A1.4. Procedure
A1.4.1 Stabilized Decahydronaphthalene Preparation—
Distill in accordance with Test Method D1601 and add 0.2 %
tetrakis [methylene 3-(3',5'-di-tert-butyl-4'-hydroxyphenyl)
propionate] methane.
A1.4.2 Cleaning the Viscometer—Empty the viscometer
thoroughly by vacuum and completely refill the viscometer
with distilled, filtered, non-stabilized decahydronaphthalene.
Place the viscometer into the 135°C hot oil constant tempera-
ture bath for at least 15-20 min. Completely drain the viscom-
eter and dry with dry air or nitrogen just prior to the next
measurement in order to prevent dilution and an erroneous
measurement result.
A1.4.3 Solution Preparation—Dry the UHMWPE in a
vacuum oven for 2 h at 60°C. Weigh 14 to 17 mg of the dry
UHMWPE onto a slide cover slip. Use the buret to transfer the
stabilized decahydronaphthalene at room temperature into the
Erlenmeyer flask, measuring, in milliliters, a volume equal to
4.5 times the UHMWPE weight in milligrams, for example, 15
mg of UHMWPE and 67.5 mL of decahydronaphthalene. Heat
the decahydronaphthalene, with stirring, to 150°C, and drop in
the UHMWPE and its slide cover slip. Continue stirring at
150°C for 1 h, with the flask lightly stoppered.
A1.4.4 Viscosity Measurement:
A1.4.4.1 Place the clean viscometer into the constant-
temperature bath, fill with stabilized decahydronaphthalene,
and allow the viscometer and solvent to come to thermal
equilibrium at 135 6 0.1°C. Determine the viscosity of the
solvent. Clean the viscometer as directed in A1.4.2. It is
essential that the whole viscometer be dry.
A1.4.4.2 Meanwhile, place the flask of polymer solution
into the 135°C bath and allow it to equilibrate. Transfer
sufficient solution to fill the viscometer to the mark (see Note
A1.2) and determine the viscosity of the solution.
A1.4.4.3 Between uses, clean the viscometer as described in
A1.4.2. Prolonged waits between uses (overnight, etc.) will
require the use of the H2SO4 – K2Cr2O7 cleaning solution.
NOTE A1.2—Filling of the viscometer is made easier by the use of a
glass funnel warmed with a heating mantle. This helps to prevent the
UHMWPE from precipitating.
A1.5. Calculation
A1.5.1 Calculate the relative solution viscosity as follows:
η r 5 ~ t s 2 k/t s ! / ~ t o 2 k/t o ! (A1.1)
where:
k = kinetic energy correction constant for the particular
viscometer used,
ts = flow time of solution at 135°C, and
to = flow time of pure solvent at 135°C.

A2. TEST SPECIMEN PREPARATION, DIMENSIONS, AND CONDITIONING REQUIREMENTS

A2.1 Test Specimens A2.2.1 Specimen dimensions shall conform to the require-
A2.1.1 Test specimen sheets shall be prepared from powder ments of the individual tests.
or granules and molded in accordance with the following A2.3 Conditioning
conditions.
Molding pressure 6.9 to 10.3 MPa A2.3.1 Condition the notched specimens at 23 6 2°C for
Platen temperature 196 to 210°C not less than 16 h prior to test.
Heating time 20 min at 196 to 210°C
Platen cooling rate 15 ± 2°C/min from 150 to 90°C
Below 90°C Maintain pressure and cool as quickly
A2.4 Test Conditions
as possible to <30°C
Platen temperature for demolding <30°C A2.4.1 Conduct the test in the standard laboratory atmo-
sphere of 23 6 2°C.
A2.2 Specimen Dimensions

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
A3. IMPACT TEST METHOD FOR ULTRA-HIGH-MOLECULAR-WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE
A3.1 Scope
A3.1.1 This test method covers determination of the impact
strength of UHMWPE, which is extremely impact resistant.
When tested in accordance with Test Method D256, Method A,
UHMWPE generally gives the NBF type of failure, rendering
the test result invalid. This test method specifies the same type
of pendulum impact test machine as that given in Test Method
D256 but introduces a much higher degree of stress concen-
tration into the specimen by double notching with a razor
blade. Application of this test method shall be limited to the
characterization of virgin, unmodified UHMWPE resins, not
commercially processed products. It is advised that the user be
familiar with Test Method D256 before attempting to use this
test method.
A3.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
NOTE A3.1—This test method and Annex B of ISO 11542-2 address the
same subject matter, but differ in technical content and results shall not be
compared between the two test methods.
A3.2. Referenced Documents
A3.2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
A3.2.2 ISO Standards:3
ISO 180 Determination of Izod Impact Strength of Rigid
Materials
ISO 11542-2 Plastics—Ultra-High Molecular Weight Poly-
ethylene (PE-UHMW) Moulding and Extrusion
Materials—Part 2: Preparation of Test Specimens and
Determination of Properties
A3.3. Apparatus
A3.3.1 The Izod-type impact machine that conforms to the
requirements of Test Method D256, including the calibration
and checking methods, shall be used.
A3.4. Test Specimen
A3.4.1 The geometry and dimensions of the specimen are
given in Fig. A3.1.
A3.4.2 The specimens shall be cut from a sheet compression
molded in accordance with the conditions described in A2.1.
A3.4.3 The width of the specimen shall be the thickness of
the sheet if the sheet thickness is within 6.00 to 6.75 mm. Sheet
material thicker than 6.75 mm shall be machined down to 6.35
6 0.25 mm. Sheet material thicker than 7.65 mm shall not be
used.
A3.4.4 Each specimen shall be free of twist and shall be
bounded by mutually perpendicular pairs of plane parallel
surfaces, free from scratches, pits, and sink marks.
A3.5 Notching of Specimens
A3.5.1 In the case of compression molding, the two notches
(or width of two notches) shall be perpendicular to the
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
mm in.
A 6.35 ± 0.38 A 0.250 ± 0.015
B 12.70 ± 0.10 B 0.500 ± 0.004
C 31.75 ± 0.25 C 1.250 ± 0.010
D 63.50 ± 0.38 D 2.500 ± 0.015
E 4.57 ± 0.08 E 0.180 ± 0.003
F 0.00 ± 0.13 F 0.000 ± 0.005
θ 90° ± 2° θ 90° ± 2°
FIG. A3.1 Dimensions of Double-Notched Izod Test Specimens
direction of application of molding pressure: if applicable. The
impact resistance of a plastic material may be different if the
notch is perpendicular to, rather than parallel to, the direction
of molding. The same is true for specimens cut with or across
the grain of an anisotropic sheet or plate.
A3.5.2 Notching shall be performed in a suitable machine
by pressing in a 0.23 6 0.03-mm thick single-edge razor blade
with a 14 6 2° included angle at the cutting edge. The notching
speed shall be less than 500 mm/min. A new blade shall be
used after notching 40 specimens.
A3.5.3 The calibration of the notching machine shall be
checked by direct measurement of the notch depth,
perpendicularity, and offset of the two notches. One of the
possible measurement methods is given in Annex A4.
A3.6. Conditioning
A3.6.1 Conditioning—Condition the notched specimens at
23 6 2°C for not less than 16 h prior to test.
A3.6.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard
laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C.
A3.7. Procedure
A3.7.1 At least five and preferably ten individual determi-
nations of impact value must be made on each sample to be
tested under the conditions prescribed in A3.6.
A3.7.2 Measure the width of each specimen in the region of
the notches twice with a micrometer to the nearest 0.025 mm,
and record its average width. Use an optical microscope to
measure the distances between the notch roots on the two side
surfaces of the specimen. Record the average value and
multiply this number by the width of the specimen to obtain the
remaining unnotched cross-section area, AR. Also record the
identifying markings of the specimen.
A3.7.3 Estimate the breaking energy for the specimen and
select a pendulum of suitable energy. Start the test with a
 D4020 − 18
pendulum of 11 J if no prior test data are available. Use the
lightest standard pendulum that is expected to break each
specimen in the group with a loss of not more than 85 % of its
energy.
A3.7.4 Before testing the specimens, perform the following
operations on the machine:
A3.7.4.1 With the excess energy indicating pointer in its
normal starting position, but without a specimen in the vise,
release the pendulum from its normal starting position and note
the position that the pointer attains after the swing as one
reading of Factor A.
A3.7.4.2 Without resetting the pointer, raise the pendulum
and release again, which will move the pointer up the scale an
additional amount. Repeat this step if the pointer does not
move. Repeat this procedure until a swing causes no additional
movement of the pointer, and note the final reading as one
reading of Factor B.
A3.7.4.3 Repeat the above two operations several times,
and calculate and record the average A and B readings.
A3.7.5 Position the specimen precisely and rigidly but not
clamped too tightly in the vise. The relationship of the vise,
specimen, and striking edge of the pendulum to one another is
given in Fig. A3.2. Note that the top plane of the vise shall be
0.13 6 0.13 mm below the notches.
A3.7.6 Release the pendulum and note and record the
excess energy remaining in the pendulum after breaking the
specimen.
A3.7.7 From the breaking strength of the specimen and
Factors A and B, determine the energy loss of the pendulum
due to windage and friction using the correction charts from the
commercial testing machine supplier. If these charts are not
available, use the method given in Appendix X2 or X3 of Test
Method D256. Subtract the correction so calculated from the
indicated breaking strength of the specimen. If a pendulum of
improper energy was used, discard the result and make
additional tests on new specimens with the proper pendulum. If
the proper pendulum was used, divide the net value so found
by the unnotched area AR of the specimen as measured in
A3.7.2 to obtain its impact strength in kilojoules per square
meter.
A3.7.8 Record the type of failure for each specimen as one
of the two coded categories defined as follows:
(1) C, Complete Break—A break in which the specimen
separates into two pieces.
(2) NB, Non-Break—A break in which the specimen does
not separate into two pieces.
A3.7.9 Calculate the average impact strength and standard
deviation of the group of specimens that results in complete
breakage. This test method requires that the specimen breaks
completely. The results obtained from unbroken specimens
shall be considered a departure from standard and shall not be
reported as a standard result.
A3.8. Report
A3.8.1 Report the following information:
A3.8.2 Complete identification of the material tested, in-
cluding type, source, manufacturer’s lot number, and previous
history;
A3.8.3 Compression molding conditions;
A3.8.4 Capacity of the pendulum, J;
A3.8.5 Total number of specimens tested;
A3.8.6 Number of those specimens that result in complete
break;
A3.8.7 Average impact strength, kJ/m2;
A3.8.8 Standard deviation; and
A3.8.9 Percent of specimens failing in each category, suf-
fixed by the corresponding letter code from A3.7.8.

A3.9. Precision and Bias

A3.9.1 Table A3.1 is based on a round robin conducted by
seven laboratories. For each material, all of the test specimens
were compression molded and machined at one source. Each
participating laboratory notched and tested five specimens of
each material.

TABLE A3.1 Precision of the Double-Notched Izod Impact Test

Method
Intrinsic Values, kJ/m2
Material Viscosity,
dl/g Mean SrA SRB IrC IRD
A 24 128.0 6.5 27.6 18.4 78.2
B 27 120.0 5.4 25.8 15.2 73.1
C 22 103.9 4.1 21.2 11.6 59.9
D 28 56.1 2.2 9.6 6.2 27.2
E 25 63.5 2.7 12.6 7.7 35.5
A
Sr = within-laboratory standard deviation of the average.
B
SR = between-laboratories standard deviation of the average.
C
Ir = 2.83 Sr.
FIG. A3.2 Relationship of Vise, Specimen, and Strike Edge to One D
IR = 2.83 SR.
Another

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
A3.9.1.1 Repeatability, Ir(Comparing two test results for the A3.9.1.2 Reproducibility, IR(Comparing two test results for
same material, obtained by the same operator using the same the same material, obtained by different operators using differ-
equipment on the same day)—The two test results are judged ent equipment on different days)—The two test results are
not equivalent if they differ by more than the Ir value for that judged not equivalent if they differ by more than the IR value
material. for that material.

A4. MEASUREMENT METHOD OF IMPERFECTIONS IN SPECIMEN NOTCHING

A4.1 The following is one of the possible test methods for
measuring the imperfections in specimen notching directly,
which can be classified into three kinds: (1) deviation from
perpendicularity, (2) incorrect notch-depth, and (3) offset of
notches (Fig. A4.1).
NOTE A4.1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this method.
A4.2 Apparatus
A4.2.1 Reflective Optical Microscope, ocular, 40 to 60×,
with an X-Y stage accurate to 0.0025 mm.
A4.2.2 Eyepiece, with a crosshair.
A4.2.3 Fiber Optic Illumination.
A4.3 Procedure
A4.3.1 Lay the specimen on one of its sides and mount it
securely on the X-Y stage.
A4.3.2 The beginning and ending points of the notches are
labeled from A to D in Fig. A4.1. Select one of the edges of the
specimen as the datum line from which the perpendicularity of
the notches to the edges is measured (in this case Line AE ¯ ).
Note that Point E is approximately 6.4 mm from Point A.
A4.3.3 Keep both the microscope and the base of the X-Y
stage stationary. Measure the coordinates of Points A to E with
respect to an arbitrarily selected coordinate system by moving
the X-Y stage and by targeting the points by the crosshair of the
eyepiece.
A4.4 Calculation
A4.4.1 The following equation is used to calculate the
perpendicularity of the notches:
m2 2 m1
/EAB 5 tan21 (A4.1)
11m 2 m 1

where:
¯ and AB
m1 andm2 = slopes of line AE ¯ with respect to the
coordinate system.
m1 and m2 are calculated from
y2 2 y1
m5 (A4.2)
x2 2 x1

where:
m = slope, and
(x1, y1) and (x2, y2) = coordinates of the end points of the
line.
The distance between two points, I, is obtained from the
following equation:
I 5 =~ x 2 2 x 1 ! 2 1 ~ y 2 2 y 1 ! 2 (A4.3)

The amount of offset of the notches is calculated from the

following equation:
FIG. A4.1 Notch Geometry of Double-Notched Izod Specimen ?
offset 5 AD? cos /DAE (A4.4)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. ELONGATIONAL STRESS TEST METHOD FOR ULTRA-HIGH MOLECULAR-WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE
X1.1 Scope
X1.1.1 This test method covers the determination of elon-
gational stress as a characterization of the melt viscosity of
UHMWPE. The melt flow rate in accordance with test method
D1238 cannot be determined for this material because ultra
high molecular weight polyethylene does not have a melt flow.
The elongational stress is also be referred to as ZST and flow
value, or both.
X1.1.2 Application of this test method shall be limited to
virgin, unmodified resin. The elongational stress method is
invalid on a previous thermally-processed material due to
possible crosslinking.
NOTE X1.1—This test method is identical to to Annex A of ISO 11542-2
in the measurement of elongational stress. It is not equivalent to
ISO 11542-2 in any other measurement or section
X1.2. Referenced Documents
2
X1.2.1 ASTM Standards:
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
X1.2.2 ISO Standards:
ISO 11542–2 Plastics – Ultra-high-molecular-weight poly-
ethylene (PE-UHMW) Moulding and Extrusion – Part 2:
Preparation of test specimens and determination of prop-
erties
X1.3. Terminology
X1.3.1 elongational stress—(in MPa) the tensile stress
(force related to the initial cross-sectional area) required to
elongate a test specimen 600 % in a hot oil bath at 150°C in a
10–min time period.
X1.3.2 tensile stress—(in MPa) the attached weight cor-
rected for the buoyancy effect divided by the measured initial
cross-sectional area.
X1.4. Apparatus
X1.4.1 Specimen die cutter
X1.4.2 Specimen holder in accordance with Fig. X1.1
X1.4.3 Constant temperature bath with thermoregulator
and circulating pump
FIG. X1.1 Test Specimen
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
X1.4.4 Graduated weight set with hooks for suspension
from the specimen holder. Recommended weights are approxi-
mately 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 250, 200,
180, 150, 120, and 100 g.
X1.4.5 Measuring instrument capable of measuring to 0.02
mm
X1.4.6 Stopwatch
X1.4.7 Hot bath liquid (for example, silicone oil)
X1.4.8 Compression molding press with controlled rate of
cooling of 15 6 2°C/min
X1.4.9 Positive compression mold with a minimum of 4
grooves for venting and minimization of residual stress and
warpage. Capable of molding plaque or disk 1.4 mm in
thickness.
X1.4.10 Aluminum foil
X1.4.11 Analytical balance, accurate to 60.1 g
X1.4.12 Blender, high intensity
X1.5. Reagents
X1.5.1 The addition of a mixture of a primary and second-
ary antioxidant to reduce the amount of crosslinking taking
place in the specimens. The type and amount of antioxidant
used will depend on the lab and the R2 value observed when
results are calculated.
NOTE X1.2—A blend of Tris(2,4-di-(tert)butylphenyl)phosphite (CAS
No. 31570-0404) and Tetrakis [methylene 3-(3’,5’-di-tert-butyl-4’-
hydroxyphenyl) propionate] methane (CAS No. 6683-19-8) at a 2:1 or 1:1
ratio has been found to work well when added at between 0.4 and 0.75 %
by weight.
X1.6. Procedure
X1.6.1 Test Plaque Preparation:
X1.6.1.1 Using the analytical balance weigh out the amount
of UHMWPE virgin material that will be needed to mold the
number of plaques or disks required for the study. Based on the
amount of UHMWPE weighed, weigh the amount of antioxi-
dant necessary to achieve a concentration capable of reducing
crosslinking. With the high intensity blender, mix the antioxi-
dant homogeneously into the UHMWPE.
 D4020 − 18
X1.6.1.2 Place the bottom half of the positive mold on a flat
surface. Cover the bottom half with a piece of aluminum foil.
Weigh out the amount of the UHMWPE/antioxidant mix
necessary to fill the mold, make a full part, and minimize flash
and warpage. When this weight is established, this weight
60.1 g shall be used consistently to ensure uniform moldings.
Pour the weighed polymer into the mold cavity and spread it
out into a smooth level surface. Cover with a second piece of
aluminum foil, then the upper portion of the positive compres-
sion mold.
X1.6.1.3 A completely fused test plaque is prepared by
compression molding. The following molding conditions are
proposed as guidelines: 1) 200°C under 12.7 MPa pressure for
20 min, 2) cool under pressure at a cooling rate of 15 6
2°C/min and 3) when the plaque or disk has cooled to below
40°C, remove it from the mold.
X1.6.2 Test Specimens—Six specimens in accordance with
Fig. X1.2 shall be die cut out of one test plaque. Each specimen
is tested using a different weight as described in X1.6.4.4.
X1.6.3 Measurement of Cross-sections—The width and
thickness at the narrow parallel-sided section of each of the six
specimens shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.02
mm.
X1.6.4 Elongational Stress Determination
X1.6.4.1 Stabilize the bath at 150 6 2°C.
FIG. X1.2 Specimen Holder
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
X1.6.4.2 Insert test specimen in the holder, hook the corre-
sponding weight to the holder and suspend in bath. The mass
of the holder and weights shall be known to an accuracy of 0.1
g.
X1.6.4.3 After preheating five min, elongate specimen and
record specimen elongation time. The elongation of test
specimens does not take place at constant speed.
X1.6.4.4 Repeat for the remaining specimens. The choice of
the six different weights used to load test specimens from the
weights listed in X1.4.4 depends upon the molecular weight of
the UHMWPE sample. The weights shall be selected so that a
time of 1 to 20 min gives 600 % elongation in the narrow
parallel-sided section of the test specimen.
X1.7. Calculation
X1.7.1 The tensile stress in MPa on each individual speci-
men is calculated in accordance with the following equation:
T S 5 $ @ ~ M 1 1M 2 ! 3 0.00981# /A 1 3 B 1 % 3 @ 1 2 ~ ρ m /ρ w ! # (X1.1)
TS = Tensile stress in MPa
M1 = Mass of selected weight
M2 = Mass of specimen holder
A1 = Initial thickness of test specimen (mm)
B1 = Initial width of test specimen (mm)
ρm = Density of the heat bath medium at 150°C
ρw = Density of the metal at 150°C
 D4020 − 18
Use log/log scale to plot tensile stress for the six specimens X1.8. Precision
against corresponding times for the 600 % elongation recorded
X1.8.1 The repeatability standard deviation has been deter-
in X1.6.4.4. Draw a best fit line through the six points and from
this graph, read off the tensile stress corresponding to a period mined to be 0.009 MPa for a material having an average
of 10 min. This value represents the elongational stress in MPa. elongational stress value of 0.516 MPa. This is based on a
single laboratory making 45 measurements over a period of
NOTE X1.3—An undue amount of scatter (R2 ≤ 0.95) or zero elongation time on one material. The reproducibility of this test method is
indicates that crosslinking has occurred in the test specimens. If this
occurs, repeat the test using specimens prepared using an increased not yet available.
amount of stabilizer. Increase the stabilizer level at least 50 % from what
was previously used.

X2. NOMINAL VISCOSITY AVERAGE MOLECULAR WEIGHT OF ULTRA-HIGH MOLECULAR-WEIGHT POLYETHYLENE

X2.1 Scope necessarily apply for another manufacturing process. As a

X2.1.1 The measurement of molecular weight of UHM-
WPE is nearly impossible to measure by techniques normally
used to measure molecular weight of other polymers. Tech-
niques such as gel permeation chromatography (GPC) and light
scattering used for other polymers are not useful for UHM-
WPE.
X2.1.2 The dilute viscosity test method can provide satis-
factory correlations for viscosity average molecular weight
within a specific manufacturing process, but this does not
result, at least five equations have been developed to describe
the molecular weight of UHMWPE.
X2.1.3 Fig. X2.1 shows the relationship between the five
equations with respect to nominal viscosity average molecular
weight versus intrinsic viscosity.
X2.1.4 This appendix is being provided only as a reference.
Only Eq 1 listed in 3.2.1.1 of this specification shall be used to
present data to the industry.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18

FIG. X2.1 Known Molecular Weight Equations (Correlating with Intrinsic Viscosity)

X3. ABRASION INDEX OF UHMWPE USING AN ALUMINUM OXIDE SLURRY

X3.1 Scope X3.4.1.1 Motor—capable of maintaining a uniform rota-

X3.1.1 This method is used to determine the resistance of
materials to abrasion, measured in terms of percent weight loss,
by rotating test specimens in a slurry consisting of 20 grit
aluminum oxide and water.
X3.1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
NOTE X3.1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this method.
X3.2. Referenced Documents
X3.2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1921 Test Methods for Particle Size (Sieve Analysis) of
Plastic Materials
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
X3.3 Terminology
X3.3.1 Definitions—For definitions related to plastics, see
Terminology D883.
X3.4. Apparatus
X3.4.1 Abrasion tester, consisting of:
tional speed of 1750 rpm.
X3.4.1.2 Stainless steel testing cups—140 mm (5.5 in.) deep
and 102 mm (4 in.) inside diameter, for holding specimens and
aluminum oxide slurry.
X3.4.1.3 Stainless steel (SS) shafts—9 mm outside diameter.
X3.4.1.4 Metal cup supports—with dimensions of 3.2 mm
by 51 mm by 152 mm (1⁄8 in. by 2 in. by 6 in.)
X3.4.1.5 Thermocouple—positioned in the testing cup to
monitor slurry temperature.
X3.4.1.6 Gaskets—fitted into groove at the top of each
testing cup to prevent leaking of slurry during motor rotation.
X3.4.1.7 Water bath—plastic glass container having dimen-
sions of 55 by 53 by 20 cm. Contains the water to cool the
testing cups during operation.
X3.4.1.8 Hydraulic jack—for raising the water bath up
under the testing cups.
X3.4.1.9 Control panel—consisting of a timing device for
automatic test termination after 2 h and other controls.
X3.4.1.10 Water chiller—to maintain the water bath at 23 6
2°C.
X3.4.1.11 Thermocouple—to verify the temperature of the
water bath.
X3.4.2 Analytical balance—for weighing test specimens,
accurate to 0.0001 g.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
X3.4.3 Pan balance—with approximately a 1000 g capacity
for preparation of slurry.
X3.4.4 Vented rack—for air-drying specimens, to allow for
free circulation of air.

X3.5. Reagents
X3.5.1 Aluminum Oxide (Al2O3)—20 grit
NOTE X3.2—Perform incoming inspection on every lot of aluminum
oxide received by pulling an approximate 50-g sample from every fifth
bag or box of the lot. Perform a particle size analysis in accordance with
Test Methods D1921 using the following sieve sizes: 12, 16, 18, 20, 25,
and pan. The specification for the aluminum oxide shall be as specified in
Table X3.1.

X3.6. Test Specimen

X3.6.1 Test specimen sheets prepared from powder or
granules shall be 6.4 6 0.64 mm (0.25 6 0.025 in.) thick and Nominal Specimen dimensions
molded in accordance with Procedure C of Annex A1 of mm in.
length 69.85 2.75
Practice D4703. width 25.4 1.0
X3.6.2 Test specimens (Fig. X3.1) are machined from the thickness 6.35 0.25
large hole diameter 8.0 0.32
sheets. Dimensions of the test specimens shall be 69.85 6 0.64 small hole diameter 3.5 0.14
mm by 25.4 6 0.64 mm by 6.35 6 0.64 mm (2.75 6 0.025 in.
by 1.00 6 0.025 in. by 0.25 6 0.025 in.). Each specimen has FIG. X3.1 Abrasion Test Specimen Dimensions
a large and a small hole; 8.7 mm (11⁄32 in.) diameter and 3.6 mm
(9⁄64 in.) diameter drill bits, respectively. X3.8.5 Push the testing cup upwards, rotating slightly so the
specimen is fully immersed in the aluminum oxide/water
X3.7. Conditioning mixture.
X3.7.1 Conditioning—Condition the notched specimens at X3.8.6 Move the metal cup support under the cup. Push the
23 6 2°C for not less than 40 h prior to test. support tightly against the cup. Tighten the wing nuts evenly. If
X3.7.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test in the standard not even, it is possible that the cup will rotate or tilt, leading to
laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C. splattering of the aluminum oxide and result in greater speci-
men wear.
X3.8. Test Procedure
X3.8.7 Set the time to 120 min.
X3.8.1 Weigh each specimen to the nearest 0.0001 g and
record this weight at W1. A minimum of two specimens per X3.8.8 Raise the hydraulic jack so approximately the bot-
sample shall be tested. tom one-third of each testing cup is immersed in the water
bath. Turn on the water chiller.
X3.8.2 Using the pan balance and tared plastic cups, weigh
out in separate cups, 450 g of aluminum oxide and 300 g of X3.8.9 Turn on the main power and push the start button to
water. Pour the contents of each cup into the stainless steel begin the test.
testing cup. Repeat procedure for each of the stainless steel X3.8.10 When the test unit has shut off at the end of 2 h,
testing cups on the unit until all cups contain the aluminum turn off the main power and the water chiller. Lower the water
oxide/water mixture. bath so the testing cups are no longer immersed. Unscrew the
X3.8.3 Attach the specimens to the stainless steel shafts of wing nuts from each testing cup and remove the metal cup
the abrasion. Bolt the specimens to the shaft. Do not over- support. Remove each specimen from the shaft.
tighten the bolts as this will stress the specimen. X3.8.11 Using your fingernail, carefully remove any melted
X3.8.4 Inspect the gasket in each testing cup to insure it is material that remains attached to the specimen.
clean and properly positioned in the groove. X3.8.12 Clean the specimens with water and a brush, and
allow them to air-dry for a minimum of 2 h on the vented rack.
Insure that no water droplets are inside either of the two holes.
TABLE X3.1 Specification for Aluminum Oxide
USA Standard Tyler Equivalent Sieve Opening Specification Percent
X3.8.13 Reweigh the specimens and record this weight as
Sieve Number (mm) Number (µm) Retained W2.
1.70 12 1700 0
1.18 16 1180 20 max X3.9. Calculation
1.00 18 1000 45 min
Contents of 18 + 20 mesh screens—contents of 16 mesh 70 min X3.9.1 Calculate the percent of weight loss using the
screen following equation:
PAN PAN = 3 max
% weight loss 5 @ ~ W1 2 W2 ! /W1 # 3 100 (X3.1)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
where: TABLE X3.2 Precision Data, Abrasion Index
W1 = original weight of test specimen Values expressed in Units of %
Material Average SrA SRB,C rD RE,C
W2 = weight of test specimen after test M-19 IV 2.68 0.12 0.25 0.32 0.69
M-28 IV 2.47 0.16 0.20 0.45 0.55
X3.10. Report T-20 IV 2.43 0.16 0.21 0.46 0.59
T-28 IV 2.25 0.10 0.25 0.27 0.71
X3.10.1 Report the following information: A
Sr = Within laboratory standard deviation for the indicated material. It is obtained
X3.10.1.1 Complete identification and description of the by pooling the within-laboratory standard deviation of the test results from all of the
material tested, including source and manufacturer’s code, participating laboratories:
X3.10.1.2 Method of sample preparation, Sr = [[(S1)2 + (S2)2 .... + (Sn)2 ] /n]1/2
B
SR = between-laboratories reproducibility, expressed as standard deviation:
X3.10.1.3 Conditioning of specimens prior to testing, SR = [Sr2 + Sl2]1/2
X3.10.1.4 Length of abrasion time, if other than 120 min, Where
X3.10.1.5 Specimen number, initial weight of specimen Sl = standard deviations of laboratory means.
C
The calculated SR and R values in the table are based on data from three
(W1), final weight of specimen after abrasion (W2), and laboratories, which is insufficient to provide complete statistical data. However, SR
X3.10.1.6 Percent abrasion for each specimen and average and R are provided for information only and should not be used in the normal
percent abrasion for the sample. Report three significant manner.
D
r = within-laboratory critical interval between two test results = 2.8 × Sr
figures. E
R = between-laboratories critical interval between two test results = 2.8 × SR

X3.11. Precision and Bias

X3.11.1 Table X3.2 is based on a round robin4 conducted in
1999 in accordance with Practice E691, involving four mate-
rials tested by three laboratories. For each material, all samples
were prepared at one source, but the individual specimens were
prepared at the laboratories which tested them. Each test result
was the result of six individual determinations. Each laboratory
obtained 12 test results for each material. (Warning—The
explanations of “r” and “R” (X3.11.2 – X3.11.2.3) are only
intended to present a meaningful way of considering the
approximate precision of this test method. The data in Table
X3.2 are not to be applied to acceptance or rejection, as these
data apply only to the materials tested in the round robin and
are unlikely to be rigorously representative of other lots,
formulations, conditions, materials, or laboratories. The prin-
ciples outlined in Practice E691 are to be used to generate data
specific to other materials and laboratories (or between specific
laboratories). The principles of X3.11.2 – X3.11.2.3 would
then be valid for this data.)
4
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
1212.
X3.11.2 Concept of “r” and “R” in Table X3.2—If Sr and
SR have been calculated from a large enough body of data, and
for test results that were averages from testing 6 specimens for
each test result, then:
X3.11.2.1 Repeatability—Two results obtained within one
laboratory shall be judged not equivalent if they differ by more
than the “r” value for the material (“r” is the interval repre-
senting the critical difference between two test results for the
same material, obtained by the same operator using the same
equipment on the same day in the same laboratory).
X3.11.2.2 Reproducibility—Two test results obtained by
different laboratories shall be judged not equivalent if they
differ by more than the “R” value for that material (“R” is the
interval representing the critical difference between two test
results for the same material, obtained by different operators
using different equipment in different laboratories).
X3.11.2.3 Any judgment in accordance with X3.11.2.1 or
X3.11.2.2 would have an approximate 95 % (.95) probability
of being correct.
X3.11.3 There are no recognized standards by which to
estimate bias of this method.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18

X4. PROPERTIES AND TEST CONDITIONS FOR UHMWPE

TABLE X4.1 Common Properties and Test Conditions for UHMWPE

Properties Standard Specimen Type and Units Test Conditions and Supplementary
Dimensions (mm) Instructions
Rheological
Intrinsic Viscosity Specification D4020, Annex A1 Granules or powder Relative viscosity at 0.02 %
concentration in decalin

Mechanical Properties
Tensile Stress at Yield Test Method D638 and ISO 527-1 Test Method D638, Type 4 MPa 50 mm/min
Tensile Stress at Break ISO 527-1, Type 2 MPa
Tensile Elongation at Yield %
Tensile Elongation at Break % Measured when extensometer is
used
Nominal Strain at Break % Gage length is equal to grip distance
Tensile Modulus MPa ASTM 5 mm/min, 2 % secant
modulus ISO 1 mm/min, chord
modulus between 0.05 % and 0.25 %
strain

Elongational Stress Specification D4020, Appendix X2 Specimen specified in

Appendix X2

Flexural Modulus Test Methods D790 127 by 12.7 by 6.35 MPa 1 % secant, 101.6 mm span, 28 mm/
min crosshead speed

Double Notched Izod Impact Resistance Specification D4020, Annex A3 and 63.5 by 12.7 by 6.35 kJ/m2
Annex A4
Izod Impact Resistance Test Method D256 63.5 by 12.7 by 6.35 J/m
Charpy Impact Resistance ISO 11542-2, Annex B 120 by 15 by 10 KJ/m2
Hardness Test Method D2240, ISO 868 13 by 13 by 6.35 mm D Reading taken after 15 s

Thermal Properties
Deflection Temperature under Flexural Load Test Methods D648 127 by 12.7 by 6.35 °C 0.454 MPa stress, 0.25 mm
deflection,
2°C/min heating rate
Thermal Stress Cracking Test Methods D2951 125 × 6.4 × 1.25 h 6.4 mm diameter mandrels at 100°C
Melting Temperature ISO 3146 powder °C Method C, ramp rate 10°C/min
Coefficient of Linear Expansion ISO 10350 Cut from ISO 3167 multipur- 1/°C TMA, secant value over the tempera-
pose bar ture range of +23°C to +55°C
Flammability Test Method D635, IEC 60695-11-10 125 by 13 by 3 mm/min Linear burning rate of specimens in
horizontal position

Performance Properties
Abrasion Index Specification D4020, Appendix X3 69.8 by 25.4 by 6.35 % 1750 RPM, 2 h in aluminum oxide/
water slurry

Electrical Properties
Relative permittivity IEC 250 >60 by >60 by 1 Frequency 100 Hz and 1 MHz (com-
pensate for electrode edge effect)
Dissipation factor IEC 250 >60 by >60 by 1 Frequency 100 Hz and 1 MHz (com-
pensate for electrode edge effect)
Volume resistivity IEC 93 >60 by >60 by 1 Ω-m Voltage 100 V
Surface resistivity IEC 93 >60 by >60 by 1 Ω Voltage 100 V
Dielectric (Electrical) Strength IEC 243-1 >60 by >60 by 1 KV/mm Use 25 mm/75 mm coaxial-cylinder
>60 by >60 by 3 electrode configuration. Immerse in
IEC 296 transformer oil. Use short
time (rapid rise) test
Comparative Tracking Index (CTI) IEC 112 >15 by >15 by 4 Use solution A

Miscellaneous Properties
Density Test Methods D792, ISO 1183 50 by 12.7 by 6.35 (ASTM) g/cm3 Density by displacement
10 by 10 by 4 (ISO)
Bulk Density Test Methods D1895 Granules or powder g/cm3
Pourability Test Methods D1895 Granules or powder S Method A, tap funnel to start flow
Angle of Repose Test Method C1444 Granules or powder Angle in
degrees
Coefficient of Friction Test Method D1894, ISO 8295 63.5 by 63.5 by 6.35 UHMWPE against metal
Water Absorption ISO 62 50 by 50 by 3 or 50 dia. by 3 % 24 h immersion
disc
Yellowness Index Practice E313 50 by 50 by 6.35 2 degree observer, Illuminant C,
specular included, UV included,
hemispherical configuration

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
X4.1. Referenced Documents ISO 527-1 Determination of tensile Properties, Part 1 Gen-
2 eral Principles
X4.1.1 ASTM Standards:
ISO 868 Plastics and Ebonite-Determination of Indention
C1444 Test Method for Measuring the Angle of Repose of
Hardness by Means of a Durometer (Shore Hardness)
Free-Flowing Mold Powders (Withdrawn 2005)5
ISO 1183 A Plastics—Methods for Determining the Density
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
and Relative Density of Non-cellular Plastics
Impact Resistance of Plastics
ISO 1628-3 Plastics—Determination of Viscosity Number
D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
and Limiting Viscosity Number—Part 3: Polyethylenes
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
and Polypropylenes
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ISO 3146 Plastics—Determination of Melting Behavior
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
(Melting Temperature or Melting Range) of Semicrystal-
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
line Polymers
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
ISO 8295 Plastics—Film and Sheeting-Determination of
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
Coefficients of Friction
als
ISO 10350 Plastics—Acquisition and presentation of Com-
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
parable Single-Point Data
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
ISO 11542–2 Plastics—Ultra High Molecular-Weight Poly-
D1894 Test Method for Static and Kinetic Coefficients of
ethylene (PE-UHMW) Moulding and Extrusion
Friction of Plastic Film and Sheeting
Materials—Part 2: Preparation of Test Specimens and
D1895 Test Methods for Apparent Density, Bulk Factor, and
determination of Properties
Pourability of Plastic Materials
X4.1.3 IEC Standards:3
D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hard-
IEC 93 Recommended Methods of Test for Volume and
ness
Surface Resistivities of Electrical Insulating Materials
D2951 Test Method for Resistance of Types III and IV
IEC 112 Recommended Method for Determining the Com-
Polyethylene Plastics to Thermal Stress-Cracking (With-
parative Tracking Index of Solid Insulation Materials
drawn 2006)5
IEC 243-1 Recommended Methods of Test for Electric
E313 Practice for Calculating Yellowness and Whiteness
Strength of Solid Insulating Material at Power Frequen-
Indices from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates
cies
X4.1.2 ISO Standards:3 IEC 250 Recommended Methods for Determination of the
ISO 62 Plastics—Determination of Water Absorption Permittivity and Dielectric Dissipation Factor of Electrical
Insulation Materials at Power, Audio, and Radio Frequen-
cies Including Metre Wavelengths
5
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on IEC 60695-11-10 Fire Hazard Testing, Part 11–10 Test
www.astm.org. Flames 50 W Horizontal and Vertical Flames

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4020 - 11)
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2018)

(1) Updated ASTM and ISO references where appropriate. (5) Revised procedure for dilute solution viscosity to reflect
(2) Updated standard conditioning and test condition require- current practice.
ments. (6) Updated Figure X3.1 to align with impact testing described
(3) Moved Izod Impact Strength test from Appendix (non- in F648.
mandatory) to Annex (mandatory).
(4) Clarified equations and graphs for nominal viscosity aver-
age molecular weight.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4020 − 18
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 12:42:29 EDT 2020
15
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4024 − 15

Standard Specification for

Machine Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Flanges1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4024; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers reinforced-thermosetting resin
flanges other than contact-molded flanges. Included are re-
quirements for materials, workmanship, performance, and
dimensions.
1.2 Flanges may be produced integrally with a pipe or
fitting, may be produced with a socket for adhesive bonding to
a pipe or fitting, or may be of the type used in conjunction with
either a metallic or nonmetallic backup ring.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values in parentheses are given for
information only. In cases where materials, products, or equip-
ment are available only in SI units, inch-pound units are
omitted.
1.4 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 10, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—Contact molded flanges are covered in Specification D5421
and referenced in Specification D5685.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D5421 Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
D5685 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe Fittings
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
2.2 ANSI Standards:3
B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 or Terminology F412. Abbreviations are in
accordance with Terminology D1600, unless otherwise indi-
cated. The abbreviation for reinforced-thermosetting-resin pipe
is RTRP.
4. Classification
4.1 General—This specification covers machine-made
reinforced-thermosetting-resin flanges defined by type (method
of manufacture), grade (generic type of resin), class (configu-
ration of joining system), and pressure rating. Flanges com-
plying with this specification are also given numerical classi-
fications relating to burst pressure, sealing test pressure, and
bolt torque limit.

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved May 1, 2015. Published June 2015. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1981. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D4024 – 12. DOI: Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
10.1520/D4024-15. 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4024 − 15
4.1.1 Types: TABLE 1 Pressure Categories
4.1.1.1 Type 1—Filament-wound flanges manufactured by Pressure Rating
Designation
winding continuous fibrous glass strand roving or roving tape, psi MPa
either preimpregnated or impregnated during winding, into a A 50 0.35
B 75 0.52
flange cavity under controlled tension. C 100 0.69
4.1.1.2 Type 2—Compression-molded flanges made by ap- D 125 0.86
E 150 1.04
plying external pressure and heat to a molding compound that F 175 1.21
is confined within a closed mold. G 200 1.38
4.1.1.3 Type 3—Resin-transfer-molded flanges manufac- H 225 1.55
J 250 1.73
tured by pumping a thermosetting resin into glass reinforce- K 300 2.07
ments that have been cut to size and clamped between matched L 350 2.42
molds. M 400 2.76
N 450 3.11
4.1.1.4 Type 4—Centrifugally-cast flanges are made by P 500 3.45
applying resin and reinforcement to the inside of a mold that is R 550 3.80
rotated and heated, subsequently polymerizing the resin sys- S 600 4.14
T 650 4.49
tem. U 700 4.83
4.1.2 Grades: V 750 5.18
4.1.2.1 Grade 1—Epoxy resin. W 800 5.52

4.1.2.2 Grade 2—Polyester resin.

4.1.2.3 Grade 3—Phenolic resin.
4.1.2.4 Grade 4—Vinylester resin.
4.1.2.5 Grade 7—Furan resin.
4.1.3 Classes:
4.1.3.1 Class 1—Integrally-molded flange manufactured di-
rectly on a pipe section, pipe stub, or fitting.
4.1.3.2 Class 2—Taper to taper adhesive joint flange manu-
factured with a tapered socket to be used in conjunction with a
pipe or fitting with a tapered spigot section and a suitable
adhesive. This joining method provides an interference fit over
the entire length of the bond line.
4.1.3.3 Class 3—Straight-taper adhesive joint flange manu-
factured with a tapered socket to be used with a pipe or fitting
with an untapered spigot section and a suitable adhesive. This
joining method provides an interference fit at the bottom of the
socket.
4.1.3.4 Class 4—Straight adhesive joint flange manufac-
tured with an untapered socket for use with a pipe or fitting
with an untapered spigot and a suitable adhesive. This joint
provides a pipe stop and may have an interference fit at the
bottom of the socket.
4.1.4 Pressure Rating—Pressure rating shall be categorized
by a single letter designation. Pressure designations are shown
in Table 1.
4.1.5 Burst pressure, sealing test pressure, and bolt torque
limit shall be categorized by single capital letter designations
as indicated by the cell classification system of Table 2.
4.2 Designation Code—The flange designation code shall
consist of the abbreviation RTR, followed by the type, grade,
and class in arabic numerals, the pressure rating category as a
capital letter, and three capital letters identifying the cell
classification designations of the burst pressure, sealing test
pressure, and the bolt torque limit, respectively. Thus, a
complete flange designation code shall consist of three letters,
three numerals and one letter, and three letters.
4.2.1 Example—RTR-112E-EED. This designation de-
scribes a filament-wound, glass fiber-reinforced epoxy resin
flange with a taper to taper adhesive joining system. The flange
has a 150 psi (1.40 MPa) pressure rating, a burst pressure in
excess of 600 psi (4.1 MPa), a sealing test pressure of 225 psi
(1.6 MPa), and a bolt torque limit greater than 75 lbf·ft (102
N·m).
NOTE 3—Flanges with identical classification from different manufac-
turers may not be interchangeable due to nonstandardization of pipe or
socket diameter, socket length, taper angle, or combination thereof.
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Flanges manufactured in accordance with this specifi-
cation shall be composed of reinforcement imbedded in or
surrounded by cured thermosetting resin. The composite struc-
ture may contain granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents,
pigments, or dyes.
5.2 The resins, reinforcements, and other materials, when
combined as composite structure, shall produce a flange that
will meet the performance requirements of this specification.
6. Performance Requirements
6.1 The following performance requirements are intended to
provide classification and performance criteria for the purpose
of qualification testing and rating of prototype constructions
and periodic reevaluation of the manufacturer’s stated ratings.
They are not intended as routine quality assurance require-
ments for production runs of rated flanges.
6.2 Flanges shall meet the following performance require-
ments when joined for testing according to the manufacturer’s
recommended practice for field installation:
6.2.1 Sealing—Flanges shall withstand a pressure of at least
1.5 times the rated design pressure without leakage when tested
in accordance with 10.4.
6.2.2 Short-Term Rupture Strength—Flanges shall withstand
a hydrostatic load of at least four times their rated design
pressure without damage to the flange when tested in accor-
dance with 10.5.
6.2.3 Bolt Torque—Flanges shall withstand, without visible
sign of damage, a bolt torque of at least 1.5 times that
recommended by the manufacturer for sealing of the flange at
its rated pressure when tested in accordance with 10.6.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4024 − 15
TABLE 2 Burst Pressure, Sealing Test Pressure, and Bolt Torque Limit
A
Property X A B C D E F G H J K
Burst pressure, psi 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200
(MPa) 1.38 2.07 2.76 3.45 4.14 4.83 5.52 6.21 6.90 8.27
Sealing test pressure, psi 75 115 150 190 225 265 300 340 375 450
(MPa) 0.52 0.79 1.03 1.31 1.55 1.83 2.07 2.34 2.59 3.10
Bolt torque limit, lbf·ft. 20 30 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225
(N·m) 27.1 40.7 67.8 101.7 135.6 169.5 203.4 237.3 271.2 305.1

Property L M N P R S T U V W
Burst pressure, psi 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
(MPa) 9.65 11.03 12.41 13.79 15.17 16.55 17.93 19.31 20.69 22.06
Sealing test pressure, psi 525 600 675 750 825 900 975 1050 1125 1200
(MPa) 3.62 4.14 4.65 5.17 5.69 6.21 6.72 7.24 7.76 8.27
Bolt torque limit, lbf·ft. 250 275 300
(N·m) 339.0 372.9 406.8
A
X = unspecified

7. Content Requirements
7.1 Recycled or Reprocessed Thermosetting Plastics—
Flanges shall not contain any recylced or reprocessed thermo-
setting plastics which might otherwise be added as fillers.
8. Dimensions
8.1 Dimensions and Tolerances:
8.1.1 Flange and Bolt Dimensions—Flanges of 24 in. (610
mm) or smaller diameter shall conform to the values given in
Table 3A or 3B for bolt circle, number and size of bolt holes,
and outside diameter. Flanges larger than 24 in. (610 mm) in
diameter shall conform to the values for bolt circle, number
and size of bolt holes, and outside diameter for Class 125 cast
iron flanges in ANSI B 16.1. The tolerances for the flange
dimensions provided in Table 3A and 3B shall be the same as
those contained in ANSI B 16.5. For all size flanges other
flange and bolt dimensions which meet internationally recog-
nized standards such as ISO, DIN, JIS, BS, or GB can be used
as long as they are agreed to by the buyer and seller.
8.1.2 Flange Face—The flange face shall be perpendicular
to the axis of the fitting within 1⁄2 °. The sealing surface of flat
face or serrated face flanges shall be flat to 61⁄32 in. (1 mm) for
sizes up to and including 18 in. (457 mm) diameter and
61⁄16 in. (2 mm) for larger diameters.
8.1.3 Washer Bearing Surface—Washer bearing surface
shall be flat and parallel to the flange face within 61°.
8.2 Pipe Stop—Each adhesive joined flange shall provide
sufficient taper or a diametric constriction to act as a stop
during adhesive joining so that the pipe stub cannot project
beyond the face of the flange.

TABLE 3 A Flange Dimensions, in. (mm)A

Nominal Pipe, Outside Diameter Drilling
SizeB of Flange Diameter of Bolt Circle Diameter of Bolt Holes Number of Bolts Diameter of Bolts

⁄
12 3.50 (88.9) 2.38 (60.5) 0.62 (15.75) 4 12⁄ (12.70)
⁄
34 3.88 (98.6) 2.75 (69.9) 0.62 (15.75) 4 12⁄ (12.70)
1 4.25 (107.9) 3.12 (79.2) 0.62 (15.75) 4 12⁄ (12.70)
1 1⁄ 4 4.62 (117.3) 3.50 (88.9) 0.62 (15.75) 4 1⁄ 2 (12.70)
1 1⁄ 2 5.00 (127.0) 3.88 (98.6) 0.62 (15.75) 4 1 ⁄2 (12.70)

2 6.00 (152.4) 4.75 (120.6) 0.75 (19.0) 4 ⁄

58 (15.9)
2 1⁄ 2 7.00 (177.8) 5.50 (139.7) 0.75 (19.0) 4 ⁄
58 (15.9)
3 7.50 (190.5) 6.00 (152.4) 0.75 (19.0) 4 5⁄ 8 (15.9)
3 1⁄ 2 8.50 (215.9) 7.00 (177.8) 0.75 (19.0) 8 5⁄ 8 (15.9)
4 9.00 (228.6) 7.50 (190.5) 0.75 (19.0) 8 5⁄ 8 (15.9)
5 10.00 (254.0) 8.50 (215.9) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄ 4 (19.0)
6 11.00 (279.4) 9.50 (241.3) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄ 4 (19.0)
8 13.50 (342.9) 11.75 (298.4) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄ 4 (19.0)
10 16.00 (406.4) 14.25 (361.9) 1.00 (25.4) 12 7⁄ 8 (22.2)
12 19.00 (482.6) 17.00 (431.8) 1.00 (25.4) 12 7⁄ 8 (22.2)

14 21.00 (533.4) 18.75 (476.2) 1.12 (28.4) 12 1 (25.4)

16 23.50 (596.9) 21.25 (539.8) 1.12 (28.4) 16 1 (25.4)
18 25.00 (635.0) 22.75 (577.8) 1.25 (31.7) 16 11⁄8 (28.6)
20 27.50 (698.5) 25.00 (635.0) 1.25 (31.7) 20 11⁄8 (28.6)
24 32.00 (812.8) 29.50 (749.3) 1.38 (35.1) 20 11⁄4 (31.7)
A
Dimensions conform to ANSI B16.5 for Class 150 steel flanges.
B
For larger sizes, see 8.1.1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4024 − 15
TABLE 3 B Flange Dimensions, in. (mm)A (continued)

Diameter of Bolt Circle Diameter of Bolt Holes Number Diameter of

Nominal Pipe Size Outside Diameter of Flange
of Bolts
Bolts
⁄
12 3.75 (95.3) 2.62 (66.5) 0.62 (15.75) 4 12⁄ (12)
⁄
34 4.62 (117.3) 3.25 (82.6) 0.75 (19.0) 4 58⁄ (16)
1 4.88 (124.0) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.0) 4 5 ⁄8 (16)
1 1⁄ 4 5.25 (133.4) 3.88 (98.6) 0.75 (19.0) 4 5 ⁄8 (16)
1 1⁄ 2 6.12 (155.4) 4.50 (114.3) 0.88 (22.4) 4 3 ⁄4 (18)

2 6.50 (165.1) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.0) 8 ⁄ (16)

58

2 1⁄ 2 7.50 (190.5) 5.88 (149.4) 0.88 (22.4) 8 ⁄ (18)

34

3 8.25 (209.6) 6.62 (168.1) 0.88 (22.4) 8 ⁄ (18)

34

3 1⁄ 2 9.00 (228.6) 7.25 (184.2) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄4 (18)

4 10.00 (254.0) 7.88 (200.2) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄4 (18)

5 11.00 (279.4) 9.25 (235.0) 0.88 (22.4) 8 3⁄4 (18)

6 12.50 (317.5) 10.62 (269.7) 0.88 (22.4) 12 3⁄4 (18)

8 15.00 (381.0) 13.00 (330.2) 1.00 (25.4) 12 7⁄8 (22)

10 17.50 (444.5) 15.25 (387.4) 1.12 (28.4) 16 1 (24)

12 20.50 (520.7) 17.75 (450.9) 1.25 (31.7) 16 11⁄8 (24)

14 23.00 (584.2) 20.25 (514.4) 1.25 (31.7) 20 11⁄8 (24)

16 25.50 (647.7) 22.50 (571.5) 1.38 (35.1) 20 11⁄4 (30)
18 28.00 (711.2) 24.75 (628.7) 1.38 (35.1) 24 11⁄4 (30)
20 30.50 (774.7) 27.00 (685.8) 1.38 (35.1) 24 11⁄4 (30)
24 36.00 (914.4) 32.00 (812.8) 1.62 (41.1) 24 11⁄2 (36)
A
Dimensions conform to ANSI B16.5 for Class 300 steel flanges.

9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance

9.1 Flanges shall be free as commercially practical of
defects, including indentations, delaminations, bubbles,
pinholes, foreign inclusions, and resin-starved areas.

10. Test Methods

10.1 Conditioning—When conditioning is required, and in
all cases of disagreement, condition the test specimens at 73.4
6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not
less than 40 h prior to test, in accordance with Procedure A of
Practice D618.
10.2 Test Conditions—The tests may be conducted at ambi-
ent temperature and humidity conditions. When controlled
environment testing is specified, tests shall be conducted in the
Standard Laboratory Atmosphere of 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C)
and 50 6 10 % relative humidity. When elevated temperature
testing is specified, the tests shall be conducted at the design
operating temperature 65.4°F (3°C).
10.3 Dimensions and Tolerances—Flange dimensions shall
be measured with a micrometer of vernier calipers, or other
suitable measuring devices accurate to within 60.001 in.
(60.02 mm). Diameters shall be determined by averaging a
minimum of four measurements, equally spaced circumferen-
tially.
10.4 Sealing—Flanged components in general arrangement
with Fig. 1 shall be bolted together using the gasket and bolt
torque recommended for standard field installation by the
flange manufacturer. The assembly shall then be pressure
tested and be required to hold the test pressure for a period of
168 hours without leakage. Retorque to the manufacturer’s
specified level after initial pressurization is permitted.
10.5 Short-Term Rupture Strength—Flanged components
shall be tested in accordance with Test Method D1599 with
FIG. 1 Test Assembly Configuration
free-end closure except as herein noted. The pressure in the
specimen shall be increased until failure of the flange occurs.
Pressure testing in an atmospheric environment is permissible.
Minimum failure time shall be 60 s; no restriction shall be
placed on maximum time-to-failure. Leaking past the gasket
interface is permissible during this test. Bolt torque may be
increased as necessary during the test in order to minimize
gasket leaking and to achieve the pressure necessary to cause
flange failure. The assembly used for the test in 10.4 may be
used for this test. (Warning—Do not test with any pressurized
gas.)
10.6 Maximum Bolt Torque—Using the gasket and hardware
recommended by the flange manufacturer, bolt the flange
against a flat face steel flange. Tighten the nuts by hand until
they are snug. Prior to fit-up, the nuts, bolts, and washers
should be well lubricated, using a nonfluid thread lubricant.
Establish uniform pressure over the flange face by tightening
bolts in 5 lbf·ft (7 N·m) increments according to the sequence

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4024 − 15
shown in Fig. 2. For flanges with more than 20 bolts, similar
alternating bolt tightening sequences shall be used. Increase the
bolt torque uniformly until flange failure occurs or until all
bolts have been torqued to five times the level recommended
by the manufacturer for field installation practice to establish
the bolt torque cell classification of the flange. Any sign of
flange damage (crumbling, flaking, cracking, or other break-
ing) shall constitute failure.
NOTE 4—The torque limits determined by 10.6 apply only to flanges
bolted up against a flat sealing surface. Significantly lower bolt torque
value will normally be obtained when RTR flanges are bolted up against
raised-faced flanges. When RTR flanges must be used against raised steel
flange face, the RTR flange manufacturer should be contacted for his
torque and installation recommendations.
11. Product Marking
11.1 Each flange shall be marked with the following infor-
mation:
11.1.1 The designation “ASTM D4024” indicating compli-
ance with this specification,
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
11.1.2 Identification of the flange in accordance with the
designation code in 4.2,
11.1.3 Nominal flange size, and
11.1.4 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and product
designation.
11.2 All required markings shall be legible and so applied as
to remain legible under normal handling and installation
practices.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 No precision and bias statement can be made for this
test method, since controlled round robin test programs have
not been run.
NOTE 5—The wide variation in raw materials and constructions allowed
in this specification make round robin testing difficult to apply.
13. Keywords
13.1 centrifugally-cast; compression-molded; filament-
wound; furan; machine-made; phenolic; polyester; resin-
transfer; vinyl ester
 D4024 − 15

FIG. 2 Bolt Torquing Sequence

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4024 - 12)
that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2015)

(1) Corrected bolt tightening sequence on 8-bolt flange dia-

gram (Fig. 2).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:43 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4068 − 17 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting for Concealed
Water-Containment Membrane1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4068; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health

1.1 This specification covers flexible chlorinated polyethyl- practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
ene (CPE) sheeting which is used without mastic, bedding, or tions prior to use.
coating for construction of concealed water-containment mem- 2. Referenced Documents
branes in applications where there is potential for costly
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
secondary damage from leakage, and where very long-term
D412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas-
reliable performance is essential. Examples are fountains,
tic Elastomers—Tension
pools, planters, shower and safe pans, tile tubs, and similar
D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
installations where the membrane is inaccessible once con-
Chemical Reagents
struction is complete. Included are requirements for
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
composition, strength and toughness, test methods, workman-
D751 Test Methods for Coated Fabrics
ship criteria, and methods of marking.
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1.2 Manufacturers have the option to use recycled materials D1004 Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of
in this product. Recycled materials must be in accordance with Plastic Film and Sheeting
the requirements in Section 4. D1203 Test Methods for Volatile Loss From Plastics Using
1.3 The test methods used to characterize the sheeting are Activated Carbon Methods
intended to ensure quality and performance and are not D1204 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
necessarily adequate for design purposes. Test methods have Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated
been selected to be conducted primarily with liquids that Temperature
simulate the environments to which the membrane will be D1876 Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-
subjected during actual installation and use. Peel Test)
D2136 Test Method for Coated Fabrics—Low-Temperature
1.4 This specification does not cover water-containment Bend Test
membranes exposed in use to ultraviolet light or direct sun- D2240 Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hard-
light. ness
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded D4968 Practice for Annual Review of Test Methods and
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical Specifications for Plastics
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid
and are not considered standard. Plastics Specimens
D6988 Guide for Determination of Thickness of Plastic Film
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
Test Specimens
1.6 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
test method portion, Section 14, of this specification: This Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With-
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns, drawn 2015)3
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user E96/E96M Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Products. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved March 1, 2017. Published March 2017. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1981. Last previous edition approved in 2015 as D4068 – 15. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D4068-17. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17
2.2 ANSI Document: 5.1.2.1 A specimen composed of plied sheets is permitted if
Safety Code for Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing Motor it has been shown the results are equivalent to a solid
Vehicles Operating on Land Highways4 specimen.

3. Terminology NOTE 2—Plied specimens may not agree with those made on solid
specimens, as the surfaces of the plied specimens may not be in complete
3.1 Definitions: contact.
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi- 5.1.3 The lateral dimensions of the specimen shall be
nology D883 unless otherwise indicated. sufficient to permit measurements at least 0.48 in. (12.0 mm)
3.1.2 The abbreviation for chlorinated polyethylene is CPE. from any edge.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: 5.1.3.1 Measurements are permitted at a lesser distance
3.2.1 homogeneous sheeting—sheeting that is of homoge- from an edge if identical results are obtained as 5.1.3.
neous composition throughout its thickness. (Note that it is not
of a sandwich construction with a continuous or semi- 6. Mechanical Properties
continuous layer of one or more materials of different compo- 6.1 The sheeting shall conform to the mechanical property
sition enclosed between two or more layers of CPE.) requirements in Table 1.
3.2.2 monolithic sheeting—sheeting manufactured as one
7. Performance Requirements
piece. (Note that it is not several thicknesses laminated
together, nor is it two or more widths lapped and joined with 7.1 The sheeting shall conform to the performance require-
heat or chemicals.) ments in Table 2.
3.2.3 water containment membrane—a nonporous mem- 8. Other Requirements
brane impervious to water and resistant to permeation by water
vapor to an extent that provides a high degree of certainty that 8.1 The sheeting shall be capable of being bonded to itself
secondary damage from leakage shall not occur. in a manner suitable for making seams and repairs in the field.
The manufacturer shall recommend or furnish methods,
4. Materials and Manufacture materials, or equipment necessary and suitable for this purpose.
4.1 The sheeting shall be made from a compound that 8.2 Bonds between sheets of material used in fabrication of
contains more than 50 % chlorinated polyethylene resin by a water-containment membrane shall conform to the require-
weight of total resin content, and the CPE resin shall: (a) ments in Table 3 and shall not reduce the overall resistance of
contain 38 to 46 % chlorine; (b) be made from a linear the membrane to permeation or leakage.
polyethylene having a density of not less than 0.95 g/cm2; (c)
be substantially amorphous, having a heat of fusion of less than 9. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
0.4 cal/g (1.7 kJ/kg), and (d) have a melt viscosity of 1700 6 9.1 The actual width and length of the sheeting shall be as
500 Pa·s when measured in a capillary rheometer at a melt agreed upon between the purchaser and the seller.
temperature of 190 6 2 °C, and a shear rate of 150 6 10 s−. 9.1.1 Sheeting width tolerance shall be +0.5, −0 in. (+12.7,
4.2 When recycled materials, as defined in Guide D7209, −0 mm).
are used in this product, the material must meet the require- 9.1.2 The length of the sheeting after unrolling and relaxing
ments in Sections 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. for 10 min at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2.0 °C) shall be no less than
that specified in the purchase order or contract.
4.3 The use of water-soluble compounding ingredients shall
be prohibited. 9.2 The sheeting shall be divided by grade based on
thickness, as follows:
4.4 The sheeting shall be homogeneous and monolithic. 9.2.1 Grade 1—40 mil (1.02 mm) shall be a minimum of
0.040 in. (1.02 mm) in thickness.
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 The sheeting shall have an average Shore-A hardness of
84 6 6 points when ten specimens taken equidistantly across TABLE 1 Mechanical Properties
the width of the sheet are tested in accordance with Test Specification
Property Unit
Method D2240, using a Type A durometer and reading durom- Grade 1 Grade 2
eter hardness after 5 s of presser foot contact with the
Thickness in. (mm) 0.040 (1.02), 0.030 (0.0765),
specimen. min min
5.1.1 The thickness of the test specimens shall be 0.24 in. Tensile strength psi (MPa) 1200 (8.28), 800 (5.5), min
(6.0 mm) minimum unless it is known that results equivalent to min
Tensile stress at psi (MPa) 400 (2.76), 300 (2.07),
the 0.24 in. (6.0 mm) values are obtained with a thinner 100 % elongation min min
specimen. (modulus) 1200 (8.28), 1200 (8.28),
5.1.2 The test specimen shall be of solid construction max max

Elongation, at break % 350, min 300, min

Tear resistance lbf/in. (kN/m) 175 (30.6), min 120 (20.9), min
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St., of width
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17
TABLE 2 Performance Requirements tests in this specification. In no case shall a sample be less than
Specification 16 ft2 (1.49 m2), nor shall either width or length be less than 3
Property Unit
Grade 1 Grade 2 ft (0.91 m).
11.1.4 Sample using a statistically acceptable procedure.
Volatile Loss at 158°F (70°C): 11.1.5 From this population, select samples randomly to
Weight change percent loss ±1.5, max ±1.5, max
Microorganism Resistance: provide specimens for each test.
Weight change percent ±5, max ±5, max
Chemical Resistance:
11.2 Sampling for In-Plant Quality Control Evaluation:
Sodium Hydroxide: 11.2.1 Samples for quality control evaluation shall be a
Weight change percent ±5, max ±5, max minimum of 25 ft2 (2.5 m2), and completely span the width of
Soapy Water, 1 % solution:
Weight change percent ±3, max ±3, max
the finished sheet.
Distilled Water: 11.2.2 Select randomly one or more samples from each
Weight change percent ±2, max ±2, max 10 000 ft2 (1 000 m2) for the quality assurance tests specified
in Section 18 and Table 4.
TABLE 3 Bonded Seam Requirements 12. Number of Tests and Retests
Specification 12.1 One set of test units is sufficient to determine confor-
Property Unit
Grade 1 Grade 2 mance. The average result of all samples tested shall conform
to the requirements of this specification.
Bonded seam shear percent of tensile 75, min 75, min
strength 12.2 Retesting to determine conformance shall be required
Bonded seam peel lbf/in. (kN/m) of 10 (2.75) min 6 (1.65) min
strength (T-peel) seam width
after any significant change in compound or method of
manufacture.
12.2.1 Significant changes in compound include addition,
elimination, or substitution of any ingredient, changes in ratios
between ingredients, change in type or grade of CPE resin,
9.2.2 Grade 2—30 mil (0.765 mm) shall be a minimum of change in supplier or manufacturer, or both, of CPE resin, and
0.030 in. (0.765 mm) in thickness. change in manufacturer or supplier, or both, of CPE compound
or sheet.
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance 12.2.2 Changes in compound that are not significant include
substitution of one material for another (except CPE resin)
10.1 The sheeting shall be free of pin holes, particles of where the two are essentially identical and changes in material
foreign matter, undispersed raw materials, or other manufac- which do not remain a part of the sheet after manufacture.
turing defects that might affect serviceability.
NOTE 3—Material substitutions include changes in supplier, grade or
10.2 The sheeting shall be free of blisters, craters, pimples, type.
pits, crazing, and thin spots. Sheet edges shall be straight,
12.2.3 Significant changes in manufacture include blending
parallel, and free of trim material.
process (dry blend, wet blend, Banbury mix, or separate
10.3 Printing and markings on the sheet shall be legible and compounding line) or method of fabricating sheet (calender,
not easily removed from the sheet during normal handling, extrusion, or casting).
transportation, and installation. 12.2.4 Changes in manufacture that are not significant
10.4 The sheeting shall be colored as agreed upon between include changes in brands of processing equipment, age of
the purchaser and the seller. equipment, location of manufacture, personnel, take-off equip-
ment and processes, packaging, and ambient or atmospheric
11. Sampling conditions.
11.1 Sampling for Evaluating Conformance to Physical, 12.3 Retesting to determine conformance shall occur at least
Mechanical, and Performance Requirements: every five years whether or not significant changes have
11.1.1 One roll, or other equivalent packaged unit, with a occurred.
minimum continuous sheet of 100 ft2 (9.3 m2) shall be suffi- NOTE 4—This requirement is included to monitor cumulative effects of
cient for completing all tests and evaluations in this specifica- relatively insignificant changes in compound or manufacture over time.
tion.
11.1.2 Select randomly each roll or unit submitted for TABLE 4 Quality Assurance Requirements
evaluation from an inventory of regular production stock not
Specification
older than one year. Selecting more than one roll or unit or Property Unit
Grade 1 Grade 2
selecting from multiple inventory stocks or locations will
increase the likelihood of obtaining a representative sample of Thickness in. (mm) 0.040 (1.02) 0.030 (0.765)
contemporary production. The age of stocks from which Pinholes ... none none
selections are made is required to be documented. Shrinkage percent 5, max 5, max
Width tolerance in. (mm) +0.5 (−0.0) +0.5 (−0.0)
11.1.3 Divide all submitted sheet into smaller samples of Length tolerance in. (mm) −0.0 −0.0
sufficient size to provide a set of specimens for any one of the

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17
12.4 If the results of any test do not conform to the
requirements of this specification, retesting to determine con-
formity is performed only after the purchaser and supplier
agree to the retesting. However, this provision shall not be used
to lower a minimum requirement, omit, substitute, or modify a
test or requirement, or alter specification limits.
13. Specimen Preparation
13.1 Conditioning:
13.1.1 Condition all physical, mechanical, and performance
test specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6 2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 %
relative humidity for not less than 40 h in accordance with
Procedure A of Methods D618 prior to testing or starting
environmental and chemical exposures.
13.1.2 Recondition all environmental and chemical expo-
sure samples at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6 2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 %
relative humidity for not less than 40 h in accordance with
Procedure A of Methods D618 following removal from expo-
sure and prior to physical or mechanical property testing.
13.1.3 Condition in-plant quality assurance specimens at
73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6 2.0 °C) for 2 h in air prior to testing.
13.2 Bonded Seam Samples:
13.2.1 Bonded seam samples from which specimens are to
be taken for testing shall be prepared using sheet samples
supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall include
detailed instructions as well as recommend or supply all
materials needed to fabricate the bonded seam samples. The
manufacturer has the option to entirely prepare the bonded
seam samples used for the test specimens.
13.2.2 Finished bonded seam samples from which test
specimens are to be cut shall be conditioned at 73.4 6 3.6°F
(23.0 6 2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for no less
than 40 h after being made and prior to cutting test specimens.
13.2.3 After cutting, prepared specimens shall be condi-
tioned at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6 2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative
humidity for not less than 168 h, in accordance with Procedure
A of Methods D618 prior to testing or starting environmental
exposures.
14. Test Methods
14.1 Stress-Strain Properties—Tensile strength, tensile
stress at 100 % elongation (modulus), and ultimate elongation
shall be determined in accordance with Method A of Test
Methods D412 using dumbbell cut specimens (Die C). Report
the average of six specimens.
14.2 Tear Resistance—Determine average value from ten
acceptable specimens tested in accordance with Test Methods
D1004.
14.3 Volatile Loss—Determine volatile loss in accordance
with Test Methods D1203, Method A, at 158°F (70 °C) with
Grade AC (6⁄14 mesh) activated carbon. Test specimens shall be
nominal thickness sheeting.
14.4 Microorganism Resistance—Test in accordance with
the method described in Annex A1.
14.5 Low-Temperature Flexibility—Test three specimens in
accordance with Test Method D2136 at a temperature of −22°F
(−30 °C) or less. Report temperature used in test and whether
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
material passed or failed at that temperature. Failure of one
specimen (as defined in Method D2136) constitutes rejection of
the sample.
NOTE 5—This test procedure may require testing an additional set of
three specimens. For greater efficiency, six specimens may be prepared,
conditioned, cooled, and tested at one time. If done in this manner the
three specimens comprising each testing group must be identified prior to
the start of the test.
NOTE 6—Requirement for Water-Vapor Transmission of Materials in
Sheet Form (Procedure E of Test Methods E96/E96M has been deleted
until the test method is improved to the extent that it can be reproducibly
run by commercial laboratories).
14.6 Chemical Resistance—Determine weight changes in
accordance with Procedures I and II of Test Method D543.
14.6.1 Reagents:
14.6.1.1 Sodium Hydroxide (10 % solution)—Immerse
specimens for 72 h at 120°F (49 °C).
14.6.1.2 Soap Solution (1 %)—Immerse specimens for 24 h
at 120°F (49 °C). Rinse specimens in clean water after removal
and dry in forced-air oven at 125°F (52 °C) for 24 h prior to
weight measurement and testing.
14.6.1.3 Distilled Water—Immerse specimens for 24 h at
120°F (49 °C). Dry specimens in forced-air oven at 125°F
(52 °C) for 24 h prior to weight measurement and testing.
14.6.2 Testing—Immerse adequate specimens in each re-
agent to test for all properties specified.
14.6.3 Weight Change—For each reagent, test a minimum of
three weight-change specimens. Weigh each specimen after
conditioning prior to immersion and record the average weight
(W1). Weigh each specimen again after conditioning following
immersion, recording the average weight (W2). Calculate
weight change as:
Weight Change, % 5 ~ W2 2 W1 ! /W1 3 100 %.
Report this value as the average weight change.
14.7 Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance—Test three speci-
mens in accordance with Annex A2. Rejection (failure) of one
specimen shall constitute failure of the entire sample. Report
results as pass or fail.
14.8 Puncture Resistance—Test six specimens in accor-
dance with Annex A3. Report results as pass or fail.
14.9 Bonded Seam Strength—Sufficient samples for speci-
men selection shall be prepared or provided as directed in 13.2
for each seaming method as specified by the manufacturer.
Possible seaming methods include solvent bonding, bodied
cements, adhesives, and thermal, dielectric, or RF welding
techniques. Other methods or techniques are also acceptable.
NOTE 7—There is no requirement as to which type of seaming must be
tested, or that more than one type needs evaluation. It is only required that
at least one type be available and tested.
14.9.1 Shear Bond:
14.9.1.1 Sample pieces shall be made from minimum 8- in.
(203-mm) square pieces of sheet, with a seam overlap of 1 6
1⁄8 in. (25.4 6 3.2 mm). When making the seam, align sheets
so that orientation is transverse. After conditioning (see 13.2),
cut the sample into 1-in. (25-mm) strips and discard the two
outside edge pieces. Cut one specimen from each strip using
 D4068 − 17
the dumbbell-shaped Die C for Test Methods D412, taking care
to place the bonded seam portion in the center of the specimen.
14.9.1.2 Test a minimum of six specimens in accordance
with Method A of Test Methods D412, measuring tensile
strength as shear bond. Report the average of the shear values
as a percentage of the average tensile strength.
14.9.2 Peel Test (T-Peel):
14.9.2.1 For each sample piece, cut two 8 by 12-in. (203 by
305-mm) pieces of sheeting, and bond these two pieces
completely together except for 3 in. (76 mm) of the 8-in.
(203-mm) dimension (see Fig. 1). After allowing the sample to
cure, cut the sample into 2 by 8-in. (50 by 203-mm) strips.
Discard the outside strips.
14.9.2.2 Test a minimum of six specimens in accordance
with Method E of Test Method D1876. Peel strength is the
average load per unit width of bond line required to produce
progressive separation of the samples when pulled apart at a
rate of 10 in./min (254 mm/min). Report the average peel
strength of all samples tested.
14.10 Thickness—Measure a minimum of five specimens
obtained from locations equidistant across the width of the
sheet in accordance with Test Methods D5947 or Guide D6988.
Report thickness as an average of all specimens measured.
14.11 Pinholes—The test specimen shall be a section of
sheeting 16 in. (406 mm) or more in length by the full sheeting
width. Examine 12 in. (304 mm) of this specimen across the
width by viewing the surface of the sheeting while held under
slight hand tension. Position a bright light source behind the
sheet so as to clearly illuminate the surface without producing
glare. A pinhole is defined as any opening observed under the
conditions specified. One or more pinholes will be considered
as failure of the sheeting. Report the number and locations of
any pinholes, and any other observed deformations of the
sheet. Separately report any other observed deformations of the
sheet.
14.12 Shrinkage—Test one specimen for 1 h at 158°F
(70 °C) in accordance with Test Method D1204. Percent
shrinkage is the average change in both lineal dimensions.
15. Certification
15.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
manufacturer’s or supplier’s certification shall be furnished to
the purchaser that states that samples representing each lot
have been manufactured, tested, and inspected in accordance
with this specification, and that the requirements have been
met. When specified in the purchase order or contract, a test
report shall be furnished.
16. Product Marking
16.1 Material complying with this specification shall be
continuously marked and shall include the following, spaced
out at intervals of not more than 2 ft (0.61 m):
16.1.1 Manufacturer’s name (or brand name or trademark),
16.1.2 Material designation CPE,
16.1.3 Sheeting thickness,
16.1.4 Designation “ASTM D4068” with which the sheet
complies, and
16.1.5 A production code.
17. Packaging and Package Marking
17.1 The sheeting shall be rolled on a substantial core and
packaged in standard commercial containers, so constructed as
to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers for safe
transportation at the lowest applicable rate to the point of
delivery, unless otherwise specified in the contract or order.
Use containers and pallets designed for forklift truck handling.
17.2 Shipping containers shall be marked as agreed upon
between the purchaser and the seller.

FIG. 1 Bonded-Seam T-Peel Sample After Bonding and Prior to Specimen Cutting and Selection

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17
18. Quality Assurance
18.1 The sheeting shall conform to the quality assurance
requirements in Table 4.
18.1.1 The sheeting shall be regularly monitored by the
manufacturer for compliance to these requirements at intervals
that best ensure that all materials shipped are in compliance.
18.2 The sheeting shall be continuously monitored at manu-
facture for appearance, pinholes, voids, undispersed materials,
surface blemishes, and other defects which may impair ser-
viceability.
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. MICROORGANISM RESISTANCE (SOIL BURIAL) TEST
A1.1 Materials
A1.1.1 Prepare a compost soil for specimen burial accord-
ing to usual greenhouse practice and having a pH of 6.5 to 7.5.
Further enrich the soil with a cow manure slurry.
A1.1.2 Maintain the moisture content of the soil between 30
and 50 % throughout the duration of the test.
A1.1.3 Maintain the temperature of the soil between 15 and
30°C.
A1.1.4 Microbiological Activity:
A1.1.4.1 Cut and condition 18 to 24 ten-ounce (540 to
720-mL) cotton duck tensile specimens in accordance with
13.1.1. Test a minimum of three specimens in accordance with
Test Method A of Test Methods D412 to obtain an average
benchmark tensile strength value for the cotton duck.
A1.1.4.2 Bury twelve cotton duck specimens in the enriched
soil with the test specimens. Remove three cotton duck
specimens after one, two, three, and four weeks and test for
tensile strength.
A1.1.4.3 Adequate microbiological activity is assumed if
the cotton duck loses at least 70 % of its initial tensile strength
in one week and at least 90 % in two weeks. A loss of 90 % or
more for three- and four-week specimens is recommended.
A1.1.4.4 After four weeks, test the three remaining unbur-
ied cotton duck specimens.
A1.2 Specimen Preparation
A1.2.1 Prepare four sets of six 2-in. (50.8-mm) diameter
weight-change disk specimens.
A1.3 Conditioning
A1.3.1 Precondition bonded seam samples at least 168 h at
73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6 2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity
after cutting and selecting bond seam test specimens.
A1.3.2 Condition all specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6
2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h
in accordance with Procedure A of Test Methods D618 prior to
burial.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
18.3 The manufacturer shall maintain quality control
records, including production codes so that defects discovered
later may be checked against quality control inspections and
traced to a specific production lot.
19. Keywords
19.1 chlorinated polyethylene; plastic sheeting; recycle us-
age water-containment membrane
A1.3.3 Post-condition specimens removed from soil burial
prior to physical properties testing as follows:
A1.3.3.1 Wash specimens under fresh, clean, warm water to
remove soil and foreign materials from specimens. Take
particular care to remove materials from the inside of the
T-peel specimens without starting peel action. Pat dry with soft
absorbent cloth.
A1.3.3.2 Desiccate specimens for one week or until speci-
men weights stabilize.
A1.3.3.3 Condition specimens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6
2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for at least 24 h
following desiccation and prior to testing.
A1.4 Procedure
A1.4.1 Weigh all weight-change specimens and record the
average weight. Bury two sets of specimens vertically and
separately in the enriched soil for 30 days with a minimum of
1 in. (25.4 mm) between each specimen.
A1.4.2 Weigh all weight-change specimens following post
conditioning and compare average with pre-burial average
weight.
A1.5 Calculation and Interpretation
A1.5.1 For each set of samples calculate average weight
change.
A1.5.2 Determine average change from original average
values for weight change using the formula:
Change, % 5 @ ~ X2 2 X1 ! / X 1 # 3 100 %
where:
X1 = original average property value, and
X2 = average property value after test exposure.
A1.6 Report
A1.6.1 Report the percent change in weight.
 D4068 − 17
A2. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST
A2.1 Materials
A2.1.1 The apparatus for the hydrostatic pressure test, a
puncture resistance apparatus, is essentially a pressure tube
connected to a specimen holder. The inner diameter of the
pressure tube shall be 2 in. (51 mm) and the outer diameter
shall be 3 in. (76 mm) with a means for introducing water from
below the specimen.
NOTE A2.1—A drawing of such an apparatus is published in Test
Methods D751 as Fig. 3: Machine for Measuring Hydrostatic Resistance
of a Coated Fabric by Using the Pressure of a Rising Column of Water.
A2.1.1.1 Connect an extension tube to permit a water head
of 2 ft (0.61 m) with a cutoff valve or other suitable device at
the water inlet to the pressure tube for isolating the specimen
until the desired head is reached.
A2.2 Specimens
A2.2.1 Each test unit shall consist of three specimens of
sheeting 3 by 3 in. (76 by 76 mm).
A2.2.2 Condition all specimens in accordance with 13.1.1.
A3. PUNCTURE RESISTANCE TEST
A3.1 Apparatus
A3.1.1 The specimen holder (Fig. A3.1) shall consist of two
10 by 10-in. (254 by 254-mm) pieces of 3⁄4-in. (19-mm)
smooth-surface hardwood. One of these pieces shall contain a
symmetrically located 6 by 6-in. (152 by 152-mm) opening in
the center.
A3.1.1.1 Sandwich the specimen between these two speci-
men holders placing the holder with the opening on top. Use
the three thumb screws or bolts located in the center of each
side to securely clamp the specimen within the holder.
A3.1.2 Impact Dart, a 7.0 6 0.1-oz (198.45 6 2.835-g) steel
dart as shown in Fig. A3.2. This drawing is published in the
American National Standard Safety Code for Safety Glazing
Materials for Glazing Motor Vehicles Operating on Land
Highways.
A3.2 Specimens
A3.2.1 Each test unit shall consist of six specimens of 10 by
10-in. (254 by 254-mm) sheeting.
A3.2.2 Condition all specimens in accordance with 13.1.1.
A3.3 Procedure
A3.3.1 Test three specimens with one side up and three with
the opposite side up.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
A2.3 Procedure
A2.3.1 Clamp the test specimen in the holder that has been
previously filled with water.
A2.3.1.1 Take care to avoid trapped air between the speci-
men and the water. This is done by filling the holder with water
and sliding the specimen onto the holder in direct contact with
the water after having used a piece of transparent material for
practice and for becoming familiar with the technique.
A2.3.2 Fill the tube to achieve a 2-ft (0.61-m) hydrostatic
head.
A2.3.3 Observe the specimen at 10-min intervals for the
first hour, and at hourly intervals for the succeeding 7 h, after
which the specimen shall be left under hydrostatic pressure for
40 h and again examined.
A2.4 Interpretation and Report
A2.4.1 Any evidence of wetness on top of the specimen or
the formation of a droplet shall cause the sheeting sample to be
rejected.
A2.4.2 Report results as pass or fail.
A3.3.2 Place a single specimen between the holding frame
halves and clamp securely by tightening the thumb screws.
Suspend the impact dart vertically above the center of the
specimen with a vertical distance of 3 ft (0.91 m) between the
nose of the dart and the surface of the specimen.
A3.3.3 Release the dart for one free fall on each specimen.
A3.3.4 All specimens completing this test without visible
rupture shall be further hydrostatically tested in accordance
with 14.8, completely following all procedures in Annex A2.
A3.3.4.1 Place the point of dart impact in the center of the
hydrostatic testing apparatus.
A3.4 Interpretation and Report
A3.4.1 Visible rupture of any specimen shall constitute
failure of the sheeting sample to meet this test.
A3.4.2 Any wetness or leakage from any specimen during
hydrostatic testing shall constitute failure of the sheeting
sample to pass this test.
A3.4.3 Report results as pass or fail.
 D4068 − 17

FIG. A3.1 Wood Holding Fixture for Drop Test

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17

FIG. A3.2 Dart for Safety Glass Tests

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4068 − 17
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4068–15)
that may impact the use of this standard. (March 1, 2017)

(1) Changed average Shore-A hardness from 76 6 6 to 84 6 6 (4) Removed “in transverse direction” from 14.1, 14.2, and
in 5.1. 14.9.1.2.
(2) Removed “transverse direction” from Table 1. (5) Reworded 16.1.5.
(3) Removed “transverse direction” from Table 3.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:49 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4097 − 19

Standard Specification for

Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermoset Resin
Corrosion-Resistant Tanks1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4097; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical

1.1 This specification covers cylindrical tanks fabricated by
contact molding for above-ground vertical installation, to
contain aggressive chemicals at atmospheric pressure, and
made of a commercial-grade polyester or vinyl ester, resin.
Included are requirements for materials, properties, design,
construction, dimensions, tolerances, workmanship, and ap-
pearance.
1.2 This specification does not cover the design of vessels
intended for pressure above atmospheric or under vacuum
conditions, except as classified herein, or vessels intended for
use with liquids heated above their flash points.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are provided for
information purposes only.
1.4 Special design consideration shall be given to tanks
subject to environmental and/or mechanical forces such
seismic, wind, ice, agitation, or fluid dynamic forces, to
operational service temperatures greater than 180°F (82°C) and
to tanks with unsupported bottoms.
1.5 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 11, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2150 Specification for Woven Roving Glass Fabric for
Polyester-Glass Laminates (Withdrawn 1987)3
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D2996 Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D2997 Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4024 Specification for Machine Made “Fiberglass” (Glass-
Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
D5421 Specification for Contact Molded “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

1 2
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2018 as D4097 - 18. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D4097-19. www.astm.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19
2.2 ANSI Standards:
B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class
25, 125, 250, and 8004
B 16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Valves and Fittings4
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 and F412, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 contact molding—includes the “hand lay-up” or a
combination of the “hand lay-up” and the “spray-up” manu-
facturing processes.
4. Classification
4.1 Tanks meeting this specification are classified according
to type. It is the responsibility of the purchaser to specify the
requirement for Type II tanks, the operating pressure or
vacuum levels, and the safety factor required for external
pressure. Absence of a designation of type required shall imply
that Type I is adequate.
4.1.1 Type I—Atmospheric pressure tanks vented directly to
the atmosphere, designed for pressure no greater or lower than
atmospheric.
4.1.2 Type II—Atmospheric pressure tanks vented directly
into a fume conservation system, and designed to withstand,
the specified positive and negative pressure not to exceed 14 in.
of water (355.6 mm) when all tie-down lugs are properly
secured, in accordance with the fabricator’s recommendations
for flat-bottom tanks.
4.2 Tanks meeting this specification are classified according
to type as follows:
4.2.1 Grade 1—Tanks manufactured with a single generic
type of thermoset resin throughout.
4.2.2 Grade 2—Tanks manufactured with different generic
types of thermoset resin in the barrier and the structural
portion.
NOTE 2—The external corrosive environment due to spillage or
corrosive vapors should be considered when specifying Grade 2 tanks (see
7.1.3.3).
5. Materials and Manufacture
5.1 Resin—The resin used shall be a commercial grade,
corrosion-resistant thermoset that has either been evaluated in
a laminate by test in accordance with 11.3, or that has been
determined by previous documented service to be acceptable
for the service conditions. Where service conditions have not
been evaluated, a suitable resin may also be selected by
agreement between fabricator and purchaser.
5.1.1 The resin shall contain no pigment, dyes, colorants, or
filler, except as follows:
5.1.1.1 A thixotropic agent that does not interfere with
visual inspection of laminate quality, or with the required
corrosion resistance of the laminate, may be added for viscos-
ity control.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
NOTE 3—The addition of a thixotropic agent may reduce the resistance
of many resin systems to certain corrosive chemical environments. It is the
responsibility of the fabricator, using a thixotropic agent in the resin
required for 7.1.1 and 7.1.2, to ascertain its compatibility with the
corrosive environment when this has been reported by the purchaser.
5.1.1.2 Resin pastes used to fill crevices before overlay shall
not be subject to the limitation of 5.1.1.
5.1.1.3 Resin may contain pigment, dyes, or colorants when
agreed upon between fabricator and purchaser.
NOTE 4—The addition of pigment, dyes, or colorants may interfere with
visual inspection of laminate quality.
5.1.1.4 Ultraviolet absorbers may be added for improved
weather resistance if agreed upon between the fabricator and
the purchaser.
5.1.1.5 Antimony compounds or other fire-retardant agents
may be added to halogenated resins for improved fire
resistance, if agreed upon between the fabricator and the
purchaser.
NOTE 5—Because the addition of fire-retardant agents may interfere
with visual inspection of laminate quality, they should not be used in the
inner surface (7.1.1) or interior layer (7.1.2), unless their functional
advantages would outweigh the loss of visual inspection.
5.2 Reinforcement:
5.2.1 Chopped-Strand Mat—Chopped-strand mat shall be
constructed from chopped commercial-grade E-type glass
strands bonded together using a binder. The strands should be
treated with a sizing that is chemically compatible with the
resin system used.
NOTE 6—The selection of the particular chopped-strand mat is depen-
dent upon the performance characteristics required of the finished product
and upon the processing techniques to be used.
5.2.2 Nonwoven Biaxial or Unidirectal Fabric—These
products shall be a commercial grade of E-type glass fiber with
a sizing that is chemically compatible with the resin system
used.
5.2.3 Woven Roving—Woven roving shall be in accordance
with Specification D2150.
5.2.4 Surface Mat—The reinforcement used for the inner
surface (7.1.1) shall be either a commercial-grade chemical
resistant glass surface mat or an organic-fiber surface mat. In
environments that attack glass, the use of an organic-fiber
surface mat is required.
6. Design Requirements
6.1 Straight Shell—The minimum required wall thickness of
the cylindrical straight shell at any fluid level shall be deter-
mined by the following equation, but shall not be less than 3⁄16
in.:
t 5 PD/2S H 5 0.036 γ HD/2S H or ~ 0.2489 γ HD/2S H !
where:
t = wall thickness, in. (mm),
SH = allowable hoop tensile stress (not to exceed 1⁄10 of the
ultimate hoop strength), psi (kPa) (see 11.8),
P = pressure, psi (kPa),
H = fluid head, in. (mm),
γ = specific gravity of fluid, and
D = inside diameter of tank, in. (mm).
 D4097 − 19
NOTE 7—The use of an accepted analytical technique, such as laminated
plate theory (LPT), for design and analysis of composite vessels may
predict stresses, strains, and strength on a ply-by-ply basis, given some
basic lamina properties.
NOTE 8—The calculation is suitable for the shell design of elevated
dished-bottom tanks that are mounted or supported below the tangent of
the dished-bottom head. Special consideration must be given to the
loading on the straight shell at the support when tank has mounting
supports located above the tangent line.
NOTE 9—Table X2.1, Appendix X2, illustrates minimum straight-shell
wall thicknesses.
6.2 Design for External Pressure:
6.2.1 Cylindrical Shells—For cylindrical shells, compute
the value 1.73 (Do/t)0.5. If the result is less than L/Do of the
cylinder, compute Pa as follows:
P a 5 2.6~ E/F ! ~ D o /L ! ~ t/D o ! 2.5

If the result is greater than L/Do of the cylinder, compute Pa

as follows:
2.6~ E/F !~ D o /L !~ t/D o ! 2.5
Pa 5
~ L/D o ! 2 0.45~ t/D o ! 0.5
where:
Do = outside diameter, in.,
Et = hoop tensile modulus of the filament wound structural
laminate, psi (kPa),
F = design factor = 5,
L = design length, in. (mm), of a vessel section, taken as
the largest of the following: (a) the distance between
head tangent lines plus one-third the depth of each
formed head, if there are no stiffening rings (excluding
conical heads and sections); (b) the distance between
cone-to-cylinder junctions for vessels with a cone or
conical heads if there are no stiffening rings; (c) the
greatest center-to-center distance between any two
adjacent stiffening rings; (d) the distance from the
center of the first stiffening ring to the formed head
tangent line plus one-third the depth of the formed head
(excluding conical heads and sections), all measured
parallel to the axis of the vessel; (e) the distance from
the first stiffening ring in the cylinder to the cone-to-
cylinder junction,
Pa = allowable external pressure, psi (kPa), and
t = wall thickness, in. (mm) (nominal).
6.2.2 Torispherical Heads—For torispherical heads, com-
pute the allowable external pressure, Pa, as follows:
P a 5 0.36~ E/F ! ~ t/R ! 2
o
where:
Ro = outside crown radius of head, in. (mm).
For toruspherical heads subject to internal loading, the
knuckle radius shall be externally reinforced in accordance
with Fig. 1. The reinforcement thickness shall be equal to the
thickness of the head as calculated above. The thickness of a
joint overlay near the knuckle radius tangent line of dished
head contributes to the knuckle reinforcement.
6.2.3 Stiffening Rings—The required moment of inertia, Is,
of a circumferential stiffening ring for cylindrical shells under
FIG. 1 Jointed Head Detail
(Sketch A)
I s 5 PLs D 3 F/24E h
where:
Do = shell outside diameter, in. (mm),
Eh = hoop tensile modulus, psi (kPa),
F = design factor = 5,
Is = moment of inertia, in.4(mm4), of stiffener for the
effective length of shell, Ls,
Ls = one-half of the distance from the centerline of the
stiffening ring to the next line of support on one side,
plus one-half of the centerline distance to the next line
of support on the other side of the stiffening ring, both
measured parallel to the axis of the cylinder, in. A line
of support is the following: (a) a stiffening ring that
meets the requirements of this paragraph; (b) a circum-
ferential line on a head at one-third the depth of the
head from the head tangent line; (c) a cone-to-cylinder
junction,
P = actual external pressure, psi (kPa).
Typical half-round stiffener sizes and dimensions for differ-
ent values of Is are shown in Fig. 4. Other stiffener profiles
meeting the required moment of inertia may be used.
6.3 Top Head—The top head, regardless of shape, shall be
able to support a 250-lb (113.4 kg) load on a 4 by 4-in. (100 by
100 mm) area without damage and with a maximum deflection
of 1⁄2 % of the tank diameter.
6.3.1 The minimum thickness of the top head shall be 3⁄16 in.
(4.8 mm).
NOTE 10—Support of auxiliary equipment, snow load, or operating
personnel, may require additional reinforcement or the use of stiffening
ribs, or both, sandwich construction, or other stiffening systems.
6.4 Bottom Head:
6.4.1 The minimum thickness for a fully supported flat-
bottom head shall be as follows:
3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) for 2 to 6-ft (0.6 to 1.8-m) diameter,

external pressure or internal vacuum shall not be less than that 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for over 6 to 12-ft (1.8 to 3.7-m) diameter, and

determined by the following: 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) for over 12-ft (3.7-m) diameter.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19
6.4.2 Bottom heads may be molded integrally with the
straight-shell, or may be molded separately with a straight
flange length for subsequent joining to shell.
6.4.3 The radius of the bottom knuckle of a flat-bottom tank
shall be not less than 1 in. (25 mm) on tanks 4 ft or smaller in
diameter and 1.5 in. (38 mm) on tanks larger than 4 ft in
diameter. The minimum thickness of the radiused section shall
be equal to the combined thickness of the shell wall and the
bottom. The reinforcement of the knuckle-radius area shall
taper so that it is tangent to the flat bottom, and shall not extend
beyond the tangent line onto the tank bottom, unless methods
of manufacture are used that maintain flat-bottom
configuration, and shall extend up the vertical tank wall a
minimum of length “L” of 8 in. (203 mm) on tanks up to 4 ft
(1219 mm) in diameter, and 12 in. (304 mm) on tanks over 4
ft (1219 mm) in diameter. The reinforcement shall then taper
into the side wall over an additional length “ M” of 4 in. (102
mm) (see Fig. 2). Methods of manufacture that incorporate
stiffening bands as a means of knuckle stabilization, are
permissible alternatives by agreement between purchaser and
fabricator, provided that the fabricator can document the
validity of design.
6.4.4 The tank bottom shall not have variations from a
nominally flat plane that would prevent uniform contact of the
entire bottom surface with a properly prepared support surface
when the tank is filled with liquid. The bottom laminate surface
shall be a hand-work finish and shall have no excessive
FIG. 2 Flat-Bottom Tank Corner Detail
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
laminate projections that would prevent uniform contact with a
properly prepared flat support surface when the tank is filled
with liquid.
NOTE 11—This requirement is not intended to exclude the use of drain
nozzles, which are commonly used at the bottom of the side shell.
However, foundation cut-outs are required of the appropriate dimensions
for nozzle type and size.
6.4.5 The thickness of an elevated torispherical dished
bottom, suitable for supporting the weight of the fluid head,
shall be determined by the following equation, but shall not be
less than 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm):
t 5 0.885 PR/S 5 0.885 ~ 0.036 γ HR! /Sor ~ 0.885 ~ 0.2489 γ HR! /S !
where:
t = thickness, in. (mm),
S = allowable stress (not to exceed 1⁄10 of ultimate strength),
psi (kPa) (see 11.8),
γ = specific gravity of fluid,
P = pressure, psi (kPa),
R = inside radius of dished head, in. (mm), and
H = distance from the top of the fluid to the deepest portion
of the bottom, in. (mm).
NOTE 12— An alternate method for design of an elevated toruspherical
dished bottom is shown in Appendix X3.
6.4.5.1 Minimum thickness of ellipsodial heads, (2:1) shall
be calculated as follows:
 D4097 − 19
PD TABLE 2 Standard Tank Inside Diameters
t5
2S in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
24 (610) 54 (1372) 96 (2438)
6.4.5.2 Minimum thickness of conical heads shall be calcu- 30 (762) 60 (1524) 108 (2743)
lated as follows: 36 (914) 66 (1676) 120 (3048)
42 (1067) 72 (1829) 132 (3353)
PD 48 (1219) 84 (2134) 144 (3658)
t5
2S· cos ~ } !

where:
} = 1⁄2 of APEX angle of the cone at the centerline of the
head (not to exceed 30°).
6.4.6 The torispherical dished-bottom head shall have a
radius of curvature that is equal to or less than the inside
diameter of the tank straight shell, and a minimum knuckle
radius of at least 6 % of the diameter of the head.
6.4.7 Deflection of the flat bottom when the tank is empty,
commonly known as “oil canning,” is permissible as long as
the requirements of 6.4.4 are met.
6.5 Open-Top Tanks—The top edge of open-top tanks shall
have a horizontal reinforcing flange or other means of rein-
forcement sufficiently rigid to maintain the shape of the tank
after installation. The flange shall be in accordance with Table
1. See Table 2.
6.6 Joints:
6.6.1 The cured resin surfaces to be overlayed shall be
roughened using 36 or coarser grit abrasive media. The
roughened area shall extend beyond the lay-up area so that no
reinforcement is applied to an unroughened surface. Surfaces
shall be clean and dry before lay-up. The entire roughened area
shall be coated with paraffinated resin after the joint lay-up is
made.
6.6.2 The secondary laminate joints are used to join hoop
segments of the straight shell, or to join the bottom or top head
to the shell. The thickness of the structural joint overlay shall
be equal to the shell thickness as determined in 6.1.
6.6.3 The minimum width of the structural joint overlay for
bottom supported tanks is shown in Table 3.
6.6.4 The corrosion-resistant barrier component of the joint
shall be formed in the same manner as the inner surface and the
interior layer (7.1.1 and 7.1.2) and shall not be considered a
structural element in determining joint thickness. The mini-
mum overlay width shall be 4 in. (100 mm).
6.6.5 The thickness of a joint near the bottom tangent line
shall not be considered to contribute to the knuckle reinforce-
ment of 6.4.3, but shall be additive thereto.
6.7 Fittings:
6.7.1 The more common method of fabricating nozzles is by
contact molding both the nozzle neck and flange to the
dimensions shown in Table 4. The corrosion-resistant barrier of
the nozzle shall be at least equivalent to the inner surface and
interior layer (7.1.1 and 7.1.2) and shall be fabricated from the
same resin as the tank head or shell to which it is attached.
6.7.2 Acceptable alternative methods are the use of contact-
molded pipe, filament-wound pipe in accordance with Speci-
fication D2996, or centrifugally cast pipe in accordance with
Specification D2997, joined to a suitable contact-molded
(Specification D5421), compression-molded, or filament-
wound flange (Specification D4024). The corrosion-resistant
barrier of the contact molded portions of such nozzles shall be
equivalent to the inner surface and interior layer (7.1.1 and
7.1.2) and shall be fabricated from the same resin as the tank
head or shell to which it is attached.
6.7.3 Nozzles 4 in. (102 mm) and smaller shall be supported
by a suitable gusseting technique using plate gussets or conical
gussets, as shown in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4. Plate gussets, where
needed, shall be evenly spaced around the nozzle and are to be
added after complete assembly of nozzle on shell. Larger
nozzles, subject to superimposed mechanical forces, require
special consideration.
6.7.4 Manways installed in top heads may be of the flanged
design or of a nonflanged design, as agreed upon between the
fabricator and purchaser.
6.7.4.1 Side-shell manways shall be in accordance with
7.3.2 and 7.3.3.
6.7.4.2 Typical manway dimensions are shown in Table 5.
NOTE 13—Tanks over 6 ft (1.8 m) straight-shell may need both top- and
side-shell opening manways for safety and maintenance considerations.
6.7.5 Vents:
6.7.5.1 Vents that discharge freely into the atmosphere shall
be provided in all Type I closed-top tanks. Minimum vent size
shall be sufficient to handle the flow displacement of all
combined inlet or outlet nozzles without creating any pressure
above atmospheric pressure, or any vacuum condition.
NOTE 14—Special vent sizing consideration should be given to the
numerous operating situations that could otherwise cause a positive or a
negative pressure in a closed tank. Since overfilling a closed tank with a
top vent can cause it to be overpressurized, a suitably sized overflow or
other appropriate protection may be required to prevent overpressuring the
tank.

TABLE 1 Minimum Acceptable Contact Molded Laminate Physical Properties

Property Thickness, in. (mm)
⁄ to 3⁄16 (3.2 to 4.8)
18 ⁄ (6.4)
14 ⁄
5 16 (7.9) ⁄ and up (9.5 and up)
38

Ultimate tensile strength, min, psi (kPa) 9 000 (620.5) 12 000 (827.4) 13 000 (930.8) 15 000 (1 034)
Flexural strength, min, psi (kPa) 16 000 (1 103) 19 000 (1 310) 20 000 (1 399) 22 000 (1 517)
Flexural modulus for elasticity (tangent), psi (kPa) 700 000 (48 263) 800 000 (55 158) 900 000 (62 053) 1 000 000 (68 948)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19
TABLE 3 Minimum Widths of Joint Overlay for Circumferential Joints

H × D = minimum 60 100 140 180 220 260 300 340 380 420 460 500
width of outside,A
in. 4 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
(mm) (102) (102) (127) (152) (178) (203) (229) (254) (279) (305) (330) (356)

where:
H = distance from the top of the liquid level to the joint, ft (m), and
D = inside diameter of the tank, ft (m).

A
Axial joint overlay widths shall be twice the width shown in the table.

TABLE 4 Reinforcing Flange for Open-Top TanksA,B

C
L Tank Diameter, ft (m) Flange Flange Dimensions
ft (m) 2 (0.610) 4 (1.219) 6 (1.829) 8 (2.438) 9 (2.743) 10 (3.048) 11 (3.353) 12 (3.658) Type Width, in. (mm) ThicknessD ,
in. (mm)

2 (0.610) A A A C D E F G A 2 (51) 14⁄ (6)

4 (1.219) A A A C D E F G B 2 (51) ⁄ (10)
38

6 (1.829) A A A C D E F G C 2 (51) 1⁄2 (13)

8 (2.438) A A A C D E F G D 21⁄2 (64) 3⁄8 (10)

10 (3.048) A A B C D E F G E 21⁄2 (64) 1⁄2 (13)

12 (3.658) A A B D D E F G F 3 (76) 3⁄8 (10)

14 (4.267) A A B D E F F G G 3 (76) 1⁄2 (13)

16 (4.877) A A C E E G G H H 3 (76) 5⁄8 (16)

18 (5.486) A A C E F G G H J 3 (76) 3⁄8 (19)

20 (6.096) A A D E F G H J K 3 (76) 1 (25)

24 (7.315) A B D F G H J K
30 (9.144) A B E G H H K K
36 (10.973) A B E H J K K
40 (12.192) A B E H J K
A
This table is based on handling considerations only. Significant superimposed loads, such as from wind or seismic conditions, should be considered independently.
B
Reinforcement configurations other than flanges may be used if equal or greater stiffness is provided.
C
L = maximum distance from flange to tank bottom or to the shell stiffener when used.
D
Flange thickness shall be at least equal to adjacent vessel wall thickness.

6.7.6 Type II tanks shall be designed to withstand the and top and bottom knuckle requirements. Fluid level in the
specified positive or negative pressures not to exceed 14 in. of tank is an important consideration in the analysis.
water (355.6 mm). Special design consideration shall be given 6.7.6.1 Flat-bottom tanks shall have all hold-down lugs
to buckling of tank wall and heads, the hold-down lug system, properly secured to the foundation, in accordance with the tank

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19

FIG. 3 Plate-Type Gussets

NOTE 1—This design does not require lay-up of nozzle neck to exterior tank wall.
FIG. 4 Conical-Type Gussets

TABLE 5 Typical Dimensions of Manways

NOTE 1—Bolt size equals bolt hole diameter minus 1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
NOTE 2— Gaskets shall be 1⁄8 in. thick full-face elastomeric material having a hardness of Shore A80 ± 5.
Minimum Diameter of Minimum Thickness of Minimum Manway Wall
Minimum Flange and Cover, Flange and Cover, Thickness, Diameter of Bolt Circle, Number of Bolt Hole Diameter,
Size, in. in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)A,B,C Bolts in. (mm)

Pressurized Manway—up to 15 psig

20 271⁄2 (699) 1 (25.4) 3⁄8 (9.5) 25 (635) 20 ⁄ (19)
34

22 30 (762) 1 (25.4) 3⁄8 (9.5) 27 (686) 20 ⁄ (19)

34

24 32 (813) 11⁄4 (31.8) 3⁄8 (9.5) 291⁄2 (749) 20 3⁄4 (19)

Manway—Atmospheric Pressure up to 0.5 psig

20 271⁄2 (699) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 25 (635) 20 ⁄ (12.7)
12

22 30 (762) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 27 (686) 20 ⁄ (12.7)

12

24 32 (813) 3⁄8 (9.5) 1⁄4 (6.4) 291⁄2 (748) 20 1⁄2 (12.7)

A
± 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) (ASME/ANSI B 16.5).
B
± 0.03 in. (0.76 mm) center to center of adjacent bolt holes (ASME/ANSI B 16.5).
C
± 0.06 in. (1.5 mm) eccentricity between bolt circle and center of nozzle.

fabricator’s recommendation for the design of the lugs used
and for the tank installation and operation.
6.8 Hold-Down Lugs—Hold-down lugs shall be a require-
ment on all tanks for outdoor service, on all Type II tanks, and
on tanks subject to seismic loads or vibrations. The design
number and attachment of such lugs is the responsibility of the
fabricator, based on the wind, seismic, and other loads speci-
fied by the purchaser.
6.8.1 Hold-down lugs shall be placed on the tank in such a
way that they do not protrude below the bottom surface of the
tank.
6.9 Lifting Lugs—Lifting lugs or other provisions for lifting
tanks (see Appendix X1) shall be provided for tanks over 500
lb (227 kg) in weight.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

7. Laminate Construction Requirements
7.1 Structural Tank—The laminate comprising the structural
tank (bottom, cylindrical shell, top head) shall consist of a
corrosion-resistant barrier comprised of an inner surface,
interior layer, and a structural layer.
7.1.1 Inner Surface—The inner surface exposed to the
chemical environment shall be a resin-rich layer 0.010 and
0.020 in. (0.254 to 0.508 mm) thick, reinforced with a suitable
chemical-resistant glass-fiber surfacing mat or with an organic-
fiber surfacing mat, in accordance with 5.2.4.
NOTE 15—This resin-rich inner surface will usually contain less than
20 % by weight of reinforcing material.
7.1.2 Interior Layer—The inner surface layer exposed to the
corrosive environment shall be followed with a layer composed
of resin, reinforced only with noncontinuous glass-fiber strands
applied in a minimum of two plies of chopped-strand mat
equivalent to a total of 3 oz/ft2 (0.92 kg/m2). As an alternative,
a minimum of two passes of chopped roving of minimum
length 0.5 in. (13 mm) to a maximum length of 2.0 in. (50.8
mm), shall be applied uniformly to an equivalent weight. Each
ply of mat or pass of chopped roving shall be well rolled prior
to the application of additional reinforcement. The combined
thickness of the inner surface and interior layer shall not be less
than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm).
7.1.2.1 Glass content of the inner liner and the interior layer
combined shall be 27 6 5 % by weight, when tested in
accordance with 11.4.
7.1.2.2 The degree of cure of the laminate shall be such as
to exhibit a Barcol hardness on the inner surface of at least
90 % of the resin manufacturer’s minimum specified hardness
for the cured resin, when tested in accordance with 11.7 and
Note 18, Note 19, and Note 20.
7.1.3 Contact Molded Structural Layer in Top and Bottom
Heads—Subsequent reinforcement shall be comprised of 1.5
oz/ft2 (0.46 kg/m2) chopped strand mat or equivalent weight of
chopped roving or shall be comprised of chopped strand mat or
chopped roving and such additional number of alternating plies
of 24 oz/yd2 (0.81 kg/m2) woven roving or 18 oz/yd2 (0.61
kg/m2) nonwoven biaxial fabric to a thickness as required to
meet the physical properties that are used for the design. The
use of woven roving is optional. The designations of these
specific weights of glass reinforcement are for reference only
and may be comprised of other weight combinations of
reinforcement materials, when agreed to between the fabricator
and purchaser. Each successive ply or pass of reinforcement
shall be well rolled prior to the application of additional
reinforcement. Where woven roving or nonwoven fabric is
used, chopped strand glass reinforcement shall be used as
alternating and final layers. All woven roving and nonwoven
TABLE 6 Shear Bond Length (Fig. 5 and Fig. 6)
NOTE 1—When internal overlay serves only as a corrosion barrier, the total shear length must be placed on the exterior overlay.
Overlay Thickness, in. ⁄ (6.4)
14 ⁄
5 16 (8) ⁄ (9.5)
38
(mm)
h (shear length), in. 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76)
(mm)
where: h = total shear length (ho + hi) (Fig. 5 and Fig. 6).
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4097 − 19
fabric, surfacing mat shall be overlapped. Laps in subsequent
layers shall be staggered at least 2.25 in. (60 mm) from laps in
the preceding layer.
7.1.3.1 When the outer surface of this structural layer is to
be subject to spillage or a corrosive environment, a resin-rich
layer in accordance with 7.1.1 shall be applied over the final
layer of reinforcement.
7.1.3.2 Where air-inhibited resin is exposed to air, full
surface cure shall be obtained by coating such surface with a
coat of resin containing 0.2 to 0.6 % paraffin with a melt point
of 122 to 126°F (50 to 52°C). Other techniques such as
sprayed, wrapped, or overlaid films are also acceptable meth-
ods to attain surface cure. The acetone sensitivity test may be
used to check surface cure (see Note 19).
7.1.3.3 Tanks used for outdoor service or subject to ultra-
violet exposure shall incorporate provisions to minimize ultra-
violet degradation. Suitable methods include use of ultraviolet
absorbers, incorporation of pigment of sufficient opacity in the
outer surface of the resin rich layer, or use of resins inherently
resistant to ultraviolet degradation. Since pigmentation makes
inspection difficult, it shall be added after inspection or
otherwise by agreement between the purchaser and fabricator.
7.1.4 All woven roving, nonwoven biaxial fabric, and sur-
facing mat shall be overlapped. Laps in subsequent layers shall
be staggered at least 2.25 in. (67 mm) from laps in the
preceding layer.
7.1.5 Where woven roving or nonwoven biaxial fabric is
used, chopped-strand glass reinforcement shall be used as
alternating and final layers.
7.2 Joints:
7.2.1 The width of the first layer of joint overlay shall be 3
in. (76 mm) minimum. Successive layers shall uniformly
increase in width to that specified in Table 6 to form a smooth
contour laminate centered on the joint.
7.2.2 A highly filled resin paste shall be placed in the
crevices between joined pieces, leaving a smooth surface for
lay-up.
7.2.3 The cured resin surfaces to be joined shall be rough-
ened using 36 or coarser abrasive grit media to expose glass
fibers. This roughened area shall extend beyond the lay-up
areas so that no reinforcement is applied to an unprepared
surface. The entire roughened area shall be coated with
paraffinated resin after joint overlay is made.
7.2.4 The interior overlay of a joint shall consist of a
minimum of two plies of 1.5 oz/ft2 (0.46 kg/m2) chopped
strand mat reinforcement, followed by a resin-rich layer
reinforced with surfacing mat. This overlay shall be the
equivalent of 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 combined, and shall be centered
on the joint. It shall be finished in accordance with 7.1.3.2.
⁄
7 16 (11) ⁄ (13)
12 ⁄
9 16 (14) ⁄ (16)
58 ⁄
11 16 (17.5) ⁄ (19)
34 ⁄ (22)
78 1 (25.4)
3 ⁄ (90)
12 4 (100) 4 ⁄ (114)
12 5 (127) 5 ⁄ (140)
12 6 (152) 7 (178) 8 (203)
8
 D4097 − 19
7.2.5 The outer structural overlay of a joint shall be centered
on the joint, fabricated in accordance with 6.6.1, and shall be
finished in accordance with 7.1.2.
7.3 Fittings and Accessories:
7.3.1 The surface of fittings, tank accessories, and the
laminates required for their installation, that are exposed to the
corrosive media, shall be constructed in accordance with 7.1.1
and 7.1.2, except for those fitting surfaces which are made by
manufacturing processes other than contact molding.
7.3.1.1 The cut edges of all laminates exposed to the
chemical environment shall be sealed with a laminate conform-
ing to 7.1.1 and 7.1.2. Where shape, thickness, or other
restrictions preclude covering the edges with the preceding
laminate, such cut edges and any machined flange faces shall
be at least coated with resin. In either case, the resin used shall
be that used in the equipment laminate and finished in
accordance with 7.1.3.2.
7.3.2 Nozzle and Manway Installation—Flanged nozzles
may be installed with the pipe stub flush with the inside of the
tank shell (Flush Type, Fig. 5) or projecting inside the tank
(Penetrating Type, Fig. 6).
7.3.2.1 Nozzle Projection—The installed nozzle shall main-
tain a minimum clearance of 3 in. (76 mm) between the back
face of the flange and the exterior of the cutout opening
reinforcement. In addition, this clearance shall not be less than
the shear distance required for proper installation of the nozzle
(see 7.3.3).
7.3.2.2 Cutout Reinforcement Laminate—When a vessel
shell or head is cut in an area bearing hydrostatic pressure, P,
the cutout shall be reinforced on a circular area concentric with
the cutout as shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6. Acceptable patterns of
reinforcement placement are shown in Fig. 7.
7.3.2.3 Cutout Reinforcement Diameter—The outer diam-
eter of the cutout reinforcing laminate, dr, shall not be less than
two times the nominal nozzle diameter. For nozzles less than 6
in. (152 mm) in diameter, the minimum cutout reinforcement
diameter, dr, shall be the nominal nozzle size plus 6 in. (152
mm).
7.3.2.4 Cutout Reinforcement Thickness—The thickness, tr,
of the cutout reinforcement laminate for nozzles installed in
cylindrical shells or dished heads shall be determined as
follows:

FIG. 5 Flush Nozzle Installation

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19

FIG. 6 Penetrating Nozzle Installation

t r 5 PDK/2S r reinforcing layers should be staggered to avoid overlapping

where:
K = 1.0 for nozzles 6-in. (152-mm) diameter and larger,
K = d/(dr − d) for nozzles less than 6-in. (152-mm)
diameter,
P = hydrostatic pressure at the point of nozzle installation,
psi (kPa),
D = inside diameter of tank, in. (mm),
Sr = allowable tensile stress (not to exceed 1⁄10 of the
ultimate strength of the cutout reinforcing laminate)
(Table 6),
d = nominal nozzle diameter, in. (mm), and
dr = cutout reinforcement diameter, in. (mm).
This thickness, tr, may be applied to the outer or inner
surfaces, or be divided between them as shown in Fig. 7.
NOTE 16—When tr is calculated to be 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) or less, it can be
disregarded, as the strength requirements will be met by to, the overlay
thickness shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6.
7.3.2.5 When reinforcing materials are cut to facilitate
placement around an installed nozzle, joints in successive
and (on cylindrical shell installations) shall not be placed so
they parallel the axis of the tank. The intent of this requirement
is to avoid orienting joints in reinforcing layers perpendicular
to the maximum load-bearing direction (circumferential).
7.3.3 Nozzle Installation Laminates—Nozzle installation
laminate dimensions are shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6. Installation
laminate placements are shown in Fig. 7. The all interior
installation laminate placement is used only when the nozzle
being installed has an integral conical gusset preventing
application of an exterior laminate.
7.3.3.1 Installation Laminate Thickness—The inside and
outside installation thicknesses (tl and to) combined shall be at
least as thick as the nozzle neck.
7.3.3.2 Inside Installation Laminate Construction—The in-
side installation laminate shall be constructed using only
noncontinuous glass reinforcement, except that when woven
roving is included to strengthen the laminate, it shall be
preceded and followed by a layer of 11⁄2 oz mat and then
covered with a laminate equivalent to 7.1.1 and 7.1.2. When

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19

NOTE 1—This installation method is used only when the nozzle is being installed with an integral conical gusset which would prevent application of
an exterior laminate.
FIG. 7 Nozzle Installation and Cutout Reinforcement Location Alternate

the inside laminate consists only of a corrosion barrier, the
length of the laminate, hr, shall be a minimum of 3 in. and
hi shall be the lesser of 3 in. or the nominal radius of the nozzle.
7.3.3.3 Installation Laminate Lengths—The length of the
outside laminate, ho, and the inside laminate, hi, shall each be
equal to the shear length, hs, given in Table 6, based on the
thickness of the individual laminates.
7.3.3.4 In nozzle installations where the installation overlay
is installed before the cutout reinforcement has fully cured, that
portion of the overlay which extends onto the tank shell may be
considered to become a part of the cutout reinforcement
laminate if the installation laminate length is extended to the
required cutout reinforcement diameter, dr.
7.3.3.5 Monolithic Installation—The total bond thickness,
tm, shall be the greater of either the cutout reinforcement
thickness, tr, or the outside bond thickness, to.
7.3.4 Gussets—If gussets (either plate or conical) are used to
stiffen the installed nozzle, gusset installation laminates are in
addition to the requirements of 7.3.3. Typical plate type and
conical type gussets are shown in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4. Other
gusseted nozzle installations may be used as agreed upon
between fabricator and purchaser.
7.3.5 Location of Cutouts on the Shell—For cutouts made
within 6 in. (152 mm) of the knuckle radius area of a head or
within 6 in. (152 mm) of a shell-to-shell or shell-to-head joint,
additional hole cutout reinforcement is required, unless the
area of installation is at a point within the vessel that is not
exposed to hydrostatic pressure.
7.3.6 All nozzles and manways shall be installed in accor-
dance with Fig. 5 and Fig. 6. The interior overlay shall present
the same corrosion resistance to the fluid as specified in 7.1.1
and 7.1.2.
8. Requirements
8.1 Physical Properties—The minimum physical properties
of the laminate constructions used to manufacture various
portions of a tank and its accessories shall be as shown in Table

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19
6 when tested in accordance with 11.5 and 11.6 or as agreed
upon between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
8.2 Degree of Cure—Degree of cure of the laminate shall be
found by determining the Barcol hardness as indicated in 11.7.
NOTE 17—The use of organic reinforcing materials may reduce the
Barcol hardness readings without necessarily indicating undercure.
NOTE 18—A test for the surface cure of polyester reins is as follows:
Remove mold release or paraffin wax, if present, and wipe clean of dust.
Rub a small amount of acetone on the laminate surface until it evaporates.
If the surface becomes softened or tacky, it is an indication of undercure.
9. Dimensions and Tolerances
9.1 Standard tank diameters, based on internal measure-
ments with the tank in the vertical position, are listed in Table
7. Tolerance on the inside diameter, including out-of-
roundness, shall be 61 %.
9.2 Where employed, shell taper shall be additive to the
figure used for the tank diameter, unless otherwise specified by
the manufacturer and accepted by the purchaser. The shell taper
shall not exceed 1⁄2 ° per side.
9.3 Tolerance on overall tank height shall be 1⁄2 %, but shall
not exceed 61⁄2 in. (613 mm).
9.4 Nozzle flange faces shall be perpendicular to the cen-
terline of the pipe within tolerances shown in Fig. 8, and shall
be flat within 61⁄32 in. (60.8 mm) through 18-in. (457-mm)
nozzle size and 61⁄16 in. (61.6 mm) for larger nozzles sizes.
Tolerances on installation are shown in Fig. 8.
9.5 The standard orientation of flanges shall provide bolt
holes straddling the normal centerlines of the tank. Bolt holes
of flanges located on the tank top or bottom shall straddle the
principal X-Y centerlines of the vessel or lines parallel to it as
shown in Fig. 8.
9.6 The location of nozzles shall be held to the tolerances
shown in Fig. 8.
10. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
10.1 The minimum acceptable level for workmanship and
finish of the finished laminate shall conform to the require-
ments specified in Section 9 of Specification C582.

TABLE 7 Dimensions for Contact Molded Nozzles (25 psi Rating)

Nozzle Inside Maximum Wall Minimum Flange Minimum Hub Minimum Hub
Diameter, (D), Thickness, (tn), Thickness, (tt), Thickness, (th), Length, (h),
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)

1 (25) ⁄ (5)
3 16 ⁄ (13)
12 ⁄ (6)
14 2 (51)
11⁄2 (38) ⁄ (5)
3 16 ⁄ (13)
12 ⁄ (6)
14 2 (51)
2 (51) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) ⁄ (6)
12 2 (51)
3 (76) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄2 (6) 2 (51)
4 (102) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄2 (6) 2 (51)
6 (152) 3⁄16 (5) 1⁄2 (13) 1⁄2 (6) 2 (51)
8 (203) 3⁄16 (5) 9⁄16 (14) 5⁄16 (8) 21⁄4 (57)
10 (254) 3⁄16 (5) 11⁄16 (17) 3⁄8 (10) 23⁄4 (70)
12 (305) 3⁄16 (5) 3⁄4 (19) 3⁄8 (10) 3 (76)
14 (356) 1⁄4 (6) 13⁄16 (21) 7⁄16 (11) 31⁄4 (83)
16 (406) 1⁄4 (6) 7⁄8 (22) 7⁄16 (11) 31⁄2 (89)
18 (457) 1⁄4 (6) 15⁄16 (24) 1⁄2 (13) 33⁄4 (95)
20 (508) 1⁄4 (6) 1 (25) 1⁄2 (13) 4 (102)
24 (610) 1⁄4 (6) 11⁄8 (29) 9⁄16 (14) 41⁄2 (114)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19

Nozzle Inside Diameter, in. Permissible Angular Deviation, −0

Up to 10 1°
10 and larger ⁄ °
12

NOTE 1—Larger tolerances may be agreed upon between purchaser and fabricator for tanks over 12 ft in diameter.
FIG. 8 Nozzle Location and Orientation Tolerances

NOTE 19—A representative laminate sample may be used for determi-
nation of an acceptable surface finish and acceptable level of visual
imperfections.
11. Test Methods
11.1 Conditioning—Condition the specimens prior to test at
23 6 2°C (70 to 77°F) for not less than 40 h in accordance with
Procedure A of Method D618, for those tests when condition-
ing is required and in all cases of disagreement.
11.2 Test Conditions—Conduct the test at a laboratory
temperature of 70 to 77°F (23 6 2°C) unless otherwise
specified.
11.3 Chemical Resistance of Resin—Determine the chemi-
cal resistance of the resin in accordance with Practice C581.
11.4 Glass Content—Determine the glass content of the
inner liner and interior layer combined. Obtain a test sample by
carefully splitting these combined areas from the structural
layer. The glass content of the separated sample shall be
determined in accordance with Test Method D2584.
11.5 Tensile Strength—Tensile strength of the laminate shall
be determined in accordance with Method D638.
11.6 Flexural Properties—Determine the flexural strength
and tangent modulus of elasticity of the laminate in accordance
with Method D790.
11.7 Degree of Cure—Degree of cure of the laminate shall
be found by determining the Barcol hardness in accordance
with Test Method D2583.
11.8 Physical Properties—Where required, physical proper-
ties shall be determined in accordance with the test methods
listed in Specification C582.
NOTE 20—A useful technique to check for cure of a non-molded surface
of a polyester laminate is as follows: Rub a few drops of acetone on the
laminate surface until it evaporates. If the surface becomes softened or

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19
tacky, it is an indication of under cure.
NOTE 21—Barcol hardness values may vary when tests are conducted at
temperatures that differ from those shown in 11.7.
12. Product Marking
12.1 The tank shall be marked to identify the producer, date
of manufacture, the capacity, all resins used, inner surface
reinforcements, specific gravity, design temperature, and the
words “Pressure-Atmospheric,” or the operating pressure and
vacuum, shall be imprinted on the tank.
12.2 Additional marking requirements may be needed for
compliance with local codes. It is the responsibility of the
purchaser or the user, or both, to specify additional labelling
requirements for the vessel, such as liquid content, operating
and safety instructions, NFPA symbols, and any other warnings
necessitated by local codes.
13. Packaging and Package Marking
13.1 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
14. Shipping
14.1 Since there are variations in the design of support
cradles, lifting and hold-down lugs, and methods of shipping,
the manufacturer’s special instructions shall be followed in all
cases.
14.2 Tanks shall be mounted on cradles if shipping
horizontally, or on a suitable skid of pallet if shipping in the
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. HANDLING AND INSTALLATION
X1.1 Handling
X1.1.1 The following normal precautions should be taken in
handling the tank at the destination:
X1.1.1.1 Proper rigging practices should be observed at all
times. Hoisting equipment operators should attach a guide line
to prevent the tank from swinging out of control.
X1.1.1.2 The tank should not be dropped or allowed to
strike any other object. Damage caused by such action may
result in cracking the inner corrosion-resistant liner, as well as
the structural portion of the tank.
X1.1.1.3 The tank should not be rolled or slid on rough
ground. Never set a tank upon a fitting or other protrusion that
may be attached to the shell.
X1.1.1.4 In working around the tank, care should be exer-
cised to prevent tools, scaffolding, or other objects from
striking the tank or being dropped on, or inside the tank.
Soft-soled shoes should be worn by workman entering the
tank. Where ladders are used (inside and outside), all points of
contact with the tank should be cushioned to protect the surface
from scratching or point loading.
X1.1.1.5 The use of a crane is recommended, both in lifting
and positioning the tank. The clearance between the head
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
vertical position. The cradles or skid shall be padded and
secured to the bed of the vehicle in such a manner that will
prevent damage to the tank with normal handling. The tank
shall be secured to the cradles or skid so that there can be no
movement of the tank in a relation to the skid or cradle under
normal handling.
14.3 A suitable stiffening member shall be provided at the
open end of open-top tanks.
14.4 Tanks shall be loaded to provide at least 2-in. (50.8-
mm) clearance between the tank (including fittings) and the
bulkheads or bed of the vehicle.
14.5 When two or more tanks are shipped on the same
vehicle, sufficient clearance or padding shall be provided
between tanks to prevent contact in transit.
14.6 Upon arrival at the destination, the purchaser shall be
responsible for inspection for damage in transit. If damage has
occurred, a claim should be filed with the carrier by the
purchaser and the supplier should be notified. If the damage is
not first repaired by the fabricator prior to the tank being put
into service, the purchaser accepts all future responsibility for
the effects of tank failure resulting from such damage.
15. Keywords
15.1 above ground; atmosphere; contact-molded; polyester;
vinylester
shackle of the crane and the tank should be at least equal to the
span between the lugs used for lifting. If this is not possible, a
spreader bar must be used to approximate the same angle in
lifting.
X1.1.1.6 Where tanks are not equipped with lifting lugs, it
is recommended that such tanks be lifted with rope slings (over
1 in. in diameter) or fabric straps positioned near each end of
the tank. Tanks can be moved by positioning fork lift trucks on
either side of the tank with forks padded.
X1.1.1.7 Under no conditions should chains or cables be
allowed to contact a tank. Full protection must be provided
when using chains or cables. Do not attach lifting devices to
any fitting other than lifting lugs.
X1.1.1.8 When storing the tank on the ground prior to
installation, it should be placed on the shipping cradles and tied
down so that it cannot roll due to wind or sloping ground.
X1.2 Installation
X1.2.1 Vertical flat bottom tanks should be installed on a
base providing continuous support and having sufficient
strength to support the weight of the tank full of liquid with
 D4097 − 19
negligible deflection. Full support of the bottom should be
obtained by one of the following:
X1.2.1.1 If the surface of the pad and the bottom of the tank
are flat and have no projections from the plane surface, the tank
may be set on such a surface.
X1.2.1.2 If the conditions of X1.2.1.1 cannot be met,
methods of support recommended by the manufacturer should
be used.
X1.2.2 If the tank has a bottom drain, a hole should be
provided in the pad with sufficient clearance so that the drain
and its flange will not contact the base at any point.
X1.2.3 Erection of Vertical Tank:
X1.2.3.1 Tanks should be handled with a crane, utilizing the
lifting lugs provided. Do not attempt to lift the tank by
attaching to other fittings. Prior to hoisting the top end, a
suitable protection pad of material should be placed under the
bottom pivot point of the tank so that as the tank rises, the
strain is taken on the pad. The hoist wire should be connected
to the top lifting lugs, and tank should be raised carefully using
guide ropes to prevent sudden swinging.
X1.2.3.2 All hold-down lugs supplied should be utilized to
secure the tank to its pad. Hold-down lugs should be grouted or
shimmed to prevent excessive loads being trans-ferred to the
tank shell.
X1.2.3.3 Valves, controllers, or other heavy items connected
to the tank nozzle should be independently supported.
X1.2.3.4 When agitators, mixers, or cooling/heating coils
are to be installed, special design considerations are to be used.

X2. WALL THICKNESSES

X2.1 The wall thicknesses shown in Table X2.1 can be used

as a guide for tanks designed in accordance with the equation
in 6.1, using the minimum laminate physical properties given
in Table 6.
TABLE X2.1 Wall ThicknessesA
Distance from Tank Diameter, ft (Inch-Pound Units)
top, ft 2 21⁄2 3 31⁄ 2 4 41⁄ 2 5 5 1⁄ 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Wall Thickness, in.

2 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16

4 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16 ⁄
3 16

6 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄
8 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄4 1 ⁄4 1⁄4 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄ 14 ⁄
10 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄4 1 ⁄4 1⁄4 1 ⁄4 1⁄5 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
5 16 ⁄
5 16

12 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 ⁄

5 16 ⁄
5 16 38 ⁄
14 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 ⁄
38 38 ⁄
16 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄8 3 ⁄8 ⁄
7 16

18 3⁄16 3⁄16 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄8 3⁄8 7⁄16 12 ⁄
20 3⁄16 3⁄16 1⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 3 ⁄8 3⁄8 7⁄16 1⁄2 12 ⁄
22 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 3 ⁄8 7⁄16 1⁄2 1 ⁄2 ⁄
9 16

24 3⁄16 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 1 ⁄4 5⁄16 5⁄16 5⁄16 3⁄8 3⁄8 7⁄16 1⁄2 1⁄2 9⁄16 58 ⁄
Distance from Tank Diameter, m (SI Units)
top, m 0.61 0.76 0.914 1.07 1.22 1.37 1.524 1.68 1.88 2.134 2.44 2.743 3.048 3.35 3.55
Wall Thickness, mmA

0.61 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76
1.22 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76
1.33 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35
2.44 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
3.05 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94
3.66 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53
4.27 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53
4.38 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53 9.53 11.11
5.49 4.76 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53 9.53 11.11 12.70
6.10 4.76 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53 9.53 11.11 12.70 12.70
6.72 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53 11.11 12.70 12.70 14.29
7.32 4.76 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.53 9.53 11.11 12.70 12.70 14.29 15.88
A
This table is based on a design factor of 10 to 1 and a liquid specific gravity of 1.2 using the laminate construction detailed in 7.1.1, 7.1.2, and 7.1.3 and the minimum
laminate physical properties in Specification C582, Table 7.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
15
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4097 − 19

X3. DISHED BOTTOM

X3.1 An alternative method for calculating the thickness of

an elevated torispherical dished bottom head is as follows:
(refer to Fig. X3.1):
t c 5 PR c /2S 5 0.036 γ HRc /2S or ~ 0.2489 γ HRc W/2S !
t i 5 PR c W/2S 5 0.036 γ HRc W/2S or ~ 0.2489 γ HRc W/2S !

where:
tc = head thickness in area of the crown radius, in. (mm),
ti = head thickness in area of the knuckle radius, in. (mm),
S = allowable stress, psi (kPa),
γ = specific gravity of fluid
P = pressure, psi (kPa),
Rc = crown radius of dished head, in. (mm),
H = fluid head, in. (mm), FIG. X3.1 Thickness of Dished-Bottom Head
W = stress intersification factor = (1⁄4) (3 + square root Rc/ri),
and
ri = knuckle radius of the dished head, in. (mm).

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:17:55 EDT 2020
16
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4161 − 14 (Reapproved 2019)

Standard Specification for

“Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin)
Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4161; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

1.1 This specification covers axially unrestrained bell-and-
spigot gasket joints including couplings required for machine-
made “fiberglass” (glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin)
pipe systems, 8 in. (200 mm) through 156 in. (4000 mm), using
flexible elastomeric seals to obtain soundness. The pipe sys-
tems may be pressure (typically up to 250 psi) or nonpressure
systems for water or for chemicals or gases that are not
deleterious to the materials specified in this specification. This
specification covers materials, dimensions, test requirements,
and methods of test.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information purposes only.
NOTE 1—There is a similar but technically different ISO Standard (ISO
8639).
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
tics
F412 Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems
F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Join-
ing Plastic Pipe
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions and abbreviations are in accor-
dance with Terminology D883 or Terminology F412, and
Terminology D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
4. Types of Joints
4.1 This specification covers two types of axially unre-
strained joints based on effecting soundness of the joint
through compression of an elastomeric seal or ring:
4.1.1 Bell-and-spigot or coupling joint with the gasket
placed in the bell in circumferential compression. An elasto-
meric gasket joint design featuring a continuous elastomeric
ring gasket placed in an annular space provided in the bell or
socket of the pipe or fitting. The spigot end of the pipe or fitting
is forced into the bell, thereby compressing the gasket radially
to form a positive seal.
4.1.2 Bell-and-spigot or coupling joint with the gasket
placed on the spigot in circumferential tension: A push on joint
design featuring a continuous elastomeric ring gasket placed in
an annular space provided on the spigot end of the pipe or
fitting. The spigot is forced into the bell of the pipe or fitting,
thereby compressing the gasket radially to form a positive seal.
NOTE 2—A coupling joint of these types is a loose double-bell sleeve
used to connect pipes which have spigots at both ends (see Fig. 1). All
references to bells in this specification are applicable to the sleeve
coupling as well as to the integral bell of a bell-and-spigot gasket joint.

5. Materials and Manufacture

1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on 5.1 The gasket shall be a continuous elastomeric ring of
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced circular or other geometric cross section and shall meet the
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved April 1, 2019. Published May 2019. Originally requirements of Specification F477, unless otherwise specified
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D4161 – 14. DOI: in this specification. When a splice is used in the manufacture
10.1520/D4161-14R19.
2
of the gasket, no more than two splices shall be made in any
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
one gasket.
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on 5.1.1 The chemical composition of the gasket shall be
the ASTM website. compatible with the type of environment to which it will be

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:01 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4161 − 14 (2019)
FIG. 1 Typical Coupling Joint Detail
subjected. Selection of the gasket composition shall be in
accordance with a purchaser and seller agreement.
NOTE 3—Consult the gasket manufacturer for advice as to the suitabil-
ity of specific rubber compounds for the intended service and joint
configurations. Items such as cold set when the joint is deflected under
low-temperature conditions and maximum and minimum stretch in the
gasket may be dependent upon the specific chemical compounds used.
5.2 Materials in the bell and spigot of the joint shall meet
the requirements of the applicable ASTM specification for the
pipe or fitting of which the joint is a part.
6. Requirements
6.1 Joint Surfaces—All surfaces of the joint upon or against
which the gasket may bear shall be smooth and free of cracks,
fractures, or other imperfections that would adversely affect the
performance of the joint.
6.2 Joint Geometry—The design of the joint shall include a
means to retain the gasket and prevent it from being uninten-
tionally displaced, either during assembly of the joint or during
operation of the completed pipe system.
6.3 Dimensions and Tolerances—The provisions of 6.3.1.1
apply only to a joining system utilizing a gasket of circular
cross section retained in a rectangular groove. Manufacturers
may submit to the purchaser detailed designs for joints utilizing
gaskets or grooves, or both, of other geometric shape or for
joints not meeting the criteria of 6.3.1. Joints not meeting the
requirements of this section shall meet the test requirements of
Section 7; such joints shall be acceptable, provided the design
is approved by the purchaser prior to manufacture and provided
the test pipe complies with the specified test requirements. Test
results may be extended to other diameters with the same joint
configuration, gasket shape and gasket composition provided
substantially similar gasket compressions and gasket hardness
are maintained. Gasket dimensions may be increased or de-
creased provided joint geometry is also appropriately propor-
tioned so that critical relationships like gasket confinement are
equal or superior to the tested joint. Design submissions shall
include joint geometry, tolerances, gasket characteristics, pro-
posed plant tests, and such other information as required by the
purchaser to evaluate the joint design for field performance.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:01 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.3.1 Joints Using Circular Gasket Cross Sections:
6.3.1.1 The volume of the annular space provided for the
gasket, with the engaged joint at normal joint closure in
concentric position, and neglecting ellipticity of the bell and
spigot, shall not be less than the design volume of the gasket
furnished. For a rectangular gasket groove, the cross-sectional
area of annular space shall be calculated for minimum bell
inside diameter, maximum spigot outside diameter, minimum
width of groove at surface of spigot, and minimum depth of
groove. The volume of the annular space shall be calculated at
the centerline of the groove and considering the centroid of the
cross-sectional area to be at the midpoint between the surface
of the groove on which the gasket is seated and the surface of
the bell, if the groove is on the spigot, or the surface of the
spigot, if the groove is in the bell.
6.3.1.2 When the design volume of the gasket is less than
75 % of the volume of the annular space in which the gasket is
confined, the dimensions and tolerances of the gasket, bell, and
spigot shall be such that, when the outer surface of the spigot
and the inner surface of the bell come into contact at some
point in their periphery, the deformation in the gasket shall not
exceed 40 % at the point of contact nor be less than 15 % at any
point. If the design volume of the gasket is 75 % or more of the
volume of the annular space, the deformation of the gasket, as
prescribed above, shall not exceed 50 % nor be less than 15 %.
The cross-sectional area of annular space shall be calculated
for average bell diameter, average spigot diameter, average
width of groove at surface of spigot, and average depth of
groove. The volume of the annular space shall be calculated at
the centerline of the groove and considering the centroid of the
cross-sectional area to be at the midpoint between the surface
of the groove on which the gasket is seated and the surface of
the bell, if the groove is on the spigot, or the surface of the
spigot, if the groove is in the bell.
NOTE 4—It is recognized that a relationship exists between the
water-tightness of a joint, the gasket deformation, and the ratio of gasket
volume to space volume. For high-pressure applications, it may be
necessary to provide a very high-volume ratio to obtain a sound joint.
Some manufacturers also have developed satisfactory joints with very
little gasket deformation, but meet the requirements of Section 6 by
utilizing a very high-volume ratio.
6.3.1.3 When determining the maximum percent deforma-
tion of the gasket, the minimum depth of groove and the
stretched gasket diameter shall be used and calculations made
at the centerline of the groove. When determining the mini-
mum percent deformation of the gasket, the maximum bell
diameter, the minimum spigot diameter, the maximum depth of
groove, and the stretched gasket diameter shall be used and
calculations made at the centerline of the groove. For gasket
deformation calculations, if the gasket is placed on the spigot
in circumferential tension, the stretched gasket diameter shall
be determined as being the design diameter of the gasket
divided by the square root of (1 + x) where x equals the design
percent of gasket stretch divided by 100. If the gasket is placed
in the bell in circumferential compression, the design diameter
of the gasket shall be used.
6.3.1.4 The taper on all sealing surfaces of the bell and
spigot on which the elastomeric gasket may bear after closure
of the joint and at any degree of partial closure, except within
 D4161 − 14 (2019)
the gasket groove, shall form an angle of not more than 2° with
the longitudinal axis of the pipe. If the joint design does not
incorporate a mechanical locking feature, the joint shall be
designed and manufactured in such a way that at the position
of normal joint closure, the parallel surfaces upon which the
gasket may bear after closure will extend not less than 0.75 in.
(20 mm) away from the edges of the gasket groove.
6.3.1.5 Circular Gaskets:
(1) In a joint in which the gasket is placed in the bell in
circumferential compression, the circumferential length of the
gasket shall be such that, when inserted into the gasket groove,
the amount of circumferential compression will be less than
4 %. In larger pipe diameters, an adhesive may be required to Pipe Size Joint Angle
hold the gasket in place prior to installation. # 20 in. 3°
(2) In an elastomeric joint in which the gasket is placed on >20 in. # 33 in. 2°
>33 in. # 60 in. 1°
the spigot in circumferential tension, the circumferential length > 60 in. 1⁄ 2 °

of the gasket shall be such that, when installed in the gasket

groove, the amount of stretch shall not exceed 30 %.
(3) Compute the amount of compression or stretch by
comparing the circumferential length of the centroid of the
relaxed gasket with the circumferential length of the centroid
of the compressed or stretched gasket after installation in the
bell or on the spigot.
(4) Each gasket shall be manufactured to provide the
volume of elastomer required by the pipe manufacturer’s joint
design, with a tolerance of 61 % for gaskets of 1.0-in.
(25-mm) diameter and larger. The allowable percentage toler-
ance shall vary linearly between 63 % and 61 % for gasket
diameters between 0.5 and 1.0 in. (13 and 25 mm).
6.3.2 The tolerances permitted in the construction of the
joint shall be those stated in the pipe manufacturer’s design as
approved.
6.3.3 Drawings—The manufacturer shall furnish drawings
of the joint and gasket, including dimensions and tolerances, if
requested by the purchaser.
7. Laboratory Performance Requirements
7.1 General:
7.1.1 The gasket shall be the sole element depended upon to
make the joint leakproof. The assembled joints shall pass the
performance tests listed in this section. The tests shall be
performed with components selected to provide minimum
compression in the gasket. The internal hydrostatic pressures
required in 7.2 and 7.3 shall be two times the rated pressure, if
the pipe is manufactured for pressure service, or 29 psi (200
kPa), if the pipe is manufactured for nonpressure service.
7.1.2 Laboratory hydrostatic pressure tests on joints shall be
made on an assembly of two sections of pipe properly
connected in accordance with the joint design. Suitable bulk-
heads may be provided within the pipe adjacent to and on
either side of the joint, or the outer ends of the two jointed pipe
sections may be bulkheaded. Restraints may be provided at the
joint to resist transverse thrust. No coatings, fillings, or
packings shall be placed prior to the hydrostatic tests.
7.2 Pipes in Angularly Deflected Position—Using a pipe
and joint system as described in 7.1.2, the test sections shall be
deflected angularly, as shown in Fig. 2, and subjected to the
appropriate internal hydrostatic test pressure for 10 min with-
NOTE 1—Joint opening shall not exceed the maximum unstressed limit
permitted by dimensional clearance between spigot and bell.
FIG. 2 Typical Bell-and-Spigot Gasket Joint Detail
out leakage. The angle defined by the joint openings given in
Fig. 2 is the angle between the axis of the two joined pipes.
7.2.1 Joints intended for use of pressures greater than 250
psi may have lower allowable angular deflections than those
given in Fig. 2 by manufacturer purchaser agreement. The
joints shall be tested at the manufacturers maximum allowed
angular deflection.
7.2.2 Determine the joint opening by scribing a circumfer-
ential index mark on the outside of the pipe a sufficient distance
from the spigot end to be visible when the pipe is joined.
Measure the maximum and minimum distance from the end of
the bell to the mark. The difference equals the joint opening.
Fig. 2 illustrates a typical joint in closed and deflected positions
and the index mark.
NOTE 5—This test is a laboratory performance test of joint integrity and
is not indicative of allowable angular deflections in field installations. In
actual installations, deflections greater than the manufacturer’s recom-
mended maximum should be avoided, and elbows, bends, or special
fittings should be used in such cases.
7.3 Pipes in Laterally Offset Position (Shear Loading)—
Using a pipe and joint system as described in 7.1.2, the test
sections shall be deflected while the pipe units are in a
horizontal position, as shown in Fig. 3, by applying a perpen-
dicular load. The load shall be 100 lb/in. (17.5 kN/m) in
diameter. The load shall be uniformly applied over an arc of not
more than 120° along a longitudinal distance equal to one pipe
diameter or 12 in. (300 mm), whichever is the smaller, at the
unsupported spigot end of the pipe immediately adjacent to the
bell of the assembled joint. The pipe in the test shall be
supported on adequate blocks placed immediately behind or on
the bells, as indicated in Fig. 3. Bands may be required to
secure the pipe to the blocks. There shall be no leakage when
the appropriate internal hydrostatic test pressure is applied for
10 min after application of the load.
7.4 Vacuum or External Pressure Test—The assembled joint
shall withstand an external pressure of 11.6-psi (80-kPa) gage
or an internal vacuum of −11.6-psi (−80-kPa) gage while in the

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:01 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4161 − 14 (2019)

NOTE 1—The load shall be applied perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. It may be applied vertically, as shown in this figure, or at any other
circumferential orientation.
FIG. 3 Shear Loading-Test Setup

angularly deflected position, as in 7.2, and in the laterally offset 8. Retesting

position, as in 7.3. Allow the pressure to stabilize for 30 min,
then seal off for a minimum of 10 min. The maximum
permissible pressure increase inside of the pipe during the
seal-off period shall be 0.1 psi (0.7 kPa). Some grades of pipe
may not have the capability in the pipe wall of withstanding the
above vacuum or external pressure. In such cases, the joint
design may be considered as meeting these criteria if a pipe and
joint system, incorporating a geometrically identical joint and
heavier-walled pipe, meets the criteria satisfactorily.
8.1 If any failure occurs during performance of the tests
specified in Section 7, the joint may be retested to establish
conformity in accordance with agreement between the pur-
chaser and the manufacturer.
9. Keywords
9.1 angular deflection; bell and spigot; coupling; elasto-
meric seals; flexible gasket; glass-fiber-reinforced; pipe joints;
specification; thermosetting resin

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standards since the last issue
(D4161–14) that may impact the use of this standard.

(1) Reapproved without changes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:01 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4167 − 15

Standard Specification for

Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Fans and Blowers1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4167; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers centrifugal and axial fans and
blowers with airstream components fabricated of fiber-
reinforced thermoset plastics (FRP) for corrosion resistance. It
is acceptable for internal structures to include encapsulated
metal fastening devices, hubs, and shafts.
1.2 Reinforcing materials other than fibrous glass are ac-
ceptable for use in the fabrication, provided the fans and
blowers produced meet all the requirements of this specifica-
tion.
1.3 The term “fans” as used in this specification includes
fans and blowers, both centrifugal and axial.
1.4 The purpose of this specification is to provide users,
system designers, specifiers, and manufacturers of FRP fans
with minimum standards for fan construction and a common
basis for determining safe operating speeds.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information only.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
NOTE 2—Appendix X2 contains a list of documents potentially of
interest to designers of fan systems.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1 3
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2015. Published January 2016. Originally
approved in 1982. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as D4167 –97(2007).
DOI: 10.1520/D4167-15.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2563 Practice for Classifying Visual Defects in Glass-
Reinforced Plastic Laminate Parts
2.2 Other Standards:
AMCA 99 Standards Handbook3
AMCA Fan and Air System Applications Handbook
(AMCA 200, 201, 202, 203)3
AMCA Bulletin 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating3
AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans3
AMCA 301 Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
from Laboratory Test Data3
ACGIH Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended
Practice4
NFPA 91 Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying
of Vapors, Gases, Mists, and Particulate Solids5
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The definitions of terms used in this speci-
fication are the same as those found in Terminology D883.
4. Construction of Fan Housings
4.1 Laminate Construction shall conform to Specification
C582. The same resin shall be used throughout a housing
unless the user and manufacturer agree to use a different resin
for the inner surface and interior layer than for the structural
layer.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Available from Air Movement and Control Association International, 30 West
University Dr., Arlington Heights, IL 60004, http://www.amca.org.
4
Available from American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
(ACGIH), 1330 Kemper Meadow Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45240, http://www.acgih.org.
5
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, http://www.nfpa.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:03 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4167 − 15
4.1.1 The inner surface exposed to the chemical environ-
ment shall be a resin-rich layer 0.010 to 0.020 in. (0.25 to 0.5
mm) thick reinforced with a suitable chemical-resistant glass-
fiber surface mat or with an organic-fiber surface mat.
4.1.2 The inner surface layer shall be followed with an
interior layer composed of resin reinforced only with non-
continuous glass-fiber strands applied in a minimum of two
plies of chopped-strand mat equivalent to a total of 3 oz/ft2
(0.92 kg/m2). As an alternative, a minimum of two passes of
chopped roving of minimum length of 0.5 in. (13 mm) to a
maximum length of 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) shall be applied
uniformly to an equivalent weight of 3 oz/ft2 (0.92 kg/m2).
Each ply of mat or pass of chopped roving shall be well rolled
prior to the application of additional reinforcement. The
combined thickness of the inner surface and interior layer shall
not be less than 0.10 in. (2.5 mm).
4.1.3 The structural layer comprises the balance of the
housing laminate.
NOTE 3—Although fan housings are subject to vibrational stresses, the
design considerations regarding construction of the laminate are similar to
those used for static FRP process system components.
4.2 Fastening Devices, such as bolts, shall be made of
material the user and manufacturer agree is at least as
corrosion-resistant to the specified corrosive environment as is
the laminate construction, or shall be embedded in a laminate
in such a way that the laminate covering the device is
reinforced with at least two layers of 11⁄2 oz/ft2 (4.57 g/m2)
chopped-strand glass mat and with the same surface finish used
in the housing laminate.
4.3 Gasketing, used where housings are constructed so that
sections or inspection panels are removable, shall be of
elastomeric material sufficiently resilient to seal the sections.
The gasketing shall be of material the user and manufacturer
agree is suitable for the corrosive environment.
4.4 Housings, shall have minimum inside corner radii of 0.6
in. (15 mm).
4.5 Suitable housing construction design shall be deter-
mined by running the fan at maximum-rated speed with the
inlet blocked tight and with an open outlet. The design will be
deemed acceptable if the test does not cause any part of the
housing to move more than a distance equal to 1⁄2 of 1 % of the
wheel diameter from the position with the fan not running.
4.6 Where the user determines that system design is such
that it is possible that liquid will collect in housings, the fan
housings shall be specified with drains.
5. Construction of Fan Wheels
5.1 Where a history of service acceptable to the manufac-
turer and the user shows that resin systems and joint designs
selected for use in the construction of fan wheels are
acceptable, destruction tests need not be run. Where acceptable
history does not exist, destruction tests shall be performed in
accordance with Section 10.
5.2 Defects visible in fan wheels shall be limited to those
shown in Table 1 (taken from Practice D2563 and modified for
specific use with fan wheels).
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:03 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
5.3 Metal hubs, fasteners, and shafts shall be made of
material at least as corrosion-resistant to the specified corrosive
environment as is the laminate construction, or be encapsulated
with a laminate reinforced with at least two layers of 11⁄2 oz/ft2
(45.7 g/m2) chopped-strand mat with the same surface finish
that is used in the laminate.
5.4 Shafts not made of corrosion-resistant alloy shall be
protected by a sleeve of FRP extending out through the fan
housing a minimum of 0.4 in. (10 mm) (see Section 7).
5.5 Additives that obscure visual inspection shall be used
only in the final surface coat(s) for the purpose of enhancing
corrosion resistance or preventing the buildup of static
electricity, or both.
5.6 Acceptable surface treatments include the following:
resin coating without reinforcement; resin coating with
reinforcement, such as glass flakes, graphite, or surface veil; or
resin coating reinforced with other materials agreed upon by
the fabricator and user. Resins that exhibit air inhibition shall
be paraffinated for use in the final coat.
6. Spark-Resistant Construction
6.1 Fans built in accordance with this specification will be
spark-resistant, providing the outer surface of the wheel and
the inner surface of the housing are rendered electrostatically
conductive (6.1.1). To be considered acceptably conductive,
the surface resistivity between all points of the airstream
surface and ground shall be no more than 1 MΩ when tested
with an insulation resistance tester.6
6.1.1 The user shall electrically ground all fan parts in order
to maintain spark resistance.
7. Shaft-Hole Closures
7.1 It is possible that gas will flow either into or out of the
shaft holes of the fan housing, depending on pressure distribu-
tion in the system and type of fan wheel. The shaft-hole closure
shall be one of the following types, as specified by the user:
NOTE 4—The user needs to determine the importance of restricting gas
flow through the shaft holes before selecting the type of closure required.
7.1.1 Shaft encapsulated with an FRP sleeve to at least 0.4
in. (10 mm) outside the fan housing, with the shaft hole no
larger than the sleeve diameter plus 0.08 in. (2 mm). (An
acceptable alternative is to mount a membrane onto the
housing to maintain the 0.08-in. maximum space).
7.1.2 Lubricated lip seals or stuffing boxes must ride on
smooth metal shafts or shaft sleeves, necessitating the use of
shafts or shaft sleeves made of material selected to withstand
the corrosive environment.
6
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time
is the Danaher Corporation, 2200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Suite 800W,
Washington, DC 20037, to Everett, Washington. Their testers are sold by many
companies and can be located on their web site: www.danaher.com. If you are aware
of alternative suppliers, please provide this information to ASTM International
Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee,1 which you may attend.
 D4167 − 15
TABLE 1 Allowable Defects in the Construction of FRP Fan Wheels (adapted from Practice D2563)
Type of Defect Definition Degree Allowed

Chip A small piece broken off an edge or surface None permitted

Crack An actual separation of the laminate, visible on opposite surfaces, and extending through the None permitted
thickness
Crack, surface Crack existing only on the surface of the laminate None permitted
Crazing Fine cracks at or under the surface of a laminate None permitted
Delamination, edge Separation of the layers of material at the edge of a laminate None permitted
Delamination, internal Separation of the layers of material in a laminate None permitted
Dry spot Area of incomplete surface film where the reinforcement has not been wetted with resin 0.4-in. (10-mm) diameter and
1/ft2 (12/m2)
Foreign inclusion Metallic particles included in a laminate that are foreign to its composition 0.04-in. (1-mm) diameter and
(metallic) 1/ft2 (12/m2)
Foreign inclusion Nonmetallic particles of substance included in a laminate that seem foreign to its composition 0.04-in. (1-mm) diameter and
(nonmetallic) 1/ft2 (12/m2)
Fracture Rupture of laminate surface without complete penetration None permitted
Air bubble (void) Air entrapment within and between the plies of reinforcement, usually spherical in shape 0.04-in. (1-mm) diameter and
200/ft2 (2000/m2)
Blister Rounded elevation of the surface of a laminate, with boundaries more or less None permitted
sharply defined, somewhat resembling in shape a blister on the human skin
Burned Showing evidence of thermal decomposition through some discoloration, distortion, or destruc- None permitted
tion of the surface of the laminate
Fish-eye Small globular mass that has not blended completely into the surrounding material and is par- None permitted
ticularly evident in a transparent or translucent material
Lack of fillout An area, occurring usually at the edge of a laminated plastic, where the reinforcement has not None permitted
been wetted with resin
Orange peel Uneven surface somewhat resembling an orange peel None permitted
Pimple Small, sharp, or conical elevation on the surface of a laminate None permitted
Pit (pinhole) Small crater in the surface of a laminate, with its width approximately of the same order of mag- 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) and 200/ft2
nitude as its depth (2000/m2)
Porosity (pinhole) Presence of numerous visible pits (pinholes) None permitted
Pre-gel An unintentional extra layer of cured resin on part of the surface of the laminate. (This condition None permitted
does not cover gel coats.)
Resin pocket An apparent accumulation of excess resin in a small localized area within the laminate 0.125 by 0.250-in. (3 by 6
mm) and 1/ft2 (12/m2)
Resin-rich edge Insufficient reinforcing material at the edge of molded laminate None permitted
Shrink mark (sink) Depression in the surface of a molded laminate where it has retracted from the mold None permitted
Wash Area where the reinforcement of molded plastic has moved inadvertently during closure of the None permitted
mold resulting in resin-rich areas
Wormhole Elongated air entrapment that is either on or near the surface of a laminate and potentially cov- None permitted
ered by a thin film of cured resin
Wrinkles In a laminate, an imperfection that has the appearance of a wave molded into one or more plies None permitted
of fabric or other reinforcement material
Scratch Shallow mark groove, furrow, or channel caused by improper handling or storage None permitted
Short In a laminate, an incompletely filled out condition None permitted
Note—It is possible that this will be evident either through an absence of surface film in some
areas, or as lighter unfused particles of material showing through a covering surface film, possi-
bly accompanied by thin-skinned blisters.

8. Balancing and Test Running
8.1 The fan manufacturer shall perform one of the following
methods of checking balance of wheel/shaft assemblies and
complete fans:
8.1.1 Dynamically balance the wheel/shaft assembly as a
unit in accordance with ANSI S2.19, Grade 6.3. For example:
At 1000 rpm the maximum total residual unbalance of both
planes is not to exceed 0.002 lb·in./lb (0.05 g·mm/g) of the total
assembly weight.
8.1.2 Run the assembled fan and balance in such a way that
the peak-to-peak vibration measured horizontally at the pillow
blocks perpendicular to the axis of the shaft will not exceed the
following:
8.1.2.1 2.5 mils (0.06 mm) up to 600 rpm,
8.1.2.2 2.0 mils (0.05 mm) up to 900 rpm,
8.1.2.3 1.5 mils (0.04 mm) up to 1200 rpm,
8.1.2.4 1.0 mils (0.025 mm) up to 1800 rpm,
8.1.2.5 0.6 mils (0.015 mm) up to 3000 rpm, and
8.1.2.6 0.5 mils (0.013 mm) above 3000 rpm.
8.2 Balance correction shall be accomplished by one or
more of the following methods:
8.2.1 Removal of FRP built onto the wheel for this purpose.
8.2.2 Addition of FRP so that it becomes homogeneous with
the wheel by proper surface preparation (normally by grinding
away the surface to expose structural fibers) and laminating the
necessary weight on so that it blends into the wheel without
abrupt changes of contour.
8.2.3 Application of metal weights, where the weights and
necessary fasteners are compatible with the corrosive environ-
ment.
8.2.4 Application of metal weights and fasteners covered by
at least two layers of 11⁄2 oz/ft2 (45.7 g/m2) chopped-strand
glass mat with the same surface finish that is used in the
laminate.
8.3 In all cases, FRP exposed as in 8.2.1 or applied as in
8.2.2 and 8.2.4, shall be given the same surface treatment as
was used in constructing the wheel.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:03 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4167 − 15
9. Fan Aerodynamic Rating and Testing
9.1 Fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA
210, ANSI/ASHRAE 51, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating.
10. Safe Operating Speed
10.1 The variables of cross sections, reinforcement content,
resin characteristics, and bonding strength limit the applicabil-
ity of methods such as the use of strain gages, the use of brittle
lacquer, and the calculation of wheel stresses. Where a history
of service, acceptable to the manufacturer and user, shows that
resin systems and joint designs selected for use in the construc-
tion of fan wheels are acceptable, destruction tests need not be
run. Where a history of service, acceptable to the manufacturer
and user, is not available, representative wheels shall be tested
to destruction to determine actual failure speeds (see 5.1).
Application of a safety factor defines safe operating speed (see
10.1.4).
10.1.1 The test method is performed by running the wheel at
slowly increasing speed until failure occurs. Because the major
destructive stresses are centrifugal, and not related to fan
horsepower, tests can be run in a vacuum for the sake of
convenience.
APPENDIXES
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. NFPA REQUIREMENTS
X1.1 Some fans are required to conform with NFPA 91,
Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors,
Gases, Mists, and Particulate Solids, depending upon the
X2. DOCUMENTS OF POSSIBLE INTEREST TO DESIGNERS OF FAN SYSTEMS
X2.1 Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA):3
X2.1.1 Bulletin 300, Reverberant Room Method for Sound
Testing of Fans
X2.1.2 Bulletin 301, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data
X2.1.3 Fan and Air System Applications Handbook (AMCA
200, 201, 202, 203)
X2.1.3.1 Section One defines the usually unmeasurable
adverse effects of fan inlet and outlet connections that are other
than those used for rating purposes and which should be
included in the system designer’s calculations of fan pressure.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:03 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10.1.2 Destruction speed is defined as the speed at which the
test is discontinued because of complete or imminent failure.
10.1.3 The failure speed so determined is established in
reference to the specific size, construction, and resin system
used in the test wheel at 68°F (20°C).
10.1.4 The safe 68°F (20°C) operating speed is a maximum
of 58 % of the failure speed. (This is one-third failure stress, or
a safety factor of 3:1 on stress.)
10.1.5 The safe operating speed at other temperatures is the
speed at 68°F (20°C) multiplied by the square root of the ratio
of the flexural modulus at the elevated temperature to the
flexural modulus at 68°F (20°C).
11. Nameplates
11.1 Nameplates shall be permanently fastened to the fans
and shall carry the following information:
11.1.1 Identification of the fan manufacturer,
11.1.2 Serial or other identifying number, and
11.1.3 Fan size and model.
12. Keywords
12.1 axial blowers; centrifugal blowers; fan balancing; fan
housing; fan wheel; fiber-reinforced plastic fans (FRP fans);
FRP; safe operating speed
nature of the fan system. This standard should be studied prior
to the design of reinforced-plastic duct systems.
X2.1.4 Bulletin 99, Standards Handbook.
X2.1.4.1 Includes definitions of, and standard terminology
for, rotation and discharge, drive arrangements, and motor
position.
X2.2 ACGIH Publicastions. American Conference of Gov-
ernment Industrial Hygienists
X2.2.1 Industrial Ventilation—A Manual of Recommended
Practice
 D4167 − 15

X3. GAS DENSITY AT FAN INLET

X3.1 The system designer should note that fans are rated necessary to make density corrections for fan selection pur-
according to fan inlet density. (See AMCA 210 and AMCA poses. Gas-stream density may vary because of temperature or
201). When actual fan inlet density varies from that used for system resistance on the inlet side of the fan (the normal
standard ratings [usually 0.075 lb/ft3 (1.20 kg/m3)], it is situation for FRP fans) and because of chemical composition.

X4. RESIN SELECTION FOR CORROSION RESISTANCE

X4.1 The selection of resin for corrosion resistance is scrubbed by fumes (perhaps with entrapped or condensed
similar to that for other corrosion-resistant devices, but it liquid droplets).
should be recognized that the gas-stream surfaces of fans are

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4167 – 97(2007)) that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2015)

(1) Updated standards and other referenced documents. (4) Eliminated mandatory Note 4 and made it into actual
(2) Eliminated obsolete documents. standard text language.
(3) Eliminated non-mandatory language.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:03 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4226 − 19 An American National Standard

Standard Test Methods for

Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Building Products1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4226; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 These test methods cover the determination of the
energy required to crack or break rigid poly(vinyl chloride)
(PVC) plastic sheeting and profile flat sections used in building
products, as well as extruded or molded test samples, under
specified conditions of impact from a freefalling standard
weight striking an impactor with either of two configurations in
contact with the specimen.
1.2 Two test procedures are included:
1.2.1 Procedure A, used to determine minimum impact
energy required to cause failure (hole, crack, split, shatter, or
tear).
1.2.2 Procedure B, used to determine minimum impact
energy required to cause brittle failure.
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding, those in tables in figures) shall not be considered as
requirements of this standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific precautionary statements are given in Section 8.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic
Building Products.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2019. Published December 2019. Originally
approved in 1983. Last previous edition approved in 2016 as D4226 - 16. DOI:
10.1520/D4226-19.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid
Plastics Specimens
E178 Practice for Dealing With Outlying Observations
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883, unless otherwise specified. For terms relating to
precision and bias and associated issues, the terms used in this
standard are defined in accordance with E456.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 failure (of test specimen, as related to impact
resistance)—signified by the presence of a punched hole,
crack, split, shatter, or tear that was created in the target area by
the impact of the falling weight (see Fig. 1).
3.2.2 ductile failure (ductile break, as related to impact
resistance)—a tear or split having an angle greater than 0° at
the tip and extending through the entire thickness of the
specimen such that light is directly visible through the tear or
split (see Fig. 1).
3.2.3 brittle failure (brittle break, as related to impact
resistance)—a punched hole, split, or shatter where a piece of
the specimen separates from the main part of the specimen or
a crack that has a 0° angle at the tip as viewed by the naked eye
(see Fig. 1).
3.2.4 mean failure height (Procedure A)—the height from
which the falling weight will cause 50 % of the specimens to
fail.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4226 − 19

FIG. 1 Types of Failures of the Specimen

3.2.5 mean failure energy (mean impact resistance), ( Pro-
cedure A)—energy required to produce 50 % failures; the
product of the weight and mean failure height.
3.2.6 normalized mean failure energy (normalized mean
impact resistance)—the mean failure energy per unit (average)
specimen thickness (Procedure A).
3.2.7 mean brittle failure height—the height from which the
falling weight will cause 50 % brittle failures in specimens
(Procedure B).
3.2.8 mean brittle failure energy (mean energy of ductile-
to-brittle transition), (Procedure B)—energy required to pro-
duce 50 % brittle failures; the product of the weight and mean
brittle failure height.
3.2.9 normalized mean brittle failure energy (normalized
mean energy of ductile-to-brittle transition), (Procedure B)—
the mean brittle failure energy per unit (average) specimen
thickness.
3.2.10 outlier—an observation that appears to deviate mark-
edly from other members of the sample in which it occurs.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Flat sections of a PVC building profile are tested by
means of an impactor driven by a falling weight to determine
impact resistance of the profile. If necessary, cut the profile into
smaller sections or coupons in order to properly position the
profile on the tester support plate.
4.2 Procedure A establishes the height from which a stan-
dard falling 8-lb (3.6-kg) weight will cause 50 % of the
specimens to fail.
4.3 Procedure B establishes the height from which a stan-
dard falling 8-lb (3.6-kg) weight will cause 50 % of the
specimens to fail in a brittle mode.
4.4 Both procedures employ either of two configurations of
impactor heads resting on the specimen. The specimen lays flat

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4226 − 19
FIG. 2 Impact Tester
on a stand that has a 0.64-in. (16.3-mm) hole. The falling
weight impacts on the impactor head tending to drive it through
the specimen into the hole of the stand.
4.5 The technique used to find 50 % failure level in both
procedures is commonly called the Bruceton Staircase Method
or Up-and-Down Method. Testing is concentrated near the
mean, reducing the number of specimens required to obtain a
reasonably precise estimate.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The impact strength values obtained on the flat sections
of a building product profile are relevant only to the flat section
that has been tested and these values do not necessarily indicate
the impact resistance of the whole product, which is affected by
the configuration of the profile (that is, corners, ribs, etc).
5.2 Constant weight and variable height, employed in these
test methods, allow the velocity of impact to vary and,
therefore, by Procedure B, can determine the energy of
ductile-to-brittle transition, which cannot be determined if a
variable weight is dropped from a constant height.
5.3 These test procedures have been found to be useful
elements in rigid poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) building product
characterization. Compound qualification, finished product
quality control, environmental and weatherability research and
development studies, and fabrication tolerance prediction con-
stitute useful applications.
5.4 Choice of the specific impactor head configuration used
is related to a variety of product attributes, such as specimen
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
thickness and product toughness as well as abstract factors,
such as the anticipated mode of failure in a specific application.
The geometric uniqueness of the impactor head configurations
prevents any comparison or correlation of testing results on
samples tested with differing impactor head configurations. In
general, the conical impactor, C.125, is useful to ensure failure
of thicker specimens where the H.25 impactor caused no
failure.
NOTE 2—Equivalent surface conditions are more likely to occur when
specimens are prepared by compression molding or extrusion than by
injection molding.
5.5 When comparing different samples tested with the same
impactor head configuration, impact resistance shall be permit-
ted to be normalized for average specimen thickness over a
reasonably broad range (for example, 1 to 3 mm).3 However,
this should only be done when the surface conditions listed in
6.1 are essentially equivalent.
6. Interferences
6.1 The results obtained are greatly influenced by the
quality of the test specimens. Cracks usually start at the surface
in tension; the surface opposite the one that is struck by the
impactor head. The composition of this surface layer and the
degree of orientation introduced during the formation of the
specimen are very important variables. Flaws in this surface
3
O.R. Weaver, “Using Attributes to Measure a Continuous Variable in Impact
Testing Plastic Bottles,” Materials Research & Standards, MR & S, Vol. 6, No. 6,
June, 1996, pp. 285-291.
 D4226 − 19
FIG. 3 Impactor Head Configuration H.25 Specimen Support Detail
will also affect results. Because of these factors, sometimes
additional information about the sample is achieved by testing
the sample from a variety of locations in a product or testing
from both sides of a flat section.
6.2 Samples must not collapse into the hole in the specimen
support plate when driven by the impactor. Sample collapse
into the hole during the impact test affects impact results.
6.3 When resting on the support plate and in contact with
the impactor the specimen must lie flat. Bowed samples will
affect test results.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Testing Machine—The apparatus shall be constructed
essentially as shown in Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 and shall consist of the
following: suitable base to withstand the impact shock; steel-
rod impact weight weighing 8 6 0.2 lb (3.6 6 0.1 kg);
hardened steel impactors as specified in 7.1.2; a slotted guide
tube 40 in. (1.0 m) in length in which the impact weights slide,
having an internal diameter sufficient so that friction does not
reduce the weight velocity, and having graduations in inch-
pound (newton-meter) increments, or multiples thereof. A
bracket is used to hold the tube in a vertical position by
attaching it to the base and also to hold the hand knob, which
is a pivot-arm alignment for the impactor, about 2 in. (50 mm)
under the tube. The top edge of the opening in the specimen
support plate should be rounded to a 0.031-in. (0.8-mm) radius.
Fig. 3 shows the specimen support configuration for this test.
7.1.1 The tester shall be mounted so that the axis of the tube
is plumb when measured with a spirit level at least 1 ft (300
mm) in length.
7.1.2 Impactor Configurations:
7.1.2.1 Impactor C.125 shall be constructed, as is shown in
Fig. 4, of tough, hardened (Rockwell C50-55), scratch resistant
steel. It should have a conical (40°) configuration and 0.125-in.
(3.18-mm) radius hemispherical tip.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7.1.2.2 Impactor H.25 shall be constructed, as is shown in
Fig. 3, of tough, hardened (Rockwell C50-55) scratch resistant
steel. It should have a 0.25-in. (6.35-mm) radius hemispherical
tip (see Fig. 3 and Fig. 4).
7.1.2.3 The surface of the impactor head shall be polished
free of nicks, scratches, or other surface irregularities.
7.2 Supporting Base—In order to minimize the energy
absorption, compression, and deflection of the support the
tester shall be firmly fixed to a dense, solid, block or base.
7.2.1 The main body of said block or base shall have
maximum dimensions of 16 in. (40 cm) (h) × 30 in. (75 cm)
(w) × 30 in. (75 cm) (d) and shall have a minimum weight of
375 lb (171 kg). This block shall be placed at a height that
facilitates equipment usage. It is not necessary to bolt blocks or
bases of this weight to the floor.
NOTE 3—The required block weight and dimensions conform to
commercially available butcher block type tables.
7.2.2 Alternative supporting bases or those lighter than 375
lb (171 kg) should be bolted to a concrete floor. Mean failure
energy comparisons shall be made between these alternative
supports and one where the tester is bolted directly to the
concrete floor. If mean failure energy differences between the
concrete floor and the alternative support are found statistically
nonsignificant, use of the lighter support shall be allowed.
7.2.3 If the weight of the butcher block that was originally
375 lb (171 kg) or greater decreases with time to less than 375
lb (171 kg), increase the block weight to a minimum of 375 lb
(171 kg) by adding a suitable amount of weight to the bottom
of the table. The weight shall be tightly affixed and in direct
contact with the bottom of the table and not cause any
vibrations during the impact test.
NOTE 4—The weight of the butcher block can decrease over time, for
instance, due to drying.
7.2.4 Use of rubber mats either under the tester or the
supporting base is prohibited.
 D4226 − 19
FIG. 4 Impactor Head Configuration C.125
7.3 Micrometer, for measurement of specimen thickness. It
should be accurate to 1 % of the average thickness of
specimens used. See Test Method D5947 for suitable microm-
eters.
8. Safety Precautions
8.1 Shield devices to protect personnel.
8.2 A tube can contain the impactor head if it rebounds after
striking a specimen, or the impactor head may be drilled for a
cotterpin to prevent rebound. The cotterpin must be located
well above the penetration depth of the impactor head.
9. Sampling
9.1 Sample in a statistically acceptable manner. The samples
shall be representative of the lot under study.
10. Test Specimen
10.1 Test specimens must lay flat on the specimen support
plate during testing, cover the hole in the support plate, and be
of sufficient size to prevent their collapse into the hole of the
specimen support plate during the impact test. The specimens
shall be free of obvious imperfections unless they constitute
variables under study.
NOTE 5—When individual coupons are used, a size of 1.5 in. by 1.5 in.
(38 mm by 38 mm) was found sufficient to avoid collapse of most
specimens. Collapse of the sample into the hole of the specimen support
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
plate is related to sample thickness and for thicker samples it’s possible to
use smaller samples.
10.2 When the approximate mean failure height for a given
sample is known, 20 specimens usually yield sufficiently
precise results. If the mean failure height cannot be
approximated, six or more specimens shall be used to deter-
mine the appropriate starting point of the test.
NOTE 6—Specimen quantity, as small as five, often yields sufficiently
reliable estimates of the mean failure height. However, the estimated
standard deviation will be relatively large.4
11. Conditioning
11.1 Unless otherwise specified, condition the test speci-
mens at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative
humidity for not less than 40 h prior to test in accordance with
Procedure A of Methods D618. In cases of disagreement, the
tolerance shall be 61.8°F (61°C) and 65 % relative humidity.
11.2 Quality Control Tests—Condition the test specimens at
73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for 4 h in air.
12. Procedure
12.1 Procedure A:
4
Brownless, K. A., Hodges J. L., Jr., and Rosenblatt, Murray, “The Up-and-
Down Method with Small Samples,” American Statistical Association Journal,
JSTNA, Vol. 48, 1953, pp. 262-277.
 D4226 − 19
12.1.1 When testing individual specimens or coupons, mea-
sure and record the thickness of each specimen at the antici-
pated area of impact. Average all values to determine average
thickness. When using a single large specimen such as a strip
of PVC siding, measure the thickness at five points uniformly
down the length of PVC siding under test. Use the average of
these five values as the average thickness. The thickness of any
individual measurement shall not vary by more than 5 % from
the average thickness.
12.1.2 When testing individual specimens or coupons,
choose randomly from the sample. Determine the order of
testing by using a set of random numbers.
12.1.3 Select the proper impactor-head configuration (C.125
or H.25) specified for the test and install on the apparatus.
Adjust the guide arm so that each impactor head is visually
centered and achieves the proper depth of penetration. Depth of
penetration is the distance the impactor head protrudes into the
support plate when properly seated. For the H.25 impactor this
shall be 0.48 in 6 0.04 in. (1.22 cm 6 0.10 cm) (Fig. 3) and
0.69 in. 6 0.04 in. (1.75 cm 6 0.10 cm) for the C.125 impactor
(Fig. 4).
NOTE 7—Periodic visual inspection during testing ensures tup is
centered.
12.1.4 After raising the weight and impactor foot, place the
specimen between the impactor foot and the specimen support
plate making sure that it covers the hole in the specimen
support plate. The clamping force, when clamping is used,
shall be sufficient to prevent motion of the specimen.
12.1.5 Place the impactor foot so that it rests on the
specimen. The specimen must lie flat at this point.
12.1.6 Raise the weight in the tube to the approximate
failure energy value for the specific sample and release it so
that the weight drops on the impactor. If the approximate
failure energy value for the sample is unknown, run a minimum
of six impact tests at varying energy levels to bracket the
approximate failure energy level before initiating the test series
of impacts.
12.1.7 Remove the specimen and examine it to determine
whether it has failed. See 3.2.1 for criteria of failure.
12.1.8 If the first impact of the specimen results in failure,
decrease the drop height one increment. If the first impact of
the specimen does not cause failure, increase the drop height
one increment. Then test a second specimen or target point on
the specimen.
12.1.9 In this manner, select the impact height for each
successive test from the results observed with the specimen just
previously tested. The same target point on a specimen shall
not be tested more than once.
12.1.10 For best results, the height increment used should
be approximately equivalent to s, the estimated standard
deviation of the test for that sample. An increment from 0.5 to
2 times s is satisfactory (see 13.6).
NOTE 8—For unknown materials it’s recommended to start with a 1.0
in. (25.4 mm) height increment to calculate an estimated standard
deviation utilizing Eq. 4 in 13.6. If necessary adjust height increments to
meet recommendations of 12.1.10.
12.1.11 At the start of a test, a continuous run of seven or
more identical results (failure or non-failure) is indicative of an
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
improper starting height and affects final results. Re-estimate
approximate starting height and restart the test.
12.1.12 Keep a running plot of the data. Use one symbol,
such as “X”, to indicate a failure and a different symbol, such
as “O”, to indicate a non-failure at each height level.
12.1.13 For any specimen that gives a break behavior that
appears to be an outlier, the conditions of that impact shall be
examined. The specimen may be discarded only if a unique
cause for the anomaly can be found, such as an internal flaw
visible in the broken specimen. Note that break behavior may
vary widely within a set of specimens. Data from specimens
that show atypical behavior shall not be discarded simply on
the basis of such behavior. Refer to Practice E178 for detailed
information on how outliers shall be handled.
12.2 Procedure B:
12.2.1 Test the specimen in the same way as described in
Procedure A (12.1.1 – 12.1.9).
12.2.2 If brittle failure is observed (Fig. 1) at the mean
failure height, the mean brittle failure height and mean brittle
failure energy are the same as mean failure height and mean
failure energy for the specimen.
12.2.3 If ductile breaks are observed (Fig. 1), continue the
test by increasing the height by increments, as described in
Procedure A, until a brittle failure occurs.
12.2.4 Use one symbol, such as “D”, to indicate ductile
break and a different symbol, such as “B”, to indicate brittle
failure at each height level.
12.2.5 At the start of a test, a continuous run of seven or
more identical results (brittle or ductile) is indicative of an
improper starting height and affects final results. Re-estimate
starting height and restart the test.
13. Calculation
13.1 Mean Failure Height (Procedure A)—Calculate the
mean failure height from the test data obtained as follows:
h 5 h o 1d h ~ A/N60.5! (1)
where:
h = mean failure height, in. (mm),
dh = increment of weight height, in. (mm),
N = total number of failures or non-failures, whichever is
smaller. For ease of notation, call whichever is used
“events,”
ho = lowest height at which an event occurred, in. (mm),
A = ∑ki=0 in i,
i = 0, 1, 2 . . . k (counting index, starts at ho),
ni = number of events that occurred at hi, and
hi = ho + idh.
In calculating h, the negative sign is used when the events
are failures. The positive sign is used when the events are
non-failures. See the example in Fig. 5.
13.2 Mean Brittle Failure Height (Procedure B)—Calculate
the mean brittle failure height using the same formula as in
Procedure A. Designations of h and N are different, as follows:
h = mean brittle failure height in. (cm), and
N = total number of brittle failures or ductile breaks, which-
ever is smaller.

FIG. 5 Sample Calculations
In calculating h, the negative sign is used within the
parentheses when the events are brittle failures. The positive
sign is used when the events are ductile breaks.
13.3 Mean Failure Energy (Procedure A)—Compute the
mean failure energy as follows:
MFE 5 h 3 w
where:
MFE = mean failure energy, in.•lbf (J),
h = mean failure height, in. (cm), and
w = weight, 8 lb (3.6 kg).
13.4 Mean Brittle Failure Energy (Procedure B)—Compute
the mean brittle failure energy as follows:
MBFE 5 h 3 w
where:
MBFE = mean brittle failure energy, in.•lbf (J),
h = mean brittle failure energy, in. (cm), and
w = weight, 8 lb (3.6 kg).
13.5 Normalized mean failure energy (Procedure A) and
normalized mean brittle failure energy (Procedure B) are
calculated by dividing the mean energy by the average thick-
ness.
13.6 Estimated Standard Deviation—Calculate the esti-
mated standard deviation from the test data as follows:
s 5 1.620d @@ NB 2 A 2 ! /N 2 # 1 0.029
k
B5 (i n
i50
2
i B
14. Report
14.1 The report shall include the following:
14.1.1 Complete identification of the sample tested, manu-
facturer’s code, form, principle dimensions, and previous
history.
14.1.2 Procedure used, either A or B, or both.
14.1.3 Impactor head configuration used, either C.125 or
H.25, or both.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4226 − 19
14.1.4 Average thickness of specimen tested.
14.1.5 Number of test specimens (target points) employed
to determine the mean failure height.
14.1.6 Mean failure energy (Procedure A) or mean brittle
failure energy (Procedure B), or both.
14.1.7 Estimated standard deviation of either the mean
(2) failure energy (Procedure A) or mean brittle failure energy
(Procedure B) or both, if required.
14.1.8 Normalized mean energies, when required.
14.1.9 Any departures from the specified test procedures.
15. Precision and Bias
15.1 Warning—The data contained in Table 1 shall not be
rigorously applied to acceptance or rejection of material, as
(3)
those data are specific to the interlaboratory study and are not
representative of other lots, conditions, materials, or laborato-
ries. Users of this test method shall apply the principles
outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
laboratory and materials or between specific laboratories.
15.2 Precision, extruded lineals—An interlaboratory study
with six laboratories was conducted in which thick flat sections
from various rigid poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) extruded profiles
were tested with impactor-head configuration C.125.
15.2.1 The average within-laboratory and between-
laboratory coefficients of variation for Procedure A and for
Procedure B were as follows:
(4)
Average V
Procedure Within-laboratory Between-laboratory
A 7.5 18.2
6.4 21.0
where:
V (Procedure A) = ⁄
100 S MFEaverage
V (Procedure B) = ⁄
100 S MBFEaverage
15.2.2 Bias—No statement of bias can be provided because
of the lack of a referee method for impact behavior of plastic,
which can provide a “true” or reference value.
15.3 Precision, extruded siding—An interlaboratory study
with nine laboratories was conducted in which four vinyl
7
 D4226 − 19
TABLE 1 Within-Laboratory and Between-Laboratory Variations
Materials Average Sr SR r R
Emboss A 92.292 2.206 4.880 6.178 13.665
Emboss B 71.157 3.031 4.207 8.486 11.957
Emboss C 56.956 3.452 5.704 9.666 15.970
Emboss D 61.406 2.538 4.922 7.107 13.782

siding (PVC) panels of 0.040 in. thickness were tested using 15.4 Equivalence testing on numerical data from two
Procedure A with impactor-head configuration H.25. The four sources shall be conducted in accordance with E2935.
vinyl siding panels had a variety of emboss patterns typical for
the industry. 16. Keywords
15.3.1 The within-laboratory and between-laboratory varia-
16.1 brittle failure energy; building products; failure energy;
tion from this study is found in Table 1.
falling weight; impact test
15.3.2 Bias—No statement of bias can be provided because
of the lack of a referee method for impact behavior of plastic
which can provide a “true” or reference value.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4226 – 16) that may impact the use of this standard. (November 1, 2019)

(1) Revised Referenced Documents, Terminology, and Preci- (5) Revised Fig. 5 to correct syntax in equations, added
sion and Bias sections consistent with D20 policy on statistical calculations for MFE and MBFE.
terminology (April 2019), revisions made to 2.1, 3.1, and (6) Corrected equation syntax in 13.6.
Section 15. Removed reference to D3679 as it is not used in (7) Clarified reporting requirements in 14.1.7.
standard. (8) Added warning statement in 15.1 as noted above in (1) of
(2) Changed size requirements for individual samples (4.1). the Summary of Changes.
(3) Added sample collapse into support table hole as potential (9) Added metric equivalences as needed.
interference (6.2).
(4) Added Note 7 recommending a starting height increment of
1 in.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:12 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4477 − 16 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Soffit1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4477; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This specification establishes requirements and test
methods for the materials, dimensions, camber, impact
strength, expansion, and appearance of extruded single-wall
soffit manufactured from rigid (unplasticized) PVC compound.
Methods of indicating compliance with this specification are
also provided.
1.2 The use of PVC recycled plastic in this product shall be
in accordance with the requirements in Section 4.
1.3 Rigid (unplasticized) poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) siding
is covered in Specification D3679.
1.4 Soffit produced to this specification shall be installed in
accordance with Practice D4756. Reference shall also be made
to the manufacturer’s installation instructions for the specific
product to be installed.
NOTE 1—Information with regard to soffit maintenance shall be
obtained from the manufacturer.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains to the test
method portion only, Section 6 of this specification. This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety and health
practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limita-
tions prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved May 1, 2016. Published May 2016. Originally
approved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D4477 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/D4477-16.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D635 Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and
Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position
D696 Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expan-
sion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous
Silica Dilatometer
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and
Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates
D2457 Test Method for Specular Gloss of Plastic Films and
Solid Plastics
D3679 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Siding
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4226 Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly-
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Building Products
D4756 Practice for Installation of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chlo-
ride) (PVC) Siding and Soffit
D5033 Guide for Development of ASTM Standards Relating
to Recycling and Use of Recycled Plastics (Withdrawn
2007)3
D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid
Plastics Specimens
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
E1753 Practice for Use of Qualitative Chemical Spot Test
Kits for Detection of Lead in Dry Paint Films
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883, D1600, and E631, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 vinyl soffıt, n—a shaped material, made principally
from rigid poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) that is used to clad the
underside of a roof overhang.
3.2.2 Discussion—Any exception to a homogeneous rigid
PVC compound is present in a coextruded or laminated
capstock.
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:16 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4477 − 16
4. Materials and Manufacture
4.1 The soffit, shall be made of one or more layers of
poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) compound. Any layers of materials
other than poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) compound shall be kept
to less than 20% by volume.
4.2 Use rigid PVC recycled plastic, as defined in Guide
D5033 if all the requirements in the sections on Terminology
(Section 3), on Materials and Manufacture (Section 4), and on
Physical Requirements (Section 5) are met by the soffit
containing PVC recycled plastic.
4.3 The poly(vinyl chloride) soffit material, when tested in
accordance with Test Method D635, shall not exceed an
average extent of burn of 4 in. (100 mm), with an average time
of burn not to exceed 10 s. A minimum sample thickness of
0.030 in. (0.8 mm) is required. (Warning—The flammability
testing data, conclusions, and recommendations of Test
Method D635 relate solely to the measurement and description
of properties for classification of the poly(vinyl chloride) soffit
material in response to flame under controlled laboratory
conditions and shall not be used for the description or appraisal
of the fire hazard of vinyl soffit under actual fire conditions.)
4.4 The PVC compound when extruded into soffit shall
maintain uniform color and be free of any visual surface or
structural changes, such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking,
or pitting.
4.5 PVC soffit shall not contain elemental lead (Pb) or
compounds of that material other than traces incidental to raw
materials or the manufacturing process. Compliance with this
requirement shall be demonstrated by one of the methods in
6.12.
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Length and Width—The nominal length and width of the
soffit shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
seller. The actual length shall not be less than 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm)
of the nominal length and the actual width shall be within
61⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) of the nominal width when measured in
accordance with 6.3 and 6.4.
5.2 Thickness—The minimum thickness of the soffit shall be
0.030 in. (0.8 mm) when measured in accordance with 6.5.
5.3 Camber—A full length of soffit, typically 10 or 12 ft
(3.05 or 3.66 m), will not have a camber greater than 1⁄8 in. (3.2
mm) when measured in accordance with 6.6.
5.4 Initial Impact Resistance—The soffit shall have a mini-
mum impact strength of 45 in.·lbf (5.34 J) when tested in
accordance with 6.7.
5.5 Coeffıcient of Linear Expansion—The soffit shall have a
coefficient of linear expansion not greater than 4.5 by 10−5
in./in./°F (8.1 by 10−5 mm/mm/°C) when tested in accordance
with 6.8.
5.6 Gloss—This requirement is not applicable to surface
ventilated soffit. The gloss of soffit shall be uniform across the
exposed face. The average of all readings for a panel deter-
mined in 6.9.1.2 shall not differ from the manufacturer’s
specified gloss value more than the permitted variation in Table
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:16 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
1, and each individual reading shall not vary more than 10
points from the average. Gloss shall be tested in accordance
with 6.9.
TABLE 1
Manufacturer’s Permitted difference
Specified Gloss Value from
Mfg. Spec. Gloss
Value
Less than or equal to 35 ±8
Greater than 35 ±10
5.7 Deflection of the soffit shall not exceed 61⁄8 in. (3.2
mm) when installed flat in a horizontal position over a span of
24 in. (610 mm) without intermittent support when tested in
accordance with 6.11.
5.8 Color—The color of the soffit shall be within the defined
color space parameters for the specific color agreed upon
between the purchaser and the manufacturer. The color speci-
fied shall be uniform on the surface of the soffit panels, except
in the case of multi-colored wood grain panels.
5.8.1 Uniformity of Color—When tested in accordance with
6.10, the total color change, E, between a production specimen
and the appropriate reference specimen or agreed-upon color
coordinates shall not vary by more than 1.5, and the chromatic
coordinates shall not change by more than 6∆a = 1.0 and6∆
b = 1.0.
6. Test Methods
6.1 General—The inspection and test procedures contained
in this section are used to determine the conformance of
products to the requirements of this specification. Each pro-
ducer who represents its products as conforming to this
specification shall be permitted to use statistically based
sampling plans that are appropriate for each manufacturing
process, but shall keep the essential records necessary to
document, with a high degree of assurance, his claim that all of
the requirements of this specification have been met. Addi-
tional sampling and testing of the product, as agreed upon
between the purchaser and manufacturer, are not precluded by
this section.
6.2 Conditioning and Test Conditions—Condition the test
specimen in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618 and
test under those conditions, unless otherwise specified herein.
6.3 Length—Lay the specimen on a flat surface and measure
with a steel tape. Measure the length of a soffit panel to the
nearest 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm) at the center, the butt edge, and the
bottom of the top lock. The average of the three measurements
is the actual length.
6.4 Width—Interlock two long specimens, each at least 26
in. (660 mm) long in the normal mode for installation. Lay the
two specimens on a flat surface. Measure to the nearest 1⁄16 in.
(1.6 mm), the distance between the lowest butt edge of the top
specimen and the lowest butt edge of the bottom specimen.
Commencing approximately 1 in. (25 mm) from one end of the
specimens, make 5 measurements at 6 in. (152 mm) intervals,
making sure that the measurement is made perpendicular to the
butt edge. Average the measurements. The average constitutes
the exposed width of soffit.
 D4477 − 16
6.5 Thickness—Make a minimum of five equally spaced
measurements across the width of the soffit specimen perpen-
dicular to the exposed surface with a micrometer similar to that
described in Test Method D5947, Method A or B, with the
exception that the vernier reading shall be to 0.001 in. (0.0254
mm). Average the measurements. The average constitutes the
thickness of the soffit.
6.6 Camber—Place a full length of soffit (typically 10 or 12
ft (3.05 or 3.66 m), on a flat surface alongside a straightedge at
least as long as the soffit specimen. Measure the maximum
space between the edge of the soffit specimen and the straight-
edge for each edge to the nearest 1⁄16 in. (1.6 mm).
6.7 Impact Resistance—Test impact resistance of soffit in
accordance with Test Methods D4226, Procedure A impactor
head configuration H.25. 4 in-lb increments (0.5 in height
increments with 8 lb falling weight) shall be used. Minimum
sample dimensions shall be 1.5 in. by 1.5 in. Samples shall be
tested with the normally exposed surface facing up. Condition-
ing time for quality control test shall be at least 1 hr.
6.8 Coeffıcient of Linear Expansion—Conduct this test in
accordance with Test Method D696.
6.9 Gloss—Measure gloss using a 75° geometry glossmeter
that meets the requirements of the Apparatus section of Test
Method D2457.
6.9.1 Procedure:
6.9.1.1 Measure gloss on one piece of soffit on at least three
widely separated points across the width of the exposed
surface. At least one reading shall be taken on each face of the
panel. The area to be tested must be flat. If a flat area on the
exposed surface cannot be found due to the style or depth of
embossing of the panel being tested, then a non-exposed area
of the panel shall be chosen in its place. Such locations shall be
representative of the gloss of the area that will be exposed after
installation.
6.9.1.2 Each reading shall be within the limits specified in
5.6. The average of all readings shall be used to represent the
gloss of the sample.
6.9.1.3 This test method is not applicable to surface venti-
lated soffit.
6.10 Color Uniformity—Calculate the difference between
the LH, aH, bH color coordinates for a production specimen to
those of either the appropriate reference specimen or the
agreed-upon color coordinates for that specific color product in
accordance with Test Method D2244. Calculate the total
difference, E, between the production specimen and the refer-
ence specimen in accordance with Test Method D2244.
6.11 Deflection:
6.11.1 Specimen Preparation—Three pieces of soffit, 30 in.
(762 mm) long, are prepared and conditioned at room tempera-
ture for 24 h.
6.11.2 Apparatus—Two parallel supporting beams, 1⁄2 in.
(12.7 mm) wide at the same level of elevation and 24 in. (610
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:16 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
mm) apart, are set up with the provision of measuring height
distance at the center of the beams.
6.11.3 Procedure—Interlock the three pieces of soffit panel
with ends being in line. Position the soffit unit across the
support beams so that the ends of the unit are equidistant from
the outside edges of the beams. The panel center area is
compared in height distance to the height of the support beams
and any deviation is recorded.
6.12 Lead Content:
6.12.1 Testing for lead content shall be conducted on
extruded soffit using a rhodizinate-type lead swab test kit
conforming to Practice E1753. Testing shall be performed in
accordance with the test kit manufacturer’s instructions. The
soffit shall be deemed to comply with 4.5 if the test shows a
negative or not-detected result; that is, the test does not indicate
the presence of lead. The test shall be conducted separately on
the substrate and on any cap or film material.
6.12.2 As an alternative to the method in 6.12.1, and as a
means of resolving any ambiguous results from that method, an
analytical method capable of detecting lead at least as low as
0.02 percent by sample weight shall be employed. Under this
alternative, neither the substrate nor any cap or film shall
contain a concentration of lead in excess of 0.02 percent by
weight.
7. Product Marking
7.1 To aid identification of products conforming to all
requirements of this specification, producers and distributors
shall include a statement of compliance in conjunction with
their name and address on product labels, invoices, sales
literature, and the like. The following statement is suggested
when sufficient space is available: “This product conforms to
all the requirements established in ASTM Specification D4477,
developed cooperatively with the industry and published by the
ASTM. Full responsibility for the conformance of this product
to the specification is assumed by (name and address of
producer or distributor).”
7.2 The following abbreviated statement is suggested when
available space on labels is insufficient for the full statement:
“Conforms to ASTM D4477, (name and address of producer or
distributor).”
8. Packing, Packaging, and Package Marking
8.1 The soffit shall be packaged in such a manner as to
provide reasonable protection against damage in ordinary
handling, transportation, and storage.
8.2 The provisions of Practice D3892 shall apply to this
specification.
9. Keywords
9.1 plastic building products; plastic weatherability; re-
cycled plastics; rigid PVC soffit; weatherability color-hold
guidelines
 D4477 − 16
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:16 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4495 − 16 An American National Standard

Standard Test Method for

Impact Resistance of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Rigid
Profiles by Means of a Falling Weight1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4495; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the energy
required to crack or break rigid poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC)
profile under specified conditions of impact by means of a
falling weight.
1.2 This test method is used either by itself or in conjunction
with other methods for measuring PVC product toughness.
1.3 Because of the wide variety of profile sizes and shapes
and the wide variety of manufacturing procedures and field
abuse, this test method does not correlate universally with all
types of abuse. Therefore, correlations must be established as
needed.
1.4 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered
as requirements of this standard.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
E178 Practice for Dealing With Outlying Observations
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved May 1, 2016. Published May 2016. Originally
approved in 1985. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D4495 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D4495-16.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 failure—the presence of a brittle failure readily visible
by the naked eye, including a sharp crack, split, or shatter in
any part of the profile as a result of the impact of the falling
weight. Failure does not include ductile tears (where the
surfaces at the tip of the crack have a greater than 0° angle), or
ductile breaks (hinged breaks where the cracked part remains
joined to the unbroken part throughout the length of the
cracked part or section), (Fig. 1).
3.2.2 mean failure height—the height from which the
falling weight will cause 50 % of the specimens to fail.
3.2.3 mean failure energy—energy required to produce
50 % failures. The product of the weight and mean failure
height.
3.2.4 outlier—an observation that appears to deviate mark-
edly from other members of the sample in which it occurs.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The profile is cut into lengths of at least 6 in. The test
method establishes the height from which a standard falling
weight will cause 50 % of the specimens to fail.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The impact strength of PVC profiles relates to suitability
for service and to quality of processing. Impact tests are used
for quality-control purposes and as an indication that products
can withstand handling during assembling, installation, or in
service.
5.2 Results obtained by use of this test method are used in
two ways:
5.2.1 As the basis for establishing impact-test requirements
in product standards, and
5.2.2 To measure the effect of changes in materials or
processing.
6. Apparatus
6.1 General—One type of impact tester is illustrated in Fig.
2.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:20 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4495 − 16

FIG. 1 Types of Breaks

6.2 Falling Weight, shall be cylindrical and 2 1⁄2 in. in
diameter, with a flat-bottom surface that strikes the test
specimen.
NOTE 2—It is suggested that the striking portion of the weight be made
of scratch-resistant steel to reduce damage to the striking surface. Badly
scarred surfaces may affect test results.
6.2.1 The mass of the falling weight shall be 10 6 0.5 lb.
6.3 Drop Tube, shall be of sufficient length (approximately
12 ft (4 m)) to provide for a fall of at least 10 ft (3 m) and shall
be mounted so that the lengthwise direction is vertical, as
measured with a plumb bob or a spirit level at least 2 ft (600
mm) in length.
6.3.1 Care must be taken to ensure that the weight falls
freely; it must not “chatter” down the tube.
NOTE 3—No particular material for the drop tube is specified. However,
a cold-drawn seamless steel tubing with an inside diameter of 2 5⁄8 to 2 3⁄4
in. (67 to 70 mm) has been found to be satisfactory. It may also be
necessary to provide a protective barrier around the specimen, particularly
for larger sizes of profile, to protect the operator from flying broken
pieces.
NOTE 4—The dropped weight may not fall freely if it is restrained by a
partial vacuum above the weight, such as can be caused by the hold and
release device.
6.3.2 Means shall be provided to hold the weight to be
dropped at steps of 2 in. (50 mm) for a distance of 2 to 10 ft
(600 mm to 3 m) above the flat-plate holder, to release the
weight in a reproducible manner, and to allow the weight to fall
freely.
6.4 Specimen Holder—The flat plate shall be used as a
specimen holder.
6.4.1 The rigid steel flat-plate holder shall consist of a plate
approximately 8 by 12 by 1 in. (200 by 300 by 25 mm). The
specimen holder shall be fastened to a concrete slab (floor).
Means shall be provided to center the specimens under the drop
tube.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:20 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4495 − 16
FIG. 2 Testing Apparatus
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The profile shall be not less than 6 in. (150 mm) in
length.
7.2 When the approximate mean-failure height for a given
sample is known, 20 specimens usually yield sufficiently
precise results. If the mean failure height is not able to be
approximated, six or more specimens shall be used to deter-
mine the appropriate starting point of the test.
NOTE 5—As few as five specimens often yield sufficiently reliable
estimates of the mean failure height. However, in such cases, the estimated
standard deviation will be relatively large.3
8. Conditioning
8.1 Unless otherwise specified, condition the test specimens
at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity
3
Brownless, K. A., Hodges, J. L., Jr., and Rosenblatt, Murray, “The Up-and-
Down Method With Small Samples”, American Statistical Association Journal,
JSTNA, Vol 48, 1953, pp. 262–277.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:20 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
for not less than 24 h prior to test in accordance with Procedure
A of Methods D618. In cases of disagreement, the tolerance
shall be 61.8°F (61°C) and 65 % relative humidity.
8.2 Quality-Control Tests—Condition the test specimens at
73.4 6 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for 4 h in air.
9. Procedure
9.1 Cut the profile into samples 6 in. (152 mm) long.
9.2 Choose a specimen at random from the sample.
9.3 After raising the weight, place the specimen on the
specimen holder between two pair of snug-fitting right-angle-
slotted brackets in such a way that it rests in the most stable
position and is centered under the weight. The brackets are
used to prevent any lateral movement of the profile and any
sliding out during impact.
NOTE 6—During the round robin, it was found that choice of the side of
the profile impacted made no difference on impact resistance. Even then,
the position was defined so that it is likely that all would hit the same side.
9.4 Raise the weight in the tube to the approximate failure
height value for the specific sample and release it so that it
drops on the specimen. Height is determined as the distance
between the top surface of the profile under impact, and the
bottom surface of the falling weight.
9.5 Remove the specimen and examine it to determine
whether or not it has failed.
9.6 If the first impact of the specimen results in failure,
decrease the drop height one increment. If the first impact of
the specimen does not cause failure, increase the drop height
one increment. Then test a second specimen.
9.7 In this manner, select the impact height for each
successive test from the results observed with the specimen just
previously tested. Do not test the same target point on a
specimen more than once.
9.8 Keep a running plot of the data. See Appendix X1. Use
one symbol, such as “X” to indicate a failure and a different
symbol such as “O” to indicate a non-failure at each height
level.
9.9 For any specimen that gives a break behavior that
appears to be an outlier, the conditions of that impact shall be
examined. The specimen is discarded only if a unique cause for
the anomaly can be found, such as an internal flaw visible in
the broken specimen. Note that break behavior varies widely
within a set of specimens. Data from specimens that show
atypical behavior shall not be discarded simply on the basis of
such behavior. Refer to Practice E178 for detailed information
on how outliers shall be handled.
10. Calculation
10.1 Mean Failure Height (Procedure A)—Calculate the
mean failure height from the test data obtained as follows:
h 5 h o 1d h ~ A/N60.5!
where:
h = mean failure height, in. (cm),
dh = increment of weight height, in. (cm),
 D4495 − 16

N = total number of failures or non-failures, whichever is 11.1.1 Complete identification of the sample tested, manu-
smaller. For ease of notation, call whichever are used facturer’s code, form, and previous history.
“events”, 11.1.2 Weight being used.
ho = lowest height at which an event occurred, in. (cm), 11.1.3 Number of test specimens (target points) employed
A = k to determine the mean failure height.
( in ,
i50
i 11.1.4 Mean failure energy.
11.1.5 Estimated standard deviation.
i = 0, 1, 2 . . . k (counting index, starts at ho), 11.1.6 Any departures from the specified test procedures.
ni = number of events which occurred at hi, and
hi = ho + idh. 12. Precision and Bias
In calculating h, the negative sign is used when the events
are failures. The positive sign is used when the events are 12.1 Precision—An interlaboratory study with five labora-
non-failures. tories was conducted in which various rigid poly(vinyl chlo-
ride) (PVC) extruded profiles were tested by means of a falling
10.2 Mean Failure Energy (Procedure A)—Compute the weight.
mean failure energy as follows: 12.1.1 The average within-laboratory and between-
MFE 5 h 3 w laboratory coefficients of variation were as follows:
where: Average V

MFE = mean failure energy, in./lb (J), Within Laboratory Between Laboratory
h = mean failure height, in. (cm), and 13.6 23.5
w = weight. where:
10.3 Estimated Standard Deviation—Calculate the esti- V = 100 S
mated standard deviation from the test data as follows:
MFE average
s 5 1.620 d FF ~ NB 2 A 2 !
N2
10.029G G 12.2 Bias—No statement of bias is provided because of the
k
lack of a referee method for impact behavior of plastics which
B5 (i 2
ni can provide a “true” or reference value.
i50

11. Report 13. Keywords

11.1 The report shall include the following: 13.1 impact resistance; profile toughness; PVC rigid profiles

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

Height in. Outcome of

X—Failure 0—Non-Failure
40
38
36
34
32
30 X X X X
28 X O X O O X O
26 O O O O
24 O
22 X O
20 O O

Height in. Nx No i Ni iNi i 2Ni

30 4 0 4 4 16 64
28 3 4 3 3 9 27
26 0 4 2 0 0 0
24 0 1 1 0 0 0
22 1 1 0 1 0 0
20 0 2
Totals 8 12 8 25 91
(Nx) (No) (N) (A) (B)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:20 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4495 − 16
h o 5 22, N 5 N x 5 7 d 5 2 in.
S 5 1.620 d S NB 2 A 2
10.029 D
h 5 h o 1d S A
2 0.5 D N2
N
S 5 1.620~ 2 ! S 728 2 625
10.29 D
h 5 2212 S 25
8
2 0.5 D S 5 5.3 in.
64

h 5 27.2 in.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4495 – 12) that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2016)

(1) Revised 5.2 and Note 4.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:20 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4551 − 17 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-
Containment Membrane1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4551; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* ization established in the Decision on Principles for the

1.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC)
flexible sheeting which is used without mastic, bedding, or
coating for construction of concealed water-containment-
membranes in applications where there is potential for costly
secondary damage from water leakage and very long-term
reliable performance is essential. Examples are fountains,
pools, planters, shower and safe pans, tile tubs, or similar wet
installations where the membrane is inaccessible once the
construction is complete. Included are requirements for mate-
rials and sheeting, test methods, workmanship criteria, and
methods of marking.
1.2 Recycled materials may be used in this product in
accordance with the requirements in Section 5.
1.3 The tests are intended to ensure quality and performance
and are not intended for design purposes. Tests have been
selected to be conducted primarily with liquids that simulate
the environment to which the membrane will be subjected
during actual use.
1.4 This specification does not cover water-containment
membranes exposed to ultraviolet light.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.6 There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 11, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2017. Published January 2018. Originally
approved in 1986. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D4551 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D4551-17.
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D374/D374M Test Methods for Thickness of Solid Electri-
cal Insulation
D412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas-
tic Elastomers—Tension
D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Chemical Reagents
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1004 Test Method for Tear Resistance (Graves Tear) of
Plastic Film and Sheeting
D1203 Test Methods for Volatile Loss From Plastics Using
Activated Carbon Methods
D1204 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Nonrigid Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated
Temperature
D1243 Test Method for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Vinyl
Chloride Polymers
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
E96/E96M Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials
2.2 ANSI Standard:
Z 26.1 Safety Code for Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing
Motor Vehicles Operating on Land Highways3
2.3 Military Standard:
MIL-STD-105 Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspec-
tion by Attributes4
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
4
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4551 − 17
3. Terminology TABLE 2 Quality Assurance Requirements

3.1 Definitions: Property Unit Specification Specification

Grade 30 Grade 40
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 unless otherwise indicated. Thickness in. (mm) 0.030 (0.765), min 0.040 (1.02), min
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: Pinholes number none none
Shrinkage at 158°F % of original 5 %, max 5 %, max
3.2.1 water-containment membrane—a non-porous mem- Width in. (cm) +0.5 (1.27), −0.0 +0.5 (1.27), −0.0
brane impervious to water and resistant to permeation by water
vapor to an extent that it provides a high degree of certainty
that secondary damage from leakage shall not occur.
3.2.2 homogeneous sheeting—sheeting that is of uniform
6.2 Sheeting shall be compounded so that bonds between
composition throughout its thickness.
sheets used in fabrication of large water-containment mem-
4. Classification branes can be accomplished in the field without reducing the
overall resistance of the membrane to permeation or leakage or
4.1 The sheeting will be subdivided by grades based on significantly reducing the sheeting’s physical strength. The
thickness: manufacturer shall specify recommended bonding procedures
4.1.1 Grade 30—0.03 in. (0.765 mm). in its product literature.
4.1.2 Grade 40—0.04 in. (1.02 mm).
6.3 The sheeting shall be monolithic and homogeneous.
5. Materials and Manufacture
7. Dimensions
5.1 This specification covers poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC)
water-containment membrane formulated from PVC materials 7.1 Minimum thickness of Grade 30 sheeting shall be 0.03
meeting the following requirements: in. (0.765 mm) and minimum thickness of Grade 40 sheeting
5.1.1 A PVC resin with an inherent viscosity (logarithmic shall be 0.04 in. (1.02 mm).
viscosity number) of not less than 0.92 as determined by Test
Method D1243. 8. Workmanship
5.1.2 A PVC compound density of 1.26/1.29 g/cm3 . 8.1 If not monitored continuously, a minimum of every hour
5.2 Recycle materials, used in this product shall meet all the production shall be sampled and inspected for appearance,
requirements in Sections 3, 5, 6, and 9. thickness, width, and workmanship. The material shall be free
of pin holes, foreign inclusions, undispersed materials, or other
5.3 The use of water-soluble compounding ingredients shall defects that could affect serviceability.
be prohibited.
5.4 Plasticizers that are resistant to migration, mildew, and 9. Qualification Tests
bacterial degradation shall be used. 9.1 The PVC sheeting shall pass all the qualification tests
prescribed in Section 11 and Table 1.
6. Physical Properties 9.1.1 Any modification of this compound shall require that
6.1 The sheeting shall conform to the physical requirements the sheeting be retested for conformance to this specification.
prescribed in Section 9 (Table 1) and Section 16 (Table 2). In addition, retesting shall be done every 3 years whether the

TABLE 1 Qualification Tests

Property Unit Specification
Grade 30 Grade 40

Thickness in. (mm) 0.030 (0.765), min 0.040 (1.02), min

Tensile strength lbf/in. (kN/m) of width 60 (10.45), min 80 (14.05), min
Tensile stress at 100 % elongation lbf/in. (kN/m) of width 30 (5.23), min 40 (7.03), min
Elongation at break % 300, min 300, min
Tear resistance lbf/in. (kN/m) of width 185 (32.5), min 250 (43.7), min
Pinholes number none none
Micro-organism resistance specimen, pass/fail 12 of 12 pass 12 of 12 pass
Puncture resistance specimen, pass/fail 6 of 6 pass 6 of 6 pass
Indentation resistance specimen, pass/fail 3 of 3 pass 3 of 3 pass
Folding resistance specimen, pass/fail 3 of 3 pass 3 of 3 pass
Chemical resistance
Distilled H2O % weight change +1 %, max +1 %, max
Soapy H2O % weight change +2 %, max +2 %, max
Alkali specimen, pass/fail 3 of 3 pass 3 of 3 pass
Hydrostatic pressure test specimen, pass/fail 3 of 3 pass 3 of 3 pass
Shrinkage % original 5 %, max 5 %, max
Volatile loss at 158°F % loss 1.5 max 1.5 max

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4551 − 17
compound has been modified or not to assess cumulative
effects of switching suppliers, grades of raw materials, or
processing changes.
10. Sampling
10.1 Test specimens shall be selected at random from
production stock. In each roll selected, units comprising the
required number of specimens shall be taken from a portion not
including the first or last foot of the roll or portions within 6 in.
of the edge of the roll.
11. Test Methods
11.1 Thickness—Test five specimens obtained from loca-
tions equidistant across the width of the sheet in accordance
with Method C of Test Methods D374/D374M. Report thick-
ness of each specimen and location in sheet.
11.2 Stress-Strain Properties—Determine tensile stress at
100 % elongation (modulus), tensile strength, and ultimate
elongation in accordance with Method A of Test Methods
D412, using a dumbbell specimen (Die C). Report physical
properties as the average value from testing of 6 specimens.
11.3 Pinholes—Examine sheeting for pinholes by viewing
the surface of the sheeting while held under slight-hand
tension. Position a bright light source behind the film so as to
clearly illuminate the surface without producing glare in the
observer’s eyes. A pinhole is defined as any opening observed
in the sheet under the conditions specified. Examine a 12-in.
(305-mm) strip from the entire width of the sheet and report the
presence or absence of pinholes.
11.4 Resistance to Chemical Reagents—Conduct this test in
accordance with Test Method D543, Procedure 1.
11.4.1 Weigh loss after immersion in distilled water at
120°F (49°C) for 24 h.
11.4.2 Weigh loss after immersion in a 1 % soapy water
solution at 120°F (49°C) for 24 h.
11.4.3 Alkali Resistance Test—This test indicates the effect
of hot alkali solutions on the plastic membrane materials.
11.4.3.1 Specimens—Each test unit shall consist of three
specimens of flat material 3 by 3 in. (76 by 76 mm) selected in
accordance with 12.1.
11.4.3.2 Procedure—Make a solution by dissolving 5.0 g of
reagent-grade sodium hydroxide and 5.0 g of reagent-grade
potassium hydroxide in 1 L of distilled water in a beaker. The
solution shall be maintained at a temperature of 150°F (66°C).
11.4.3.3 Immerse each specimen in its own individual
beaker of solution in accordance with 11.4.3.2. Immerse the
specimen for 72 h, and completely change the solution every
24 h. Before immersion of a specimen in the new solution, the
solution shall be at a temperature of 150°F (66°C).
11.4.3.4 Test each specimen for waterproofness in accor-
dance with 11.8 for hydrostatic pressure test.
11.5 Microorganism Resistance Test—Determine the resis-
tance of PVC membrane to mold growth in accordance with
Annex A1.
11.6 Strength and Toughness Tests:
11.6.1 Puncture Resistance Test—Determine the resistance
of the material to mechanical damage which might occur
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
during the installation of the water-containment membrane in
accordance with the procedure described in Annex A2.
11.6.2 Indentational Resistance Test—Determine the ability
of the material to withstand nail-head indentation without
impairing waterproofness. Conduct the test in accordance with
the procedure detailed in Annex A3.
11.6.3 Folding Resistance Test—Determine the ability of the
material to withstand corner folding without impairing water-
proofness in accordance with the procedure outlined in Annex
A4.
11.7 Shrinkage—Test for 1 h at 158°F (70°C) in accordance
with Test Method D1204.
11.8 Hydrostatic Pressure Test—Determine the ability of
plastic membrane material to withstand water pressure without
leaking in accordance with the test procedure in Annex A5.
11.9 Tear Resistance—Determine the average value for six
specimens in accordance with Test Method D1004.
11.10 Volatile Loss—Determine volatile loss in accordance
with Test Methods D1203, Method A, at 158°F (70°C) with
grade AC (6⁄14 mesh) activated carbon. Test specimens shall be
nominal thickness sheeting.
NOTE 1—Requirement for Water—Vapor Transmission of Materials in
Sheet Form (Procedure E of Test Methods E96/E96M) has been deleted
until the test method is improved to the extent that it can be reproducibly
run by commercial laboratories.
12. Conditioning
12.1 Condition all qualification test specimens at 73 6 4°F
(23 6 2°C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less than
40 h prior to testing, in accordance with Method A of Methods
D618.
12.2 In-plant quality control specimens shall be conditioned
at 73 6 4°F (23 6 2°C) for 2 h in air.
13. Certification
13.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
manufacturer’s or the supplier’s certification shall be furnished
to the purchaser stating that samples representing each lot have
been manufactured, tested, and inspected in accordance with
this specification and the requirements have been met. When
specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
results shall be furnished.
14. Product Marking
14.1 Material complying with this specification shall be
continuously marked and shall include the following spaced
out at intervals of not more than 2 ft (610 mm).
14.1.1 Manufacturer’s name (or brand name or trademark).
14.1.2 Material designation.
14.1.3 Designation, Grade 30 or Grade 40, with which the
sheet complies.
14.1.4 Designation, “ASTM D4551”, with which the sheet
complies.
14.1.5 The production code shall be included inside the core
of all shipping units.
 D4551 − 17
15. Packaging and Package Marking
15.1 The material shall be rolled on a substantial core and
packaged in standard commercial containers, so constructed as
to ensure acceptance by common or other carriers for safe
transportation to the point of delivery, unless otherwise speci-
fied in the contract or order.
15.2 Shipping containers shall be marked as agreed upon
between the purchaser and the seller.
15.3 Packaging provisions for government/military procure-
ment.
15.4 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
16. Quality Assurance
16.1 Sheeting manufactured from compound qualified by
Section 9 shall pass the quality assurance and control require-
ments prescribed in Table 2.
16.1.1 In addition to the in-plant quality control inspections
specified in Section 8, at least annually samples shall be tested
and certified as complying with the requirements of Table 2.
16.2 If the results of any tests do not conform to the
requirements of this specification, retesting to determine con-
formity may be performed as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the seller.
17. Keywords
17.1 flexible sheeting; fountains; planters; pools; poly(vinyl
chloride); PVC; recycle usage; shower and safe pans; tile tubs;
water containment membrane; water leakage resistance; water
permeation

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS FOR GOVERNMENT/MILITARY

PROCUREMENT

These requirements apply only Federal/Military procurement, not domestic sales or transfers.

S1. Selection of Acceptable Quality Level (AQL) and of IL AQL

Inspection Level (IL) shall be made with consideration of the Defects in material and workmanship II 2.5
Defects of preparation for delivery S-2 2.5
specific use requirements. This is discussed in Sections 7 and Testing (products) S-1 1.5
8 of the above document, with reference to MIL-STD-105. Testing (polymer, unfabricated) S-1 ...
S3. In the absence of contrary requirements the following
values shall apply:

ANNEXES

(Mandatory Information)

A1. MICROORGANISM RESISTANCE TEST

A1.1 Specimens—Each unit of specimens shall consist of
twelve samples of material each 11⁄2 by 11⁄2 in. (38 by 38 mm)
square, selected in accordance with 11.1.
A1.2 Apparatus, medium and test fungi.
A1.2.1 Apparatus shall consist of:
A1.2.1.1 Autoclave, capable of maintaining an interior tem-
perature of 251 6 4°F (122 6 2°C) at a pressure of 15.5 6 0.5
lb psig (107 6 3.5 kPa) for the purpose of sterilizing glassware
and the medium.
A1.2.1.2 Erlenmeyer Flask, 100-cm2 capacity.
A1.2.1.3 Glass Beads, 1⁄4 in. (6 mm) in diameter, 5 pieces.
A1.2.1.4 Glass Pipettes, two required.
A1.2.1.5 Wire Loop, of nichrome wire.
A1.2.1.6 Petri Dishes (4 in.) 10 cm in diameter with covers
capable of being sealed with cellophane tape. One petri dish is
required for each of the twelve samples comprising a test unit.
A1.2.1.7 Incubation Chamber, capable of maintaining a
temperature of 84.5 6 1.8°F (296 1°C) and a relative humidity
of at least 50 %.
A1.2.1.8 Sterile Room, dust-free, using sterilamps, antisep-
tic spray, or air filtration under pressure to maintain sterile
conditions.
A1.2.2 Test Fungi:
A1.2.2.1 Chaetomium globosum, ATCC 6205.
A1.2.2.2 Aspergillus niger, ATCC 6275.
A1.2.3 Medium—A culture medium of the following com-
position:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

NH4NO3
KH2PO4
MgSO47H2O
K2HPO4
Agar
Distilled water to make 1000 mL
Adjust the pH to a range from 6.4 to 6.8 with HCl or NaOH,
as required. This is the base medium for both fungus cultures.
However, the medium to be used for the Aspergillus niger shall
be enriched by adding 30 g of brown sugar.
A1.3 Procedure:
A1.3.1 Prepare medium as specified in A1.2.3 and pour in
the required number of petri dishes to a depth of 3⁄8 in. (9.5
mm).
A1.3.2 Sterilize in the autoclave, all of the apparatus in
A1.2.1 including the medium contained in the petri dishes by
retention in the autoclave at the temperature and pressure
prescribed in A1.2.1.1 for 60 min. After sterilization, remove to
sterile room of A1.2.1.8, taking care not to contaminate the
sterilized equipment and medium. Use the sterile room for all
preparation procedures.
A1.3.3 Cultures, Stock and Substocks, and Inoculum:
A1.3.3.1 Carefully maintain Chaetomium globosum fungus
stock cultures on strips or squares of sterile porous filter paper,
or blotting paper, on a sterilized culture medium as specified in
A1.2.3 and A1.3.2. If there is evidence of contamination,
promptly renew the culture. The culture may be kept for not
more than four months in a refrigerator at approximately 37.5
to 50°F (3 to 10°C).
(1) Prepare subcultures from a stock culture by transferring
spores from the stock culture to a sterilized covered petri dish
containing sterilized medium. Incubate the subculture for a
period of 7 to 21 days at 84.5 6 1.8°F (29 6 1°C) in the
incubation chamber until in a ripe fruiting condition.
(2) Prepare inoculum by transferring the spores with the
sterilized wire loop to a sterilized Erlenmeyer flask containing
five sterilized glass beads and 10 mL of distilled water. Shake
this mixture sufficiently to break up the spores, after which the
solution shall be diluted to 200 mL.
A1.3.3.2 Carefully maintain Aspergillus niger fungus stock
cultures as specified in A1.3.3.1 (1) on a medium as specified
in A1.3.3.1.
(1) Prepare subcultures and incubate as in A1.3.3.1 (1)
using a medium as specified in A1.3.3.1.
(2) Prepare inoculum as specified in A1.3.3.1 (2).
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4551 − 17
3.0 g A1.3.4 Inoculate six specimens of each test unit as defined
2.5 g in A1.1 with each of the two varieties of fungi. Inoculate three
2.0 g
2.0 g
with the face side up and three with the back side up.
20.0 g A1.3.4.1 Preparation—Handle each specimen under aseptic
conditions and sterilize by dipping in 70 % ethanol for a few
seconds followed by a thorough rinse in distilled water after
which place each firmly in the center of the solidified agar
medium in its respective petri dish. Test six of the specimens
with one fungi and six with the other. Of each subunit of six,
test three with one surface in contact with the medium and
three in contact with the opposite surface as stated under
A1.3.4.
A1.3.4.2 Place controls in each petri dish along with the
specimen. Each control shall be a strip of sterile blotting paper
or filter paper placed on the agar separated from the specimen.
The purpose of the control is to provide a medium for the
fungi, thus proving that the fungi is active.
A1.3.4.3 Make inoculation with a particular fungus by using
a sterile pipette individual to the fungus. With the pipette,
distribute approximately 1.5 mL of inoculum over the
specimen, the control, and the surrounding medium.
A1.3.5 Incubate the inoculated specimens for a period of 28
days at a temperature of 84.5 6 1.8°F (29 6 1°C) and a
relative humidity of 90 %. An appropriate incubation condition
is obtained by placing the covered and sealed petri dishes in a
room or chamber maintained at 85°F (29.5°C) and 50 %
relative humidity.
A1.3.6 Results—Reject test dishes with controls that do not
exhibit a substantial growth of fungi after 7 days of incubation
and start anew. Examine a unit test, the controls of which
indicate a substantial fungus growth, after the required 28-day
incubation period. If after this period any one of the specimens
show evidence of evenly distributed or intense localized fungus
growth under 16X magnification of either side of the sample
(excluding growth overlapping the edges), the test sample shall
be considered to have failed the test.
A1.3.6.1 Photographs of the specimen taken at the end of
the 28 day incubation period are required as a part of the test
on fungus resistance. Take each photograph with a scale laid
beside the specimen to indicate its size, allowing the light
conditions of the photographs to reveal the nature and height of
the fungus growth on the surface of the material. Enlarge the
photographs so the specimen will be a 6 by 6 in. (152 by 152
mm) size.
5
 D4551 − 17

A2. PUNCTURE-RESISTANCE TEST

A2.1 Specimens—Six 10 by 10 in. (254 by 254 mm) pieces A2.3 Procedure:

of material shall make up each test unit.
A2.2 Apparatus:5
A2.2.1 Specimen Holder (Fig. A2.1), shall consist of two 10
by 10 in. (254 by 254-mm) square pieces of 3⁄4 in. (19 mm)
smooth surface hard maple. One of these pieces shall contain a
symmetrically located 6 by 6-in. (152 by 152-mm) opening in
the center. Sandwich the specimen between two specimen
holders, placing the holder with the opening on top. Three
thumb screws or bolts located in the center of each side are
used to securely clamp the specimen within the holder.
A2.2.2 Impact Dart—A7 6 1-oz (196 to 201-g) steel dart as
described in Fig. A2.2.
A2.3.1 Test three specimens with one side up and three with
the opposite side up.
A2.3.2 Place a single specimen between the holding frame
halves and clamp securely by tightening the thumb screws.
Suspend the impact dart vertically above the center of the
specimen with a vertical distance of 3 ft (0.91 m) between the
nose of the dart and the surface of the specimen.
A2.3.3 Release the dart for one free fall on each specimen.
A2.4 Results:
A2.4.1 Visible rupture of any specimens shall require rejec-
tion of the materials in accordance with 17.2.

5
A2.4.2 All specimens passing this test for rupture shall be
Photographs of apparatus described are published in Federal Housing Admin-
istration Document 4900.1, Appendix D, available from the U.S. Department of
further hydrostatically tested in accordance with 11.8 with the
Housing and Urban Development, 451 7th St., SW, Washington, DC 20410. point of impact in the center of the test apparatus.

FIG. A2.1 Wood Holding Fixture for Drop Test

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4551 − 17

FIG. A2.2 Dart for Safety Glass Tests

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4551 − 17

A3. TEST FOR RESISTANCE TO INDENTATION

A3.1 Specimens—The specimens shall be in accordance
with 11.1.
A3.2 Apparatus5—The apparatus shall consist of an in-
denter acting under a total weight of 120 lb (54.4 kg), a smooth
steel plate as a specimen support, and a rigid form for
supporting the indenter and the imposed weight. The indenting
head shall be a 0.178-in. (4.5-mm) diameter steel bar with the
pressing face buffed smooth, but not rounded. The rigid
support shall hold the indenter vertically so that the indenting
face shall contact the specimen in the plane of the contact
surface of the specimen when the specimen is placed on the
horizontal steel plate. The shaft of the indenter shall be capable
of vertical motion along its axis without friction when the
weight causing indentation is imposed thereon.
A3.3 Procedure—Place the specimen on the supporting
plate of the apparatus with the bottom surface up, and lower the
indenter gently until its face contacts the surface of the
specimen. Within 1 or 2 s, apply the total load of 120 lb (54.4
kg) to the specimen and maintain for a period of 60 min.
A3.4 Results—Test each specimen of the test unit
hydrostatically, in accordance with 11.8, with the water con-
tacting each of the specimens on the side opposite the
indentation and with the indentation centered in the hydrostatic
test specimen holder.

A4. FOLDING RESISTANCE TEST

A4.1 Specimens—The specimens shall be in accordance
with 12.1.
A4.2 Apparatus—The apparatus shall consist of a 10-lb
(4.5-kg) weight having a smooth, flat surface, a 1⁄4-in. (6.3-mm)
diameter mandrel, and a constant temperature chamber to be
maintained at 0 6 2°F (−17 6 1°C).
A4.3 Procedure—Place the specimen, weight, and mandrel
in the constant-temperature chamber and accomplish all opera-
tions for the bend test therein. After temperature conditioning
the apparatus and the test unit of specimens for 4 h at within
62°F (61°C) of the temperature indicated in A4.2, bend each
specimen over the mandrel through an angle of 180°. Make the
bend in the middle of each specimen and complete it within 1
s. Then, remove the specimen from the mandrel without
unfolding and place on a smooth, hard surface for support
while the weight is placed on the fold for 30 s. Place the weight
so that its force is evenly distributed over the full length of the
fold. Unfold each specimen and repeat the bending and
weighing operation on each specimen with the second bend
being at 90° to the first and on the same side. Note that all
bends shall be made with the surface of the material intended
to be toward the water exposure on the inside of the bend.
A4.4 Results—After unfolding, test each specimen of the
test unit hydrostatically, in accordance with 11.8, with each
specimen placed so that the inside of the folds are in contact
with the water and with the intersection of the two folds
centered in the hydrostatic test specimen holder.

A5. HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST

A5.1 Specimens—Each test unit shall consist of three speci-
mens of flat material 3 by 3 in. (76 by 76 mm) selected in
accordance with 12.1.
A5.2 Apparatus5—The apparatus for the hydrostatic pres-
sure test shall consist essentially of a pressure tube connected
to a specimen holder. The inner diameter of the pressure tube
shall be 2 in. (51 mm) and the outer diameter 3 in. (76 mm)
with a means for introducing water for below the specimen.
Connect an extension tube to permit a water head of 2 ft (610
mm) with a cutoff valve or other suitable device at the water
inlet to the pressure tube for isolating the sample until the
desired head is reached.
A5.3 Procedure—Clamp the test specimen face down in the
holder, which has been previously filled with water, the face
being that surface which is intended to be installed toward the
water receptor. Take care to avoid trapped air between the
specimen and the water. This is done by filling the holder with
water and sliding the specimen onto the holder in direct contact

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4551 − 17
with the water after having used a piece of transparent material
for practice and for becoming familiar with the technique. Fill
the tube to achieve a 2-ft (610-mm) head.
A5.4 Requirement—Make observations at 10-min intervals
for the first hour, and at hourly intervals for the succeeding 7 h,
after which leave the specimen under hydrostatic pressure for
40 h and examine again. Any evidence of wetness on top of the
material or the formation of a droplet shall cause the material
to be rejected.

A6. PRECISION AND BIAS FOR ANNEX TEST METHODS

A6.1 Precision—Precision testing has not been possible on A6.2 Bias—No determination of bias is possible in any of
any of the annex test methods because there are presently an the annex test methods since no referee methods are available.
inadequate number of product producers to permit statistically
valid precision studies.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4551–12)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2017)

(1) Section 2: Reinstated D374/D374M-16, had been with- (6) Section 7: Renumbered 7.2 to 7.1.
drawn 2013. (7) Subsection 11.1: Added D374M reference.
(2) Section 2: Deleted D7209 reference, standard has been (8) Deleted Section 13.
withdrawn. (9) Renumbered Sections 14 – 18 to 13 – 17.
(3) Subsection 5.2 reworded, deleted D7209 reference. (10) Subsection A1.2.1.1: Changed 63.6°F to 64°F per D618-
(4) Deleted subsection 6.3, renumbered 6.4 to 6.3. 13.
(5) Section 7: Dimensions, deleted 7.1, 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:24 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4659 − 19

Standard Test Methods for

Polyurethane Raw Materials: Determination of Specific
Gravity of Isocyanates 1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4659; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 These test methods determine the specific gravity of
toluenediisocyanate, polymeric (methylene phenylisocyanate),
and liquid methylene di(phenylisocyanate). These test methods
also are applicable to many other liquids. (See Note 1.)
1.1.1 Test Method A—Specific gravity by pycnometer, for
high-accuracy determination.
1.1.2 Test Method B—Specific gravity by hydrometer, for a
less accurate, but rapid, determination.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D891 Test Methods for Specific Gravity, Apparent, of Liquid
Industrial Chemicals
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.22 on Cellular
Materials - Plastics and Elastomers.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D4659 - 14. DOI:
10.1520/D4659-19.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D4052 Test Method for Density, Relative Density, and API
Gravity of Liquids by Digital Density Meter
E100 Specification for ASTM Hydrometers
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
E202 Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and
Propylene Glycols
E2251 Specification for Liquid-in-Glass ASTM Thermom-
eters with Low-Hazard Precision Liquids
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Terms used in this standard are defined in
accordance with Terminology D883, unless otherwise speci-
fied. For terms relating to precision and bias and associated
issues, the terms used in this standard are defined in accordance
with Terminology E456.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 specific gravity—the ratio of the weight in air of a
given volume of the material at a stated temperature to the
weight in air of an equal volume of water at a stated
temperature. It shall be expressed as specific gravity, 25/25°C,
indicating that the sample and reference water were both
measured at 25°C.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 These test methods can be used for research or for
quality control to characterize isocyanates used in polyurethane
products.
4.2 A general test method for specific gravity using a digital
density meter, which applies to isocyanates as well as other
liquids is published in Test Method D4052.
TEST METHOD A—SPECIFIC GRAVITY BY
PYCNOMETER
5. Apparatus
5.1 Pycnometer, of 25 or 50-mL capacity, conical shape with
a capillary side arm overflow tube having a standard-taper 5/12
ground-glass joint and a ground-glass vented cap. A thermom-
eter graduated from 12 to 38°C in 0.2° divisions attached to the
neck of the flask by a standard-taper 10/18 ground-glass joint.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:36 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4659 − 19
This thermometer is to be calibrated using the ASTM ther-
mometer specified in 5.3.
5.2 Water Bath—A water bath maintained at 25 6 0.05°C.
5.3 Thermometer—An ASTM low-softening point
thermometer, calibrated from −2 to +80°C, which meets the
requirements for Thermometer S15C in Specification E2251.
5.4 Analytical Balance—A balance having a sensitivity of at
least 0.1 mg.
6. Reagents and Materials
6.1 Purity of Reagents—Use reagent grade chemicals in all
tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents
conform to the specifications of the Committee on Analytical
Reagents of the American Chemical Society where such
specifications are available.3 Other grades are acceptable,
provided it is ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently high
purity to permit its use without lessening the accuracy of the
determination.
6.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references
to water shall be understood to mean reagent water as defined
by Type IV or better of Specification D1193.
6.3 Chromic Acid Cleaning Solution—Prepare a saturated
solution of chromic acid (CrO3) in concentrated sulfuric acid
(H2SO4, sp gr 1.84).
7. Sampling
7.1 Since organic isocyanates react with atmospheric
moisture, take special precautions in sampling. Usual sampling
methods, even when conducted rapidly, can cause contamina-
tion of the sample with insoluble urea. Therefore, blanket the
sample with dry air or nitrogen at all times. (Warning—
Diisocyanates are eye, skin and respiratory irritants at concen-
trations above the occupational exposure limit (TLV or PEL).
Diisocyanates can cause skin and respiratory sensitization
(asthma) in some people. Once sensitized, it is essential to limit
further exposure to diisocyanates. Use a combination of
engineering controls and personal protective equipment, in-
cluding respiratory, skin and eye protection, to prevent over-
exposure to diisocyanates. Consult the product suppliers’
Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for more detailed information about
potential health effects and other specific safety and handling
instructions for the product.)
8. Test Conditions
8.1 Keep laboratory humidity low, preferably around 50 %
relative humidity.
9. Procedure
9.1 Clean the pycnometer by filling it with chromic acid
cleaning solution and allowing it to stand for a few hours.
Empty the pycnometer and rinse well with distilled water.
3
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmaceutical Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:36 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.2 Fill the pycnometer with freshly boiled distilled water
that has been cooled to 22 to 24°C. Insert the thermometer into
the pycnometer without trapping air bubbles. Place the pyc-
nometer in a water bath at 25 6 0.05°C and allow it and its
contents to equilibrate for at least 30 min. Wipe the overflow
from the side-arm capillary and cover it with the vented cap.
Remove the pycnometer from the bath, wipe dry, and weigh.
9.3 Empty the pycnometer and rinse it with alcohol, then
with ether. Remove the ether and dry the pycnometer under
vacuum for 15 min. (See Note 2.) Weigh the pycnometer.
Determine the weight, W, of the water at 25.0°C in air by
subtracting the weight of the empty pycnometer from the
weight of the pycnometer filled with water.
NOTE 2—Other drying techniques are acceptable if ether is to be
avoided. It must be established that for any alternative drying method, a
clean and dry pycnometer results.
9.4 The isocyanate sample for testing must be completely
liquid, that is, free of any solid material. Fill the pycnometer,
while minimizing exposure of the sample to air.
9.5 Insert the thermometer into the pycnometer without
trapping air bubbles and cleanly wipe any sample off the
outside of the pycnometer. Allow the pycnometer to equilibrate
in the water bath for at least 30 min. Wipe any overflow from
the side arm capillary and cover it with the vented cap. Remove
the pycnometer from the bath, wipe dry, and weigh. To obtain
the weight, S, of the sample at 25.0°C, subtract the weight of
the empty pycnometer from the weight when filled with
sample.
10. Calculation
10.1 Calculate the specific gravity at 25/25°C as follows:
S
Specific gravity, 25/25°C 5
W
where:
S = sample used, g (see 9.5), and
W = water in the pycnometer, g (see 9.3).
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
this test method have not been successful. Data on precision
and bias cannot be given for this reason. Anyone wishing to
participate in the development of precision and bias data can
contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.22 (Section
D20.22.01), ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.
11.2 Test Method E202 is similar and does include precision
data. Precision statements from E202 are restated below as an
estimate of the precision for this test method.
11.2.1 Repeatability—It has been estimated that the maxi-
mum expected difference between two test results for the same
material, obtained by the same operator using the same
equipment on the same day in the same laboratory due solely
to the method is 0.0002 units.
11.2.2 Reproducibility—It has been estimated that the maxi-
mum expected difference between two test results for the same
 D4659 − 19
material, obtained by different operators using different equip-
ment in different laboratories due solely to the method is
0.0008 units.
11.3 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
estimate the bias of this test method.
11.4 For information on equivalence, refer to Practice
E2935.
TEST METHOD B—SPECIFIC GRAVITY BY
HYDROMETER
12. Apparatus
12.1 Hydrometer—An ASTM hydrometer with a specific
gravity range from 1.195 to 1.255 at 15.6/15.6°C conforming
to the requirements for Hydrometer 115H in Specification
E100.
12.2 Hydrometer Cylinder—A clear glass cylinder with an
inside diameter at least 25.4 mm [1 in.] larger than the
hydrometer and tall enough so that there is at least 1 in.
between the bottom of the cylinder and the bottom of the
hydrometer after equilibration at 25°C.
12.3 Thermometer—See 5.3.
12.4 Water Bath—See 5.2.
13. Sampling
13.1 Since organic isocyanates react with atmospheric
moisture, take special precautions in sampling. Usual sampling
methods, even when conducted rapidly, can cause contamina-
tion of the sample with insoluble urea. Therefore, blanket the
sample with dry air or nitrogen at all times. (Warning—
Diisocyanates are eye, skin and respiratory irritants at concen-
trations above the occupational exposure limit (TLV or PEL).
Diisocyanates can cause skin and respiratory sensitization
(asthma) in some people. Once sensitized, it is essential to limit
further exposure to diisocyanates. Use a combination of
engineering controls and personal protective equipment, in-
cluding respiratory, skin and eye protection, to prevent over-
exposure to diisocyanates. Consult the product suppliers’
Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for more detailed information about
potential health effects and other specific safety and handling
instructions for the product.)
14. Test Conditions
14.1 Keep laboratory humidity low, preferably around 50 %
relative humidity
15. Procedure
15.1 The isocyanate sample for test must be completely
liquid, that is, free of any solid material.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:36 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
15.2 To avoid forming air bubbles, slowly pour the sample
into the dry hydrometer cylinder. Place the cylinder in the
water bath. Stir the contents of the cylinder, being careful to
avoid formation of air bubbles. When the temperature of the
sample is 24.8°C, slowly and carefully lower the hydrometer
into the sample liquid to a level two small scale divisions
below that at which it will float and then release the hydrom-
eter. Allow the hydrometer to come to rest and make sure it
does not touch the walls of the cylinder and that there are no
trapped air bubbles. When the temperature of the sample
reaches 25.0°C, read the value on the hydrometer at the
meniscus line of the sample.
15.3 Determine the temperature of the sample just before
and just after reading the hydrometer.
16. Calculation
16.1 Calculate the specific gravity at 25/25°C as follows
(Note 3):
Specific gravity, 25/25°C 5 observed value10.0021
NOTE 3—The correction factor +0.0021 is applied to correct the reading
to 25/25°C because the hydrometer was standardized at 15.6/15.6°C.
17. Precision and Bias
17.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
this test method have not been successful. Data on precision
and bias cannot be given for this reason. Anyone wishing to
participate in the development of precision and bias data can
contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.22 (Section
D20.22.01), ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West
Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.
17.2 Test Method D891 is similar and does include preci-
sion data. Precision statements from D891 are restated below
as an estimate of the precision for this test method.
17.2.1 Repeatability—It has been estimated that the maxi-
mum expected difference between two test results for the same
material, obtained by the same operator using the same
equipment on the same day in the same laboratory due solely
to the method is 0.0005 units.
17.2.2 Reproducibility—It has been estimated that the maxi-
mum expected difference between two test results for the same
material, obtained by different operators using different equip-
ment in different laboratories due solely to the method is
0.0021 units.
17.3 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
mate the bias of this test method.
17.4 For information on equivalence, refer to Practice
E2935.
18. Keywords
18.1 density; hydrometer; isocyanates; polyurethane raw
materials; pycnometer; specific gravity
 D4659 − 19
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4659 - 14)
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) Removed nonmandatory language and corrected grammar (3) Removed definitions and statements of equivalency from
throughout. Precision and Bias, Sections 11 and 17.
(2) Updated 7.1 and 13.1 with latest wording from Center for
the Polyurethane Industry’s Sustainability subcommittee’s
EHS warning.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:36 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4674 − 19

Standard Practice for

Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed
to Indoor Office Environments1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4674; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-

1.1 This practice covers the basic principles and operating
procedures for using fluorescent light to determine color
stability of plastics when materials are exposed in typical office
environments where fluorescent overhead lighting and
window-filtered daylight are used for illumination and where
temperature and humidity conditions are in accordance with
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-
conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommendations for
workers’ comfort.
1.2 This practice describes four methods where specimens
are exposed to fluorescent light under controlled environmental
conditions. Two of the methods use an exposure device that
provides for mixing of fluorescent lamps and two of the
methods use devices that comply with Practice G154.
NOTE 1—Method I uses cool white fluorescent lamps and window glass
filtered fluorescent UVB lamps and is the same method described in
previous versions of this standard.
1.3 Specimen preparation and evaluation of the results are
covered in ASTM methods or specifications for specific
materials. General guidance is given in Practice G151. More
specific information about methods for determining the change
in properties after exposure and reporting these results is
described in Practice D5870.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.5 Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions are nominal.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific precautionary statements are given in Section 7.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D1729 Practice for Visual Appraisal of Colors and Color
Differences of Diffusely-Illuminated Opaque Materials
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and
Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates
D3980 Practice for Interlaboratory Testing of Paint and
Related Materials (Withdrawn 1998)3
D5870 Practice for Calculating Property Retention Index of
Plastics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
G113 Terminology Relating to Natural and Artificial Weath-
ering Tests of Nonmetallic Materials
G141 Guide for Addressing Variability in Exposure Testing
of Nonmetallic Materials
G147 Practice for Conditioning and Handling of Nonmetal-
lic Materials for Natural and Artificial Weathering Tests
G151 Practice for Exposing Nonmetallic Materials in Accel-
erated Test Devices that Use Laboratory Light Sources
G154 Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV)
Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
G169 Guide for Application of Basic Statistical Methods to
Weathering Tests
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The definitions given in Terminology G113
are applicable to this practice.

1 2
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.50 on Durability of Plastics. contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Current edition approved April 15, 2019. Published May 2019. Originally Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D4674 - 02a(2010), the ASTM website.
3
which was withdrawn January 2019 and reinstated in April 2019. DOI: 10.1520/ The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
D4674-19. www.astm.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4674 − 19
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 This practice provides for the exposure of specimens to
fluorescent light under controlled environmental conditions.
Radiant energy is provided by one of the following fluorescent
light sources: (1) VHO cool-white fluorescent lamps and glass
filtered fluorescent UV lamps, (2) VHO cool-white fluorescent
lamps alone, (3) standard output cool white fluorescent lamps
alone, or (4) UVA-351 fluorescent UVA lamps.
4.1.1 Method I is intended to simulate the conditions in an
office environment plus a portion of solar UV radiation
transmitted by window glass. Methods II and III are intended
to simulate only the indoor lighting component of a typical
office environment. Method IV is intended to simulate only the
effects of a portion of solar UV radiation transmitted through
window glass.
NOTE 3—A comparison of the four listed methods has not been
performed, and as such, results obtained from each method cannot be
considered as equivalent.
NOTE 4—For more information on the use of fluorescent UV lamps to
simulate solar UV radiation behind window glass, refer to Annex A1 of
Practice G154.
4.1.2 Do not compare Comparison of results obtained from
specimens exposed using the methods described should not be
made unless correlation has been established between the
methods being compared for the materials being tested.
4.2 Color change is determined periodically throughout the
course of the exposure by comparison of the exposed speci-
mens to unexposed specimens, using either visual or instru-
mental procedures.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Tests conducted in accordance with this practice are
intended to induce property changes associated with use
exposure to light and heat in typical office environments. These
exposures are not intended to simulate the deterioration caused
by localized phenomena such as handling, dirt contamination,
etc.
NOTE 5—Caution: Refer to practice G151 for full cautionary guidance
applicable to all laboratory weathering devices. Additional information on
sources of variability and on strategies for addressing variability by design
and data analysis of laboratory accelerated exposure tests is found in
Guide G141.
5.2 Variation in results may be expected are possible be-
tween the different methods described in this practice. For
example, differences in spectral distribution of the lamps used
and variations in the irradiance for a single type of lamp can
cause significant differences in test results. Therefore, any no
reference to the use of this practice should be made unless
accompanied by a report prepared in accordance with Section
12 that describes needs to include a reference to the method
used.
5.3 Reproducibility of test results between laboratories has
been shown to be good when the stability of materials is
evaluated in terms of performance ranking compared to other
materials or to a control. Therefore, exposure of a similar
material of known performance (a control) at the same time as
the test materials is strongly recommended. It is recommended
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
that at least three replicates of each material be exposed to
allow for statistical evaluation of results.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Test Chamber—Unless otherwise specified, the test
chamber shall comply with the requirements of Practice G151.
6.1.1 The test chamber used for Methods I and II shall be
designed so that simultaneous operation of VHO cool white
and glass filtered UV fluorescent lamps is possible, and shall be
equipped with a radiometer complying with the requirements
of Practice G151 and calibrated from 250 to 400 nm. Annex
Annex A1 contains more information about the design of the
apparatus used for Methods I and II.
6.1.2 The test chamber used for Methods III and IV shall
conform to the requirements of Practice G154.
6.2 The spectral distribution of the UVB-313, UVA-340,
and UVA-351 shall comply with the requirements of practice
G154. The spectral power distribution of the cool white lamps
used shall comply with the requirements given in Annex Annex
A2.
6.3 Window glass—Unless otherwise specified the window
glass shall be good grade clear, flat, drawn “single strength”
sheet glass free of bubbles or other imperfections and between
2.0 and 2.5 mm in thickness. The glass shall be preaged in the
device for at least 24 hours prior to use.
6.4 For Methods I and II, place the apparatus in an envi-
ronment that meets ASHRAE recommendations of 20 to
25.5°C and 40 to 50 % relative humidity. For Methods III and
IV follow the requirements of Practice G154 for the area in
which the instruments are used.
6.5 Instrument Calibration—To ensure standardization and
accuracy, the instruments associated with the exposure appa-
ratus (for example, timers, thermometers, UV sensors, and
radiometers) require periodic calibration to ensure repeatability
of test results. Whenever possible, calibration should needs to
be traceable to national or international standards. Unless
otherwise specified, calibration schedule and procedure shall
be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Hazards
7.1 Never look directly at the operating lamps unless
wearing UV protective eyewear. The apparatus specified in
Section 6 shall be constructed so that the operator will not be
exposed to hazardous levels of UV radiation.
7.2 Discard or recycle lamps in accordance with any rel-
evant local ordinances when they are no longer suitable for the
tests described.
8. Test Specimens
8.1 The recommended specimen size is a rectangular flat
piece 50 by 80 by 4 mm (minimum thickness). This size is
adequate for visual or instrumental evaluation. Other specimen
dimensions may be used by mutual agreement among the
parties concerned but exposed surfaces need to be coplanar for
most consistent results.

9. Test Conditions
9.1 Conduct exposures in accordance with one of the
following exposure methods.
9.1.1 Method I:
9.1.1.1 Use apparatus conforming to the requirements de-
scribed in Annex Annex A1.
NOTE 6—For Method I, the contribution of fluorescent UV lamp
radiation to the total UV actinic exposure is adjusted by changing the
percentage of time the specimens are exposed to the various lamp types.
9.1.1.2 This method provides for exposure of specimens to
radiant energy from an array of very high output (VHO) cool
white fluorescent lamps plus intermittent radiant energy from
window glass filtered fluorescent UV lamps. The total UV
radiant exposure from both sources is calculated by determin-
ing the total UV irradiance from each type of lamp separately
and calculating the product of the total UV irradiance and
exposure time in Watt-hours/m2 (W-h/m2).
9.1.1.3 Place test specimens in the exposure area, leaving at
least a 25 mm empty border around the exposure area.
9.1.1.4 Run the device with both the cool white and fluo-
rescent UV lamps on for at least 20 minutes, then turn off the
fluorescent UV lamps and record the UV irradiance with only
the cool white lamps operating (CWE in W/m2, 250-400 nm).
Calculate the exposure time required for the desired CWE
radiant exposure as follows:
CWH
CWt 5
CWE
where:
CWt = exposure time for cool white lamps,
CWH = desired UV radiant exposure for cool white lamps
alone, and
CWE = UV irradiance measured with only with the cool
white lamps operating.
9.1.1.5 Run the device with only the fluorescent UV lamps
on and record the UV irradiance (UVE in W/m2, 250-400 nm).
The UV actinic exposure from the filtered fluorescent UV
lamps is set at 12 % of the UV actinic exposure for the cool
white lamps. Calculate the total operating time for the fluores-
cent UV lamps as follows:
0.12 3 CWH
UVt 5
UVE
where:
UVt = exposure time for fluorescent UV lamps,
CWH = desired UV radiant exposure for cool white lamps
alone, and
UVE = UV irradiance measured with only with the fluores-
cent UV lamps operating.
NOTE 7—Although an office environment sees some UV exposure due
to sunlight through window glass, most photodegradation originates from
fluorescent lighting. The 12 % is an estimate of a representative office
environment.
9.1.1.6 Calculate the fraction of time per hour for which the
fluorescent UV lamps are turned off (UVOFF) as follows:
CWt 2 UVt
UVOFF 5
UVt
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4674 − 19
(1) Replace the cool white lamps if UVOFF is greater than
or equal to one.
9.1.1.7 Program the device so that the cool white lamps
operate continuously and the fluorescent UV lamps are turned
on once per hour for the fraction of time calculated in section
9.1.1.6. Continue the exposure for the total time calculated in
section 9.1.1.4.
9.1.1.8 Reposition the specimens at time intervals equal to
25 6 5 % of the total time calculated in section 9.1.1.4. Move
specimens just to the right of the center line of the exposure
area to the position farthest to the right in the exposure area and
move remaining specimens one position to the left. Move
specimens just to the left of the center line of the exposure to
the position farthest to the left in the exposure area and move
remaining specimens in this half one position to the right.
9.1.1.9 Maintain chamber air temperature between 30 and
40°C during the exposure. If the air temperature exceeds 40°C,
the device must be shut off and the cause for the high
temperature corrected before exposures can continue.
9.1.1.10 Conduct exposures for a total time agreed upon by
all interested parties. Periodically remove test and control
specimens for color measurement and relevant physical prop-
erty tests.
9.1.2 Method II:
9.1.2.1 Use apparatus conforming to the requirements of
Annex A, but without the fluorescent UV lamps.
(1) 9.1.2.2 Place test specimens in the exposure area, leaving at
least a 25 mm empty border around the exposure area.
9.1.2.3 Operate the device for at least 20 minutes then
record the UV irradiance (CWUV, in W/m2, 250-400 nm).
Calculate the exposure time necessary for the desired cool
white UV irradiance exposure in accordance with section
9.1.1.4.
9.1.2.4 Reposition the specimens during the exposure as
described in section 9.1.1.8.
9.1.2.5 Maintain chamber air temperature between 30 and
40°C during the exposure. If the air temperature exceeds 40°C,
the device must be shut off and the cause for the high
temperature corrected before exposures can continue.
9.1.2.6 Conduct exposures for a total time agreed upon by
all interested parties. Periodically remove test and control
(2)
specimens for color measurement and relevant physical prop-
erty tests.
9.1.3 Method III:
9.1.3.1 Use apparatus conforming to the requirements of
Practice G154 and equipped with F40T12 cool white lamps.
Place specimens in the devices, and fill all spaces not used by
test specimens with blank metal panels. Operate the device
with lamps on continuously and with the black panel tempera-
ture controlled at 50 6 3°C.
9.1.3.2 Specimen Repositioning—Periodic repositioning of
the specimens during exposure is not necessary if the irradi-
ance at the positions farthest from the center of the specimen
area is at least 90 % of that measured at the center of the
exposure area. Irradiance uniformity shall be determined in
(3)
accordance with Practice G151.
3
 D4674 − 19
9.1.3.3 Conduct exposures for a total time agreed upon by
all interested parties. Periodically remove test and control
specimens for color measurement and relevant physical prop-
erty tests.
9.1.4 Method IV:
9.1.4.1 Use apparatus conforming to the requirements of
Practice G154 and equipped with UVA 351 lamps that comply
with the requirements of Practice G154. Place specimens in the
devices, and fill all spaces not used by test specimens with
blank metal panels. Operate the device with lamps on continu-
ously and with the black panel temperature controlled at
50 6 3°C.
9.1.4.2 Specimen Repositioning—Periodic repositioning of
the specimens during exposure is not necessary if the irradi-
ance at the positions farthest from the center of the specimen
area is at least 90 % of that measured at the center of the
exposure area. Irradiance uniformity shall be determined in
accordance with Practice G151.
9.1.4.3 Conduct exposures for a total time agreed upon by
all interested parties. Periodically remove test and control
specimens for color measurement and relevant physical prop-
erty tests.
9.1.5 Other exposure conditions may be used as long as the
exact conditions are detailed in the report. Obtain agreement
between all concerned parties for the specific exposure cycle
used.
10. Procedure
10.1 Prepare specimens in accordance with relevant stan-
dards and identify each in accordance with Practice G147.
10.2 Determine which property or properties of the test and
control specimens will be evaluated. If non-destructive tests
are used, measure the property or properties on each test and
control specimen prior to exposure and after each exposure
increment. Use of instrumental measurements is recommended
whenever possible. Retain a supply of unexposed file speci-
mens of all materials evaluated.
10.2.1 When destructive tests are used, a separate set of
specimens will be needed for each exposure increment. It is
recommended that sufficient file specimens be retained so that
the property of interest can be determined on unexposed file
specimens each time the exposed materials are evaluated.
NOTE 8—Since the stability of file specimen may also be time-
dependent, users are cautioned that over prolonged exposure periods, or
where small differences in the order of acceptable limits are anticipated,
comparison of exposed to file specimens may not be valid.
10.3 Mounting of Test Specimens—Attach the specimens to
the specimen tray or specimen holders in the equipment in such
a manner that the specimens are not subject to any applied
stress. To assure uniform exposure conditions, fill all of the
spaces, using blank panels of corrosion resistant material.
10.4 Evaluation of color and appearance changes of ex-
posed materials shall be made based on comparisons to
unexposed specimens of the same material that have been
stored in the dark.
10.5 Unless otherwise specified, do not mask or shield
Masking or shielding the face of test specimens with an opaque
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
cover for the purpose of showing the effects of exposure on one
panel. Misleading results may be obtained by using this
method, since the masked portion of the specimen is still
exposed to temperature and humidity that in many cases will
affect results.
10.6 Exposure to Test Conditions—Unless otherwise
specified, expose specimens in accordance with one of the
methods described in Section 9. Maintain these conditions
throughout the exposure. Interruptions to service the apparatus
and to inspect specimens shall be minimized.
10.7 Inspection—If it is necessary to remove a test specimen
for periodic inspection, take care not to handle or disturb the
test surface. After inspection, the test specimen shall be
returned to the test chamber with its test surface in the same
orientation as previously tested.
10.8 Apparatus Maintenance—The test apparatus requires
periodic maintenance to maintain uniform exposure conditions.
Perform required maintenance and calibration in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
10.9 Color changes initiated by accelerated exposure may
continue after removal of the specimens from exposure to
radiation. Unless otherwise specified, evaluate the final color
change within 24 hours after the test is completed, preferably
less than one hour, to eliminate possible misleading conse-
quences of post actinic exposure reaction. (Color change
initiated by accelerated exposure may continue after removal
of specimens from exposure to radiation.)
11. Periods of Exposure and Evaluation of Test Results
11.1 In most cases, periodic evaluation of test and control
materials is necessary to determine the variation in magnitude
and direction of property change as a function of exposure time
or radiant exposure.
11.2 The time or radiant exposure necessary to produce a
defined change in a material property can be used to evaluate
or rank the stability of materials. This method is preferred over
evaluating materials after an arbitrary exposure time or radiant
exposure.
11.2.1 Exposure to an arbitrary time or radiant exposure
may be used for the purpose of a specific test if agreed upon
between the parties concerned or if required for conformance
to a particular specification. When a single exposure period is
use, select a time or radiant exposure that will produce the
largest performance differences between the test materials or
between the test material and the control material.
11.2.2 The minimum exposure time used shall be that
necessary to produce a substantial change in the property of
interest for the least stable material being evaluated. An
exposure time that produces a significant change in one type of
material cannot be assumed to be applicable to other types of
materials.
11.2.3 The relation between time to failure in an exposure
conducted in accordance with this practice and service life in
its end use environment requires determination of a valid
acceleration factor. Do not use arbitrary acceleration factors
relating time in an exposure conducted in accordance with this
practice and time in its end use environment because they can
 D4674 − 19
give erroneous information. The acceleration factor is material-
dependent and is only valid if it is based on data from a
sufficient number of separate real time and laboratory acceler-
ated exposures so that results used to relate times to failure in
each exposure can be analyzed using statistical methods.
NOTE 9—An example of a statistical analysis using multiple-laboratory
and exterior exposures to calculate an acceleration factor is described by
Simms4. See Practice G151 for more information and additional cautions
about the use of acceleration factors.
11.3 After each exposure increment, evaluate or rate
changes in exposed test specimens in accordance with appli-
cable ASTM test methods.
11.3.1 For some materials, changes may continue after the
specimen has been removed from the exposure apparatus. In
such cases, it is best if measurements (visual or instrumental)
should be are made within a standardized time period or as
agreed upon between the interested parties. The standardized
time period needs to consider conditioning prior to testing.
11.4 Use of results from exposures conducted in accordance
with this practice in specifications:
11.4.1 If a standard or specification for general use requires
a definite property level after a specific time or radiant
exposure in an exposure test conducted in accordance with this
practice, base the specified property level on results from
round-robin experiments run to determine the test reproduc-
ibility from the exposure and property measurement proce-
dures. Conduct these round robins in accordance with Practice
E691 or Practice D3980 and include a statistically representa-
tive sample of all laboratories or organizations who would
normally conduct the exposure and property measurements.
11.4.2 If a standard or specification for use between two or
three parties require a definite property level after a specific
time or radiant exposure in an exposure test conducted in
accordance with this practice, base the specified property level
on two independent experiments run in each laboratory to
determine the reproducibility for the exposure and property
measurement process. The reproducibility of the exposure/
property measurement process is then used to determine the
minimum level of property after the exposure that is mutually
agreeable to all parties.
11.4.3 When reproducibility in results from an exposure test
conducted in accordance with this practice has not been
established through round-robin testing, specify performance
requirements for materials in terms of comparison (ranked) to
a control material used.
11.4.3.1 Conduct analysis of variance to determine whether
any differences between test materials and control materials is
statistically significant. Expose replicates of the test specimen
and the control specimen so that statistically significant per-
formance differences can be determined.
NOTE 10—Fischer illustrates use of rank comparison between test and
control materials in specifications.5 The precision and bias section of this
4
Simms, J.A., Journal of Coatings Technology, Vol. 50, 1987, pp. 45–53.
5
Fischer, R., Ketola, W., “Impact of Research on Development of ASTM
Durability Testing Standards,” Durability Testing of Non-Metallic Materials, ASTM
STP 1294, Robert Herling, ed., American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia 1995.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
standard shows how rank correlation was used to compare the between lab
results for materials tested in accordance with Method I.
NOTE 11—Guide G169 shows examples using analysis of variance to
compare materials.
12. Report
12.1 The report shall include the following:
12.1.1 Material identification and source (if known).
12.1.2 Exposure apparatus type.
12.1.3 Total exposure time, h.
12.1.4 Exposure method used (I, II, III or IV).
12.1.5 Radiant dosage and wavelength in which it was
measured (CWH for Methods I and II).
12.1.6 Quantity and types of lamps used.
12.1.7 For Methods I and II:
12.1.7.1 Initial and final CW Irradiance (CWE)
12.1.7.2 Initial and final UV Irradiance (UVE)
12.1.7.3 Hours CW Light time (CWt)
12.1.7.4 Hours UV Light time (UVt)
12.1.7.5 UV off time interval (UVOFF – Method I only)
12.1.8 Basis for evaluation:
12.1.8.1 Results from visual or instrumental tests used to
evaluate specimens,
12.1.8.2 Results from visual or instrumental tests used to
evaluate masked areas or file specimens,
12.1.9 Description of the method used for visual or instru-
mental analysis of the specimens,
12.1.10 If instrumental color measurements are used, the
type of equipment and color-difference equation must be
stated.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 Precision
13.1.1 The repeatability and reproducibility of results ob-
tained in exposures conducted in accordance with this practice
will vary with the materials being tested, the material property
being measured, and with the variability in temperature and
irradiance within and between exposure devices. In a round-
robin on Method I conducted in 1986,6 laboratories reported
color (CIE L, a, b) and ∆E for eight materials. Five replicate
specimens of each material were tested. Seven laboratories
participated in the round-robin, but variability in color mea-
surement or exposure conditions, or both resulted in data from
only four laboratories being used for statistical analysis in
accordance with Practice E691. The precision data for the eight
materials tested by the four laboratories is shown in Table 1.
13.1.2 Using the precision data obtained in the round-robin,
two samples of material Aa tested in a single device cannot be
judged to be different (at a 95 % confidence level) unless the
∆E between the unexposed and exposed specimens differs by
more than 0.59. Similarly, two samples of material Aa tested in
different laboratories unless the ∆E difference is larger than
1.05 units. The reproducibility data in Table 1 show how the
precision varies with material and the tolerances needed to
account for variability in exposure and property measurement.
The variability shown in this round-robin studies restricts the
6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR: D20–1135.
 D4674 − 19
TABLE 1 Precision Data for ∆E of Eight Materials Exposed for Time T100 in Round-Robin Exposures Conducted in Accordance with
Method I of This Practice
Material Average Repeatability Reproducibility Repeatability Reproducibility
∆E Standard Standard Limit Limit
Deviation Deviation
Aa 1.99 0.21 0.37 0.59 1.05
Ab 1.61 0.11 0.42 0.31 1.19
Ba 1.53 0.10 0.17 0.28 0.48
Bb 0.39 0.08 0.19 0.23 0.54
Ca 9.25 0.30 1.24 0.85 3.51
Cb 1.07 0.29 0.44 0.82 1.25
Da 3.63 0.25 0.83 0.71 2.35
Db 0.33 0.07 0.26 0.20 0.74

TABLE 2 Average ∆E for Five Replicates of Each Material Exposed to Time T100 in Accordance to Method I Reported by Laboratories
Participating in Round-Robin on This Practice
Material Lab 1 Lab 2 Lab3 Lab 4 Lab 5 Lab 6 Lab 7 Lab Ave
Aa 2.36 1.88 3.66 1.67 1.29 2.14 1.77 2.11
Ab 1.73 1.54 2.14 1.32 1.20 1.26 1.86 1.58
Ba 1.64 1.66 1.33 1.45 1.77 1.45 1.64 1.56
Bb 1.56 0.28 1.22 1.69 0.25 0.11 1.12 0.47
Ca 9.94 9.96 10.81 8.46 8.40 7.49 8.83 9.13
Cb 1.16 0.96 1.38 0.79 0.93 0.59 1.55 1.05
Da 4.35 4.80 4.57 3.12 3.28 3.38 2.74 3.75
Db 0.71 0.20 0.70 0.26 0.35 0.15 0.60 0.42

TABLE 3 Rank Order for Eight Materials Based on ∆E Obtained in Exposure in Accordance with Method I of This Practice (1 = Smallest
∆E, 8 = Largest ∆E)
Material Lab 1 Lab 2 Lab3 Lab4 Lab 5 Lab 6 Lab 7 Lab Ave
Aa 6 6 6 6 5 6 5 6
Ab 5 4 5 4 4 4 6 5
Ba 4 5 3 5 6 5 4 4
Bb 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2
Ca 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Cb 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3
Da 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Db 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1

TABLE 4 Rank Correlation Coefficients between Individual Labs and between a Lab and the Rank Based on Average ∆E for All Labs
Lab 1 Lab 2 Lab3 Lab4 Lab 5 Lab 6 Lab 7 Lab Ave
Lab 1 1.0000 0.9995 0.9995 0.9997 0.9992 0.9997 0.9995 0.9997
Lab 2 0.9995 1.0000 0.9992 0.9997 0.9995 0.9997 0.9992 0.9997
Lab 3 0.9995 0.9992 1.0000 0.9990 0.9982 0.9990 0.9995 0.9997
Lab 4 0.9997 0.9997 0.9990 1.0000 0.9997 1.0000 0.9990 0.9995
Lab 5 0.9992 0.9995 0.9982 0.9997 1.0000 0.9997 0.9987 0.9990
Lab 6 0.9997 0.9997 0.9990 1.0000 0.9997 1.0000 0.9990 0.9995
Lab 7 0.9995 0.9992 0.9995 0.9990 0.9987 0.9990 1.0000 0.9997
Lab Ave 0.9997 0.9997 0.9997 0.9995 0.9990 0.9995 0.9997 1.0000

use of “absolute standards” such as requiring a specific
property level after a specific exposure period.
13.1.3 The same round-robin study demonstrated that the
∆E values for the eight materials could be ranked with a high
level of reproducibility between laboratories. Table 2 shows
the average ∆E for the eight materials reported by the seven
labs that participated in the round-robin. Table 3 shows the
rank ordering based on the average ∆E and Table 4 shows the
rank correlation coefficients between individual labs for each
lab compared to the average for all labs.
13.2 Bias
13.2.1 Bias cannot be determined because no acceptable
standard weathering reference materials are available.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4674 − 19
ANNEXES

(Mandatory Information)

A1. REQUIREMENTS FOR APPARATUS USED FOR METHODS I AND II

A1.1 The interior of the test chamber shall be constructed NOTE A1.1—Typical spectral power distributions for the UVA-340 and
using UV reflective aluminum with a clear chromate or UVB-313 lamps filtered by window glass can be found in Appendix X1 of
non-chrome conversion coating. Practice G154.

A1.2 The test chamber shall consist of a flat area used for
exposure of specimens and an arched “roof” on which are
placed 1500 mA F48T12/CW/VHO cool white fluorescent
lamps. The arched roof shall contain two apertures where 430
mA fluorescent UV lamps are placed behind a soda lime glass
filter that is 2.4 6 0.2 mm thick.
A1.3 The apparatus shall be equipped with timing devices
and timing meters to control on time for the 1500 mA cool
white and 430 mA fluorescent UV lamps and to record the total
operating time for each type of lamp. The spectral power
distribution of the fluorescent UV lamps shall conform to the
requirements of the UVA-340 or UVB 313 lamps given in
Practice G154. Fig. A1.1 shows a typical instrument configu-
ration. The dimensions shown produce a configuration where
irradiance uniformity within the exposure area meets the
requirements of Practice G151. Other configurations and di-
mensions can be used if uniform conditions can be achieved.
A1.4 The specimen table shall have the same reflecting
surface as the lamp reflector. It shall have a vertical adjustment
to control specimen-to-lamp distance.
A1.5 The apparatus shall include a properly calibrated
radiometer to measure irradiance at the center of the exposure
area. The radiometer shall be capable of recording irradiance
between 250 and 400 nm with appropriate cosine response.
A1.6 The apparatus shall be equipped with fans or other
means of cooling to maintain air temperature in the exposure
chamber between 30 and 40°C while the apparatus is operat-
ing. The apparatus shall be equipped with a thermostatic sensor
that will cause lamps to turn off if the upper temperature limit
within the exposure area is exceeded.

FIG. A1.1 Cross Section Diagram of Representative Test Apparatus for Methods I and II.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4674 − 19

A2. SPECTRAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS AND TABULAR DATA FOR FLUORESCENT COOL WHITE LAMPS

A2.1 Spectral Irradiance of Cool White Fluorescent

Lamps—The spectral power distribution of cool white
fluorescent lamps shall comply with the requirements specified
in Table A2.1.

TABLE A2.1 Specification for Cool White Lamps (Irradiance Expressed as a Percent of Integrated Irradiance from 300-400 nm or from
300-700 nm)
(nm) minimum maximum
As percent of 300–400 nm irradiance
<300 0.0 % 1.4 %
300–320 4.0 % 28.0 %
321–360 0.0 % 14.0 %
361–400 65.0 % 90.0 %
As percent of 300–700 nm irradiance
300–400 0.0 % 5.0 %
401–700 94.0 % 100.0 %

NOTE 1—The sum of the percentages given in the “minimum” and “maximum” will not necessarily add up to 100 % because they represent limits based
on measurements made on a number of different cool white lamps. However, the data for any individual lamp will add up to 100 %.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:39 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4726 − 18 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Exterior-Profile Extrusions
Used for Assembled Windows and Doors1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4726; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* environmental practices and determine the applicability of

1.1 This specification establishes requirements for the ma-
terial properties, including dimensional stability,
weatherability, and extrusion quality, of rigid poly(vinyl chlo-
ride) (PVC) exterior profile extrusions used for assembled
windows and doors. Methods for testing and for identifying
exterior profile extrusions that comply with this specification
are also provided.
1.2 The use of rigid PVC recycled plastic in this product
shall be in accordance with the requirements in Section 6.
NOTE 1—Information with regard to application, assembly, and instal-
lation should be obtained from the manufacturers of the profiles and of the
windows and doors.
NOTE 2—Refer to Specification D3678 for interior profile extrusions.
1.3 Color-hold guidelines are provided in an appendix for
the manufacturer’s product development and quality perfor-
mance use.
1.4 Color-hold guidelines are presently limited to white,
grey, beige, light brown, and dark brown (see Figs. X1.1
through X1.5). Additional colors will be added as color
guidelines are developed.
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are for informa-
tion only.
NOTE 3—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes,
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered
as requirements of this standard.
1.7 The following safety hazards caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 11, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published September 2018. Originally
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 2015 as D4726 – 15. DOI:
10.1520/D4726-18.
regulatory limitations prior to use.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1042 Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of
Plastics Caused by Exposure to Heat and Moisture
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and
Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates
D3678 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Interior-Profile Extrusions
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4216 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Building Products Compounds
D4226 Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly-
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Building Products
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
E805 Practice for Identification of Instrumental Methods of
Color or Color-Difference Measurement of Materials
G147 Practice for Conditioning and Handling of Nonmetal-
lic Materials for Natural and Artificial Weathering Tests
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 or E631 and D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 color-hold guidelines—target color regions within a
three-dimensional model which constitute acceptable appear-
ance retention levels of color change resulting from weathering
of a specific product type and color.
3.2.2 temperate northern climate—in weather testing, a
North American metropolitan area testing site located within
73 to 100° W longitude and 37 to 45° N latitude.
4. Classification
4.1 Color Regions—The color region for a color is deter-
mined by measuring the Hunter L, a, b color values for a
sample. Use the integer value (by truncating any fractional
results) to determine the color region for the color using the
following region boundaries.
4.1.1 Region 1—Beige:
L = 60 to 87
a = –2.5 to 4.0
b = 6.5 to 23
4.1.2 Region 2—Dark Brown:
L = 13 to 33
a = –1.0 to 6.0
b = 1.0 to 6.5
4.1.3 Region 3—Gray:
L = 33 to 74
a = –3 to 4
b = –5.5 to 5.5
4.1.4 Region 4—Light Brown:
L = 30 to 60
a = –1.5 to 12.5
b = 3.0 to 12.5
4.1.5 Region 5—White:
L = 83 to 100
a = –4 to 0
b = –5.5 to +5.5
NOTE 4—L, a, b is determined in accordance with the Hunter L, a, b
opponent color space system in Test Method D2244.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The purpose of this specification is to establish a
recognized standard of quality for rigid poly(vinyl chloride)
(PVC) exterior weatherable profile extrusions for use in
assembling windows and doors. The information contained in
this specification is intended to be helpful to producers,
distributors, and users, and to promote understanding between
buyers and sellers. It is also intended to serve as the basis for
specification requirements of exterior windows and doors
which are made from rigid PVC profile extrusions in their
construction.
6. Materials and Manufacture
6.1 The profile extrusions used for assembled windows and
doors shall be made principally of weatherable, rigid poly(vi-
nyl chloride) (PVC) compounds meeting or exceeding the
requirements of Class 1-20131-13 as defined in Specification
D4216.
NOTE 5—Non-PVC materials may be used as a capstock.
6.2 Rigid PVC recycled plastic is acceptable for use in this
product if all the requirements in the sections on Terminology
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
(Section 3), Materials and Manufacture (Section 6), Physical
Requirements (Section 7), and Performance Requirements
(Section 8) are met by the extrusions containing PVC recycled
plastic.
6.3 The PVC compound in the extruded section shall have
visual uniform color and be free of any visual surface or
structural changes, such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking,
or pitting.
6.4 Rework Material—Clean, homogeneous PVC rework
material or rework material containing PVC capstock gener-
ated from the manufacturer’s own production of the same class
compound is acceptable for use by the same manufacturer
providing that the extruded profiles meet all the requirements
of this specification. Clean principally PVC rework material
containing non-PVC capstock is acceptable for use in the
substrate of a capstocked product by the same manufacturer,
providing that the extruded profiles meet all of the require-
ments of this specification.
6.5 The PVC compound shall have successfully met the
weathering requirements for six months at each climatic testing
site prescribed in A1.1.1 prior to use in production of exterior-
profile extrusions for either market development or sales.
NOTE 6—The six-month-test requirement constitutes a screening pro-
cess to eliminate catastrophic failure in the marketplace.
7. Physical Requirements
7.1 Dimensions—The size, thickness, and dimensional tol-
erances of the exterior profiles shall be as agreed upon between
the supplier and the purchaser in the purchase order, or by
established internal process control standards.
7.2 Dimensional Stability—The dimensional stability of the
exterior-profile extrusions shall be determined in accordance
with 11.3. Extrusions over 0.040 in. (1.02 mm) shall have a
maximum average shrinkage of 2.2 % for all sides measured,
with no single value exceeding 2.4 %. Extrusions of 0.040 in.
(1.02 mm) or less shall have a maximum average shrinkage of
3 %.
7.3 Impact Resistance—Flat sections of the exterior profile
extrusion shall have a minimum brittle impact failure of 1.0
in.·lb/mil (4450 J/m) when tested in accordance with Test
Methods D4226, Procedure B, using impactor C.125. Refer to
11.4.
8. Performance Requirements
8.1 Weathering:
8.1.1 The exposures listed in Annex A1 shall be conducted
in order to meet the requirements of this specification. All
exposures shall be conducted at an angle of 45° S, plywood-
backed, in accordance with Practice D1435 and Practice G147.
8.1.2 After six-month and 1-year exposure times, the mini-
mum mean impact for 20 measurements conducted on the
exposed specimens shall be at least 0.6 in·lb/mil (2670 J/m).
Test impact in accordance with 11.4, A1.4, and A1.5.
8.1.3 After each exposure time, the tested specimens shall
maintain a visual uniform color and be free of any visual
 D4726 − 18
changes in appearance at the surface, such as peeling, chipping,
cracking, flaking, and pitting when tested in accordance with
Annex A1.
NOTE 7—It is recommended that manufacturers use the color-hold
guidelines in Appendix X1 to ensure quality performance.
8.1.4 Weatherability conformance testing requirements are
to reflect performance of a “typical” extrusion system profile
representing a specific PVC compound and a specific extrusion
technology. In no case is there an implied requirement for
testing all the various shaped profiles. The lengthy outdoor
weatherability testing shall be performed concurrently with
market development of new applications and sales of profiles
to existing markets. Completion of weatherability testing prior
to marketing of the product is not required. The profile
extrusion producer shall immediately respond in terms of
compound change or extrusion technology change to unsatis-
factory weatherability behavior of the profiles under test in any
climatic test site at any stage of the weatherability testing.
9. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
9.1 The extrusions shall meet internal process control stan-
dards in section, color, and finish. The extrusions shall be
substantially straight and free from defects that might affect
appearance or serviceability.
10. Sampling
10.1 Select samples using a statistically acceptable proce-
dure. The samples shall be representative of the compound
used.
11. Test Methods
11.1 General—Use the inspection and test procedures con-
tained in this section to determine the conformance of products
to the requirements of this specification. A producer or dis-
tributor representing products as conforming to this specifica-
tion shall use statistically based sampling plans that are
appropriate to each manufacturing process. Keeping essential
records are necessary to document with a high degree of
assurance the claim that all of the requirements of this
specification have been met. Additional sampling and testing of
the product, as agreed upon between the supplier and the
purchaser, is not precluded by this section.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
11.2 Conditioning of Specimens—Condition the test speci-
mens in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618. For the
purpose of quality control testing, the minimum conditioning
time shall be four hours.
11.3 Dimensional Stability:
11.3.1 Determine the dimensional stability in accordance
with Test Method D1042, except that one or more specimens
shall be exposed to either of the following test cycles:
11.3.1.1 30 min immersed in water maintained at 180 6 2°F
(82 6 1 °C), or
11.3.1.2 30 min conditioned in a forced-ventilation oven at
180 6 2°F (82 6 1 °C).
11.3.2 Specimens shall condition for no less than 1 h in
accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618, prior to
measurement. If a specimen were to fail, select and retest two
additional specimens.
11.4 Impact Test—Determine the impact strength in accor-
dance with Test Methods D4226, Procedure B, using the C.125
impactor.
12. Packing, Packaging, and Package Marking
12.1 The exterior profile extrusions shall be packaged in
such a manner as to provide reasonable protection against
damage in ordinary handling, transportation, and storage.
12.2 Provisions of Practice D3892 shall apply to this speci-
fication.
12.3 Marking on each package of extruded profile extru-
sions shall include the following:
12.3.1 Manufacturer’s name or trademark;
12.3.2 Identity of code number of extrusion profiles;
12.3.3 Class of compound (Specification D4216) used in
profiles;
12.3.4 The designation ASTM D4726, affirming that the
product so marked has been qualified to all the provisions of
this specification, and
12.3.5 The date and any other relevant information, such as
factory, machine, production shift, and so forth, either directly
or all or partly coded.
13. Keywords
13.1 color-hold guidelines; doors; exterior-profile extru-
sions; poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC); recycled plastic; windows
 D4726 − 18
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
A1. WEATHERABILITY PROCEDURE
A1.1 Summary of Procedure of Determining
Weatherability
A1.1.1 Flat section specimens cut from finished product
lineals or laboratory extruded samples are exposed in accor-
dance with Practice D1435 and Practice G147 at 45° S,
plywood-backed, in a hot, dry (desert) climate; a hot, humid
climate; and in a northern temperate climate for periods of six
months, one year and two years.
A1.1.2 Degree of retention of the original impact strength
due to weather exposure in each exposure site is measured after
six-months and one-year exposure.
A1.1.3 The acceptability of color uniformity, and surface
changes resulting from weathering at each test site and each
exposure frequency is determined by visual observation in
comparison to the unexposed specimens.
A1.2 Significance
A1.2.1 The processing of poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) com-
pounds has influence on impact retention and some influence
on appearance retention. For this reason samples prepared for
impact retention must be processed in a manner similar to the
commercial product while still permitting the use of laboratory
scale equipment.
NOTE A1.1—It is recommended that manufacturers use the color-hold
guidelines in Appendix X1 to ensure quality performance.
A1.2.2 Poly(vinyl chloride) compounds undergo complex
changes when exposed to the weather. Changes in appearance
are caused by chemical changes in the PVC, additives, or
pigments. Changes in appearance are caused by selective
erosion of some pigments faster than others. Changes in impact
strength are due to chemical changes in the PVC or additives,
or due to physical changes on the surface as a result of erosion
and crazing.
A1.3 Sampling and Specimen Preparation
A1.3.1 Select samples using a statistically acceptable pro-
cedure. The samples shall be representative of the product to be
qualified.
A1.3.2 If commercial parts are used, cut them into sections
so that flat test specimens at least 1.5 in. (38 mm) wide can be
obtained. The back surface of the specimen must lay as flat as
possible on the specimen support anvil. Cut the flat sections
such that there are no ridges or raised areas remaining on the
back surface of the specimen that would make contact with the
specimen support anvil. The specimens shall be free of obvious
imperfections, grooves, ribs, and so forth. Material prepared in
the laboratory by a similar process is an alternate to a
commercial part. If the commercial product is extruded, the
laboratory specimen must be extruded; if the commercial
product is a laminate of two materials, the laboratory specimen
must be laminated with the two materials, and so forth.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
A1.3.3 The number of specimens or the size of the specimen
must be sufficient to obtain at least 20 impact locations of the
dropped dart for each weathering interval.
A1.3.4 The thickness of any test specimen must differ from
the average test specimen by no more than 10 %.
A1.4 Conditioning
A1.4.1 Condition the test specimens, including specimens
removed from the weather exposure, at 73.4 6 3.6°F (23.0 6
2.0 °C) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less than 24 h
before testing. In no case shall weathered specimens be
oven-dried before testing.
NOTE A1.2—The operational fluctuations are allowable deviations from
the specified temperature and relative humidity settings. They do not
imply that these settings can be higher or lower than that specified. If the
operational fluctuations are greater than the maximum allowed, correct the
cause of the problem before continuing the conditioning.
A1.5 Procedure
A1.5.1 Obtain test specimens in accordance with A1.3.
A1.5.2 Measure the impact resistance on an unexposed
specimen in accordance with Test Methods D4226, Procedure
B, with a C.125 impactor and record permanently.
A1.5.3 Mark the specimens permanently so as to not lose
their identity during weathering. Weather specimens at 45°S,
plywood-backed, in accordance with Practice D1435 in both a
dry/hot and hot/humid, and northern temperate climate zones.
Remove specimens for testing after six-months, one-year, and
two-year exposure. Further testing is optional. More frequent
exposure increments are preferred to some applications.
A1.5.4 After exposure, evaluate the appearance of the
exposed specimens.
NOTE A1.3—Additional color development is known to occur for PVC
products after removal from exposure to solar radiation. This change in
appearance is referred to as “Dark Time Yellowing.” For two locations
representing hot/humid and northern temperate climate zones, visual color
comparisons within 48 h of removal is strongly recommended for PVC
products. For a hot/dry climate zone, it is strongly recommended the
visual color comparison be made within 8 h of removal from the exposure
rack.
A1.5.5 Wash the exposed specimens in accordance with the
procedure in Annex A2.
A1.5.6 Condition in accordance with A1.4.
A1.5.7 The acceptability of color uniformity, and surface or
structural changes resulting from weathering at each test site
and each exposure frequency is determined by visual observa-
tion in comparison to the unexposed specimens.
A1.5.8 Note and record any nonuniform change in color.
A1.5.9 Measure average impact resistance of the weathered
specimens, weathered side up, using the same method used for
the unexposed specimen (A1.5.2).
 D4726 − 18
A2. WASHING WEATHERED SPECIMENS
A2.1 Scope
A2.1.1 This procedure provides a consistent and reproduc-
ible practice for washing weathered specimens. The procedure
is designed to minimize any effects of altering the surface of
the specimen in other than a predictable manner.
A2.2 Equipment
A2.2.1 Mild Detergent.
A2.2.2 Sponge or Soft Cloth.
A2.3 Procedure
A2.3.1 Flush the exposed specimen with distilled or deion-
ized water.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. COLOR-HOLD GUIDELINES WEATHERING TEST
X1.1 Scope
X1.1.1 Color-hold guideline weatherability testing provides
a method for estimating the acceptability of color change in a
window and door profile product over an extended period of
service. Changes in appearance are caused by chemical
changes in the PVC, additives, or pigments. Changes in
appearance are caused by selective erosion of some pigments
faster than others.
X1.1.2 It has been shown that commercial window and door
profile products which demonstrate weathering behavior that
approximates these target guidelines during a two-year test
program exhibit acceptability for the marketplace in terms of
changes in appearance.
X1.1.3 These tests are designed for the window and door
manufacturer’s product development and quality performance
use only and are not for regulatory use.
X1.2 Significance and Use
X1.2.1 Color-hold guidelines provide boundary target color
regions within a three-dimensional model, which constitutes
acceptable appearance retention levels of color change result-
ing from weathering of a specific window or door profile
product type, formulation, and color.
X1.2.2 Each color region is defined by the manufacturers of
vinyl window and door profiles as specific color-hold guide-
lines (see Note X1.1). Regardless of where a specific color falls
within the region, it becomes the control on each of the three
graphs plotting color difference of each manufacturer’s formu-
lation and color.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
A2.3.2 Wash the specimen lightly with mild detergent using
a sponge or soft cloth.
A2.3.2.1 The scrubbing action shall not be excessive and
shall be limited to back and forth scrubbing along the grain or
pattern, if one exists.
A2.3.2.2 Avoid circular scrubbing.
A2.3.3 Evaluate specimen visually to determine if the
specimen is “soil free.”
A2.3.4 If not “soil free,” lightly wipe the specimen once
over the surface with a “sopping wet” sponge in the direction
of the grain or pattern, if one exists.
A2.3.5 Reflush the specimen with distilled or deionized
water and dry in a vertical position, placed so that water will
run off with the grain or pattern, if one exists.
NOTE X1.1—Five color regions are presently defined as specific
color-hold guidelines.
X1.2.3 Color-hold guidelines are unique and specific to a
product application, such as window and door profiles and may
not be transposable for use on other product applications.
NOTE X1.2—In any product application, color-hold guidelines are
related to a perceived acceptable level of color change. Therefore, window
and door color-hold guidelines may be acceptable for transposition for
building railings or fence profile applications, but not for siding applica-
tions.
X1.3 Establishing Window and Door Color Regions
X1.3.1 The window and door manufacturer’s color panel
uses the following steps to establish the window and door color
regions.
Step 1—All commercial unexposed window and door profile
colors are divided into rational similar color regions represent-
ing a visibly definable hue (white, beige, dark brown, gray, and
light brown). See Figs. X1.1-X1.5. Each color is then measured
in Hunter L, a, b units and plotted in color space.
Step 2—The color region itself is then defined by the
extreme Hunter L, a, b units within the population of colors.
Step 3—Any specific color being evaluated within the color
region becomes the control for color-difference studies. Refer
to X1.3.
Step 4—Simulated two-year weathered samples for each
color region encompassing areas within that region are pre-
pared.
Step 5—A visual examination and rating of each simulated
weathered sample is conducted by a panel of window and door
 D4726 − 18

FIG. X1.1 White Color-Hold Guidelines

manufacturers and color specialists to establish a visual aver-
age rating of limits of acceptability of color change for the
window and door application. After visual examination, the
acceptable delta (∆) limits are plotted three dimensionally and
considered preliminary limits.
Step 6—Real world data from two-year weathering studies
in three locations, representing hot/dry, hot/humid, and north-
ern temperate climate zones are then plotted in terms of change
of Hunter L, a, b from the control for each of the colors within
that region.
Step 7—The final reference ellipses of color-hold guidelines
for each region are then established by adjustment of the
preliminary data by use of the real world data. Refer to X1.3.
The ellipses are then normalized and the mathematical equa-
tions for each set of ellipses are developed.
Step 8—Concurrent with development of the color-hold
guidelines for each color region, outdoor weathering of all
commercial window and door profile samples will be contin-
ued in three locations, representing hot/dry, hot/humid, and
northern temperate climate zones in a five-year program

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18

FIG. X1.2 Gray Color-Hold Guidelines

followed each five years by a new study, including new colors

and formulations representing current commercial products.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18

FIG. X1.3 Beige Color-Hold Guidelines

X1.4 Summary of Procedure for Determining Weather-
ing
X1.4.1 Flat section specimens cut from finished product
window and door profiles are exposed in three locations
representing hot/dry, hot/humid, and northern temperate cli-
mate zones.
X1.4.2 Color change caused by weather exposure at each
exposure site is measured after six months, one year, and two
years of exposure.
X1.4.3 The acceptability in the change in color resulting
from weathering at each test site and exposure frequency is
determined by reference to the appropriate color-hold guideline
ellipses for that specific color or, as an alternative, by reference
to the appropriate color-hold guideline equation for that spe-
cific color.
X1.5 Sampling and Specimen Preparation
X1.5.1 Select samples using a statistically acceptable pro-
cedure. The samples shall be representative of the window and
door profile product to be qualified.
X1.5.2 If commercial parts are to be used, they shall be cut
into specimens that are flat and are free of any imperfections.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18

FIG. X1.4 Light Brown Color-Hold Guidelines

Cut a sufficient number of specimens to allow removal of a X1.6 Weathering Practice

specimen at each weathering time interval specified at each
testing site, plus retained unexposed specimens. Alternatively,
samples may be washed, measured, and returned to the test
site.
X1.5.3 Samples prepared in the laboratory by the same
process (extrusion) and melt temperature may be used as an
alternative to a commercial sample. The laboratory sample
must be extruded under similar conditions to those used to
prepare the commercial product.
X1.5.4 The thickness of any test specimen shall be the same
thickness as the window and door profile commercial product,
differing from the average test specimen by no more than 10 %.
X1.6.1 Prepare test specimens in accordance with X1.5.
X1.6.2 Mark each specimen permanently so as to ensure
retention of identity during and after weathering.
X1.6.3 Measure in replicate the original tristimulus X, Y,
and Z values for each specimen using 2° observer and
Illuminant C, specular components included, in accordance
with Practice E805. Calculate the Hunter L, a, b units in
accordance with the equations in the section on Hunter L, a, b
Color Space and Color-Difference Equation in Test Method
D2244, using the average of the replicate measurements and
record them in a permanent record.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18

FIG. X1.5 Dark Brown Color-Hold Guideline

X1.6.4 Weather specimens at an angle of 45° S, plywood-
backed, in accordance with Practice D1435 in three locations,
representing hot/dry, hot/humid, and northern temperate cli-
mate zones.
X1.6.5 Remove specimens for testing after six months, one
year, and two years of exposure.
X1.6.6 It is recommended that exposed specimens be evalu-
ated for color characterization at the test site. If this is not
possible, use an expedient shipping procedure to minimize
time between exposure and testing. Color measurement shall
be completed within seven days after removal from the
exposure rack.
X1.6.6.1 Additional color development is known to occur
for PVC products after removal from exposure to solar
radiation. This color change is referred to as “Dark Time
Yellowing.” Weathering locations representing hot/humid and
northern temperate climate zones, color measurements within
48 h of removal is strongly recommended for PVC products.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18
For a hot/dry climate zone, it is strongly recommended the X1.6.14.3 Insert the ∆L, ∆a, and ∆b values into the Gray
color measurement be made within 8 h of removal from the Colorhold Ellipsoid Equation to calculate the ellipsoid value.
exposure rack. Gray Colorhold Ellipsoid:
X1.6.7 Wash the exposed specimens in accordance with the ~ ∆L 2 1.20! 2 ~ ∆a10.15! 2 ~ ∆b 2 0.10! 2
1 1 51 (X1.1)
procedure in Annex A2. ~ 7.30! 2 ~ 1.85! 2 ~ 3.00! 2
X1.6.8 Measure and record the color of the exposed speci-
~ 4.20 2 1.20! 2 ~ 20.2510.15! 2 ~ 20.90 2 0.10! 2
mens in accordance with X1.6.3 after each exposure frequency. 1 1
~ 7.30! 2 ~ 1.85! 2 ~ 3.00! 2
X1.6.9 Calculate and record the change in L, a, b color
coordinates for each specimen exposure frequency by refer- 50.16910.0310.111
ence to the original color (X1.6.3) and the exposed color
50.283
(X1.6.8).
X1.6.10 Note and record any nonuniform change in color The ellipsoid value is less than 1.00, so the outdoor exposure
on any specimen. specimen is within the gray colorhold guideline.
X1.6.11 Determine the acceptability of the change in color X1.7 Color Hold Guideline Equations
resulting from weathering at each test site and exposure X1.7.1 White:
frequency by reference to the appropriate series of color-hold
guideline ellipses for that specific color. The target three- ~ ∆L 2 0.00! 2 ~ ∆a 2 0.00! 2 ~ ∆b 2 3.00! 2
1 1 51 (X1.2)
dimension color space is plotted as guideline ellipses for each ~ 6.00! 2 ~ 2.30! 2 ~ 5.50! 2
color (∆a versus ∆b), (∆a versus ∆L), and (∆b versus ∆L) in X1.7.2 Gray:
Fig. X1.1(a) to 5(c). For example, in the case of white window ~ ∆L 2 1.20! 2 ~ ∆a10.15! 2 ~ ∆b 2 0.10! 2
and door profiles, use Fig. X1.1(a), 1(b), and 1(c). 1 1 51 (X1.3)
~ 7.30! 2 ~ 1.85! 2 ~ 3.00! 2
X1.6.12 Plot the specific change in the color coordinates X1.7.3 Beige:
when compared to the unexposed specimen color coordinates
(X1.6.3) by plotting on each of the guideline ellipses for that ~ ∆L'20.85! 2 ~ ∆a"10.15! 2 ~ ∆b'20.60! 2
1 1 51 (X1.4)
color. To meet the color-hold guidelines, the plotted change in ~ 5.65! 2 ~ 2.65! 2 ~ 5.20! 2
color for ∆a, ∆b, and ∆L will fall essentially within the X1.7.3.1 In order to duplicate the original hand-drawn
acceptance regions in all three color ellipses. ellipses for Beige, two axes rotations were made to the
X1.6.13 Report any deviation and extent of deviation from ellipsoid equation. The ∆b – ∆a plane was rotated –0.50
the target guideline ellipses by ∆a, ∆b, and ∆L for any test site radians, and the ∆L– ∆a plane was rotated –0.30 radians.
and exposure frequency. Report any deviation from uniform X1.7.3.2 To calculate the ellipsoid value for Beige, counter-
color change in any specimen. Report any other appearance rotations of the ∆L, ∆a, and ∆b data must be made. Note that
change in any specimen. ∆a is rotated twice, and ∆a" is used to calculate the ellipsoid
X1.6.13.1 As an alternative to plotting the color change data value.
on the color hold guideline ellipses, the equations for the ∆a'5 ~ ∆b 2 1∆a 2 ! 0.5 ~ sin~ arctan~ ∆a/∆b ! 10.5!!
corresponding guidelines set of ellipses may be used. The X1.7.3.3 Calculations for ∆L', ∆a", and ∆b' used in the
calculations are performed by inserting the delta L, delta a and ellipsoid equation for Beige:
delta b values into the equation and solving for the value on the
∆L' 5 ~ ∆L 2 1∆a' 2 ! 0.5 ~ cos ~ arctan~ ∆a'/∆L ! 10.3!! (X1.5)
left side of the equation. If the left side of the equation is less
than or equal to 1, the product meets the color-hold guidelines. ∆a" 5 ~ ∆L 2 1∆a' 2 ! 0.5 ~ sin ~ arctan~ ∆a'/∆L ! 10.3!! (X1.6)

X1.6.14 An Example of an Ellipsoid Calculation: ∆b' 5 ~ ∆b 2 1∆a 2 ! 0.5 ~ cos ~ arctan~ ∆a/∆b ! 10.5!! (X1.7)
X1.6.14.1 Take an initial color reading of the specimen. X1.7.4 Lt. Brown:
Example: L = 75.25, a = 0.50, b = 2.85 ~ ∆L 2 1.45! 2 ~ ∆a10.45! 2 ~ ∆b 2 0.05! 2
By definition, this specimen is in the Gray Color Region. ~ 5.45! 2
1
~ 3.65! 2
1
~ 3.95! 2
51 (X1.8)
X1.6.14.2 Take a color reading after an outdoor exposure.
Example: L = 79.45, a = 0.25, b = 1.95 X1.7.5 Dk. Brown:
The color difference (exposed - initial) is: ∆L = 4.20, ∆a = ~ ∆L 2 2.05! 2 ~ ∆a 2 0.20! 2 ~ ∆b10.30! 2
1 1 51 (X1.9)
–0.25, ∆b = –0.90 ~ 5.05! 2 ~ 1.90! 2 ~ 2.50! 2

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4726 − 18
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4726–15)
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2018)

(1) Deleted D7209 reference in Section 2. (14) Reworded A1.5.4.

(2) Removed D7209 reference in 6.2. (15) Reworded A1.5.5.
(3) Reworded 6.3. (16) Added Note A1.3.
(4) Deleted 6.5 and 6.6. (17) Reworded A1.5.8.
(5) Reworded, removed color reference in 8.1.3. (18) Reworded A2.1.1.
(6) Reworded 9.1. (19) Reworded A2.2.1.
(7) Deleted A1.1.2. (20) Reworded X1.1.1.
(8) Reworded A1.2.1. (21) Added Note X1.3.
(9) Added Note A1.1. (22) Reworded X1.4.1.
(10) Reworded A1.2.2. (23) Reworded X1.6.4.
(11) Reworded A2.2.1. (24) Added X1.6.6.1.
(12) Added Note A1.2. (25) Reworded X1.6.13.
(13) Deleted A1.5.2. (26) Added X1.6.13.1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:44 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4754 − 18

Standard Test Method for

Two-Sided Liquid Extraction of Plastic Materials Using FDA
Migration Cell1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4754; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 1.7 Analytical procedures must be available to quantitate

1.1 This test method covers the use of the FDA migration
cell in the extraction of components and permits quantitation of
individual migrants from plastic materials by suitable extract-
ing liquids, including liquid foods and food-stimulating sol-
vents.
1.2 This test method provides a two-sided, liquid extraction
test for plastic materials that can be formed into film, sheet, or
disks.
1.3 This test method has been applied to a variety of
migrant/polymer systems in contact with numerous foods and
food simulants.2 Though most of the migrants examined were
radiolabeled, the use of the FDA cell has been validated for
migration studies of unlabeled sytrene from polystyrene.3
1.4 This test method has been shown to yield reproducible
results under the conditions for migration tests requested by the
FDA. However, if the data is to be submitted to the FDA, it is
suggested that their guidelines be consulted.
1.5 Because it employs two-sided extraction, this test
method may not be suitable for multi-layered plastics intended
for single-sided food contact use.
1.6 The size of the FDA migration cell as described may
preclude its use in determining total nonvolatile extractives in
some cases.
NOTE 1—For more information, see Practice D1898, the AOAC
Methods of Analysis on Flexible Barrier Materials Exposed for
Extraction, and the Guidance for Industry: Preparation of Premarket
Submissions for Food Contact Substances: Chemistry Recommendations,
December 2007.
the migrant(s) generated by this test method.
1.8 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.9 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific hazards statements are given in Section 8.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this test method.
1.10 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:4
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)5
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
IEEE/ASTM SI 10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modernized Metric System
2.2 Association of Offıcial Analytical Chemists (AOAC)
Methods of Analysis:
Flexible Barrier Materials Exposed for Extraction6

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
4
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods. For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Current edition approved May 1, 2018. Published May 2018. Originally contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
approved in 1987. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D4754 – 11. DOI: Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
10.1520/D4754-18. the ASTM website.
2 5
“A Study of Indirect Food Additive Migration,” Arthur D. Little, Inc., FDA The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
Contract No. 223-77-2360. www.astm.org.
3 6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may Available through the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, 481 North
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1141. Frederick Avenue, Suite 500, Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877-2417 USA.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:52 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4754 − 18
FIG. 1 FDA Migration Cell
2.3 Federal Document:
Guidance for Industry: Preparation of Premarket Submis-
sions for Food Contact Substances: Chemistry
Recommendations, December 20077
3. Terminology
3.1 General—The units, symbols, and abbreviations used in
this test method are in accordance with Terminology D883 and
Practice IEEE/ASTM SI 10.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Specimens of plastic materials, formed in the shape of
disks, are threaded onto a stainless steel wire with alternating
glass bead spacers and placed in a glass vial. Solvent is added
to the vial and the vial is capped and maintained at the desired
extraction temperature. Aliquots of the liquid are removed at
various times and the migrant(s) in the liquid determined by
suitable analytical methods.
NOTE 3— Significant migration loss due to volatility may occur if
migration is carried out at temperatures exceeding 50°C for periods
greater than 2 weeks.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Knowledge of migrants from plastic materials may
serve many useful purposes, such as testing for compliance
with food additive regulations. The procedure described in this
test method is recommended as suitable for obtaining such data
on many migrant(s)/plastic(s) combinations.
6. Apparatus
6.1 FDA Migration Cell (Fig. 1), consisting of:
7
Available from Division of Food Contact Notifications, Office of Food Additive
Safety, Center for Food Safety and Applied Nutrition, Food and Drug
Administration, College Park, MD 20740, USA. https://www.fda.gov/Food/
GuidanceRegulation/GuidanceDocumentsRegulatoryInformation/
IngredientsAdditivesGRASPackaging/ucm081818.htm
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:52 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.1.1 Glass Vials, 23-mL,
6.1.2 Mininert® Slide Valve Caps,
6.1.3 Stainless Steel Wire (20-gage), and
6.1.4 Glass Bead (5-mm diameter), containing hole slightly
larger than diameter of stainless steel wire.8 (Available at local
hobby shops.)
NOTE 4—The apparatus, disk size, and number of disks are described
for the 23-mL vial. Alternative vial sizes and corresponding test specimen
sizes may be substituted. (The volume-to-surface area ideally should be
between 155 and 0.31 mL/cm2.) Note that validation tests have only been
conducted using the 23-mL vials.
NOTE 5—Recommend one-time use of mininert valve (that is, discard-
ing it at completion of study).
6.2 Hot-Air Oven or Static Thermostatted Water Bath, with
suitable safety provisions and capable of maintaining the
desired extraction temperature within 61°C.
6.3 Thermostatted Shaker Water Bath—Some migrant/
plastic/liquid combinations may involve significant partition-
ing and would benefit by having the cells shaken throughout
the migration study.
6.4 Liquid Syringes, for removing liquid aliquots from the
cells and transferring them to the analytical instrumentation.
6.5 Analytical Instrumentation, as required by the method
chosen to determine the migrant(s).
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Purity of Reagents—All solvents shall be HPLC or
chromatographic grade and shown to be free of interferences in
the detection region of the migrant(s).
8. Hazards
8.1 The usual safety precautions for handling flammable
solvents are recommended when such solvents are used for
extraction.
9. Sampling
9.1 Sample the plastic in accordance with Practice D1898.
9.2 Select representative samples of the plastic to be tested
from available stock on hand. Film, pellets, powders, sheet,
and, in some cases, actual end-use articles are suitable. Protect
the samples from exposure to liquids or contamination by
migration from contact with other materials.
NOTE 6—See RR:D20-1141 for details regarding sample test speci-
mens.
10. Test Specimen
10.1 Test specimens in the form of round disks (11 by 1
mm) are prepared from the plastic to be tested. Disks can be
stamped out of sheets of actual end-use articles of non-brittle
plastic by means of the appropriate sized cork borer.
Alternatively, disks can be formed by using a heated press and
an appropriate shim or mold containing holes the size of the
disk. Holes can be put in the center of the disk by means of a
drill or a heated wire.
8
Glass beads sold at hobby shops have been found satisfactory for this purpose.
 D4754 − 18
NOTE 7—Whenever possible, plastic from actual end-use articles TABLE 1 Precision for Migration of Residual Styrene from
should be tested. Polystyrene
NOTE 8—When actual end-use articles are tested, the cut edges of the Values in ppm
disks may have a different structure than the surfaces, and henceforth the Time, h
Avg SrA SRB rC RD
migration rates may be altered. Because the area of the surfaces is much
greater than that of the cut edges, the effect of the edges would be limited. 4 0.222 0.022 0.11 0.062 0.31
If a significant edge effect is suspected, however, tests can be run 24 0.979 0.080 0.12 0.226 0.34
72 2.282 0.153 0.27 0.433 0.76
comparing disks formed by using a heated press with disks cut from a
168 3.875 0.198 0.46 0.560 1.30
sheet formed under similar conditions. 240 4.790 0.197 0.62 0.558 1.75
336 5.711 0.276 0.82 0.781 2.32
11. Preparation of Apparatus A
Sr = within-laboratory standard deviation of the average,
B
11.1 Alternately thread glass beads and 14 plastic disks onto C
SR = between-laboratories standard deviation of the average,
r = 2.83 Sr, and
the stainless steel wire (see Fig. 1). Prepare at least 4 sets for D
R = 2.83 SR.
each liquid extractant used. Place resulting stacks of disks into
23 mL glass vials. Add 22 mL of extraction liquid and screw
Mininert® caps tightly onto the vials. 13.3 A second way to express the test results is in milli-
11.2 Use the above prepared vials to determine the total grams of migrant(s) per square meter of sample exposed, E, as
amount of migrant(s). follows:
11.3 To calculate migration rates, the samples should be
washed to remove any surface bloom of the migrant(s). E 5 ~ W 2 B ! / @ ~ 2π R 2 1CT! N #
Maintain the above prepared vials at the extraction temperature where:
for 2 h. Discard the liquid in the vials and replenish with fresh W = total weight of migrant(s) in the liquid, mg,
extracting liquid. B = weight of migrant(s) in the blank, mg,
NOTE 9—Depending upon the conditions under which the test speci- R = radius of the disk, m,
mens were prepared, removal of any migrant surface bloom might not be C = circumference of disk, m,
warranted. Under these conditions, simply omit the wash step for T = thickness of disk, m, and
removing migrant surface bloom. N = number of disks per cell.
12. Procedure 13.4 A third and more rigorous way to express the test
results is to calculate diffusion and partition coefficients for the
12.1 Place properly prepared vials in thermostatted oven or
plastic/migrant(s)/liquid system used. These calculations,
bath.
however, are beyond the scope of this test method. A brief
12.2 To prepare standards for quantitating the migration, description is contained in Appendix X1.
place extraction solvent(s) and known quantities of the mi-
grant(s) to be studied in a vial containing the support stand with 14. Report
glass bead spacers. Place these standard vials in the same 14.1 Report the test results, either as concentration of
thermostatted oven or bath. migrant(s) per unit volume of liquid, or concentration of
12.3 To prepare the blank, place only the extraction sol- migrant(s) per square metre of disk area.
vent(s) in a vial containing the support stand with glass bead 15. Precision and Bias3
spacers. Place these blank vials in the same thermostatted oven
or bath. 15.1 Table 1 is based on a round-robin conducted in 1984 in
accordance with Practice E691. Twelve laboratories reported
12.4 At pre-selected times, typically 5 to 8 samplings over results (ppm) for styrene migration from polystyrene disks into
a 2-week period, withdraw µL aliquots from each sample, 50/50 ethanol/water at 49°C. The disks were prepared at one
standard, and blank vial and analyze using selected methodol- source. Five replicate sample cells were then setup by each
ogy. laboratory which conducted the studies. One aliquot was taken
NOTE 10—At each sampling, check to see if cell caps are tight. from each cell at six times over 2 weeks. A test result was
NOTE 11—Volume withdraw is dictated by analytical procedure being obtained from the analysis of each aliquot. Each laboratory
utilized. If aliquots of more than 1 % by volume are removed during reported 30 test results.
samplings, separate vials should be used for each test period.
NOTE 12— The following explanations of Ir and IR (see 15.2) are only
12.5 Use response of standards on each day of analysis to intended to present a meaningful way of considering the approximate
quantitate the migrant(s). precision of this test method. The data in Table 1 should not be rigorously
applied to acceptance or rejection of material, as those data are specific to
13. Calculation the round-robin and may not be representative of other lots, conditions,
materials, or laboratories. Users of this test method should apply the
13.1 The test results can be calculated in a number of ways
principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
depending upon the application of the data. laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories. The principles
13.2 One simple way to express the test results is to of 15.2 through 15.2.3 would then be valid for such data.
calculate the concentration of the migrant(s) in the liquid at a 15.2 Concept of r and R—Since Sr and SR have been
given time in some unit such as parts per million (ppm) or parts calculated from data produced by 12 laboratories, and for test
per billion (ppb). results that were averages from testing 5 sample cells:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:52 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4754 − 18
15.2.1 Repeatability, Sr—Precision under repeatability
conditions, represented as Repeatability Standard Deviation.
15.2.2 Reproducibility, SR—Precision under reproducibility
conditions, represented as Reproducibility Standard Deviation.
15.2.3 Repeatability Limit, r—The value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under repeatability conditions may be expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
15.2.4 Reproducibility Limit, R—The value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under reproducibility conditions may be expected to occur with
a probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
15.3 The integrity of this cell was evaluated by carrying
standards along with the actual migration cells. Each of the 12
participating laboratories analyzed standards at four different
concentrations, six times over the 2-week migration period.
From the detector response for these four standards, an average
detector response per 1 ppm of styrene was calculated (that is,
slope of linear least squares fit, forced through origin). The
coefficient of variation for the six average detector responses
for the 12 laboratories ranged from 0.6 to 9.5 % and averaged
4.9 %.
15.4 Bias—There are no recognized standards on which to
base an estimate of bias for this test method.
16. Keywords
16.1 diffusion; food packaging; indirect additives; migration
cell; migration testing; polymer extraction

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. STYRENE DIFFUSION COEFFICIENTS (Dp) IN POLYSTYRENE (49°C)

X1.1 Although slightly beyond the scope of this test TABLE X1.1 Diffusion Coefficients
method, a diffusion coefficient for component migration can be Laboratory Dp × 10 −12
cm/s
calculated from the data obtained. The only additional infor- 1 1.9
2 1.6
mation needed is the component concentration in the polymer 3 1.7
disks. 4 1.5
5 1.9
X1.1.1 Diffusion of a migrant in a polymeric material is 6 1.7
governed by Fick’s Law. In its simplest form, where no 7 1.4
8 1.8
partitioning between the polymer and the solvent in contact 10 3.3
with it occurs, this migration can be expressed by: 11 2.0
16 1.9
Mt 5 2Cp~ DpT/π ! 1/2 19 2.5
avg = 1.9 (1.8 if #10
where: omitted)
Mt = mg/cm2 at time, T, s, CV = 26.6 % (16.3 % if #10
omitted)
Cp = mg/cm3 in polystyrene disks, and
Dp = diffusion coefficient in disks, cm2/s.
X1.1.2 From the slope, m, of a linear, least squares fit of X1.2 Sytrene migration at 49°C was calculated from the
Mt/Cp versus T ⁄ . 12 data reported by the twelve laboratories participating in this
round-robin. The residual styrene concentration in the polysty-
X1.1.3 Dp can be calculated as follows: rene disks was determined by HPLC analysis to be 2348 ppm
Dp 5 π ~ m/2 ! 2 (n = 4, CV = 3.6 %). The Dp values are given in Table X1.1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:52 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4754 − 18

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4754 – 11) that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2018)

(1) Added government document web address.

(2) Removed footnotes 8 and 10 since products are now
available from a wider range of suppliers.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:52 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4756 − 15 An American National Standard

Standard Practice for

Installation of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Siding and
Soffit1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4756; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D3679 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

1.1 This practice covers the basic requirements for and the
methods of installation of rigid vinyl siding, soffits, and
accessories on the exterior wall and soffit areas of buildings. In
all applications, refer also to the specific manufacturer’s
installation instructions and the requirements of applicable
building codes.
1.2 This practice covers aspects of installation relating to
effectiveness and durability in service.
1.3 The various application systems are located in the
following sections of this practice:
Substrate, Surface Preparation Section
Application of Horizontal Siding Section
Application of Vertical Siding Section
Application of Soffits and Fascia Section
Special Details Section
1.4 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as standard. The values given in parentheses are mathematical
conversions to SI units that are provided for information only
and are not considered standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building Products.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2015. Published February 2015. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D4745 – 13. DOI:
10.1520/D4756-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Siding
D4477 Specification for Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Soffit
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
E2112 Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors
and Skylights
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 and E631 and abbreviations with Terminology
D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
8
9 3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
10 3.2.1 backerboard—a flat material used on the face of the
11
12 house, applied between the studs and the siding (or over
existing wall surface) to provide an even surface for the
installation of the vinyl siding.
3.2.2 buttlock—the bottom of a siding or soffit panel, or
accessory piece, opposite the nail hem, which locks onto the
preceding panel.
3.2.3 crimp—small protrusions, typically approximately 1⁄2
in. (12.7 mm) long, 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm) wide, and projecting 1⁄8 in.
(3.2 mm) formed by a crimper (snaplock punch). (See Fig. 2.)
3.2.4 crimper—a special hand tool designed to form crimps
(snaplock ears) intended to hold partial panels in place. (See
Fig. 2.)
3.2.5 face nail—the action of fastening directly on to the
“face,” or exposed surface, of a panel (instead of using the nail
slot).
3.2.6 fascia—the trim covering the ends of roof rafters. (See
Fig. 1.)
3.2.6.1 fascia board—a board attached to the ends of the
rafters between the roofing material and the soffit overhang.
3.2.6.2 fascia cap or cover—the covering around a fascia
board.
3.2.7 flashing—special membrane pieces or manufactured
trim pieces used to supplement siding panels in weather
protection around joints, penetrations, and openings, such as
windows, doors, mechanical penetrations, and roof-wall

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15
FIG. 1 Terminology for Buildings, Siding and Accessories
FIG. 2 Siding Installation Tools
intersections, designed and intended to move incidental water
to the building exterior.
3.2.8 furring/furring strip—a wooden or steel framing
material, usually a nominal 1 by 2 in. (25.4 by 50.8 mm) used
to even the surface in preparation for installation of siding. To
“fur” a surface means to apply these strips.
3.2.9 nailslot punch—a special hand tool used to create slots
for attachment of field-modified siding or accessories. (See Fig.
3.)
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
3.2.10 rake (roof)—the inclined, usually projecting edge of
a sloping roof.
3.2.11 rake (wall)—the board or molding placed along the
sloping sides of a gable to cover the ends of the siding.
3.2.12 snaplock ears—see crimp and Fig. 2.
3.2.13 snaplock punch—see crimper and Fig. 2.
3.2.14 soffıt—the underside surface (typically horizontal) of
roof overhangs.
3.2.15 starter strip—an accessory applied directly to the
surface of the building and used to secure the first course of
siding to the home. Starter strips can either be a part manufac-
tured for the specific purpose or created by cutting the nailing
hem and adjacent lock from a siding panel.
3.2.16 undersill trim (utility trim)—an accessory strip used
to receive and hold the crimped edge of horizontal or vertical
siding that has had its normal lock removed.
3.2.17 zip tool (unlocking tool)—a special hand tool used to
separate interlocked siding panels. (See Fig. 2.)
4. Delivery of Materials
4.1 All manufactured materials shall be delivered in the
original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the size or
type product, or both, brand name, and manufacturer (or
supplier) identification, manufacturer’s lot number, and the
ASTM specification to which it conforms.
5. Protection of Materials
5.1 Do not store in any location or in any manner where the
temperature of the siding, soffit or accessories is likely to
exceed 130°F (54°C).
 D4756 − 15
FIG. 3 Typical Siding Profiles
5.2 Store the cartons on a flat surface and support the entire
length of the cartons.
5.3 Store the cartons away from areas where falling objects
or other construction activity could impact the cartons. Keep
the cartons dry.
5.4 Do not store the cartons in stacks more than 6 boxes
high.
6. Environmental Conditions
6.1 Vinyl siding and accessories will expand when heated
and contract when cooled. If siding is installed in hot weather
and the siding is very warm it will be partially “expanded.”
Provide allowance for more future “contraction” than expan-
sion.
6.2 Leave 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance between the ends of
panels and trim and any receiver such as J-channels and corner
posts to allow for thermal expansion. If installing during
weather colder than 40°F (4.4°C), increase the minimum
clearance to 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) to allow for additional expansion
during warmer weather.
7. Materials
7.1 Horizontal Wall Siding—See Specification D3679.
7.2 Vertical Wall Siding—See Specification D3679
7.3 Soffıt Panels—See Specification D4477.
7.4 Accessories:
7.4.1 Starter Strip—For horizontal siding made of poly(vi-
nyl chloride) or corrosion-resistant metal.
7.4.2 Corner Posts—Of two types: for inside corners and for
outside corners of poly(vinyl chloride).
FIG. 4 Typical Soffit Profiles
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7.4.3 Trim Channels—Produced of poly(vinyl chloride) in a
variety of designs and sizes for use around openings and edges
of wall and soffit surfaces. (See Fig. 5.)
7.5 Fasteners:
7.5.1 Nails—Corrosion-resistant with head diameter 5⁄16 in.
(7.9 mm) minimum, shank diameter 1⁄8 in. (3.2 mm), length
sufficient to penetrate not less than 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) into framing
or furring.
7.5.2 Staples—Corrosion-resistant, 16 gage minimum, with
3⁄8 to 1⁄2-in. (9.5 to 12.7-mm) crown, length sufficient to
penetrate not less than 3⁄4 in. (19 mm) into framing or furring.
7.5.3 Screws—Corrosion resistant, self-tapping type, No. 8
truss head or pan head length sufficient to penetrate wall
thickness of steel stud or 3⁄4 in. into framing or furring.
NOTE 2—To minimize the possibility of any color variation use material
from a single manufacturer’s lot number for application to one building.
8. Substrate, Surface Preparation
8.1 Water-resistive Barrier—Vinyl siding must be installed
over a water-resistive barrier system that includes (1) a
continuous water-resistive material, and (2) properly integrated
flashing around all penetrations and where vinyl siding inter-
faces with other building products. Refer to the vinyl siding
manufacturer’s installation instructions and the minimum re-
quirements of the local building code for specific product
applications and requirements.
8.2 All caulking to prevent moisture penetration must be
done before siding application. Do not use caulk where it could
restrict the normal expansion of the vinyl siding.
8.3 Apply vinyl siding over sheathing or other rigid surface
that provides a smooth, flat surface. Do not apply vinyl siding
 D4756 − 15
FIG. 5 Typical Siding Accessories
directly to studs without sheathing. If permitted by the vinyl
siding manufacturer, a contoured foam underlayment fitted for
the specific style of vinyl siding is permitted to be utilized.
Apply over wood furring strips when the underlying surface is
uneven.
8.4 Drive fasteners into framing or furring. Driving of
fasteners directly into sheathing or existing siding is permitted
in accordance with the siding manufacturer’s instructions,
where substantiated by windload testing conducted in accor-
dance with Specification D3679.
8.5 On existing structures, secure any loose boards, replace
any rotted ones, recaulk around windows, doors, and other
areas as necessary to protect from moisture penetration prior to
the installation of siding or accessories. Use furring as needed
to create an even surface.
8.6 Flashing—Refer to Practice E2112 for installation of
flashing around windows, doors, penetrations and points of
interface between the vinyl siding and other building compo-
nents. If available, also refer to the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the window, door, or other object that will
penetrate the siding.
8.7 Furring—Masonry and uneven surfaces, as examples,
require wood furring strips nominal 1 by 2 in. (25.4 by 50.8
mm) applied vertically and typically spaced 16 in. (406 mm)
on center for horizontal siding and applied horizontally and
typically spaced 12 in. (305 mm) on center for vertical siding.
9. Application of Horizontal Siding
9.1 General Requirements—Vinyl siding and accessories
expand and contract as much as 1⁄2 in. (12.7 mm) over a 12 ft
(3.65 m) length with changes in temperature. For this reason
adhere to the following provisions:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.1.1 When applied, vinyl siding products must be attached
“loosely,” leaving approximately a 1⁄32-in. (0.8-mm) space
between the vinyl and the fastener head or crown to permit
thermal movement. (See Fig. 6.)
9.1.2 Center fasteners in slots of siding and accessories to
permit possible expansion and contraction. (See Fig. 7.) If a
nail slot does not allow centering/securing into framing,
furring, or other permitted nailable surface, use a nail hole slot
punch to extend the slot and allow centering of the fastener.
9.1.3 Do not face nail siding panels. (See Fig. 8.)
9.1.4 Allow clearance at panel ends for thermal expansion
between corner posts, J-channels, and other receivers in
accordance with 6.2.
9.2 Installation of Accessories—Accessories, including
starter strips, corner posts and door/window trim, are installed
prior to application of the siding, adhering to the provisions of
9.1 and those which follow.
9.2.1 Corner Posts—Outside and inside corner posts will
start 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) below the top, and end 3⁄4 in. (19.1 mm)
below the bottom edge of the first course of siding which will
be installed later. Attach each leg of the corner posts with
fasteners, spaced not over 12 in (305 mm) apart centered in
nailing slots except the top fastener that is located at the upper
end of a nailing slot.
9.2.1.1 If more than one length of corner post is required,
lap the upper piece over the lower piece by cutting away 1 in.
(25.4 mm) of the nailing flange on the top piece. Lap 3⁄4 in. (19
mm) allowing 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for expansion. (See Fig. 9.)
9.2.1.2 As an alternative for inside corners, install two
J-channels with the web of one abutting the adjacent wall and
the web of the other J-channel abutting the shorter outer flange
of the first J-channel. Attach as specified in 9.1.1.
9.2.2 Starter Strip—Determine the lowest point along the
area to receive siding and install starter strips located so that
the bottom edge of the initial course of siding will be on a level
line and typically approximately 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) below that
point. Allow space for corner posts, J-channels, etc., and keep
ends of starter strips 1⁄4 to 1⁄2 in. (6.4 to 12.7 mm) apart. Space
fasteners not more than 10 in. (254 mm) apart, centered in nail
slots.
9.2.3 Door/Window Trim:
9.2.3.1 Install flashing around windows and doors in accor-
dance with 8.1 and 8.6 before installing trim.
9.2.3.2 J-channel is installed on each side and the top of
door and window frames, and under window sills. Always
install the bottom J-channel first, followed by the side
channels, and then the top channel.
9.2.3.3 Extend the bottom and top J-channel the length of
the window frame plus the width of the visible face of the side
FIG. 6 Attachment of Vinyl Siding
 D4756 − 15

FIG. 7 Fastening Location in Siding Slots

FIG. 10 Installation of Bottom and Side J-Channels under Win-

dow (for clarity, 45 degree miter of side J-channel is
FIG. 8 Face Nailing of Vinyl Siding Prohibited
not shown)

FIG. 9 Joining Corner Posts

J-channels (typically 3⁄4 in. (19 mm)) on each side. Extend the
side J-channels the height of the window or door frame plus the
width of the visible face of the top and bottom J-channels.
9.2.3.4 In the bottom J-channel, cut a notch in the web at
each end the width of the visible face of the side J-channel. In
both side J-channels, cut a notch at the top end and a tab at the
bottom end. Miter the bottom ends of the visible face of the
side J-channels at a 45 degree angle. In the top J-channel cut
along the bends at both ends of the J-channel to create a tab the
same length as the exposed face of the side J-channel. Miter the
end of the visible face of both ends of the top J-channel at a 45
degree angle.
9.2.3.5 Install the bottom J-channel. Install each of the side
J-channels, with the mitered visible face over the face of the
bottom J-channel. Bend the tabs in the side J-channels into the
bottom J-channel. (See Fig. 10.)
9.2.3.6 Install optional head flashing across the top of the
window or door frame. Install the top J-channel with the
mitered face over the face of the side J-channels. Bend the tabs
in the top J-channel into the side J-channels. (See Fig. 11.)
9.3 Siding Panel Installation:
9.3.1 General Considerations—To make overlapped siding
joints less noticeable on the sides of a building, start at the rear
corner and install toward the front. On the front and rear of
buildings start at the corners and install toward the entrance
door. Avoid use of short panel lengths under 24 in. (610 mm).
(See Fig. 13.) When lapping, place factory-cut ends of panels
on top of field-cut ends for best appearance.
FIG. 11 Installation of Top and Side J-Channels Above Window
or Door (note mitered face of top J-channel)
FIG. 12 Fastening of Initial Siding Panel
9.3.2 Engage the bottom of the first panel and the starter
strip. If backerboard insulation is used, drop it in behind the
panel now. Make sure the panel is locked, but not pulled tight,
and fasten leaving 1⁄4 to 3⁄8 in. (6.4 to 9.5 mm) gap at the corner
posts, in accordance with 6.2. (See Fig. 12.) Space fasteners
not over 16 in. (406 mm) on center. Greater spacing is
permitted in accordance with the siding manufacturer’s
instructions, where substantiated by windload testing con-
ducted in accordance with Specification D3679.
9.3.3 Lap the next panel over the first by approximately
one-half of the factory cut notch, provided the overlap is at
least 3⁄4 in. (25.4 mm) but not greater than 11⁄4 in. (38.1 mm).
(See Fig. 13.) Insert backerboard (if used) and fasten.
9.3.4 To field-notch a panel where the factory notch has
been cut off, cut away 11⁄2 in. (38 mm) of the nailing flange and

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15

FIG. 13 Lapping Siding Panel

FIG. 15 Installation of Siding Under Window

lock. Cut a 1⁄8 by 11⁄2-in. (3.2 by 38-mm) notch from the bottom
step of the panel, cutting away the hook on the back as well.
9.3.5 At the bottom of the window, snugly install between
the side J-channels and against the underside of the sill, a piece
of undersill trim cut to the exact width of the window. Use the
proper thickness of furring behind it to keep the pitch of the
panel consistent.
9.3.6 If the top of the siding panel will extend above the
bottom of the window, cut a section out of the panel to fit under
FIG. 16 Installation Over Window or Door
the opening. Be sure the uncut portion of this panel extends on
both sides of the window. Measure the panel to fit. Hold the
siding panel under the window and mark the width of the
opening on it. Allow 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance at the edges for
insertion into each side of the J-channel. Measure the space
between the bottom edge of the S-lock on the previous panel
and the top of the undersill trim, minus 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for
insertion into the undersill trim receiver. Remove cut section.
Punch snap locks every 6 in. (152 mm) along the horizontal cut FIG. 17 Installation of J-channel on Gable
edge. Slide the panel up into position so the bottom locks into
the previous panel and the top snaps into the undersill trim and
fasten. (See Figs. 14 and 15.)
9.3.7 Over a window or door, measure for the cuts. Mark the
bottom portion of the panel and cut out the unwanted section.
Install the panel. (See Fig. 16.) If necessary, place a piece of
furring into the J-channel behind the cut edge of the siding to
reduce wind movement and maintain the proper plane of this
siding. Leave enough gap at the top of the cutout to permit
locking onto the previous course.
9.3.8 At a gable, install J-channel along the rake boards, or FIG. 18 Using a Pattern to Match Panel End Cuts to Gable Angle
at the top of the wall if there are no rake boards. (See Fig. 17.)
Lap the channels if necessary by cutting 1 in. (25.4 mm) off the
end leaving only the face and then lap 3⁄4 in. (19 mm). Miter the 9.3.8.1 To ensure that the angle of the ends of the siding
ends that meet at the peak to make a neat joint. panels match the angle of the gable, make a pattern from two
pieces of scrap siding. Hold one piece on the lock of the last
installed panel, place the other piece against the gable and
mark the horizontal piece. (See Fig. 18(a).) Cut along the mark
and use this piece as a pattern for the remaining siding panels
on that side. Make another pattern for the other end of the
panels. (See Fig. 18(b).)
9.3.8.2 Lock each precut siding panel into the siding panel
below and slide it into J-channel allowing 1⁄4-in. (6.4-mm)
expansion gap between the end of the siding and back of the
FIG. 14 Preparation of Siding Panel Under Window J-channel.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15
9.3.8.3 Cut the panel for the top of the gable to match the
angle of the gable. Use furring behind the top of this panel if
necessary to maintain the proper plane of the siding.
9.3.8.4 If the nail hem of the panel for the top of the gable
is cut off to fit the space, face nail the panel. Drill a hole
slightly larger than the size of the nail shank in the center of
this triangular panel. Lock the panel in place and drive one nail
into the pre-drilled hole. Do not nail it tight. Nailing into the
panel without a pre-drilled hole has the potential to crack or
kink the vinyl. (See Fig. 19.)
FIG. 19 Nailing of Panel at Top of Gable
9.3.9 The final panel under an eave is handled like the
portion under a window. Nail undersill trim to the top of the
sidewall (see Fig. 20), flush with the underside of the eave. If
more than one length of undersill trim is needed, splice by
cutting out 11⁄4 in. (31.7 mm) inch from the back and nailing
flange of one piece of trim, then inserting the second strip
inside the first, leaving 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for expansion. (See Fig.
21.) To determine the amount of the top panel to be cut off,
measure from the bottom of the eave or soffit to the bottom of
the preceding panel lock in several places along the full length
of the panel and subtract 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm). (See Fig. 22.) Cut the
panels to provide this width. Punch snap-locks every 6 in. (152
mm) along the cut edge and slide it up into position.
10. Application of Vertical Siding
10.1 For general requirements, see 9.1 and 9.2.
10.2 Bottom Receiver—Determine the lowest point along
the area to be covered with siding and install J-channels located
so that the lower edge of the J-channel is 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) below
FIG. 20 Undersill Trim at Top of Sidewall
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
FIG. 21 Undersill Trim Splice
FIG. 22 Determining Width of Final Siding Panel under Eave
that point all along the area to be covered with siding. Leave 1⁄4
in. (6.4 mm) gap at all corner posts and J-channels. To lap two
pieces of J-channel, cut away 1 in. (25.4 mm) of the nailing
flange of the overlapping piece and lap 3⁄4 in. (19 mm). Drill
minimum 3⁄16 in. (4.8 mm) diameter weep holes spaced no
more than 24 in. (610 mm) apart in the bottom web of the
J-channel.
10.3 Corner Posts—Install inside and outside corner posts.
Leave a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) gap between the top of the corner post
and eaves or soffits. Extend the corner post to 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm)
below the lowest edge of the J-channel that serves as the
bottom receiver. Fasten the corner posts by placing the upper-
most fasteners at the top of the top nail slots, and placing other
fasteners spaced not over 12 in. (305 mm) apart centered in nail
slots.
10.4 Top of Sidewalls—If vinyl soffits are to be installed,
install the soffits before installation of J-channels at the top of
all sidewalls. For vinyl soffit installation see Section 11. Install
J-channels along the top of all wall areas that will receive
vertical siding. Lap where necessary, removing 1 in. (25.4 mm)
of the nailing flange of the overlapping piece and lap 3⁄4 in. (19
mm). (See Fig. 23.)
10.5 Trim around all windows and doors as described in
9.2.3, using J-channel at least as wide as the butt height of the
vertical siding.
10.6 For most sidewall applications vertical siding is in-
stalled from one corner across the wall to the other corner. To
produce a balanced appearance, measure the width of the wall
 D4756 − 15
FIG. 23 J-Channel Installation at Top of Sidewall
and divide by the face exposure of the siding panels. Divide
any fractional remainder by two and cut siding panels to that
width to be used as the first and last panels.
NOTE 3—For instance, if a wall requires 20 full panels plus an
additional 8 in., the first and last panel would be cut to a width of 4 inches.
Be sure to allow for the depth of the receiving channels when measuring
the wall width.
10.7 Initial Siding Panel—To start the first panel, install
utility trim into the receiving pocket of a corner post. Shim the
utility trim so that it matches the level of the siding panel face.
Punch snap locks every 6 in. (152 mm) along to cut edge of the
vertical siding, and insert into the utility trim. Where the first
panel will be a full panel, including buttlock, cut the nail hem
and top lock from a separate siding panel and install in the
receiving pocket. Hook the buttlock of the first panel over the
top lock to secure the panel.
10.7.1 Make sure that the first siding panel is plumb. Fasten
the panel by installing the top fastener in the top of the
uppermost nail slot, Place other fasteners spaced not over 12 in.
(305 mm) apart centered in nail slots. Leave 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm)
clearance at the top and 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance to the bottom
receiver.
10.7.2 For vertical siding under gables and other situations
where the siding is to be visually centered, install back-to- back
J-channels or an H-divider bar at the center of the wall. Install
utility trim or the cut nail hem and top lock of a siding panel
in each J-channel, as described in 10.7. Install the vertical
siding from the center toward each corner. As an alternative for
non-gabled walls, carefully measure the wall and install the
siding starting at one side, trimming the first section so that a
seam or center of a panel falls at the center of the wall.
10.8 Install the vertical siding panels by locking it into the
previous panel, and nailing as described in 10.7.1.
10.9 The last panel at the corner opposite the starting corner
is to be cut to the same width as the first panel. Install it into
the receiving pocket of the corner post using utility trim or the
cut nail hem and top lock of a siding panel, as described in
10.7. Drive a trim nail through the utility trim and edge of the
siding panel, inside the receiving pocket, to prevent the panel
from sliding down inside the trim.
10.10 For application of vertical siding to gables, make a
pattern for end-cuts along the gables using two pieces of scrap
siding. Lock one piece on the starter strip just under the eave.
Hold the edge of the other piece against, and in line with, the
roof line. Mark and cut the vertical piece. Use it as a pattern to
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
mark and cut the ends of all other panels required for this side
of the gable end. Make another pattern for the other side of the
gable. (See Fig. 24.)
10.11 If it will take more than one course to span the height
of the house, terminate the first course into an inverted
J-channel, leaving a 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) clearance. Install a head
flashing on top of the J-channel. Then install an upward-facing
J-channel on top of the head flashing. Install the second course
of vertical panels, leaving a 3⁄8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance to the
bottom J-channel. (See Fig. 25.)
10.12 At windows and doors, cut the panels to fit the
opening allowing 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) for expansion.
10.12.1 If the panel is cut down in the V-groove, fasten a
wood furring stop as shown in Fig. 26, with fasteners that do
not penetrate the legs of the J-channel or corner post, insert the
cut side over the furring strip and into the J-channel, locking
the other side into the last panel. (See Fig. 26.)
10.12.2 If the panel is cut on the flat surface, install undersill
trim, backed by a furring strip, into the J-channel using
fasteners that do not penetrate the leg of the J-channel. Punch
snap locks along the edge of the panel at 6-in. (152-mm)
intervals; snap it into the space below the return of the
J-channel, locking the other side into the last panel. (See Fig.
27.)
10.13 At corners, insert a J-channel of height appropriate for
the depth of the panel into the receiver of the corner post.
10.13.1 If panel is cut in the bottom of the V-groove, insert
into the J-channel. Install a furring strip prior to panel insertion.
This will prevent the panel from detaching. (See Fig. 28.)
10.13.2 If the panel is cut on the flat surface, place a piece
of undersill trim, backed by furring, into the receiver of the
corner post. Punch snap locks along the cut edge of the panel
at 6-in. (152-mm) intervals and snap it into the undersill trim.
(See Fig. 29.)
11. Application of Soffits and Fascia (See Fig. 30)
11.1 Requirements for Proper Ventilation:
11.1.1 Calculation of perforated soffit needed for ventila-
tion.
11.1.1.1 Proper attic ventilation is important for any home
or dwelling. Consult a local building official for the appropriate
requirements for a specific geographical area, and use vented
soffit or other vented products as necessary.
11.2 Installation of Soffıt on an Open Rafter (See Fig. 31):
11.2.1 Provide two parallel slots to hold and support the
soffit panels.
FIG. 24 Pattern Preparation for Gable End-Cuts
 D4756 − 15

FIG. 29 Corner Installation with Panel Cut on Flat Surface

FIG. 25 Joining Area-Multicourse Installation

FIG. 30 Application of Soffit and Fascia

FIG. 26 Installation with Panel Cut in V-Groove

FIG. 31 Installation of Soffit on Open Rafter

FIG. 27 Installation with Panel Cut on Flat Surface
hem into the nailing strip. If nailing strips are not used, drive
a trim nail through the end of each V-groove in the soffit into
the underside of the fascia board.
11.2.5 Where two soffit surfaces meet, a T-channel or two
1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm) J-channels properly supported and nailed

back-to-back will provide support for the soffit panel.

11.2.6 At the ends, pieces of F-channel or 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm)
J-channel, are installed to finish the job.
11.3 Installation of Soffıt on an Enclosed Rafter (See Fig.
32.):
FIG. 28 Corner Installation with Panel Cut in V-Groove 11.3.1 Provide two parallel slots to hold and support the
soffit panels.
11.3.1.1 Fasten an F-channel to the outer bottom edge of the
11.2.1.1 Fasten an F-channel directly to wall at 6 to 12-in. fascia board.
(152 to 305-mm) intervals. Center the fasteners in the nail slot.
11.2.1.2 Fasten an F-channel on the outer bottom edge of
the fascia board.
11.2.2 Cut a soffit panel to fit into the slots of the
F-channels. Allow 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) per side for expansion.
11.2.3 Slide the soffit panels into the F-channel slots. Panels
are hooked together. On panel sections over 16 in. (406 mm)
wide, intermediate nailing supports are required.
11.2.4 Secure each soffit panel with at least one fastener. If
nailing strips are used, place fasteners through the soffit nail FIG. 32 Installation of Soffit on Enclosed Rafter

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15
11.3.1.2 Nail a quarter round Frieze moulding or a J-channel
to the wooden soffit or an F-channel to the wall so that the slot
to hold the soffit is parallel to the slot in the F-channel on the
fascia board.
11.3.2 Cut a soffit panel to fit into the slots of the
F-channels. Allow 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) per side for expansion.
11.3.3 Slide the soffit panels into the F-channel slots. Panels
are hooked together.
11.3.4 At the ends, pieces of F-channel or 1⁄2-in. (12.7-mm)
J-channel are installed to finish the job.
FIG. 34 Punch Snaplock Ears on Fascia Cover
11.4 Installation of Fascia:
11.4.1 Install undersill trim molding at the top of the fascia
boards. (See Fig. 33.)
11.4.2 Measure the cover required and cut the fascia cover
to proper width. Punch snaplock “ears” every 6 in. (152 mm)
along the top of the fascia using a snaplock punch. (See Fig.
34.) Position the panel and secure the bottom lip of the fascia
over the F-channel or J-channel, (see Fig. 35.), and snap into
the undersill trim.
11.5 Installation of Corner Cap:
11.5.1 Trim the fascia cover ends at the corners as in Fig.
36. FIG. 35 Positioning of Fascia Cover
11.5.2 Prefabricate or fashion corner caps from a piece of
fascia cover. Cut a 51⁄2-in. (140-mm) length of fascia cover and
mark a vertical centerline on the back as shown in Fig. 37. Cut
out a 90° section of bottom flange from the center, leaving 45°
on each side. Using a hand seamer, fold along the centerline to
form a right angle.
11.5.3 Punch the top edge of a corner cap with a snaplock
punch. Hook the bottom ends of the cap over the fascia flange
and push the top into the undersill trim slot to lock into place.
(See Fig. 38.)
FIG. 36 Trimming Fascia Corner Ends
12. Special Details
12.1 Fitting Siding Around Faucets or Railing—Use a
commercially-available trim ring to fit siding to a penetration
such as a faucet, light fixture, or railing attachment, following
manufacturer’s instructions (See Fig. 39.) If a commercial trim
ring is not available for the application, follow these steps to fit
the siding to the penetration:
12.1.1 Always begin a course of siding at an obstruction
such as a faucet or wrought iron railing to avoid excess lap
joints.
12.1.2 Cut a slot 1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) bigger than the obstruction, FIG. 37 Prefabricating Corner Cap
matching the contour of the obstruction. Install the first piece
of siding as shown in Fig. 40(a).

12.1.3 Match the contour of the obstruction in the end of the

FIG. 33 Installation of Undersill Trim
next panel and lap it over the first one. (See Fig. 40(b).)
12.1.4 Apply flexible caulk around the obstruction to seal
the penetration, but do not caulk the siding overlap.
12.2 Installing Siding Around Electric Boxes—Place
J-channel around the service box, meter, or outlet cover in the
same manner as for windows (see 9.2.3).
12.3 Shutter Installation:
12.3.1 Pre-drill holes through the shutters for attachment
screws and mark their location on the siding. (See Fig. 41.)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15

(a) Notch and install first (b) Notch and install second
FIG. 40 Fitting Siding

FIG. 38 Installation of Corner Cap

FIG. 41 Shutter Installation

FIG. 39 Commercial Trim Ring

12.3.2 Drill expansion holes through the siding (siding

only) where attachment screws will be located, a minimum of
1⁄4 in. (6.4 mm) larger than the diameter of the screw. (See Fig.

41.)
12.3.3 When attaching the shutters do not fasten such that
the shutter bears tightly against the siding otherwise expansion
of the siding will be restricted. (See Fig. 41.)
13. Keywords
13.1 crimp; horizontal siding; installation practice; poly(vi-
nyl chloride) (PVC); vertical siding; vinyl siding; vinyl soffits

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4756 − 15

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue D4756 – 13
that may impact the use of this standard (February 1, 2015).

(1) Revised 1.1 to include a reference to applicable building (3) Revised Section 10 to describe proper installation without
codes. use of a vertical starter strip.
(2) Revised 7.4.1 to remove reference to a vertical starter strip

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:18:55 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4803 − 18 An American National Standard

Standard Test Method for

Predicting Heat Buildup in PVC Building Products1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4803; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 1.10 This international standard was developed in accor-

1.1 This test method covers prediction of the heat buildup in
rigid and flexible PVC building products above ambient air
temperature, relative to black, which occurs due to absorption
of the sun’s energy.
NOTE 1—This test method is expected to be applicable to all types of
colored plastics. The responsible subcommittee intends to broaden the
scope beyond PVC when data on other materials is submitted for review.
NOTE 2—There are no ISO standards covering the primary subject
matter of this test method.
1.2 Rigid PVC exterior profile extrusions for assembled
windows and doors are covered in Specification D4726.
1.3 Rigid PVC exterior profiles for fencing are covered in
Specification F964.
1.4 Rigid PVC siding profiles are covered in Specification
D3679.
1.5 Rigid PVC soffit profiles are covered in Specification
D4477.
1.6 Rigid PVC and Rigid CPVC plastic building products
compounds are covered in Specification D4216.
1.7 The text of this test method references notes and
footnotes which provide explanatory material. These notes and
footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be
considered as requirements of this test method.
1.8 Units—The values stated in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard. The values given in parentheses are
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for
information only and are not considered standard.
1.9 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific safety hazard statements are given in Section 7.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2018. Published October 2018. Originally
approved in 1989. Last previous edition approved in 2018 as D4803 - 10(2018)ɛ1.
DOI: 10.1520/D4803-18.
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
D3679 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Siding
D4216 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Building Products Compounds
D4477 Specification for Rigid (Unplasticized) Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Soffit
D4726 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Exterior-Profile Extrusions Used for Assembled Windows
and Doors
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
F964 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Exterior Profiles Used for Fencing and Railing
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 or E631 and abbreviations with Terminology
D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 heat buildup—the increase in temperature above that
of ambient air due to the amount of energy absorbed by a
specimen from the sun.
3.2.2 temperature rise—the increase in temperature above
that of ambient (laboratory) air due to absorption of energy
from a heating lamp (source).
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:00 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4803 − 18
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The PVC product (extruded product, injection molded
part, or compression molded) is cut apart to obtain a flat test
specimen at least 3 by 3 by 0.060 6 0.020 in. (76 by 76 by 1.5
6 0.5 mm).
4.2 The test specimen is heated under the infrared reflective
heat lamp to determine the temperature rise above ambient
(laboratory) temperature relative to a black control sample.
4.3 The temperature rise data, obtained in the laboratory for
a given test specimen, is then used to predict the heat buildup,
which may occur outdoors due to the sun.

5. Significance and Use

5.1 Heat buildup in PVC exterior building products due to
absorption of the energy from the sun may lead to distortion
problems. Heat buildup is affected by the color, emittance,
absorptance, and reflectance of a product. Generally, the darker
the color of the product, the more energy is absorbed and the
greater is the heat buildup. However, even with the same
apparent color, the heat buildup may vary due to the specific
pigment system involved. The greatest heat buildup generally
occurs in the color black containing carbon black pigment. The
black control sample used in this test method contains 2.5 parts
of furnace black per 100 parts of PVC suspension resin. The
maximum temperature rise above ambient temperature for this
black is 90°F (50°C) for a 45° or horizontal surface when the
sun is perpendicular to the surface and 74°F (41°C) for a
vertical surface assuming that the measurements were done on
FIG. 1 Apparatus for Measuring Temperature Rise
a cloudless day with no wind and heavy insulation on the back
of the specimen.3 See Appendix X1.
6.1.4 Digital Read-Out Temperature Meter, Type J; or
5.2 This test method allows the measurement of the tem- equivalent.
perature rise under a specific type heat lamp, relative to that of
a black reference surface, thus predicting the heat buildup due NOTE 3—The type of insulation may affect absolute temperature rise.
to the sun’s energy. However, the calculated values of predicted maximum heat buildup,
relative to a black does not appear to be affected, based on a laboratory
5.3 The test method allows prediction of heat buildup of study comparing white rigid hydrous calcium silicate heat insulation with
various colors or pigment systems, or both. aluminum foil insulation having equivalent thermal resistance.
NOTE 4—The intensity of the heat lamp has an effect on absolute
5.4 This test method gives a relative heat buildup compared temperature rise, however, it does not appear to influence the calculated
to black under certain defined severe conditions but does not values of predicted maximum heat buildup relative to the black control.
predict actual application temperatures of the product. These The 250-W infrared heat lamp was selected because a higher intensity
lamp results in excessive temperature rise. This leads to excessive
will also depend on air temperature, incident angle of the sun, softening of the specimen under study, especially in the case of the black
clouds, wind velocity, insulation, installation behind glass, etc. control. A lower intensity lamp requires a longer testing time and,
therefore, is considered undesirable.
6. Apparatus 6.2 The thermocouple shall be inserted through a 0.125-in.
6.1 Testing Apparatus—The apparatus shall be constructed (3.18-mm) hole in the bottom of the box, so that it extends 0.25
essentially as shown in Fig. 1 and shall consist of the in. (6.35 mm) above the bottom surface of the box. The
following: thermocouple bends under the weight of the specimen, but
6.1.1 Wooden Box, opened from the top and the front and shall retain contact with the specimen when the specimen is in
lined with 1-in. (25.4-mm) thick white rigid hydrous calcium place. The lamp shall be installed perpendicular to the thermo-
silicate heat insulation. couple.
6.1.2 White Infrared Heat Lamp, 250-W.4 6.3 The distance from the bottom of the box to the bottom
6.1.3 Thermocouple, 40-gage Type J (iron-constantan); or surface of the lamp shall be 15.5 6 1 in. (39.4 6 2.5 cm).
equivalent.
NOTE 5—Calculated heat buildup for the specimens is independent of
the distance between the light source and the surface of the specimen.
However, shorter distances lead to very high maximum equilibrium
3
Summers and Brown, SPE Technical Papers, XXV, 1979, p. 403. temperatures, especially for dark colors, which might cause distortion of
4
A G.E. heat lamp has been found satisfactory for this purpose. the specimen. Larger distances between the light source and the specimen

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:00 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

cause less test sensitivity and less reproducibility.
6.4 Install the apparatus in a room characterized by still air
without drafts due to air conditioning, etc.
7. Safety Precautions
7.1 The heating lamp is hot during the test. Touching it will
cause burns.
8. Sampling
8.1 Select samples in a statistically acceptable manner. The
samples shall be representative of the color or pigment system,
or both, under study.
9. Test Specimens
9.1 Test flat test specimens measuring 3 6 0.125 in. square
by 0.060 6 0.020 in. thick (76 6 3.2 mm square by 1.5 6 0.5
mm), cut from the selected samples.
9.2 A control specimen conforming in size with the speci-
fication in 9.1 shall be prepared from any rigid PVC compound
containing 2.5 parts Black Pearls 7005 or equivalent furnace
type carbon black without any other pigmentation. See Practice
D4703.
10. Procedure
10.1 Maintain the ambient air temperature in the laboratory,
measured 3 ft from the side of the testing box, at 75 6 5°F.
10.2 Set the specimen on the bottom of the box so that its
center is in contact with the thermocouple. Use two-sided
adhesive tape between the specimen and the box to ensure
contact with the thermocouple.
10.3 Turn on the heat lamp and digital read out temperature
meter.
10.4 From the temperature meter, record the equilibrium
temperature of the specimen. The maximum interval shall be
five minutes. Equilibrium is defined as an increase of less than
1°F in any given five-minute interval.
NOTE 6—It is expected that equilibrium is reached between 20 and 30
minutes for the standard 0.060 6 0.020 in. thick (1.5 6 0.5 mm)
specimen. Individual formulations may require different durations of time.
See Fig. 2 for relationship of the time required to reach equilibrium
temperature and the thickness of the PVC specimens.
10.5 Measure the maximum temperature of the control
specimen prior to the specimens under study but within 2 h of
the other temperature rise measurements.
11. Calculation
11.1 Temperature rise above ambient temperature:
∆Tlu 5 Tm 2 Ta
where:
∆Tlu = temperature rise above ambient temperature in the
laboratory under the heat lamp,
Tm = maximum temperature of the specimen, as read from
the digital temperature meter, and
Ta = ambient air temperature in the laboratory.
5
Available from Cabot Corp., P.O. Box 188, Tuscola, IL 61953.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:00 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D4803 − 18
FIG. 2 Time for Maximum Equilibrium Temperature Rise as a
Function of the Sample Thickness for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
11.2 Heat buildup:
∆Tlu
∆T 5 3 ∆Tb (2)
∆Tlb
where:
∆T = predicted heat buildup of the specimen under study
due to heating by the sun,
∆Tlu = temperature rise above ambient temperature in the
laboratory for the specimen under study,
∆Tlb = temperature rise above ambient temperature in the
laboratory for a black control sample,
∆Tb = heat buildup for a black control sample under con-
trolled conditions due to absorption of the sun’s
energy (found experimentally),
∆Tb = for vertical position, 74°F or 41°C, and
∆Tb = for horizontal position, 90°F or 50°C.
NOTE 7—Conversion equations for ∆Tb are as follows:
°C 2 2 ° C 1 5 ~ °F 2 2 32! 5/9 2 ~ °F 1 2 32! 5/9
°C 2 2 °C 1 5 5/9°F 2 5/9 3 32 2 5/9°F15/9 3 32
∆°C 5 5/9∆°F ~ conversion equation!
11.3 To determine maximum temperature the specimen can
achieve outdoors under the most severe conditions (clear skies,
no wind, sun is perpendicular to the specimen), the predicted
heat buildup temperature must be added to the ambient
temperature.
12. Report
12.1 The report shall include the following:
12.1.1 Complete identification of the specimen tested, color,
manufacturer’s code,
12.1.2 Temperature rise above ambient air temperature in
the laboratory for the black control specimen,
12.1.3 Temperature rise above ambient air temperature in
(1) the laboratory for the specimen under study, and
12.1.4 Heat buildup, degrees Fahrenheit (degrees Celsius),
of the test specimen under study.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 For precision and bias data, see Table 1.
14. Keywords
14.1 heat buildup; PVC building products; sun energy
absorption; weathering
3
 D4803 − 18
TABLE 1 Precision and BiasA,B
Material Color Mean Values as a Percentage of the Mean
Heat Sr SR Ir IR
Buildup,
°C
M1 Gray 31.25 3.3 5.1 9.3 14.4
M2 Beige 27.76 4.7 6.8 13.3 19.2
M3 Beige 29.63 3.1 8.8 8.8 24.9
M4 Gray 24.08 2.3 5.8 6.5 16.4
M5 Brown 34.56 6.0 7.5 17.0 21.2
M6 White 20.18 5.8 10.9 16.4 30.8
M7 Brown 33.38 6.0 3.6 17.0 10.2
M8 Beige 26.75 7.5 4.5 21.2 12.7
M9 Green 28.12 4.4 7.5 12.5 21.2
M 10 Brown 39.34 2.7 2.8 7.6 7.9
M 11 Beige 27.32 4.3 6.6 12.2 18.7
M 12 Brown 34.49 6.4 4.0 18.1 11.3
M 13 Green 34.28 2.8 4.4 7.9 12.4
Precision (Average) → 4.8 6.1 13.6 17.3

A
Table 1 is based on a round-robin study conducted in 1985, involving 13 materials
tested by 6 laboratories. Each test result was based on 44 individual determina-
tions. Each laboratory obtained 8 test results for each material. Supporting data
have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may be obtained by
requesting Research Report RR:D20-1142.
B
In Table 1, for the materials indicated:
Sr = pooled within-laboratories standard deviation of the average of 40 test
specimens,
SR = pooled between-laboratories standard deviation of the average of 40 test
specimens,
Ir = 2.83 Sr—repeatability, and
IR = 2.83 SR—reproducibility.

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CORRELATION OF HEAT LAMP TO SOLAR ENERGY HEATING OF VINYL

NOTE 1—Source: Summers and Brown, SPE Technical Papers, XXV, 1979, p. 403.
FIG. X1.1 Correlation of Heat Lamp to Solar Energy Heating of Vinyl

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:00 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4803 − 18
Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4803 - 10(2018)ɛ1) that may impact the use of this standard. (October 1, 2018)

(1) Revised 9.1 and 9.2 to provide a more precise specification

for specimen size.
(2) Revised 10.4 to specify the conditions considered to
represent equilibrium, and to place advisory material into a
Note.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:00 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D4890 − 18

Standard Test Methods for

Polyurethane Raw Materials: Determination of Gardner and
APHA Color of Polyols1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D4890; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 These test methods measure visually the color of clear
polyester and polyether liquids. They apply only to materials
whose colors have light-absorption characteristics similar to
those of the standards. An alternative method is Test Method
D1209 (see Note 1).
1.2 Units—The values stated in SI units are to be regarded
as standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—Test Method A of this standard is equivalent to ISO 6271-1.
Test Method B of this standard is equivalent to ISO 4630-1.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
D1209 Test Method for Color of Clear Liquids (Platinum-
Cobalt Scale)
D5386 Test Method for Color of Liquids Using Tristimulus
Colorimetry
1
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of Committee D20 on Plastics and
are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.22 on Cellular Materials - Plastics
and Elastomers.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally
approved in 1988. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D4890 - 13. DOI:
10.1520/D4890-18.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D6166 Test Method for Color of Pine Chemicals and Re-
lated Products (Instrumental Determination of Gardner
Color)
E177 Practice for Use of the Terms Precision and Bias in
ASTM Test Methods
E308 Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using
the CIE System
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E1164 Practice for Obtaining Spectrometric Data for Object-
Color Evaluation
2.2 ISO Standards:3
ISO 4630-1 Clear Liquids—Estimation of Colour by the
Gardner Colour Scale—Part 1: Visual Method
ISO 4630-2 Clear Liquids—Estimation of Colour by the
Gardner Colour Scale—Part 2: Spectroscopic Method
ISO 6271-1 Clear Liquids—Estimation of Colour by the
Platinum-Cobalt Scale—Part 1: Visual Method
ISO 6271-2 Clear Liquids—Estimation of Colour by the
Platinum-Cobalt Scale—Part 2: Spectroscopic Method
3. Terminology
3.1 For definitions of terms used in these test methods see
Terminology D883.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 In Test Method A, the color of the material to be tested
is compared to a series of color standards with defined
chromaticity coordinates, prepared in one of three ways. The
results are reported as the color standard, which best matches
the sample.
4.2 In Test Method B, the color of the material to be tested
is compared to a series of platinum-cobalt color standards,
designated by mg of Pt/mL of standard solution. The results are
reported as the color standard, which best matches the sample
(see Note 2).
NOTE 2—Color of liquids are also measured by visible spectroscopy
and the results converted to any of several color scales. These results are
converted to the APHA scale by appropriate manipulations, as for example
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:04 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4890 − 18
in Test Method D5386 and ISO 6271-2. These results are converted to the
Gardner scale by appropriate manipulations, as for example in Test
Method ISO 4630-2.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 These test methods are suitable for quality control, as
specification tests, and for research. Color is an important
property of urethane products.
6. Sampling
6.1 Polyesters and polyethers usually contain molecules
covering an appreciable range of molecular weights. These
have a tendency to fractionate during solidification. Unless the
material is a liquid or finely ground solid it is necessary to melt
(using no higher temperature than necessary) and mix the resin
well before removing a sample for analysis. Many polyols are
hygroscopic and care must be taken to provide minimum
exposure to atmospheric moisture during the sampling.
7. Purity of Reagents
7.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent-grade chemicals shall be
used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that
all reagents shall conform to the specifications of the Commit-
tee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
where such specifications are available.4 Other grades are
acceptable, provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of
sufficiently high purity to permit its use without reducing the
accuracy of the determination.
7.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references
to water shall be understood to mean reagent water as defined
by Type IV or better of Specification D1193.
TEST METHOD A—GARDNER COLOR
8. Apparatus
8.1 Gardner-Holdt Tubes, of clear glass, with closed, flat,
even bottoms, and having the following approximate dimen-
sions and markings:
8.1.1 A uniform internal length of 112 mm,
8.1.2 A uniform internal diameter throughout the length of
the tube of 10.75 mm, and
8.1.3 An etched line around the outside of the tube 5 mm
from the open end and a second etched line around the outside
of the tube 13 mm from the open end.
9. Reagents
9.1 Cobalt Chloride Solution—Prepare a solution contain-
ing 1 part by weight of cobalt chloride (CoCl2 × 6H2O) to 3
parts of HCl (1 to 17).
9.2 Ferric Chloride Solution—Prepare a solution containing
approximately 5 parts by weight of ferric chloride
(FeCl3 × 6H2O) and 1.2 parts of HCl (1 to 17). Adjust to exact
4 5
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:04 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
color equivalence to a freshly prepared solution containing 3 g
of K2Cr2O7 in 100 mL of H2SO4 (sp gr 1.84).
9.3 Hydrochloric Acid (1 to 17)—Mix 1 volume of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid (HCl, sp gr 1.19) with 17 volumes of
water.
9.4 Hydrochloric Acid (0.1 N)—Prepare 0.1 N HCl.
9.5 Potassium Chloroplatinate (PtCl6).
9.6 Potassium Dichromate (K2Cr2O7).
9.7 Sulfuric Acid (sp gr 1.84)—Concentrated sulfuric acid
(H2SO4).
10. Gardner Color Reference Standards5
10.1 The primary standards for color shall consist of solu-
tions defined by their spectral transmittance in 1-cm cell with
parallel sides. The chromaticity coordinates of these solutions
shall conform to those given in Table 1 when determined on a
1-cm layer of the solution in accordance with Practice E1164
and Test Methods E308 and D6166.
10.2 For comparison, permanent solutions of known color
are more satisfactory. The approximate composition of solu-
tions giving each of the 18 Gardner colors is also given in
Table 1. The solutions shall be made from K2PtCl6 in 0.1 N
HCl, or, in the darker colors, from stock solutions of FeCl3,
CoCl2, and HCl (see 9.1, 9.2, and 9.3). Pre-prepared Gardner
color standard solutions are commonly available for purchase.
10.3 If the solutions in 10.2 are unavailable, solutions of
K2Cr2O7 (sp gr 1.84) are used as reference standards. The
approximate composition of these standards is also given in
Table 1. Each solution must be freshly made for the color
comparison, using gentle heat, if necessary, to effect solution.
10.4 Secondary reference standards are available in the
form of 18 colored glass disks, which are set into a pair of
larger, plastic disks and the latter mounted to rotate in a
housing for holding the sample tube and glass disk in close and
fixed proximity.
11. Procedure
11.1 Fill the tube with sample, free of solid particles or air
bubbles, so that the apparent upper edge of the liquid meniscus
is even with the lower etched line on the tube.
11.2 Determine the color by comparison with the reference
standard solutions prescribed in Table 1, by comparing the
sample and the standard in Gardner-Holdt viscosity tubes as
described. Make the comparison at 25 6 5°C by placing tubes
close together and looking through them against a white
background or by comparison to the standards in a color disk.
12. Report
12.1 Report the color of the sample in terms of the Gardner
standard number that is nearest to it in color. If the sample
The sole source of supply of the glass color standards and color standard
solutions known to the committee at this time is BYK-Gardner USA, 9104 Guilford
Road, Columbia, MD 21046. If you are aware of alternative suppliers, please
provide this information to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will
receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible technical committee,1
which you may attend.
 D4890 − 18
TABLE 1 Gardner Reference Standard Color Solutions
Chromaticity CoordinatesA Potassium Iron-Cobalt Solutions Potassium
Gardner Color Standard Chloroplatinate,
Ferric Chloride Cobalt Chloride Dichromate, g/100 mL
Number Y x y g/1000 mL of 0.1 Hydrochloric Acid, mL
Solution, mL Solution, mL Sulfuric AcidB
N HCl
1 80 0.3177 0.3303 0.550 ... ... ... 0.0039
2 79 0.3233 0.3352 0.865 ... ... ... 0.0048
3 76 0.3329 0.3452 1.330 ... ... ... 0.0071
4 75 0.3437 0.3644 2.080 ... ... ... 0.0112
5 74 0.3558 0.3840 3.035 ... ... ... 0.0205
6 71 0.3767 0.4061 4.225 ... ... ... 0.0322
7 67 0.4044 0.4352 6.400 ... ... ... 0.0384
8 64 0.4207 0.4498 7.900 ... ... ... 0.0515
9 61 0.4343 0.4640 ... 3.8 3.0 93.2 0.0780
10 57 0.4503 0.4760 ... 5.1 3.6 91.3 0.164
11 45 0.4842 0.4818 ... 7.5 5.3 87.2 0.250
12 36 0.5077 0.4638 ... 10.8 7.6 81.6 0.380
13 30 0.5392 0.4458 ... 16.6 10.0 73.4 0.572
14 22 0.5646 0.4270 ... 22.2 13.3 64.5 0.763
15 16 0.5857 0.4089 ... 29.4 17.6 53.0 1.041
16 11 0.6047 0.3921 ... 37.8 22.8 39.4 1.280
17 6 0.6290 0.3701 ... 51.3 25.6 23.1 2.220
18 4 0.6477 0.3521 ... 100.0 0.0 0.0 3.00
A
Chromaticity coordinates for CIE standard illuminant C and the CIE 1931 (2°) standard observer.
B
The dichromate color standards have been found to be less reliable than chloroplatinate or iron-cobalt color standards. They are included in Table 1 for reference only.

appears exactly halfway between two standards, report the
color number of the darker standard.
13. Precision and Bias6
13.1 Table 2 is based on an interlaboratory study conducted
in 2011. Six laboratories tested two different polyurethane
materials. Every “test result” represents an individual determi-
nation. Each laboratory reported three replicate test results for
each material. Practice E691 was followed for the design and
analysis of the data; the details are given in ASTM Research
Report No. D20-1257.
13.2 Caution—The explanation of the repeatability (r) and
reproducibility (R) is only intended to present a meaningful
way of considering the approximate precision of this test
method. Do not apply the data in Table 2 to acceptance or
rejection of materials, as these data apply only to the materials
tested in the round robin and are unlikely to be rigorously
representative of other lots, formulations, conditions, materials,
or laboratories. Users of this test method need to apply the
principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to
their materials and laboratory (or between specific laborato-
ries). The principles would then be valid for such data
13.3 Repeatability—Precision under repeatability condi-
tions.
13.4 Reproducibility—Precision under reproducibility con-
ditions.
13.5 Repeatability Limit, r—The value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under repeatability conditions is expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %). For the data gener-
ated in Table 2, the maximum expected difference between two
6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1257. Contact ASTM Customer
Service at service@astm.org.
test results for the same material, obtained by the same
operator using the same equipment on the same day in the same
laboratory due solely to the method is 0.7 units.
13.6 Reproducibility Limit, R—The value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under reproducibility conditions is expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %). For the data gener-
ated in Table 2, the maximum expected differences between
two test results for the same material, obtained by different
operators using different equipment in different laboratories
due solely to the method is 2.0 units.
13.7 Any judgment in accordance with the repeatability and
reproducibility statements shown above would have an ap-
proximate 95 % (0.95) probability of being correct.
13.8 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
estimate bias of this method.
TEST METHOD B—APHA COLOR
14. Apparatus
14.1 Nessler Tubes, matched 100-mL, tall-form.
15. Reagents
15.1 Hydrochloric Acid (sp gr 1.19)—Concentrated hydro-
chloric acid (HCl).
15.2 Potassium Chloroplatinate (K2PtCl6).
15.3 Cobaltous Chloride Hexahydrate (CoCl2 · 6H2O).
16. Preparation of Color Standards
16.1 Pre-prepared platinum-cobalt standards are commonly
available for purchase or prepared by the following. Measure
500 mL of water into a 1000-mL volumetric flask. Add 100 mL
of the HCl and mix well. Weigh 1.245 g of K2PtCl6 to the
nearest 1 mg and transfer to the flask (see Note 3). Add 1.0 g
of crystallized CoCl2 · 6H2O. Dilute the solution in the flask to

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:04 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4890 − 18
TABLE 2 Gardner Color (Gardner Color Standard Number)
A
Material Average Repeatability Reproducibility Repeatability Reproducibility
Standard Standard Limit Limit
Deviation Deviation
x̄ Sr SR r R
Jeffol 5.2 0.2 0.4 0.7 1.3
SD-441
Jeffol 9.6 0.2 1.0 0.7 2.7
SA-499
A
The average of the laboratories’ calculated averages.

the mark with water and mix thoroughly. The color of this TABLE 3 APHA Color Standards
standard solution is equivalent to 500 units (500 mg metallic Color Standard Number
Number 500 Standard,
Water, mL
platinum/L), that is each milliliter of standard contains 0.5 mg mL

of metallic platinum. 1 0.2 99.8

3 0.6 99.4
NOTE 3—If potassium chloroplatinate is not available, dissolve 0.500 g 5 1.0 99.0
of pure metallic platinum in aqua regia with the aid of heat; then remove 10 2.0 98.0
15 3.0 97.0
HNO3 by repeated evaporation with fresh portions of HCl. Dissolve this
18 3.6 96.4
product as directed in 16.1. 20 4.0 96.0
16.2 Prepare the required color standards by diluting the 25 5.0 95.0
30 6.0 94.0
No. 500 standard solution as shown in Table 3. If more exact 40 8.0 92.0
color comparison is desired, prepare additional standards to 50 10.0 90.0
supplement those given below. One color unit is equivalent to 60 12.0 88.0
70 14.0 86.0
1 mg metallic platinum/liter. Protect these standards against 80 16.0 84.0
evaporation and contamination when not in use. 90 18.0 82.0
100 20.0 80.0
17. Procedure 120 24.0 76.0
140 28.0 72.0
17.1 Transfer 100 mL of the sample to one of two matched 160 32.0 68.0
100-mL tall-form Nessler tubes. Fill the second tube to the 180 36.0 64.0
200 40.0 60.0
mark with the standard that seems to match the color of the 300 60.0 40.0
sample as indicated by a preliminary estimation. Compare the 400 80.0 20.0
500 100.0 0.0
colors of the sample and the standard by viewing vertically
down through the tubes against a white background. Replace
the liquid in the second tube with lighter or darker standards
until an exact match is obtained.
18. Report their materials and laboratory (or between specific laborato-
18.1 Report the color of the sample in terms of the color ries). The principles would then be valid for such data.
standard number that is nearest to it in color. If the sample 19.3 Repeatability—Precision under repeatability condi-
appears exactly halfway between two standards, report the tions.
color number of the darker standard.
19.4 Reproducibility—Precision under reproducibility con-
19. Precision and Bias ditions.
19.1 The precision of this test method is based on an 19.5 Repeatability Limit, r—The value below which the
interlaboratory study conducted in 2011. Six laboratories tested absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
four different polyurethane materials. Every “test result” rep- under repeatability conditions is expected to occur with a
resents an individual determination. Each laboratory reported probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %). For the data gener-
three replicate test results for each material. Practice E691 was ated in Table 4, the maximum expected difference between two
followed for the design and analysis of the data; the details are test results for the same material, obtained by the same
given in ASTM Research Report No. D20-1257. operator using the same equipment on the same day in the same
laboratory due solely to the method is 0.7 units.
19.2 Caution—The explanation of the repeatability (r) and
reproducibility (R) is only intended to present a meaningful 19.6 Reproducibility Limit, R—The value below which the
way of considering the approximate precision of this test absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
method. Do not apply the data in Table 4 to acceptance or under reproducibility conditions is expected to occur with a
rejection of materials, as these data apply only to the materials probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %). For the data gener-
tested in the round robin and are unlikely to be rigorously ated in Table 4, the maximum expected differences between
representative of other lots, formulations, conditions, materials, two test results for the same material, obtained by different
or laboratories. Users of this test method need to apply the operators using different equipment in different laboratories
principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to due solely to the method is 26 units.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:04 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D4890 − 18
TABLE 4 APHA Color (APHA Color Standard Number)
A
Material Average Repeatability Reproducibility Repeatability Reproducibility
Standard Standard Limit Limit
Deviation Deviation
x̄ Sr SR r R
Jeffol 10.6 0.2 7.4 0.7 20.8
G 31-35
Jeffol 80.8 0.2 11.1 0.7 31.1
S-490
A
The average of the laboratories’ calculated averages.

20. Keywords
20.1 APHA; color; Gardner; platinum-cobalt scale; polyols;
polyurethane raw materials; Pt-Co scale

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D4890–13)
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2018)

(1) Corrected spelling throughout. (3) Updated Precision and Bias statements to comply with
(2) Removed non-mandatory language throughout. D4968.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:04 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5117 − 17

Standard Test Method for

Dye Penetration of Solid Fiberglass Reinforced Pultruded
Stock1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5117; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics

1.1 This dye-penetrant test method covers a means of
evaluating solid fiberglass all-roving reinforced pultruded rod
or bar stock for longitudinal wicking. There are generally three
mechanisms that promote wicking such as delaminations,
longitudinal continuous voids, or the presence of hollow fibers.
Any or all of them will be operating at a given time.
NOTE 1—Occasionally the flaws listed above may be detected by this
test, but other tests are usually required.
1.2 The values stated in either SI units or inch-pound units
are to be regarded separately as standard. The values stated in
each system are not necessarily exact equivalents; therefore,
each system shall be used independently of the other. Combin-
ing values from the two systems has the potential to result in
nonconformance with the standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
For specific hazard statements, see 10.3 and 10.6.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this test method.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.18 on Reinforced Thermoset-
ting Plastics.
Current edition approved Dec. 15, 2017. Published January 2018. Originally
approved in 1990. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D5117 - 09. DOI:
10.1520/D5117-17.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
D3918 Terminology Relating to Reinforced Plastic Pul-
truded Products
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of technical terms pertain-
ing to plastics used in this test method, see Terminology D883.
3.2 For definitions of terms that appear in this standard
relating to reinforced plastic pultruded products, refer to
Terminology D3918.
3.3 For definitions of terms that appear in this standard
relating to quality and statistics, refer to Terminology E456.
3.4 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.4.1 wicking—transmission of a gas or liquid due to pres-
sure differential or capillary action along fibers incorporated in
a fiberglass reinforced pultruded product.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 All-roving pultruded rod stock is tested by placing the
specimen(s) on end into the dye penetrant to a specified depth
and observing the wicking action as spots, or dots, on the
opposite, dry face.
4.2 The wicking action through the length of the specimen
is due to the capillary action of the penetrant through the open
pathways in the composite. These pathways are typically
occupied by air and are caused by continuous voids, cracks, or
hollow fibers, or all three, simultaneously.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is useful for establishing the integrity
of composite rod. The presence of voids, cracks, and hollow
fibers are considered detrimental to the structural integrity of
the composite and causes reduced electrical resistance and
increased current leakage.
5.2 A perfect composite would be flaw-free, and there
would be no possibility of wicking. Composites of this type are
virtually nonexistent, as there will typically be entrapped air in
the resin developed during manufacturing, occasional hollow
fibers, and occasional cracks due to thermal stresses.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:07 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5117 − 17
5.3 This test method is intended to provide a tool for
measuring the extent of wicking in a composite over very short
lengths of material for comparative purposes. The presence of
wicking over 1 in. (2.54 cm) lengths will not necessarily imply
that the composite will perform unsatisfactorily for its intended
end-use. Therefore, interpretation of test results shall be made
carefully.
5.4 This test method was developed as a technique for
estimating quality and consistency of pultruded rod and bar
stock, which is a composite of resin and all-roving reinforce-
ment. This test method will be useful for a manufacturer to
determine whether any gross changes in quality have taken
place due to process or raw material changes as the manufac-
turing process also affects the quality of the product.
5.5 Since the results of this test are so sensitive to sample
size, penetrant type, penetrant used, viscosity, duration of test,
and other factors, no attempt to arrive at or recommend
development of a specification for these materials has been
made. A specification shall be negotiated between supplier and
end user and such specification shall be made with great care.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Dye Penetrant3
6.2 Ultraviolet Light Source—The penetrant used is
fluorescent, and requires a black lamp light source.
6.3 Dark Room—An area for viewing the presence of
fluorescent spots on the test specimens is required.
6.4 Hood—There is a need to provide adequate air ventila-
tion for the elimination of any annoying vapors from the
penetrant. These vapors are nontoxic, but has potential to be an
irritant.
6.5 Shallow Pan, for holding the penetrant is required. A
thin, spongy material that can be placed in the pan to support
the specimen on one end.
6.6 Stop Watch, or other means for timing the length of the
test is required.
6.7 Magnifying Glass, 5×, recommended for identifying
very small fluorescent specks, or dots, on the specimen’s upper
face. It is not regarded as essential.
7. Materials
7.1 This test method was developed for use on solid
pultruded all-roving rod and bar stock reinforced with fiber-
glass. An evaluation employed 1 in. diameter rod stock using
epoxy, vinyl ester and polyester resins. It was determined that
this test method is applicable for all three resin series.
7.2 Use rod-stock representative of typical production lots
and select random specimens for testing.
8. Sampling and Test Specimens
8.1 Take at least three test specimens for each sample.
3
Zyglo Penetrex ZL 30A dye penetrant, manufactured by Magnaflex, or
equivalent, is suitable for this purpose. During the initial round-robin work, three
standard penetrants of the industry were evaluated. The above referenced penetrant
provided the most discriminating, rapid, and consistent results.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:07 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.2 Specimens shall not be taken from material that has
been damaged or subjected to previous testing.
8.3 Select at least three 1-in. (2.54 cm) length specimens
taken at random locations along the rod stock to be tested.
These shall be cut dry with a diamond-dust blade to ensure a
smooth test surface.
8.4 In order to prevent the problem of wicking up the sides
of some composites, paint a ring of clear nail polish or other
suitable inhibitor below the top surface and around the circum-
ference of each test specimen.
9. Conditioning
9.1 Condition the test specimens at 23 6 2°C (73.4 6
3.6°F) and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h
prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618.
9.2 Test Conditions—Conduct all testing in the standard
laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2°C (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6
10 % relative humidity, unless otherwise specified.
10. Procedure
10.1 Preheat the ultraviolet light source for 15 min or in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Posi-
tion the light to shine on the pan (penetrant) surface.
10.2 Place a thin, spongy material such as common house-
hold plastic foam sponge on the bottom of the pan to support
the specimens. This material aids in properly wetting the
bottom surface of the specimen and reduces possible problems
associated with air entrapment.
10.3 Add sufficient dye to the pan such that the specimens
will be immersed to a depth of 1⁄8 in. (0.32 cm) while resting on
the sponge. This depth shall be predetermined with an extra
piece of rod stock.
10.4 Warning—Avoid hand contact with the penetrant to
preclude possible contamination of the specimens during
handling. Wash hands thoroughly before proceeding, if contact
with the penetrant were to occur.
Place each specimen on end in the penetrant to the depth
specified in 10.3 and staggered from the rest of the group. The
actual time of immersion for each shall be recorded if more
than six specimens are to be tested at one time. Otherwise, all
specimens shall be considered to be immersed at the same
time. When more than six specimens are tested, an interval of
30 s between the respective immersions shall be observed. For
example, if a group of nine specimens were to be tested, one
could be added at T = 0, the next at T = 30 s, and the last at
T = 4.0 min.
10.5 Immerse each specimen such that its lower face is
inserted into the dye normal to the supporting sponge to ensure
optimum coating of its surface. Press down lightly on the upper
face of the specimen to effect its positive sealing.
10.6 See Warning in 10.4.
10.7 Position the specimens in the penetrant in a row left to
right such that the first, second, etc. can be easily identified.
10.8 Record the time for the appearance of the first dot.
 D5117 − 17
10.9 Count upper face wicking dots (fluorescent specks) 11.1.5 The average of the individual wicking data for each
following 30 min of penetrant immersion. For a large group of sample,
specimens, the counting must be completed between 29 min, 11.1.6 Date of test, and
45 s and 30 min, 15 s for each specimen. 11.1.7 Any deviations from the test method shall be
10.9.1 The immersion time of 30 min for all specimens is included, such as alternate penetrant source, etc.
particularly critical and must be observed within the limits
specified under 10.9 if meaningful data are to be obtained. In 12. Precision
fact, the time at which the extent of wicking is determined has
been found to be the greatest single source of error in 12.1 Repeatability—The value below which the absolute
interlaboratory comparisons of wicking data. difference between two individual test results obtained under
repeatability conditions is expected to occur with a probability
10.10 If an error is made, or if a specimen falls into the
of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
penetrant, reject that specimen and run a retest from retained TABLE Number of Wicking Dots
stock.
Polyester Epoxy Vinyl Ester
10.11 Test at least three specimens per sample.
Repeatability 7.85 4.17 13.5
10.12 Record the time to the first dot. Record the total
number of wicking dots, or specks, for each specimen after 12.2 Reproducibility—The value below which the absolute
30-min immersion, discounting those that have merged as one. difference between two individual test results obtained under
If the latter condition exists, discontinue the test for that reproducibility conditions is expected to occur with a probabil-
particular specimen and test another. ity of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
TABLE Number of Wicking Dots
11. Report Polyester Epoxy Vinyl Ester

11.1 Report the following information: Reproducibility 9.41 4.17 14.6

11.1.1 Complete identification of the material tested, includ-
ing resin type, machine identification, dimensions, reinforce-
ment type, manufacturer’s code, etc.,
11.1.2 Conditioning procedure used, if different than
stipulated,
11.1.3 Test room conditions,
11.1.4 Individual specimens tested, with individual wicking
data,
12.3 The above precision data were generated as the result
of an industry round-robin in which seven laboratories
participated, using rod stock from a single supplier’s standard
inventory.
13. Keywords
13.1 dye penetration test; pultruded rod; rod stock; wicking

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5117 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 15, 2017)

(1) Added “them will” and removed “which may” in 1.1.
(2) Added “such as delaminations, longitudinal continuous
voids, or the presence of hollow fibers” in 1.1.
(3) Removed “The specimen’s cross-section may reflect
delaminations, longitudinal continuous voids, or the presence
of hollow fibers, or all three.” in 1.1, Note 1.
(4) Removed “The results of a wicking test are dependent on
specimen type and size, penetrant type, time of exposure in the
penetrant, penetrant viscosity, etc. Any attempt to use a
wicking test to establish specification criteria should be made
with great care.” and added “See the significance and use
section for cautions in using this test method.” in 1.2.
(5) Added “are not necessarily” and “has the potential to” and
removed “may not be” and “may” in 1.3.
(6) Added D883 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastics and
E456 Standard Terminology Relating to Quality and Standards
and removed “E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory
Study to Determine the Precision of a Test Method” to 2.1.
(7) Removed “Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:”
and added “Definitions—For definitions of technical terms
pertaining to plastics used in this test method, see Terminology
D883.” in 3.1.
(8) Added “3.2 For definitions of terms that appear in this
standard relating to reinforced plastic pultruded products, refer
to D3918.”
(9) Removed “3.1.1 wicking—transmission of a gas or liquid
due to pressure differential or capillary action along fibers
incorporated in a fiberglass reinforced pultruded product.”
(10) Added “3.3 For definitions of terms that appear in this
standard relating to quality and statistics, refer to Terminology
E456.”
(11) Added “3.4 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Stan-
dard:”
(12) Added “3.4.1 wicking—transmission of a gas or liquid
due to pressure differential or capillary action along fibers
incorporated in a fiberglass reinforced pultruded product.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:07 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5117 − 17
(13) Added “are” and “simultaneously” and removed “can be”
and “in the reinforcement” in 4.2.
(14) Added “causes” and removed “may cause” in 5.1.
(15) Added “manufacturing” and removed “manufacture” in
5.2.
(16) “should be made with care” changed to “shall be made
carefully” and “may” changed to “will” in 5.3.
(17) Deleted “The manufacturing process may also affect the
quality of the product. It should be useful for a manufacturer in
determining whether any gross changes in quality have taken
place due to process or raw material changes.” and added “This
test method will be useful for a manufacturer to determine
whether any gross changes in quality have taken place due to
process or raw material changes as the manufacturing process
also affects the quality of the product.” in 5.4.
(18) Deleted “It is suggested that such a specification should be
negotiated between supplier and end user.” and added “A
specification shall be negotiated between supplier and end user
and such specification shall be made with great care.” in 5.5.
(19) Added “has potential to” and removed “could” in 6.4.
(20) Added “It was determined that this test method is appli-
cable for all those three resin series.” and removed “It is
recognized that this test method will be used with other resin
system and rod-stock sizes.” in 4.2.
(21) Added “to support the specimen on one end.” and re-
moved “and upon which the specimens may rest is recom-
mended” in 6.5.
(22) “should” changed to “shall” in 8.3.
(23) Added “standard laboratory atmosphere” and removed
“Standard Laboratory Atmosphere” in 9.2.
(24) “should” changed to “shall” in 10.3.
(25) Added “if contact with the penetrant were to occur.” and
removed “should contact with the penetrant occur.” in 10.4.
(26) “should” changed to “if” and “exist” changed to “exists”
in 10.12.
(27) Added “12.1 Repeatability Limit—The value below
which the absolute difference between two individual test
results obtained under repeatability conditions is expected to
occur with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95%).” and
removed “12.1 Repeatability—The critical difference table
below was obtained on the same material by a single operator
using the same instrument. Two averages of wicking data taken
within a single laboratory for a 1 in. (2.54 cm) diameter
fiberglass reinforced solid rod stock can be considered signifi-
cantly different at 95 % confidence if the values differ by more
than those listed in the following table.” in 12.1.
(28) Added “12.2 Reproducibility Limit—The value below
which the absolute difference between two individual test
results obtained under reproducibility conditions is expected to
occur with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95%).” and
removed “12.2 Reproducibility—The critical difference table
shown below represents data obtained by two different opera-
tors using different instruments in different laboratories. Two
averages of wicking data taken in different laboratories for a 1
in. (2.54 cm) diameter fiberglass reinforced solid rod stock can
be considered significantly different at 95 % confidence if the
values differ by more than those listed in the following table.”
in 12.2

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:07 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5132 − 20

Standard Test Method for

Horizontal Burning Rate of Polymeric Materials Used in
Occupant Compartments of Motor Vehicles1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5132; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This test method is intended for use as a small-scale
laboratory procedure for comparing the relative horizontal
burning rates of polymeric materials used in occupant com-
partments of motor vehicles.
1.2 During the course of combustion, gases or vapors, or
both, are evolved that are potentially hazardous to personnel.
Adequate precautions shall be taken to protect the operator.
1.3 Units—The values stated in SI units are to be regarded
as standard.
1.4 This test method, Federal Safety Standard MVSS 302,
SAE J369, and ISO 3795 address the same subject matter, but
differ in technical content.
1.5 This standard is used to measure and describe the
response of materials, products, or assemblies to heat and
flame under controlled conditions, but does not by itself
incorporate all factors required for fire hazards or fire risk
assessment of materials, products, or assemblies under actual
fire conditions.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific hazard statements are given in Section 7.
1.7 Fire testing is inherently hazardous. Adequate safe-
guards for personnel and property shall be employed in
conducting these tests.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.30 on Thermal Properties.
Current edition approved Feb. 1, 2020. Published March 2020. Originally
approved in 1990. Last previous edition approved in 2019 as D5132 – 19. DOI:
10.1520/D5132-20.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D5025 Specification for Laboratory Burner Used for Small-
Scale Burning Tests on Plastic Materials
E176 Terminology of Fire Standards
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
2.2 Federal Safety Standard:
MVSS 302 (49 CFR 571.302) Flammability of Interior
Materials-Passenger Cars, Multipurpose Passenger
Vehicles, Trucks and Buses3
2.3 SAE Standard:
SAE J369 Flammability of Polymeric Interior Materials -
Horizontal Test Method4
2.4 ISO Standard:
ISO 3795 Road vehicles, and tractors and machinery for
agriculture and forestry—Determination of burning be-
havior of interior materials5
ISO 13943 Fire Safety—Vocabulary
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms relating to plastics,
the definitions in this test method are in accordance with
Terminology D883. For terms relating to fire, the definitions in
this test method are in accordance with Terminology E176 and
ISO 13943. In case of conflict, the definitions given in
Terminology E176 shall prevail. For terms relating to precision
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
United States Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 571.302, 36 FR 28991,
available from Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402.
4
Available from Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth
Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096-0001.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5132 − 20
and bias and associated issues, the terms used in this test
method are in accordance with the definitions in Terminology
E456.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method employs a standard test specimen (100
by 356 mm) with a thickness up to 13 mm, mounted in a
U-shaped metal frame. The specimen is ignited by means of a
38 mm high flame from an appropriate burner, and the burning
rate of the material is determined.
4.2 The rate of burning is determined by measurements of
the horizontal distance burned in relation to the time of
burning, and reported for each set of specimens.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method provides a standard laboratory proce-
dure for measuring and comparing the burning rates of
polymeric materials under specified controlled conditions.
5.2 The rate of burning is affected by such factors as density,
direction of rise, and type and amount of surface treatments.
The thickness of the finished specimens must also be taken into
account. These factors must be considered in order to compare
materials on the same basis.
5.3 In this procedure, the specimens are subjected to one or
more specific sets of laboratory test conditions. If different test
conditions are substituted or the end-use conditions are
changed, it is not always possible by or from this test method
to predict changes in the fire-test-response characteristics
measured. Therefore, the results are valid only for the fire test
exposure conditions described in this procedure.
6. Apparatus
6.1 The apparatus shall be as shown in Figs. 1-6 and shall
include the following:
FIG. 1 Horizontal Flammability Chamber
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.1.1 Test Chamber—A chamber approximately 380 by 355
by 200 mm constructed of 1.25–1.50 mm steel sheet and
fabricated in accordance with Fig. 1.
6.1.2 Laboratory Burner—Constructed in accordance with
Specification D5025.
NOTE 2—It is acceptable to mount the burner on the door, as shown in
Fig. 6, to ensure proper alignment.
6.1.3 Gas Supply—Methane or natural gas having a heating
value of 37 6 1 MJ/m3.
6.1.4 Specimen Holder Support—A device capable of main-
taining the specimen holder horizontally in place so that the top
of the burner tube is positioned 19 mm below the top surface
of the bottom U-shaped frame when placed in the specimen
holder support, as shown in Fig. 2 and Fig. 3. The base of the
support shall not obstruct the ventilation holes in the base of
the cabinet.
NOTE 3—Limited data indicates that the use of a “drip tray” under the
specimen holder does not significantly affect the test results. If differences
are observed by the testing laboratory, the drip tray shall be removed.
6.1.5 Specimen Holder—Two matching U-shaped frames of
non-corroding metal stock 25 mm wide and 10 mm high. The
interior dimensions of the U-shaped frames are 50 mm wide by
330 mm long. A specimen that softens and bends at the flaming
end so as to cause erratic burning is kept horizontal by supports
consisting of thin, heat-resistant wires, spanning the width of
the U-shaped frame under the specimen at 25-mm intervals. A
device that is suitable for use for supporting this type of
material is an additional U-shaped frame containing the
specimen, spanned by 0.25-mm wires of heat-resistant compo-
sition at 25 mm intervals starting 38 mm from the open end.
The device is inserted over the bottom U-shaped frame. See
Fig. 4 and Fig. 5.
6.1.6 Timing Device—A timer accurate to the nearest 0.1 s.
6.1.7 Measuring Device—A rule accurate to the nearest 1.0
mm.
 D5132 − 20

FIG. 2 Typical Specimen Holder Support

FIG. 3 Specimen Holder With Specimen Positioned in the Specimen Holder Support

FIG. 4 Typical Specimen Holder—Two Identical U-Shaped Frames

7. Hazards
7.1 During the course of combustion, gases or vapors, or
both, are evolved and have the potential to be hazardous.
Precautions shall be taken to protect the operator.
8. Test Specimens
8.1 A minimum of five specimens 100 6 5 mm wide by a
minimum of 300 mm long by thickness up to a maximum of 13
mm are prepared by cutting from the test material. If the test
material has a coating, covering, or construction that is
considered directional in nature, and it has a directional effect
on the burning rate, then specimens are produced by cutting
five specimens in both the transverse and longitudinal direc-
tions.
8.2 Cut specimens from uniform density samples. The
maximum thickness of any specimen shall be 13 mm. If any

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5132 − 20

FIG. 5 Bottom U-Frame

FIG. 6 Burner Position Inside Cabinet

material to be tested exceeds this, it shall be cut to the above
thickness by a mechanical process applied to the side which
does not face the occupant compartment, so that the specimen
shall include the primary surface of the part. In case of
materials made of different composition which are not com-
posite materials, all the layers within a depth of 13 mm from
the surface facing towards the occupant compartment shall be
tested individually, as shown at the Fig. 7. Any material that
does not adhere to other materials at every point of contact
shall be tested separately. Any material that adheres to other

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5132 − 20
NOTE 1—Material A has a non-adhering interface with material B and is tested separately. Part of material B is within 13.0 mm of the occupant
compartment air space, and materials B and C adhere at every point of contact; therefore B and C are tested as a composite. The cut is in material C as
shown, to make a specimen 13.0 mm thick.
FIG. 7 Specimen Preparation (Illustrative Example)
materials at every point of contact shall be tested as a
composite with other material(s). Record the information on
specimen preparation in the test report.
8.3 Where it is not possible to obtain a flat specimen
because of the component configuration, cut the specimen to
the maximum thickness of 13 mm at any point, from the area
with the least curvature, and in such a manner as to include the
face side.
8.4 The minimum width and length of the specimen shall be
95 and 300 mm, respectively. Use the maximum available
length or width of a specimen (as described in 8.1) where either
dimension is less than the specified values.
8.5 For composites, laminates, or surface-treated samples,
the side nearest to the compartment occupant shall be placed
facing down during testing.
8.6 If the material’s grain pattern or construction is such that
it has a directional effect on the burning rate, conduct the
testing in both the transverse and longitudinal directions, as
described in 8.1. Test five specimens in each direction.
9. Conditioning
9.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon, materials shall be con-
ditioned for at least 24 h at 23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 % relative
humidity prior to testing.
9.2 All specimens shall be tested in a laboratory atmosphere
of 15 to 35°C and 40 to 75 % relative humidity. For
convenience, the specimens can be stored up to 1 h in closed
polyethylene bags after conditioning and prior to testing.
10. Procedure
10.1 Place the test chamber inside a laboratory exhaust
hood.
NOTE 4—The proper control of the hood is necessary to ensure the
proper draft. Adjust the baffles or the exhaust motor speed, or both, so that
the face velocity of the hood shall be constant in the range of 0.1 m/s [75
ft/min]. It is possible that the effectiveness of the hood will change when
the door to the lab is opened and closed.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10.2 Place samples with napped or tufted surface on a flat
surface and comb twice against the nap using the metal comb
at least 110 mm in length, with seven to eight teeth per 25 mm.
10.3 Place the test specimen between the two matching
U-shaped frames so that the frames hold both long sides and
one end of the specimen.
10.4 Place the burner remote from the specimen, ignite, and
adjust it to produce a blue flame 38 6 2 mm high. Adjust the
gas supply and the air ports of the burner until a yellow-tipped
blue flame is produced and then increase the air supply until the
yellow tip just disappears. Measure the height of the flame,
and, if necessary, readjust to obtain a flame 38 mm high.
10.5 Place the burner inside the open end of the test
chamber and position the burner to ensure that the center of the
burner top is 19 6 1 mm below the center of the bottom edge
of the specimen at the open end of the specimen holder when
the specimen is in the specimen testing position.
10.6 Place the mounted specimen in the horizontal testing
position in the specimen holder support inside the test chamber.
10.7 Turn on the exhaust hood.
10.8 Move the flame into contact with the specimen for a
period of 15 s, then extinguish the exposure flame by turning
off the gas supply or by removing the flame from under the
specimen.
10.9 Observe the leading edge of the flame front, starting
the timer when the scribed mark 38 mm from the open end of
the sample holder is reached.
10.10 Measure the time it takes the leading edge of the
flame front to progress to the line scribed 292 mm from the
open end of the top or bottom U-shaped frame. If the flame
does not reach this specified end point, time its progress to the
furthest distance reached. If the specimen stops burning before
it has burned for 60 s and has not burned more than 50 mm past
the 38 mm scribed line, no burn rate is calculated.
 D5132 − 20
11. Calculation tories tested ten different materials. Eight laboratories per-
11.1 Calculate the burning rate from the following formula: formed the test method without a drip tray, three laboratories
performed the test method with a drip tray. Every “test result”
B 5 D/T 3 60 (1) represents one individual determination. Laboratories submit-
where: ted test results from a single operator for each material, four
B = burning rate, mm/min, laboratories submitted five replicate test results, one laboratory
D = length the flame traveled, starting from the first scribed submitted four replicate test results. Practice E691 was fol-
line, mm, and lowed for the design and analysis of data, the details are given
T = time for the flame to travel distance D, s in ASTM Research Report No. D20-1238.
13.2 Warning—The data in Table 1 shall not be rigorously
12. Report
12.1 Report the following information:
12.1.1 Complete identification of the material tested, includ-
ing generic description, manufacturer, commercial designation, TABLE 1 Test Method D5132 without drip tray, Burn Rate (mm/
and lot number, color and other information as requested. min.)
12.1.2 Directionality of the specimens, if pertinent. See 8.1 Material
Values, s
and 8.5. Average SrA SRB rC RD
ABS 60.3 7.5 11.7 21.1 32.7
12.1.3 The thickness and type of specimens tested, that is, PVC 37.2 10.3 24.5 29.0 68.5
composite, laminate, finished section, cellular foam, etc. TPO 65.8 4.1 29.0 11.5 81.1
12.1.4 Conditioning treatment. Polystyrene 80.5 7.8 10.1 21.7 28.2
Foam/Fabric 1A 66.3 12.3 26.5 34.5 74.2
12.1.5 Any prior treatment before testing, other than Foam/Fabric 1B 74.0 7.9 25.1 22.1 70.4
cutting, trimming and conditioning. Foam/Fabric 2A 51.4 10.8 18.4 30.2 51.5
12.1.6 Number of specimens tested. Foam/Fabric 2B 53.2 12.6 17.2 35.4 48.3
Foam/PVC 5.9 11.2 14.8 31.4 41.5
12.1.7 Burnt distance in mm, and burning time, in seconds. Polyurethane 6.8 6.1 22.1 17.0 61.8
12.1.8 All calculated single values of burning rate, in mm / A
Sr = within-laboratory standard deviation of the average.
min. B
SR = between-laboratories standard deviation of the avergage.
C
12.1.9 Average burning rate in millimetres per minute when r = 2.83Sr.
D
R = 2.83SR.
the flame reaches the specific end point. Report D and T
separately for each specimen when the flame propagation stops
before reaching the end point.
12.1.10 Describe observations of burning characteristics
such as warping, melting, dripping, charring, etc. applied to acceptance or rejection of material, as those data are
12.2 The report shall contain the following statement: “In specific to the interlaboratory study and are not necessarily
this procedure, the specimens are subjected to one or more representative of other lots, conditions, materials, or laborato-
specific laboratory test conditions. If different test conditions ries. Users of this test method shall apply the principles
are substituted or the end-use conditions are changed, it is not outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
always possible by or from this test to predict changes in the laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories.
fire-test-response characteristics measured. Therefore, the re- 13.3 Equivalence testing on numerical data from two
sults are valid only for the fire test exposure conditions sources shall be conducted in accordance with Practice E2935.
described in this procedure.”
13.4 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
13. Precision and Bias6 estimate bias of this test method.
13.1 Precision—The precision of this test method is based
on an interlaboratory study conducted in 2002. Eleven labora- 14. Keywords
14.1 burning rate; flame; flexible cellular materials; heat;
6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and are motor vehicles; occupant compartments; polymeric materials;
obtainable by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1238. rubber

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5132 − 20
ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. ROUND ROBIN RESULTS

A1.1 An interlaboratory study of the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (FMVSS) 302 was conducted in 2002. Eleven
laboratories tested ten different materials. Every “test result”
represents one individual determination. Laboratories submit-
ted test results from a single operator for each material, six
laboratories submitted five replicate test results, three labora-
tories submitted four replicate test results, and one laboratory
submitted three replicate test results. Practice E691 was fol-
lowed for the design and analysis of data.
A1.2 Warning—The data in Table A1.1 shall not be rigor-
ously applied to acceptance or rejection of material, as those
data are specific to the interlaboratory study and are not
necessarily representative of other lots, conditions, materials,
or laboratories. Users of this test method shall apply the
principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to
their laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5132 − 20
TABLE A1.1 Burn Rate (mm/min)
Values, s
Material
Average SrA SRB rC RD
ABS 60.7 5.9 12.5 16.5 35.1
PVC 31.4 8.5 20.0 23.8 56.1
TPO 65.5 4.9 27.8 13.8 77.7
Polystyrene 73.6 11.8 20.2 33.1 56.6
Foam/Fabric 1A 68.0 6.7 28.6 18.7 80.2
Foam/Fabric 1B 73.9 5.3 27.5 14.8 76.9
Foam/Fabric 2A 51.6 15.0 25.4 42.0 71.0
Foam/Fabric 2B 53.0 14.0 19.3 39.2 54.2
Foam/PVC 5.0 10.9 14.0 30.4 39.1
Polyurethane 1.1 6.0 6.4 16.9 18.0
A
Sr = within-laboratory standard deviation of the average.
B
SR = between-laboratories standard deviation of the average.
C
r = 2.83Sr.
D
R = 2.83SR.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5132-19)
that may impact the use of this standard. (February 1, 2020)

(1) Revised 3.1.

(2) Added reference to ASTM D883, ASTM E456 and to ISO
13943.

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5132-17)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2019)

(1) Added D883, E456, and E2935 to Referenced Documents, (5) Deleted Note 6 reference and note as the information
2.1. contained in the note is now included in 13.1.
(2) Added document titles to Referenced Documents, 2.1. (6) Revised Annex A1 to conform to D20 Guidance 4/2/19
(3) Revised 3.1—Definitions—to include reference to E456 for removing statements regarding equivalence of test results
definitions of terms relating to precision and bias and associ- based on repeatability or reproducibility values.
ated issues.
(4) Revised Section 13—Precision and Bias—to conform to
D20 Guidance 4/2/19 removing statements regarding equiva-
lence of test results based on repeatability or reproducibility
values.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:11 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5138 − 16

Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Liquid Crystal Polymers Molding and Extrusion Materials
(LCP)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5138; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory

1.1 This classification system covers liquid crystal poly-
meric (LCP) materials suitable for injection molding and
extrusion. This classification system allows the use of liquid
crystal polymers that are recycled, reconstituted, recycled-
regrind, recovered, or reprocessed, or a combination thereof,
provided that the requirements as stated in this classification
system are met. It is the responsibility of the supplier and the
buyer of liquid crystal polymers that are recycled,
reconstituted, recycled-regrind, recovered, or reprocessed, or a
combination thereof, to ensure compliance.
1.2 The properties included in this classification system are
those required to identify the compositions covered. Other
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics
important to specialized applications are allowed. These shall
be agreed upon between the user and the supplier, by using
suffixes as given in Section 5.
1.3 This classification system and subsequent line callout
(specification) are intended to be a means of calling out plastic
materials used in the fabrication of end-use items or parts. It is
not intended for the selection of materials. Material selection
can be made by those having expertise in the plastics field after
careful consideration of the design and the performance
required of the part, the environment to which it will be
exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the costs
involved, and the inherent properties of the material other than
those covered by this classification system.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.5 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test method portion, Section 11, of this classification system:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
als
D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With-
drawn 2015)3
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications

1 2
This classification system is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Materials. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved April 1, 2016. Published April 2016. Originally the ASTM website.
3
approved in 1990. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D5138 - 11. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D5138-16. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16
2.2 IEC and ISO Standards:4
IEC 112 Recommended Method for Determining the Com-
parative Tracking Index of Solid Insulation Materials
IEC 243 Recommended Methods of Test for Electrical
Strength of Solid Insulating Materials at Power Frequen-
cies
ISO 62 Plastics—Determination of Water Absorption
ISO 75-1 Determination of Temperature of Deflection Un-
der Load—General Test Method
ISO 75-2 Determination of Temperature of Deflection Under
Load—Plastics and Ebonite
ISO 178 Plastics—Determination of Flexural Properties of
Rigid Materials
ISO 180 Plastics—Determination of Izod Impact Strength of
Rigid Materials
ISO 294-1 Plastics—Injection Moulding of Test Specimens
of Thermoplastic Materials—General Principles for Injec-
tion Molding
ISO 527-1 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
General Principles
ISO 527-2 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Test Conditions for Moulding and Extrusion of Plastics
ISO 604 Plastics—Determination of Compressive Properties
ISO 3451-1 Plastics—Determination of Ash Content—Part
1: General Methods
ISO 11357-1 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry
(DSC)—Part 1: General Principles
ISO 11357-3 Plastics—Differential Scanning Calorimetry
(DSC)—Part 3: Determination of Temperature and En-
thalpy of Melting and Crystallization
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
ISO 11443 Plastics—Determination of the Fluidity of Plas-
tics Using Capillary and Slit-Die Rheometers
ISO 20753 Plastics—Test Specimens
2.3 Military Standard:5
MIL-M-24519 Molding Plastics—Electrical Thermoplastics
2.4 Underwriters Laboratories (UL):6
UL 94 Test for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in
Devices and Appliances
2.5 National Technical Information Service (NTIS):7
AD297457 Procedure and Analytical Method for Determin-
ing Toxic Gases Produced by Synthetic Compounds
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Except for the terms defined below, the
terminology used in this classification system is in accordance
with Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 liquid crystal polymer (LCP)—A family of thermo-
plastic polymers which upon heating to the processing
temperature, exhibit ordered structure and under shear, highly
aligned chains that are retained in the solid state. Liquid crystal
polymers are polymers that in the molten state exhibit birefrin-
gence in polarized light.
5
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, http://
dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
6
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 2600 N.W. Lake Rd., Camas,
WA 98607-8542, http://www.ul.com.
7
Available from National Technical Information Service (NTIS), 5301 Shawnee
Rd., Alexandria, VA 22312, http://www.ntis.gov.

TABLE LCP Liquid Crystal Polymers—Classification

Group Description Class Description GradeA Description
01 unsubstituted or methyl substituted, wholly aromatic 1 high temperature 0
copolyester, polyether, or polyester amide DTULB >260°C
2 medium temperature 0
DTUL = 220–260°C
3 general purpose 0
DTUL <220°C
02 mixed aromatic/aliphatic copolyesters, polyethers, or 1 high temperature 0
polyester amides DTUL >260°C
2 medium temperature 0
DTUL = 220–260°C
3 general purpose 0
DTUL <220°C
03 aromatic copolyesters, polyethers, or polyesteramides 1 high temperature 0
with aliphatic sidechain DTUL >260°C
2 medium temperature 0
DTUL = 220–260°C
3 general purpose 0
DTUL <220°C
04 blends 1 high temperature 0
DTUL >260°C
2 medium temperature 0
DTUL = 220–260°C
3 general purpose 0
DTUL <220°C
00 other 0 other 0
A
Description unspecified.
B
DTUL is deflection temperature under load measured at 1.8 MPa and is determined in accordance with Table A or Table B.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16
4. Classification
4.1 The LCP materials are classified into groups according
to their chemical composition. These groups are subdivided,
whether reinforced or not, into classes based on thermal
performance as shown in Table LCP.
NOTE 2—An example of this classification system is as follows: The
specification LCP0120 indicates the following LCP = liquid crystal poly-
mer as found in Terminology D1600:
01 = Unsubstituted, or methyl substituted, wholly aromatic
copolyester, polyether, or polyester amide (group)
2 = Medium temperature, DTUL = 220-260°C (class)
0 = Other (grade)
4.1.1 To facilitate the incorporation of future or special
materials, the “other” category for Group (00), Class (0), and
Grade (0) is shown in Table LCP.
4.2 Reinforced, filled, and lubricated versions of LCP ma-
terials are classified in accordance with Tables LCP and Table
A. Table LCP is used to specify the group or the group and
class of LCP and Table A is used to specify the property
requirements.
4.2.2.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include
the range of properties available in existing materials, this does
not imply that every possible combination of properties exists
or can be obtained.
4.2.3 When the grade or class of the basic material is not
known or is not important, the “0” classification shall be used.
NOTE 6—An example of this classification for specifying a reinforced
LCP material is given as follows: The specification LCP0120G30A22450
would indicate the following material requirements:
LCP = Liquid Crystal Polymer as found in Terminology D1600
01— = Unsubstituted or methyl substituted, wholly aromatic
copolyester, polyether, or polyester amide (group),
2 = medium temperature (class)
0 = unspecified (grade)
G30 = Glass reinforced at 30 % nominal level
A = Table A property requirements
2 = Tensile strength, min, 100 MPa
2 = Flexural modulus, min, 8 GPa
4 = Notched izod impact, min, 15 kJ/m
5 = Deflection temperature under load, min, 260°C at 1.8 MPa,
0 = Unspecified
If no properties are specified, the specification would be
LCP0120G30A00000.

NOTE 3—Test specimens shall be prepared in accordance with

ISO 20753, Specimen Type A1 or Practice D3641 accordingly.
NOTE 4—A similar callout can be developed using Table B.
4.2.1 Reinforced, filled, and lubricated variations of the
basic materials are identified by a single letter that indicates the
filler, or reinforcement used, or both, and two digits that
indicate the nominal quantity in percent by weight. The
reinforcement letter designations and associated tolerance
levels are shown in Table 4.
NOTE 5—This part of the system uses the percent of reinforcements or
additives, or both, in the callout of the modified basic material. The types
and percentages of reinforcements and additives are shown on the
suppliers’ technical data sheet unless they are proprietary in nature. If
necessary, additional callout of these reinforcements and additives can be
accomplished by the use of the suffix part of the system (see Section 5).
4.2.2 Specific requirements shall be shown by a six-
character specification. The specification will consist of the
letter A and the five digits comprising the cell numbers for the
property requirements in the order as they appear in Table A.
5. Suffixes Requirements
5.1 When additional requirements are needed that are not
covered by the basic requirements or cell-table requirements,
they shall be indicated through the use of suffixes.
5.2 A list of suffixes is found in Classification System
D4000 (Table 3) and are used for additional requirements as
appropriate.
5.2.1 Additional suffixes will be added to that standard as
test methods and requirements are developed and requested.
6. General Requirements
6.1 The composition of the specified material shall be
uniform and shall conform to the requirements specified
herein.
6.2 The basic requirements from the property tables or cell
tables are always in effect unless superseded by specific suffix
requirements, which always take precedence.

TABLE A Property Requirements for Liquid Crystal Polymer Based on ISO Test Methods
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Tensile ISO 527 unspecified 70 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 specify
strength, value
min, MPa
2 Flexural ISO 178 unspecified 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 specify
modulus, value
min, GPa
3 Notched ISO 180 unspecified 5 9 12 15 18 25 37 50 specify
izod value
impact,
min, kJ/m2
4 DTULA at ISO 75/A unspecified 140 180 220 240 260 300 340 380 specify
1.8 MPa, value
min,° C
5 To be unspecified specify
determined value
A
DTUL = Deflection temperature under load tested flatwise on 80 by 10 by 4-mm specimen.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16

TABLE B (Formerly Table A in D5138 – 90) Property Requirements for LCP Based on ASTM Test Methods
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tensile strength, MPa, min,A unspecified 70 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 specify value
(D638)
Flex modulus, GPa, min,B unspecified 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 specify value
(D790)
Notched Izod unspecified 40 75 100 125 150 200 300 400 specify value
impact, min,
J/m, (D256)C
Deflection temperature, min, unspecified 140 180 220 240 260 300 340 380 specify value
°C at 1.8 MPa, (D648)D
To be determined unspecified specify value
A
Type 1 tensile bar, 3.2 mm thick tested at 5 mm/min ± 25 % (minimum length 200 mm).
B
127 by 12.7 by 3.2-mm bar tested at 1.3 mm/min.
C
Bar thickness 3.2 mm.
D
Test Method D648, Method A.

TABLE 4 Reinforcement-FillerA SymbolsB and Tolerances fied in Table 5 are guidelines only. Since mechanical properties
Symbol Material
Tolerance can vary depending on the molding conditions, contact the
(Based on Total MassA )
manufacturer of the grade for molding conditions appropriate
C carbon and graphite fiber ±2 % for specification purposes.
G glass ±2 %
L lubricants (for example PTFE, depends upon material and 9.3 Because of the shear sensitivity of LCP materials,
graphite, silicone, and process—to be specified occasionally a gate smaller than the gate specified by the
molybdenum disulfide) molding practice or method is required to fill the part ad-
M mineral ±2 %
R combinations of reinforcements ±3 % for the total equately. When reporting data in accordance with a specifica-
or fillers, or both tion (line callout), the gate design shall be reported if different
A
Ash content of filled, or reinforced material, or both, is determined using either than the applicable molding practice ro method requirement.
Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451-1 where applicable.
B
Additional symbols will be added to this table as required. 10. Conditioning
10.1 Test specimens shall be conditioned in the standard
laboratory atmosphere for a minimum of 12 h (condition
7. Detail Requirements 12/23/50 of Practice D618).
7.1 The material shall conform to the requirements pre-
scribed in Tables LCP and A (or B), and the suffix requirements 11. Test Methods
as they apply. 11.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica-
7.2 For the purposes of determining conformance with this tion system by means of the test methods referenced in Section
classification system, all specified limits for a specification 2.
(line callout) based on this classification system are absolute
limits, as defined in Practice E29. 12. Certification and Inspection

7.3 With the absolute method, an observed value or a 12.1 Inspection and certification of the material supplied
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly with reference to a specification based on this classification
with the limiting value. Conformance or nonconformance is system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
based on this comparison. herein.
12.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
8. Sampling acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the inspection shall consist of filler or reinforcement content (if
requirements of 12.4. any).
8.2 A batch or lot shall be constituted as a unit of manufac-
ture as prepared for shipment. A batch or lot is allowed to TABLE 5 Processing Guidelines for Liquid Crystal Polymers for
consist of a blend of two or more production runs. Preparation of Test SpecimensA
Melt Average Mold
9. Specimen Preparation Material Temperature, Cycle Time, s Injection Temperature,
°C Velocity, mm/s °C
9.1 The moisture content of the molding material for the Liquid crystal B
30 ± 5 150–600 90 ± 5
preparation of test specimens shall not exceed 0.01 %. Material polymer
having a moisture content above these limits shall be dried in A
Contact the manufacturer of the grade for more specific molding conditions when
conducting tests for comparison with the requirements of this classification system.
accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. B
Target melt temperature shall be ±20°C around the melt point. Actual melt
9.2 The test specimens shall be prepared by an injection temperature shall be held at ±3°C of the target. The melt point is defined as the
nominal melt transition temperature as measured by differential scanning
molding process as specified in ISO 294-1 for Table A or calorimetry.
Practice D3641 for Table B. The processing conditions speci-

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16
12.3 Periodic check inspection with a reference to a speci-
fication based on this classification system shall consist of the
tests for all requirements of the material under the specifica-
tion. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to ensure the
material is certifiable in accordance with 12.4.
12.4 Certification shall be that the material was manufac-
tured by a process in statistical control, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this classification system and that
the average values for the lot meet the requirements of the
specification (line callout).
NOTE 7—The ASTM publication Manual on Presentation of Data and
Control Chart Analysis, 8th Edition,8 provides detailed information about
statistical process control.
8
Available from ASTM International. Order stock number: MNL7-8TH-EB.
12.5 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
requested. The report shall consist of the results of the
lot-acceptance inspections for the shipment, the percent by
weight of recycled plastic as defined in Guide D7209, if
requested, and the results of the most recent periodic check
inspections.
13. Packaging and Package Marking
13.1 The provisions of Practice D3892 apply to packaging,
packing, and marking of containers for plastic materials.
14. Keywords
14.1 aromatic polyester (ARP); classification system; extru-
sion materials; injection molding materials; line call out; liquid
crystal polymers (LCP); recycled plastics

SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

The following supplementary requirements shall apply only when specified by the inquiry, contract,
or order for agencies of the U.S. Government.

S1. Special End Uses TABLE S2.1 Property Values for Initial Physical and Electrical
Qualification Testing
S1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase Value Required for Each Type
order, the supplier is responsible for the performance of all of Compound
Type Type
testing and inspections. Except as otherwise specified, the Property Units
GLCP-30F GLCP-50F
supplier is allowed to utilize his own facilities or any commer- Flammability — V-0 V-0
cial laboratory acceptable to the Government. The Government Water absorption %, max 0.08 0.08
Compressive strength MPa 75 75
reserves the right to perform any of the testing or inspections Dielectric strength
set forth in the specification requirements. This testing ensures Short-Time Test 1 kV/mm 18.8 18.8
Short-Time Test 2 kV/mm 18.8 18.8
qualification on a one-time basis unless the manufacturer Tracking index V 120 140
makes a significant change in formulation, raw material, or
process. S3. Quality Assurance
S3.1 Acceptance Criteria—Failure to conform to require-
S2. Physical Requirements ments in Table S2.1 shall result in rejection of the material.
S3.2 Sample Size—The minimum number of test specimens
S2.1 The physical and electrical property requirements for to be tested shall be as specified in Table S3.1.
initial material qualification are given in Table S2.1 and the test S3.3 Test Method—Testing shall be in accordance with the
methods in Table S3.1. Unless otherwise stated, the values are methods specified in Table S3.1.
minimum requirements. S3.4 Conditioning—Standard test specimens shall be con-
ditioned before testing as specified in Table S3.1 and as
described in Section 4.
TABLE S3.1 Sampling and Conditioning for Initial Qualification Testing
Test Method Number
Property to Be Tested Test Method Specimens Conditioning Units
Modified per Tested
Flammability UL 94 125 by 13 mm 10 per UL 94 per UL 94
by thickness
Compressive strength ISO 604 25 by 10 by 4 mm 5 E-48/50+C-96/23/50 MPa
(minimum average)
Water absorption ISO 62 50-mm disk, 3 E-24/100+des+D-48/50 Percent
3 mm thick (maximum average)
Dielectric Strength: IEC 243 S5.1 60 by 60 by 2-mm kV/mm
Short-time test plaque 3 E-48/50+C-96/23/50 (minimum average)
Short-time test 3 E-48/50+D-48/50
Tracking index IEC 112 80 by 10 by 4 mm 4 A V

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16
S4. Conditioning shall be denoted by use of a plus (+) sign between successive conditions.
Examples: C-96/23/50 — Humidity condition; 96 h at 23°C
S4.1 Nomenclature: and 50 % R.H.
S4.1.1 Condition A—As received. D-48/50 — Immersion condition; 48 h at 50°C.
S4.1.2 Condition C—Humidity conditioning. E-48/50 — Temperature condition; 48 h at 50°C.
S4.1.3 Condition D—Immersion conditioning in distilled
S5. Test Method Modification
water.
S4.1.4 Condition E—Temperature conditioning. S5.1 Dielectric Strength:
S4.1.5 Condition des—Dessication condition, cooling over S5.1.1 The test shall be performed under oil at a frequency
silica gel or calcium chloride in a desiccator at 23°C for 16 to not exceeding 100 Hz at the temperature of the final condi-
20 h after temperature conditioning. tioning.
S4.2 Designation— Conditioning procedures shall be des- S5.1.2 Short-Time Test—The voltage shall be increased
ignated as follows: uniformly at the rate of 500 V/s.
S4.2.1 A capital letter indicating the general conditioning.
S4.2.2 A number indicating, in hours, the duration of S6. Toxicity Requirements
conditioning. S6.1 Thermoplastic molding compounds shall be tested for
S4.2.3 A number indicating, in °C, the conditioning tem- toxicity in accordance with NTIS AD297457. Specimens shall
perature. meet the requirements in Table S6.1, expressed as the maxi-
S4.2.4 A number indicating the relative humidity when it is mum level permissible.
controlled. TABLE S6.1 Toxicity When Heated
S4.3 Tolerances: Compounds Units GLCP-30F GLCP-50F
S4.3.1 Relative Humidity—Standard tolerance shall be Carbon dioxide ppm 15 000 15 000
Carbon monoxide ppm 1 000 1 000
610 %. Ammonia ppm 500 500
S4.3.2 Temperature—Standard tolerance shall be 62°C. Aldehydes as HCHO ppm 50 50
For water immersion the standard tolerance shall be 61°C. Cyanide as HCN ppm 50 50
NOTE S4.1—The numbers shall be separated from each other by slant (/) Oxides of nitrogen as NO2 ppm 100 100
Hydrogen chloride ppm 50 50
marks, and from the capital letter by a dash (-). A sequence of conditions

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. MELT VISCOSITY TESTING

X1.1 Determine melt viscosity using a capillary rheometer
in accordance with Test Method ISO 11443 or Test Method
D3835 at the following conditions:
X1.1.1 Drying—Minimum 11⁄2 h (maximum 72 h) at 150 6
10°C in a vacuum oven (minimum reduction of 0.05 MPa from
atmospheric pressure) under N2 bleed.
X1.1.2 Temperature—0-20°C above the nominal melt tran-
sition peak as determined in accordance with Test Method
ISO 11357-3 or Test Method D3418 differential scanning
calorimetry using second melting curve at 20°C/min.
X1.1.3 Capillary Die—1-mm diameter, 20:1 L/D, 180° full
entrance angle.
X1.1.4 Shear Rates—Report at 1000 s–1. Alternatively, run
at constant shear rate of 400 s−1 for 15 min. Interpolate and
report viscosities at 5 and 10-min residence time.
NOTE X1.1—The test method for flow rates of thermoplastic materials
by extrusion plastometer (Test Method D1238) is not recommended as a
test method for describing liquid crystal polymers because of the
morphological nature of the material. The LCPs maintain a crystalline
structure even at their processing temperatures. They are highly shear
sensitive, and are difficult to process under the low shear rate of the flow
rate test. Repeatability of flow rate value is poor. Melt viscosity by
capillary rheology at appropriate shear rate(s) should be used to describe
the flow properties of these materials.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5138 − 16

X2. MILITARY SPECIFICATION M-24519

X2.1 The following Specification D5138 call outs describe

the LCP materials referenced in Military Specification MIL-
M-24519 under the appropriate MIL SPEC callout:
Specification D5138 MIL-M-24519

LCP0120G30A43430 EA300ED035EE200EF140 GLCP-30F

LCP0120G50A44230 EA300ED042EE200EF180 GLCP-50F

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5138 - 11)
that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2016)

(1) Replaced ISO 3167 reference with ISO 20753. (3) Added Note 7 added.
(2) Replaced Specimen 1A with specimen A1 in Note 3. (4) Added title to Table 1 and footnotes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:15 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5155 − 19

Standard Test Methods for

Polyurethane Raw Materials: Determination of the
Isocyanate Content of Aromatic Isocyanates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5155; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical

1.1 These test methods are used to measure the isocyanate
content of aromatic isocyanates used as polyurethane raw
materials.
1.1.1 Test Method A—Unheated toluene-dibutylamine deter-
mines the toluene diisocyanate content, the amine equivalent
and the isocyanate content of refined toluene-2,4-diisocyanate
and toluene-2,6-diisocyanate, or mixtures of the two. Other
isomers, if present, will be included in the determination. This
test method is also applicable to other isocyanates of suitable
reactivity and solubility.
1.1.2 Test Method B—Heated toluene-dibutylamine deter-
mines the amine equivalent and the isocyanate content of crude
or modified isocyanates derived from toluene diisocyanate,
methylene di-(4-phenylisocyanate) and polymeric (methylene
phenylisocyanate).
1.1.3 Test Method C—Unheated trichlorobenzene-toluene-
dibutylamine determines the amine equivalent and the isocya-
nate content of crude or modified isocyanates derived from
toluene diisocyanate, methylene-di-(4-phenylisocyanate) and
polymeric (methylene phenylisocyanate).
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—Method C of this test method is equivalent to Method B of
ISO 14896.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
E180 Practice for Determining the Precision of ASTM
Methods for Analysis and Testing of Industrial and Spe-
cialty Chemicals (Withdrawn 2009)3
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
2.2 ISO Standard:
ISO 14896 Polyurethane Raw Materials-Determination of
Isocyanate Content
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Terms used in this standard are defined in
accordance with Terminology D883, unless otherwise speci-
fied. For terms relating to precision and bias and associated
issues, the terms used in this standard are defined in accordance
with Terminology E456.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 amine equivalent—the weight of sample that will
combine with 1.0-g equivalent weight of dibutylamine.
3.2.2 assay—the percent by weight of toluene diisocyanate
present in the sample.
3.2.3 isocyanate (NCO) content—the percent by weight of
NCO groups present in the sample.
4. Summary of Test Methods
4.1 In all three test methods, the isocyanate sample is
reacted with an excess amount of dibutylamine to form the

1 2
These test methods are under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and are the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.22 on Cellular contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Materials - Plastics and Elastomers. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally the ASTM website.
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D5155 - 14ɛ1. DOI: 3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D5155-19. www.astm.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5155 − 19
corresponding urea. The NCO content is determined from the
amount of dibutylamine consumed in the reaction. The test
methods differ in the reaction conditions, or solvents used, or
both.
4.1.1 Test Method A—The sample is added to an excess
amount of dibutylamine in toluene and allowed to stand at
room temperature for 15 min. The reaction mixture is diluted
with isopropyl alcohol, and the excess dibutylamine is back-
titrated with hydrochloric acid.
4.1.2 Test Method B—The sample is added to an excess
amount of dibutylamine in toluene and stirred for 20 min. The
resulting solution is then heated rapidly to 100°C, removed
from the heat, and allowed to stand for 30 min. The reaction
mixture is diluted with isopropyl alcohol, and the excess
dibutylamine is back-titrated with hydrochloric acid.
4.1.3 Test Method C—The sample is added to an excess
amount of dibutylamine in toluene and trichlorobenzene. The
resulting solution is allowed to stand until it has cooled to room
temperature. The reaction mixture is diluted with methanol and
back-titrated with hydrochloric acid.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 These test methods are to be used for research or for
quality control to characterize isocyanates used in polyurethane
products.
6. Interferences
6.1 Phosgene, the carbamyl chloride of the isocyanate,
hydrogen chloride, and any other acidic or basic compounds
will interfere. In refined isocyanates, these impurities are
usually present in such low amounts that they do not affect the
determination. While some crude or modified isocyanates
contain acidities of up to approximately 0.05 %, the NCO
content is not normally corrected.
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that
all reagents shall conform to the specifications of the Commit-
tee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society,
where such specifications are available.4 Other grades are
allowed, provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of
sufficiently high purity to permit its use without lessening the
accuracy of the determination.
7.2 Purity of Water—Unless otherwise indicated, references
to water shall be understood to mean reagent water as defined
by Types I through IV of Specification D1193.
8. Sampling
8.1 Since organic isocyanates react with atmospheric
moisture, take special precautions in sampling. Usual sampling
methods, even when conducted rapidly, can cause contamina-
4
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
tion of the sample with insoluble urea. Therefore, blanket the
sample with dry air or nitrogen at all times. (Warning—
Diisocyanates are eye, skin and respiratory irritants at concen-
trations above the occupational exposure limit (TLV or PEL).
Diisocyanates can cause skin and respiratory sensitization
(asthma) in some people. Once sensitized, further exposure to
diisocyanates should be eliminated. A combination of engi-
neering controls and personal protective equipment, including
respiratory, skin and eye protection, may be used to prevent
over-exposure to diisocyanates. Consult the product suppliers’
Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for more detailed information about
potential health effects and other specific safety and handling
instructions for the product.)
9. Test Conditions
9.1 Since isocyanates react with moisture, keep the labora-
tory humidity low, preferably below 50 % relative humidity.
TEST METHOD A—UNHEATED TOLUENE-
DIBUTYLAMINE
10. Apparatus
10.1 Any weighing device that weighs a liquid by difference
to the nearest 0.001 g.
10.2 Cooling Bath—Any container approximately 50 mm
deep filled with ice and water.
10.3 Pipet capable of reproducibly delivering 50 6 .05 mL.
10.4 Buret capable of dispensing 0.05 mL at a time.
11. Reagents
11.1 Bromocresol Green Indicator Solution—Using 1.5 mL
of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide, extract the bromocresol green from
0.100 g of bromocresol green indicator-grade powder, stirring
vigorously until the amount of insoluble residue remains
constant. Decant the aqueous portion into a 100-mL volumetric
flask and dilute to the mark with water.
11.2 Dibutylamine Solution (260 g/L)—Dilute 260 g of dry
dibutylamine to 1 L with dry toluene. Dry the solution with a
drying agent.5
11.3 Hydrochloric Acid (1 N)—Prepare 1 N HCl (hydro-
chloric acid) and standardize frequently enough to detect
changes of 0.001 N.
11.4 Isopropyl Alcohol.
11.5 Toluene, dry with a drying agent.5
12. Procedure
12.1 Run sample and blank determinations side by side.
Run the blank determination exactly as described in 12.2 –
12.4, but without adding the sample.
12.2 Add a magnetic stirring bar and 40 mL of dry toluene
to a 500-mL Erlenmeyer flask that has been rinsed successively
with water, alcohol, and high-purity acetone, dried at 100°C,
5
The 4A Molecular Sieve, or its equivalent, has been found suitable. The 4A
Molecular Sieve is available from VWR International,Inc., 1310 Goshen Parkway,
West Chester, PA 19380.
 D5155 − 19
and allowed to cool in a desiccator. Accurately add, by pipet or N = normality of the HCl, meq/mL,
buret,6 50 mL of dibutylamine solution and mix carefully. W = sample used, g,
12.3 While stirring the contents of the flask, slowly add 6.5 87.08 = equivalent weight of TDI, mg/meq,
to 7.0 g of the sample weighed to the nearest 0.001 g (Note 2). 1000 = conversion from g to mg, and
100 = conversion to percent.
Wash down the sides of the flask with 10 mL of dry toluene,
then stopper the flask loosely and allow it to stand at room
14. Precision and Bias8
temperature for 15 min.
14.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
NOTE 2—If spattering is anticipated, cool the flask and contents in the
this test method have not been successful due to the limited
cooling bath before adding the sample and continue to cool until the heat
of reaction is dissipated. Add 10 mL of dry toluene, stopper the flask number of laboratories participating in round-robin tests. Data
loosely, and allow the contents to come to room temperature. on precision and bias are not given for this reason. Anyone
12.4 Add 225 mL of isopropyl alcohol and 0.8 mL of wishing to participate in the development of precision and bias
bromocresol green indicator solution. Titrate with 1 N HCl data are to contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.22
solution in a 50 or 100-mL buret7 while stirring the flask (Section D20.22.01), ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West
contents with the magnetic stirring bar. Near the end point, Conshohocken, PA 19428.
slowly add the HCl dropwise. The end point is reached when 14.2 A limited round robin was conducted.
the blue color disappears and a yellow color appears that 14.2.1 It has been estimated that the maximum expected
persists for at least 15 s (Note 3). difference between two test results for the same material,
obtained by the same operator using the same equipment on the
NOTE 3—Alternatively, the end point is determined using a potentio-
metric titrator and electrodes. When using this apparatus, it occasionally is same day in the same laboratory due solely to the method is
necessary to transfer the solution to a 600-mL beaker prior to titration. 0.4 % TDI.
After transfer, rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with 25 mL of isopropyl alcohol 14.2.2 It has been estimated that the maximum expected
and add the rinse to the 600-mL beaker. To titrate, immerse the calomel difference between two test results for the same material,
and glass electrodes or a combination electrode of the pH meter
(standardized with pH 4.0 and pH 7.0 standard buffers) and titrate the
obtained by different operators using different equipment in
sample to the break that occurs at approximately pH 4.2 to 4.5 with 1.0 N different laboratories due solely to the method is 0.8 % TDI.
HCl while stirring the solution with a stirring bar. 14.3 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
13. Calculation mate the bias of this test method.
13.1 Calculate the assay as follows: 14.4 For information on equivalence, refer to Test Methods
E2935.
~ B 2 S !~ N !~ 87.08!~ 100!
%TDI 5 (1)
1000~ W ! TEST METHOD B—HEATED TOLUENE-
DIBUTYLAMINE
When constants are combined, this equation reduces to:
~ B 2 S !~ N !~ 8.708! 15. Apparatus
%TDI 5 (2)
~W! 15.1 Potentiometric Titrator, or pH meter.
13.2 Calculate the amine equivalent as follows:
15.2 Combination pH Electrode.
1000~ W !
Amine Equivalent 5 (3) 15.3 Any weighing device suitable for weighing a liquid
N~B 2 S!
sample by difference to the nearest 0.001 g.
13.3 Calculate the percent NCO as follows:
15.4 Magnetic Stirrer.
42.02~ B 2 S !~ N !~ 100!
%NCO 5 (4) 15.5 Thermometer, from − 10 to 100°C range.
1000~ W !
15.6 Pipet or buret capable of reproducibly delivering 25 6
When constants are combined, this equation reduces to: 0.025 mL.
4.202~ B 2 S !~ N !
%NCO 5 (5) 16. Reagents
~W!
where: 16.1 Dibutylamine Solution (260 g/L)—Dilute 260 g dry
B = HCl required for titration of the blank, mL, dibutylamine to 1 L with dry toluene.
S = HCl required for titration of the sample, mL, 16.2 Hydrochloric Acid (1 N)—Prepare 1 N hydrochloric
acid (HCl) and standardize frequently enough to detect changes
of 0.001 N.
6
Pipets and burets shall conform to National Institute of Standards and
Technology tolerances, as given in Peffer, E. L., and Mulligan, G. C., “Testing of
16.3 Isopropyl Alcohol, 99 % minimum purity.
Glass Volumetric Apparatus,” NIST Circular C434, 1941, available from the 16.4 Toluene, dry, dried with a drying agent.5
Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC
20025.
7
If an isocyanate monomer other than TDI is used, substitute the equivalent
8
weight of the material being analyzed. The calculated assay result will be percent by Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
weight of the monomer used. 1089.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

17. Procedure
17.1 Add 50 mL of dry toluene to a dry 600-mL beaker.
Pipet 256 mL of the dibutylamine solution into the beaker.
Swirl the beaker to mix the contents.
17.2 Transfer to the beaker 0.02 to 0.03 equivalents of the
sample weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. The amount of sample
needed is calculated from the following equation:
105
weight of sample ~ g ! 5
expected % NCO
Start the magnetic stirrer carefully and rinse the sides of the
beaker with an additional 10 mL of dry toluene. Cover the
beaker and continue mixing for an additional 20 min.
17.3 Place the beaker on a hot plate with the −10 to 100°C
thermometer in the sample. Heat the sample mixture rapidly
with stirring, so that the solution reaches a temperature of 95 to
100°C in 31⁄2 to 41⁄2 min. Do not overheat. Quickly remove the
beaker from the hot plate, cover it with a watchglass, and allow
it to stand for 30 min.
17.4 Cool the beaker and contents to room temperature and
add 225 mL of isopropyl alcohol.
17.5 Titrate potentiometrically with 1.0 N HCl to the break
that occurs at apparent pH approximately 4.2 to 4.5 (for manual
titration see Note 4, below).
17.6 Prepare and titrate a blank exactly as described in 17.1
– 17.5, but without adding the sample.
18. Calculation
18.1 Calculate the amine equivalent as follows:
1000~ W !
Amine Equivalent 5
N~B 2 S!
18.2 Calculate the percent NCO as follows:
42.02 ~ B 2 S ! ~ N ! ~ 100!
% NCO 5
1000~ W !
When constants are combined, this equation reduces to:
4.202 ~ B 2 S ! N
% NCO 5
~W!
B = HCl required for titration of blank, mL,
S = HCl required for titration of sample, mL,
N = normality of HCl, meq/mL,
W = sample used, g, and
4.202 = constant combining the equivalent weight of NCO
(42.02) mg/meq, conversion of g to 1000 mg, and
conversion to 100 %
19. Precision and Bias9
19.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
this test method have not been successful due to the limited
number of laboratories participating in round-robin tests. Data
9
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
1040. The precision estimates are based on an interlaboratory study performed in
1989 on one sample each of Lupranate M20S (BASF), PAPI 20 and Isonate 143L
(Dow), Mondur PF (Bayer), and Rubinate HF185 (Rubicon). Eleven industrial
laboratories participated in the test method evaluation.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5155 − 19
on precision and bias are not given for this reason. Anyone
wishing to participate in the development of precision and bias
data are to contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.22
(Section D20.22.01), ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor
Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
19.2 A limited round robin was conducted.
19.2.1 It has been estimated that the maximum expected
difference between two test results for the same material,
(6) obtained by the same operator using the same equipment on the
same day in the same laboratory due solely to the method is
0.80 amine equivalents (0.2 % at 30.0 % NCO).
19.2.2 It has been estimated that the maximum expected
difference between two test results for the same material,
obtained by different operators using different equipment in
different laboratories due solely to the method is 2.0 amine
equivalents (0.4 % at 30 % NCO).
19.3 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
mate the bias of this test method.
19.4 For more information on equivalence, refer to Test
Methods E2935.
TEST METHOD C—UNHEATED
TRICHLOROBENZENE-TOLUENE-DIBUTYLAMINE
20. Apparatus
20.1 Potentiometric Titrator, or pH meter (Note 4).
20.2 Calomel Reference Electrode and Indicator Electrode
or a Combination pH electrode.
20.3 Any weighing device suitable for weighing a liquid
(7) sample by difference to the nearest 0.001 g.
20.4 Magnetic Stirrer.
20.5 Pipet or buret capable of reproducibly delivering
(8)
20 6 0.02 mL.
NOTE 4—If a potentiometric titrator is not available; the titration is
performed using a conventional 50-mL buret and bromophenol blue
indicator (0.04 % aqueous bromophenol blue, sodium salt, reagent grade).
(9) Titrate the blank and the sample solutions to the first appearance of a
stable yellow color. (The solution will change from a blue color at the start
of the titration, to a bluish-green intermediate color, to a yellow color at
the end point. Recognition of the end point is a matter of experience, but
better defined color changes are obtained when the acid is titrated rapidly
into the solution until the first flash of yellow color is observed. This flash
of color normally appears within a few tenths of a millilitre of the end
point.)
21. Reagents
21.1 Dibutylamine.
21.2 Methanol.
21.3 Toluene, dry, dried with a drying agent.5
21.4 Trichlorobenzene-1,2,4 (TCB) —Dry over Type 4A
molecular sieves.
21.5 Dibutylamine Solution (2 N)—Dilute 260 g of dibu-
tylamine to 1 L with dry toluene and dry over Type 4A
molecular sieves.
4
 D5155 − 19
21.6 Methanolic Hydrochloric Acid (1 N)—Prepare 1 N conditions during operation also are to be reported, such as any
hydrochloric acid from methanol and concentrated HCl. Stan- heating required to effect solution before titration, or end point
dardize frequently enough to detect changes of 0.001 N (Note identified different from that described in 22.5.
5).
25. Precision and Bias9
NOTE 5—In order to have homogenous titrations, it is recommended
that methanolic HCl be used in this procedure. If desired, aqueous HCl is 25.1 Table 1 is based on a round robin involving nine
used. However, turbidity will be encountered in some titrations. It is laboratories and conducted in 1991 in accordance with Practice
recommended that 200 to 250 mL of methanol be added to the reacted E180. All labs used potentiometric titration for the generation
product to minimize the formation of two layers. Experience has shown
that if the mixtures are agitated vigorously, inhomogeneity is tolerated of the data used in this study. Except for MDI and TDI, all the
without adversely affecting the results. samples were prepared at one source, but the individual
specimens were prepared at the laboratories that tested them.
22. Procedure The MDI and TDI samples were freshly produced material at
22.1 Add 25 mL of TCB to a dry 250-mL wide-mouth the laboratory site. Each test result was the average of two
Erlenmeyer flask. Pipet 20 mL of the dibutylamine solution individual determinations. (Warning—The following explana-
into the flask. Swirl to mix the contents. tions of r and R (25.2.1 – 25.2.3) are intended only to present
a meaningful way of considering the approximate precision of
22.2 Transfer the approximate amount of sample required
this test method. The data in Table 1 are not to be rigorously
weighed to the nearest 0.001 g to the flask. The approximate
applied to the acceptance or rejection of material, as those data
amount of sample required is calculated from the following
are specific to the round robin and not necessarily representa-
equation:
tive of other lots, conditions, materials, or laboratories. Users
84 of this test method are to apply the principles outlined in
weight of sample, g 5 (10)
expected % NCO Practice E180 or E691 to generate data specific to their
22.3 Cover the flask and swirl the contents until the solution laboratory and materials or between specific laboratories. The
is homogeneous. The reaction mixture will warm to approxi- principles of 25.2.1 – 25.2.3 then would be valid for such data.)
mately 40°C. 25.2 Precision
22.4 Let the sample stand until the reaction mixture reaches 25.2.1 Repeatability, (r)—It has been determined that the
room temperature (20 to 25 min) and add 100 mL of methanol maximum expected difference between two test results for the
to the flask (see Note 4). same material, obtained by the same operator using the
equipment on the same day in the same laboratory due solely
22.5 Titrate potentiometrically with 1.0 N HCl to the break
to the method is r.
that occurs at apparent pH approximately 4.2 to 4.0.
25.2.2 Reproducibility, (R)—It has been estimated that the
22.6 Prepare and titrate a blank exactly as described in 22.1 maximum expected difference between two test results for the
– 22.5, but without adding the sample. same material, obtained by different operators using different
equipment in different laboratories due solely to the method is
23. Calculation R.
23.1 Calculate the amine equivalent as follows: 25.2.3 There are insufficient degrees of freedom to make a
1000~ W ! statistically acceptable determination for TDI. The data in
Amine Equivalent 5 (11) Table 1 are provided for information only. The precision for
N~B 2 S!
TDI isomers is expected to be similar to results obtained for
23.2 Calculate the percent NCO as follows: MDI.
42.02 ~ B 2 S ! ~ N ! ~ 100!
% NCO 5 (12) 25.3 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
1000 ~ W !
mate the bias of this test method.
When constants are combined, this equation reduces to:
4.202 ~ B 2 S ! N
% NCO 5 (13) TABLE 1 Round-Robin Percent NCO Data In Accordance with
~W!
PracticeE180A
where: Average Sr B SR C rD RE dfF
B = HCl required for titration of blank, mL, Lupranate M20S 31.30 0.082 0.206 0.230 0.577 9
Rubinate 1850 30.78 0.082 0.194 0.230 0.543 9
S = HCl required for titration of sample, mL, PAPI 20 29.57 0.080 0.172 0.224 0.482 8
N = normality of HCl, meq/mL, Isonate 143L 28.83 0.126 0.230 0.353 0.644 9
W = sample used, g, and Mondur PF 22.63 0.048 0.120 0.134 0.336 9
4.202 = constant combining the equivalent weight of NCO MDI 33.53 0.011 0.080 0.031 0.224 6
TDI (see 25.2.3) 48.18 0.078 0.126 0.218 0.353 2
(42.02) mg/meq, conversion of g to 1000 mg, and
A
Values in units of percent NCO.
conversion to 100 %. B
Sr = within-laboratory standard deviation of the replicates.
C
SR = between-laboratories standard deviation of the average.
24. Report D
r = within-laboratory repeatability limit = 2.8·Sr.
E
R = between-laboratories reproducibility limit = 2.8·SR.
24.1 The result is reported as the average of duplicates, F
df = degrees of freedom in the data.
expressed as percent NCO, to the nearest 0.01 %. Any unusual

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5155 − 19
25.4 For information on equivalence, refer to Test Methods
E2935.
26. Keywords
26.1 isocyanates; isocyanates aromatic; methylene-bis-(4-
phenylisocyanate); polymethylene polyphenylisocyanate;
polyurethane; raw materials; test method; titration; toluene
diisocyanate

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5155 –
14ɛ1) that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) Removed non-mandatory language and corrected grammar (3) Removed definitions and statements of equivalency from
throughout. Precision and Bias sections (14, 19, and 25).
(2) Added references to E456 and E2935

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:20 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5204 − 19

Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Polyamide-Imide (PAI) Molding and Extrusion Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5204; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* ization established in the Decision on Principles for the

1.1 This classification system covers polyamide-imide ma-
terials suitable for injection molding and extrusion.
1.2 The properties included in this classification system are
those required to identify the compositions covered. It is
possible that other requirements are necessary to identify
particular characteristics important to specialized applications.
The use of suffixes as shown in Section 5 is one way of
specifying these requirements.
1.3 This standard allows for the use of recycled materials
provided that specification requirements based upon this clas-
sification system are met.
1.4 This classification system and subsequent line call-out
(specification) is intended to be a means of calling out plastics
materials used in the fabrication of end items or parts. It is not
intended for the selection of materials. Material selection needs
to be made by those having expertise in the plastics field after
careful consideration of the design and the performance
required of the part, the environment to which it will be
exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the inherent
properties of the material other than those covered by this
classification, and the economics.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. (Reporting in inch-pound units is acceptable.)
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 11, of this classification system:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety,
health, and environmental practices and determine the appli-
cability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
1
This classification system is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
Materials.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2019. Published August 2019. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2017 as D5204 - 17. DOI:
10.1520/D5204-19.
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
at Commercial Power Frequencies
D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
Insulating Materials
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1525 Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of
Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D1708 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics by Use
of Microtensile Specimens
D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Plastics (Oxygen Index)
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
als
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5204 − 19
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System
2.2 Military and Federal Specifications and Standards:3
MIL-P-46179A Plastic Molding and Extrusion Materials,
Polyamide-Imide (PAI)
NOTE 2—MIL-P-46179A property requirements are the basis of Clas-
sification System D5204. The Department of Defense adopted Classifica-
tion System D5204 on July 27, 1994, and canceled MIL-P-46179A.
2.3 SAE Specifications:4
AMS 3670B Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod, and Shapes
Molded or Extruded
AMS 3670/1B Unfilled Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod and
Shapes
AMS 3670/2B Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod and Shapes 20-
Graphite-3-Polytetrafluoroethylene Filled
AMS 3670/3B Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod and Shapes 12-
Graphite-3-Polytetrafluoroethylene Filled
AMS 3670/4C Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod and Shapes 30
Glass Fiber
AMS 3670/5C Polyamide-Imide Bar, Rod and Shapes 30
Carbon Graphite Fiber
3. Terminology
3.1 The terminology used in this classification system is in
accordance with Terminology D883 and D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 polyamide-imide (PAI), n—a polymer that is com-
posed of linkages of all random, or all block, or all alternating,
or any combination thereof, amide and imide units in the
structural backbone.
4. Classification
4.1 The polyamide-imide materials are designated PAI, as
specified in Terminology D1600.
4.2 Polyamide-imide materials are classified into groups
that are subdivided into classes and grades as shown in Table
PAI.
4.2.1 An example of this classification system is as follows:
The designation PAI012L23 would indicate from Table PAI:
PAI = Polyamide-imide as found in Terminology D1600,
01 (Group) = Injection molding material,
2 (Class) = Wear resistance PAI, and
L23 (Grade) = Nominal 20 % graphite and 3 % PTFE with the require-
ments given in Table PAI.
4.2.2 To facilitate the incorporation of special materials not
covered in Table PAI, the “other” category (0) for group, class,
and grade is shown on the table with the basic properties to be
obtained from Table A.
3
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, http://
dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
4
Available from SAE International (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale,
PA 15096-0001, http://www.sae.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
4.3 Use Table A to specify physical property requirements
for other PAI materials. These properties are shown by a
six-character designation. The designation consists of the letter
A and the five digits comprising the cell numbers for the
property requirements in the order as they appear in Table A.
4.3.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include the
range of properties available in existing materials, not every
possible combination of the properties exists or can be ob-
tained.
4.3.2 A single letter is used to identify the grade and indicate
the major reinforcement or combinations, or both, along with
two digits that indicate the percentage of additive(s) by total
mass. The reinforcement and additive letter designations and
associated tolerance levels are shown in Table 1.
TABLE 1 Reinforcement-Filler Symbols and Tolerances
Category Material Tolerance
C Carbon or graphite fiber reinforced ±3 percentage points
G Glass fiber reinforced ±3 percentage points
L Lubricants ±3 percentage points
M Minerals ±3 percentage points
R Combinations of reinforcements or ±5 percentage points
fillers, or both
4.3.3 This part of the classification system uses the type and
percentage of additive to designate the modification of the
basic material. To facilitate this designation, the type and
percentage of additive is frequently shown on the supplier’s
technical data sheet. If necessary, additional requirements are
indicated by use of the suffix part of the system, as given in
Section 5.
4.3.4 Reinforced, filled, and lubricated versions of PAI
materials that are not in Table PAI are classified in accordance
with Tables PAI and A. Table PAI is used to specify the Group
or group and class of PAI and Table A is used to specify the
property requirements. An example of this classification sys-
tem for a polyamide-imide material containing 40 % glass is as
follows:
The designation PAI0130G40A61550
PAI0130 = polyamide-imide from Table PAI,
G40 = glass reinforced at 40 % nominal level,
A = Table A physical-property requirements,
6 = tensile strength, 172 MPa, min,
1 = elongation, 4 %, min,
5 = flexural strength, 269 MPa, min,
5 = flexural modulus, 11700 MPa, min, and
0 = unspecified property.
If no properties are specified, the designation would be PAI0130G40A00000.
5. Suffixes
5.1 When additional requirements are needed, based on
application, that are not covered by the basic requirements
(Table PAI) or cell-table requirements (Table A), they are
indicated through the use of suffixes.
5.2 Use the suffixes found in Classification System D4000
(Table 3) for additional requirements as appropriate. Additional
suffixes will be added to Classification System D4000 as test
methods and requirements are developed and requested.
5.2.1 An example of this classification system using a suffix
is as follows:
 D5204 − 19
The designation PAI013G30CBXXX
PAI013G30 = polyamide-imide material as described in Table PAI,
C = melting point / softening point from Classification System
D4000
B = Test Method D1525, Rate A (Vicat), and
XXX = three digit number indicating minimum value, °C.
5.3 Suffixes for electrical properties, if required, are found
in Table SE in the Supplementary Requirements section of this
standard.
6. General Requirements
6.1 Basic requirements from Table A, as they apply, are
always in effect unless these requirements are superseded by
specific suffix requirements, which always take precedence.
6.1.1 The material composition shall be uniform and shall
conform to the requirements specified herein.
7. Detail Requirements
7.1 Test specimens for the various materials shall conform
to the requirements prescribed in Table A and the suffix
requirements as they apply.
7.2 For the purpose of determining conformance, all speci-
fied limits in this specification (line callout) based on this
classification system, are absolute limits, as defined in Practice
E29.
7.2.1 With the absolute method, an observed value or a
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly
with the limiting value. Conformance or nonconformance with
a specification based on this classification system is based on
this comparison.
8. Sampling
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy re-
quirements of 12.2. A batch or lot of material is defined as
material produced in a single compound blend.
9. Test Specimen
9.1 Dry pellets before molding test specimens. Pellets dried
on trays at 149°C (300°F) in a desiccant air drier for a
minimum of 24 h have been found to be satisfactory for
injection molding.
9.2 Unless otherwise specified, prepare injection and extru-
sion resins test specimens by injection molding in accordance
with Practice D3641.
NOTE 3—Typical conditions for molding are melt temperature of 315 to
370°C (600 to 700°F) and mold temperature of 195 to 215°C (380 to
420°F), depending on the product. Because of the equipment requirements
and difficulty associated with molding PAI, the manufacturer normally
does all molding of parts.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10. Conditioning
10.1 Postcure all test specimens in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
10.2 Condition all test specimens for a minimum of 40 h at
23°C and 50 % relative humidity in accordance with 3.1.2 of
Practice D618 after postcuring and before testing.
11. Test Methods
11.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica-
tion system in accordance with the relevant methods as they
apply.
11.2 Specify methods for reinforcement and additive con-
centration.
12. Certification and Inspection
12.1 Inspection and certification of the material supplied
with reference to a specification based on this classification
system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
herein.
12.2 Lot acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made and shall consist of
the tests listed, as they apply, as follows: tensile strength at
break, tensile elongation at break, and specific gravity.
12.3 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the material under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure that the material is certifiable in accordance with 12.4
NOTE 4—If any failure occurs, it is acceptable to retest the material to
establish conformity.
12.4 Certification shall state that the material was manufac-
tured by a process in statistical control, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this classification system, and
that the average values meet the requirements of the specifi-
cation (line call-out).
12.5 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
requested. The report shall consist of the lot-acceptance inspec-
tion for the shipment. The results of the most recent periodic-
check inspection shall also be furnished when requested by the
purchaser.
13. Packaging and Package Marking
13.1 For packing, packaging, and package marking, the
provisions of Practice D3892 shall apply.
14. Keywords
14.1 extrusion material; line call-out; molding material;
polyamide-imide
 D5204 − 19
TABLE PAI Requirements for Polyamide-Imide Plastics
Tensile Strength,
Test Method Tensile Elongation,
D1708, Test Method Specific Gravity,
Group Description Class Description Grade Description MPa (psi), min D1708, %, min Test Method D792

01 Injection Molding 1 general purpose M00 0 % mineral 158 (23 000) 9 1.36 to 1.39
M03 3 % mineral 158 (23 000) 9 1.39 to 1.43
0 other
2 wear resistance L15 12 % graphite, 3 % PTFE 124 (18 000) 5 1.44 to 1.48
L23 20 % graphite, 3 % PTFE 124 (18 000) 5 1.48 to 1.53
L20 12 % graphite, 8 % PTFE 97 (14 000) 4 1.48 to 1.52
R30 30 % filled 69 (10 000) 4 1.52 to 1.59
R35 35 % filled 110 (16 000) 3 1.56 to 1.60
R45 45 % filled 96 (14 000) 3 1.53 to 1.58
0 other
3 high strength G30 30 % glass fiber 200 (29 000) 4 1.59 to 1.63
C30 30 % carbon fiber 163 (23 600) 4 1.46 to 1.50
0 other
02 Extrusion 1 general purpose M00 0 % mineral 158 (23 000) 9 1.36 to 1.39
M03 3 % mineral 158 (23 000) 9 1.39 to 1.43
0 other
2 wear resistance L15 12 % graphite, 3 % PTFE 124 (18 000) 5 1.44 to 1.48
L23 20 % graphite, 3 % PTFE 124 (18 000) 5 1.48 to 1.53
R30 30 % filled 69 (10 000) 4 1.52 to 1.59
R35 35 % filled 110 (16 000) 3 1.56 to 1.60
R45 45 % filled 96 (14 000) 3 1.53 to 1.58
0 other
3 high strength G30 30 % glass fiber 200 (29 000) 4 1.59 to 1.63
C30 30 % carbon fiber 163 (23 600) 4 1.46 to 1.50
0 other
00 Other 0 other 0 other

TABLE A Detailed Requirements for Special Polyamide-Imides

Designation
Order PropertyA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9B

1 Tensile strength,C unspecified 97 114 124 138 159 172 specify value
MPaD (psi), min (14 000) (16 500) (18 000) (20 000) (23 000) (25 000)
2 Elongation,C % , min unspecified 4 5 6 7 8 9 specify value
3 Flexural strength,E unspecified 152 165 193 228 269 290 specify value
MPaD (psi), min (22 000) (24 000) (28 000) (33 000) (39 000) (42 000)
4 Flexural modulus,E unspecified 3860 5030 5520 9660 11 700 15 900 specify value
MPaD (psi), min (560 000) (730 000) (800 000) (1 400 000) (1 700 000) (2 300 000)
5 Izod ImpactF , J/mG unspecified 37 53 64 80 101 117 specify value
(ft · lb ⁄in.), min (0.7) (1.0) (1.2) (1.5) (1.9) (2.2)
A
Physical property data were determined using injection molded and postcured specimens.
B
If a specific value is required it must be shown in the call-out.
C
See Test Method D1708, Speed B, using 3.175 ± 0.05 mm (0.125 in.) thick specimens.
D
MPa X 145 = psi.
E
See Test Method D790, Method 1, Procedure A.
F
See Test Method D256, Method A, using the center portion of a D638, Type I specimen.
G
J/m × 0.01873 = ft · lb ⁄in.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5204 − 19
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS

FOR SPECIAL END USES

The following supplementary requirements apply only when specified by the inquiry, contract or
order for agencies of the U.S. Government.

S1. Special End Uses S2. Physical Requirements

S1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase S2.1 Material properties, in addition to those in Tables PAI
order, the supplier is responsible for the performance of and A, are sometimes required for initial material qualifications
acceptance testing per 12.2 of this standard. Except as other- (such as those described in MIL-P-46179A) are given in Table
wise specified, the supplier is permitted to utilize its own S2.1.
facilities or any commercial laboratory acceptable to the
Government. The Government reserves the right to perform S2.2 Electrical requirements for initial material qualifica-
any of the testing or inspections set forth in the specification tions are given in Table SE.
requirements.
TABLE S2.1 Property Values for Initial Qualification Testing
Physical and ASTM Methods Type I Type II Type II Type II Type III Type III Type IV
Thermal Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 1 Class 2
Properties
Flexural Strength, D790 193 165 158 152 290 269 297
min. (Procedure A) (28 000) (24 000) (23 000) (22 000) (42 000) (39 000) (43 000)
MPa (psi)A
Flexural Modulus, D790 3860 5860 5520 5030 9660 11,700 15,900
min. (Procedure A) (560 000) (850 000) (800 000) (730 000) (1 400 000) (1 700 000) (2 300 000)
MPa (psi)
Compressive D695 165 145 124 103 199 248 203
Strength, min. (24 000) (21 000) (18 000) (15 000) (28 900) (36 000) (29 500)
MPa (psi)
Shear Strength, D732 103 89 62 63 110 124 97
min. (15 000) (12 900) (9000) (9200) (16 000) (18 000) (14 000)
MPa (psi)
Deflection Temp. D648 260 260 260 260 260 260 260
at 1820 kPa (264 (500) (500) (500) (500) (500) (500) (500)
psi),
°C (°F), min.
Coefficient of D696 27–36 22–29 22–29 23–31 12–22 9–17 9–27
Linear Thermal (15–20) (12–16) (12–16) (13–17) (7–12) (5–9) (5–15)
Expansion,
10—6 cm/cm/°C
(10—6 in./in./°F)
Thermal C177 0.21–0.28 0.50–0.58 ... ... 0.32–0.40 ... 0.43–0.57
Conductivity (1.5–2.0) (3.5–4.0) ... ... (2.25–2.75) ... (3.0–4.0)
W/m-K
(Btu-in./h-ft2 - °F)B
UL Rating D3801 V0 V0 V0 V0 V0 V0 V0
(UL94)
Smoke Density F814 9 ... ... ... 4 ... 5
Smoldering 220 ... ... ... 50 ... 90
(Dmax)C
Flaming (Dmax)
Oxygen Index, D2863 41 42 42 40 46 45 47
min.D
Water Absorption D570 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
wt. %, max.E
Glass Transition D3418 272 ± 2 272 ± 2 272 ± 2 272 ± 2 272 ± 2 272 ± 2 272 ± 2
Temp., Tg °C (°F), (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5) (522 ± 5)
min.F
A
MPa × 145 = psi
B
1 W/m = 6.933 Btu-in./h - ft2 - °F
C
Dmax = Maximum specific optical density; specimens are 3 in. × 3 in. by thickness supplied.
D
Type A, self-supporting samples, approximately 4.0 in. × 1⁄2 in. × 1⁄8 in. Test specimens sometimes glow after flaming combustion.
E
24 h immersion
F
Glass transition temperature shall be determined on dry, fully cured specimens.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5204 − 19
S3. Quality Assurance S3.3 Test Methods— Testing shall be in accordance with the
S3.1 Acceptance Criteria— Lot acceptance testing shall be methods specified in Table PAI and Table S2.1.
in accordance with 12.2 of this standard. S3.4 Conditioning— Test specimens shall be conditioned as
S3.2 Sample Size— The minimum number of test specimens described in Section 10.110.2.
to be tested shall conform to the requirements of the respective S3.5 Lot Certification— Lot certification shall be in accor-
test method or, if different, by agreement with the customer. dance with 12.4 of this standard.

TABLE SE Electrical Property Requirements

Property 1 2 3 4 5 6
Dielectric constant, max:A
1 kHz 4.6 6.6 8.0 7.5 4.8 4.7
1 MHz 4.3 5.9 7.3 6.6 4.6 5.1
Dissipation factor, max:A
1 kHz 0.033 0.046 0.074 0.046 0.028 0.050
1 MHz 0.039 0.053 0.079 0.089 0.064 0.055
Volume resistivity, min:B
Ω-cm 10 × 1015 5 × 1014 5 × 1014 5 × 1014 7.6 × 1015 2.5 × 1015
(Ω-in.) (4 × 1015) (2 × 1014) (2 × 1014) (2 × 1014) (3 × 1015) (1 × 1015)
Surface resistivity, min,B Ω 1 × 1016 1 × 1015 8 × 1015 2 × 1015 2 × 1015 2 × 1015
Dielectric strength, min:C
kV/mm 19.3 28.0 16.1
(V/mil) (490) (710) (410)
A
See Test Method D150.
B
See Test Method D257.
C
See Test Method D149.

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CROSS REFERENCE FROM MIL-P-46179A AND CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM D5204

X1.1 This classification system contains pertinent specifica- X1.3 Appropriate additional suffixes can be used as
tion items from MIL-P-46179A, for molding and extrusion required.
materials, polyamide-imide (PAI).
X1.2 The cross-reference designations are listed in Table
X1.1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

TABLE X1.1 Cross Reference Designations for MIL-P-46179A and Revisions of Classification System D5204
MIL-P-46179A
Type I
Type II Class 1
Type II Class 2
Type II Class 3
Type III Class 1
Type III Class 2
Type IV
An example of specifying Type III Class 1 material using property Table A in this standard and Table 3 in D4000 is as follows:
The designation PAI000G30A61643E15FB46 would indicate:
An example of specifying Type III Class 1 material using only Table PAI is as follows:
D5204 − 19
DOD D5204 – 99 D5204 – 01
D5204 Adoption Notice
Dated 27 July 1994
(Based on D5204 – 91)
PAI000R03A56316E11FB41 PAI011M03 or PAI021M03 PAI000R03A56316E11FB41 or
PAI011M03 or PAI021M03
PAI000L15A32232E12FB42 PAI012L15 or PAI022L15 PAI000L15A32232E12FB42 or
PAI012L15 or PAI022L15
PAI000L23A22133E13FB42 PAI012L23 PAI000L23A22133E13FB42 or
PAI012L23
PAI000L20A11122E14FB40 PAI0121L20 PAI000L20A11122E14FB40
PAI000G30A61643E15FB46 PAI013G30 or PAI023G30 PAI000G30A61643E15FB46 or
PAI013G30 or PAI023G30
PAI000G40A61553E16FB45 Not Manufactured Not Manufactured
PAI000C30A51661FB47 PAI013C30 PAI000C30A51661FB47 or
PAI013C30
Explanation of Call-Outs for Table X1.1
PAI000 = unspecified polyamide-imide material,
G30 = glass reinforced at 30 % nominal level,
A = Table A physical properties,
6 = tensile strength, min 172 MPa,
1 = elongation, min 4 %,
6 = flexural strength, min 290 MPa,
4 = flexural modulus, min 9660 MPa,
3 = Izod impact of 64 J/m,
E = Table SE electrical property requirements,
1 = electrical tests as specified in the footnotes of Table SE,
5 = electrical properties as given in column 5 of Table SE,
FB = Table 3 (suffix symbols and requirements) in D4000, and
46 = oxygen index, max 46 %
The designation PAI013G30 would indicate from Table PAI:
PAI = polyamide-imide as found in Terminology D1600,
01 (Group) = injection molding material,
3 (Class) = high strength PAI, and
G30 (Grade) = glass reinforced at the 30 % nominal level with the require-
ments given in Table PAI.

X2. CROSS REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS FROM THE SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS AMS 3670B AND CLASSI-
FICATION SYSTEM D5204

X2.1 This classification system contains pertinent specifica- X2.2 The cross reference designations are listed in Table
tion items from the SAE AMS 3670B. X2.1.

TABLE X2.1 Cross Reference Designations for SAE AMS 3670B

and Classification System D5204
AMS 3670B Designation ASTM D5204 CALL-OUT
3670/1B PAI011M03 or PAI021M03
3670/2B PAI012L23 or PAI022L23
3670/3B PAI012L15 or PAI022L15
3670/4C PAI013G30 or PAI023G30
3670/5C PAI013C30 or PAI023C30

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5204 − 19
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5204 - 17)
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2019)

(1) The specific gravity range for 012L23 and 022L23 materi-
als in Table PAI was changed from 1.48 – 1.52 to 1.48 – 1.53,
respectively.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:23 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5205 − 16

Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Polyetherimide (PEI) Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5205; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This classification system covers unfilled, filled, and
reinforced polyetherimide materials suitable for injection
molding and extrusion.
1.2 This classification system is not intended for the selec-
tion of materials, but only as a means to call out plastic
materials to be used for the manufacture of parts. The selection
of these materials is to be made by personnel with expertise in
the plastics field where the environment, inherent properties of
the materials, performance of the parts, part design, manufac-
turing process, and economics are considered.
1.3 The properties included in this classification system are
those required to identify the compositions covered. Other
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics
important to specialized applications are to be specified by
using suffixes as given in Section 5.
1.4 Polyetherimide materials, being thermoplastic, are re-
processable and recyclable. This classification system allows
for the use of those polyetherimide materials, provided that all
specific requirements of this classification system are met.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 12, of this classification system:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use. Specific precautionary statements are
given at the end of 5.4.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1
This classification system is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
Materials.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2016. Published September 2016. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5205 – 10. DOI:
10.1520/D5205-16.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D149 Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and
Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials
at Commercial Power Frequencies
D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
Insulating Materials
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
Plastics (Oxygen Index)
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
als
D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D5740 Guide for Writing Material Standards in the Classi-
fication Format
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With- Category Material Tolerance
drawn 2015)3 (Based on the Total Mass)
C Carbon and graphite fiber- ±2 percentage points
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to reinforced
Determine Conformance with Specifications G Glass-reinforced
E662 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke < 15 % glass content ±2 percentage points
> 15 % glass content ±3 percentage points
Generated by Solid Materials L Lubricants (such as PTFE, Depends upon material and
2.2 Military Standards:4 graphite, silicone, and process—to be specified
MIL-P-46184 Plastic Molding and Extrusion Materials, molybdenum disulfide)
M Mineral-reinforced ±2 percentage points
Polyetherimide (PEI). R Reinforced-combination/ ±3 percentage points based on
MIL-M-24519 Molding Plastics, Electrical, Thermoplastic mixtures of reinforcements or the total reinforcement
2.3 Underwriters Laboratories Standards:5 other fillers/reinforcements

UL 94 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts NOTE 3—If necessary, additional requirements are specified using
in Devices and Appliances suffixes as described in Section 5. Any special tolerances, when levels are
below 5 %, are to be specified. Ash content of filled or reinforced
3. Terminology materials are determined using Test Method D5630 where applicable.

3.1 Definitions—The terminology used in this classification
system is in accordance with Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3.2 Abbreviation—The polyetherimide materials will be
designated “PEI” as specified in Terminology D1600.
4. Classification
4.1 Unfilled polyetherimide materials are classified into
groups according to their composition. These groups are
subdivided into classes and grades as shown in Table PEI.
NOTE 2—An example of this classification system is given as follows.
The designation ASTM D5205 PEI 0114 indicates the following:
PEI = polyetherimide as found in Terminology D1600,
01 = polyetherimide (group),
1 = general purpose (class), and
4 = requirements given in Table PEI (grade).
4.1.1 To facilitate incorporation of future or special materi-
als the “other” category (0) for group, class, and grade is shown
in Table PEI. The basic properties of these materials can be
obtained from Tables A or B as they apply.
4.2 Reinforced, pigmented, filled, and lubricated versions of
polyetherimide materials are classified in accordance with
Tables PEI and A or B. Table PEI is used to specify the
unreinforced material and Table A or B is used to specify the
property requirements after the addition of reinforcements,
pigments, fillers, or lubricants at the nominal level indicated
(see 4.2.1).
4.2.1 A single letter shall be used to indicate the major
category of the reinforcement, along with two numbers that
indicate the percentage of additive(s) by mass, with the
tolerances as tabulated as follows:
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D,
Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, Bldg. 4 Section D, 700
Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094, Attn: NPODS.
5
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 2600 N.W. Lake Rd., Camas,
WA 98607-8542, http://www.ul.com.
4.2.2 Specific requirements for reinforced, filled, or lubri-
cated polyetherimide materials shall be shown by a six-
character designation. The designation will consist of the letter
“A” or “B” and the five digits comprising the cell numbers for
the property requirements in the order as they appear in Tables
A or B.
4.2.2.1 Although the values listed are necessary to include
the range of properties available in existing materials, this does
not imply that every possible combination of the properties
exists or can be obtained.
4.2.3 When the grade of the basic materials is not shown, or
is not important, the use of “O”-grade classification shall be
used for reinforced materials in this system.
NOTE 4—An example of this classification for a polyetherimide
material is given as follows. The designation ASTM D5205
PEI0110G10A48266 would indicate the following material requirements:
PEI 0110 = general-purpose polyetherimide from Table PEI,
G10 = glass reinforced at nominal 10 % level,
A = Table A property requirements,
4 = 110-MPa tensile strength, min,
8 = 13790-MPa flexural modulus, min,
2 = 4 g/10 min; melt flow, min,
6 = 205-MPa flexural strength, min, and
6 = 230°C deflection temperature, min.
If no properties are specified, the designation would be
ASTM D5205 PEI0110G10A00000.
5. Suffixes
5.1 When additional requirements are needed that are not
covered by the basic requirements or cell-table requirements,
they shall be indicated through the use of suffixes.
5.2 A list of suffixes can be found in Classification System
D4000 (Table 3) and are to be used for additional requirements
as appropriate. Additional suffixes will be added to that
standard as test methods and requirements are developed and
requested.
5.3 Electrical requirements are designated by a suffix which
uses the letter E followed by two digits. These digits refer to
use of Table 1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16
TABLE 1 Electrical Detail Requirements
NOTE 1—Resin samples should be dried 4 h at 160°C in an air-circulating oven before molding specimens to be used in these tests.
Property ConditionA Units A B C D E
Dielectric constant,B max 48/50 + D24 ⁄23
1 KHz, 50 % RH, 23°C ... 3.2 3.7 3.7 3.8 ...
1 MHz ... ... ... ... ... 3.5
Dissipation factor,B max 48/50 + D24 ⁄23
1 KHz, 50 % RH, 23°C ... 0.0015 0.0016 0.0017 0.0017 ...
2450 MH, 50 % RH, 23°C ... 0.003 ... ... ... ...
1 MH, 50 % RH, 23°C ... ... ... ... ... 0.007
Volume resistivity,C min 24/23/50 ohm-cm 1016 1016 1016 1016 ...
Dielectric strength,D min (1.6-mm thickness, in 48/ KV/mm 23.6 23.0 22.0 21.0 17.0
oil, S/T) 50 + 96 ⁄23 ⁄50 (V/mil)
Specific gravityE ... ... 1.27 1.34 1.42 1.51 ...
A
In accordance with Practice D618.
B
See Test Methods D150.
C
See Test Methods D257.
D
See Test Methods D149.
E
See Test Method D792 (tolerance ± 0.02).

First Digit First Digit

0 = specimen to be specified by user 0 = to be specified by user,
1 = specimens as appropriate for test methods as defined in Table 1 1 = product is tested according to UL94 at 3.05-mm minimum thickness,
Second Digit 2 = product is tested according to UL94 at 1.47-mm minimum thickness,
0 = to be specified by user 3 = product is tested according to UL94 at 0.71-mm minimum thickness,
1 = meets requirements of Table 1, Column A 4 = product is tested according to Test Method D2863,
2 = meets requirements of Table 1, Column B 5 = product is tested according to Test Method E662.
3 = meets requirements of Table 1, Column C Second Digit
4 = meets requirements of Table 1, Column D 0 = To be specified by user
5 = meets requirements of Table 1, Column E 1 = 94V-0 flammability class
2 = 94V-1 flammability class
5.4 Flammability requirements are designated by a suffix 3 = 94V-2 flammability class
that uses the letter F followed by two digits. (Warning—By 4 = 94-5V flammability class
5 = Oxygen index 44 % minimum
publication of this classification system and its use of flamma- 6 = Specific optical density, flaming mode, D4 # 2, D max # 50.
bility ratings, ASTM does not intend that their use in any way
6. General Requirements
reflects hazards presented under actual fire conditions.)
6.1 The plastic compositions shall be uniform and shall
conform to the requirements specified herein.

TABLE PEI Polyetherimide Materials Detail Requirements

NOTE 1—The values listed were developed for “natural colors.” Pigments or other additives, or both, can alter these properties.
DeflectionC FlexuralE
Flow-Rate,B Specific Temperature TensileD Strength, FlexuralE Modulus, Test
Test Method Gravity, Test (DTUL), min, Test Method Strength, Test
Group Description Class Description Grade DescriptionA Methods
D1238, Method Test Method D638, Methods D790, D790,
g/10, min D792 D648, MPa, min MPa, min MPa, min
°C, min

01 Polyetheri- 1 General- 1 <2 1.25–1.30 194 103 152 3030

Purpose
mide 2 2–8 1.25–1.30 194 103 152 3030
3 6–12 1.25–1.30 194 103 152 3030
4 10–16 1.25–1.30 194 103 152 3030
5 15–22 1.25–1.30 194 103 152 3030
6 20–30 1.25–1.30 192 90 138 2900
7 > 30 1.25–1.30 190 83 138 2900
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
2 Impact- 1 <2 1.22–1.28 180 83 117 2410
Modified
2 2–8 1.22–1.28 180 83 117 2410
3 6–12 1.22–1.28 180 83 117 2410
4 10–16 1.22–1.28 180 83 117 2410
5 15–22 1.22–1.28 180 83 117 2410
6 20–30 1.22–1.28 180 69 103 2280
7 > 30 1.22–1.28 180 69 103 2280
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
0 Other 0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16

DeflectionC FlexuralE
Flow-Rate,B Specific Temperature TensileD Strength, FlexuralE Modulus, Test
Group Description Class Description Grade DescriptionA Test Method Gravity, Test (DTUL), min, Test Method Strength, Test Methods
D1238, Method Test Method D638, Methods D790, D790,
g/10, min D792 D648, MPa, min MPa, min MPa, min
°C, min

02 PEI Chemical 1 General- 1 <2 1.25–1.30 198 93 128 2760

Purpose
Resistant 2 2–8 1.25–1.30 198 93 128 2760
3 6–12 1.25–1.30 198 93 128 2760
4 10–16 1.25–1.30 198 93 128 2760
5 15–22 1.25–1.30 198 93 128 2760
6 20–30 1.25–1.30 196 90 124 2760
7 > 30 1.25–1.30 196 90 124 2760
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
2 Impact- 1 <2 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
Modified
2 2–8 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
3 6–12 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
4 10–16 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
5 15–22 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
6 20–30 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
7 > 30 1.22–1.28 184 69 90 2070
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
3 High-Heat 1 <2 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
Resistant 2 2–8 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
3 6–12 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
4 10–16 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
5 15–22 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
6 20–30 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
7 > 30 1.27–1.32 215 97 145 2760
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
4 High-Heat 1 <2 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
Impact- 2 2–8 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
Modified
3 6–12 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
4 10–16 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
5 15–22 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
6 20–30 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
7 > 30 1.23–1.30 200 69 103 2070
0 Other 0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
03 PEI Heat- 1 General- 1 <2 1.27–1.31 210 103 145 2760
Purpose
Resistant 2 2–8 1.27–1.31 210 103 145 2760
3 6–12 1.27–1.31 210 103 145 2760
4 10–16 1.27–1.31 210 103 145 2760
5 15–22 1.27–1.31 210 103 145 2760
6 20–30 1.27–1.31 210 90 131 2760
7 > 30 1.27–1.31 210 90 131 2760
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
2 Impact- 1 <2 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
Modified
2 2–8 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
3 6–12 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
4 10–16 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
5 15–22 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
6 20–30 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
7 > 30 1.22–1.28 196 69 110 2070
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
3 High-Heat 1 <2 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
2 2–8 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
3 6–12 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
4 10–16 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
5 15–22 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
6 20–30 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
7 > 30 1.28–1.32 225 103 138 2760
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
4 High-Heat 1 <2 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
Impact- 2 2–8 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
Modified
3 6–12 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
4 10–16 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
5 15–22 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
6 20–30 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
7 > 30 1.24–1.28 210 69 97 2070
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
0 Other 0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16

DeflectionC FlexuralE
Flow-Rate,B Specific Temperature TensileD Strength, FlexuralE Modulus, Test
Group Description Class Description Grade DescriptionA Test Method Gravity, Test (DTUL), min, Test Method Strength, Test Methods
D1238, Method Test Method D638, Methods D790, D790,
g/10, min D792 D648, MPa, min MPa, min MPa, min
°C, min

04 PEI—Flexible 1 General- 1 <2 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690

Purpose
Resistant 2 2–8 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
3 6–12 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
4 10–16 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
5 15–22 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
6 20–30 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
7 > 30 1.16–1.20 N/AF 34 52 690
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
2 Semirigid 1 <2 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
2 2–8 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
3 6–12 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
4 10–16 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
5 15–22 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
6 20–30 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
7 > 30 1.16–1.20 N/AF 21 14 69
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
3 Nonrigid 1 <2 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
2 2–8 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
3 6–12 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
4 10–16 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
5 15–22 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
6 20–30 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
7 > 30 1.10–1.20 N/AF 7 7 <69
0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
0 Other 0 Other ... ... ... ... ... ...
A
No descriptions are listed unless needed to describe a special grade under the class. All other grades are listed by requirements.
B
Conditions—Method A, 6.7 kg, 2.0955-mm inside diameter orifice:
Group-Class Test Temperatures, °C
011, 012, 021, 022 337
023, 024, 031, 032, 033, 034 367
041, 042, 043 295
C
Specimens 6.4 mm tested at 1.82 MPa.
D
Type 1 bar, speed 5.1 mm/min.
E
Method I, Procedure A, speed = 2.5 mm ⁄min, span-to-depth ratio 16/1 (tangent modulus).
F
“N/A” indicates the particular data so designated is considered “Not Applicable” to the product being considered.

TABLE A Detail Requirements Filled or Reinforced PEI, or Both

NOTE 1—Resin samples should be dried 4 h at 160°C in an air-circulating oven before molding specimens to be used in these tests and before
determining melt-flow rate.
Designa-
Property/ASTM Test
tion Units 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Method
Order
1 Tensile strength, min, D638,A Type I MPa B
25 55 80 110 135 165 190 220 C

bar, 0.2 in./min

2 Flexural modulus, min, D790D MPa B
690 1720 3450 5170 6900 8620 10340 13790 C

3 Flow Rate, min, D1238E g/10 min B

1 4 7 10 13 16 20 24 C

4 Flexural strength, min, D790D MPa B

30 65 100 135 170 205 240 275 C

5 Deflection Temperature, min, D648F °C B

180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 C

A
Type I bar, speed = 5.1 mm/min.
B
Unspecified.
C
Specify value. If a specific value is required, it must appear on the drawing or contract, or both.
D
Method 1, Procedure A; speed = 2.55 mm ⁄min.
E
Conditions—Method A, 6.7 kg, 2.0955-mm inside diameter orifice:
Group-Class Test Temperatures, °C
011, 012, 021, 022 337
023, 024, 031, 032, 033, 034 367
041, 042, 043 295
F
6.4-mm thick specimen tested at 1.82 MPa.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16
TABLE B Detail Requirements Unreinforced/Unfilled PEI
NOTE 1—Resin samples should be dried 4 h at 160°C in an air-circulating oven before molding specimens to be used in these tests and before
determining melt-flow rate.
Designa-
Property/ASTM Test
tion Units 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Method
Order
1 Tensile strength, min, D638A MPa B
14 25 40 55 65 80 95 110 C

2 Flexural modulus, min, D790D MPa B

7 30 65 340 690 1380 2070 2760 C

3 Flow Rate, min, D1238E g/10 min B

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 C

4 Flexural strength, min, D790D MPa B

7 30 65 90 110 130 150 170 C

5 Deflecting Temperature, min, D648FG °C B

170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 C

A
Type I bar, speed = 5.1 mm ⁄min.
B
Unspecified.
C
Specify value. If a specific value is required, it must appear on the drawing or contract, or both.
D
Method 1, Procedure A; speed = 2.55 mm ⁄min.
E
Conditions—Method A, 6.7 kg, 2.0955-mm inside diameter orifice:
Group-Class Test Temperatures, °C
011, 012, 021, 022 337
023, 024, 031, 032, 033, 034 367
041, 042, 043 295
F
6.4-mm thick specimen tested at 1.82 MPa.

7. Detail Requirements 13. Inspection and Certification

7.1 The various materials shall conform to the requirements
prescribed in the tables and suffix requirements as they apply.
7.2 For the purpose of determining conformance, all speci-
fied limits for a specification (line callout) based on this
classification system are absolute limits, as defined in Practice
E29.
7.2.1 With the absolute method, an observed value or a
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly
with the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconfor-
mance is based on this comparison.
8. Sampling
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy re-
quirements of 13.4. A batch or lot is contrued as a unit of
manufacture as prepared for shipment and can consist of a
blend of two or more “production runs.”
9. Number of Tests
9.1 The number of tests shall be consistent with the require-
ments of 13.4.
10. Specimen Preparation
10.1 Unless otherwise specified, test specimens shall be
prepared by injection molding in accordance with Practice
D3641 employing the following conditions:
Minimum
Mold
Temperature,
°C
Unfilled and unreinforced 120
Filled or reinforced, or both 150
11. Conditioning
11.1 Condition test specimens at least 40 h at 23°C and
50 % relative humidity as defined in 3.1.2 of Practice D618.
13.1 Inspection and certification of the material supplied
with reference to a specification based on this classification
system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
herein.
13.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
shall consist of: flow rate.
13.3 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the material under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure the material is certifiable in accordance with 13.4.
13.4 Certification shall be that the material was manufac-
tured by a process in statistical control, sampled, tested, and
inspected in accordance with this classification system, and
that the average values meet the requirements of the specifi-
cation (line callout).
NOTE 5—The ASTM publication Manual on Presentation of Data and
Control Chart Analysis, 8th Edition,6, provides detailed information about
statistical process control.
13.5 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
requested. The report shall consist of results of the lot
acceptance inspection for the shipment and the results of the
most recent periodic check inspection.
Minimum
Stock
Temperature,
14. Packing, Packaging, and Package Marking
°C
360
14.1 Provisions of Practice D3892 apply for packing,
390 packaging, and marking of containers for plastic materials.
15. Keywords
15.1 classification; line-call-out; polyetherimide resins

12. Test Methods

12.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica- 6
Available from ASTM International Headquarters. Order Catalog Number:
tion system using the referenced test methods. MNL-8TH-EB.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5205 − 16

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CROSS REFERENCES

X1.1 The following cross references between government

specifications and Classification System D5205 are provided
for information purposes only.
TABLE X1.1 Cross References Designations for Classification System D5205 and Government Specifications
Government Specification Classification System D5205
MIL-P-46184
Type I (unfilled) PEI0113 E01 F05 F06
Type II Class 1 (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G10 A49203 E02 ZU 434OMPa
Class 2 (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G20 A99103 E03 ZU 5800MPa
Class 3 (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G30 A99103 E04 ZK 159MPa ZU 7600MPa
MIL-M-24519B
Type: GLT-10F (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G10 A00290 E05 EF085 ZN180
GLT-20F (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G20 A00190 E05 EF085 ZN195
GLT-30F (glass reinforced) PEI0110 G30 A00190 E05 EF085 ZN215

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5205 – 10) that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2016)

(1) Added statement allowing recycled material to Scope.
(2) In 2.1, added reference to D5740, Standard Guide for
Writing Material Standards in the Classification D4000 For-
mat.
(3) In 2.1, added reference to D7209, Guide for Waste
Reduction, Resource Recovery, and Use of Recycled Poly-
meric Materials and Products.
(4) Revised Note 3 for clarity of intent.
(5) Rewrote Section 5 to improve consistency with wording of
D5740, Standard Guide for Writing Material Standards in the
Classification D4000 Format.
(6) Corrected placement of footnote A in Table PEI and applied
footnote F to all appropriate cells.
(7) Eliminated footnote B as unnecessary on all tables.
(8) Rewrote footnote D on Tables A and B.
(9) Rewrote 8.1 and 8.2 to correct reference and to use wording
of D5740 in 8.1.
(10) In 11.1, eliminated tolerances in order to avoid possible
misinterpretation of the requirements.
(11) Revised 13.2 to use wording of D5740.
(12) Revised 13.4 to reflect current practice and added Note 8.
(13) Revised 13.5 to accommodate use of recycled material.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:27 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5206 − 19 An American National Standard

Standard Test Method for

Windload Resistance of Rigid Plastic Siding1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5206; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

1.1 This test method describes methods for testing and
evaluating windload resistance of rigid plastic siding when
fastened in accordance with Practice D4756, specific product
standard specifications, or in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
1.2 The proper use of this test method requires a knowledge
of the principles of pressure measurement.
1.3 This test method describes the apparatus and the proce-
dures to be used to determine an average maximum sustained
static test pressure, or ultimate test pressure values, or both,
with static pressure applied uniformly to a specimen.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this test method.
1.4 The values expressed in inch-pound units are to be
regarded as the standard. The SI equivalents in parentheses are
for information only.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
For specific precautionary statements, see Section 7.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Nov. 15, 2019. Published January 2020. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D5602 – 13. DOI:
10.1520/D5206-19.
2 3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
tics
D4756 Practice for Installation of Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chlo-
ride) (PVC) Siding and Soffit
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
2.2 ASCE Standard:3
ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures
2.3 International Code Council:4
International Building Code
International Residential Code
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 and E631 and abbreviations are in accordance with
Terminology D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 maximum sustained static test pressure—the greatest
difference in static air pressure (negative or positive) that a test
specimen withstands without failure, expressed as force per
square foot (or pascals).
3.2.2 nail hem thickness—the average thickness of the nail
hem as measured between the nail slots.
3.2.3 specimen—the entire assembled siding panel as de-
scribed in Section 8.
3.2.4 static test pressure—the specific difference in static air
pressure (positive or negative) for which the specimen is to be
tested expressed as force per square foot (or pascals).
3.2.5 ultimate test pressure—the difference in static air
pressure (positive or negative) at which failure occurs ex-
pressed as force per square foot (or pascals).
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This method can be used to determine either the
maximum sustained static test pressure or the ultimate
pressure, or both, for the siding specimen. The procedure
consists of sealing the test specimen with or against one face of
a test chamber, supplying air to or exhausting air from the
Available from American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1801 Alexander
Bell Dr., Reston, VA 20191, http://www.asce.org.
4
Available from International Code Council (ICC), 500 New Jersey Ave., NW,
6th Floor, Washington, DC 20001, http://www.iccsafe.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:30 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5206 − 19
chamber at a rate required to maintain a specific static air
pressure across the specimen for a specific time period.
Pressure is applied in increments and the sample observed for
failure at each stage, to determine the maximum sustained
static test pressure, the ultimate test pressure, or both.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is a standard procedure for determining
windload resistance of rigid plastic siding under specified
uniform static pressure difference. This typically is intended to
represent the effects of wind loads on exterior building sur-
faces. The actual loading on building surfaces is quite complex,
varying with wind direction, time, height above ground,
building shape, terrain, surrounding structures, and other fac-
tors.
5.2 Design wind pressure is derived for specific geographi-
cal locations from wind velocity maps prepared by various
agencies and found in references such as ASCE 7, the
International Residential Code, International Building Code or
other sources. For additional detailed information relating to
the use of this test method for evaluation of wind load
resistance, refer to Annex A1 of the standard specification
appropriate for the type of polymeric siding.
NOTE 2—In applying the results of this test method, note that the
performance of rigid PVC siding is a function of installation, and the
specimen may or may not truly represent the actual application. In service,
performance will also depend on the rigidity of supporting construction,
and on the resistance of other components to deterioration by various
causes, to thermal expansion and contraction, etc.
FIG. 1 Test Chamber
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:30 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6. Apparatus
6.1 The description of theapparatus is general in nature; any
equipment capable of performing the test procedure within the
allowable tolerances is permitted.
6.2 Major Components (See Fig. 1):
6.2.1 Test Chamber—A test chamber or box with an
opening, a removable mounting panel, or one open side in
which or against which the specimen is installed. Either the
positive test chamber configuration or the negative test cham-
ber configuration shall be used to perform this test. (See Fig.
1.) At least one static pressure tap shall be provided to measure
the chamber pressure and shall be so located that the reading is
unaffected by the velocity of the air supply to or from the
chamber or any other air movement. The air supply opening
into the chamber shall be arranged so that the air does not
impinge directly on the test specimen with any significant
velocity. A means of access into the chamber to facilitate
adjustments, observations, and measurements after the speci-
men has been installed is permitted.
NOTE 3—The test chamber or the specimen mounting frame, or both,
must not deflect under the test load in such a manner that the performance
of the specimen will be affected.
6.2.2 Air System—A controllable blower, a compressed air
supply, an exhaust system, or reversible controllable blower
designed to provide the required maximum air pressure differ-
ence across the specimen. The system shall provide an essen-
tially constant air pressure difference for the required test
period.
 D5206 − 19
6.2.3 Pressure Measuring Apparatus—A device to measure
the test pressure difference within a tolerance of 62 %.
7. Safety Precautions
7.1 Take proper precautions to protect the observers in the
event of any failure. At the pressures used in this test method,
considerable energy and hazard are involved. In cases of
failure, the hazard to personnel is less with a negative pressure
configuration, as the specimen will tend to blow into the test
chamber rather than out. Do not permit personnel in such
chambers during tests and lock out chambers during tests.
8. Test Specimens
8.1 Sampling—Siding samples for test specimens shall be
selected at random from production stock.
8.2 Prepare a test specimen frame to simulate construction
methods that will be expected in the field. The frame shall be
sized to accommodate a minimum of three stud spaces wide
and a minimum of four siding panels high. Measure the nail
hem thickness at a minimum of 5 locations along the nail hem
prior to mounting the panel.
8.2.1 Stud spacing shall have either 16 or 24-in. (406 or 609
mm) centers in accordance with the manufacturer’s fastening
instructions.
8.2.2 The overall height of the test specimen frame shall be
adjusted for siding panels of varying height to keep the
distance between the frame and the siding at the top and bottom
to a minimum and yet provide clearance between siding and
frame. (See Fig. 1.)
8.3 Apply 2-mil (0.0508 mm) maximum thickness plastic
film between the siding and the studs or sheathing and seal it
to the perimeter of the test frame. If sheathing is applied to the
exterior of the studs, 2-in. (50.8 mm) minimum diameter holes
centered horizontally and vertically between studs shall be cut
through the sheathing to allow pressure application to the
plastic film.
8.3.1 Film application must permit full pressure load trans-
fer to the siding test specimen and must not prevent movement
or failure of the specimen. Apply film loosely with extra folds
of material at each corner and at all offsets and recesses. When
load is applied, there shall be no fillet caused by tightness of
the plastic film.
8.4 Apply a starter strip and at least four siding panels to the
test specimen frame as specified in the section on application of
horizontal siding in Practice D4756 (9.1), the standard speci-
fication appropriate for the type of siding, or manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
8.5 In cases where siding is not designed or configured for
use as horizontal panels, the test structure shall be modified to
provide a test exposure similar to that described in the above
sections, with the siding installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Procedure
9.1 Position a test specimen frame vertically or horizontally
over the opening in the test chamber (box) so as to subject the
entire test specimen to the pressure load. The orientation of the
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:30 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
siding face will depend upon whether a positive or negative
chamber configuration is used. The test configuration shall
create a load on the siding in the direction that would tend to
pull the siding off the wall.
9.2 Install a filler panel in the test chamber of box opening
not covered by the specimen frame.
9.3 Seal all seams in the equipment and test chamber which
could permit pressure leakage during the test.
9.4 Failure of siding specimen has occurred when any of the
following criteria are present:
9.4.1 Siding nail tab is torn or disengaged from fastener.
9.4.2 Permanent buckling of siding.
9.4.3 Fastener withdrawal from frame.
9.4.4 Permanent disengagement of locks.
9.5 Procedure—This procedure determines the maximum
sustained static test pressure, the ultimate test pressure for
failure, or both, for the siding.
9.5.1 Check the specimen for proper adjustment and lock
out the chamber if human entry is possible.
9.5.2 Apply a preload of 5 lbf/ft2 (239.4 Pa) to the test
specimen and hold for 30 s. Release pressure difference across
the specimen, and allow a 1-min recovery period.
9.5.3 Apply a pressure difference across the specimen in
increments of 5 lbf/ft2 (239.4 Pa), holding for 30 s before
increasing the next 5 lbf/ft2 (239.4 Pa). Continue test until
failure occurs. Record the pressure at failure, which is the
ultimate pressure, as well as the mode of failure. Record the
highest pressure that was sustained for 30 s without failure,
which is the maximum sustained static test pressure.
9.5.4 Test two additional specimens for failure pressure
difference as detailed in 9.5.1 to 9.5.3. For each sample, record
the pressure at failure, which is the ultimate test pressure, and
the failure mode. Record the highest pressure that was sus-
tained for 30 s without failure, which is the maximum
sustained static test pressure.
9.5.5 Average the pressure at failure for each of the three
specimens and report this value as the average ultimate test
pressure of the siding product. Average the highest pressure
that was sustained for 30 s without failure for each of the three
specimens and report this value as the average maximum
sustained static test pressure.
9.5.6 For the test results to be considered valid, the ultimate
test pressure and the maximum sustained static test pressure for
each of the three specimens must fall within the following
required range:
(1) For average test pressure less than 33.33 lbf/ft2, the
result for each of the three specimens is not greater than 5 psf
above or below the average of the three specimens.
(2) For average test pressure greater than or equal to 33.33
lbf/ft2 (1596 Pa), the result for each of the three specimens is
not greater than 15 percent above or below the average of the
three pressures.
9.5.6.1 If the result for any of the three specimens falls
outside the required range, a test with a fourth specimen is to
be conducted. The average of all four tests is reported.
 D5206 − 19
10. Report
10.1 Report the following information:
10.1.1 Date of the test and the report.
10.1.2 Identification of the siding (manufacturer, trademark,
or code, lot number, source of supply, dimensions, model type,
material) and other related information.
10.1.3 Specific details of test parameters including siding
nominal and measured thickness, siding style, fasteners used,
number of siding spans used, stud spacing, nail slot edge
distance, average nail hem thickness, type and thickness of
sheathing material, and other pertinent information. If a double
nail hem is used, the thickness of both nail hem walls shall be
reported. Any deviation from the test procedure in Sections 8
and 9 shall be reported.
10.1.4 Detailed drawings of the test specimen, showing
dimensioned section profiles and any other pertinent details.
Any deviation from the drawings or any modifications made to
the specimen to obtain the reported values shall be noted on the
drawing and in the report.
10.1.5 Any deviation from the manufacturer’s installation
instructions or any modifications made to the test specimen to
obtain the reported values shall be noted on the installation
instructions and the test report.
10.1.6 A record of visual observations made during the
application of pressure and during the examination for failure
criteria.
10.1.7 A tabulation of test pressure difference applied to
each specimen, specimen orientation, duration of pressure
application, and failure mode for each test performed.
10.1.8 As appropriate, the ultimate test pressure, the aver-
age maximum sustained static test pressure, or both.
10.1.9 A statement that the tests were conducted in accor-
dance with this test method, or a full description of any
deviations from this test method.
10.1.10 Author of the report.
10.1.11 Testing agency which conducted the tests and re-
quester of tests, including addresses.
10.1.12 Ambient conditions including temperature, before
and during tests.
10.1.13 Signatures of persons responsible for supervision of
the tests and a list of official observers.
10.1.14 Append to the report any data not required herein,
but useful to a better understanding of the test results,
conclusions, or recommendations.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Precision—Due to the subjective nature of the tests
(pass/fail mode), the many variable styles of siding under test,
the variable installation practice depending on the manufactur-
er’s instructions, the variable sheathing or stud backing to
which the siding is installed, and the variable modes of failure,
the precision of this test method has not been measured.
11.2 Bias—It is not possible to measure bias in this test
method since there is no reference value.
12. Keywords
12.1 PVC siding; plastic siding; siding failure modes; test
methods; windload resistance

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:30 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5207 − 14

Standard Practice for

Confirmation of 20–mm (50–W) and 125–mm (500–W) Test
Flames for Small-Scale Burning Tests on Plastic Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5207; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D5025 Specification for Laboratory Burner Used for Small-

1.1 This practice covers the confirmation of test flames for
small-scale burning tests on plastic materials using the labora-
tory burner described in Specification D5025. Back pressures
and flow rates for methane, propane, and butane supply gases
are given for specific test flames. This practice describes a
procedure to confirm the heat evolution of the test flame.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.3 This standard is used to measure and describe the
response of materials, products, or assemblies to heat and
flame under controlled conditions, but does not by itself
incorporate all factors required for fire hazard or fire risk
assessment of the materials, products, or assemblies under
actual fire conditions.
NOTE 1—There is no similar ISO standard. This practice is equivalent
in technical content to, but not fully corresponding in presentation with,
the confirmatory procedures of IEC/TS 60695-11-3, Method A and IEC/
TS 60695-11-4, Method A.
1.4 Fire testing is inherently hazardous. Adequate safe-
guards for personnel and property shall be employed in
conducting these tests.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D3195 Practice for Rotameter Calibration
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.30 on Thermal Properties.
Current edition approved May 1, 2014. Published May 2014. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D5207 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/D5207-14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Scale Burning Tests on Plastic Materials
E176 Terminology of Fire Standards
E220 Test Method for Calibration of Thermocouples By
Comparison Techniques
E230 Specification and Temperature-Electromotive Force
(EMF) Tables for Standardized Thermocouples
E608 Specification for Mineral-Insulated, Metal-Sheathed
Base Metal Thermocouples
2.2 IEC Standards:3
IEC/TS 60695-11-3 Ed. 1: Fire Hazard Testing-Part 11: Test
Flames-Section 3: 500 W Flames: Apparatus and Confir-
mational Test Methods
IEC/TS 60695-11-4 Ed. 2: Fire Hazard Testing-Part 11: Test
Flames-Section 4: 50 W Flame: Apparatus and Confirma-
tional Test Methods
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions of Terms:
3.1.1 For definitions of terms related to plastics used in this
test method, refer to Terminology D883. For definitions of
terms related to fire used in this test method, refer to Termi-
nology E176.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 A test flame of specified height and color is obtained
with gas supplied at a suggested back pressure and flow rate. A
thermal sensor is then positioned over the flame, and the time
for the temperature of the sensor to increase from 100 to 700°C
is determined. The time is used to confirm the heat-evolution
profile of the test flame.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The flame height and color (indicative of air-to-gas
ratio) for a test flame have traditionally been specified in the
individual test method. The energy content of the flame has
also been addressed by reference to a specific supply gas. It has
been determined that the supply-gas back pressure and flow
rate can be varied without affecting the height and color of the
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:36 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5207 − 14
flame. However, the energy content of the flame is affected.
This practice provides the back pressure and flow rate of the
supply gas for a 20-mm (50–W) and a 125-mm (500–W) test
flame, and a procedure for confirming the heat-evolution
profile of the test flame.
5.2 Information is provided for test flames using methane,
propane, or butane. Using this information, these supply gases
can be used interchangeably with a standardized burner to
produce essentially the same test flame.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Test Chamber, enclosure or laboratory hood, free of
induced or forced draft, having an internal volume of at least
0.5 m3 for the 20–mm (50–W) flame or 0.75 m3 for the
125–mm (500–W) flame.
6.2 Laboratory Burner, constructed in accordance with
Specification D5025.
6.3 Manometer/Pressure Gauge, capable of measuring to
800 mm of water, with increments of 5 mm.
6.4 Flow Meter—A rotameter calibrated in accordance with
Practice D3195, with correlation curves appropriate for the gas,
or a mass flow meter with at least 2 % accuracy.
6.5 Thermal Sensor (Copper Slug and Thermocouple)—A
slug constructed of high conductivity (electrolytic) copper with
dimensions as shown in Fig. 1. A 1.76 6 0.01-g slug is used for
FIG. 1 Copper Slug for Thermal Sensor
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:36 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
the 20-mm (50–W) flame, and a 10.0 6 0.05-g slug is used for
the 125-mm (500–W) flame. A Type K thermocouple with a
0.5-mm diameter stainless steel sheath constructed in accor-
dance with Specification E608 shall be peened into the top of
the slug.
6.6 Temperature Indicator—A potentiometer or temperature
indicator for Type K thermocouples capable of reading to
800°C. Calibrate the combination thermal sensor and tempera-
ture indicator in accordance with the general procedures
outlined in Method E220. The initial calibration tolerance is
defined in Tables E230.
6.7 Ring Stand, with a clamp or equivalent device, adjust-
able for positioning of the thermal sensor.
6.8 Timer, stop watch or other suitable timing device
capable of timing to the nearest 0.1 s.
6.9 Gas Supply—A supply of methane, propane, or butane,
with suitable regulator and meter for uniform gas flow.
6.9.1 Methane, Technical grade, 98 % minimum purity,
having a heating value of 37 6 1 MJ ⁄m3 at 25°C. Natural gas
with a certified heating value of 37 6 1 MJ/m3 will likely
provide similar results.
6.9.2 Propane, Technical grade, 98 % minimum purity,
having a heating value of 94 6 2 MJ ⁄m3 at 25°C.
6.9.3 Butane, CP grade, 99 % minimum purity, having a
heating value of 120 6 3 MJ/m3 at 25°C.
 D5207 − 14
7. Confirmation Procedure
7.1 Locate the burner in a draft-free enclosure or hood.
Connect the burner to the gas supply, in line with a control
valve, flowmeter and manometer. See Fig. 2.
7.2 Connect the leads of the Type K thermocouple to the
temperature indicator. Clamp the thermocouple sheath above
the burner, along its central axis, so that the copper slug is
suspended 75 mm minimum from the clamp. See Fig. 3.
7.2.1 20-mm (50–W) Test Flame—Position the slug 10 6 1
mm from the top of the burner.
7.2.2 125-mm (500–W) Test Flame—Position the slug
55 6 1 mm from the top of the burner.
7.3 Move the burner away from the copper slug to ensure no
influence of the flame on the slug during the preliminary
adjustment of the test flame.
7.4 If the copper slug has not been used before, conduct a
preliminary run to condition the surface of the slug. Discard
this first result. The slug shall not be polished or cleaned for
subsequent use. The presence or absence of an oxide coating
affects the thermal response of the slug to the flame. It is
recommended that laboratories maintain a standard reference
slug and a working slug to compare their thermal response
working and verify that the oxide coating is not affecting the
working slug’s thermal response.
7.5 Start with the needle valve on the burner completely
open, and the air-inlet openings closed or reduced to the
smallest setting. Set the gas-flow rate and back pressure for the FIG. 3 Confirmatory Test Arrangement
type of flame and gas supply. Ignite the flame.
7.5.1 20-mm (50–W) Test Flame—Set the gas flow rate as TABLE 1 20-mm (50–W) Test Flame
shown in Table 1. Adjust the needle valve so that the back
Gas Type Methane
pressure is also as shown in Table 1. Adjust the barrel air
Flow rate mL/min 105 ± 5
supply so that a blue flame with no inner cone and an overall Back pressure mm water <10
height of 20 6 1 mm is produced, when viewed in subdued
light.
TABLE 2 125-mm (500–W) Test Flame
NOTE 2—If alternate fuel gases such as propane or butane are used,
ensure that a stable flame is obtained and the heat-evolution profile Gas Type Methane Propane Butane
complies with 7.10.1. It is possible the yellow tip will not disappear when Flow rate mL/min 965 ± 30 380 ± 15 300 ± 10
using propane or butane. Back mm water 125 ± 25 550 ± 100 600 ± 125
pressure
7.5.2 125-mm (500–W) Test Flame—Set the gas flow rate as
shown in Table 2. Adjust the needle valve so that the back
pressure is also as shown in Table 2. Adjust the barrel air
supply so that a flame having an inner blue cone of 40 6 2 mm 7.6 Extinguish the flame and reposition the copper slug, if
and an overall height of 125 6 10 mm is produced, when necessary.
viewed in subdued light. 7.7 Reignite the flame and allow the burner to operate for 5
min to stabilize the working temperature.
7.8 The initial temperature of the slug shall be less than
50°C.
7.9 Reposition the burner under the slug. Start the timer
when the temperature of the slug reaches 100 6 2°C. Stop the
timer when the temperature of the slug reaches 700 6 3°C.
Record this time. Remove the burner and allow the slug to cool
in air to less than 50°C between determinations.
NOTE 3—It is optional to use a small fan to reduce the time to cool the
slug.
NOTE 4—To avoid damage to the thermocouple, immediately remove or
FIG. 2 Burner Supply Arrangement extinguish the flame once the slug has reached 700°C.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:36 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5207 − 14
7.10 Report the individual determinations.
7.10.1 20-mm (50–W) Test Flame—The time for the tem-
perature to rise from 100 6 2 to 700 6 3°C shall be 44 6 2 s.
7.10.2 125-mm (500–W) Test Flame—The time for the
temperature to rise from 100 6 2 to 700 6 3°C shall be 54 6 2
s.
7.11 If the temperature-rise time falls outside the specified
range, adjust the gas-flow rate and repeat the calibration
procedure from 7.5. If the temperature-rise time is within the
specified range, repeat the heating procedure (see 7.7) two
additional times to confirm the heat-evolution profile of the test
flame.
7.12 An example of a typical temperature response is shown
in Fig. 4.

8. Keywords
8.1 confirmation; flammability; laboratory burner; small-
FIG. 4 Typical Temperature Response
scale burning tests; test flames

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5207 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2014)

(1) Added standard edition number to IEC/TS60695-11-3 (4) Added the replacement criteria for copper slug to minimize
(2.2). variation in results (7.4).
(2) Revised 3.1.
(3) Revised the term “heat flux” to “heat evolution” (5.1) to
align with 1.1, 4.1, and 7.11.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:36 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5208 − 14

Standard Practice for

Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Exposure of Photodegradable
Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5208; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* G141 Guide for Addressing Variability in Exposure Testing

1.1 This practice covers the specific procedures applicable
for fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) exposure of photodegradable
plastics conducted in accordance with Practices G151 and
G154. This practice also covers the preparation of test speci-
mens and the evaluation of test results.
1.2 Practice D4329 covers fluorescent UV exposures of
plastics intended for long term use in outdoor applications.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety problems, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D3826 Practice for Determining Degradation End Point in
Degradable Polyethylene and Polypropylene Using a Ten-
sile Test
D4329 Practice for Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp Ap-
paratus Exposure of Plastics
D5870 Practice for Calculating Property Retention Index of
Plastics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
G113 Terminology Relating to Natural and Artificial Weath-
ering Tests of Nonmetallic Materials
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.96 on Environmentally Degradable
Plastics and Biobased Products.
Current edition approved April 1, 2014. Published April 2014. Originally
approved in 1991. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D5208 - 09. DOI:
10.1520/D5208-14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
of Nonmetallic Materials
G147 Practice for Conditioning and Handling of Nonmetal-
lic Materials for Natural and Artificial Weathering Tests
G151 Practice for Exposing Nonmetallic Materials in Accel-
erated Test Devices that Use Laboratory Light Sources
G154 Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV)
Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials
G169 Guide for Application of Basic Statistical Methods to
Weathering Tests
3. Terminology
3.1 The definitions given in Terminology G113 are appli-
cable to this practice.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Materials made from photodegradable plastics are in-
tended to show relatively rapid deterioration of chemical,
physical, and mechanical properties when exposed to light,
heat, and water after fulfilling their intended purpose. This
practice is intended to induce property changes associated with
conditions that might be experienced when the material is
discarded as litter, including the effects of sunlight, moisture,
and heat. The exposure used in this practice is not intended to
simulate the deterioration caused by localized weather phe-
nomena such as atmospheric pollution, biological attack, and
salt water exposure.
4.2 Cautions—Variation in results can be expected when
operating conditions are varied within the accepted limits of
this practice. Therefore, no reference to the use of this practice
shall be made unless accompanied by a report prepared in
accordance with Section 9 that describes the specific operating
conditions used. Refer to Practice G151 for detailed informa-
tion on the caveats applicable to use of results obtained in
accordance with this practice.
NOTE 2—Additional information on sources of variability and on
strategies for addressing variability in the design, execution and data
analysis of laboratory accelerated exposure tests is found in Guide G141.
4.3 Exposure of a similar material of known performance (a
control) at the same time as the test specimens provides a
standard for comparative purposes. Use of a control to rank the
stability of test materials greatly improves agreement between

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:42 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5208 − 14
different laboratories.3,4 It is recommended that at least three
replicates of each material evaluated be exposed to allow for
statistical evaluation of results.
4.4 Test results will depend upon the care that is taken to
operate the equipment in accordance with Practice G154.
Significant factors include regulation of line voltage, tempera-
ture of the room in which the device operates, temperature
control, and condition and age of the lamps, if exposure is
conducted in a device without irradiance control.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Use of fluorescent UV apparatus that conform to the
requirements defined in Practices G151 and G154 is required to
conform to this practice.
5.2 The spectral power distribution of the fluorescent UV
lamp shall conform to the requirements in Practice G154 for a
UVA 340 lamp.
5.3 Test Chamber Location:
5.3.1 Locate the apparatus in an area maintained between 18
and 27°C (65 and 80°F). Control of ambient temperature is
particularly critical when one apparatus is stacked above
another, because the heat generated from the lower unit can
interfere with the operation of the units above.
5.3.2 Place the apparatus at least 300 mm from walls or
other apparatus. Do not place the apparatus near a heat source
such as an oven.
5.3.3 Ventilate the room in which the apparatus is located to
remove heat and moisture.
6. Test Specimens
6.1 The size and shape of specimens to be exposed will be
determined by the specifications of the particular test method
used to evaluate the effects of the exposure on the specimens;
the test method shall be determined by the parties concerned.
Where practical, it is recommended that specimens be sized to
fit specimen holders and racks supplied with the exposure
apparatus. Unless supplied with a specific backing as an
integral part of the test, specimens shall be mounted so that
only the minimum specimen area required for support by the
holder shall be covered. This unexposed surface must not be
used as part of the test area.
6.2 For specimens of insulating materials, such as foams,
maximum specimen thickness is 20 mm in order to allow for
adequate heat transfer for condensation.
6.3 To provide rigidity, attach flexible specimens to a
backing panel made of aluminum, 0.635 mm (0.025 mm) thick.
Suggested aluminum alloys are 5052, 6061, or 3003.
6.4 Seal any holes in specimens larger than two mm and any
openings larger than one mm around irregularly shaped speci-
3
Fischer, R., “Results of Round Robin Studies of Light- and Water-Exposure
Standard Practices,” Accelerated and Outdoor Durability Testing of Organic
Materials, ASTM STP 1202, Warren D. Ketola and Douglas Grossman, Eds.,
American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, 1993.
4
Ketola, W., and Fischer, R., “Characterization and Use of Reference Materials
in Accelerated Durability Tests,” VAMAS Technical Report No. 30. Available from
NIST, Gaithersburg, MD.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:42 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
mens to prevent loss of water vapor. Attach porous specimens
to a solid backing such as aluminum that can act as a vapor
barrier.
6.5 Unless otherwise specified, expose at least three repli-
cate specimens of each test and control material.
6.6 Follow the procedures described in Practice G147 for
identification and conditioning and handling of specimens of
test, control, and reference materials prior to, during, and after
exposure.
6.7 Do not mask the face of a specimen for the purpose of
showing on one panel the effects of various exposure times.
Misleading results can be obtained by this method, since the
masked portion of the specimen is still exposed to temperature
and humidity cycles that, in many cases, will affect results.
6.8 Since the thickness of a specimen can markedly affect
the results, thickness of test and control specimens shall be
within 610 % of the nominal dimensions.
NOTE 3—This is especially important when mechanical properties are
being investigated.
6.9 Retain a supply of unexposed file specimens of all
materials tested.
6.10 Specimens shall not be removed from the exposure
apparatus for more than 24 h and then returned for additional
tests, since this will not produce the same results on all
materials as tests run without this type of interruption. Report
any elapsed time as noted under Section 9.
NOTE 4—Since the stability of the file specimen can also be time-
dependent, users are cautioned that over prolonged exposure periods, or
where small differences in the order of acceptable limits are anticipated,
comparison of exposed specimens with the file specimen are not neces-
sarily valid. Instrumental measurements are recommended whenever
possible.
7. Procedure
7.1 When the test and control specimens do not completely
fill the specimen racks, fill all empty spaces with blank panels
to maintain the test conditions within the chamber.
7.2 Unless otherwise specified, control irradiance at 0.89
W/(m2 · nm) at 340 nm.
NOTE 5—In devices without irradiance control operated at 50 6 3°C
uninsulated black panel temperature the typical irradiance at 340 nm is
0.89 W/(m2 · nm). (See Note 1 of Table X2.1 in Practice G154 for a full
explanation of the current default irradiance.)
7.2.1 During equilibrium operation, the allowed deviation
from the 340 nm set point is 60.02 W/(m2 • nm). If the
indicated irradiance is outside the tolerance, stop the test and
correct the problem before continuing.
7.3 Unless otherwise specified, program the device to one of
the following test cycles.
7.3.1 Cycle A—20 h UV (light only) with uninsulated black
panel temperature controlled at 50°C.
4 h Dark/condensation with uninsulated black
panel temperature controlled at 40°C.
Repeat this 24-hour cycle continuously until the desired total
exposure is reached.
 D5208 − 14
FIG. 1 Sample Rotation
7.3.2 Cycle B—4 h UV (light only) with uninsulated black
panel temperature controlled at 50°C.
4 h Dark/condensation with uninsulated black
panel temperature controlled at 40°C.
Repeat this 8-hour cycle continuously until the desired total
exposure is reached.
7.3.3 Cycle C—continuous UV with uninsulated black panel
temperature controlled at 50°C. Operate continuously until the
desired total exposure is reached.
7.3.4 During equilibrium operation, the maximum allow-
able deviation from the uninsulated black panel temperature set
point is 63°C. If the indicated temperature of the uninsulated
black panel is outside these limits, stop the test and correct the
problem before continuing.
NOTE 6—The set points and tolerances for 7.2 and Cycles A, B, and C
represent an operational control point for equilibrium conditions at a
single location in the cabinet, which does not necessarily represent the
uniformity of those conditions throughout the cabinet. ASTM Committee
G03 is working to refine these tolerances and address the uniformity issue.
7.3.5 Use Cycle C for materials that will be used for toxicity
testing after exposure. This is essential because cycles that use
condensation can wash away by-products of photochemical
degradation.
7.4 Unless otherwise specified, reposition specimens as
follows in order to minimize any effects from temperature or
UV light variation. Figure 1 shows a diagram of the specimen
repositioning.
7.4.1 Reposition the specimens horizontally at least every
third day by (1) moving the two extreme right hand holders to
the far left of the exposure area, and (2) sliding the remaining
holders to the right.
7.4.2 Reposition the specimens vertically so that each speci-
men spends the same amount of exposure time in each vertical
position within the specimen holder. For instance, if two
specimens are stacked vertically in each holder, then the top
and bottom specimens shall switch places halfway through the
test. If four specimens are stacked vertically, then reposition
the specimens vertically three times during the test.
7.5 Identification of any control specimen used shall accom-
pany the report.
8. Periods of Exposure and Evaluation of Test Results
8.1 If a standard or specification for general use requires a
definite property level after a specific time or radiant exposure
in an exposure test conducted in accordance with this practice,
base the specified property level on results from round-robin
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:42 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
experiments run to determine the test reproducibility from the
exposure and property measurement procedures. Conduct these
round-robins in accordance with Practice E691 and include a
statistically representative sample of all laboratories or orga-
nizations who would normally conduct the exposure and
property measurement. The precision and bias section contains
results from such a round-robin.
8.1.1 If a standard or specification for use between two or
three parties requires a definite property level after a specific
time or radiant exposure in an exposure test conducted in
accordance with this practice, base the specified property level
on two independent experiments run in each laboratory to
determine the reproducibility for the exposure and property
measurement process. The reproducibility of the exposure/
property measurement process is then used to determine the
minimum level of property after the exposure that is mutually
agreeable to all parties.
8.2 When reproducibility in results from an exposure test
conducted in accordance with this practice have not been
established through round-robin testing, specify performance
requirements for materials in terms of comparison (ranked) to
a control material. The control specimens shall be exposed
simultaneously with the test specimen(s) in the same device.
All concerned parties must agree on the specific control
material used.
8.2.1 Conduct analysis of variance to determine whether
any differences between test materials and control materials are
statistically significant. Expose replicates of the test specimen
and the control specimen so that statistically significant per-
formance differences can be determined.
NOTE 7—Fischer illustrates use of rank comparison between test and
control materials in specifications.5
NOTE 8—Guide G169 includes examples showing use of analysis of
variance to compare materials.
8.3 In most cases, periodic evaluation of test and control
materials is necessary to determine the variation in magnitude
and direction of property change as a function of exposure time
or radiant exposure.
8.4 The time or radiant exposure necessary to produce a
defined change in a material property can be used to evaluate
or rank the stability of materials. This method is preferred over
evaluating materials after an arbitrary exposure time or radiant
exposure.
8.4.1 Exposure to an arbitrary time or radiant exposure can
be used for the purpose of a specific test if agreed upon by the
parties concerned. When a single exposure period is used,
select a time or radiant exposure that will produce the largest
performance differences between the test materials or between
the test material and the control material.
8.5 Evaluate or rate changes in exposed test specimens in
accordance with applicable ASTM test methods.
5
Fischer, R., Ketola, W., “Impact of Research on Development of ASTM
Durability Testing Standards,” Durability Testing of Non-Metallic Materials, ASTM
STP 1294, Robert Herling, Editor, American Society for Testing and Materials,
Philadelphia, 1995.
 D5208 − 14
TABLE 1 Results from Round-Robin Test
Tensile Elongation Determined in Accordance with Practice D3826
Material Average Repeatability Reproducibility Repeatability Reproducibility
Tested Standard Standard Limit, r Limit, R
Deviation, sf Deviation, sR
ECOA , unexposed 187.0 67.7 185.5 189.6 519.5
ECO, exposed 240 hB 1.7 0.8 1.1 2.3 3.0
white LLC , exposed 24 hB 364.7 64.5 110.0 180.6 308.1
white LL, exposed 240 hB 4.0 2.1 4.6 5.8 12.8
clear LL, exposed 24 hB 531.3 110.2 110.2 308.5 308.5
clear LL, exposed 240 hB 75.1 26.7 152.7 74.8 427.5
A
ECO material is ethylene/carbon monoxide copolymer which is known to degrade under UV exposure.
B
The exposure used for this round-robin was Cycle A of this standard.
C
LLDPE and white LLDPE are blown film low density polyethylene with an additive to promote degradation by solar radiation. Clear LLDPE was natural in color, while
white LLDPE had some TiO2 added to provide the white color.

8.5.1 When testing degradable polyethylene and
polypropylene, conduct tensile tests in accordance with Prac-
tice D3826 to determine the degradation end point.
8.5.2 In accordance with EPA regulation 40 CFR Part 238,
a polyethylene or polypropylene material cannot be considered
as photodegradable when tested in accordance with this prac-
tice if an exposure of longer than 250 light hours using Cycle
A is needed to produce degradation end point determined in
accordance with Practice D3826.
NOTE 9—For some materials, changes can continue after the specimen
has been removed from the exposure apparatus. Make measurements
(visual or instrumental) within a standardized time period or as agreed
upon between interested parties. The standardized time period needs to
consider conditioning prior to testing.
9. Report
9.1 Report the following information:
9.1.1 Type and model of exposure device.
9.1.2 If exposure is conducted in a device without irradiance
control, record the age of fluorescent lamps used at the start of
the exposure, and note whether any lamps were exchanged
during the period of exposure.
9.1.3 If required, report irradiance measured at a single
wavelength in W/(m2 · nm) and radiant energy measured at a
single wavelength in J/(m2 · nm). For measurements made over
a broad band, such as 300–400 nm, report irradiance in W/m2
and radiant exposure in J/m2, specifying the spectral region
measured.
9.1.3.1 Do not report spectral irradiance or radiant exposure
unless direct measurement of spectral irradiance was made
during the exposure.
9.1.4 Elapsed exposure time,
9.1.5 Light and dark-moisture-condensation periods,
9.1.6 Operating uninsulated black panel temperature,
9.1.7 Specimen repositioning procedure, if different from
the procedure described in 7.3, and
9.1.8 Type of property tests and results. Calculate retention
of characteristic property in accordance with Practice D5870
when it is reported.
10. Precision and Bias6
10.1 Precision:
10.1.1 The repeatability and reproducibility of results ob-
tained in exposures conducted in accordance with this practice
will vary with the materials being tested, the material property
being measured, and the specific test conditions and cycles that
are used. It is essential to determine reproducibility of the
exposure/property measurement process when using the results
from exposures conducted in accordance with this practice in
product specifications.
10.1.2 A round-robin conducted and analyzed in accordance
with Practice E691 for exposures of three degradable poly-
olefin polymers produced the repeatability and reproducibility
results for tensile elongation shown in Table 1.
NOTE 10—For this round-robin, six laboratories exposed three different
materials supplied by two laboratories. Each participating laboratory
exposed five replicate specimens. After exposure, the specimens were
returned to the originating laboratory for tensile testing.
10.2 Bias:
10.2.1 Bias cannot be determined because no acceptable
standard weathering reference materials are available.
11. Keywords
11.1 degradation; exposure; fluorescent UV; light exposure;
ultraviolet
6
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR: RR:D20-1205.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:42 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5208 − 14
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5208 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2014)

(1) Added “if exposure is conducted in a device without (5) Removed old 9.1.7 since it references humidity.
irradiance control” at the end of 4.4. (6) Removed reference to G53 from 2.1.
(2) Removed “6 0.02” from 7.2 as redundant to 7.2.1, and (7) Removed requirement to measure temperature within 6 in.
could be misinterpreted to mean can be set between 0.87 and of device in 5.3.1.
0.91. (8) Grammar corrected in 4.4.
(3) Minor revision to 9.1.2 for clarity. (9) Removed non-mandatory language.
(4) Removed humidity in 9.1.5 as it is not controlled in a
fluorescent UV device.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:42 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5224 − 12 (Reapproved 2019)

Standard Practice for

Compression Molding Test Specimens of Thermosetting
Molding Compounds1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5224; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2.2 ISO Standard:

1.1 This practice covers the general principles to be fol-
lowed when compression molding test specimens of thermo-
setting molding compounds, such as phenolics, aminoplastics,
melamine phenolics, epoxies, and unsaturated polyesters.
1.2 Molding conditions are given for amino, phenolic, and
allyl molding compounds. The exact molding conditions will
vary from material to material, and, if not incorporated in the
material specification, shall be agreed upon between the
purchaser and the supplier or determined by previous experi-
ence with the particular type of material being used
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. The values in parentheses are given for information
only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—This standard and ISO 295 address the same subject matter,
but differ in technical content.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.09 on Specimen Preparation.
Current edition approved May 1, 2019. Published June 2019. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D5224 - 12. DOI:
10.1520/D5224-12R19.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
ISO 295 Plastics—Compression Molding Test Specimens
of Thermosetting Materials3
ISO 3167 Plastics—Multipurpose—Test Specimens3
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms pertaining to plas-
tics used in this practice, see Terminology D883.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 breathe step, n—in plastics molding, the part of the
molding cycle in which the mold halves are opened
momentarily, prior to curing, to release volatiles from the
molded part.
3.2.2 skin, n—in plastics molding, the thin resin-rich layer
(skin) on the surface of the molded part.
3.2.3 skin effect, n—in plastics testing, the positive or
negative effect on the results of some standard tests attributable
to the skin.
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 Compression molded test specimens are produced by
loading a mold cavity with some form of the molding material,
applying a specified pressure to the mating surface for a
specified time and at a specified temperature, and then remov-
ing the part from the cavity.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The conditions at which compounds are molded are
known to influence the properties of the specimens. The degree
of cure, elimination of knit-lines between particles, density of
the part, and degradation of the polymer are among those
factors which will be affected by the molding conditions. Thus
it is important to conform to a standard set of conditions in
order to have a valid comparison of properties between
different compounds and different batches of the same com-
pound.
3
ISO Standards Handbook 21, Vol 2, Plastics, 2nd Ed., 1990, available from
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St., 4th Floor, New York,
NY 10036.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:47 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5224 − 12 (2019)
FIG. 1 Single-Cavity Positive-Compression Mold for Bar Test
Specimens
5.2 Molded specimens showing evidence of low-density
areas due to trapped gases shall be discarded. A breathe step
can be incorporated to eliminate this situation. If used, it is
critical that the breathe step be as brief as possible to avoid
precuring of the compound before full pressure is applied
leading to poorly “knitted” areas and lower strength in the
molded specimen.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Molds:
6.1.1 The mold shall be made of steel, able to withstand the
molding temperatures and pressures. The mold shall be de-
signed such that the compressive mold force is transferred to
the molding material with no appreciable loss. The molds
shown in Figs. 1 and 2 are recommended for maintaining the
maximum force on the material. They are of the three-plate
design; consisting of a shell or floating plate, with upper and
lower compression plates. Molds may be of single or multiple
cavity design.
NOTE 2—Semi-positive molds can be used, and for materials such as
amino compounds, are preferred.
6.1.2 The majority of tests will use bars 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) in
width by 127 mm (5 in.) or 64 mm (2.5 in.) in length, discs 51
mm (2 in.) or 102 mm (4 in.) in diameter or an appropriate
tensile bar as described in Test Method D638 or the multi-
purpose design from ISO 3167. The mold shall be capable of
molding thickness from 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) to 12.5 mm (0.5 in.).
Some procedures such as flame testing require thinner speci-
mens. In all cases the ASTM Standard Test Procedure to be
used shall be consulted for the dimensions of the required test
specimens.
6.1.3 If at all possible, specimens shall be molded directly to
dimension, rather than machined from a plaque to maintain the
integrity of any skin effect.
6.1.3.1 If it is necessary for specimens to be machined from
plates or plaques, they shall not be taken from the edge of the
plaque and a minimum margin of 10 mm (0.5 in.) is recom-
mended. This shall be noted in the report.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:47 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
FIG. 2 Compression Mold for Disk Test Specimens
6.1.4 A cavity draft angle not exceeding 3° can be used to
facilitate specimen removal.
6.1.5 The clearance between the vertical wall of the cavity
and that of the force shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.).
6.1.6 Mold surfaces finished to a roughness of 0.4 to 0.8 µm
(SPI-SPE #2 or equivalent4) are preferred, unless it is known
that the particular test is not affected by a coarser surface finish.
Chrome plating is recommended but not necessary. Draw
polishing of all cavity surfaces in the direction parallel to the
force will facilitate specimen removal.
6.1.7 If ejector pins are used, they shall not deform the
specimens and their placement shall be such that the pin marks
are not in the area of test.
6.1.8 The mold shall have a loading chamber of sufficient
volume to allow the introduction of the entire charge of
material in a single loading. Preforms can be used to decrease
the required loading volume of high bulk materials. The
conditions of such preforming shall be included in the report.
6.1.9 As the specimen surface facing the lower die is heated
for a longer time and at a higher temperature in the time
interval between filling and compression, it is recommended
that a mark be placed on one cavity face in such a position that
it will not interfere with the testing. When reporting the results
of tests that affect the surfaces unequally, the tested surface
shall be indicated.
6.2 Press—The hydraulic press shall have a range of pres-
sures sufficient to insure that the specified pressure is applied
4
Mold comparison kits are available from the D-M-E Company, 29111 Stephen-
son Highway, Madison Heights, MI 48071.
 D5224 − 12 (2019)
TABLE 1 Molding Conditions for Compression Molding of Thermoset Molding Compounds
Molding Condition A B C D E F G H
Charge powder preformA powder or preformB powder, pill, or granular powder or preformB powder powder preform
Preheating none electronic air oven air oven none air oven electronic
Preheat temperature 104 to 115°C 90°C 90°C 120°C 107°C
Preheat time 30 min 60 min 10 min 25 to 30 s
Molding temperatureC 170°C 170°C 170°C 150°C 150°C 160°C 160°C 160°C
Molding pressureD,E 17 MPaE 17 MPa 17 MPa 28 MPa 28 MPa 20 MPa 20 MPa 20 MPa
Molding time
3.2 mm thickness 5 min 3 min 5 min 4 min 5 min 5 min 3 min 3 min
6.4 mm thickness 5 min
12.7 mm thickness 5 min
Breathing allowed allowed allowed allowed allowed when necessary (keep brief)
A
A single preform, preferably approximating the molded shape, shall be used. If more than one preform is used, weld lines may affect the test value of the specimen.
B
When using preforms, the material should be preheated in powder form, then preformed and molded immediately.
C
Molding temperatures should be held to within 3°C of the specified level.
D
Molding pressure should be held to within 2 MPa of the specified level.
E
Highly plastic materials may flash excessively under the molding pressure specified. If that occurs, molding pressure may be reduced to a minimum of 10 MPa, in which
case the pressure used shall be reported.

and maintained during the entire molding operation, and of
maintaining that pressure within 61.5 MPa (6218 psi).
6.2.1 In order to prevent precure, the press shall be capable
of closing within 15 s after the placement of the material in the
mold. A two-speed press is preferred for this purpose. The fast
approach speed can be in the range of 200 to 400 mm/s (8 to
16 in./s) while the slow closing speed of 5 mm/s (0.2 in./s) is
used to prevent gas entrapment.
6.3 Heating System—Mold heating can be accomplished by
conduction from heated platens, heaters inserted into the mold
itself, by hot fluids circulated through passageways in the
mold, or any suitable alternative. The heating system shall be
capable of controlling the mold temperature to 63°C (65°F)
from point-to-point on the mold and for the duration of the
molding time.
6.3.1 If the mold is heated directly, it shall be insulated from
the press platens with a sheet of insulating material.
NOTE 3—It is generally preferable to heat the mold electrically.
6.4 Temperature-Measurement System:
6.4.1 Mold Temperature—A surface pyrometer or equiva-
lent means is used to measure the temperature of the mold
surface.
6.4.2 Preheated Compound Temperature—If the compound
is to be preheated to a definite temperature, a needle-probe
pyrometer or equivalent sensitive to 62°C shall be used.
7. Conditioning
7.1 Except for referee testing and preparation of samples for
electrical tests, prior conditioning of the material is not
required.
7.2 Referee Testing: Phenolic and Amino Molding Com-
pounds:
7.2.1 For the referee testing of all but electrical specimens,
place a sufficient quantity of material in an open tray to a
maximum depth of 13 mm (0.5 in.) for 72 h in a standard
laboratory atmosphere (23 6 1°C, 50 6 5 % relative humid-
ity).
7.2.2 For the preparation of electrical test specimens, place
a sufficient sample of the molding material in an open tray to
a maximum depth of 13 mm (0.5 in.). Dry in an air-circulating
oven for 30 min at 90 6 3°C. Mold the material immediately
after conditioning.
7.3 Referee Testing: Allyl Molding Compounds:
7.3.1 For referee testing of all test specimens, place a
sufficient quantity of material in an open tray to a depth of 25
mm (1 in.) for 72 h in a standard laboratory atmosphere (23 6
1°C, 50 6 5 % relative humidity).
7.4 Electronic Preheating:
7.4.1 When electronic preheating is to be used (refer to
Molding Conditions, Table 1), the objective is to attain a
particular temperature as rapidly as possible. Determine the
conditions necessary to attain that temperature with spare
preforms which are then discarded. Do not use this type of
preheating when preparing electrical test specimens. The
material shall be transferred to the mold immediately after
preheating to prevent cooling or premature curing.
7.5 Preplastification:
7.5.1 Preplastification is permissible to insure thermal and
mechanical homogenization of the material. The preplasticized
material shall be molded immediately after preplastification to
prevent cooling or premature curing. Preplastification condi-
tions shall be the subject of an agreement between the
interested parties and shall be included in the molding report.
8. Procedure
8.1 Unless directed otherwise in the material specification,
mold test specimens under the conditions listed in Table 1.
8.1.1 The “breathe step,” if used, is done by slightly opening
the mold for a few seconds to release volatiles generated by the
curing process and is done after it has already been closed at
the molding temperature.
8.1.2 Release agents are not normally needed as molding
compounds have internal lubricants to facilitate mold release.
If release agents are used it shall be shown that they have no
influence on the test specimen properties. They shall be noted
in the report.
8.1.3 Cooling fixtures can be used to prevent warpage upon
removal of the specimens from the mold.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:47 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5224 − 12 (2019)
8.2 Phenolic Molding Compounds:
8.2.1 Use conditions A or B from Table 1 for impact,
flexure, tension, water absorption, heat deflection, heat-aging
tests.
8.2.2 Use Condition C from Table 1 for electrical test
specimens.
8.3 Amino Molding Compounds:
8.3.1 For urea-formaldehyde compounds use Condition D
from Table 1.
8.3.2 For melamine-formaldehyde compounds use Condi-
tion E from Table 1.
8.4 Allyl Molding Compounds—Use conditions F, G, or H
from Table 1.
8.5 Molding Pressures:
8.5.1 The molding pressures shown in Table 1 are recom-
mended and shall be used for all referee molding and testing.
If other pressures are to be used, the oil pressure p0 in
megapascals (MPa), to be displayed on the pressure gauge in
order to obtain the specified pressure p, in megapascals, is
given by the equation:
p 0 5 ~ p 3 A 1 ! /A
where:
A = the area of the press piston head, m2, and
A1 = the total area of the cavities, m2.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:47 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9. Report
9.1 Report the following information:
9.1.1 Type and description of material used,
9.1.2 Description of the mold,
9.1.3 State of material molded (as received or with “referee
test” conditioning),
9.1.4 Molding condition used (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, or H) and
any variations from the listed condition,
9.1.5 Whether or not a “breathe step” was used during
molding,
9.1.6 Whether any specimens were machined, and
9.1.7 Whether any release agents were used.
NOTE 4—A report form (Fig. 3) identifying all pertinent information is
provided for reference.
10. Precision and Bias
10.1 Inasmuch as this practice does not generate a numeri-
cal result, a precision and bias estimate is not possible.
However, the procedures used during molding of test speci-
mens will affect the numerical results from tests done on the
specimens. Thus variabilities in the molding procedure will
contribute to variability in the final test results.
(1)
11. Keywords
11.1 allyl molding compound; amino molding compound;
compression molding; phenolic molding compound; plastics;
thermoset
4
 D5224 − 12 (2019)

FIG. 3 Compression Molding Report

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:47 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5225 − 17

Standard Test Method for

Measuring Solution Viscosity of Polymers with a Differential
Viscometer1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5225; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the solu-
tion viscosity of polymers using a differential or the modified
differential viscometer. It is applicable to all polymers that
dissolve completely without chemical reaction or degradation
to form solutions that are stable with time and temperature.
Results of the test are usually expressed as specific viscosity,
intrinsic viscosity (limiting viscosity number), inherent viscos-
ity (logarithmic viscosity number), or relative viscosity (vis-
cosity ratio).
1.2 Since there is more than one type of viscometer avail-
able to measure a differential pressure, follow the manufactur-
er’s directions applicable to the equipment being used.
1.3 The solution viscosity values are comparable with those
obtained using a glass capillary of Test Method D2857. This
test method differs from the glass capillary in that the solvent
and the solution are compared at the same time that a test is
run. With a glass capillary, each solution must be referenced
back to the solvent run in the same capillary at the same
temperature.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
For specific hazard statements, see Section 8.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D1243 Test Method for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Vinyl
Chloride Polymers
D2857 Practice for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Polymers
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 inherent viscosity—the ratio of the natural logarithm
of the relative viscosity to the concentration. The IUPAC term
for inherent viscosity is logarithmic viscosity number.
3.1.2 intrinsic viscosity—limit of the reduced and inherent
viscosities as the concentration of the polymeric solute ap-
proaches zero and represents the capacity of the polymer to
increase viscosity. The IUPAC term for intrinsic viscosity is
limiting viscosity number.
3.1.3 reduced viscosity—the ratio of the specific viscosity to
the concentration. Reduced viscosity is a measure of the
specific capacity of the polymer to increase the relative
viscosity. The IUPAC term for reduced viscosity is viscosity
number.
3.1.4 relative viscosity—the ratio of the polymer solution
pressure to the pressure of the solvent.
3.1.5 specific viscosity—the relative viscosity minus one.
3.1.6 viscosity constant, K—baseline reading when solvent
is present in both capillaries.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 Differential Viscometer (Fig. 1):

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2017. Published January 2018. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D5225 - 14. DOI:
10.1520/D5225-17.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:50 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5225 − 17
across the capillaries. A pump continuously supplies solvent
flow. The ratio of the pressures P2 and P1 is proportional to the
ratio of the viscosities of the fluid in capillary 2 to that in
capillary 1.
P2 η2
5K 5 K·Relative Viscosity (2)
P1 η1

4.2.1.1 K, the viscosity constant, is obtained from the

baseline reading when solvent is present in both capillaries, so
η2/η1 is unity.
4.2.1.2 With the valve in LOAD position, the sample is
flushed through the sample loop by the syringe pump. A
baseline reading is established and recorded by the computer
data acquisition system. When the valve is switched to the
INJECT position, solvent flowing from capillary 1 pushes the
sample into capillary 2. The differential pressure P2 will
increase due to the higher viscosity of the sample solution. The
steady state value of P2/P1 then yields the value of relative
NOTE 1—
R1, R2, R3, R4 = Matched SS Capillary Tubing viscosity of the sample.
A, B = Solution Holdup Reservoirs P2
SA, SB = Switching Valve Relative Viscosity 5 (3)
KP1
Pi = Solvent Inlet Pressure Transducer
∆P = Differential Pressure Transducer 4.2.1.3 Absolute viscosity of the sample may be calculated
FIG. 1 Differential Viscometer
from relative viscosity, RV, assuming the viscosity of the
solvent is known.
4.1.1 The viscosity measurement with the differential vis- η ~ sample! 5 RV·η ~ solvent! (4)
cometer is based on a fluid analog of the Wheatstone Bridge.
Pure solvent at constant inlet pressure Pi enters a balanced 5. Significance and Use
capillary network and flows through, producing a zero or
5.1 Solution viscosity values for polymers are related to the
baseline pressure on the differential pressure transducer. Solu-
average molecular size of that portion of the polymer which
tion is loaded into the sample reservoir A and then injected
dissolves in the solvent.
onstream by means of the switching valve SA. The differential
pressure begins to rise until it reaches a steady state value of
6. Apparatus
∆P proportional to the specific viscosity of the solution. The
differential pressure is monitored continuously on a strip chart 6.1 Differential Viscometer, or Relative Viscometer, Dilute
recorder or computer, providing a baseline where ∆P is Solution Viscosity (DSV) System,
measured. The equation relating ∆P to specific viscosity is: 6.2 Glass Vial, 25 mL,
4∆P 6.3 Screw Type Cap, open top, size 24-400,
η sp 5 (1)
P i 2 2∆P
6.4 Septa, aluminum foil (household grade) or acceptable
4.1.2 Derivation of the equation is in Annex A1. substitute,
4.2 Modified Differential Viscometer (Fig. 2): 6.5 Balance, capable of weighting to 0.0001 gms,
4.2.1 The modified differential viscometer has two stainless
6.6 Filter Funnel, and
steel capillaries connected in series with a sample loading/
injection valve before the second capillary. Two differential 6.7 Filter medium, coarse filter paper or metal screen of 140
pressure transducers, P1 and P2, are connected in parallel mesh or finer.

7. Reagents and Materials

7.1 Polymer Sample.
7.2 Solvent.
7.3 Compressed Gas Cylinder of nitrogen or helium.

8. Hazards
8.1 Flammable solvents are to be used in a hood or a well
ventilated area.
8.2 Solvents are to be dated and to be used on a first-in
FIG. 2 Relative Viscometer first-out basis.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:50 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5225 − 17
8.3 Stored solvents prone to develop peroxides should be
tested on a regular schedule for peroxide development.
9. Procedure
9.1 Set viscometer oven temperature to maintain solution of
the test polymer.
9.2 Adjust inlet solvent pressure to obtain the pressure
differential and test time desired.
data in Table 1 should not be rigorously applied to acceptance
or rejection of material, as those data are specific to the one
laboratory and may not be representative of other lots,
conditions, materials, or laboratories.)
NOTE 2—Users of this test method should apply the principles outlined
in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their laboratory and materials,
or between specific laboratories. The principles of 11.2.1 through 11.2.3
would then be valid for such data.

9.3 Prepare polymer solution. Weigh the polymer accurately
to the nearest 1.0 6 0.1 mg and record weight.
9.4 Filter polymer solution into a 25-mL vial. Cover vial
with an aluminum septa or equivalent and cap.
9.5 Program the instrument and processing parameters for
the desired viscosity calculations.
9.6 Initiate viscosity acquisition.
9.7 After the last sample has been run, flush the sample lines
and sample holder with fresh solvent.
9.8 Turn off viscometer, leaving the sample lines filled with
solvent.
10. Report
10.1 Report viscosity data for each sample in the run queue.
11. Precision and Bias
11.1 Table 1 is the precision data for eight polymers which
were measured using this test method. Each result is an average
of three or more independent tests made by a single laboratory.
(Warning—The following explanations of Ir and IR (11.2 thru
11.2.3) are only intended to present a meaningful way of
considering the approximate precision of this test method. The
11.2 Concept of Ir and IR—If Sr and SR have been calculated
from a large enough body of data, then the following applies:
11.2.1 Repeatability—The value below which the absolute
difference between two individual test results obtained under
repeatability conditions is likely to be expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
11.2.2 Reproducibility—The value below which the abso-
lute difference between two test results obtained under repro-
ducibility conditions is likely to be expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
11.2.3 Equivalence testing on numerical data from two
sources shall be conducted in accordance Practice E2935 or
any known method for judging the equivalence of two means.
NOTE 3—Example: A t-test.
11.3 Bias is systematic error which contributes to the
difference between a test result and a true (or reference) value.
There are no recognized standards on which to base an estimate
of bias for this test method.
12. Keywords
12.1 differential solution viscosity; differential viscometer;
polymer solution viscosity

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. CALCULATIONS FOR DIFFERENTIAL VISCOMETER

TABLE 1 Precision Data for the Solution Viscosities of Various PolymersA

Relative Viscosity Inherent Viscosity Intrinsic Viscosity
Polymer Solvent Concentration
Mean Sr Ir Mean Sr Ir Mean Sr Ir
poly(1-butene) decalin 0.1 g/100 mL 1.207 0.007 0.020 1.853 0.054 0.153 1.892 0.057 0.161

polycarbonate methylene chloride 0.5 g/100 mL ... ... ... 0.460 0.003 0.0085 0.472 0.003 0.0085
poly(ethylene) decalin 0.1 g/100 mL 1.124 0.005 0.014 1.166 0.044 0.125 1.181 0.045 0.127
poly(4-methyl-1-pentene) decalin 0.1 g/100 mL 1.280 0.007 0.018 2.294 0.051 0.144 2.361 0.054 0.153
poly(propylene) decalin 0.1 g/100 mL
resin “A” 1.170 0.005 0.014 1.557 0.042 0.112 1.585 0.044 0.125
resin “B” 1.182 0.005 0.014 1.664 0.045 0.127 1.695 0.047 0.133
resin “C” 1.254 0.008 0.021 2.240 0.060 0.170 2.299 0.063 0.178
resin “D” 1.289 0.007 0.018 2.516 0.052 0.147 2.593 0.056 0.158
resin “E” 1.415 0.003 0.008 3.452 0.021 0.059 3.604 0.022 0.062
poly(phenylene oxide) chloroform 0.1 g/100 mL 1.053 0.0005 0.001 0.500 0.003 0.0085 0.503 0.003 0.009
poly(styrene) toluene 0.1 g/100 mL 1.095 0.0006 0.002 0.726 0.0015 0.004 0.737 0.0025 0.007
poly(vinyl chloride) tetrahydrofuran 0.2 g/100 mL 1.225 0.0003 0.0009 1.015 0.001 0.003 1.039 0.001 0.003
A
This data was generated by a Viscotek Model 100-01 viscometer, Malvern Instruments, 117 Flanders Rd., Westborough, MA.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:50 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5225 − 17
A1.1 Assume R3 is filled with solution and R1, R2, R4 are Q 1 η o 1η o 2η o
5 5 (A1.4)
filled with solvent. The measured quantities are the inlet Q2 η o 1η η o 1η
pressure Pi and the differential pressure ∆P.
A1.5 Combining Eqs (A1.2), (A1.3), and (A1.4), we find
∆P P 1 2 P 2 the following:
5 (A1.1)
Pi Pi
∆P
Pi
5 1/2 F
η 2 ηo
η1η o G (A1.5)
P1 = pressure drop across R3 and
P2 = pressure drop across R4. A1.6 The definition of specific viscosity of a solution is as
follows:
A1.2 R2 and R4 have equal flow resistance, so Pi = 2P2,
giving the following: η 2 ηo
η sp 5 (A1.6)
ηo
∆P
Pi
5 1/2
P1
P2 F
21 G (A1.2)
A1.7 Substituting into Eq (A1.5) yields the following:
A1.3 Applying Poiseuelle’s Law to capillaries R3 and R4: ∆P η sp
5 (A1.7)
Pi 2η sp14
P1 ηQ 1
5 (A1.3)
P 2 η oQ 2 A1.7.1 Rearrange to give the following:
4∆P
η sp 5 (A1.8)
Q1 = flow rate through R1, R3, P i 2 2∆P
Q2 = flow rate through R2, R4,
η = viscosity of solution, and A1.8 Assumptions in Derivation:
ηo = viscosity of solvent. A1.8.1 Capillaries have equal flow resistance.
A1.4 The ratio of flow rates Q1/Q2 is equal to the inverse A1.8.2 Capillaries obey Poiseuelle’s Law.
ratio of the total resistance in each side of the bridge.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5225 - 14)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2017)

(1) Revised 6.5 to clarify accuracy of balance being used. (3) Added Note 3.
(2) Subsections 11.2.1, 11.2.2, and 11.2.3: Removed passive
language.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:50 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5226 − 16

Standard Practice for

Dissolving Polymer Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5226; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 4.1.1 A polymer and a list of suggested solvents for making

1.1 This practice outlines the parameters applicable to the a solution are listed in Annex A1.
preparation of a polymeric solution, such as solvent, 4.1.2 Table 1 designates the parameters for container, heat-
concentration, temperature, pressure, time, agitation, and heat- ing mode, and type of agitation.
ing mode. NOTE 2—To illustrate the use of the cell classifications with Table 1, a
1.2 The proper use of this practice requires knowledge of 2 % solution of poly(vinyl chloride) using cyclohexanone would be
written as:
solvents and their effect on polymeric materials.
PVC 2 cyclohexanone 2 20 2 66 2 40 2 BEC
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the where:
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- PVC = abbreviation of the polymer from Annex A1,
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica- cyclohexanone = the solvent from Annex A1,
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. 20 = weight of polymer in tenths of a percent,
66 = temperature in degrees Celsius,
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard. 40 = time in tenths of an hour,
B = glass container from Table 1,
2. Referenced Documents E = bath heater from Table 1, and
C = random agitation from Table 1.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- 5. Significance and Use
tics 5.1 This practice embodies the specifications to describe the
2.2 Other Document: preparation of a polymeric solution.
Polymer Handbook3
6. Procedure
3. Terminology
6.1 Polymer—Select the applicable polymer from Annex A1
3.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology D883. and write its abbreviation.
3.2 Abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology
6.2 Solvent—Select the solvent applicable to the polymer
D1600.
from Annex A1.
4. Summary of Practice 6.3 Concentration—Write the polymer gram weight in
4.1 A polymer solution is described or prepared using the tenths of a percent per milliliter of solvent.
cell classifications listing the parameters relative to solvate the 6.4 Temperature—Write the solution temperature in degrees
polymer. The cell classifications are listed in the following Celsius.
order: polymer, solvent, concentration, temperature, time,
container, heating mode, and agitation. 6.5 Time—Write the time for solution in tenths of an hour.
6.6 Container—Select the type of container from Table 1.
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and 6.7 Heating Mode—Select the heating mode from Table 1.
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2016. Published September 2016. Originally 6.8 Agitation—Select the agitation mode from Table 1.
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5226 - 98(2010)ɛ1.
DOI: 10.1520/D5226-16.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or 7. Precision and Bias
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
7.1 No statement is made about the precision or bias of this
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website. practice since the procedure is descriptive with no measure-
3
Available from John Wiley and Sons, New York, NY. ments being made.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5226 − 16
TABLE 1 Parameters 8. Keywords
Designation Container Heater Mode Agitation Mode
8.1 polymer solutions; solution preparation; solutions; sol-
A unspecified unspecified unspecified
B glass none none
vents
C sealed glass vial oven random
D metal hot plate magnetic stirrer
E fluoropolymer bath propeller blade
F block heater wrist action
G electric mantle ultrasonic
H microwave

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. SUGGESTED SOLVENTS FOR POLYMERIC SOLUTIONS

A1.1 Note the following: A1.1.4 Solubility normally increases with rising tempera-
ture.
A1.1.1 The solvents in Table A1.1 are listed in random
order. A1.1.5 The temperature is for room temperature unless
noted.
A1.1.2 An increase in polymer molecular weight reduces
A1.1.6 The following abbreviations are used in Table A1.1:
solubility.
D.S. = degree of substitution,
A1.1.3 Branching increases the solubility compared to a S.C. = substituent content,
linear polymer of the same molecular weight. conc. = concentrated.
TABLE A1.1 Solvents
Abbreviation Polymer Solvents
ABA Acrylonitrile-butadiene-acrylate aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, tetrahydrofuran,
esters, ketones, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethyl-acetamide (if
high acrylonitrile)
ABS Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide (if high acrylonitrile),
cyclohexanone (above 35°C), cyclohexanone/acetone,
methylcyclohexane/acetone, decahydronaphthalene/dimethyl oxalate,
benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, styrene, lower chlorinated
hydrocarbons, phenol/acetone, tetrahydrofuran,
dimethyltetrahydrofuran, dioxane, methyl ethyl ketone, diisopropyl
ketone, glycol formal, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl-, ethyl-,
n-butyl phthalate, 1-nitropropane, carbon disulfide, tributyl phosphate,
phosphorus trichloride
Alkydes tetrahydrofuran
AMMA Acrylonitrile/metha methacrylate benzene, toluene, xylene, methylene chloride, chloroform, ethylene
chloride, chlorobenzene, isobutanol (hot), cyclohexanol (hot),
B-ethoxyethanol, dioxane, methyl ethyl ketone, diisopropyl ketone,
cyclohexanone, acetic acid, isobutyric acid, methyl formate, ethyl
acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, isobutyl propionate, butyl lactate
ADC Allyl diglycol carbonate benzene, chloroform, acetone
CMC Carboxylmethyl cellulose S.C. = 5 to 10 % —alkali
S.C. = 15 to 30 % —water (sodium salt)
S.C. = high—benzene/alcohol, benzene/acetone, chloroform, pyridine,
acetone, esters, tetrahydrofuran
CA Cellulose acetate D.S. = 0.6 to 0.8—water
D.S. = 1.3 to 1.7—2-methoxyethanol
D.S. = 2.0 to 2.3—methylene chloride/methanol at 80:20, chloroform/
methanol, benzyl alcohol, phenols, ethylene glycol ethers, dioxane,
diethanolamine, pyridine, aniline, acetone, cyclohexanone, formic acid,
glacial acetic acid, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate/nitrobenzene, glycol
monoethyl ether acetate, nitromethane, tetrahydrofuran
CAB Cellulose acetate-butyrate D.S. (acetate) = 0.8 and D.S. (butyrate) = 2.35—
benzene, toluene (hot), chloroform, carbon tetrachloride,
tetrachloroethane, methanol (hot), acetone, cyclohexanone, dioxane,
aliphatic esters, nitroethane
CAB Cellulose acetate-butyrate D.S. (acetate) = 2.1 and D.S. (butyrate) = 0.7—
chloroform, dichloroethane, tetrachloroethane, dioxane, acetone,
cyclohexanone, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, nitroethane
CAP Cellulose acetate propionate benzene, dichloromethane, chlorobenzene, acetone, ethyl acetate

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5226 − 16
TABLE A1.1 Continued
Abbreviation Polymer Solvents
CN Cellulose nitrate N = 6.8 % —water
N = 10.5 to 12 % —alcohol (lower), alcohol/diethyl ether, acetone,
amyl acetate, ethylene glycol ethers, acetic acid (glacial)
N = 12.7 % —halogenated hydrocarbons, ethanol/diethyl ether,
acetone, methyl amyl acetone, cyclohexanone, methyl acetate, ethyl
acetate, ethyl butyrate, ethyl lactate, ethylene glycol ether acetates,
ethylene carbonate, furan derivatives, nitrobenzene
CP Cellulose propionate benzene, dichloroethane, chlorobenzene, acetone, ethyl acetate
CTA Cellulose triacetate methylene chloride, methylene chloride/ethanol at 80:20, chloroform,
chloroform/alcohol, trichloroethane, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, acetone,
acetone/water at 80:20, methyl acetate, ethylene glycol ether
acetates, ethylene carbonate
EPDM Diene-modified ethylene-propylene 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene, toluene at 75°C, 1,2,4-trichloro-benzene at
135°C
EP Epoxy, epoxide tetrahydrofuran
EC Ethyl cellulose D.S. = 0.5 to 0.7—aqueous alkali
D.S. = 1.0 to 1.5—pyridine, formic acid, water (cold), cuoxam
D.S. = 2—methylene chloride, chloroform, dichloroethylene,
chlorohydrins, ethanol, tetrahydrofuran
D.S. = 2.3—benzene, toluene, alkyl halogenoids, alcohols, furan
derivatives, ketones, acetic esters, carbon disulfide, nitromethane
D.S. = 3.0—benzene, toluene, methylene chloride, alcohols, esters
EEA Ethylene/ethyl acrylate aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, tetrahydrofuran,
esters, ketones
EMA Ethylene/methacrylic acid water, aqueous hydrogen chloride (0.002M above 30°C), dilute
aqueous sodium hydroxide
ETFE Ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene copolymer perfluorokerosene (350°C)
EVA Ethylene/vinyl acetate benzene, toluene, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride/ethanol,
dichloroethylene/ethanol at 20:80, chlorobenzene, methanol, ethanol/
water, n-butanol/water, allyl alcohol, 2,4-dimethyl-3-pentanol, benzyl
alcohol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, tetrahydrofuran,
dimethyltetrahydrofuran, dioxane, glycol ethers, glycol ether esters,
acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetic acid, lower aliphatic acids, vinyl
acetate, acetals, acetonitrile, nitromethane, N,N-dimethylformamide,
dimethyl sulfoxide, 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene at 135°C (if high ethylene
content)
LCP Liquid crystal polymer 50:50 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene/phenol at 175°C, pentafluorophenol
MF Melamine formaldehyde Very low molecular weight—alcohol, water
Intermediates—pyridine, formalin, formic acids, dilute and
concentrated acids
High molecular weight—m-cresol at 100°C, N,N-dimethylformamide,
N,N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl pyrrolidone at 85 to 100°C
PF Phenol-formaldehyde Novalks and low molecular weight—hydrocarbons, diethyl ether,
acetone, esters, 4-tert-butylphenol and 4-phenylphenol polymers,
drying oils, tetrahydrofuran, methanol
Final resins—molten phenols (with some decomposition)
PAA Poly(acrylic acid) Atactic—methanol, ethanol, ethylene glycol, methyoxyethanol,
dioxane, formamide, N,N-dimethyl-formamide, water, dilute alkali
solution
Isotactic—dioxane/water at 80:20
PAN Polyacrylonitrile Polyacrylonitrile (PAN)—o-, m-, p-phenylene diamine,
N-formylhexamethyleneimine, N-nitrosopiperidine, maleic anhydride,
chloromaleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, acetic anhydride,
citraconic anhydride, g-butyrolactone, dioxanone, p-dioxanedione,
ethylene oxalate, ethylene carbonate, propylene carbonate,
2-oxazolidone, 1-methyl-2-pyridone, 1,5-dimethyl-2-pyrrolidone,
E-caprolactam, N,N-dimethyl-formamide, dimethylthioformamide,
N-methyl-B-cyanoethylformamide, cyanoaceticacid, a-cyano-
acetamide, N-methylacetamide, N,N-diethylacetamide, N,N-
dimethylacetamide, dimethylmethoxyacetamide, N,N-dimethyl-a,a,a-
trifluoroacetamide, N,N-dimethylpropionate, N,N,N’,N’-
tetramethyloxamide, hydroxyacetonitrile, chloro-acetonitrile/water,
B-hydroxypropionitrile, malonitrile, fumaronitrile, succinonitrile,
adiponitrile, bis(2-cyanoethyl)ether, bis(2-cyanoethyl)sulfide, bis(4-
cyanobutyl)sulfone, 1,3,3,5-tetracyanopentane, nitromethane/water
(94:6), 1,1,1-trichloro-3-nitro-2-propane, tri(2-cyanoethyl)nitromethane,
3-,4-nitrophenol, methylene dithiocyanate, trimethylene dithiocyanate,
dimethyl sulfoxide, tetramethylene sulfoxide, dimethyl sulfone, ethyl
methyl sulfone, 2-hydroxyethyl methyl sulfone, ethylene-1,2-bis-(ethyl
sulfone), dimethyl phosphite, diethyl phosphite, sulfuric acid, nitric
acid, p-phenol sulfonic acid, conc. aqueous lithium chloride, conc.
aqueous zinc chloride, conc. aqueous aluminum perchlorate, conc.
aqueous sodium thiocyanate, conc. aqueous calcium thiocyanate,
molten quaternary ammonium salts and their aqueous solutions

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5226 − 16
TABLE A1.1 Continued
Abbreviation Polymer Solvents
PA Polyamide 6—m-cresol, chlorophenol, formic acid, acetic acid, trichloroacetic
acid, ethylene carbonate, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid,
hexamethyltrisphosphoramide, hexafluoroisopropanol
6:6 (at room temperature)—trifluoroethanol, trichloroethanol, phenol,
cresols, chloral hydrate, formic acid, halogenated acetic acids,
hydrogen fluoride, hydrogen cyanide/methanol, liquid sulfur dioxide,
sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, saturated solution of alcohol-soluble
salts, for example, calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, in methanol,
hexafluoroisopropanol
6:6 (at temperatures of 120 to 140°C)—benzyl alcohol, ethylene
chlorohydrin, 1,3-chloropropanol, 2-butene-1,4-diol, diethylene glycol,
acetic acid, formamide, N-acetylmorpholine, dimethyl sulfoxide
6:10—chlorobenzene, hexafluoroisopropanol, dimethyl succinate
(79°C)
11:—higher primary alcohols, N,N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl
sulfoxide, hexafluoroisopropanol
PA/PET Polyamide + Polyethylene terephthalate pentafluorophenol
PB Poly(butadiene) tetrahydrofuran, toluene, chloroform
PBAN Polybutadiene-acrylonitrile benzene, halogenated hydrocarbons, aliphatic, cycloaliphatic and
aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, tetrahydrofuran,
higher ketones, higher aliphatic esters, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-
dimethylacetamide (if high acrylonitrile content)
PBS Polybutadiene-styrene benzene, halogenated hydrocarbons, aliphatic, cycloaliphatic and
aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, tetrahydrofuran,
higher ketones, higher aliphatic esters
PBT Poly(butylene terephthalate) m-cresol at 100°C, hexafluoroisopropanol
PB Polybutene-1 see Polyethylene
PC Polycarbonate benzene, chloroform, acetone, tetrahydrofuran, methylene chloride
Neoprene Polychloroprene tetrahydrofuran, toluene
PEEK Polyetheretherketone 50:50 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene/phenol at 135°C
PEI Poly(ether imide) N-methyl pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide
at 85°C
PES Poly(ether sulfone) tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide
PE Polyethylene High-density (HDPE) (at temperatures above 80°C)—aliphatic,
cycloaliphatic, and aromatic hydrocarbons, halogenated aliphatic,
cycloaliphatic, and aromatic hydrocarbons, higher aliphatic esters and
ketones, di-n-amyl ether
Low-density (LDPE)(LLDPE)—as high density, but temperatures 20 to
30°C lower depending on the degree of branching
CPE Polyethylene, chlorinated, 40 % tetrahydronaphthalene, toluene, xylene, tetrachloroethane,
Cl (at elevated temperature) chlorobenzene, cyclohexanone
CPE Polyethylene, chlorinated, 60 % Cl tetrahydronaphthalene, benzene, toluene, methylene chloride,
chloroform, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, cyclohexanone, acetone/carbon
disulfide at 1:1
PEO Poly(ethylene oxide) benzene, toluene, methylene chloride, chloroform, carbon
tetrachloride, n-butanol, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, water
PET Poly(ethylene terephthalate) chloral hydrate, phenol, phenol/tetrachloroethane at 1:1 by volume,
phenol/2,4,6-trichlorophenol at 10:7 by volume, chlorophenol,
hexafluoroisopropanol, nitrobenzene, dimethyl sulfoxide (hot),
halogenated aliphatic carboxylic acids, m-cresol at 100°C
PETG Poly(ethylene terephthalate), glycol comonomer see Poly(ethylene terephthalate)
PI Polyimide N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N-methyl pyrrolidone
at 85°C
PIB Polyisobutylene tetrahydrofuran, toluene
Polyisoprene tetrahydrofuran, toluene
PMCA Poly(methyl-a-chloroacrylate) aromatic hydrocarbons, chlorinated hydrocarbons, tetrahydrofuran,
esters, ketones
PMMA Poly(methyl methacrylate) benzene, toluene, xylene, methylene chloride, chloroform, ethylene
chloride, chlorobenzene, isobutanol (hot), cyclohexanol (hot),
B-ethoxyethanol, dioxane, methyl ethyl ketone, diisopropyl ketone,
cyclohexanone, acetic acid, isobutyric acid, methyl formate, ethyl
acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, isobutyl propionate, butyl lactate, ethanol/
water, ethanol/carbon tetrachloride, isopropanol/methyl ethyl ketone at
1:1 above 25°C, formic acid, nitroethane, methylene chloride,
hexafluoroisopropanol
PMP Poly(4-methylpentene-1), isotactic see Poly(ethylene)
PCTFE Polymonochlorotrifluoroethylene cyclohexane (235°C), benzene (200°C), toluene (142°C), p-xylene
(140°C), 1,1,1-trichloroethane (120°C), carbon tetrachloride (114°C),
1,2,3-trifluoropentachloropropane, 1,1,2,2-tetrafluoro-3,3,4,4-
tetrachlorocyclobutane, 1,2-dichlorotrifluorobenzene, 2,5-
dinitrotrifluorobenzene (130°C), mesitylene (140°C),
hexamethyltrisphosphoramide
POM Polyoxymethylene, polyacetal (at elevated benzyl alcohol, phenol, chlorophenols, aniline, formamide, N,N-
temperatures) dimethylformamide, malodinitrile, g-butyrolactone, ethylene carbonate,
bromobenzene, diphenyl ether, benzyl benzoate
PPE Poly(phenylene ether) 1,2,4-trichlorobenzene at 135°C

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5226 − 16
TABLE A1.1 Continued
Abbreviation Polymer Solvents
PP Polypropylene Atactic—hydrocarbons and chlorinated hydrocarbons at room
temperature, isoamyl acetate, diethyl ether
Isotactic (at temperatures above 135°C)—trichlorobenzene, xylenes,
decahydronaphthalene
PPO Poly(propylene oxide) benzene, toluene, carbon tetrachloride, methanol (hot), ethanol,
tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone
PSU Polysulfone methylene chloride, N,N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide
PS Polystyrene cyclohexane (above 35°C), cyclohexane/acetone, methylcyclohexane/
acetone, decahydronaphthalene/dimethyl oxalate, benzene, toluene,
ethylbenzene, styrene, lower chlorinated aliphatic hydrocarbons,
phenol/acetone, tetrahydrofuran, dimethyltetrahydrofuran, dioxane,
methyl ethyl ketone, diisopropyl ketone, cyclohexanone, glycol formal,
ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl-, ethyl-, n-butyl phthalate,
1-nitropropane, carbon disulfide, tributyl phosphate, phosphorus
trichloride
PTFE Polytetrafluoroethylene perfluorokerosene (350°C)
PUR Polyurethane phenol, m-cresol, formic acid, sulfuric acid, tetrahydrofuran,
chloroform, N,N-dimethylformamide
PVK Polyvinylcarbazole benzene, toluene, xylene, methylene chloride, chloroform,
tetrachloroethane, chlorobenzene, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane,
cyclohexanone, benzyl acetate, conc. nitric acid, conc. sulfuric acid
PVP Polyvinylpyrrolidone water
PVAC Poly(vinyl acetate) benzene, toluene, chloroform, carbon tetrachloride/ethanol,
dichloroethylene/ethanol at 20:80, chlorobenzene, methanol, ethanol/
water, n-butanol/water, allyl alcohol, 2,4-dimethyl-3-pentanol, benzyl
alcohol, tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, tetrahydrofuran,
dimethyltetrahydrofuran, dioxane, glycol ethers, glycol ether esters,
acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetic acid, lower aliphatic esters, vinyl
acetate, acetals, acetonitrile, nitromethane, N,N-dimethylformamide,
dimethyl sulfoxide Syndiotactic—chloroform, chlorobenzene
PVAL Poly(vinyl alcohol) glycols (hot), glycerol (hot), piperazine, methylenediamine, formamide,
N,N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide (hot), water,
hexamethyltrisphosphoramide, tetrahydrofuran
PVB Poly(vinyl butural) Acetalization 70 %—alcohols, cyclohexanone, ethyl acetate, ethyl
glycol acetate Acetalization 77 %—methylene chloride, alcohols,
acetone, methyl ethyl ketone cyclohexanone, lower esters
Acetalization 83 %—methylene chloride, alcohols, ketones, lower
esters
PVC Poly(vinyl chloride) High molecular weight—tetrahydrofuran, acetone/carbon disulfide,
methyl ethyl ketone, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, N,N-
dimethylformamide, nitrobenzene, dimethyl sulfoxide
Low molecular weight—toluene, xylene, methylene chloride, ethylene
chloride, perchloroethylene/acetone, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, dioxane,
acetone/carbon disulfide, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, diisopropyl
ketone, mesityl oxide, isophorone, N,N-dimethylformamide,
nitrobenzene, hexamethyltrisphosphoramide, tricresyl phosphate
Chlorinated, 63 %—aromatic hydrocarbons, chloroform,
chlorobenzene, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, acetone, cyclohexanone,
butyl acetate, nitrobenzene, N,N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl
sulfoxide
PVCA Poly(vinyl chloride-acetate) see Poly(vinyl chloride)
PVF Poly(vinyl fluoride) cyclohexanone (hot), N,N-dimethylformamide, dinitrile, N,N-
dimethylacetamide (hot), dimethyl sulfoxide (hot)
Chlorinated, 30 %—N,N-dimethylformamide
Chlorinated, 60 %—carbon tetrachloride
PVFM Poly(vinyl formed) benzene/alcohol at 70:30, toluene, methylene chloride, chloroform,
carbon tetrachloride/alcohol at 70:30, dichloroethylene,
dichloroethylene/diacetone alcohol at 50:50, 2-chloroethanol, benzyl
alcohol, furfural, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, cyclohexanone, formic acid,
acetic acid, N,N-dimethylformamide
PVDC Poly(vinylidene chloride) tetrahydrofuran (hot), tetrahydronaphthalene (hot), trichloroethane,
pentachloroethane, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, trichlorobenzene,
tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol, dioxane, cyclohexane, N,N-dimethylamide,
butyl acetate, N,N-dimethylformamide, N-methylpyrrolidone,
benzonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, cyclohexanone
PVDF Poly(vinylidene fluoride) cyclohexanone, g-butyrolactone, ethylene carbonate, propylene
carbonate, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, dimethyl
sulfoxide
SI Silicone plastics tetrahydrofuran, chlorinated hydrocarbons, toluene
SAN Styrene-acrylonitrile N,N-dimethylformamide (if high acrylonitrile), also see Polystyrene
SB Styrene-butadiene chloroform, toluene
SMS Styrene/a-methylstyrene see Polystyrene
SRP Styrene-rubber plastics toluene
UP Unsaturated polyester tetrahydrofuran
UF Urea-formaldehyde hexafluoro-2-propanol, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-
dimethylacetamide at 85°C

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5226 − 16
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:19:54 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5227 − 13

Standard Test Method for

Measurement of Hexane Extractable Content of Polyolefins1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5227; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Determine the Precision of a Test Method

1.1 This test method describes an extraction/gravimetric 2.2 Federal Document:3
procedure for determination of the amount of hexane soluble 21 CFR 177.1520
low molecular weight material present in polyethylene,
3. Terminology
polypropylene, ethylene-propylene copolymers, and ethylene-
vinyl acetate copolymers. This test method is a modification of 3.1 The definitions given in Terminology D883, D1600, and
the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) procedure for E131 are applicable to this test method.
determining hexane extractables of polyolefins. This test 3.2 Abbreviations:
method is based upon the presumption that the weight of the 3.2.1 EVA—ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer.
residue extract present in the solvent is equal to the amount
3.2.2 LDPE—low-density polyethylene.
extracted from the film sample and could therefore be quanti-
fied by measuring the weight loss of the extracted film, 3.2.3 HDPE—high-density polyethylene.
eliminating the complex and time-consuming evaporation 3.2.4 LLDPE—linear low-density polyethylene.
process described in 21 CFR 177.1520. 3.2.5 FDA—Food and Drug Administration.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the 3.2.6 PP—polypropylene.
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- 4. Summary of Test Method
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
4.1 Film samples are extracted with hexane for 2 h at 49.5
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
6 0.5°C, dried, and weighed.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. Units used in 21 CFR 177.1520 are also used in this 4.2 The loss in weight of the film is presumed to be equal to
test method. Units are in conformance with Federal Code 21 the extractable content determined by solvent evaporation in
CFR 177.1520, from which this test method is derived. the FDA protocol.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard. 5. Significance and Use
2. Referenced Documents 5.1 FDA requirements for maximum extractables are speci-
2 fied for resin and uses. This test method provides a means to
2.1 ASTM Standards: determine the amount of hexane-soluble low molecular weight
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics material present in polyolefins. It is applicable to resins
D1239 Test Method for Resistance of Plastic Films to containing greater than 0.20 % extractables.
Extraction by Chemicals
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas- 6. Apparatus
tics
6.1 Water Bath, maintained at 49.5 6 0.5°C.
E131 Terminology Relating to Molecular Spectroscopy
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to 6.2 Resin Kettle, 1500-mL.
6.3 Kettle Head, 3-neck, with one 45/50 and two 24/40
female joints, and appropriate stoppers.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods. 6.4 Clamp.
Current edition approved June 1, 2013. Published July 2013. Originally approved
in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D5227 - 01(2008)ε1. DOI:
6.5 Allihn Condenser, Size C, with 45/50 male joint.
10.1520/D5227-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
3
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM Available from Standardization Documents Order Desk, DODSSP, Bldg. 4,
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Section D, 700 Robbins Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098, http://
the ASTM website. www.dodssp.daps.mil.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:26 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5227 − 13
FIG. 1 Resin Kettle Setup
6.6 Plastic Sleeves, tetrafluoroethylene (TFE), to fit Allihn
condenser 45/50 male joint.
6.7 Vacuum Oven, capable of maintaining 80 6 5°C and a
minimum of 25-in. Hg pressure.
6.8 Magnetic Stirring Bar, egg-shaped, TFE-coated, 11⁄2 by
⁄ in.
58
6.9 Submersible Magnetic Stirring Motor, with power sup-
ply.
6.10 Analytical Balance, capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 n-Hexane, aromatic free (<1 mg/L), minimum 85 %
n-Hexane-reagent grade or equivalent. The solvent must be
free of aromatic compounds that would significantly increase
the solubility of the resin. The solvent grade specified repre-
sents the minimum required purity.
8. Materials
8.1 Blown Film, compression molded films, or cast films are
suitable for testing.
8.2 Film, approximately 2.5 g, with a thickness not exceed-
ing 4 mil is required for a single determination.
9. Procedure
9.1 Assemble the resin kettle setup with glass stopper,
clamp, and magnetic stirring bar. (See Fig. 1.)
9.2 Add 1000 mL of n-Hexane to the kettle assembly.
9.3 Stopper the kettle and clamp the assembly into the water
bath set at 49.5 6 0.5°C.
NOTE 2—Temperature is a critical factor in this analysis and must not
vary more than 1°C. If the temperature exceeds these limits, the test must
be discontinued and restarted. The FDA protocol also states the tempera-
ture of the contents must be brought to 49.5 6 0.5°C within 20 to 25 min.
NOTE 3—The level of water in the bath must be kept at least 2 cm above
the level of the solvent in the kettle to ensure the temperature equilibrium.
Position the kettle so that the center bottle of the kettle is sitting on a
submersible stirrer. Start stirring and allow the hexane to heat for 1 h.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:26 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.4 Using gloves and metal tweezers to avoid sample
contamination, cut 2.7 g of the prepared film sample (4 mil or
less in thickness) into 1-in. squares using clean sharp scissors.
NOTE 4—Care must be exercised when cutting the samples to avoid
ragged edges on the specimen. Small shards of film or contamination
present at initial weighing can easily be lost during the test, adversely
affecting the test results.
9.5 Weigh 2.5 6 0.05 g of film squares and record the initial
film weight to the nearest 0.1 mg. Also record the number of
film pieces.
NOTE 5—Forty or more squares will be obtained depending on the film
thickness. Some laboratories have found that a basket assembly, as shown
in Appendix X1, eliminates the need to count the film pieces before and
after the solvent extraction step.
9.6 Add the film sample to the hexane making sure all
squares become immersed in the solvent. (Use tweezers.)
Replace the kettle head with condenser column. Extract for 2 h.
9.7 After the extraction period:
9.7.1 Filter the contents of the resin kettle through the fritted
porcelain funnel.
9.7.2 Transfer the film squares, using tweezers, to a 200-mL
Berzelius beaker and recount the film pieces to verify that none
were lost during transfer.
9.7.3 Cover the beaker with a watchglass and place it in a
vacuum oven at 80 6 5°C for 2 h.
9.7.4 After 2 h, remove the covered beaker from the vacuum
oven and place it in a desiccator to cool to room temperature
(estimated 1 h).
9.8 Remove the film squares using tweezers and weigh them
to the nearest 0.1 mg.
9.9 Repeat 9.7.3 and 9.7.4 until a constant weight is
obtained.
10. Calculation
10.1 Calculate the weight percent of extractables present in
the original sample as follows:
~ A 2 B ! 3 100 3 0.935
hexane extractables, % 5 (1)
A
where:
A = weight of original sample film, g,
B = weight of the film after extraction, g, and
0.935 = correlation factor to eliminate the bias between the
original FDA technique and this alternate test
method.
11. Report
11.1 Report the hexane extractables to the nearest 0.01 % as
calculated in 10.1.
12. Precision and Bias4
12.1 Hexane Extractable Content of Polyolefins:
12.1.1 Table 1 is based on a round robin conducted in 1990
in accordance with Practice E691, involving five materials
4
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
1173.
 D5227 − 13
TABLE 1 Hexane Extractable Content of Polyolefins, Weight 12.1.2 Concept of r and R—If Sr and SR have been
Material Average Sr SR r R calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test results
HDPE 0.26 0.03 0.05 0.09 0.15 that were averages from testing five specimens.
LLDPE 0.88 0.11 0.16 0.31 0.46 12.1.2.1 Repeatability Limit, r—(Comparing two test results
LDPE 1.74 0.08 0.15 0.21 0.42
EVA 3.54 0.28 0.33 0.78 0.93 for the same material, obtained by the same operator using the
PP 3.80 0.29 0.35 0.81 0.98 same equipment on the same day.) The two test results should
be judged not equivalent if they differ by more than the r value
for that material.
12.1.2.2 Reproducibility Limit, R—(Comparing two test re-
sults for the same material, obtained by different operators
tested by ten laboratories. The materials were supplied by one using different equipment in different laboratories.) The two
laboratory. Each test result was an individual determination. test results should be judged not equivalent if they differ by
Each laboratory obtained six test results for each of the five more than the R value for that material.
materials. Each laboratory obtained two test results for each 12.1.2.3 Any judgment in accordance with 12.1.2.1 or
material tested each day for three days. 12.1.2.2 would have an approximate 95 % (0.95) probability of
NOTE 6—Caution: The following explanations of r and R (12.1.2 – being correct.
12.1.2.3) are only intended to present a meaningful way of considering the 12.1.3 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
approximate precision of this test method. The data in Table 1 should not estimate bias of this test method.
be rigorously applied to acceptance or rejection of material, as those data
are specific to the round robin and may not be representative of other lots, 13. Keywords
conditions, materials, or laboratories. Users of this test method should
apply the principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to 13.1 ethylene-propylene copolymers; ethylene-vinyl acetate
their laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories. The copolymers; extractables; FDA; hexane; plastics; polyethyl-
principles of 12.1.2 – 12.1.2.3 would then be valid for such data. ene; solvent extraction

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. BASKET ASSEMBLY FOR n -HEXANE EXTRACTABLES

X1.1 If one uses the basket assembly shown in Fig. X1.1,
the following steps should be performed after the 2-h hexane
extraction (9.6) Also, the sample and basket must be weighed
together and recorded before starting the extraction:
X1.1.1 Rinse the basket and contents by immersing several
times in fresh n-hexane contained in a small beaker, allowing
the basket to drain between rinsings.
X1.1.2 Remove the excess solvent by briefly blowing the
basket with a stream of nitrogen or dry air.
X1.1.3 Place the basket in a vacuum oven for 2 h at 806
5°C, then cool to ambient temperature in a desiccator (esti-
mated 1 h).
X1.1.4 Reweigh the basket and its contents to the nearest
0.1 mg.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:26 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5227 − 13

FIG. X1.1 Basket for n-Hexane Extractables1

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5227 –
01(2008)ε1) that may impact the use of this standard. (June 1, 2013)

(1) Removed permissive language. (3) Revised X1.1.

(2) Removed materials manufacturers information.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:26 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5260 − 16

Standard Classification for

Chemical Resistance of Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Homopolymer and Copolymer Compounds and Chlorinated
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5260; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

1.1 This classification covers the method for determining
and classifying the resistance of poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC)
homopolymer and copolymer compounds, and chlorinated
poly(vinyl chloride) (CPVC) compounds in chemicals by
simple immersion testing of unstressed specimens.
1.2 This classification is applicable to any PVC or CPVC
compound as defined in Specifications D1784, D4216, D4396,
or D4551.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.4 The text of this standard references notes and footnotes
which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes
(excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered
as requirements of this standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There are no ISO standards covering the subject matter of this
classification.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Chemical Reagents
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Compounds
D4216 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Building Products Compounds
D4396 Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Com-
pounds for Plastic Pipe and Fittings Used in Nonpressure
Applications
D4551 Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions and Abbreviations:
3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology D883
and abbreviations with Terminology D1600 unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 Reference this chemical resistance classification for any
PVC/CPVC material compound specification wherein a level
of resistance to specific chemicals is required for satisfactory
product performance.
4.2 Listing of a chemical in the annex does not imply
PVC/CPVC compatibility or resistance to the chemical. Some
of the chemicals listed could be deleterious to a specific
compound, causing radical changes in the physical properties.
Resistance to these chemicals is not intended to be a practical
requirement in a specification.

1
4.3 For resistance to mixtures of chemicals, it is suggested
This classification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
that the blend be tested rather than accepting the resistance of
Materials. the individual chemicals because of a possible solvency
Current edition approved May 1, 2016. Published May 2016. Originally enhancement of the combined chemicals.
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5260 - 04(2010).
DOI: 10.1520/D5260-16. 4.4 The specimens tested in this classification are un-
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or stressed. When service conditions include stress or other
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on factors, or both, test chemical resistance of the PVC/CPVC
the ASTM website. compound under actual service conditions.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5260 − 16
5. Basis of Classification 8.1.1 The test chemical is designated from the alphanumeri-
5.1 The chemical resistance of a PVC or CPVC compound cal list of chemicals in the annex. This alphanumeric designa-
is composed of the cell classifications specified from Table 1. tion is the first three digits of the chemical resistance cell.
For example, the resistance of PVC to 25 % acetic acid at 8.1.2 The concentration of the chemical from row two of
ambient temperature would be written as a cell classification of Table 1 is designated as the fourth digit of the chemical
A05231: resistance cell.
Class
8.1.3 The test temperature from row three of Table 1 is
Chemical (acetic acid from annex) A05 designated as the fifth number of the chemical resistance cell.
Concentration of 25 % 2 8.1.4 The resistance of a compound from row four of Table
Temperature of 23°C 3
Resistance 1
1 is designated as the sixth number of the chemical resistance
cell. Grade a compound for its resistance to the testing of 8.1.1
NOTE 2—The cell-type format provides the means of classifying – 8.1.3 as follows:
chemical resistance. This type of format is subject to possible misappli-
cation in classifying a chemical resistance that is unobtainable with Resistant Marginally Non-
commercially available materials. Consult the manufacturer regarding this Resistant Resistant
classification. Linear Swelling 0% <5 % >5 %
Change in Weight <1 % <10 % >10 %
Change in Shore Hardness no change <5 units >5 units
6. Performance Requirements
6.1 The chemical resistance shall be for a compound that 9. Inspection
meets the physical property and processing requirements of the
9.1 Inspection of the product shall be agreed upon between
application.
the purchaser and the supplier as part of the purchase contract.
7. Sampling
7.1 A batch or lot shall be considered as a unit of manufac- 10. Rejection and Rehearing
ture and is permitted to consist of a blend of two or more 10.1 Product that fails to conform to the requirements of this
production runs of material. classification shall not be certified as meeting the requirements
7.2 Sample using a statistically acceptable procedure. of this classification. Report rejection to the producer or
supplier promptly and in writing. In case of dissatisfaction with
8. Test Methods the results of the test, the producer or supplier is permitted to
8.1 Determine the chemical resistance of a compound fol- make claim for a rehearing.
lowing the procedure of Test Method D543 except the expo-
sure period shall be for 30 days. Note the chemical, 11. Keywords
concentration, test temperature, and resistance in accordance 11.1 chemical resistance; chlorinated poly(vinyl chloride)
with 8.1.1 – 8.1.4. This data is compiled in Table 1 and polymers; poly(vinyl chloride) copolymers; poly(vinyl chlo-
comprises the six digits of the chemical resistance cell. ride) polymers
TABLE 1 Chemical Resistance of a Compound
Designation Cell Limits
Property and Unit
Order Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 to 3 chemical unspecified use number of chemical from annex
4 concentration, % unspecified 0 to 19 20 to 39 40 to 59 60 to 79 80 to 99 100
5 temperature,° C unspecified <0 0 to 19 20 to 39 40 to 59 60 to 79 80 to 100 >100
6 resistance unspecified R MR NR

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. ALPHANUMERICAL LIST OF CHEMICALS

Acetaldehyde A01 Ammonia Biflouride A19

Acetamide A02 Ammonium Carbonate A20
Acetate Solvent A03 Ammonium Casenite A21
Acetic Acid, Glacial A04 Ammonium Chloride A22
Acetic Acid A05 Ammonium Hydroxide A23
Acetic Anhydride A06 Ammonium Nitrate A24
Acetone A07 Ammonium Oxalate A25

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5260 − 16

Acetylene A08 Ammonium Persulfate A26

Acrylonitrile A09 Ammonium Phosphate, Dibasic A27
Aluminum Chloride A10 Ammonium Phosphate, Monobasic A28
Aluminum Fluoride A11 Ammonium Phosphate, Tribasic A29
Aluminum Hydroxide A12 Ammonium Sulfate A30
Aluminum Potassium Sulfate A13 Ammonium Thio-Sulfate A31
Aluminum Sulfate A14 Amyl Acetate A32
Amines A15 Amyl Alcohol A33
Ammonia, Anhydrous A16 Amyl Chloride A34
Ammonia, Liquid A17 Aniline A35
Ammonia, Nitrate A18 Aqua Regia (80 % HCl ⁄ 20 % H2 SO4) A36
Arsenic Acid A37

Barium Carbonate B01 Benzyl Alcohol B14

Barium Chloride B02 Borax (Sodium Borate) B15
Barium Cyanide B03 Boric Acid B16
Barium Hydroxide B04 Brewey Slop B17
Barium Nitrate B05 Bromine B18
Barium Sulfate B06 Butadiene B19
Barium Sulfide B07 Butane B20
Beer B08 Butter B21
Beet Sugar Liquids B09 Buttermilk B22
Benzaldehyde B10 Butyl Acetate B23
Benzene B11 Butyl Alcohol B24
Benzoic Acid B12 Butylene B25
Benzol B13 Butyric Acid B26

Calcium Bisulfide C01 Chlorobenzene (mono) C20

Calcium Carbonate C02 Chloroform C21
Calcium Chloride C03 Chlorosulfuric Acid C22
Calcium Hydroxide C04 Chlorox (bleach) C23
Calcium Hypochlorite C05 Chocolate Syrup C24
Calcium Sulfate C06 Chromic Acid C25
Calgon C07 Cider C26
Cane Juice C08 Citric Acid C27
Carbolic Acid......(See Phenol)...... Coffee C28
Carbon Bisulfide C09 Copper Chloride C29
Carbon Dioxide C10 Copper Cyanide C30
Carbon Disulfide C11 Copper Fluorborate C31
Carbon Monoxide C12 Copper Nitrate C32
Carbon Tetrachloride C13 Copper Sulfate C33
Carbonated Water C14 Cream C34
Carbonic Acid C15 Cresols C35
Catsup C16 Cresylic Acid C36
Chloroacetic Acid C17 Cyclohexane C37
Chlorinated Glue C18 Cyanic Acid C38
Chlorine, Anhydrous Liquid C19

Detergents D01 Diethylene Glycol D04

Diethylene D02 Diphenyl Oxide D05
Diacetone Alcohol D03 Dyes D06

Epsom Salts...(See Magnesium Sulfate) Ethyl Chloride E06

Ethane E01 Ethyl Sulfate E07
Ethanolamine E02 Ethylene Chloride E08
Ether E03 Ethylene Dichloride E09
Ethyl Acetate E04 Ethylene Glycol E10
Ethyl Alcohol E05 Ethylene Oxide E11

Fatty Acids F01 Freon 22 F13

Ferric Chloride F02 Freon 113 F14
Ferric Nitrate F03 Freon T.F. F15
Ferric Sulfate F04 Fruit Juice F16
Ferrous Chloride F05 Fuel Oil #1 F17
Ferrous Sulfate F06 Fuel Oil #2 F18
Fluorboric Acid F07 Fuel Oil #3 F19
Fluosilicic Acid F08 Fuel Oil #5A F20
Formaldehyde F09 Fuel Oil #5B F21

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5260 − 16

Formic Acid F10 Fuel Oil #6 F22

Freon 11 F11 Furan Resin F23
Freon 12 (wet) F12 Furfural F24

Gasoline (unleaded) G01 Glycerine G06

Gasoline (unleaded premium) G02 Glycolic Acid G07
Gelatin G03 Gold Monocyanide G08
Glucose G04 Grape Juice G09
Glue, P.V.A. G05 Grease G10

Heptane H01 Hydrochloric Acid H09

Hexane H02 Hydrocyanic Acid H10
Hexyl Alcohol H03 Hydrofluoric Acid H11
Honey H04 Hydrofluosilicic Acid H12
Hydraulic Oil (Petroleum) H05 Hydrogen Peroxide H13
Hydraulic Oil (Synthetic) H06 Hydrogen Sulfide, Aqueous H14
Hydrazine H07 Hydroxyacetic Acid H15
Hydrobromic Acid H08

Ink I01 Isopropyl Acetate I05

Iodine I02 Isopropyl Ether I06
Isobutyl Alcohol I03 Isotane I07
Isopropyl Alcohol I04

JP 3 Jet Fuel J01 JP 5 Jet Fuel J03

JP 4 Jet Fuel J02

Kerosene K01

Lacquers L01 Lead Sulfamate L06

Lactic Acid L02 Ligroin L07
Lard L03 Lime L08
Latex L04 Lubricants L09
Lead Acetate L05

Magnesium Carbonate M01 Methyl Acrylate M17

Magnesium Chloride M02 Methyl Alcohol M18
Magnesium Hydroxide M03 Methyl Bromide M19
Magnesium Nitrate M04 Methyl Butyl Ketone M20
Magnesium Oxide M05 Methyl Cellosolve M21
Magnesium Sulfate M06 Methyl Chloride M22
Maleic Acid M07 Methyl Dichloride M23
Maleic Anhydride M08 Methyl Ethyl Ketone M24
Mash M09 Methyl Isobutyl Ketone M25
Mayonnaise M10 Methyl Isopropyl Ketone M26
Melamine M11 Methyl Methacrylate M27
Mercuric Chloride M12 Methylamine M28
Mercuric Cyanide M13 Methylene Chloride M29
Mercury M14 Milk M30
Methyl Acetate M15 Mineral Oil M31
Methyl Acetone M16 Molasses M32
Mustard M33

Naptha N01 Nickel Sulfate N04

Napthalene N02 Nitric Acid N05
Nickel Chloride N03 Nitrobenzene N06

Oils: Oils:
Anise O01 Olive O15
Bay O02 Orange O16
Bone O03 Palm O17
Castor O04 Peanut O18

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5260 − 16

Cinnamon O05 Peppermint O19

Citric O06 Pine O20
Clove O07 Rape Seed O21
Coconut O08 Rosin O22
Cod Liver O09 Sesame Seed O23
Corn O10 Soybean O24
Cotton Seed O11 Sperm O25
Ginger O12 Oleic Acid O26
Lemon O13 Oleum O27
Linseed O14 Oxalic Acid O28

Paraffin P01 Potash P23

Pentane P02 Potassium Bicarbonate P24
Perchloroethylene P03 Potassium Bromide P25
Petrolatum P04 Potassium Carbonate P26
Phenol P05 Potassium Chlorate P27
Phosphoric Acid P06 Potassium Chloride P28
Photographic Developer P07 Potassium Chromate P29
Plating Solution:
Antimony P08 Potassium Cyanide P30
Arsenic P09 Potassium Dichromate P31
Brass P10 Potassium Hydroxide P32
Bronze P11 Potassium Nitrate P33
Cadmium P12 Potassium Permanganate P34
Chrome P13 Potassium Sulfate P35
Copper P14 Propane (liquified) P36
Gold P15 Propyl Alcohol P37
Indium P16 Propylene Glycol P38
Iron P17 Pyridene P39
Lead P18 Pyrogallic Acid P40
Nickel P19
Silver P20
Tin P21
Zinc P22

Rosins R01 Rust Inhibitors R03

Rum R02

Salad Dressing S01 Sodium Polyphosphate, monobasic S26

Sea Water S02 Sodium Polyphosphate, dibasic S27
Shellac (bleached) S03 Sodium Polyphosphate, tribasic S28
Shellac (orange) S04 Sodium Silicate S29
Silicone S05 Sodium Sulfate S30
Silver Bromide S06 Sodium Sulfide S31
Silver Nitrate S07 Sodium Tetraborate S32
Soap Solutions S08 Sodium Thiosulfate S33
Sodium Acetate S09 Sorgum S34
Sodium Aluminate S10 Soy Sauce S35
Sodium Bicarbonate S11 Stannic Chloride S36
Sodium Bisulfate S12 Stannic Fluoborate S37
Sodium Bisulfite S13 Starch S38
Sodium Carbonate S14 Stearic Acid S39
Sodium Chlorate S15 Stoddard Solvent S40
Sodium Chloride S16 Styrene S41
Sodium Chromate S17 Sugar (liquids) S42
Sodium Cyanide S18 Sulfate Liquors S43
Sodium Hydroxide S19 Sulfur Chloride S44
Sodium Hypochlorite S20 Sulfur Dioxide S45
Sodium Metaphosphate S21 Sulfur Trioxide S46
Sodium Metasilicate S22 Sulfuric Acid S47
Sodium Nitrate S23 Sulfurous Acid S48
Sodium Perborate S24 Syrup S49
Sodium Peroxide S25

Tallow T01 Tomato Juice T08

Tannic Acid T02 Trichloroethane T09
Tanning Liquors T03 Trichloroethylene T10
Tartaric Acid T04 Trichloropropane T11
Tetrachloroethane T05 Tricresylphosphate T12
Tetrahydrofuran T06 Triethylamine T13

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5260 − 16

Toluene T07 Turpentine T14

Urine U01

Vegetable Juice V01 Vinegar V02

Water, Distilled W01 Whey W06

Water, Fresh W02 Whiskey W07
Water, Mine, Acid W03 Wine W08
Water, Salt W04 White Liquor (pulp mill) W09
Weed Killers W05 White Water (pulp mill) W10

Xylene X01

Zinc Chloride Z01 Zinc Sulfate Z03

Zinc Hydrosulfite Z02

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5260 -
04(2010)) that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2016)

(1) Removed reference to withdrawn standard Specification

D3915.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:24:39 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5272 − 08 (Reapproved 2013)

Standard Practice for

Outdoor Exposure Testing of Photodegradable Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5272; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope
1.1 This practice defines test conditions applicable when
Practices D1435 and G7 are employed for the outdoor expo-
sure testing of photodegradable plastics.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D882 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic
Sheeting
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
D3593 Test Method for Molecular Weight Averages/ Distri-
bution of Certain Polymers by Liquid Size-Exclusion
Chromatography (Gel Permeation Chromatography GPC)
Using Universal Calibration (Withdrawn 1993)3
D3826 Practice for Determining Degradation End Point in
Degradable Polyethylene and Polypropylene Using a Ten-
sile Test
E772 Terminology of Solar Energy Conversion
G7 Practice for Atmospheric Environmental Exposure Test-
ing of Nonmetallic Materials
G169 Guide for Application of Basic Statistical Methods to
Weathering Tests
G183 Practice for Field Use of Pyranometers, Pyrheliom-
eters and UV Radiometers
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.96 on Environmentally Degradable
Plastics and Biobased Products.
Current edition approved April 1, 2013. Published April 2013. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D5272 - 08. DOI:
10.1520/D5272-08R13.
2 4
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
3. Terminology
3.1 The terminology given in Terminology E772 and Ter-
minology D883 is applicable to this practice.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 When discarded as litter, articles made using photode-
gradable plastics are subject to attack by daylight (particularly
solar-ultraviolet radiation), oxygen, heat, and water. The 5°
exposure angle used in this practice represents typical condi-
tions for degradation experienced by litter.
4.2 This practice requires characterization of the duration of
exposure in terms of solar-ultraviolet radiation. Solar-
ultraviolet radiation varies considerably as a function of
location and time of year. This can cause dramatic differences
in the time required to produce a specified level of degradation
in a polymer. Daro4 has shown that when the same lot of
polyethylene containing an iron-salt prodegradant is exposed at
various times of the year in a single location, the time required
to produce an average of two chain scissions per molecule
varied by over 130 %. Daro, and Zerlaut and Anderson5 have
shown that this variability can be significantly reduced when
total solar or solar-ultraviolet radiation, or both, is used to
characterize the exposure increments.
4.3 In addition to variations in level of daylight and solar-
ultraviolet radiation, there are significant differences in
temperature, and moisture stresses between different locations,
and between different years, or periods within a single year, at
a single location. Because of this variability, results from this
test cannot be used to predict the absolute rate at which
photodegradable plastics degrade. Results from this test can be
used to compare relative rates of degradation for materials
exposed at the same time in the same location. Results from
multiple exposures of a common lot of material (during
different seasons over several years) at different sites can be
used to compare the relative rates at which a particular
photodegradable plastic will degrade in each location.
Daro, A., et al, “Degradation of Polymer Blends IV, Natural Weathering of Low
Density and Linear Low Density Polyethylene,” European Polymer Journal, Vol 26,
No. 1, 1990, pp. 47–52.
5
Zerlaut, G. L., and Anderson, T. A., “Ultraviolet Radiation as a Timing
Technique for Outdoor Weathering of Materials,” Society of Automotive Engineers,
SAE Technical Paper Number 850348 , 1985.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:10 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5272 − 08 (2013)
NOTE 2—An inherent limitation in solar-radiation measurements is that
they do not reflect the effects of variations in temperature and moisture
exposure, which often can be as important as solar radiation. The same
solar-ultraviolet radiation increment will not necessarily give the same
changes in properties of the test specimen in different exposure sites.
Results from this practice must be regarded as giving only a general
indication of the degree of degradability and should always be considered
in terms of characteristics of the exposure site as well.
4.4 Where measurement of total solar-ultraviolet radiation
is not possible, exposure duration can be determined by the
number of days, weeks, or months exposed. When this practice
is used, a reference material whose degradation properties have
been well established must be exposed at the same time as the
other materials being tested. The reference material used must
be agreed upon by all interested parties. The time to produce a
specified level of degradation for each material in this simul-
taneous exposure is then compared. It is also a good practice to
use reference materials when exposure length is determined by
total solar or solar UV radiant exposure.
NOTE 3—A reference material can be a single lot of material which has
shown consistent results after a number of exposures. It is not necessary
that the composition or properties of the reference material be character-
ized and certified by a recognized standards agency or group.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Use exposure racks constructed in accordance with the
requirements of Practice G7. Unless otherwise specified, posi-
tion the exposure racks so that specimens face the equator and
so that the exposed surfaces are 5° from the horizontal. If other
exposure rack orientations are used, they must be reported.
5.2 Use one of the following rack constructions for expos-
ing photodegradable plastic specimens:
5.2.1 Exposure Rack A—Positionable mounting bars used
for attaching specimens shall be arrayed over a regular mesh
expanded-metal (aluminum or stainless steel) sheet backing.
Use 16–18 gage metal with approximately 0.5-in. openings. It
is recommended that the surface area of the expanded metal be
FIG. 1 Typical Rack Construction for Exterior Exposures of Photodegradable Plastics
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:10 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
60 to 70 % open. Use a noncorroding material for the mounting
bars. 6061T6 aluminum or untreated wood are typical materi-
als used for the mounting bars. Fig. 1 is a top view showing
typical rack construction.
5.2.2 Exposure Rack B—Unpainted exterior-grade plywood
forms the rack surface to which specimens are directly at-
tached. Replace the plywood when there is any evidence of
delamination or fiber separation which could produce sharp
edges and damage exposed specimens. Medium-density over-
lay (MDO) or high-density overlay (HDO) plywood are
satisfactory substrates and will require less frequent replace-
ment than plywood with no overlay.
NOTE 4—There is less air circulation around the specimens when Rack
B exposures are used. Degradation rates from exposures using Rack B will
be somewhat faster than those using Rack A because specimen tempera-
tures will be higher. Comparisons between materials should only be made
with exposures conducted at the same time and using the same rack type.
5.3 Solar Radiometers:
5.3.1 Ultraviolet Radiometer—Unless otherwise specified,
use a total UV radiometer that measures ultraviolet radiation
from 295 to 385 mm. Operate the radiometer in accordance
with Practice G183. Narrow band radiometers (for example,
with 20 nm bandpass) can also be used if agreed upon by all
interested parties. Operate narrow band radiometers in accor-
dance with Practice G183.
NOTE 5—The use of narrow band filter UV radiometers having selective
spectral sensitivity may not be sensitive to all variations of solar-
ultraviolet radiation. Monitoring at a narrow band (for example, 20 nm)
may not relate to the total photodegradation of the plastic material, which
is a result of a complex interaction of many factors, including sensitivity
across a broad wavelength region.
6. Sampling
6.1 Sample using a statistically acceptable procedure agreed
upon by interested parties.
 D5272 − 08 (2013)
7. Procedure spectral regions where the plastic material is most sensitive
7.1 Attach the ends of specimens of photodegradable plastic may also be employed to follow exposure increments.
to be exposed to the positionable mounting bars or plywood 7.5 After specimens are exposed for the desired amount of
rack. Films or specimens that are nearly flat can be attached total solar-ultraviolet radiation, measure the specified property
using a pressure sensitive tape with a durable adhesive and or properties. Typical properties measured are molecular
backing. Staples may be used with plywood racks or with weight (in accordance with Test Method D3593) and tensile
wood mounting bars. Specimens with odd shapes can be strength and elongation (in accordance with Test Methods
attached directly to the expanded metal or plywood using D882). For polyolefins, degree of oxidation can be monitored
nonferrous bolts and large washers or by any other suitable using a carbonyl index, which is the ratio of carbonyl infrared
method. Ensure that the test specimens are inscribed or absorbance at approximately 1715 cm−1 to an invariant absor-
otherwise labeled with an identifying number, letter, or symbol. bance characteristic of the polymer (for example, C-H stretch
Expose at least three replicate specimens for each material and at approximately 3000–2840 cm−1). The degradation end point
exposure increment used. of polyolefins can be determined by a tensile test in accordance
NOTE 6—Pressure sensitive tapes with aluminum foil backing and
with Practice D3826. Measure the same properties of an
acrylic pressure sensitive adhesives have been found to be suitable for unexposed specimen of each material being tested. If a
attaching flat films and specimens to the exposure rack. reference material is used, determine its properties and express
7.2 Ensure that the UV radiometer is mounted at an angle of the time to degradation for all other materials as a function of
5° from the horizontal, facing the equator. If specimens are the time to produce a specific degree of degradation in the
exposed at a different angle, mount the UV radiometer at the reference material.
same angle as the specimens. NOTE 7—Guide G169 provides information about using statistical
analysis techniques to compare properties of exposed and unexposed
7.3 Mount the specimens on the exposure rack for the time specimens.
desired to produce the prescribed level of total solar-ultraviolet
radiation. It is recommended that a series of exposure incre- 8. Report
ments be used for each material being tested to determine the 8.1 Report the following information for each material
rate of degradation as a function of total solar or solar- exposed:
ultraviolet radiant energy dose. Table 1 shows monthly and 8.1.1 Complete identification and description (for example,
annual average total solar-ultraviolet radiation incident on 5° dimensions) of material tested.
surfaces in representative humid subtropical and desert cli- 8.1.2 Location of exposure and type of exposure rack used.
mates. 8.1.2.1 Any exposure angle other than 5°.
7.4 If total ultraviolet radiant energy is used to determine 8.1.3 Dates exposure started and completed.
exposure increments, measure the increments using the instru- 8.1.3.1 Total time exposed (expressed in days, weeks, or
mentation in accordance with 5.3.1. Express total solar- months).
ultraviolet exposures in joules per square metre, with data 8.1.4 Solar-ultraviolet radiant exposure:
reported to four significant figures. If agreed on by all 8.1.4.1 If total ultraviolet radiation is used, it shall be
interested parties, the ultraviolet radiant energy in specified expressed in joules per square metre. Record manufacturer and
narrow wavelength intervals (or bands) that closely conform to model of UV radiometer employed, date of last calibration, and
calibrating laboratory.
TABLE 1 Average Monthly Solar-Ultraviolet Radiation (295 to 385 8.1.5 General appearance and results of tests used to char-
nm) on a 5° SurfaceA acterize the properties on unexposed samples of each material
NOTE 1—The climate data for Miami also meets the criteria for a
being exposed.
tropical summer rain climate given in the Koppen Climate Classification 8.1.6 General appearance and results of tests used to char-
System. acterize the properties of specimens from each exposure
Average Solar-Ultraviolet Radiation (MJ/m2, 295–385 nm) increment. Report the average and standard deviation from
Month Subtropical Climate Desert Climate each test used to measure properties of replicate specimens.
Miami, FL (26°N latitude) Phoenix, AZ (34°N latitude) 8.1.7 Complete description or reference to characterization
January 19.6 16.6 tests used to evaluate material properties.
February 21.6 19.5
March 28.4 29.0
April 32.2 36.1
9. Precision and Bias
May 33.3 41.1 9.1 It is not practicable to specify the precision of the
June 28.6 41.7
July 29.8 40.3 procedure in this practice because it is dependent upon the
August 27.6 37.7 ASTM test methods used to determine the specific properties
September 24.7 32.1 being measured. The precision and bias for the individual test
October 23.5 25.7
November 18.7 18.0 methods can be used in the analysis of data from exposures
December 17.5 15.3 used to assess the differences in materials.
Annual 305.5 352.5
A
9.2 Because of the variability in solar radiation,
Data in this table are the averages for monthly total solar UV radiation data
reported from 1985 to 2005. temperature, and moisture levels between sites and between
different times at the same site, results from this practice

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:10 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5272 − 08 (2013)
should only be used to compare relative rates of degradation
for materials exposed at the same time in the same location
using the same exposure rack construction.
10. Keywords
10.1 aging; degradable plastic; exterior exposure; outdoor
exposure; photodegradation; ultraviolet radiation; weathering

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:10 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5279 − 13

Standard Test Method for

Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Properties: In Torsion1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5279; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This test method covers the use of dynamic mechanical
instrumentation for gathering and reporting the viscoelastic
properties of thermoplastic and thermosetting resins and com-
posite systems in the form of rectangular specimens molded
directly or cut from sheets, plates, or molded shapes. The
torsional data generated may be used to identify the thermo-
mechanical properties of a plastics material or composition.
1.2 This test method is intended to provide means for
determining the torsional modulus of plastics as a function of
temperature using nonresonant forced-vibration techniques, as
outlined in Practice D4065. Plots of the elastic (storage), loss
(viscous), and complex moduli and tan delta, as a function of
frequency, time, or temperature are indicative of significant
transitions in the thermomechanical performance of the poly-
meric material system.
1.3 This test method is valid for a wide range of frequencies,
typically from 0.01 to 100 Hz.
1.4 Apparent discrepancies may arise in results obtained
under differing experimental conditions. These apparent differ-
ences from results observed in another study can usually be
reconciled without changing the observed data by reporting in
full (as described in this test method) the conditions under
which the data were obtained.
1.5 Test data obtained by this test method are relevant and
appropriate for use in engineering design.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—This test method is equivalent to ISO 6721, Part 7.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D4065 Practice for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Proper-
ties: Determination and Report of Procedures
D4092 Terminology for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical
Properties
3. Terminology
3.1 For definitions applicable to this test method, refer to
Terminology D4092.
4. Summary of Test Method3
4.1 This test method covers the determination of the shear
modulus of plastics using dynamic mechanical techniques. A
test specimen of rectangular cross section is tested in dynamic
torsion. The specimen is gripped longitudinally between two
clamps. The specimen of known geometry is placed in me-
chanical torsional displacement at either a fixed frequency, or
variable frequencies at either isothermal conditions, or with a
linear temperature increase. The elastic or loss modulus, or
both, of the polymeric material system are measured in torsion.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method provides a simple means of character-
izing the thermomechanical behavior of plastics materials
using very small amounts of material. The data obtained may
be used for quality control, research and development, and
establishment of optimum processing conditions.
5.2 Dynamic mechanical testing provides a sensitive
method for determining thermomechanical characteristics by
measuring the elastic and loss moduli as a function of
frequency, temperature, or time. Plots of moduli and tan delta
of a material versus temperature provide graphical representa-
tions indicative of functional properties, effectiveness of cure
(thermosetting resin system), and damping behavior under
specified conditions.

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.10 on Mechanical Properties.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2013. Published Septmeber 2013. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D5279 - 08. DOI:
10.1520/D5279-13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
The particular method for measurement of the elastic and loss moduli and tan
delta depends upon the individual instrument’s operating principles.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:13 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5279 − 13
5.3 This test method can be used to assess
5.3.1 The modulus as a function of temperature,
5.3.2 The modulus as a function of frequency,
5.3.3 The effects of processing treatment, including
orientation,
5.3.4 Relative resin behavioral properties, including cure
and damping,
5.3.5 The effects of substrate types and orientation (fabri-
cation) on elastic modulus, and
5.3.6 The effects of formulation additives that might affect
processability or performance.
5.4 Before proceeding with this test method, reference
should be made to the specification of the material being tested.
Any test specimen preparation, conditioning, dimensions, or
testing parameters, or combination thereof, covered in the
relevant ASTM materials specification shall take precedence
over those mentioned in this test method. If there are no
relevant ASTM materials specifications, then the default con-
ditions apply.
6. Interferences
6.1 Since small test specimen geometries are used, it is
essential that the specimens be representative of the material
being tested.
7. Apparatus
7.1 The function of the apparatus is to hold a rectangular
test specimen so that the material acts as the elastic and
dissipative element in a mechanically driven torsional system.
Dynamic mechanical instruments operate at a forced, constant
amplitude, and either at a fixed frequency, or variable frequen-
cies.
7.2 The apparatus shall consist of the following:
7.2.1 Fixed Member—A fixed or essentially stationary
member carrying one grip.
7.2.2 Movable Member—A movable member carrying a
second grip.
7.2.3 Grips—Grips for holding the test specimen between
the fixed member and the movable member. The grips shall be
mechanically aligned, that is, they shall be attached to the fixed
and movable member, respectively, in such a manner that they
will move into alignment as soon as any load is applied, so that
the long axis of the test specimen will coincide with the
direction of the applied pull through the center line of the grip
assembly.
7.2.3.1 The test specimen shall be held in such a way that
slippage relative to the grips is minimized.
7.2.4 Deformation (Strain Device)—A device for applying a
continuous linear deformation (strain) to the specimen. In the
force-displacement device the deformation (strain) is applied
and then released. (See Table 1 of Practice D4065.)
7.2.5 Detectors—Devices for determining dependent and
independent experimental parameters, such as force (stress),
deformation (strain), frequency, and temperature. Temperature
should be measurable with a precision of 61°C, frequency to
61 %, and force to 61 %.
7.2.6 Temperature Controller and Oven— A device for
controlling the temperature, either by heating (in steps or
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:13 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
ramps), cooling (in steps or ramps), maintaining a constant
specimen environment, or a combination thereof. A tempera-
ture controller should be sufficiently stable to permit measure-
ment of environmental chamber temperature to within 1°C.
7.3 Nitrogen or other inert gas supply for purging purposes.
8. Test Specimens
8.1 Any rectangular specimen, representative of the mate-
rial being tested and within the fixturing capabilities of the
specific test instrument employed, shall be used so long as an
accurate description of the specimen is clearly stated in the test
report.
NOTE 2—The test specimens may be cut from sheets, plates, or molded
shapes, or may be molded to the desired finished dimensions.
9. Calibration
9.1 Calibrate the instrument using procedures recommended
by the manufacturer.
10. Conditioning
10.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 23.0 6
2.0°C and 50 6 5 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h
prior to testing in accordance with Procedure A of Practice
D618, unless otherwise specified by the contract or relevant
material specification.
11. Procedure
11.1 Use an untested specimen for each measurement.
Measure the width and thickness of the specimen to the nearest
0.03 mm at the center of the specimen and enter those
dimensions into the test program using the instrument’s soft-
ware.
11.2 Clamp the test specimen between the movable and
stationary members using shim stock, if necessary, to minimize
slippage within the clamp.
11.3 Preload the test specimen so that a positive normal
force is maintained during the test. Monitor the normal force
during testing to ensure adequate preloading.
11.4 Measure the jaw separation between the movable and
stationary members to the nearest 0.03 mm and enter that
dimension into the test program using the instrument’s soft-
ware.
NOTE 3—Tests may be conducted in several modes depending on the
desired characterization requirements and the properties of interest.
Generally those modes include a strain sweep during which the tempera-
ture and frequency are maintained at constant values; a frequency sweep
during which the temperature and strain are maintained at constant values;
a temperature sweep during which the strain and frequency are maintained
at constant values or a frequency-temperature sweep during which the
strain is maintained at a constant value and properties are measured across
a range of frequencies at step increments of temperature.
11.5 Based on the type of test being conducted:
11.5.1 Select the frequency (or range of frequency) for
dynamic-torsional displacement as desired.
11.5.2 Select the torsional-displacement amplitude (or range
of amplitude) as desired, making sure it is within the material’s
linear elastic region.
 D5279 − 13
NOTE 4—An independent strain sweep test may need to be run to 13.1.3 Conditioning procedure,
establish this property. 13.1.4 Description of the instrument used for the test,
11.5.3 Select the temperature (or range of temperature), 13.1.5 Description of the calibration procedure,
dwell time and either ramp rate or step increments to be used 13.1.6 Identification of the sample atmosphere by gas
if temperature is to be varied. composition, purity, and rate used,
11.5.3.1 Temperature increases should be controlled to 1 to 13.1.7 Width and thickness of specimen,
2°C/min for linear increases or 2 to 5°C/min (with a minimum
13.1.8 Jaw separation distance,
of 1-min thermal-soak time for step increases). These soak
times should be set to assure thermal equilibrium of the test 13.1.9 Frequency of dynamic displacement,
material. Appropriate soak times are generally related to the 13.1.10 Amplitude of displacement,
mass of the test specimen and to the ramp rate or step 13.1.11 Thermal gradient; heating rate,
increment being used. 13.1.12 Number of specimens tested,
11.6 Conduct the desired test recording the appropriate data. 13.1.13 Table of data including moduli, tan delta, frequency,
strain, and temperature as appropriate, and
12. Calculations 13.1.14 A plot of the modulus (moduli) and tan delta as
12.1 The equations listed in Practice D4065 are used to appropriate. (See Fig. 1.)
calculate the important rheological properties measured in
forced, nonresonant dynamic displacement: 14. Precision and Bias

where: 14.1 The repeatability standard deviation has been deter-

mined for the following materials. Laboratory A evaluated a
G' = storage (elastic) modulus in torsion,
G" = loss (viscous) modulus in torsion, polyurethane sample and the values in Table 1 were obtained
G* = complex modulus in torsion, and with the same test method in the same laboratory by the same
d* = tan delta. operator using the same equipment in the shortest practical
period of time using test specimens taken at random from a
13. Report single quantity of homogeneous material. Laboratory B tested
13.1 Report the following information: the same material and obtained the results shown in Table 1.
13.1.1 Complete identification of the material tested, includ-
ing type, source, manufacturer’s code, number, form, principal 15. Keywords
dimensions, and previous history as available, 15.1 dynamic mechanical rheological properties; elastic;
13.1.2 Description and direction of cutting and loading loss; storage; tan delta; torsional shear modulus; viscoelastic
specimen, including preload force, behavior; viscous

FIG. 1 Dynamic Mechanical Modulus in Torsion as a Function of Temperature

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:13 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5279 − 13
TABLE 1 DMRT-Torsion, Elastic Modulus, G’ (E8 Pascals) or (E9
dynes/cm2) at Selected Temperatures
Laboratory –40°C 0°C 40°C 80°C
A
Mean 3.773 0.2038 0.03624 0.03532
Standard 0.008 0.0067 0.00032 0.00087
Deviation
B
Mean 3.568 0.2263 0.03206 0.02758
Standard 0.160 0.0461 0.00142 0.00023
Deviation

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5279 - 08)
that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2013)

(1) Revised Section 8 to reduce permissive language. (2) Added Note 2 and renumbered subsequent notes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:13 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5296 − 19

Standard Test Method for

Molecular Weight Averages and Molecular Weight
Distribution of Polystyrene by High Performance Size-
Exclusion Chromatography1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5296; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-

1.1 This test method covers the determination of molecular
weight (MW) averages and the distribution of molecular
weights for linear, soluble polystyrene by high-performance
size-exclusion chromatography (HPSEC). This test method is
not absolute and requires the use of commercially available
narrow molecular weight distribution (MWD) polystyrene
standards for calibration. This test method is applicable for
samples containing molecular weight components that have
elution volumes falling within the elution volume range
defined by polystyrene standards (that is, molecular weights
generally from 2000 to 2 000 000 g·mol−1).
1.2 The HPSEC is differentiated from traditional size-
exclusion chromatography SEC (also referred to as gel perme-
ation chromatography (GPC)) in that the number of theoretical
plates per metre with an HPSEC system is at least ten times
greater than that for traditional SEC (see Terminology D883
and Practice D3016).2 The HPSEC systems employ low-
volume liquid chromatography components and columns
packed with relatively small (generally 3 to 20 µm) micropo-
rous particles. High-performance liquid chromatography in-
strumentation and automated data handling systems for data
acquisition and processing are required.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific precautionary statements are given in Section 9.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
Current edition approved Nov. 1, 2019. Published December 2019. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D5296 – 11. DOI:
10.1520/D5296-19.
2
See also AMD Bibliography and Bibliography Supplements AMD 40-S1, 40-S2,
and 40-S3 on Size Exclusion Chromatography, available from ASTM Headquarters.
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:3
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2857 Practice for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Polymers
D3016 Practice for Use of Liquid Exclusion Chromatogra-
phy Terms and Relationships
E685 Practice for Testing Fixed-Wavelength Photometric
Detectors Used in Liquid Chromatography
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of technical terms pertain-
ing to plastics used in this test method see Terminology D883.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 In this test method a dilute solution of a polystyrene
sample is injected into a liquid mobile phase containing the
same solvent used to prepare the polymer solution. The mobile
phase transports the polymer into and through a chromato-
graphic column (or set of columns connected in series) packed
with a solid or semirigid, porous substrate which separates the
polymer molecules according to their size in solution. Starting
from injection, a detector continuously monitors the eluate as a
function of elution volume (or time). Upon emerging from the
column(s), the size-separated molecules are detected and
recorded according to their concentration. Through calibration,
the elution volumes (or times) are converted to molecular
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
weights, and various molecular weight parameters for the 7.2 Essential Components—The essential components of
sample are calculated from the molecular weight/concentration instrumentation are a solvent reservoir, solvent pumping
data. system, sample injector, packed column(s), solute detector, low
dead-volume liquid chromatography tubing and fittings, waste
5. Significance and Use container, recorder, and an automated data-handling system.
5.1 General Utility—The molecular weight (MW) and mo- Any component used shall meet the safety and performance
lecular weight distribution (MWD) are fundamental character- requirements specified as follows.
istics of a polymer sample. They are used for a wide variety of 7.2.1 The interrelationships of the components are shown
correlations for fundamental studies, processing, or product schematically in Fig. 1. For instruments that have injector,
applications. For example, the observed MWD is compared to column(s), detector, or other components operated above
one predicted from assumed kinetics or mechanisms for a ambient temperature, the use of a degasser located in the
polymerization reaction. Differences between the values will solvent reservoir or between the reservoir and pumping system
allow alteration of theory or experimental design. Similarly, the is recommended to remove air from the solvent. Typical
strength, melt flow, and other properties of a polymer sample laboratory glassware and an analytical balance are also needed.
usually are dependent on MW and MWD. Determinations of NOTE 2—A number of systems and components for performing HPSEC
MW and MWD are used for quality control of polymers. are available commercially.
5.2 Limitations—Because of the need for specific calibra- 7.3 Solvent Reservoir—The solvent reservoir must hold
tion of the polymer type under study, and because of the sufficient solvent to ensure consistency of composition for a
specific nature of polymer/solvent/column-packing number of runs or analyses. The reservoir shall permit control
interactions, this test method is valid only for polystyrene and of the environment in contact with the solvent, and be
non-exclusion effects are to be avoided. However, many of the completely inert to the solvent employed. In addition, some
principles of the method have been applied in generating means of agitation (for example, magnetic stirring) is recom-
HPSEC methods for other polymer systems, for example, using mended to ensure uniform composition.
the principles of universal calibration. (see Practice D3016). 7.4 Solvent Pumping System—The principal requirement of
a pumping system is production of a constant and pulseless
6. Units and Symbols flow of solvent through the columns. In general, the rate of
6.1 Units and symbols related to function are given in Table flow shall be adjustable between 0.1 and 5.0 mL/min and
1. back-pressures shall not exceed limits specified by the column
manufacturer (for example, 28 MPa). If the elution volume is
6.2 Equivalencies used in this test method are as follows:
not being measured directly or corrected for systematic
Common Unit/Symbol SI Unit or Symbol
changes, the precision in the flow rate must be at least 60.3 %
1 mL·min−1 = 1.667 × 10−8 m3 ·s̄−1 as measured under the conditions and over the time interval
1 × 107 dyn·cm−2 = 145 psi = 1 MPa required for running a typical analysis.
7. Apparatus 7.5 Sample Injector—The purpose of an injection system is
to generate a sharply defined zone of solution containing the
7.1 Introduction—Liquid high-performance size-exclusion sample when introducing the sample into the flow stream. A
chromatography (HPSEC) is a specific form of liquid chroma- valve and loop assembly or any of a number of commercially
tography and is differentiated from traditional SEC in that available high-performance liquid chromatography automatic
HPSEC uses columns with at least ten times the number of injection systems is suitable for this purpose. Requirements
theoretical plates per metre. The principal distinguishing fea- include minimal contribution to band spreading, injector ability
ture of HPSEC is the column packing material that is discussed to operate at the back-pressure generated by the columns,
as follows. repeatability of injection volume, and no carryover.
7.6 Columns—Stainless steel columns with uniform and
highly polished inside walls are usually selected for HPSEC.
TABLE 1 Units and Symbols Related to Function Columns with lengths ranging from 15 to 50 cm and special
Common Unit/ SI Unit/ end fittings, frits, and connectors designed to minimize dead
Function
Symbol Symbol volume and mixing are recommended. Micro-particulate, semi-
Basic property definition Molecular weight (Daltons) g·mol−1 rigid organic gels, and rigid solid, porous packing materials are
Solvent flow rate mL·min−1 m3 ·s−1
A
Sample weight (mass) mg
A
Sample solution volume µL, mL
A
Pore size Å
A
Particle Size µm
A
Elution volume µL, mL
A
Elution time s
A
Chromatogram peak mm
heights
Column back pressure dyn·cm−2 (psi) N·m−2 or pascal (Pa)
A
Same as common unit.
FIG. 1 Schematic of an HPSEC System

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
used for HPSEC. Generally, the packing materials have narrow
particle size distributions with particle sizes in the range from
3 to 20 µm. Packing materials also are available in a variety of
shapes and pore sizes. Columns are either packed with particles
of relatively uniform pore size or with a “mixed bed” of
particles to produce a broad range of pore sizes for polymer
separation. If a set of columns is used, it is recommended that
the columns be connected starting from the injector outlet in
order of columns having the smallest to those having the
largest packing pore size.
NOTE 3—Column packing materials and packed HPSEC columns are
available commercially from a number of manufacturers. Users of this test
method are advised to follow manufacturers’ guidelines and recommen-
dations for the care and use of their HPSEC columns. For example,
manufacturers’ guidelines may override the preceding recommendation
for ordering the placement of columns in a column set because of concern
about the fragility of smaller pore size packing materials.
7.7 Detectors—The purpose of the detector is to continu-
ously monitor the concentration of solute eluting from the
chromatographic column(s). Consequently, the detector must
be sufficiently sensitive and respond linearly to the solute
concentration. Additionally, the detector must not appreciably
distort the concentration gradient in the emerging stream. This
requirement imposes severe limitations on the volume of
solution available for detection. For example, use of detectors
with cell volumes greater than 15 µL generally will not be
accepted with this test method. Most detectors employed for
HPSEC are based upon photometric measurements (refractive
index, UV-visible, fluorescence and infrared absorbance). Prac-
tice E685 serves as a guide for testing the performance of
photometric detectors used in high-performance liquid chro-
matographic systems. Other detectors with appropriate sensi-
tivity are also acceptable. The differential refractometer has
moderate sensitivity and general utility. It provides a signal
proportional to the difference in refractive index (∆RI) between
the solvent and the column eluate. The detector shall be able to
respond to 10−7 to 10−8 ∆RI unit with cell volumes ≤ 10 µL.
NOTE 4—The change in the specific refractive index increment (dn/dc)
of polystyrene is negligible at molecular weights greater than about 5000
g·mol−1. No appreciable error in molecular weight averages will be
introduced with this detector for polystyrene as long as its number-average
molecular weight, Mn, is greater than 5000 g·mol−1. The principal
disadvantage of the differential refractometer is that precise control of
temperature, pressure, and flow rate is required to maintain a stable signal
for an appropriate level of sensitivity. For example, most organic liquids
have a temperature coefficient of 10−4 RI units per K. Consequently, the
temperature within the RI detector cell must be controlled to within 10−4
°C.
NOTE 5—Benzoyl peroxide is commonly used as a free radical initiator
for styrene in the synthesis of polystyrene. The presence of small
concentrations of initiator fragments containing strong chromophores,
such as the benzoate group resulting from the decomposition of benzoyl
peroxide, as polymer end groups can significantly alter the ultraviolet
(UV) absorption characteristics of polystyrene.4 Since the relative con-
centration of such end groups increases with decreasing polymer MW, the
relationship between detector response and polymer concentration (molar
absorptivity in the Beer-Lambert law) may change with MW. Photometric
detectors (UV and fluorescence) are particularly sensitive to the presence
of strong chromophoric end groups. Choice of detector and selection of
4
Garcia Rubio, L. H., Ro, N., and Patel, R. D., Macromolecules, 17, 1984, p.
1998.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
wavelength are important to ensure a MW-independent concentration
response. Failure to do so may result in erroneous MW-averages and a
distorted MWD.
7.8 Tubing and Fittings—All tubing between the sample
injector and the detector shall be no greater than 0.25-mm
[0.010-in.] internal diameter and of sufficient thickness for use
at pressures up to 42 MPa. Connecting tubings shall be kept as
short as possible and all fittings and connectors must be
designed to prevent mixing and have low dead volumes.
7.9 Recorder/Plotter—Either a recording potentiometer
with a full-scale response of at least 2 s or a printing device
connected to a data handling system is recommended to plot
the chromatographic data. Choose a pen response and signal-
to-noise ratio so that the concentration signal is not appreciably
perturbed.
7.10 Data Handling Systems—Means must be provided for
determining chromatographic peak heights or integrated area
segments at prescribed intervals under the HPSEC chromato-
gram and for handling and reporting the data. This is best
accomplished by means of a computer or a real-time data
acquisition system with either off-line or on-line data process-
ing.
NOTE 6—Data acquisition and handling systems for HPSEC have not
been standardized. However, it is noted that a number of different
manufacturers now provide chromatography data systems that include
HPSEC software. Also, some users have developed their own specialized
HPSEC computer software.
7.11 Other Components—Special solvent line filters, pres-
sure monitors, pulse dampers, flowmeters, thermostated ovens,
syphon counters, plotters, raw data storage systems, software,
and so forth are oftentimes incorporated with the essential
components previously listed.
7.12 HPSEC System—Any satisfactory combination of the
above components that will meet the performance require-
ments of Section 12.
8. Reagents and Materials
8.1 Solvent—Tetrahydrofuran (THF) is recommended as the
solvent for this test method. However, any solvent that is
compatible with the HPSEC system components and column
packing materials and is considered to be a good solvent for
polystyrene is acceptable. To a certain extent, the choice of
solvent dictates the operating temperature, as well as the
detector, selected for the HPSEC system. The temperature must
be sufficiently high to keep the eluent viscosity low (usually 1
cp or less) and yet not too high to cause eluent to boil or degas.
Considering detector limitations, solvents having refractive
indices similar to that of polystyrene are not preferred for use
with differential refractive index detectors; while those absorb-
ing strongly in the UV, such as toluene, shall not be used with
UV (254-nm) detectors. Solvent purity and consistency must
also be considered when choosing a solvent. For example,
unless freshly distilled and kept in an all glass (amber)
container under an inert gas, THF will react with oxygen to
form peroxides that absorb in the UV and are hazardous upon
evaporative concentration. Therefore, THF must either contain
an antioxidant such as 0.025 to 0.1 % w ⁄v butylated hydroxy
 D5296 − 19
toluene, or be continuously blanketed or sparged with an inert
gas like helium to prevent peroxide formation.
8.2 Polymer Standards—Unimodal, narrow MWD (M̄w /M̄n
< 1.1) polystyrene standards of known molecular weight are
preferred for calibration. Ideally, the average molecular
weights of the standards are based on absolute MW methods
such as end-group analysis, osmometry, light scattering, or
ultracentrifugation.
8.3 Low MW Standards—Low MW compounds, such as
o-dichlorobenzene, that are used for determining plate count or
as internal standards must be of high purity. Sulfur is an
excellent internal standard for monitoring changes in eluent
flow rate in most HPSEC systems where THF is used as the
solvent. Sulfur elutes after the HPSEC “junk” peak composed
of low MW compounds or injected air, or both, and is available
in high purity.
9. Hazards
9.1 Solvents used in this test method are likely to be toxic or
highly flammable, or both. Direct contact with the skin and
inhalation of solvent vapors shall be avoided. The user is
advised to consult literature and follow recommended proce-
dures pertaining to the safe handling of the solvent. Similar
precautions are to be followed with respect to the handling of
low MW standards.
10. Preparation of Apparatus
10.1 Assembly—The HPSEC system must be assembled
into an integrated package as shown in Fig. 1 and readied for
operation. For commercial systems, manufacturers’ guidelines
and recommendations shall be followed for assembly and
operation.
10.2 Temperature—An operating temperature is not speci-
fied in this test method. Maintain a relatively constant tem-
perature of the critical internal components (injection loop,
column(s), detector, and connecting tubing) that is consistent
with the choice of solvent. The temperature of the previously
mentioned internal components during an analysis must be
within 3°C of their temperature at calibration.
10.3 Flow Rate—Column and instrument manufacturers’
recommendations shall be followed when selecting a flow rate
and starting the solvent pumping system. A flow rate of 1 6 0.1
mL·min−1 is suggested, but not required, for this test method. If
necessary, the pumping system is adjusted to deliver a rela-
tively constant and pulseless flow of eluent from the detector
outlet. Flow rate is measured by determining either the volume
or weight of solvent eluted over a sufficiently long period of
time and under suitable conditions to guarantee a precision of
at least 60.3 %. Flow rates must be determined during
calibration and, if practical, before or after each analysis.
Alternatively, use an internal standard (see 12.5) or a flow-
measuring device, such as a syphon dump, to monitor changes
in flow rate.
10.4 Detector—Detector settings and wavelength selection,
in the case of photometric detectors, shall provide optimum
sensitivity for solute detection without causing undue baseline
noise or overloading of the output signal.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10.5 Data Handling System—Users are advised to follow
recommendations of their computer or data system manufac-
turer for setting data acquisition and integration parameters.
11. Preparation of Solutions
11.1 Polymer Samples—Solutions are prepared by weighing
10 to 50 mg of the polymer sample into a clean, dry, 50-mL
flask having a screw cap lined with solvent-resistant material or
into glasswares such as volumetric flasks fitted with ground
glass stoppers. Next, the flask is filled two thirds with solvent
syphoned from the solvent reservoir and then stoppered. The
polymer must be dissolved at room temperature. Magnetic
stirring devices or laboratory shakers are recommended to aid
dissolution. Excessive temperature or ultrasonic devices have
been known to cause the polymer to degrade at times and
therefore, must not be used with this test method. After the
polymer has dissolved, additional solvent from the solvent
reservoir is added to fill the flask. An alternative way is to
prepare the solution from “stock” solutions containing an
internal standard as described in 11.3. Polystyrene solutions
prepared with solvents such as THF are very stable, as long as
M < 500 000 g·mol−1. However, it is a good practice to analyze
the polymer solutions within 24 h of their preparation.
11.2 Polymer Standards—The same procedure as described
in 11.1 is used with the exception that “cocktails” of two or
more narrow MWD polymer standards be prepared in the same
flask. Such cocktail solutions are useful for MW calibration
and for determining resolution. It is recommended that higher
MW polymer standards (M > 800 000 g·mol−1) be prepared as
single, more dilute solutions to reduce problems relating to
polymer size in solution and concentration during calibration.
NOTE 7—To ensure good precision, the mass of each injected standard
and sample must be consistent from analysis to analysis.
11.3 Low MW Standards—The same procedure as described
in 11.1 is used to prepare dilute solutions (0.1 % w/v) of low
MW standards such as o-dichlorobenzene for determining the
plate count number (see 12.1). Dilute solutions (≤0.01 % w ⁄v)
of low MW compounds also are sometimes prepared to
introduce internal standards into polymer solutions. “Stock”
solutions containing an internal standard, such as sulfur when
THF is the solvent, have been used directly in the preparation
of polymer solutions or be added as aliquots to solutions
already prepared.
NOTE 8—A typical “stock” solution contains 0.03 % w ⁄v sulfur can be
prepared using THF from the solvent reservoir. It is sometimes desirable
to use an ultrasonic device to assist dissolution of the sulfur. Sulfur can be
detected using differential refractive index and UV (254- nm) detectors.
11.4 Filtration—It is recommended that all solutions be
filtered through membrane filters to remove lint and other
materials likely to obstruct the columns and other system
components. Except for very high MW samples, membrane
filters with pore sizes in the range from 0.2 to 0.5 µm are
recommended. (The membrane pore size must not exceed 5
µm.) The filters must be inert to the solvent and not become
clogged during filtration.
NOTE 9—Filtration often reveals the presence of gel in solutions even
though the solutions appear clear to the eye, as is the case with many

microgels. During filtration, gel particles are likely to plug the pores of the
filter, noticeable by an excessive pressure needed for filtration. If such an
obstruction occurs, the soluble portion of the polymer may be partially
removed during filtration, the obstructed membrane now acting as an
ultra-filtration device. In this case, the polymer in the filtrate may no
longer be representative of the soluble portion of the sample. Therefore, if
extensive plugging of the membrane pores is indicated, the meaning of the
chromatographic results is open to doubt.
11.5 Test for Sample Solution Suitability—The mass of
polymer injected for an HPSEC analysis is typically between
0.05 and 0.5 mg depending on the expected breadth of the
molecular weight distribution. Use smaller sample size for
polymers of narrower MW distribution or higher MW. This
method assumes that the mass of polymer injected is suffi-
ciently small such that the hydrodynamic volume of the
polymer and the chromatographic separation mechanism do
not depend upon the mass or concentration of polymer in-
jected. However, if the injected solution concentration is too
high, especially for higher polymer molecular weight samples,
the peak elution volume (time) and shape of the chromatogram
will be affected and possible leads to an erroneous MW
determination. It is therefore advisable to rerun an unknown
sample or standard at one half its original concentration (while
doubling detector sensitivity) to ensure that its peak elution is
reproducible. If a change is observed, the run shall be repeated
with a still lower concentration of sample. The relationship
between log MW and mass injected is usually a continuous
function. Dilutions shall be made until a low-range mass is
achieved which still provides adequate signal-to-noise to
distinguish between MW values of interest. For polystyrene in
THF, the slope of the plot of log MW versus mass injected is
small; therefore, repeated dilutions will not greatly affect the
determined MW.
12. Performance Requirements
12.1 Plate Count Number—The plate count number, N, is a
dimensionless quantity related to column efficiency and pro-
vides an indication of dispersion processes in chromatographic
systems. Various procedures and methods of calculation have
been successfully applied to estimate N. Users of this test
method are advised to follow recommendations of the column
manufacturer when initially evaluating their columns. The
plate count number are to be determined under the same
conditions as those applied for this test method. For example,
utilize the following test conditions for both plate count
determination and testing:
Solvent—Tetrahydrofuran (THF)
Temperature—30°C
Flow Rate—1 mL·min−1
Test Solute—o-dichlorobenzene
Concentration—# 0.1 % w ⁄v
Injection Volume—1 to 5 µL
12.1.1 Assuming that the solute peak is symmetrical and has
a nearly Gaussian shape, the following approximation is used
to calculate the plate count number:
plate count, N 5 16 ~ V R /W ! 2
where:
VR = peak elution volume (or time) measured at the peak
maximum of the test solute and
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5296 − 19
W = peak width in elution volume (or time) units as
determined by measuring the distance between the
baseline intercepts of lines drawn tangent to the peak
inflection points as shown in Fig. 2.
12.1.2 Since N is a dimensionless parameter, the plate count
number has the same value, regardless, whether VR and W are
measured in elution volume or elution time units. To compare
plate count numbers for different systems, N is usually normal-
ized with respect to the total column(s) length, L; that is:
N' 5 N/L (2)
12.1.3 The HPSEC columns are expected to equal or exceed
N' = 13 100 plates·m−1. The HPSEC systems not meeting this
performance requirement shall be examined and, if necessary,
the column(s) replaced. Occasional monitoring of the plate
count is useful in trouble-shooting problems in the total
HPSEC system as well as problems relating to column(s)
performance.
12.2 Resolution—Resolution, R, is a more meaningful pa-
rameter for chromatographic performance than plate count
number N'. R provides an indication of the separating
capability, as well as dispersion or band broadening effects, of
a column or column set. The resolution of two standard
polymers having narrow MWDs (M̄w/Mn < 1.1) is defined as
the specific resolution:
R s 5 2· ~ V R2 2 V R1 ! / @ ~ W 1 1W 2 ! ·log10 ~ M 1 /M 2 ! # (3)
where:
VR 1, VR 2 = peak elution volumes or times measured at the
peak maximum of polymer Standards 1 and 2,
W1, W2 = peak widths of Standards 1 and 2 measured in
elution volume or times units as indicated in
Fig. 3, and
M1, M2 = peak molecular weights of Standards 1 and 2.
12.2.1 The two standards shall differ in known molecular
weight values by a factor of about ten and shall be chromato-
graphed at a concentration of ≤0.05 % w/v and an injection
volume ≤100 µL. It is recommended that the resolution
parameter Rs be determined over each decade of molecular
weight for which this test method applies and that at least three
polymer standards be used. This test method requires that
calculated R s values equal or exceed 1.7 for sufficient resolu-
tion over the applicable molecular weight range for samples
analyzed. Since resolution is a dimensionless parameter, Rs will
have the same value as long as consistent units (elution volume
or elution time) are used for its evaluation.
(1)
FIG. 2 Measurement of Peak Width
5

FIG. 3 Determination of Resolution, Rs , Using Narrow MWD
Polystyrene Standards M1 > M2
NOTE 10—Mixtures or “cocktails” of three or more polymer standards
may be run to determine several Rs values with a single injection. For
example, a mixture of polystyrene standards of molecular weight 10 000;
100 000 and 1 000 000 g·mol−1 may be run to determine Rs over the MW
range from 10 000 to 1 000 000 g·mol−1. Alternatively, a mixture of 2000;
20 000; 200 000 and 2 000 000 g·mol−1 standards may be run to determine
Rs over a broader MW range. It is important to keep solution concentra-
tions sufficiently low to avoid possible concentration effects (see 11.5).
12.2.2 Baseline resolution shall be observed for the elution
peaks generated by mixtures of standards as previously de-
scribed. Such mixtures are extremely useful in determining
changes in HPSEC system performance and shall be run
frequently to ensure calibration (see 13.2).
12.2.3 Resolution has also been defined in terms of the slope
of the HPSEC calibration curve (see 13.4). Present the calibra-
tion curve using a straight line with Slope S over the elution
volume region of the polymer samples being analyzed, and Eq
3 becomes:
R s 5 @ 20.5 S· ~ W 1 1W 2 ! # 21
If W = W1 × W2 for polymer standards eluting within the
straight region of the calibration curve, a limiting value of
resolution will be defined as follows:
limR s 5 ~ 2W·S ! 21
In this case, changes in the slope of the calibration curve or
peak width of a polymer standard would indicate a change in
HPSEC system performance.
12.3 Detector Response—Select HPSEC operating condi-
tions and detector settings to optimize detector response. The
user is referred to Practice E685 as a guide for testing the
performance of liquid chromatography detectors. Practice
E685 addresses determination of detector response in Sections
5 and 7. In order for this test method to be valid, the detected
peak height or total integrated peak area of the eluted polymer
must be directly proportional to the mass of polymer injected.
A linear (Beer-Lambert law) relationship must be demonstrated
for polystyrene as shown in Fig. 2.
12.4 Baseline Stability—Conditions must be selected to
minimize baseline noise. Practice E685 classifies noise as
short-term, long-term and drift. The inverse frequency or time
period of short-term noise is much shorter than the elution time
of a polymer sample and therefore has the potential to be used
to define the lower limit of detectability. In general, short-term
noise shall not exceed 2 % of the maximum polymer peak
signal. Long-term noise refers to noise over a time interval
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5296 − 19
similar to that of a polymer peak (1 to 10 min) and therefore
must be minimized before analyses are conducted. The occur-
rence of long-term noise usually signifies that the chromato-
graphic system is not functioning properly. Long-term noise
shall not exceed 5 % of the maximum polymer peak signal.
Drift is defined as the average slope of the noise envelope
measured over a period of 1 h. Drift is not a problem if the
slope is constant over the time required to run an HPSEC
analysis and if the data handling system is capable of correct-
ing for sloping baselines. Erroneous results is likely to occur if
drift exceeds 2 % of the maximum polymer peak signal and the
data system is unable to compensate for a sloping baseline.
12.5 Flow Rate—If uncorrected, small differences (> 0.3 %)
in the solvent flow rate, between the time the HPSEC system is
calibrated and when sample analyses are run, will have the
potential to cause large systematic errors in MW values
obtained. Determine the average flow rate of the system by
measuring either the volume or weight of solvent eluted over
the time interval required for an analysis. If the flow rate varies
by more than 0.3 % over a period of several days, users are
strongly advised to add a flow-measuring device to their
system or to include an internal standard with samples injected
for monitoring changes in eluent flow rate.
13. Calibration
13.1 Selection of Polystyrene Standards—Prepare fresh so-
lutions of polystyrene calibration standards as outlined in 11.2.
The calibration solutions shall be as dilute as possible to reduce
concentration effects. Indeed since the solutions are used only
for calibration and are not being analyzed for MW, much
higher noise levels are acceptable than what is indicated in
(4) 12.4. Equivalent standards from any source are acceptable. A
minimum number of three standards per decade of molecular
weight need to be run to calibrate over the MW range covered
by the samples being analyzed. The samples need to be
chromatographed first to establish the estimated range.
(5)
13.2 Injection of Polystyrene Standards—Make injections
with a clean micro-syringe (or automatic injector system).
Flush the injector loop with solvent and expel air bubbles from
the syringe before each injection. Add the internal standard, if
used, to solution before injection. Filtered solutions containing
two or more polystyrene standards are injected for calibration
if the molecular weights of the standards are less than 800 000
g·mol−1 and the elution peaks of the standards are baseline
resolved as shown in Fig. 3.
13.2.1 Users are advised to inject higher MW (≥ 800 000
g·mol−1) standards as separate solutions and at several different
concentrations. Each calibration standard shall be completely
eluted before the next standard solution is injected. The
injection volumes of all standard solutions must be identical,
regardless of concentration. The maximum recommended in-
jection volume is related to the diameter (and packing volume)
of the HPSEC column(s). For columns with diameters of 0.6 to
0.8 cm, the injection volume shall be ≤100 µL. For column
diameters of 0.8 to 1.0 cm, injection volumes ≤150 µL are
recommended.
13.3 Data Acquisition—Optimize data system parameters to
determine elution peak maxima and corresponding elution
6
 D5296 − 19
volumes (or times) for the various polymer standards (and
internal standard). The elution volume is the product of elution
time and flow rate. Plot elution volumes (or times) at peak
maxima determined for each of the higher MW (≥ 800 000
g·mol−1) standards versus the concentration or mass inject and
then extrapolate to “zero” concentration to estimate the “true”
or concentration independent values of VR. (Determine and
record an average peak elution volume (or time) of the internal
standard VIS when the system is calibrated.)
NOTE 11—Measure peak elution volume (or time) from the point at
which the sample is injected to the location (or time) of the observed
maximum of the recorded chromatographic peak (see Fig. 2).
13.4 Generation of Calibration Curve—Obtain the HPSEC
calibration curve by plotting the measured peak elution
volumes, VR (or time) versus the logarithmic calculated “peak”
or mean molecular weight values (Mw·Mn)½ of the calibration
standards. By the nature of the HPSEC separation mechanism,
the calibration curve generally assumes an s-shape (as shown
by the dashed line in Fig. 5) that asymptotically approaches
total exclusion near the void volume at high MW (Solute A)
and approaches total permeation near the total column liquid
volume at low MW (Solute D). The useful separation region
covering a finite MW range resides between these two ex-
tremes. Use data handling systems or computer software to
treat the calibration data, if available.
13.4.1 This test method does not discriminate between the
various treatments except to recommend that users attempt to FIG. 5 HPSEC Calibration Curve
smooth or obtain a “best fit” of the data since errors are
associated with MW values reported for some standard poly- 14. Procedure
mers. The objective of the calibration curve is to relate an
experimental elution parameter VR to a respective polystyrene 14.1 Preparation for Analysis—Prepare polymer sample
MW value. solutions as described in 11.1, 11.4, and 11.5 and add an
13.4.2 Through column design or selection, it is sometimes internal standard, if used, to each sample solution before
possible to obtain a calibration curve that is essentially linear injection. Alternatively, use a “stock” solution containing an
over a broad MW range. For polymers that elute within this internal standard for monitoring eluent flow rate to prepare
region (for example, Solutes B and C in Fig. 5), a simple polymer sample solutions (see 11.3). Prepare the apparatus and
proportional relationship exists between Log M and VR. The fulfill the performance requirements (see Section 12).
proportionality constant equals the slope S of the linear region 14.2 Injection of Sample Solutions—Follow guidelines de-
of the calibration curve as follows: scribed in 13.2. The injection volume must be identical to that
log10 M 5 S o 1S·V R (6)
selected for calibration. A sharp increase or “pulse” in back
pressure upon injection indicates a serious problem in the
and So is a constant for the system. HPSEC system that must be remedied before continuing with
this test method. The sample and internal standard, if present,
must be fully eluted before the next sample is injected.
14.3 Baseline Determination—Satisfy baseline criteria dis-
cussed in 12.4. Identify elution volumes Va and Vb correspond-
ing to the beginning and end of the polymer chromatogram (see
Fig. 6). The baseline between Va and Vb is assumed to be linear;
that is, a straight line.

FIG. 4 Linear Detector Response to Polystyrene Sample Concen- FIG. 6 Typical Chromatogram for Which This Test Method is
tration Applicable

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
14.3.1 The establishment of Va, the low elution volume
(high MW) end of the chromatogram, is straightforward. Here,
the baseline is usually stable and not influenced by low MW
impurities.
14.3.2 The establishment of Vb is more difficult and depends
largely upon the separation of the polymer peak from peaks of
low MW impurities and the recovery of a stable baseline. With
baseline resolution and recovery the choice of Vb is obvious.
14.3.3 Fig. 6 shows the chromatogram for a polystyrene
sample with adequate separation between polymer and impu-
rity peaks and good baseline recovery. In this example, Va and
Vb were chosen to be 18.99 and 29.49 mL, respectively.
14.3.4 Fig. 7 shows the chromatogram for a polystyrene
with incomplete separation of the polymer and impurity peaks.
The polymer apparently has a low MW “tail” that extends into
the region (M < 2000 g·mol−1) where this test method is no
longer valid. This test method does not encompass the problem
of establishing the correct baseline and cut off limits for the
chromatogram shown in Fig. 7 and therefore is not applicable
to such a sample.
14.4 Data Acquisition—It is possible that data systems and
computer software handle data acquisition differently. Upon
acquisition, data under the polymer elution peak is usually
handled in discrete segments Ai (integrated area slices) or as
digitized chromatogram heights Hi by recording the vertical
displacements between the chromatogram trace and the base-
line at elution volumes Vi over designated intervals. A mini-
mum of 40 area segments or heights are required by this test
method.
14.5 Flow Rate Correction—If the HPSEC system does not
contain a continuous flow rate monitor or some device, such as
a syphon dump, that automatically and precisely monitors
elution volume increments, then the flow rate must be within
0.3 % of its value measured at calibration. Otherwise, using an
internal standard is recommended. When an internal standard
is used, correct sample elution volumes Vi ' or times ti ' (made
consistent with calibration values) by the following relation:
corrected V i 5 V i '· ~ V IS! / ~ V IS! ' (7)
or:
corrected t i 5 t i '· ~ t IS! / ~ t IS! ' (8)
where:
(VIS) and (tIS ) = average elution volume and time,
respectively, of the internal standard mea-
sured at calibration and
(VIS)' and (tIS )' = elution volume and time of the internal
standard obtained with the sample analy-
sis.
FIG. 7 Example of Chromatogram for Which This Test Method is
Not Applicable
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
15. Calculation
15.1 Tabulation of Data—Record data as indicated in Table
X1.1 of Appendix X1. Obtain the appropriate values for M
using the MW calibration curve outlined in 13.4.
15.2 Calculation of Molecular Weight Averages—Calculate
the number-, weight-, and z-average molecular weights (M̄n ,
M̄w , and M̄z ) using data from Table X1.1 and the following
expressions.
N N
Mn 5 ( A / ( ~A
i51
i
i51
i /M i ! (9)
N N
Mw 5 ( ~A
i51
i ·M i ! / (A
i51
i (10)
N N
Mz 5 (
i51
~ A i ·M i 2 ! / ( ~ A i ·M i !
i51
(11)
If the elution volume interval ∆Vi is constant, parameters Ai
and Mi are the chromatographic peak slice area and polystyrene
MW associated with the (corrected) elution volume Vi and N is
equal to the number of data points obtained from the chro-
matogram between Va to Vb (see 14.3). An example of this
method of calculating the molecular weight averages is given
in Appendix X1. If N is sufficiently large, the use of area
segments Ai or peak heights Hi will yield equivalent results.
15.3 Calculation of Intrinsic Viscosity—Determine the in-
trinsic viscosity [η] of a polymer in dilute solution experimen-
tally using Test Method D2857.5 The value of [η] is related to
polymer MW by the following Mark-Houwink equation:
@ η # 5 K·M av (12)
where K and a are constants for a given polymer/solvent
system at a specified temperature and Mv is the viscosity-
average molecular weight that is calculated from HPSEC data:
Mv 5 F( ~
i51
N
A i ·M ia ! /
N
(A
i51
i G 1/a
(13)
Values of K and a appropriate to the polymer type and the
solvent and temperature conditions used in Test Method D2857
must be applied when calculating the parameter from HPSEC
data. Acceptable parameters for polystyrene in dilute THF
solution at 25°C are K = 0.016 mL·g−1 and a = 0.706.5
15.4 Molecular Weight Distributions: Cumulative Weight
Fraction Distribution—Calculate the cumulative distribution
by integrating the chromatogram to different elution volumes
(molecular weights) using standard numerical integration pro-
cedures and then dividing these areas by the total area under
the chromatogram. This area ratio is the cumulative weight
fraction Wi and equals the weight fraction of polymer having
retention volumes greater than Vi and molecular weights less
than Mi. To display the distribution graphically, plot Wi versus
log10 Mi. An example of this method of calculating the
cumulative weight fraction distribution using peak area slices
is given in Appendix X1. If peak heights are determined and
the elution volume interval Vi is constant, the cumulative
weight fraction of solute of MW less than and equal to Mi is
defined as follows and illustrated in Fig. X2.1:
5
Provder, T., and Rosen, E. M., Separation Science, SESCA, 5, 1970, p. 437.
 D5296 − 19
i i N
analysis of linear polystyrene samples. Inaccurate molecular
Wi 5 1 2 (H
j51
N , j 512 ( H /( H
j51
j
j51
j (14)
weight values will be obtained if this test method is applied to
15.5 Molecular Weight Distributions: Differential Molecu- branched polystyrene samples.
lar Weight Distribution—Weight differential distribution func- 17.2 Tables 2-8 are based on an interlaboratory study
tions fw (M) and Fw (log10 M) are defined in Appendix X2. If conducted in 1990 in accordance with Practice E691, involving
determined correctly, plots of the differential distribution 3 polystyrene materials tested by 28 laboratories. For each
functions versus log10 M obtained using different HPSEC material, test solutions were prepared by the individual
systems to analyze the same sample will be identical. The laboratories, and these solutions were analyzed in triplicate
distribution function is defined as follows and illustrated in Fig. using various liquid chromatography (HPSEC) systems and
X2.1: test conditions. Some test results were rejected because the
F w ~ log10 M i ! 5 2H N,i / ~ dlog10 M/dV! (15) chromatographic systems failed to meet performance criteria
for plate count (N), resolution (Rs), calibration, flow rate,
The differential molecular weight distribution is determined detector response, baseline stability, data acquisition, or sample
using Eq 16. preparation. For this reason, test results from only 18 labora-
dW/d ~ log10M ! 5 log10M (16) tories are included in the statistical analysis presented in Tables
2-8.
16. Report
NOTE 12—The explanations of r and R are only intended to present a
16.1 Report the following information: meaningful way of considering the approximate precision of this test
16.1.1 Apparatus: method. The data of Tables 2-8 should not be applied to acceptance or
16.1.1.1 System type and model number, rejection of materials, as these data apply only to the materials tested in
the round robin and are unlikely to be rigorously representative of other
16.1.1.2 Column(s) packing type, dimensions, and
lots, formulations, conditions, materials, or laboratories. Users of this test
manufacturer, method should apply the principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate
16.1.1.3 Column temperature, °C, data specific to the materials and laboratory (or between specific labora-
16.1.1.4 Solvent (plus additives and treatment, if any), tories). The principles of 17.2.1 – 17.2.1.3 would then be valid for such
16.1.1.5 Solvent flow rate (mL·min−1), data.
16.1.1.6 Detector type and model number, 17.2.1 Concept of r and R in Tables 2-8—If Sr and SR have
16.1.1.7 Internal standard or flow monitor (if used), or both, been calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test
16.1.1.8 Injection volume, µL, and results that were averages from testing 3 solutions for each test
16.1.1.9 Polymer sample solution concentration (mg·mL−1). result, then:
16.1.2 Plate Count and Resolution: 17.2.1.1 Repeatability Limit (r)—The value below which
Plate Count N' (plates/metre) = ___, using ___ as the test solute. the absolute difference between two individual test results
Resolution Rs = ___, using standards ___ and ___ and (Eq 3-5) ___. obtained under repeatability conditions may be expected to
16.1.3 Calibration Standards: occur with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
Source Description (Mw ·Mn)½ Peak VR 17.2.1.2 Reproducibility Limit (R)—The value below which
1. the absolute difference between two individual test results
2. obtained under reproducibility conditions may be expected to
3.
4. occur with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
5. 17.2.1.3 When required, conducting equivalence testing on
6. numerical data from two sources shall be conducted in accor-
etc.
dance with E2935 or any known method for judging the
16.1.4 Calculated Molecular Weight Averages and Hetero- equivalence of two means, for example a t-test.
geneity Parameters:
17.3 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
M̄n = _____
M̄w = _____ M̄w /M̄n = _____ estimate bias of this method.
M̄z = _____ M̄z /M̄n = _____
18. Keywords
16.1.5 Calculated Viscosity-Average MW and Intrinsic Vis-
cosity: 18.1 high-performance size exclusion chromatography
M̄v = _____ [η] = _____ mL·g −1 (HPSEC); molecular weight average; molecular weight distri-
using K = _____ mL·g−1 and a = _____ bution; polystyrene
17. Precision and Bias TABLE 2 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mn Measurements
for Polystyrene
17.1 Limitations and Considerations—To obtain molecular
weights from high-performance size exclusion chromatogra- Material Average Sr SR r R

phy (HPSEC), calibration must be employed using standard A 98 389 4 524 7 850 12 667 21 679
B 118 533 4 691 10 869 13 134 30 433
samples of known molecular weight and the same chemical C 159 898 1 600 11 433 4 481 32 013
type as the unknowns. This test method is limited to the

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
TABLE 3 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mw Measurements
for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 258 122 6 131 17 860 17 167 50 008
B 383 459 8 043 33 637 22 521 94 182
C 167 745 3 036 12 057 8 501 33 761

TABLE 4 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mz Measurements

for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 493 511 31 966 73 406 89 504 205 536
B 935 058 28 228 160 256 80 864 448 717
C 174 470 3 787 13 199 10 604 36 957

TABLE 5 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mw /Mn

Measurements for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 2.6380 0.0871 0.2675 0.2440 0.7491
B 3.2572 0.1175 0.3890 0.3290 1.0890
C 1.0496 0.0111 0.0230 0.0311 0.0643

TABLE 6 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mz /Mn

Measurements for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 5.0912 0.2314 0.7676 0.6480 2.1493
B 7.9011 0.4956 1.5701 1.3877 4.3963
C 1.0912 0.0138 0.0366 0.0385 0.1023

TABLE 7 Repeatability and Reproducibility of Mv Measurements

for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 233 518 9.086 17 422 25 441 48 783
B 335 318 5.142 23 424 14 397 65 586
C 166 381 630 11 577 1 763 32 416

TABLE 8 Repeatability and Reproducibility of [η] Measurements

for Polystyrene
Material Average Sr SR r R
A 97.601 1.925 5.239 5.390 14.670
B 126.639 2.209 7.568 6.186 21.192
C 77.458 1.496 4.087 4.188 11.443

APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. SAMPLE CALCULATIONS FROM SECTIONS 14 and 15

See Table X1.1.

TABLE X1.1 Sample Calculations From Sections 14 and 15A
i
1 Vi (mL) Mi (g·mol−1) Ai o Ai Wi Fw (log10 Mi)
i51

1 18.99 2 175 000 0 0 1 0

2 19.14 1 993 000 70 70 0.9998 0.0041
3 19.29 1 828 000 150 220 0.9995 0.0089

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
TABLE X1.1 Continued
i
1 Vi (mL) Mi (g·mol−1) Ai o Ai Wi Fw (log10 Mi)
i51

4 19.44 1 680 000 230 450 0.9990 0.0138

5 19.59 1 344 000 340 790 0.9983 0.0207
6 19.74 1 422 000 455 1245 0.9973 0.0281
7 19.89 1 310 000 650 1895 0.9958 0.0403
8 20.04 1 207 000 879 2774 0.9939 0.0553
9 20.19 1 115 000 1271 4045 0.9911 0.0814
10 20.34 1 030 000 1756 5801 0.9872 0.1138
11 20.49 952 900 2273 8074 0.9822 0.1482
12 20.64 881 700 2906 10 980 0.9758 0.1911
13 20.79 816 500 3598 14 578 0.9678 0.2394
14 20.94 756 900 4330 18 908 0.9583 0.2906
15 21.09 701 800 5141 24 049 0.9470 0.3474
16 21.24 651 200 5950 29 999 0.9338 0.4054
17 21.39 604 600 6778 36 777 0.9189 0.4661
18 21.54 561 800 7583 44 360 0.9021 0.5264
19 21.69 522 300 8491 52 851 0.8834 0.5923
20 21.84 485 700 9339 62 190 0.8628 0.6551
21 21.99 451 900 10 159 72 349 0.8404 0.7181
22 22.14 420 700 10 899 83 248 0.8164 0.7735
23 22.29 391 600 11 577 94 825 0.7908 0.8241
24 22.44 364 700 12 050 106 875 0.7643 0.8640
25 22.59 339 900 12 302 119 177 0.7371 0.8887
26 22.74 316 900 12 918 132 095 0.7086 0.9352
27 22.89 295 400 13 202 145 297 0.6795 0.9560
28 23.04 275 400 13 478 158 775 0.6498 0.9759
29 23.19 256 700 13 553 172 328 0.6199 0.9870
30 23.34 239 500 13 666 185 994 0.5897 0.9969
31 23.49 223 300 13 711 199 705 0.5595 0.9940
32 23.64 208 200 13 565 213 270 0.5296 0.9888
33 23.79 194 300 13 541 226 811 0.4997 0.9904
34 23.94 181 200 13 353 240 164 0.4702 0.9690
35 24.09 168 900 13 104 253 268 0.4413 0.9518
36 24.24 157 600 12 867 266 135 0.4130 0.9352
37 24.39 146 900 11 852 277 987 0.3868 0.8581
38 24.54 136 900 12 277 290 264 0.3597 0.8837
39 24.69 127 500 11 932 302 196 0.3334 0.8528
40 24.84 118 800 11 500 313 696 0.3080 0.8246
41 24.99 110 700 11 163 324 859 0.2834 0.7963
42 25.14 103 000 10 684 335 543 0.2599 0.7558
43 25.29 95 890 10 248 345 791 0.2372 0.7226
44 25.44 89 210 9803 355 594 0.2156 0.6858
45 25.59 82 930 9351 364 945 0.1950 0.6506
46 25.74 77 090 8869 373 814 0.1754 0.6121
47 25.89 71 580 8278 382 092 0.1572 0.5650
48 26.04 66 430 7753 389 845 0.1401 0.5276
49 26.19 61 660 7306 397 151 0.1240 0.4928
50 26.34 57 140 6728 403 879 0.1091 0.4491
51 26.49 52 950 6191 410 070 0.0955 0.4102
52 26.64 49 020 5709 415 779 0.0829 0.3690
53 26.79 45 250 5189 420 968 0.0714 0.3360
54 26.94 41 900 4704 425 672 0.0610 0.3053
55 27.09 38 700 4171 329 843 0.0518 0.2647
56 27.24 35 700 3681 433 524 0.0437 0.2312
57 27.39 32 920 3286 436 810 0.0365 0.2040
58 27.54 30 320 2913 439 723 0.0300 0.1788
59 27.69 27 900 2525 442 248 0.0245 0.1531
60 27.84 25 640 2178 444 426 0.0197 0.1297
61 27.99 23 520 1905 446 331 0.0155 0.1122
62 28.14 21 580 1562 447 893 0.0120 0.0911
63 28.29 19 760 1313 449 206 0.0091 0.0754
64 28.44 18 080 1148 450 354 0.0066 0.0651
65 28.59 16 520 892 451 246 0.0046 0.0499
66 28.74 15 080 774 452 020 0.0029 0.0426
67 28.89 13 740 580 452 600 0.0016 0.0315
68 29.04 12 510 401 453 001 0.0008 0.0215
69 29.19 11 360 250 453 251 0.0002 0.0132
70 29.34 10 314 95 453 346 0 0.0049
71 29.49 9340 0 453 346 0 0

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19
N N N N
A
M n 5 o A i / o s A i /M i d 5115 000 g·mol21 M w 5 o s A i ·M i d / o A i 5253 000 g·mol21
i51 i51 i51 i51
N N
M z 5 o s A i ·M i 2 d / o s A i ·M i d 5446 000 g·mol21 M w /M n 52.20 M z /M n 53.88
i51 i51

Mv 5 Fo N

i51
N

s A i ·M i 2 d / o A i
i51
G 1/a
5229 000 g·mol21 f η g 50.016 M v 0.706 597.3 mL·g 21

X2. DERIVATION OF WEIGHT DIFFERENTIAL AND CUMULATIVE MOLECULAR WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION FUNCTIONS

X2.1 The weight differential distribution of molecular 2H N ~ V !

fw ~M! 5 (X2.7)
weight fw (M) is defined as the weight population density or 2.303 M ~ dlog10 M/dV!
frequency distribution of molecular weights. The weight frac-
tion of polymer is fw (M)dM in the molecular weight interval M and:
to (M + dM) or Fw (log10 M)dlog10 M from log10 M to (log10 2H N ~ V !
F w ~ log10 M ! 5 (X2.8)
M + dlog10 M). Since: ~ dlog10 M/dV!
f w ~ M ! dM 5 f w ~ M ! 2.303 M dlog10 M 5 F w ~ log10 M ! dlog10 M X2.1.4 The derivatives in Eq X2.7 and Eq X2.8 are best
(X2.1) obtained by analytically differentiating the calibration curve.
X2.1.1 Furthermore, the weight fraction integrated over all For example, if a polynomial is fit to the calibration points:
molecular weights equals unity; that is, log10 M 5 a1b·V1c·V 2 1f·V 3 (X2.9)
` `
*0
f w ~ M ! dM 5 * 0
F w ~ log10 M ! dlog10 M 5 1 (X2.2) Where a, b, c, and f are constants, then the derivative to be
substituted into Eq X2.7 and Eq X2.8 is:
X2.1.2 For a mass detector the unnormalized detector signal
H(V) is given by the following: dlog10 M/dV 5 b12c·V13f·V 2 (X2.10)

H ~ V ! 5 }C ~ V ! (X2.3) X2.2 Using finite difference expressions to approximate the

where C(V) is the concentration of solute in mass per unit derivative should be avoided because of inaccuracies for
volume eluted at retention volume, V, and is the detector nonlinear portions of the curve. Also, caution is advised in
response factor. The normalized signal HN (V) is equal there- fitting polynomials to investigate how the polynomial extrapo-
fore to the raw chromatogram; and the weight fraction of solute lates into regions beyond the first and last data points of the
in the elution volume range V to V + dV, is given by the calibration curve. The curve fitting procedure must give
following equation: reasonable extrapolations. Although not always possible, the
C ~ V ! dV H ~ V ! dV
best approach is to work only within the range of the
` 5 ` 5 H N ~ V ! dV (X2.4) calibration data and not rely on any extrapolation. The follow-
*
0
C ~ V ! dV * 0
H ~ V ! dV ing cumulative weight distribution function is generated from
X2.1.3 The integral area may be calculated for both uniform Eq X2.4 and represents the weight fraction of solute in the
and nonuniform elution volume intervals ∆V using the trap- elution volume range Va to V or molecular weight range Ma to
ezoidal rule: M:

(S D
V

* `
H ~ V ! dV 5
N21
H i 1H i11
·∆V i (X2.5)
W~M! 5 1 2 * Va
H N ~ V ! dV (X2.11)
0 i51 2

where: The weight fraction less than and equal to Mi is given by the
following:
∆Vi = Vi +1 − Vi.
(S D
i21
H N,j 1H N,j11
From Eq X2.2 and Eq X2.4 the identity: Wi 5 1 2 ·∆V j (X2.12)
j52 2
` `
*0
fw~ M ! dM 2 * 0
H N ~ V ! dV (X2.6)
X2.3 The weight differential and cumulative distribution
and the weight differential distribution functions are ob- plots for the data in Appendix X1, plotted using Eq X2.8 and
tained by: Eq X2.12, are shown as Fig. X2.1 and Fig. X2.2.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5296 − 19

FIG. X2.1 Weight Differential Distribution Plot for the Data of

Appendix X1 as Computed From Eq X2.5b

FIG. X2.2 Cumulative Weight Distribution Plot for the Data of

Appendix X1 as Computed From Eq X2.6b

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D4020 – 11) that may impact the use of this standard. (November 1, 2019)

(1) Updated definitions in Precision and Bias, Section 17. (2) Removed permissive language from several sections.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:20:17 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5319 − 17 An American National Standard

Standard Specification for

Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5319; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This specification covers the classification, materials of
construction, workmanship, physical requirements, and meth-
ods of testing glass-fiber-reinforced polyester composite wall
and ceiling panels intended for use in light construction and
semi-structural applications.
1.2 Supplementary information on chemical resistance, im-
pact resistance, and installation practice are provided in Ap-
pendix X1.
1.3 The classification of these composite panels into classes
based on relative response to a laboratory test shall not be
considered a fire-hazard classification.
1.8 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.9 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

1.4 Laboratory flammability tests (Test Methods E84 and
D1929) applicable to this specification should be used to
measure and describe the properties of materials, products, or
assemblies in response to heat and flame under controlled
laboratory conditions and should not be used to describe or
appraise the fire hazard or conditions. However, results may be
used as elements of a fire risk assessment which takes into
account all of the factors which are pertinent to an assessment
of the fire hazard of a particular end use.
1.5 The intent of this specification is to define the class,
grade, and general laminate properties of the composite wall
and ceiling liner panels in order to ensure a quality product
which will perform in the intended application. This specifi-
cation is not intended to restrict or limit technological changes
affecting performance when changes are agreed upon between
the purchaser and manufacturer.
1.6 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are provided
for information only.
1.7 The text of this specification references notes and
footnotes that provide explanatory material. These notes and
footnotes (excluding those in Tables and Figures) shall not be
considered as requirements of this specification.
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.24 on Plastic Building
Products.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2017. Published September 2017. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D5319 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D5319-17.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D374/D374M Test Methods for Thickness of Solid Electri-
cal Insulation
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D1929 Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature
of Plastics
D2244 Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and
Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E631 Terminology of Building Constructions
3. Terminology
3.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Terminolo-
gies D883 and E631 and abbreviations with Terminology
D1600, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 camber, n—non-linearity of the long axis of a panel.
NOTE 2—In the process of water jet, knife, saw, or rotary shear
trimming of a continuous panel, sidewards motion of the panel through the
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:06 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5319 − 17
cutting medium can be induced by imbalances in the system. The resulting
trim cuts, although maintaining parallelism between the long sides, may
describe a continuous curve, rather than a straight line along the long axis
of the panel. Imbalances in side-to-side cure rates or material distribution
may also produce this phenomenon. This curvature of the long axis may
create problems with installation of the panel. Limits are placed on the
degree of non-linearity to minimize those problems.
4. Classification
4.1 The panels covered by this specification are divided into
four classifications based on relative response to the laboratory
flammability of Test Method E84.
4.1.1 Class A—Flame spread index 0 to 25, smoke devel-
opment index of 450 or less.
4.1.2 Class B—Flame spread index 26 to 75, smoke devel-
opment index of 450 or less.
4.1.3 Class C—Flame spread index 76 to 200, smoke
development index of 450 or less.
4.1.4 Class D—General purpose, no flame spread or smoke
development indices.
NOTE 3—Refer to 1.3 on flammability testing and fire hazard classifi-
cation.
4.2 These classifications may be further subdivided into
grades based on nominal thickness when tested in accordance
with 8.4:
4.2.1 Grade 1—0.027 to 0.033 in. (0.69 to 0.84 mm); 0.030
in. nominal (0.76 mm).
4.2.2 Grade 2—0.036 to 0.044 in. (0.91 to 1.12 mm); 0.040
in. nominal (1.02 mm).
4.2.3 Grade 3—0.040 to 0.050 in. (1.02 to 1.27 mm); 0.045
in. nominal (1.14 mm).
4.2.4 Grade 4—0.054 to 0.066 in. (1.37 to 1.68 mm); 0.060
in. nominal (1.52 mm).
4.2.5 Grade 5—0.067 to 0.083 in. (1.70 to 2.11 mm); 0.075
in. nominal (1.91 mm).
4.2.6 Grade 6—0.081 to 0.099 in. (2.06 to 2.51 mm); 0.090
in. nominal (2.29 mm).
4.2.7 Grade 7—0.108 to 0.132 in. (2.74 to 3.35 mm); 0.120
in. nominal (3.05 mm).
4.3 Within the classification of grade and class of composite
panel described in this specification are commercial products
with the following variations as agreed upon between the
purchaser and manufacturer.
4.3.1 Size (Length and Width)—The nominal sizes available
are 23.75 in. (603.25 mm) to 120 in. (3048 mm) in width and
47.75 in. (1212.85 mm) to 500 continuous feet of coil stock
(152 m) in length.
4.3.2 Thickness—The nominal thicknesses available are
0.0303 in. (0.77 mm) to 0.120 in. (3.05 mm).
4.3.3 Surface—The two most popular surfaces available are
textured and smooth.
5. Materials
5.1 The polyester resin used in the composite shall be a
thermosetting polyester resin with cross-linking monomers
composed of polymeric esters in which the recurring ester
groups are an integral part of the main polymer chain. The resin
shall be reinforced with glass fibers. The polyester resin may
contain additives for various purposes, such as additives to
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:06 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
provide lower smoke density or higher fire retardancy, catalyst
residues, stabilizers, pigments, dyes, filters, or other types of
reinforcing fibers.
6. Physical Properties
6.1 Size (Length and Width)—Tolerance for nominal length
and width specified shall be 60.25 in. (6.35 mm). Panel
lengths over 12 ft (3.7 m) shall have a tolerance of 60.5 in.
(12.7 mm) when measured in accordance with 8.2.
6.2 Squareness—Panels shall be within 0.125 in. (3.18 mm)
of square when measured in accordance with 8.3.
6.3 Thickness—Tolerance on the specified thickness shall be
within 610 % when determined in accordance with 8.4.
6.4 Camber—Tolerance on camber shall be 60.25 in. (6.35
mm) when determined in accordance with 8.5.
6.5 Color—Color shall be as specified by the purchaser and
uniform throughout the sheet when examined in accordance
with 8.6.
6.6 Ignition Properties—All panels shall have a minimum
self-ignition temperature of 650°F (343°C) when tested in
accordance with Test Method D1929.
6.7 All composite wall and ceiling liners shall have a USDA
acceptance for incidental food contact.
7. Workmanship
7.1 The composite shall conform to the nominal
dimensions, shall be fully cured, and shall not contain major
visual cracks, pinholes, foreign inclusions, or surface wrinkles
that would impact or otherwise affect serviceability.
8. Test Methods
8.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens in accor-
dance with Procedure A of Method D618 where conditioning is
required.
8.2 Length and Width—Lay the panel on the flat surface and
measure with a steel tape. Measure the length on both sides and
the center to the nearest 0.0625 in. (1.59 mm) and average the
three measurements. Measure the width at each end and in the
center to the nearest 0.0625 in. and average the three measure-
ments.
8.3 Squareness—Any type of jig that has two rails perpen-
dicular to one another, each length at least equal to the length
of the side of the panel in contact with the rail, may be used to
determine squareness. Place the panels in the jig so that the
longest edge of the panel touches the horizontal rail along the
entire length, and the vertical edge (shorter edge) touches the
vertical rail at some point along the entire length. Measure the
maximum distance between the vertical rail and the short edge
of the panel at the corner opposite the one touching the rail.
Measure to the nearest 0.0625 in. (1.6 mm). Rotate the panel
180° on the axis perpendicular to the face of the panel and
repeat the test.
8.4 Thickness—Thickness readings shall be taken every 6
in. (152 mm) across the width and along the length of the
panel. Measurements shall be taken with a large foot
 D5319 − 17
micrometer, having an anvil size of 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) mini-
mum and accurate to 0.0001 in. (0.003 mm). Refer to Test
Methods D374/D374M. Average all measurements for a final
value.
8.5 Camber—Lay the longest edge of the panel beside a
straightedge on a flat surface with both ends touching the
straight edge. If necessary, rotate the panel 180°. Measure the
greatest distance between the panel and the straightedge to the
nearest 0.0625 in. (1.59 mm).
8.6 Color—Examine the panel visually from a distance of
10 ft (3 m) for color uniformity. Color tolerance may be
checked using outdoor lighting or, in critical applications, a
colorimeter using the Hunter L, a, b scale. Refer to Test
Method D2244. Color tolerance shall be agreed upon between
the purchaser and manufacturer.
8.7 Burning Characteristics—Determine burning character-
istics and smoke development values in accordance with Test
Method E84.
9. Retest and Rejection
9.1 If any panel fails to meet the agreed upon requirements,
a second set of specimens shall be taken for retesting to
establish conformity in accordance with the agreement.
APPENDIX
(Nonmandatory Information)
X1. SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
X1.1 Chemical Resistance—Generally, glass-fiber-
reinforced polyester plastic panels will provide satisfactory
service for long periods of time. However, exposure to chemi-
cal atmospheres may cause greater color change and greater
fiber exposure than exposure to normal conditions. Since it is
impossible to describe all of the possible conditions of expo-
sure to chemical atmospheres, it is recommended that specific
exposure conditions be discussed with the panel manufacturer
prior to purchase.
X1.2 Impact Resistance—Work is presently underway to
develop a test method for impact resistance. Since there are
many methods in determining the impact resistance of glass-
fiber-reinforced polyester plastic panels, it is recommended
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:06 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10. Certification
10.1 Manufacturers shall supply certification of compliance
with this specification in the form of a statement appended or
affixed to invoices, or of labels affixed to panels or to
wrappings. In any form, the certification shall state as follows:
10.1.1 The name of the manufacturer,
10.1.2 The fact of conformance with this specification by
number designation: ASTM D5319,
10.1.3 The nominal weight per square foot (square metre) or
nominal thickness,
10.1.4 Type, and
10.1.5 Grade.
11. Packaging and Package Marking
11.1 Packaging—The panels shall be packed in containers
so constructed as to ensure acceptance by common or other
carriers for safe transportation to the point of delivery.
11.2 Marking:
11.2.1 Shipping containers shall be marked as agreed upon
between the purchaser and manufacturer.
11.2.2 Labels on individual panels shall include Specifica-
tion D5319, type, and grade.
12. Keywords
12.1 building construction; composite panels glass-fiber-
reinforced polyester; laminates; wall and ceiling panels
that Test Method D3029, Method G, be used and the values be
agreed upon between the purchaser and manufacturer prior to
purchase until the new method is developed.
X1.3 Installation Practice—The method of installation has
a bearing on the performance of the composite in use. Consult
the manufacturer’s recommendation for their products. In
addition, a documentFiber Glass Reinforced Panel Council
Installation Guide for On-Site Application of Wall and Ceiling
Panels3 may be used.
X1.4 Physical Properties—See Table X1.1.
3
Developed by the SPI Composites Institute, 355 Lexington Ave., New York,
NY 10017, April 1985.
 D5319 − 17
TABLE X1.1 Typical Physical Properties for Interior Wall and
Ceiling LinerA
ASTM Test
Property ValueB , psi
Method
Flexural strength 8 000 to 10 000 D790
Flexural modulus 0.3 to 0.5 × 106 D790
Tensile strength 6 000 to 8 000 D638
Compressive strength 13 000 to 16 000 D695
A
This table is for reference purposes only. The values shown in Table X1.1 reflect
the typical performance criteria for application on smooth solid-wall surfaces, for
example, plaster, gypsum board, poured concrete, concrete block, etc. Specialized
applications may require values other than those stated in Table Table X1.1. For
example, interior liner for cold storage may require higher values to minimize
possible product failure in extreme conditions.
B
For specific product values, refer to the manufacturers’ published literature. All
published physical property data shall report the test methods used to obtain the
specific data.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5319–12)
that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2017)

(1) Section 2: Added D374M reference, this standard has been (5) Deleted 8.7, renumber 8.8 to 8.7.
reinstated. (6) Deleted old Section 9 (Inspection). Renumbered old Sec-
(2) Section 2: Deleted D3029 reference, standard has been tions 10 – 12 to 9 – 12.
withdrawn. (7) Reworded 9.1.
(3) Deleted 4.3.3, renumbered 4.3.4 to 4.3.3. (8) Reworded 10.1.
(4) Deleted 6.6, renumber 6.7 and 6.8

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:06 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5336 − 15a

Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Polyphthalamide (PPA) Injection Molding Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5336; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This classification system covers polyphthalamide ma-
terials suitable for injection molding.
1.2 The properties included in this classification system are
those required to identify the compositions covered. Other
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics
important to specialized applications are to be specified by
using suffixes as given in Section 5.
1.3 This classification system allows for the use of recycled
materials provided that all specification requirements are met.
1.4 This classification system is intended to be a means of
calling out plastics materials used in the fabrication of end
items or parts. It is not intended for the selection of materials.
Material selection can be made by those having expertise in the
plastics field only after careful consideration of the design and
the performance required of the part, the environment to which
it will be exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the
costs involved, and the inherent properties of the material other
than those covered by this classification system.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard (see IEEE/ASTM SI-10). The values given in paren-
theses are for information only.
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 11, of this classification system:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use. Specific precautionary statements are
given in 11.7.1.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1
This standard is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic Materials
(Section D20.15.09).
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2015. Published October 2015. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2015 as D5336 - 15. DOI:
10.1520/D5336-15A.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2857 Practice for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Polymers
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3801 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning
Characteristics of Solid Plastics in a Vertical Position
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
als
D5225 Test Method for Measuring Solution Viscosity of
Polymers with a Differential Viscometer
D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D6869 Test Method for Coulometric and Volumetric Deter-
mination of Moisture in Plastics Using the Karl Fischer
Reaction (the Reaction of Iodine with Water)
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With-
drawn 2015)3
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System
2.2 Underwriters Laboratories Standard:
UL94 Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Mate-
rials4
2.3 ISO Standards:5
ISO 75-1 Determination of Temperature of Deflection
Unnder Load – Part 1:General Test Methods
ISO 75-2 Determination of Temperature of Deflection
Unnder Load – Part 2: Plastics and Ebonite
ISO 179-1 Determination of Charpy Impact Strength—Part
1: Non-Instrumented Impact Test
ISO 294-1 Injection Moulding of Test Specimens of Ther-
moplastic Materials—Part 1: General Principles,
Multipurpose-Test Specimens and Bars
ISO 527-1 Determination of Tensile Properties—Part 1:
General Principles
ISO 527-2 Determination of Tensile Properties—Part 2:
Testing Conditions
ISO 3451-1 Determination of Ash General Methods
ISO 3451-4 Determination of Ash, Polyamides
ISO 15512 Determination of Water Content
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The terminology used in this classification
system is in accordance with Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd.,
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
5
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 polyphthalamide, PPA, n—a polyamide in which resi-
dues of terephthalic acid or isophthalic acid or a combination
of the two comprise at least 55 molar percentage of the
dicarboxylic acid portion of the repeating structural units in the
polymer chain.
4. Classification
4.1 The polyphthalamide materials are designated “PPA,” as
specified in Terminology D1600.
4.2 Unreinforced polyphthalamide materials are classified
into groups according to crystallinity. These groups are subdi-
vided into classes and grades as shown in Table PPA.
NOTE 2—An example of this classification system is as follows:
The designation PPA0121 would indicate from Table PPA:
PPA = Polyphthalamide as found in Terminology D1600
01 (Group) = Semicrystalline PPA
2 (Class) = Low-temperature molding material
1 (Grade) = With the corresponding requirements shown in Table PPA
4.2.1 To facilitate the incorporation of future or special
materials, the “other/unspecified” category (00) for group, (0)
for class, and (0) for grade is shown. The basic properties of the
material can be obtained from Table A as they apply.
4.3 Reinforced and lubricated versions of the polyphthal-
amide materials are classified in accordance with Tables PPA
and A, where Table PPA specifies the unreinforced material and
Table A the properties after the addition of reinforcements or
lubricants at the nominal level indicated (see 4.3.1).
NOTE 3—This part of the classification system uses the percent of
reinforcements or additives, or both, in the callout of the modified basic
material. The types and percentages of reinforcements and additives is
sometimes shown on the supplier’s technical data sheet. If necessary
additional callout of these reinforcements and additives can be accom-
plished by use of the suffix of the system (see Section 5).
NOTE 4—Materials containing reinforcements or fillers, or both, at
nominal levels not in multiples of five are included in the nearest grade
designation. For example, a material with a nominal glass fiber level of
33 % is included with Grade G35.
 D5336 − 15a

TABLE PPA Requirements for Unreinforced Polyphthalamide Resins

Inherent Melting Glass
ViscosityA Temperature,B TransitionB ,
Group Description Class Description Grade Description dL/g °C Tg, °C
01 semicrystalline 1 high-temperature molding 1 0.80-1.06 305-320 115-130
2 0.70-1.00 315-330 115-130
PPA 0 Other
2 low-temperature molding 1 0.80-1.05 320-335 90-105
2 0.85-0.95 290-305 85-95
3 0.85-1.05 300-315 85-95
0 Other
0 Other 0 Other
00 Other 0 Other 0 Other
A
Practice D2857 or Test Method D5225 with conditions as specified in 11.7 of this classification system.
B
Test Method D3418 using a heating rate of 10°C/min.

TABLE A Detail Requirements of Special Reinforced PPAs Using ASTM Methods

NOTE—All mechanical properties are determined on dry-as-molded injection molded specimens.
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inherent viscosity,A Test Method D2857, B 0.60 0.7 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.95 1 C

dL/g, min
Tensile strength, Test Method D638D , B
45 (6500) 75 (10 900) 90 (13 000) 100 (14 500) 135 (19 600) 200 (29 000) 230 (33 400) 255 (37 000) C

MPaE (psi), min

F B C
Flexural modulus, Test Method D790 , 1.5 (218) 2.5 (363) 3.0 (435) 5.5 (798) 6.5 (943) 10.0 (1450) 13.5 (1958) 15.0 (2175)
GPA (kpsi), min
G H B C
Izod impact, Test Method D256 J/m 20 (0.38) 40 (0.75) 60 (1.1) 90 (1.6) 100 (1.9) 350 (6.6) 500 (9.4) 650 (12.1)
(ft-lbf/in), min
B C
Deflection Temperature Test Method 100 125 160 185 210 235 260 285
D648I , °C, min
A
See 11.7 of this classification system for specific conditions.
B
Unspecified requirement.
C
Specific value must be given in call-out.
D
Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar. The speed of testing shall be as described in 11.2 of this classification system.
E
MPa × 145 = psi.
F
Test Method D790 with a 1-mm (0.05-in.)/min testing speed.
G
Test Methods D256, Test Method A.
H
J/m × 0.01873 = ft-lb/in.
I
Test Method D648, using 1820-kPa (264-psi) stress.

TABLE B Detail Requirements of Special Reinforced PPAs Using ISO Methods

NOTE—All mechanical properties are determined on dry-as-molded injection molded specimens.
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tensile strength, ISO 527 MPa minA B
45 75 90 100 135 200 230 255 C

Tensile modulus, ISO 527 GPa minD B

1.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 12.0 14.0 18.0 C

Charpy, ISO 179-1, J/m2, minE B

2.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 9.0 11.0 13.0 15.0 C
B C
Deflection Temperature Under Load, 100 125 160 185 210 235 260 285
F
ISO 75-2 method Af, °C, min
B
To be determined
A
ISO 527, Type IA tensile bar. The speed of testing shall be as described in 12.2 of this classification system.
B
Unspecified requirement.
C
Specific value must be given in call-out.
D
ISO 527, Type 1A tensile bar. The Speed of testing shall be 1 mm/min.
E
ISO 179-1, Test specimen shall be taken from the center portion of multipurpose tensile bar.
F
ISO 75-2, The test specimen shall be taken from the center portion of the multipurpose tensile bar, 4 mm thick, and tested in the flatwise position.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
4.3.1 Reinforced, filled, and lubricated variations of the
basic materials are identified by a single letter from Table 1 that
indicates the filler and/or reinforcement used and two digits to
indicate the nominal quantity in percent by weight. A second
letter, from Table 1A, when desired, is used to indicate the form
or structure of the reinforcement and/or filler, but not used for
functional mixtures. Thus, a letter designation G for glass, E
for beads or spheres or balls, and 33 for percent by weight,
GE33, specifies a reinforced or filled material with 33 percent
by weight in the form of glass beads, spheres or balls. The
reinforcement letter designations and associated tolerance
levels are shown in the previous table (1). Form and structure
letter designations are shown in the following table (1A).
TABLE 1 Reinforcement-FillerA SymbolsB and Tolerances
Symbol Material Tolerance (Based on
the Total Mass)
C Carbon or graphite fiber ±3 %
G Glass reinforced ±3 %
L Lubricants (for example, Depends upon the
PTFE, graphite) material and
process—To be
specified
M Mineral ±3 %
R Combinations of ±3 % for the total
reinforcements or fillers, reinforcement or filler,
or both or both
A
Ash content of filled and/or reinforced materials is to be determined using either
Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451-1 where applicable.
B
Additional symbols will be added to this table as required.
TABLE 1A Symbols for the Form or Structure of Fillers and
Reinforcing Materials
Symbol Form or Structure
C Chips, cuttings
D Fines, powders
E Beads, spheres, balls
F Fiber
G Ground
H Whiskers
K Knitted fabric
L Layer
M Mat (fabric, thick)
N Non-woven (fabric, thin)
P Paper
R Roving
S Flake
T Cord
V Veneer
W Woven fabric
Y Yarn
X Not specified
4.3.2 Tables A and B Detail Requirements—An identifying
number is made up of the letter “A” or “B,” depending on
whether ASTM or ISO test methods are used, and five digits
comprising the cell numbers in the order in which the proper-
ties appear.
4.3.2.1 Although the values listed in Tables A and B are
necessary to include the range of properties available in
existing materials, this does not imply that every possible
combination of the properties exists or can be obtained.
4.3.3 An example of this classification system for a 33 %
glass-reinforced polyphthalamide material, using ASTM test
methods (Table A) is as follows:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
PPA0121G33A56577
PPA0121 = Semicrystalline, low-temperature molding grade polyphthalamide
from Table PPA,
G33 = Glass reinforced at 33 % nominal,
A = Table A property requirements,
5 = Inherent viscosity, min 0.85 dL/g,
6 = Tensile strength, min 200 MPa,
5 = Flexural modulus, min 6.5 GPa,
7 = Izod impact, min 500 J/m,
7 = Deflection temperature, min 260°C, and
If no properties are specified, the designation would be PPA0121G33.
5. Suffixes
5.1 When additional requirements are needed for the mate-
rials covered in this classification system that are not covered
in Tables PPA, A, or B, then those requirements shall be
designated through the use of suffixes.
5.1.1 A list of suffixes found in Classification System D4000
(Table 3) is useful for additional requirements as appropriate.
5.2 Flammability callouts were changed in 2007. Therefore
callouts written before 2007 are different from those written in
2007 and later.
5.2.1 If the requirements for the polyphthalamide material
in 4.3.3 also included flammability requirements, the following
example illustrates the call-out based on ASTM D4000-04:
PPA0121G33A06577FL34
PPA0121G33A06577 = Same as 4.3.3
F = Flammability requirements
L = UL94 recognition required
3 = UL recognition at 0.80-mm min thickness
4 = UL rating 94V-0
5.2.2 The following example illustrates the call-out based
on ASTM D4000-07:
PPA0121G33A06577FF003
PPA0121G33A65770 = Same as 4.3.3
F = Flammability requirements
F = Vertical burn rate by ASTM D3801 or UL 94V
0 = Rating of designation V-0
03 = 0.80 mm minimum specimen thickness
6. General Requirements
6.1 Basic requirements from Tables PPA and A or B, as they
apply, are always in effect unless these requirements are
superseded by specific suffix requirements, which always take
precedence. Properties in Tables A and B supersede properties
in Table PPA when reinforced or filled materials are specified.
6.2 The material compositions shall be uniform and shall
conform to the requirements specified herein.
7. Detail Requirements
7.1 The materials shall conform to the requirements pre-
scribed in Tables PPA and A or B, and the suffix requirements
as they apply.
7.2 For the purpose of determining conformance, all speci-
fied limits for a specification (line callout) are absolute limits,
as defined in Practice E29.
7.2.1 With the absolute method, an observed value or a
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly
to the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconfor-
mance with the specification is based on this comparison.
 D5336 − 15a
8. Sampling NOTE 9—Test Method D648 and ISO 75-2 will probably yield different
heat distortion temperatures.
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
requirements of 12.4. A batch/lot of material shall be consid- 11.7 Inherent Viscosity (IV)—Test Method D2857 or D5225
ered as a unit of manufacture as prepared for shipment, and is with the following modifications:
permitted to consist of two or more “production runs” or 11.7.1 Solvent—Prepare a filtered solution containing a
batches. 60/40 weight percent of phenol/ tetrachloroethane (TCE).
(Warning—Phenol tetrachloroethane is a very dangerous sol-
9. Specimen Preparation vent. It is toxic by ingestion, inhalation, and absorption. Refer
to the appropriate material safety data sheet for information on
9.1 Mold test specimens by an injection molding process the proper handling of this material.)
(see Practice D3641 or ISO 294). Use the following conditions: 11.7.2 Sample Size—Use a sample size of 0.400 6 0.003 g
Class Grade Melt Temperature° C (°F) Mold Temperature min, °C (°F) of resin/100 mL of solvent. IV determinations are not recom-
1 1 325-335 (620-635) 135 (275)
2 335-345 (635-650) 135 (275)
mended for materials that contain fillers or reinforcements.
2 1 and 3 330-345 (625-650) 65 (150) However, if the sample does contain filler, select the appropri-
2 2 320-330 (605-625) 65 (150) ate sample size from the following table:
9.2 Materials used in the preparation of test specimens shall % Ash Sample Size, g
contain no more than 0.2 % moisture.
10 0.4444
NOTE 5—If the moisture content exceeds the limits previously stated, 20 0.5000
drying the material by methods such as at a temperature of 80 - 100°C in 25 0.5333
vacuum or in a stream, of nitrogen or in a desiccant bed dryer, or both, 30 0.5714
35 0.6154
until the moisture content is within the stated limits have been found to be
40 0.6666
satisfactory. 45 0.7273

10. Conditioning NOTE 10—A sample size to produce a resin concentration of 0.4
g/100mL shall be used. The sample sizes shown in the table were
10.1 Obtain test data using dry-as-molded specimens, de- calculated by the following equation:
fined as those that upon removal from the mold are immedi- 0.4
ately sealed in containers that are impermeable to water vapor. sample weight 5 3 100 (1)
100 2 % filler
Condition specimens a minimum of 2 h in sealed containers at
23 6 2°C prior to testing. 11.7.3 Dissolve the sample in the inherent viscosity (IV)
solvent by heating and stirring on a hot plate. Monitor the
NOTE 6—Physical properties of polyphthalamides are dependent upon
the moisture content of the molded item. Refer to the manufacturers’ temperature with a surface thermometer to be sure that it does
literature for details. not exceed 130°C.
10.2 Conduct tests, other than solution viscosity and those 11.7.4 If the sample contains a filler, it must be filtered to
conducted at elevated temperatures, in the standard laboratory remove the filler after all of the resin has dissolved.
atmosphere (see Practice D618) of 23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 % 11.7.5 Calculation:
relative humidity. Do not remove individual specimens from IV 5 ln~ S t /B t ! /C (2)
sealed containers until immediately before testing. where:
NOTE 7—The tolerance specified is the maximum allowed variation IV = inherent viscosity at 30°C, dL/g,
around the set points. It is not to be taken as the range of acceptable set St = average sample flow time, s,
points. Bt = average blank flow time, s, and
C = polymer concentration, g/dl.
11. Test Methods
11.8 Moisture—Test methods D6869 or ISO 15512, Method
11.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica- B.
tion system by means of test methods referenced.
11.2 Tensile Strength—Test Method D638, using a Type I 12. Inspection and Certification
test specimen or ISO 527, using Type 1A specimens. A testing 12.1 Inspection and certification of the materials supplied
speed of 5 mm (0.2 in.)/min or 50 mm (2.0 in.)/min if with reference to a specification based on this classification
elongation exceeds 10 %. system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
NOTE 8—ASTM D638 and ISO 527 could yield different results. herein.
11.3 Flexural Strength—Test Methods D790, using a testing 12.2 Lot acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
speed of 1 mm (0.05 in.)/min. acceptance or rejection of a lot is made. The lot acceptance
11.4 Izod Impact—Test Methods D256, Test Method A. inspection shall consist of the following tests that ensure
process control during manufacturing as well as those neces-
11.5 Charpy Impact—ISO 179-1, Method 1eA sary to ensure certifiability in accordance with 12.4.
11.6 Deflection Temperature—Test Method D648, using a 12.2.1 Inherent viscosity only for unreinforced or unfilled
maximum outer fiber stress of 1.82 Mpa (264 psi), or ISO 75-2, polymer as described in Table PPA.
Method Af with a specimen height of 4.0 mm. 12.2.2 Moisture content, and

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
12.2.3 Filler content (see Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451),
when applicable.
12.3 A periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the materials under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure the material is certifiable in accordance with 12.4.
12.4 Certification shall be that the material was
manufactured, by a process in statistical control, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this classification
system, and that the average values for the lot meet the
requirements of the specification (line callout).
NOTE 11—The ASTM publication, Manual on Presentation of Data and
Control chart Analysis, 7th Edition, Stock number MNL7A, provides
detailed information about statistical process control.
12.5 A report of test results shall be furnished when re-
quested. The report shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance
inspection for the shipment, the percent by weight of recycled
plastic, as defined in 3.1.47 of Guide D7209, if requested, and
the results of the most recent periodic-check inspection.
13. Packaging and Marking
13.1 For packing, packaging, and practice marking, the
provisions of Practice D3892 apply.
14. Keywords
14.1 inherent viscosity; line call-out; moisture analysis;
molding material; plastic; polyphthalamide

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CALCULATION FOR VISCOSITY NUMBER (VN)

X1.1 Viscosity number (VN) is defined as the ratio of the To further elaborate on the situation where the IV is known
viscosities of the (dilute) solution of the polymer to the and the VN needs to be calculated, we note that 11.7.5 by the
viscosity of the solvent divided by the concentration of the equation: IV = ln (St / Bt) / C.
polymer in the solvent. In this instance efflux time (t) can be This can be re-arranged to: (St / Bt) = e(C × IV)
substituted for viscosity (ɳ). Substituting in the VN equation, this leads to:
VN = (e(C × IV) – 1 / C)
VN 5 ~~ t 2 t c ⁄ t o 2 t oc ! 2 1 ! ⁄C (0)
Using the above relation for C = 0.4 of PCTE as used in 11.7
VN = viscosity number, of this standard, leads to following correlation table (Table
t = flow time of the sample, X1.1).
tc = Hagenbach correction of the solution,
to = flow time of the solvent, TABLE X1.1 Correlation Table
toc = Hagenbach correction of the solvent, and
IV VN IV VN IV VN IV VN
C = polymer concentration. 0.70 81 0.82 97 0.94 114 1.06 132
0.71 82 0.83 98 0.95 116 1.07 134
Assuming the correction factors for the solution and solvent 0.72 83 0.84 100 0.96 117 1.08 135
approach zero the equation becomes, 0.73 85 0.85 101 0.97 119 1.09 137
VN = ((t / to) – 1) / C, or when using the symbols as in 11.7.5 0.74 86 0.86 103 0.98 120 1.10 138
0.75 87 0.87 104 0.99 121 1.11 140
of this standard, 0.76 89 0.88 105 1.00 123 1.12 141
0.77 90 0.89 107 1.01 124 1.13 143
VN 5 ~~ S t ⁄ B t ! 2 1 ! ⁄C (0)
0.78 92 0.90 108 1.02 126 1.14 144
0.79 93 0.91 110 1.03 127 1.15 146
VN = viscosity number, 0.80 94 0.92 111 1.04 129 1.16 148
St = average sample flow time, 0.81 96 0.93 113 1.05 130 1.17 149
Bt = average solvent flow time, and NOTE: Using a different concentration or a different solvent would change the
results.
C = polymer concentration.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5336 - 15)
that may impact the use of this standard. (October 1, 2015)

(1) Added Guide D7209 to 2.1. (5) Added Table 1A.

(2) Revised Table 1. (6) Deleted 4.3.1.1, which is now included in 4.3.1.
(3) Added Note 3, Note 4, and Note 7, and subsequent notes (7) Revised 12.5.
were renumbered. (8) Added Appendix X1.
(4) Revised 4.3. (9) Some editorial changes were made.

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5336 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2015)

(1) This five year review included editorial changes. (4) Deleted old Section 7. The requirements in old Section 7
(2) The title was changed. are now included in Section 6 and the new Section 7.
(3) Added Note 5 and renumbered subsequent notes. Renumbered subsequent sections.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:09 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5336 − 15a

Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Polyphthalamide (PPA) Injection Molding Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5336; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This classification system covers polyphthalamide ma-
terials suitable for injection molding.
1.2 The properties included in this classification system are
those required to identify the compositions covered. Other
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics
important to specialized applications are to be specified by
using suffixes as given in Section 5.
1.3 This classification system allows for the use of recycled
materials provided that all specification requirements are met.
1.4 This classification system is intended to be a means of
calling out plastics materials used in the fabrication of end
items or parts. It is not intended for the selection of materials.
Material selection can be made by those having expertise in the
plastics field only after careful consideration of the design and
the performance required of the part, the environment to which
it will be exposed, the fabrication process to be employed, the
costs involved, and the inherent properties of the material other
than those covered by this classification system.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard (see IEEE/ASTM SI-10). The values given in paren-
theses are for information only.
1.6 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 11, of this classification system:
This standard does not purport to address all of the safety
concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility
of the user of this standard to establish appropriate safety and
health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory
limitations prior to use. Specific precautionary statements are
given in 11.7.1.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1
This standard is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic Materials
(Section D20.15.09).
Current edition approved Oct. 1, 2015. Published October 2015. Originally
approved in 1992. Last previous edition approved in 2015 as D5336 - 15. DOI:
10.1520/D5336-15A.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D256 Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2857 Practice for Dilute Solution Viscosity of Polymers
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3801 Test Method for Measuring the Comparative Burning
Characteristics of Solid Plastics in a Vertical Position
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
D4000 Classification System for Specifying Plastic Materi-
als
D5225 Test Method for Measuring Solution Viscosity of
Polymers with a Differential Viscometer
D5630 Test Method for Ash Content in Plastics
D6869 Test Method for Coulometric and Volumetric Deter-
mination of Moisture in Plastics Using the Karl Fischer
Reaction (the Reaction of Iodine with Water)
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products (With-
drawn 2015)3
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modern Metric System
2.2 Underwriters Laboratories Standard:
UL94 Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Mate-
rials4
2.3 ISO Standards:5
ISO 75-1 Determination of Temperature of Deflection
Unnder Load – Part 1:General Test Methods
ISO 75-2 Determination of Temperature of Deflection
Unnder Load – Part 2: Plastics and Ebonite
ISO 179-1 Determination of Charpy Impact Strength—Part
1: Non-Instrumented Impact Test
ISO 294-1 Injection Moulding of Test Specimens of Ther-
moplastic Materials—Part 1: General Principles,
Multipurpose-Test Specimens and Bars
ISO 527-1 Determination of Tensile Properties—Part 1:
General Principles
ISO 527-2 Determination of Tensile Properties—Part 2:
Testing Conditions
ISO 3451-1 Determination of Ash General Methods
ISO 3451-4 Determination of Ash, Polyamides
ISO 15512 Determination of Water Content
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The terminology used in this classification
system is in accordance with Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from Underwriters Laboratories (UL), 333 Pfingsten Rd.,
Northbrook, IL 60062-2096, http://www.ul.com.
5
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 polyphthalamide, PPA, n—a polyamide in which resi-
dues of terephthalic acid or isophthalic acid or a combination
of the two comprise at least 55 molar percentage of the
dicarboxylic acid portion of the repeating structural units in the
polymer chain.
4. Classification
4.1 The polyphthalamide materials are designated “PPA,” as
specified in Terminology D1600.
4.2 Unreinforced polyphthalamide materials are classified
into groups according to crystallinity. These groups are subdi-
vided into classes and grades as shown in Table PPA.
NOTE 2—An example of this classification system is as follows:
The designation PPA0121 would indicate from Table PPA:
PPA = Polyphthalamide as found in Terminology D1600
01 (Group) = Semicrystalline PPA
2 (Class) = Low-temperature molding material
1 (Grade) = With the corresponding requirements shown in Table PPA
4.2.1 To facilitate the incorporation of future or special
materials, the “other/unspecified” category (00) for group, (0)
for class, and (0) for grade is shown. The basic properties of the
material can be obtained from Table A as they apply.
4.3 Reinforced and lubricated versions of the polyphthal-
amide materials are classified in accordance with Tables PPA
and A, where Table PPA specifies the unreinforced material and
Table A the properties after the addition of reinforcements or
lubricants at the nominal level indicated (see 4.3.1).
NOTE 3—This part of the classification system uses the percent of
reinforcements or additives, or both, in the callout of the modified basic
material. The types and percentages of reinforcements and additives is
sometimes shown on the supplier’s technical data sheet. If necessary
additional callout of these reinforcements and additives can be accom-
plished by use of the suffix of the system (see Section 5).
NOTE 4—Materials containing reinforcements or fillers, or both, at
nominal levels not in multiples of five are included in the nearest grade
designation. For example, a material with a nominal glass fiber level of
33 % is included with Grade G35.
 D5336 − 15a

TABLE PPA Requirements for Unreinforced Polyphthalamide Resins

Inherent Melting Glass
ViscosityA Temperature,B TransitionB ,
Group Description Class Description Grade Description dL/g °C Tg, °C
01 semicrystalline 1 high-temperature molding 1 0.80-1.06 305-320 115-130
2 0.70-1.00 315-330 115-130
PPA 0 Other
2 low-temperature molding 1 0.80-1.05 320-335 90-105
2 0.85-0.95 290-305 85-95
3 0.85-1.05 300-315 85-95
0 Other
0 Other 0 Other
00 Other 0 Other 0 Other
A
Practice D2857 or Test Method D5225 with conditions as specified in 11.7 of this classification system.
B
Test Method D3418 using a heating rate of 10°C/min.

TABLE A Detail Requirements of Special Reinforced PPAs Using ASTM Methods

NOTE—All mechanical properties are determined on dry-as-molded injection molded specimens.
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Inherent viscosity,A Test Method D2857, B 0.60 0.7 0.75 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.95 1 C

dL/g, min
Tensile strength, Test Method D638D , B
45 (6500) 75 (10 900) 90 (13 000) 100 (14 500) 135 (19 600) 200 (29 000) 230 (33 400) 255 (37 000) C

MPaE (psi), min

F B C
Flexural modulus, Test Method D790 , 1.5 (218) 2.5 (363) 3.0 (435) 5.5 (798) 6.5 (943) 10.0 (1450) 13.5 (1958) 15.0 (2175)
GPA (kpsi), min
G H B C
Izod impact, Test Method D256 J/m 20 (0.38) 40 (0.75) 60 (1.1) 90 (1.6) 100 (1.9) 350 (6.6) 500 (9.4) 650 (12.1)
(ft-lbf/in), min
B C
Deflection Temperature Test Method 100 125 160 185 210 235 260 285
D648I , °C, min
A
See 11.7 of this classification system for specific conditions.
B
Unspecified requirement.
C
Specific value must be given in call-out.
D
Test Method D638, Type I tensile bar. The speed of testing shall be as described in 11.2 of this classification system.
E
MPa × 145 = psi.
F
Test Method D790 with a 1-mm (0.05-in.)/min testing speed.
G
Test Methods D256, Test Method A.
H
J/m × 0.01873 = ft-lb/in.
I
Test Method D648, using 1820-kPa (264-psi) stress.

TABLE B Detail Requirements of Special Reinforced PPAs Using ISO Methods

NOTE—All mechanical properties are determined on dry-as-molded injection molded specimens.
Property 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tensile strength, ISO 527 MPa minA B
45 75 90 100 135 200 230 255 C

Tensile modulus, ISO 527 GPa minD B

1.5 3.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 12.0 14.0 18.0 C

Charpy, ISO 179-1, J/m2, minE B

2.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 9.0 11.0 13.0 15.0 C
B C
Deflection Temperature Under Load, 100 125 160 185 210 235 260 285
F
ISO 75-2 method Af, °C, min
B
To be determined
A
ISO 527, Type IA tensile bar. The speed of testing shall be as described in 12.2 of this classification system.
B
Unspecified requirement.
C
Specific value must be given in call-out.
D
ISO 527, Type 1A tensile bar. The Speed of testing shall be 1 mm/min.
E
ISO 179-1, Test specimen shall be taken from the center portion of multipurpose tensile bar.
F
ISO 75-2, The test specimen shall be taken from the center portion of the multipurpose tensile bar, 4 mm thick, and tested in the flatwise position.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
4.3.1 Reinforced, filled, and lubricated variations of the
basic materials are identified by a single letter from Table 1 that
indicates the filler and/or reinforcement used and two digits to
indicate the nominal quantity in percent by weight. A second
letter, from Table 1A, when desired, is used to indicate the form
or structure of the reinforcement and/or filler, but not used for
functional mixtures. Thus, a letter designation G for glass, E
for beads or spheres or balls, and 33 for percent by weight,
GE33, specifies a reinforced or filled material with 33 percent
by weight in the form of glass beads, spheres or balls. The
reinforcement letter designations and associated tolerance
levels are shown in the previous table (1). Form and structure
letter designations are shown in the following table (1A).
TABLE 1 Reinforcement-FillerA SymbolsB and Tolerances
Symbol Material Tolerance (Based on
the Total Mass)
C Carbon or graphite fiber ±3 %
G Glass reinforced ±3 %
L Lubricants (for example, Depends upon the
PTFE, graphite) material and
process—To be
specified
M Mineral ±3 %
R Combinations of ±3 % for the total
reinforcements or fillers, reinforcement or filler,
or both or both
A
Ash content of filled and/or reinforced materials is to be determined using either
Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451-1 where applicable.
B
Additional symbols will be added to this table as required.
TABLE 1A Symbols for the Form or Structure of Fillers and
Reinforcing Materials
Symbol Form or Structure
C Chips, cuttings
D Fines, powders
E Beads, spheres, balls
F Fiber
G Ground
H Whiskers
K Knitted fabric
L Layer
M Mat (fabric, thick)
N Non-woven (fabric, thin)
P Paper
R Roving
S Flake
T Cord
V Veneer
W Woven fabric
Y Yarn
X Not specified
4.3.2 Tables A and B Detail Requirements—An identifying
number is made up of the letter “A” or “B,” depending on
whether ASTM or ISO test methods are used, and five digits
comprising the cell numbers in the order in which the proper-
ties appear.
4.3.2.1 Although the values listed in Tables A and B are
necessary to include the range of properties available in
existing materials, this does not imply that every possible
combination of the properties exists or can be obtained.
4.3.3 An example of this classification system for a 33 %
glass-reinforced polyphthalamide material, using ASTM test
methods (Table A) is as follows:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
PPA0121G33A56577
PPA0121 = Semicrystalline, low-temperature molding grade polyphthalamide
from Table PPA,
G33 = Glass reinforced at 33 % nominal,
A = Table A property requirements,
5 = Inherent viscosity, min 0.85 dL/g,
6 = Tensile strength, min 200 MPa,
5 = Flexural modulus, min 6.5 GPa,
7 = Izod impact, min 500 J/m,
7 = Deflection temperature, min 260°C, and
If no properties are specified, the designation would be PPA0121G33.
5. Suffixes
5.1 When additional requirements are needed for the mate-
rials covered in this classification system that are not covered
in Tables PPA, A, or B, then those requirements shall be
designated through the use of suffixes.
5.1.1 A list of suffixes found in Classification System D4000
(Table 3) is useful for additional requirements as appropriate.
5.2 Flammability callouts were changed in 2007. Therefore
callouts written before 2007 are different from those written in
2007 and later.
5.2.1 If the requirements for the polyphthalamide material
in 4.3.3 also included flammability requirements, the following
example illustrates the call-out based on ASTM D4000-04:
PPA0121G33A06577FL34
PPA0121G33A06577 = Same as 4.3.3
F = Flammability requirements
L = UL94 recognition required
3 = UL recognition at 0.80-mm min thickness
4 = UL rating 94V-0
5.2.2 The following example illustrates the call-out based
on ASTM D4000-07:
PPA0121G33A06577FF003
PPA0121G33A65770 = Same as 4.3.3
F = Flammability requirements
F = Vertical burn rate by ASTM D3801 or UL 94V
0 = Rating of designation V-0
03 = 0.80 mm minimum specimen thickness
6. General Requirements
6.1 Basic requirements from Tables PPA and A or B, as they
apply, are always in effect unless these requirements are
superseded by specific suffix requirements, which always take
precedence. Properties in Tables A and B supersede properties
in Table PPA when reinforced or filled materials are specified.
6.2 The material compositions shall be uniform and shall
conform to the requirements specified herein.
7. Detail Requirements
7.1 The materials shall conform to the requirements pre-
scribed in Tables PPA and A or B, and the suffix requirements
as they apply.
7.2 For the purpose of determining conformance, all speci-
fied limits for a specification (line callout) are absolute limits,
as defined in Practice E29.
7.2.1 With the absolute method, an observed value or a
calculated value is not rounded, but is to be compared directly
to the specified limiting value. Conformance or nonconfor-
mance with the specification is based on this comparison.
 D5336 − 15a
8. Sampling NOTE 9—Test Method D648 and ISO 75-2 will probably yield different
heat distortion temperatures.
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
requirements of 12.4. A batch/lot of material shall be consid- 11.7 Inherent Viscosity (IV)—Test Method D2857 or D5225
ered as a unit of manufacture as prepared for shipment, and is with the following modifications:
permitted to consist of two or more “production runs” or 11.7.1 Solvent—Prepare a filtered solution containing a
batches. 60/40 weight percent of phenol/ tetrachloroethane (TCE).
(Warning—Phenol tetrachloroethane is a very dangerous sol-
9. Specimen Preparation vent. It is toxic by ingestion, inhalation, and absorption. Refer
to the appropriate material safety data sheet for information on
9.1 Mold test specimens by an injection molding process the proper handling of this material.)
(see Practice D3641 or ISO 294). Use the following conditions: 11.7.2 Sample Size—Use a sample size of 0.400 6 0.003 g
Class Grade Melt Temperature° C (°F) Mold Temperature min, °C (°F) of resin/100 mL of solvent. IV determinations are not recom-
1 1 325-335 (620-635) 135 (275)
2 335-345 (635-650) 135 (275)
mended for materials that contain fillers or reinforcements.
2 1 and 3 330-345 (625-650) 65 (150) However, if the sample does contain filler, select the appropri-
2 2 320-330 (605-625) 65 (150) ate sample size from the following table:
9.2 Materials used in the preparation of test specimens shall % Ash Sample Size, g
contain no more than 0.2 % moisture.
10 0.4444
NOTE 5—If the moisture content exceeds the limits previously stated, 20 0.5000
drying the material by methods such as at a temperature of 80 - 100°C in 25 0.5333
vacuum or in a stream, of nitrogen or in a desiccant bed dryer, or both, 30 0.5714
35 0.6154
until the moisture content is within the stated limits have been found to be
40 0.6666
satisfactory. 45 0.7273

10. Conditioning NOTE 10—A sample size to produce a resin concentration of 0.4
g/100mL shall be used. The sample sizes shown in the table were
10.1 Obtain test data using dry-as-molded specimens, de- calculated by the following equation:
fined as those that upon removal from the mold are immedi- 0.4
ately sealed in containers that are impermeable to water vapor. sample weight 5 3 100 (1)
100 2 % filler
Condition specimens a minimum of 2 h in sealed containers at
23 6 2°C prior to testing. 11.7.3 Dissolve the sample in the inherent viscosity (IV)
solvent by heating and stirring on a hot plate. Monitor the
NOTE 6—Physical properties of polyphthalamides are dependent upon
the moisture content of the molded item. Refer to the manufacturers’ temperature with a surface thermometer to be sure that it does
literature for details. not exceed 130°C.
10.2 Conduct tests, other than solution viscosity and those 11.7.4 If the sample contains a filler, it must be filtered to
conducted at elevated temperatures, in the standard laboratory remove the filler after all of the resin has dissolved.
atmosphere (see Practice D618) of 23 6 2°C and 50 6 10 % 11.7.5 Calculation:
relative humidity. Do not remove individual specimens from IV 5 ln~ S t /B t ! /C (2)
sealed containers until immediately before testing. where:
NOTE 7—The tolerance specified is the maximum allowed variation IV = inherent viscosity at 30°C, dL/g,
around the set points. It is not to be taken as the range of acceptable set St = average sample flow time, s,
points. Bt = average blank flow time, s, and
C = polymer concentration, g/dl.
11. Test Methods
11.8 Moisture—Test methods D6869 or ISO 15512, Method
11.1 Determine the properties enumerated in this classifica- B.
tion system by means of test methods referenced.
11.2 Tensile Strength—Test Method D638, using a Type I 12. Inspection and Certification
test specimen or ISO 527, using Type 1A specimens. A testing 12.1 Inspection and certification of the materials supplied
speed of 5 mm (0.2 in.)/min or 50 mm (2.0 in.)/min if with reference to a specification based on this classification
elongation exceeds 10 %. system shall be for conformance to the requirements specified
NOTE 8—ASTM D638 and ISO 527 could yield different results. herein.
11.3 Flexural Strength—Test Methods D790, using a testing 12.2 Lot acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
speed of 1 mm (0.05 in.)/min. acceptance or rejection of a lot is made. The lot acceptance
11.4 Izod Impact—Test Methods D256, Test Method A. inspection shall consist of the following tests that ensure
process control during manufacturing as well as those neces-
11.5 Charpy Impact—ISO 179-1, Method 1eA sary to ensure certifiability in accordance with 12.4.
11.6 Deflection Temperature—Test Method D648, using a 12.2.1 Inherent viscosity only for unreinforced or unfilled
maximum outer fiber stress of 1.82 Mpa (264 psi), or ISO 75-2, polymer as described in Table PPA.
Method Af with a specimen height of 4.0 mm. 12.2.2 Moisture content, and

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
12.2.3 Filler content (see Test Method D5630 or ISO 3451),
when applicable.
12.3 A periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the materials under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure the material is certifiable in accordance with 12.4.
12.4 Certification shall be that the material was
manufactured, by a process in statistical control, sampled,
tested, and inspected in accordance with this classification
system, and that the average values for the lot meet the
requirements of the specification (line callout).
NOTE 11—The ASTM publication, Manual on Presentation of Data and
Control chart Analysis, 7th Edition, Stock number MNL7A, provides
detailed information about statistical process control.
12.5 A report of test results shall be furnished when re-
quested. The report shall consist of results of the lot-acceptance
inspection for the shipment, the percent by weight of recycled
plastic, as defined in 3.1.47 of Guide D7209, if requested, and
the results of the most recent periodic-check inspection.
13. Packaging and Marking
13.1 For packing, packaging, and practice marking, the
provisions of Practice D3892 apply.
14. Keywords
14.1 inherent viscosity; line call-out; moisture analysis;
molding material; plastic; polyphthalamide

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. CALCULATION FOR VISCOSITY NUMBER (VN)

X1.1 Viscosity number (VN) is defined as the ratio of the To further elaborate on the situation where the IV is known
viscosities of the (dilute) solution of the polymer to the and the VN needs to be calculated, we note that 11.7.5 by the
viscosity of the solvent divided by the concentration of the equation: IV = ln (St / Bt) / C.
polymer in the solvent. In this instance efflux time (t) can be This can be re-arranged to: (St / Bt) = e(C × IV)
substituted for viscosity (ɳ). Substituting in the VN equation, this leads to:
VN = (e(C × IV) – 1 / C)
VN 5 ~~ t 2 t c ⁄ t o 2 t oc ! 2 1 ! ⁄C (0)
Using the above relation for C = 0.4 of PCTE as used in 11.7
VN = viscosity number, of this standard, leads to following correlation table (Table
t = flow time of the sample, X1.1).
tc = Hagenbach correction of the solution,
to = flow time of the solvent, TABLE X1.1 Correlation Table
toc = Hagenbach correction of the solvent, and
IV VN IV VN IV VN IV VN
C = polymer concentration. 0.70 81 0.82 97 0.94 114 1.06 132
0.71 82 0.83 98 0.95 116 1.07 134
Assuming the correction factors for the solution and solvent 0.72 83 0.84 100 0.96 117 1.08 135
approach zero the equation becomes, 0.73 85 0.85 101 0.97 119 1.09 137
VN = ((t / to) – 1) / C, or when using the symbols as in 11.7.5 0.74 86 0.86 103 0.98 120 1.10 138
0.75 87 0.87 104 0.99 121 1.11 140
of this standard, 0.76 89 0.88 105 1.00 123 1.12 141
0.77 90 0.89 107 1.01 124 1.13 143
VN 5 ~~ S t ⁄ B t ! 2 1 ! ⁄C (0)
0.78 92 0.90 108 1.02 126 1.14 144
0.79 93 0.91 110 1.03 127 1.15 146
VN = viscosity number, 0.80 94 0.92 111 1.04 129 1.16 148
St = average sample flow time, 0.81 96 0.93 113 1.05 130 1.17 149
Bt = average solvent flow time, and NOTE: Using a different concentration or a different solvent would change the
results.
C = polymer concentration.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5336 − 15a
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5336 - 15)
that may impact the use of this standard. (October 1, 2015)

(1) Added Guide D7209 to 2.1. (5) Added Table 1A.

(2) Revised Table 1. (6) Deleted 4.3.1.1, which is now included in 4.3.1.
(3) Added Note 3, Note 4, and Note 7, and subsequent notes (7) Revised 12.5.
were renumbered. (8) Added Appendix X1.
(4) Revised 4.3. (9) Some editorial changes were made.

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5336 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2015)

(1) This five year review included editorial changes. (4) Deleted old Section 7. The requirements in old Section 7
(2) The title was changed. are now included in Section 6 and the new Section 7.
(3) Added Note 5 and renumbered subsequent notes. Renumbered subsequent sections.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:12 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5364 − 14 (Reapproved 2019)

Standard Guide for

Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Fiberglass Reinforced
(FRP) Plastic Chimney Liners with Coal-Fired Units1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5364; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

INTRODUCTION

Federal and state environmental regulations have imposed strict requirements to clean the gases
leaving a chimney. These regulations have resulted in taller chimneys (600–1000 ft (183–305 m)) and
lower gas temperatures (120–200°F (49–93°C)) due to the use of Air Quality Compliance Systems
(ACQS). These regulations led to the development of fiber reinforced plastics (FRP) chimney liners
in the 1970’s.
Fiberglass-reinforced plastic liners have proven their capability to resist corrosion and carry loads
over long periods of time. Successful service has been demonstrated in the utility and general-process
industries for over 40 years. The taller FRP structures and larger diameters (10–30 ft (3–9 m)) imposed
new design, fabrication, and erection challenges.
The design, fabrication, and erection of FRP liners involves disciplines which must address the
specific characteristics of the material. Areas that have been shown to be of importance include the
following:
(1) Flue-gas characteristics such as chemical composition, water and acid dew points, operating and excursion temperature,
velocity, etc.
(2) Plant operation as it relates to variations in the flue-gas characteristics.
(3) Material selection and laminate design.
(4) Quality control throughout the design, fabrication, and erection process to ensure the integrity of the corrosion barrier and
the structural laminate.
(5) Secondary bonding of attachments, appurtenances, and joints.
(6) Installation and handling.
(7) Inspections and Confirmation Testing.
Chimney components include an outer shell, one or more inner liners, breeching ductwork, and miscellaneous platforms,
elevators, ladders, and miscellaneous components. The shell provides structural integrity to environmental forces such as wind,
earthquake, ambient temperatures, and supports the liner or liners. The liner or liners inside the shell protects the shell from the
thermal, chemical, and abrasive environment of the hot boiler gases (generally 120–560°F (49–293°C)). These liners have been
made of FRP, acid-resistant brick, carbon steel, stainless steel, high-alloy steel, shotcrete-coated steel, and shotcrete-coated shells.
The selection of the material type depends on the chemical composition and temperature of the flue gas, liner height, diameter, and
seismic zone. Also, variations in flue-gas characteristics and durations of transient temperatures affect material selection and
design. For FRP liners, the flue gas maximum operating temperature is generally limited to 200°F (90°C) for 2 hours and for
maximum transient temperatures to 400°F (204°C) for 30 minutes.

1. Scope terial selection, fabrication, erection, inspection, confirmatory

1.1 This guide offers direction and guidance to the user
concerning available techniques and methods for design, ma-
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic Piping
Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved May 1, 2019. Published May 2019. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D5364 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D5364-14R19.
testing, quality control and assurance.
1.2 These minimum guidelines, when properly used and
implemented, can help ensure a safe and reliable structure for
the industry.
1.3 This guide offers minimum requirements for the proper
design of a FRP liner once the service conditions relative to
thermal, chemical, and erosive environments are defined. Due

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
to the variability in liner height, diameter, and the environment, Other Operating and Service Environments 5.7
each liner must be designed and detailed individually. Static Electricity Build-Up 5.8
Flame Spread 5.9
1.4 Selection of the necessary resins and reinforcements, Materials 6
Raw Materials 6.1
composition of the laminate, and proper testing methods are Laminate Composition 6.2
offered. Laminate Properties 6.3
Design 7
1.5 Once the material is selected and the liner designed, Design 7.1
procedures for proper fabrication of the liner are developed. Assumptions 7.2
Dead Loads 7.3
1.6 Field erection, sequence of construction, proper field- Wind Loads 7.4
joint preparation, and alignment are reviewed. Earthquake Loads 7.5
Thermal Loads 7.6
1.7 Quality control and assurance procedures are developed Circumferential Pressure Loads 7.7
for the design, fabrication, and erection phases. The quality- Load Factors 7.8
Resistance Factors 7.9
assurance program defines the proper authority and Loading Combinations 7.10
responsibility, control of design, material, fabrication and Allowable Longitudinal Stresses 7.11
Allowable Circumferential Stresses 7.12
erection, inspection procedures, tolerances, and conformity to
Design Limits 7.13
standards. The quality-control procedures provide the steps Tolerances 7.14
required to implement the quality-assurance program. Deflections 7.15
Critical Deign Considerations and Details 7.16
1.8 Appendix X1 includes research and development sub- Fabrication 8
jects to further support recommendations of this guide. Fabrication 8.1
Reponsibility of Fabricator 8.2
1.9 Disclaimer—The reader is cautioned that independent Fabrication Facility 8.3
General Construction 8.4
professional judgment must be exercised when data or recom- Fabrication Equipment 8.5
mendations set forth in this guide are applied. The publication Resin Systems 8.6
of the material contained herein is not intended as a represen- Reinforcement 8.7
Fabrication Procedures 8.8
tation or warranty on the part of ASTM that this information is Handling and Transportation 8.9
suitable for general or particular use, or freedom from infringe- Erection Appurtenances 8.10
ment of any patent or patents. Anyone making use of this Tolerances 8.11
Erection of FRP Liners 9
information assumes all liability arising from such use. The Erection Scheme and Sequence 9.1
design of structures is within the scope of expertise of a Handling and Storage on Site 9.2
licensed architect, structural engineer, or other licensed profes- Erection Appurtenances 9.3
Field Joints 9.4
sional for the application of principles to a particular structure. Field Joints Lamination Procedure 9.5
Quality Assurance and Quality Control 10
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard. Quality Assurance and Quality Control 10.1
1.10 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be re- Quality-Assurance Program 10.2
Quality-Assurance Surveillance 10.3
garded as standard. The values given in parentheses are Inspections 10.4
mathematical conversions to SI units that are provided for Submittals 10.5
information only and are not considered standard. Operation Maintenance and Start-Up Procedures 11
Initial Start-Up 11.1
1.11 This standard does not purport to address all of the Operation and Maintenance 11.2
Annex
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the Typical Inspection Checklist Annex A1
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro- Appendix
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter- Commentary Appendix X1
References
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Section
1.12 This international standard was developed in accor-
Introduction and Background dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
Scope and Objective 1 ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Referenced Documents 2
ASTM Standards 2.1
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
ACI Standard 2.2 mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
NFPA Standard 2.3 Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
ASME Standards 2.4
Terminology 3
ASTM Standard General Definitions 3.1 2. Referenced Documents
Applicable Definitions 3.2
Descriptions of Terms Specific to This Standard 3.3
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
Symbols 3.4 C177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measure-
Significance and Use 4 ments and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of
Service and Operating Environments 5
Service Conditions 5.1
Environmental Severity 5.2
Chemical Environment 5.3 2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Erosion/Abrasion Environment 5.4 contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Operating Temperature Environment 5.5 Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Abnormal Environments 5.6 the ASTM website.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus
C518 Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
C581 Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of
Thermosetting Resins Used in Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Structures Intended for Liquid Service
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced
and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materi-
als
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D2393 Test Method for Viscosity of Epoxy Resins and
Related Components (Withdrawn 1992)3
D2471 Practice for Gel Time and Peak Exothermic Tempera-
ture of Reacting Thermosetting Resins (Withdrawn 2008)3
D2583 Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plas-
tics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
D2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
D3299 Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks
D4398 Test Method for Determining the Chemical Resis-
tance of Fiberglass-Reinforced Thermosetting Resins by
One-Side Panel Exposure (Withdrawn 2015)3
E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
E228 Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid
Materials With a Push-Rod Dilatometer
2.2 American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard:
ACI Standard 307 Specification for the Design and Con-
struction of Reinforced Concrete Chimneys4
2.3 NFPA Standard:
NFPA 77 Recommended Practice on Static Electricity5
2.4 ASME Standards:
Section X Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels6
RTP-1 Reinforced Thermoset Plastic Corrosion Resistant
Equipment6
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Terms used in this guide are from Terminology D883
unless otherwise indicated in 3.2.
3.2 The following applicable definitions in this guide are
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American Concrete Institute (ACI), P.O. Box 9094, Farmington
Hills, MI 48333-9094, http://www.concrete.org.
5
Available from National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471, http://www.nfpa.org.
6
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
International Headquarters, Three Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990, http://
www.asme.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
provided for reference:
3.2.1 accelerator—a material added to the resin to increase
the rate of polymerization (curing).
3.2.2 axial—in the direction of the axis (lengthwise center-
line) of the equipment.
3.2.3 Barcol hardness—measurement of the degree of cure
by means of resin hardness. The Barcol impressor is the
instrument used (see Test Method D2583).
3.2.4 binder—chemical treatment applied to the random
arrangement of glass fibers to give integrity to mats. Specific
binders are utilized to promote chemical compatibility with
various laminating resins used.
3.2.5 blister—refer to Terminology D883.
3.2.6 bonding—joining of two or more parts by adhesive
forces.
3.2.7 bond strength—force per unit area (psi) necessary to
rupture a bond in interlaminar shear.
3.2.8 buckling—a mode of failure characterized by an un-
stable lateral deflection due to compressive action on the
structural element involved.
3.2.9 burned areas—areas of laminate showing evidence of
decomposition (for example, discoloration and cracking) due
to excessive resin exotherm.
3.2.10 burn out (burn off)—thermal decomposition of the
organic materials (resin and binders) from a laminate specimen
in order to determine the weight percent and lamination
sequence of the glass reinforcement.
3.2.11 carbon veil—a nonwoven surface veil that is made of
carbon fiber or is coated with conductive carbon for purposes
of providing static dissipation. This could be carbon veil, or
polyester veil impregnated with carbon.
3.2.12 catalyst—an organic peroxide material used to acti-
vate the polymerization of the resin.
3.2.13 chopped-strand mat—reinforcement made from ran-
domly oriented glass strands that are held together in a mat
form by means of a binder.
3.2.14 chopper gun—a machine used to cut continuous
fiberglass roving to predetermined lengths [usually 0.5–2 in.
(13–51 mm)] and propel the cut strands to the mold surface. In
the spray-up process, a catalyzed resin is deposited simultane-
ously on the mold. When interspersed layers are provided in
filament winding, the resin spray is not used.
3.2.15 contact molding—process for molding reinforced
plastics in which reinforcement and resin are placed on an open
mold or mandrel. Cure is without application of pressure;
includes both hand-lay-up and spray-up.
3.2.16 corrosion barrier—the integral inner barrier of the
laminate which is made from resin, veil, and chopped mat.
3.2.17 coverage—see winding cycle.
3.2.18 crazing—the formation of tiny hairline cracks in
varying degrees throughout the resin matrix, particularly in
resin-rich areas.
3.2.19 cut edge—end of a laminate resulting from cutting
that is not protected by a corrosion barrier.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
3.2.20 delamination—physical separation or loss of bond
between laminate plies.
3.2.21 dry spot—an area where the reinforcement fibers
have not been sufficiently wetted with resin.
3.2.22 edge sealing—application of reinforcement and
resin, or resin alone, to seal cut edges and provide a corrosion-
resistant barrier. The final layer should be paraffinated.
3.2.23 entrapped-air void—see void.
3.2.24 environment—state of the surroundings in contact
with the internal and external surfaces, including the
temperature, pressure, chemical exposure, relative humidity,
and presence of liquids or gases.
3.2.25 exotherm—evolution of heat by the resin during the
polymerization reaction.
3.2.26 exotherm ply—that ply of chopped mat at which the
lamination process is stopped to allow gelation and exotherm
of the existing laminate.
3.2.27 fabricator—the producer of the equipment who com-
bines resin and reinforcing fibers to produce the final product.
3.2.28 fatigue—the change in properties of the laminate
over time under cycling of loads, including mechanical,
temperature, and other environmental exposures.
3.2.29 fiber(glass)—a fine, continuously formed thread of
glass. E-glass is used for strength and durability, E-CR-glass is
a modified E-glass with improved corrosion resistance to most
acids, and C-glass is resistant to corrosion by most acids.
3.2.30 fiberglass roving—see roving.
3.2.31 fiberglass woven roving—heavy fabric woven from
strands of glass fiber.
3.2.32 fiber wetting—coating of the fiberglass with resin by
means of rollout or immersion.
3.2.33 filament winding—a process for forming FRP parts
by winding resin-saturated continuous-roving strands onto a
rotating mandrel.
3.2.34 fillers—inert materials that are added to the resin to
increase density, increase viscosity, improve abrasion
resistance, enhance resin-application properties, decrease resin
shrinkage, and reduce cost.
3.2.35 fill picks—the rovings in a woven roving that run in
the transverse direction of the fabric, that is, across the fabric
roll width.
3.2.36 flame-retardant resin—halogenated resins that can be
used with or without additives to provide a laminate having a
reduced flame-spread rating as measured in accordance with
Test Method E84. The resins are not flame retardant in their
liquid state.
3.2.37 flame-spread rating—index number for any laminate
of definite composition resulting from testing in accordance
with Test Method E84.
3.2.38 gap filling—the filling of voids between joined parts,
elements, or components with resin putty or resin.
3.2.39 gel—the initial jelly-like solid phase that develops
during the polymerization of resin.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
3.2.40 gel time—time from the initial mixing of the resin
with catalyst to gelation.
3.2.41 glass—see fiber(glass).
3.2.42 glass content—weight percent of glass-fiber rein-
forcement in the laminate.
3.2.43 gun roving—fiberglass roving designed for use in a
chopper gun.
3.2.44 hand lay-up—see contact molding.
3.2.45 heat-deflection temperature (HDT)—temperature at
which a specified bar specimen deflects 0.010 in. (0.25 mm)
when loaded as a simple beam at a constant 264 psi (1820 kPa).
Test Method D648 usually refers to a cured-resin casting, not
a laminate.
3.2.46 helical winding—filament winding where the angle
at which the reinforcement is placed is other than 0 or 90°.
3.2.47 hoop winding—filament winding where the winding
angle is essentially 90°. The winding strands are applied
immediately adjacent to the strands applied on the previous
mandrel revolution.
3.2.48 intersperse—chopped fiberglass used in a filament-
wound laminate, usually in thin layers between winding
coverages.
3.2.49 isotropic—having uniform properties in all direc-
tions. The measured properties of the material are independent
of the axis of testing. The opposite is anisotropic, which is the
case for FRP laminates.
3.2.50 joint overlay—an overlay that joins the adjoining
surfaces of two contacting parts or elements.
3.2.51 laminate—the total of the part constructed by com-
bining one or more layers of material (reinforcement and
resin). As used in this guide, the laminate consists of the
corrosion barrier on the inner surface, the interior structural
layer, and the outer surface.
3.2.52 laminate composition—the sequence of reinforce-
ment materials on a type, class, and category basis that make
up a laminate.
3.2.53 lamination analysis—procedure by which, given the
amount and properties of the resin and the properties and
orientation of the reinforcement, it is possible to calculate the
elastic physical and mechanical properties of the individual
layers of a laminate and using weighted-averaging techniques
to determine the elastic properties of the total laminate (see
section 2.4).
3.2.54 lamination theory—see lamination analysis.
3.2.55 mandrel—mold around which a laminate is formed to
fabricate a cylindrical section.
3.2.56 macro—denotes the properties of the laminate as a
total structural element.
3.2.57 matrix—resin phase of a fiberglass-reinforced lami-
nate.
3.2.58 micro—denotes the properties of the constituent ele-
ments of the laminate; that is, matrix and reinforcements and
interface only, and their effect on the laminate properties.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
3.2.59 mold—form over or into which resin and reinforce-
ments are placed to form the laminate product shape.
3.2.60 monomer—the basic polymerizing element for the
formation of the matrix; in FRP-liner fabrication, this is mostly
styrene.
3.2.61 overlay—laminate applied over base FRP structures
to secure a joint, seal a seam, or attach a nozzle.
3.2.62 paraffınated resin—resin containing a small amount
of dissolved paraffin wax. This wax will come out of the
solution during cure and bloom to the surface, preventing the
normal air inhibition at the atmospheric exposed surface.
3.2.63 parting agents—compounds that assist in releasing
the FRP part from its mold; also referred to as mold-release
agents.
3.2.64 pass—in filament winding, one “round trip” of the
carriage (which applies the winding strand to the mandrel)
from one end of the mandrel to the other and return.
3.2.65 pit—crater-like area in the surface of the laminate.
3.2.66 polyester resin—resin produced by the condensation
of dihydroxy glycols and dibasic organic acids or anhydrides.
In FRP fabrications, the polyester plastic contains at least one
unsaturated constituent and is dissolved in styrene and subse-
quently reacted to give a highly crosslinked thermoset matrix.
3.2.67 profile—the roughness (or smoothness) of a surface
that has been prepared for bonding.
3.2.68 promoter—a material which activates the catalyst
that cures the resin.
3.2.69 PVA—abbreviation for polyvinyl alcohol, a widely
used parting agent.
3.2.70 reinforcement—glass fibers in the form of continuous
strand, chopped-strand, or fabric. These fibers are added to the
resin matrix to give strength and other properties to the
laminate.
3.2.71 release film—film used to facilitate removal of the
fabricated part from the mold. Oriented polyester film, 3 to 5
mils thick has been found suitable for this purpose.
3.2.72 resin putty—resin filled with clay, silica fume, milled
fibers, or other inert materials, or both, to yield a material for
filling gaps, cracks, and fillets.
3.2.73 resin richness—excessive amounts or uneven distri-
bution of resin in the laminate. Such areas are the result of
improper wetout or drainage and are prone to cracking.
3.2.74 roll-out—densification of the laminate by working
reinforcement into and air out of the resin, using a serrated
thermoplastic or metal roller.
3.2.75 roving—a number of strands or filaments gathered
with little or no twist in a package called a roving ball. Also see
woven roving.
3.2.76 secondary bond strength—adhesive force that holds a
separately cured laminate to the basic substrate laminate.
3.2.77 sizing—surface treatment or coating applied to fila-
ments to improve the filament-to-resin bond.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
3.2.78 spray-up—method of contact molding where resin
and chopped strands of continuous-filament glass fiber are
deposited on the mold directly from a chopper gun.
3.2.79 strain—elongation per unit length.
3.2.80 stress—load per unit area.
3.2.81 structural layer—the portion of the laminate having
the primary mechanical strength.
3.2.82 surface preparation—the act of roughening, priming,
or otherwise treating the laminate surface to achieve surface
conditions that are conducive to adhesion of a subsequently
applied laminate.
3.2.83 surfacing veil—a very thin (10 to 20 mils) mat of
C-glass or synthetic material such as non-woven polyester
fabric, used to reinforce the corrosion-resistant resin on the
inside or outside surface of the FRP laminate.
3.2.84 unidirectional roving—continuous parallel roving
held together with periodic stitching.
3.2.85 vinyl ester resin—resin characterized by reactive
unsaturation, located predominately in terminal positions that
can be compounded with styrene and reacted to produce
crosslinked copolymer matrices.
3.2.86 void—unfilled space caused by air or gas in the resin
mix or entrapment of such gases during lay-up of individual
plies of glass.
3.2.87 warp ends—the strands in a woven roving that run in
the longitudinal direction of the fabric, that is, along the roll
length of the fabric.
3.2.88 winding angle—the angle between the winding
strand and the longitudinal axis of the cylindrical liner,
sometimes called the helix angle. The winding angle can be
determined by measuring the included angle along the longi-
tudinal axis of the pipe at the intersection of strands and
dividing this angle by two.
3.2.89 winding cycle—the complete covering of the mandrel
surface by two bi-directional layers of filament winding. Hoop
winding will use one pass; in helical winding many passes are
required to complete one winding cycle.
3.2.90 woven roving—a plain-weave reinforcement fabric
made of rovings. The standard configuration requires five
rovings in the warp direction and four rovings in the weft
direction and a nominal weight of 24 oz/yd2 (814 g/m2).
3.3 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.3.1 can—an individual fabricated cylindrical liner section.
3.3.2 quality assurance (QA)—a system, employed by the
owner or his designate, to monitor the manufacturer’s quality
control and to recognize and resolve any nonconformances.
This system is administered by a quality-assurance represen-
tative who is empowered to verify the QA and the resolution of
all noncompliances.
3.3.3 quality-assurance program—a plan that documents
the procedures or instructions used to ensure the quality control
of the manufacturing process.
3.3.4 quality control (QC)—a system of measurements and
checks employed to monitor the manufacture of the FRP
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
TABLE 1 Stress and Modulus of Elasticity Symbols, psi LL = total length of the continuous liner
Stress Type MRF = material resistance factor
Description Membrane Membrane P = external pressure, psi
Bending
Tension Compression p' = atmosphere pressure at plant grade level, psi
Calculated longitudinal fzt fzc fzb r = average radius of the liner wall, in.
Calculated circumferential fθt fθc fθb
Allowable longitudinal Fzt Fzc Fzb
R1 = displacement-induced seismic response (force,
Allowable circumferential Fθt Fθc Fθb displacement, or stress)
Ultimate longitudinal Fztu ... Fzbu R2 = inertia-induced seismic response (force,
Ultimate circumferential Fθtu ... Fθbu displacement, or stress)
Critical buckling, longitudinal ... Fzcr ...
Critical buckling, ... Fθcr ... Rc = radius of the liner to the centroid of the stiffener
circumferential Rs = radius of the stiffener
Modulus of elasticity, Ezt Ezc Ezb Rt = total seismic response (force, displacement, or
longitudinal
Modulus of elasticity, Eθt Eθc Eθb
stress)
circumferential RF = capacity-reduction factor = MRF × TTRF
†
Editorially corrected column alignment in March 2010. t = thickness of the liner (structural) wall, in.
T = normal temperature load,
Ta = ambient air temperature, Degrees Fahrenheit
tc = thickness of corrosion barrier, in.
chimney liner and to assess compliance of manufacture to the te = equivalent liner thickness, including stiffener
critical quality requirements. contribution, on basis of equal mass
3.4 Symbols: (see Table 1) Tg = flue gas temperature, Degrees Fahrenheit
Tm = mean liner temperature, (T1 + T2)/2, Degrees
a = winding angle (with respect to the longitudinal Fahrenheit
axis of the liner), degree Tn = annulus air temperature, Degrees Fahrenheit
Aθ = hoop membrane stiffness of the liner wall, lb/in. To = temperature at inside surface of corrosion
barrier, Degrees Fahrenheit
AT = abnormal temperature load T1 = temperature at interface between corrosion bar-
CP = circumferential pressure load, psi rier and structural layer, Degrees Fahrenheit
D = dead load T2 = temperature at outside surface of structural
Ds = theoretical draft (without losses), inches of layer, Degrees Fahrenheit
water ∆Tg = flue-gas temperature difference across the di-
Dx, Dθ = longitudinal and hoop bending stiffness, of the ameter of the liner, at height z, °F
liner wall, lb-in.2/in. (∆Tg)BASE = ∆Tg at top of breeching, °F (minimum Tg-
(EI)s = transformed flexural stiffness of ring stiffener, BASE = 25°F)
lb-in.2 ∆Tm = difference of temperature, Tm, across the diam-
EQ = earthquake load eter of the liner, °F
f = ovalling natural frequency, cycles per second ∆Tw = temperature differential across the structural
g = acceleration due to gravity, in/s2 layer, °F (T2 – T1)
H = total height of liner above breeching, ft TTRF = time and temperature reduction factor
h1 = flue-gas film coefficient of thermal W = wind load
conductivity, BTU/ft2/in/h/°F Wcm = compressive modulus of elasticity of the wind-
h3 = film coefficient of thermal conductivity outside ing material (glass), psi
of liner, BTU/ft2/in/h/°F WL = total weight of the continuous liner, including
I = center-line moment of inertia of liner section, corrosion barrier, and stiffeners
in.4 = πr3t Wtm = tension modulus of elasticity of the winding
Is = moment of inertia of one stiffener material (glass), psi
k = coefficient of thermal conductivity for FRP z = distance from top of breeching, in.
liner (in absence of data use k = 2), BTU/ft2/ α = coefficient of thermal expansion in the direction
in/h/°F specified by subscript, in./in./°F
kn = knockdown factor µ = average Poisson’s ratio
kR = ratio of thermal resistance from gas stream to 5 ~ µ zθ 3 µ θz ! 1/2
the middle of the liner wall to the total radial
thermal resistance of liner µθz = Poisson’s ratio of longitudinal strain to an
L = distance between lateral supports, ft imposed hoop strain
L1 = spacing between full circumferential stiffeners, µzθ = Poisson’s ratio of hoop strain to an imposed
in, determined as the sum of half the distance to longitudinal strain
adjacent stiffeners on either side of the stiffener γ = unit weight of liner, lb/in.3
under consideration γa = specific weight of ambient air, lb/ft3
LF = load factor γg = specific weight of gas, lb/ft3

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
δ = longitudinal deflection, in.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This guide provides information, requirements and rec-
ommendations for design professionals, fabricators, installers
and end-users of FRP chimney liners. FRP is a cost-effective
and appropriate material of construction for liners operating at
moderate temperatures in a corrosive chemical environment.
4.2 This guide provides uniformity and consistency to the
design, fabrication, and erection of fiberglass-reinforced plastic
(FRP) liners for concrete chimneys with coal-fired units. Other
fossil fuels will require a thorough review of the operating and
service conditions and the impact on material selection.
4.3 This guide is limited specifically to FRP liners within a
supporting concrete shell and is not applicable to other FRP
cylindrical structures.
5. Service and Operating Environments
5.1 Service Conditions:
5.1.1 To properly select the optimum design for an FRP
chimney liner, it is essential to define the operating and service
conditions and the effect they may have on the lining. The
chemical, erosion/abrasion, and temperature environments
should be determined for the full height of the FRP liner.
5.1.2 Owing to the variability in details of design and
system configuration, each FRP liner design must be consid-
ered individually. The information given is for coal-fired units,
but the general principles are applicable to units fired with
other fuels.
5.2 Environmental Condition—The environment for a chim-
ney liner is classified as to its chemical, erosion, and tempera-
ture condition. Two chemical conditions, three erosion
conditions, and four temperature conditions are identified,
together with the circumstances in which they usually occur.
The combinations of circumstances applicable to a particular
chimney liner should be determined.
5.3 Chemical Environment:
5.3.1 Condition 1—Occasional exposure of certain areas to
low pH from acid condensation, occurring with reheated gas or
un-scrubbed gas at localized cold areas, such as the liner hood
or during start-up.
5.3.2 Condition 2—Constant exposure to low pH, acid
condensation with concentration based on equilibrium concen-
tration of H2SO4, water vapor in the gas stream at temperatures
above the water dew point. This operating condition is usually
for scrubber systems without reheat, with essentially saturated
gas with temperatures from ambient to 140°F (60°C), or when
there is insufficient reheat to raise the gas temperature above
the acid dew point. Start-up conditions are covered by the
operating conditions.
5.4 Erosion/Abrasion Environment:
5.4.1 Condition 1—Normal-velocity gas flow (45–100 fps
(14–31 m/s)) with particulate removal equipment in service.
Most particulate removal and flue-gas desulfurization (FGD)
systems have velocities in this range.
5.4.2 Condition 2—Normal-velocity gas flow with particu-
late removal equipment out of service. This condition would be
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
infrequent, such as when precipitator electric power is out or
when bag houses are bypassed. The duration should be
determined, as the plant may reduce load or shut down when
such a condition occurs.
5.4.3 Condition 3—High-velocity gas flow (higher than 100
fps (31 m/s)), by design, or at sharp corners, turning vanes, and
struts. Erosion will likely occur at these locations.
5.5 Operating Temperature Environment:
5.5.1 Condition 1—Saturated flue gas, ambient to 140°F
(60°C). This is the usual operating condition for chimney liners
on systems with wet scrubbers without reheat. Start-up condi-
tions are covered by the operating conditions. Where bypass of
scrubbers is provided, conditions are described in 5.6.
5.5.2 Condition 2—Normal gas temperature from 140 to
200°F (60 to 93°C), with moisture content and acid condensa-
tion determined by the individual conditions. This is the usual
operating range for wet scrubber systems with reheat. Start-up,
high-temperature, and by-pass conditions will be the same as
described in 5.6.
5.5.3 Condition 3—Normal gas temperature from 140 to
200°F (60 to 93°C), with temperatures high enough for
condensation not to occur during normal operation. This is the
usual operating range for spray dryer-baghouse and spray
dryer-precipitator combinations. Condensation at start-up is
minimized by not introducing water to the spray dryers until
coal firing is started. Temperatures during by-pass and for
excursions are as described in 5.6.
5.5.4 Condition 4—Normal gas temperature from 200 to
330°F (93 to 166°C). This is the usual operating range for
plants without scrubbers. This condition is also applicable to
systems in which the particulate removal or flue-gas desulfu-
rization (FGD) system, or both, can be bypassed, with tem-
peratures determined by the gas flow that can be bypassed
compared to the total gas flow of the system.
5.5.5 This guide covers FRP liners for Conditions 1, 2, and
3. Condition 4 is not covered in this guide, although applica-
tions over 200°F (93°C) operating temperature condition are in
service. Condition 4 requires additional considerations in
evaluating materials and composite designs.
5.6 Abnormal Environments—Abnormal environments,
such as stoppage of an air preheater or malfunction of the
scrubber sprays, or both, can result in short-term conditions
more severe than those covered. The severity and duration of
the abnormal conditions depend on the design and operation of
the plant and should be determined for each project. In many
cases, these conditions are of short duration because a major
upset in the boiler draft system, or in the FGD or particulate
removal system, means a reduction in load or plant shutdown
to protect the equipment or stay within the emission criteria.
5.6.1 Condition 1—Flue-gas-temperature excursion of up to
250°F (121°C) maximum, maintained by a quench system.
5.6.2 Condition 2—Flue-gas-temperature excursion up to
400°F (227°C) maximum.
5.6.3 FRP liners may be used for abnormal Condition 1, but
its use for Condition 2 is not considered in this guide.
5.6.4 The gas temperature shall be maintained by a quench
system at or below a temperature of 250°F (121°C).
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
5.6.5 In case of a gas-temperature upset 25°F (−4°C) above
the established operating temperature, an additional deluge
system should be used to bring the gas temperature back to
normal operating temperatures.
5.7 Other Operating and Service Environments:
5.7.1 Start-up of coal-fired units is usually accomplished
with fuel other than coal, such as diesel oil, natural gas, or
liquefied natural gas. These fuels, which result in flue-gas
compositions different from that produced by coal-firing,
should be considered in the design of the liner.
5.7.2 The temperatures given are average temperatures of
flue gases entering the chimney liners. Gas temperatures vary
as the gas rises up the chimney and at breaching openings, and
they vary with the start-up condition of the unit.
5.8 Static Electricity Build-Up—FRP in a chimney-liner
application is subject to the build-up of static electricity that
may be a consideration in some installations. A static-charge
dissipation system must be provided where considered neces-
sary (see 6.3.6).
5.9 Flame Spread—FRP chimney liners are subject to con-
ditions that propagate flame spread. Specific requirements will
vary, depending upon operating and maintenance conditions.
However, all FRP liners shall have a flame-resistant resin as in
6.3.5.
6. Materials
6.1 Raw Materials:
6.1.1 Resin:
6.1.1.1 The selected resin shall be either a polyester or
vinylester that provides the properties necessary to withstand
the conditions of the operating environment described in
Section 5. Resins shall conform to the requirements of Speci-
fication C582.
6.1.1.2 FRP chimney liners are fabricated with a flame-
retardant resin and, when required, additional flame-retardant
synergist added. The resin shall, at minimum, have been
demonstrated to withstand 25 % sulfuric acid at 180°F (82°C)
for a duration of one year with a minimum retained strength of
50 %, in accordance with Practice C581, or under the actual
anticipated environmental-service condition.
6.1.1.3 The resin in the corrosion barrier shall be chosen for
its corrosion resistance and flame-retardant properties. Due to
physical and mechanical requirements, a different corrosion-
resistant resin may be used in the corrosion barrier than in the
structural layer.
6.1.2 Other Additives—The resin may contain diluents such
as added styrene, fillers, dyes, pigments, or flame retardants
only when agreed upon between the fabricator and the owner.
Such uses shall conform to the descriptions of diluents, resin
pastes, and ultraviolet absorbers as explained in Specification
C582. Additionally, carbon filler may be added for static-
charge dissipation.
6.1.3 Reinforcements—Reinforcements shall conform to the
requirements of Specification C582 for contact molding and
Specification D3299 for filament winding. These specifications
require the sizing and binder systems to be compatible with the
resins selected.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.1.3.1 Glass reinforcements shall be Type E or E-CR glass
fibers having a sizing compatible with the resin.
6.1.3.2 The surface veil used in the corrosion barrier should
be Type C glass fibers, or a synthetic material as approved by
the owner. If specified by the purchaser, a carbon veil may be
added for static-charge dissipation as in section 6.3.6.
6.2 Laminate Composition—FRP chimney-liner laminates
consist of a corrosion barrier, a structural layer, and an exterior
surface. The FRP composition shall include a thermoset
polyester or vinylester resin, reinforced with glass fiber and
containing various other raw materials to provide specific
properties. The corrosion barrier provides primary corrosion
resistance, flame retardant, and shall follow laminate construc-
tion described in Specification C582. The structural layer shall
primarily provide the mechanical properties and strength of the
design. The outer layer shall contain a paraffinated resin to
prevent air from inhibiting the cure process and shall provide
weather or environmental protection, or both. Liner extending
above the chimney cap shall be protected against ultraviolet
(UV) rays and in cold weather regions, against ice forming on
the liner surfaces from freezing of water droplets in the gas
phase.
6.2.1 Corrosion Barrier—The corrosion barrier shall be as
described in Specification C582. Additional plies of surfacing
mat and chopped-strand mat may be used in particularly severe
chemical environments, but consideration shall be given to the
effects of thermal and mechanical shock.
6.2.2 Structural Layer—The structural layer shall meet the
physical properties required by the design in Section 7. The
fabrication process is typically filament winding, as described
in Specification D3299 and Section 8, but may include contact
molding, as described in Specification C582, or a combination
of both.
6.2.3 Outer Layer
6.3 Laminate Properties:
6.3.1 Physical and Mechanical—The following physical-
property test methods are designed for use on entire laminates
or individually on the corrosion barrier, the structural layer, or
repeating structural units, and external overlays. The following
test methods shall be used for determination of initial design
data and QA/QC procedures:
6.3.1.1 Tensile Modulus (Axial Direction)—Test Method
D638 shall be used; or the test results used in conjunction with
laminate theory as in section 6.3.1.6.
6.3.1.2 Flexural Modulus (Axial and Hoop Directions)—
Test Method D790 shall be used; or the test results used in
conjunction with laminate theory as in section 6.3.1.6.
6.3.1.3 Compressive Modulus—The compressive modulus
shall be obtained in accordance with Test Method D695, with
the following modifications. The specimens shall be 2 in. (51
mm) in the test direction by 0.5 in. (13 mm) thick with the
corrosion barrier removed by machining. Strain shall be
measured by the use of an extensometer or other strain gages
centered on the specimen in the 2-in. direction. The extensom-
eter arms shall be spaced to 1.5 in. (38 mm) apart at their
attachment points to the specimen. The test results may be used
in conjunction with laminate theory as in section 6.3.1.6.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
6.3.1.4 Coeffıcient of Thermal Expansion—Coefficient of
thermal expansion shall be measured in accordance with Test
Method E228, over an appropriate temperature range using
specimens constructed with the same composition, resin,
construction sequence, glass content, type and weight of
reinforcement, and cure conditions used in the actual liner. The
glass content of the test laminate should be within 5 % of the
glass content of the actual chimney-liner laminate. The direc-
tion of measurement in relation to the orientation of glass shall
be considered in interpretation of the results. Unidirectional
roving may be used to approximate filament winding.
6.3.1.5 Coeffıcient of Thermal Conductivity—The coeffi-
cient of thermal conductivity shall be determined by Test
Method C177 or C518 on representative laminate for either the
entire liner laminate to be used, or for each of the following
laminate components; that is, corrosion barrier, structure layer,
and exterior coating, if any. The representative laminate shall
be a flat laminate constructed with the same resin, construction
sequence, glass content, type and weight of reinforcements,
and cure conditions used in the actual laminate. The direction
of measurement in relation to the orientation of glass shall be
considered in interpretation of the results. Unidirectional rov-
ing may be used to approximate filament winding.
6.3.1.6 Laminate theory may be used instead of physical
testing to determine axial tensile, flexural, and compressive
moduli only. In such a case, the axial tensile and hoop flexural
moduli computed from laminate theory shall be verified by
comparison with the results obtained by physical testing. The
test results shall be at least 90 % of the computed values.
6.3.2 Chemical—The corrosion resistance of the resins used
shall have been characterized by either Practice C581 or Test
Method D4398. Resins may also be evaluated for vapor
exposure in accordance with Practice C581, except that speci-
mens are exposed totally in the vapor space above the liquid
returning from the condenser. The resin shall have been
deemed acceptable for long-term use in the environments
described in Section 5 (Conditions 1 or 2, or both), by either of
the above test methods or verifiable actual field environments.
6.3.3 Erosion/Abrasion—In areas where Condition 3
erosion/abrasion is expected, resin additives such as silicon
carbide may be considered.
6.3.4 Temperature:
6.3.4.1 The material properties of the laminate shall be
suitable for operating-temperature environments as defined by
normal Conditions 1, 2, and 3, and abnormal Condition 1.
These conditions define only typical temperature environ-
ments. It is essential for the owner to fully provide specific
temperature conditions in order to properly select the optimum
resin.
6.3.4.2 The maximum operating temperature at the interface
between the corrosion barrier and the structural layer shall not
exceed the heat-deflection temperature (HDT) of the structural-
layer resin. The HDT shall be determined in accordance with
Test Method D648.
6.3.4.3 The temperature at the corrosion barrier/structural
layer interface may be determined by a thermocouple embed-
ded in the laminate or by correlating gas-stream temperature
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
and thermal gradient through the laminate with the temperature
at the corrosion liner/structural layer interface.
6.3.5 Flame Retardancy—Selection of the flame spread
rating is governed by local building codes. The purchaser shall
specify the rating for each location.
6.3.5.1 Flame spread is determined in accordance with Test
Method E84 (see Note 2) by using a standard laminate
construction as determined in accordance with 4.1.2 of Speci-
fication C582. The standard laminate is 0.125 in. (3 mm) thick,
flat, reinforced with all mat and has a glass content of 25 to
30 % by weight. Flame-retardant synergists of the type and
level used in the actual laminate construction shall be used in
this test.
NOTE 2—This flame-spread rating is based on a laboratory test, which
is not necessarily predictive of product performance in a real fire situation,
and is therefore not intended to reflect hazards presented by this or any
other material under actual fire conditions.
6.3.6 Static-Charge Dissipation—Operation of FRP chim-
ney liners can build up significant static charges. This may be
a safety hazard to personnel and appropriate grounding shall be
considered.
6.3.7 Grounding System—Each can in the liner shall have at
least two proof tested grounding patches. The patches shall be
externally connected to a grounding system conforming to the
requirements of NFPA 77 and 77-16. Patches should be
approximately 2 feet square containing conductive carbon filler
and carbon veil covering a 1⁄2 in. bolt that connects to the
grounding system. Every bolt patch shall be proof tested
(ohmmeter) to assure it will provide an appropriate path to
ground.
7. Design
7.1 Design:
7.1.1 Standard guidelines and minimum requirements are
provided for the structural design of fiber-reinforced plastic
(FRP) chimney liners, based on load and resistance-factor
design procedures.
7.1.2 The objective is to provide a uniform procedure for
computing forces and displacements of the liner based on the
present state of the art and science of design of fiber-reinforced
plastic liners.
7.1.3 The design is limited to FRP chimney liners supported
laterally and vertically by the concrete shell.
7.1.4 The design of a fiber-reinforced plastic liner is an
iterative process and similar to most engineering designs, but
with the following significant differences:
7.1.4.1 Fiber-reinforced plastic is a composite material and
its behavior is different from isotropic materials.
7.1.4.2 The practical variation in the physical properties of
the liner material in the thermal and chemical design environ-
ments are more than those encountered in most other structural
materials.
7.1.5 The scope is limited to chimney liners designed to
operate continuously in operating temperature environments
defined by Conditions 1, 2, and 3 in Section 5 under normal
operating conditions, and for Condition 1 for abnormal envi-
ronments defined in Section 5. The design of liners operating in
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
normal-temperature environment, Condition 4, or abnormal 7.2.10 The minimum structural-wall thickness of the liner
Condition 2, is not covered. shall be 3⁄8 in. (10 mm).
7.2 Assumptions: 7.2.11 Wherever the design requirements for the concrete
7.2.1 The design procedure is based on the overall stress chimney are cited in accordance with ACI 307, it is implied
resultants acting on the wall and on the properties of the that requirements of ACI 307, or of the project specification,
laminate. whichever are more critical, shall be used.
7.2.12 Nothing in this section shall be deemed to prohibit
7.2.2 For the purpose of analysis, the cross section is
the use of other properly substantiated technical data and
considered to consist of the average diameter and structural
procedures for the analysis and design of fiber reinforced
layer thickness. The thickness of the corrosion barrier is
plastic liners.
excluded. For structure design, properties of the material are
based on centerline temperature of the section (that is, average 7.3 Dead Loads (D):
through-wall thickness), except where variation through the 7.3.1 The dead load shall include the estimated weight of all
thickness is being explicitly considered. permanent structures, including stiffeners and attachments. A
7.2.3 For analysis of the liner behavior due to dead load, unit weight of 140 lb/ft3 (2243 kg/m3) is recommended for the
wind, earthquake, and thermal loads, the liner may be treated calculation of the dead load of the liner (including stiffeners
as a beam column and beam theory used for calculating the and attachments) using its nominal dimensions.
resultant stresses and displacements. 7.3.2 Where fly-ash is expected to be deposited on the inside
7.2.4 For the beam-column analysis, the liner may be surface of the liner, the dead load of the fly-ash shall be
considered uncoupled (separate) or coupled (jointly) with considered in the design. Where a wet scrubber is in operation,
respect to the concrete column. or can be in operation upstream of the chimney liner, a fly-ash
7.2.4.1 For the uncoupled system, the liner is considered to deposit shall be considered to be attached to the inside of the
be rigidly supported by the concrete column and shall be liner. The variation of the thickness of the fly-ash deposit along
designed as a continuous beam column. The displacements at the height of the liner shall be as shown in Fig. 1. The dead
points of support or restraint shall equal the independently load of the wet fly-ash shall be based on a unit weight of 80
computed displacements of the concrete shell. lb/ft3 (1281 kg/m3).
7.2.4.2 For the coupled system, the coupling of the liner and 7.3.2.1 Where a wet scrubber is not in operation and no
the concrete column system is achieved by incorporating the quenching system is used, or used briefly or rarely, the dry
flexibility of the concrete column in the liner design. A larger
combined structure must be analyzed to obtain forces in the
liner member(s) as a beam column.
7.2.4.3 The flexibility of the supports and restraints between
the liner and the concrete column and the local flexibility of the
liner at lateral support points may be incorporated in the
analysis of the coupled system.
7.2.5 If the frequency of vibration of the liner, based on
beam theory, is within 620 % of the concrete column
frequency, a dynamic analysis of the coupled system shall be
made. A dynamic analysis of the coupled FRP liner/concrete
column system shall be made, unless it is demonstrated by
evaluation of the mass frequency ratios that coupling effects
are negligible.
7.2.6 At points of application of loads (that is, at supports
and restraints) on the liner beam-column, the liner may be
adequately stiffened locally so that the liner roundness is
maintained and the liner indeed functions as a beam-column.
7.2.7 Resultant forces are computed from linear elastic
analysis of the beam column.
7.2.8 Using the resultant forces from the analysis, the design
of the liner is checked against the appropriate material prop-
erties of the laminate. The resistance in a certain direction is
based on the strength of the laminate in that direction,
determined either experimentally or derived from known
properties of the constituents.
7.2.9 Most material properties used in the analysis and
design are results of short-duration tests at room temperature.
Factors are recommended to reduce these property values to a
design life of 35 years of the liner in the range of operating
temperatures given in Section 5. FIG. 1 Fly-Ash Deposit

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
fly-ash load [65 lb/ft3 (1040 kg/m3) dry-unit weight] shall
equal 0.5 lb/ft2 (2.5 kg/m2) on the entire inside surface of the
liner, or as specified.
7.3.2.2 When a quench system is used frequently and a wet
scrubber is not in operation, the moist fly-ash load [80
lb/ft3 (1281 kg/m3) average moist-unit weight] shall equal 1.50
lb/ft2 (7 kg/m2) on the entire inside surface of the liner, or as
specified.
7.3.3 The liner shall be designed to withstand the installa-
tion and handling stresses and the temporary loads during
construction. Such loads should include self dead weight when
the can is resting on its side prior to the installation of bracing.
Temporary supports, lifting lugs, rigging, scaffolding, and
other construction equipment shall be designed in accordance
with accepted structural-engineering practices.
7.4 Wind Loads (W)—The liner shall be designed for all
forces induced by the displacements caused by wind on the
concrete column in accordance with ACI 307. The analysis for
the dynamic wind loads shall be for along-wind or across-
wind, whichever gives higher relative displacements in accor-
dance with ACI 307.
7.5 Earthquake Loads (EQ)—It is recognized that the liner
and chimney column interact under earthquake motion. Proce-
dures for the dynamic analysis of the combined column liner
system are outlined in 7.5.1. An alternative empirical proce-
dure is outlined in section 7.5.2.
7.5.1 Dynamic Analysis:
7.5.1.1 The liner shall be designed for all forces or
displacements, or both, resulting from a response spectrum
analysis of the combined column liner system for the design
response spectra in accordance with ACI 307.
7.5.1.2 Other dynamic analysis, based on properly substan-
tiated technical data for establishing the magnitude and distri-
bution of lateral forces, is also acceptable. In such analyses, the
dynamic characteristics of both the column and liner shall be
considered.
7.5.2 Empirical Method—The empirical method consists of
computing, separately, the liner earthquake responses due to
column deflections and due to liner inertia, and then combining
them to obtain the total liner earthquake response. The re-
straints between the liner and the concrete column are consid-
ered rigid. The procedure is as follows:
7.5.2.1 Calculate the response of the liner to displacements
induced by the concrete column due to earthquake. The column
displacements shall be obtained from either method of earth-
quake analysis given in ACI 307, that is, from the design-
response-spectrum analysis or the equivalent static-lateral-
force analysis.
7.5.2.2 Calculate the response of the liner due to its inertia
to the earthquake loads given in ACI 307 by either the
design-response spectrum or by the equivalent static-lateral-
force method.
7.5.2.3 Calculate the total liner earthquake response from:
R t 5 ~ R 1 2 1R 2 2 ! 1/2
where R1 and R2 are the responses calculated from section
7.5.2.1 and 7.5.2.2, respectively. The response may be a
typical quantity such as force, displacement, or stress.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7.6 Thermal Loads:
7.6.1 Uniform Temperature Loading (T)—The uniform tem-
perature across the cross section normally does not cause any
forces or stresses since the liner is not restrained in the
longitudinal direction. This load is used to calculate the total
thermal expansion of the liner due to the difference between the
installation and operating temperatures.
7.6.2 Non-Uniform Temperature Loading (∆T)—Thermal
loading on the liner is created by non-uniform temperatures
within the gas stream in both longitudinal and circumferential
directions and by the variation of temperature through the liner
wall thickness when combined with boundary restraint condi-
tions.
7.6.3 Longitudinal Stress Due to Thermal Loads—The lon-
gitudinal thermal stress shall be taken as the sum of the flexural
stress, the secondary stress, and the stress induced in the wall
by the temperature differential through the wall.
7.6.3.1 Thermal Membrane Stress—A liner subject to cir-
cumferential temperature differential will rotate if free to do so.
The resulting curvature may be expressed by 0.4 αz∆Tm/r.
Thermal-membrane (direct) stresses result when rotational and
translational supports restrain the curvature of the liner. The
equivalent moment to be applied to the liner is 0.4 EzIαz∆Tm/r.
7.6.3.2 Temperature differential of the liner across its diam-
eter is calculated as follows:
∆T m 5 ∆T g ~ 1 2 k R ! (1)
where:
∆Tg = flue-gas temperature difference across the diameter,
and
kR = thermal resistance from gas stream to the middle of
the liner wall relative to the total radial thermal
resistance of liner.
In these calculations, the insulation effect of the corrosion-
barrier thickness shall be used.
7.6.3.3 Temperature differential of flue gas across liner
diameter is constant through the height of the breeching and
attenuates with height as follows:
∆T g 5 ~ ∆T g ! basee 20.2z/r (2)
where:
z = distance from the top of breeching, and
(∆Tg)base = minimum of 25°F (−4°C).
7.6.3.4 Temperature differential across the structural layer,
∆Tw, should be considered in the design of the liner.
7.6.3.5 Thermally induced longitudinal secondary mem-
brane stress resulting from ∆Tg shall be computed from:
f z ct 5 0.1E z ctα z ~ ∆T g ! (3)
where:
Ezct = modulus of elasticity (compression or tension) in the
longitudinal direction, and
αz = average coefficient of thermal expansion in the longi-
tudinal direction.
7.6.3.6 Longitudinal bending stress due to temperature dif-
ferential through the structural layer shall be computed from:
f z b 5 0.5E z b α z ∆T w (4)
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
where:
αz and Ezb = average material properties of the wall in the f5
3
πR 2c
Œ E bθ I s g
5L 1 γt e ~ 1 2 µ 2 !
(7)
longitudinal direction, and
∆Tw = total temperature differential through the struc- WL
te 5
tural layer. 2πrL L γ

7.6.4 Temperature differential, ∆Tw, also induces bending where:

stresses in the circumferential direction, which may be com-
puted similarly using material properties in the circumferential
direction.
7.6.5 Reverse-thermal-gradient loading (that is, during shut-
down) where air temperature in the annulus is higher than
inside the liner, shall be considered in the design of the liner.
7.7 Circumferential Pressure Loads (CP)—The circumfer-
ential loads on the liner result from the positive or negative
pressure inside the liner and pressure fluctuations due to
turbulent gas flow.
7.7.1 Pressure in the Liner:
7.7.1.1 The pressure within a liner is affected by changes in
the unit operation (air preheater malfunction, forced draft, or
induced draft fan changes) as well as the changes in the unit
load.
7.7.1.2 When a liner is conveying hot flue gas of a specific
weight less than that of the surrounding atmosphere, the
pressure on the outside of the liner may be greater than on the
inside. This negative pressure is commonly referred to as the
chimney draft. The amount of negative pressure depends on the
temperature and velocity of the flue gas, the height of the liner,
as well as atmosphere pressure. When the flue-gas flow is
supplemented by induced-draft fans, a reduction of the net
negative pressure will result. For cases when an induced-draft
fan is forcing the gas or cool air, or both, through the liner, the
liner may be operating under a net positive pressure.
7.7.1.3 The theoretical negative static pressure, neglecting
losses, shall be computed from:
D s 5 0.192H ~ γ a 2 γ g ! , inches of water
where H = height from the center of breeching to top of
liner.
7.7.2 Liner Vibrations:
7.7.2.1 There are situations where a liner may vibrate due to
the movement of gas through it or due to resonance of the
chimney column as a result of excitation by wind or earth-
quake. The lowest ovalling frequency of the liner, given in
section 7.7.2.2 or 7.7.2.3 shall not be in the frequency range of
the pressure fluctuation at the base of the liner. Where no
specific data is available on the frequency range of pressure
fluctuations, the lowest ovalling frequency shall not be less
than 2 Hz.
7.7.2.2 The lowest ovalling or ring frequency for an unstiff-
ened liner is calculated as follows:
f5
t
2πr 2
Œ 3E θ b g
5γ ~ 1 2 µ 2 !
7.7.2.3 For a stiffened liner with ring stiffeners, the lowest
frequency is calculated as follows:
Rc = radius of the liner to the centroid of the stiffeners,
Eθb = circumferential bending modulus of elasticity of the
liner,
Is = moment of inertia of one (1) stiffener,
g = acceleration due to gravity,
L1 = spacing between full circumferential stiffeners,
γ = unit weight of liner,
te = equivalent liner thickness, including stiffener
contribution, on basis of equal mass,
µ = average Poisson’s ratio of the liner,
WL = total weight of the continuous liner, including corro-
sion barrier, and stiffeners,
r = radius of the liner,
LL = total length of the continuous liner, and
rs = radius of the stiffener
7.7.2.4 For other liners not covered by section 7.7.2.2 and
7.7.2.3, rational procedures shall be used for computing the
lowest frequency.
7.8 Load Factors (LF)—The load factors in the limit design
approach are multiplicative factors used on dead, live, wind,
earthquake, and temperature loads, as follows:
LF = 0.9 or 1.2 for dead load (D),
= 1.3 for wind or earthquake load (W or EQ),
= 1.1 for temperature load (T or ∆T),
= 1.1 for circumferential pressure loads (CP).
7.9 Resistance Factor (RF)—Resistance factor is the prod-
uct of material resistance factor (MRF) and time-and-
temperature-reduction factor (TTRF) (RF = MRF × TTRF).
7.9.1 Material-Resistance Factor (MRF)—The usable de-
(5) sign strength is a fraction of the nominal material strength in
the given mode.
7.9.2 The material-resistance factor for various types of
loading is as follows:
MRF = 0.65 for direct tension or flexural, or both,
= 0.40 for direct compression.
7.9.3 Time-and-Temperature-Reduction Factor (TTRF)—
The reduction in the mechanical properties of the liner material
under load subjected to the operating environment of the liner
is reflected in the time-and-temperature-reduction factor
(TTRF). If no experimental data is available, the values of
TTRF in section 7.9.5 shall be used.
7.9.4 The TTRF is affected significantly by the duration of
the load. It is larger for short-term loads, such as those arising
in abnormal operations or upset conditions, as compared to
(6) those for the long-term loads such as normal operation and
dead loads.
7.9.5 The TTRF for the various types and durations of
stresses at operating environments is given in Table 2.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
TABLE 2 Time-and-Temperature-Reduction Factors (TTRF) for 7.11.1.2 Lateral bracing such as stay rods or bumpers shall
Long-Term Operation and Short-Term Abnormal Environments be provided so that L/r does not exceed 20.
Type of Stress 7.11.2 Tensile Stress—Direct or membrane stress is that part
Duration Membrane Membrane
Bending of the total stress, which is uniform over the thickness of the
Tension Compression
structural layer, or which is almost uniform through the
Long-term 0.2 0.7 0.7 structural layer as in the case of beam bending of the liner. The
Short-term 0.6 0.8 0.8 remaining part of the total stress is caused by the bending of the
structural layer.
7.11.2.1 The maximum allowable longitudinal direct tensile
7.9.6 The values of the moduli used in sections 7.10 and stress in the liner shall be determined as follows:
7.11 shall correspond to results from short-duration tests under F z t 5 RF 3 F z tu (16)
the mean liner (Tm) temperature conditions. where:
7.10 Loading Combinations—Stresses shall be calculated RF = 0.13 for long-term loads,
for all three load combinations shown in sections 7.10.1 and RF = 0.39 for short-term loads, and
7.10.2. Fztu = ultimate longitudinal short-term tensile strength of the
7.10.1 Loading combination for the sustained or long-term structural layer at room temperature.
loading are as follows:
7.11.3 Bending Stresses—The allowable bending tension or
Load Combination No. 1: (8) compression in the longitudinal direction shall be determined
1.2D11.1T11.1CP
from the following equation:
F z b 5 RF 3 F z bu (17)
and where D reduces the effects of T and CP:
0.9D11.1T11.1CP (9)
where:
RF = 0.45 for long-term loads,
where: RF = 0.52 for short-term loads, and
D = dead loads, Fzbu = ultimate longitudinal short-term bending strength of
T = temperature loads, and the structural layer at room temperature.
CP = circumferential pressure effects.
7.12 Allowable Circumferential Stresses:
7.10.2 Short-duration-loading combinations are as follows: 7.12.1 Compressive Membrane Stress—Determine the
Load Combination No. 2:1.2D11.1T11.3W/EQ11.1CP (10) maximum allowable circumferential compressive membrane
stress in the liner by the following equation:
and where D reduces the effects of T, CP, and W or EQ :
F θ c 5 RF 3 F θ cr 5 0.28 F θ cr for long 2 term loads, and (18)
0.9D11.1T11.3W/EQ11.1CP (11)
where W/EQ = effects of wind or earthquake, not taken at F θ c 5 RF 3 F θ cr 5 0.32 F θ cr for short 2 term loads.
the same time.
Load Combination No. 3: (12) where Fθcr is calculated by:
@ ~ E z c ! 1/4 ~ E θ b ! 3/4 # ~ t/r ! 1.5
1.2D11.1AT11.1CP F θ cr 5 0.765 (19)
~ L 1 /r !
and where D reduces the effect of AT and CP:
7.12.2 Tensile Stress—Direct or membrane stress is that part
0.9D11AT11.1CP (13) of the total stress which is uniform over the thickness of the
where AT = effect of the abnormal temperature condition. structural layer. The remaining part of the total circumferential
tension stress is caused by the bending of the liner wall.
7.11 Allowable Longitudinal Stresses:
7.12.2.1 Determine the maximum allowable circumferential
7.11.1 Compressive Stress—Determine the maximum al-
direct tensile stress in the liner by the following equation:
lowable longitudinal compressive stress in the cylindrical liner
by the following equation: F θ t 5 RF 3 F θ tu (20)
c cr
F z 5 RF 3 F z (14) 50.13 F θ tu for long 2 term loads, and

50.28 F z cr for long term loads, and 50.39 F θ tu for short 2 term loads.
where Fθtu = ultimate hoop short-term tensile strength of the
50.32 F z cr for short term loads. structural layer at room temperature.
7.11.1.1 Fzcr in Eq 14 is calculated as follows: 7.12.3 Bending Stresses—The allowable bending tension or
k nt compression in the circumferential direction shall be deter-
F z cr 5 0.6
r
=E z b E θ c (15)
mined from the following equation:
~
k n 5 knockdown factor 5 1.00 2 0.91 1 2 e 20.06=r/t ! F θ b 5 RF 3 F θ bu (21)

(15A) 50.45 F θ bu for long 2 term loads, and

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
13
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
50.52 F θ bu for short 2 term loads. 7.13.2 When either the longitudinal or circumferential stress
where Fθbu = ultimate circumferential short-term bending is compressive, the following requirements shall be satisfied:
strength of the liner wall, at room temperature.
f θc f zc
#1 and #1 (25)
7.12.4 Circumferential Stiffener Requirements: F θc F zc
7.12.4.1 General—Circumferential stiffening shall meet the
7.13.3 When the longitudinal and circumferential stresses
minimum requirements given in this section when the unstiff-
are both compressive, interaction shall be as follows:
ened liner shell is unable to structurely support the circumfer-
ential pressures as described herein. In addition to providing
structural resistance, stiffeners reduce the effect of imperfec-
f zc
F zc
1 S D
f θc
F θc
2
#1 (26)

tions built into the cross section.
7.12.4.2 The circumferential stiffeners shall be designed to
resist the lateral loads arising from the positive or negative
pressure inside the liner, pressure fluctuations due to turbulent
gas flow, liner vibrations (see section 7.7.2) and the lateral
restraints such as stay rods and bumpers.
7.12.4.3 Stiffener Spacing—Spacing of stiffeners shall not
exceed 11⁄2 diameters of the liner or 25 ft (8 m), whichever is
less.
7.12.4.4 Stiffener Size—The size of stiffeners shall satisfy
the following requirements:
(a) The ring stiffener shall have a bending stiffness equal to
or greater than that determined by the following equation:
PL r 3
~ EI! s $ 1.15~1RF!
where:
(EI)s = transformed flexural stiffness of the ring stiffener,
and
RF = reduction factor for flexural tension or compression
for short-term loads. The MRF, of the RF, shall be
selected based on the stiffener material used (that is,
steel, plastic).
(b) In determining stiffener-section properties, a portion of
the structural layer of the liner equal in width to 1.56 =rt may
be included, but the total area so added shall not exceed the
transformed area of the stiffener.
(c) The stiffener shall be designed for the erection loads,
including deflection considerations.
7.13 Design Limits—The liner shall be so proportioned that
the actual or computed stress in a given direction of the liner,
for a given loading condition, is less than the corresponding
allowable stress. Thus, when one of the two computed stresses,
namely, longitudinal or circumferential, is tensile, the require-
ment is expressed as follows:
f zt f zb
1 #1
F zt F zb
or
f θt f θb
1 #1
F θt F θb
7.13.1 As an alternative method to the requirements of
section 7.13 for allowable tensile and bending stresses, the
design professional may choose to use lamination analysis. If
used then follow the procedure set forth in ASME RTP-1, a
standard for reinforced thermoset plastic corrosion-resistant
equipment. The elastic constants and strain limits selected shall
account for the thermal environment of the liner.
7.13.4 The design limits in section 7.13 shall be applied,
separately, for long-term loads and for short-term loads.
7.14 Tolerances—The tolerances are based on those in
Section 8.
7.15 Deflections:
7.15.1 Short-Term Loads—The loading combinations de-
fined in section 7.10 with the loads defined in sections 7.3
through 7.7 shall be used to calculate deflections using the
short-term moduli of elasticity at room temperature.
7.15.2 Long-Term Loads—The primary loads causing the
long-term longitudinal deflection are the tension resulting from
dead loads and the thermal growth of the liner.
7.15.2.1 The long-term longitudinal deflection shall be cal-
(22)
culated from the following expression:
δ 5 @ f z t /E z t 1α z ∆T # 12H (27)
7.16 Critical Design Considerations and Details—The fol-
lowing design considerations and details are critical to an FRP
liner and will require careful consideration by the design
professional:
7.16.1 Shear parallel to laminate,
7.16.2 Support shoulders,
7.16.3 Lateral-restraint locations,
7.16.4 Construction joints,
7.16.5 Reinforcement around openings,
7.16.6 Breechings,
7.16.7 Hoods, and
7.16.8 Expansion joints.
8. Fabrication
8.1 Fabrication—This section addresses minimum require-
ments of facilities, tooling, laminate construction, and proce-
dures necessary for satisfactory fabrication of FRP chimney
liner components.
(23) 8.2 Responsibility of Fabricator—The responsibility of the
fabricator shall be to construct the equipment in accordance
with the complete designs and details set forth solely by the
design professional and shall warrant all workmanship to be in
(24)
accordance with specified designs.
8.3 Fabrication Facility:
8.3.1 The fabrication process is considered to be a “shop”
operation which can be performed in the “home-shop” of the
fabricator, or the process can be performed in a “temporary
shop” that is built at or near the project site.
8.3.2 The facility shall be enclosed and capable of main-
taining a 60°F (16°C) minimum constant environment.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
14
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
8.3.2.1 The facility shall maintain all materials and equip-
ment during use at a minimum of 5°F (3°C) above dew-point
temperature to avoid moisture condensation.
8.3.3 Special care and conditioning is required when mate-
rials are brought in from cold outside temperatures to warm
work areas.
8.3.4 If fabrication is not a continuous operation, provisions
shall be made to assure that condensation does not develop on
the surface of an incomplete part.
8.3.5 All mechanical systems (heating, lighting, and venti-
lation) shall be designed and operated for adequate safety of
materials and personnel.
8.3.5.1 The facility shall have adequate ventilation capacity
to constantly maintain the proper number of air changes per
hour, as required by OSHA (1).7
8.3.5.2 The styrene concentration at the working level shall
not exceed that required by OSHA (1). Ventilation shall be
designed to draw fumes from the floor of the facility. Floor-
level exhaust fans are recommended.
8.3.6 Open-flame heating units shall not be allowed.
Electric, steam, or closed-flame units are acceptable. The
source of heat cannot generate any particles, moisture, or
organic vapor to the environment.
8.4 General Construction:
8.4.1 The FRP chimney liners are normally constructed
from individual cylindrical sections, called “cans,” of the
diameter set forth by the design.
8.4.2 The can should be fabricated in lengths to minimize
the number of required erection joints.
8.5 Fabrication Equipment:
8.5.1 Winding Machine:
8.5.1.1 The winding machine shall maintain a wind angle
within 61 1⁄2 ° throughout the length of the can.
8.5.1.2 The machine shall deliver the reinforcing strands in
a continuous uniform flat band saturated with resin. Unsatu-
rated glass is not acceptable.
8.5.1.3 The number of winding passes and the weight of
resin and reinforcement applied shall be recorded for each can.
8.5.2 Mandrel:
8.5.2.1 The FRP cans shall be fabricated on mandrels with
uniform outer surface to minimize flat spots or indentations.
Mandrels may be of either collapsible or tapered design to
allow removal of the liner can. The extraction method shall
ensure safe removal without scratches.
8.5.2.2 The mandrel shall have a diameter within 60.25 %
of the specified diameter anywhere along its length.
8.5.2.3 The mandrel drive and related mechanisms shall be
capable of maintaining the proper pattern(s) from can to can.
8.5.2.4 Suitable polyester film, or other release agents such
as polyvinyl alcohol, or both, shall be used to provide a glossy
inner surface to ensure extraction without damage to the inner
surface.
8.5.2.5 Mandrel temperature must be 60°F (16°C) minimum
during application of material.
7
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this guide.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
15
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.5.3 Resin Apparatus—The resin-delivery equipment shall
be commercial internal-mixing units which will accurately
meter, dispense, and mix the proper ratio of catalyst to
promoted resin in adequate volume to properly wet out
(saturate) the glass reinforcement.
8.5.4 Reinforcement Apparatus—The machine apparatus
should deliver glass strand, and other reinforcements, in a
manner that is uniform, consistent and repeatable from part to
part. Application of reinforcements that may cause gaps, voids
or other structural impairments is not acceptable.
8.6 Resin Systems:
8.6.1 Resins shall be stored, promoted, catalyzed, and ap-
plied within the recommendations of the resin manufacturer.
8.6.1.1 The resins shall be maintained at a minimum tem-
perature of 60°F (16°C) during mixing and application.
8.6.1.2 Resins can be supplied in drums or tank-car quan-
tities. The mixing requirements apply equally to whatever
quantities are being mixed.
8.6.2 Resin viscosity may be adjusted for manufacturing
requirements by the addition of thixotropic agents such as
fumed silica or styrene, or both. The addition of thixotropic
agents or styrene shall be within the recommendation of the
resin manufacturer and in no case shall these concentrations
exceed 5 % by weight of the resin.
8.6.3 Resins containing dispersed solids shall be agitated
after mixing and continuously throughout use during applica-
tion.
8.6.4 Resins may be supplied with or without factory
promoters added. When promoters or other additives are added
at the fabrication site, adequate equipment shall be provided to
assure accurate measurement and adequate mixing of resin.
8.6.5 Prior to application, a gel time test shall be performed
on the resin. A suitable means shall be used to monitor the flow
of catalyst to ensure that properly catalyzed resin is delivered
to the mandrel.
8.7 Reinforcement:
8.7.1 Structural reinforcements shall be E or E-CR-grade
fiberglass rovings and mat with sizings and binder systems
compatible with the specified resin, as stated in the requirement
in Section 6.
8.7.2 All reinforcement products shall be packaged, stored,
and handled in such a manner that does not allow damage or
contamination (that is, dirt, moisture, etc.).
8.7.3 Winding rovings shall be continuous strands having
nominal yield of 200 yd/lb, or greater.
8.7.4 Chopped-strand mat shall consist of random fibers
with a minimum length of 1 in. (25 mm) and maximum of 2 in.
(50 mm). A nominal weight of 1.5 oz/ft2 (458 g/m2) is required.
Mat may be applied as roll goods or by use of a chopper gun.
8.8 Fabrication Procedures:
8.8.1 Mandrel Preparation:
8.8.1.1 Liner cans shall be constructed over a smooth
mandrel surface with a laminate consisting of: (1) a corrosion
barrier that consists of a resin-rich inner surface reinforced
with one or more veil layers and interior layer(s) reinforced
with chopped-strand mat, both intended for optimum chemical
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
resistance; (2) a structural layer reinforced with continuous-
strand rovings and mat layers for structured requirements; and
(3) an exterior outer surface for weather, erosion, and environ-
mental protection.
8.8.1.2 The specific laminate sequence and number of layers
shall be determined by the design professional and detailed on
the manufacturing drawings.
8.8.1.3 The mandrel and any molds shall be examined prior
to the start of fabrication to assure that their surfaces are clean
and free of defects.
8.8.2 Corrosion Barrier:
8.8.2.1 The corrosion barrier shall be built-up on the man-
drel in a sequential operation to achieve the requirements of the
specified laminate.
8.8.2.2 A resin coat shall be applied to the rotating mandrel
before application of any reinforcement. The mandrel shall be
wetted with resin and the specified veil applied. The veil should
be applied with sufficient overlap to ensure that no gaps are
present. Additional wetting of the veil may be required to
achieve proper saturation.
8.8.2.3 The inner surface shall be 0.010-in. (0.25-mm)
nominal thickness reinforced with a minimum one-veil rein-
forcement.
8.8.2.4 The resin content of the inner surface shall be
approximately 85 % by weight.
8.8.2.5 After a uniform wet-resin coat has been applied the
veil shall be applied with a minimum overlap of 0.5 in. (13
mm) and no gaps shall be permitted. Another application of
resin shall then be applied to assure complete wet-out of the
veil.
8.8.2.6 The interior layers shall consist of chopped-strand
mat or chopped rovings in one or more layers as specified.
8.8.2.7 Chopped strand and resin shall be applied with
uniform thickness. If more than 1.5 oz/ft2 (458 g ⁄m2) is
required, it shall be applied in a minimum of two applications.
8.8.2.8 Each pass shall be adequately rolled to ensure proper
wet-out and air pocket removal.
8.8.2.9 The resin content of the interior layer(s) shall be at
least 70 %, but not more than 80 % by weight.
8.8.2.10 The mat shall be overlapped a minimum of 0.5 in.
(13 mm) and no gaps shall be permitted.
8.8.2.11 After completion of the corrosion barrier (inner
surface and interior layers), the laminate shall be allowed to
exotherm and essentially cure prior to the application of the
structural wall. The structural wall shall not be allowed to
compress the thickness of the corrosion barrier.
8.8.2.12 After exotherm, the liner shall be inspected for
rough spots, bumps, or depressions that may cause subsequent
bridging of the filament winding.
8.8.2.13 The corrosion barrier shall be free of any
contamination, including moisture, and shall be acetone-
sensitive prior to start of filament winding.
8.8.3 Structural Layer:
8.8.3.1 Before starting the structural layer, the surface of the
corrosion barrier shall be inspected for defects, air pockets,
protruding glass fibers, ridges at abutted reinforcement, or
other conditions which could lead to deficiencies in subsequent
operations.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
16
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.8.3.2 Such deficiencies shall be removed or corrected by
grinding or sanding. Any pockets or depressions created by this
operation shall be filled with chopped-strand laminate to a
uniform flush surface.
8.8.3.3 The structural reinforcement should be applied with
24 hours after completion of the corrosion barrier. The surface
of the corrosion barrier must be inspected for contamination
and condensation, and an acetone sensitivity test performed. If
no contamination or condensation is found, and the surface is
acetone sensitive, the structural reinforcement may be applied.
8.8.3.4 If the surface does not become tacky with acetone,
or if the surface becomes contaminated by any cause, the
surface shall be thoroughly sanded to remove the surface gloss.
The surface shall then be blown free of excessive dust. In no
case shall the time between completion of the corrosion barrier
and application of the structural layer exceed 72 h without
sanding.
8.8.3.5 The structural layer shall consist of continuous
wound strands at the specified winding angle. Strands shall be
applied as a flat band in a helical pattern so as to provide full
mandrel coverage of bi-directional layers without gaps or
overlays. Patterns that may not allow butting bands next to the
preceding band shall not be used.
8.8.3.6 As determined by the design professional, localized
reinforcements may consist of circular wound rovings and weft
unidirectional roving parallel to the axis and shall be detailed
on the manufacturing drawings.
8.8.3.7 The winding angle shall be as specified in the project
specifications and drawings. Allowable variation from the
specified angle is 63°.
8.8.3.8 Immediately before start of the structural layer
application, a wet layer of chopped strand shall be applied to
“bed” the continuous strand and compensate for any minor
outer-surface irregularities.
8.8.3.9 The first complete cycle (closed-pattern layer) of
winding shall be applied with sufficient resin to fill in minor
surface irregularities to aid in and ensure good bedding onto
the cured corrosion barrier.
8.8.3.10 The glass content of the structural layer shall be
within 63 % of that used to predict the design properties.
8.8.3.11 Not more than 5 % of the winding strand or two
adjacent strands may be allowed to break out before the
operation is stopped and the strands retied.
8.8.3.12 If the winding operation is not continuous to the
final thickness, or if equipment breakdown occurs that delays
completion, then the procedures in 8.8.3.3 and 8.8.3.4 shall be
followed before the winding operation restarts.
8.8.4 Outer Layer—The outer exterior surface shall be
coated with a layer of non-air-inhibited resin.
8.8.5 Fittings:
8.8.5.1 Fittings shall be fabricated by hand lay-up construc-
tion of alternate layers of mat and woven roving or by filament
winding, or a combination of both. The precise sequence and
number of layers shall be specified by the design professional
and detailed on the manufacturing drawings.
8.8.5.2 All fittings, regardless of structural layer design,
shall have a corrosion barrier equal to the liner requirements.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
8.8.5.3 Flanges shall be fabricated by hand lay-up proce-
dures. The stub wall reinforcing shall be continuous into the
flange face.
8.8.6 Structural Joints:
8.8.6.1 Structural joints for shop fabrication and field instal-
lation shall be butt-and-strap type. The specific joint require-
ments shall be determined by the design professional.
8.8.6.2 Butt-and-strap joints may be on the inside only or
inside and outside.
8.8.6.3 Butt-and-strap joints shall be constructed with alter-
nating layers of mat and woven roving to the thickness
specified.
8.8.6.4 The first and last layers of butt-and-strap joints shall
be mat.
8.8.6.5 All structural joints 24 in. (610 mm) in diameter and
larger shall have an internal sealing laminate at least equal in
construction to the specified corrosion barrier.
8.9 Handling and Transportation:
8.9.1 All liner sections shall be properly handled in a safe
manner that will not allow damage, scuffing, or over-stressing.
The FRP components shall not be allowed to impact on any
hard objects as nonvisible impact damage may occur.
8.9.2 All shipments shall be adequately packaged, braced,
and cradled in order to prevent damage during transit. Ends and
fittings shall be adequately protected from damage.
8.9.3 All handling of cans shall be by means of non-abrasive
slings. The use of cables or chains is prohibited.
8.10 Erection Appurtenances:
8.10.1 Lifting lugs or similar attachments shall be provided
on each liner section for ease of handling and erection.
8.10.1.1 The design of these attachments shall be incorpo-
rated into the overall design of the liner and shall take into
account the method of handling and loads imposed.
8.10.1.2 Location of the lifting attachments shall be deter-
mined by the fabricator and reviewed by the design profes-
sional. Details of the attachments shall be furnished by the
design professional.
8.11 Tolerances:
8.11.1 The design professional is responsible to set consis-
tent tolerances for the manufacturing of the FRP cans and the
steel components that are attached to the cans. Tolerances shall
take into account limitations with respect to methods of
manufacturing.
8.11.2 The tolerance of can diameter, based on internal
measurement when the can is in the vertical position, including
the out-of-roundness, shall be less than 1 %.
8.11.3 Flat spots on a can shall not cause a change in
geometry in excess of that resulting in a radial offset of 0.2 in.
(5 mm) over 2 ft (610 mm), 0.4 in. (10 mm) over 3 ft (915
mm), and 0.8 in. (20 mm) over 4 ft (1219 mm) of the
circumference of the can.
8.11.4 Tolerance on the overall can height shall be 61⁄2 %
but shall not exceed 61⁄2 in. (13 mm).
8.11.5 Tolerance on the thickness of total structural layer
and of the corrosion-barrier layer at any point shall be −10 to
+20 %. The tolerance on the average thickness of a can, based
on thickness measurements of at least five randomly selected
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
17
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
points, or on the weight of the can, however, shall be between
−5 and +10 %. When based on weight, there shall be no limit
on the tolerance on underweight as long as the thickness
tolerances are achieved.
8.11.6 Control the total weight of the liner in order that the
grillages not be overloaded.
9. Erection of FRP Liners
9.1 Erection Scheme and Sequence:
9.1.1 Prior to liner erection, a construction plan shall be
formulated detailing the erection sequence and methods to be
employed by the contractor.
9.1.2 Consideration shall be given to the loads imposed on
the FRP liner during handling, storage, and erection. Stresses
resulting from these loads shall be accounted for during the
initial-design stage and incorporated into the final design.
Conditions such as ovalling and localized stresses at lifting
points are of particular importance.
9.1.3 All rigging materials and hoisting equipment shall be
designed by a licensed engineer and made available to the
owner for review, if requested.
9.2 Handling and Storage on Site:
9.2.1 Handling of liner cans shall be done with slings made
of nylon or other similar materials to prevent damage to the
exterior surface.
9.2.2 When repositioning the liner cans from the horizontal
to the vertical position, take care to avoid bottom edge point
loading conditions which may cause cracking of the interior
corrosion-barrier surface.
9.2.3 Liner cans shall be stored in a manner that will
minimize ovalling.
9.2.4 Stored liner cans shall be checked for wind effects and
suitable anchorage or guy wires provided if required.
9.3 Erection Appurtenances:
9.3.1 The use of alignment lugs on each liner can is required
to ensure proper fit-up and liner orientation during the erection
phase. They shall be designed to accommodate any loads
imposed during erection.
9.3.2 When the liner installation utilizes a temporary FRP
lifting shoulder to support the liner during erection, it shall be
similar in fabrication to any permanent support shoulders. The
lifting shoulder shall be designed to accommodate all loads
imposed during erection.
9.4 Field Joints:
9.4.1 Field joints shall be connected as shown on the
erection drawings.
9.4.2 All field joints shall be designed to transmit the loads
from each liner can to the next. The joint shall be equivalent in
strength to the structural layer.
9.4.3 A butt-and-strap joint is preferred to other types. The
width of the joint shall be a minimum of 16 in. (406 mm) with
the sum of the exterior and interior overlay at least equal to the
full-wall thickness of the thinner can.
9.4.4 All joint types shall be cured to at least 25 Barcol
hardness, read at eight places equally spaced on each surface
around the circumference, and averaged, eliminating the high
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
and low readings, before moving the section. Barcol readings
shall be made for both the interior and exterior joint surfaces.
9.4.5 The contractor shall provide methods to ensure proper
alignment of joints, tolerances, and clearances to the design
professional for review prior to erection.
9.4.6 The contractor shall provide an inspection and testing
program, as well as safety recommendations, to the design
professional for review prior to erection.
9.5 Field Joint Lamination Procedure:
9.5.1 Joint Overlay Zone Preparation:
9.5.1.1 The field weld overlay must be applied onto the
surface of an FRP Liner Can which has been abraded to
completely remove the glaze, and is clean and dry. The surface
glaze (external post coat or internal corrosion barrier), must be
abraded in the overlay zone by grinding using a 24 grit
grinding disc, a 36 grit grinding disc can be used if it produces
the required surface profile. The abraded surface should not
have a polished finish appearance; it must remove the surface
glaze exposing a clean abraded surface which has a roughened
finish approximately a 0.15 mm (0.006) mil minimum texture.
9.5.1.2 The surface preparation should be done just prior to
fabricating the weld overlay (no more than 12 hours maximum
prior to overlay placement). If the surface has been pre-ground
and left exposed to exterior environments (wet with dew or
moisture) then acetone solvent wipe, allow to air dry, or dry
with a heat gun, and regrind the overlay zone.
9.5.1.3 If the grinding dust and dirt has not been removed
from the overlay surface, this will cause the overlay not to have
the proper bond adhesion. Clean, dry air or a clean cotton rag
maybe used to remove the surface dust.
9.5.1.4 If there is doubt about the surface preparation,
re-prepare the surface for bonding.
9.5.2 Weld Overlay Placement:
9.5.2.1 Verify the proper weld kit materials are available.
Overlay patches consist of multiple glass fabric plies; refer to
project drawings for the fabric ply order and quantities.
9.5.2.2 Verify surface preparation is completed properly and
proceed with lamination.
9.5.2.3 If required, a bonding coat of catalyzed resin may be
applied to the section of the overlay zone to receive the
overlay. This should be done before the application of the first
plies.
9.5.2.4 Wet out the overlay plies on clean cardboard or non
waxed Kraft paper. Be certain that all tools are clean and free
of liquid solvent before using. Begin to wet out overlay plies
starting with the widest ply first on the wet out table. Verify
complete saturation of laminate plies with catalyzed resin. Do
not use an excessive amount of resin to wet overlay patches.
9.5.2.5 Apply the overlay material. Application in patch
form is recommended. Apply the completed package of plies
which have been wet out to liner can joint area. The overlay
package should be centered on the liner can joint. Use a
serrated roller tool to remove entrapped air from the laminated
patch after it is placed on the liner can surface. Continue
applying overlay packages until the weld joint area has been
closed completely.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
18
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.5.2.6 If the patch begins to gel, (i.e. harden) prior to
placement on the liner can surface or prior to all the air removal
between the cans and the overlay, remove the patch and discard
it.
9.5.2.7 Allow laminate package to completely exotherm and
cool to ambient temperature.
9.5.2.8 Repeat procedure from step 9.5.1.1 for each follow-
ing laminate sequence to apply the remainder of the overlay
material as defined in the overlay kit (glass layers).
9.5.2.9 Visually inspect the weld overlay, remove and cor-
rect with additional overlay material any deficiencies exceed-
ing the prescribed limit per square foot area Ishall not exceed
the following. MoveMore][VB60] stringent requirements may
take precedence over these requirements.
9.5.3 Top Coat of Overlay Surface:
9.5.3.1 After application of all overlay laminate packages,
and all repairs have been completed prepare the overlay
laminate for a final resin coat by grinding all loose edges and
burrs. Use of a 36 grit grinding disc or higher is acceptable for
this step, as the intent is to provide a smooth finished laminate
surface profile.
9.5.3.2 Apply a coating or catalyzed resin to the entire
overlay joint area. This final topcoat is intended to provide a
resin rich surface, possibly with the addition of chemicals for
ultraviolet protection and wax for providing a tack free surface.
10. Quality Assurance and Quality Control
10.1 Quality Assurance and Quality Control:
10.1.1 Minimum quality-control criteria are stated for the
design, fabrication, erection, and inspection of the FRP
chimney-liner system and accessories, and to ensure a system
of high-operating reliability.
10.1.2 Minimum quality requirements shall be ensured
through the entire process of design, fabrication, and installa-
tion. The components for the program may be defined by the
fabricator or a designated representative of the owner. The
procedures and practices shall be performed by persons with a
demonstrated knowledge of FRP design and fabrication and the
specific requirements of chimney liners.
10.2 Quality-Assurance Program:
10.2.1 The contractor’s organization shall be established in
such a manner that persons involved in the quality-assurance
program have sufficient authority and organizational freedom
to identify quality nonconformances. The quality-assurance
program shall define the method(s) to initiate, recommend, or
provide solutions, as well as to verify implementation of
solutions.
10.2.2 The organization shall be established in such a
manner that the individual or group assigned the responsibility
for checking, auditing, inspecting, or otherwise verifying that
an activity has been correctly performed is independent of the
individual or group directly responsible for performing the
specific activity.
10.2.3 The authority and responsibility of persons perform-
ing activities affecting quality shall be clearly established and
documented in the contractor’s quality-assurance manual.
10.2.4 The contractor shall establish and maintain a quality-
assurance program for the control over the quality of the
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
specific items being supplied or the work to be performed. The
contractor shall require any subcontractors or suppliers to
establish and implement a quality-assurance program for the
work to be performed or the items to be supplied, or both.
10.2.5 The quality of all items under contract, whether
supplied by the contractor or a subcontractor, shall be con-
trolled at all points necessary to assure conformance with the
requirements of this guide and associated codes and standards.
10.2.6 The quality-assurance program shall be documented
in detail in a quality-assurance manual, subject to the owner’s
(or his designee’s) review.
10.2.7 The contractor’s quality-assurance manual shall in-
clude: written instructions, procedures, or drawings to direct
and control activities affecting quality. Job specifications,
instructions, job tickets, planning sheets, operating or proce-
dure manuals, test and repair procedures, or other relevant
documents shall be maintained to control quality.
10.2.8 The contractor’s quality-control system shall provide
procedures that will ensure that issued documents affecting
quality, such as procurement documents, reports, drawings,
calculations, procedures, and instructions, are adequately con-
trolled. The control specified in the procedures shall assure that
the documents are reviewed for adequacy and approved for
release by authorized personnel. Changes to these documents
shall be authorized and controlled in the same manner as the
original documents.
10.2.9 The design professional shall ensure that applicable
codes and standards have been included in his design. Mea-
sures shall be established to ensure that appropriate quality
requirements are specified and included in the design docu-
ments.
10.2.10 Design-control measurements shall provide for
verifying or checking the adequacy of design by performance
of design reviews and calculational or test programs.
10.2.11 The design professional shall identify and control
design interfaces, including coordination, review, and approval
with participating organizations of all interfaces with the
subject equipment.
10.2.12 The contractor shall ensure that purchased items
and services, whether purchased directly by him or through his
subcontractors, conform to the requirements of the procure-
ment documents. The contractor’s procedures shall include, as
appropriate: (1) provisions for source evaluation and selection
by means of historical quality-performance data, source sur-
veys or audits, or source qualification programs; and (2)
objective evidence of quality furnished by the equipment
subcontractor, source inspection and audit, and inspection and
test of item upon delivery.
10.2.13 The contractor shall maintain a system of receiving
control which will assure that the material received is properly
identified and has documentation, including required material
certifications or material-test reports to satisfy code or standard
requirements, as ordered. The material-control system shall
ensure that only acceptable material is used for fabrication or
construction. These procedures shall also identify the methods
of marking and maintaining control on applicable parts and
materials.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
19
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10.2.14 The contractor shall establish a program for in-
process and final inspection of activities affecting quality to
ensure conformance with documented instructions, procedures,
and drawings. Examinations, measurements, or tests shall be
performed for each activity, where necessary, to ensure quality.
Inspection and test activities to verify that the quality of work
shall be performed by persons other than those who performed
the work being inspected.
10.2.15 Sufficient records shall be prepared as work is
performed to furnish documentary evidence of the quality of
items and activities affecting quality. The records shall be
readily identifiable and retrievable for a period to be identified
by contract.
10.3 Quality-Assurance Surveillance:
10.3.1 All activities performed by the contractor and sub-
contractors are subject to quality-assurance surveillance or
audit, or both, by the owner. Surveillance or audit, or both,
shall not relieve the contractor of any responsibility for the
requirements of his contract and shall not be considered as
waiver of warranty or other rights.
10.3.2 Compliance with the requirements of this guide does
not relieve the contractor of his responsibility to ensure that all
other contract requirements are met.
10.3.3 The owner shall have the right to establish
inspection-hold points and be given prior notice to all inspec-
tions designated as inspection-hold points.
10.3.4 Prior to the start of fabrication activities, the owner
may prepare a vendor-surveillance-check plan (VSCP) which
will be forwarded to the contractor. The VSCP shall establish
those points in the fabrication cycle that the owner will
witness, verify, or perform.
10.3.5 The owner reserves the right to provide a quality-
assurance representative in the fabrication shop. A mutually
acceptable quality-assurance program that incorporates the
intent of the requirements of 10.2.1, 10.2.2, and 10.2.3 shall be
developed by the fabricator.
10.4 Inspections:
10.4.1 Inspections and approval of all critical, major, and
minor quality attributes shall be clearly defined in the quality-
assurance manual.
10.4.2 The acceptance and rejection criteria shall be clearly
defined for materials and laminate construction. Laminates
shall be inspected for visual defects such as pits, voids, blisters,
cracks and other defects listed in Table 5 of Specification
C582. Special consideration shall be provided for entrapped air
in the bond area of the corrosion barrier as these may result in
eventual blistering. Appropriate acceptance and repair proce-
dures shall be written in the Quality Assurance Manual.
10.4.3 The quality-assurance procedures shall address in-
spections and approval of quality attributes which include, but
are not limited to the following:
10.4.3.1 Completeness of approved drawings and specifica-
tions;
10.4.3.2 Material description of resins, reinforcements,
putty, and additives;
10.4.3.3 Surface Preparation:
(a) Mandrel.
(b) Corrosion barrier to structural winding.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
(c) Ribs and shoulders. 10.5.4 Resin type with the type of catalyst and promotion
(d) Nozzles and joints. system intended and the location of its intended use.
(e) Secondary bonding of any discontinuous operations 10.5.5 The manufacturer’s general-arrangement drawings
that may occur. showing all dimensions, cross-sectional details of shell joints
10.4.3.4 Hand Lay-Up Laminate (Including Attachments or slip-mold-type joints, nozzles or manways, lugs and
and Appurtenances): supports, knuckles, pads, or other appurtenances. The width,
(a) Thickness control. minimum thickness, and composition of all laminates shall be
(b) Laminate sequences. included.
(c) Exotherm limit. 10.5.6 Description of the method of construction of flanges
(d) Critical ply intervals. detailing the method of connection between the flange face and
(e) Delay-and-restarting contingencies. neck.
(f) Reinforcement staggering. 10.5.7 The materials of construction and dimension of all
(g) Reinforcement overlap. weldments.
(h) Glass-to-resin ratios. 10.5.8 Identification of areas to receive abrasion-resistant
(i) Cure. laminates, for the purpose of resisting localized abrasion or
(j) Wax coat (where applicable). impingement.
10.4.3.5 Filament-Wound Laminate (Including Attachments 10.5.9 All major design criteria including laminate
and Appurtenances): physicals, maximum deflections, and safety factors.
(a) Thickness. 10.5.10 The plan for production of the equipment including
(b) Band width and strands per inch. the expected rate of production, number of shifts per day,
(c) Winding angle. names of the production manager, and leaders of each shift (if
(d) Laminate sequence. known).
(e) Exotherm limit. 10.5.11 Details of assembly and field installation of the
(f) Glass-to-resin ratio. equipment including edge preparations, end gap tolerances,
(g) Cure. and detailed joint-overlay laminate description including the
(h) Strand yield. width and composition of each ply. The method for protection
(i) Gapping tolerance. of the joint area during lamination shall be provided.
10.4.3.6 Environmental Constraints: 10.5.12 All inspection forms required to comply with this
(a) Temperature (air and resin). guide.
(b) Humidity. 10.5.13 Quality-assurance manual.
10.4.3.7 Mechanical Elements Non-FRP: 10.5.14 All design bases including calculations, laminate
(a) Welding and steel fabrication. design, and physical sample test data.
(b) Bolt torques.
10.5.15 Shipping, handling, and storage recommendations
(c) Equipment lifting and handling.
and instructions.
(d) Shipment to the job site.
(e) Storage of completed equipment.
11. Operation, Maintenance, and Start-Up Procedures
(f) Erection sequence.
10.4.3.8 Dimensions and Weights: 11.1 Initial Start-Up or Start-Up After a Long-Term Shut-
(a) Length. down:
(b) Thickness. 11.1.1 During start-up and shutdown, the temperature gra-
(c) Inside diameter. dients shall be gradual. Any sudden temperature changes shall
(d) Out-of-roundness. be avoided.
(e) Weight of finished part. 11.1.2 Prior to start-up, any temperature-moderation devices
10.4.4 A typical inspection checklist is contained in Annex (that is, spray quench systems) shall be checked and opera-
A1. tional.
10.5 Submittals—The following documentation shall be 11.1.3 Prior to start-up all expansion joints, counterweights,
submitted for review prior to fabrication by the contractor, if guides, etc. shall be checked, cleaned, and operating smoothly.
requested by the owner: 11.2 Operation and Maintenance:
10.5.1 The details of construction, including ply thickness 11.2.1 Inspections—Inspections of critical stress areas (that
and type of reinforcement, for all laminates. is, supports) shall be inspected at least annually. A vertical
10.5.2 The description of laminates shall include all plies of interior and exterior full-height inspection of the liner shall be
the corrosion barrier and structural wall, including the mini- performed at regular intervals (maximum two years).
mum allowable thickness for laminate sequences and the 11.2.2 Inspectors shall be qualified to inspect FRP materials
location of exotherm plies. The glass content of the corrosion and any areas of stress shall be noted and mapped.
barrier and structural wall of each laminate shall be provided. 11.2.3 All moving parts (that is, expansion joints), shall be
10.5.3 Filament-wound laminates shall be described includ- inspected regularly to ensure that all are operating satisfacto-
ing the thickness of each cycle, wind angle, and band density. rily. Additionally, any spray-quench system shall be tested. All
The yield of winding strand shall be listed. drains shall be kept clear.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
20
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
11.2.4 Written reports of inspections and unusual operating 11.2.6 Operation of the facility shall be such that buildup of
occurrences shall be recorded and a liner history maintained fly ash on the liner is minimized. The spray-quench system
over the life of the liner. shall not be operated continuously on a regular basis. Opera-
11.2.5 During operation of the liner, the difference in tion of the spray-quench system causes buildup of fly ash on
temperature between the ambient temperature surrounding the the liner.
liner shall be minimized. For instance, during cold weather,
exterior chimney-column vents shall not be opened unless
necessary.

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. TYPICAL INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Inspection Item Inspection Inspection Reference Procedure Reference Remarks Documentation

Frequency Method Requirement

(1) Mandrel Prior to Start of

Carbon Veil
Application (Hold
Point)
Smooth each can visual ... ... ... not formally
documented
Clean each can visual ... ... ... not formally
documented
Other Items to Verify
Resin batch numbers each can visual ... ... ... quality assurance
manual (QAM)
Resin shelf life each batch visual (drums) ... 6 months resin if exceeds 6 months, not formally
supplier retest in documented
accordance
with procedure
Resin gel-time test each batch Test Method QC procedure resin supplier procedure ... QAM
daily D2471 specifications
Resin viscosity test each batch Test Method procedure resin suppliers procedure QAM
daily D2393 specifications
Glass receiving report each can visual procedure ... ... ... QAM
Air temperature in every day thermometer on ... 50°F (10°C), min fabricator material usage
work area mandrel form
Resin temperature in point each can visual ... min 60°F (16°C) fabricator material usage
of use max 95°F (32°C) form
(2) Carbon Veil (Witness
Application)
Smooth—no wrinkles which each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
cannot be rolled documented
out before gel
Full wet-out each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
documented
(3) Surfacing Veil (Witness
Application)
Smooth—no wrinkles which each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
cannot be rolled documented
out before gel
Full wet-out each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
documented
(4) Chopped Strand (Witness
First Layer At Least)
Smooth—no wrinkles which each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
cannot be rolled documented
out before gel
Full wet-out each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
documented
(5) Ready to Start Filament-
Winding (Witness
Point)
Chopped-strand used each can visual ... 3 oz/ft2 (915 g/m2), procedure material usage
min (2 layers
min)

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
21
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)

Inspection Item Inspection Inspection Reference Procedure Reference Remarks Documentation

Frequency Method Requirement
Chopped-strand layers each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
gelled prior documented
to winding
Rough spots each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
ground smooth documented
During winding:
Winding (helix) angle each can visual ... 55–65° specification QAM
(6) After Fabrication is
Complete, and Prior to
Removal from Mandrel
(Witness Point)
No gaps between glass each can visual ... ... ... ... not formally
strands documented
Proper number of filament- each can visual (check ... ... ... QAM
winding cycles based “counter”-
on specified wall passes/cycle)
thickness
All required stiffeners each can visual ... various requirements drawings ... QAM
etc . . . added
Outer surface coat applied each can visual ... U.V. stabilizer procedure QAM
(U.V. stabilizer/wax) and wax
Resin-glass ratio: interior each can Test Method procedure glass content 25 ± procedure QAM
layer (chopped strand) D2584 5 % by weight
Exterior layer (filament- each can Test Method procedure glass content 55 − 0 + procedure QAM
wound) D2584 15 % by weight
Total wall thickness each can cut-outs or ultra ... minimum thickness for procedure QAM
sonics, or both each can and
drawings
Corrosion barrier thickness each can cut-outs ... 0.096 in. (2.5 mm), specification QAM
(veil plus 2 mat) nominal
Barcol hardness (for each can Test Method procedure per resin manufacturer procedure Barcol hardness of QAM
surface cure) D2583 corrosion barrier
to be measured
after can removed
from mandrel
Visual inspection/repair each can visual ... visual specification Inspect corrosion grid preliminary inner
requirements barrier after can
is removed
from mandrel

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. COMMENTARY

X1.1 Reference 7.2—The information presented in the
ASCE report (2) is used extensively.
X1.1.1 Reference 7.2.3—The error introduced in the analy-
sis of cylindrical shells by the beam theory is the assumption
that plane surfaces remain plane, or that the bending stresses
are proportional to the distances from the neutral axis.
X1.1.2 Reference 7.2.9—If experimental data is available or
if other values of material properties are available, or both, they
may be used, provided the various parameters defined in this
section can be substantiated (3).
X1.1.3 Reference 7.2.12—It will be up to the user of the
alternative design procedures to properly substantiate the
rationality and the choice of the parameters used in the
methods. Two examples of such design procedures are given as
follows:
(1) Laminate theory may be used in arriving at the theo-
retical properties of the laminate section based on the glass
ratio, angle of wind and the material properties of the resin and
reinforcement.
(2) The entire formulation may be developed in terms of
limiting lamina stresses and strains that constitute the design
criteria.
X1.2 Reference 7.3.1—The recommended dead load is
based on a statistical analysis of some liners. See also X1.3.6.
X1.2.1 Reference 7.3.3—The erection loads do not occur in
conjunction with the thermal loads and hence will not normally
control the design of the liner. However, the circumferential
stresses and stability shall be investigated for handling proce-
dures.
X1.3 Reference 7.4—The mass of the liner is usually not
large enough to significantly affect the dynamic wind charac-
teristics of the concrete column.
X1.3.1 Reference 7.6.2—An empirical method is presented
in Ref (2). Field data was collected for temperature distribu-
tions along and across steel liners with different geometric
configurations and flow characteristics. Recommendations are
based on these measurements made in the early 1970’s. The

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
22
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
operating conditions of some power plants have been altered
since then. Also, the thermal characteristics of uninsulated
fiber-reinforced liners are significantly different from the insu-
lated steel liners considered in the reports.
X1.3.2 The ASCE report remains a primary publicly avail-
able resource on the thermal distributions in liners. However,
caution is required in the present application of the ASCE
report recommendations.
X1.3.3 Reference 7.6.3—The temperature nonuniformity is
the result of incomplete mixing of different-temperature-level
flue-gas streams. The nonuniform temperature distribution
within the gas stream will impose a similar temperature
distribution on the inside of the liner, resulting in varying
temperatures around the centerline circumference of the liner.
These differentials produce unequal longitudinal thermal ex-
pansion causing lateral deflection of the liner. Longitudinal
stresses will develop when the liner is restrained.
X1.3.3.1 If the centerline temperature varies across the liner
as a linear function of the diameter, the resulting deformation
in the cylinder produces only beam-type stresses, if the liner is
restrained from bending freely. This idealized temperature NOTE 1—Curves are based on atmosphere at −20°F (−29°C) and sea
distribution along the centerline of the liner seldom occurs. level.
Secondary thermal stresses develop when nonlinear tempera- FIG. X1.1 External Pressure Curves (1)
ture variations are imposed across the liner.
X1.3.3.2 Reference 7.6.3.2—In the calculation of the total liners are as susceptible to vibration as steel liners. Measure-
thermal resistance, the temperature inside the liner may be ments of steel liners have shown pressure pulsation of 1⁄2 to 2
considered as the average gas temperature: in. of water and dominant frequencies of 1 to 2 Hz (cps). The

S T1
T0
2 D. (X1.1)
spectrum shown in Fig. X1.2 shows a peak at 1.8 cps.
Therefore, it is prudent to ensure a minimum natural frequency
of 2 cps to avoid resonance. Note that ovalling frequency of
X1.3.3.3 Reference 7.6.3.6—The calculations for obtaining liner is proportional to liner thickness, t, material factor
the temperature drop through the liner wall may be performed
in accordance with the procedure outlined in ACI 307. Other
substantiated heat-transfer models and the analysis thereof may
be used.
X1.3.4 Reference 7.7.1.3—Considering the variation of
pressure with elevation above sea level, the equation for Ds
becomes:

D s 5 0.52Hp' S 1
2
1
Ta Tg D inches of water (X1.2)
The negative pressure at the base of a chimney, computed in
accordance with Eq X1.2 under natural-draft conditions, is
shown in Fig. X1.1 in terms of average gas temperature for
various chimney heights. The negative static pressure at the
base of the stack is actually less than the plotted values be-
cause of flow losses, but for liner-design purposes, these val-
ues may be used.
X1.3.5 Reference 7.7.3—Gas movement through the liner is
turbulent and may cause significant pressure fluctuation. At the
present time there is little data available on the magnitude and
frequency of pressure fluctuations, or their spatial distributions
within the liner. The cause of the fluctuations may be associ-
ated with the uneven nature of the combustion process,
turbulence induced when the gas stream changes direction or
velocity, or both, and possible induced pulsation due to an
imbalance in an induced-draft fan. Ovalling vibration of steel NOTE 1—Pressure difference measured by transducers located 180°
liners due to gas turbulence has been observed at several apart.
locations, and is a design criterion for steel liners. The FRP FIG. X1.2 Pressure Difference Versus Frequency

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
23
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5364 − 14 (2019)
=2 E/ @ γ ~ 12µ2 ! #
, and 1/r2. For chimney liners of the same
radius, the material factor for FRP is about 50 to 60 % of that
for steel; therefore, the thickness of the FRP liner must be 1.7
to 2 times that of the steel liner to result in the same natural
frequency.
X1.3.5.1 Reference 7.7.2.2—The formula given for ovalling
frequency of an unstiffened shell is applicable to small diam-
eter liners (approximately up to 6 ft (1.8 m)) in which the
thickness is not substantially increased.
X1.3.5.2 Reference 7.7.2.3—If the shell is stiffened, appro-
priate computation of natural frequency must be made.
X1.3.5.3 Reference 7.7.2.4—Although natural frequency
for circumferentially stiffened shell is not given, there is
nothing that prevents the design professional from using an
appropriate equation. The design professional can reference
Forsberg for a discussion of natural frequency of a stiffened
cylinder, or use the equations developed by Forsberg given in
the steel chimney liner reference (2).
X1.3.6 Reference 7.8—The upper load factor on dead load
was based on a statistical analysis of certain liners. A probabil-
ity of failure of 1 × 10−5 was used with the normal distribution.
The procedure given in Ref (4) was used in determining the
load factor.
X1.3.6.1 Reference 7.9.1—The material-resistance factor
(MRF) accounts for the usual variability in the room-
temperature properties of the liner material manufactured
under normal conditions of quality control, as specified in
Section 10. It is based on a coefficient of variation of the
measured property of less than 10 %. If the level of quality
control is not sufficient to ensure a coefficient of variation of
less than 10 %, then the MRF must be proportionally reduced.
X1.3.6.2 Reference 7.9.3—The time-and-temperature-
reduction factor (TTRF) accounts for the loss of the mechani-
cal properties of the liner material when subjected to the
temperature and chemical environment of the liner for the
duration of the load. When applied to long-term strength of
laminate in direct tension, it is the ratio of the average strength
of a loaded specimen in the chemical environment and tem-
perature of the liner that would cause creep rupture only after
the design life of the liner (35 years) to the strength of the
specimen as determined by short-term tests at room tempera-
ture. The TTRF should be distinguished from the retained
strength of the laminate, which is the percent of the short-term
strength of the laminate that is retained after exposure of the
unloaded specimen to the combined thermal and chemical
environment of interest. The values of the TTRF presented in
Section 7 were selected based on the engineering judgment of
the members of Subcommittee D20.23 and the limited test
results available (5).
X1.3.6.3 Reference 7.10.2—Wind loading is not considered
in the sustained or long-term loading because the contribution
of a factored-design wind load is very small, compared to other
long-term loads on the liner.
X1.4 Reference 7.11.1.1—A more accurate longitudinal
buckling strength of fiber-reinforced plastics may be deter-
mined from the following equation:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
24
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
2 =3 C =D x A θ
F z cr 5 (X1.3)
rt
X1.4.1 For further explanation see Ref (6). For a uniform
thickness of the shell and neglecting the shear deflection, the
equation reduces to the one given in 7.11.2, with kn = 1.0.
X1.4.2 The value of 0.6 in the equation in 7.11.1.2 corre-
sponds to a Poisson’s ratio of about 0.3.
X1.4.3 The above equation is based on the “long-shell”
formulation. The longitudinal-buckling strength for the “short”
shells is higher than that for the long shells. The effect of the
length for“ intermediate” shells can be incorporated in the
knockdown factor kn in the equation. The additional term of 1.5
(r/L1)2 (t/r) in the more exact semi-empirical equation for kn is
omitted because its contribution is not significant for the
practical range of values of (r/L1) and (t/r) for liners. Thus, its
maximum value is estimated at about 0.03 when (r/L1) is at its
practical maximum of 1.0 and t/r is 0.02. Furthermore,
dropping this term is more conservative.
X1.4.4 As the value of r/t is increased from 24 to 1160, the
value kn in the formula given in 7.11 varies from 0.768 to
0.208. The latter value corresponds to the buckling stress of
0.125 Et/r used in (2).
X1.4.5 In addition to longitudinal buckling of the cylindri-
cal shell, the combined flexural and longitudinal compressive
stress should not be high enough to cause failure, local
microbuckling, or delamination. Microbuckling occurs when
fiber bundles buckle locally and delamination causes buckling
of one or more laminate. Elastic buckling of a cylindrical shell
liner is a bifurcation phenomenon in which two adjacent
equilibrium configurations exist. The buckling occurs when the
strain energy required for deforming the liner into the buckled
configuration is less than the external work of the forces that
maintain the liner in the unbuckled configuration. Therefore,
the creep of the material in the unbuckled configuration does
not affect the buckling strength directly, although it magnifies
the imperfections and thus may affect the buckling strength
indirectly.
X1.4.6 High negative pressure can occur in the liner as a
result of the implosion effect following an explosion, or “puff”
in the boiler. Several coal-fired units have experienced explo-
sions during start-up which were severe enough to cause
extensive damage to steel liners. Nonuniform circumferential
negative pressures were estimated to exceed 10 in. of water.
X1.4.7 The sudden closing of flue dampers can also create
a similar condition resulting in high negative pressures.
X1.4.8 There are two significant considerations that suggest
that the reduction factors for buckling strength of fiber-
reinforced plastic liners may be more than those for the steel
liners. The normal thickness of the former is generally more
than that of the latter; thus the ratio of the magnitude of the
imperfections to the design thickness is likely to be less for
fiber-reinforced plastic. Secondly the method of fabrication of
most liners makes it less likely to have the deviation from the
circular form, as compared to steel liners, where individual
plates are field-welded.

X1.5 Reference 7.12.1—A more accurate analysis of the
circumferential buckling strength of fiber-reinforced plastics
may be determined from the following equation:
5.5k n ~ A x ! 1/4 ~ D θ ! 3/4
F θ cr 5
L 1 =rt
X1.5.1 For further explanation, see Ref (6). For a uniform
thickness of the liner, Eq X1.4 reduces to the one given in
7.11.1. The value of kn is taken as 0.9.
X1.5.2 The circumferential compressive stress should not
exceed the maximum compressive stress that causes mi-
crobuckling and delamination, as discussed in X1.4.
D5364 − 14 (2019)
X1.5.3 If the test data for the material properties of the
design laminate of the liner are not available, the moduli of
elasticity of the liner in circumferential compression may be
based on the following formula:
(X1.4) ~ E z c1/4 E θ b3/4 ! 5 W cm sin2 a (X1.5)
X1.5.4 Reference 7.12.4.4—The stiffness of the stiffener
should be large enough to resist ring buckling when subjected
to radial load, even when the shell buckles and the pressure
loads between stiffener rings are transferred to the rings. The
factor of safety, FS, without the RF = 2.60. For a fiberglass
stiffener with an RF = 0.52, the FS against buckling = 5.0. For
a steel stiffener, an MRF = 0.85, the FS > 3.0.

REFERENCES

(1) Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
(2) “Design and Construction of Steel Chimney Liners,” American
Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), 1975. Discontinued; reproduc-
tions at: UMI, 3009 N. Zeeb Rd., Ann Arbor, MI 48106.
(3) Nielsen, L. E., “Mechanical Properties of Polymers and Laminates,”
Vol 1, Dekar, 1974, pp. 8–83.
(4) MacGregor, J. G., “Safety and Limit States Design for Reinforced
Concrete,” Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering, Vol 3, 1976, pp.
481–513.
(5) Kraus, H., Creep Analysis, John Wiley and Sons, Chapter 5 (“Creep
Rupture”), p. 101, 1980.
(6) “Structural Plastics Design Manual,” ASCE Manual of Engineering
Practice No. 63, ASCE, New York, NY, 1984.
(7) Robinson, James, “Utility FRP Chimney Liner Survey,” United
Engineers and Constructors, Inc., Englewood, CO, May 1983.
(8) Zarghamee, Mehdi, S., Brainerd, M. L., and Tigne, D. B., “On
Thermal Blistering of FRP Chimney Liners,” Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE Vol 112, No. 4, April 1986, pp. 677-691.
(9) Nespoli, O., and Osborne, A. D., “Predicting Elastic Properties of FRP
Laminates at Elevated Temperatures,” 1986 Canadian RP/C Corro-
sion Conference Proceedings, SPI, Canada.
(10) Manual of Professional Practice, “Quality in the Constructed
Project,” American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), Vol 1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:15 EDT 2020
25
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5365 − 18

Standard Test Method for

Long-Term Ring-Bending Strain of “Fiberglass” (Glass-
Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5365; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers a procedure for determining the
long-term ring-bending strain (Sb) of “fiberglass” pipe. Both
glass-fiber-reinforced thermosetting-resin pipe (RTRP) and
glass-fiber-reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP) are “fiber-
glass” pipes.
1.2 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use. A
specific warning statement is given in 9.5.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.4 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D3567 Practice for Determining Dimensions of “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe and
Fittings
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced Plastic
Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D5365 - 12. DOI:
10.1520/D5365-18.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 General—Definitions are in accordance with Termi-
nology D883 and abbreviations are in accordance with Termi-
nology D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 end point—the failure of the test specimen. The failure
mode may be catastrophic, characterized by a sudden fracture
through the pipe wall in the area of greatest strain.
3.2.2 fiberglass pipe—tubular product containing glass-fiber
reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by curing thermo-
setting resin. The composite structure may contain aggregate,
granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents, pigments, or
dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or coatings may be
included.
3.2.3 reinforced polymer mortar pipe (RPMP)—fiberglass
pipe with aggregate.
3.2.4 reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP)—
fiberglass pipe without aggregate.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of subjecting submerged-pipe
ring specimens to various increasing deflections induced by a
constant load and monitoring the time to failure. A minimum of
18 samples are required. Test temperatures are obtained by
testing in a fluid environment where the temperature is
controlled.
4.2 The long-term ring-bending strain is obtained by an
extrapolation to 50 years of a log-log linear regression line for
failure strain versus time.
NOTE 2—It is the consensus of Subcommittee D20.23 that the log-log
linear regression analysis of test data is a conservative approach and is
representative of standard industry practice.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method determines the long-term ring-bending
strain of pipe when deflected under constant load and im-
mersed in a chemical environment. It has been found that
effects of chemical environments can be accelerated by strain
induced by deflection. This information is useful and necessary
for the design and application of buried fiberglass pipe.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5365 − 18
NOTE 3—Pipe of the same diameter but of different wall thicknesses
will develop different strains with the same deflection. Also, pipes having
the same wall thickness but different constructions making up the wall
may develop different strains with the same deflection.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Loading Device—The testing apparatus shall be suitable
for maintaining a constant load on the test specimen.
6.2 Load Application—The load shall be applied to the test
specimens using any of three alternative pairs of parallel
loading surfaces; flat plates, rods or bars of a length at least as
long as the pipe ring and of sufficient strength and stiffness to
ensure a straight loading surface throughout the test. The same
type of loading device shall be used for each specimen in a test
series. In order to achieve uniform strain along the pipe, use
0.25-in. (6-mm) thick elastomeric pads between the parallel
loading surfaces and the pipe ring (see Note 4).
6.2.1 Flat Plates—The plates shall have a minimum 6-in.
(152-mm) width.
6.2.2 Bars—The bars shall have a flat contact surface of
0.75 6 0.25 in. (19 6 6 mm).
6.2.3 Rods—The rod diameter shall be 2 6 0.25 in. (51 6 6
mm) for pipe rings 12 in. (305 mm) and greater in diameter.
For smaller pipes, the rod diameter shall be 1 6 0.25 in. (25 6
6 mm).
6.3 Environment Containment—A test enclosure of suffi-
cient size to fully immerse the test specimens shall be used to
contain the test solution. The enclosure shall not chemically
affect the test solution.
NOTE 4—Elastomeric pads with a hardness of Shore A40 to 70 have
been used successfully.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The test specimens shall be ring sections taken from a
sample(s) of pipe selected at random from a normal production
run. The test specimens shall have a minimum length of one
nominal pipe diameter or 12 in. (305 mm) 6 5 %, whichever is
less. Treat the cut edges of the specimens by the same
procedure as production products.
8. Test Conditions
8.1 The standard temperature shall be 23 6 5°C (73.4 6
9°F).
9. Procedure
9.1 Test Specimen Measurements:
9.1.1 Wall Thickness—Determine in accordance with Test
Method D3567.
9.1.2 Inside Diameter—Determine in accordance with Test
Method D3567 at both ends prior to deflection and average the
measurements.
NOTE 5—It is recommended that the inside diameter be measured with
the axis vertical.
9.2 Place the test apparatus into the test enclosure.
9.3 Place the pipe ring in the test apparatus (see Fig. 1) and
apply force to deflect the specimen at a rate not to exceed 10 %
of its diameter per minute while keeping the top and bottom
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Side View Front View
1 Load-Application Guides 5 Submerged Test Specimen
2 Load-Application Device 6 Test Solution
3 0.25 in (6 mm) Rubber Pad 7 0.25 in. (6 mm) Rubber Pad
4 Test Enclosure 8 Load-Applicatiion Device
FIG. 1 Long-Term Ring Bending Test Apparatus
loading devices (plates, bars, or rods) of the apparatus as near
parallel as practical. When the desired deflection is obtained
cease adding load to the apparatus.
NOTE 6—Alignment of the specimen within the loading devices is
critical. The loading devices should not only be parallel with the load
points 180° opposite, but the pipe ring should also be centered between the
load-application guides. Additionally, the load-application guides should
permit complete vertical freedom of movement, so the specimen remains
under constant load.
9.4 Measure the vertical inside diameter of the deflected
pipe specimen at both ends to the nearest 0.01 in. (0.25 mm).
Average the measurements and determine the initial deflection
by subtracting the average vertical inside diameter after load-
ing from the measurement determined in 9.1.2.
NOTE 7—Deflections in excess of 28 % of diameter may cause local
flattening of the pipe and lead to erratic test results. For deflections
approaching 28 %, improved accuracy is obtained by use of strain gages
or by establishing, for each pipe product, a calibration of deflection versus
measured strain. This calibration technique may also be useful at all
deflection levels.
9.5 Introduce the test solution to completely submerge the
pipe ring. The solution may be added prior to loading the pipe
ring and should be added within 30 min of loading the pipe
ring. Testing time commences only after both specimen loading
(deflection) and the addition of solution are complete.
(Warning—Since the failure mode could be catastrophic, take
precautions to prevent or contain splashing or spilling of the
test solution or other damages resulting from the sudden
collapse of the pipe specimen.)
9.6 Periodically check and maintain the test solution within
65 % of the specified strength or concentration for the
duration of the test. The test specimen must remain completely
submerged.
NOTE 8—As some solutions become more concentrated with the
evaporation of water, care must be exercised in replenishment to prevent
a build-up in strength. It may be necessary, with some reagents, to
periodically clean the deflected specimen and replace the test solution with
a fresh mixture. The use of plastic film, cut carefully to fit around the test
apparatus and floated on the top of the test solution, has been found
 D5365 − 18
helpful in reducing evaporation. where:
9.7 Continuously monitor the decreasing pipe-ring inside εf = failure strain in inches per inch (millimetres per
vertical diameter versus time or inspect the loaded specimen at millimetre),
least at the frequency given below and measure the pipe e = wall thickness in inches (millimetres) in accordance
specimen inside vertical diameter: with 9.1.1 (see Note 11),
D = mean diameter in inches (millimetres) (ID in accor-
Hours Inspect at Least
0 to 20 Every hour dance with 9.1.2 plus e in accordance with 9.1.1 or OD
20 to 40 Every 2 h minus e), and
40 to 60 Every 4 h ∆f = failure deflection in accordance with 10.1.
60 to 100 Every 8 h
100 to 600 Every 24 h 10.2.1.2 Springline failures:
600 to 6000 Every 48 h
After 6000 Every week 2.44~ e !~ ∆ f !
εf 5
Determine the deflection by subtracting the inside vertical ~ D1∆ f /2 ! 2
NOTE 11—The Sb calculations assume that the neutral axis is at the
diameter from the measurement determined in 9.1.2. pipe-wall midpoint. For pipe-wall constructions that produce an altered
neutral-axis position, it shall be necessary to evaluate results by substi-
NOTE 9—Decreasing diameter of the pipe ring (deflection change) may
tuting 2ȳ for e. (ȳ is the distance from the appropriate pipe surface to the
be monitored with an appropriate indicator on the apparatus above the
neutral axis.) Neutral-axis position shall be determined with strain-gage
solution and submerged specimen.
couples.
9.8 Calculate the end point (failure time and failure deflec- 10.2.2 Use for each specimen in the series, the log of the
tion) in accordance with 10.1. failure strain and the log of the failure time in hours as
9.9 Record the following data: described in A1.4.1. Calculate Sb, the strain at 50 years
9.9.1 Average pipe-wall thickness, (438 000 h).
10.2.3 If Sxy > 0 (see Annex A1.4.2.2), consider the data
9.9.2 Average inside pipe diameter before deflection, unsuitable.
9.9.3 Average inside pipe diameter after deflection, 10.2.4 Calculate r in accordance with A1.4.3.1. If r is less
9.9.4 Initial deflection, than the applicable minimum value given in Table A1.1,
9.9.5 Type of loading device, consider the data unsuitable.
9.9.6 Type, location and time of any distress of the pipe 10.2.5 Prepare a graph on a log-log diagram showing time
wall, to failure versus failure strain, with time plotted on the
9.9.7 Failure deflection and time at the end point, and horizontal (x) axis and strain on the vertical (y) axis.
9.9.8 Type of failure. 11. Reconfirmation of the Sb Regression Line
9.10 To determine the regression line and the lower confi- 11.1 When a piping product has an existing Sb regression
dence level, a minimum of 18 samples is required. Distribution line, any change in material, manufacturing process, construc-
of data points shall be as follows: tion or liner will necessitate a screening evaluation (reconfir-
Hours Failure Points
mation) as described in 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, and 11.5.
10 to 1000 At least 4 11.2 Calculate and plot the 95 % confidence limits and the
1000 to 6000 At least 3
After 6000 At least 3 95 % prediction limits of the original regression line in
After 10 000 At least 1 accordance with A1.4.6.2 using only data obtained prior to the
9.10.1 Those specimens that have not failed after more than change.
10 000 h may be included as failures to establish the regression NOTE 12—Prediction limits define the bounds for single observations,
line. Use of these data points may result in a higher or lower whereas confidence limits define the bounds for the regression line.
extrapolated value. NOTE 13—For 95 % confidence limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
the mean value for the regression line may fall above the UCL and a 2.5 %
NOTE 10—Non-failed specimens may be left under test and the probability that the mean value for the regression line may fall below the
regression line recalculated as failures are obtained. LCL. For 95 % prediction limits, there is a 2.5 % probability that
individual data points may fall above the UPL and a 2.5 % probability that
individual data points may fall below the LPL.
10. Calculation
11.3 From the original regression line, select strain levels
10.1 Determine the failure time and deflection: for at least two sets of specimens. Each specimen set shall
10.1.1 The failure deflection and failure time shall be the consist of three or more specimens tested at the same initial
last values noted prior to the fracture occurrence. strain level, as follows:
Hours to Failure Failure Points
10.2 Long-Term Ring-Bending Strain: (Average of Set)
10.2.1 Compute the failure strain for each failed specimen 10 to 200 At least 3
More than 1000 At least 3
as given in 10.2.1.1 and 10.2.1.2. Total: At least 6
10.2.1.1 Crown and invert failures: For the purposes of reconfirmation it is permitted to include
4.28~ e !~ ∆ f ! as failures those specimens which have not failed after 1200
εf 5
~ D1∆ f /2 ! 2 hours provided they exceed the existing regression line.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

11.4 Consider any changes in material or manufacturing
process minor and permissible if the results of 11.3 meet the
following criteria:
11.4.1 The average failure point for each specimen set falls
on or above the 95 % lower confidence limit of the original
regression line.
11.4.2 The earliest individual failure point falls on or above
the 95 % lower-prediction limit of the original regression line.
11.4.3 The failure points are distributed about the originally
determined regression line. No more than two-thirds of the
individual failure points may fall below the original regression
line.
11.5 It is permitted to assume that data meeting the criteria
of 11.4 are part of the original data set and to determine a new
regression line using all failure points. Specimens which have
not failed after 1200 hours are not suitable for establishing a
new regression line; however, it is permitted to use these points
for the purpose of reconfirmation.
11.6 If the data fails to satisfy the criteria of 11.4, the
changes are considered major and a new regression line must
be established. While the new test program is being conducted,
an interim Sb value for the material or process change may be
taken as the lower of the following calculations:
11.6.1 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the value ob-
tained by extrapolating the failure points of 11.3 to 438 000 h
(50 years) by the procedure in Annex A1.
(Mandatory Information)
A1. LEAST SQUARES CALCULATION FOR LONG TERM RING-BENDING STRAIN
A1.1 General
A1.1.1 The analysis is based on the following relationship:
y 5 a1bx
where:
y = one variable,
x = other variable,
b = slope of the line, and
a = intercept on the y axis.
A1.1.2 A linear functional relationship analysis (sometimes
called “covariance analysis”) is used, subject to tests for the
sign (that is, “+” or “−”) of the slope and the coefficient of
correlation for the quantity of data available. The relevant
equations are given together with example data and results, on
the basis of which any other statistical computing package may
be used subject to validation by agreement with the example
results to within the indicated limits.
A1.1.3 For the purposes of this annex, a design service life
of 50 years has been assumed.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5365 − 18
11.6.2 The 95 % lower confidence limit of the original
regression line at 50 years.
12. Report
12.1 Report the following information:
12.1.1 Complete identification of the pipe composition,
manufacturers code, size, and minimum wall thickness,
12.1.2 Description of loading apparatus and monitoring
system,
12.1.3 Data in 9.9,
12.1.4 Complete description of the test solution,
12.1.5 If used, the type of strain gage employed and method
of mounting,
12.1.6 Temperature at which the test was run,
12.1.7 Graph of 10.2.5,
12.1.8 Calculations of 10.2.1, and
12.1.9 Strain at 50 years for the mean and the value for r.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 No precision and bias statement can be made for this
test method since controlled round-robin test programs have
not been run. This test method is generally used to evaluate
large-diameter fiberglass pipe.
14. Keywords
14.1 constant load; deflection; end point; fiberglass pipe;
pipe-ring specimens; regression line; ring-bending strain
ANNEX
A1.2 Procedure for Analysis of Data
A1.2.1 Use a linear functional relationship analysis to
(A1.1) analyze n pairs of data values (as y and x) to obtain the
following information:
A1.2.1.1 The slope of line, b,
A1.2.1.2 The intercept on the y axis, a,
A1.2.1.3 The correlation coefficient, r, and
A1.2.1.4 The predicted mean and the lower 95 % confi-
dence and prediction intervals on the mean value.
A1.3 Assignment of Variables
A1.3.1 Let x be log10t, where t is the time, in hours, and let
y be log10V, where V is the stain value.
A1.4 Functional Relationship Equations and Method of
Calculation
A1.4.1 Basic Statistics and Symbols:
A1.4.1.1 The following basic statistics and symbols are
used:
4
 D5365 − 18

n = number of pairs of observed data values (Vi, ti), TABLE A1.1 Minimum Values for the Coefficient of Correlation, r,
for Acceptable Data From n Pairs of Data
yi = log10 of Vi, where Vi is the strain at failure of Observa-
tion i; i = 1, . . . n, n n-2 Minimum r
Number of variables Degrees of freedom
xi = log10 of ti, where ti is the time to failure in hours of 3 1 0.9999
Observation i; i = 1, . . .n, 4 2 0.9900
ȳ = arithmetic mean of all yi values: 5 3 0.9587
6 4 0.9172
1 7 5 0.8745
5
n (y i (A1.2) 8
9
6
7
0.8343
0.7977
10 8 0.7646
x̄ = arithmetic mean of all xivalues: 11 9 0.7348
12 10 0.7079
1 13 11 0.6835
5
n (x i (A1.3) 14 12 0.6614
15 13 0.6411
A1.4.2 Relevant Sums-of-Squares: 16 14 0.6226
17 15 0.6055
A1.4.2.1 Calculate the following sums-of-squares and 18 16 0.5897
cross-products: 19 17 0.5751
20 18 0.5614
1 21 19 0.5487
S xy 5
n ( ~ x 2 x̄ !~ y 2 ȳ !
i i (A1.4) 22 20 0.5368
23 21 0.5256
A1.4.2.2 If Sxy > 0, consider the data unsuitable for evalu- 24 22 0.5151
25 23 0.5052
ating the material; otherwise calculate also: 26 24 0.4958
1 27 25 0.4869
S xx 5
n ( ~ x 2 x̄ !
i
2
(A1.5) 32
37
30
35
0.4487
0.4182
42 40 0.3932
1
S yy 5
n ( ~y i 2 ȳ ! 2
(A1.6) 47
52
45
50
0.3721
0.3542
62 60 0.3248
A1.4.3 Correlation of Data: 72 70 0.3017
A1.4.3.1 Calculate the coefficient of correlation, r, from the 82 80 0.2830
92 90 0.2673
following relationship: 102 100 0.2540

2
~ S xy! 2
r 5 (A1.7)
~ S xx 3 S yy!
Yi, for true y and the error variance, σδ2, for x using Eq A1.12,
r 5 =r 2
Eq A1.13, and Eq A1.14, respectively:
A1.4.3.2 If the value of r is less than the applicable ξ i 5 $ λx i 1 ~ y i 2 a ! b % /2λ (A1.12)
minimum value given in Table A1.1as a function of n, reject Y i 5 a1bξ i (A1.13)
the data; otherwise, proceed to A1.4.4.
σδ 2 5 $ ( ~ y 2 Y ! 1λ ( ~ x
i i
2
i 2 ξ i! 2
%/$λ~n 2 2!% (A1.14)
A1.4.4 Functional Relationships:
A1.4.5.3 Calculate the following quantities:
A1.4.4.1 To find a and b for the functional relationship line,
y = a + bx (Eq A1.1), first set: τ 5 bσ δ 2 /2S xy (A1.15)

S D
2
S yy D 5 2λbσ δ /nSxy (A1.16)
λ5 (A1.8)
S xx B 5 2Dx̄ ~ 11τ ! (A1.17)
and then let: A1.4.5.4 Calculate the following variances: the variance,
C, of b using the formula:
b 5 2 =λ (A1.9)
C 5 D ~ 11τ ! (A1.18)
and then:
the variance, A, of a using the formula:
a 5 ȳ 2 bx̄ (A1.10)
NOTE A1.1—Since y = log10V and x = log10t, hence V = 10y, t = 10x and
the implied relationship for V in terms of t is therefore:
H
A 5 D x̄ 2 ~ 11τ ! 1
S xy
b J (A1.19)

V 5 10~ a1b3log 10 t ! the variance, σn2, of the fitted line at xL using the formula:
A1.4.5 Calculation of Variances: σ n 2 5 A12BxL 1CxL 2 (A1.20)
A1.4.5.1 If tL is the applicable time to failure, then set: the error variance, σε2, for y using the formula:
x L 5 log10t L (A1.11) σ ε 2 5 2λσ δ 2 (A1.21)
2
A1.4.5.2 Calculate, in turn, the following sequence of sta- the total variance, σy , for future values, yL, for y at xL using
tistics. For i= 1 to i = n, the best fit, ξi, for true x, the best fit, the formula:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5365 − 18
TABLE A1.2 Student’s “t” Value σy = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.23, and
(Two-Sided 0.05 Level of Significance)
tv = applicable value for Student’s t for v = n − 2 degrees of
n n-2 Student’s freedom, as given in Table A1.2 for a two-sided 0.05
Number of variables Degrees of freedom t(0.05)
3 1 12.706 level of significance (that is, mean 62.5 %).
4 2 4.303
5 3 3.182 A1.4.6.2 Calculate the corresponding lower 95 % prediction
6 4 2.776 limit for V using the relationship:
7 5 2.571
8 6 2.447 V L 0.95 5 10Y L 0.95 (A1.26)
9 7 2.365
10 8 2.306
11 9 2.262
A1.4.6.3 The predicted mean value of V at time tL, that is,
12 10 2.228 VL, is given by the relationship:
13 11 2.201
14 12 2.179 V L 5 10Y L (A1.27)
15 13 2.160
16 14 2.145 where:
17 15 2.131 YL = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.24
18 16 2.120
19 17 2.110
20 18 2.101
A1.4.6.4 Setting σy2 = σn2 in Eq A1.22 will produce a
21 19 2.093 confidence interval for the line rather than a prediction interval
22 20 2.086 for a future observation.
23 21 2.080
24 22 2.074
25 23 2.069
A1.5 Example Calculation
26 24 2.064
27 25 2.060 A1.5.1 Basic Data—The example data given in Table A1.3,
32 30 2.042 together with the example analysis given in this subsection, can
37 35 2.030
42 40 2.021
be used to validate statistical packages or procedures. Because
47 45 2.014 of rounding errors, it is unlikely that there will be exact
52 50 2.009 agreement, but acceptable procedures should agree within
62 60 2.000
72 70 1.994 60.1 % of the results given in A1.5.6.
82 80 1.990
92 90 1.987 A1.5.2 Sums of Squares:
102 100 1.984
Sxx = 0.7981093
Syy = 8.365498 × 10−4
σ y 2 5 σ n 2 1σ ε 2 (A1.22) Sxy = −0.024165
A1.4.5.5 Calculate the estimated standard deviation, σy, for A1.5.3 Coeffıcient of Correlation:
yL using the equation:
2
r = 0.935215
σy 5 ~σ n 1σ ε 2 ! 0.5 (A1.23)
A1.5.4 Functional Relationships:
and the predicted value, yL, for y at xL using the relationship:
y L 5 a1bxL (A1.24) λ = 1.048164 × 10−3
b = −3.237537 × 10−2
where a and b have the values obtained in accordance with a = 0.1372625
Eq A1.9 and Eq A1.10.
A1.5.5 Calculated Variances:
A1.4.6 Calculation and Confidence Intervals:
A1.4.6.1 Calculate the lower 95 % prediction interval, D = 4.84063 × 10−6
yL 0.95, predicted for yL using the equation: B = −1.470945 × 10−5
y L 0.95 5 y L 2 t v σ y (A1.25)
C (variance of b) = 5.01947× 10−6
A (variance of a) = 4.671877 × 10−5
where: σn2 (error variance for x) = 0.0515264
yL = value obtained in accordance with Eq A1.24 when xL is, σε2 (error variance for y) = 1.1157 × 10−4
as applicable, the value in accordance with Eq A1.11 A1.5.6 Confidence Limits—For N = 32 and Student’s t of
appropriate to a design life of, for example, 50 years 2.0423, the estimated mean and confidence and prediction
(that is, xL = 5.6415 (h)) or to a time at which it is intervals are given in Table A1.4.
desired to predict with 95 % confidence the minimum
value for the next observation of V,

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5365 − 18
TABLE A1.3 Example Data For Example Calculation
Observation Number x(Time) Variable LOG x Variable y(Strain) Variable LOG y Variable

1 5184 3.714641 1 0
2 2230 3.348283 1 0
3 2220 3.346331 1.03 1.283708E-02
4 12340 4.091289 1.03 1.283708E-02
5 10900 4.037401 1.03 1.283708E-02
6 12340 4.091289 1.03 1.283708E-02
7 10920 4.038197 1.03 1.283708E-02
8 8900 3.949365 1.05 2.118911E-02
9 4173 3.620425 1.05 2.118911E-02
10 8900 3.949365 1.05 2.118911E-02
11 878 2.943476 1.05 2.118911E-02
12 4110 3.613819 1.07 2.938355E-02
13 1301 3.114257 1.07 2.938355E-02
14 3816 3.581585 1.07 2.938355E-02
15 669 2.825408 1.07 2.938355E-02
16 1430 3.155316 1.09 3.742624E-02
17 2103 3.322818 1.09 3.742624E-02
18 589 2.770098 1.09 3.742624E-02
19 1710 3.232975 1.09 3.742624E-02
20 1299 3.113589 1.09 3.742624E-02
21 272 2.434553 1.14 5.690446E-02
22 446 2.649318 1.14 5.690446E-02
23 466 2.668369 1.14 5.690446E-02
24 684 2.835038 1.14 5.690446E-02
25 104 2.01702 1.18 7.188151E-02
26 142 2.152274 1.18 7.188151E-02
27 204 2.309615 1.18 7.188151E-02
28 209 2.320131 1.18 7.188151E-02
29 9 0.9542362 1.25 9.690937E-02
30 13 1.113936 1.25 9.690937E-02
31 17 1.230441 1.25 9.690937E-02
32 17 1.230441 1.25 9.690937E-02

TABLE A1.4 Confidence Limits

Lower Confidence Lower Prediction
Time (hours) Mean Interval Interval

1 1.37 1.33 1.29

10 1.27 1.25 1.20
100 1.18 1.17 1.12
1000 1.10 1.09 1.04
10000 1.02 1.00 0.97
100000 0.94 0.92 0.89
438000 0.90 0.87 0.85

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5365 – 12) that may impact the use of this standard (August 1, 2018).

(1) Clarified the intent and use of data for reconfirmation (3) Revised Tables A1.1 and A1.2 to unify range of variables
testing—Section 11. considered.
(2) Eliminated instances of non-mandatory language.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5365 − 18
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:21 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5418 − 15

Standard Test Method for

Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Properties: In Flexure (Dual
Cantilever Beam)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5418; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method outlines the use of dynamic mechanical
instrumentation for determining and reporting the viscoelastic
properties of thermoplastic and thermosetting resins and com-
posite systems in the form of rectangular bars molded directly
or cut from sheets, plates, or molded shapes. The elastic
modulus data generated may be used to identify the thermo-
mechanical properties of a plastics material or composition.
1.2 This test method is intended to provide a means for
determining the viscoelastic properties of a wide variety of
plastics using nonresonant, forced-vibration techniques as
outlined in Practice D4065. In particular, this method identifies
the procedures used to measure properties using what is known
as a dual-cantilever beam flexure arrangement. Plots of the
elastic (storage) modulus, loss (viscous) modulus, and complex
modulus, and tan delta as a function of frequency, time, or
temperature are indicative of significant transitions in the
thermomechanical performance of the polymeric material sys-
tems.
1.3 This test method is valid for a wide range of frequencies,
typically from 0.01 to 100 Hz.
1.4 Apparent discrepancies may arise in results obtained
under differing experimental conditions. These apparent differ-
ences from results observed in another study can usually be
reconciled, without changing the observed data, by reporting in
full (as described in this test method) the conditions under
which the data were obtained.
1.5 Test data obtained by this test method are relevant and
appropriate for use in engineering design.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.7 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D4065 Practice for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Proper-
ties: Determination and Report of Procedures
D4092 Terminology for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical
Properties
D5279 Test Method for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Prop-
erties: In Torsion
3. Terminology
3.1 For definitions applicable to this practice see Terminol-
ogy Standard D4092.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method covers the determination of the elastic
modulus of plastics using dynamic mechanical techniques. A
bar of rectangular cross section is tested as a beam in dynamic
linear displacement or bending. The dual-cantilever beam
specimen is gripped between two clamps. The specimen of
known geometry is placed in mechanical linear displacement,
with the displacement strain or deformation applied at the
center of the dual-cantilever beam. The forced-strain displace-
ment is at either a fixed frequency or variable frequencies, and
at either isothermal conditions or with a linear temperature
variation. The elastic or loss modulus, or both, of the polymeric
material system are measured in flexure.3
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method provides a simple means of character-
izing the thermomechanical behavior of plastic compositions
using a very small amount of material. Since small test

1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.10 on Mechanical Properties.
Current edition approved July 1, 2015. Published July 2015. Originally approved
in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2007 as D5418 - 07. DOI: 10.1520/
D5418-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
The particular method for measurement of the elastic and loss moduli and tan
delta depends upon the individual instrument’s operating principles.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:24 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5418 − 15
specimen geometries are used, it is essential that the specimens
be representative of the material being tested. The data
obtained can be used for quality control and/or research and
development purposes. For some classes of materials, such as
thermosets, it can also be used to establish optimum processing
conditions.
5.2 Dynamic mechanical testing provides a sensitive means
for determining thermomechanical characteristics by measur-
ing the elastic and loss moduli as a function of frequency,
temperature, or time. Plots of moduli and tan delta of a material
versus these variables can be used to provide a graphic
representation indicative of functional properties, effectiveness
of cure (thermosetting-resin systems), and damping behavior
under specified conditions.
5.3 This test method can be used to assess the following:
5.3.1 The modulus as a function of temperature or aging, or
both,
5.3.2 The modulus as a function of frequency,
5.3.3 The effects of processing treatment, including
orientation, induced stress, and degradation of physical and
chemical structure,
5.3.4 Relative resin behavioral properties, including cure
and damping,
5.3.5 The effects of substrate types and orientation (fabri-
cation) on elastic modulus,
5.3.6 The effects of formulation additives that might affect
processability or performance,
5.3.7 The effects of annealing on modulus and glass transi-
tion temperature,
5.3.8 The effect of aspect ratio on the modulus of fiber
reinforcements, and
5.3.9 The effect of fillers, additives on modulus and glass
transition temperature.
5.4 Before proceeding with this test method, refer to the
specification of the material being tested. Any test specimen
preparation, conditioning, dimensions, or testing parameters, or
combination thereof, covered in the relevant ASTM material
specification shall take precedence over those mentioned in this
test method. If there are no relevant ASTM material
specifications, then the default conditions apply.
6. Apparatus
6.1 The function of the apparatus is to hold a rectangular
cross-sectional bar so that the material acts as the elastic and
dissipative element in a mechanically driven linear displace-
ment system. Dynamic mechanical instruments described in
this standard generally operate in a forced, constant amplitude
mode at either a fixed frequency or variable frequencies.
6.2 The apparatus consists of the following:
6.2.1 Fixed Grips—A fixed or essentially stationary fixture
consisting of two grips to secure the rectangular specimen
horizontally in a dual cantilever configuration.
6.2.2 Movable Grip—A movable grip applying the linear
displacement at the center of the rectangular beam.
6.2.3 Grip Alignments—The grips shall be mechanically
aligned or centered, that is, they shall be attached in such a
manner that they will move into alignment as soon as any load
is applied.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:24 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
6.2.3.1 The test specimen shall be held in such a way that
slippage relative to the grips is minimized as much as possible.
6.2.4 Deformation (Strain) Device—A device for applying a
continuous linear deformation (strain) to the specimen. In the
force-displacement device the deformation (strain) is applied
and then released (see Table 1 of Practice D4065).
6.2.5 Detectors—A device or devices for determining de-
pendent and independent experimental parameters, such as
force (stress), deformation (strain), frequency, and temperature.
Temperature should be measurable with a precision of 61°C,
frequency, strain, and force to 61 %.
6.2.6 Temperature Controller and Oven—A device for con-
trolling the temperature, either by heating (in steps or ramps),
cooling (in steps or ramps), or maintaining a constant specimen
environment, or a combination thereof. A temperature control-
ler should be sufficiently stable to permit measurement of
environmental chamber temperature to within 1°C.
6.3 Nitrogen, or other inert-gas supply for purging purposes
if appropriate.
7. Test Specimens
7.1 The specimens may be cut from sheets, plates, or
molded shapes or may be molded to the desired finished
dimensions. Any rectangular specimen (representative of the
material being tested and within the fixturing capabilities of the
test equipment) is permitted as long as it is clearly stated in the
test report.
8. Calibration
8.1 Calibrate the instrument according to procedures recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
9. Conditioning
9.1 Conditioning—Condition the test specimens at 23.0 6
2.0°C and 50 6 10 % relative humidity for not fewer than 40
h prior to test in accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618
unless otherwise specified by contract or relevant ASTM
material specification.
10. Procedure
10.1 Use an untested specimen for each measurement.
Measure the width and thickness of the specimen to the nearest
0.03 mm (0.001 in.) at the center of the specimen.
10.2 Clamp the test specimen between the movable and
stationary members; use shim stock, if necessary, to minimize
slippage within the clamp.
10.3 Pre-load the test specimen so that there is a positive
force. The positive pre-load should be sufficient to maintain a
positive deflection during testing unless the test mode allows a
zero-displacement measurement.
10.4 Measure the length of the specimen between the
stationary end grips to the nearest 0.03 mm (0.001 in.).
10.5 Select the desired frequency (or frequencies) for dy-
namic linear displacement.
10.6 Select the linear displacement amplitude within the
linear elastic region of the material being tested. If the linear
 D5418 − 15
elastic region is not known, perform a strain sweep at ambient 12.1.14 A plot of the modulus (moduli) and tan delta as a
temperature to determine an appropriate amplitude. function of temperature or of time as appropriate (see Fig. 1).
10.7 Temperature Sweep: 13. Precision and Bias
10.7.1 Temperature variations shall be controlled to 1 to
2°C/min for linear increases or to 2 to 5°C/min with a 13.1 The repeatability standard deviation has been deter-
minimum of 1-min thermal-soak time for step increases. mined for the following materials. A single laboratory evalu-
ated a polyurethane sample and the values in Table 1 were
10.8 The tan delta peak will coincide with a significant obtained with the same test method in the same laboratory by
decrease in the E' (elastic or storage) modulus, with increasing the same operator using the same equipment in the shortest
temperature, through the glass-transition region. Another indi- practical period of time using test specimens taken at random
cation of the glass-transition is a maximum value of the E" from a single quantity of homogeneous material. This labora-
(loss or viscous) modulus. tory tested the same polyurethane material used for the
11. Calculation precision and bias statement in Test Method D5279 and
obtained the results in Table 1.
11.1 The equations listed in Practice D4065 are used to TABLE 1 Dual Cantilever Beam, Elastic Modulus, E' (E9 Pa) or
calculate the important rheological properties measured in (E10 dynes/cm2) at Selected Temperatures
forced, nonresonant dynamic displacement where: –40°C 0°C
Mean 1.162 0.04953
E' = storage (elastic) modulus in bending, Standard deviation 0.004 0.00373
E" = loss (viscous) modulus in bending,
E* = complex modulus in bending, and 14. Keywords
Tanδ = tan delta. 14.1 dual cantilever; dynamic mechanical rheological prop-
erties; linear displacement; modulus storage; viscous; loss
12. Report
modulus; complex; tan delta; viscoelastic behavior
12.1 Report the following information:
12.1.1 Complete identification of the material tested, includ-
ing type, source, manufacturer’s code, number, form, principal
dimensions, and previous processing or thermal history, or
both, if available,
12.1.2 Description and direction of cutting and loading
specimen, including pre-load force,
12.1.3 Conditioning procedure,
12.1.4 Description of the instrument used for the test,
12.1.5 Description of the calibration procedure,
12.1.6 Identification of the sample atmosphere by gas
composition, purity, and rate used if appropriate,
12.1.7 Width and thickness of specimen,
12.1.8 Grip separation distance of the beam,
12.1.9 Frequency of dynamic displacement,
12.1.10 Amplitude of displacement,
12.1.11 Thermal gradient; heating rate, if appropriate,
12.1.12 Number of specimens tested,
12.1.13 Table of data and results, including moduli and tan FIG. 1 Dynamic Mechanical Modulus in Bending as a Function of
delta as a function of temperature or of time as appropriate, and Temperature at Different Frequencies

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:24 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5418 − 15
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5418 - 07)
that may impact the use of this standard. (July 1, 2015)

(1) Added 5.3.7, 5.3.8, and 5.3.9. (3) Revised the title of Table 1.
(2) Revised 9.1, 11.1, and 12.1.11.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:24 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5419 − 14a

Standard Test Method for

Environmental Stress Crack Resistance (ESCR) of Threaded
Plastic Closures1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5419; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D2911 Specification for Dimensions and Tolerances for

1.1 This test method determines the susceptibility of
threaded plastic closures to failure due to environmental stress
cracking (ESC).
1.2 In use, threaded plastic closures can contact agents that
appreciably reduce the stress at which cracks form. Examples
of such agents are: soaps, detergents, oils, and liquid bleaches.
1.3 Major factors that influence environmental stress crack
resistance (ESCR) of threaded plastic closures include the
closure material(s), closure design, molded-in stress, and
applied stress.
1.4 This procedure can be applied to all closures, but is
particularly applicable to closures made from plastics based on
polypropylene (PP) or polystyrene (PS).
1.5 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The values given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific precau-
tionary statements are given in Section 8 and 6.2.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.19 on Film, Sheeting, and
Molded Products.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2014. Published December 2014. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2014 as D5419 – 14. DOI:
10.1520/D5419-14A.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Plastic Bottles
E145 Specification for Gravity-Convection and Forced-
Ventilation Ovens
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Except for those terms below, see Termi-
nologies D883 and D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 assembly—closure applied to a bottle finish.
3.2.2 failure—during this test, any visible crack.
3.2.2.1 Discussion—A crack does not have to penetrate the
closure wall to be considered a failure.
3.2.3 finish—fixture representing the threaded portion of the
bottle.
3.2.4 threaded closure—part applied to seal bottle as speci-
fied in Specification D2911.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method consists of applying closures at a
specified application torque to rigid finishes (of polysulfone or
other appropriate resin), immersing the assembly in a potential
stress-cracking agent, and observing and reporting time-to-
failure.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method compares closures for ESCR. Suitable
variables are: closure materials, closure designs, processes,
applied torque, and stress-crack agents.
5.2 Results can be used for estimating shelf life of closures
in terms of ESCR. This requires that the user has calibrated
failure time in this test to failure time in the field for actual
packaging systems.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Wide-Mount Gallon Jars, glass, PET, or other suitable
material. Must have lined closures to ensure air-tight seal. Use
one jar per sample.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:29 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5419 − 14a

NOTE 1—Tolerances for Dimensions T, E, and S shall be in accordance with Specification D2911.
FIG. 1 Typical Fixture

6.2 Circulating-Air Oven, capable of maintaining a tem-
perature of 50 6 1°C (critical in this application). See
Specification E145 for a procedure for confirming satisfactory
uniformity of temperature within the oven. There is no air-flow
requirement in this application. An environmental room with
these properties is also suitable. (Warning—A high-
temperature safety switch is highly recommended on this oven.
Some test liquids can cause extreme pressure to build up upon
heating. Under these conditions it is possible that the test jars
will rupture with explosive force. Set the override cutoff switch
to turn off the oven if the test temperature is exceeded by 10°C
or more.)
6.3 Tongs, for sample removal and inspection.
6.4 Bottle Finishes, polysulfone or other material of equiva-
lent stiffness and thermal coefficient of expansion, to which
closures are applied. These can be made by injection molding
or by machining rod stock. See Fig. 1 for a drawing of a typical
fixture. Use an appropriate size based on closure and bottle
specifications.
6.5 Torque Meter, with capacity of at least 5 torque Nm,
calibrated or verified within the past 12 months.
6.6 Plastic Test Closures, lined or unlined closure based on
specifications.
NOTE 2—To ensure that full crystallization has essentially been
achieved, PP-based closures should condition for at least three weeks
before testing and PS closures for at least 16 h.
NOTE 3—To convert lbf-in. torque to Nm torque, multiply by 0.113.
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Test Solution—Use solution for which the closure is
intended.
8. Hazards
8.1 Always wear protective equipment, such as goggles,
gloves, and aprons, appropriate to the product hazard when
setting up or inspecting closures.
9. Test Specimens
9.1 Normal sample size is 20 closures, typical of lots to be
tested. It is strongly advisable to run the test in duplicate (two
sets of 20) or to sample more than one lot.
9.2 Visually inspect each closure to be tested. Replace any
that appear defective or irregular.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:29 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5419 − 14a
10. Conditioning
10.1 Conditioning—After aging in accordance with 6.6,
condition closures and bottle finishes at 23 6 2°C and 50 6
10 % relative humidity for not less than 40 h prior to test, in
accordance with Procedure A of Practice D618 unless other-
wise specified by agreement or the relevant ASTM material
specification. Condition test solution at 50 6 1°C until it
reaches 50 6 1°C (16 h normally required).
10.2 Test Conditions—Conduct all tests at 50 6 2°C, unless
instructed otherwise.

11. Procedure
11.1 Apply closures to bottle finishes. Unless otherwise
specified, apply torque to a tolerance of 65 % using one of the
following values:
11.1.1 A value corresponding to the upper limit of immedi-
ate removal torque in production (rule of thumb: application
torque = 1.05 × immediate removal torque), or
11.1.2 A nominal value based on the closure diameter (rule
of thumb: torque, Nm = closure diameter, mm × 0.08), or
11.1.3 A value agreed upon between the laboratory and the
customer.
11.1.4 Firmly position the bottle finish between the four
posts on the torque tester in such a manner that the axis of
rotation of the cap is concentric with the center of the movable FIG. 2 F50 Failure Time
plate on which the bottle finish rests.
11.1.5 Grip the closure by hand, avoiding any contact with
the bottle finish, and twist clockwise while closely watching and a total of at least 11 out of 20 closures have failed. Record
the gauge. Apply torques smoothly and consistently, at a inspections even on days when there are no failures.
constant rate consistent with accurate reading of the gauge.
NOTE 5—If testing against an F50 specification, the test may be
11.1.6 Apply torque continuously until the desired torque as terminated if no more than 1 closure out of 20 fails by the specification
indicated by the needle on the gauge is reached. time.
11.2 Place 20 assemblies in jars. Fill jars with enough test
solution at 50 6 1°C to cover all assemblies. Wipe any test 12. Calculation
solution from jar-finish area. Cap jars and hand tighten. 12.1 Calculate closures predicted to fail at any given time
11.3 Place jars on test at 50 6 1°C. Check and record the by the following equation:
temperature of test area daily and maintain it within the failures, % 5 @ ~ n 2 0.5! /N # 3 100 (1)
specified limits. where:
11.4 Inspect the assemblies daily except on weekends. n = cumulative number of closures that have failed as of
Move jars from test condition to inspection area. Do not allow the given time, and
to be off test more than 60 min. Remove the assemblies N = number of closures tested (20 unless otherwise stated).
individually, using tongs on the bottle finishes, not the closures.
NOTE 4—It is recommended that the inspection frequency be increased 12.2 F25 Failure Time—Plot the data on Weibull probability
during periods of known high-failure rates. Delaying the start of the graph paper with days on the log scale and percent failure on
second duplicate sample facilitates this; however, frequency of torque
reapplication should remain at daily intervals except on weekends.
the probability scale. When more than one closure fails on a
given inspection, use the average % failing on that inspection
11.5 After inspection, set aside failures. Reapply initial for the plotting position (see the example in Appendix X1).
torque to nonfailing closures, return them to jars and move jars Draw the best fitting straight line for the plot. The days
back to test condition. Do not remove or loosen closures. If test indicated at the intersection of the data line with the 50 %
solution degrades with age, replace it often enough that the failure level probability line shall be reported as the F50 failure
failure rate is not significantly reduced. If closure cracks on time. See Fig. 2 for example.
retorqueing, count this as a failure on the next inspection.
NOTE 6—The plot or calculations, or both, may be made on computer
11.6 For each failure, note the time, description, and loca- with suitable software.
tion of failure.
11.7 Any sample (jar) can be removed and the test termi- 13. Report
nated when there have been failures on at least two inspections, 13.1 Report the following information:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:29 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5419 − 14a
TABLE 1 F50, Days precision of this test method. Do not apply the data in Table 1
Closures Tested
Average Sr A
SR B
r C
R D rigorously to the acceptance or rejection of material, as those
in Bleach data are specific to the round robin and are not necessarily
28 mm- 5.1 0.8 1.5 2.2 4.1
Polypropylene representative of other lots, conditions, materials, or laborato-
A
Sr is the within-laboratory standard deviation.
ries. Users of this test method need to apply the principles
B
SR is the between-laboratories standard deviation. outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to their
C
r is the within-laboratory repeatability limit = 2.8 Sr . laboratory and materials or between specific laboratories. The
D
R is the between-laboratory reproducibility limit = 2.8 SR .
principles of 14.1.1.1 – 14.1.1.3 would then be valid for such
data.)
13.1.1 Closure identification, specification number (if 14.1.1 Concept of r and R—if Sr and SR have been calculated
applicable), manufacturer, molding location, molding date, lot from a large enough body of data,
number, liner description (if applicable), molding machine, 14.1.1.1 Repeatability, (r)—(Comparing two test results for
resin, mold and cavity number(s), process conditions, the same material, obtained by the same operator using the
13.1.2 Test solution name and composition/analysis, same equipment on the same day.) Judge the two test results as
13.1.3 Application torque, not equivalent if they differ by more than the r value for that
13.1.4 Date and time of each inspection and location of each material.
failure, and 14.1.1.2 Reproducibility, (R)—(Comparing two test results
13.1.5 Failure time (F50 ). for the same material, obtained by different operators using
different equipment on different days.) Judge the two test
14. Precision and Bias3 results as not equivalent if they differ by more than the R value
14.1 Precision—Table 1 is based on a round robin con- for that material.
ducted in 1995 in accordance with Practice E691, involving 14.1.1.3 Any judgment determined in accordance with
one material tested by 12 laboratories. All of the samples were 14.1.1.1 and 14.1.1.2 would have an approximate 95 % (0.95)
prepared at one source. Each test result was based on 20 probability of being correct.
individual determinations. Each laboratory obtained two test 14.2 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
results for each material. (Warning—The following explana- estimate the bias of this test method.
tions of r and R (14.1.1.1 – 14.1.1.3) are only intended to
present a meaningful way of considering the approximate 15. Keywords
15.1 closures; environmental stress crack resistance
3
A research report is currently being written. (ESCR); failure; plastic; stress crack; threaded plastic closures

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. EXAMPLE OF GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF F50

TABLE X1.1 Data TABLE X1.2 Plotting Positions for n = 20

No. of Days No. of Closures Failing Total No. of Closures No. of Closures Failed Plotting Position, %
on Test on This Date Failed to Date 1 2.5
3 0 0 2 7.5
4 0 0 3 12.5
5 10 10 4 17.5
6 9 19 5 22.5
6 27.5
7 32.5
8 37.5
9 42.5
X1.1 Data (See Table X1.1): 10 47.5
11 52.5
X1.2 Plotting Positions for n = 20 (See Table X1.2): 12 57.5
13 62.5
X1.3 X-Axis Values for Example: 14 67.5
15 72.5
X1.3.1 First failures occurred at 5 days, so the first X value 16 77.5
17 82.5
is 5 days. 18 87.5
X1.3.2 The second X value is 6 days. 19 92.5
20 97.5
X1.3.3 The test terminated after 6 days (19 failures).
X1.4 Y-Axis Values for Example:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:29 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5419 − 14a
X1.4.1 For the first point, the Y value is the average of the X1.4.3 Graph (See Fig. 2):
plot position for 1 and 10 closures failed
5 ~ 2.5147.5! /2 5 25 % (X1.1)
X1.5 Determination of F50 —Interpolate the line at the
“percent failing” value of 50 on the Y-axis, and read of f “days
X1.4.2 For the second point, the Y value is the average of to failure” on the X-axis.
the plot position for 11 and 19 closures failed
5 ~ 52.5192.5! /2 5 72.5 % (X1.2)

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5419 - 14)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2014)

(1) Deleted reference to ASTM D3198 since it was withdrawn.

(2) Added appropriate directions to Section 11 (Procedure) to
address application of closures to bottle finish.

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5419 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (November 15, 2014)

(1) Editorially changed the wording of the warning note in 6.2. (3) Added units of measurement to Fig. 1.
(2) Clarified the standard units statement in 1.5.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:29 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5420 − 16

Standard Test Method for

Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means
of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5420; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D5947 Test Methods for Physical Dimensions of Solid

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the relative
ranking of materials according to the energy required to crack
or break flat, rigid plastic specimens under various specified
conditions of impact of a striker impacted by a falling weight.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2794 Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to
the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
D3763 Test Method for High Speed Puncture Properties of
Plastics Using Load and Displacement Sensors
D4066 Classification System for Nylon Injection and Extru-
sion Materials (PA)
D4226 Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Rigid Poly-
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Building Products
D5628 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid
Plastic Specimens by Means of a Falling Dart (Tup or
Falling Mass)
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.10 on Mechanical Properties.
Current edition approved May 1, 2016. Published May 2016. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5420 - 10. DOI:
10.1520/D5420-16.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
Plastics Specimens
E171 Practice for Conditioning and Testing Flexible Barrier
Packaging
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of plastics terms used in
this test method, see Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 failure (of test specimen)—the presence of any crack
or split created by the impact of the falling weight that can be
seen by the naked eye under normal laboratory lighting
conditions.
3.2.1.1 Discussion—Failure shall include the following:
(1) complete shattering of the plaque; (2) any crack radiating
out toward the edges of the plaque on either surface of the
plaque; (3) any radial crack within or just outside the impact
area of the striker; (4) any hole in the plaque, whether due to
brittle or ductile puncture, where unobstructed light or water
could pass through; (5) any brittle splitting of the bottom
surface of the plaque; and (6) any glassy-type chip dislodged
from or loosened from the plaque.
3.2.1.2 Discussion—Since the interpretation of failure may
be slightly different between material types, refer to the
appropriate material specification for guidance.
3.2.1.3 Discussion—Cracks usually start at the surface op-
posite the one that is struck. For example, in some cases
incipient cracking in glass-reinforced polymers is difficult to
differentiate from the reinforcing fibers. In such cases, apply a
penetrating dye such as gentian violet to the stressed surface to
determine the onset of crack formation.
3.2.2 mean-failure energy (mean impact resistance)—the
energy required to produce 50 % failures, equal to the product
of the constant mass and mean failure height.
3.2.3 mean-failure height (impact-failure height)—the
height at which a standard mass, when dropped on test
specimens, will cause 50 % failures.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16
in velocity. Hagan, et al (2) found that the mean-failure energy
of sheeting was constant at drop heights between 0.30 and 1.4
m. Different materials respond differently to changes in the
velocity of impact.
5.2 The test conditions used in Geometry GA are the same
as those used in Geometry FA of Test Method D5628 (see
Table 1).
5.3 The test conditions of Geometry GB are equivalent to
the geometry used for the Gardner Variable Height Impact Test
(3).
5.4 The test conditions of Geometry GC cause a punch-
shear type of failure because the support-plate hole is close to
the diameter of the striker.
5.5 The test conditions of Geometry GD are the same as
those in Test Method D3763.
5.6 The test conditions of Geometry GE are the same as
those in Test Method D4226, impactor head configuration
H.25.
5.7 Because of the nature of impact testing, the selection of
a test method and striker must be somewhat arbitrary. Consider
the end use environment and requirements when choosing from
the available striker geometries. The selection of any one of the
striker geometries is permitted.
NOTE 2—Material processing can have a significant affect on the
FIG. 1 Impact Tester development of a plastic’s physical properties. Consult relevant material
standards for processing guidelines

4. Summary of Test Method 6. Interferences

4.1 In this test method, a weight falls through a guide tube 6.1 Falling-weight-impact test results are dependent on the
and impacts a striker resting on top of a supported specimen. geometry of the falling weight, striker, and the support. Thus,
The fixed weight is dropped from various heights (see Fig. 1). use impact tests only to obtain relative rankings of materials.
Impact values cannot be considered absolute unless the geom-
4.2 The procedure determines the energy (mass × grav-
etry of the test equipment and specimen conform to the end-use
ity × height) that will cause 50 % of the specimens tested to fail
requirement. Data obtained with different geometries, cannot,
(mean-failure energy).
in general, be compared directly with each other.
4.3 The technique used to determine mean-failure energy is 6.1.1 Falling-weight-impact types of tests are not suitable
commonly called the Bruceton Staircase Method, or the for predicting the relative ranking of materials at impact
Up-and-Down Method (1).3 Testing is concentrated near the velocities differing greatly from those imposed by these test
mean, reducing the number of specimens required to obtain a methods.
reasonably precise estimate of the impact resistance.
6.2 As cracks usually start at the surface opposite the one
4.4 This test method permits the use of different striker that is struck, the results obtained can be greatly influenced by
diameters and specimen support plate geometries to obtain the surface characteristics of the test specimens. Therefore,
different modes of failure, permit easier sampling, or test factors including surface features (flaws, texturing, and so
limited amounts of material. There is no known means for
correlating the results of tests made by different methods or
procedures. TABLE 1 Striker and Specimen-Support-Plate Dimensions
Striker Diameter, Support Plate Inside Diameter, mm
5. Significance and Use Geometry
mm (in.) (in.)
5.1 Plastics are viscoelastic and it is possible that they are GA 15.86 ± 0.10 76.0± 3.0
(0.625 ± 0.004) (3.00 ± 0.12)
sensitive to changes in velocity of weights falling on their GB 15.86 ± 0.10 31.75± 0.025
surfaces. However, the velocity of a free-falling object is a (0.625 ± 0.004) (1.25 ± 0.001)
function of the square root of the drop height. A change of a GC 15.86 ± 0.10 16.26 ± 0.025
(0.625 ± 0.004) (0.640 ± 0.001)
factor of two in the drop height will cause a change of only 1.4 GD 12.70 ± 0.10 76.0 ± 3.0
(0.500 ± 0.004) (3.00 ± 0.12)
GE 12.70 ± 0.10 16.26 ± 0.025
3
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references found at the (0.500 ± 0.004) (0.640 ± 0.001)
end of this test method.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16
forth), surface composition, orientation due to specimen
preparation, and so forth, are important variables and will
influence results.
6.3 Impact properties of plastic materials can be very
sensitive to temperature. This test can be carried out at any
reasonable temperature and humidity, thus representing actual-
use environments. However, this test method is intended
primarily for rating materials under specific impact conditions.
6.4 It is possible that the apparatus used in this test method
will not have sufficient energy available to cause failure of
some specimens under the conditions of this procedure.

7. Apparatus
7.1 Testing Mechanism—The apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.
Adapt the apparatus from Test Method D2794 for use in this
test method or obtain the apparatus commercially. The appa-
ratus shall consist of the following: suitable base to withstand
the impact shock; steel-rod impact mass, weighing 0.9 kg (2
lb), 1.8 kg (4 lb), or 3.6 kg (8 lb); a hardened steel striker
having a round nose with diameter described in 7.2.1 and 7.2.2
and Table 1; a slotted guide tube 1.0 m (40 in.) in length, in
which the impact mass slides, having graduations in newton-
metres (inch-pound increments) or multiples thereof. Use a
bracket to hold the tube in a vertical position by attaching it to
the base and also to hold the hand knob, which is a pivot arm
alignment for the striker, about 50 mm (2 in.) under the tube.
Mount this instrument firmly to a rigid table or bench. Round
the top edge of the opening in each specimen-support plate to
a 1.0 6 0.2-mm (0.039 6 0.008-in.) radius, except in Geom- FIG. 2 Specimen-Support Plate Used for Geometries GA and GD
etry GE which has a radius of 0.75 mm (0.031 in.).
7.1.1 The tester shall be mounted so that the axis of the tube
is plumb when measured with a spirit level at least 300 mm (12
in.) in length.
7.2 Striker Geometries:
7.2.1 For Geometries GA, GB, and GC, the striker shall
have a rounded nose with a diameter of 15.86 6 0.10 mm
(0.625 6 0.004 in.).
7.2.2 For Geometries GD and GE the striker shall have a
rounded nose with a diameter of 12.70 6 0.1 mm (0.500 6
0.004 in.).
7.2.3 With Geometries GA and GD, a specimen-support
plate with a hole 76.0 6 3.0 mm (3.00 6 0.12 in.) in diameter
is mounted in the apparatus. A suggested design is given in Fig.
2.
7.2.4 With Geometry GB, the specimen-support plate has a
31.75 6 0.025-mm (1.25 6 0.001-in.) diameter hole. This
geometry can be achieved by removing the removable support
ring on the standard Gardner instrument.
FIG. 3 Striker/Specimen/Support Plate Configuration for Geom-
7.2.5 With Geometries GC and GE, the standard removable
etries GB and GC (Geometry GC Shown)
specimen-support plate, with a hole 16.26 6 0.025 mm (0.640
6 0.001 in.) in diameter, is mounted in the specimen support
anvil (see Fig. 3 for Geometry GC and Fig. 4 for Geometry base shall have maximum dimensions of 16 by 30 by 30 in.
GE). (height by width by depth). Place this block or base at a height
7.3 Supporting Base—In order to minimize the energy suitable for ease of operation. It is not necessary to bolt blocks
absorption, compression, and deflection of the support, affix or bases of this weight to the floor. Alternatively, affix testers
the tester to a dense, solid block or base weighing a minimum directly to the floor. Use of rubber mats either directly under
of 375 lb (see Appendix X2). The main body of the block or the tester or supporting apparatus is prohibited.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16
NOTE 1—Depth of penetration when fully seated shall be 12.2 6 0.1
mm (0.48 6 0.04 in.).
FIG. 4 Striker/Specimen/Support Plate Configuration for Geom-
etry GE
NOTE 3—Such block dimensions conform to commercially available
butcher block tables.
7.3.1 Bolt supporting bases or tables lighter than 375 lb to a
concrete floor. For each different material tested, make com-
parisons between mean failure energy data generated using this
support and one where the tester is fixed directly to the
concrete floor. If mean failure energy differences between two
types of supports are found to be statistically nonsignificant,
use of the lighter support shall be allowed.
7.3.2 If the weight of the butcher block that was originally
375 lb or greater decreases with time to less than 375 lb,
increase the block weight to a minimum of 375 lb by adding a
suitable amount of weight to the bottom of the table. The
weight shall be tightly affixed and in direct contact with the
bottom of the table and not cause any vibrations during the
impact test.
NOTE 4—The weight of the butcher block can decrease over time due,
for instance to drying.
7.4 Micrometer, for measurement of specimen thickness.
Ensure that the accuracy is 1 % of the average thickness of the
specimens used. See Test Methods D5947 for descriptions of
suitable micrometers.
8. Sampling
8.1 Sample using a statistically acceptable procedure. The
samples shall be representative of the lot under study. When
taken from a commercial production process, the process shall
be in a state of statistical control.
9. Test Specimens
9.1 The diameter or width of flat test specimens shall be at
least 25 mm (1.00 in.) greater than the diameter of the hole in
the support plate. The specimens shall be free of obvious
imperfections, unless the imperfections constitute a variable
under study.
9.2 The thickness of any specimen in a sample shall not
differ by more than 5 % from the average specimen thickness
of that sample. However, if variations greater than 5 % are
unavoidable in a sample that is obtained from parts, the sample
shall be permitted to be tested, but the data shall not be used for
referee purposes. Machining specimens to reduce thickness
variation is not permissible.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.3 When the approximate mean-failure height for a given
sample is known, 20 specimens will usually yield sufficiently
precise results. If the approximate mean-failure height is
unknown, six or more additional specimens shall be used to
determine the appropriate starting point of the test.
9.4 Visually examine the specimens to ensure they are free
of cracks or other obvious imperfections or damages, unless
these imperfections constitute variables under study. For speci-
fication purposes, do not test samples known to be defective.
Production parts shall be tested in the as-received condition to
determine conformance to specified standards.
9.5 Select a suitable method for making the specimen that
will minimize the effect of specimen preparation on the impact
resistance of the material. Refer to the appropriate material
specification for requirements for specimen preparation.
NOTE 5—As few as ten specimens often yield sufficiently reliable
estimates of the mean-failure height. However, in such cases the estimated
standard deviation will be relatively large (1).
10. Conditioning
10.1 Unless otherwise specified by contract or relevant
material specification, condition the test specimens in accor-
dance with Procedure A of Practice D618 or Specification
E171, for those tests where conditioning is required. Tempera-
ture and humidity tolerances shall be in accordance with
Section 7 of Practice D618, unless otherwise specified by
contract or relevant ASTM material specification.
10.1.1 Note that for some hygroscopic materials, such as
nylons, the material specifications (for example, Specification
D4066) call for testing “dry as-molded specimens.” Such
requirements take precedence over the above routine precon-
ditioning to 50 % relative humidity and require sealing the
specimens in water vapor-impermeable containers as soon as
molded and not removing them until ready for testing.
10.2 Conduct tests at the same temperature and humidity
used for conditioning with tolerances in accordance with
Section 7 of Practice D618, unless otherwise specified by
contract or relevant ASTM material specification.
11. Procedure
11.1 Determine the number of specimens for each sample to
be tested, as specified in 9.3.
11.2 Mark the specimens and condition as specified in 10.1.
11.3 Prepare the test apparatus for the geometry (GA, GB,
GC, GD, or GE) selected.
11.4 Measure and record the thickness of each specimen in
the area of impact. In the case of injection molded specimens,
it is sufficient to measure and record thickness for one
specimen when it has been previously demonstrated that the
thickness does not vary by more than 5 %.
11.5 Choose a specimen at random from the sample. Use a
random numbers table if desired.
11.6 Position the specimen. Ensure that the same surface or
area, or both, is targeted on all test specimens. (see 6.2).
NOTE 6—Normally the specimen is not clamped because the test
 D5420 − 16
apparatus does not have provision for clamping. However, the apparatus where:
can be modified to permit clamping, which should improve the precision
of the measurement.
h = mean-failure height, mm (or in.),
dh = increment of height, mm (or in.),
11.7 Place the test specimen on the tester anvil, after raising N = total number of failures or nonfailures, whichever is
the weight and striker foot. Be sure the specimen is flat against smaller. For ease of notation, call whichever are used
the specimen-support plate before the striker foot is brought in events,
contact with the top surface of the specimen. (Fig. 3 shows the ho = lowest height at which an event occurred, mm (or in.),
position of the test specimen.) Raise the weight in the tube to
the desired impact value, as shown on the appropriate scale, i = 0, 1, 2 ... k (counting index, starts at ho or wo),
and release it so that the weight drops on the striker. ni = number of events that occurred at hi or wi,
hi = ho + idh, and
11.8 As a result of the wide range of failure types that are
observed with different materials, the definition of failure k
defined in the material specification shall take precedence over A5 ( ini,
i50
the definition stated in 3.2.1. Other definitions of failure shall
be used if agreed upon between the supplier and the user.
In calculating h, the negative sign is used when the events
11.9 Remove the specimen and examine it to determine are failures. The positive sign is used when the events are
whether or not it has failed. Permanent deformation alone is nonfailures. Refer to the example in Appendix X1.
not considered failure, but note the extent of such deformation 12.2 Mean-Failure Energy—Compute the mean failure en-
(depth, area). For some polymers, for example, glass- ergy as follows:
reinforced polyester, it is difficult to assess incipient cracking
with the naked eye. In such cases, it is permissible to expose MFE 5 hwf (2)
the stressed surface to a penetrating dye, such as gentian violet, where:
to help determine the onset of cracking. MFE = mean-failure energy, J (or in.·lbf),
11.10 If the first specimen fails, decrease the drop height h = mean-failure height as applicable, mm (or in.),
while keeping the mass constant (see 11.11). If the first w = constant mass, kg (or lb), and
specimen does not fail, increase the drop height one increment, f = factor for conversion to joules.
as above. Then test the second specimen. Use f = 9.80665 × 10−3 if h = mm and w = kg; Use 0.11299
if h = in. and w = lb; Use f = 1.0 for inch-pound
11.11 In this manner, select the impact height for each test units (in.·lbf, in., lb).
from the results observed with the specimen just previously
12.3 Estimated Standard Deviation of the Sample—If de-
tested. Test each specimen only once.
sired for record purposes, calculate the estimated standard
11.12 At the start of a test, a continuous run of seven or deviation of the sample for variable height as follows:
more identical results (failure or nonfailure) is indicative of an s h 5 1.62d h @ B/N 2 ~ A/N ! 2 # 10.047d h (3)
improper starting heights and affects final results. Re-estimate
approximate starting height and restart the test. where:
sh = estimated standard deviation, height, mm (or in.), and
11.13 Keep a running plot of the data, as shown in Appen-
dix X1. Use one symbol, such as X, to indicate a failure and a k
different symbol, such as O, to indicate a nonfailure at each B5 ( i ni.
2

height level. i50

12. Calculation The above calculation is valid for [B/N − (A/N)2] > 0.3. If the
value is <0.3, use Table 1 from Ref (3).
12.1 Mean-Failure Height—If a constant-mass procedure
12.4 Estimated Standard Deviation of the Sample Mean—
was used, calculate the mean-failure height from the test data
Calculate the estimated standard deviation of the sample
obtained, as follows:
mean-failure height as follows:
h 5 h o 1d h ~ A/N60.5! (1)
s h¯ 5 Gsh / =N (4)

where:
sh̄ = estimated standard deviation of the mean height, mm
TABLE 2 Precision, Method GA
(or in.), and
Values Expressed as G = factor that is a function of s/d (see Table X1.2).
Material Mean, J Percent of the Mean
Vr r A sample computation of sw is found in Appendix X1.
33 % Glass-Reinforced Nylon (PA) 0.75 4.66 13.2
Acetal (POM) 2.12 6.90 19.5 NOTE 7—For values of G at other levels of s/d, see Fig. 22 in Ref (4).
Impact Polystyrene 15.1 2.20 6.23
12.5 Estimated Standard Deviation of the Mean-Failure
Vr = within-laboratory coefficient of variation of the mean Energy—Calculate the estimated standard deviation of the
r = 2.83 Vr mean-failure energy as follows:

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16
TABLE 3 Precision, Method GB laboratories. Data from only three laboratories were used in
Values Expressed as calculating the values in these tables. For each material, all
Material Mean, J Percent of the Mean samples were prepared at one source, but the individual
Vr r specimens were prepared at the laboratories that tested them.
33 % Glass-Reinforced Nylon (PA) 0.99 3.18 8.99 Each test result was the mean of multiple individual determi-
Acetal (POM) 2.57 11.6 32.8
Impact Polystyrene 10.3 12.3 34.7 nations (Bruceton Staircase Procedure) (1). Each laboratory
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) 26.9 6.56 18.6 obtained two test results for a material. Warning—The fol-
lowing explanations of r and R (14.2 – 14.2.3) are only
Vr = within-laboratory coefficient of variation of the mean
r = 2.83 Vr intended to present a meaningful way of considering the
approximate precision of this test method. Do not apply the
TABLE 4 Precision, Method GC data in Table 2 and Table 4 rigorously for acceptance or
Values Expressed as
rejection of a material. Data in these tables are specific to the
Material Mean, J Percent of the Mean round robin study and are not always representative of other
Vr r lots, conditions, materials, or laboratories. The principles of
33 % Glass-Reinforced Nylon (PA) 1.82 1.92 5.44
Acetal (POM) 4.56 7.02 19.9
14.2 – 14.2.3 are valid if users of this test method apply the
Impact Polystyrene 14.8 18.6 52.7 principles outlined in Practice E691 to generate data specific to
their laboratory and materials, or between specific laboratories.
Vr = within-laboratory coefficient of variation of the mean
r = 2.83 Vr 14.1.1 Glass-Reinforced Nylon (33 % Glass)—101 by 101
by 3.2 mm (4 by 4 by 1⁄8 in.) cut from injection-molded
S MFE 5 s h¯ wf (5) plaques.
14.1.2 Acetal (Homopolymer)—101 by 101 by 3.2 mm (4 by
where: 4 by 1⁄8 in.) cut from injection-molded plaques.
SMFE = estimated standard deviation of the mean-failure 14.1.3 Impact Polysytrene—101 by 101 by 3.2 mm (4 by 4
energy. by 1⁄8 in.) cut from extruded sheet.
13. Report 14.1.4 ABS—101-mm diameter by 3.2-mm (4-in. diameter
by 1⁄8-in.) injection-molded disks.
13.1 Report the following information:
13.1.1 Complete identification of the sample tested, includ- 14.2 Concept of r and R—If Vr and VR have been calculated
ing type of material, source, manufacturer’s code, form, from a large enough body of data, and for test results that were
principal dimensions, and previous history. means from testing multiple individual specimens, then the
13.1.2 Method of preparation of specimens. following concepts apply:
13.1.3 Means of clamping, if any. 14.2.1 Repeatability, r—In comparing two test results for
13.1.4 Statement of geometry (GA, GB, GC, GD, GE). the same material, obtained by the same operator using the
13.1.5 Thickness of specimens tested (average and range). same equipment on the same day, judge the two results as not
13.1.6 Number of test specimens employed to determine the equivalent if they differ by more than the r value for that
mean-failure height. material.
13.1.7 Mean-failure energy. 14.2.2 Reproducibility, R—In comparing two test results for
13.1.8 Types of failure, for example: (a) crack or cracks on the same material, obtained by different operators using differ-
one surface only (the plaque could still hold water), (b) cracks ent equipment in different laboratories, reproducibility statis-
that penetrate the entire thickness (water would probably tics were not calculated because data from only four and three
penetrate through the plaque), (c) brittle shatter (the plaque is laboratories do not justify making these calculations.
in several pieces after impact), or (d) ductile failure (the plaque
is penetrated by a blunt tear). Report other observed deforma- 14.2.3 Any judgement in accordance with 14.2.1 would
tion due to impact, whether the specimens fail or not. have an approximate 95 % (0.95) probability of being correct.
13.1.9 Date of test and operator name. 14.3 Bias—There are no recognized standards by which to
13.1.10 Test temperature. estimate bias of this test method.
13.1.11 In no case shall results obtained with arbitrary
geometries differing from those contained in these test methods 14.4 Efforts to form a task group to address between-
be reported as values obtained by Test Method D5420. laboratory reproducibility of this test method have been unsuc-
cessful. Persons interested in participating in such a task group
14. Precision and Bias4 need to contact ASTM Headquarters.
14.1 Table 2, Table 3, and Table 4 are based on a round
robin conducted in 1977 involving four materials tested by four 15. Keywords
15.1 dart impact; falling weight impact; Gardner impact;
4
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may impact; impact resistance; mean-failure energy; mean-failure
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1060. height; rigid plastic

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

X1.1 See Table X1.1 and Table X1.2 for sample calculations and values of G for obtaining the estimated standard deviation.

TABLE X1.1 Sample Calculations

Total Outcome of Test
Dart (X = failure; O = nonfailure) nx no i ni ini i2ni
Height,
mm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
500 X 1 0 2 1 2 4
475 O X X X X 4 1 1 4 4 4
450 X O O X O O X X O 4 5 0 4 0 0
425 O O O O O 0 5
Totals 9 11 9 6 8
(Nx) (No) (N) (A) (B)

NOTE 1—
where:
ho = 450; N = Nx = 9; d = 25
h = ho + dh (A/N − 0.5)
= 450 + 25 (6/9 − 0.5)
= 454.2 mm
sh = 1.62dh [B/N − (A/N)2] + 0.047dh
= 1.62 (25) [8/9 − (6 ⁄ 9)2] + 0.047 (25)
= 19.2 mm
s/d = 19.2/25 = 0.77; G = 1.035 (from Table X1.2)
sh̄ = Gsh/ =N51.035 ~ 0.77! / =950.27 mm

TABLE X1.2 Values of G for Obtaining the Estimated Standard Deviation of the Mean
s/d 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
0.40 ... ... ... ... ... 1.18 1.175 1.17 1.16 1.155
0.50 1.15 1.145 1.14 1.135 1.13 1.125 1.12 1.11 1.105 1.10
0.60 1.095 1.09 1.085 1.08 1.075 1.07 1.07 1.065 1.06 1.06
0.70 1.055 1.055 1.05 1.05 1.045 1.04 1.04 1.035 1.035 1.03
0.80 1.03 1.025 1.025 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.015 1.015 1.015 1.01
0.90 1.01 1.01 1.005 1.005 1.005 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.995 0.995
1.00 0.995 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.985 0.985 0.985 0.985 0.98 0.98
1.10 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.97
1.20 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.965 0.965 0.965 0.965
1.30 0.965 0.965 0.965 0.965 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96
1.40 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.955 0.955 0.955 0.955 0.955 0.955 0.955
1.50 0.955 0.955 0.955 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
1.60 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945
1.70 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.945 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
1.80 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.935
1.90 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.935
2.00 0.935 0.935 0.935 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.93

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5420 − 16

X2. TESTING SUMMARY

TABLE X2.1 Testing Summary, MFE versus Table Weight, 8 lb WeightA

MFE Averages
Plastic 57 lb Base 215 lb Base 440 lb Base Floor
ABS 273 256 239 240
HDPE 190 185 184 ...
HIPS 179 164 162 133
PP (0.077 in.) 121 120 110 ...
PP (0.0121 in.) 196 185 184 184
PVC 112 102 101 101
A
Test results are based on averages for three sets of operators, using two different testers fixed to each base. Twenty specimens were used for each sample calculation,
with a minimum of 120 specimens used for each averaged test result.

X2.1 See Table X2.1 for testing summary of mean failure

energy versus table weight using an 8 lb weight.

REFERENCES

(1) Brownlee, K. A., Hodgest, J. L., Jr., and Rosenblatt, M., “The
Up-and-Down Method with Small Samples,” American Statistical
Association Journal, Vol 48, 1953, pp. 262–277.
(2) Hagan, R. S., Schmitz, J. V., and Davis, D. A.,“Impact Testing of High
Impact Thermoplastic Sheet,” Technical Papers, 17th Annual Techni-
cal Conference of SPE, SPPPB, Vol VII, January 1961.
(3) “Test Method B—Gardner Impact, Proposed Method of Test for
Impact Resistance of Fabricated Plastics Parts,” Proposed Test Meth-
ods for Plastics Parts Used in Appliances, Society of the Plastics
Industry, New York, NY, January 1965.
(4) Natrella, M. G., “Experimental Statistics,” National Bureau of Stan-
dards Handbook 91, October 1966, pp. 10–22 and 10–23.
(5) Weaver, O. R., “Using Attributes to Measure a Continuous Variable in
Impact Testing Plastic Bottles,” Materials Research and Standards,
Vol 6, No. 6, June 1966, pp. 285–291.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5420 - 10)
that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2016)

(1) Added 7.1.1 on plumbness of vertical tube. (3) Added new Note 4.
(2) Modified 7.2 based on commercially available butcher (4) Revised Section 8 on Sampling
block tables. (5) Added 11.12 on starting heights for testing.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:31 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5421 − 15

Standard Specification for

Contact Molded “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Flanges1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5421; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This specification covers circular contact-molded fiber-
glass reinforced-thermosetting-resin flanges for use in pipe
systems and tank nozzles. Included are requirements for
materials, workmanship, performance, and dimensions.
1.2 Flanges (see Fig. 1) may be produced as integral flanges,
Type A, or flange-on-pipe, Type B.
1.3 This specification is based on flange performance and
does not cover design.
1.4 These flanges are designed for use with pipe and tanks
that are manufactured to Specifications D2996, D2997, D3262,
D3299, D3517, D3754, and D4097.
1.5 Selection of gaskets is not covered in this specification,
refer to the manufacturer’s recommendation.
1.6 The values stated in inch-pound units are to be regarded
as the standard. The SI units given in parentheses are for
information only.
1.7 The following precautionary caveat pertains only to the
test methods portion, Section 9, of this specification: This
standard does not purport to address all of the safety concerns,
if any, associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user
of this standard to establish appropriate safety, health, and
environmental practices and determine the applicability of
regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.8 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
C582 Specification for Contact-Molded Reinforced Thermo-
setting Plastic (RTP) Laminates for Corrosion-Resistant
Equipment
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1599 Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic
Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2996 Specification for Filament-Wound “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D2997 Specification for Centrifugally Cast “Fiberglass”
(Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
D3262 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe
D3299 Specification for Filament-Wound Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks
D3517 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pressure Pipe
D3754 Specification for “Fiberglass” (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial
Pressure Pipe
D4097 Specification for Contact-Molded Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermoset Resin Corrosion-Resistant Tanks
2.2 ASME Standards:3
B 16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 18.21.1 Type “A” Narrow Washers
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 Definitions are in accordance with Terminology D883.
Abbreviations are in accordance with Terminology D1600,

1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.23 on Reinforced
Plastic Piping Systems and Chemical Equipment.
Current edition approved May 1, 2015. Published June 2015. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approve in 2010 as D5421 – 05(2010).
DOI: 10.1520/D5421-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), ASME
International Headquarters, Two Park Ave., New York, NY 10016-5990, http://
www.asme.org.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:36 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5421 − 15
TABLE 1 Pressure Categories
Pressure RatingA
Designation
psi MPa

A 25 0.173
B 50 0.345
C 75 0.517
D 100 0.690
E 125 0.862
F 150 1.034
A
Flanges with higher pressure ratings are available by agreement between the
purchaser and the manufacturer.

FIG. 1 Flange Types

unless otherwise indicated. The abbreviation for reinforced- 4.1.5 Short-term rupture pressure and sealing-test pressure
thermosetting-resin pipe is RTRP. limits shall be categorized by single arabic number designa-
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard: tions as indicated by the cell classification system of Table 2.
3.2.1 contact molding (CM)—a method of fabrication 4.2 Designation Code—The flange-designation code shall
wherein the glass fiber reinforcement is applied to the mold in consist of the abbreviation for contact molded (CM) followed
the form of all chopped-strand mat, or chopped-strand mat and by the type as a capital letter, grade as an Arabic numeral, class
woven roving, in alternate plies by hand with the resin matrix as a Roman numeral, and the pressure-rating category as a
applied by brush or roller and the laminate consolidated by a capital letter and two Arabic numbers identifying the cell-
roller. classification designations of the short-term rupture pressure
3.2.2 fiberglass pipe—a tubular product containing glass- and sealing-test pressure, respectively. Thus, a complete
fiber reinforcements embedded in or surrounded by cured flange-designation code shall consist of three letters, one
thermosetting resin; the composite structure may contain Arabic numeral, one Roman numeral, one letter and two
aggregate, granular or platelet fillers, thixotropic agents, pig- numerals.
ments or dyes; thermoplastic or thermosetting liners or coat- 4.2.1 Example—Contact molded fiberglass is CM-AlID-46.
ings may be included. This designation described a stub flange, made using glass-
fiber-reinforced epoxy resin for full-axial pressure thrust. The
4. Classification flange has a 100-psi (0.69-MPa) pressure rating, a short-term
4.1 General—This specification covers reinforced- rupture pressure of 400-psi (2.76-MPa), and a sealing-test
thermosetting-resin flanges defined by type (method of pressure of 225-psi (1. 55-MPa).
manufacture), grade (generic type of resin), class (pressure end 4.3 Attachment of Flanges to Pipe, Pipe Fittings, or Tanks:
thrust capability), and pressure rating. Flanges complying with 4.3.1 Type “A” flanges are to be butt and strap welded to
this specification are also given numerical classifications relat- pipe described in Specifications D2996, D2997, D3262,
ing to rupture pressure and sealing test pressure. D3517, and D3754, or using overlay joint into a tank as
4.1.1 Types: described in Specifications D3299 and D4097.
4.1.1.1 Type A—Integral flange, contact molded with the 4.3.2 Type “B” flanges are built onto elbows, reducers, or
stub integral with the flange. other parts where the use of an integral flange (Type “A”) is not
4.1.1.2 Type B—Flange on pipe, contact molded onto an practical or required.
existing pipe or fitting.
4.1.2 Grades: 5. Materials and Manufacture
4.1.2.1 Grade 1—Epoxy resin. 5.1 Flanges manufactured in accordance with this specifi-
4.1.2.2 Grade 2—Polyester resin. cation shall be composed of reinforcement embedded in or
4.1.2.3 Grade 3—Phenolic resin. surrounded by cured thermosetting resin.
4.1.2.4 Grade 4—Vinylester resin.
4.1.2.5 Grade 5—Furan resin. 5.2 The resins, reinforcements, and other materials, when
4.1.3 Classes: combined into composite structure, shall produce a flange that
4.1.3.1 Class I—Hoop and axial-pressure. will meet the performance requirements of this specification.
4.1.3.2 Class II—Hoop pressure only.
NOTE 2—All combinations of type, liner, grade, and class may not be TABLE 2 Short-Term Rupture Pressure and Sealing-Test
commercially available. Additional type, liner, grade, and class may be PressureA
added as they become commercially available. The purchaser should Property/Cell Classification 1 2 3 4 5 6
solely determine or consult with the manufacturer for the proper class,
type, liner, and grade to be used under the installation and operating Short-Term Rupture 100 200 300 400 500 600
conditions that will exist for the project in which the flange is to be used. Pressure, psi (MPa) (0.69) (1.38) (2.07) (2.76) (3.45) (4.14)
Sealing-test pressure, psi 37.5 75 112.5 150 187.5 225
4.1.4 Pressure Rating—Pressure rating shall be categorized (MPa) (0.26) (0.52) (0.78) (1.03) (1.29) (1.55)
by single-letter designation. Pressure designations are shown in A
Refer to Test Method D1599 for explanation of failure.
Table 1.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:36 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5421 − 15
NOTE 3—The term “other materials” does not include recycled or TABLE 3 Flange Dimensions
reprocessed thermosetting plastics which might otherwise be added as Drilling
Nominal Outside
fillers. Pipe Size, Diameter, Bolt Circle Number of Diameter of Diameter of
5.3 Flanges manufactured in accordance with this specifi- in.A min, in.A DiameterA Holes HolesA BoltsA
cation shall have an inner corrosion barrier fabricated with the
1 4 1⁄ 4 3 1⁄ 8 4 58⁄ 12⁄
same resin, reinforcement, ply sequence, and nominal glass/ 1 1⁄ 2 5 3 7⁄ 8 4 58⁄ 12⁄
resin ratio as required in the applicable ASTM standard for the 2 6 43⁄ 4 4 3 ⁄4 58⁄
tank or pipe on which the flange will be used. 2 1⁄ 2 7 5 1⁄ 2 4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8

3 7 1⁄ 2 6 4 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8

6. Performance Requirements 3 1⁄ 2 8 1⁄ 2 7 8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8

4 9 7 1⁄ 2 8 3 ⁄4 5 ⁄8

6.1 The following performance requirements are intended to 5 10 8 1⁄ 2 8 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4

6 11 9 1⁄ 2 8 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4
provide classification and performance criteria for the purpose
8 13 1⁄2 11 3⁄4 8 7 ⁄8 3 ⁄4
of qualification testing and rating of prototype constructions 10 16 14 1⁄4 12 1 7 ⁄8

and periodic reevaluation of the manufacturer’s stated ratings. 12 19 17 12 1 7 ⁄8

14 21 18 3⁄4 12 1 1⁄ 8 1
They are not intended as routine quality assurance require- 16 23 1⁄2 21 1⁄4 16 1 1⁄ 8 1
ments for production runs of rated flanges: 18 25 22 3⁄4 16 1 1⁄ 4 1 1⁄ 8
6.1.1 Sealing—Flanges shall withstand a pressure of at least 20 27 1⁄2 25 20 1 1⁄ 4 1 1⁄ 8
24 32 29 1⁄2 20 1 3⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 4
1.5 times the pressure rating without leakage when tested in 26 34 1⁄4 31 3⁄4 24 1 3⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 4
accordance with 9.4. 28 36 1⁄2 34 28 1 3⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 4
6.1.2 Short-Term Rupture Strength—Flanges shall withstand 30 38 3⁄4 36 28 1 3⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 4
32 41 3⁄4 38 1⁄2 28 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
a hydrostatic load of at least four times their pressure rating 34 43 3⁄4 40 1⁄2 32 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
when tested in accordance with 9.5 using flat-faced steel 36 46 42 3⁄4 32 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
closure and using the gasket or “O” ring designated by the 38 48 3⁄4 45 1⁄4 32 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
40 50 3⁄4 47 1⁄4 36 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
flange manufacturer. 42 53 49 1⁄2 36 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
6.1.3 Bolt Torque—Flanges shall withstand, without visible 44 55 1⁄4 51 3⁄4 40 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
sign of damage, a bolt torque of two times that recommended 46 57 1⁄4 53 3⁄4 40 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
48 59 1⁄2 56 44 1 5⁄ 8 1 1⁄ 2
by the manufacturer. The use of a non-fluid thread lubricant is 50 61 3⁄4 58 1⁄4 44 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
recommended on all bolts. 52 64 60 1⁄2 44 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
54 66 1⁄4 62 3⁄4 44 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
7. Dimensions and Tolerances 60 73 69 1⁄4 52 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
66 80 76 52 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
7.1 Flange and Bolt Dimensions—Flanges of 24 in. (610 72 86 1⁄2 82 1⁄2 60 1 7⁄ 8 1 3⁄ 4
mm) or smaller diameter shall conform to the values for bolt 84 99 3⁄4 95 1⁄2 64 2 1⁄ 8 2
96 113 1⁄4 108 1⁄2 68 2 3⁄ 8 2 1⁄ 4
circle and number and size of bolt holes, for Class-150 cast 102 120 114.50 72 2.625 2.50
iron flanges in ASME B 16.5. Flanges larger than 24 in. (610 108 126.75 120.75 72 2.625 2.50
mm) in diameter shall conform to the values for bolt circle, 114 133.50 126.75 76 2.875 2.75
120 140.25 132.75 76 2.875 2.75
number and size of bolt holes, for Class-125 cast-iron flanges 126 147 139.25 80 3.125 3.00
in ASME B 16.1 as shown in Table 3. The tolerance for these 132 153.75 145.75 80 3.125 3.00
flange dimensions shall be the same as those contained in 144 167.25 158.25 84 3.375 3.25
ASME B 16.1 and B 16.5. A flat washer is to be used under all A
1 in. = 25.4 mm.
bolt heads and nuts.
NOTE 4—Interference between the hub and bolt spot face may occur,
especially in high-pressure flanges. The use of ASME B 18.21.1 narrow 24-in. (610-mm) inside diameter and ASME B 16.1 for larger
washers is suggested because of their smaller outside diameter. The flanges. It is accepted practice to increase all flange outside
customer should be notified when these washers with smaller outside diameters to provide greater strength at the bolt holes.
diameter are to be used.
NOTE 5—For special-design large flanges, it may be desirable to 8. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance
provide the required bolt area by using smaller bolts spaced closer
together than is normally used for steel flanges. The minimum bolt size 8.1 Workmanship and appearance shall conform to Table 5
shall be 5⁄8 in. (16 mm). Flange dimensions shall be by purchaser- on visual acceptance criteria of standard C582 for the process
manufacturer agreement. side, and shall be as free as commercially practical of defects,
7.1.1 Flange Face for Full-Faced Gaskets— The flange face including indentations, delaminations, bubbles, pinholes, for-
shall be perpendicular to the axis of the fitting within 1⁄2 °, and eign inclusions, and resin-starved areas in the structural layer
shall be flat to 1⁄32 in. (1 mm) for sizes up to and including and outer surface as agreed upon between the purchaser and the
18-in. (457-mm) diameter and 1⁄16 in. (2 mm) for larger manufacturer.
diameters. For other sealing systems the tolerances must be
established to meet the requirements of 6.1.1. 9. Test Methods
7.1.2 Washer-Bearing Surface—Washer-bearing surface 9.1 Conditioning—When conditioning is required, and in all
shall be flat and parallel to the flange face within 1°. cases of disagreement, condition the test specimens at 73.4 6
7.1.3 Flange Outside Diameter—Outside diameter of 3.6°F (23 6 2°C) for not less than 40 h prior to test, in
flanges is to be at least equal to that of ASME B 16.5 for up to accordance with Procedure A of Test Methods D618.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:36 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5421 − 15
9.2 Test Conditions—The tests may be conducted at ambient
temperature and humidity conditions. When controlled-
environment testing is specified, conduct test at 73.4 6 3.6°F
(23 6 2°C). When elevated-temperature testing is specified,
conduct the tests at the design operating temperature, with a
tolerance of 63.6°F (2°C).
9.3 Dimensions and Tolerances—Measure flange dimen-
sions with a micrometer, vernier calipers, or other suitable
measuring devices accurate to within 50 % of the required
tolerance. Determine diameters by averaging a minimum of
four measurements, equally spaced circumferentially.
9.4 Sealing—Bolt together flanged components in general
agreement with Fig. 2 using the gasket and bolt torque
recommended for standard field installation by the flange
manufacturer. Then pressure test the assembly and require it to
hold the test pressure for a period of 168 h without leakage.
Retorquing to the manufacturer’s specified level after initial
pressurization is permitted.
9.5 Short-Term-Rupture Strength—Hydrostatically test
flanged components in accordance with Test Method D1599
with free-end closure for Class I flanges and fixed-end closure
for Class II flanges except as herein noted. Increase the
pressure in the specimen until failure of the flange occurs.
Pressure testing in an atmospheric environment is permissible.
Minimum-failure time shall be 60 s; no restriction shall be
placed on maximum time-to-failure. Leaking past the gasket
interface is permissible during this test. Bolt torque may be
increased as necessary during the test in order to minimize
gasket leaking and to achieve the pressure necessary to cause
flange failure. The assembly used for the test in 9.4 may be
used for this test. (Warning—DO NOT TEST WITH AIR
PRESSURE.)
9.6 Maximum Bolt Torque—Using the gasket and hardware
recommended by the flange manufacturer, bolt the flange
against a flat-face steel flange. Tighten the nuts by hand until
they are snug. Prior to fit-up, the nuts, bolts and washers should
be well lubricated, using a non-fluid thread lubricant. Establish
uniform pressure over the flange face by tightening bolts in
10-lb·ft (14-N·m) increments according to the sequence shown
A—End, plate, end cap, or quick closure with coupling for pressure source/vent
line.
B—Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe (RTRP).
C—Test flange set.
D—End plate, end cap, or quick closure.
FIG. 2 Test-Assembly Configuration
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:36 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
in Fig. 3. For flanges with 20 or more bolts, similar alternating
bolt-tightening sequences shall be used. Increase the bolt
torque uniformly until flange failure occurs, or until all bolts
have been torqued to 2 times the level recommended by the
manufacturer for field-installation practice to establish the bolt
torque cell classification of the flange. Any sign of flange
damage (crumbling, flaking, cracking, or other breaking) shall
constitute failure.
NOTE 6—The torque limits determined by 11.6 apply only to flanges
bolted up against a flat sealing surface. Significantly lower bolt-torque
values will normally be allowed when contact-molded flanges are bolted
up against other than flat sealing surfaces. When fiberglass flanges must be
used against other than flat sealing surfaces, the flange manufacturer
should be contacted for his torquing and installation recommendations.
10. Proof of Design
10.1 Test one each of 150-psi (1.03-MPa) flanges 8, 12, and
24 in. (203, 305, and 610 mm) as described in 6.1.2 and 9.5, to
establish that the design calculations meet the test requirements
and to establish rating data for the particular construction for
all sizes of 150 psi or lower pressure ratings. Any change in
calculation or construction will require retesting.
10.2 For individual orders conduct only those tests specifi-
cally agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer
prior to manufacture of flanges.
11. Product Marking
11.1 Flanges for use or installation by other than the flange
manufacturer shall be marked with the following information:
11.1.1 The designation “ASTM D5421” with which the
flange complies,
11.1.2 Identification of the flange in accordance with the
designation code in 4.2,
11.1.3 Nominal flange size, and
11.1.4 Manufacturer’s name (or trademark) and product
designation.
11.2 Flanges for use and installation by the flange manufac-
turer shall be identified on the fabrication and assembly
drawings with the following information:
11.2.1 The designation “ASTM D5421,” and
11.2.2 Pressure rating.
NOTE 7—Through a quality-assurance and surveillance program the
manufacturer shall ensure that the flanges used are of the designated grade
and pressure rating.
12. Precision and Bias
12.1 No precision and bias statement can be made for the
test methods outline in this standard since controlled round-
robin test programs have not been run. The wide variations in
raw materials and construction between manufacturers make
round-robin testing difficult to apply.
13. Keywords
13.1 butt weld; contact molded; flange on pipe; furan;
integral flange; polyester; vinylester
 D5421 − 15

FIG. 3 Bolt Torquing Sequence

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5421 – 05(2010)) that may impact the use of this standard. (May 1, 2015)

(1) Extended to larger diameters as now covered in many (3) Removed references to ASTM D2310 and D3982 as not
“Fiberglass” pipe standards. applicable.
(2) Corrected referenced bolting standards from ANSI to (4) Corrected recommended bolt torqueing sequences in Fig. 3.
ASME.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:36 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5422 − 17

Standard Test Method for

Measurement of Properties of Thermoplastic Materials by
Screw-Extrusion Capillary Rheometer1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5422; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

INTRODUCTION

This test method uses capillary rheometry to measure the rheological properties of thermoplastics
and thermoplastic compounds. This test method utilizes a screw-extrusion-type capillary rheometer.

1. Scope* mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical

1.1 This test method covers the use of a screw-extrusion-
type capillary rheometer for the measurement of flow proper-
ties of thermoplastics and thermoplastic compounds. The
measured flow properties, which are obtained through labora-
tory investigation, may help to describe the material behavior
that occurs in factory processing.
1.2 Since a screw-type capillary rheometer imparts shear
energy to the material during testing, the measurements will
usually differ from those obtained with a piston-type capillary
rheometer (see Test Method D3835).
1.3 Capillary rheometer measurements for thermoplastics
and thermoplastic compounds are described in Test Method
D3835.
1.4 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.5 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard. The scope
of this standard is mentioned in ISO 11443:2014, Plastics—Determination
of the fluidity of plastics using capillary and slit-die rheometers,” Annex
C, “Uncertainties in the determination of shear viscosity by capillary
extrusion.”
1.6 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.30 on Thermal Properties
(Section D20.30.08).
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2017. Published January 2018. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D5422 – 09. DOI:
10.1520/D5422-17.
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions: (See Terminology D883):
3.1.1 apparent shear rate (γ̇a)—shear strain rate (or velocity
gradient) of the thermoplastic or thermoplastic compound
extrudate as it passes through the capillary die.
3.1.1.1 Discussion—This velocity gradient is not uniform
through the cross-section of the capillary die. The shear rate is
calculated for the region of highest shear, which is at the wall
of the capillary. By selecting a die diameter and controlling the
volume flow per unit time through the die, a specific level of
apparent shear rate is achieved. Alternately, the shear stress
(entrance pressure) is controlled, and the apparent shear rate
measured.
3.1.1.2 Discussion—Mathematically, the apparent shear rate
at the wall of the capillary for a Newtonian fluid at the capillary
wall is given by the following:
32·Q
γ̇ a 5 (1)
π·D 3
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

where:
γ̇a = apparent shear rate, s−1,
Q = quantity of fluid extruded per time, mm3 /s,
π = 3.142, and
D = diameter of the measuring capillary, mm.
3.1.2 apparent shear stress (τa)—the measured resistance to
the flow through a capillary die. It may be determined by
measuring the die entrance pressure for a specific die, then
applying appropriate geometric factors.
3.1.2.1 Discussion—Mathematically, apparent shear stress
is given by the following:
P vary with die length.
τa 5
4· ~ L/D !
where:
τa = apparent shear stress, Pa,
P = pressure at the entrance of the measuring capillary, Pa,
L = length of the measuring capillary, mm, and
D = diameter of the measuring capillary, mm.
3.1.3 apparent viscosity (ηa)—ratio of apparent shear stress
to apparent shear rate, Pa·s.
3.1.3.1 Discussion—For an extrusion capillary rheometer,
the ratio is usually calculated at a given shear rate. At constant
temperature, the apparent viscosity of most polymers is not
constant, but varies with shear rate. The viscosity is generally
annotated with the shear rate at which the measurement was
made.
3.1.4 capillary rheometer—an instrument in which thermo-
plastics or thermoplastic compounds can be forced from a
reservoir through a capillary die. The temperature, pressure
entering the die, and flow rate through the die can be controlled
and accurately measured.
3.1.5 corrected shear rate (γ̇w)—the actual shear rate at the
wall of the capillary die determined by applying the Rabinow-
itsch correction for non-Newtonian materials, s−1.
3.1.5.1 Discussion—The Rabinowitsch correction math-
ematically adjusts the shear-rate values to compensate for
non-Newtonian behavior of the polymer. To obtain corrected
shear rate, at least two measurements of apparent shear stress
and apparent shear rate are made. This is generally accom-
plished by increasing the rate of extrusion (Q) while using the
same measuring capillary.
3.1.5.2 Discussion—As a first step, the Bagley correction
(as stated in 3.1.6) is made to the shear-stress values. Then,
either by algebraic means (if only two measurements are
made), or by a regression method (for a greater number of
points), the equation in 3.1.11 is solved for n, using the
corrected shear stress (τw).
3.1.5.3 Discussion—The corrected shear rate (γ̇ w) is deter-
mined by the following:
γ̇ w 5 F 3 n 11
4n G ·γ̇ a
For most thermoplastics and thermoplastic compounds,
the magnitude of shear sensitivity (n) will vary, depending
on material composition.
3.1.6 corrected shear stress (τW)—the actual shear stress at
the wall of the capillary die, Pa. The corrected shear stress is
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5422 − 17
obtained by applying the Bagley Correction Factor (E) to the
apparent shear stress (see 3.1.7.1 and 3.1.7.2). The Bagley
correction compensates for energy losses at the entrance and
exit of the die.
3.1.6.1 Discussion—This correction is often applied as
though it were an additional length of capillary. The correction
is often termed “end effect.” Capillary entrance angle and
geometry have great influence on the magnitude of this
correction.
3.1.6.2 Discussion—The Bagley correction will also remove
the influence of any static pressure in the system that does not
(2)
3.1.6.3 Discussion—Since the magnitude of correction is a
function of shear rate, data for this correction are obtained by
using two or more dies of different length, but of the same
diameter (and thus the same apparent shear rate, as calculated
in 3.1.4.2). If the data from these additional dies are compared,
either graphically or mathematically, a linear relationship of
extrusion pressure with die geometry is usually obtained in the
following form:
P 5 c· F L
D
1E G (4)
where:
E = the Bagley Correction Factor. (This term is often called
“end effect.” It is expressed as the equivalent length of
capillary necessary to extrapolate the pressure-line value
on the P versus L/D plot to zero, mm.)
c = slope of the line.
The Bagley Correction Factor (E) and the slope (c) are
functions of the thermoplastic compound and the shear rate.
Corrected shear stress is therefore as follows:
P
τ 5 (5)
w
4· @ ~ L/D ! 1E #
3.1.6.4 Discussion—Each value of corrected shear stress
must be annotated with the shear rate with which it is
measured.
3.1.7 corrected viscosity (η)—the ratio of corrected shear
stress to corrected shear rate, Pa·s.
3.1.7.1 Discussion—Since both the material properties and
the correction equations are functions of shear rate, it is very
important to state the particular value of shear rate at which
each measurement is made.
3.1.7.2 Discussion—Other corrections to measured values
are often made in rheological research studies to compensate
for the effects of pressure, viscous heating, compressibility,
time effects, etc. The terms “true shear stress,” “true shear
rate,” and “true viscosity” are often used for the results of such
exhaustive calculations. This test method addresses only the
(3)
two most important corrections, Bagley and Rabinowitsch.
3.1.8 die entrance pressure (P)—the pressure in the reser-
voir at the die entrance.
3.1.9 newtonian fluid—a material for which the measure-
ment of viscosity is not changed by changing the shear rate.
Simple liquids, such as water, are considered Newtonian
whereas most polymeric materials are not.
2

3.1.10 power-law fluid—a material for which the viscosity
varies with the shear rate in accordance with the following
known relationship:
τ a 5 K· ~ γ̇ a ! n
where:
τa = apparent shear stress, Pa,
γ̇a = apparent shear rate, s−1 ,
K = a material constant, often called “consistency index,”
and
n = shear sensitivity, dimensionless.
Most non-Newtonian fluids follow this relationship for at
least short ranges of the shear rate variable. The power-law
equation is generally used in its logarithmic form as follows:
log~ τ
a ! 5 log~ K ! 1n ~ log~ γ̇ a !!
3.1.11 shear sensitivity (n)—a dimensionless material
parameter, also called the “power-law index,” that represents
the magnitude of the shear sensitivity of a polymer. It is equal
to 1.00 for Newtonian fluids, and generally less than 0.8 for
non-Newtonian fluids.
3.1.11.1 Discussion—Mathematically, the shear sensitivity
is given by the following:
dlog~ τ w !
n5
dlog~ γ̇ a !
where:
d log(τw) = the change in log corrected shear stress over
varying extrusion rates, and
d log(γ̇a) = the change in log apparent shear rate over
varying extrusion rates.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The thermoplastic material is fed into a laboratory
extruder, the barrel of which is equipped with a temperature
control. The output end of the extruder is equipped with a
capillary die containing an insert of specified dimensions.
Temperatures of the extruder barrel and capillary die are
normally kept constant. (It may be necessary to alter the die-set
temperature only to compensate for shear heating of the
material at different extrusion rates.)
4.2 A suitable pressure transducer and temperature-
measuring device, such as a thermocouple, are positioned in
the die just before the entrance to the insert.
4.3 The rate of material extrusion, or mass throughput (Q) is
determined by collecting extrudate over a timed interval and
then weighing it. The extrusion rate is controlled by adjusting
the drive speed.
4.4 In order to calculate the flow properties of the material,
extrusion is performed at a minimum of two different drive
speeds through an insert of specified dimensions (Die A). Then,
extrusion is performed again, at the same drive speeds, through
at least one additional die insert of different specified dimen-
sions (Die B or Die C).
4.5 This procedure allows for the determination of apparent
shear rate, apparent shear stress, apparent viscosity, corrected
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5422 − 17
shear stress, corrected shear rate, corrected viscosity, shear
sensitivity, and entrance/exit effects.
(6) 5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is useful for the characterization of
thermoplastics and thermoplastic compounds, in terms of
viscosity, or resistance to flow.
5.2 The data produced by this test method has been found
useful in both quality-control testing and compound develop-
ment. However, direct correlation with factory conditions is
not implied.
5.3 Flow-performance data permits quality control of in-
coming thermoplastics and thermoplastic compounds because
the flow parameters are sensitive to molecular weight and
(7)
molecular-weight distribution. Therefore, this test method may
distinguish differences between lots.
5.4 The shear viscosity or flow viscosity of thermoplastics
and thermoplastic compounds will not only be sensitive to the
raw-polymer molecular properties, but will also be affected by
the type and amount of filler, additive, plasticizer, or stabilizer,
by the type of copolymer blend, and by the addition of other
compounding materials. This test method can serve as a
quality-control tool for either incoming materials or for in-
(8)
house quality-assurance checks on production mixing. This test
method is useful to the research and development of new
products in that the rheological behavior of a yet uncharacter-
ized thermoplastic or thermoplastic compound can be mea-
sured and considered for comparative analysis.
6. Interferences and Precautions
6.1 Since the flow properties of non-Newtonian materials
are not linear, capillary rheometers should be operated at
conditions of flow (temperature, pressure, and rate) similar to
those of selected commercial processes. These processes in-
clude mixing, calendering, molding, and extrusion of thermo-
plastics and thermoplastic compounds.
6.2 Screw-extrusion-type rheometers impart significant
amounts of energy to the thermoplastic or thermoplastic
compound before the measurement is made. Interpretation of
the data for factory operations such as production extrusion,
calendering, or injection molding is therefore more straightfor-
ward than for compression-molding operations, where factory-
work input is quite small.
6.3 Increasing the rate of extrusion will induce shear
heating, and therefore may alter the temperature of the material
flowing through the capillary die. It is essential to maintain a
constant melt temperature in the die in order to perform
accurate viscosity measurements. It may be necessary to
compensate for shear heating by manually adjusting the
die-heater set temperature.
6.4 Extruder residence time and shearing actions at a
particular melt temperature will often affect a material’s
viscosity. It is recommended that consideration be given to the
temperature and shear-stability characteristics of each thermo-
plastic or thermoplastic compound before using this test
method.
3
 D5422 − 17
FIG. 1 Schematic of Screw-Extrusion-Type Rheometer Cross-Section
7. Apparatus
7.1 A schematic diagram of a screw-extrusion capillary
rheometer is shown in Fig. 1. Only those parts essential to the
measurement are depicted. Suitable supports, drive
components, and fixtures, such as devices for securing the die
to the barrel are essential, but are not shown.
7.2 The screw-extrusion system controls both the rate of
extrusion and the temperature of the stock at the die entrance.
7.2.1 A single-screw-type laboratory extruder having a bar-
rel diameter of not greater than 31.7 mm nor less than 19 mm
is recommended. The length to diameter (L/D) ratio of the
barrel should not be less than 20:1 nor more than 30:1.
7.2.2 Compression of the stock is accomplished by transport
action of the rotating screw. In some extruders, the volume
between the screw and the wall, occupied by the polymeric
compounds, is less at the end of the barrel than at the feed
section. The ratio of the volume in the feed section to the
volume at the end of the screw is referred to as the “compres-
sion ratio.” The compression ratio of the screw should not be
less than 2.0:1.0 nor greater than 5.0:1.0. The suggested
compression ratio is 3.0:1.0.
NOTE 2—Refer to material specifications or to recommendations of the
manufacturer when selecting the proper compression ratio for the screw.
7.2.3 Both the barrel and the screw should be constructed of
hardened stainless steel with suitable surface treatments to
render them resistant to wear and chemical attack.
7.2.4 The extruder shall be equipped with instrumentation
capable of monitoring the wall temperature of each portion of
the barrel. The stock temperatures should also be measured at
the extruder head and at any inside surface of the capillary-die
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
assembly. The monitoring devices should have an accuracy of
61.0°C, and a precision of 60.2°C.
7.3 The dies are firmly secured to the end of the barrel. A
minimum of two die inserts are needed. A schematic of the die
is shown in Fig. 2. The dimensions are given in Tables 1 and
2.
NOTE 3—Refer to recommendations of the manufacturer when selecting
the proper diameter for the die nozzle. The 2.0 mm insert series is
recommended for rigid PVC, glass-reinforced resins, and materials with
heat/shear sensitive properties.
7.4 For the purpose of calculation, the length of each insert
shall be measured to 60.14 mm, and the diameter to 60.014
mm. The actual measured dimensions shall be used for these
calculations. Calibration of the apparatus shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
7.4.1 Dies must be made of wear-resistant materials such as
hardened steel, hardened stainless steel, or carbide. Calibration
of the pressure transducer generally requires removal of the
transducer from its mounting, followed by the calibration in an
appropriate testing apparatus, and then reattachment to the
extruder. Thermocouples are calibrated according to the rec-
ommendations of the manufacturer.
8. Sampling and Conditioning of Samples
8.1 Many thermoplastics and thermoplastic compounds do
not require conditioning prior to testing. Materials that contain
volatile components, are chemically reactive, or have other
unique characteristics, are most likely to require special con-
ditioning procedures. In many cases, moisture accelerates
 D5422 − 17
TABLE 3 Typical Screw-Flight Dimensions
Flight Channel Width, Flight Channel Depth,
Compression Ratio
mm mm
19.05 mm screw diameter 15.88 ± 0.14 1.91 ± 0.03
2:1 15.88 ± 0.14 1.27 ± 0.03
3:1 15.88 ± 0.14 0.95 ± 0.03
4:1 15.88 ± 0.14 0.76 ± 0.03
5:1
31.75 mm screw diameter 27.00 ± 0.14 3.18 ± 0.03
2:1 27.00 ± 0.14 2.12 ± 0.03
3:1 27.00 ± 0.14 1.59 ± 0.03
4:1 27.00 ± 0.14 1.27 ± 0.03
5:1

9.3 Equip the extruder with Die A if using the 1.0 mm insert
series, or Die D if using the 2.0 mm insert series (See 7.3).
9.4 Preheat the rheometer die and die holder to the test
temperature. This temperature should model that of the pro-
cessing operation. For material-processing temperatures, refer
to the supplier recommendations. The die and die holder shall
be preheated until thermal equilibrium of each heating zone has
been achieved, and then maintained at the test temperature for
at least 5 min.
9.5 Establish equilibrium extrusion conditions.
FIG. 2 Rheometer Die
9.5.1 To ensure that equilibrium-flow conditions prevail
before any viscosity measurements are taken, screw-extruder-
TABLE 1 1.0 mm Die Nozzle Dimensions
type capillary rheometers require an additional running period,
Item Die A Die B Die C generally referred to as “ line-out.” Sufficient sample must be
Capillary length, (L), mm 15.0 ± 0.13 20.0 ± 0.13 30.0 ± 0.13 fed to the turning screw to fill and maintain the volume in the
Capillary diameter, (D ), mm 1.0 ± 0.013 1.0± 0.013 1.0± 0.013
Total included entrance angle, 40° ± 0°30' 40°± 0°30' 40°± 0°30' screw, head, and die under equilibrium conditions.
(α),° 9.5.2 Check the rate of extrusion by cutting the extruded
Capillary length to diameter 15.0 ± 0.13 20.0 ± 0.13 30.0 ± 0.13 strand with a sharp knife, collecting the extrudate for precisely
ratio, (L/D)
2 min, and then cutting the strand. Weigh the collected
extrudate.
TABLE 2 2.0 mm Die Nozzle Dimensions NOTE 4—The apparent shear rate will increase or decrease by adjusting
Item Die D Die E Die F the extruder variable-speed drive.
Capillary length, (L), mm 20.0 ± 0.13 30.0 ± 0.13 40.0 ± 0.13
Capillary diameter, (D ), mm 2.0 ± 0.013 2.0 ± 0.013 2.0 ± 0.013
9.5.3 Monitor the barrel temperatures and the die-stock
Total included entrance angle, (α),° 40° ± 0°30' 40° ± 0°30' 40° ± 0°30' temperature for at least 5 min of continuous running. During
Capillary length to diameter ratio, 10.0 ± 0.13 15.0 ± 0.13 20.0 ± 0.13 this period, the pressures in the head and particularly in the
(L/D)
capillary-die assembly shall be in equilibrium before taking
readings for viscosity measurements.
9.6 Collect the extrudate for 2 min, again using a sharp knife
degradation or may otherwise affect reproducibility of flow- to cut the strand before and after the time period. Note the
rate measurements. If conditioning is necessary, see the appli- pressure and stock temperature in the die during extrudate
cable material specification and Test Method D618. collection. Weigh the extrudate to the nearest milligram, then
9. Procedure convert the mass to volume, using the melt density of the
material.
9.1 Determine the melt density of the thermoplastic or
thermoplastic compound being tested (see Test Method 9.7 Repeat the extrusion procedure of 9.5 and 9.6 at least
D1238). This is necessary since the throughput is measured as twice at different drive speeds to obtain an apparent shear-rate
a mass, but the calculations are based on volumetric flow. range. It may be necessary to adjust the die-set temperature in
order to compensate for the shear heating of the material (see
9.2 Prepare the sample for introduction into the extruder. 6.3).
9.2.1 To obtain equilibrium plastication and flow of thermo-
plastics or thermoplastic compounds, it is necessary to feed the 9.8 Change to Die B after using Die A when using the 1.0
material at a constant rate into the feed section of the screw. mm insert series. Change to Die E after using Die D when
Material should be supplied in either pellet or powder form. using the 2.0 mm insert series.
9.2.2 Typical screw-flight dimensions for the feed section of 9.9 Repeat the procedure in 9.5 – 9.7 using the same drive
the laboratory scaled extruders are shown in Table 3. speeds.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5422 − 17
TABLE 4 Repeatability Data
Corrected Shear Stress (KPa) at Fixed Corrected Shear Rate (s-1)
Mean Level in Ascending Order Within Laboratory
Material Shear Rate Avg. Stress (KPa) Sr r (r)
LDPE 1000 120.3 2617 7328 6.1 %
2500 157.3 1574 4409 2.8 %
5000 192.6 216 606 0.3 %
7500 216.9 884 2475 1.1 %
10 000 236.0 1831 5128 2.2 %
12 500 251.9 2676 7494 3.0 %
Pooled Values 1633 4573 2.5 %

Corrected Viscosity at Fixed Corrected Shear Rate (s-1) and Shear Stress (KPa)
Mean Level in Ascending Order Within Laboratory
Material Shear Rate Viscosity Sr r (r)
LDPE 1000 120.3 2.6 7.3 6.1 %
2500 63.0 0.6 1.8 2.8 %
5000 38.6 0.1 0.2 0.5 %
7500 28.9 0.1 0.4 1.4 %
10 000 23.6 0.1 0.4 1.7 %
12 500 20.2 0.2 0.6 2.9 %
Pooled Values 0.6 1.8 2.5 %

NOTE 5—If a third die insert is necessary, follow the procedures in 9.8
and 9.9, substituting Die C for Die B, or substituting Die F for Die E. Use
of three or more die nozzles of different lengths may better ensure the
3n11
γ̇ w 5
4nF ·γ̇ a G (15)
NOTE 7—Corrected shear stress (τW) is calculated first, and then used in
linearity of data required to calculate the Bagley Correction Factor. the determination of n.

10. Calculation 10.8 Corrected Viscosity (η):

NOTE 6—See Section 3 for terminology used in the following calcula- 10.8.1 The corrected viscosity is calculated as follows:
tions. For all calculations, it is advisable to use the actual measured values τw
of the die dimensions instead of the nominal values discussed in 7.3. η5 (16)
γ̇ w
10.1 Apparent Shear Rate (γ̇aA1 ):
10.1.1 Calculate the apparent shear rate of 9.5.2, 9.7, and 11. Report
9.9 as follows: 11.1 Report the following information:
γ̇ aA1 5 @ ~ 32·Q 3
A1 ! / ~ π·D A ! # (9) 11.1.1 Type of capillary rheometer used,
11.1.2 Dimensions of capillary-die inserts, mm,
10.2 Apparent Shear Stress (τaA1):
11.1.3 Entrance angle of capillary-die inserts, rad,
10.2.1 The apparent shear stress is calculated as follows:
11.1.4 Position of pressure transducer (distance from capil-
τ aA1 5 4· ~ P A1 /L A /D A ! (10) lary entrance), mm,
10.3 Apparent Viscosity (ηa): 11.1.5 Identity of sample,
10.3.1 The apparent viscosity is calculated as follows: 11.1.6 Pretreatment of sample, if any,
11.1.7 Temperature of test, °C or °K,
τ aA1
ηa 5 (11) 11.1.8 Shear sensitivity (n), dimensionless,
γ̇ aA1
11.1.9 End effect (E), mm,
10.4 Entrance/Exit Effects (Bagley): 11.1.10 Corrected shear stress values, Pa,
10.4.1 The Bagley Correction Factor (E) is calculated as 11.1.11 Corrected shear rate values, s−1, and
follows: 11.1.12 Corrected viscosity values, Pa·s.
@ P B1 · ~ L A /D A ! # 2 @ P A1 · ~ L B /D B ! # 12. Precision and Bias
E5 (12)
@ P A1 2P B1 #
12.1 Table 4 is based on a single laboratory repeatability
10.5 Corrected Shear Stress (τw): study conducted in 2002 involving one LDPE homopolymer
10.5.1 The corrected shear stress is calculated as follows: resin. The laboratory used a computerized torque rheometer
P A1 and a three zone electrically heated 19.0 mm single screw
τw 5 (13)
4· @ ~ L A /D A ! 1E # extruder, 3:1 metering extruder screw, electrically heated one
10.6 Shear Sensitivity (n): zone gear pump (1.16 cc/rev), and an electrically heated two
10.6.1 Shear sensitivity is calculated as follows: zone capillary rheology die to process the sample. The sample
was tested once on two separate days yielding two data points
dlog~ τ w ! per value. (Warning—The explanation of r (12.2.1 and 12.2.2)
n5 (14)
dlog~ γ̇ a ! is only intended to present a meaningful way of considering the
10.7 Corrected Shear Rate (γ̇w): approximate precision of this test method. The data in Table 4
10.7.1 The corrected shear rate is calculated as follows: should not be applied to acceptance or rejection of materials, as

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5422 − 17
these data apply only to the materials tested in the round robin
and are unlikely to be rigorously representative of other lots,
formulations, conditions, materials, or laboratories. Users of
this method should apply the principles outlined in Practice
E691 to generate data specific to their materials and laboratory
(or between specific laboratories). The principles of 12.2.1 and
12.2.2 would then be valid for such data.)
NOTE 8—SYMBOLS ARE DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
Sr = within laboratory standard deviation
r = within laboratory repeatability, measurement units
(r) = within laboratory repeatability, %
12.2 Concept of r and R in Table 4—If Sr has been
calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test results
that were averages from testing one point for each test result,
then:
12.2.1 Repeatability (r)—Two results obtained within one
laboratory shall be judged not equivalent if they differ by more
than the r-value, where r = 2.8Sr. r is the interval representing
the critical difference between two test results for the same
material, obtained by the same operator using the same
equipment on the same day in the same laboratory.
12.2.2 Reproducibility (R)—The number of laboratories,
one, participating in the round robin does not meet the
minimum requirement for inclusion of information on between
laboratory variability. Because this method does not contain a
recognized round robin precision and bias statement, it shall
not be used as a referee test method in case of dispute. Anyone
wishing to participate in the development of precision and bias
data should contact the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.30
(Section D20.30.08) ASTM 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box
C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.
12.3 Any judgment in accordance with 12.2.1 or 12.2.2
would have an approximate 95 % (0.95) probability of being
correct.
12.4 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
mate bias of this method.
13. Keywords
13.1 capillary rheometer; flow properties; material proper-
ties; molecular properties; rheological properties; rheology;
screw extrusion

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5422 - 09)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2017)

(1) Revised Note 1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:39 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5436 − 15

Standard Specification for

Cast Poly(Methyl Methacrylate) Plastic Rods, Tubes, and
Shapes1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5436; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.
This standard has been approved for use by agencies of the U.S. Department of Defense.

1. Scope* D1003 Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance

1.1 This specification covers poly(methyl methacrylate)
rods, tubes, and other shapes produced by casting or machining
cast blanks. This specification does not apply to heat-formed
and molded or extruded parts and shapes, or sections that are
made by assembling or joining two or more pieces.
NOTE 1—The properties included in this specification are those required
to identify the types and grades of materials covered. There may be other
requirements necessary to identify particular characteristics.
1.2 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.3 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D542 Test Method for Index of Refraction of Transparent
Organic Plastics
D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D648 Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1
This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
Materials.
Current edition approved June 1, 2015. Published July 2015. Originally approved
in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D5436 – 13. DOI: 10.1520/
D5436-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
of Transparent Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
E29 Practice for Using Significant Digits in Test Data to
Determine Conformance with Specifications
3. Terminology
3.1 The terminology used in this specification is in accor-
dance with Terminology D883 and Terminology D1600.
4. Classification
4.1 Types—This specification covers two types of cast
methacrylate plastics:
4.1.1 Type UVA—Material having ultraviolet-lightabsorbing
properties as shown in Table 1.
4.1.2 Type UVT—Material not subject to the light-absorbing
properties shown in Table 1.
4.2 Finish—Castings may be specified with the following
finishes:
4.2.1 Finish 1—Rods, tubes, and shapes having a smooth
surface finish obtained either in the casting process or by
highly polishing the surface.
4.2.2 Finish 2—Rods, tubes, and shapes having a rough,
unfinished surface which may be frosted, abraded, sanded,
machined, or as-cast.
NOTE 3—The sawed ends of Finish 1 and Finish 2 rods, tubes, and
shapes are not polished.
5. General Requirements
5.1 Finish 1 and Finish 2 cast tubes are subject to the
following permissible variations from the specified dimen-
sions:
5.1.1 Cast tubes shall be specified with either Type A or
Type B wall thickness tolerances as listed in Table 2. Type A
tolerances are specified for applications where wall thickness is
critical to performance, otherwise Type B is generally speci-
fied.
5.1.2 Cast tubes are subject to the outside-diameter toler-
ances listed in Table 3.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:42 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5436 − 15
TABLE 1 Detail Requirements for Cast Methacrylate Rods, Tubes, TABLE 4 Sizes and Permissible Length Tolerances for Cut-to-
and Shapes Length Cast Rod and Tube
Type UVA Type UVT Nominal Outside Permissible Length
Index of refraction, n D, 23 °C Diameter, Tolerances,
min: 1.48 1.48 mm (in.) ±, mm (in.)
max: 1.50 1.50 up to 76 (3.0) 2 (0.079)
Specific gravity, 23/23 °C (73.4/73.4°F) up to 280 (11.0) 3 (0.118)
min: 1.18 1.18 greater than 280 (11.0) 6 (0.236)
max: 1.20 1.20
Spectral transmittance, %, max
270 nm: 5 ...
280 nm: 5 ... TABLE 5 Size and Permissible Tolerances for Diameter of Cast
290 nm: 5 ... Rods
310 nm: 5 ... Diameter Tolerances,
340 nm: 5 ... Size, Diameter, mm (in.)
±, mm (in.)
Luminous transmittance, %, min
up to 4.7 mm (0.187 in.) thickness: 91 91 up to 9.5 (0.375) 0.1 (0.005)
25.4 mm (1.00 in.) thickness: 89 89 up to 25.4 (1.00) 0.2 (0.010)
greater than 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) thickness: 87 87 up to 50.8 (2.00) 0.4 (0.015)
Haze, %, max 3.0 3.0 up to 76.2 (3.00) 0.8 (0.030)
Deflection temperature under load at 1820 up to 152.4 (6.00) 1.1 (0.045)
kPa (264 psi), °C (°F) min. up to 304.8 (12.00) 1.5 (0.060)
<12.0 mm (0.472 in.) 87 (188.6) 87 (188.6) greater than 304.8 (12.00) 2.5 (0.100)
>12.0 mm (0.472 in.)–24.0 mm (0.944 in.) 88 (190.4) 88 (190.4)
>24.0 mm (0.944 in.)–100 mm (3.937 in.) 93 (199.4) 93 (199.4)
Water absorption at 23 °C
Gain in weight, 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) thick, %, 0.8 0.8
max
5.3 Tolerances for shapes other than simple rods and tubes
Tensile strength at 23 °C (73.4°F), min, MPa 55 (8000) 55 (8000) depend upon the shapes themselves. Tolerances for these cast
(psi) shapes are to be specified independently.
Elongation at break, %, min 2 2
6. Detail Requirements
TABLE 2 Sizes and Permissible Tolerances for Wall Thickness of 6.1 The following applies to all specified limits in this
Cast Tube specification: For purposes of determining conformance with
Permissible Wall Thickness Tolerances, this specification an observed value or a calculated value shall
Nominal Wall Thickness, ±, mm (in.) be rounded to the nearest 1 MPa (100 psi) for tensile strength,
mm (in.)
Type A Type B and for all other properties shall be rounded to the nearest unit
up to 4.7 (0.187) 0.5 (0.020) not applicable in the last righthand place of figures used in expressing the
up to 6.4 (0.250) 0.6 (0.025) 1.1 (0.045)
limiting value, in accordance with the rounding method of
up to 9.5 (0.375) 0.9 (0.035) 1.4 (0.055)
up to 12.7 (0.550) 1.1 (0.045) 1.5 (0.060) Practice E29.
up to 19.0 (0.750) 1.5 (0.060) 2.3 (0.090)
up to 25.4 (1.00) 3.8 (0.150) not applicable
6.2 The physical and optical properties in this specification
greater than 25.4 (1.00) 6.4 (0.250) not applicable are based on Finish 1 material unless otherwise specified.
6.3 Rods, tubes, and shapes shall conform to the detail
requirements prescribed in Table 1 and, in addition, shall be so
TABLE 3 Sizes and Permissible Tolerances for Outside Diameter
of Cast Tubes prepared as to conform to the following properties:
6.3.1 Bubbles or inclusions in cast rods, tubes, and shapes
Difference Between
Nominal Outside Outside Diameter Maximum and Minimum shall not exceed 3.96 mm (0.156 in.) in any dimension. No
Diameter, Tolerances, Outside Diameter (One more than three such defects are permissible in any standard
mm (in.) ±, mm (in.) Tube), Not to Exceed,
mm (in.)
length greater than 122 cm (48 in.), or an outside diameter
up to 76.2 (3.0) 0.5 (0.020) 0.6 (0.025)
greater than 76.2 mm (3 in.). Bubbles or inclusions are not
up to 98.4 (3.875) 0.8 (0.030) 1.0 (0.040) permitted in rods, tubes, or shapes less than 122 cm (48 in.) in
up to 152.4 (6.00) 1.1 (0.045) 1.5 (0.060) length and less than 76.2 mm (3 in.) in outside diameter.
up to 304.8 (12.00) 1.6 (0.065) 2.0 (0.080)
greater than 304.8 (12.00) 3.2 (0.125) not applicable
Defects less than 1 mm (0.039 in.) shall be disregarded, unless
grouped to form an objectionable pattern.

5.1.3 Cut-to-size lengths of cast tube are subject to the
length tolerances listed in Table 4.
5.2 Finish 1 and Finish 2 cast rods are subject to the
following dimensions and tolerances.
5.2.1 Cast rods are subject to the diameter tolerances listed
in Table 5.
5.2.2 Cut-to-size lengths of cast rod are subject to the length
tolerances listed in Table 4.
7. Number of Tests
7.1 The number of tests shall be consistent with the require-
ments of Sections 8 and 10.
8. Sampling and Specimen Preparation
8.1 Sampling shall be statistically adequate to satisfy the
requirements of Section 10.
8.2 In the case of rods, tubes, or special shapes from which
the required test specimens cannot be cut, the test specimens

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:42 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5436 − 15
shall be prepared specially from the same raw materials and
under conditions simulating the manufacture of the special size
or shape. Otherwise a unit of the manufactured product shall be
used for testing.
8.3 A batch or lot shall be constituted as a unit of manufac-
ture as prepared for shipment, and shall consist of product from
one or more production runs.
9. Test Methods
9.1 The properties enumerated in this specification shall be
determined in accordance with the following test methods:
9.1.1 Test Conditions—Conduct the tests in the standard
laboratory atmosphere of 23 6 2.0 °C (73.4 6 3.6°F) and 50 6
10 % relative humidity, unless otherwise specified in the test
methods or in this specification.
9.1.2 Index of Refraction—Test in accordance with Test
Methods D542, using one of the exposed surfaces of the test
specimen that has been given any necessary polish without
gross removal of material.
9.1.3 Specific Gravity—Test in accordance with Method A
of Test Methods D792.
9.1.4 Water Absorption—Test in accordance with Test
Method D570, using the 24-h immersion procedure. Before
testing and following immersion, condition the test specimens
for 24 h at 50 6 3 °C (112 6 5°F) in accordance with
Procedure B of Practice D618.
9.1.5 Defection Temperature Under Flexural Load—Test in
accordance with Test Method D648. Any square, rectangular,
or cylindrical test specimen is allowed, but calculate the test
load used on the basis of a center-loaded beam in which the
outer fiber stress produced is 1820 kPa (264 psi). Stack and
bind together pieces of thin sheet, 12.7 mm (0.500 in.) in
width, to form a test specimen approximately 12.7 by 12.7 mm
(0.500 by 0.500 in.). Load the specimen parallel to the faces
containing the original surfaces of the material. Specimens
12.7 by 12.7 mm (0.500 by 0.500 in.) machined from the face
of thick material shall be loaded parallel to the face containing
the original surface.
9.1.6 Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break—Test in
accordance with Test Method D638 using Type I or Type II
specimens at a cross-head speed of 5 mm/min (0.2 in./min).
SUMMARY OF CHANGES
Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5436 –
13) that may impact the use of this standard. (June 1, 2015)
(1) Updated tolerances on temperature and humidity in 9.1.1 to
be consistent with Practice D618, Table 1.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:42 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.1.7 Spectral Transmittance—Measure the spectral trans-
mittance at each specified wavelength with a suitable spectro-
photometer.
9.1.8 Light Transmittance—Test in accordance with Test
Method D1003.
9.1.9 Haze—Test in accordance with Test Method D1003.
10. Certification and Inspection
10.1 When specified in the purchase order or contract, the
purchaser shall be furnished certification that samples repre-
senting each lot have been either tested or inspected as directed
in this specification and the requirements have been met. When
specified in the purchase order or contract, a report of the test
results shall be furnished.
10.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
inspection shall consist of (1) thickness and dimensions, (2)
appearance, and (3) deflection temperature.
10.3 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the material under this
specification. Supplier shall determine and use an inspection
frequency which shall be adequate to ensure that the material
is certifiable in accordance with 10.4.
10.4 Certification shall be that the material was
manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance
with this specification and that average values meet the
requirements at a confidence level of 95 %.
10.5 Any report made in accordance with 10.1 shall consist
of the results of the lot-acceptance inspection of the shipment
and the results of the most recent periodic-check inspection.
11. Packaging and Marking
11.1 All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of
Practice D3892 shall apply to this specification.
12. Keywords
12.1 acrylic; acrylic plastic; cast acrylic; clear weatherable
plastics; plastic; plastic materials; plastic rods; plastic shapes;
plastic tubes; PMMA; poly(methyl methacrylate); rods;
shapes; transparent; tubes
 D5436 − 15
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:42 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5477 − 18

Standard Practice for

Identification of Polymer Layers or Inclusions by Fourier
Transform Infrared Microspectroscopy (FT-IR)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5477; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

1.1 This practice describes the techniques used for detecting
two different polymer entities such as:
1.1.1 Abnormal specks or spots on a surface or in the film
that are objectionable as defects and
1.1.2 Layers of different polymeric sheets commonly used
as barrier films made by coextrusion.
1.2 This practice utilizes through-transmittance optical and
infrared techniques.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific hazard statements are given in Section 7.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1248 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion
Materials for Wire and Cable
1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally
published as D5477 – 93. Last previous edition approved in 2011 as D5477 – 11.
DOI: 10.1520/D5477-18.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
tics
E131 Terminology Relating to Molecular Spectroscopy
E168 Practices for General Techniques of Infrared Quanti-
tative Analysis
E2015 Guide for Preparation of Plastics and Polymeric
Specimens for Microstructural Examination
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI):The Modern Metric System
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 For definitions of the terms used in this practice, refer
to Terminologies D883 and D1600.
3.1.2 For units, symbols, and abbreviations used in this
practice, refer to Terminology E131 or IEEE/ASTM SI-10.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 A speck will ultimately cause a failure to occur by virtue
of its appearance in a film or by the decrease in electrical or
mechanical properties in the polymer substrate (see Specifica-
tion D1248).
4.2 The analysis of composite layers for barrier purposes by
microscopic Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR)
can indicate the adequacy of the barrier tape or indicate why a
barrier may be defective (a missing layer or hole in the layer or
poor coextrusion practice). Fig. 1 represents a typical multi-
layer film.
5. Apparatus
5.1 FT-IR Spectrophotometer, with nominal 4-cm−1 resolu-
tion (see Practices E168).
5.2 Microsampling Accessory, accommodated into the
FT-IR for microscopic infrared analysis, with nominal 6.25-µm
resolution in the infrared mode.
5.3 Optical Microscope, equipped with cross-polarized light
and phase contrast accessories. May be incorporated into the
infrared microsampling accessory.
5.4 Hot-Stage, with temperature readout, is accommodated
into the optical microscope or microsampling accessory.
5.5 Microtome, capable of <25 µm slices 62.5 µm.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:44 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5477 − 18

FIG. 1 Position and Function of Materials in a Typical Multilayer Film

6. Material 8. Specimen Preparation

6.1 Stiff plastic at 25°C, 1.25 mm thick and large enough to
hold sample (for example, ABS, boPET).
6.2 Cyano-acrylate adhesive.
6.3 Thermoset material for encapsulating sample (for
example, 2-part epoxy, acrylic).
6.4 Glass microscope slide to support sample slice during
inspection.
7. Hazards
7.1 The FT-IR spectrophotometer contains a laser. To avoid
eye injury, do not stare directly into the laser beam.
7.2 Use gloves when samples are prepared. The cyano-
acrylate adhesive will attach itself to the fingers and skin. Take
care to prevent this from occurring.
7.3 Avoid burns when handling microscopic slides with the
hot-stage.
8.1 It is necessary to microtome a thin cross section at right
angles to the surface of the film or sample in order to
conveniently observe the individual layers or the interior of the
speck.
8.2 Samples that do not deflect can be microtomed into the
required thin sections as received.
8.3 Flexible samples must be supported during sectioning.
Two common support techniques are shown, for flexible
samples, in Fig. 2. On the left, a stiff, flat plastic is used for the
support. A cyano-acrylate adhesive quickly bonds the flexible
sample to the flat plastic support. On the right of Fig. 2, the
sample is supported and cured inside a thermoset compound,
such as a two-part epoxy. (See Guide E2015.)
8.4 The entire sandwich is then microtomed in a direction
normal to the sample surface. Slice thickness typically of 25-50
µm provide satisfactory transmission of optical and infrared
light.

FIG. 2 Sandwich for Thin Films

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:44 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5477 − 18
9. Procedure
9.1 Optical Microscopy
9.1.1 The first step is to observe the sample visually in an
optical microscope. The fundamentals of optical microscopy
and sample preparation have been discussed in detail else-
where.3
9.1.2 The key to optical microscopy analysis is the sample
preparation. A 25 to 50-µm thick section allows the visible and
IR radiation to go through the section. A section with very few
knife marks is required. A knife mark is a gouge created in the
section by a defect in the microtome knife. Under cross-
polarized light, knife marks will confuse and distort the
boundaries of an inhomogeneity or layers in a multilayer
specimen.
9.1.3 Once suitable sections have been collected, they are
viewed in the optical microscope under cross-polarized light.
In pigmented materials, it is also necessary to view the
materials in uncrossed polarized light. Differences in contrast
between inhomogeneities of layers develop in these situations
due to differences in the intrinsic birefringence of the resins,
thermal and stress history, and pigment concentration. The
differences in contrast generally define material boundaries.
3
Chamot, E. M., and Mason, C. W., Handbook of Chemical Microscopy, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY, 1985.
FIG. 3 Schematic of An Infrared Microsampling Accessory with Viable Lenses and Polarizers Built In
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:44 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
The areas of interest may then be photographed and measure-
ments made to quantify the dimensions of inhomogeneities or
layers.
9.1.4 Since differences in contrast may arise from factors
other than chemical differences, it is necessary to conduct a
hot-stage microscopic analysis. In the hot-stage, each of the
different materials is located when their birefringence disap-
pears in the microscope under cross-polarized light, in accor-
dance with their melting temperature. The hot-stage is heated
at a rate of up to 10°C/min. It is advisable to recrystallize the
polymers and recheck the melting points since processing
history may influence softening point upon first melting in the
hot-stage.
9.2 Infrared Microscopy—
9.2.1 The infrared microscope permits the identification of
inclusions and multilayer films down to diameters of 10 µm.
9.2.2 This procedure uses the microscope to locate and
analyze small areas of a specimen. The microscope mates with
a FT-IR spectrometer. Infrared spectra may then be obtained
for each small area of interest.
9.2.3 A schematic of an instrument capable of performing
these tasks is shown in Fig. 3. This microscope accessory is
very useful for locating and then identifying small
inhomogeneities, such as a particle, oxidized zone, or layer in
a plastic film. Its use is unique for the identification of the
 D5477 − 18
layers in a multilayer film or sheet. The area of interest is 10. Report
chemically identified by the interpretation of the infrared
10.1 Report the following information:
spectra obtained for that area.
9.2.4 The infrared microscope is focused on the area of 10.1.1 Preparation method,
interest within the section. This typically requires using aper- 10.1.2 Material(s) identification,
tures to isolate the area. All spectra are recorded at 4 cm–1 10.1.3 Method(s) of determination,
resolution. Acceptable signal-to-noise ratios are obtained by 10.1.4 The date of the test.
the co-adding at least 100 spectra.
9.2.5 Many unresolved peaks in the spectrum indicate
11. Keywords
sections need to be thinner, assuming apertures, gain, and other
parameters optimized. 11.1 Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy; microscopy;
9.2.6 A well-resolved spectrum, along with the estimated microsampling; cross-polarized
melting point, may now be used to aid in chemical identifica-
tion.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:44 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5491 − 08 (Reapproved 2014)

Standard Classification for

Recycled Post-Consumer Polyethylene Film Sources for
Molding and Extrusion Materials1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5491; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-

1.1 This document provides for the classification of post-
consumer polyethylene (PE) film derived from specific
sources. It also identifies characteristics useful in determining
the acceptability of the film for recycling into molding and
extrusion materials. It is neither the intent nor the purpose of
this classification to specify the suitability of the recycled
material for specific applications.
1.2 This classification provides that the source of the mate-
rial be listed as an aid in identification. The separation by
source also improves the usefulness of the material. Sources
are post-consumer PE films from shrink wrap, dry cleaning
film, merchandise bags, grocery sacks, stretch wrap, recycle
bags, redemption bags, bubble packaging film, and
commercial/industrial liners/bags and overwrap. Other post-
consumer PE films shall be added to this classification when
such material streams are defined.
1.3 It is not the function of this classification to provide data
for specific product design or process-performance purposes.
1.4 The supplier shall provide a written certification with
each shipment stating that the material is derived from post-
consumer PE film sources described within this classification.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard. The values given in parentheses are for information
only.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
1
This classification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
Materials.
Current edition approved Dec. 1, 2014. Published December 2014. Originally
approved in 1993. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D5491 - 08. DOI:
10.1520/D5491-08R14.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
tics
D7209 Guide for Waste Reduction, Resource Recovery, and
Use of Recycled Polymeric Materials and Products
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—The definitions used in this classification
are in accordance with Terminology D883 and Guide D7209.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 bubble packaging film, n—clear or tinted LDPE or
LLDPE film with little or no print, used to cushion or to protect
surfaces, or both.
3.2.2 commercial/industrial liners/bag, n—clear LDPE,
LLDPE, or MDPE film with light or no print, used for the
shipment of industrial parts, mattresses or textile products, dry
nonputrescible foods, nonhazardous chemicals, etc.
3.2.3 commercial overwrap, n—clear LDPE, LLDPE, or
MDPE film with light or no print, used to cover finished
products such as carpeting, furniture, yarn, and other interme-
diate or retail items during shipment to the distribution outlet or
final consumer.
3.2.4 dry-cleaning film, n—clear or pigmented film made
from LDPE, LLDPE, or their blends, with light or no print,
used as the outer protective wrap by dry-cleaning establish-
ments.
3.2.5 grocery sacks, n—pigmented or unpigmented blends
of polyethylene with or without print, used to carry groceries
from a food market.
3.2.6 merchandise bags, n—pigmented LDPE, LLDPE,
MDPE, HDPE, or a combination of these resin types, with
print, used to carry dry goods from a retailer.
3.2.7 nominal density, n—the density of the unpigmented
polyethylene resin. The nominal density differs from the
apparent density of the material due to the addition of fillers or
pigments to the resin.
3.2.8 recycle bags, n—blue tinted LLDPE or LDPE film
with light or no print, used to transport items to a recycling
facility.
3.2.9 redemption bags, n—clear or tinted LLDPE or LDPE
film with little or no print, used to transport beverage bottles

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:48 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5491 − 08 (2014)
and cans to a recycler in a “bottle bill” state where beverage
containers require a refundable deposit upon purchase.
3.2.10 shrink wrap, n—pigmented or unpigmented film
made from LDPE, LLDPE, or their blends, clear or pigmented,
with light or no print, that is typically used to unitize an item
or items for stability.
3.2.11 source, n—the original end use of the PE materials
described in this specification.
3.2.12 stretch wrap, n—clear or tinted LLDPE film, with no
print, used to unitize an item or items for stability.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This classification identifies sources of PE film. The
separation by sources also improves the usefulness of the
material. Sources are post-consumer PE films from shrink
wrap, dry cleaning film, merchandise bags, grocery sacks,
stretch wrap, recycle bags, redemption bags, bubble packaging
film, commercial/industrial liners/bags, and commercial over-
wrap.
4.2 This classification is useful in characterizing post-
consumer film to be used as a feedstock for recycling.
4.3 It is neither the intent nor the purpose of this classifica-
tion to specify the suitability of the recycled material for
specific applications.
5. Basis of Classification
5.1 The basis of classification is solely by source.
5.1.1 Shrink Wrap—Pigmented or unpigmented film made
from LDPE, LLDPE, or their blends, clear or pigmented, with
light or no print, that is typically used to unitize an item or
items for stability.
5.1.2 Dry-Cleaning Film—Clear or pigmented film made
from LDPE, LLDPE, or their blends, with light or no print,
used as the outer protective wrap by dry-cleaning establish-
ments.
5.1.3 Merchandise Bags—Pigmented LDPE, LLDPE,
MDPE, HDPE or a combination of these resin types, with
print, used to carry dry goods from a retailer.
5.1.4 Grocery Sacks—Pigmented or unpigmented blends of
polyethylene with or without print, used to carry groceries
from a food market.
5.1.5 Stretch Wrap—Clear or tinted LLDPE film, with no
print, used to unitize an item or items for stability. Tackifiers
are an acceptable constituent of the wrap.
5.1.6 Recycle Bags—Blue tinted LLDPE or LDPE film with
little or no print, used to transport items to a recycling facility.
5.1.7 Redemption Bags—Clear or tinted LLDPE or LDPE
film with little or no print, used to transport beverage bottles
and cans to a recycler in a “bottle bill” state where beverage
containers require a refundable deposit upon purchase.
5.1.8 Bubble Packaging Film—Clear or tinted LDPE or
LLDPE film with little or no print, used to cushion or to protect
surfaces, or both. Barrier resin or tie layers are acceptable
components of the construction.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:48 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
5.1.9 Commercial/Industrial Liners/Bags—Clear LDPE,
LLDPE, or MDPE film with light or no print, used for the
shipment of industrial parts, mattresses or textile products, dry
nonputrescible foods, nonhazardous chemicals, etc.
5.1.10 Commercial Overwrap—Clear LDPE, LLDPE, or
MDPE film with light or no print, used to cover finished
products such as carpeting, furniture, yarn, and other interme-
diate or retail items during shipment to the distribution outlet or
final consumer.
6. Ordering Information
6.1 The purchase order or inquiry for these recycled post-
consumer PE materials shall state this ASTM specification
number, year of issue, and source.
6.2 Further definition for the sources listed in 5.1 shall be by
agreement between user and supplier.
7. Contamination
7.1 Contamination by non-polymeric materials, non-
polyethylene films, and non-film plastics shall not exceed 2 %
by weight and must be identified by type.
7.2 Shipments shall contain minimal contamination (see
Note 3) from dirt, mud, stones, grease, glass, metals, and paper.
7.3 Materials contaminated with agricultural chemicals,
hazardous materials, flammable liquids, and medical wastes are
prohibited.
7.4 All polymeric materials that present a health hazard, or
safety hazard, or both, due to their decomposition products at
polyethylene processing conditions are prohibited.
7.5 The material shall be free of any free-flowing liquid.
7.6 The plastic shall not have visible evidence of damage by
ultraviolet exposure, that is embrittled, flaky film.
NOTE 2—It is recognized that certain contaminants result in an odor
being present in the recycled material. The acceptability of the type and
level of odor shall be agreed upon between the user and supplier. Methods
to evaluate odors in recycled materials are being developed elsewhere in
the plastics industry.
NOTE 3—It is recognized that despite all efforts to completely prevent
the presence of contamination, it still does occur. The term “minimal
contamination” shall mean film that has been inspected and is visually
acceptable for use in good commercial practice. Carefully collect and pack
the film for accumulation and shipment.
8. Inspection and Certification
8.1 The supplier shall provide a written certification with
each shipment that the material is derived from post-consumer
sources. The source of these materials, as specified in 5.1, shall
also be identified in the certification.
8.2 Certification shall be that the material is in accordance
with this classification and meets the contamination require-
ments of Section 7.
9. Keywords
9.1 plastic films; polyethylene; post-consumer material; re-
covered material; recycled
 D5491 − 08 (2014)
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5491 - 08)
that may impact the use of this standard. (December 1, 2014)

(1) Reapproved with no changes.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:48 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5492 − 17

Standard Test Method for

Determination of Xylene Solubles in Propylene Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5492; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method is to be used for determining the 25°C
xylene-soluble fraction of polypropylene homopolymers and
copolymers.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—This test method is technically equivalent to ISO 16152.
1.3 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
E456 Terminology Relating to Quality and Statistics
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
E2935 Practice for Conducting Equivalence Testing in
Laboratory Applications
2.2 ISO Standard:
ISO 16152 Plastics—Determination of Xylene Solubles of
Polypropylene3
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic Materi-
als.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2017. Published August 2017. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5492 - 10. DOI:
10.1520/D5492-17.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
3
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 For definitions of plastic terms see Terminology D883
and for abbreviations see Terminology D1600.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 soluble-fraction (SS)—the percentage of the polymer
mass that does not precipitate out when the polymer solution is
cooled from reflux temperature to +25 6 0.5°C and held at that
temperature for a specified period of time.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 A weighed amount of sample is dissolved in xylene
under reflux conditions. The solution is cooled under con-
trolled conditions and maintained at a +25°C equilibrium
temperature so that the crystallization of the insoluble fraction
takes place. When the solution is cooled the insoluble portion
precipitates and is isolated by filtration. The xylene is evapo-
rated from the filtrate, leaving the soluble fraction in the
residue. The percentage of this fraction in the plastic is
determined gravimetrically.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The results of this test provide a relative measure of the
total soluble fraction of polypropylene homopolymers and
copolymers. The soluble fraction approximately correlates to
the amorphous fraction in the polypropylene. Xylene is widely
used for determining the soluble fraction in polypropylene as it
is more specific to the atactic fraction than other solvents. The
concentration of a soluble fraction obtained with a specific
solvent has been found to relate closely to the performance
characteristics of a product in certain applications, for example
film and fiber. Data obtained by one solvent and at one
precipitation time cannot be compared with data obtained by
another solvent or precipitation time, respectively.
6. Interferences
6.1 It is possible that materials with solubilities similar to
the soluble fraction, such as additives, can interfere with the
measurement of solubles. When present in concentrations that
are judged to impart a significant error to the soluble-fraction
data, the level of interference must be determined and correc-
tions made.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5492 − 17
6.2 It is possible that small-particle fillers and pigments and
insoluble gels present in the polymer can pass through the filter
and cause errors in the measurement.
6.3 The polymer flakes and spheres must be dried before
testing to eliminate moisture that can influence the initial
weight of sample added to the flask.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Reflux-Condenser Apparatus, minimum 400 mL, with
24/40 glass joint.
7.1.1 The use a teflon seal sleeve around the glass joint is an
acceptable option provided it has been determined that com-
ponents from the sleeve or tape are not extracted by the xylene.
7.1.2 The use of silicone greases or other greases shall be
avoided.
7.2 Flat- or Round-Bottom Boiling Flask, with one or two
necks, minimum 400 mL with 24/40 joint, Erlenmeyer flask, or
flat-bottomed cylindrical bottle.
7.3 Insulation Disk, made of fiberglass or rock wool.
7.4 Electromagnetic Stirrer Unit, with temperature-
controlled heating plate, oil bath, heater block, or heating
mantle capable of maintaining 145 to 150°C.
7.5 Stirring Bar.
7.6 Pipet, Class A, 200 mL or equivalent.
7.7 Pipet, Class A, 100 mL or equivalent.
7.8 Glass-Stoppered Volumetric Flask, 250 mL.
7.9 Thermostatically Controlled Water Bath, at +25 6
0.5°C.
7.10 Electromagnetic Stirrers.
7.11 Filter Paper, fluted, Whatman No. 4, No. 541,4 or
equivalent, at least 125 mm in diameter.
7.12 Funnel, 60°, or equivalent, at least 125 mm in diam-
eter.
7.13 Heated Vacuum Oven.
7.14 Aluminum or stainless steel pans or beaker at a
minimum 125 mL capacity, but not larger than 300 mL, with
smooth sides or other suitable container of similar design.
7.15 Temperature-Controlled Heating Plate.
7.16 Analytical Balance, with minimum weighing sensitiv-
ity to 0.0001 g (a sensitivity of 0.00001 g is preferred).
7.17 Desiccator, containing appropriate desiccant.
7.18 Timer, preferably with an alarm, in minutes.
7.19 Oven, conventional forced air or gravity.
4
The sole sources of supply (EU/U.S.) of the apparatus known to the committee
at this time are Whatman Int’l. Ltd., Maidstone, England or from Fisher Scientific,
711 Forbes Ave., Pittsburgh, PA 15219. If you are aware of alternative suppliers,
please provide this information to ASTM International Headquarters. Your com-
ments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible technical
committee,1 which you may attend.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8. Reagents
8.1 Reagent-Grade Ortho-Xylene (o-Xylene)—Assay gas
chromatography (GC) = 98 % min; less than 2 % ethylbenzene
as established by GC; evaporation residue at 140°C less than
0.002 g/100 mL; boiling point 144°C.
8.2 Reagent-Grade Para-Xylene (p-Xylene)—Assay gas
chromatography (GC) = 98 % min; less than 2 % ethyl-
benzene as established by GC, evaporation residue at 140°C
less than 0.002 g/100 mL; boiling point 138°C.
NOTE 2—Mixed xylene may be used within a laboratory if the ratio of
para-xylene to ortho-xylene remains constant and the level of ethyl-
benzene is less than 2 %.
8.3 Reagent grade ortho-xylene shall be used as the refer-
ence solvent whenever there is a dispute between laboratories
on test results, unless the laboratories agree otherwise.
9. Reagent and Specimen Preparation
9.1 Preparation of the Xylene:
9.1.1 Stabilization of the xylene is not required.
NOTE 3—When testing non-stabilized polypropylene powders, (that is,
unstabilized reactor products) it is recommended that antioxidants be
added to prevent degradation. This addition is optional if previous testing
has shown there is no significant change in xylene soluble level.
NOTE 4—Butylated hydroxyl toluene (BHT), 4,4 thiobis (6-tert-butyl-
m-cresol), or tetrakis (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamate) meth-
ane at an approximate concentration of 0.02 g/L of xylene have been
found to be effective stabilizers. Agitate with a magnetic stirring bar and
heat for a minimum of one hour at 80°C to 90°C to ensure the thorough
mixing of the antioxidants and the xylene. This is a suitable heating
temperature for BHT, which is highly volatile.
9.1.2 Degas the xylene. Using nitrogen gas, purge the
xylene for a minimum of 1 h every 24 h.
9.2 Determine the Level of Contamination in the Xylene
(Solvent Blank):
9.2.1 The purpose of the solvent blank is to determine
whether the xylene to be used contains significant amounts of
evaporation residue or foreign components. A solvent-blank
test for residue shall be run on every new lot of xylene. Test
and average the solvent-blank results, for three aliquots per
bottle or lot of xylene. Each aliquot shall be 200 mL.
9.2.2 If the xylene is an extra pure grade (minimum 99.5 %)
and is used within three days after being opened, the determi-
nation of the blank is not required. If used more than three days
after being opened, a solvent blank must be run.
NOTE 5—It is recommended that xylene be purchased in glass or
glass-lined containers and of a size such that the xylene is used within
three days, once opened. Containers of larger size may be used if the
xylene is used up within a short period of time. The purpose of the short
time period is to ensure purity and minimize moisture pickup and other
contaminants.
9.2.3 Pipet 200 mL of unstabilized or stabilized xylene into
a clean empty flask.
9.2.4 Place a 125-mm diameter or larger No. 4 filter paper
or equivalent in a 125-mm diameter of larger funnel in a funnel
rack over a 250-mL glass-stoppered flask.
9.2.5 For each sample blank, pour the contents from the
flask into a funnel and allow the filtrate to drip into a second
flask. Continue the filtration until all the filtrate has been
collected.
 D5492 − 17
TABLE 1 Sample Size
Expected Solubles Initial Sample Mass, gA
<8 % by mass 4.0000 ± 0.1000 or 2.000 ± 0.1000
8.0 to 30.0 % by mass 2.0000 ± 0.1000
>30.0 % by mass 2.0000 ± 0.1000 or 1.0000 ± 0.1000
A
See 10.2.

9.2.6 Dry the aluminum or stainless steel vessel (or other

suitable container) for 30 min in an oven at 200°C. Cool the
pans in a desiccator until ready to use. For each sample weigh
a clean, dry vessel on the analytical balance to the nearest
0.0001 g.
9.2.7 With a Class A pipet, pipet a 100-mL aliquot of the
filtered xylene into the weighed vessel.
9.2.8 Place the vessel on a temperature-controlled heating
plate maintained at 145 to 150°C. Allow the aliquot to obtain
a rolling boil to prevent splashing. Blanket the pan with a slow
stream of nitrogen. Continue heating the vessel until the
residue in the dish is almost dry.
9.2.9 Place the vessel into a vacuum oven at 100 6 10°C at
a pressure less than 13-13.5 kPa for a known suitable time
where constant weight is observed.
9.2.10 Cool the vessel to room temperature in a desiccator
for a minimum of 15 minutes and weigh the pan to the nearest
0.0001 g. Calculate the average blank-residual mass of the
three determinations.
9.3 Determine the Percent Soluble Fraction in the Polymer: FIG. 1 Equipment Setup
9.3.1 Dry polypropylene reactor powder before analysis. If
pellets or other large particles are used, drying is not necessary
unless it is known that they contain high levels of moisture. If 10.5 Place an insulation disk on top of the electromagnetic
necessary, dry the samples in a vacuum oven at 70 6 5°C, at a stirrer plate to prevent localized heating of the flask. Position
pressure range of 13-13.5 kPa for a minimum of 20 min. Cool the flask and condenser system on top of the insulation disk
the sample in a desiccator to prevent moisture pickup. (see Fig. 1, which shows a flat-bottom boiling and Erlenmeyer
NOTE 6—For large pellets or other large particles where there is concern flask). Position the nitrogen inlet tube in the top of the
that the polymer sample will not dissolve in a reasonable time frame, grind condenser. Turn on the cooling water to the condenser.
the pellets or particles to an appropriate size to afford a faster dissolution.
Avoid subjecting the sample to excessive mechanical shear, which can 10.6 Blanket the contents of the boiling flask with a slow
lead to an increase in residual solubles level. Ground material shall be flow of nitrogen directed across the top of the condenser, not
dried as specified in 9.3.1. directly into the condenser, to minimize possible xylene loss.
Nitrogen flow rate shall be approximately 2 L/h. Ensure that
10. Procedure nitrogen and water is flowing in the condenser with the aid of
10.1 Weigh out a sample in accordance with Table 1. When bubblers or indicator devices to ensure flow.
the expected solubles level is unknown or referee testing 10.7 Heat the polymer/xylene mixture to reflux temperature
between laboratories is being conducted, a 2.0 6 0.1 g sample while vigorously stirring. The stirring shall be vigorous enough
shall be used, unless there is agreement between the laborato- to obtain a deep vortex, which keeps the boiling under control
ries to use a different sample size. Determine the mass of the and prevents boiling up into the condenser. Ensure that the
sample to the nearest 0.0001 g. Pour the sample into a reflux is gentle so that localized burning, splashing, and
flat-bottom boiling flask. Place a magnetic stirring bar in the sticking of the polymer to the flask walls does not occur.
flask.
10.8 Once the reflux temperature is reached, stir the solution
10.2 Table 1 provides a choice of sample mass. Use the for an additional 30 min. The liquid will appear water-clear.
largest sample mass possible to minimize variability of the test
NOTE 7—For some polymers the total dissolution time can be longer
data, unless from prior experience it is known that the than 30 min for the liquid to appear water-clear.
polymer/xylene solution does not filter readily as in 10.15.
10.9 Remove the heating plate from beneath the flask.
10.3 Pipet 200 mL of unstabilized or stabilized xylene into Detach the flask from the condenser and lightly stopper the
the flask. flask. Cool the solution temperature from reflux temperature to
10.4 Attach the flask to the condenser. below 100°C by cooling the flask in air for 12 to 14 min. A

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5492 − 17
timer, preferably with an alarm, must be used to ensure that the
solution is cooled to within a narrow range of temperature from
run to run.
10.10 Transfer the flask to a thermostatically controlled
water bath at 25 6 0.5°C. Do not shake the flask to break up
any precipitate before immersing the flask in the bath.
10.11 The water bath shall have sufficient cooling capacity
to maintain a constant temperature of 25 6 0.5°C during
cooling.
NOTE 8—Do not shake the flask while the xylene-polymer solution is
still hot as this may create a safety hazard.
NOTE 9—Because the rate of cooling affects the crystal size and the rate
of crystallization, the time and temperature during the cooling steps are
very critical to the final test result.
10.12 Precipitation Time:
10.13 Without stirring, cool the solution for 30 min in the
temperature-controlled bath at 25 6 0.5°C. Using a timer,
preferably with an alarm, to ensure that the solution-
precipitation time ranges from 30 to 32 min. Remove the flask
from the temperature-controlled bath. Stir or gently shake the
flask to break up any precipitated-polymer gel.
NOTE 10—Shorter precipitation times (for example, comparing 30
minutes versus 60 minutes or longer) lead to higher values of soluble
content for propylene plastics. Users of this method should be warned that
product specification ranges may need to be adjusted in order to
compensate for these differences.
NOTE 11—With the shorter 30 minute precipitation time, a true
equilibrium will not be reached. Consequently, it is very critical that both
the precipitation time and cooling temperature be controlled very precisely
to minimize variance.
10.14 Place a 125-mm diameter or larger No. 4 filter paper
or equivalent in a 125-mm diameter or larger funnel in a funnel
rack over a 250-mL glass-stoppered flask.
10.15 For each sample, pour the contents from the flask into
a funnel and allow the filtrate to drip into the second flask.
NOTE 12—With some materials that may have been compounded with
filler or rubber, it may be extremely difficult to do the filtration because of
clogging of the filter paper. In this case, a filter cloth may be used to
remove the large particles of the filler or the precipitate.
10.16 Continue the filtration until all the filtrate has been
collected. If the filtered solution is not completely clear it will
be necessary to repeat the filtration.
10.17 Dry the aluminum pans (or other suitable container
(refer to 7.14)) for 30 min in an oven at 200°C. Cool the pans
in a desiccator until ready for use. For each sample weigh a
clean, dry pan on the analytical balance to the nearest 0.0001
g.
NOTE 13—It has been shown that other types of containers, including
those made with stainless steel can be used by a laboratory.
10.18 Aluminum pans shall be used in the case of referee
testing.
10.19 With the clean Class A pipet, pipet a 100-mL aliquot
of the soluble filtrate into the weighed pan.
NOTE 14—Smaller aliquots can be used within the laboratory with the
understanding that the repeatability may be different.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
10.20 A 100-mL aliquot shall be used in the case of referee
testing.
10.21 Place the pan on a temperature-controlled hot plate
maintained at 140 to 150°C. Allow the aliquot to obtain a
rolling boil to prevent splashing. Blanket the pan with a slow
stream of nitrogen. Continue heating the pan until the residue
in the dish is almost dry. Do not dry completely as this can
result in degradation of the residue.
NOTE 15—Degradation or charring of the sample can lead to inaccurate
results.
NOTE 16—Other methods of drying can be used if it has been shown
that they provide equivalent results to the hot plate method (for example,
steam bath drying or vacuum oven).
10.22 Place the pan in a vacuum oven at 100 6 10°C at a
pressure less than 13.3 kPa for a known suitable time where a
constant weight is achieved.
10.23 Cool the pan to room temperature in a desiccator and
weigh the pan to the nearest 0.0001 g.
10.24 Obtain the mass of the soluble fraction by subtracting
the mass of the pan from the residue-and-pan mass. Adjust the
final percent-soluble-fraction data to account for the percent
residual contamination from xylene.
11. Calculation
11.1 Calculate the mass percent of the soluble fraction by
use of the following equation:
S s 5 ~~ V bo/V b1 3 ~ W 2 2 W 1 ! 2 V bo/V b2 3 B ! /W o ! 3 100
where:
SS = soluble fraction of sample, %,
Vbo = original volume of solvent, mL,
Vb1 = volume of aliquot used for solubles determination,
mL,
Vb2 = volume of aliquot used for blank residuals, mL,
W2 = mass of pan and solubles, g,
W1 = mass of pan, g,
W0 = mass of original sample, g, and
B = average blank residual, g.
11.2 Materials, such as additives, with solubilities similar to
the soluble-polymer fraction interfere in the measurement of
percent solubility. Corrections are made to the percent soluble
fraction only if the material is present in concentrations that are
judged to impart a significant error on the soluble-fraction data.
The material(s) must be 100 % soluble and the mass percent of
the material present in the polymer must be known for the
following correction to be made:
Sc 5 Ss 2 Sm
where:
Sc = corrected soluble fraction of sample, %,
Ss = soluble fraction of sample, %, and
 D5492 − 17

Sm = contamination from materials added to polymer, %, TABLE 2 Xylene Solubles by the 60-Minute Precipitation Method
for Seven Laboratories and Five Materials
where Sm is the sum of the percent for each of the
Values Expressed in %
additives in the material formulation known to be Material
Average SrA SRB rC RD
100 % soluble.
PP 3.58 0.202 0.408 0.565 1.14
PP 5.62 0.490 0.729 1.37 2.04
12. Report PP 6.87 0.230 0.715 0.644 2.00
PP 15.0 0.354 0.799 0.993 2.24
12.1 Report the following information: PP 22.3 1.22 1.63 3.42 4.56
12.1.1 Sample identification and other pertinent A
Sr is the within-laboratory standard deviation for the indicated material. It is
information, obtained by pooling the within-laboratory standard deviations of the test results
12.1.2 Type and grade of xylene, from all of the participating laboratories.
B
12.1.3 Initial sample mass added to flask, Sr = [[s1)2 + (s2)2 +. . . . . . . . . + (sn) 2]/n]1/2
SR is the between-laboratories reproducibility, expressed as standard
12.1.4 Volume of aliquot used, and deviation.
12.1.5 Percent-soluble fraction. (If the data is adjusted for C
SR = [Sr2 + SL2]1/2, whereSL is the standard deviation of laboratory means.
r is the within-laboratory critical interval between two test results = 2.8 × Sr .
soluble additives, report corrected-percent-solubles fraction, D
R is the between-laboratories critical interval between two test results = 2.8 × SR
percent-solubles fraction, and percent contamination. Report .
values to three significant figures.)

13. Precision and Bias
5 13.2.3 then would be valid for such data.)
13.1 Tables are based on a round robin tests conducted in
1996 in accordance with Practice E691, involving five mate-
rials tested by seven laboratories. One laboratory distributed
the five commercial polypropylene formulations chosen for the
evaluation. The individual specimens were prepared at the
laboratories that tested them. All pellet samples were extracted
using a 60-minute precipitation time. Each test result was an
individual determination. Each laboratory obtained two test
results for each material. Results for the 60-minute precipita-
tion time are listed in Table 2. These results shall only be used
as a guideline until a new round robin study can be completed
using the 30-minute precipitation time. (Warning—The fol-
lowing explanation for r and R (13.2 through 13.2.3) only are
intended to present a meaningful way of considering the
approximate precision of this test method. Do not apply the
data in Table 2 to acceptance or rejection of material, as these
data apply only to materials tested in the round robin and are
unlikely to be rigorously representative of the other lots,
formulations, conditions, material, or laboratories. Users of this
test method shall apply the principles outlined in Practice E691
to generate data specific to their materials and laboratory, or
between specific laboratories. The principles of 13.2 through
13.2 Concept of “r” and “R” in Table 2—If Sr and SR have
been calculated from a large enough body of data, and for test
results from testing one specimen for each test result, then
perform the test as follows:
13.2.1 Repeatability—“r” the value below which the abso-
lute difference between two individual test results obtained
under repeatability conditions are expected to occur with a
probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
13.2.2 Reproducibility—“R” the value below which the
absolute difference between two individual test results obtained
under reproducibility conditions are to be expected to occur
with a probability of approximately 0.95 (95 %).
13.2.3 Inferences about equivalence from applying esti-
mates based only on variability are likely conservative and can
lead to incorrect decisions being made. Equivalence testing in
ASTM standards is covered by ASTM E2935. These terms and
definitions come from E456 on statistical terminology.
Alternatively, it’s permissible to use an appropriate test for two
means.
13.3 There are no recognized standards by which to esti-
mate bias of this test method.

5
14. Keywords
Supporting data are available from ASTM Headquarters. Request RR:D20-
1199. 14.1 plastics; polypropylene; xylene solubles

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5492 − 17
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue, D5492 - 10,
that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2017)

(1) Technical additions incorporated and modifications made to (4) Subsections 13.2.1 and 13.2.2 revised definitions of repeat-
Sections 7 (Apparatus), 9 (Reagent and sample preparation- ability and reproducibility.
modified), 10 (Procedure-modified). (5) Notes 8 and 16 added.
(2) Editorial and permissive language changes. (6) Added reference of ASTM E456 and E2935 into the
(3) Subsections 7.1 and 7.2 revised to expand and explain referenced document section.
incorporation of the optional Teflon sleeves and the non-use of
silicon grease.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:52 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5507 − 99 (Reapproved 2012)

Standard Test Method for

Determination of Trace Organic Impurities in Monomer
Grade Vinyl Chloride by Capillary Column/Multidimensional
Gas Chromatography1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5507; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope valve or alternately as an expanded gas. An appropriate volume

1.1 This is a general-purpose capillary-based test method
for the determination of trace level impurities in high-purity
vinyl chloride. This test method uses serially coupled capillary
PLOT columns in conjunction with the multidimensional
techniques of column switching and cryogenic trapping to
permit the complete separation of the 11 key vinyl chloride
impurities in a single 25-min run.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific hazards
statements are given in Section 8.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
F307 Practice for Sampling Pressurized Gas for Gas Analy-
sis
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Terminology is in accordance with Termi-
nologies D883 and D1600 unless otherwise indicated.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The liquid vinyl chloride sample or calibration standard
is injected either directly using a high-pressure liquid sampling
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
Current edition approved Oct. 10, 2012. Published November 2012. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2008 as D5507 - 99 (2008)ε1.
DOI: 10.1520/D5507-99R12.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
of the liquid or gas sample is injected to enable the required
detection limits to be achieved. A preliminary GC separation is
achieved on a 6-m pre-column, the purpose of which is to
remove the bulk of the vinyl chloride peak from the trace peaks
of interest. Two heart-cut transfers are made from this pre-
column separation, which sends selected portions to a second
column for additional separation. These two cuts incorporate
10 of the 11 trace impurities of interest, but they exclude 1,2
ethylene dichloride and the bulk of the vinyl chloride peak. The
1,2 EDC peak is eluted from the 6-m pre-column and detected
at the first FID after the two cuts are made.
4.2 The components eluting to the two FID detectors are
identified and quantitated by comparing their retention times
and area counts to those obtained previously from a calibration
standard run under identical conditions.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 The multidimensional approach permits all of the trace
impurities to be well separated from the main vinyl chloride
peak, thereby improving quantitative accuracy over established
packed column methods.
5.2 The minimum detection limit (MDL) for all components
of interest has been shown to be well below 500 ppb for this
test method.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Instrumentation:
6.1.1 HP 5890A3,4(or equivalent), equipped as follows:
6.1.1.1 Split/Splitless Injector System—Must be demon-
strated to be free of discrimination effects induced by vapor
viscosity differences if helium- or nitrogen-based gas standards
are to be used for instrument calibration.
6.1.1.2 Dual Flame-Ionization Detectors.
3
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time
is Hewlett-Packard Co., 3495 Deer Creek Road, Palo Alto, California 94304.
4
If you are aware of alternative suppliers, please provide this information to
ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consider-
ation at a meeting of the responsible technical committee,1 which you may attend.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5507 − 99 (2012)
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Helium—Carrier gas, zero grade, high quality. Traps
should be placed in the supply lines leading to the gas
chromatograph. These traps should reduce oxygen, moisture,
and hydrocarbons to the lowest possible levels.
7.2 Hydrogen—Flame gas, high-purity (hydrocarbon free).
7.3 Air—Flame gas, high-purity (hydrocarbon free).
7.4 Liquid CO2—Coolant, bone-dry grade, liquid-delivery,
1200-psi helium pad recommended.
7.5 Standards:
7.5.1 Primary Standard—The primary standard is a certified
reference standard, which is blended into a stable nitrogen or
helium matrix. The component concentrations should be pre-
pared and reported on an as-in-vinyl chloride basis. The
concentrations of the various components in this standard
should also represent typical values expected for the particular
process or sample. The following is a typical calibration
standard composition:
FIG. 1 Procedure B: On-Line Vaporization Using the LPG Vapor- Component Mole, ppm Weight, ppm
izing Injector
Ethylene 29.4 13.2
Propylene 20.0 13.5
Acetylene 6.8 2.8
6.1.1.3 Column Switching Device A pneumatics control Butane-1 6.8 6.1
system, available from Scientific Glass Engineering, Inc.,4,5 or Trans-butene-2 7.1 6.4
Cis-butene-2 7.5 6.7
equivalent. 1,3 butadiene 6.5 5.6
6.1.1.4 Sub-Ambient Oven Temperature Control (optional). Methyl chloride 36.8 29.7
6.1.1.5 LPG Vaporizing Injector, available from Microana- Vinyl acetylene 12.2 10.2
Ethyl chloride 15.9 16.4
lytics Instrumentation,4,6 or equivalent (Fig. 1). 1,2 ethylene dichloride 11.8 18.7
6.2 Data System—Dual HP 3396A Integrators3,4 (or equiva- Nitrogen balance

lent) permit the acquisition, storage, and reduction of the
output signals from the two FIDs simultaneously. After the
initial method development, however, it is possible to consoli-
date the output to a single integrator using the instruments
signal switching capability.
6.3 Columns:
6.3.1 Pre-Column—100 cm of 0.20-mm inside diameter
fused silica fixed restrictor coupled to the front of a 6 m by
0.53-mm inside diameter GSQTM available from J & W
Scientific4,7 (or equivalent).
6.3.2 Analytical Column—9 m by 0.53-mm inside diameter
GSQTM available from J & W Scientific4,7 (or equivalent) plus
25 m by 0.53 mm inside diameter PORAPLOT UTM
Chrompack4,8 (or equivalent).
6.4 Syringes—A range of high-quality gas-tight syringes
representing volumes from 0.5 to 25 mL should be available.
These syringes should be equipped with PTFE-tipped plunger
seals and on and off syringe valves to prevent the loss of gas
sample.
7.5.2 Secondary Standard—The secondary standard is a
vinyl chloride-based blend, which is used for method setup and
day-to-day method calibration. This standard is prepared from
actual vinyl chloride product, which is spiked where appropri-
ate to yield the approximate levels represented in the nitrogen-
based primary standard. The final concentrations should be
determined by averaging the results from multiple runs, which
are referenced to the primary standard. This calibration/
recalibration process may be conducted using an alternate GC
procedure.
8. Hazards
8.1 Appropriate caution must be exercised in handling the
sample due to the suspected carcinogenicity of vinyl chloride.
Any excess of sample beyond that actually injected into the
column should be routed to a purge waste line to be passed to
a vent hood or other suitable disposal location. This excess
sample includes the inlet splitter vent flow and the sample-loop
purge flow in the case in which a gas-valve injection is being
made.

5
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time 9. Sampling
is Scientific Glass Engineering 2007 Kramer Lane, Austin, Texas 78758.
6
9.1 This section is to be followed for all samples, including
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time
is Microanalytics Instrumentation, 2713 Sam Bass Rd., Round Rock, TX 78681. unknown samples and the synthetic standards.
7
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time
9.2 Samples should be supplied to the laboratory in high-
is J & W Scientific, 91 Blue Ravine Road, Folsom, California 95630-4714.
8
The sole source of supply of the apparatus known to the committee at this time pressure sample cylinders, obtained using the procedure de-
is Chrompack Inc., 1130 Route 202, Raritan, NJ 08869. scribed in Practice F307 or similar standards.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5507 − 99 (2012)
FIG. 2 Procedure A: Off-Line Vaporization
9.3 Place the cylinder in a horizontal position in a safe place
such as a hood. Check to see that the container is at least
one-half full by opening the valve slightly. The container is at
least one-half full if liquid is emitted (a white cloud of vapors).
Do not analyze any samples or use any synthetic standard if the
liquid in the container is below this amount.
9.4 Place the cylinder in a vertical position and repressure to
1.208 MPa (175 psig) with the chromatographic carrier or
equivalent inert gas through the valve at the top of the cylinder,
ensuring that no air enters during the operation.
9.5 Use either of the following two procedures for obtaining
a sample from the container:
9.5.1 Liquid Sample—Connect the cylinder to the liquid
valve on the chromatograph using a minimum length of
connecting tubing, so that sample is withdrawn from the
bottom of the cylinder and a liquid sample is obtained. The
liquid valve on the chromatograph must be designed in such a
manner that full sample pressure can be maintained through the
valve without leaking and that means are provided for trapping
a liquid sample in the chromatograph valve under static flow
conditions. With the exit of the chromatograph valve closed,
open the valve on the cylinder. Open the exit from the
chromatograph valve slowly so that liquid flows through the
connecting line and valve. Close the exits so that the liquid
sample is trapped in the valve. Perform the necessary opera-
tions to introduce the liquid sample into the chromatograph
column.
9.5.2 Vaporized Sample:
9.5.2.1 Procedure A—Off-Line Vaporization:
(1) Assemble the apparatus in a manner similar to that
illustrated in Fig. 2. Disconnect the 1700-cm3 cylinder at E and
evacuate. Close Valve B and open Valves C and D, allowing
the liquid sample to flow into the small cylinder. Open Valve B
slowly and allow the sample to flow through until a steady slow
stream of liquid emerges from B. Close Valves B, C, and D in
that order, trapping a portion of the liquid sample in the pipe
cylinder. Attach the evacuated cylinder (1700-cm3 volume) at
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
E. Open Valve A and then Valve B. The liquid will expand,
filling the larger cylinder. Close Valve A and disconnect at E.
NOTE 2—To prevent possible rupture of the liquid-filled pipe cylinder,
the sample cylinder and its contents should be at room temperature prior
to sampling, and the liquid should be allowed to remain in the pipe
cylinder for only a minimum of time.
(2) Connect the cylinder containing the vaporized sample to
the chromatograph gas valve. Evacuate the sample loop and the
lines up to the sample cylinder. Close the valve to the vacuum
source and allow the sample loop to fill with sample up to
atmospheric pressure. Repeat the evacuation and filling of the
sample loop with vaporized sample. Turn the valve so that the
vaporized sample is displaced with carrier gas into the chro-
matograph.
9.5.2.2 Procedure B—On-line vaporization using the LPG
Vaporizing Injector (or equivalent). An alternate approach that
has been used successfully for the automated on-line LPG to
vapor conversion and sample introduction is shown in Fig. 1.
The vapor injection occurs in the upper half of this assembly
labeled “hot zone.” The automated injection process proceeds
as follows:
(1) The lower valve of the sample cylinder is opened to
permit the flow of liquid to the fixed restricter (35 to 45-µm
pinpoint restriction or equivalent).
(2) The constant-pressure force above the liquid drives
liquid across the fixed restrictor at a constant rate.
(3) The vapor formed in the heated vaporizer tube is mixed
prior to passing through the block out valve and on through the
sample loop to vent.
(4) The sample loop purge is permitted to proceed for a
fixed period of time that is sufficient to ensure a complete purge
of the loop volume.
(5) The block out valve automatically shuts off the flow of
vapor to the sample loop after the sample-loop purge period.
(6) A short delay period is permitted after sample block out
and before sample injection. This delay ensures that the sample
loop is permitted to decay back to atmospheric pressure.
(7) The gas sampling valve is then actuated to inject the
sample loop contents into the flowing carrier gas stream and
simultaneously begin the GC run.
10. Preparation of Apparatus
10.1 The column/transfer tube combination is installed as
outlined in the schematic shown in Fig. 3 (by-pass operation)
and Fig. 4 (heart-cut operation).
10.2 Initial Instrument Parameters:
10.2.1 Columns:
10.2.1.1 Pre-Column—100 cm of 0.20-mm inside diameter
fused silica fixed restrictor coupled to the front of a 6 m by
0.53-mm inside diameter GCQTM available from J & W
Scientific4,7 (or equivalent).
10.2.1.2 Analytical Column—9 m by 0.53-mm inside diam-
eter GSQTM plus 25 m by 0.53 mm inside diameter PORA-
PLOT UTM (Chrompack).
10.2.2 Injection Mode—Split.
10.2.3 Split Ratio—At 1:1.
10.2.4 Split Volume—At 15 mL/min.
10.2.5 Injection Volume—At 1.00 mL.
 D5507 − 99 (2012)
10.3.1 Equilibrate the GC oven for isothermal operation at
150°C.
10.3.2 With the system operated in the monitor mode (that
is, heart-cut valve open and plunger up), a series of 1.0-mL gas
injections are made with a sample of high-purity vinyl chlo-
ride. The outputs from both detectors should be observed while
these test probes are being made.
10.3.3 When the mid-point pressure is set below the balance
point, splitting of the test peak will occur at the mid-point
restrictor, and responses will be recorded from both detectors.
10.3.4 The mid-point pressure is increased slightly after
each such injection until the pressure differential is reached, at
which the test peak is absent (or acceptably small) from the
second detector. This is the correct pressure differential for
normal heart-cut and back flush operations.
FIG. 3 By-Pass Operation
10.3.5 This pressure tuning process should be required only
once for any combination of columns and restrictors.
10.4 Establishing Column Switching Parameters—The
heart-cut and cold-trap times in the instrument parameters (see
10.2) can be used as a general guideline or can be developed
from the following procedure:
10.4.1 The process of establishing the heart-cut times for
this procedure is begun by determining retention times for the
pre-column separation only. This is accomplished by holding
the system in the monitor mode while the first complete run is
made with the secondary standard. A sample volume of 1.0 to
1.25 mL should be used for this and all subsequent injections.
10.4.2 The retention times from this first run are then used
to determine the approximate start and stop times required for
heart-cut No. 1. This cut should include all of the trace
impurities, which elute prior to the vinyl chloride peak (that is,
FIG. 4 Heart-Cut Operation ethane, ethylene, acetylene, propylene, and methyl chloride).
The best results are achieved in practice if the first cut is
10.2.6 Injection Temperature—180°C. terminated just into the front edge of the large vinyl chloride
10.2.7 Detector Temperature—240°C. peak.
10.2.8 Column Temperature (Typical): 10.4.3 After the times are finalized for the first cut, the last
of those tuning runs is used to determine the appropriate times
Ramp 1 40°C initial, 3 min, 7°C/min, 100°C final, 2–min hold
Ramp 2 5°C/min, 135°C final, 0–min hold for heart-cut No. 2. This cut includes ethyl chloride and the C4
Ramp 3 15°C/min, 155°C final, 5-min hold unsaturates group (that is, cis-butene-2, trans-butene-2,
10.2.9 Carrier Gas: butene-1, 1,3-butadiene, and vinyl acetylene).
Pre-column pressure 82.8 kPa (12.0 psi) 10.4.4 The final step in establishing the MDGC parameters
Midpoint pressure 55.2 kPa (8.0 psi) is to select the on and off times for the LCO2 cold trap
10.2.10 Detectors: operation. These times will be selected on the basis of the start
Monitor FID B—Signal 2
and stop cut times, which were determined for heart-cut No. 2.
Analytical FID A—Signal 1 The cold trap is turned on at 1.5 min prior to the start of cut No.
10.2.11 Instrument Gas Pressures: 2 and is turned off at 1.0 min after cut No. 2 is completed.
10.4.5 The system is ready for calibration and sample
helium 372.5 kPa (54 psi)
hydrogen 110.4 kPa (16 psi) analysis after the multidimensional parameters have been
air 220.7 kPa (32 psi) determined.
10.2.12 MDGC Event Times (Approximate):
Heart-cut No. 1 0 min 5 s to 4 min 0 s
11. Calibration and Standardization
Cold trap 7 min 0 s to 12 min 15 s 11.1 Initial Calibration—After the initial setup, it is recom-
Heart-cut No. 2 8 min 10 s to 11 min 0 s
mended that 5 to 7 replicate calibration runs be made in
10.2.13 Fixed Resistor—200-µm inside diameter deacti- succession with the secondary calibration standard. The results
vated fused silica 86 cm in length. from the first run should be discarded, and those from the
10.3 Pressure Balancing—The switching system is then remaining runs should be used for the determination of
adjusted to a pressure balanced condition using the following response factors, mean area counts, standard deviations, and
procedure: percent relative standard deviations for each of the trace

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5507 − 99 (2012)
components. If the variability is found to be within acceptable
limits (less than 3 % RSD for all components), the subsequent
sample analysis can be conducted. The average response factor
for each of the trace components is used for subsequent
calculation.
11.2 Continuing Calibration Check—Although the calibra-
tion results for this test method have proven to be very stable
over long periods of time (days to weeks), it is highly
recommended that an instrument-calibration check be made at
least once per day, and preferably once per shift. If the response
factor for any component is found to vary from the previous
calibration by a value greater than 5 %, it will be necessary to
re-run the calibration standard or locate the cause of the
variation, or both. If no mechanical problems are found (leaks,
etc.) to explain the variation and the system is found to be
functioning correctly otherwise, it will be necessary to adjust
the calibration to reflect the current level of detector response.
12. Procedure
12.1 Using the same conditions that were used in the
previous calibration runs, inject an identical volume of gas
from the vinyl chloride sample to be analyzed. Measure,
record, and store the retention time and area count data for each
of the components of interest. In order to ensure the accuracy
and reproducibility of the analysis, it is essential that good
laboratory procedures be followed when vaporizing the liquid
vinyl chloride and sampling the gas stream.
13. Calculation
13.1 Calculate the concentrations of each of the components
of interest using the following equation:
~ Ax!~ Qes!
Qx 5
~ Aes!
where:
Qx = concentration of the components in the vinyl chloride
sample,
Qes = concentration of the component in the calibration
standard,
Ax = integrated-area count for the component from the
sample run, and
Aes = integrated-area count for the component from the
standard run.
13.2 Alternately, an average response factor can be deter-
mined for each of the components from a series of calibration
runs. This factor can in turn be used as a multiplier for
calculating the concentrations from the subsequent sample
runs.
Qx 5 ~ Ax!~ Rf! (2)
where:
~ Qes!
Rf 5 (3)
~ Aes!
13.3 Any units can be used for area count concentration, but
the units selected must be consistent throughout.
14. Precision and Bias
14.1 Precision—The following precision data were devel-
oped within a single laboratory. Table 1 is the precision data for
four impurities that were measured by Procedure B. Each result
is an average of five or more independent tests made by a
single operator in the same laboratory.
14.2 This data is provided to give an operator a range of
values that could be expected using this test method. An
interlaboratory study of precision is being organized.
14.3 The concept of the r values (repeatability limits) in
Table 1 is as follows: when comparing two test results for the
same material, obtained by the same operator using the same
equipment on the same day, the two test results should be
judged not equivalent if they differ by more than the r value for
that material.
14.3.1 Any judgment in accordance with 14.3 would have
(1) an approximate 95 % (0.95) of being correct.
14.4 Bias—Bias is systematic error that contributes to the
difference between a test result and true (or reference) value.
There are no recognized standards on which to base an estimate
of bias for this test method.
15. Keywords
15.1 capillary-column chromatography; VCM impurities;
vinyl chloride monomer

TABLE 1 Single Laboratory and Single Operator Repeatability for Four Key Impurities Using Procedure B Vapor Injection
Retention Time (Short-Term) Quantitative (Short Term) Quantitative (Long Term)
(1 day—6 Sequential Runs) (1 day—6 Sequential Runs) (9 day—10 Sequential Runs)
Impurity
Mean, Mean, Mean,
Sr A rB Sr r Sr r
min ppm ppm
Methyl chloride 11.02 0.02 0.057 29.50 0.12 0.340 34.48 0.60 1.698
1,3 butadiene 17.48 0.01 0.028 2.75 0.02 0.057 3.27 0.06 0.170
Vinyl acetylene 17.86 0.01 0.028 5.23 0.03 0.085 10.09 0.14 0.396
Ethyl chloride 18.14 0.01 0.028 17.44 0.09 0.255 19.23 0.29 0.821
A
Sr = standard deviation.
B
r = 2.83 × Sr .

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5507 − 99 (2012)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:56 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5508 − 16

Standard Test Method for

Determination of Residual Acrylonitrile Monomer in Styrene-
Acrylonitrile Copolymer Resins and Nitrile-Butadiene
Rubber by Headspace-Capillary Gas Chromatography (HS-
CGC)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5508; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* the polymer, solvent, plus a known standard addition of

1.1 This test method covers the determination of the re-
sidual acrylonitrile (RAN) content in nitrile-butadiene rubbers
(NBR), styrene-acrylonitrile (SAN) copolymers, and rubber-
modified acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) resins.
1.2 Any components that can generate acrylonitrile in the
headspace procedure will constitute an interference. The pres-
ence of 3-hydroxypropionitrile in latices limits this procedure
to dry rubbers and resins.
1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use. Specific precau-
tionary statements are given in 6.3 and 6.4.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
E691 Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Study to
Determine the Precision of a Test Method
3. Summary of Test Method
3.1 Two dispersions (in o-dichlorobenzene) are prepared
and sealed in headspace vials for each polymer; one vial
contains the polymer in solvent while the second vial contains
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods and
Section D20.70.02 on Chromatography.
Current edition approved Sept. 1, 2016. Published September 2016. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2009 as D5508 - 94a(2009)ε1.
DOI: 10.1520/D5508-16.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
acrylonitrile (AN). Both vials are agitated for a specified time
under ambient conditions. After agitation, the vials are ther-
mally equilibrated in a constant-temperature bath.
3.2 After completion of the timed equilibration, an aliquot
of the heated headspace gas from each vial is injected into a
capillary gas-chromatographic column using an automated
injection system. The capillary column will provide the chro-
matographic resolution necessary to isolate the AN from other
volatiles potentially present. The AN response is measured
using a nitrogen-specific detector (NPD). The raw data signal
is converted to a relative RAN concentration through a
standard addition calculation.
4. Significance and Use
4.1 A measurement of the residual acrylonitrile in nitrile
rubbers (NBR), styrene-acrylonitrile copolymers or ABS ter-
polymers will determine the polymer’s suitability for various
applications.
4.2 Under optimum conditions, the minimum level of de-
tection of RAN in NBR, SAN, or ABS terpolymers is approxi-
mately 50 ppb.
5. Apparatus
5.1 Gas Chromatograph, equipped with a nitrogen-
phosphorus specific detector, backflush valve (see Fig. 1), split
injector, and capable of accepting megabore (0.53 mm inside
diameter) fused silica capillary columns. Detector make-up gas
is required.
NOTE 2—The use of a backflush configuration will provide for
operating advantages, but its use is optional. Chlorinated solvents quench
the alkali bead in a nitrogen-phosphorous detector, producing a loss of
signal. While the bead (signal) will recover as the solvent evacuates the
detector, repeated quenching during a multi-run sequence may produce
instabilities in the signal (and precision) over the sequence period.
5.2 Automated Headspace Sampler, shall have a thermost-
atted sample tray capable of 90°C heating with constant
heating times. Automated sampling of the headspace gas in the
sample vials via a heated, constant-volume sample loop or

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:58 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5508 − 16
FIG. 1 Configuration of Eight-Port Valve Backflush Assembly
pressure balancing sampling mechanism is required. Conduct
sampling to the gas chromatograph by means of a heated
transfer line of minimum dead volume.
5.3 Fused Silica Porous-Layer-Open-Tubular (PLOT) Cap-
illary Column, 30 m × 0.53 mm inside diameter.
NOTE 3—The column should be cut so as to have a 3 m section for the
pre-column (Column 1) and a 27-m section for the analytical column
(Column 2).
5.4 Variable Restrictor.
5.5 Data-Recording Device—A strip-chart recorder, record-
ing integrator, or computer-based data system is suitable.
5.6 Wrist-Action Shaker.
5.7 Analytical Balance, 0.1-mg readability.
5.8 Headspace Vials, 20-mL capacity.
5.9 Aluminum Crimp Caps, 20-mm diameter.
5.10 Septa, TFE-fluorocarbon-faced silicone construction,
20-mm diameter.
5.11 Crimper, for 20-mm crimp caps.
6. Reagents and Materials
6.1 Purity of Reagents—Chemicals of the highest purity
shall be used in all tests. Solvents shall have a minimum of
volatile impurities. Other grades shall only be used after
ascertaining that the reagent is free of interferences.
6.2 Observe all health and safety recommendations for each
chemical, as prescribed by the manufacturer.
6.3 Acrylonitrile, 99 + %. (Warning—Acrylonitrile is an
OSHA-regulated carcinogen and should not be released into
the laboratory atmosphere. All work involving acrylonitrile
should be carried out in a hood or with proper personal
protection to minimize human exposure.)
6.4 o-Dichlorobenzene. (Warning—o-Dichlorobenzene is
moderately toxic and should only be handled in a hood or with
proper personal protection to limit human exposure.)
NOTE 4—Each lot of o-dichlorobenzene should be analyzed under the
same instrumental conditions as the NBR samples to ensure that impuri-
ties are not present that will interfere with the acrylonitrile peak.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:58 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
7. Sampling and Storage
7.1 The polymer test unit (sample) submitted for analysis
shall be supplied in the form of a 13⁄4 in. (45 mm) cube.
7.2 All test specimens shall be taken from the interior of the
polymer-test unit to minimize the contribution of surface
effects on the residual-acrylonitrile level.
7.3 Keep all polymer-test units in sealed containers. Ana-
lyze test-specimen solutions immediately after preparation.
Report any analysis delays along with the test results.
8. Calibration
8.1 Preparation of External Standard Solutions:
8.1.1 Tare (to the nearest 0.1 mg) a 25-mL volumetric flask
containing 10 mL of o-dichlorobenzene (DCB).
8.1.2 Weigh (to the nearest 0.1 mg) into the 25-mL volu-
metric flask 40 6 5 mg of AN. Dilute to the mark with DCB.
Label this solution as the “external-standard master solution”.
8.1.3 Add 1 mL of the “external-standard master solution”
to a clean 10-mL volumetric flask containing 2 mL of DCB.
Dilute to the mark with additional DCB. Label this solution as
the “external-standard working solution”.
8.1.4 Prepare fresh “master” and “working” solutions each
week and keep refrigerated at 4°C using Parafilm “M” to seal
volumetric stoppers.
8.2 Generation of the External-Standard Calibration
Curve:
NOTE 5—A new external-standard calibration curve should be gener-
ated each week to account for any changes in the AN response due to NPD
bead fluctuations.
8.2.1 Transfer 5 mL of DCB into seven clean headspace
vials, using a volumetric pipet.
8.2.2 Add 0 (solvent blank), 1, 5, 10, 20, 60, or 100 µL of
the “external-standard working solution”, respectively, to the
vials.
8.2.3 Seal each vial immediately after addition with a
septum and crimp cap.
8.2.4 Establish the instrument parameters as listed in Annex
A1.
8.2.5 Obtain the peak-area values for AN in each of the
standards.
9. Procedure
9.1 Determine the Target AN Weight for Polymer Test Units:
9.1.1 Weigh (to the nearest 0.1 mg) into a clean headspace
vial 400 6 10 mg of polymer. Add 5 mL of DCB, using a
volumetric pipet. Seal vial with septum and crimp cap.
9.1.2 Place the vial on a wrist-action shaker, set at maxi-
mum agitation for 16 h under ambient conditions.
9.1.3 Analyze the sample under the same instrument param-
eters as was used to generate the external-standard calibration
curve.
9.1.4 Obtain the peak-area value for AN.
9.2 Preparation of AN Standard-Addition Solution:
NOTE 6—The following steps in preparing the AN standard addition
solution are given as an illustration only. Depending on the target weights
involved, the AN concentration of these solutions may need to be adjusted.
 D5508 − 16
9.2.1 Tare (to the nearest 0.1 mg) a 25-mL volumetric flask 10.1.1 Plot AN added (ng) versus AN peak area (seven data
containing 10 mL of DCB. points obtained from 8.2.5).
9.2.2 Weigh (to the nearest 0.1 mg) into the 25-mL volu- 10.1.2 Perform a linear regression on the data set. The
metric flask 165 6 10 mg of AN. Dilute to the mark with DCB. inverse of the slope, 1/slope, will be the AN-response factor
Label this solution as the “AN master solution”. with units of ng/unit area.
9.2.3 Add 50 µL of the “AN master solution” to a clean 10.2 Target AN weight:
10-mL volumetric flask containing 2 mL of DCB. Dilute to the 10.2.1 Calculate the target AN weight in ng for the polymer:
mark with DCB. Label this solution as the “AN working
solution”. This solution has an AN concentration of 33 ng/µL. TW, ~ ng! 5 A ~ sp! 3 RF (1)
9.2.4 Prepare fresh “master” and “working” solutions where:
weekly or as needed for varying target levels. Keep refrigerated A(sp) = peak area for AN in polymer test specimen (from
at 4°C using Parafilm “M” to seal volumetric stoppers. 9.1.4), and
9.3 Determination of the RAN Concentration: RF = external-response factor for AN from the external-
calibration curve in ng/unit area (from 10.1.2).
NOTE 7—At this point, it must be decided which type of determination
is required: (1) Linearity Test—Required for each different polymer type 10.3 RAN Concentration:
as it is encountered. Once the linearity of the standard addition has been 10.3.1 Linearity Test:
established it may be assumed valid for further analyses for that specific
10.3.1.1 Plot AN added (ng) versus AN peak area (eight
polymer type. (2) Precision Test—Required for each different polymer
type as it is encountered. Once the precision of the standard addition has data points obtained from 9.3.6) to obtain a curve as illustrated
been established it may be assumed valid for further analyses for that in Fig. 2.
specific polymer type. (3) Routine Test —Both linearity and precision 10.3.1.2 Perform a linear regression on the data set. The
have been established for the specific polymer type to be tested. Only a correlation coefficient will determine the degree of linearity for
routine RAN determination is required.
the specific polymer type. The absolute value of the x-intercept
9.3.1 Weigh (to the nearest 0.1 mg) into a clean headspace will give the weight of AN in the polymer.
vial 400 6 10 mg of polymer. Add 5 mL of DCB to the vial,
NOTE 9—The degree of linearity increases as the correlation coefficient
using a volumetric pipet. Loosely place the septum and crimp nears a value of 1.
cap on the vial. Do not seal at this time.
9.3.1.1 For a Linearity Test—Prepare eight vials with the 10.3.1.3 Calculate the RAN concentration for the polymer
identical weight (65 mg) of polymer in each vial. in parts per billion (ng/g):
9.3.1.2 For a Precision Test—Prepare a minimum of twelve
RAN, ~ ppb! 5
? x 2 intercept? (2)
vials with the identical weight (65 mg) of polymer in each W ~ sp!
vial.
where:
9.3.1.3 For a Routine Test—Prepare two vials per polymer
test specimen with the identical weight (65 mg) of polymer in |x − intercept| = absolute value of the x-intercept obtained
each vial. from the linear regression (nanograms), and
9.3.2 Add to each vial a volume of the “AN working W(sp) = weight (grams) of NBR (polymer).
solution,” resulting in a weight of AN based on the target
weight as specified below for each test.
9.3.2.1 For a Linearity Test—Add 0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, and
five times the target AN weight to the vials, respectively.
9.3.2.2 For a Precision Test—Make no addition to six vials
and an addition of three times the target AN weight to the other
six vials.
NOTE 8—This group of vials is to be run as six sets each containing one
from the null addition and three times the target weight. The pairing is
carried through the calculations.
9.3.2.3 For a Routine Test—Make no addition to one vial
and an addition of three times the target AN weight to the
remaining vial.
9.3.3 Seal vials with crimper (immediately after an addi-
tion).
9.3.4 Place the vials on a wrist-action shaker, set at maxi-
mum agitation for 16 h under ambient conditions.
9.3.5 Establish the instrument parameters as listed in Annex
A1.
9.3.6 Obtain the peak-area values for AN from each vial.
10. Calculations
FIG. 2 Plot of Detector Response Versus Nanograms Acryloni-
10.1 External-Standard-Calibration Curve: trile Added

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:58 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

10.3.2 Precision Test:
10.3.2.1 Plot AN added (ng) versus AN peak-area values for
the six pairs of data points obtained from 9.3.6. Six lines will
be plotted.
10.3.2.2 Perform a linear regression on each of the six pairs
of data points. Determine the x-intercept for each pair (six
values total).
10.3.2.3 Calculate the RAN concentration using each
x-intercept value. Refer to 10.3.1.3.
10.3.2.4 Calculate the mean for the six RAN values ob-
tained above. Determine the standard deviation (s) for the data
set. The precision will be expressed as the percent relative
standard deviation (%RSD).
s
%RSD 5 3 100
mean RAN value
10.3.3 Routine Test:
10.3.3.1 Plot AN added (ng) versus AN peak area values
(two points obtained from 9.3.6).
10.3.3.2 Perform a linear regression on the data set. The
absolute value of the x-intercept will be the weight (ng) of AN
in the polymer.
10.3.3.3 Calculate the RAN concentration for the polymer
in parts per billion (ng/g). Refer to 10.3.1.3.
11. Report
11.1 Report parts per billion (ng/g) residual acrylonitrile
monomer.
D5508 − 16
12.3 No valid statement of between-laboratories reproduc-
ibility is acceptable for data from less than six laboratories.
However, within-laboratory repeatability precision values are
shown in Table 1.
NOTE 11—Laboratories interested in performing between labs repro-
ducibility round-robin testing should contact ASTM headquarters.
12.3.1 The concept of the “r” and “(r)” values (repeatability
limits) in Table 1 is as follows: when comparing two test
results for the same material obtained by the same operator
using the same equipment on the same day, judge the two test
results as not equivalent if they differ by more than the “r” or
“(r)” value for that material.
12.3.2 Any judgement in accordance with 12.3.1 would
have an approximate 95 % (0.95) probability of being correct.
(3) 12.4 Bias—By definition, bias is a measure of the system-
atic error that contributes to the difference between the mean
value of the test-result population and an accepted reference or
true value. It is possible that one or more bias elements
contribute to the systematic error.
12.5 No statement of bias is made for this test method due
to the lack of an absolute method for comparison.
13. Keywords
13.1 headspace-gas chromatography; nitrile rubber; residual
acrylonitrile; styrene-acrylonitrile copolymers
TABLE 1 Type I—Precision (Residual Acrylonitrile in Nitrile-
Butadiene Rubber)
Within Laboratories
Material Mean, ppm
srA rB (r)C

12. Precision and Bias A 0.66 0.07 0.20 30.5

B 1.25 0.13 0.35 28.4
NOTE 10—Data were generated only for nitrile rubbers, although C 1.12 0.23 0.64 57.7
comparable repeatability can be expected for SAN and ABS resins. D 0.17 0.04 0.11 67.7
E 0.16 0.05 0.13 82.5
12.1 Precision statements were prepared in accordance with “A” 1.84 0.07 0.19 10.3
Practice E691. “B” 0.66 0.04 0.12 17.9
“C” 38.5 2.06 5.77 15.0
12.2 Ten materials (NBRs) of varying levels of the test “D” 10.8 0.73 2.04 18.9
“E” 1.25 0.12 0.34 27.3
component were used in the interlaboratory program. Materials
A
“A” through “E” were 30 to 37 % AN NBRs, and materials sr = Within-laboratory standard deviation.
B
r = Repeatability (in measurement units).
“A” through “E” were 40 to 48 % AN NBRs. Testing was C
(r) = Repeatability (in percent).
conducted in four laboratories.

ANNEX

(Mandatory Information)

A1. PARAMETERS FOR GAS CHROMATOGRAPH AND HEADSPACE SAMPLER

A1.1.4 Linear Flow Velocity—38 cm/s (at approximately

130°C).
A1.1 Gas Chromatograph Parameters:
A1.1.5 Oven Temperature Profile—Isothermal, 155°C.
A1.1.1 Injection Mode—Capillary, split.
A1.1.2 Injection Temperature—250°C. A1.1.6 Detector Type—Nitrogen-phosphorus detector.
A1.1.3 Carrier Gas—Helium. A1.1.7 Detector Temperature—300°C.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:58 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5508 − 16
TABLE A1.1 Parameters for Gas Chromatograph and Headspace A1.2 Headspace Sampler Parameters:
Sampler
Time min:s Action Description A1.2.1 Bath Temperature—90°C.
:01 Probe Needle enters vial A1.2.2 Equilibration Time—3 hour.
:03 Pressure Vial pressurization begins
:18 Pressure Vial pressurization stops
:19 Vent/fill loop Initialize sample loop filling
A1.2.3 Sample Loop Size—3 mL.
:28 Vent/fill loop Close sample loop-loop filled
:33 Inject Flush sample onto analytical column
A1.2.4 Sample Loop Temperature—110°C.
1:03 Vent/fill loop Open loop to vent
1:04 Pressure Initialize sample loop cleaning A1.2.5 Injection Cycle Parameters—(For volume-
2:34 Pressure Stop carrier flow through sample loop controlled headspace sampler).
2:35 Vent/fill loop Close vent
2:36 Inject Stop injection cycle
2:37 Probe Needle exits vial

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5508 - 94a(2009)ε1) that may impact the use of this standard. (September 1, 2016)

(1) Updated ISO equivalency statement.

(2) Removed product-specific references throughout docu-
ment.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:32:58 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5511 − 18

Standard Test Method for

Determining Anaerobic Biodegradation of Plastic Materials
Under High-Solids Anaerobic-Digestion Conditions1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5511; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope*
1.1 This test method covers the determination of the degree
and rate of anaerobic biodegradation of plastic materials in
high-solids anaerobic conditions. The test materials are ex-
posed to a methanogenic inoculum derived from anaerobic
digesters operating only on pretreated household waste. The
anaerobic decomposition takes place under high-solids (more
than 30 % total solids) and static non-mixed conditions.
1.2 This test method is designed to yield a percentage of
conversion of carbon in the sample to carbon in the gaseous
form under conditions found in high-solids anaerobic digesters,
treating municipal solid waste (1, 2, 3, 4).2 This test method
may also resemble some conditions in biologically active
landfills where the gas generated is recovered and biogas
production is actively promoted by inoculation (for example,
codeposition of anaerobic sewage sludge, anaerobic leachate
recirculation), moisture control (for example, leachate
recirculation), and temperature control (for example, short-
term injection of oxygen, heating of recirculated leachate) (5,
6, 7).
1.3 This test method is designed to be applicable to all
plastic materials that are not inhibitory to the microorganisms
present in anaerobic digesters operating on household waste.
1.4 Claims of performance shall be limited to the numerical
result obtained in the test and not be used for unqualified
“biodegradable” claims. Reports shall clearly state the percent-
age of net gaseous carbon generation for both the test and
reference samples at the completion of the test. Furthermore,
results shall not be extrapolated past the actual duration of the
test.
1.5 The values given in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific hazards are given in Section 8.
NOTE 1—This test method is equivalent to ISO 15985.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:3
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1293 Test Methods for pH of Water
D1888 Methods Of Test for Particulate and Dissolved Matter
in Water (Withdrawn 1989)4
D2908 Practice for Measuring Volatile Organic Matter in
Water by Aqueous-Injection Gas Chromatography
D3590 Test Methods for Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen in Water
D4129 Test Method for Total and Organic Carbon in Water
by High Temperature Oxidation and by Coulometric
Detection
E260 Practice for Packed Column Gas Chromatography
E355 Practice for Gas Chromatography Terms and Relation-
ships
2.2 APHA-AWWA-WPCF Standards:
2540 D Total Suspended Solids Dried at 103°–105°C5
2540 E Fixed and Volatile Solids Ignited at 550°C5
212 Nitrogen Ammonia5

1 3
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee of D20 on For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.96 on Environmen- contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
tally Degradable Plastics and Biobased Products. Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
Current edition approved Jan. 15, 2018. Published February 2018. Originally the ASTM website.
4
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D5511 – 12. DOI: The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
10.1520/D5511-18. www.astm.org.
2 5
The boldface numbers is parentheses refer to a list of references at the end of Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 17th Edition,
the text. 1989, American Public Health Association, 1740 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5511 − 18
2.3 ISO Standard:6
ISO 13641-1 Water quality—Determination of inhibition of
gas production of anaerobic bacteria—Part 1: General test
ISO 15985 Plastics—Determination of the ultimate anaero-
bic biodegradability and disintegration under high-solids
anaerobic-digestion conditions—Method by analysis of
released biogas

3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—Definitions of terms applying to this test
method appear in Terminology D883.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 methanogenic inoculum—anaerobically digested or-
ganic waste containing a high concentration of anaerobic
methane-producing microorganisms.

4. Summary of Test Method FIG. 1 Test Setup

4.1 This test method consists of selection and analysis of
material for testing, obtaining a concentrated anaerobic inocu-
lum from an anaerobic laboratory-scale digester, exposing the
material to an anaerobic-static-batch fermentation at more than
20 % solids, measuring total carbon in the gas (CO2 and CH4)
evolved as a function of time, and assessing the degree of
biodegradability.
4.2 The percentage of biodegradability is obtained by de-
termining the percent of conversion of carbon from the test
material to carbon in the gaseous phase (CH4 and CO2). This
percentage of biodegradability will not include the amount of
carbon from the test substance that is converted to cell biomass
and that is not, in turn, metabolized to CO2 and CH4.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Biodegradation of a plastic within a high-solids anaero-
bic digestion unit is an important phenomenon because it will
affect the decomposition of other waste materials enclosed by
the plastic and the resulting quality and appearance of the
digestate after an anaerobic digestion process. Biodegradation
of plastics could allow for the safe disposal of these plastics
through aerobic and anaerobic solid-waste-treatment plants.
This procedure has been developed to permit the determination
of the rate and degree of anaerobic biodegradability of plastic
products when placed in a high-solids anaerobic digester for
the production of digestate from municipal solid waste.
5.2 Limitations—Because there is a wide variation in the
construction and operation of anaerobic-digestion systems and
because regulatory requirements for composting systems vary,
this procedure is not intended to simulate the environment of
any particular high-solids anaerobic-digestion system.
However, it is expected to resemble the environment of a
high-solids anaerobic-digestion process operated under opti-
mum conditions. More specifically, the procedure is intended
to create a standard laboratory environment that will permit a
rapid and reproducible determination of the anaerobic biode-
gradability under high-solids digestion conditions.
6
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Inverted Graduated Cylinder or Plastic Column, in
water or other suitable device for measuring gas volume. The
water in contact with the gas must be at a pH of less than two
during the whole period of the test to avoid CO2 loss through
dissolution in the water. The gas-volume-measuring device, as
well as the gas tubing, shall be of sufficient quality to prevent
gas migration and diffusion between the system and the
surrounding air (see Fig. 1).
6.2 Gas Chromatograph, (optional) or other apparatus,
equipped with a suitable detector and column(s) for measuring
methane and carbon dioxide concentration in the evolved
gases.
6.3 Incubator, or hot-water bath capable of maintaining the
test bottles at 37°C (62°C) or 52°C (62°C) for the duration of
the test.
6.4 Erlenmeyer Flasks, with sufficient capacity for the
experiment and openings of at least 7-cm diameter, set up so
that no loss of gas occurs.
6.5 pH Meter, precision balance (60.1 g), analytical balance
(60.1 mg), thermometer, and barometer.
6.6 Devices, suitable for determining volatile fatty acids by
aqueous-injection chromatography, total Kjeldahl nitrogen,
ammonia nitrogen, dry solids (105°C) and volatile-solids
(550°C) concentrations.
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Anaerboic Inoculum, derived from a properly operating
anaerobic digester with pretreated household waste as a sole
substrate.
7.2 Analytical-Grade Cellulose, for thin-layer chromatogra-
phy as a positive control.
7.3 Polyethylene, as a negative control (optional). It is
optimal if it is in the same form as the form in which the
sample is tested (for example, film polyethylene for film
samples, pellets of polyethylene if the sample is in the form of
pellets, etc.).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5511 − 18
8. Hazards
8.1 The procedure given in this test method involves the use
of an inoculum composed of biologically and possibly chemi-
cally active materials known to produce a variety of diseases.
Avoid contact with these materials by wearing gloves and other
appropriate protective garments. Use good personal hygiene to
minimize exposure.
8.2 It is possible that the solid-waste mixture contains sharp
objects. Take extreme care when handling this mixture to avoid
injury.
8.3 The biological reactor is not designed to withstand high
pressures; operate it at close to ambient pressure.
8.4 This test method includes the use of hazardous chemi-
cals. Avoid contact with the chemicals and follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions and Material Safety Data Sheets.
8.5 The methane produced during this procedure is explo-
sive and flammable. Upon release of the biogas from the
gas-collection system, take care in venting the biogas to the
outside or to a hood.
9. Inoculum
9.1 The inoculum must be derived from a properly operat-
ing anaerobic digester functioning with a pretreated household
waste as a sole substrate. The pretreated household waste shall
come from an existing waste treatment facility treating munici-
pal solid waste, where through sorting, shredding, sieving, or
other means, a fairly homogeneous organic fraction is pro-
duced of less than 60 mm. The digester shall be operating for
a period of at least four months on the organic fraction, with a
retention time of a maximum of 30 days under thermophilic
conditions (52 6 2°C). Gas-production yields shall be at least
15 mL at standard temperature and pressure of biogas per gram
of dry solids in the digester and per day on the average for at
least 30 days.
9.1.1 It is preferable to derive the inoculum from a digester
operating under dry (>20 % total solids) conditions, but it is
acceptable to derive it from a wet fermentation whereby the
anaerobically digested sludge is dewatered through
centrifugation, with a press or through drying at a maximum
temperature of 55°C to a dry-solids content of at least 20 %.
9.2 The prepared inoculum shall undergo a short post-
fermentation of approximately seven days at the same operat-
ing temperature from which it was derived. This means that the
inoculum is not fed but allowed to post-ferment anaerobically
by itself. This is to ensure that large easily biodegradable
particles are degraded during this period and also to reduce the
background level of degradation of the inoculum itself.
9.2.1 The most important biochemical characteristics of the
inoculum shall be as follows:
9.2.1.1 pH—Between 7.5 and 8.5 (in accordance with Test
Methods D1293),
9.2.1.2 Volatile Fatty Acids (VFA)—Below 1 g/kg wet
weight (in accordance with Practice D2908), and
9.2.1.3 NH4+-N—Between 0.5 and 2 g/kg wet weight (in
accordance with APHA Test Method 212 and Test Method
D3590).
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
9.3 Analyses are performed after dilution of the inoculum
with distilled water on a ratio of distilled water to inoculum of
5 to 1 on a weight over weight basis.
10. Test Specimen
10.1 The test specimen shall be of sufficient carbon content,
analyzed in accordance with Test Method D4129, to yield
carbon dioxide and methane volumes that can be accurately
measured by the trapping devices described. Add more test
specimen when low biodegradability is expected, up to 100 g
on a dry weight basis of the test specimen.
10.2 It is acceptable if the test specimen is in the form of
films, powder, pellets, formed articles, or in the form of a dog
bone and conforming to Practice D618. The test set-up shall be
able to handle articles that are 100 mm by 50 mm by 4 mm
thick.
11. Procedure
11.1 Inoculum Medium:
11.1.1 Remove enough inoculum (approximately 15 kg)
from the post-fermentation vessel and mix carefully and
consistently by hand in order to obtain a homogeneous
medium.
11.1.2 Test three replicates each of a blank (inoculum only),
positive control (thin-layer chromatography cellulose), nega-
tive control (polyethylene), and the test substance being
evaluated.
11.1.2.1 Manually mix 1000 g wet weight (at least 20 % dry
solids) of inoculum in a small container for a period of 2 to 3
min with 15 to 100 g of volatile solids of the test substance or
the controls for each replicate. (Determine dry solids and
volatile solids in accordance with APHA Standards , 2540, and
Test Method D1888).
11.1.2.2 For the three blanks containing inoculum only,
manually mix 1000 g of the same inoculum in a small container
for a period of 2 to 3 min with the same intensity as was done
for the other vessels containing test substance or controls.
11.1.2.3 Determine the weight of the inoculum and test
substance added to each individual Erlenmeyer flask accu-
rately.
11.1.3 Add the mixtures to a 2-L wide-mouth Erlenmeyer
flask and gently spread and compact the material evenly in the
flask to a uniform density.
11.1.4 After placing the Erlenmeyer flask in a water bath or
incubator, connect it with the gas-measurement or gas-
collection device.
11.1.5 Record room temperature and atmospheric pressure
prior to turning on the heating system of the incubator or water
bath.
11.2 Incubation:
11.2.1 Incubate the Erlenmeyer flasks in the dark or in
diffused light at 52°C (62°C) for thermophilic conditions, or
37°C (62°C) for mesophilic conditions for a period of nor-
mally 15-30 days.
11.2.1.1 For the test to be considered valid, the positive
control must achieve 70 % biodegradation within 30 days.

11.2.1.2 The incubation time shall be run until no net gas
production is noted for at least five days from both the positive
control and test substance reactors.
11.2.1.3 The test substance and the positive control shall be
run for the same duration.
11.2.2 Control the pH of the water used to measure biogas
production to less than two by adding HCl.
11.3 Analytical Measurements:
11.3.1 Make at least five measurements of gas volume per
week in order to establish the gas production as a function of
time.
11.3.2 Determine methane and carbon dioxide concentra-
tion by using analytical devices suitable for the detection and
quantification of these gases, such as a gas chromatograph with
an appropriate detector, in accordance with Practices E260 and
E355.
11.3.3 Verify the quality of the inoculum by analyses for
pH, volatile fatty acids, and total Kjeldahl nitrogen (in accor-
dance with Test Methods D1293 and D3590 and Practice
D2908).
11.4 At the end of the digestion period, allow the setup to
cool to room temperature for 8 h and determine the following
parameters:
11.4.1 Total gas-volume production produced during the
test,
11.4.2 Gas composition at the end of the test,
11.4.3 Weight loss of each vessel, and
11.4.4 Room temperature and atmospheric pressure at the
end of the test.
12. Calculation
12.1 By using the total carbon content in the test specimen,
calculate the maximum theoretical gas production (carbon
dioxide plus methane) originating from the anaerobic biodeg-
radation of the test specimen added, based on the following
biochemical transformations:
C12 H 2 →CH4
C1O 2 →CO2
Each mmole (12 mg) of organic carbon from the test sample
can be converted into 1 mmole of gaseous CH4 or CO2, or both.
One mmole of gas produced occupies 22.4 mL at standard
temperature and pressure (STP).
12.2 Temperature and Pressure—Measure the percentages
of CH4 and CO2 and transform the gas volumes to STP. Correct
also for water vapor-pressure and atmospheric-pressure varia-
tion during the test. Calculate the amount of gaseous carbon.
Determine the mean (of the three replicates) net gaseous
carbon production by anaerobic biodegradation of the test
substances by subtracting the mean gaseous carbon production
of the control (three replicates) containing only the inoculum.
12.3 Calculate the percent of biodegradation by dividing the
average net gaseous carbon production of the test material by
the original average amount of total carbon of the test
compound and multiplying by 100:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5511 − 18
mean C g ~ test! 2 mean C g ~ blank!
% biodegradation: 3 100 (2)
Ci
where:
Cg = amount of gaseous carbon produced, g, and
Ci = amount of carbon in test compound added, g.
12.4 Calculate the standard error, se, of the percentage of
biodegradation as follows:
S e 5 SQRT~~ s 2 test /n1 ! 1 ~ s 2 blank /n2 !! 3 100/C i (3)
where:
n1 andn2 = number of replicate test and blank digesters
respectively, and
s = standard deviation of the total gaseous carbon
produced.
12.5 Calculate the 95 % confidence limits (CL) as follows:
95 % CL 5 % biodegradation6 ~ t 3 s e ! (4)
where:
t = t-distribution value for 95 % probability with
(n1 + n2 − 2) degrees of freedom, thus n = 3 + 3 − 2 = 4.
13. Interpretation of Results
13.1 Information on the toxicity of the plastic material
provides useful information in interpreting whether the plastic
material falls within the scope of this test method. ISO 13641-1
is an appropriate standard suitable to assess the toxicity of
plastic materials to anaerobic sludge.
13.2 This test method includes the use of thin-layer chro-
matography cellulose as a positive control. If sufficient biodeg-
radation (a minimum of 70 % for cellulose after 30 days, and
the deviation among the cellulose replicates is less than 20 %
of the mean) is not observed within the duration of the test
method, then the test method must be regarded as invalid and
shall be repeated with fresh inoculum.
13.3 Results shall not be extrapolated past the actual dura-
(1)
tion of the test.
13.4 If the confidence interval on percentage biodegradation
calculated in 12.5 includes zero, then the percentage biodeg-
radation is not statistically significantly different from zero.
14. Report
14.1 Report the following data and information:
14.1.1 Information on the inoculum, including: source;
mesophilic or thermophilic; pH; volatile fatty acids (in milli-
grams per kilogram); NH4+-N in grams per kilogram); percent
of dry solids; percent volatile solids; date of collection and use;
storage time and conditions; and handling and potential accli-
mation to the test material,
14.1.2 Carbon content of the plastic material, the positive
control and the negative control (if used), and maximum
theoretical gas production (carbon dioxide and methane),
14.1.3 Numerical extent and graphical display of the cumu-
lative gas productions of each replicate over time for the
inoculum, positive control, negative control (if used) and test
substance; numerical extent and graphical display of the
4
 D5511 − 18
percentage biodegradation over time for the positive control, TABLE 1 Results from Within-Laboratory Testing for the
negative control (if used) and test substance, Anaerobic Biodegradability of Cellulose Under the High-Solids
Anaerobic Conditions at 52°C
14.1.4 Result of the calculation of the 95 % confidence
95 %
limits, and Biodegradability Standard
Confidence
14.1.5 Analysis of gas as percent methane and percent After Ten Days Deviation
Limit
carbon dioxide for each reading at the end of the test, or each Run 1 86.7 % 0.3 % 2.4 %
Run 2 85.6 % 2.2 % 4.5 %
time the gas is released to the atmosphere during the course of Run 3 86.2 % 1.1 % 5.4 %
the test. Run 4 84.2 % 4.5 % 9.0 %
Mean of Four Runs 85.7 % .. ...
15. Precision and Bias Mean Variance With ... 5.1 % 10.2 %
95 %
15.1 The precision and bias of the procedure in this test Confidence Limit
method for measuring the anaerobic biodegradation of plastic
materials under high-solids anaerobic conditions is being
determined. containing cellulose as the positive control, with a standard
15.2 Preliminary results for within-laboratory repeatability deviation of 0.3 % and a 95 % confidence limit interval of
testing are presented in Table 1. These data represent four 2.4 %. Fig. 2 represents the gas production of three replicates
different determinations of the degradation of thin-layer chro- with inoculum only as the blanks, while Fig. 3 gives a view of
matography cellulose as the positive reference material under the total biogas production after cellulose as a positive refer-
thermophilic conditions (52°C). The average degradation of ence has been added. Fig. 4 represents the net biogas produc-
cellulose after ten days in the test method is 85.7 %, with a tion from the cellulose after the average biogas production
mean variance of 5.1 % and a 95 % confidence limit interval of coming from the inoculum has been subtracted.
610.2 % for the four runs. All four runs were carried out
within a twelve-month period by the same operators. Figs. 2-4 16. Keywords
represent the results of the first run in which a biodegradability 16.1 anaerobic biodegradation; anaerobic digestion; biodeg-
of 86.7 % was obtained as the mean for the three replicates radation; high-solids digestion; landfill; plastics test method

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5511 − 18

FIG. 2 Representative Plot Showing Total Biogas Production

from Inoculum for Three Replicate Specimens Tested in a Single
Run

FIG. 3 Representative Plot Showing Total Biogas Production

from Inoculum Plus Cellulose for Three Replicate Specimens
Tested in a Single Run

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5511 − 18

FIG. 4 Representative Plot Showing Net Biogas Production from

Cellulose for Three Replicate Specimens Tested in a Single Run

REFERENCES

(1) De Baere, L. A., et al., “High-Rate Dry Anaerobic Composting
Process for the Organic Fraction of Solid Wastes,” Biotechnology and
Bioengineering Symposium No. 15, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, N.Y., 1986, p. 321.
(2) De Wilde, B., et al., “Dry Anaerobic Conversion of Source Separated
Household Waste to Biogas and Humotex,” Journal of Resource
Management and Technology, Vol 18, No. 1, 1990, p. 40.
(3) European Patent No. 84200801.3, 06.06. 1984.
(4) U.S. Patent No. 4 684 468, 03.31.1986 .
(5) Campbell, D. J. V., and Croft B., “Landfill Gas Enhancement:
Brogborough Cell Programme,” Landfill Gas: Energy and Environ-
ment 90, United Kingdom Department of Energy, 1990, p. 281.
(6) Westlake, K., “Landfill Microbiology,” Landfill Gas: Energy and
Environment 90, United Kingdom Department of Energy, 1990, p.
271.
(7) Suflita, J. M., et al., “The World’s Largest Landfill: A Multidisci-
plinary Investigation,” Environmental Science and Technology, Vol
26, No. 8, 1992, p. 1486.

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5511–12)
that may impact the use of this standard. (January 15, 2018)

(1) Deleted 11.1.2.4.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:02 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5523 − 15

Standard Test Method for

Polyurethane Raw Materials: Acidity by Argentometric
Determination of Hydrolyzable Chlorine in Monomeric,
Aromatic Isocyanates1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5523; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 3.2.1 acidity—the acid strength of a sample expressed as

1.1 This test method measures the hydrolyzable chlorine
content of monomeric, aromatic isocyanates used as polyure-
thane raw materials and expresses it as HCl acidity. The test
method is applicable to toluene diisocyanate (TDI) and mono-
meric methylene di(phenylisocyanate), known as MDI. The
main sources of hydrolyzable chlorine and, therefore, acidity in
monomeric aromatic isocyanates are carbamyl chlorides, acid
chlorides, and dissolved phosgene. All of these compounds
react with alcohols and water to form hydrochloric acid.
1.2 This test method applies only to monomeric isocyanates
in which all of the acidity is derived from species that generate
HCl on solvolysis.
parts per million hydrochloric acid (HCl) present.
3.2.2 hydrolyzable chlorine—the amount of chlorine re-
leased as chloride ion under the conditions of the test,
expressed as parts per million chlorine.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 The sample reacts with 2-propanol to form urethanes
and hydrochloric acid, which is liberated from the labile
carbamyl chlorides, acid chlorides, and dissolved phosgene.
The chlorides of the liberated acid are then determined
potentiometrically using standard methanolic silver nitrate
solution and calculated as parts per million HCl.

1.3 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and determine the applica-
bility of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2
2.1 ASTM Standards:
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this test
method, see Terminology D883.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.22 on Cellular Materials -
Plastics and Elastomers.
Current edition approved April 1, 2015. Published May 2015. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5523 - 10. DOI:
10.1520/D5523-15.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 This test method is suitable for research or for quality
control to characterize TDI and MDI.
5.2 This test method was developed to overcome problems
with low-level acidity determinations that use glass electrodes
in the presence of reagent alcohol solvents. Reagent alcohols
contain acidic and basic species, which complicate the glass
electrode methods at low levels of acidity.
6. Interferences
6.1 Acidic species that do not generate chloride ions under
the conditions of this test method will not be determined
because acidity is determined indirectly from the chloride ion
concentration.
6.2 Acidic species that do not produce chloride ions are
expected to be negligible at low levels of acidity and for the
monomeric isocyanates in this test method.
6.3 Care must be taken to avoid chloride contamination of
glassware and sample containers.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Potentiometric Titrator.
7.2 Combination Silver Billet Electrode (Note 2).
7.3 Oven, 70°C (Note 3).
7.4 Magnetic Stirrer.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:06 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5523 − 15
NOTE 2—The combination silver billet electrode is to be stored in 0.01
N methanolic silver nitrate solution in order to keep the electrode
conditioned properly. The use of chloride containing solutions must be
avoided during storage and maintenance of the apparatus.
NOTE 3—Monomeric MDI samples can be solid when received in the
laboratory. An oven is to be used to melt the sample prior to beginning the
test procedure.
8. Reagents and Materials
8.1 Purity of Reagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
used in all tests. Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that
all reagents conform to the specifications of the Committee on
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society where
such specifications are available.3 Other grades can be used,
provided it is first ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently
high purity to permit its use without lessening the accuracy of
the determination.
8.2 Methanol.
8.3 2-Propanol.
8.4 Nitric Acid, concentrated, 70 %.
8.5 Silver Nitrate.
8.6 Methanolic Silver Nitrate Solution (0.01 N)—Prepare
by dissolving 1.70 g AgNO3/L of solution. Potentiometrically
standardize with titration-grade sodium chloride frequently
enough to detect changes of 0.00005 N.
8.7 Methanolic Silver Nitrate Solution (0.001 N)—Prepare
by dissolving 0.170 g AgNO3/L of solution. Potentiometrically
standardize with titration-grade sodium chloride frequently
enough to detect changes of 0.000005 N.
9. Sampling
9.1 Since organic isocyanates react with atmospheric
moisture, take special precautions in sampling. Usual sampling
methods, even when conducted rapidly, can cause contamina-
tion of the sample with insoluble urea. Therefore, blanket the
sample with dry air or nitrogen at all times. (Warning—
Diisocyanates are eye, skin, and respiratory irritants at concen-
trations above the occupational exposure limit (TLV or PEL).
Diisocyanates can cause skin and respiratory sensitization
(asthma) in some people. Once sensitized, it is essential to limit
further exposure to diisocyanates. Use a combination of
engineering controls and personal protective equipment, in-
cluding respiratory, skin and eye protection, to prevent over-
exposure to diisocyanates. Consult the product suppliers’
Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for more detailed information about
potential health effects and other specific safety and handling
instructions for the product.)
10. Test Conditions
10.1 Since isocyanates react with moisture, keep laboratory
humidity low, preferably around 50 % relative humidity. See
warning statement in 9.1.
3
Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC. For suggestions on the testing of reagents not
listed by the American Chemical Society, see Analar Standards for Laboratory
Chemicals, BDH Ltd., Poole, Dorset, U.K., and the United States Pharmacopeia
and National Formulary, U.S. Pharmaceutical Convention, Inc. (USPC), Rockville,
MD.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:06 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
11. Procedure
11.1 Weigh 10.0 g of the sample into a beaker and record the
weight to the nearest 0.0001 g (Note 4).
11.2 Add 100 mL of 2-propanol to the beaker, cover, and stir
the sample for 10 min.
11.3 Add 100 mL of methanol, cover, and continue stirring
the sample solution for an additional 20 min (Note 5).
11.4 Add ten drops of concentrated nitric acid solution to
the sample solution.
11.5 Cool the sample solution to room temperature in an ice
bath if necessary.
11.6 Titrate the sample solution potentiometrically with the
appropriate methanolic silver nitrate solution (Note 6).
11.7 Record the volume of titrant used to reach the end point
to at least the nearest 0.001 mL.
11.8 If the chloride content of the reagents is in question,
run a blank (steps 11.1 to 11.7 with no isocyanate sample
added) to ensure that the reagents are free of chloride interfer-
ences. If chloride is detected, subtract the volume (mL) of
AgNO3 required to titrate the blank from the volume (mL) of
AgNO3 required to titrate the sample.
NOTE 4—The beaker must be of such size to accommodate approxi-
mately 300 mL of solution, and it must be of a shape to allow the proper
coverage for the electrode. For monomeric MDI, it is acceptable to gently
warm the beaker on a hot plate to keep the sample molten prior to the
addition of 2-propanol. This will assist in dissolution of the sample. Once
2-propanol has been added, remove the beaker from the hot plate.
NOTE 5—The stirring times were chosen to ensure an adequate reaction
time for material that has been adjusted with an acid chloride. In
monomeric, unadjusted material, it is acceptable to reduce the stirring
times to those required to obtain uniform solutions and stable electrode
responses (approximately 2 min).
NOTE 6—For expected acidities or hydrolyzable chlorines below 20
ppm, use the 0.001 N methanolic silver nitrate solution as the titrant. For
expected acidities or hydrolyzable chlorines above 20 ppm, use the 0.01
N methanolic silver nitrate solution as the titrant.
12. Calculation
12.1 Calculate the acidity, as ppm HCl, as follows:
S 3 N 3 36.465 3 106
acidity 5 (1)
W 3 1000
where:
S = AgNO3 required for titration of the sample, mL (If
a blank is run, subtract the volume in mL of
AgNO3 required to titrate the blank from the
volume (mL) of AgNO3 required to titrate the
sample),
N = normality of AgNO3 solution, meq/mL,
W = sample weight, g,
36.465 = equivalent weight of HCl, mg/meq,
1000 = factor for converting milligrams to grams, and
106 = factor for converting to parts per million.
12.2 Because hydrolyzable chlorine is measured, the ppm
hydrolyzable chlorine can be calculated as follows:
S 3 N 3 35.465 3 106
hydrolyzable chlorine 5 (2)
W 3 1000
 D5523 − 15
where:
S = AgNO3 required for titration of the sample, mL (If
a blank is run, subtract the volume in mL of
AgNO3 required to titrate the blank from the
volume (mL) of AgNO3 required to titrate the
sample),
N = normality of AgNO3 solution, meq/mL,
W = sample weight, g,
35.465 = equivalent weight of Cl, mg/meq,
1000 = factor for converting milligrams to grams, and
106 = factor for converting to parts per million.
13. Precision and Bias4
13.1 Attempts to develop a precision and bias statement for
this test method have not been successful due to the limited
number of laboratories participating in round-robin tests. Data
on precision and bias cannot be given for this reason. Contact
the Chairman, Subcommittee D20.22 (Section D20.22.01),
ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West
4
Supporting data have been filed at ASTM International Headquarters and may
be obtained by requesting Research Report RR:D20-1181.
Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959, if you are interested in
participating in the development of precision and bias data for
this test method.
13.2 A limited round robin was conducted with nine labo-
ratories.
13.2.1 It has been estimated that duplicate results for either
acidity or hydrolyzable chlorine by the same analyst are to be
considered suspect if they differ by 63.9 ppm for results
greater than 10 ppm and 60.6 ppm for results less than 10
ppm.
13.2.2 It has been estimated that results reported by different
laboratories for either acidity or hydrolyzable chlorine are to be
considered suspect if they differ by 615.5 ppm for results
greater than 10 ppm and 63.5 ppm for results less than 10
ppm.
14. Keywords
14.1 acidity; HC; hydrolyzable chlorine; isocyanates; iso-
cyanates aromatic; MDI; methylene-4,4’-di(phenylisocyanate);
methylene di(phenylisocyanate); polyurethane; raw materials;
TDI; test method; titration; toluene diisocyanate

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue (D5523 –
10) that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2015)

(1) Subsection 9.1: Sampling—The previous warning state-
ment was edited to remove non-mandatory language and
updated with input from the Center for the Polyurethanes
Industry’s (CPI) Product Stewardship Committee.
(2) Section 10: Test Conditions—Removed redundant informa-
tion.
(3) Section 12: Calculations—Added calculations to perform if
a blank is used.
(4) Section 14: Keywords—Changed keyword for MDI to be
consistent with that used in the other polyurethane raw material
analysis methods.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:06 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5526 − 18

Standard Test Method for

Determining Anaerobic Biodegradation of Plastic Materials
Under Accelerated Landfill Conditions1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5526; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope “biodegradable” claims. Reports shall clearly state the percent-

1.1 This test method covers determination of the degree and
rate of anaerobic biodegradation of plastic materials in an
accelerated-landfill test environment. This test method is also
designed to produce mixtures of household waste and plastic
materials after different degrees of decomposition under con-
ditions that resemble landfill conditions. The test materials are
mixed with pretreated household waste and exposed to a
methanogenic inoculum derived from anaerobic digesters op-
erating only on pretreated household waste. The anaerobic
decomposition occurs under dry (more than 30 % total solids)
and static nonmixed conditions. The mixtures obtained after
this test method can be used to assess the environmental and
health risks of plastic materials that are degraded in a landfill.
1.2 This test method is designed to yield a percentage of
conversion of carbon in the sample to carbon in the gaseous
form under conditions that resemble landfill conditions. It is
possible that this test method will not simulate all conditions
found in landfills, especially biologically inactive landfills.
This test method more closely resembles those types of
landfills in which the gas generated is recovered or even
actively promoted, or both, for example, by inoculation (code-
position of anaerobic sewage sludge and anaerobic leachate
recirculation), moisture control in the landfill (leachate
recirculation), and temperature control (short-term injection of
oxygen and heating of recirculated leachate) (1-7).2
1.3 This test method is designed to produce partially de-
graded mixtures of municipal solid waste and plastics that can
be used to assess the ecotoxicological risks associated with the
anaerobic degradation of plastics after various stages of an-
aerobic biodegradation in a landfill.
1.4 Claims of performance shall be limited to the numerical
result obtained in the test and not be used for unqualified
1
This test method is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics
and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.96 on Environmentally
Degradable Plastics and Biobased Products.
Current edition approved Sept. 15, 2018. Published October 2018. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2012 as D5526 – 12. DOI:
10.1520/D5526-18.
2 4
The boldface numbers in parentheses refer to the list of references at the end of
this standard.
age of net gaseous carbon generation for both the test and
reference samples at the completion of the test. Furthermore,
results shall not be extrapolated past the actual duration of the
test.
1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as the
standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
Specific hazards statements are given in Section 8.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:3
D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1293 Test Methods for pH of Water
D1888 Methods Of Test for Particulate and Dissolved Matter
in Water (Withdrawn 1989)4
D2908 Practice for Measuring Volatile Organic Matter in
Water by Aqueous-Injection Gas Chromatography
D3590 Test Methods for Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen in Water
D4129 Test Method for Total and Organic Carbon in Water
by High Temperature Oxidation and by Coulometric
Detection
E260 Practice for Packed Column Gas Chromatography
3
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.

E355 Practice for Gas Chromatography Terms and Relation-
ships
2.2 APHA-AWWA-WPCF Standards:5
2540D Total Suspended Solids Dried at 103°–105°C
2540E Fixed and Volatile Solids Ignited at 550°C
212 Nitrogen Ammonia
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of terms used in this test
method see Terminology D883.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 methanogenic inoculum—anaerobically digested or-
ganic waste containing a high concentration of anaerobic
methane-producing microorganisms.
4. Summary of Test Method
4.1 This test method described consists of the following: (1)
selecting and analyzing material for testing; (2) obtaining a
pretreated municipal-solid-waste fraction and a concentrated
anaerobic inoculum from an anaerobic digester; (3) exposing
the material to an anaerobic static batch fermentation at more
than 30 % solids; (4) measuring total carbon in the gas (CO2
and CH4) evolved as a function of time; (5) removing the
specimens for cleaning (optional), conditioning, testing, and
reporting; (6) assessing the degree of biodegradability; and (7)
assessing the degree of biodegradability under less than opti-
mum conditions.
4.2 The percentage of biodegradability is obtained by de-
termining the percent of conversion of carbon from the test
material to carbon in the gaseous phase (CH4 and CO2). This
percentage of biodegradability will not include the amount of
carbon from the test substance that is converted to cell biomass
and that is not, in turn, metabolized to CO2 and CH4.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Decomposition of a plastic within a landfill involves
biological processes that will affect the decomposition of other
materials enclosed by, or in close proximity to, the plastic.
Rapid degradation of the plastic has the ability to increase the
economic feasibility of landfill-gas recovery, minimize the
duration of after-care of the landfill, and make possible the
recovery of the volume reduction of the waste due to biodeg-
radation during the active life of the landfill. This procedure
has been developed to permit determination of the anaerobic
biodegradability of plastic products when placed in biologi-
cally active environments simulating landfill conditions.
5.2 As degradation occurs inevitably in a landfill, it is of
immediate concern that the plastic materials do not produce
toxic metabolites or end products under the various conditions
that have the potential to occur in a landfill. The mixtures
remaining after completion of the test method, containing fully
or partially degraded plastic materials or extracts, can be
submitted subsequently to ecotoxicity testing in order to assess
5
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20 ed.,
1999, available from American Public Health Association, 800 I Street, NW,
Washington, D.C. 20001-3710, or http://www.standardmethods.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
D5526 − 18
the environmental hazards posed by the breakdown of plastics
to varying degrees in landfills. This test method has been
designed to assess biodegradation under optimum and less-
than-optimum conditions.
5.3 Limitations—Because a wide variation exists in the
construction and operation of landfills, and because regulatory
requirements for landfills vary greatly, this procedure is not
intended to simulate the environment of all landfills. However,
it is expected to closely resemble the environment of a
biologically active landfill. More specifically, the procedure is
intended to create a standard laboratory environment that
permits rapid and reproducible determination of the anaerobic
biodegradability under accelerated landfill conditions, while at
the same time producing reproducible mixtures of fully and
partially decomposed household waste with plastic materials
for ecotoxicological assessment.
6. Apparatus
6.1 Pressure-Resistant Glass Vessels—Twenty-seven, each
with a volume of 4 to 6 L, which can be closed airtight and
capable of withstanding an overpressure of two atmospheres.
The lids of the reactors are equipped with an overpressure
valve (to prevent the overpressure from becoming higher than
2 bars), a manometer that provides a rough indication of the
overpressure, a septum that allows one to take gas samples and
measure the exact overpressure, and, finally, a valve to release
the overpressure (Fig. 1).
6.2 Incubators, sufficient to store the vessels in the dark at
35 6 2°C for the duration of the test.
6.3 Pressure Transducer, connected to a syringe needle to
measure the headspace pressure in the test vessel.
6.4 Gas Chromatograph, or other apparatus, equipped with
a suitable detector and column(s) for measuring methane and
carbon dioxide concentrations in the evolved gases.
6.5 pH Meter, precision balance (60.1 g), analytical balance
(60.1 mg), thermometer, and barometer.
6.6 Suitable Devices, for determining volatile fatty acids by
aqueous-injection chromatography, total Kjeldahl nitrogen,
ammonia nitrogen, dry solids (105°C), and volatile solids
(550°C) concentrations.
7. Reagents and Materials
7.1 Pretreated-Household Waste, derived from mixed mu-
nicipal solid waste or the organic fraction thereof, after
homogenizing, screening over a screen with holes of a diam-
eter of 40 to 80 mm, and aerobically stabilized over a period of
2 to 4 weeks by blowing air into the material and maintaining
a dry-matter content of 50 6 5 % and a temperature of 55 6
10°C. (Optional: the pretreated household waste can be re-
placed by a similarly pretreated simulated solid waste.)
7.2 Anaerobic Inoculum, derived from a properly operating
th anaerobic digester with pretreated household waste as a sole
substrate or a digester that treats predominantly household
waste.
2
 D5526 − 18
1 = Digester.
2 = Incubation chamber.
3 = Overpressure valve.
4 = Manometer.
5 = Septum.
6 = Valve.
FIG. 1 Setup of Accelerated Landfill
7.3 Cellulose, Analytical-Grade, for thin-layer chromatog-
raphy as a positive control.6
7.4 Polyethylene (optional), as a negative control. It needs
to be in the same form as that in which the sample is tested:
film polyethylene for film samples, pellets of polyethylene in
case the sample is in the form of pellets, etc.
8. Hazards
8.1 This procedure involves the use of inoculum and mu-
nicipal solid waste containing biologically and possibly chemi-
cally active materials known to produce a variety of diseases.
Avoid contact with these materials by wearing gloves and other
appropriate protective equipment. Use good personal hygiene
to minimize exposure.
8.2 It is possible that the solid waste mixture will contain
sharp objects. Take extreme care when handling this mixture to
avoid injury.
8.3 This test method includes the use of hazardous chemi-
cals. Avoid contact with the chemicals and follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions and material safety data sheets.
6
Avicel®, available from EM Chemicals, Inc., Hawthorne, NY, was used for
development of this test method.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.4 The methane produced during the procedure is explo-
sive and flammable. Upon release of the biogas from the
gas-collection system, take care in venting the biogas to the
outside or to a hood.
9. Inoculum
9.1 The inoculum can be derived either from a laboratory-
scale or full-scale continuous digester or batch digester, oper-
ating at 35°C and functioning with an organic fraction of
household waste as the predominant substrate. In case the
inoculum is derived from a continuous laboratory-scale or
full-scale digester, the digester must be operating for a period
of at least one month on the organic fraction of household
waste, with a maximum retention time of 30 days under
mesophilic conditions (35 6 2°C). Gas production yields must
be at least 15 mL at standard temperature and pressure of
biogas/gram of dry solids in the digester and per day for at least
7 days. In case the inoculum is derived from a batch digester,
the gas production rate must have exceeded 1 L/kg waste/day,
and the methane concentration of the biogas being produced
must be above 60 %.
9.2 The prepared inoculum needs to undergo a short meso-
philic post-fermentation of approximately 7 days at the same
dry-matter content as the digester from which it was derived.
This means that the inoculum is not fed but is allowed to
post-ferment anaerobically by itself. This is to ensure that
large, easily biodegradable particles are degraded during this
period and also to reduce the background level of degradation
of the inoculum itself.
9.3 The biochemical characteristics of the inoculum shall be
as follows:
9.3.1 pH—Between 7.5 and 8.5 (in accordance with Test
Methods D1293);
9.3.2 Volatile Fatty Acids (VFA)—Below 1 g/kg wet weight
(in accordance with Practice D2908); and
9.3.3 NH+ 4- N—Between 0.5 and 2 g/kg (in accordance
with APHA Test 212 and Test Method D3590).
9.4 Analyses are performed after dilution of the inoculum
with distilled water on a ratio of distilled water to inoculum of
5 to 1 on a weight-over-weight basis.
10. Test Specimen
10.1 The test specimen needs to be of sufficient carbon
content, analyzed in accordance with Test Method D4129, to
yield carbon dioxide and methane volumes that can be mea-
sured accurately by the trapping devices described. Add more
test specimen when low biodegradability is expected, up to 100
g of dry matter of the test specimen.
10.2 It is acceptable for the test specimen to be in the form
of films, powder, pellets, or formed articles, or in the form of
a dog bone and in accordance with Practice D618.
11. Procedure
11.1 Preparation of the Mixtures:
11.1.1 Determine the volatile solids, dry solids, and nitrogen
content of the pretreated household waste and the inoculum in
accordance with Test Methods D1888, D3590, and APHA
2540D and 2540E.
 D5526 − 18
11.1.2 Determine the volatile solids, dry solids, and carbon
content of all test substances in accordance with APHA 2540D
and 2540E and Test Method D4129.
11.1.3 Weigh and combine the components and adjust the
dry matter content of the final mixtures with water to reach the
desired dry-matter content for each vessel. Roughly weigh out
600 g on a dry-weight basis of pretreated household waste, and
mix it with 100 g on a dry-weight basis of mesophilic
anaerobic inoculum from a continuously operating digester or
150 g on a dry-weight basis of anaerobic inoculum from a
batch digester. Add 60 to 100 g of dry matter of the test
substance. Add water until the appropriate final dry matter
content is reached. (In order to reach 60 % dry matter content
in the mixture, it is necessary, in some cases, to have water
removed prior to combining the different components of the
mixture. This can be accomplished by drying the pretreated
household waste or centrifuging the anaerobic inoculum.) Mix
the required amounts of pretreated household waste, inoculum,
and test substance in a small container for 2 to 3 min. Introduce
the mixture in the vessel, weigh the vessel with all of the
contents, and close it airtight. Prepare the pressure vessels in
the triplicate at each of the following dry matter contents: 35,
45, and 60 %, so nine vessels are necessary for each sample.
11.1.4 The blanks consist of 600 g dry matter of pretreated
household waste and anaerobic inoculum at the respective total
dry-matter contents. As references, thin-layer chromatography
cellulose must be used as a positive control. The blank and
reference are performed in triplicate at the three different
dry-matter contents.
11.2 Start-Up Procedure—After all reactors are filled and
closed, place them in incubators at 35 6 2°C. Acclimate the
reactors for approximately 1 h and release the pressure, which
originates from the temperature increase, to the atmosphere.
Incubate the reactors in the dark for a period of four months.
11.3 Operating Procedure:
11.3.1 Check the gas production (measured as a pressure
increase) at least weekly. When the overpressure reaches more
than 700 mbar, measure the pressure exactly with the pressure
transducer and release to atmospheric pressure. Take care that
the temperature decrease, due to the opening of the incubator
or incubation room, is not more than 1°C during measurement
of the overpressure.
11.3.2 Analyze the gas composition biweekly. Determine
the methane and carbon dioxide concentration by using ana-
lytical devices suitable for the detection and quantification of
these gases, such as a gas chromatograph with an appropriate
detector, conforming to Practices E260 and E355. Pay special
attention to the occurrence of leaks through the septum.
11.4 End of the Test:
11.4.1 It is acceptable for the incubation time to be
extended, depending on the activity of the inoculum, until no
significant gas production in excess of the blank has been
recorded during one week or until the positive reference has
degraded for more than 70 %.
11.4.2 At the end of the test, analyze the dry matter, volatile
fatty acids, and pH for each of the reactor mixtures, in
accordance with APHA 2540E, Practice D2908, and Test
Methods D1293.
11.4.3 Remove sufficient residual material from the vessel
and submit to ecotoxicity testing, in accordance with appropri-
ate standard test methods and practices (optional).
12. Calculation
12.1 By using the total carbon in the test specimen, calculate
the maximum theoretical gas production (carbon dioxide plus
methane) originating from the anaerobic biodegradation of the
test specimen, based on the following biochemical transforma-
tions:
C12H 2 →CH4 (1)
C1O 2 →CO2
Each millimole (12 mg) of organic carbon from the test
sample can be converted into 1 mmole of gaseous CH4 or CO2,
or both. One millimole of gas produced occupies 22.4 mL at
standard temperature and pressure (STP).
12.2 Temperature and Pressure—Measure the percentages
of CH4 and CO2, and transform the gas volumes to STP. Also
correct for vapor pressure and atmospheric pressure variation
during the test. Calculate the amount of gaseous carbon.
Determine the mean (of the three replicates) net gaseous
carbon production by anaerobic biodegradation of the test
substances by subtracting the mean gaseous carbon production
of the control (three replicates) containing only the inoculum.
12.3 Calculate the percent of biodegradation for each dry-
matter concentration by dividing the average net gaseous-
carbon production of the test material by the original average
amount of total carbon of the test compound and multiplying
by 100.
mean C g ~ test! 2 mean C g ~ blank!
% biodegradation 5 3 100 (2)
Ci
where:
Cg = amount of gaseous carbon produced, g, and
Ci = amount of carbon in test compound added, g.
Calculate the standard error, se, of the percentage of biodeg-
radation as follows:
2
s e 5 SQRT ~~ s test /n1 ! 1 ~ s 2blank /n2 !! 3 100/C i (3)
where:
n1 andn2 = number of replicate test and blank digesters,
respectively, and
s = standard deviation of the total gaseous carbon
produced.
Calculate the 95 % confidence limits as follows:
95 % CL 5 % biodegradation6 ~ t 3 s e ! (4)
where:
t = t-distribution value for 95 % probability with
(n1 + n2 − 2) degrees of freedom; thus n = 3 + 3 − 2 = 4.
13. Interpretation of Results
13.1 Information on the toxicity of the plastic material is
potentially useful for interpreting inhibitory effects on the
inoculum.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5526 − 18
13.2 This test method includes the use of thin-layer chro- 14.1.10 Temperature range of the test.
matography cellulose as a positive control. If sufficient biodeg- 14.1.11 Wet-weight loss (optional).
radation (a minimum of 70 % for cellulose) is not observed
within the duration of the test, the test must be regarded as 15. Precision and Bias
invalid and needs to be repeated with fresh inoculum. 15.1 The precision and bias of the procedure presented in
this test method for measuring the anaerobic biodegradation of
14. Report plastic materials under accelerated landfill conditions is being
14.1 Report the following data and information: determined.
14.1.1 Information on the inoculum, including source, pH, 15.2 Preliminary results at 40 % dry-matter content and
volatile fatty acids (in milligram per kilogram wet weight), 35°C are presented in Fig. 2. The curves in Fig. 2 represent the
NH4+ -N (in gram per kilogram wet weight), percent dry solids,
percent volatile solids, date of collection and use, storage time
and conditions, handling, and potential acclimation to the test
material.
14.1.2 Information on the pretreated household waste used
to produce the inoculum and used as a substance. In case a
simulated solid waste is used, report the composition of the
mix. For both pretreated household waste and simulated solid
waste, report the source, pH, type of pretreatment, NH4+ -N (in
gram per kilogram), percent dry solids, percent volatile solids,
date of collection, storage time and conditions, handling, and
transportation.
14.1.3 Carbon content of the plastic material and the posi-
tive control and maximum theoretical gas production (carbon
dioxide and methane) for each.
14.1.4 Record and display graphically the cumulative gas
evolution over time.
14.1.5 Analysis of gas as percent methane and percent
carbon dioxide for each reading at the end of the test, or each
time the gas is released to the atmosphere during the course of
the test. Concomitantly, report the barometric pressure and FIG. 2 Cumulative Biogas Production Over a Period of 300 Days
temperature in the incubator and in the gas-collection device. for 1 kg of Pretreated Household Waste Plus 100 g of Mesophilic
Anaerobic Inoculum Without Sample (Blank) and With 60 g of
14.1.6 Record the percent of carbon conversion, along with Cellulose (Plus Positive Control)
the form of plastic material, that is, sheet, powder, pellets, etc.
Record specific information on the size, shape, volume, and
thickness of the plastic materials and control substances tested. biogas production in litres from 1 kg of pretreated household
14.1.7 Percent of biodegradation relative to cellulose. waste plus 10 % mesophilic inoculum without sample (blank)
14.1.8 Standard deviation and 95 % confidence interval for and with 60 g of cellulose (plus positive control).
the percentage of biodegradation for each triplicate set.
14.1.9 In case biogas production has not reached a plateau 16. Keywords
for the vessels at 45 and 60 % dry matter, report total biogas 16.1 accelerated landfill; anaerobic biodegradation; biodeg-
production as percentage of total biogas production at 35 % dry radation; dry digestion; ecotoxicity; landfill; metabolites; plas-
matter. tics; test method

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5526 − 18
REFERENCES

(1) Campbell, D. J. V., and Croft, B.,“Landfill Gas Enhancement:
Brogborough Test Cell Programme,” Landfill Gas: Energy and
Environment 90, United Kingdom Department of Energy, 1990, p.
281.
(2) De Baere, L. A., et al., “High-Rate Dry Anaerobic Composting
Process for the Organic Fraction of Solid Wastes,” Biotechnology and
Bioengineering Symposium No. 15, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New
York, NY, 1986, p. 321.
(3) De Wilde, B., et al., “Dry Anaerobic Conversion of Source Separated
Household Waste to Biogas and Humotex,” Journal of Resource
Management and Technology, Vol 18, No. 1, 1990, p. 40.
(4) European Patent No. 84200801.3, 06.06.1984.
(5) U.S. Patent No. 4 684 468, 03.31.1986.
(6) Westlake, K., “Landfill Microbiology,” Landfill Gas: Energy and
Environment 90, United Kingdom Department of Energy, 1990, p.
271.
(7) Suflita, J. M., et al., “The World’s Largest Landfill: A Multidisci-
plinary Investigation,” Environmental Science and Technology, Vol
26, No. 8, 1992, p. 1486.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:10 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5575 − 18

Standard Classification System for

Copolymers of Vinylidene Fluoride (VDF) with Other
Fluorinated Monomers1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5575; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* 1.5 The minimum specification properties are established by

1.1 This classification system covers both developing prop-
erty designations and specifications for thermoplastic compo-
sitions consisting of vinylidene fluoride (VDF) polymers
modified with other fluoromonomers and property-enhancing
additives. The other fluoromonomers include one or more of
the following: hexafluoropropylene (HFP), tetrafluoroethylene
(TFE), and chlorotrifluoroethylene (CTFE). The additives are
those that improve its flame resistance, processing, or physical
properties. However, these additives are not normally consid-
ered to be reinforcing. This classification system covers ther-
moplastic compositions supplied in pellet or powder forms.
1.2 A designation or specification applies only to the virgin
polymers prepared from vinylidene fluoride (>50 weight %)
with one or more of the following comonomers:
hexafluoropropylene, tetrafluoroethylene, and chlorotrifluoro-
ethylene. Some polymers contain additives to enhance certain
properties.
1.3 This system constitutes a line callout as a means of
designating and specifying properties of VDF-based copoly-
mers. At least four of the designated properties are used to
define a polymer’s specification. Specification criteria from
international documents can be used if their criteria match
designation properties currently used by this classification
system.2 This classification system is not intended for the
selection of materials.
1.4 The manufacturer of the virgin resin shall establish the
designation of a resin based on the property value criteria in
this classification system.
1
This classification system is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on
Plastics and is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.15 on Thermoplastic
Materials.
Current edition approved Aug. 1, 2018. Published August 2018. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2013 as D5575 - 07(2013).
DOI: 10.1520/D5575-18.
This standard is needed to cover commercial products outside the scope of
Specification D3222.
2
Fluoropolymer property specification data from international standards can
include properties intentionally excluded from this classification system (for
example, composition). The only property criteria from other documents that can be
used are those having similar properties allowed under the designation system.
this classification system. Additional specification properties,
based on the designation properties cited, can be established by
the resin supplier and customer.
1.6 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as
standard.
1.7 The property tests are intended to provide information
for specifications of modified VDF-copolymer compositions. It
is not the purpose of this classification system to provide
engineering data for design purposes.
NOTE 1—Although the values listed in Table 1, Table 2, Table 3, Table
4, and Table 5 are necessary to include the range of properties available in
existing materials, they are not to be interpreted as implying that every
possible combination of the properties exists or can be obtained. It is
possible for a user or designer, using Tables 1-5, to call out property
relationships that are physically impossible to occur in a copolymer made
using current technology.
NOTE 2—Many of these polymers exhibit polymorphism.3 The type and
extent of crystalline structure will vary with the thermomechanical history
of the sample. Properties vary based on the technique used to prepare the
specimens.
1.8 Test methods used in this classification system can result
in the incidental production of hazardous materials. Modified
VDF polymer fluoroplastics melt between 90 and 182°C (194
and 359°F) and are thermally stable up to about 350°C (662°F),
or somewhat higher, depending on the composition.
(Warning—Evolution of corrosive, colorless, and toxic hydro-
gen fluoride can occur under certain conditions.)
1.9 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
See Warning in 1.8 and Section 10 for specific hazards
statements.
NOTE 3—Many, but not all of the codes and specifications found in this
classification system are also in ISO 12086-1 and ISO 12086-2.
1.10 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
3
Lovinger, A. J., “Poly(vinylidene fluoride),” Developments in Crystalline
Polymers, Vol 1, Chapter 5, D.C. Bassett, Ed., Applied Science, London, 1982.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18
TABLE 1 Codes for the Information on Fluoropolymers Used in rable method is listed after each citation in parentheses.
Data Block 1 D150 Test Methods for AC Loss Characteristics and Permit-
Code Meaning tivity (Dielectric Constant) of Solid Electrical Insulation
A modified D257 Test Methods for DC Resistance or Conductance of
B block copolymer
H homopolymer Insulating Materials
K copolymer D618 Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing
L graft polymer D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
R random copolymer
Z other D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
TABLE 2 Code-Letters Used in Data Block 2 (Intended D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
Application or Method of Processing, Essential Properties, by Extrusion Plastometer
Additives, or Other Information D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
Code Position 1 Code Positions 2 to 8 tics
A adhesives C colored
B blow molding D powder D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen
B1 extrusion blow molding D2 free-flowing Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of
B2 injection blow molding D3 not free-flowing Plastics (Oxygen Index)
C calendaring E expandable
E extrusion F special burning characteristics D3222 Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluo-
G general use F1 nonflammable ride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials
H coating F2 flame retarded D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
H1 powder coating F4 reduced smoke emission
H2 dip coating G granules thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
K cable and wire coating G1 pellets Differential Scanning Calorimetry
L monofilament extrusion L light and weather stabilized D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
M molding (injection/transfer) M nucleated
Q compression molding N natural (no color added) Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
R rotational molding N1 suitable for food contact D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics
V thermoforming N2 high purity D4591 Test Method for Determining Temperatures and
X no indication P impact modified
Y textile yarns, spinning R mold release agent Heats of Transitions of Fluoropolymers by Differential
Z other S lubricated Scanning Calorimetry
T transparent D4703 Practice for Compression Molding Thermoplastic
T1 translucent
T2 opaque Materials into Test Specimens, Plaques, or Sheets
W1 improved chemical resistance D5740 Guide for Writing Material Standards in the Classi-
Y increased electrical conductivity
fication Format
Z antistatic
IEEE/ASTM S1–10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI)
TABLE 3 Designatory and Specification Properties for Data Block 2.2 IEC and ISO Standards:5
3
IEC 60093 Recommended Methods of Test for Volume and
Position NumberA Property Surface Resistivities of Electrical Insulating Materials
B
1 melt temperature
2 B
melt flow rate/melt viscosity IEC 60250 Recommended Methods for the Determination of
3 B
tensile strength and modulus the Permittivity and Dielectric Dissipation Factor of
4 tensile elongation
5 B
density
Electrical Insulating Materials at Power, Audio and Radio
6 electrical Frequencies Including Metre Wavelengths
7 flammability by oxygen index (OI) ISO 291 Plastics—Standard Atmospheres for Conditioning
8 specimen preparation method and type
and Testing (Practice D618)
A
Property test information for Positions 1 to 7 are given in Section 8. ISO 293 Plastics—Compression Molding Test Specimens of
B
Positions 1, 2, 3, and 5 are mandated as the minimum specification properties.
Thermoplastic Materials (Practice 4703)
ISO 472 Plastics—Vocabulary (Terminology D883)
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom- ISO 527/1,2,3 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical (Test Method D638)
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee. ISO 1043/1 Plastics—Symbols—Part 1: Symbols for Basic
Polymers and Their Special Characteristics (Terminology
2. Referenced Documents D883)
2.1 ASTM Standards:4 ISO 1043/2 Plastics—Symbols—Part 2: Fillers and Rein-
forcing Materials (Terminology D883)
NOTE 4—For ASTM and ISO documents, the equivalent or a compa- ISO 1133 Plastics—Determination of the Melt Mass-Flow
Rate (MFR) and the Melt Volume-Flow Rate (MVR) of
4
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
5
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
the ASTM website. 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18
TABLE 4 Date Block 3
Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 4
Melt Viscosity/Melt-Flow Rate Tensile Strength Tensile Elongation
Melt Temp-
Code Tm,° C Melt-Flow Yield
Load, Vis- era- Modulus,
Code Rate, Code Strength, Code Yield, % Break, %
kg cosity, ture, MPa
g/10 min MPa
Pa/sA °C
a <20 a <0.1 <250 a <15 <500 a <5 <50
b 20 to <30 b 0.1 to< 0.2 0.325 >250 b 15 to <20 500 to< 800 b 5 to <10 50 to <100
c 30 to <40 c 0.2 to <0.5 1.20 >500 c 20 to <25 800 to< 1200 c 10 to <15 100 to <150
d 40 to< 50 d 0.5 to <1.0 2.16 >100 d 25 to< 30 1200 to <1600 d 15 to <20 150 to <200
e 50 to <60 e 1.0 to <2.0 3.80 >1500 e 30 to< 35 1600 to <2000 e 20 to <25 200 to <250
f 60 to <70 f 2.0 to <5.0 5.00 >2000 230 f 35 to< 40 2000 to< 3000 f 25 to <30 250 to <300
g 70 to <80 g 5.0 to <10 10.00 >2500 125 g 40 to< 45 3000 to< 4000 g >30 300 to <350
h 80 to< 90 h 10 to < 20 12.50 >3000 h 45 to< 50 4000 to <6000 h 350 to <400
i 90 to < 100 i 20 to <50 21.60 >3500 i 50 to< 55 >6000 i 400 to <500
j 100 to< 110 j $50 31.60 j 55 to< 60 j 500 to <600
k 110 to< 120 k k 60 to <65 k 600 to< 800
l 120 to< 130 l l $65 l >800
m 130 to <140 m m m
n 140 to <150 n n n
o 150 to <160 o o o
p 160 to <170 p p p
q 170 to <180 q q q
r 180 to <190 r r r
s 190 to <200 s s s
t 200 to <210 t t t
u u u u
v v v v
w w w w
x x x x
y y y y
z not specified z not specified z not specified z not specified
A
1 Pa/s = 10 P.

Position 5 Position 6 Position 7 Position 8

Specific Gravity, Electrical a-c d-c Electric Vol- Limiting Oxygen
Code Code Loss Code Code Specimen Type
g/cm3 Dielectric Constant ume Index
a <1.6 a >10E3 a <40 a D638 Type I
b 1.6 to <1.7 b 10E3 to 10E12 b 40 to <50 b D638 Type II
c 1.7 to< 1.8 c >10E12 c 50 to <60 c D638 Type III
d 1.8 to <1.9 d d 60 to< 70 d D638 Type IV
e 1.9 to< 2.0 e e 70 to <80 e ISO 527 Type 1A
f 2.0 to <2.1 f f 80 to <90 f ISO 527 Type 1B
g 2.1 to< 2.2 g <0.0012 g >90 g ISO 527 Type 6A
h 2.2 to< 2.3 h <3.0 <0.0014 h h ISO 527 Type 7A
i 2.3 to <2.4 i 3.0 to< 3.1 <0.0016 i i ISO 12086/1 Fig. 1
j 2.4 to <2.5 j 3.1 to <3.2 <0.0018 j j D638 Type MI
k k 3.2 to< 3.5 <0.0020 k k D638 Type MII
l l 3.5 to <4.0 <0.0022 l l D638 Type MIII
m m 4.0 to< 4.5 <0.0024 m m
n n 4.5 to <5.0 <0.0026 n n
o o 5.0 to< 5.5 <0.0028 o o
p p 5.5 to <6.0 <0.0030 p p D1708
q q 6.0 to <6.5 <0.0035 q q
r r 6.5 to <7.0 <0.0040 r r
s s 7.0 to <8.0 <0.0060 s s
t t 8.0 to <9.0 <0.0080 t t
u u 9.0 to <10 <0.0100 u u
v v 10 to <11 <0.0300 v v
w w 11 to <12 <0.1000 w w
x x 12 to <14 >0.1000 x x
y y >14 y y
z not specified z not specified not specified z not specified z

Thermoplastics (Test Method D1238) ISO 12086-1 Fluoropolymer Dispersion and Molding and
ISO 1183 Plastics—Methods for Determining Density and Extrusion Materials—Part 1: Designation and Specifica-
Relative Density of Non-Cellular Plastics (Test Methods tion
D792) ISO 12086-2 Fluoropolymer Dispersion and Molding and
ISO 4589 Plastics—Determination of Flammability By Oxy- Extrusion Materials—Part 2: Preparation of Test Speci-
gen Index mens and Determination of Properties

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18
TABLE 5 Codes for Filler and Physical Form of Materials for Use 3.3.4 HFP—hexafluoropropylene (1,1,2,3,3,3-hexaflu-
in Data Block 4 oropropylene).
Code Material Code Form/Structure
B boron B beads, spheres, balls
3.3.5 MFR—melt-flow rate.
C carbon C chips, cuttings 3.3.6 MV—melt viscosity.
CG graphite D powder
E clay F fiber 3.3.7 PVDF—poly(vinylidene fluoride).
G glass G ground
K calcium carbonate H whisker 3.3.8 TFE—tetrafluoroethylene (1,1,2,2-tetrafluoro-
M mineral, metal K knitted fabric ethylene). D1600
Ma aluminum oxide L layer
Mb bronze M mat (thick) 3.3.9 VDF—vinylidene fluoride (1,1,-difluoroethylene).
MC calcium fluoride N nonwoven (fabric) 3.3.10 VDF/CTFE—vinylidene fluoride/
Md molybdenum disulfide P paper
Me stainless steel S roving chlorotrifluoroethylene copolymer.
P mica T scale, flake 3.3.11 VDF/HFP—vinylidene fluoride/hexafluoropro-
Q silica V cord
R aramid W veneer penecopolymer.
S synthetic, organic X not specified
T talcum Y yarn
3.3.12 VDF/TFE—vinylidene fluoride/tetrafluoroethylene
X not specified Z others copolymer.
Z none
3.3.13 VDF/TFE/HFP—vinylidene fluoride/
tetrafluoroethylene/hexafluoropropene copolymer.

3. Terminology 4. Classification and Designation

3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 copolymer—a polymer derived from more than one
species of monomer.
3.1.2 fluoroplastic—a plastic based on polymers made with
monomers containing one or more atoms of fluorine, or
copolymers of such monomers with other monomers, the
fluoro-monomer(s) being in the greatest amount by mass.
ISO 12086-1
3.1.3 monomer—a low-molecular-weight substance consist-
ing of molecules capable of reacting with like or unlike
molecules to form a polymer.
3.1.4 thermoplastic—a plastic that repeatedly can be soft-
ened by heating and hardened by cooling through a tempera-
ture range characteristic of the plastic, and that in the softened
state can be shaped by flow into articles by molding or
extrusion.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 amorphous—noncrystalline or devoid of regular struc-
ture.
3.2.2 contamination—the presence of nonpolymer particu-
late and debris in the polymer, excluding any property-
enhancing additives.
3.2.3 fluoropolymer—synonymous with fluoroplastic.
3.2.4 melt-processible—capable of being processed by, for
example, injection molding, screw extrusion, and other opera-
tions typically used with thermoplastics.
3.2.5 polymorphism—the ability of a material to form two
or more different but stable crystalline forms.
3.2.6 thermomechanical history—the mechanical and ther-
mal exposure that a material experiences before testing.
3.3 Abbreviations:
3.3.1 CTFE—chlorotrifluoroethylene (1-chloro-1,2,2-
trifluoroethylene).
3.3.2 DMAC—dimethylacetamide.
3.3.3 DSC—differential scanning calorimetry.
4.1 The classification and designation system of the poly-
mers is based on the following standardized pattern taken from
ISO 12086-1:
Designation and Classification System
Description Block
| Identity Block |
| Individual Item Block |
Data Data Data Data Data
Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5
4.1.1 The designation system consists of the following:
4.1.1.1 An optional description block, reading
“Thermoplastics,”
4.1.1.2 An identity block comprising the ASTM standard
number, and
4.1.1.3 An individual item block.
(1) The individual item block is subdivided into five data
blocks that include the information in 4.2 – 4.6. Data Block 5
is used when a designation is converted to a specification. See
Section 7 for more details.
(2) The blocks shall be separated from each other by
commas. If a data block is not used, this shall be indicated by
doubling the separation sign, that is, by two commas (,,).
4.2 Data Block 1—This data block identifies the fluoropo-
lymer by its abbreviation from the list in 3.3 (additional terms
are listed in ISO 12086-1, 2, or Terminology D1600). The
abbreviation is followed by a hyphen and a one-letter code
giving more information about the polymer, using the codes
from Table 1.
4.3 Data Block 2:
4.3.1 This block can indicate up to eight items of informa-
tion coded by letters as specified in Table 2. Position 1 gives
information about intended application or method of process-
ing. Positions 2 through 8 provide up to seven items that can
use codes from Table 2 to indicate the polymer’s form as well
as specific special characteristics.
4.3.2 If only one letter is given (for example, E), it must
apply to Position 1. Whenever there is an indication of
properties, etc., in Positions 2 to 8, a code in Position 1 is

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18
required. The code “X” indicates that no other letter code is
appropriate. An alphabetical order is recommended if more
than one code letter is used in Positions 2 to 8.
NOTE 5—Selecting the application or processing method for Position 1
of Data Block 2 must be done carefully. Many polymers are capable of
more than one application or method of processing (for example,
extrusion (E) and molding (M) resins must be coded “general use” (G)).
Coding for special methods of processing must be reserved for polymers
only designed for the application.
4.4 Data Block 3:
4.4.1 Data Block 3 is used as the designation or general
description of the fluoropolymer’s properties. The property
values are presented by code letters in seven of eight positions
within Data Block 3. Each position represents a specific
property listed in Table 3. Table 4 lists the code letters
corresponding to the various property values. The values are
determined by the methods cited in Section 8. At least four of
the seven properties are specification properties. Position 8
cites specimen preparation methods when the designation is
converted to a specification.
4.4.1.1 Each position shall contain one or more code letters,
depending on the property cited. The positions are separated by
a hyphen (-). Use of an asterisk (*) or question mark (?) before
the code letters denotes that property as a specification prop-
erty.
4.4.1.2 The resin manufacturer shall assign the codes in
Data Block 3, based on test results from Table 4. If test values
lie on, or on either side of, a cell limit because of manufactur-
ing tolerances, the resin manufacturer shall state which cell
will designate.
NOTE 6—Properties other than those in this classification system or do
not have standard test methods are outside of the property focus of the
document scope (for example, comonomer ratios).
4.4.2 Melting Endotherm Peak Temperature (Position 1)—
Melting endotherm peak temperature shall be determined in
accordance with the principles of Test Methods D3418 and
D4591. Semicrystalline polymers shall use melting endotherm
peak temperature as a designatory property. Cell codes and
ranges are given in Table 4.
4.4.3 Melt-Flow Rate or Melt Viscosity (Position 2)—Melt
viscosity (MV) shall be determined using Test Method D3835.
Melt-flow rate (MFR) shall be determined in accordance with
Test Method D1238 or ISO 1133, using test conditions selected
from Table 4. The melt viscosity or the melt-flow rate is
indicated in Data Block 3 by the cell code and ranges in
accordance with Table 4, followed by the codes for tempera-
ture and load for MFR and shear rate for MV also included in
Table 4. Order for Position 2 is as follows:
Position 2 Order
1st = MFR
2nd = MFR load
3rd = MV
4th = Temperature
4.4.4 Tensile Strength Properties (Positions 3 and 4)—
Tensile-strength properties shall be determined in accordance
with the principles of Test Method D638 or ISO 527 modified
by details given in 8.9 or ISO 12086-2. Table 4 provides the
codes to use for each range of tensile strength and modulus,
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
and percentage elongation at yield and break. Order for
Positions 3 and 4 are as follows:
Position 3 Order Position 4 Order
1st = tensile yield 1st = tensile-yield elongation
2nd = tensile break 2nd = tensile-break elongation
3rd = tensile modulus
4.4.5 Density (Relative Density, Specific Gravity) (Position
5)—Density shall be determined in accordance with the prin-
ciples of Test Methods D150 or ISO 12086-2. The cell codes
are listed in Table 4.
4.4.6 Electrical Properties (Position 6)—Electrical proper-
ties for d-c and a-c currents shall be determined by Test
Methods D150, D257, or their ISO equivalents. The cell codes
are listed in Table 4. Order for Position 6 is as follows:
Position 6 Order
Position 1 = resistivity
Position 2 = frequency (listed as the exponent of the power of ten)
Position 3 = dielectric constant
Position 4 = dissipation factor
Positions 5 to 7, 8 to 10, 11 to 13, ... (repeat of 2 to 4 for each frequency cited)
4.4.7 Flammability Properties (Position 7)—Flammability
properties shall be determined by oxygen index (OI) values
using Test Method D2863 or ISO 4583. The cell codes are
listed in Table 4.
4.4.8 Specimen Preparation and Type (Position 8)—This
position is used only when a designation is converted to a
specification to describe the molded specimen type and its
preparation. Section 9 provides information on preparing
compression-molded specimens. Cell codes are listed in Table
2 and Table 4. Order for Position 8 is as follows:
Position 8 Order
1st = molding method (from Table 2, Position 1)
2nd = tensile bar type and method (Table 4)
NOTE 7—Using specimen preparation method and type cited in Position
8 allows the supplier and customer to monitor polymer properties while
minimizing the effects of specimen preparation.
4.5 Data Block 4—Data Block 4 is used to site the type
(Position 1) and form (Position 2) of fillers or other materials
added to the fluoropolymer. Letter codes listed in Table 5 are
used to indicate the type and form used (supplemental codes
can be found in ISO 1043/2). The nominal content, by weight
percent, is noted by arabic numerals after Position 2 to the
nearest 1 %. Additive contents below 2 % need not be speci-
fied. For designation clarity, a hyphen (-) is used to separate
material type codes. When a material is present in more than
one form, a plus sign ( + ) is used to separate the form codes.
4.6 Data Block 5:
4.6.1 Data Block 5 is used to denote changes in the values
of a property when the designation is converted to specifica-
tion. The type of changes would be the following:
4.6.1.1 To cite the alternate property value range when a (?)
is used in Data Block 3. Where more than one (?) is cited, the
value ranges shall be listed in order of their occurrence.
NOTE 8—It is recommended that any ranges smaller than designated by
Table 4 codes be greater than the precision and bias for the test method
that measures the property.
 D5575 − 18
4.6.1.2 To cite a current ASTM or other standard specifica-
tion for the polymer (see 4.7 for restrictions).
4.6.1.3 A combination of 4.6.1.1 and 4.6.1.2.
4.7 Designation and Specification Restrictions:
4.7.1 Data Block 5 of the specification call-out cannot cite
properties beyond the scope of this classification system. In
other words, specification criteria or properties from other
specifications that conflict with this classification system’s
scope are not allowed.
NOTE 9—Some specifications cite properties that are either not detect-
able or use test methods not available to most customers. Therefore,
specification property values or results shall be able to be determined by
a user without a priori knowledge of the polymer’s manufacturer,
polymerization process, or any other unique finishing process.
4.7.2 A commercial grade of polymer shall not have mul-
tiple designations for Data Block 2. The application choice
shall be broad enough for a variety of the applications to which
it can be applied.
4.7.3 An alternate specification property range in Data
Block 5 shall not be greater than the original designation-code
range from Table 4 and either the preceding or following code.
In other words, if a property code is normally “D,” the new
range could encompass values or ranges from Code “C and D”
or “D and E.” The new values cannot encompass a range cited
by Codes “C to E” or greater.
4.7.4 At no time shall a designation for a commercial grade
have more than one designation for Data Blocks 1, 2, 3, and 4.
If the code values need to be modified from those cited in Table
4, the changes shall be done by use of a (?) and listed in Data
Block 5.
5. General Requirements
5.1 The material shall be ordered by the manufacturer’s
trade name and corresponding copolymer line callout and the
necessary suffix properties to define the material.
5.2 The material shall be of uniform composition and free of
foreign matter to a contamination level agreed upon between
the purchaser and the seller.
5.3 Adequate statistical sampling shall be considered an
acceptable alternative.
6. Example of a Designation
6.1 The following example is for VDF/HFP fluoropolymer
material for general-purpose molding with a designation of:
7. Specifications for Fluoropolymers
7.1 Designation Conversion to Specification:
7.1.1 A designation is converted into a specification by
preceding 4 or more property codes in Data Block 3 with an
asterisk and adding the specimen preparation codes in Data
Block 3, Position 8, from Table 2 and Table 4.
7.1.1.1 Four property codes, cited by Data Block 3
positions, that must be included in a specification are as
follows:
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Data Block 3 Position Property
1 melt temperature
2 melt-flow rate or melt viscosity, or both
3 tensile strength and modulus
5 density
7.1.2 Specification Using Designation Ranges:
7.1.2.1 Example (see Appendix X2):
A VDF/CTFE copolymer, a general-use grade, sold as granules, and
having the following (specification properties are in boldface type):
(1) A melting point of 165°C,
(2) An MV of 1500 Pa/s when tested at 230°C at 100 s−1,
(3) A tensile strength yield of 28 MPa; break strength not cited;
modulus of 800 MPa,
(4) Elongation yield of 9 %; break of 450 %,
(5) Density between 1.78,
(6) Electricals of:
Volume resistivity greater than 2.3 E14Ω,
Dielectric constant at 1 kHz at 10.1; at 10 kHz at 9.3; 1 MHz at 7.3,
Dissipation factor at 1 kHz at 0.021; at 10 kHz at 0.031; at 1 MHz at
0.15,
(7) OI at 53, and
(8) Tested using compression-molded specimens using ISO 527 Type-6A
tensile bars.
Designation and specification where each designatory property is desired
as part of the specification with the specification limits equal to the cell limits
is as follows:
ASTM D5XXX, VDF/CTFE-K, GG,*P-*ZZE-*DZC-BI-*C-
C3VU4UVSXY-C-*QG,Z,, ASTM D5XXX, VDF/CTFE-K,
GG,*P-*ZZE-*DZC-BI-*C-C3VU4UVSXY-C-*QG, Z,,
7.1.3 Specification Using Alternate Property Ranges:
7.1.3.1 When the values given in the cell tables are not
satisfactory for specification purposes, indicate this situation
by inserting a question mark in Data Block 3 at the beginning
of the destination cell code and the specification range given in
Data Block 5.
7.1.3.2 Example (see Appendix X3):
A modified VDF/HFP copolymer that is processed by extrusion, with
reduced-burning characteristics and smoke emissions. The resin is marketed
as pellets, contains a lubricant, and is opaque. The additive level is less than
2 %. Its properties are as follows (specification properties are in boldface
type):
(1) A melting point of 143°C,
(2) An MV between 1300 and 1700 Pa/s when tested at 230°C at 100
−1
s ,
(3) A tensile strength yield of 24 MPa; break not cited; modulus of
1000 MPa,
(4) Elongation yield of 12 %; break of 350 %,
(5) Density of 1.79,
(6) Electricals not cited.
(7) OI greater than 80,
(8) Tensile specimens are compression-molded and Test Method
D638, Type I, and
(9) The melt-viscosity range encompasses two ranges.
Designation and specification is as follows:
ASTM D5XXX, VDF/HFP-A, EFF4G1ST2, *N-*ZZ?E-*CZC-CH-
*C-ZZ-*C-QA, Z, ?1300–1700,
8. Property Determination Methods
8.1 The following subsections of Section 8 cite test methods
used to determine polymer-property values of code levels from
Table 4 for Data Block 3 of a designation or specification line
call-out. When a test value normally varies between two code
levels, the manufacturer shall designate the code levels. Sev-
eral properties are tested using molded specimens. Section 9
presents a procedure to prepare compression-molded speci-
mens. Injection molded specimens are allowed, but due to
stress effects on many properties, compression molding of
specimens is preferred.
 D5575 − 18
8.2 Melt Temperature—The copolymers peak melting points
are determined using Test Methods D4591 or D3418 using
DSC. The sample size is 10 6 1 mg. The sample is heated,
cooled, and reheated over a temperature range from − 20 to
220°C at a rate of 10°C/min. The sample is held at the upper
temperature for 5 min before cooling. The second heating
endotherm peak value shall be used. Occasionally multiple
peaks are observed. The temperature of the tallest peak shall be
reported as the melting point.
8.3 Melt-Flow Rate and Melt Viscosity:
8.3.1 Melt-Flow Rate—The melt-flow rate (MFR) shall be
determined using Test Method D1238 or ISO 1133 at 230°C for
all resins whose melt point is above 100°C. Lower melt-point
resins shall use a test temperature of 125°C.
8.3.2 Melt Viscosity—The melt-viscosity value at 100 s−1 at
230°C shall be determined from a shear-rate viscosity curve of
four or more points ranging from less than 50 s−1 to greater
than 500 s−1 shear rate. For polymers with melt points less than
110°C, a test temperature of 125°C shall be used. The
rheometer die shall have an entrance angle of 60° (cone angle
of 120°) and a capillary L/D ratio of 15. The sample shall be
pellets or pieces cut from molded or extruded forms. Strips
about 6 mm wide by 76 mm long are easily handled.
8.4 Tensile Properties:
8.4.1 Tensile properties, except modulus, shall be tested in
accordance with Test Method D638 or ISO 527 at a strain rate
of 25 mm/mm/min (1 in./in./min). The strain rate is the ratio of
the cross-head speed divided by the specimen-gauge length.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
7
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Tensile modulus shall use a strain rate of 2 % of the previous
strain rate (0.5 mm/mm/min or 0.013 in./in./min). The property
values of the resin shall be determined as the average of results
from at least five specimens.
NOTE 10—When test equipment cannot test at a 2 % strain rate for the
smaller test bars, a higher strain rate (less than 5 %) is allowed.
8.4.2 Elongation is determined as the percent change in
specimen length during the test, based on the original gauge
length. This value can be determined by either cross-head
separation or by use of an extensometer.
8.4.3 Compression molded specimens are preferred (see
Section 9), but injection-molded specimens or specimens cut
from extruded sheet are allowed. Dies or mold cavity-
dimensions to cut or mold specimens shall match the required
specimen dimensions and tolerances.
NOTE 11—The different test bar shapes have three basic types with
minor variations. Unfortunately, these differences can affect the test
values. For this reason Position 8 in Data Block 3 is used when a
designation is changed to a specification. Examples of the three basic
shapes are as follows:
Large: D638 Type I or ISO 527 Type 1A (50-mm gauge)
Medium: ISO 527 Type 6A or Test Method D638 Type IV (25-mm gauge)
Small: ISO 12086-2 Figure 1 (22-mm gauge)
NOTE 12—Due to the molded-in stress and orientation, injection-
molded or samples cut from extruded sheet are subject to breaking outside
of the gauge region and show low (and possibly variable) elongation
compared to compression-molded specimens. Some samples exhibit strain
hardening. This effect can result in variable break properties.
 D5575 − 18
8.5 Specific Gravity—The specific gravity shall be deter-
mined by Test Methods D792 using two test specimens cut
from a compression-molded sample. With this test, care must
be exercised to eliminate all air bubbles attached to the
specimens upon immersion. Dipping the specimens in a very
dilute solution (less than 0.1 weight %) of a surfactant will
minimize the problem.
8.6 Electrical Properties:
8.6.1 Specimen Type:
8.6.1.1 The electrical tests are determined on three
specimens, each 100 mm in diameter and 0.12 to 0.25 mm
(0.005 to 0.010 in.) in accordance with IEC 250, Test Methods
D150, and Test Method D257.
8.6.2 Volume Resistivity—The d-c volume resistivity shall
be measured using Test Method D257 or IEC 93. Cell codes
and ranges are listed in Table 4.
8.6.3 Dielectric Constant and Dissipation Factor—The a-c
dielectric constant and dissipation factor shall be determined
by Test Methods D150. The testing shall be done at the
following frequencies: 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 0.1 MHz, and 1 MHz.
Codes for dielectric constant and dissipation factor are listed in
Table 4. The code used for each frequency shall be the first
integer of the base 10 log of the frequency (for example, 1
kHz = 3; 1 MHz = 6).
8.7 Limiting Oxygen Index (LOI)—Limiting oxygen index is
determined by Test Method D2863. For formulations that
extinguish before the 3-min burn time that defines the LOI
value at oxygen levels above 95 %. In this case, the LOI value
is the highest oxygen level used.
NOTE 13—If a column with a restricted opening is used, the top of the
specimen shall be positioned at least 40 mm below the opening.
9. Preparation of Compression-Molded Specimens
9.1 Molding Conditions:
9.1.1 Compression-molded sheets can be prepared by Prac-
tice D4703 using a “picture frame” mold. The resin form can
be pellets, molded preforms, or powder. Due to the variety of
grade types possible, follow manufacturer’s recommendations
for processing the material. Where possible, cooling shall be
done under pressure either by slow cooling (Method A or B) or
quench cooling (Method C). It is recommended that an inert
mold-release sheet (less than 0.007 in.) of aluminum,
polyimide, or PTFE be used.
9.1.2 The ram forces are used based on the size of the
specimen area. The force adjustment exerts an approximate
pressure of 0.25 kN/cm2 (360 lb/in.2) of specimen area.
NOTE 14—Powder samples tend to entrap air and cause bubbles in the
specimen when compression molded. Such specimens are not suitable for
any test in this classification system. Use molded preforms or densified
powder to eliminate bubble formation.
9.2 Specimen Preparation—Test specimens can be molded
directly by a shaped mold or cut from a molded sheet. The
dimensions of shaped molds can vary due to mold-shrinkage
effects. Cutting specimens from a molded sheet is preferred.
NOTE 15—The specimen edge will affect performance in mechanical
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
8
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
tests. Die-cutting is the preferred method of preparing specimens. The
cutting edges shall be sharp and free from any nicks or other defects that
could cause a dimensional defect in the specimen.
10. Handling
10.1 As with any synthetic resin, it is advisable to wear a
dust mask when handling large quantities of powder grades to
prevent ingestion.
10.2 The Material Safety Data Sheets of the fluoropolymer
grade must be reviewed to determine if there is any special-
handling information.
11. Inspection and Certification
11.1 Inspection and certification of the material supplied
under this classification system or specification shall be for
conformance to the requirements specified herein.
11.2 Lot-acceptance inspection shall be the basis on which
acceptance or rejection of the lot is made. The lot-acceptance
inspection shall consist of melt-flow rate, melt viscosity, tensile
and elongation at break.
11.2.1 Those tests that ensure process control during manu-
facture as well as those necessary to ensure certifiability in
accordance with 11.5.
11.2.2 The four minimum lot-acceptance tests are melt
temperature, melt flow rate/melt viscosity, tensile strength and
modulus, and density as listed in Table 3.
11.3 A lot is defined as one production run or a uniform
blend of two or more production runs.
11.4 Periodic check inspection shall consist of the tests
specified for all requirements of the material under this
classification system. Inspection frequency shall be adequate to
ensure that the material is certifiable in accordance with 11.5.
11.5 Certification shall be that the material was manufac-
tured by a process in statistical control, tested, and inspected in
accordance with this classification system and that average
values meet the requirements at a confidence level of 95 %.
11.6 A report of the test results shall be furnished when
requested. The report shall consist of the results of the
lot-acceptance inspection for the shipment and the results of
the most recent periodic-check inspection.
12. Packaging, Packing, and Marking
12.1 Unless otherwise agreed upon between the purchaser
and the seller, the packing, packaging, and marking provisions
of Practice D3892 shall apply to this classification system.
13. Precision and Bias
13.1 The precision and bias statements of the ASTM test
methods referenced herein apply to the specific tests required
in this classification system.
14. Keywords
14.1 fluoropolymers; line callout; plastics; poly(vinylidene
fluoride) copolymers
 D5575 − 18
APPENDIXES

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. FORM TO DEVELOP DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATION CODE

Specification
Test/Parameter Actual Lot Data Data Block Data Table Code Used Other Comments
YN
Polymer abbreviation Y-mandated No. 1–2 Section 3.3
Polymer type Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1
Application/process and Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1
special characteristics
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Properties
Melt temperature °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 * Test Method D4591
MFR g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 * Test Method D1238
Load kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 * Test Method D1238
Melt viscosity Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 * Test Method D3835
Temperature °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 *
Tensile strength:
Yield MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a * Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c * Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 * Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6 Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 2 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 3 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 4 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Flammability (OI) Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 2-1
Specimen type (above 2 %) Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4.8
Additives type Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Alternate:
Property range No. 1 Y if used
Property range No. 2 Y if used
Method specification Y If used
Designation code: ASTM
D5 XXX

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
9
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18

X2. DEVELOPMENT OF DESIGNATION FOR 7.1.2.1

Specification
Test/Parameter Actual Lot Data Data Block Data Table Code Used Other Comments
YN
Polymer abbreviation VDF/CTFE Y-mandated No. 1-2 Section 3.3 VDF/CTFE
Polymer type copolymer Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1 K
Application/process and general Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1 Gn
special characteristics granules Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 G
natural Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 N
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Properties
Melt temperature 168 °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 *P Test Method D4591
MFR ... g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 Z Test Method D1238
Load ... kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 Z Test Method D1238
Melt Viscosity 1500 Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 *E Test Method D3835
Temperature 230 °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 *F
Tensile strength:
Yield 28 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a *D Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break ... MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Z Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus 800 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield 9 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a B Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break 450 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 I Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density 1.78 g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 C Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity >2.4E14 Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c C Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 1K Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 3
Dielectric constant 10.1 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a V Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.021 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 2 10K Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 4
Dielectric constant 9.3 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.031 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b V Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 3 1M Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent 6
Dielectric constant 7.3 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a S Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss 0.15 Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b U Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 4 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Flammability (OI) 53 Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 C Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method compression Y as specified DB 3-8 name Q
Specimen type (above 2 %) 527—Type 6a Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4. G
Additives type none Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1 Z
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Alternate:
Property range No. 1 Y if used
Property range No. 2 Y if used
Method specification Y if used
Designation code: ASTM D5XXX VDF/CTFE-K, GGN, *P-*ZZEF-*DZC-BI-*C-C3VU4VU6SU-C-QG, Z, ,

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
10
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18

X3. DEVELOPMENT OF DESIGNATION AND SPECIFICATION FOR 7.1.3.2

Specification
Test/Parameter Actual Lot Data Data Block Data Table Code Used Other Comments
YN
Polymer abbreviation VDF/HFP Y-mandated No. 1-2 Section 3.3 VDF/HFP
Polymer type modified Y-mandated No. 1-2 Table 1 A
Application/process and extrusion Y-mandated No. 2-1 Table 2-1 E
special characteristics specification Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 F
burn
low smoke Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 F4
pellets Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 G1
lubricated Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 S
opaque Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2 T1
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Y N (optional) No. 2-2 Table 2-2
Properties
Melt temperature 143 °C Y-mandated No. 3-1 Table 4-1 *N Test Method D4591
MFR ... g/10 min Y-mandated DB 3-2a Table 4.1 Z Test Method D1238
Load ... kg [or use] DB 3-2b Table 4.2 Z Test Method D1238
Melt Viscosity 1300–1400 Pa/s Y-mandated DB 3-2c Table 4.3 *? Test Method D3835
Temperature 230 °C Y-mandated DB 3-2d Table 4.4 F
Tensile strength:
Yield 24 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3a Table 4.3a *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break ... MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-3a Table 4.3b Z Test Method D638/ISO 527
Modulus 1000 MPa Y-mandated DB 3-3b Table 4.3c *C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Tensile elongation:
Yield 12 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4a Table 4.4a C Test Method D638/ISO 527
Break 350 MPa Y N (optional) DB 3-4b Table 4.4 H Test Method D638/ISO 527
Density 1.79 g/cm3 Y-mandated DB 3-5 Table 4.5 *C Test Method D1505
Electricals:
d-c volume resistivity none Ω Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6c Z Test Methods D257
Frequency No. 1 none Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent Z
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 2 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 3 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Frequency No. 4 Hz Y N (optional) DB 3-6 exponent
Dielectric constant Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6a Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Loss Y N (optional) DB 3-6 Table 4.6b Test Methods D150/IEC 250
Flammability (OI) >80 Y N (optional) DB 3-7 Table 4.7 *F Test Method D2863/ISO 4583
Molding method compression Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 2-1 *Q
Specimen type (above 2 %) D638 TYPE I Y as specified DB 3-8 Table 4.8 A
Additives type ... Y N (optional) DB 4-1 Table 5.1 Z
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Form Y N (optional) DB 4-2 Table 5.2
Alternate:
Property range No. 1 1300–1700 Y if used ?1300–1700
Property range No. 2 Y if used
Method specification Y if used
Designation code: ASTM D5XXX VDF/HFP-A, EFF4G1ST2, *N-*ZZ?F-*CZC-CH-*C-ZZ-*F-*QA, Z, ?1300–1700

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
11
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5575 − 18
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5575 - 07(2013)) that may impact the use of this standard. (August 1, 2018)

(1) Revised 8.3.2 and 9.1.1.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:14 EDT 2020
12
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5576 − 00 (Reapproved 2013)

Standard Practice for

Determination of Structural Features in Polyolefins and
Polyolefin Copolymers by Infrared Spectrophotometry (FT-
IR)1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5576; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope* Content of Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (EVA) Copolymers by

1.1 This practice covers infrared procedures for determining
the molecular structural features in polyolefins and polyolefin
copolymers. The structural features of primary concern are the
types and numbers of branches. Although this practice centers
its attention on polyolefins and polyolefin copolymers, the
techniques, with proper modification, can be used for some
other polymers as well.
NOTE 1—Quantitative determinations require either an internal or an
external evaluation of sample thickness. ASTM test methods available for
specific features are listed in Tables 1 and 2.
1.2 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety and health practices and to determine the
applicability of the regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 2—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards: 2 appear in Terminology E131 or IEEE/ASTM SI-10.
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-
Gradient Technique
D1600 Terminology for Abbreviated Terms Relating to Plas-
tics
D2238 Test Methods for Absorbance of Polyethylene Due to
Methyl Groups at 1378 cm−1
D3124 Test Method for Vinylidene Unsaturation in Polyeth-
ylene by Infrared Spectrophotometry
D3594 Test Method for Copolymerized Ethyl Acrylate In
Ethylene-Ethyl Acrylate Copolymers
D5594 Test Method for Determination of the Vinyl Acetate
Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy (FT-IR)
D6248 Test Method for Vinyl and Trans Unsaturation in
Polyethylene by Infrared Spectrophotometry
E131 Terminology Relating to Molecular Spectroscopy
E168 Practices for General Techniques of Infrared Quanti-
tative Analysis
E932 Practice for Describing and Measuring Performance of
Dispersive Infrared Spectrometers
E1421 Practice for Describing and Measuring Performance
of Fourier Transform Mid-Infrared (FT-MIR) Spectrom-
eters: Level Zero and Level One Tests
IEEE/ASTM SI-10 Standard for Use of the International
System of Units (SI): The Modern System
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions—For definitions of plastics terms used in
this practice see Terminology D883 and D1600.
3.2 Units, symbols and abbreviations used in this practice
4. Summary of Practice
4.1 Infrared absorption bands suitable for quantitative
analysis by FT-IR are listed in Tables 1 and 2. These are only
typical bands and are not to be construed as exhaustive.
4.2 For quantitative determinations, sample specimen thick-
ness is measured internally at some band representing the basic
chain structure, such as 2019 cm–1 for polyethylene, or
externally using a micrometer (see Tables 1 and 2 for ASTM
test methods).
NOTE 3—Warning: Molding can cause carbonyl formation due to
oxidation. This should be checked in the 1700 to 1750 cm–1 range.

5. Significance and Use

1
This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.70 on Analytical Methods.
5.1 The structural features expressed by these determina-
Current edition approved April 1, 2013. Published April 2013. Originally tions affect the ultimate polymeric properties and are useful in
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2006 as D5576 - 00(2006). showing correlations with many performance properties.
DOI: 10.1520/D5576-00R13.
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or 6. Apparatus
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on 6.1 Infrared Spectrophotometer, either double beam or a
the ASTM website. Fourier transform (FT-IR).

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:17 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5576 − 00 (2013)
TABLE 1 Polyolefin Structural Features Determined by FT-IR 9.1.1.1 Control the hot plate temperature at 100 6 10°C
Structure
Absorption Band,
ASTM Test Method
above the melting temperature of the polymer.
cm–1 9.1.1.2 Place a portion of the sample on a microscope slide
Methyl group 1378 D2238 on the hot plate.
(polyethylene)
Methyl group (eth-prop 1380 9.1.1.3 Cover the sample with another slide and press with
copol) a wooden pestle. Use firm circular motions to press a uniform
Pendant methyl 935 film.
Terminal vinyl 908 D6248
Trans-vinylene 965 D6248 9.1.1.4 To quench the pressed polymer film, dip the two
Vinylidene 888 D3124 slides carefully into a beaker of cold water. Remove the film
and blot dry.
9.1.2 Procedure B:
TABLE 2 Structural Features in Polyolefin Copolymer Determined 9.1.2.1 Preheat the press to about 50°C above the melting
by FT-IR
point of the polymer.
Structure Absorption Band, cm–1 ASTM Test Method
9.1.2.2 Place a brass shim on the sheet material chosen (see
Vinyl acetate 609 D5594 7.1) that, in turn, covers a metal plate.
1020 D5594
3270 D5594 9.1.2.3 Add polymer in sufficient quantity to completely fill
Styrene 770–700 the shim aperture during pressing.
1600–1500
Ethyl acrylate 1640–1730
9.1.2.4 Cover with another piece of sheet (see 7.1) and
862 D3594 another metal plate.
Ethylene acrylate 1280–1200 9.1.2.5 Insert the mold assembly between the press platens
1640–1625
and apply a slight pressure.
9.1.2.6 Allow the sample to preheat for about 30 s. Apply
6.1.1 Double-beam infrared spectrophotometer capable of a the full press pressure at a temperature approximately 50°C
4 cm-1 spectral resolution as defined in Practice E932. The above the melting point of the polymer for 1 min or until all
instrument should be capable of scale expansion along the exudation ceases.
wavelength axis. 9.1.2.7 Turn off the heat, turn on the cooling water, and
6.1.2 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectrometer, capable of 4 allow the sample to press quench at full pressure until the
cm–1 resolution. The instrument should be capable of scale temperature drops below 50°C (or cool enough to remove the
expansion along the wavelength axis. Also, see Practice E1421 mold assembly by hand).
for testing procedures. 9.1.2.8 Release the pressure and remove the sample.
9.1.2.9 Select plaques that are clear and of uniform thick-
6.2 Hot Plate. ness for the FT-IR analysis. To avoid interference fringes in the
6.3 Microscope Slides. spectrum, the plaque/film surfaces must be slightly dimpled.
6.4 Compression-Molding Press, capable of 200°C. 9.2 Spectral Measurements:
6.5 Metal Plates, two, 150 by 150 mm or larger, of 0.5–mm 9.2.1 Place the sample in the infrared spectrophotometer.
thickness with smooth surfaces. 9.2.2 Set the controls of the infrared spectrophotometer for
quantitative conditions with a good signal to noise ratio and
6.6 Brass Shims, approximately 75 by 75 mm, of 0.5-mm satisfactory repeatability. For a FT-IR, a spectral resolution of
thickness with an aperture in the center at least 25 by 38 mm. 4 cm–1 and an apodization function (Beer-Norton medium and
6.7 Micrometer (optional), with thimble graduations of Happ-Genzel have been found to be appropriate) that gives
0.001 mm. good quantitation should be used.
6.8 Film Mounts, with apertures at least 6 by 27 mm, to hold 9.2.3 Record the infrared spectrum from 4000 to 500 cm–1.
the specimens in the infrared spectrophotometer. 9.2.4 Determine which structural feature(s) are present and
select the appropriate ASTM method for quantitative determi-
7. Materials nation.
7.1 Polyethylene Terephthalate, Aluminum or Matte Fin-
ished Teflon-Fiberglass Sheets. 10. Calculation

8. Hazards 10.1 If no standard method is available and an estimate of

the concentration of the feature of interest is sought, the
8.1 Wear gloves when plaques are prepared using a heated approach in 10.1.1-10.1.3 is suggested.
press. 10.1.1 Determine the thickness of the plaque or, preferably,
8.2 The optical bench of the FT-IR spectrometer contains a its spectral cross-section, b, in cm2/g, by measuring the
laser. To avoid eye injury, do not look directly into the laser thickness and density or alternatively the mass and surface area
beam. of a uniformly thick portion of the plaque
10.1.2 Measure the absorbance of the peak of interest.
9. Procedure Choose a baseline between valleys on either side of the peak in
9.1 Sample Preparation: a manner to produce the most accurate and repeatable repre-
9.1.1 Procedure A: sentation of the actual background absorbance

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:17 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5576 − 00 (2013)
10.1.3 Calculate the concentration, c, of the feature using 11.1.2 Date of test, and
either the Beer-Lambert Law (A = a · b · c) with the appropri- 11.1.3 Any sample or spectral anomalies observed during
ate molar absorptivity, a, or an appropriate calibration curve. If the measurement.
a calibration curve is used, it should have a minimum of 5 data
points, and the unknown should be within the high and low 12. Keywords
limits of the standards.
12.1 copolymers; FT-IR; infrared spectrophotometry; poly-
11. Report ethylene; structural features
11.1 Report the following information:
11.1.1 Complete identification of material tested including
name, manufacturer, lot number and physical form when
sampled,

SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Committee D20 has identified the location of selected changes to this standard since the last issue
(D5576 - 00(2006)) that may impact the use of this standard. (April 1, 2013)

(1) Reapproved without change.

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the ASTM website (www.astm.org/
COPYRIGHT/).

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:17 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5577 − 19

Standard Guide for

Techniques to Separate and Identify Contaminants in
Recycled Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5577; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

1. Scope 2. Referenced Documents

1.1 This guide is intended to provide information on avail-
able methods for the separation and classification of contami-
nants such as moisture, incompatible polymers, metals,
adhesives, glass, paper, wood, chemicals, and original-product
residues in recycled plastic flakes or pellets. Although no
specific methods for identification or characterization of foam
products are included, foam products are not excluded from
this guide. The methods presented apply to post-consumer
plastics.
1.2 For specific procedures existing as ASTM test methods,
this guide only lists the appropriate reference. Where no
current ASTM standard exists, however, this guide gives
procedures for the separation or identification, or both, of
specific contaminants. Appendix X1 lists the tests and the
specific contaminant addressed by each procedure.
1.3 This guide does not include procedures to quantify the
contaminants unless this information is available in referenced
ASTM standards.
1.4 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.5 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D789 Test Method for Determination of Relative Viscosity
of Concentrated Polyamide (PA) Solutions
D792 Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Rela-
tive Density) of Plastics by Displacement
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1003 Test Method for Haze and Luminous Transmittance
of Transparent Plastics
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water
D1238 Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer
D1457 Specification for Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
Molding and Extrusion Materials (Withdrawn 1996)3
D1505 Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-
Gradient Technique
D1898 Practice for Sampling of Plastics (Withdrawn 1998)3
D1925 Test Method for Yellowness Index of Plastics (With-
drawn 1995)3
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D4019 Test Method for Moisture in Plastics by Coulometric
Regeneration of Phosphorus Pentoxide (Withdrawn
2002)3
D5033 Guide for Development of ASTM Standards Relating
to Recycling and Use of Recycled Plastics (Withdrawn
2007)3
D5227 Test Method for Measurement of Hexane Extractable
Content of Polyolefins
E169 Practices for General Techniques of Ultraviolet-Visible
Quantitative Analysis
E355 Practice for Gas Chromatography Terms and Relation-
ships

1 2
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.95 on Recycled Plastics. contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Current edition approved April 1, 2019. Published May 2019. Originally Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5577 - 94(2010)ɛ1, the ASTM website.
3
which was withdrawn January 2019 and reinstated in April 2019. DOI: 10.1520/ The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
D5577-19. www.astm.org.

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5577 − 19
E682 Practice for Liquid Chromatography Terms and Rela-
tionships
E794 Test Method for Melting And Crystallization Tempera-
tures By Thermal Analysis
E1252 Practice for General Techniques for Obtaining Infra-
red Spectra for Qualitative Analysis
2.2 ISO Standards:4
ISO 3451/1-1981 Plastics—Determination of Ash; Part 1:
General Methods
ISO 1183-1987 Methods for Determining the Density and
Relative Density of Noncellular Plastics
3. Terminology
3.1 This terminology used in this guide is in accordance
with Terminology D883 and Guide D5033.
3.2 Definitions of Terms Specific to This Standard:
3.2.1 chemicals—nonhazardous or hazardous materials (for
example, insecticides or herbicides) potentially used in contact
with plastic materials.
3.2.2 glue—adhesives used for labels or joining bottle parts
(for example, ethylene-vinyl acetate).
3.2.3 heavy metals—metals heavier than sodium on the
periodic table (for example, lead, arsenic, cadmium,
chromium, or copper).
3.2.4 heavy plastic—unfilled polymers such as polystyrene,
poly(ethylene terephthalate), and poly(vinyl chloride) and
filled materials with densities greater than 1.00 g ⁄cm3.
3.2.5 light plastic—polymers such as polyethylene and
polypropylene with densities less than 1.00 g/cm3.
3.2.6 original-product residues—residues from any
original-product contents of a plastic package (for example,
milk, juice, or detergent).
3.2.7 particles—piece of metal, glass, wood, paper, or other
discreetly shaped material equal to or larger than 0.1 mm2.
3.2.8 specks—any material equal to or less than 0.1 mm2.
4. Summary of Guide
4.1 This guide provides details of several procedures used to
separate and classify contaminants including, but not limited
to, moisture, original product residues, incompatible plastic,
metal, paper, glass, adhesives, and wood in recycled plastic
flakes or pellets. This guide lists existing ASTM and ISO
methods that can be used to characterize solid and some liquid
contaminants. In addition, this guide presents details of some
industry procedures for identification of contaminants. Appen-
dix X1 provides information on quantitative aspects of some of
these industry standards that can also be used to estimate the
concentration of various contaminants.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Recycled plastic materials may contain incompatible
plastic or other undesirable contaminants that could affect the
processing or quality, or both, of the plastic prepared for reuse.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
Techniques to separate and identify incompatible plastics,
moisture, chemicals, or original product residues, and solid
contaminants such as metals, paper, glass, and wood are
essential to the processing of recycled plastic materials.
5.2 This guide lists existing ASTM and ISO methods plus
currently practiced industrial techniques for identification and
classification of contaminants in recycled plastics flake or
pellets.
6. Sampling
6.1 Unless otherwise stated, materials should be sampled in
accordance with the procedures described in Practice D1898.
Adequate statistical sampling should be considered as an
acceptable alternative.
7. Existing ASTM or ISO Procedures
7.1 Moisture:
7.1.1 A coulometric method (Test Method D4019), the
standard test method for haze (Test Method D1003), Karl
Fisher titration (Test Method D789), or a gravimetric proce-
dure (13.6.1 of Specification D1457) can be used to estimate
the moisture content of recycled plastic materials.
7.2 Visual Inspection and Product Uniformity:
7.2.1 Color:
7.2.1.1 Test Method D1925 measures the yellowness index
of clear acrylic plastics and the haze and the luminous
transmittance procedure (Test Method D1003) characterizes
the color of transparent unpigmented recycled plastic materi-
als. These tests are not readily applied to pigmented plastic
samples.
NOTE 2—Test Method D1925 is currently being revised by ASTM
Subcommittee D20.40 to address reproducibility and bias problems.
7.2.2 Melt Flow for Product Uniformity—Uniformity of
some recycled plastic flakes or pellets can be estimated by
measuring the flow rate of the material using an extrusion
plastometer (Test Method D1238).
7.3 Density or Specific Gravity—The displacement method
for specific gravity or relative density (Test Method D792) or
the density-gradient procedure for density (Test Method
D1505) are useful techniques to determine contamination of
recycled plastic flakes or pellet samples with one or more other
polymers.
NOTE 3—Test Method D1505 uses relatively small test specimens, so it
may not be applicable for analysis of nonhomogeneous recycled plastic
materials.
7.4 Inorganic Contaminants:
7.4.1 An ash test, such as ISO 3451/1, or the muffle-furnace
techniques currently being evaluated within ASTM Subcom-
mittee D20.70 (project designation X70-8702) can be used to
estimate the inorganic filler content of recycled plastic flake or
pellets.
NOTE 4—Some volatile metals may be lost using the test indicated in
7.4.1. ASTM Subcommittee D20.70 is currently developing a test method
(project X70-9201) for metals, including heavy metals, that will include
sample-preparation techniques to minimize the loss of volatile metals
prior to analysis by X-ray fluorescence or spectroscopic techniques.
 D5577 − 19
7.4.2 Ferrous (iron) contaminants can be removed with a
magnet and aluminum contaminants are separated from plastic
materials using density procedures in accordance with 8.3.
7.5 Thermal Analysis:
7.5.1 Since most polymers exhibit unique temperatures for
melting or other phase transitions, measurement of these
transition temperatures (Test Method D3418) or the melting
and crystallization temperatures (Test Method E794) of a
sample may provide useful information regarding the identity
of polymeric components present in a recycled plastic material.
7.5.2 Both Test Methods D3418 and E794 involve thermal
gravimetric analysis (TGA) or differential scanning calorim-
etry (DSC). These techniques utilize small samples (5 to 15
mg), so they may not be practical for use in characterization of
potentially nonhomogeneous recycled plastic materials.
7.6 Infrared Analysis—Qualitative infrared analysis using
the techniques of Practice E1252 can be used to identify
polymeric, chemical, and, in some cases, inorganic compo-
nents of recycled plastic materials. Sample size considerations
indicated in 7.5.2 may also apply to preparation of samples for
infrared analysis.
7.7 Chromatographic Analysis—The principles of gas
chromatography, described in Practice E355, and liquid
chromatography, described in Practice E682, are useful for
separation and classification of chemical contaminants or
residues from original-use contents of plastic packages.
8. Additional Industrial Procedures
8.1 Specimen Preparation:
8.1.1 Using standard injection molding equipment, prepare
homogenized sample plaques.
8.1.2 Plaques, or slices from plaques prepared in 8.1.1, can
be used for differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), infrared
analysis, and other test procedures requiring small, homoge-
neous specimens.
8.2 Visible Inspection Procedures:
8.2.1 Inspection Table for Large, Visible Contaminants:
8.2.1.1 Using a laboratory spatula, spread 450 6 20 g of
recycled plastic flakes or pellets on a clean, white inspection
table.
8.2.1.2 Without the benefit of magnification, describe the
types of individual contaminant “particles” as defined in 3.2.7,
then using 10× magnification, describe the “specks” as defined
in 3.2.8.
8.2.1.3 Thermal techniques (see 7.5) and infrared analysis
(see 7.6) can be used to identify some of the isolated contami-
nants.
NOTE 5—To obtain a quantitative estimate of the contaminants, these
contaminants can be removed and weighed, but there is not existing
precision and bias data related to this estimated contaminant concentra-
tions in recycled plastics.
8.2.2 Inspection of Molded Specimens or Plaques:
8.2.2.1 Weigh 4 to 5 g of dry plastic flake on to a polyester
sheet or aluminum foil in a 15.2 by 15.2 by 0.013-cm mold.
Cover with another sheet of polyester film or aluminum foil,
then adjust the press temperature to at least 10°C above the
melting temperature of the bulk of the test material.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.2.2.2 Press a plaque from the recycled plastic sample.
Remove the plaque from the press and cool.
8.2.2.3 Visually examine the test plaque within a 10-cm2
area using a fluorescent-light table. For comparison, repeat
8.3.1 and 8.3.2 with a portion of virgin resin representing the
bulk of the test material (for example, poly(ethylene terephtha-
late) (PET) if you are interested in contaminants in recycled
PET).
NOTE 6—The presence of glue contamination is indicated by bonding of
the plastic to the polyester sheet used as a release material during molding
of the plaque.
NOTE 7—An alternative procedure for poly(ethylene terephthalate)
involves melting pellets for 10 min at 275°C in an aluminum pan. This
melt is rapidly quenched in ice water to prevent crystallization and the
resulting disk or plaque is visually inspected for contaminants and black
specks by comparison with a control disk or plaque prepared from virgin
PET. In this case, black specks are attributed to degraded paper, adhesives,
poly(vinyl chloride), or other contaminants in the poly(ethylene terephtha-
late).
8.3 Separations Based on Density:
8.3.1 Water-Density Separation:
8.3.1.1 Fill a clean plastic container with 2 L of clean water.
Add sufficient nonionic surfactant to make a 2 % (weight ⁄vol-
ume) solution and mix thoroughly.
NOTE 8—Acknowledging that water quality varies from one part of the
country to another, minimum water quality for this test includes properties
of Type III grade reagent water as defined in Specification D1193.
NOTE 9—Air pockets within flake material may cause the material to
fold back on itself. The surfactant (for example, Triton X-1005) helps
eliminate this problem with plastic flakes.
8.3.1.2 Obtain a representative sample of recycled plastic
flakes (see 6.1) and weigh 100 6 10 g into a clean, dry plastic
container.
NOTE 10—The sample should be free of particles identified by a
procedure such as that described in 8.1.
8.3.1.3 Add the surfactant solution from 8.3.1.1 to the
sample container and mix well with a spatula. Allow solids to
settle for at least 5 min.
8.3.1.4 Skim light plastic and any contaminants (for
example, paper) from the top of the water using a small kitchen
strainer. Transfer these materials to a larger strainer and rinse
with water to remove residual surfactant.
8.3.1.5 Pour the remaining contents from the sample con-
tainer (see 8.3.1.4) through another large strainer and wash
these heavier materials with water to remove residual surfac-
tant.
8.3.1.6 If desired, these collected heavy materials are dried
and characterized by thermal (see 7.5) or infrared (see 7.6)
techniques.
8.3.2 Propanol/Water Density Separation:
8.3.2.1 Add 1840 mL of 2-propanol and 1660 mL of water
(drinking, distilled, or deionized) to a 4-L plastic bottle. Mix
well to provide a solution containing 52 % (volume:volume)
2-propanol in water.
8.3.2.2 Pour 200 mL of the solution from 8.3.2.1 into a
500-mL graduated cylinder and measure the specific gravity of
5
Available from Rohm & Haas Co., Independence Mall West, Philadelphia, PA
19105.
 D5577 − 19
this solution with a hydrometer. The specific gravity should be
between 0.914 and 0.917. If not, add small amounts of
2-propanol or water to the solution from 8.3.2.1 to bring the
specific gravity into the desired range.
8.3.2.3 Weigh 100 6 10 g dry light plastic (see 8.3.1.4) into
a 4-L plastic pail, then add the 52 % 2-propanol ⁄water solution
(see 8.3.2.1) to this container. Stir contents with a rubber
spatula to wet all flakes, then allow solids to settle.
8.3.2.4 Skim any plastic from the top of this solution with a
small kitchen strainer. Transfer the separated material to a
larger strainer and rinse with water.
8.3.2.5 Pour the remaining contents from 8.3.2.3 through a
large strainer and collect the 2-propanol/water solution in a
clean, dry bottle. Save this solution for reuse in other separa-
tions. Rinse the plastic in the strainer with water to remove
residual 2-propanol.
8.3.2.6 If desired, dry the plastic in the strainer, then
characterize the material using thermal (see 7.6) or infrared
(see 7.7) techniques.
8.4 Extrusion/Melt Flow Test:
8.4.1 To estimate the relative level of contamination, pro-
cess the recycled plastic through a laboratory extruder
equipped with a filter screen.
8.4.2 The level of contamination is measured as a function
of the rate of pressure increase resulting from increased
deposits on the filter screen.
8.4.3 Contaminants isolated on the screen can be character-
ized by thermal (see 7.5) or infrared (see 7.6) techniques.
8.5 Chlorinated Polymer Contamination:
8.5.1 Flame Test (Beilstein Test):
8.5.1.1 Start the flame of a Bunsen burner, then pick up a
sample of the test plastic with tweezers.
8.5.1.2 Place the bare end of a copper wire in the flame until
it heats to a dull orange color, then quickly remove the wire
from the flame and touch it to the sample.
8.5.1.3 Press the wire into the plastic sample and allow the
sample to melt on to the wire.
8.5.1.4 Remove the wire from the sample, place the wire
with the sample back into the flame, and hold the wire in the
flame until the plastic sample burns off the wire.
8.5.1.5 The presence of a chlorinated polymer is indicated
by a strong green flame during 8.5.1.4.
8.5.1.6 When all samples have been tested, turn off the gas
to the burner and store the burner.
8.5.2 Stain K Test:
8.5.2.1 Prepare a Stain K master batch by adding 1.00 g
Sevron Brilliant Red B, 1.00 g Irgalan Yellow DRL, and 2.00
g Terasil Brilliant Blue BGN dyes6 to 1 L water heated to 82 6
5°C. Stir until dyes are completely dissolved, then remove the
mixture from the heat, cool, and transfer to a suitable container.
8.5.2.2 Prepare a test solution by mixing 15 mL of Stain K
(see 8.5.2.1), 200 mL of water, 30 mL of 5 % Tanavol
solution,7 and 2 mL 5 % (volume:volume) acetic acid in a
suitable container.
6 8
Sevron Brilliant Red dye is available from Crompton & Knowles, Charlotte,
NC, and the other dyes are available from CIBA-Geigy Corp., Greensboro, NC.
7
Tanavol reagent is available from Tanatex Sybron Corp., Wellford, SC.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
8.5.2.3 Place the test solution in a 400-mL beaker on a hot
plate and add approximately 100 g of the recycled plastic.
8.5.2.4 Boil the mixture for 5 min, then remove the beaker
from the hot plate.
8.5.2.5 Discard the liquid, rinse the plastic thoroughly with
water, and transfer the washed plastic to a clear plastic bag.
8.5.2.6 Visually determine the presence of colored plastic
under fluorescent light. Poly(vinyl chloride) and poly(vi-
nylidene chloride) dye purple, while polyesters appear as blue
regions, and polyamides appear yellow or orange.
8.6 Stain 5 Test for Nylon and Polyesters:
8.6.1 Add 1 mL NaCl, 2 drops of a nonionic surfactant, 0.3
g of Stain #5, and 300 mL of water to a 500-mL beaker.8
8.6.2 Add approximately 100 g of recycled plastic to the
beaker and place the beaker on a hot plate.
8.6.3 Boil the mixture for at least 2 min, then remove the
beaker from the hot plate.
8.6.4 Pour the beaker contents into a strainer and rinse with
cold water.
8.6.5 Visually examine the washed plastic under fluorescent
light. Nylon (polyamide) samples will turn green or blue-green,
polyesters will turn yellow, and paper contamination will
appear as red material.
8.7 Solvent Extraction Procedures:
8.7.1 Xylene Extraction:
8.7.1.1 Weigh 100 g of recycled plastic into an 800-mL
Erlenmeyer flask and add 200 mL of p-xylene.
8.7.1.2 Seal the flask with a cork stopper fitted with a
thermometer. Adjust the thermometer so that the bulb touches
the bottom of the flask.
8.7.1.3 Maintain a temperature of 65 6 2°C and heat the
solvent and sample on a hot plate for 1 h. Shake the flask every
2 to 3 min to mix the contents.
8.7.1.4 After 1 h, cool the sample to room temperature.
8.7.1.5 Transfer a portion of the p-xylene extract to a
suitable cell and obtain an infrared spectrum of the extract
versus a p-xylene reference liquid in accordance with Practice
E1252. Appearance of an absorption band at 5.7 µm indicates
the presence of an ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA) copolymer.
Other bands in the infrared spectrum may be characterized in
accordance with Practice E1252.
8.7.2 n-Hexane Extraction:
8.7.2.1 To adapt Test Method D5227 to the characterization
of contaminants in recycled plastic materials, add 1 L of
n-hexane to the resin kettle in accordance with Test Method
D5227 and clamp the kettle assembly into a water bath
maintained at 49.5 6 0.5°C.
8.7.2.2 Add 2.5 to 5 g of the plastic sample, replace the
kettle head with a condenser, and extract the sample for 2 h.
NOTE 11—This procedure developed for polyolefins, may be modified
for use with other polymers by using higher boiling solvents and
extraction at higher temperatures.
8.7.2.3 After extraction, filter the resin kettle contents
through a fritted porcelain funnel.
Triton N-101, available from Ashland Chemical, 729 Mauney Dr., Columbia,
SC 29201, is a typical nonionic surfactant used for this test. The Stain #5 reagent is
available from J. Belmar Inc., N. Andover, MA.
 D5577 − 19
8.7.2.4 Analyze an aliquot of the filtered extract using
thermal techniques (see 7.5), infrared spectroscopy (see 7.6), or
a suitable alternative technique such as gas chromatography to
identify the extracted components.
8.8 Polystyrene as a Contaminant:
8.8.1 Weigh 10 g of the recycled plastic sample into an
Erlenmeyer flask and shake 2 h with 100 mL of a solvent that
is transparent at 254 nm (for example, dichloromethane or
tetrahydrofuran) based on spectroscopic techniques of Practice
E169.
8.8.2 Dilute 2.5 mL of the extract to 50 mL with the same
solvent.
8.8.3 Filter 5 mL of this solution through a 0.45-m filter into
a 1-cm quartz cell.
8.8.4 Obtain the ultraviolet spectrum of this filtered extract
in accordance with Practice E169. Compare the absorbance at
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
254 nm with the absorbance of a solvent blank. Significant
absorbance at 254 nm indicates the presence of a styrenic
polymer or another aromatic species (for example, poly(ethyl-
ene terephthalate) or poly(butylene terephthalate)).
9. Report
9.1 Report the following information:
9.1.1 The types of contaminants, and
9.1.2 The techniques used to arrive at the identifications
reported in 9.1.1.
10. Keywords
10.1 compression moldings; contaminants; density separa-
tions; extrusion; post-consumer plastics; recycled plastics;
visual inspection
 D5577 − 19

APPENDIX

(Nonmandatory Information)

X1. IDENTIFICATION OF CONTAMINANTS ADDRESSED BY SPECIFIC TEST PROCEDURES

TABLE X1.1 Identification of Contaminants Addressed by Specific Test Procedures

Test Procedure (Section Number) ASTM or ISO Method Components Detected
Ash test (7.4.1) ISO 3451/1 Inorganic fillers, some metals
Chlorinated polymers (8.5) Chlorinated materials
Chromatographic analysis (7.7) Practice E355; Practice E682 Chemicals, original-use contents
Color or yellowness index (7.2.1) Test Method D1925 Colored or degraded materials
Density or specific gravity (7.3) Test Methods D792; Test Method D1505 Contamination by other polymers
Density separations, water or propanol/water (8.3) Paper, other polymers, metals
Extrusion/melt flow test (8.4; 7.2.2) Test Method D1238 Incompatible polymers, metals, dirt, insoluble material
Flame or beilstein test (8.4.1) Chlorinated materials
Haze or transmittance (7.2.1) Test Method D1003 Moisture; incompatible polymers
Inspection table (8.2.1 Visible contaminants (specks, particles)
Infrared spectroscopy (7.6) Practice E1252 Contaminant functional groups
Magnets (7.4.2) Ferrous metals
Moisture (7.1) Test Methods D789; Test Method D1003; Test Water content
Method D4019
Molded specimens or plaques (8.2.2) Paper, adhesives, poly(vinyl chloride), incompatible
polymers
Polystyrene contaminant (8.8) Polystyrene; other aromatic polymers
Product uniformity (7.4)
Solvent extraction procedures, hexane or xylene (8.7) Glues, soluble contaminants
Specimen preparation (8.1)
Stain 5 test (8.6) Nylon, polyesters, paper
Stain K test (8.5.2) Chlorinated polymers
Thermal analysis (7.5) Test Method D3418; Test Method E794 Polymer identity
Ultraviolet spectroscopy (8.8) Aromatic polymers
Visible inspection procedures (7.2; 8.2) Dirt, specks, particles, materials with color different
from bulk polymer

ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:34:00 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
This international standard was developed in accordance with internationally recognized principles on standardization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.

Designation: D5592 − 94 (Reapproved 2018)

Standard Guide for

Material Properties Needed in Engineering Design Using
Plastics1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation D5592; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last reapproval. A
superscript epsilon (´) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapproval.

INTRODUCTION

Plastics are increasingly being used in durable applications as structural components on a basis
comparable with traditional materials such as steels and aluminum, as well as high performance
composite systems. Unlike many consumer-goods applications, where plastics typically serve as
enclosures, these durables applications primarily involve load-bearing components exposed to rather
broad varying operating environments over the life cycle of the product. This necessitates access to
material property profiles over a wide range of conditions, rather than typical values reported at room
temperature. In order to design effectively with plastics, the designer must take into account the effects
of time, temperature, rate, and environment on the performance of plastics, and the consequences of
failure.

1. Scope 1.5 The values stated in SI units are to be regarded as

1.1 This guide covers the essential material properties
needed for designing with plastics. Its purpose is to raise the
awareness of the plastics community regarding the specific
considerations involved in using the appropriate material
properties in design calculations.
1.2 This guide is intended only as a convenient resource for
engineering design. It should be noted that the specific oper-
ating conditions (temperature, applied stress or strain,
environment, etc. and corresponding duration of such expo-
sures) could vary significantly from one application to another.
It is, therefore, the responsibility of the user to perform any
pertinent tests under actual conditions of use to determine the
suitability of the material in the intended application.
1.3 The applicable ISO and ASTM standard methods for the
relevant material properties are listed in this guide for the
benefit of design engineers.
1.4 It should be noted that for some of the desired
properties, no ASTM or ISO standards exist. These include
pvT data, no-flow temperature, ejection temperature, and
fatigue in tension. In these instances, relying on available test
methods is suggested.
1
This guide is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D20 on Plastics and
is the direct responsibility of Subcommittee D20.10 on Mechanical Properties.
Current edition approved April 1, 2018. Published April 2018. Originally
approved in 1994. Last previous edition approved in 2010 as D5592 - 94 (2010).
DOI: 10.1520/D5592-94R18.
standard. No other units of measurement are included in this
standard.
1.6 This standard does not purport to address all of the
safety concerns, if any, associated with its use. It is the
responsibility of the user of this standard to establish appro-
priate safety, health, and environmental practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
NOTE 1—There is no known ISO equivalent to this standard.
1.7 This international standard was developed in accor-
dance with internationally recognized principles on standard-
ization established in the Decision on Principles for the
Development of International Standards, Guides and Recom-
mendations issued by the World Trade Organization Technical
Barriers to Trade (TBT) Committee.
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:2
D543 Practices for Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to
Chemical Reagents
D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
D883 Terminology Relating to Plastics
D1435 Practice for Outdoor Weathering of Plastics
2
For referenced ASTM standards, visit the ASTM website, www.astm.org, or
contact ASTM Customer Service at service@astm.org. For Annual Book of ASTM
Standards volume information, refer to the standard’s Document Summary page on
the ASTM website.

*A Summary of Changes section appears at the end of this standard

Copyright © ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. United States
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
1
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5592 − 94 (2018)
D1894 Test Method for Static and Kinetic Coefficients of
Friction of Plastic Film and Sheeting
D1999 Guide for Selection of Specimens and Test Param-
eters from ISO/IEC Standards (Withdrawn 2000)3
D2565 Practice for Xenon-Arc Exposure of Plastics In-
tended for Outdoor Applications
D2990 Test Methods for Tensile, Compressive, and Flexural
Creep and Creep-Rupture of Plastics
D2991 Test Method for Stress-Relaxation of Plastics (With-
drawn 1990)3
D3045 Practice for Heat Aging of Plastics Without Load
D3123 Test Method for Spiral Flow of Low-Pressure Ther-
mosetting Molding Compounds
D3418 Test Method for Transition Temperatures and En-
thalpies of Fusion and Crystallization of Polymers by
Differential Scanning Calorimetry
D3641 Practice for Injection Molding Test Specimens of
Thermoplastic Molding and Extrusion Materials
D3835 Test Method for Determination of Properties of
Polymeric Materials by Means of a Capillary Rheometer
D4473 Test Method for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Prop-
erties: Cure Behavior
D5045 Test Methods for Plane-Strain Fracture Toughness
and Strain Energy Release Rate of Plastic Materials
D5279 Test Method for Plastics: Dynamic Mechanical Prop-
erties: In Torsion
E6 Terminology Relating to Methods of Mechanical Testing
E228 Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid
Materials With a Push-Rod Dilatometer
E1823 Terminology Relating to Fatigue and Fracture Testing
2.2 ISO Standards:4
ISO 175 Plastics—Determination of the Effects of Immer-
sion in Liquid Chemicals
ISO 294-1 Plastics—Injection Moulding of Test Specimens
of Thermoplastic Materials—General Principles, and
Moulding of Multipurpose and Bar Test Specimens
ISO 527-1 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Part 1: General Principles
ISO 527-2 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Part 2: Test Conditions for Moulding and Extrusion
Plastics
ISO 527-4 Plastics—Determination of Tensile Properties—
Part 4: Test Conditions for Isotropic and Orthotropic Fibre
Reinforced Plastic Composites
ISO 604 Plastics—Determination of Compressive Properties
ISO 899-1 Plastics—Determination of Creep Behaviour -
Tensile Creep
ISO 899-2 Plastics—Determination of Creep Behaviour -
Flexural Creep by Three-Point Loading
ISO 2578 Plastics—Determination of Time-Temperature
Limits After Prolonged Exposure to Heat
ISO 3167 Plastics—Multipurpose Test Specimens
ISO 4607 Plastics—Methods of Exposure to Natural Weath-
ering
3
The last approved version of this historical standard is referenced on
www.astm.org.
4
Available from American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 W. 43rd St.,
4th Floor, New York, NY 10036, http://www.ansi.org.
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
2
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
ISO 4892-2 Plastics—Methods of Exposure to Laboratory
Light Sources—Part 2: Xenon Arc Sources
ISO 6721-2 Plastics—Determination of Dynamic Mechani-
cal Properties—Part 2: Torsion Pendulum
ISO 8295 Plastics—Film and Sheeting—Determination of
the Coefficients of Friction
ISO 10350.1 Plastics—Acquisition and Presentation of
Comparable Single-Point Data— Part 1: Moulding Mate-
rials
ISO 11403-1 Plastics—Acquisition and Presentation of
Comparable Multipoint Data—Part 1: Mechanical Prop-
erties
ISO 11403-2 Plastics—Acquisition and Presentation of
Comparable Multipoint Data—Part 2: Thermal and Pro-
cessing Properties
ISO 11443 Plastics—Determination of the Fluidity of Plas-
tics Using Capillary and Slit-Die Rheometers
3. Terminology
3.1 Definitions:
3.1.1 aging—the effect on materials of exposure to an
environment for an interval of time (see Terminology D883).
3.1.2 coeffıcient of friction—a measure of the resistance to
sliding of one surface in contact with another surface.
3.1.3 coeffıcient of linear thermal expansion—the change in
linear dimension per unit of original length of a material for a
unit change in temperature.
3.1.4 compressive strength—the compressive stress that a
material is capable of sustaining. In the case of a material that
does not fail in compression by a shattering fracture, the value
for compressive strength is an arbitrary value depending upon
the degree of distortion that is regarded as indicating complete
failure of the material (modified from Terminology E6).
3.1.5 creep—the time-dependent increase in strain in re-
sponse to applied stress (modified from Terminology E6).
3.1.6 creep modulus—the ratio of initial applied stress to
creep strain (see Test Method D2990).
3.1.7 creep rupture stress—stress to produce material failure
corresponding to a fixed time to rupture (modified from Test
Method D2990).
3.1.8 critical stress intensity factor—toughness parameter
indicative of the resistance of a material to fracture at fracture
initiation (see Test Method D5045).
3.1.9 engineering stress—stress based on initial cross sec-
tional area of the specimen.
3.1.10 fatigue—the process of progressive localized perma-
nent deleterious change or loss of properties occurring in a
material subjected to cyclic loading conditions (modified from
Definitions E1823).
3.1.11 Poisson’s ratio—the absolute value of the ratio of
transverse strain to the corresponding axial strain resulting
from uniformly distributed axial stress below the proportional
limit of the material (see Terminology D883).
 D5592 − 94 (2018)
3.1.12 proportional limit—the greatest stress that a material
is capable of sustaining without any deviation from propor-
tionality of stress to strain (Hooke’s law) (see Test Method
D638).
3.1.13 PV limit—the limiting combination of pressure and
velocity that will cause failure of any polymer rubbing against
another surface without lubrication at a specific ambient
temperature and tested in a specific geometry.
3.1.14 secant modulus—the ratio of engineering stress to
corresponding strain at a designated strain point on the
stress-strain curve (see Test Method D638).
3.1.15 shear modulus—the quotient of the shearing stress
and the resulting angular deformation of the test specimen
measured in the range of small recoverable deformations (see
ISO 6721-2).
3.1.16 shear strength—the maximum shear stress that a
material is capable of sustaining. Shear strength is calculated
from the maximum load during a shear or torsion test and is
based on the original dimensions of the cross section of the
specimen (see Terminology E6).
3.1.17 tensile modulus—the ratio of engineering stress to
corresponding strain below the proportional limit of a material
in tension (modified from Test Method D638).
3.1.18 tensile stress at break—the tensile stress sustained by
the material at break (modified from Test Method D638).
3.1.19 tensile stress at yield—the tensile stress sustained by
the material at the yield point (modified from Test Method
D638).
3.1.20 warpage—distortion caused by non-uniform change
of internal stresses (D883).
3.1.21 yield point—the first point on the stress-strain curve
at which an increase in strain occurs without an increase in
stress (see Test Method D638).
4. Significance and Use
4.1 This guide is intended to serve as a reference to the
plastics community for material properties needed in engineer-
ing design.
4.2 Product datasheets or product literature typically report
single-point values at ambient conditions and hence, by their
very nature, are inadequate for engineering design and struc-
tural analysis of a component or system. A detailed property
profile for the particular grade chosen for a given part not only
enhances the confidence of the design engineer by allowing a
more realistic assessment of the material under close-to-actual
service environments but also may avoid premature failure of
the designed component and potential liability litigation later.
Additionally, it would also eliminate use of larger “design
safety factors” that result in “overengineering” or “overde-
sign.” Not only is such overdesign unwarranted, but it adds to
the total part cost, resulting in a good example of ineffective
design with plastics and a prime target for substitution by other
materials.
4.3 One of the problems faced by design engineers is access
to comparable data among similar products from different
Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
3
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
material suppliers because of the lack of standardized reporting
format in the plastics industry. ISO 10350.1, ISO 11403-1, and
ISO 11403-2 are intended to address the comparability of data
issue only as far as single-point and multipoint data for
material selection. This guide attempts to serve as a means to
standardize the format to report comparable data for engineer-
ing design. It is essential that incorporating standardized test
specimen geometry and specific test conditions as recom-
mended in Guide D1999, Practice D3641, or ISO 3167 and
ISO 294-1 are an integral part of the data generation.
5. Material Properties in Engineering Design
5.1 Finite element analysis is an integral part of computer
aided design/engineering (CAD/CAE). It serves as a powerful
tool for design engineers in performing engineering analysis of
plastics components to predict the performance. The material
data inputs required for carrying out these analyses essentially
constitute the minimum data needed in engineering design.
5.2 The material properties essential in engineering design
can be grouped into three main categories; (1) properties
essential for structural analysis, (2) properties essential for
assessing manufacturability, and (3) properties essential for
evaluating assembly. The properties essential for structural
analysis are employed in assessing the structural integrity of
the designed part over its useful life or in determining the
required geometry of the part to ensure structural integrity. The
properties essential for assessing manufacturability are em-
ployed in simulating the part filling/post filling steps to
optimize processing conditions and for predictions of dimen-
sional stability of the manufactured part. The properties essen-
tial for assembly considerations are employed in evaluating the
ability to join/assemble the component parts.
5.3 As functional requirements are often specific to each
application, the material properties essential for structural
analysis can be classified into two categories—those that are
somewhat application specific and those that are not.
5.4 Whether the individual property is application-specific
or not, certain properties are directly employed in design
calculations while others are employed more or less for
verification of the design limits. For example, although parts
may fail in service under multi-axial impact loading
conditions, the impact energy data can be used only in design
verification, at best. Additional examples of properties that are
useful only for design verification include fatigue (S-N) curves,
wear factor, PV limit, retention of properties following expo-
sure to chemicals and solvents, and accelerated aging or UV
exposure/outdoor weathering.
5.5 Almost all structural design calculations fall under one
of the following types of analysis or some combination thereof:
beam or plate; pipe; snap fits, pressfits, threads, bearing, bolts;
or buckling. The properties needed for each of these design
calculations are summarized in Table 1.
5.6 In plate and beam analyses, flexural modulus is often
used in determining the beam deflection or stiffness. However,
development of apparent stress gradient across the beam or
plate thickness in flexure fails to satisfy the basic assumptions
of uniformity of stress in most material models used in
 D5592 − 94 (2018)
TABLE 1 Material Properties Needed for Engineering Design Using Plastics
I. Structural Considerations
Plate or Beam Analysis (stiffness versus deflection) Pipe Analysis (stiffness versus hoop stresses)
Tensile modulus Tensile modulus
Poisson’s ratio Poisson’s ratio
Creep modulus Critical stress intensity factor, K1c
Tensile creep rupture stress Tensile creep rupture stress
Shear strength
Snap Fits Analysis (cantilever beam deflection) Press Fits Analysis (hoop stress)
Tensile modulus Tensile modulus
Poisson’s ratio Poisson’s ratio
Creep modulus Compression modulus
Secant modulus Compression strength
Shear modulus Coefficient of friction
Tensile strength at yield Tensile strength at yield
Coefficient of friction Creep modulus
Stress relaxationA
Threads Analysis (screw pullout forces, thread stripping torque) Bearing Analysis
Shear strength Coefficient of friction
Coefficient of friction Coefficient of thermal expansion
Tensile strength at break Wear factorB
Tensile modulus PV limitB
Compressive modulus Compressive yield strength
Bolts Analysis Buckling Analysis
Compressive strength Compressive modulus
Tensile creep strain Secant modulus
Tensile creep rupture stress Creep modulus
A
Stress relaxation Poisson’s ratio
Compressive creep modulus
II. Manufacturability Considerations
Mold Filling/Cooling Analysis Shrinkage and Warpage Analysis
Viscosity—shear rate data Mold shrinkage as function of thickness, gate geometry, and processing
Flowability (thermosets) parameters
Melt densityB Coefficient of linear thermal expansion
B
Thermal conductivity No-flow temperatureB
Specific heatB Glass transition temperature
Ejection temperatureB Crystallinity
No-flow temperature Crystallization temperature
Cure kinetics (thermosets) Heat of crystallization
pvT dataB Crystallization kineticsB
Elastic modulus
Poisson’s ratio
Shear modulus
III. Assembly Considerations
Weldability
Shear strength
Density
Coefficient of friction
Thermal conductivityB
Specific heatB
Crystalline melting temperature
A
See Practice D2991.
B
No ASTM or ISO standards exist today.

engineering analysis. For this reason, tensile modulus is more
appropriate and is therefore recommended.
5.7 Creep and fatigue data are commonly reported in
flexure. However, the most useful data to the designer is
uniaxial loading in tension mode.
5.8 Material properties in molded parts are a function of
processing conditions because of their influence on orientation
and morphology developed in the molded part. Thus the
properties measured from large molded parts may differ from
those obtained with standard test specimens. Use of filled or
reinforced materials may magnify these differences.
5.9 Molded parts frequently display anisotropy. As a result,
significant property differences between flow and the trans-
verse directions can result. The use of filled or reinforced
materials may magnify this effect. It is, therefore, essential to
consider the material properties such as properties in tension,
creep, and coefficient of linear thermal expansion, in both
directions.
5.10 The required materials characterizations are summa-
rized in Table 2. Suggested conditions are intended to serve as
a guide in establishing standardized specific test conditions for
the purpose of providing comparable data.
6. Data Reporting Format
6.1 Standardization of format for reporting the data for
engineering design acquired using harmonized test methods is
deemed essential for providing comparable data among similar
products from different suppliers.
6.2 In the case of single-point data, the reporting format for
each property shall include average, standard deviation, and

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
4
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5592 − 94 (2018)
TABLE 2 Material Property Characterization Requirements
Test Method Suggested Conditions
ASTM ISO
I. Structural Criteria
Properties in tension D638 ISO 527-1, ISO at 23°C, at least three elevated temperatures and one temperature below standard
527-2, and ISO laboratory conditions at standard strain rate; at three additional strain rates at 23°C
527-4
Poisson’s ratio D638 ... at 23°C, at least one elevated temperature and one temperature below standard labo-
ratory conditions
Properties in compression D695 ISO 604 at 23°C, two additional elevated temperatures and one temperature below standard
laboratory conditions
Shear modulus (DMA/DMTA) D5279 ISO 6721-2 −150°C to Tg + 20°C or Tm + 10°C at approximately 1 Hz
Creep in tension D2990 ISO 899-1 at 23°C and at least two elevated temperatures for 1000 h at three stress levels
Fatigue in tension ... ... (a) S − N curves at three Hz at 23°C; 80, 70, 60, 55, 50, and 40 % of tensile stress at
yield; R = 0.5; 1 million cycles run out.
... ... (b) a − N curves at 3 Hz at 23°C; single edge notched specimens; three stress levels;
R = 0.5.
Coefficient of friction D1894 ISO 8295 against itself and steel
Application specific
Creep in bending D2990 ISO 899-2 at 23°C and at least two elevated temperatures for 1000 h and at least three stress
levels
Creep in compression D2990 ISO 899-1 at 23°C and at least two elevated temperatures for 1000 h and at least three stress
levels
Fatigue In Bending ... ... at 23°C; fully reversed; 80, 70, 60, 55, 50, and 40 % of tensile stress at yield at ap-
proximately 3 Hz
Fracture toughness D5045 ... K1c or G1c
Solvent resistance D543 ISO 175 Retention of tensile properties exposed to specific chemicals under no strain as well as
0.1, 0.25, and 0.5 % strain
UV Exposure/Weathering D2565 ISO 4892-2 1. Xenon Arc (0.35 to 0.70 W/m2 at 340 nm; 65°C black panel; and 50 % RH at ap-
proximately 315, 630, 1260, 1890, and 2520 kJ/m2 ; borosilicate/borosilicate or equiva-
lent filters);
Retention of tensile properties, color (CIELAB, D65, 10° standard observer, specular
included), and 60° Gardner gloss.
D1435 ISO 4607 2. 45° unbacked outdoor weathering (Florida and Arizona) for 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, and 24
months;
Retention of tensile properties, color (CIELAB, D65, 10° standard observer, specular
included), and 60° Gardner gloss.
Accelerated Aging D3045 ISO 2578 Retention of instrumented impact strength and tensile properties, color and Gloss at
three temperatures for 1000 h
II. Manufacturing Criteria
Viscosity-shear rate data D3835 ISO 11403-2 and At approximately three temperatures, over shear rate range 10 to 10 000 s−1
ISO 11443

Flowability D3123 ...

Melt density ... ... at 0 MPa and processing temperature
Thermal conductivity ... ... 23°C to processing temperature
Specific heat ... ... 23°C to processing temperature
No-flow temperature ... ...
Ejection temperature ... ...
Crystallization temperature D3418 ...
Heat of crystallization D3418 ...
Glass transition temperature D3418 ...
Flowlength versus nominal wall ... ... simulations at three combinations of melt temperature and mold temperature
thickness
pvT data ... ... 23°C to processing temperature; over 0 to 200 bars
Coefficient of linear thermal E228 ... over the range − 40° to 85°C
expansion
Mold shrinkage ... ISO 294-1 at least two thicknesses as function of cavity pressure, melt temperature, mold
temperature, injection time, and fixed gate geometry
Crystallization kinetics ... ...
Cure kinetics D4473 ...

number of specimens tested. These are required to enhance the
confidence level of the designer.
6.3 In the case of multipoint data, the reporting format for
each property shall be in both graphical format and tabulated
data. The graphical format is desired to illustrate the behavior
of the material in response to changes in temperature, time, and
strain rate, in a format that is concise, indicative of the trends,
and compatible with the needs of design methods employed.
The tabulated data lend itself to extraction of the information
for design calculations.
7. Keywords
7.1 computer aided design (CAD); computer aided engi-
neering (CAE); engineering design; finite element analysis;
manufacturability; plastics; structural analysis

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
5
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.
 D5592 − 94 (2018)
ASTM International takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any item mentioned
in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk
of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.

This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed every five years and
if not revised, either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTM International Headquarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, at the address shown below.

This standard is copyrighted by ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959,
United States. Individual reprints (single or multiple copies) of this standard may be obtained by contacting ASTM at the above
address or at 610-832-9585 (phone), 610-832-9555 (fax), or service@astm.org (e-mail); or through the ASTM website
(www.astm.org). Permission rights to photocopy the standard may also be secured from the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: (978) 646-2600; http://www.copyright.com/

Copyright by ASTM Int'l (all rights reserved); Sat Jun 20 15:33:21 EDT 2020
6
Downloaded/printed by
Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur (Indian Inst of Tech Kharagpur) pursuant to License Agreement. No further reproductions authorized.